Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

SCHEME OF EXAMINATION

&

SYLLABI

for

Bachelor of Technology Programmes of Studies under the aegis of

University School of Information, Communication & Technology
offered at Affiliated Institutions of the University

(1st Year Common Scheme and Syllabus and 2nd Year onwards Scheme
and Syllabus)

University School of Information, Communication &Technology

Sector 16C, Dwarka, Delhi – 110 078 [INDIA]
www.ipu.ac.in

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1

 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 2

 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

CONTENTS
Particulars Page
No
1. Approval History 4
2. Provision for Smooth Implementation 5
3. Programme Outcomes 6
4. Acronyms and Definitions 7
5. Common Scheme and Syllabus of First Year 9
5.1. Common Scheme of First Year 10
5.2. Bridge Courses for the B.Tech Lateral Entry Students 13
5.3. Syllabus of First Year 14
6. 2nd Year Onward Scheme and Implementation Guideline for Core Branches (Major 52
/ Primary Disciplines)
6.1. Bachelor of Technology in Computer Science and Engineering (CSE) 53
6.2. Bachelor of Technology in Information Technology (IT) 65
6.3. Bachelor of Technology in Computer Science and Technology (CST) 77
6.4. Bachelor of Technology in Information Technology and Engineering (ITE) 89
6.5. Bachelor of Technology in Electronics and Communications Engineering (ECE) 101
6.6. Bachelor of Technology in Electrical Engineering (EE) 113
6.7. Bachelor of Technology in Electrical and Electronics Engineering (EEE) 125
6.8. Bachelor of Technology in Instrumentation and Control Engineering (ICE) 137
6.9. Bachelor of Technology in Mechanical Engineering (ME) 149
6.10. Bachelor of Technology in Civil Engineering (CE) 161
7. Minor Specialization to be Offered to Core Engineering Disciplines Only 172
7.1. Emerging Area Elective Groups (for Minor Specialization) – Applicable only for 173
Core Disciplines (EAE)
7.2. Open Area Elective Groups (for Minor Specialization) – Applicable only for Core 185
Disciplines (OAE)
8. 2nd Year Onward Scheme and Implementation Guideline for Bachelor of 190
Technology Programme(s) in Emerging Areas Disciplines
8.1. Mechanical and Automation Engineering (MAE) 191
8.2. Computer Science and Engineering (Artificial Intelligence) (CSE‐AI) 201
8.3. Computer Science and Engineering(Artificial Intelligence and Machine Learning) 212
(CSE‐AIML)
8.4. Computer Science and Engineering (Data Science) (CSE‐DS) 223
8.5. Computer Science and Engineering (Internet of Things) (CSE‐IoT) 234
8.6. Computer Science and Engineering (Internet of Things and Cyber Security 245
including Block Chain Technology) (CSE‐ICB)
8.7. Computer Science and Engineering (Networks) (CSE‐Net) 256
8.8. Computer Science and Engineering (Cyber Security) (CSE‐CS) 267
8.9. Electronics Engineering (VLSI Design and Technology) (EE‐VDT) 278
8.10. Electronics and Communication (Advanced Communication Technology) (EC‐ACT) 289
9. Assessment of Outcomes Achieved in a Course / Paper. That is, Learning 300
Outcome Assessment Alignment Grid
10. Syllabus of 2nd Year Papers (3rd Semester for Lateral Entry Students only) 301
11. Syllabus of 2nd Year Papers 305
12. Syllabus of 3rd Year and 4th Year Papers (in Aplhabetical Order of Paper Name) 453

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 3

 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Approval History:
1. 1st year scheme and syllabus (1st and 2nd semester) and Framework for higher semesters (3rd
to 8th) implemented from 2021‐22 batch approved by 55thBoard of Studies of USICT held on
dated 31.10.2021 .
2. 1st year scheme and syllabus (1st and 2nd semester) and Framework for higher semesters (3rd
to 8th) implemented from 2021‐22 batch approved by Academic Council Sub‐committee on
dated 22.11.2021.
3. Modification to BS‐103 / BS‐104 syllabus implemented from 2021‐22 batch approved by
56thBoard of Studies of USICT held on 24.01.2022.
4. 1st year scheme and syllabus (1st and 2nd semester) and Framework for higher semesters (3rd
to 8th) implemented from 2021‐22 batch approved by 52ndAcademic Council vide agenda item
52.14 on dated 22.02.2022.
5. Modification to BS‐103 / BS‐104 syllabus implemented from 2021‐22 batch approved by
52ndAcademic Council held on dated 22.02.2022 vide agenda item no. AC 52.33.
6. Scheme of study of 2nd and higher years approved by the 58thBoS of USICT held on dated
10.09.2022.
7. Scheme and Syllabus of 2nd year approved by the 58thBoS of USICT held on dated 10.09.2022.
8. Inclusion of lateral entry guidelines and bridge course with effect from lateral entry
admissions in the year 2022‐23 (regular batch 2021‐22) approved by BoS on 10/09/2022.
And, the same approved in AC subcommittee on dt. 14.09.2022.
9. Inclusion of Basic Chemistry in lieu of Applied Chemistry for admitted students in the 1st
year, for students who did not study chemistry at 10+2 level, approved by BoS on 10
/09/2022 w.e.f academic session 2022‐23. And, the same approved in AC subcommittee on
dt. 14.09.2022.
10. Scheme of study of 2nd and higher years approved by Academic Council Sub‐committee on
dated 14.09.2022
11. Scheme and Syllabus of 2nd year approved by Academic Council Sub‐committee on dated
14.09.2022.
12. Modification to the some paper codes and name & syllabus of ECC‐210/ECC‐313, ECC‐212,
ECC‐258, EEC‐206, CEC‐206, CEC‐208, CEC‐210, CEC‐212 and CEC‐254 implemented from
2021‐22 batch approved by 60thBoard of Studies of USICT held on 17.03.2023 and approved
by Academic Council Sub‐committee on dated 20.03.2023.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 4

 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Provision for Smooth Implementation

This document describes the curriculum of the Bachelor of Technology Programmes that are
(or allowed to be) offered at the affiliated institutions of Guru Gobind Indraprastha
University, Delhi, under the aegis of the University School of Information, Communication
and Technology. In the event of any difficulty of implementation, and / or interpretation of
any clause of the document, the same may be brought to the notice of Dean of the
University School of Information Communication and Technology. The decision of the Dean,
University School of Information Communication and Technology shall be final and
implemented to resolve the issue. The same shall be put up in the subsequent meeting of
the Board of Studies of the University School of Information Communication and Technology
for its approval. If the decision of the Board of Studies of the University School of
Information Communication and Technology is at variance with the decision taken earlier by
the Dean of the School, the decision of the Board shall be effective from the date of the
approval by the Board of Studies. In the interim period (between the approval of the Dean,
of the School and the Board of Studies approval), the decision already taken by the Dean of
the school shall stand.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 5

 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Programme Outcomes
1. Engineering Knowledge (PO01): Apply the knowledge of mathematics, science, engineering fundamentals,
and an engineering specialization to the solution of complex engineering problems.

2. Problem Analysis (PO02): Identify, formulate, review research literature, and analyse complex engineering
problems reaching substantiated conclusions using first principles of mathematics, natural sciences and
engineering sciences.

3. Design/Development of Solutions (PO03): Design solutions for complex engineering problems and design
system components or processes that meet the specified needs with appropriate consideration for the
public health and safety, and the cultural, societal, and environmental considerations.

4. Conduct Investigations of Complex Problems (PO04): Use research‐based knowledge and research
methods including design of experiments, analysis and interpretation of data, and synthesis of the
information to provide valid conclusions for complex problems:

a. that cannot be solved by straightforward application of knowledge, theories and techniques applicable
to the engineering discipline as against problems given at the end of chapters in a typical text book
that can be solved using simple engineering theories and techniques;

b. that may not have a unique solution. For example, a design problem can be solved in many ways and
lead to multiple possible solutions;

c. that require consideration of appropriate constraints / requirements not explicitly given in the
problem statement such as cost, power requirement, durability, product life, etc.;

d. which need to be defined (modelled) within appropriate mathematical framework; and

e. that often require use of modern computational concepts and tools, for example, in the design of an
antenna or a DSP filter.

5. Modern Tool Usage (PO05): Create, select, and apply appropriate techniques, resources, and modern
engineering and IT tools including prediction and modelling to complex engineering activities with an
understanding of the limitations.

6. The Engineer and Society (PO06): Apply reasoning informed by the contextual knowledge to assess
societal, health, safety, legal and cultural issues and the consequent responsibilities relevant to the
professional engineering practice.

7. Environment and Sustainability (PO07): Understand the impact of the professional engineering solutions
in societal and environmental contexts, and demonstrate the knowledge of, and need for sustainable
development.

8. Ethics (PO08): Apply ethical principles and commit to professional ethics and responsibilities and norms of
the engineering practice.

9. Individual and Team Work (PO09): Function effectively as an individual, and as a member or leader in
diverse teams, and in multidisciplinary settings.

10. Communication (PO10): Communicate effectively on complex engineering activities with the engineering
community and with society at large, such as, being able to comprehend and write effective reports and
design documentation, make effective presentations, and give and receive clear instructions.

11. Project Management and Finance (PO11): Demonstrate knowledge and understanding of the engineering
and management principles and apply these to one’s own work, as a member and leader in a team, to
manage projects and in multidisciplinary environments.

12. Life‐long Learning (PO12): Recognize the need for, and have the preparation and ability to engage in
independent and lifelong learning in the broadest context of technological change.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 6

 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Acronyms for Core Disciplines:

CSE : Computer Science and Engineering
IT : Information Technology
CST : Computer Science and Technology
ITE : Information Technology and Engineering
ECE : Electronics and Communications Engineering
EE : Electrical Engineering
EEE : Electrical and Electronics Engineering
ICE : Instrumentation and Control Engineering
ME : Mechanical Engineering
CE : Civil Engineering

Acronyms for Emerging Area Disciplines:

MAE : Mechanical and Automation Engineering
CSE‐AI : Computer Science and Engineering (Artificial Intelligence)
CSE‐AIML : Computer Science and Engineering (Artificial Intelligence and Machine Learning)
CSE‐DS : Computer Science and Engineering (Data Science)
CSE‐IoT : Computer Science and Engineering (Internet of Things)
CSE‐ICB : Computer Science and Engineering (Internet of Things and Cyber Security including Block Chain
Technology)
CSE‐Net : Computer Science and Engineering (Networks)
CSE‐CS : Computer Science and Engineering (Cyber Security)
EE‐VDT : Electronics Engineering (VLSI Design and Technology)
EC‐ACT : Electronics and Communication (Advanced Communication Technology)

Acronyms for Minor Specializations(Applicable only for Core Disciplines):

AI : Artificial Intelligence
AIML : Artificial Intelligence and Machine Learning
DS : Data Science
BT : Block Chain Technology
IoT : Internet of Things
ICB : Internet of Things and Cyber Security including Block Chain Technology
Net : Networks
CS : Cyber Security
MLDA : Machine Learning and Data Analytics
SC : Soft Computing
SE : Software Engineering
FSD : Full Stack Development
IPCV : Image Processing and Computer Vision
RA : Robotics and Automation
ES : Embedded Systems
VLSI : VLSI Design
WMC : Wireless and Mobile Communications
EV : Electrical Vehicles
MT : Microgrid Technologies
PS : Power Systems
PED : Power Electronics and Drives
CI : Control and Instrumentation
CADM : Computer Aided Design and Manufacturing
DMS : Design and Measurement Systems
DT : Design Trends
TES : Thermal Energy Sources
QM : Quality Management
CTM : Construction Technology and Management
IE : Infrastructure Engineering
GTSE : Green Technology and Sustainability Engineering

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 7

 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

CSE : Computer Science and Engineering

ECE : Electronics and Communications Engineering
EE : Electrical Engineering
SD : Software Development
ME : Mechanical Engineering
ICE : Instrumentation and Control Engineering
CE : Civil Engineering
UHV : Universal Human Values
Acronyms for Course / Paper Groups and Codes:
BS : Basic Science
HS : Humanities, Social Science
MS : Management Studies
ES : Engineering Science
MC : Mandatory Courses
PC : Programme Core, that is course/paper offered in the discipline of the programme as a compulsory
paper.
PCE : Programme Core Elective, that is elective course/paper offered in the discipline of the programme.
EAE/OAE: Emerging Area Elective / Open Area Elective offered in the institution
CIC : Computer Science / IT Core
CIE : Computer Science / IT Elective
ECC : Electronics Core
ECE : Electronics Elective
EEC : Electrical Core
EEE : Electrical Elective
ICC : Instrumentation Core
ICE : Instrumentation Elective
MEC : Mechanical Core
MEE : Mechanical Elective
CEC : Civil Core
CEE : Civil Elective
MAC : Automation Core
MAO : Automation Open Elective
Definitions:
Batch: The batch of the student shall mean the year of the first time enrolment of the students in the
rd nd
programme of study in the first semester. Lateral entry students admitted in the 3 semester / 2 year shall be
designated as students admitted in the previous batch as they are admitted one year later. A student re‐
admitted in a programme of study in a lower / later batch shall be considered as the student of the original
batch for the purpose calculation of duration of study (lateral entry o readmission due to academic break).
Programme of study shall mean Bachelor of Technology.
Major / Primary specialization / discipline shall mean the discipline in which the student is admitted /
upgraded or transferred.
Minor specialization shall mean the specializations earned through the EAE or OAE route subject to fulfilment
of requirements specified in the scheme of study for the concerned minor specialization.

Other Acronyms:
PCC : Programme Coordination Committee
APC : Academic Programme Committee comprising of all faculty of the department / institutions
and as defined in the implementation rules and the Ordinance 11 of the University.
L : Number of Lecture hours per week
T/P : Number of Tutorial / Practical Hours per week
C : Number of credits assigned to a course / paper
COE : Controller of Examinations of the Examinations Division of the University.
SGPA/CGPA : Semester/Cumulative Grade Point Average.
NUES : Non University Examination System ‐ No term end examination shall be held. The evaluation
shall be conducted as per the scheme of examinations as described in the scheme of study.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 8

 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

FIRST YEAR
Common Scheme and Syllabus
for
All Bachelor of Technology Programmes of Study
under the aegis of University School of Information,
Communication & Technology offered at Affiliated
Institutions of the University

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 9

 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

In light of the eligibility condition specified in the AICTE Process Handbook 2022‐23 (Page Nos 89 and 90), the
Chemistry Papers BS‐121 / BS‐120 entitled “Basic Chemistry” shall be offered to students admitted from
Academic Session 2022‐23 (in the 1st/ 2ndSemester) in lieu of Chemistry Papers BS‐103 / BS‐104 entitled
“Applied Chemistry”. This shall be offered only to students who have not studied Chemistry at 10+2 Level and
are admitted to the following disciplines only:
1) Computer Science and Engineering (CSE)
2) Information Technology (IT)
3) Computer Science and Technology (CST)
4) Information Technology and Engineering (ITE)
5) Electronics and Communications Engineering (ECE)
6) Electrical Engineering (EE)
7) Electrical and Electronics Engineering (EEE)
8) Instrumentation and Control Engineering (ICE)
9) Computer Science and Engineering (Artificial Intelligence) (CSE‐AI)
10) Computer Science and Engineering (Artificial Intelligence and Machine Learning) (CSE‐AIML)
11) Computer Science and Engineering (Data Science) (CSE‐DS)
12) Computer Science and Engineering (Internet of Things) (CSE‐IoT)
13) Computer Science and Engineering (Internet of Things and Cyber Security including Block Chain
Technology) (CSE‐ICB)
14) Computer Science and Engineering (Networks) (CSE‐Net)
15) Computer Science and Engineering (Cyber Security) (CSE‐CS)
16) Electronics Engineering (VLSI Design and Technology) (EE‐VDT)
17) Electronics and Communication (Advanced Communication Technology) (EC‐ACT)
Note: The corresponding practical paper (BS‐155 / BS‐156) shall be unchanged.(Addition from AY 2022‐23)

First Semester
Group Code Paper L P Credits
Theory Papers
*Any one of the following:
ES ES‐101 Programming in ‘C’ 3 ‐ 3
BS BS‐103/BS‐121# Applied Chemistry / Basic Chemistry#
BS BS‐105 Applied Physics – I 3 ‐ 3
*Any one of the following:
ES ES‐107 Electrical Science 3 ‐ 3
BS BS‐109 Environmental Studies
BS BS‐111 Applied Mathematics – I 4 ‐ 4
**Group 1 or Group 2 shall be offered:
HS HS‐113 Group 1: Communications Skills 3 ‐ 3
OR
Group 2:
HS HS‐115 Indian Constitution*** 2 2
HS HS‐117 Human Values and Ethics*** 1 1
ES ES‐119 Manufacturing Process 4 ‐ 4
Practical/Viva Voce
BS BS‐151 Physics‐I Lab ‐ 2 1
Any of the following corresponding to the theory
paper offered:
ES ES‐153 Programming in ‘C’ Lab ‐ 2 1
BS BS‐155 Applied Chemistry
ES ES‐157 Engineering Graphics‐I ‐ 4 2
Any of the following corresponding to the theory
paper offered:
ES ES‐159 Electrical Science Lab ‐ 2 1
BS BS‐161 Environmental Studies Lab
Total 20 10 25

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 10

 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

*For a particular batch of a programme of study one out of these two papers shall be taught in the first semester while the
other shall be taught in the 2nd semester. Students who have to re‐appear can only reappear in the odd semester if
originally offered to the student in the 1st semester and similarly for the students who study the paper in the second
semester. The institution shall decide which paper to offer in which semester.

**For a particular batch of a programme of study either the paper on “Communications Skills” (Group 1), or Group 2:
papers (“Indian Constitution” and “Human values and ethics”) shall be taught in the first semester while the other group
shall be taught in the 2nd semester. Students who have to re‐appear can only reappear in the odd semester if originally
st
offered to the student in the 1 semester and similarly for the students who study the paper(s) in the second semester. The
institution shall decide which paper group to offer in which semester.

***NUES: All examinations to be conducted by the concerned teacher as specified in the detailed syllabus of the paper.

#The students who have not studied Chemistry at 10+2 level shall be offered BS‐121 in lieu of BS‐103, as applicable in
applicable disciplines. (Addition from the Academic Session 2022‐23)

Group Code Paper L P Credits

NSS / NCC / Cultural Clubs / Technical Society /
HS/MS HS‐352 2
Technical Club*
*NUES: Comprehensive evaluation of the students by the concerned coordinator of NCC / NSS / Cultural Clubs / Technical
Society / Technical Clubs, out of 100 as per the evaluation schemes worked out by these activity societies, organizations; the
st
co‐ordinators shall be responsible for the evaluation of the same. These activities shall start from the 1 semester and the
th
evaluation shall be conducted at the end of the 6 semester for students admitted in the first semester. Students admitted
nd rd rd
in the 2 year (3 semester) as lateral entry shall undergo training or participate in the activities for the period of 3
th
semester to 6 semester only

Second Semester
Group Paper Code Paper L P Credits
Theory Papers
*Any one of the following:
ES ES‐102 Programming in ‘C’ 3 ‐ 3
BS BS‐104/BS‐120# Applied Chemistry / Basic Chemistry#
BS BS‐106 Applied Physics – II 3 ‐ 3
*Any one of the following:
ES ES‐108 Electrical Science 3 ‐ 3
BS BS‐110 Environmental Studies
BS BS‐112 Applied Mathematics – II 4 ‐ 4
**Group 1 or Group 2 shall be offered:
HS HS‐114 Group 1: Communications Skills 3 ‐ 3
OR
Group 2:
HS HS‐116 Indian Constitution*** 2 2
HS HS‐118 Human Values and Ethics*** 1 1
ES ES‐114 Engineering Mechanics 3 ‐ 3
Practical/Viva Voce
BS BS‐152 Physics‐II Lab ‐ 2 1
*Any of the following corresponding to the theory
paper offered:
ES ES‐154 Programming in ‘C’ Lab ‐ 2 1
BS BS‐156 Applied Chemistry
ES ES‐158 Engineering Graphics‐II ‐ 2 1
*Any of the following corresponding to the theory
paper offered:
ES ES‐160 Electrical Science Lab ‐ 2 1
BS BS‐162 Environmental Studies Lab
ES ES‐164 Workshop Practice 4 2
Total 19 12 25

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 11

 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

*For a particular batch of a programme of study one out of these two papers shall be taught in the first semester while the
other shall be taught in the 2nd semester. Students who have to re‐appear can only reappear in the odd semester if
originally offered to the student in the 1st semester and similarly for the students who study the paper in the second
semester. The institution shall decide which paper to offer in which semester.

**For a particular batch of a programme of study either the paper on “Communications Skills” (Group 1), or Group 2:
papers (“Indian Constitution” and “Human values and ethics”) shall be taught in the first semester while the other group
shall be taught in the 2nd semester. Students who have to re‐appear can only reappear in the odd semester if originally
st
offered to the student in the 1 semester and similarly for the students who study the paper(s) in the second semester. The
institution shall decide which paper group to offer in which semester.

***NUES: All examinations to be conducted by the concerned teacher as specified in the detailed syllabus of the paper.

#The students who have not studied Chemistry at 10+2 level shall be offered BS‐120 in lieu of BS‐104, as applicable in
applicable disciplines. (Addition from the Academic Session 2022‐23)

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 12

 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

BRIDGE COURSES FOR THE B.TECH LATERAL ENTRY STUDENTS

All the Lateral Entry students of B.Tech., who are directly admitted in the 2nd Year / 3rd
Semester of the Progarmme of Study, have to pass the following bridge courses.

Paper Code Paper Name L/P

BC‐181 Bridge Course in Mathematics 3

BC‐183 Bridge Course in Programming in C 3

Implementation Rules for Bridge Courses:

1. The institutions are required to conduct the classes for the above bridge courses in the
3rd Semester along with the classes of the other courses.
2. These papers have to be qualified by the students.
3. For these papers examination shall be conducted by the concerned subject teacher as
NUES, the same shall be transferred to Examination Division of the University.
4. The degree to be awarded to the student only subject to the acquiring qualifying
grade/marks in the bridge courses and the minimum credits in the regular courses of the
scheme of study as prescribed.
5. These Courses shall be qualifying in nature; they shall not be included for calculation of
CGPA. The qualifying marks shall be 40 marks in each paper.
6. A separate marksheet will be issued by the Examination Division of the University for the
Bridge Course.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 13

 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

PaperCode: ES-101 / ES-102 Paper: Programming in ‘C’ L T/P C

3 - 3
Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question
should be objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per
the syllabus. Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the
syllabus. However, the student shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the
unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5 sub-parts / sub-questions. Each Unit shall have
a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper.
The standard / level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed
textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log-tables / data – tables may be specified if
required.
Course Objectives:
1: To impart basic knowledge about simple algorithms for arithmetic and logical problems
so that students can understand how to write a program, syntax and logical errors in ‘C’.
2: To impart knowledge about how to implement conditional branching, iteration and
recursion in ‘C’.
3: To impart knowledge about using arrays, pointers, files, union and structures to develop
algorithms and programs in ‘C’.
4: To impart knowledge about how to approach for dividing a problem into sub-problems
and solve the problem in ‘C’.
Course Outcomes (CO):
CO1 Ability to develop simple algorithms for arithmetic and logical problems and implement
them in ‘C’.
CO2 Ability to implement conditional branching, iteration and recursion and functions in ‘C’
CO3 Ability to use arrays, pointers, union and structures to develop algorithms and programs
in ‘C’.
CO4 Ability to decompose a problem into functions and synthesize a complete program using
divide and conquer approach in ‘C’.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) Mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3:
High)
CO/PO PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 3 2 1 1 - - - 2 1 1 3
CO2 3 3 2 1 1 - - - 2 1 1 3
CO3 3 3 3 1 1 - - - 2 1 1 3
CO4 3 3 3 1 1 - - - 2 1 1 3

Unit I

Introduction to Programming: Computer system, components of a computer system, computing

environments, computer languages, creating and running programs, Preprocessor, Compilation
process, role of linker, idea of invocation and execution of a programme. Algorithms:
Representation using flowcharts, pseudocode.
Introduction to C language: History of C, basic structure of C programs, process of compiling and
running a C program, C tokens, keywords, identifiers, constants, strings, special symbols, variables,
data types, I/O statements. Interconversion of variables.
Operators and expressions: Operators, arithmetic, relational and logical, assignment operators,
increment and decrement operators, bitwise and conditional operators, special operators, operator
precedence and associativity, evaluation of expressions, type conversions in expressions.[8Hrs][T2]

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 14

 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Unit II

Control structures: Decision statements; if and switch statement; Loop control statements: while,
for and do while loops, jump statements, break, continue, goto statements.
Arrays: Concepts, One dimensional array, declaration and initialization of one dimensional arrays,
two dimensional arrays, initialization and accessing, multi-dimensional arrays.
Functions: User defined and built-in Functions, storage classes, Parameter passing in functions, call
by value, Passing arrays to functions: idea of call by reference, Recursion.
Strings: Arrays of characters, variable length character strings, inputting character strings,
character library functions, string handling functions. [8Hrs] [T2]

Unit III

Pointers: Pointer basics, pointer arithmetic, pointers to pointers, generic pointers, array of
pointers, functions returning pointers, Dynamic memory allocation. Pointers to functions. Pointers
and Strings
Structures and unions: Structure definition, initialization, accessing structures, nested structures,
arrays of structures, structures and functions, self-referential structures, unions, typedef,
enumerations.
File handling: command line arguments, File modes, basic file operations read, write and append.
Scope and life of variables, multi-file programming. [8Hrs][T2]

Unit IV

C99 extensions. ‘C’ Standard Libraries: stdio.h, stdlib.h, assert.h, math.h, time.h, ctype.h,
setjmp.h, string.h, stdarg.h, unistd.h [3Hrs] [T1, R8]
Basic Algorithms: Finding Factorial, Fibonacci series, Linear and Binary Searching, Basic Sorting
Algorithms- Bubble sort, Insertion sort and Selection sort. Find the square root of a number, array
order reversal, reversal of a string [7Hrs][T1]

Textbooks:
1. How to solve it by Computer by R. G. Dromey, Prentice-Hall India EEE Series, 1982.
2. The C programming language by B W Kernighan and D M Ritchie, Pearson Education, 1988.

References:
1. Programming Logic & Design by Tony Gaddis, Pearson, 2nd Ed. 2016.
2. Programming Logic and Design by Joyce Farrell, Cengage Learning, 2015.
3. Engineering Problem Solving With C by Delores M. Etter, Pearson, 2013.
4. Problem Solving and Program Design in C by Jeri R. Hanly and Elliot B. Koffman, Pearson, 2016.
5. Structure and Interpretation of Computer Programs by Harold Abelson and Gerald Sussman with
Julie Sussman, MIT Press, 1985.
6. How to Design Programs by Matthias Felleisen, Robert Bruce Findler, Matthew Flatt, and Shriram
Krishnamurthi, MIT Press, 2018.
7. ANSI/ISO 9899-1990, American National Standard for Programming Languages ‘C’ by American
National Standards Institute, Information Technology Industry Council, 1990 (C89).
8. ISO/IEC 9899:1999. International Standard for Programming Languages – C (ISO/IEC 9899) by
American National Standards Institute, Information Technology Industry Council, 2000 (C99).
9. INCITS/ISO/IEC 9899-2011.American National Standard for Programming Languages ‘C’ by
American National Standards Institute, Information Technology Industry Council, 2012 (C11).

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 15

 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

PaperCode: BS-103 / BS-104 Paper: Applied Chemistry L T/P C

3 - 3
Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instruction for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term-end examinations question paper.
2. The first unit will be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question will have Five
sub-parts, and the students will be required to answer any THREE parts of 5 marks each. This
unit will have a total weightage of 15 marks.
3. Apart from unit 1 which is compulsory, the rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the
syllabus. Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus.
However, the student shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit.
Individual questions may contain up to 5 sub-parts / sub-questions. Each Unit shall have a
marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course/paper.
The standard / level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed
textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log-tables / data – tables may be specified if
required.
Course Objectives:
1: To understand the fuels and their uses.
2: To understand phase rule and its applications. Also, to understand the properties and
industrial applications of polymers.
3: To understand the methods used to make pure water.
4: To understand the chemical aspects of corrosion and gain a basic understanding about
the principles of Green Chemistry and Nano-chemistry.
Course Outcomes (CO):
CO1 Ability to use fuels and perform energy conversion calculations.
CO2 Understand the phase rule and its applications. Also, to understand the properties and
industrial applications of polymers.
CO3 Ability to analyse water and use technologies to purify it.
CO4 Understand the chemical aspects of corrosion and its prevention. Also, to understand
the basics of Green Chemistry and Nano-chemistry.
Course Outcomes (CO to Programme Outcomes (PO) Mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3:
High
CO/PO PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 2 2 3 3 2 - - - 1 1 - 1
CO2 2 2 3 3 2 - - - 1 1 - 1
CO3 2 2 3 3 2 - - - 1 1 - 1
CO4 2 2 3 3 2 1 1 - 1 1 - 1

Unit I

Fuels: Classification and Characteristics of fuels, Calorific values, Comparison between solid, liquid
and gaseous fuels, calorific values of fuels, determination of calorific values using Bomb
calorimeter, Boy’s calorimeter, theoretical calculation of calorific value using Dulong formula and
numericals of Calorific values. Types of fuels: - Solid: Coal, proximate and ultimate analysis of coal
and numericals, carbonisation of coal in Otto-Hoffman oven with recovery of by-products,
metallurgical coke; Liquid: Petroleum products --- refining, cracking-thermal and catalytic, knocking
characteristics, Octane and Cetane rating; Gaseous: Natural Gas (NG), CNG, LPG, Coal gas, Oil gas,
Producer gas, Water gas; Combustion of fuels numericals. [9Hrs] [T1]

Unit II

Phase rule: Terms used in Gibb’s Phase rule, phase diagram and its applications for study of one-
component systems: Water and Sulphur and two-component systems: Lead-Silver and Zinc-
Magnesium.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 16

 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Polymers: Classification, functionality and their types; Plastics: Synthesis (reactions) and properties
of Polyethylene Plastics (Addition polymers) ---low-density polyethene (LDPE), high-density
polyethylene(HDPE), linear low density polyethylene(LLDPE) and ultra-high molecular weight
polyethylene (UHMWPE); Vinyl Plastics (Condensation polymers) -Nylons, Phenol-formaldehyde
resins(Bakelite) and Glyptal; Speciality Polymers: Engineering thermoplastics, Conducting polymers,
Electroluminescent polymers, liquid crystalline polymers and biodegradable polymers.
[9Hrs][T1, T2]

Unit III

Water: Introduction, water quality standards, physical, chemical and biological characteristics;
hardness of water, disadvantages of hardness, determination of hardness (EDTA method) and related
numerical questions. Alkalinity and its determination; Boiler problems with hard water and their
prevention: Scale and sludge formation, boiler corrosion, caustic embrittlement, priming and
foaming, boiler water treatment –internal or in-situ: carbonate and phosphate conditioning,
colloidal and Calgon conditioning; external treatment: (a) Lime soda process and related numericals
(b) Zeolite process and numericals, (c) Ion-exchange process. Municipal water supply – its treatment
and disinfection using break -point chlorination. Desalination, Reverse Osmosis, Electrodialysis and
defluoridation of water. [9Hrs][T1, T2]

Unit IV

Corrosion and its Control: Definition, effects, theory (mechanisms): dry/chemical,

wet/electrochemical corrosion, Pilling-Bedworth ratio; Types of corrosion: Galvanic corrosion, Soil
corrosion, Pitting corrosion, Concentration cell or Differential Aeration corrosion, Stress corrosion;
Mechanism of rusting of iron, Passivity. Factors influencing corrosion; protective measures:
galvanization, tinning, cathodic protection, sacrificial anodic protection; electroplating and
prevention of corrosion through material selection and design.
Green Technology and Green Chemistry
Twelve Principles of Green Chemistry, Zero Waste Technology, Atom economy, Use of alternative
feedstock, innocuous reagents, alternative solvents, designing alternative reaction methodology,
minimising energy consumption.
Nano Chemistry: Nanomaterials: Properties, synthesis and surface characterization techniques BET
and TEM and applications. [9Hrs][T1, T2]

Textbooks:
1. Applied Chemistry by Achyutananda Acharya and Biswajit Samantray, Pearson, 2017.
2. Engineering Chemistry: Fundamentals and Applications by Shikha Agarwal, Cambridge University
Press, 2019.

References:
1. Applied Chemistry: A Textbook of Engineers and Technologists by O. V. Roussk and H. D. Gesser,
Springer, 2013.
2. Engineering Chemistry by Raghupati Mukhopadhyay and Sriparna Datta, New Age Int. (P0 Ltd.,
2007.
3. Engineering Chemistry by K. Shesha Maheswaramma and Mridula Chugh, Pearson, 2017.
4. Basic Engineering Chemistry by S.S. Dara, A. K.Singh, and Abhilasha Asthana, S. Cand and Co.,
2012.
5. Engineering Chemistry by K. N. Jayaveera, G.V. Subba Reddy, and C. Ramachandraiah, McGraw
Hill, 2016.
6. Engineering Chemistry by O. G. Palanna, McGraw-Hill, 2017.
7. Textbook of Engineering Chemistry by Jaya Shree Anireddy, Wiley, 2017.
8. Engineering Chemistry byE.R. Nagarajan and S. Ramalingam, Wiley, 2017.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 17

 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

PaperCode: BS-121 / BS-120 Paper: Basic Chemistry L T/P C

Year of Inclusion: 2022-23 3 - 3
Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instruction for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term-end examinations question paper.
2. The first unit will be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question will have Five
sub-parts, and the students will be required to answer any THREE parts of 5 marks each. This
unit will have a total weightage of 15 marks.
3. Apart from unit 1 which is compulsory, the rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the
syllabus. Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus.
However, the student shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit.
Individual questions may contain up to 5 sub-parts / sub-questions. Each Unit shall have a
marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course/paper.
The standard / level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed
textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log-tables / data – tables may be specified if
required.
Course Objectives:
1: To understand the fuels and their uses.
2: To lay foundation for the application of engineering materials such as cement and glass
Also, to understand the properties and industrial applications of polymers.
3: To understand the methods used to make pure water.
4: To understand the chemical aspects of corrosion.
Course Outcomes (CO):
CO1 Ability to use fuels and perform energy conversion calculations.
CO2 Course will impart knowledge about some important engineering materials such as
cement and glass. It will also enable the students to understand the properties and
industrial applications of polymers.
CO3 Ability to analyse water and use technologies to purify it.
CO4 Students will be able to understand the chemical aspects of corrosion and its
prevention.
Course Outcomes (CO to Programme Outcomes (PO) Mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3:
High
CO/PO PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 2 2 3 3 2 - - - 1 1 - 1
CO2 2 2 3 3 2 - - - 1 1 - 1
CO3 2 2 3 3 2 - - - 1 1 - 1
CO4 2 2 3 3 2 1 1 - 1 1 - 1

Unit I

Fuels: Classification and Characteristics of fuels, Calorific values, Comparison between solid, liquid
and gaseous fuels, calorific values of fuels, determination of calorific values using Bomb
calorimeter, Boy’s calorimeter, theoretical calculation of calorific value using Dulong formula and
numericals of Calorific values. Types of fuels: - Solid: Coal, proximate and ultimate analysis of coal
and numericals, carbonisation of coal in Otto-Hoffman oven with recovery of by-products,
metallurgical coke; Liquid: Petroleum products --- mining and refining of petroleum, knocking,
numericals based on combustion of fuels (excluding flue gas analysis) . [9Hrs] [T1]

Unit II

Engineering Materials: Portland Cement: manufacturing by Rotary Kiln, role of gypsum, chemistry of
setting and hardening of cement. Glass: manufacturing by tank furnace, significance of annealing,
types and properties of soft glass, hard glass, borosilicate glass. Polymers: Basic concepts &
terminology, classification and functionality of polymers, Properties and applications of (excluding

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 18

 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

synthesis): polyethylene, polymethacrylate, nylon, bakelite, polycarbonate, conducting polymers,

liquid crystalline polymers, biodegradable polymers. [9Hrs][T1, T2]

Unit III

Water: Introduction, water quality standards, physical, chemical and biological characteristics;
hardness of water, disadvantages of hardness, determination of hardness (EDTA method) and related
numerical questions, Alkalinity of water and related numericals. Boiler problems with hard water
and their prevention: Scale and sludge formation, boiler corrosion, caustic embrittlement, priming
and foaming, boiler water treatment –internal or in-situ: carbonate and phosphate conditioning,
colloidal and Calgon conditioning; external treatment: (a) Lime soda process and related numericals
(b) Zeolite process and numericals (c) Ion-exchange process. Desalination, Reverse Osmosis,
Electrodialysis. [9Hrs] [T1, T2]

Unit IV

Corrosion and its Control: Definition, effects, theory (mechanisms): dry/chemical,

wet/electrochemical corrosion, Pilling-Bedworth ratio; Types of corrosion: Galvanic corrosion, Soil
corrosion, Pitting corrosion, Concentration cell or Differential Aeration corrosion, Stress corrosion;
Passivity. Factors influencing corrosion; protective measures: galvanization, cathodic protection,
sacrificial anodic protection; electroplating. [9Hrs] [T1, T2]

Textbooks:
1. Engineering Chemistry: Fundamentals and Applications by Shikha Agarwal, Cambridge University
Press, 2019.
2. Engineering Chemistry by Jain & Jain, Dhanpat Rai Publication Company, 2021 (Seventeenth
Edition).

References:
1. Applied Chemistry: A Textbook of Engineers and Technologists by O. V. Roussk and H. D. Gesser,
Springer, 2013.
2. Engineering Chemistry by Raghupati Mukhopadhyay and Sriparna Datta, New Age Int. (P0 Ltd.,
2007.
3. Engineering Chemistry by K. Shesha Maheswaramma and Mridula Chugh, Pearson, 2017.
4. Basic Engineering Chemistry by S.S. Dara, A. K.Singh, and Abhilasha Asthana, S. Cand and Co.,
2012.
5. Engineering Chemistry by K. N. Jayaveera, G.V. Subba Reddy, and C. Ramachandraiah, McGraw
Hill, 2016.
6. Engineering Chemistry by O. G. Palanna, McGraw-Hill, 2017.
7. Textbook of Engineering Chemistry by Jaya Shree Anireddy, Wiley, 2017.
8. Engineering Chemistry byE.R. Nagarajan and S. Ramalingam, Wiley, 2017.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 19

 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

PaperCode: BS-105 Paper: Applied Physics – I L T/P C

3 - 3
Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instruction for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question
should be objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per
the syllabus. Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the
syllabus. However, the student shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the
unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5 sub-parts / sub-questions. Each Unit shall have
a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper.
The standard / level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed
textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log-tables / data – tables may be specified if
required.
Course Objectives:
1: To understand thermodynamic principles.
2: To understand and model oscillations and waves.
3: To understand and model interference, diffraction and polarization phenomenon.
4: To understand and appreciate relativistic systems and Lasers.
Course Outcomes (CO):
CO1 Ability to apply thermodynamic principles to solution of engineering problems.
CO2 Ability to understand and model oscillations and waves.
CO3 Ability to understand and model interference, diffraction and polarization phenomenon.
CO4 Ability to understand and appreciate relativistic systems and Lasers.
Course Outcomes (CO to Programme Outcomes (PO) Mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3:
High
CO/PO PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 2 2 3 3 2 - - - 1 1 - 2
CO2 2 2 3 3 2 - - - 1 1 - 2
CO3 2 2 3 3 2 - - - 1 1 - 2
CO4 2 2 3 3 2 - - - 1 1 - 2

Unit I

Introduction to Thermodynamics: Fundamental Ideas of Thermodynamics, The Continuum Model,

The Concept of a “System’”, “State”, “Equilibrium”, “Process’”. Equations of state, Heat, Zeroth
Law of Thermodynamics, Work, first and second laws of thermodynamics, entropy
[8Hrs]

Unit II

Waves and Oscillations: Wave motion, simple harmonic motion, wave equation, superposition
principle. Introduction to Electromagnetic Theory: Maxwell’s equations. work done by the
electromagnetic field, Poynting’s theorem, Momentum, Angular momentum in electromagnetic
fields, Electromagnetic waves: the wave equation, plane electromagnetic waves, energy carried by
electromagnetic waves [8Hrs]

Unit III

Interference: Interference by division of wave front (Young's double slit experiment, Fresnel's
biprism), interference by division of amplitude (thin films, Newton's rings, Michelson's
interferometer), Coherence and coherent sources

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 20

 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Diffraction: Fraunhofer and Fresnel diffraction; Fraunhofer diffraction for Single slit, double slit,
and N-slit (diffraction grating), Fraunhofer diffraction from a circular aperture, resolving power and
dispersive power of a grating, Rayleigh criterion, resolving power of optical instruments

Polarization: Introduction to polarization, Brewster’s law, Malu's law, Nicol prism, double refraction,
quarter-wave and half-wave plates, optical activity, specific rotation, Laurent half shade
polarimeter. [12Hrs]

Unit IV

Theory of relativity: The Michelson-Morley Experiment and the speed of light; Absolute and Inertial
frames of reference, Galilean transformations, the postulates of the special theory of relativity,
Lorentz transformations, time dilation, length contraction, velocity addition, mass energy
equivalence. Invariance of Maxwell’s equations under Lorentz Transformation.

Introduction to Laser Physics: Introduction, coherence, Einstein A and B coefficients, population

inversion, basic principle and operation of a laser, the He-Ne laser and the Ruby laser [12Hrs]

Textbooks:
1. Concepts of Modern Physics (SIE)by Arthur Beiser, Shobhit Mahajan, and S. Rai Choudhury,
McGraw-Hill, 2017.
2. Physics for Scientists and Engineers by Raymond A. Serway and John W. Jewett, 9th Edition ,
Cengage, 2017

References:
1. Modern Physics by Kenneth S. Krane, Wiley, 2020.
2. Principles of Physics by Robert Resnick, Jearl Walker and David Halliday, Wiley, 2015.
3. Optics by Ajoy Ghatak, McGraw Hill, 2020.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 21

 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

PaperCode: ES-107 / ES-108 Paper: Electrical Science L T/P C

3 - 3
Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instruction for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question
should be objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per
the syllabus. Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the
syllabus. However, the student shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the
unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5 sub-parts / sub-questions. Each Unit shall have
a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper.
The standard / level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed
textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log-tables / data – tables may be specified if
required.
Course Objectives:
1: To impart knowledge of the basics electrical engineering.
2: To impart knowledge of the working of RLC circuits.
3: To impart basic knowledge about filters and magnetic circuits.
4: To impart basic knowledge about electrical machines.
Course Outcomes (CO):
CO1 Ability to understand and use Kirchpff’s Laws to solve resistive circuit problems.
CO2 Ability to analyse resistive, inductive and capacitive circuits for transient and steady
state sinusoidal solutions.
CO3 Understand the first order filters and magnetic circuits.
CO4 Understand the design of electrical machines.
Course Outcomes (CO to Programme Outcomes (PO) Mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3:
High
CO/PO PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 3 3 3 3 - - - 1 1 1 2
CO2 3 3 3 3 3 - - - 1 1 1 2
CO3 3 3 3 3 3 - - - 1 1 1 2
CO4 3 3 3 3 3 - - - 1 1 1 2

Unit - I

DC Circuits: Passive circuit components, Basic laws of Electrical Engineering, Temperature

Resistance Coefficients. voltage and current sources, Series and parallel circuits, power and energy,
Kirchhoff’s Laws, Nodal & Mesh Analysis, delta-star transformation, superposition theorem,
Thevenin’s theorem, Norton’s theorem, maximum power transfer theorem. Time domain analysis of
first Order RC & LC circuits.
[9Hrs] [T1]

Unit – II
AC Circuits: Representation of sinusoidal waveforms, peak and rms values, phasor representation,
real power, reactive power, apparent power, power factor. Analysis of single-phase ac circuits
consisting of R, L, C, RL, RC, RLC combinations (series and parallel), resonance. Three phase
balanced circuits, voltage and current relations in star and delta connections. [9Hrs] [T1]

Unit - III

D. C. Generators & Motors: Principle of operation of Generators & Motors, Speed Control of shunt
motors, Flux control, Rheostatic control, voltage control, Speed control of series motors.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 22

 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

A. C. Generators & Motors: Principle of operation, Revolving Magnetic field, Squirrel cage and phase
wound rotor, Starting of Induction motors, Direct on line and Star Delta starters, Synchronous
machines. [9Hrs [T1]]

Unit - IV:

Transformers: Construction and principle of operation, equivalent circuit, losses in transformers,

regulation and efficiency. Auto-transformer and three-phase transformer connections.
Measuring Instruments: Electromagnetism, Different Torques in Indicating instruments, Moving Iron
Instruments: Construction & Principle, Attraction and Repulsion type; Moving Coil instruments:
Permanent Magnet type; Dynamometer type Instruments. [9Hrs] [T1]

Textbooks:
1. Electrical Engineering Fundamentals by Vincent Del Toro, PHI (India), 1989

References:
1. An Introduction to Electrical Science by Adrian Waygood, Routledge, 2nd Ed. 2019.
2. Electrical Circuit Theory and Technology by John Bird, Elsevier, 2007.
3. Principles and Applications of Electrical Engineering by Giorgio Rizzoni, MacGraw-Hill, 2007.
4. Electrical Engineering by Allan R. Hambley, Prentice-Hall, 2011.
5. Hughes Electical & Electronic Technology by Edward Hughes revised by Hohn Wiley, Keith Brown
and Ian McKenzie Smith, Pearson, 2016.
6. Electrical and Electronics Technology by E. Hughes, Pearson, 2010.
7. Basic Electrical Engineering by D.C. Kulshrestha, McGraw-Hill, 2009.
8. Basic Electrical Engineering by D. P. Kothai and I.J. Nagrath, McGraw-Hill, 2010.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 23

 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

PaperCode:BS-109 / BS-110 Paper: Environmental Studies L P C

3 - 3
Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instruction for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question
should be objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per
the syllabus. Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the
syllabus. However, the student shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the
unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5 sub-parts / sub-questions. Each Unit shall have
a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log-tables / data – tables may be specified if
required.
Course Objectives:
1: The course is designed to impart basic knowledge of the environment and its
components.
2: The course deals in creating awareness about the energy resources and current
environmental problems faced by the world.
3: To understand and learn about environment pollution, related case studies and measures
taken for control to pollution.
4: To understand and explore different approaches of conserving and protecting
environment for the benefit of society.
Course Outcomes (CO):
CO1 Environmental Studies course will provide necessary information and knowledge about
the various aspects of environment, ecosystems and related biodiversity.
CO2 Students will be able to learn and understand about the availability and sustainable use
of resources, environmental problems and their short term and long term impacts to
humans.
CO3 Course will help them to learn about environmental policies and protocols, social issues
and role of human in conservation and protection of environment.
CO4 Overall, course will help students to develop skills and ability of understanding
environment- human relationship.
Course Outcomes (CO to Programme Outcomes (PO)) Mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3:
High)
CO/PO PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 - 1 1 - - 3 3 2 1 1 1 1
CO2 - 1 1 - - 3 3 2 1 1 1 1
CO3 - 1 1 - - 3 3 2 1 1 1 1
CO4 - 1 1 - - 3 3 2 1 1 1 1

Unit I

Fundamentals: The Multidisciplinary nature of environmental studies: Definition, components, scope

and importance, need for public awareness; Natural Resources.
Ecosystems: Concept, Structure and function of an ecosystem, Types, Functional Components,
Different ecosystems, biogeochemical cycles.
Biodiversity: Introduction to biodiversity, biogeographical classification, India as a mega diversity
nation, endangered and endemic species of India, threats to biodiversity and conservation of
biodiversity. Bioprospecting and Biopiracy. [10Hrs] [T1,T2]

Unit III

Environmental Pollution: (a) Air Pollution: Source, Types, effects on biosphere and Meterology, Air
Quality, Control. (b) Water Pollution: Types and Sources. (c) Soil Pollution: Types and Control. (d)

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 24

 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Noise Pollution: Effect, Control (e) Thermal Pollution. (f) Radiation Pollution (g) Solid waste
Management, (h) Pollution Prevention, (i) Disaster Management [10Hrs][T1,T2]

Unit III

Social Issues and Environment: Concept of Sustainable Development; Urban problem related to
energy; Water Conservation; Wasteland reclamation; Resettlement and Rehabilitation; Climate
Change; Nuclear Accidents; Consumerism and Waste Products; Laws related to Environment,
Pollution, Forest and Wild life; Environmental Impact Assessment. [8Hrs] [T1,T2]

Unit IV

Human Population and Environment: Population Growth, Human Rights, Family Welfare
Programmes, Environment and Human Health, HIV/AIDS, Women and Child Welfare, Role of IT.
[8Hrs] [T1,T2]

Textbooks:
1. Environmental Studies by AninditaBasak, Pearson, 2009.
2. Environmental Studies: Simplified by Benny Joseph, McGraw-Hill, 2017.

References:
1. Environmental Studies by D. L. Manjunath, Pearson, 2007.
2. Environmental Studies by Anil Kumar De and Arnab Kumar De, New Age Int. (P) Ltd, Publishers,
2005.
3. Companion to Environmental Studiesedited by Coel Castree, Mike Hulme, and James D. Proctor,
Routledge, 2018.
4. Environmental Studies by Deepa Sharma and Bhupendra Singh Chabbra, New Age Int. (P) Ltd,
Publishers, 2007.
5. Environmental Studies: Simplified by Raj Kumar Singh, McGraw-Hill, 2012.
6. Basics of Environmental Studies by U. K. Khare, McGraw-Hill, 2014.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 25

 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

PaperCode: BS-111 Paper: Applied Mathematics – I L T/P C

4 - 4
Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instruction for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question
should be objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per
the syllabus. Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the
syllabus. However, the student shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the
unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5 sub-parts / sub-questions. Each Unit shall have
a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper.
The standard / level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed
textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log-tables / data – tables may be specified if
required.
Course Objectives:
1: To understand use series, differential and integral methods to solve formulated
engineering problems.
2: To understand use Ordinary Differential Equations to solve formulated engineering
problems.
3: To understand use linear algebra to solve formulated engineering problems.
4: To understand use vector calculus to solve formulated engineering problems.
Course Outcomes (CO):
CO1 Ability to use series, differential and integral methods to solve formulated engineering
problems.
CO2 Ability to use Ordinary Differential Equations to solve formulated engineering problems.
CO3 Ability to use linear algebra to solve formulated engineering problems.
CO4 Ability to use vector calculus to solve formulated engineering problems.
Course Outcomes (CO to Programme Outcomes (PO) Mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3:
High
CO/PO PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 2 3 3 3 1 - - - - - 1 2
CO2 2 3 3 3 1 - - - - - 2 2
CO3 2 3 3 3 1 - - - - - 2 2
CO4 2 3 3 3 1 - - - - - 2 2

Unit I

Partial derivatives, Chain rule, Differentiation of Implicit functions, Exact differentials. Maxima,
Minima and saddle points, Method of Lagrange multipliers. Differentiation under Integral sign,
Jacobians and transformations of coordinates. [8Hrs][T2]

Unit II

Ordinary Differential Equations (ODEs): Basic Concepts. Geometric Meaning of y’= ƒ(x, y). Direction
Fields, Euler’s Method, Separable ODEs. Exact ODEs. Integrating Factors, Linear ODEs. Bernoulli
Equation. Population Dynamics, Orthogonal Trajectories. Homogeneous Linear ODEs with Constant
Coefficients. Differential Operators. Modeling of Free Oscillations of a Mass–Spring System, Euler–
Cauchy Equations. Wronskian, Nonhomogeneous ODEs, Solution by Variation of Parameters.
Power Series Method for solution of ODEs: Legendre’s Equation. Legendre Polynomials, Bessel’s
Equation, Bessels’s functions Jn(x) and Yn(x). Gamma Function [12Hrs][T1]

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 26

 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Unit III

Linear Algebra: Matrices and Determinants, Gauss Elimination, Linear Independence. Rank of a
Matrix. Vector Space. Solutions of Linear Systems and concept of Existence, Uniqueness,
Determinants. Cramer’s Rule, Gauss–Jordan Elimination. The Matrix Eigenvalue Problem.
Determining Eigenvalues and Eigenvectors, Symmetric, Skew-Symmetric, and Orthogonal Matrices.
Eigenbases. Diagonalization. Quadratic Forms.Cayley – Hamilton Theorem (without proof)[10Hrs][T1]

Unit IV

Vector Calculus: Vector and Scalar Functions and Their Fields. Derivatives, Curves. Arc Length.
Curvature. Torsion, Gradient of a Scalar Field. Directional Derivative, Divergence of a Vector Field,
Curl of a Vector Field, Line Integrals, Path Independence of Line Integrals, Double Integrals, Green’s
Theorem in the Plane, Surfaces for Surface Integrals, Surface Integrals, Triple Integrals, Stokes
Theorem. Divergence Theorem of Gauss. [10Hrs][T1]

Textbooks:
1. Advanced Engineering Mathematics by Erwin Kreyszig, John Wiley, 10th Ed., 2011.
2. Mathematical Methods for Physics and Engineering, by K. F. Riley, M. P. Hobson and S. J. Bence,
CUP, 2013. (for Unit I)
References:
1. Engineering Mathematics by K.A. Stroud withDexter J. Booth, Macmillan, 2020.
2. Advanced Engineering Mathematics by Larry Turyn, Taylor and Francis, 2014.
3. Advanced Engineering Mathematics by Dennis G. Zill, Jones & Bartlett Learning, 2018.
4. Advanced Engineering Mathematics with MATLAB by Dean G. Duffy, Taylor and Francis, 2017.
5. Advanced Engineering Mathematics by Merle C. Potter, Jack L. Lessing, and Edward F.
Aboufadel, Springer (Switzerland), 2019.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 27

 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

PaperCode:HS-113 / HS-114 Paper: Communications Skills L T/P C

3 - 3
Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instruction for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question
should be objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per
the syllabus. Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the
syllabus. However, the student shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the
unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5 sub-parts / sub-questions. Each Unit shall have
a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper.
The standard / level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed
textbook.
Course Objectives:
1: To understand the communication system paradigm.
2: To understand how language vocabulary can be increased and difference between
Indian, British and American English.
3: To understand how to write a business letter and make a speech.
4: To improve grammar and sentence structure.
Course Outcomes (CO):
CO1 Ability to Communicate as an Individual and in a Group.
CO2 Ability to learn new words, differentiate between Indian, British and American English.
CO3 Ability to write business letters and make speeches.
CO4 Improved grammar and sentence structure.
Course Outcomes (CO to Programme Outcomes (PO) Mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3:
High
CO/PO PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 - - - - - - - - 3 3 - 3
CO2 - - - - - - - - 3 3 - 3
CO3 - - - - - - - - 3 3 - 3
CO4 - - - - - - - - 3 3 - 3

Unit I

Role and Importance of Communications, Attributes of Communications, Verbal and Non-Verbal

Communications, Verbal Communications Skills, Non-verbal Communication Methods, Body
Language, Barriers to Communications, Socio-psychological barriers, Inter-Cultural barriers,
Overcoming barriers, Communication Mediums: Characterization and Choice of medium, Effective
Communication: Correctness, Clarity, Conciseness, Courtesy, Group Communication: Meetings
(types, purpose), Group Discussions, Conduct of Meeting, Participant Role, Making Presentations.
[8Hrs][T1]

Unit II

Spoken and Written English: Attributes of spoken and written communication, Formal & Informal
Communication, Variation in between Indian, British and American English. Etiquette and Manners:
Personal Behaviour, Greetings, Introductions, Telephone Etiquette. Vocabulary Development:
Dictionaries and Thesaurus, Words often confused, generally used one word substitutions,
Comprehension. [8Hrs][T1]

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 28

 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Unit III

Letter writing: Planning the message, Planning Content, Structure, Language use, Layout, enquires
and replies, asking for or giving quotations, Bargaining letters, Seller’s reply, etc.; Complaints and
Replies; Memos, Circulars and notices;
Papragraph Writing, Writing Scientific and Technical Reports: Types, Structure, Drafting and
Delivering a Speech: Understanding the Environment, Understanding the Audience, Text preparing,
Composition, Practicing, Commemorative Speeches, Welcome and Introduction, Farewell and Send-
offs, Condolence [8Hrs][T1]

Unit IV

Articles: Indefinite, Definite; Tenses: Present, Past, Future, Perfect (Present, Past and Future),
Tenses in conditional sentences; Active and Passive Voice: Formation, conversion; Direct and
Indirect Speech, Degrees of Comparison, Common errors, Concepts of Learning and Listening
[8Hrs][T1]

Textbooks:
1. English Language Communication Skills by Urmilla Rai, Himalaya Publishing House, 10th Ed.,
2010.

References:
1. Technical Communication: Principles and Practice byMeenakshi Raman and Sangeeta Sharma,
Oxford University Press, 2015.
2. Communication Skills for Engineers by C. Muralikrishna and Sunita Mishra, Pearson, 2011.
3. Effective Technical Communication by M. Ashraf Rizvi, McGraw-Hill, 2018.
4. Business Communication: Skills, Concepts, and Applications by P.D. Chaturvedi and Mukesh
Chaturvedi, Pearson, 2013.
5. Business Correspondence and Report Writing by R.C. Sharma and Krishan Mohan, McGraw-Hill,
2016.
6. English for Technical Communications by Aysha Viswamohan, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2008.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 29

 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

PaperCode:HS-115 / HS-116 Paper: Indian Constitution L T/P C

2 - 2
Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
3. This is an NUES paper, hence all examinations to be conducted by the concerned teacher.
Instruction for paper setter
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question
should be objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per
the syllabus. Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the
syllabus. However, the student shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the
unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5 sub-parts / sub-questions. Each Unit shall have
a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper.
Course Objectives:
1: To create awareness among students about the Indian Constitution
2: To create consciousness among students about democratic principles and enshrined in
the Constitution of India
Course Outcomes (CO):
CO1 To understand institutional mechanism and fundamental values enshrined in the
Constitution of India
CO2 To understand the inter-relation between Centre and State Government
CO3 To understand Fundamental Rights and Duties
CO4 To understand the structure and functions of judicial systems in the country.
Course Outcomes (CO to Programme Outcomes (PO) Mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3:
High
CO/PO PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 - - - - - 3 - 2 - - - 1
CO2 - - - - - 3 - 2 - - - 1
CO3 - - - - - 3 - 2 - - - 1
CO4 - - - - - 3 - 2 - - - 1

Unit I

Introduction to Constitution of India: Definition, Source and Framing of the Constitution of India.
Salient features of the Indian Constitution. Preamble of the Constitution. [6Hrs]

Unit II

Fundamental Rights and Duties: Rights To Equality (Article 14-18). Rights to Freedom (Article 19-22).
Right against Exploitation (Article 23-24). Rights to Religion and Cultural and Educational Rights of
Minorities( Article 25- 30). The Directive Principles of State Policy – Its significance and application.
Fundamental Duties – Necessary obligations and its nature, legal status and significance [6Hrs]

Unit III

Executives and Judiciary: Office of President, Vice President and Governor: Power and Functions,
Parliament, Emergency Provisions-, President Rule; Union Judiciary: Appointment of Judges,
Jurisdiction of the Supreme Court, State Judiciary: Power and functions, Writ Jurisdiction [6Hrs]

Unit IV

Center-States Relation: Is Indian Constitution Federalin Nature, Legislative relations between Union
and States, Administrative Relations between Union and States, Financial Relations between Union
and States [6Hrs]

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 30

 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Textbooks:
1. Constitutional Law of India by J.N Pandey, Central Law Publication, 2018.
2. Introduction to the Indian Constitution of India by D.D. Basu, PHI, New Delhi, 2021
3. The Constitution of India by P.M. Bakshi, Universal Law Publishing Co., 2020.

References:
1. Indian Constitutional Law by M.P. Jain, Lexis Nexis, 2013
2. Constitution of India by V.N. Shukla, Eastern Book Agency, 2014

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 31

 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

PaperCode:HS-117/HS-118 Paper: Human Values and Ethics L P C

1 - 1
Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
3. This is an NUES paper, the examinations are to be conducted by the concerned teacher.
Instruction for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should
be objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the
syllabus. Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus.
However, the student shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit.
Individual questions may contain upto 5 sub-parts / sub-questions. Each Unit shall have a marks
weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper.
Course Objectives:
1: To help students regulate their behavior in a professional environment as employees
2: To make students aware of the impact of taking non-ethical engineering decisions.
3: To understand that mind and desire control is needed for being ethical.
4: To understand organizational culture and to adapt to varying cultures without compromising
ethical values
Course Outcomes (CO):
CO1 Realize the importance of human values.
CO2 Understand that excessive desires of the mind make a person unethical and restless, while
fewer desires lead to peace and professional progress
CO3 Assess different types of risks involved in unethical practices. Know various means of
protesting against unethical practices.
CO4 Assess the benefits of restraining from unethical practices like bribery, extortion, nepotism,
nexus between politicians and industrialists.
Course Outcomes (CO to Programme Outcomes (PO) Mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High
CO/PO PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 - - - - - 3 - 3 1 1 - 1
CO2 - - - - - 3 - 3 1 1 - 1
CO3 - - - - - 3 - 3 1 1 - 1
CO4 - - - - - 3 - 3 1 1 - 1

Unit I

Human Values: Morals, Values, Ethics, Integrity, Work ethics, Service learning, Virtues, Respect for
others, Living peacefully, Caring, Sharing, Honesty, Courage, Valuing time, Cooperation,
Commitment, Empathy, Self-confidence, Challenges in the work place, Spirituality [3Hrs]

Unit II

Engineering Ethics: Senses of engineering ethics, Variety of moral issues, Types of inquiries, Moral
dilemma, Moral autonomy, Moral development (theories), Consensus and controversy, Profession,
Models of professional roles, Responsibility, Theories about right action (Ethical theories), Self-
control, Self-interest, Customs, Religion, Self-respect, Case study: Choice of the theory

Engineering as experimentation, Engineers as responsible experimenters, Codes of ethics, Industrial

standards, A balanced outlook on law, Case study: The challenger [3Hrs]

Unit III

Safety definition, Safety and risk, Risk analysis, Assessment of safety and risk, Safe exit, Risk-
benefit analysis

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 32

 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Sefety lessons from ‘the challenger’, Case study: Power plants,Collegiality and loyalty, Collective
bargaining,
Confidentiality, Conflict of interests, Occupational crime, Human rights, Employee rights, Whistle
blowing, Intellectual property rights. [4Hrs]

Unit IV

Globalization, Multinational corporations, Environmental ethics, Computer ethics, Weapons

development, Engineers as managers, Consulting engineers, Engineers as expert witness, Engineers
as advisors in planning and policy making, Moral leadership, Codes of ethics, Engineering council of
India, Codes of ethics in Business Organizations [3Hrs]

Textbooks:
1. A Textbook on Professional Ethics and Human Values, by R. S. Naagarazan, New Age Publishers,
2006.

References:
1. Professional Ethics and Human Values by D. R. Kiran, McGraw-Hill, 2014.
2. Engineering Ethics, by Charles E Harris and Micheal J Rabins, Cengage Learning Pub., 2012.
3. Ethics in Engineering, Mike Martin and Roland Schinzinger, McGraw Hill Pub., 2017.
4. Unwritten laws of Ethics and Change in Engineering by The America Society of Mechanical
Engineers, 2015.
5. Engineering Ethics by Charles B. Fleddermann, Pearson, 2014.
6. Introduction to Engineering Ethics by Mike W. Martin and Roland Schinzinger, McGraw-Hill, 2010.
7. Engineering Ethics: Concept and Cases by Charles E. Harris, Michael S. Pritchard and Michael
J.Rabins, Cengage, 2009.
8. Ethics in Engineering Practiceand Research by Caroline Whitbeck, Cambridge University Press,
2007.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 33

 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

PaperCode: ES-119 Paper: Manufacturing Process L T/P C

4 - 4
Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instruction for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question
should be objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per
the syllabus. Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the
syllabus. However, the student shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the
unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5 sub-parts / sub-questions. Each Unit shall have
a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper.
The standard / level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed
textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log-tables / data – tables may be specified if
required.
Course Objectives:
1: The students will have basic understanding of various manufacturing processes. The
students will have knowledge about casting process.
2: The students will have understanding of joining processes.
3: The students will have understanding of forging and sheet metal works.
4: The students will have basic idea of powder metallurgy and manufacturing of plastic
components.
Course Outcomes (CO):
CO1 Understand casting process.
CO2 Understand joining process.
CO3 Understand forging and sheet metal work.
CO4 Basic understanding of powder metallurgy and manufacturing of plastic components.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) Mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3:
High)
CO/PO PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 2 1 1 1 2 - - - - - 1 1
CO2 2 1 1 1 2 - - - - - 1 1
CO3 2 1 1 1 2 - - - - - 1 1
CO4 2 1 1 1 2 - - - - - 1 1

Unit I

Definition of manufacturing, Importance of manufacturing towards technological and social

economic development, Classification of manufacturing processes, Properties of materials.
Metal Casting Processes: Sand casting, Sand moulds, Type of patterns, Pattern materials, Pattern
allowances, Types of Moulding sand and their Properties, Core making, Elements of gating system.
Description and operation of cupola.
Working principle of Special casting processes - Shell casting, Pressure die casting, Centrifugal
casting. Casting defects. [10Hrs]

Unit II

Joining Processes: Welding principles, classification of welding processes, Fusion welding, Gas
welding, Equipments used, Filler and Flux materials. Electric arc welding, Gas metal arc welding,
Submerged arc welding, Electro slag welding, TIG and MIG welding process, resistance welding,
welding defects. [10Hrs]

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 34

 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Unit III

Deformation Processes: Hot working and cold working of metals, Forging processes, Open and closed
die forging process. Typical forging operations, Rolling of metals, Principle of rod and wire drawing,
Tube drawing. Principle of Extrusion, Types of Extrusion, Hot and Cold extrusion.
Sheet metal characteristics -Typical shearing operations, bending and drawing operations, Stretch
forming operations, Metal spinning. [10Hrs]

Unit IV

Powder Metallurgy: Introduction of powder metallurgy process, powder production, blending,

compaction, sintering
Manufacturing Of Plastic Components: Types of plastics, Characteristics of the forming and shaping
processes, Moulding of Thermoplastics, Injection moulding, Blow moulding, Rotational moulding,
Film blowing, Extrusion, Thermoforming. Moulding of thermosets- Compression moulding, Transfer
moulding, Bonding of Thermoplastics. [10Hrs]

Textbooks:
1. Manufacturing Technology: Foundry, Forming and Welding Volume 1, P. N Rao, , McGrawHill, 5e,
2018.
2. Elements of Workshop Technology Vol. 1 and 2 by Hajra Choudhury, Media Promoters Pvt
Ltd.,2008.

References:
1. Manufacturing Processes for Engineering Materials, by Serope Kalpajian and Steven R.Schmid,
Pearson Education, 5e, 2014.
2. Fundamentals of Modern Manufacturing: Materials, Processes, and Systems by Mikell P. Groover,
John Wiley and Sons, 4e, 2010 .
3. Production Technology by R.K.Jain and S.C. Gupta, Khanna Publishers. 16th Edition, 2001.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 35

 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

PaperCode: BS-151 Paper: Applied Physics - I Lab. L P C

- 2 1
Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Applied Physics - I) as
this is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class
commencement under intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in
which the paper is being offered from the list of practicals below. Atleast 8 experiments
must be performed by the students

1. To determine the wavelength of sodium light by Newton’s Rings.

2. To determine the wavelength of sodium light by Fresnel's biprism.
3. To determine the wavelength of sodium light using diffraction grating.
4. To determine the refractive index of a prism using spectrometer.
5. To determine the dispersive power of prism using spectrometer and mercury source.
6. To determine the specific rotation of cane sugar solution with the help of half shade
polarimeter.
7. To find the wavelength of He-Ne laser using transmission diffraction grating.
8. To determine the numeral aperture (NA) of an optical fibre.
9. To plot a graph between the distance of the knife-edge from the center of the gravity and the
time period of bar pendulum. From the graph, find (a) The acceleration due to gravity (b) The
radius of gyration and the moment of inertia of the bar about an axis.
10. To determine the velocity of ultrasound waves using an ultrasonic spectrometer in a given liquid
(Kerosene Oil).
11. To verify inverse square law.
12. To determine Planck’s constant.

Note: Teacher’s may use the prescribed books to choose the practicals in addition to above. Total 8
practicals minimum shall be performed by the students, they may be asked to do more. Atleast 4
experiments must be from the above list.

Textbook:
1. B.Sc. Practical Physics by C. L. Arora, S.Chand & Co., 2020.
2. Practical physics by R. K. Shukla and A. Srivastava, New Age Int. (P) Ltd., 2006.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 36

 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

PaperCode: ES-153 / ES-154 Paper: Programming in ‘C’ Lab. L P C

- 2 1
Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of “Programming in ‘C’” as
this is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class
commencement under intimation to the office of the office of the Head of Department /
Institiution in which the paper is being offered from the list of practicals below. Atleast 8
experiments must be performed by the students

1. Write a program to find divisor or factorial of a given number.

2. Write a program to find sum of a geometric series
3. Write a recursive program for tower of Hanoi problem
4. Write a recursive program to print the first m Fibonacci number
5. Write a menu driven program for matrices to do the following operation depending on whether
the operation requires one or two matrices
a. Addition of two matrices
b. Subtraction of two matrices
c. Finding upper and lower triangular matrices
d. Transpose of a matrix
e. Product of two matrices.
6. Write a program to copy one file to other, use command line arguments.
7. An array of record contains information of managers and workers of a company. Print all the data
of managers and workers in separate files.
8. Write a program to perform the following operators on Strings without using String functions
a. To find the Length of String.
b. To concatenate two string.
c. To find Reverse of a string.
d. To copy one string to another string.
9. Write a Program to store records of a student in student file. The data must be stored using
Binary File.Read the record stored in “Student.txt” file in Binary code.Edit the record stored in
Binary File.Append a record in the Student file.
10. Write a programmed to count the no of Lowercase, Uppercase numbers and special Characters
presents in the contents of text File.

Note:
1. At least 8 Experiments out of the list shall be performed by the students. Teachers may introduce
new experiments for the class in addition to above.
2. In addition Two Mini Projects based on the skills learnt shall be done by the students. Teachers
shall create the mini projects so that the same is not repeated every year. These mini projects may
be done in a group not exceeding group size of 4 students.
3. Usage of IDE like Visual Studio Community Edition, Codeblocks, etc. are recommended.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 37

 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

PaperCode: BS-155 / BS-156 Paper: Applied Chemistry Lab. L P C

- 2 1
Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of “Applied Chemistry” as
this is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class
commencement under intimation to the office of the office of the Head of Department /
Institiution in which the paper is being offered from the list of practicals below. Atleast 8
experiments must be performed by the students

1. Determination of alkalinity of water sample.

2. Determination of hardness of water sample by EDTA method.
3. Determine the percentage composition of sodium hydroxide in the given mixture of sodium
hydroxide and sodium chloride.
4. Determine the amount of oxalic acid and Sulphuric acid in one litre of solution, given standard
sodium hydroxide and Potassium Permanganate.
5. Determine the amount of copper in the copper ore solution, provided hypo-solution (Iodometric
Titration).
6. Determine the amount of chloride ions present in water using silver nitrate (Mohr’s
Precipitation Method).
7. Determine the strength of MgSO4 solution by Complexometric titration.
8. Determine the surface tension of a liquid using drop number method.
9. Determine the viscosity of a given liquid (density to be determined).
10. Determine the cell constant of conductivity cell and titration of strong acid/strong base
conductometrically.
11. To determine (a) λ max of the solution of KMnO4. (b) Verify Beer’s law and find out the
concentration of unknown solution by spectrophotometer.
12. Determination of the concentration of iron in water sample by using spectrophotometer.
13. Determination of the concentration of Iron (III) by complexometric titration.
14. Proximate analysis of coal.
15. Determination of eutectic point and congruent melting point for a two component system by
method of cooling curve.

References:
1. Vogel’s Text Book of Quantitative Chemical Analysis by G.H. Jefferey, J. Bassett, J. Mendham,
and R.C. Denney, Logmaan Scientific & Technical, 1989
2. Essentials of Experimental Engineering Chemistry by S. Chawla, Dhanpat Rai & Co., 2008.
3. Experiments in Applied Chemistry by S. Ratan, S.K. KAtaria & Sons, 2003.
4. Practical Chemistry by O.P.Pandey, D. N. Bajpai and S. Giri, S.Chand & Co., 2005.
5. Engineering Chemistry with Laboratory Experiments by M. S. Kaurav, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd.,
2011.
6. Laboratory Manual on Engineering Chemistry by S. K. Bhasin, and Sudha Rani, Dhanpat Rai &Co.,
2006.

Note:
1. At least 8 Experiments out of the list shall be performed by the students. Teachers may introduce
new experiments for the class in addition to above.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 38

 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

PaperCode: ES-157 Paper: Engineering Graphics-I L P C

- 4 2
Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Course Objectives:
1: The students will learn the introduction of Engineering graphics, various equipment
used, various scales, dimensions and BIS codes used while making drawings for various
streams of engineering disciplines.
2: The students will learn theory of projections and projection of points.
3: The students will learn projection of lines and projection of planes.
4: The students will learn the projection of solid and development of surfaces
Course Outcomes (CO):
CO1 To understand the theory of projections and projection of points.
CO2 Ability to do line projections.
CO3 Ability to do plane projections.
CO4 Ability to do solid projections and development of surfaces
Course Outcomes (CO to Programme Outcomes (PO) Mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3:
High
CO/PO PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 3 3 3 2 - - - 1 2 1 2
CO2 3 3 3 3 2 - - - 1 2 1 2
CO3 3 3 3 3 2 - - - 1 2 1 2
CO4 3 3 3 3 2 - - - 1 2 1 2

Unit I

Introduction: Engineering Graphics/Technical Drawing, Introduction to drawing equipments and use

of instruments, Conventions in drawing practice. Types of lines and their uses, BIS codes for lines,
technical lettering as per BIS codes, Introduction to dimensioning, Types, Concepts of scale drawing,
Types of scales
Theory of Projections: Theory of projections, Perspective, Orthographic, System of orthographic
projection: in reference to quadrants, Projection of Points, Projection in different quadrants,
Projection of point on auxiliary planes. Distance between two points, Illustration through simple
problems.

Unit II

Projection of Lines: Line Parallel to both H.P. and V.P., Parallel to one and inclined to other, Other
typical cases: three view projection of straight lines, true length and angle orientation of straight
line: rotation method, Trapezoidal method and auxiliary plane method, traces of line.

Unit III

Projection of Planes: Projection of Planes Parallel to one and perpendicular to other, Perpendicular
to one and inclined to other, Inclined to both reference planes, Plane oblique to reference planes,
traces of planes.
Planes Other than the Reference Planes: Introduction of other planes (perpendicular and oblique),
their traces, inclinations etc., projections of points and lines lying in the planes, conversion of
oblique plane into auxiliary plane and solution of related problems.

Unit IV

Projection of Solids: Projection of solids in first or third quadrant, Axis parallel to one and
perpendicular to other, Axis parallel to one inclined to other, Axis inclined to both the principal
plane, Axis perpendicular to profile plane and parallel to both H.P. and V.P., Visible and invisible
details in the projection, Use of rotation and auxiliary plane method.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 39

 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Development of Surface: Purpose of development, Parallel line, radial line and triangulation
method, Development of prism, cylinder, cone and pyramid surface for both right angled and
oblique solids, Development of surface.

Note: The sheets to be created shall be notified by the concerned teacher.

Textbooks:
1. Engineering Drawing by N.D. Bhatt, 53rd Ed., Charotar Publishing House Pvt. Ltd., Gujarat,2017.

References:
1. Engineering Drawing by P.S. Gill, S.K Kataria & Sons, New Delhi, 2013.
2. Technical Drawing with Engineering Graphics by Frederick E. Giesecke, Shawna Lockhart, Marla
Goodman, and Cindy M. Johnson, 15th Ed., Prentice Hall, USA, 2016
3. Engineering Drawing by M.B. Shah and B.C. Rana, 3rd Ed., Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2009.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 40

 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

PaperCode: ES-159 / ES-160 Paper: Electrical Science Lab. L P C

- 2 1
Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of “Electrical Science” as
this is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class
commencement under intimation to the office of the office of the Head of Department /
Institiution in which the paper is being offered from the list of practicals below. Atleast 8
experiments must be performed by the students

1. To Design the circuit for a given load and selection of its various Components and instruments
from the safety point of view
OR
To study different types of symbols and standard currently being used inelectrical engineering.
2. Study and applications of CRO for measurement of voltage, frequencyand phase of signals.
3. Connection of lamp by(1)Single Switch Method.(2) Two-way Switch Method.
OR
Performance comparison of fluorescent Tube & CFL Lamp.
3. To Verify Thevenin’s & Norton’s Theorem
OR
To Verify Superposition &Reciprocity Theorem.
OR
To Verify Maximum Power Transfer Theorem.
4. To Measure Power & Power Factor in a Single-Phase A.C Circuit usingThree Ammeters or three
Voltmeters.
5. To Measure Power & Power Factor in a Balanced Three Phase Circuitusing Two Single Phase
Wattmeters.
6. To study of Resonance in a series R-L-C or Parallel R-L-C Circuits.
7. To perform open circuit and short circuit test on 1-phase transformer.
8. Starting, Reversing and speed control of DC shunt Motor
9. Starting, Reversing and speed control of 3-phase Induction Motor
10. To Study different types of Storage Batteries & its charging system.
11. To Study different types of earthing methods including earth leakagecircuit breaker (GFCI)

Note:
1. At least 8 Experiments out of the list shall be performed by the students. Teachers may introduce
new experiments for the class in addition to above.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 41

 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

PaperCode: BS-161 /BS-162 Paper: Environmental Studies Lab. L P C

- 2 1
Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of “Environmental Studies”
as this is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class
commencement under intimation to the office of the office of the Head of Department /
Institiution in which the paper is being offered from the list of practicals below. Atleast 8
experiments must be performed by the students

1. Determination of pH, conductivity and turbidity in drinking water sample.

2. Determination of pH and conductivity of soil/sludge samples.
3. Determination of moisture content of soil sample.
4. Determination of Total Dissolved Solids (TDS) of water sample.
5. Determination of dissolved oxygen (DO) in the water sample.
6. Determination of Biological oxygen demand (BOD) in the water sample.
7. Determination of Chemical oxygen demand (COD) in the water sample.
8. Determination of Residual Chlorine in the water sample.
9. Determination of ammonia in the water sample.
10. Determination of carbon dioxide in the water sample.
11. Determination of nitrate ions or sulphate ions in water using spectrophotometer.
12. Determination of the molecular weight of polystyrene sample using viscometer method.
13. Base catalyzed aldol condensation by Green Methodology.
14. Acetylation of primary amines using eco-friendly method.
15. To determine the concentration of particulate matter in the ambient air using High Volume
Sampler.

Note:
1. For better understanding of various aspects of environment visits to local areas, depending upon
easy access and importance may be planned to any nearby river, forest, grassland, hills and
students should write a report based on their observations.
2. At least 8 Experiments out of the list shall be performed by the students. Teachers may
introduce new experiments for the class in addition to above

References:
1. Vogel’s Text Book of Quantitative Chemical Analysis by G.H. Jefferey, J. Bassett, J. Mendham,
and R.C. Denney, Logmaan Scientific & Technical, 1989.
2. dst.gov.in/green-chem.pdf (monograph of green chemistry laboratory experiments).
3. Essentials of Experimental Engineering Chemistry by S. Chawla, Dhanpat Rai & Co., 2008.
4. Experiments in Applied Chemistry by S. Ratan, S.K. KAtaria & Sons, 2003.
5. Principles of Environment Science: Enquiry and Applications by W. Cunningham and M. A.
Cunningha, Tata McGraw Hill, 2003.
6. Perspectives in Environment Studies by A. Kaushik and C. P. Kaushik, New Age Int. (P) Pub.,
2013.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 42

 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

PaperCode: BS-106 Paper: Applied Physics - ll L T/P C

3 - 3
Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instruction for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term-end examinations question paper.
2. The first unit will be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question will have Five
sub-parts, and the students will be required to answer any THREE parts of 5 marks each. This
unit will have a total weightage of 15 marks.
3. Apart from unit 1 which is compulsory, the rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the
syllabus. Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus.
However, the student shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit.
Individual questions may contain up to 5 sub-parts / sub-questions. Each Unit shall have a
marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course/paper.
The standard / level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed
textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log-tables / data – tables may be specified if
required.
Course Objectives:
1: To learn about the quantum nature of reality.
2: To learn about quantum statistics and its significance.
3: To understand the structures of crystals.
4: To learn about the band theory of solids and properties and characteristics of diodes.
Course Outcomes (CO):
CO1 Understand and appreciate the quantum nature of reality.
CO2 Understand quantum statistics and its significance.
CO3 Understand Crystalline Structure.
CO4 Understand the band theory of solids and properties and characteristics of diodes.
Course Outcomes (CO to Programme Outcomes (PO) Mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3:
High
CO/PO PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 2 2 3 3 2 - - - 1 1 - 1
CO2 2 2 3 3 2 - - - 1 1 - 1
CO3 2 2 3 3 2 - - - 1 1 - 1
CO4 2 2 3 3 2 - - - 1 1 - 1

Unit I

Quantum Mechanics: Introduction: Wave particle duality, de Broglie waves, the experiment of
Davisson and Germer, electron diffraction, physical interpretation of the wave function, properties,
the wave packet, group and phase velocity, the uncertainty principle . The Schrödinger wave
equation (1D), Eigen values and Eigen functions, expectation values, simple Eigen value problems –
solutions of the Schrödinger’s equations for the free particle, the infinite well, the finite well,
tunneling effect, the scanning electron microscope, the quantum simple harmonic oscillator
(qualitative), zero point energy. [8Hrs][T1,T2]

Unit II

Quantum Statistics: The need for statistics , statistical distributions: Maxwell Boltzmann, Bose-
Einstein and Fermi-Dirac statistics, their comparisons, Fermions and Bosons, Applications of
quantum statistics: 1. Molecular speed and energies in an ideal gas; 2. The Black body spectrum, the
failure of classical statistics to give the correct explanations – Bose-Einstein statistics applied to the
Black Body radiation spectrum; Fermi-Dirac distribution, free electron theory, electronic specific
heats, Fermi energy and average energy; Dying stars. [8Hrs][T1,T2]

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 43

 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Unit III

Crystal Structure: Types of solids, Unit cell, Types of crystals, Translation vectors, Lattice planes,
Miller indices, Simple crystal structures, Interplaner spacing, Crystal structure analysis: Bragg’s law,
Laue method, Point defects: Schottcky and Frankel defects. [8Hrs][T1,T2]

Unit IV

Band Theory of Solids: Origin of energy bands in solids, motion of electrons in a periodic potential –
the Kronig–Penny model (Qualitative). Brillouin zones, effective mass, metals, semi-conductors and
insulators and their energy band structures. Extrinsic and Intrinsic semiconductors, doping – Fermi
energy for doped and undoped semiconductors, the p-n junction (energy band diagrams with Fermi
energy), the unbiased diode, forward and reverse biased diodes – tunnel diodes, zener diode, photo
diode its characteristics, LED [8Hrs][T1,T2]

Textbooks:
1. Concepts of Modern Physics (SIE)by Arthur Beiser, Shobhit Mahajan, and S. Rai Choudhury,
McGraw – Hill, 2017.
2. Modern Physics by Kenneth S. Krane, Wiley, 2020.

References:
1. Physics for Scientists and Engineers by Raymond A. Serway and John W. Jewett, 9th Edition
, Cengage, 2017
2. Principles of Physics by Robert Resnick, Jearl Walker and David Halliday, Wiley, 2015.
3. Solid State Electronic Devices ,by Streetman and Ben G Prentice Hall India
Learning Private Limited; 2006

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 44

 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

PaperCode: BS-112 Paper: Applied Mathematics – II L T/P C

4 - 4
Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instruction for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus.This question
should be objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per
the syllabus. Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the
syllabus. However, the student shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the
unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5 sub-parts / sub-questions. Each Unit shall have
a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper.
The standard / level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed
textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log-tables / data – tables may be specified if
required.
Course Objectives:
1: To understand Complex series methods.
2: To understand Complex analysis
3: To understand Fourier and Laplace methods
4: To understand how to solve specific formulated engineering problems using PDE
methods.
Course Outcomes (CO):
CO1 Ability to use Complex series methods.
CO2 Ability to use Complex analysis to solve formulated engineering problems
CO3 Ability to use Fourier and Laplace methods to solve formulated engineering problems
CO4 Ability to solve specific formulated engineering problems using PDE methods.
Course Outcomes (CO to Programme Outcomes (PO) Mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3:
High
CO/PO PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 2 3 3 3 1 - - - - - 1 2
CO2 2 3 3 3 1 - - - - - 2 2
CO3 2 3 3 3 1 - - - - - 2 2
CO4 2 3 3 3 1 - - - - - 2 2

Unit I

Complex Analysis – I : Complex Numbers and Their Geometric Representation, Polar Form of
Complex Numbers. Powers and Roots, Derivative. Analytic Function, Cauchy–Riemann Equations.
Laplace’s Equation, Exponential Function, Trigonometric and Hyperbolic Functions. Euler’s Formula,
de’Moivre’s theorem (without proof), Logarithm. General Power. Principal Value. Singularities and
Zeros. Infinity,
Line Integral in the Complex Plane, Cauchy’s Integral Theorem, Cauchy’s Integral Formula,
Derivatives of Analytic Functions, Taylor and Maclaurin Series. [10Hrs]

Unit II

Complex Analysis – II: Laurent Series, Residue Integration Method. Residue Integration of Real
Integrals,
Geometry of Analytic Functions: Conformal Mapping, Linear Fractional Transformations (Möbius
Transformations), Special Linear Fractional Transformations, Conformal Mapping by Other Functions,
Applications: Electrostatic Fields, Use of Conformal Mapping. Modeling, Heat Problems, Fluid Flow.
Poisson’s Integral Formula for Potentials [10Hrs]

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 45

 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Unit III

Laplace Transforms: Definitions and existence (without proof), properties, First Shifting Theorem (s-
Shifting), Transforms of Derivatives and Integrals and ODEs, Unit Step Function (Heaviside Function).
Second Shifting Theorem (t-Shifting), Short Impulses. Dirac’s Delta Function. Partial Fractions,
Convolution. Integral Equations, Differentiation and Integration of Transforms. Solution of ODEs with
Variable Coefficients, Solution of
Systems of ODEs. Inverse Laplace transform and its properties.
Fourier Analysis: Fourier Series, Arbitrary Period. Even and Odd Functions. Half-Range Expansions,
Sturm–Liouville Problems. Fourier Integral, Fourier Cosine and Sine Transforms, Fourier Transform.
Usage of fourier analysis for solution of ODEs. Inverse Fourier transform and its properties. [10Hrs]

Unit IV

Partial Differential Equations (PDEs): Basic Concepts of PDEs. Modeling: Vibrating String, Wave
Equation. Solution by Separating Variables. Use of Fourier Series. D’Alembert’s Solution of the Wave
Equation. Characteristics. Modeling: Heat Flow from a Body in Space. Heat Equation:Solution by
Fourier Series. Steady Two-Dimensional Heat Problems. Dirichlet Problem. Heat Equation: Modeling
Very Long Bars. Solution by Fourier Integrals and Transforms. Modeling: Membrane, Two-Dimensional
Wave Equation. Rectangular Membrane. Laplacian in Polar Coordinates. Circular Membrane.
Laplace’s Equation in Cylindrical and Spherical Coordinates. Potential. Solution of PDEs by Laplace
Transforms. [10Hrs]

Textbooks:
1. Advanced Engineering Mathematics by Erwin Kreyszig, John Wiley, 10th Ed., 2011.

References:
1. Engineering Mathematics by K.A. Stroud withDexter J. Booth, Macmillan, 2020.
2. Advanced Engineering Mathematics by Larry Turyn, Taylor and Francis, 2014.
3. Advanced Engineering Mathematics by Dennis G. Zill, Jones & Bartlett Learning, 2018.
4. Advanced Engineering Mathematics with MATLAB by Dean G. Duffy, Taylor and Francis, 2017.
5. Advanced Engineering Mathematics by Merle C. Potter, Jack L. Lessing, and Edward F.
Aboufadel, Springer (Switzerland), 2019.
6. Mathematical Methods for Physics and Engineering, by K. F. Riley, M. P. Hobson and S. J. Bence,
CUP, 2013.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 46

 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

PaperCode: ES-114 Paper: Engineering Mechanics L T/P C

3 - 3
Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instruction for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question
should be objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per
the syllabus. Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the
syllabus. However, the student shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the
unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5 sub-parts / sub-questions. Each Unit shall have
a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper.
The standard / level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed
textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log-tables / data – tables may be specified if
required.
Course Objectives:
1: To impart knowledge to solve problems pertaining to force systems, equilibrium and
distributed systems.
2: To impart knowledge to solve problems of friction and engineering trusses.
3: To impart knowledge to deal with the problems of kinematics and kinetics of particle
4: To impart knowledge to deal with the problems of kinematics and kinetics of rigid
bodies.
Course Outcomes (CO):
CO1 Ability to solve problems pertaining to force systems, equilibrium and distributed
systems.
CO2 Ability to solve problems of friction and engineering trusses.
CO3 Ability to deal with the problems of kinematics and kinetics of particle
CO4 Ability to deal with the problems of kinematics and kinetics of rigid bodies.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) Mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3:
High)
CO/PO PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 3 3 3 2 - - - 1 1 1 2
CO2 3 3 3 3 2 - - - 1 1 1 2
CO3 3 3 3 3 2 - - - 1 1 1 2
CO4 3 3 3 3 2 - - - 1 1 1 2

Unit I

Force System: Introduction, force, principle of transmissibility of force, resultant of a force system,
resolution of a force, moment of force about a line, Varigon’s theorem, couple, resolution of force
into force and a couple, properties of couple and their application to engineering problems.
Equilibrium: Force body diagram, equations of equilibrium and their applications to engineering
problems, equilibrium of two force and three force members.
Distributed Forces: Determination of center of gravity, center of mass and centroid by direct
integration and by the method of composite bodies, mass moment of inertia and area moment of
inertia by direct integration and composite bodies method, radius of gyration, parallel axis theorem,
polar moment of inertial. [10Hrs]

Unit II

Structure: Plane truss, perfect and imperfect truss, assumption in the truss analysis, analysis of
perfect plane trusses by the method of joints, method of section and graphical method.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 47

 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Friction: Static and Kinetic friction, laws of dry friction, co-efficient of friction, angle of friction,
angle of repose, cone of friction, frictional lock, friction in flat pivot and collar bearing, friction in
flat belts. [10Hrs]

Unit III

Kinematics of Particles: Rectilinear motion, plane curvilinear motion, rectangular coordinates,

normal and tangential coordinates.
Kinetics of Particles: Equation of motion, rectilinear motion and curvilinear motion, work-energy
equation, conservation of energy, concept of impulse and momentum, conservation of momentum,
impact of bodies, co-efficient of restitution, loss of energy during impact. [10Hrs]

Unit IV

Kinematics of Rigid Bodies: Concept of rigid body, types of rigid body motion, absolute motion,
introduction to relative velocity, relative acceleration (Corioli’s component excluded) and
instantaneous center of zero velocity, Velocity and acceleration.
Kinetics of Rigid Bodies: Equation of motion, translatory motion and fixed axis rotation, application
of work energy principles to rigid bodies conservation of energy.
Beam: Introduction, types of loading, methods for the reactions of a beam, space diagram, types of
end supports, beams subjected to couple. [10Hrs]

Textbooks:
1.Engineering Mechanics by A.K.Tayal, Umesh Publications.

References:
1. 'Engineering Mechanics' by K. L. Kumar, Tata Mc-Graw Hill
2. 'Engineering Mechanics' by S. Timoshenko, D. H. Young, J. V. Rao, Tata Mc-Graw Hill
3. 'Engineering Mechanics-Statics and Dynamics' by Irwing H. Shames, PHI.
4. 'Engineering Mechanics' by Basudev Bhattacharya, Oxford University Press.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 48

 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

PaperCode: BS-152 Paper: Applied Physics - II Lab. L P C

- 2 1
Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Applied Physics - I) as
this is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class
commencement under intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institiution in
which the paper is being offered from the list of practicals below. Atleast 8 experiments
must be performed by the students

1. To determine the e/m ratio of an electron by J.J. Thomson method.

2. To measure the frequency of a sine-wave voltage obtained from signal generator and to obtain
lissajous pattern on the CRO screen by feeding two sine wave signals from two signal generators.
3. To determine the frequency of A.C. mains by using Sonometer.
4. To determine the frequency of electrically maintained tuning fork by Melde’s method.
5. Computer simulation (simple application of Monte Carlo): Brownian motion, charging &
discharging of a capacitor.
6. To study the charging and discharging of a capacitor and to find out the time constant.
7. To study the Hall effect.
8. To verify Stefan’s law.
9. To determine the energy band gap of a semiconductor by four probe method/or by measuring the
variation of reverse saturation current with temperature.
10. To study the I-V characteristics of Zener diode.
11. To find the thermal conductivity of a poor conductor by Lee’s disk method.
12. To study the thermo emf using thermocouple and resistance using Pt. Resistance thermometer.

Note: Teacher’s may use the prescribed books to choose the practicals in addition to above. Total 8
practicals minimum shall be performed by the students, they may be asked to do more. Atleast 4
experiments must be from the above list.

Textbook:
1. B.Sc. Practical Physics by C. L. Arora, S.Chand & Co., 2020.
2. Practical physics by R. K. Shukla and A. Srivastava, New Age Int. (P) Ltd., 2006.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 49

 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

PaperCode: ES-158 Paper: Engineering Graphics-II L P C

- 2 1
Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Course Objectives:
1: The students will learn sectioning of solid figures.
2: The students will understand 3D projections. They will have understanding of isometric
and oblique projections.
3: The students will have understanding of perspective projections,
4: The students will learn computer aided drafting.
Course Outcomes (CO):
CO1 Ability to draw sectional diagrams of solids
CO2 Ability to draw 3S projections (isometric and oblique).
CO3 Ability to draw perspective projections.
CO4 Understand and use a CAD tool (AutoCAD).
Course Outcomes (CO to Programme Outcomes (PO) Mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High
CO/PO PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 3 3 3 2 - - - 1 2 1 2
CO2 3 3 3 3 2 - - - 1 2 1 2
CO3 3 3 3 3 2 - - - 1 2 1 2
CO4 3 3 3 3 2 - - - 1 2 1 2

Unit I
Section of Solids: Definition of Sectioning and its purpose, Procedure of Sectioning, Illustration
through examples, Types of sectional planes-application to few examples.

Unit II
Isometric Projection: Classification of pictorial views, Basic Principle of Isometric projection,
Difference between isometric projection and drawing, Isometric projection of solids such as cube,
prism, pyramid and cylinder.
Oblique Projection: Principle of oblique projection, difference between oblique projection and
isometric projection, receding lines and receding angles, oblique drawing of circle, cylinder, prism
and pyramid.

Unit III
Perspective Projection: Principle of perspective projection, definitions of perspective elements,
visual ray method, vanishing point method.
Conversion of 3D to 2D figures.

Unit IV
Introduction to CADD: Interfacing and Introduction to CAD Software, Coordinate System, 2D
drafting: lines, circles, arc, polygon, etc., Dimensioning, 2-D Modelling, Use of CAD Software for
engineering drawing practices.

Note: The sheets to be created shall be notified by the concerned teacher.

Textbooks:
1. Engineering Drawing by N.D. Bhatt, 53rd Ed., Charotar Publishing House Pvt. Ltd., Gujarat,2017.

References:
1. Engineering Drawing by P.S. Gill, S.K Kataria & Sons, New Delhi, 2013.
2. Technical Drawing with Engineering Graphics by Frederick E. Giesecke, Shawna Lockhart, Marla
Goodman, and Cindy M. Johnson, 15th Ed., Prentice Hall, USA, 2016
3. Engineering Drawing by M.B. Shah and B.C. Rana, 3rd Ed., Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2009.
4. AutoCAD 2017 for Engineers & Designers by Sham Tickoo,, Dreamtech Press 2016.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 50

 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

PaperCode: ES-164 Paper: Workshop Technology L P C

- 4 2
Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class
commencement under intimation to the office of the school in which the paper is being
offered.
Course Objectives:
1: The students will learn basics of safety precautions to be taken in lab. / workshop
2: The students will have an overview of different machines used in workshop and the
operations performed on these machines.
3: The students will have understanding of various welding processes.
4: The students will have understanding of sheet metals hop and fitting shop
Course Outcomes (CO):
CO1 Ability to safely work in a Lab./workshop.
CO2 Ability to use machines (lathe, mill, shaper, planer, grinder, drill).
CO3 Ability to weld.
CO4 Ability to use sheet metal tools and fitting shop tools.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) Mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3:
High)
CO/PO PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 2 1 2 2 3 3 - - - - - 2
CO2 2 1 2 2 3 1 - - - - - 2
CO3 2 1 2 2 3 1 - - - - - 2
CO4 2 1 2 2 3 1 - - - - - 2

Unit I
Safety, precautions and maintenance: Safety in shop, safety devices, safety and precautions -
moving machine and equipment parts, electrical parts and connections, fire, various driving systems
like chain, belt and ropes, electrical accidents, an overview of predictive, preventive and scheduled
maintenance, standard guidelines to be followed in shop.

Unit II
Introduction to machine shop: Introduction to Lathe, Milling, shaper, Planer, grinder, drilling and
overview of operations performed on these machines by making some jobs.

Unit III
Introduction to welding shop: Welding, types of welding, tools and applications, gas welding and arc
welding, edge preparation, various joints formation by gas welding and electric arc welding.

Unit IV
Introduction to sheet metal shop: Sheet metal tools and operations, formation of a box using sheet.
Introduction to fitting shop: Introduction to fitting, tools and applications, some jobs in fitting shop.

Textbooks:
1. Workshop Technology Vol. 1 and Vol. 2, Hajra Choudhary and Roy, Media Promoters and
Publishers, 2018.

References:
1. A course in Workshop Technology Vol.1 and Vol. 2, B. S. Raghuvanshi, Dhanpat Rai and Compnay,
2015.
2. Workshop Technology (Manufacturing Processes), Khurmi and Gupta, S. Chand Publication, 2010.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 51

 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

2nd Year Onward Scheme and implementation

guideline for Core Branches (Major / Primary
Disciplines), namely:

1. Computer Science and Engineering (CSE)

2. Information Technology (IT)
3. Computer Science and Technology (CST)
4. Information Technology and Engineering (ITE)
5. Electronics and Communications Engineering (ECE)
6. Electrical Engineering (EE)
7. Electrical and Electronics Engineering (EEE)
8. Mechanical Engineering (ME)
9. Instrumentation and Control Engineering (ICE)
10. Civil Engineering (CE)

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 52

 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Bachelor of Technology in Computer Science and Engineering

(CSE)
2nd Year Onward Scheme and implementation guideline

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 53

 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Third Semester
Paper
Group Paper L P Credits
Code
Theory Papers
ES ES‐201 Computational Methods 4 4
HS/MS HS‐203 Indian Knowledge System* 2 2
PC CIC‐205 Discrete Mathematics 4 4
PC ECC‐207 Digital Logic and Computer Design 4 4
PC CIC‐209 Data Structures 4 4
PC CIC‐211 Object‐Oriented Programming using C++ 4 4
Practical / Viva Voce
ES ES‐251 Computational Methods Lab 2 1
PC ECC‐253 Digital Logic and Computer Design Lab 2 1
PC CIC‐255 Data Structures Lab 2 1
PC CIC‐257 Object‐Oriented Programming using C++ Lab 2 1
Total 22 8 26

*NUES:All examinations to be conducted by the concerned teacher as specified in the detailed syllabus of the paper.

Fourth Semester
Paper
Group Paper L P Credits
Code
Theory Papers
BS BS‐202 Probability, Statistics and Linear Programming 4 4
HS/MS HS‐204 Technical Writing* 2 2
PC CIC‐206 Theory of Computation 4 4
PC EEC‐208 Circuits and Systems 4 4
PC CIC‐210 Database Management Systems 4 4
PC CIC‐212 Programming in Java 4 4
Practical / Viva Voce
BS BS‐252 Probability, Statistics and Linear Programming Lab 2 1
PC EEC‐254 Circuits and Systems Lab 2 1
PC CIC‐256 Database Management Systems Lab 2 1
PC CIC‐258 Programming in Java Lab 2 1
Total 22 8 26

*NUES:All examinations to be conducted by the concerned teacher as specified in the detailed syllabus of the paper.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 54

 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Fifth Semester
Paper
Group Paper L P Credits
Code
Theory Papers
HS/MS HS‐301 Economics for Engineers 2 2
PC CIC‐303 Compiler Design 3 3
PC CIC‐305 Operating Systems 4 4
PC CIC‐307 Computer Networks 4 4
PC CIC‐309 Software Engineering 3 3
PC CIC‐311 Design and Analysis of Algorithm 4 4
Practical / Viva Voce
PC CIC‐351 Compiler Design Lab 2 1
PC CIC‐353 Operating Systems Lab 2 1
PC CIC‐355 Computer Networks Lab 2 1
PC CIC‐357 Software Engineering Lab 2 1
PC CIC‐359 Design and Analysis of Algorithm Lab 2 1
PC / Internship ES‐361 Summer Training Report ‐ 1 * 1
Total 20 10 26

*NUES:Comprehensive evaluation of the Summer Training Report – 1 (after 4th Semester) shall be done by the committee
of teachers, constituted by the Academic Programme Committee, out of 100. The training shall be of 4 to 6 weeks duration.
The training can be under the mentorship of a teacher of the institute.

Sixth Semester
Paper
Group Paper L P Credits
Code
Theory Papers
HS/MS MS‐302 Principles of Management for Engineers 3 3
HS/MS HS‐304 Universal Human Values* 1 1
PCE Programme Core Elective Paper (PCE –1) 4
PCE Programme Core Elective Paper (PCE – 2) 4
PCE Programme Core Elective Paper (PCE – 3) 4
EAE / OAE Emerging Area/Open Area Elective Paper (EAE – 1 /OAE – 1) 4
EAE / OAE Emerging Area/Open Area Elective Paper (EAE – 2 /OAE – 2) 4
Practical / Viva Voce
NSS / NCC / Cultural Clubs / Technical Society / Technical
HS/MS HS‐352 2
Club**
Total 26

*NUES:All examinations to be conducted by the concerned teacher as specified in the detailed syllabus of the paper.

**NUES:Comprehensive evaluation of the students by the concerned coordinator of NCC / NSS / Cultural Clubs / Technical
Society / Technical Clubs, out of 100 as per the evaluation schemes worked out by these activity societies, organizations; the
faculty co‐ordinators shall be responsible for the evaluation of the same. These activities shall start from the 1st semester
and the evaluation shall be conducted at the end of the 6th semester for students admitted in the first semester. Students
nd rd
admitted in the 2 year (3 semester) as lateral entry shall be evaluated on the basis their performance, by the faculty co‐
rd th
ordinator for the period of 3 semester to 6 semester only.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 55

 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Seventh Semester
Paper
Group Paper L P Credits
Code
Theory Papers
HS/MS MS‐401 Principles of Entrepreneurship Mindset 2 2
PCE Programme Core Elective Paper (PCE – 4) 4
PCE Programme Core Elective Paper (PCE – 5) 4
EAE / OAE Emerging Area / Open Area Elective Paper (EAE – 3 / OAE – 3) 4
EAE / OAE Emerging Area / Open Area Elective Paper (EAE – 4 / OAE – 4) 4
EAE / OAE Emerging Area / Open Area Elective Paper (EAE – 5 / OAE – 5) 4
Practical / Viva Voce
PC / Project ES‐451 Minor Project** 3
PC / Internship ES‐453 Summer Training Report ‐ 2 * 1
Total 26

*NUES:Comprehensive evaluation of the Summer Training Report – 2 (after 6th Semester) shall be done by the committee
of teachers, constituted by the Academic Programme Committee, out of 100. The training shall be of 4 to 6 weeks duration.
The training can be under the mentorship of a teacher of the institute.

**The student shall be allocated a supervisor / guide for project work at the end 6th semester by the department /
institution, the project shall continue into the 8th semester. In the 7th semester evaluation, the criteria for evaluation shall
be conceptualization of the project work, the background study / literature survey and identification of objectives and
methodology to be followed for project. 40 marks evaluation for the Teachers' Continuous Evaluation / Internal Assessment
shall be done by concerned supervisor while the term end examination of 60 marks shall be conducted by the supervisor
concerned and the external examiner deputed by the Examinations Division. In the absence of the supervisor, the Director
of the Institution / Head of the Department can assign the responsibility of the supervisor (for purpose of examinations) to
any faculty of the Institution / Department.

Eight Semester
Paper
Group Paper L P Credits
Code
%
Practical / Viva Voce
ES‐452 Major Project – Dissertation and Viva Voce# 18
PC / Project
ES‐454 Project Progress Evaluation* 2
#
ES‐456 Internship Report and Viva Voce 18
PC / Internship
ES‐458 Internship Progress Evaluation* 2
Total 0 0 20

*NUES: Comprehensive evaluation by the committee of teachers, constituted by the Academic Programme
Committee, out of 100.

%By default every student shall do the project work (ES‐452 and ES‐454). A student shall either be allowed to
do a project work (ES‐452 and ES‐454) or an internship (ES‐456 and ES‐458). The student must apply for
approval to do internship before the commencement of the 8th semester to the institute, and only after
approval of Principal / Director of the institute through Training and Placement Officer of the institute, shall
proceed for internship.

#Students may be allowed to do internship in this semester in lieu of Major project. The students allowed to
proceed for internship shall be required to maintain a log‐book of activities performed during internship. The
same has to be countersigned by the mentor at the organization where internship is completed.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 56

 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

ES‐452: Evaluation shall be conducted of 40 marks (Teachers’ continuous evaluation / internal assessment) by
the supervisor. And, 60 marks by a bench of the supervisor and the external examiner deputed by Examination
Division (COE), for a total of 100 marks.

ES‐454 / ES‐458: Comprehensive evaluation by the committee of teachers, constituted by the Academic
Programme Committee, out of 100.

ES‐456: Evaluation shall be conducted of 40 marks (Teachers’ continuous evaluation / internal assessment) by
the Training and Placement Officer of the department / institute on the basis of the report submitted by the
student. And, 60 marks by a bench of the Training and Placement Officer of the department / institute and the
external examiner deputed by Examination Division (COE), for a total of 100 marks.

In the absence of the supervisor or the Training and Placement Officer (as the case may be), the Director of the
institute / Head of the Department can assign the responsibility of the supervisor or the Training and Placement
Officer (for purpose of examinations) to any faculty of the department.

Note on Elective Papers: The elective papers shall be allowed to be taken / studied by the students, by the
APC of the department / institute, keeping in view that two papers studied by the student should not have a
substantial overlap. All papers studied by the student should be substantially distinct in content.

Note on Examination of Elective Papers:

(a) Papers with only theory component shall have 25 Marks continuous evaluation by the teacher and 75
Marks term‐end examinations. Both these component marks shall be reflected on the marksheet of the
student.
(b) Papers with only practical component shall have 40 Marks continuous evaluation by the teacher and 60
Marks term‐end examinations. Both these component marks shall be reflected on the marksheet of the
student.

Note on Continuous Evaluation of All Papers:

(a) Papers with only theory component shall have 25 Marks continuous evaluation by the teacher which shall
be evaluated as:
i. Mid‐Term Test* ‐ 15 Marks (after 8 weeks of teaching or as
decided by PCC)
ii. Assignments / Project / Quiz / Case Studies, etc. ‐ 5 Marks
iii. Attendance / Class Participation ‐ 5 Marks
(b) Papers with only practical component shall have 40Marks continuous evaluation by the teacher which shall
be evaluated as:
i. Mid‐Term Test and Viva Voce ‐ 20 Marks (after 8 weeks of teaching or as
decided by PCC)
ii. Practical File ‐ 10 Marks
iii. Attendance / Lab Participation ‐ 10 Marks

* The mid‐term test shall be coordinated by the Programme Coordination Committee.

If a student could not appear for a mid‐term test due to situation beyond the control by the student, a
supplementary test may be arranged towards the end of the semester, in a similar manner to the mid‐term
test for such students. The students must apply for this provision to the department / institution. On
examination of the reason for non‐appearing in the mid‐term test by the Head of the Department / Institute,
and with reason for allowing to appear in the supplementary test to recorded by the Head of the Department
/ Institute, the student may be allowed.

The attendance sheets, the question papers and the award sheets for the continuous evaluation to be
retained by the concerned department / institute for at least 6 months after the declaration of the result by
the Examination Division of the University.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 57

 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Programme Core Electives

Semester Paper Code PCE – 1 (Choose Any One) L P Credits
CIE‐306T Advanced Java Programming 3 3
6
CIE‐306P Advanced Java Programming Lab 2 1
CIE‐308T Visual Basic.NET Programming 3 3
6
CIE‐308P Visual Basic.NET Programming Lab 2 1
6 CIE‐312 Engineering Optimization 4 4
6 CIE‐320 Principles of Programming Languages 4 4
CIE‐322T Simulation and Modelling 3 3
6
CIE‐322P Simulation and Modelling Lab 2 1
Semester Paper Code PCE – 2 (Choose Any One) L P Credits
CIE‐330T Introduction to Internet of Things 3 3
6
CIE‐330P Introduction to Internet of Things Lab 2 1
CIE‐332T Programming in Python 3 3
6
CIE‐332P Programming in Python Lab 2 1
6 CIE‐334 Quantum Computing 4 4
CIE‐338T Graph Theory for Computer Science 3 3
6
CIE‐338P Graph Theory for Computer Science Lab 2 1
CIE‐348T Software Project Management 3 3
6
CIE‐348P Software Project Management Lab 2 1
Semester Paper Code PCE – 3 (Choose Any One) L P Credits
CIE‐354T Introduction to Digital Signal Processing 3 3
6
CIE‐354P Introduction to Digital Signal Processing Lab 2 1
CIE‐356T Web Technologies 3 3
6
CIE‐356P Web Technologies Lab 2 1
CIE‐368T Mobile Computing 3 3
6
CIE‐368P Mobile Computing Lab 2 1
CIE‐370T Parallel Computing 3 3
6
CIE‐370P Parallel Computing Lab 2 1
CIE‐374T Artificial Intelligence 3 3
6
CIE‐374P Artificial Intelligence Lab 2 1
Semester Paper Code PCE – 4 (Choose Any One) L P Credits
CIE‐403T Blockchain Technology 3 3
7
CIE‐403P Blockchain Technology Lab 2 1
CIE‐405T Data Science 3 3
7
CIE‐405P Data Science Lab 2 1
CIE‐407T Distributed Systems and Cloud Computing 3 3
7
CIE‐407P Distributed Systems and Cloud Computing Lab 2 1
CIE‐409T Social Network Analysis and Sentiment Analysis 3 3
7
CIE‐409P Social Network Analysis and Sentiment Analysis Lab 2 1
CIE‐413T Next Generation Web 3 3
7
CIE‐413P Next Generation Web Lab 2 1
Semester Paper Code PCE – 5 (Choose Any One) L P Credits
CIE‐417T C#.NET Programming 3 3
7
CIE‐417P C#.NET Programming Lab 2 1
7 CIE‐419 Intellectual Property Rights 4 4
CIE‐421T Machine Learning 3 3
7
CIE‐421P Machine Learning Lab 2 1
CIE‐425T Data Warehousing and Data Mining 3 3
7
CIE‐425P Data Warehousing and Data Mining Lab 2 1
CIE‐431T Web Mining 3 3
7
CIE‐431P Web Mining Lab 2 1

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 58

 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Note:
1. An elective shall be offered to the student for each PCE group (That is for PCE‐1, PCE‐2, etc.) based on the
availability of resources and faculty at the institution and at least one third of the batch or at least 20 students
must be willing to take the elective. At least two elective per PCE group must be offered to the students of the
major discipline.

2. Each PCE slot is of 4 credits, if in a particular slot, the paper has no practical component, then it is of 4 credits
(a pure theory paper), otherwise for purpose of examination and conduct of classes, the course is split in two
papers, namely a theory paper of 3 credits and a practical paper of 1 credit. The student has to study for 4
credits per slot of PCE group. This is reflected by suffixing the paper code by T (for Theory component) and P
(for Practical component), if required.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 59

 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Implementation Rules:

1. The examinations, attendance criteria to appear in examinations, promotion and award of the degree
shall be governed by the Ordinance 11 of the University. The term “major discipline” / “primary discipline”
in this document refers to the discipline in which student is admitted / studies from 3rd semester onwards.
However credits of courses / paper for OAE / EAE groups shall not be considered for the purpose of
promotion from one year of study to the subsequent year of study.
2. Minimum duration of the Bachelor of Technology programme shall be 4 years (N=4 years) (8 semesters)for
the students admitted in the 1st year and 1st semester of the degree programme. Lateral entry students
shall be admitted in the 2nd year and 3rd semester of the degree programme (effectively in the batch
admitted in the first year in the previous academic session and shall be deemed to have been exempted
from the courses / papers of the first year of the degree programme. No exemption certificate shall be
issued in any case.
A specific lateral entry students’ minimum duration shall be the same as the minimum duration for the
batch in which he/she is admitted as a lateral entry student in the 2nd year.
3. Maximum duration of the Bachelor of Technology programme shall be 6 years (N+2 years). After
completion of N+2 years of study, if the student has appeared in the papers of all the semesters upto 8th
semester, then a maximum extension of 1 year may be given to the student for completing the
requirements of the degree if and only if the number of credits already earned by the student is atleast 150
(for lateral entry students it shall be at least 102 credits) from the (non‐honours components). Otherwise,
the admission of the student shall stand cancelled. After the period of allowed study, the admission of the
student shall be cancelled.
A specific lateral entry students’ maximum duration shall be the same as the minimum duration for the
batch in which he/she is admitted as a lateral entry student in the 2nd year.
4. The degree shall be awarded only after the fulfilment of all requirements of the Scheme and Syllabus of
Examinations and the applicable Ordinance.
5. (a) The students shall undergo the following group of Courses / Papers as enumerated in the scheme (For
the students admitted in the First Year / First Semester).

Semester (Credits) Total Mandatory

Group
I & II III IV V VI VII VIII Credits Credits

BS 24 5 29 14

HS/MS 6 2 2 2 6 2 20 10

ES 20 5 25 15

PC 19 19 24 4 20 86 76

PCE 12 8 20 16

EAE/OAE 8 12 20 16

Total 50 26 26 26 26 26 20 200 147

TABLE 1: Distribution of Credits (Project / Internship credits are 25 out the 86 credits for Programme Core
(PC) credits, while extra‐curricular activities credits are 2 out of 20 credits for Humanities / Management
/ Social Science Group (HS/MS)) . This table is for students admitted in the First Year / First Semester of
the Degree Programme.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 60

 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

(b) The students admitted as Lateral Entry shall undergo the following group of Courses / Papers as
enumerated in the scheme.

Semester (Credits) Total Mandatory

Group
III IV V VI VII VIII Credits Credits

BS 5 5 0

HS/MS 2 2 2 6 2 14 7

ES 5 5 0

PC 19 19 24 4 20 86 76

PCE 12 8 20 16

EAE/OAE 8 12 20 16

Total 26 26 26 26 26 20 150 115

TABLE 2: Distribution of Credits (Project / Internship credits are 25 out the 86 credits for Programme Core
(PC) credits, while extra‐curricular activities credits are 2 out of 14 credits for Humanities / Management
/ Social Science Group (HS/MS)) This table is for students admitted as Lateral Entry Students in the
Second Year / Third Semester of the Degree Programme.

6. Mandatory Credits specify the number of credits from each subject group to be mandatorily acquired by
the student for the award of the degree,for students admitted as students in the 1st year and 1st semester
of the degree programme. While for students admitted as lateral entry in the 2nd year and 3rd semester
the Mandatory Credits value is 115, and specify the number of credits from each subject group to be
mandatorily acquired by the student for the award of the degree (Table 2). See clause 11 and 12 also.
7. Some of the papers are droppable in the sense that the student may qualify for the award of the degree
even when the student has not cleared / passed some of the papers of these group. However, the student
has to earn the minimum credits for the programme of study as specified. See clause 11 and 12 also.
8. The students may take 5 subjects from EAE / OAE groups. The open electives of the OAE group of courses
may also be taken through SWAYAM / NPTEL MOOCs platform. The student desirous of doing a MOOC
based course among the OAE group must seek approval of the APC of the institute for the same before the
commencement of the semester. The APC shall allow the MOOC based OAE option to the student if and
only if the MOOC subject / course being considered for the student is being offered in line with the
Academic Calendar applicable. The student shall submit the successful completion certificate with marks to
the institution for onwards transfer to the Examination Division. The Examinations Division shall take these
marks on record for incorporation in the result of the appropriate semester. These marks / grades of these
courses shall be used for calculation of the SGPA/CGPA of the student concerned by the examination
division of the University. If a student takes even one OAE paper through MOOCs, then the student shall
not be eligible for minor specialization. The degree to the student on fulfilment of other requirements for
such cases shall be through clause 12.b. or 12.c.
These MOOC courses taken by the students, if allowed by the APC of the institute shall be of 4 credits or
more collectively to be against or for one paper slot in the scheme, through MOOCs, though the marks
shall be shown individually. That is in one paper slot in the scheme wherever a MOOC course is allowed,
the student may register for more than one paper to aggregate 4 credits or more. If the credits of these
MOOC Courses, allowed to a student is more than 4, then the maximum credit for the programme shall
be amended accordingly for the particular student. Also, in a particular semester, a student may take
more than one MOOC course with the approval of the APC to meet the credit requirements of OAE for the
semester. The cost of taking the MOOC course is to be borne by the concerned student. The results of the
MOOC courses shall be declared separately by the Examination Division from the result for the papers
conducted by the examination division of the University.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 61

 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

9. To earn an Honours degree, the student may enrol for 20 credits or more through SWAYAM / NPTEL
MOOCs platform. This point has to be read together with other points specially point 13 and 14. The
acquisition of the credits should be completed before the 15th of the July of the Admission Year plus 4
years. That is, if a student is admitted in the year X, then these credits must be acquired through MOOCs by
15th July of the year (X+4), no extra duration or time shall be allocated, this means, the student must
submit the result of such papers on or before 15th July of the Admission Year plus 4 years.
Honours in the degree shall be awarded if and only if at least 20 credits are acquired through MOOCs. To
obtain Honours in the programme, the student must apply to the institution about the same before the
commencement of the 5th semester. The specific courses through MOOCs shall be registered by the
student only after approval by the Academic Programme Committee (APC) of the Institute. The APC shall
approve the course if it is not already studied by the student or the student shall not study it in future and
adds value to the major area of specialization (which is the degree). The papers for which the student
desires to appear for Honours through MOOCs, all papers results shall be submitted by the student to the
Institute for onwards transfer to Examination Division of the University, to be taken on record of the
University. The results of these papers shall be a part of the records of the examinations of the students.
The records shall be submitted by the student to the Institute, then transferred to the Examination
Division, shall be notified by the Examination Division of the University, and a separate marksheet shall be
issued by the Examination Division. The cost of taking the MOOC course is to be borne by the concerned
student. Such courses shall be reflected as additional courses / papers for the student.
If a student acquires less than 20 credits through MOOCs, following the mechanism specified, then also
the results of these papers shall be taken on record as specified above, though no Honours degree shall
be awarded.
The papers through MOOCs for Honours degree shall not be a part of the set of the papers over which the
SGPA / CGPA of the student shall be calculated.
The papers through MOOCs for Honours degree shall be additional papers studied by the students and are
to be taken into account only for award of Honours in the degree programme, if 20 credits are earned
through MOOCs as approved by APC, by a student. See Clause 13 also.
10. Maximum Credits is at least 200 (Table 1) for students admitted in the 1st year and 1st semester, these are
the credits for which the student shall have to study for the non‐Honours component of the curriculum.
And, for lateral entry students admitted in the 2nd year and 3rd semester of the degree programme, the
maximum credit required to be studied is at least 150 (Table 2). See clause 8 also.
The student has to appear in the examinations for these credits in all components of evaluation as
specified in the scheme of studies.
11. Minimum Credits required to be earned is atleast 180 (out of the 200 non Honours papers credits, see
clause 10 also) for students admitted in the 1st year and 1st semester. And, for lateral entry students
admitted in the 2nd year and 3rd semester of the degree programme, the minimum credit required to be
earned Is at least 135 (out of the 150 non Honours papers credits, see clause 10 also). See clause 6 also.
12. The following degree route can be taken by a student (also refer point 13):
a. The students shall be awarded one minor specialization, one from EAE/OEA route under the following
conditions:
i. The student has earned the mandatory credits as defined in Table 1 or Table 2 (as applicable) and
clause 6.
ii. The student earns 20 credits from one group of EAE / OAE courses offered as a minor
specialization by the institute.
iii. In addition, the total credits (including the above specified credits) earned by the student is atleast
as specified in clause 11.
The degree nomenclature of the degree shall be as: “Bachelor of Technology in Computer Science and
Engineering with Minor Specializations in <concerned EAE/OAE discipline>”; if criteria / point 9 is not
satisfied for Honours. Otherwise, if criteria / point 9 is met, then the degree shall be an Honours

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 62

 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

degree and the nomenclature shall be as: “Bachelor of Technology in Computer Science and
Engineering with Minor Specializations in <concerned EAE/OAE discipline>) (Honours)”, if in addition
to point 12.a.i, 12.a.ii, and 12.a.iii, the student fulfils the criteria for Honours as specified at point 9.
b. The students shall be awarded the degree without any minor specialization under the following
conditions:
i. The student has earned the mandatory credits as defined in Table 1 or Table 2 (as applicable) and
clause 6.
ii. In addition, the total credits (including the above specified credits) earned by the student is atleast
as specified in clause 11.
The degree nomenclature of the degree shall be as: “Bachelor of Technology in Computer Science and
Engineering”; if criteria / point 9 is not satisfied for Honours. Otherwise, if criteria / point 9 is met,
then the degrees shall be an Honours degree and the nomenclature shall be as: “Bachelor of
Technology in Computer Science and Engineering (Honours)”, if in addition to point 12.b.i and 12.b.ii,
the student fulfils the criteria for Honours as specified at point 9.
c. If the student does not fulfil any of the above criterions (point 12.a, or 12.b), if the student earns at
least the minimum credits specified in clause 11 (disregarding the mandatory credits clause of Table
1or Table 2 (as applicable)and Clause 6), then the student shall be award the degree as “Bachelor of
Technology in Computer Science and Engineering”. Such students shall not be eligible for the award of
an Honours degree. Though, if credits are accumulated through MOOCs as per clause 9, the same shall
be reflected in the marksheets of the students.
13. The Honours degree shall only be awarded if the CGPA of the student is above or equal to 7.5 in addition
to fulfilment of criteria / point 10 and 13 above and the degree is awarded after the immediate
completion of the 4th year of the batch from the year of admission. No Honours shall be conferred if the
degree requirements are not completed in the minimum duration.
14. Pass marks in every paper shall be 40.
15. Grading System shall be as per Ordinance 11 of the University.
16. The Programme Core Electives (PCE) shall be specific to a major discipline, minor specializations and papers
for EAE shall be defined by the school defining the syllabus for the particular areas and minor
specializations and papers for OAE shall be defined by the schools defining the elective streams.
17. Minor specialization in non‐engineering disciplines may be offered under the aegis of the other schools
(provided the individual institutions are offering programmes under the aegis of the school offering the
non‐engineering minor specialization). The minor specialization framework of 20 credits has to be
offered within the framework of the current Scheme of Studies of the primary / major discipline.
18. The institution shall offer atleast two elective groups out of the emerging area / open area for students of
each major discipline. The emerging area / open electives can also be offered as standalone papers not
forming a part of any elective groups also. The institute shall decide the group(s) and/or individual papers
to be offered as electives based on the availability of infrastructure and faculty. From the groups / papers
offered by the institute, an elective paper / group shall be taught if and only if the number of students in a
paper is at‐least 20 or at‐least 1/3 of the students of a major / primary discipline for which the paper /
group is to be offered. The APC of the department / institute may define a maximum number of students
allowed to register for a paper as an elective (EAE / OAE).
19. The institution shall offer atleast two elective papers from each program core elective group for students
of each major / primary discipline. The institute shall decide the individual papers to be offered as electives
(PCE) based on the availability of infrastructure and faculty. From the papers offered by the institute, an
elective paper shall be taught if and only if the number of students in a paper is at‐least 20 or at‐least 1/3
of the students of a major / primary discipline for which the paper is to be offered. The APC of the
department / institute may define a maximum number of students allowed to register for a paper as an
elective (PCE).
20. Teachers of the other department(s), as and when deputed by their department, for teaching the students
enrolled in programmes offered by the department offering the programme shall be a part of the

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 63

 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Academic Programme Committee of the discipline. Such teachers, for all academic matters, including
teaching, teachers’ continuous evaluation, term end examinations etc. shall be governed by the decisions
of the APC of department offering the programme of study. Similarly, the guest faculty, the visiting faculty
and the Contract / Ad Hoc faculty as and when deputed to teach students of a particular department shall
form a part of APC of the department.
21. The Paper IDs will be generated / issued / assigned by the Examination Division of the University.

22. The medium of instructions shall be English.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 64

 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Bachelor of Technology in Information Technology (IT)

2nd Year Onward Scheme and implementation guideline

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 65

 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Third Semester
Paper
Group Paper L P Credits
Code
Theory Papers
ES ES‐201 Computational Methods 4 4
HS/MS HS‐203 Indian Knowledge System* 2 2
PC CIC‐205 Discrete Mathematics 4 4
PC ECC‐207 Digital Logic and Computer Design 4 4
PC CIC‐209 Data Structures 4 4
PC CIC‐211 Object‐Oriented Programming using C++ 4 4
Practical / Viva Voce
ES ES‐251 Computational Methods Lab 2 1
PC ECC‐253 Digital Logic and Computer Design Lab 2 1
PC CIC‐255 Data Structures Lab 2 1
PC CIC‐257 Object‐Oriented Programming using C++ Lab 2 1
Total 22 8 26

*NUES:All examinations to be conducted by the concerned teacher as specified in the detailed syllabus of the paper.

Fourth Semester
Paper
Group Paper L P Credits
Code
Theory Papers
BS BS‐202 Probability, Statistics and Linear Programming 4 4
HS/MS HS‐204 Technical Writing* 2 2
PC CIC‐206 Theory of Computation 4 4
PC EEC‐208 Circuits and Systems 4 4
PC CIC‐210 Database Management Systems 4 4
PC CIC‐212 Programming in Java 4 4
Practical / Viva Voce
BS BS‐252 Probability, Statistics and Linear Programming Lab 2 1
PC EEC‐254 Circuits and Systems Lab 2 1
PC CIC‐256 Database Management Systems Lab 2 1
PC CIC‐258 Programming in Java Lab 2 1
Total 22 8 26

*NUES:All examinations to be conducted by the concerned teacher as specified in the detailed syllabus of the paper.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 66

 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Fifth Semester
Paper
Group Paper L P Credits
Code
Theory Papers
HS/MS HS‐301 Economics for Engineers 2 2
PC CIC‐303 Compiler Design 3 3
PC CIC‐305 Operating Systems 4 4
PC CIC‐307 Computer Networks 4 4
PC CIC‐309 Software Engineering 3 3
PC CIC‐311 Design and Analysis of Algorithm 4 4
Practical / Viva Voce
PC CIC‐351 Compiler Design Lab 2 1
PC CIC‐353 Operating Systems Lab 2 1
PC CIC‐355 Computer Networks Lab 2 1
PC CIC‐357 Software Engineering Lab 2 1
PC CIC‐359 Design and Analysis of Algorithm Lab 2 1
PC / Internship ES‐361 Summer Training Report ‐ 1 * 1
Total 20 10 26

*NUES:Comprehensive evaluation of the Summer Training Report – 1 (after 4th Semester) shall be done by the committee
of teachers, constituted by the Academic Programme Committee, out of 100. The training shall be of 4 to 6 weeks duration.
The training can be under the mentorship of a teacher of the institute.

Sixth Semester
Paper
Group Paper L P Credits
Code
Theory Papers
HS/MS MS‐302 Principles of Management for Engineers 3 3
HS/MS HS‐304 Universal Human Values* 1 1
PCE Programme Core Elective Paper (PCE –1) 4
PCE Programme Core Elective Paper (PCE – 2) 4
PCE Programme Core Elective Paper (PCE – 3) 4
EAE / OAE Emerging Area/Open Area Elective Paper (EAE – 1 /OAE – 1) 4
EAE / OAE Emerging Area/Open Area Elective Paper (EAE – 2 /OAE – 2) 4
Practical / Viva Voce
NSS / NCC / Cultural Clubs / Technical Society / Technical
HS/MS HS‐352 2
Club**
Total 26

*NUES:All examinations to be conducted by the concerned teacher as specified in the detailed syllabus of the paper.

**NUES: Comprehensive evaluation of the students by the concerned coordinator of NCC / NSS / Cultural Clubs / Technical
Society / Technical Clubs, out of 100 as per the evaluation schemes worked out by these activity societies, organizations; the
faculty co‐ordinators shall be responsible for the evaluation of the same. These activities shall start from the 1st semester
and the evaluation shall be conducted at the end of the 6th semester for students admitted in the first semester. Students
nd rd
admitted in the 2 year (3 semester) as lateral entry shall be evaluated on the basis their performance, by the faculty co‐
rd th
ordinator for the period of 3 semester to 6 semester only.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 67

 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Seventh Semester
Paper
Group Paper L P Credits
Code
Theory Papers
HS/MS MS‐401 Principles of Entrepreneurship Mindset 2 2
PCE Programme Core Elective Paper (PCE – 4) 4
PCE Programme Core Elective Paper (PCE – 5) 4
EAE / OAE Emerging Area / Open Area Elective Paper (EAE – 3 / OAE – 3) 4
EAE / OAE Emerging Area / Open Area Elective Paper (EAE – 4 / OAE – 4) 4
EAE / OAE Emerging Area / Open Area Elective Paper (EAE – 5 / OAE – 5) 4
Practical / Viva Voce
PC / Project ES‐451 Minor Project** 3
PC / Internship ES‐453 Summer Training Report ‐ 2 * 1
Total 26

*NUES:Comprehensive evaluation of the Summer Training Report – 2 (after 6th Semester) shall be done by the committee
of teachers, constituted by the Academic Programme Committee, out of 100. The training shall be of 4 to 6 weeks duration.
The training can be under the mentorship of a teacher of the institute.

**The student shall be allocated a supervisor / guide for project work at the end 6th semester by the department /
institution, the project shall continue into the 8th semester. In the 7th semester evaluation, the criteria for evaluation shall
be conceptualization of the project work, the background study / literature survey and identification of objectives and
methodology to be followed for project. 40 marks evaluation for the Teachers' Continuous Evaluation / Internal Assessment
shall be done by concerned supervisor while the term end examination of 60 marks shall be conducted by the supervisor
concerned and the external examiner deputed by the Examinations Division. In the absence of the supervisor, the Director
of the Institution / Head of the Department can assign the responsibility of the supervisor (for purpose of examinations) to
any faculty of the Institution / Department.

Eight Semester
Paper
Group Paper L P Credits
Code
%
Practical / Viva Voce
ES‐452 Major Project – Dissertation and Viva Voce# 18
PC / Project
ES‐454 Project Progress Evaluation* 2
#
ES‐456 Internship Report and Viva Voce 18
PC / Internship
ES‐458 Internship Progress Evaluation* 2
Total 0 0 20

*NUES: Comprehensive evaluation by the committee of teachers, constituted by the Academic Programme
Committee, out of 100.

%By default every student shall do the project work (ES‐452 and ES‐454). A student shall either be allowed to
do a project work (ES‐452 and ES‐454) or an internship (ES‐456 and ES‐458). The student must apply for
approval to do internship before the commencement of the 8th semester to the institute, and only after
approval of Principal / Director of the institute through Training and Placement Officer of the institute, shall
proceed for internship.

#Students may be allowed to do internship in this semester in lieu of Major project. The students allowed to
proceed for internship shall be required to maintain a log‐book of activities performed during internship. The
same has to be countersigned by the mentor at the organization where internship is completed.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 68

 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

ES‐452: Evaluation shall be conducted of 40 marks (Teachers’ continuous evaluation / internal assessment) by
the supervisor. And, 60 marks by a bench of the supervisor and the external examiner deputed by Examination
Division (COE), for a total of 100 marks.

ES‐454 / ES‐458: Comprehensive evaluation by the committee of teachers, constituted by the Academic
Programme Committee, out of 100.

ES‐456: Evaluation shall be conducted of 40 marks (Teachers’ continuous evaluation / internal assessment) by
the Training and Placement Officer of the department / institute on the basis of the report submitted by the
student. And, 60 marks by a bench of the Training and Placement Officer of the department / institute and the
external examiner deputed by Examination Division (COE), for a total of 100 marks.

In the absence of the supervisor or the Training and Placement Officer (as the case may be), the Director of the
institute / Head of the Department can assign the responsibility of the supervisor or the Training and Placement
Officer (for purpose of examinations) to any faculty of the department.

Note on Elective Papers: The elective papers shall be allowed to be taken / studied by the students, by the
APC of the department / institute, keeping in view that two papers studied by the student should not have a
substantial overlap. All papers studied by the student should be substantially distinct in content.

Note on Examination of Elective Papers:

(a) Papers with only theory component shall have 25 Marks continuous evaluation by the teacher and 75
Marks term‐end examinations. Both these component marks shall be reflected on the marksheet of the
student.
(b) Papers with only practical component shall have 40 Marks continuous evaluation by the teacher and 60
Marks term‐end examinations. Both these component marks shall be reflected on the marksheet of the
student.

Note on Continuous Evaluation of All Papers:

(a) Papers with only theory component shall have 25 Marks continuous evaluation by the teacher which shall
be evaluated as:
i. Mid‐Term Test* ‐ 15 Marks (after 8 weeks of teaching or as
decided by PCC)
ii. Assignments / Project / Quiz / Case Studies, etc. ‐ 5 Marks
iii. Attendance / Class Participation ‐ 5 Marks
(b) Papers with only practical component shall have 40Marks continuous evaluation by the teacher which shall
be evaluated as:
i. Mid‐Term Test and Viva Voce ‐ 20 Marks (after 8 weeks of teaching or as
decided by PCC)
ii. Practical File ‐ 10 Marks
iii. Attendance / Lab Participation ‐ 10 Marks

* The mid‐term test shall be coordinated by the Programme Coordination Committee.

If a student could not appear for a mid‐term test due to situation beyond the control by the student, a
supplementary test may be arranged towards the end of the semester, in a similar manner to the mid‐term
test for such students. The students must apply for this provision to the department / institution. On
examination of the reason for non‐appearing in the mid‐term test by the Head of the Department / Institute,
and with reason for allowing to appear in the supplementary test to recorded by the Head of the Department
/ Institute, the student may be allowed.

The attendance sheets, the question papers and the award sheets for the continuous evaluation to be
retained by the concerned department / institute for at least 6 months after the declaration of the result by
the Examination Division of the University.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 69

 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Programme Core Electives

Semester Paper Code PCE – 1 (Choose Any One) L P Credits
CIE‐306T Advanced Java Programming 3 3
6
CIE‐306P Advanced Java Programming Lab 2 1
CIE‐308T Visual Basic.NET Programming 3 3
6
CIE‐308P Visual Basic.NET Programming Lab 2 1
6 CIE‐314 Advanced Computer Architecture 4 4
6 CIE‐316 Database Modelling and Design 4 4
CIE‐328T Analog and Digital Communications 3 3
6
CIE‐328P Analog and Digital Communications Lab 2 1
Semester Paper Code PCE – 2 (Choose Any One) L P Credits
CIE‐330T Introduction to Internet of Things 3 3
6
CIE‐330P Introduction to Internet of Things Lab 2 1
CIE‐332T Programming in Python 3 3
6
CIE‐332P Programming in Python Lab 2 1
6 CIE‐334 Quantum Computing 4 4
6 CIE‐336 E‐Commerce and M‐Commerce 4 4
CIE‐344T Object Oriented Analysis and Design using UML 3 3
6
CIE‐344P Object Oriented Analysis and Design using UML Lab 2 1
Semester Paper Code PCE – 3 (Choose Any One) L P Credits
CIE‐354T Introduction to Digital Signal Processing 3 3
6
CIE‐354P Introduction to Digital Signal Processing Lab 2 1
CIE‐356T Web Technologies 3 3
6
CIE‐356P Web Technologies Lab 2 1
CIE‐360T Introduction to Information and Communication Theory 3 3
6
CIE‐360P Introduction to Information and Communication Theory Lab 2 1
CIE‐366T Middleware Technologies 3 3
6
CIE‐366P Middleware Technologies Lab 2 1
CIE‐374T Artificial Intelligence 3 3
6
CIE‐374P Artificial Intelligence Lab 2 1
Semester Paper Code PCE – 4 (Choose Any One) L P Credits
CIE‐403T Blockchain Technology 3 3
7
CIE‐403P Blockchain Technology Lab 2 1
CIE‐405T Data Science 3 3
7
CIE‐405P Data Science Lab 2 1
CIE‐407T Distributed Systems and Cloud Computing 3 3
7
CIE‐407P Distributed Systems and Cloud Computing Lab 2 1
CIE‐409T Social Network Analysis and Sentiment Analysis 3 3
7
CIE‐409P Social Network Analysis and Sentiment Analysis Lab 2 1
CIE‐415T Wireless Communication and Networks 3 3
7
CIE‐415P Wireless Communication and Networks Lab 2 1
Semester Paper Code PCE – 5 (Choose Any One) L P Credits
CIE‐417T C#.NET Programming 3 3
7
CIE‐417P C#.NET Programming Lab 2 1
7 CIE‐419 Intellectual Property Rights 4 4
CIE‐421T Machine Learning 3 3
7
CIE‐421P Machine Learning Lab 2 1
7 CIE‐427 Introduction to Mobile Ad Hoc Networks 4 4
CIE‐431T Web Mining 3 3
7
CIE‐431P Web Mining Lab 2 1

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 70

 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Note:
1. An elective shall be offered to the student for each PCE group (That is for PCE‐1, PCE‐2, etc.) based on the
availability of resources and faculty at the institution and at least one third of the batch or at least 20 students
must be willing to take the elective. At least two elective per PCE group must be offered to the students of the
major discipline.

2. Each PCE slot is of 4 credits, if in a particular slot, the paper has no practical component, then it is of 4 credits
(a pure theory paper), otherwise for purpose of examination and conduct of classes, the course is split in two
papers, namely a theory paper of 3 credits and a practical paper of 1 credit. The student has to study for 4
credits per slot of PCE group. This is reflected by suffixing the paper code by T (for Theory component) and P
(for Practical component), if required.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 71

 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Implementation Rules:

1. The examinations, attendance criteria to appear in examinations, promotion and award of the degree
shall be governed by the Ordinance 11 of the University. The term “major discipline” / “primary discipline”
in this document refers to the discipline in which student is admitted / studies from 3rd semester onwards.
However credits of courses / paper for OAE / EAE groups shall not be considered for the purpose of
promotion from one year of study to the subsequent year of study.
2. Minimum duration of the Bachelor of Technology programme shall be 4 years (N=4 years) (8 semesters)
for the students admitted in the 1st year and 1st semester of the degree programme. Lateral entry students
shall be admitted in the 2nd year and 3rd semester of the degree programme (effectively in the batch
admitted in the first year in the previous academic session and shall be deemed to have been exempted
from the courses / papers of the first year of the degree programme. No exemption certificate shall be
issued in any case.
A specific lateral entry students’ minimum duration shall be the same as the minimum duration for the
batch in which he/she is admitted as a lateral entry student in the 2nd year.
3. Maximum duration of the Bachelor of Technology programme shall be 6 years (N+2 years). After
completion of N+2 years of study, if the student has appeared in the papers of all the semesters upto 8th
semester, then a maximum extension of 1 year may be given to the student for completing the
requirements of the degree if and only if the number of credits already earned by the student is atleast 150
(for lateral entry students it shall be at least 102 credits) from the (non‐honours components). Otherwise,
the admission of the student shall stand cancelled. After the period of allowed study, the admission of the
student shall be cancelled.
A specific lateral entry students’ maximum duration shall be the same as the minimum duration for the
batch in which he/she is admitted as a lateral entry student in the 2nd year.
4. The degree shall be awarded only after the fulfilment of all requirements of the Scheme and Syllabus of
Examinations and the applicable Ordinance.
5. (a) The students shall undergo the following group of Courses / Papers as enumerated in the scheme (For
the students admitted in the First Year / First Semester).

Semester (Credits) Total Mandatory

Group
I & II III IV V VI VII VIII Credits Credits

BS 24 5 29 14

HS/MS 6 2 2 2 6 2 20 10

ES 20 5 25 15

PC 19 19 24 4 20 86 76

PCE 12 8 20 16

EAE/OAE 8 12 20 16

Total 50 26 26 26 26 26 20 200 147

TABLE 1: Distribution of Credits (Project / Internship credits are 25 out the 86 credits for Programme Core
(PC) credits, while extra‐curricular activities credits are 2 out of 20 credits for Humanities / Management
/ Social Science Group (HS/MS)) . This table is for students admitted in the First Year / First Semester of
the Degree Programme.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 72

 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

(b) The students admitted as Lateral Entry shall undergo the following group of Courses / Papers as
enumerated in the scheme.

Semester (Credits) Total Mandatory

Group
III IV V VI VII VIII Credits Credits

BS 5 5 0

HS/MS 2 2 2 6 2 14 7

ES 5 5 0

PC 19 19 24 4 20 86 76

PCE 12 8 20 16

EAE/OAE 8 12 20 16

Total 26 26 26 26 26 20 150 115

TABLE 2: Distribution of Credits (Project / Internship credits are 25 out the 86 credits for Programme Core
(PC) credits, while extra‐curricular activities credits are 2 out of 14 credits for Humanities / Management
/ Social Science Group (HS/MS)) This table is for students admitted as Lateral Entry Students in the
Second Year / Third Semester of the Degree Programme.

6. Mandatory Credits specify the number of credits from each subject group to be mandatorily acquired by
the student for the award of the degree,for students admitted as students in the 1st year and 1st semester
of the degree programme. While for students admitted as lateral entry in the 2nd year and 3rd semester
the Mandatory Credits value is 115, and specify the number of credits from each subject group to be
mandatorily acquired by the student for the award of the degree (Table 2). See clause 11 and 12 also.
7. Some of the papers are droppable in the sense that the student may qualify for the award of the degree
even when the student has not cleared / passed some of the papers of these group. However, the student
has to earn the minimum credits for the programme of study as specified. See clause 11 and 12 also.
8. The students may take 5 subjects from EAE / OAE groups. The open electives of the OAE group of courses
may also be taken through SWAYAM / NPTEL MOOCs platform. The student desirous of doing a MOOC
based course among the OAE group must seek approval of the APC of the institute for the same before the
commencement of the semester. The APC shall allow the MOOC based OAE option to the student if and
only if the MOOC subject / course being considered for the student is being offered in line with the
Academic Calendar applicable. The student shall submit the successful completion certificate with marks to
the institution for onwards transfer to the Examination Division. The Examinations Division shall take these
marks on record for incorporation in the result of the appropriate semester. These marks / grades of these
courses shall be used for calculation of the SGPA/CGPA of the student concerned by the examination
division of the University. If a student takes even one OAE paper through MOOCs, then the student shall
not be eligible for minor specialization. The degree to the student on fulfilment of other requirements for
such cases shall be through clause 12.b. or 12.c.
These MOOC courses taken by the students, if allowed by the APC of the institute shall be of 4 credits or
more collectively to be against or for one paper slot in the scheme, through MOOCs, though the marks
shall be shown individually. That is in one paper slot in the scheme wherever a MOOC course is allowed,
the student may register for more than one paper to aggregate 4 credits or more. If the credits of these
MOOC Courses, allowed to a student is more than 4, then the maximum credit for the programme shall
be amended accordingly for the particular student. Also, in a particular semester, a student may take
more than one MOOC course with the approval of the APC to meet the credit requirements of OAE for the
semester. The cost of taking the MOOC course is to be borne by the concerned student. The results of the
MOOC courses shall be declared separately by the Examination Division from the result for the papers
conducted by the examination division of the University.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 73

 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

9. To earn an Honours degree, the student may enrol for 20 credits or more through SWAYAM / NPTEL
MOOCs platform. This point has to be read together with other points specially point 13 and 14. The
acquisition of the credits should be completed before the 15th of the July of the Admission Year plus 4
years. That is, if a student is admitted in the year X, then these credits must be acquired through MOOCs by
15th July of the year (X+4), no extra duration or time shall be allocated, this means, the student must
submit the result of such papers on or before 15th July of the Admission Year plus 4 years.
Honours in the degree shall be awarded if and only if at least 20 credits are acquired through MOOCs. To
obtain Honours in the programme, the student must apply to the institution about the same before the
commencement of the 5th semester. The specific courses through MOOCs shall be registered by the
student only after approval by the Academic Programme Committee (APC) of the Institute. The APC shall
approve the course if it is not already studied by the student or the student shall not study it in future and
adds value to the major area of specialization (which is the degree). The papers for which the student
desires to appear for Honours through MOOCs, all papers results shall be submitted by the student to the
Institute for onwards transfer to Examination Division of the University, to be taken on record of the
University. The results of these papers shall be a part of the records of the examinations of the students.
The records shall be submitted by the student to the Institute, then transferred to the Examination
Division, shall be notified by the Examination Division of the University, and a separate marksheet shall be
issued by the Examination Division. The cost of taking the MOOC course is to be borne by the concerned
student. Such courses shall be reflected as additional courses / papers for the student.
If a student acquires less than 20 credits through MOOCs, following the mechanism specified, then also
the results of these papers shall be taken on record as specified above, though no Honours degree shall
be awarded.
The papers through MOOCs for Honours degree shall not be a part of the set of the papers over which the
SGPA / CGPA of the student shall be calculated.
The papers through MOOCs for Honours degree shall be additional papers studied by the students and are
to be taken into account only for award of Honours in the degree programme, if 20 credits are earned
through MOOCs as approved by APC, by a student. See Clause 13 also.
10. Maximum Credits is at least 200 (Table 1) for students admitted in the 1st year and 1st semester, these are
the credits for which the student shall have to study for the non‐Honours component of the curriculum.
And, for lateral entry students admitted in the 2nd year and 3rd semester of the degree programme, the
maximum credit required to be studied is at least 150 (Table 2). See clause 8 also.
The student has to appear in the examinations for these credits in all components of evaluation as
specified in the scheme of studies.
11. Minimum Credits required to be earned is atleast 180 (out of the 200 non Honours papers credits, see
clause 10 also) for students admitted in the 1st year and 1st semester. And, for lateral entry students
admitted in the 2nd year and 3rd semester of the degree programme, the minimum credit required to be
earned Is at least 135 (out of the 150 non Honours papers credits, see clause 10 also). See clause 6 also.
12. The following degree route can be taken by a student (also refer point 13):
a. The students shall be awarded one minor specialization, one from EAE/OEA route under the following
conditions:
i. The student has earned the mandatory credits as defined in Table 1 or Table 2 (as applicable) and
clause 6.
ii. The student earns 20 credits from one group of EAE / OAE courses offered as a minor
specialization by the institute.
iii. In addition, the total credits (including the above specified credits) earned by the student is atleast
as specified in clause 11.
The degree nomenclature of the degree shall be as: “Bachelor of Technology in Information
Technology with Minor Specializations in <concerned EAE/OAE discipline>”; if criteria / point 9 is not
satisfied for Honours. Otherwise, if criteria / point 9 is met, then the degree shall be an Honours

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 74

 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

degree and the nomenclature shall be as: “Bachelor of Technology in Information Technology with
Minor Specializations in <concerned EAE/OAE discipline>) (Honours)”, if in addition to point 12.a.i,
12.a.ii, and 12.a.iii, the student fulfils the criteria for Honours as specified at point 9.
b. The students shall be awarded the degree without any minor specialization under the following
conditions:
i. The student has earned the mandatory credits as defined in Table 1 or Table 2 (as applicable) and
clause 6.
ii. In addition, the total credits (including the above specified credits) earned by the student is atleast
as specified in clause 11.
The degree nomenclature of the degree shall be as: “Bachelor of Technology in Information
Technology”; if criteria / point 9 is not satisfied for Honours. Otherwise, if criteria / point 9 is met,
then the degrees shall be an Honours degree and the nomenclature shall be as: “Bachelor of
Technology in Information Technology (Honours)”, if in addition to point 12.b.i and 12.b.ii, the
student fulfils the criteria for Honours as specified at point 9.
c. If the student does not fulfil any of the above criterions (point 12.a, or 12.b), if the student earns at
least the minimum credits specified in clause 11 (disregarding the mandatory credits clause of Table 1
or Table 2 (as applicable) and Clause 6), then the student shall be award the degree as “Bachelor of
Technology in Information Technology”. Such students shall not be eligible for the award of an
Honours degree. Though, if credits are accumulated through MOOCs as per clause 9, the same shall be
reflected in the marksheets of the students.
13. The Honours degree shall only be awarded if the CGPA of the student is above or equal to 7.5 in addition
to fulfilment of criteria / point 10 and 13 above and the degree is awarded after the immediate
completion of the 4th year of the batch from the year of admission. No Honours shall be conferred if the
degree requirements are not completed in the minimum duration.
14. Pass marks in every paper shall be 40.
15. Grading System shall be as per Ordinance 11 of the University.
16. The Programme Core Electives (PCE) shall be specific to a major discipline, minor specializations and papers
for EAE shall be defined by the school defining the syllabus for the particular areas and minor
specializations and papers for OAE shall be defined by the schools defining the elective streams.
17. Minor specialization in non‐engineering disciplines may be offered under the aegis of the other schools
(provided the individual institutions are offering programmes under the aegis of the school offering the
non‐engineering minor specialization). The minor specialization framework of 20 credits has to be
offered within the framework of the current Scheme of Studies of the primary / major discipline.
18. The institution shall offer atleast two elective groups out of the emerging area / open area for students of
each major discipline. The emerging area / open electives can also be offered as standalone papers not
forming a part of any elective groups also. The institute shall decide the group(s) and/or individual papers
to be offered as electives based on the availability of infrastructure and faculty. From the groups / papers
offered by the institute, an elective paper / group shall be taught if and only if the number of students in a
paper is at‐least 20 or at‐least 1/3 of the students of a major / primary discipline for which the paper /
group is to be offered. The APC of the department / institute may define a maximum number of students
allowed to register for a paper as an elective (EAE / OAE).
19. The institution shall offer atleast two elective papers from each program core elective group for students
of each major / primary discipline. The institute shall decide the individual papers to be offered as electives
(PCE) based on the availability of infrastructure and faculty. From the papers offered by the institute, an
elective paper shall be taught if and only if the number of students in a paper is at‐least 20 or at‐least 1/3
of the students of a major / primary discipline for which the paper is to be offered. The APC of the
department / institute may define a maximum number of students allowed to register for a paper as an
elective (PCE).
20. Teachers of the other department(s), as and when deputed by their department, for teaching the students
enrolled in programmes offered by the department offering the programme shall be a part of the

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 75

 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Academic Programme Committee of the discipline. Such teachers, for all academic matters, including
teaching, teachers’ continuous evaluation, term end examinations etc. shall be governed by the decisions
of the APC of department offering the programme of study. Similarly, the guest faculty, the visiting faculty
and the Contract / Ad Hoc faculty as and when deputed to teach students of a particular department shall
form a part of APC of the department.
21. The Paper IDs will be generated / issued / assigned by the Examination Division of the University.

22. The medium of instructions shall be English.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 76

 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Bachelor of Technology in Computer Science and Technology (CST)

2nd Year Onward Scheme and implementation guideline

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 77

 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Third Semester
Paper
Group Paper L P Credits
Code
Theory Papers
ES ES‐201 Computational Methods 4 4
HS/MS HS‐203 Indian Knowledge System* 2 2
PC CIC‐205 Discrete Mathematics 4 4
PC ECC‐207 Digital Logic and Computer Design 4 4
PC CIC‐209 Data Structures 4 4
PC CIC‐211 Object‐Oriented Programming using C++ 4 4
Practical / Viva Voce
ES ES‐251 Computational Methods Lab 2 1
PC ECC‐253 Digital Logic and Computer Design Lab 2 1
PC CIC‐255 Data Structures Lab 2 1
PC CIC‐257 Object‐Oriented Programming using C++ Lab 2 1
Total 22 8 26

*NUES:All examinations to be conducted by the concerned teacher as specified in the detailed syllabus of the paper.

Fourth Semester
Paper
Group Paper L P Credits
Code
Theory Papers
BS BS‐202 Probability, Statistics and Linear Programming 4 4
HS/MS HS‐204 Technical Writing* 2 2
PC CIC‐206 Theory of Computation 4 4
PC EEC‐208 Circuits and Systems 4 4
PC CIC‐210 Database Management Systems 4 4
PC CIC‐212 Programming in Java 4 4
Practical / Viva Voce
BS BS‐252 Probability, Statistics and Linear Programming Lab 2 1
PC EEC‐254 Circuits and Systems Lab 2 1
PC CIC‐256 Database Management Systems Lab 2 1
PC CIC‐258 Programming in Java Lab 2 1
Total 22 8 26

*NUES:All examinations to be conducted by the concerned teacher as specified in the detailed syllabus of the paper.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 78

 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Fifth Semester
Paper
Group Paper L P Credits
Code
Theory Papers
HS/MS HS‐301 Economics for Engineers 2 2
PC CIC‐303 Compiler Design 3 3
PC CIC‐305 Operating Systems 4 4
PC CIC‐307 Computer Networks 4 4
PC CIC‐309 Software Engineering 3 3
PC CIC‐311 Design and Analysis of Algorithm 4 4
Practical / Viva Voce
PC CIC‐351 Compiler Design Lab 2 1
PC CIC‐353 Operating Systems Lab 2 1
PC CIC‐355 Computer Networks Lab 2 1
PC CIC‐357 Software Engineering Lab 2 1
PC CIC‐359 Design and Analysis of Algorithm Lab 2 1
PC / Internship ES‐361 Summer Training Report ‐ 1 * 1
Total 20 10 26

*NUES:Comprehensive evaluation of the Summer Training Report – 1 (after 4th Semester) shall be done by the committee
of teachers, constituted by the Academic Programme Committee, out of 100. The training shall be of 4 to 6 weeks duration.
The training can be under the mentorship of a teacher of the institute.

Sixth Semester
Paper
Group Paper L P Credits
Code
Theory Papers
HS/MS MS‐302 Principles of Management for Engineers 3 3
HS/MS HS‐304 Universal Human Values* 1 1
PCE Programme Core Elective Paper (PCE –1) 4
PCE Programme Core Elective Paper (PCE – 2) 4
PCE Programme Core Elective Paper (PCE – 3) 4
EAE / OAE Emerging Area/Open Area Elective Paper (EAE – 1 /OAE – 1) 4
EAE / OAE Emerging Area/Open Area Elective Paper (EAE – 2 /OAE – 2) 4
Practical / Viva Voce
NSS / NCC / Cultural Clubs / Technical Society / Technical
HS/MS HS‐352 2
Club**
Total 26

*NUES:All examinations to be conducted by the concerned teacher as specified in the detailed syllabus of the paper.

**NUES: Comprehensive evaluation of the students by the concerned coordinator of NCC / NSS / Cultural Clubs / Technical
Society / Technical Clubs, out of 100 as per the evaluation schemes worked out by these activity societies, organizations; the
faculty co‐ordinators shall be responsible for the evaluation of the same. These activities shall start from the 1st semester
and the evaluation shall be conducted at the end of the 6th semester for students admitted in the first semester. Students
nd rd
admitted in the 2 year (3 semester) as lateral entry shall be evaluated on the basis their performance, by the faculty co‐
rd th
ordinator for the period of 3 semester to 6 semester only.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 79

 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Seventh Semester
Paper
Group Paper L P Credits
Code
Theory Papers
HS/MS MS‐401 Principles of Entrepreneurship Mindset 2 2
PCE Programme Core Elective Paper (PCE – 4) 4
PCE Programme Core Elective Paper (PCE – 5) 4
EAE / OAE Emerging Area / Open Area Elective Paper (EAE – 3 / OAE – 3) 4
EAE / OAE Emerging Area / Open Area Elective Paper (EAE – 4 / OAE – 4) 4
EAE / OAE Emerging Area / Open Area Elective Paper (EAE – 5 / OAE – 5) 4
Practical / Viva Voce
PC / Project ES‐451 Minor Project** 3
PC / Internship ES‐453 Summer Training Report ‐ 2 * 1
Total 26

*NUES:Comprehensive evaluation of the Summer Training Report – 2 (after 6th Semester) shall be done by the committee
of teachers, constituted by the Academic Programme Committee, out of 100. The training shall be of 4 to 6 weeks duration.
The training can be under the mentorship of a teacher of the institute.

**The student shall be allocated a supervisor / guide for project work at the end 6th semester by the department /
institution, the project shall continue into the 8th semester. In the 7th semester evaluation, the criteria for evaluation shall
be conceptualization of the project work, the background study / literature survey and identification of objectives and
methodology to be followed for project. 40 marks evaluation for the Teachers' Continuous Evaluation / Internal Assessment
shall be done by concerned supervisor while the term end examination of 60 marks shall be conducted by the supervisor
concerned and the external examiner deputed by the Examinations Division. In the absence of the supervisor, the Director
of the Institution / Head of the Department can assign the responsibility of the supervisor (for purpose of examinations) to
any faculty of the Institution / Department.

Eight Semester
Paper
Group Paper L P Credits
Code
%
Practical / Viva Voce
ES‐452 Major Project – Dissertation and Viva Voce# 18
PC / Project
ES‐454 Project Progress Evaluation* 2
#
ES‐456 Internship Report and Viva Voce 18
PC / Internship
ES‐458 Internship Progress Evaluation* 2
Total 0 0 20

*NUES: Comprehensive evaluation by the committee of teachers, constituted by the Academic Programme
Committee, out of 100.

%By default every student shall do the project work (ES‐452 and ES‐454). A student shall either be allowed to
do a project work (ES‐452 and ES‐454) or an internship (ES‐456 and ES‐458). The student must apply for
approval to do internship before the commencement of the 8th semester to the institute, and only after
approval of Principal / Director of the institute through Training and Placement Officer of the institute, shall
proceed for internship.

#Students may be allowed to do internship in this semester in lieu of Major project. The students allowed to
proceed for internship shall be required to maintain a log‐book of activities performed during internship. The
same has to be countersigned by the mentor at the organization where internship is completed.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 80

 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

ES‐452: Evaluation shall be conducted of 40 marks (Teachers’ continuous evaluation / internal assessment) by
the supervisor. And, 60 marks by a bench of the supervisor and the external examiner deputed by Examination
Division (COE), for a total of 100 marks.

ES‐454 / ES‐458: Comprehensive evaluation by the committee of teachers, constituted by the Academic
Programme Committee, out of 100.

ES‐456: Evaluation shall be conducted of 40 marks (Teachers’ continuous evaluation / internal assessment) by
the Training and Placement Officer of the department / institute on the basis of the report submitted by the
student. And, 60 marks by a bench of the Training and Placement Officer of the department / institute and the
external examiner deputed by Examination Division (COE), for a total of 100 marks.

In the absence of the supervisor or the Training and Placement Officer (as the case may be), the Director of the
institute / Head of the Department can assign the responsibility of the supervisor or the Training and Placement
Officer (for purpose of examinations) to any faculty of the department.

Note on Elective Papers: The elective papers shall be allowed to be taken / studied by the students, by the
APC of the department / institute, keeping in view that two papers studied by the student should not have a
substantial overlap. All papers studied by the student should be substantially distinct in content.

Note on Examination of Elective Papers:

(a) Papers with only theory component shall have 25 Marks continuous evaluation by the teacher and 75
Marks term‐end examinations. Both these component marks shall be reflected on the marksheet of the
student.
(b) Papers with only practical component shall have 40 Marks continuous evaluation by the teacher and 60
Marks term‐end examinations. Both these component marks shall be reflected on the marksheet of the
student.

Note on Continuous Evaluation of All Papers:

(a) Papers with only theory component shall have 25 Marks continuous evaluation by the teacher which shall
be evaluated as:
i. Mid‐Term Test* ‐ 15 Marks (after 8 weeks of teaching or as
decided by PCC)
ii. Assignments / Project / Quiz / Case Studies, etc. ‐ 5 Marks
iii. Attendance / Class Participation ‐ 5 Marks
(b) Papers with only practical component shall have 40Marks continuous evaluation by the teacher which shall
be evaluated as:
i. Mid‐Term Test and Viva Voce ‐ 20 Marks (after 8 weeks of teaching or as
decided by PCC)
ii. Practical File ‐ 10 Marks
iii. Attendance / Lab Participation ‐ 10 Marks

* The mid‐term test shall be coordinated by the Programme Coordination Committee.

If a student could not appear for a mid‐term test due to situation beyond the control by the student, a
supplementary test may be arranged towards the end of the semester, in a similar manner to the mid‐term
test for such students. The students must apply for this provision to the department / institution. On
examination of the reason for non‐appearing in the mid‐term test by the Head of the Department / Institute,
and with reason for allowing to appear in the supplementary test to recorded by the Head of the Department
/ Institute, the student may be allowed.

The attendance sheets, the question papers and the award sheets for the continuous evaluation to be
retained by the concerned department / institute for at least 6 months after the declaration of the result by
the Examination Division of the University.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 81

 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Programme Core Electives

Semester Paper Code PCE – 1 (Choose Any One) L P Credits
CIE‐306T Advanced Java Programming 3 3
6
CIE‐306P Advanced Java Programming Lab 2 1
CIE‐308T Visual Basic.NET Programming 3 3
6
CIE‐308P Visual Basic.NET Programming Lab 2 1
CIE‐310T Advanced DBMS 3 3
6
CIE‐310P Advanced DBMS 2 1
6 CIE‐312 Engineering Optimization 4 4
6 CIE‐324 Software Testing 4 4
Semester Paper Code PCE – 2 (Choose Any One) L P Credits
CIE‐330T Introduction to Internet of Things 3 3
6
CIE‐330P Introduction to Internet of Things Lab 2 1
CIE‐332T Programming in Python 3 3
6
CIE‐332P Programming in Python Lab 2 1
6 CIE‐334 Quantum Computing 4 4
6 CIE‐340 IT Project Management 4 4
CIE‐346T Service Oriented Architecture 3 3
6
CIE‐346P Service Oriented Architecture Lab 2 1
Semester Paper Code PCE – 3 (Choose Any One) L P Credits
CIE‐354T Introduction to Digital Signal Processing 3 3
6
CIE‐354P Introduction to Digital Signal Processing Lab 2 1
CIE‐356T Web Technologies 3 3
6
CIE‐356P Web Technologies Lab 2 1
CIE‐358T Human Computer Interface 3 3
6
CIE‐358P Human Computer Interface Lab 2 1
CIE‐372T Software Requirements and Estimation 3 3
6
CIE‐372P Software Requirements and Estimation Lab 2 1
CIE‐374T Artificial Intelligence 3 3
6
CIE‐374P Artificial Intelligence Lab 2 1
Semester Paper Code PCE – 4 (Choose Any One) L P Credits
CIE‐403T Blockchain Technology 3 3
7
CIE‐403P Blockchain Technology Lab 2 1
CIE‐405T Data Science 3 3
7
CIE‐405P Data Science Lab 2 1
CIE‐407T Distributed Systems and Cloud Computing 3 3
7
CIE‐407P Distributed Systems and Cloud Computing Lab 2 1
CIE‐409T Social Network Analysis and Sentiment Analysis 3 3
7
CIE‐409P Social Network Analysis and Sentiment Analysis Lab 2 1
CIE‐411T Computer Graphics and Multimedia Technologies 3 3
7
CIE‐411P Computer Graphics and Multimedia Technologies Lab 2 1
Semester Paper Code PCE – 5 (Choose Any One) L P Credits
CIE‐417T C#.NET Programming 3 3
7
CIE‐417P C#.NET Programming Lab 2 1
7 CIE‐419 Intellectual Property Rights 4 4
CIE‐421T Machine Learning 3 3
7
CIE‐421P Machine Learning Lab 2 1
CIE‐423T Data Visualization 3 3
7
CIE‐423P Data Visualization Lab 2 1
CIE‐425T Data Warehousing and Data Mining 3 3
7
CIE‐425P Data Warehousing and Data Mining Lab 2 1

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 82

 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Note:
1. An elective shall be offered to the student for each PCE group (That is for PCE‐1, PCE‐2, etc.) based on the
availability of resources and faculty at the institution and at least one third of the batch or at least 20 students
must be willing to take the elective. At least two elective per PCE group must be offered to the students of the
major discipline.

2. Each PCE slot is of 4 credits, if in a particular slot, the paper has no practical component, then it is of 4 credits
(a pure theory paper), otherwise for purpose of examination and conduct of classes, the course is split in two
papers, namely a theory paper of 3 credits and a practical paper of 1 credit. The student has to study for 4
credits per slot of PCE group. This is reflected by suffixing the paper code by T (for Theory component) and P
(for Practical component), if required.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 83

 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Implementation Rules:

1. The examinations, attendance criteria to appear in examinations, promotion and award of the degree
shall be governed by the Ordinance 11 of the University. The term “major discipline” / “primary discipline”
in this document refers to the discipline in which student is admitted / studies from 3rd semester onwards.
However credits of courses / paper for OAE / EAE groups shall not be considered for the purpose of
promotion from one year of study to the subsequent year of study.
2. Minimum duration of the Bachelor of Technology programme shall be 4 years (N=4 years) (8 semesters)
for the students admitted in the 1st year and 1st semester of the degree programme. Lateral entry students
shall be admitted in the 2nd year and 3rd semester of the degree programme (effectively in the batch
admitted in the first year in the previous academic session and shall be deemed to have been exempted
from the courses / papers of the first year of the degree programme. No exemption certificate shall be
issued in any case.
A specific lateral entry students’ minimum duration shall be the same as the minimum duration for the
batch in which he/she is admitted as a lateral entry student in the 2nd year.
3. Maximum duration of the Bachelor of Technology programme shall be 6 years (N+2 years). After
completion of N+2 years of study, if the student has appeared in the papers of all the semesters upto 8th
semester, then a maximum extension of 1 year may be given to the student for completing the
requirements of the degree if and only if the number of credits already earned by the student is atleast 150
(for lateral entry students it shall be at least 102 credits) from the (non‐honours components). Otherwise,
the admission of the student shall stand cancelled. After the period of allowed study, the admission of the
student shall be cancelled.
A specific lateral entry students’ maximum duration shall be the same as the minimum duration for the
batch in which he/she is admitted as a lateral entry student in the 2nd year.
4. The degree shall be awarded only after the fulfilment of all requirements of the Scheme and Syllabus of
Examinations and the applicable Ordinance.
5. (a) The students shall undergo the following group of Courses / Papers as enumerated in the scheme (For
the students admitted in the First Year / First Semester).

Semester (Credits) Total Mandatory

Group
I & II III IV V VI VII VIII Credits Credits

BS 24 5 29 14

HS/MS 6 2 2 2 6 2 20 10

ES 20 5 25 15

PC 19 19 24 4 20 86 76

PCE 12 8 20 16

EAE/OAE 8 12 20 16

Total 50 26 26 26 26 26 20 200 147

TABLE 1: Distribution of Credits (Project / Internship credits are 25 out the 86 credits for Programme Core
(PC) credits, while extra‐curricular activities credits are 2 out of 20 credits for Humanities / Management
/ Social Science Group (HS/MS)) . This table is for students admitted in the First Year / First Semester of
the Degree Programme.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 84

 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

(b) The students admitted as Lateral Entry shall undergo the following group of Courses / Papers as
enumerated in the scheme.

Semester (Credits) Total Mandatory

Group
III IV V VI VII VIII Credits Credits

BS 5 5 0

HS/MS 2 2 2 6 2 14 7

ES 5 5 0

PC 19 19 24 4 20 86 76

PCE 12 8 20 16

EAE/OAE 8 12 20 16

Total 26 26 26 26 26 20 150 115

TABLE 2: Distribution of Credits (Project / Internship credits are 25 out the 86 credits for Programme Core
(PC) credits, while extra‐curricular activities credits are 2 out of 14 credits for Humanities / Management
/ Social Science Group (HS/MS)) This table is for students admitted as Lateral Entry Students in the
Second Year / Third Semester of the Degree Programme.

6. Mandatory Credits specify the number of credits from each subject group to be mandatorily acquired by
the student for the award of the degree,for students admitted as students in the 1st year and 1st semester
of the degree programme. While for students admitted as lateral entry in the 2nd year and 3rd semester
the Mandatory Credits value is 115, and specify the number of credits from each subject group to be
mandatorily acquired by the student for the award of the degree (Table 2). See clause 11 and 12 also.
7. Some of the papers are droppable in the sense that the student may qualify for the award of the degree
even when the student has not cleared / passed some of the papers of these group. However, the student
has to earn the minimum credits for the programme of study as specified. See clause 11 and 12 also.
8. The students may take 5 subjects from EAE / OAE groups. The open electives of the OAE group of courses
may also be taken through SWAYAM / NPTEL MOOCs platform. The student desirous of doing a MOOC
based course among the OAE group must seek approval of the APC of the institute for the same before the
commencement of the semester. The APC shall allow the MOOC based OAE option to the student if and
only if the MOOC subject / course being considered for the student is being offered in line with the
Academic Calendar applicable. The student shall submit the successful completion certificate with marks to
the institution for onwards transfer to the Examination Division. The Examinations Division shall take these
marks on record for incorporation in the result of the appropriate semester. These marks / grades of these
courses shall be used for calculation of the SGPA/CGPA of the student concerned by the examination
division of the University. If a student takes even one OAE paper through MOOCs, then the student shall
not be eligible for minor specialization. The degree to the student on fulfilment of other requirements for
such cases shall be through clause 12.b. or 12.c.
These MOOC courses taken by the students, if allowed by the APC of the institute shall be of 4 credits or
more collectively to be against or for one paper slot in the scheme, through MOOCs, though the marks
shall be shown individually. That is in one paper slot in the scheme wherever a MOOC course is allowed,
the student may register for more than one paper to aggregate 4 credits or more. If the credits of these
MOOC Courses, allowed to a student is more than 4, then the maximum credit for the programme shall
be amended accordingly for the particular student. Also, in a particular semester, a student may take
more than one MOOC course with the approval of the APC to meet the credit requirements of OAE for the
semester. The cost of taking the MOOC course is to be borne by the concerned student. The results of the
MOOC courses shall be declared separately by the Examination Division from the result for the papers
conducted by the examination division of the University.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 85

 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

9. To earn an Honours degree, the student may enrol for 20 credits or more through SWAYAM / NPTEL
MOOCs platform. This point has to be read together with other points specially point 13 and 14. The
acquisition of the credits should be completed before the 15th of the July of the Admission Year plus 4
years. That is, if a student is admitted in the year X, then these credits must be acquired through MOOCs by
15th July of the year (X+4), no extra duration or time shall be allocated, this means, the student must
submit the result of such papers on or before 15th July of the Admission Year plus 4 years.
Honours in the degree shall be awarded if and only if at least 20 credits are acquired through MOOCs. To
obtain Honours in the programme, the student must apply to the institution about the same before the
commencement of the 5th semester. The specific courses through MOOCs shall be registered by the
student only after approval by the Academic Programme Committee (APC) of the Institute. The APC shall
approve the course if it is not already studied by the student or the student shall not study it in future and
adds value to the major area of specialization (which is the degree). The papers for which the student
desires to appear for Honours through MOOCs, all papers results shall be submitted by the student to the
Institute for onwards transfer to Examination Division of the University, to be taken on record of the
University. The results of these papers shall be a part of the records of the examinations of the students.
The records shall be submitted by the student to the Institute, then transferred to the Examination
Division, shall be notified by the Examination Division of the University, and a separate marksheet shall be
issued by the Examination Division. The cost of taking the MOOC course is to be borne by the concerned
student. Such courses shall be reflected as additional courses / papers for the student.
If a student acquires less than 20 credits through MOOCs, following the mechanism specified, then also
the results of these papers shall be taken on record as specified above, though no Honours degree shall
be awarded.
The papers through MOOCs for Honours degree shall not be a part of the set of the papers over which the
SGPA / CGPA of the student shall be calculated.
The papers through MOOCs for Honours degree shall be additional papers studied by the students and are
to be taken into account only for award of Honours in the degree programme, if 20 credits are earned
through MOOCs as approved by APC, by a student. See Clause 13 also.
10. Maximum Credits is at least 200 (Table 1) for students admitted in the 1st year and 1st semester, these are
the credits for which the student shall have to study for the non‐Honours component of the curriculum.
And, for lateral entry students admitted in the 2nd year and 3rd semester of the degree programme, the
maximum credit required to be studied is at least 150 (Table 2). See clause 8 also.
The student has to appear in the examinations for these credits in all components of evaluation as
specified in the scheme of studies.
11. Minimum Credits required to be earned is atleast 180 (out of the 200 non Honours papers credits, see
clause 10 also) for students admitted in the 1st year and 1st semester. And, for lateral entry students
admitted in the 2nd year and 3rd semester of the degree programme, the minimum credit required to be
earned Is at least 135 (out of the 150 non Honours papers credits, see clause 10 also). See clause 6 also.
12. The following degree route can be taken by a student (also refer point 13):
a. The students shall be awarded one minor specialization, one from EAE/OEA route under the following
conditions:
i. The student has earned the mandatory credits as defined in Table 1 or Table 2 (as applicable) and
clause 6.
ii. The student earns 20 credits from one group of EAE / OAE courses offered as a minor
specialization by the institute.
iii. In addition, the total credits (including the above specified credits) earned by the student is atleast
as specified in clause 11.
The degree nomenclature of the degree shall be as: “Bachelor of Technology in Computer Science and
Technology with Minor Specializations in <concerned EAE/OAE discipline>”; if criteria / point 9 is not
satisfied for Honours. Otherwise, if criteria / point 9 is met, then the degree shall be an Honours

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 86

 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

degree and the nomenclature shall be as: “Bachelor of Technology in Computer Science and
Technology with Minor Specializations in <concerned EAE/OAE discipline>) (Honours)”, if in addition
to point 12.a.i, 12.a.ii, and 12.a.iii, the student fulfils the criteria for Honours as specified at point 9.
b. The students shall be awarded the degree without any minor specialization under the following
conditions:
i. The student has earned the mandatory credits as defined in Table 1 or Table 2 (as applicable) and
clause 6.
ii. In addition, the total credits (including the above specified credits) earned by the student is atleast
as specified in clause 11.
The degree nomenclature of the degree shall be as: “Bachelor of Technology in Computer Science and
Technology”; if criteria / point 9 is not satisfied for Honours. Otherwise, if criteria / point 9 is met,
then the degrees shall be an Honours degree and the nomenclature shall be as: “Bachelor of
Technology in Computer Science and Technology (Honours)”, if in addition to point 12.b.i and 12.b.ii,
the student fulfils the criteria for Honours as specified at point 9.
c. If the student does not fulfil any of the above criterions (point 12.a, or 12.b), if the student earns at
least the minimum credits specified in clause 11 (disregarding the mandatory credits clause of Table 1
or Table 2 (as applicable) and Clause 6), then the student shall be award the degree as “Bachelor of
Technology in Computer Science and Technology”. Such students shall not be eligible for the award of
an Honours degree. Though, if credits are accumulated through MOOCs as per clause 9, the same shall
be reflected in the marksheets of the students.
13. The Honours degree shall only be awarded if the CGPA of the student is above or equal to 7.5 in addition
to fulfilment of criteria / point 10 and 13 above and the degree is awarded after the immediate
completion of the 4th year of the batch from the year of admission. No Honours shall be conferred if the
degree requirements are not completed in the minimum duration.
14. Pass marks in every paper shall be 40.
15. Grading System shall be as per Ordinance 11 of the University.
16. The Programme Core Electives (PCE) shall be specific to a major discipline, minor specializations and papers
for EAE shall be defined by the school defining the syllabus for the particular areas and minor
specializations and papers for OAE shall be defined by the schools defining the elective streams.
17. Minor specialization in non‐engineering disciplines may be offered under the aegis of the other schools
(provided the individual institutions are offering programmes under the aegis of the school offering the
non‐engineering minor specialization). The minor specialization framework of 20 credits has to be
offered within the framework of the current Scheme of Studies of the primary / major discipline.
18. The institution shall offer atleast two elective groups out of the emerging area / open area for students of
each major discipline. The emerging area / open electives can also be offered as standalone papers not
forming a part of any elective groups also. The institute shall decide the group(s) and/or individual papers
to be offered as electives based on the availability of infrastructure and faculty. From the groups / papers
offered by the institute, an elective paper / group shall be taught if and only if the number of students in a
paper is at‐least 20 or at‐least 1/3 of the students of a major / primary discipline for which the paper /
group is to be offered. The APC of the department / institute may define a maximum number of students
allowed to register for a paper as an elective (EAE / OAE).
19. The institution shall offer atleast two elective papers from each program core elective group for students
of each major / primary discipline. The institute shall decide the individual papers to be offered as electives
(PCE) based on the availability of infrastructure and faculty. From the papers offered by the institute, an
elective paper shall be taught if and only if the number of students in a paper is at‐least 20 or at‐least 1/3
of the students of a major / primary discipline for which the paper is to be offered. The APC of the
department / institute may define a maximum number of students allowed to register for a paper as an
elective (PCE).
20. Teachers of the other department(s), as and when deputed by their department, for teaching the students
enrolled in programmes offered by the department offering the programme shall be a part of the

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 87

 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Academic Programme Committee of the discipline. Such teachers, for all academic matters, including
teaching, teachers’ continuous evaluation, term end examinations etc. shall be governed by the decisions
of the APC of department offering the programme of study. Similarly, the guest faculty, the visiting faculty
and the Contract / Ad Hoc faculty as and when deputed to teach students of a particular department shall
form a part of APC of the department.
21. The Paper IDs will be generated / issued / assigned by the Examination Division of the University.

22. The medium of instructions shall be English.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 88

 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Bachelor of Technology in Information Technology and

Engineering (ITE)
2nd Year Onward Scheme and implementation guideline

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 89

 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Third Semester
Paper
Group Paper L P Credits
Code
Theory Papers
ES ES‐201 Computational Methods 4 4
HS/MS HS‐203 Indian Knowledge System* 2 2
PC CIC‐205 Discrete Mathematics 4 4
PC ECC‐207 Digital Logic and Computer Design 4 4
PC CIC‐209 Data Structures 4 4
PC CIC‐211 Object‐Oriented Programming using C++ 4 4
Practical / Viva Voce
ES ES‐251 Computational Methods Lab 2 1
PC ECC‐253 Digital Logic and Computer Design Lab 2 1
PC CIC‐255 Data Structures Lab 2 1
PC CIC‐257 Object‐Oriented Programming using C++ Lab 2 1
Total 22 8 26

*NUES:All examinations to be conducted by the concerned teacher as specified in the detailed syllabus of the paper.

Fourth Semester
Paper
Group Paper L P Credits
Code
Theory Papers
BS BS‐202 Probability, Statistics and Linear Programming 4 4
HS/MS HS‐204 Technical Writing* 2 2
PC CIC‐206 Theory of Computation 4 4
PC EEC‐208 Circuits and Systems 4 4
PC CIC‐210 Database Management Systems 4 4
PC CIC‐212 Programming in Java 4 4
Practical / Viva Voce
BS BS‐252 Probability, Statistics and Linear Programming Lab 2 1
PC EEC‐254 Circuits and Systems Lab 2 1
PC CIC‐256 Database Management Systems Lab 2 1
PC CIC‐258 Programming in Java Lab 2 1
Total 22 8 26

*NUES:All examinations to be conducted by the concerned teacher as specified in the detailed syllabus of the paper.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 90

 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Fifth Semester
Paper
Group Paper L P Credits
Code
Theory Papers
HS/MS HS‐301 Economics for Engineers 2 2
PC CIC‐303 Compiler Design 3 3
PC CIC‐305 Operating Systems 4 4
PC CIC‐307 Computer Networks 4 4
PC CIC‐309 Software Engineering 3 3
PC CIC‐311 Design and Analysis of Algorithm 4 4
Practical / Viva Voce
PC CIC‐351 Compiler Design Lab 2 1
PC CIC‐353 Operating Systems Lab 2 1
PC CIC‐355 Computer Networks Lab 2 1
PC CIC‐357 Software Engineering Lab 2 1
PC CIC‐359 Design and Analysis of Algorithm Lab 2 1
PC / Internship ES‐361 Summer Training Report ‐ 1 * 1
Total 20 10 26

*NUES:Comprehensive evaluation of the Summer Training Report – 1 (after 4th Semester) shall be done by the committee
of teachers, constituted by the Academic Programme Committee, out of 100. The training shall be of 4 to 6 weeks duration.
The training can be under the mentorship of a teacher of the institute.

Sixth Semester
Paper
Group Paper L P Credits
Code
Theory Papers
HS/MS MS‐302 Principles of Management for Engineers 3 3
HS/MS HS‐304 Universal Human Values* 1 1
PCE Programme Core Elective Paper (PCE –1) 4
PCE Programme Core Elective Paper (PCE – 2) 4
PCE Programme Core Elective Paper (PCE – 3) 4
EAE / OAE Emerging Area/Open Area Elective Paper (EAE – 1 /OAE – 1) 4
EAE / OAE Emerging Area/Open Area Elective Paper (EAE – 2 /OAE – 2) 4
Practical / Viva Voce
NSS / NCC / Cultural Clubs / Technical Society / Technical
HS/MS HS‐352 2
Club**
Total 26

*NUES:All examinations to be conducted by the concerned teacher as specified in the detailed syllabus of the paper.

**NUES: Comprehensive evaluation of the students by the concerned coordinator of NCC / NSS / Cultural Clubs / Technical
Society / Technical Clubs, out of 100 as per the evaluation schemes worked out by these activity societies, organizations; the
faculty co‐ordinators shall be responsible for the evaluation of the same. These activities shall start from the 1st semester
and the evaluation shall be conducted at the end of the 6th semester for students admitted in the first semester. Students
nd rd
admitted in the 2 year (3 semester) as lateral entry shall be evaluated on the basis their performance, by the faculty co‐
rd th
ordinator for the period of 3 semester to 6 semester only.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 91

 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Seventh Semester
Paper
Group Paper L P Credits
Code
Theory Papers
HS/MS MS‐401 Principles of Entrepreneurship Mindset 2 2
PCE Programme Core Elective Paper (PCE – 4) 4
PCE Programme Core Elective Paper (PCE – 5) 4
EAE / OAE Emerging Area / Open Area Elective Paper (EAE – 3 / OAE – 3) 4
EAE / OAE Emerging Area / Open Area Elective Paper (EAE – 4 / OAE – 4) 4
EAE / OAE Emerging Area / Open Area Elective Paper (EAE – 5 / OAE – 5) 4
Practical / Viva Voce
PC / Project ES‐451 Minor Project** 3
PC / Internship ES‐453 Summer Training Report ‐ 2 * 1
Total 26

*NUES:Comprehensive evaluation of the Summer Training Report – 2 (after 6th Semester) shall be done by the committee
of teachers, constituted by the Academic Programme Committee, out of 100. The training shall be of 4 to 6 weeks duration.
The training can be under the mentorship of a teacher of the institute.

**The student shall be allocated a supervisor / guide for project work at the end 6th semester by the department /
institution, the project shall continue into the 8th semester. In the 7th semester evaluation, the criteria for evaluation shall
be conceptualization of the project work, the background study / literature survey and identification of objectives and
methodology to be followed for project. 40 marks evaluation for the Teachers' Continuous Evaluation / Internal Assessment
shall be done by concerned supervisor while the term end examination of 60 marks shall be conducted by the supervisor
concerned and the external examiner deputed by the Examinations Division. In the absence of the supervisor, the Director
of the Institution / Head of the Department can assign the responsibility of the supervisor (for purpose of examinations) to
any faculty of the Institution / Department.

Eight Semester
Paper
Group Paper L P Credits
Code
%
Practical / Viva Voce
ES‐452 Major Project – Dissertation and Viva Voce# 18
PC / Project
ES‐454 Project Progress Evaluation* 2
#
ES‐456 Internship Report and Viva Voce 18
PC / Internship
ES‐458 Internship Progress Evaluation* 2
Total 0 0 20

*NUES: Comprehensive evaluation by the committee of teachers, constituted by the Academic Programme
Committee, out of 100.

%By default every student shall do the project work (ES‐452 and ES‐454). A student shall either be allowed to
do a project work (ES‐452 and ES‐454) or an internship (ES‐456 and ES‐458). The student must apply for
approval to do internship before the commencement of the 8th semester to the institute, and only after
approval of Principal / Director of the institute through Training and Placement Officer of the institute, shall
proceed for internship.

#Students may be allowed to do internship in this semester in lieu of Major project. The students allowed to
proceed for internship shall be required to maintain a log‐book of activities performed during internship. The
same has to be countersigned by the mentor at the organization where internship is completed.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 92

 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

ES‐452: Evaluation shall be conducted of 40 marks (Teachers’ continuous evaluation / internal assessment) by
the supervisor. And, 60 marks by a bench of the supervisor and the external examiner deputed by Examination
Division (COE), for a total of 100 marks.

ES‐454 / ES‐458: Comprehensive evaluation by the committee of teachers, constituted by the Academic
Programme Committee, out of 100.

ES‐456: Evaluation shall be conducted of 40 marks (Teachers’ continuous evaluation / internal assessment) by
the Training and Placement Officer of the department / institute on the basis of the report submitted by the
student. And, 60 marks by a bench of the Training and Placement Officer of the department / institute and the
external examiner deputed by Examination Division (COE), for a total of 100 marks.

In the absence of the supervisor or the Training and Placement Officer (as the case may be), the Director of the
institute / Head of the Department can assign the responsibility of the supervisor or the Training and Placement
Officer (for purpose of examinations) to any faculty of the department.

Note on Elective Papers: The elective papers shall be allowed to be taken / studied by the students, by the
APC of the department / institute, keeping in view that two papers studied by the student should not have a
substantial overlap. All papers studied by the student should be substantially distinct in content.

Note on Examination of Elective Papers:

(a) Papers with only theory component shall have 25 Marks continuous evaluation by the teacher and 75
Marks term‐end examinations. Both these component marks shall be reflected on the marksheet of the
student.
(b) Papers with only practical component shall have 40 Marks continuous evaluation by the teacher and 60
Marks term‐end examinations. Both these component marks shall be reflected on the marksheet of the
student.

Note on Continuous Evaluation of All Papers:

(a) Papers with only theory component shall have 25 Marks continuous evaluation by the teacher which shall
be evaluated as:
i. Mid‐Term Test* ‐ 15 Marks (after 8 weeks of teaching or as
decided by PCC)
ii. Assignments / Project / Quiz / Case Studies, etc. ‐ 5 Marks
iii. Attendance / Class Participation ‐ 5 Marks
(b) Papers with only practical component shall have 40Marks continuous evaluation by the teacher which shall
be evaluated as:
i. Mid‐Term Test and Viva Voce ‐ 20 Marks (after 8 weeks of teaching or as
decided by PCC)
ii. Practical File ‐ 10 Marks
iii. Attendance / Lab Participation ‐ 10 Marks

* The mid‐term test shall be coordinated by the Programme Coordination Committee.

If a student could not appear for a mid‐term test due to situation beyond the control by the student, a
supplementary test may be arranged towards the end of the semester, in a similar manner to the mid‐term
test for such students. The students must apply for this provision to the department / institution. On
examination of the reason for non‐appearing in the mid‐term test by the Head of the Department / Institute,
and with reason for allowing to appear in the supplementary test to recorded by the Head of the Department
/ Institute, the student may be allowed.

The attendance sheets, the question papers and the award sheets for the continuous evaluation to be
retained by the concerned department / institute for at least 6 months after the declaration of the result by
the Examination Division of the University.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 93

 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Programme Core Electives

Semester Paper Code PCE – 1 (Choose Any One) L P Credits
CIE‐306T Advanced Java Programming 3 3
6
CIE‐306P Advanced Java Programming Lab 2 1
CIE‐308T Visual Basic.NET Programming 3 3
6
CIE‐308P Visual Basic.NET Programming Lab 2 1
CIE‐310T Advanced DBMS 3 3
6
CIE‐310P Advanced DBMS Lab 2 1
CIE‐318T Network Security and Cryptography 3 3
6
CIE‐318P Network Security and Cryptography Lab 2 1
CIE‐326T VHDL Programming 3 3
6
CIE‐326P VHDL Programming Lab 2 1
Semester Paper Code PCE – 2 (Choose Any One) L P Credits
CIE‐330T Introduction to Internet of Things 3 3
6
CIE‐330P Introduction to Internet of Things Lab 2 1
CIE‐332T Programming in Python 3 3
6
CIE‐332P Programming in Python Lab 2 1
6 CIE‐334 Quantum Computing 4 4
CIE‐342T Multimedia Technologies 3 3
6
CIE‐342P Multimedia Technologies Lab 2 1
6 CIE‐350 Windows System Administration 4 4
Semester Paper Code PCE – 3 (Choose Any One) L P Credits
CIE‐354T Introduction to Digital Signal Processing 3 3
6
CIE‐354P Introduction to Digital Signal Processing Lab 2 1
CIE‐356T Web Technologies 3 3
6
CIE‐356P Web Technologies Lab 2 1
CIE‐362T Linux System Administration 3 3
6
CIE‐362P Linux System Administration Lab 2 1
CIE‐364T Microprocessors and Interfacing 3 3
6
CIE‐364P Microprocessors and Interfacing Lab 2 1
CIE‐374T Artificial Intelligence 3 3
6
CIE‐374P Artificial Intelligence Lab 2 1
Semester Paper Code PCE – 4 (Choose Any One) L P Credits
CIE‐403T Blockchain Technology 3 3
7
CIE‐403P Blockchain Technology Lab 2 1
CIE‐405T Data Science 3 3
7
CIE‐405P Data Science Lab 2 1
CIE‐407T Distributed Systems and Cloud Computing 3 3
7
CIE‐407P Distributed Systems and Cloud Computing Lab 2 1
CIE‐409T Social Network Analysis and Sentiment Analysis 3 3
7
CIE‐409P Social Network Analysis and Sentiment Analysis Lab 2 1
CIE‐411T Computer Graphics and Multimedia Technologies 3 3
7
CIE‐411P Computer Graphics and Multimedia Technologies Lab 2 1
Semester Paper Code PCE – 5 (Choose Any One) L P Credits
CIE‐417T C#.NET Programming 3 3
7
CIE‐417P C#.NET Programming Lab 2 1
7 CIE‐419 Intellectual Property Rights 4 4
CIE‐421T Machine Learning 3 3
7
CIE‐421P Machine Learning Lab 2 1
CIE‐423T Data Visualization 3 3
7
CIE‐423P Data Visualization Lab 2 1
CIE‐429T Web Intelligence and Big Data Analytics 3 3
7
CIE‐429P Web Intelligence and Big Data Analytics Lab 2 1

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 94

 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Note:
1. An elective shall be offered to the student for each PCE group (That is for PCE‐1, PCE‐2, etc.) based on the
availability of resources and faculty at the institution and at least one third of the batch or at least 20 students
must be willing to take the elective. At least two elective per PCE group must be offered to the students of the
major discipline.

2. Each PCE slot is of 4 credits, if in a particular slot, the paper has no practical component, then it is of 4 credits
(a pure theory paper), otherwise for purpose of examination and conduct of classes, the course is split in two
papers, namely a theory paper of 3 credits and a practical paper of 1 credit. The student has to study for 4
credits per slot of PCE group. This is reflected by suffixing the paper code by T (for Theory component) and P
(for Practical component), if required.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 95

 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Implementation Rules:

1. The examinations, attendance criteria to appear in examinations, promotion and award of the degree
shall be governed by the Ordinance 11 of the University. The term “major discipline” / “primary discipline”
in this document refers to the discipline in which student is admitted / studies from 3rd semester onwards.
However credits of courses / paper for OAE / EAE groups shall not be considered for the purpose of
promotion from one year of study to the subsequent year of study.
2. Minimum duration of the Bachelor of Technology programme shall be 4 years (N=4 years) (8 semesters)
for the students admitted in the 1st year and 1st semester of the degree programme. Lateral entry students
shall be admitted in the 2nd year and 3rd semester of the degree programme (effectively in the batch
admitted in the first year in the previous academic session and shall be deemed to have been exempted
from the courses / papers of the first year of the degree programme. No exemption certificate shall be
issued in any case.
A specific lateral entry students’ minimum duration shall be the same as the minimum duration for the
batch in which he/she is admitted as a lateral entry student in the 2nd year.
3. Maximum duration of the Bachelor of Technology programme shall be 6 years (N+2 years). After
completion of N+2 years of study, if the student has appeared in the papers of all the semesters upto 8th
semester, then a maximum extension of 1 year may be given to the student for completing the
requirements of the degree if and only if the number of credits already earned by the student is atleast 150
(for lateral entry students it shall be at least 102 credits) from the (non‐honours components). Otherwise,
the admission of the student shall stand cancelled. After the period of allowed study, the admission of the
student shall be cancelled.
A specific lateral entry students’ maximum duration shall be the same as the minimum duration for the
batch in which he/she is admitted as a lateral entry student in the 2nd year.
4. The degree shall be awarded only after the fulfilment of all requirements of the Scheme and Syllabus of
Examinations and the applicable Ordinance.
5. (a) The students shall undergo the following group of Courses / Papers as enumerated in the scheme (For
the students admitted in the First Year / First Semester).

Semester (Credits) Total Mandatory

Group
I & II III IV V VI VII VIII Credits Credits

BS 24 5 29 14

HS/MS 6 2 2 2 6 2 20 10

ES 20 5 25 15

PC 19 19 24 4 20 86 76

PCE 12 8 20 16

EAE/OAE 8 12 20 16

Total 50 26 26 26 26 26 20 200 147

TABLE 1: Distribution of Credits (Project / Internship credits are 25 out the 86 credits for Programme Core
(PC) credits, while extra‐curricular activities credits are 2 out of 20 credits for Humanities / Management
/ Social Science Group (HS/MS)) . This table is for students admitted in the First Year / First Semester of
the Degree Programme.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 96

 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

(b) The students admitted as Lateral Entry shall undergo the following group of Courses / Papers as
enumerated in the scheme.

Semester (Credits) Total Mandatory

Group
III IV V VI VII VIII Credits Credits

BS 5 5 0

HS/MS 2 2 2 6 2 14 7

ES 5 5 0

PC 19 19 24 4 20 86 76

PCE 12 8 20 16

EAE/OAE 8 12 20 16

Total 26 26 26 26 26 20 150 115

TABLE 2: Distribution of Credits (Project / Internship credits are 25 out the 86 credits for Programme Core
(PC) credits, while extra‐curricular activities credits are 2 out of 14 credits for Humanities / Management
/ Social Science Group (HS/MS)) This table is for students admitted as Lateral Entry Students in the
Second Year / Third Semester of the Degree Programme.

6. Mandatory Credits specify the number of credits from each subject group to be mandatorily acquired by
the student for the award of the degree,for students admitted as students in the 1st year and 1st semester
of the degree programme. While for students admitted as lateral entry in the 2nd year and 3rd semester
the Mandatory Credits value is 115, and specify the number of credits from each subject group to be
mandatorily acquired by the student for the award of the degree (Table 2). See clause 11 and 12 also.
7. Some of the papers are droppable in the sense that the student may qualify for the award of the degree
even when the student has not cleared / passed some of the papers of these group. However, the student
has to earn the minimum credits for the programme of study as specified. See clause 11 and 12 also.
8. The students may take 5 subjects from EAE / OAE groups. The open electives of the OAE group of courses
may also be taken through SWAYAM / NPTEL MOOCs platform. The student desirous of doing a MOOC
based course among the OAE group must seek approval of the APC of the institute for the same before the
commencement of the semester. The APC shall allow the MOOC based OAE option to the student if and
only if the MOOC subject / course being considered for the student is being offered in line with the
Academic Calendar applicable. The student shall submit the successful completion certificate with marks to
the institution for onwards transfer to the Examination Division. The Examinations Division shall take these
marks on record for incorporation in the result of the appropriate semester. These marks / grades of these
courses shall be used for calculation of the SGPA/CGPA of the student concerned by the examination
division of the University. If a student takes even one OAE paper through MOOCs, then the student shall
not be eligible for minor specialization. The degree to the student on fulfilment of other requirements for
such cases shall be through clause 12.b. or 12.c.
These MOOC courses taken by the students, if allowed by the APC of the institute shall be of 4 credits or
more collectively to be against or for one paper slot in the scheme, through MOOCs, though the marks
shall be shown individually. That is in one paper slot in the scheme wherever a MOOC course is allowed,
the student may register for more than one paper to aggregate 4 credits or more. If the credits of these
MOOC Courses, allowed to a student is more than 4, then the maximum credit for the programme shall
be amended accordingly for the particular student. Also, in a particular semester, a student may take
more than one MOOC course with the approval of the APC to meet the credit requirements of OAE for the
semester. The cost of taking the MOOC course is to be borne by the concerned student. The results of the
MOOC courses shall be declared separately by the Examination Division from the result for the papers
conducted by the examination division of the University.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 97

 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

9. To earn an Honours degree, the student may enrol for 20 credits or more through SWAYAM / NPTEL
MOOCs platform. This point has to be read together with other points specially point 13 and 14. The
acquisition of the credits should be completed before the 15th of the July of the Admission Year plus 4
years. That is, if a student is admitted in the year X, then these credits must be acquired through MOOCs by
15th July of the year (X+4), no extra duration or time shall be allocated, this means, the student must
submit the result of such papers on or before 15th July of the Admission Year plus 4 years.
Honours in the degree shall be awarded if and only if at least 20 credits are acquired through MOOCs. To
obtain Honours in the programme, the student must apply to the institution about the same before the
commencement of the 5th semester. The specific courses through MOOCs shall be registered by the
student only after approval by the Academic Programme Committee (APC) of the Institute. The APC shall
approve the course if it is not already studied by the student or the student shall not study it in future and
adds value to the major area of specialization (which is the degree). The papers for which the student
desires to appear for Honours through MOOCs, all papers results shall be submitted by the student to the
Institute for onwards transfer to Examination Division of the University, to be taken on record of the
University. The results of these papers shall be a part of the records of the examinations of the students.
The records shall be submitted by the student to the Institute, then transferred to the Examination
Division, shall be notified by the Examination Division of the University, and a separate marksheet shall be
issued by the Examination Division. The cost of taking the MOOC course is to be borne by the concerned
student. Such courses shall be reflected as additional courses / papers for the student.
If a student acquires less than 20 credits through MOOCs, following the mechanism specified, then also
the results of these papers shall be taken on record as specified above, though no Honours degree shall
be awarded.
The papers through MOOCs for Honours degree shall not be a part of the set of the papers over which the
SGPA / CGPA of the student shall be calculated.
The papers through MOOCs for Honours degree shall be additional papers studied by the students and are
to be taken into account only for award of Honours in the degree programme, if 20 credits are earned
through MOOCs as approved by APC, by a student. See Clause 13 also.
10. Maximum Credits is at least 200 (Table 1) for students admitted in the 1st year and 1st semester, these are
the credits for which the student shall have to study for the non‐Honours component of the curriculum.
And, for lateral entry students admitted in the 2nd year and 3rd semester of the degree programme, the
maximum credit required to be studied is at least 150 (Table 2). See clause 8 also.
The student has to appear in the examinations for these credits in all components of evaluation as
specified in the scheme of studies.
11. Minimum Credits required to be earned is atleast 180 (out of the 200 non Honours papers credits, see
clause 10 also) for students admitted in the 1st year and 1st semester. And, for lateral entry students
admitted in the 2nd year and 3rd semester of the degree programme, the minimum credit required to be
earned Is at least 135 (out of the 150 non Honours papers credits, see clause 10 also). See clause 6 also.
12. The following degree route can be taken by a student (also refer point 13):
a. The students shall be awarded one minor specialization, one from EAE/OEA route under the following
conditions:
i. The student has earned the mandatory credits as defined in Table 1 or Table 2 (as applicable) and
clause 6.
ii. The student earns 20 credits from one group of EAE / OAE courses offered as a minor
specialization by the institute.
iii. In addition, the total credits (including the above specified credits) earned by the student is atleast
as specified in clause 11.
The degree nomenclature of the degree shall be as: “Bachelor of Technology in Information
Technology and Engineering with Minor Specializations in <concerned EAE/OAE discipline>”; if
criteria / point 9 is not satisfied for Honours. Otherwise, if criteria / point 9 is met, then the degree

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 98

 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

shall be an Honours degree and the nomenclature shall be as: “Bachelor of Technology in Information
Technology and Engineering with Minor Specializations in <concerned EAE/OAE discipline>)
(Honours)”, if in addition to point 12.a.i, 12.a.ii, and 12.a.iii, the student fulfils the criteria for Honours
as specified at point 9.
b. The students shall be awarded the degree without any minor specialization under the following
conditions:
i. The student has earned the mandatory credits as defined in Table 1 or Table 2 (as applicable) and
clause 6.
ii. In addition, the total credits (including the above specified credits) earned by the student is atleast
as specified in clause 11.
The degree nomenclature of the degree shall be as: “Bachelor of Technology in Information
Technology and Engineering”; if criteria / point 9 is not satisfied for Honours. Otherwise, if criteria /
point 9 is met, then the degrees shall be an Honours degree and the nomenclature shall be as:
“Bachelor of Technology in Information Technology and Engineering (Honours)”, if in addition to
point 12.b.i and 12.b.ii, the student fulfils the criteria for Honours as specified at point 9.
c. If the student does not fulfil any of the above criterions (point 12.a, or 12.b), if the student earns at
least the minimum credits specified in clause 11 (disregarding the mandatory credits clause of Table 1
or Table 2 (as applicable) and Clause 6), then the student shall be award the degree as “Bachelor of
Technology in Information Technology and Engineering”. Such students shall not be eligible for the
award of an Honours degree. Though, if credits are accumulated through MOOCs as per clause 9, the
same shall be reflected in the marksheets of the students.
13. The Honours degree shall only be awarded if the CGPA of the student is above or equal to 7.5 in addition
to fulfilment of criteria / point 10 and 13 above and the degree is awarded after the immediate
completion of the 4th year of the batch from the year of admission. No Honours shall be conferred if the
degree requirements are not completed in the minimum duration.
14. Pass marks in every paper shall be 40.
15. Grading System shall be as per Ordinance 11 of the University.
16. The Programme Core Electives (PCE) shall be specific to a major discipline, minor specializations and papers
for EAE shall be defined by the school defining the syllabus for the particular areas and minor
specializations and papers for OAE shall be defined by the schools defining the elective streams.
17. Minor specialization in non‐engineering disciplines may be offered under the aegis of the other schools
(provided the individual institutions are offering programmes under the aegis of the school offering the
non‐engineering minor specialization). The minor specialization framework of 20 credits has to be
offered within the framework of the current Scheme of Studies of the primary / major discipline.
18. The institution shall offer atleast two elective groups out of the emerging area / open area for students of
each major discipline. The emerging area / open electives can also be offered as standalone papers not
forming a part of any elective groups also. The institute shall decide the group(s) and/or individual papers
to be offered as electives based on the availability of infrastructure and faculty. From the groups / papers
offered by the institute, an elective paper / group shall be taught if and only if the number of students in a
paper is at‐least 20 or at‐least 1/3 of the students of a major / primary discipline for which the paper /
group is to be offered. The APC of the department / institute may define a maximum number of students
allowed to register for a paper as an elective (EAE / OAE).
19. The institution shall offer atleast two elective papers from each program core elective group for students
of each major / primary discipline. The institute shall decide the individual papers to be offered as electives
(PCE) based on the availability of infrastructure and faculty. From the papers offered by the institute, an
elective paper shall be taught if and only if the number of students in a paper is at‐least 20 or at‐least 1/3
of the students of a major / primary discipline for which the paper is to be offered. The APC of the
department / institute may define a maximum number of students allowed to register for a paper as an
elective (PCE).

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 99

 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

20. Teachers of the other department(s), as and when deputed by their department, for teaching the students
enrolled in programmes offered by the department offering the programme shall be a part of the
Academic Programme Committee of the discipline. Such teachers, for all academic matters, including
teaching, teachers’ continuous evaluation, term end examinations etc. shall be governed by the decisions
of the APC of department offering the programme of study. Similarly, the guest faculty, the visiting faculty
and the Contract / Ad Hoc faculty as and when deputed to teach students of a particular department shall
form a part of APC of the department.
21. The Paper IDs will be generated / issued / assigned by the Examination Division of the University.

22. The medium of instructions shall be English.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 100
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Bachelor of Technology in Electronics and Communications

Engineering (ECE)
2nd Year Onward Scheme and implementation guideline

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 101
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Third Semester
Paper
Group Paper L P Credits
Code
Theory Papers
ES ES‐201 Computational Methods 4 4
HS/MS HS‐203 Indian Knowledge System* 2 2
PC ECC‐205 Signals and Systems 3 3
PC ECC‐207 Digital Logic and Computer Design 4 4
PC ECC‐209 Analog Communications 4 4
PC ECC‐211 Analog Electronics‐I 4 4
Practical / Viva Voce
ES ES‐251 Computational Methods Lab 2 1
PC ECC‐253 Digital Logic and Computer Design Lab 2 1
PC ECC‐255 Analog Communications Lab 2 1
PC ECC‐257 Analog Electronics‐I Lab 2 1
PC ECC‐259 Signals and Systems Lab 2 1
Total 21 10 26

*NUES:All examinations to be conducted by the concerned teacher as specified in the detailed syllabus of the paper.

Fourth Semester
Paper
Group Paper L P Credits
Code
Theory Papers
BS BS‐202 Probability, Statistics and Linear Programming 4 4
HS/MS HS‐204 Technical Writing* 2 2
PC EEC‐206 Network Analysis and Synthesis 3 3
PC ECC‐210 Microprocessors and Microcontrollers 3 3
PC ECC‐212 Digital Communications 3 3
PC ECC‐214 Analog Electronics‐II 3 3
PC ECC‐216 Electromagnetic Field Theory 3 3
Practical / Viva Voce
BS BS‐252 Probability, Statistics and Linear Programming Lab 2 1
PC ECC‐256 Microprocessors and Microcontrollers Lab 2 1
PC ECC‐258 Digital Communications Lab 2 1
PC ECC‐260 Analog Electronics‐II Lab 2 1
PC EEC‐262 Network Analysis and Synthesis Lab 2 1
Total 21 10 26

*NUES:All examinations to be conducted by the concerned teacher as specified in the detailed syllabus of the paper.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 102
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Fifth Semester
Paper
Group Paper L P Credits
Code
Theory Papers
HS/MS HS‐301 Economics for Engineers 2 2
PC ECC‐303 Digital Signal Processing 4 4
PC ECC‐305 Microelectronics 3 3
PC EEC‐307 Introduction to Control Systems 3 3
PC ECC‐309 Transmission Lines, Waveguides and Antenna Design 4 4
PC ECC‐311 Data Communication and Networking 4 4
Practical / Viva Voce
PC ECC‐351 Digital Signal Processing Lab 2 1
PC ECC‐353 Microelectronics Lab 2 1
PC EEC‐355 Introduction to Control Systems Lab 2 1
PC ECC‐357 Transmission Lines, Waveguides and Antenna Design Lab 2 1
PC ECC‐359 Data Communication and Networking Lab 2 1
PC / Internship ES‐361 Summer Training Report ‐ 1 * 1
Total 20 10 26

*NUES:Comprehensive evaluation of the Summer Training Report – 1 (after 4th Semester) shall be done by the committee
of teachers, constituted by the Academic Programme Committee, out of 100. The training shall be of 4 to 6 weeks duration.
The training can be under the mentorship of a teacher of the institute.

Sixth Semester
Paper
Group Paper L P Credits
Code
Theory Papers
HS/MS MS‐302 Principles of Management for Engineers 3 3
HS/MS HS‐304 Universal Human Values* 1 1
PCE Programme Core Elective Paper (PCE –1) 4
PCE Programme Core Elective Paper (PCE – 2) 4
PCE Programme Core Elective Paper (PCE – 3) 4
EAE / OAE Emerging Area/Open Area Elective Paper (EAE – 1 /OAE – 1) 4
EAE / OAE Emerging Area/Open Area Elective Paper (EAE – 2 /OAE – 2) 4
Practical / Viva Voce
NSS / NCC / Cultural Clubs / Technical Society / Technical
HS/MS HS‐352 2
Club**
Total 26

*NUES:All examinations to be conducted by the concerned teacher as specified in the detailed syllabus of the paper.

**NUES: Comprehensive evaluation of the students by the concerned coordinator of NCC / NSS / Cultural Clubs / Technical
Society / Technical Clubs, out of 100 as per the evaluation schemes worked out by these activity societies, organizations; the
faculty co‐ordinators shall be responsible for the evaluation of the same. These activities shall start from the 1st semester
and the evaluation shall be conducted at the end of the 6th semester for students admitted in the first semester. Students
nd rd
admitted in the 2 year (3 semester) as lateral entry shall be evaluated on the basis their performance, by the faculty co‐
rd th
ordinator for the period of 3 semester to 6 semester only.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 103
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Seventh Semester
Paper
Group Paper L P Credits
Code
Theory Papers
HS/MS MS‐401 Principles of Entrepreneurship Mindset 2 2
PCE Programme Core Elective Paper (PCE – 4) 4
PCE Programme Core Elective Paper (PCE – 5) 4
EAE / OAE Emerging Area / Open Area Elective Paper (EAE – 3 / OAE – 3) 4
EAE / OAE Emerging Area / Open Area Elective Paper (EAE – 4 / OAE – 4) 4
EAE / OAE Emerging Area / Open Area Elective Paper (EAE – 5 / OAE – 5) 4
Practical / Viva Voce
PC / Project ES‐451 Minor Project** 3
PC / Internship ES‐453 Summer Training Report ‐ 2 * 1
Total 26

*NUES:Comprehensive evaluation of the Summer Training Report – 2 (after 6th Semester) shall be done by the committee
of teachers, constituted by the Academic Programme Committee, out of 100. The training shall be of 4 to 6 weeks duration.
The training can be under the mentorship of a teacher of the institute.

**The student shall be allocated a supervisor / guide for project work at the end 6th semester by the department /
institution, the project shall continue into the 8th semester. In the 7th semester evaluation, the criteria for evaluation shall
be conceptualization of the project work, the background study / literature survey and identification of objectives and
methodology to be followed for project. 40 marks evaluation for the Teachers' Continuous Evaluation / Internal Assessment
shall be done by concerned supervisor while the term end examination of 60 marks shall be conducted by the supervisor
concerned and the external examiner deputed by the Examinations Division. In the absence of the supervisor, the Director
of the Institution / Head of the Department can assign the responsibility of the supervisor (for purpose of examinations) to
any faculty of the Institution / Department.

Eight Semester
Paper
Group Paper L P Credits
Code
%
Practical / Viva Voce
ES‐452 Major Project – Dissertation and Viva Voce# 18
PC / Project
ES‐454 Project Progress Evaluation* 2
#
ES‐456 Internship Report and Viva Voce 18
PC / Internship
ES‐458 Internship Progress Evaluation* 2
Total 0 0 20

*NUES: Comprehensive evaluation by the committee of teachers, constituted by the Academic Programme
Committee, out of 100.

%By default every student shall do the project work (ES‐452 and ES‐454). A student shall either be allowed to
do a project work (ES‐452 and ES‐454) or an internship (ES‐456 and ES‐458). The student must apply for
approval to do internship before the commencement of the 8th semester to the institute, and only after
approval of Principal / Director of the institute through Training and Placement Officer of the institute, shall
proceed for internship.

#Students may be allowed to do internship in this semester in lieu of Major project. The students allowed to
proceed for internship shall be required to maintain a log‐book of activities performed during internship. The
same has to be countersigned by the mentor at the organization where internship is completed.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 104
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

ES‐452: Evaluation shall be conducted of 40 marks (Teachers’ continuous evaluation / internal assessment) by
the supervisor. And, 60 marks by a bench of the supervisor and the external examiner deputed by Examination
Division (COE), for a total of 100 marks.

ES‐454 / ES‐458: Comprehensive evaluation by the committee of teachers, constituted by the Academic
Programme Committee, out of 100.

ES‐456: Evaluation shall be conducted of 40 marks (Teachers’ continuous evaluation / internal assessment) by
the Training and Placement Officer of the department / institute on the basis of the report submitted by the
student. And, 60 marks by a bench of the Training and Placement Officer of the department / institute and the
external examiner deputed by Examination Division (COE), for a total of 100 marks.

In the absence of the supervisor or the Training and Placement Officer (as the case may be), the Director of the
institute / Head of the Department can assign the responsibility of the supervisor or the Training and Placement
Officer (for purpose of examinations) to any faculty of the department.

Note on Elective Papers: The elective papers shall be allowed to be taken / studied by the students, by the
APC of the department / institute, keeping in view that two papers studied by the student should not have a
substantial overlap. All papers studied by the student should be substantially distinct in content.

Note on Examination of Elective Papers:

(a) Papers with only theory component shall have 25 Marks continuous evaluation by the teacher and 75
Marks term‐end examinations. Both these component marks shall be reflected on the marksheet of the
student.
(b) Papers with only practical component shall have 40 Marks continuous evaluation by the teacher and 60
Marks term‐end examinations. Both these component marks shall be reflected on the marksheet of the
student.

Note on Continuous Evaluation of All Papers:

(a) Papers with only theory component shall have 25 Marks continuous evaluation by the teacher which shall
be evaluated as:
i. Mid‐Term Test* ‐ 15 Marks (after 8 weeks of teaching or as
decided by PCC)
ii. Assignments / Project / Quiz / Case Studies, etc. ‐ 5 Marks
iii. Attendance / Class Participation ‐ 5 Marks
(b) Papers with only practical component shall have 40Marks continuous evaluation by the teacher which shall
be evaluated as:
i. Mid‐Term Test and Viva Voce ‐ 20 Marks (after 8 weeks of teaching or as
decided by PCC)
ii. Practical File ‐ 10 Marks
iii. Attendance / Lab Participation ‐ 10 Marks

* The mid‐term test shall be coordinated by the Programme Coordination Committee.

If a student could not appear for a mid‐term test due to situation beyond the control by the student, a
supplementary test may be arranged towards the end of the semester, in a similar manner to the mid‐term
test for such students. The students must apply for this provision to the department / institution. On
examination of the reason for non‐appearing in the mid‐term test by the Head of the Department / Institute,
and with reason for allowing to appear in the supplementary test to recorded by the Head of the Department
/ Institute, the student may be allowed.

The attendance sheets, the question papers and the award sheets for the continuous evaluation to be
retained by the concerned department / institute for at least 6 months after the declaration of the result by
the Examination Division of the University.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 105
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Programme Core Electives

Semester Paper Code PCE – 1 (Choose Any One) L P Credits

ECE‐306T VHDL Programming 3 3
6
ECE‐306P VHDL Programming Lab 2 1
ECE‐308T Digital Image Processing 3 3
6
ECE‐308P Digital Image Processing Lab 2 1
6 ECE‐310 Mobile Communication 4 4
ECE‐312T Advanced Microprocessors and Microcontroller 3 3
6
ECE‐312P Advanced Microprocessors and Microcontroller Lab 2 1
ECE‐314T RF and Microwave Engineering 3 3
6
ECE‐314P RF and Microwave Engineering Lab 2 1
ECE‐316T Mobile Computing 3 3
6
ECE‐316P Mobile Computing Lab 2 1
ECE‐318T Artificial Intelligence 3 3
6
ECE‐318P Artificial Intelligence Lab 2 1
ECE‐320T Electronic Measurements 3 3
6
ECE‐320P Electronic Measurements Lab 2 1
Semester Paper Code PCE – 2 (Choose Any One) L P Credits
ECE‐322T Fabrication Technology 3 3
6
ECE‐322P Fabrication Technology Lab 2 1
6 ECE‐324 Multimedia Communication 4 4
ECE‐326T Optical Communication Systems and Networks 3 3
6
ECE‐326P Optical Communication Systems and Networks Lab 2 1
6 ECE‐328 Advanced Computer Architecture 4 4
ECE‐330T Antenna Design and Radiating Systems 3 3
6
ECE‐330P Antenna Design and Radiating Systems Lab 2 1
6 ECE‐332 Introduction to Information and Coding Theory 4 4
ECE‐334T Random Processes and Stochastic Systems 3 3
6
ECE‐334P Random Processes and Stochastic Systems Lab 2 1
ECE‐336T Radio and Television Engineering 3 3
6
ECE‐336P Radio and Television Engineering Lab 2 1
Semester Paper Code PCE – 3 (Choose Any One) L P Credits
ECE‐338T CMOS Analog Integrated Circuit Design 3 3
6
ECE‐338P CMOS Analog Integrated Circuit Design Lab 2 1
ECE‐340T Wavelets 3 3
6
ECE‐340P Wavelets Lab 2 1
ECE‐342T Wireless Sensor Networks 3 3
6
ECE‐342P Wireless Sensor Networks Lab 2 1
ECE‐344T Embedded System Architecture and Design 3 3
6
ECE‐344P Embedded System Architecture and Design Lab 2 1
6 ECE‐346 Solid State Microwave Device and their application 4 4
6 ECE‐348 Radar and Satellite Communications 4 4
ECE‐350T Machine Learning 3 3
6
ECE‐350P Machine Learning Lab 2 1
ECE‐354T Introduction to Power Electronics 3 3
6
ECE‐354P Introduction to Power Electronics Lab 2 1
Semester Paper Code PCE – 4 (Choose Any One) L P Credits
ECE‐403T RF Components and Circuit Design 3 3
7
ECE‐403P RF Components and Circuit Design Lab 2 1
ECE‐405T Pattern Recognition 3 3
7
ECE‐405P Pattern Recognition Lab 2 1

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 106
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

7 ECE‐407 Next Generation Networks 4 4

ECE‐409T Micro‐electromechanical Systems (MEMS) and Sensors 3 3
7
ECE‐409P Micro‐electromechanical Systems (MEMS) and Sensors Lab 2 1
ECE‐411T Fuzzy Logic and Neural Networks 3 3
7
ECE‐411P Fuzzy Logic and Neural Networks Lab 2 1
ECE‐413T Ad hoc and Sensor Networks 3 3
7
ECE‐413P Ad hoc and Sensor Networks Lab 2 1
7 ECE‐415 Engineering Optimization 4 4
ECE‐417T Optoelectronics Devices 3 3
7
ECE‐417P Optoelectronics Devices Lab 2 1
ECE‐435T Logic Design and Analysis using Verilog 3 3
7
ECE‐435P Logic Design and Analysis using Verilog Lab 2 1
Semester Paper Code PCE – 5 (Choose Any One) L P Credits
ECE‐419T Low Power VLSI Design 3 3
7
ECE‐419P Low Power VLSI Design Lab 2 1
ECE‐421T Medical Image Processing, Analysis and Reconstruction 3 3
7
ECE‐421P Medical Image Processing, Analysis and Reconstruction Lab 2 1
ECE‐423T Network Security and Cryptography 3 3
7
ECE‐423P Network Security and Cryptography Lab 2 1
7 ECE‐425 Real Time Operating Systems 4 4
ECE‐427T Smart Antennas 3 3
7
ECE‐427P Smart Antennas Lab 2 1
ECE‐429T Introduction to Internet of Things 3 3
7
ECE‐429P Introduction to Internet of Things Lab 2 1
ECE‐431T Nature Inspired Biological Optimization Techniques 3 3
7
ECE‐431P Nature Inspired Biological Optimization Techniques Lab 2 1
7 ECE‐433 Introduction to Robotics Engineering 4 4

Note:
1. An elective shall be offered to the student for each PCE group (That is for PCE‐1, PCE‐2, etc.) based on the
availability of resources and faculty at the institution and at least one third of the batch or at least 20 students
must be willing to take the elective. At least two elective per PCE group must be offered to the students of the
major discipline.

2. Each PCE slot is of 4 credits, if in a particular slot, the paper has no practical component, then it is of 4 credits
(a pure theory paper), otherwise for purpose of examination and conduct of classes, the course is split in two
papers, namely a theory paper of 3 credits and a practical paper of 1 credit. The student has to study for 4
credits per slot of PCE group. This is reflected by suffixing the paper code by T (for Theory component) and P
(for Practical component), if required.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 107
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Implementation Rules:

1. The examinations, attendance criteria to appear in examinations, promotion and award of the degree
shall be governed by the Ordinance 11 of the University. The term “major discipline” / “primary discipline”
in this document refers to the discipline in which student is admitted / studies from 3rd semester onwards.
However credits of courses / paper for OAE / EAE groups shall not be considered for the purpose of
promotion from one year of study to the subsequent year of study.
2. Minimum duration of the Bachelor of Technology programme shall be 4 years (N=4 years) (8 semesters)
for the students admitted in the 1st year and 1st semester of the degree programme. Lateral entry students
shall be admitted in the 2nd year and 3rd semester of the degree programme (effectively in the batch
admitted in the first year in the previous academic session and shall be deemed to have been exempted
from the courses / papers of the first year of the degree programme. No exemption certificate shall be
issued in any case.
A specific lateral entry students’ minimum duration shall be the same as the minimum duration for the
batch in which he/she is admitted as a lateral entry student in the 2nd year.
3. Maximum duration of the Bachelor of Technology programme shall be 6 years (N+2 years). After
completion of N+2 years of study, if the student has appeared in the papers of all the semesters upto 8th
semester, then a maximum extension of 1 year may be given to the student for completing the
requirements of the degree if and only if the number of credits already earned by the student is atleast 150
(for lateral entry students it shall be at least 102 credits) from the (non‐honours components). Otherwise,
the admission of the student shall stand cancelled. After the period of allowed study, the admission of the
student shall be cancelled.
A specific lateral entry students’ maximum duration shall be the same as the minimum duration for the
batch in which he/she is admitted as a lateral entry student in the 2nd year.
4. The degree shall be awarded only after the fulfilment of all requirements of the Scheme and Syllabus of
Examinations and the applicable Ordinance.
5. (a) The students shall undergo the following group of Courses / Papers as enumerated in the scheme (For
the students admitted in the First Year / First Semester).

Semester (Credits) Total Mandatory

Group
I & II III IV V VI VII VIII Credits Credits

BS 24 5 29 14

HS/MS 6 2 2 2 6 2 20 10

ES 20 5 25 15

PC 19 19 24 4 20 86 76

PCE 12 8 20 16

EAE/OAE 8 12 20 16

Total 50 26 26 26 26 26 20 200 147

TABLE 1: Distribution of Credits (Project / Internship credits are 25 out the 86 credits for Programme Core
(PC) credits, while extra‐curricular activities credits are 2 out of 20 credits for Humanities / Management
/ Social Science Group (HS/MS)) . This table is for students admitted in the First Year / First Semester of
the Degree Programme.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 108
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

(b) The students admitted as Lateral Entry shall undergo the following group of Courses / Papers as
enumerated in the scheme.

Semester (Credits) Total Mandatory

Group
III IV V VI VII VIII Credits Credits

BS 5 5 0

HS/MS 2 2 2 6 2 14 7

ES 5 5 0

PC 19 19 24 4 20 86 76

PCE 12 8 20 16

EAE/OAE 8 12 20 16

Total 26 26 26 26 26 20 150 115

TABLE 2: Distribution of Credits (Project / Internship credits are 25 out the 86 credits for Programme Core
(PC) credits, while extra‐curricular activities credits are 2 out of 14 credits for Humanities / Management
/ Social Science Group (HS/MS)) This table is for students admitted as Lateral Entry Students in the
Second Year / Third Semester of the Degree Programme.

6. Mandatory Credits specify the number of credits from each subject group to be mandatorily acquired by
the student for the award of the degree,for students admitted as students in the 1st year and 1st semester
of the degree programme. While for students admitted as lateral entry in the 2nd year and 3rd semester
the Mandatory Credits value is 115, and specify the number of credits from each subject group to be
mandatorily acquired by the student for the award of the degree (Table 2). See clause 11 and 12 also.
7. Some of the papers are droppable in the sense that the student may qualify for the award of the degree
even when the student has not cleared / passed some of the papers of these group. However, the student
has to earn the minimum credits for the programme of study as specified. See clause 11 and 12 also.
8. The students may take 5 subjects from EAE / OAE groups. The open electives of the OAE group of courses
may also be taken through SWAYAM / NPTEL MOOCs platform. The student desirous of doing a MOOC
based course among the OAE group must seek approval of the APC of the institute for the same before the
commencement of the semester. The APC shall allow the MOOC based OAE option to the student if and
only if the MOOC subject / course being considered for the student is being offered in line with the
Academic Calendar applicable. The student shall submit the successful completion certificate with marks to
the institution for onwards transfer to the Examination Division. The Examinations Division shall take these
marks on record for incorporation in the result of the appropriate semester. These marks / grades of these
courses shall be used for calculation of the SGPA/CGPA of the student concerned by the examination
division of the University. If a student takes even one OAE paper through MOOCs, then the student shall
not be eligible for minor specialization. The degree to the student on fulfilment of other requirements for
such cases shall be through clause 12.b. or 12.c.
These MOOC courses taken by the students, if allowed by the APC of the institute shall be of 4 credits or
more collectively to be against or for one paper slot in the scheme, through MOOCs, though the marks
shall be shown individually. That is in one paper slot in the scheme wherever a MOOC course is allowed,
the student may register for more than one paper to aggregate 4 credits or more. If the credits of these
MOOC Courses, allowed to a student is more than 4, then the maximum credit for the programme shall
be amended accordingly for the particular student. Also, in a particular semester, a student may take
more than one MOOC course with the approval of the APC to meet the credit requirements of OAE for the
semester. The cost of taking the MOOC course is to be borne by the concerned student. The results of the
MOOC courses shall be declared separately by the Examination Division from the result for the papers
conducted by the examination division of the University.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 109
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

9. To earn an Honours degree, the student may enrol for 20 credits or more through SWAYAM / NPTEL
MOOCs platform. This point has to be read together with other points specially point 13 and 14. The
acquisition of the credits should be completed before the 15th of the July of the Admission Year plus 4
years. That is, if a student is admitted in the year X, then these credits must be acquired through MOOCs by
15th July of the year (X+4), no extra duration or time shall be allocated, this means, the student must
submit the result of such papers on or before 15th July of the Admission Year plus 4 years.
Honours in the degree shall be awarded if and only if at least 20 credits are acquired through MOOCs. To
obtain Honours in the programme, the student must apply to the institution about the same before the
commencement of the 5th semester. The specific courses through MOOCs shall be registered by the
student only after approval by the Academic Programme Committee (APC) of the Institute. The APC shall
approve the course if it is not already studied by the student or the student shall not study it in future and
adds value to the major area of specialization (which is the degree). The papers for which the student
desires to appear for Honours through MOOCs, all papers results shall be submitted by the student to the
Institute for onwards transfer to Examination Division of the University, to be taken on record of the
University. The results of these papers shall be a part of the records of the examinations of the students.
The records shall be submitted by the student to the Institute, then transferred to the Examination
Division, shall be notified by the Examination Division of the University, and a separate marksheet shall be
issued by the Examination Division. The cost of taking the MOOC course is to be borne by the concerned
student. Such courses shall be reflected as additional courses / papers for the student.
If a student acquires less than 20 credits through MOOCs, following the mechanism specified, then also
the results of these papers shall be taken on record as specified above, though no Honours degree shall
be awarded.
The papers through MOOCs for Honours degree shall not be a part of the set of the papers over which the
SGPA / CGPA of the student shall be calculated.
The papers through MOOCs for Honours degree shall be additional papers studied by the students and are
to be taken into account only for award of Honours in the degree programme, if 20 credits are earned
through MOOCs as approved by APC, by a student. See Clause 13 also.
10. Maximum Credits is at least 200 (Table 1) for students admitted in the 1st year and 1st semester, these are
the credits for which the student shall have to study for the non‐Honours component of the curriculum.
And, for lateral entry students admitted in the 2nd year and 3rd semester of the degree programme, the
maximum credit required to be studied is at least 150 (Table 2). See clause 8 also.
The student has to appear in the examinations for these credits in all components of evaluation as
specified in the scheme of studies.
11. Minimum Credits required to be earned is atleast 180 (out of the 200 non Honours papers credits, see
clause 10 also) for students admitted in the 1st year and 1st semester. And, for lateral entry students
admitted in the 2nd year and 3rd semester of the degree programme, the minimum credit required to be
earned Is at least 135 (out of the 150 non Honours papers credits, see clause 10 also). See clause 6 also.
12. The following degree route can be taken by a student (also refer point 13):
a. The students shall be awarded one minor specialization, one from EAE/OEA route under the following
conditions:
i. The student has earned the mandatory credits as defined in Table 1 or Table 2 (as applicable) and
clause 6.
ii. The student earns 20 credits from one group of EAE / OAE courses offered as a minor
specialization by the institute.
iii. In addition, the total credits (including the above specified credits) earned by the student is atleast
as specified in clause 11.
The degree nomenclature of the degree shall be as: “Bachelor of Technology in Electronics and
Communications Engineering with Minor Specializations in <concerned EAE/OAE discipline>”; if
criteria / point 9 is not satisfied for Honours. Otherwise, if criteria / point 9 is met, then the degree

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 110
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

shall be an Honours degree and the nomenclature shall be as: “Bachelor of Technology in Electronics
and Communications Engineering with Minor Specializations in <concerned EAE/OAE discipline>)
(Honours)”, if in addition to point 12.a.i, 12.a.ii, and 12.a.iii, the student fulfils the criteria for Honours
as specified at point 9.
b. The students shall be awarded the degree without any minor specialization under the following
conditions:
i. The student has earned the mandatory credits as defined in Table 1 or Table 2 (as applicable) and
clause 6.
ii. In addition, the total credits (including the above specified credits) earned by the student is atleast
as specified in clause 11.
The degree nomenclature of the degree shall be as: “Bachelor of Technology in Electronics and
Communications Engineering”; if criteria / point 9 is not satisfied for Honours. Otherwise, if criteria /
point 9 is met, then the degrees shall be an Honours degree and the nomenclature shall be as:
“Bachelor of Technology in Electronics and Communications Engineering (Honours)”, if in addition to
point 12.b.i and 12.b.ii, the student fulfils the criteria for Honours as specified at point 9.
c. If the student does not fulfil any of the above criterions (point 12.a, or 12.b), if the student earns at
least the minimum credits specified in clause 11 (disregarding the mandatory credits clause of Table 1
or Table 2 (as applicable) and Clause 6), then the student shall be award the degree as “Bachelor of
Technology in Electronics and Communications Engineering”. Such students shall not be eligible for
the award of an Honours degree. Though, if credits are accumulated through MOOCs as per clause 9,
the same shall be reflected in the marksheets of the students.
13. The Honours degree shall only be awarded if the CGPA of the student is above or equal to 7.5 in addition
to fulfilment of criteria / point 10 and 13 above and the degree is awarded after the immediate
completion of the 4th year of the batch from the year of admission. No Honours shall be conferred if the
degree requirements are not completed in the minimum duration.
14. Pass marks in every paper shall be 40.
15. Grading System shall be as per Ordinance 11 of the University.
16. The Programme Core Electives (PCE) shall be specific to a major discipline, minor specializations and papers
for EAE shall be defined by the school defining the syllabus for the particular areas and minor
specializations and papers for OAE shall be defined by the schools defining the elective streams.
17. Minor specialization in non‐engineering disciplines may be offered under the aegis of the other schools
(provided the individual institutions are offering programmes under the aegis of the school offering the
non‐engineering minor specialization). The minor specialization framework of 20 credits has to be
offered within the framework of the current Scheme of Studies of the primary / major discipline.
18. The institution shall offer atleast two elective groups out of the emerging area / open area for students of
each major discipline. The emerging area / open electives can also be offered as standalone papers not
forming a part of any elective groups also. The institute shall decide the group(s) and/or individual papers
to be offered as electives based on the availability of infrastructure and faculty. From the groups / papers
offered by the institute, an elective paper / group shall be taught if and only if the number of students in a
paper is at‐least 20 or at‐least 1/3 of the students of a major / primary discipline for which the paper /
group is to be offered. The APC of the department / institute may define a maximum number of students
allowed to register for a paper as an elective (EAE / OAE).
19. The institution shall offer atleast two elective papers from each program core elective group for students
of each major / primary discipline. The institute shall decide the individual papers to be offered as electives
(PCE) based on the availability of infrastructure and faculty. From the papers offered by the institute, an
elective paper shall be taught if and only if the number of students in a paper is at‐least 20 or at‐least 1/3
of the students of a major / primary discipline for which the paper is to be offered. The APC of the
department / institute may define a maximum number of students allowed to register for a paper as an
elective (PCE).

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 111
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

20. Teachers of the other department(s), as and when deputed by their department, for teaching the students
enrolled in programmes offered by the department offering the programme shall be a part of the
Academic Programme Committee of the discipline. Such teachers, for all academic matters, including
teaching, teachers’ continuous evaluation, term end examinations etc. shall be governed by the decisions
of the APC of department offering the programme of study. Similarly, the guest faculty, the visiting faculty
and the Contract / Ad Hoc faculty as and when deputed to teach students of a particular department shall
form a part of APC of the department.
21. The Paper IDs will be generated / issued / assigned by the Examination Division of the University.

22. The medium of instructions shall be English.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 112
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Bachelor of Technology in Electrical Engineering (EE)

2nd Year Onward Scheme and implementation guideline

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 113
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Third Semester
Paper
Group Paper L P Credits
Code
Theory Papers
ES ES‐201 Computational Methods 4 4
HS/MS HS‐203 Indian Knowledge System* 2 2
PC ECC‐205 Signals and Systems 3 3
PC EEC‐209 Electrical Materials 3 3
PC EEC‐211 Electrical Machines ‐ I 4 4
PC ECC‐213 Electromagnetic Field Theory 3 3
PC ECC‐215 Electronics – I 3 3
Practical / Viva Voce
ES ES‐251 Computational Methods Lab 2 1
PC EEC‐257 Electrical Machines – I Lab 2 1
PC EEC‐259 Electrical Engineering Workshop 2 1
PC ECC‐261 Electronics ‐ I Lab 2 1
Total 22 8 26

*NUES:All examinations to be conducted by the concerned teacher as specified in the detailed syllabus of the paper.

Fourth Semester
Paper
Group Paper L P Credits
Code
Theory Papers
BS BS‐202 Probability, Statistics and Linear Programming 4 4
HS/MS HS‐204 Technical Writing* 2 2
PC EEC‐206 Network Analysis and Synthesis 3 3
PC EEC‐210 Electrical Machines ‐ II 4 4
PC EEC‐212 Power Systems ‐ I 4 4
PC ECC‐218 Electronics ‐ II 4 4
Practical / Viva Voce
BS BS‐252 Probability, Statistics and Linear Programming Lab 2 1
PC EEC‐256 Electrical Machines ‐ II Lab 2 1
PC EEC‐260 Power Systems ‐ I Lab 2 1
PC EEC‐262 Network Analysis and Synthesis Lab 2 1
PC ECC‐264 Electronics ‐ II Lab 2 1
Total 21 10 26

*NUES:All examinations to be conducted by the concerned teacher as specified in the detailed syllabus of the paper.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 114
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Fifth Semester
Paper
Group Paper L P Credits
Code
Theory Papers
HS/MS HS‐301 Economics for Engineers 2 2
PC EEC‐303 Power Systems – II 4 4
PC EEC‐305 Electrical and Electronics Measuring Instruments 4 4
PC EEC‐307 Introduction to Control Systems 3 3
PC EEC‐309 Power Electronics 4 4
PC ECC‐313 Microprocessors and Microcontrollers 3 3
Practical / Viva Voce
PC EEC‐351 Power Systems – II Lab 2 1
PC EEC‐353 Electrical and Electronics Measuring Instruments Lab 2 1
PC EEC‐355 Introduction to Control Systems Lab 2 1
PC EEC‐357 Power Electronics Lab 2 1
PC ECC‐363 Microprocessors and Microcontrollers Lab 2 1
PC / Internship ES‐361 Summer Training Report ‐ 1 * 1
Total 20 10 26

*NUES:Comprehensive evaluation of the Summer Training Report – 1 (after 4th Semester) shall be done by the committee
of teachers, constituted by the Academic Programme Committee, out of 100. The training shall be of 4 to 6 weeks duration.
The training can be under the mentorship of a teacher of the institute.

Sixth Semester
Paper
Group Paper L P Credits
Code
Theory Papers
HS/MS MS‐302 Principles of Management for Engineers 3 3
HS/MS HS‐304 Universal Human Values* 1 1
PCE Programme Core Elective Paper (PCE –1) 4
PCE Programme Core Elective Paper (PCE – 2) 4
PCE Programme Core Elective Paper (PCE – 3) 4
EAE / OAE Emerging Area/Open Area Elective Paper (EAE – 1 /OAE – 1) 4
EAE / OAE Emerging Area/Open Area Elective Paper (EAE – 2 /OAE – 2) 4
Practical / Viva Voce
NSS / NCC / Cultural Clubs / Technical Society / Technical
HS/MS HS‐352 2
Club**
Total 26

*NUES:All examinations to be conducted by the concerned teacher as specified in the detailed syllabus of the paper.

**NUES: Comprehensive evaluation of the students by the concerned coordinator of NCC / NSS / Cultural Clubs / Technical
Society / Technical Clubs, out of 100 as per the evaluation schemes worked out by these activity societies, organizations; the
faculty co‐ordinators shall be responsible for the evaluation of the same. These activities shall start from the 1st semester
and the evaluation shall be conducted at the end of the 6th semester for students admitted in the first semester. Students
nd rd
admitted in the 2 year (3 semester) as lateral entry shall be evaluated on the basis their performance, by the faculty co‐
rd th
ordinator for the period of 3 semester to 6 semester only.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 115
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Seventh Semester
Paper
Group Paper L P Credits
Code
Theory Papers
HS/MS MS‐401 Principles of Entrepreneurship Mindset 2 2
PCE Programme Core Elective Paper (PCE – 4) 4
PCE Programme Core Elective Paper (PCE – 5) 4
EAE / OAE Emerging Area / Open Area Elective Paper (EAE – 3 / OAE – 3) 4
EAE / OAE Emerging Area / Open Area Elective Paper (EAE – 4 / OAE – 4) 4
EAE / OAE Emerging Area / Open Area Elective Paper (EAE – 5 / OAE – 5) 4
Practical / Viva Voce
PC / Project ES‐451 Minor Project** 3
PC / Internship ES‐453 Summer Training Report ‐ 2 * 1
Total 26

*NUES:Comprehensive evaluation of the Summer Training Report – 2 (after 6th Semester) shall be done by the committee
of teachers, constituted by the Academic Programme Committee, out of 100. The training shall be of 4 to 6 weeks duration.
The training can be under the mentorship of a teacher of the institute.

**The student shall be allocated a supervisor / guide for project work at the end 6th semester by the department /
institution, the project shall continue into the 8th semester. In the 7th semester evaluation, the criteria for evaluation shall
be conceptualization of the project work, the background study / literature survey and identification of objectives and
methodology to be followed for project. 40 marks evaluation for the Teachers' Continuous Evaluation / Internal Assessment
shall be done by concerned supervisor while the term end examination of 60 marks shall be conducted by the supervisor
concerned and the external examiner deputed by the Examinations Division. In the absence of the supervisor, the Director
of the Institution / Head of the Department can assign the responsibility of the supervisor (for purpose of examinations) to
any faculty of the Institution / Department.

Eight Semester
Paper
Group Paper L P Credits
Code
%
Practical / Viva Voce
ES‐452 Major Project – Dissertation and Viva Voce# 18
PC / Project
ES‐454 Project Progress Evaluation* 2
#
ES‐456 Internship Report and Viva Voce 18
PC / Internship
ES‐458 Internship Progress Evaluation* 2
Total 0 0 20

*NUES: Comprehensive evaluation by the committee of teachers, constituted by the Academic Programme
Committee, out of 100.

%By default every student shall do the project work (ES‐452 and ES‐454). A student shall either be allowed to
do a project work (ES‐452 and ES‐454) or an internship (ES‐456 and ES‐458). The student must apply for
approval to do internship before the commencement of the 8th semester to the institute, and only after
approval of Principal / Director of the institute through Training and Placement Officer of the institute, shall
proceed for internship.

#Students may be allowed to do internship in this semester in lieu of Major project. The students allowed to
proceed for internship shall be required to maintain a log‐book of activities performed during internship. The
same has to be countersigned by the mentor at the organization where internship is completed.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 116
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

ES‐452: Evaluation shall be conducted of 40 marks (Teachers’ continuous evaluation / internal assessment) by
the supervisor. And, 60 marks by a bench of the supervisor and the external examiner deputed by Examination
Division (COE), for a total of 100 marks.

ES‐454 / ES‐458: Comprehensive evaluation by the committee of teachers, constituted by the Academic
Programme Committee, out of 100.

ES‐456: Evaluation shall be conducted of 40 marks (Teachers’ continuous evaluation / internal assessment) by
the Training and Placement Officer of the department / institute on the basis of the report submitted by the
student. And, 60 marks by a bench of the Training and Placement Officer of the department / institute and the
external examiner deputed by Examination Division (COE), for a total of 100 marks.

In the absence of the supervisor or the Training and Placement Officer (as the case may be), the Director of the
institute / Head of the Department can assign the responsibility of the supervisor or the Training and Placement
Officer (for purpose of examinations) to any faculty of the department.

Note on Elective Papers: The elective papers shall be allowed to be taken / studied by the students, by the
APC of the department / institute, keeping in view that two papers studied by the student should not have a
substantial overlap. All papers studied by the student should be substantially distinct in content.

Note on Examination of Elective Papers:

(a) Papers with only theory component shall have 25 Marks continuous evaluation by the teacher and 75
Marks term‐end examinations. Both these component marks shall be reflected on the marksheet of the
student.
(b) Papers with only practical component shall have 40 Marks continuous evaluation by the teacher and 60
Marks term‐end examinations. Both these component marks shall be reflected on the marksheet of the
student.

Note on Continuous Evaluation of All Papers:

(a) Papers with only theory component shall have 25 Marks continuous evaluation by the teacher which shall
be evaluated as:
i. Mid‐Term Test* ‐ 15 Marks (after 8 weeks of teaching or as
decided by PCC)
ii. Assignments / Project / Quiz / Case Studies, etc. ‐ 5 Marks
iii. Attendance / Class Participation ‐ 5 Marks
(b) Papers with only practical component shall have 40Marks continuous evaluation by the teacher which shall
be evaluated as:
i. Mid‐Term Test and Viva Voce ‐ 20 Marks (after 8 weeks of teaching or as
decided by PCC)
ii. Practical File ‐ 10 Marks
iii. Attendance / Lab Participation ‐ 10 Marks

* The mid‐term test shall be coordinated by the Programme Coordination Committee.

If a student could not appear for a mid‐term test due to situation beyond the control by the student, a
supplementary test may be arranged towards the end of the semester, in a similar manner to the mid‐term
test for such students. The students must apply for this provision to the department / institution. On
examination of the reason for non‐appearing in the mid‐term test by the Head of the Department / Institute,
and with reason for allowing to appear in the supplementary test to recorded by the Head of the Department
/ Institute, the student may be allowed.

The attendance sheets, the question papers and the award sheets for the continuous evaluation to be
retained by the concerned department / institute for at least 6 months after the declaration of the result by
the Examination Division of the University.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 117
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Programme Core Electives

Semester Paper Code PCE – 1 (Choose Any One) L P Credits
6 EEE‐308 Artificial Intelligence and Machine Learning for Electrical Systems 4 4
EEE‐310T Bio Medical Instrumentation 3 3
6
EEE‐310P Bio Medical Instrumentation Lab 2 1
EEE‐312T Introduction to Digital Signal Processing 3 3
6
EEE‐312P Introduction to Digital Signal Processing Lab 2 1
6 EEE‐318 Stochastic Processes and Systems 4 4
EEE‐320T Utilization of Electrical Energy 3 3
6
EEE‐320P Utilization of Electrical Energy Lab 2 1
6 EEE‐358 Electrical Power Generation Systems 4 4
Semester Paper Code PCE – 2 (Choose Any One) L P Credits
EEE‐322T Computer Aided Electrical Machine Design 3 3
6
EEE‐322P Computer Aided Electrical Machine Design Lab 2 1
EEE‐324T Introduction to Data Communication and Networking 3 3
6
EEE‐324P Introduction to Data Communication and Networking Lab 2 1
EEE‐326T Discrete Control Systems 3 3
6
EEE‐326P Discrete Control Systems Lab 2 1
EEE‐334T Research Methodology for Electrical & Electronics Engineering 3 3
6 Research Methodology for Electrical & Electronics Engineering
EEE‐334P 2 1
Lab
Introduction to Transmission Lines, Waveguides and Antenna
EEE‐336T 3 3
Design
6
Introduction to Transmission Lines, Waveguides and Antenna
EEE‐336P 2 1
Design Lab
Semester Paper Code PCE – 3 (Choose Any One) L P Credits
EEE‐340T Electric Drives 3 3
6
EEE‐340P Electric Drives Lab 2 1
EEE‐356T Optimization using Controllers 3 3
6
EEE‐356P Optimization using Controllers lab 2 1
6 EEE‐360 Process Control 4 4
EEE‐362T VLSI 3 3
6
EEE‐362P VLSI Lab 2 1
EEE‐364T Systems Design and Simulation 3 3
6
EEE‐364P Systems Design and Simulation Lab 2 1
6 EEE‐366 Introduction to Information and Coding Theory 4 4
Semester Paper Code PCE – 4 (Choose Any One) L P Credits
7 EEE‐403 Electricity Distribution Schemes and Policies 4 4
EEE‐405T Mathematical Analysis of Complex Systems 3 3
7
EEE‐405P Mathematical Analysis of Complex Systems Lab 2 1
7 EEE‐407 Renewable Energy and Policies 4 4
EEE‐409T Solid State Drives 3 3
7
EEE‐409P Solid State Drives Lab 2 1
EEE‐411T Switchgear and Protection 3 3
7
EEE‐411P Switchgear and Protection Lab 2 1
EEE‐413T Digital Image Processing 3 3
7
EEE‐413P Digital Image Processing Lab 2 1
Semester Paper Code PCE – 5 (Choose Any One) L P Credits
EEE‐421T e‐Mobility 3 3
7
EEE‐421P e‐Mobility Lab 2 1
7 EEE‐423 Energy Conservation Schemes 4 4
7 EEE‐425 Energy Economics and Policies 4 4
7 EEE‐427 High Voltage Engineering 4 4

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 118
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Mathematical Model for Reliability of Transmission and

EEE‐429T 3 3
Distribution
7
Mathematical Model for Reliability of Transmission and
EEE‐429P 2 1
Distribution Lab
7 EEE‐431 Smart Grid and Distributed Generation 4 4
EEE‐433T Systems Restructuring for Optimization 3 3
7
EEE‐433P Systems Restructuring for Optimization Lab 2 1

Note:
1. An elective shall be offered to the student for each PCE group (That is for PCE‐1, PCE‐2, etc.) based on the
availability of resources and faculty at the institution and at least one third of the batch or at least 20 students
must be willing to take the elective. At least two elective per PCE group must be offered to the students of the
major discipline.

2. Each PCE slot is of 4 credits, if in a particular slot, the paper has no practical component, then it is of 4 credits
(a pure theory paper), otherwise for purpose of examination and conduct of classes, the course is split in two
papers, namely a theory paper of 3 credits and a practical paper of 1 credit. The student has to study for 4
credits per slot of PCE group. This is reflected by suffixing the paper code by T (for Theory component) and P
(for Practical component), if required.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 119
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Implementation Rules:

1. The examinations, attendance criteria to appear in examinations, promotion and award of the degree
shall be governed by the Ordinance 11 of the University. The term “major discipline” / “primary discipline”
in this document refers to the discipline in which student is admitted / studies from 3rd semester onwards.
However credits of courses / paper for OAE / EAE groups shall not be considered for the purpose of
promotion from one year of study to the subsequent year of study.
2. Minimum duration of the Bachelor of Technology programme shall be 4 years (N=4 years) (8 semesters)
for the students admitted in the 1st year and 1st semester of the degree programme. Lateral entry students
shall be admitted in the 2nd year and 3rd semester of the degree programme (effectively in the batch
admitted in the first year in the previous academic session and shall be deemed to have been exempted
from the courses / papers of the first year of the degree programme. No exemption certificate shall be
issued in any case.
A specific lateral entry students’ minimum duration shall be the same as the minimum duration for the
batch in which he/she is admitted as a lateral entry student in the 2nd year.
3. Maximum duration of the Bachelor of Technology programme shall be 6 years (N+2 years). After
completion of N+2 years of study, if the student has appeared in the papers of all the semesters upto 8th
semester, then a maximum extension of 1 year may be given to the student for completing the
requirements of the degree if and only if the number of credits already earned by the student is atleast 150
(for lateral entry students it shall be at least 102 credits) from the (non‐honours components). Otherwise,
the admission of the student shall stand cancelled. After the period of allowed study, the admission of the
student shall be cancelled.
A specific lateral entry students’ maximum duration shall be the same as the minimum duration for the
batch in which he/she is admitted as a lateral entry student in the 2nd year.
4. The degree shall be awarded only after the fulfilment of all requirements of the Scheme and Syllabus of
Examinations and the applicable Ordinance.
5. (a) The students shall undergo the following group of Courses / Papers as enumerated in the scheme (For
the students admitted in the First Year / First Semester).

Semester (Credits) Total Mandatory

Group
I & II III IV V VI VII VIII Credits Credits

BS 24 5 29 14

HS/MS 6 2 2 2 6 2 20 10

ES 20 5 25 15

PC 19 19 24 4 20 86 76

PCE 12 8 20 16

EAE/OAE 8 12 20 16

Total 50 26 26 26 26 26 20 200 147

TABLE 1: Distribution of Credits (Project / Internship credits are 25 out the 86 credits for Programme Core
(PC) credits, while extra‐curricular activities credits are 2 out of 20 credits for Humanities / Management
/ Social Science Group (HS/MS)) . This table is for students admitted in the First Year / First Semester of
the Degree Programme.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 120
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

(b) The students admitted as Lateral Entry shall undergo the following group of Courses / Papers as
enumerated in the scheme.

Semester (Credits) Total Mandatory

Group
III IV V VI VII VIII Credits Credits

BS 5 5 0

HS/MS 2 2 2 6 2 14 7

ES 5 5 0

PC 19 19 24 4 20 86 76

PCE 12 8 20 16

EAE/OAE 8 12 20 16

Total 26 26 26 26 26 20 150 115

TABLE 2: Distribution of Credits (Project / Internship credits are 25 out the 86 credits for Programme Core
(PC) credits, while extra‐curricular activities credits are 2 out of 14 credits for Humanities / Management
/ Social Science Group (HS/MS)) This table is for students admitted as Lateral Entry Students in the
Second Year / Third Semester of the Degree Programme.

6. Mandatory Credits specify the number of credits from each subject group to be mandatorily acquired by
the student for the award of the degree,for students admitted as students in the 1st year and 1st semester
of the degree programme. While for students admitted as lateral entry in the 2nd year and 3rd semester
the Mandatory Credits value is 115, and specify the number of credits from each subject group to be
mandatorily acquired by the student for the award of the degree (Table 2). See clause 11 and 12 also.
7. Some of the papers are droppable in the sense that the student may qualify for the award of the degree
even when the student has not cleared / passed some of the papers of these group. However, the student
has to earn the minimum credits for the programme of study as specified. See clause 11 and 12 also.
8. The students may take 5 subjects from EAE / OAE groups. The open electives of the OAE group of courses
may also be taken through SWAYAM / NPTEL MOOCs platform. The student desirous of doing a MOOC
based course among the OAE group must seek approval of the APC of the institute for the same before the
commencement of the semester. The APC shall allow the MOOC based OAE option to the student if and
only if the MOOC subject / course being considered for the student is being offered in line with the
Academic Calendar applicable. The student shall submit the successful completion certificate with marks to
the institution for onwards transfer to the Examination Division. The Examinations Division shall take these
marks on record for incorporation in the result of the appropriate semester. These marks / grades of these
courses shall be used for calculation of the SGPA/CGPA of the student concerned by the examination
division of the University. If a student takes even one OAE paper through MOOCs, then the student shall
not be eligible for minor specialization. The degree to the student on fulfilment of other requirements for
such cases shall be through clause 12.b. or 12.c.
These MOOC courses taken by the students, if allowed by the APC of the institute shall be of 4 credits or
more collectively to be against or for one paper slot in the scheme, through MOOCs, though the marks
shall be shown individually. That is in one paper slot in the scheme wherever a MOOC course is allowed,
the student may register for more than one paper to aggregate 4 credits or more. If the credits of these
MOOC Courses, allowed to a student is more than 4, then the maximum credit for the programme shall
be amended accordingly for the particular student. Also, in a particular semester, a student may take
more than one MOOC course with the approval of the APC to meet the credit requirements of OAE for the
semester. The cost of taking the MOOC course is to be borne by the concerned student. The results of the
MOOC courses shall be declared separately by the Examination Division from the result for the papers
conducted by the examination division of the University.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 121
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

9. To earn an Honours degree, the student may enrol for 20 credits or more through SWAYAM / NPTEL
MOOCs platform. This point has to be read together with other points specially point 13 and 14. The
acquisition of the credits should be completed before the 15th of the July of the Admission Year plus 4
years. That is, if a student is admitted in the year X, then these credits must be acquired through MOOCs by
15th July of the year (X+4), no extra duration or time shall be allocated, this means, the student must
submit the result of such papers on or before 15th July of the Admission Year plus 4 years.
Honours in the degree shall be awarded if and only if at least 20 credits are acquired through MOOCs. To
obtain Honours in the programme, the student must apply to the institution about the same before the
commencement of the 5th semester. The specific courses through MOOCs shall be registered by the
student only after approval by the Academic Programme Committee (APC) of the Institute. The APC shall
approve the course if it is not already studied by the student or the student shall not study it in future and
adds value to the major area of specialization (which is the degree). The papers for which the student
desires to appear for Honours through MOOCs, all papers results shall be submitted by the student to the
Institute for onwards transfer to Examination Division of the University, to be taken on record of the
University. The results of these papers shall be a part of the records of the examinations of the students.
The records shall be submitted by the student to the Institute, then transferred to the Examination
Division, shall be notified by the Examination Division of the University, and a separate marksheet shall be
issued by the Examination Division. The cost of taking the MOOC course is to be borne by the concerned
student. Such courses shall be reflected as additional courses / papers for the student.
If a student acquires less than 20 credits through MOOCs, following the mechanism specified, then also
the results of these papers shall be taken on record as specified above, though no Honours degree shall
be awarded.
The papers through MOOCs for Honours degree shall not be a part of the set of the papers over which the
SGPA / CGPA of the student shall be calculated.
The papers through MOOCs for Honours degree shall be additional papers studied by the students and are
to be taken into account only for award of Honours in the degree programme, if 20 credits are earned
through MOOCs as approved by APC, by a student. See Clause 13 also.
10. Maximum Credits is at least 200 (Table 1) for students admitted in the 1st year and 1st semester, these are
the credits for which the student shall have to study for the non‐Honours component of the curriculum.
And, for lateral entry students admitted in the 2nd year and 3rd semester of the degree programme, the
maximum credit required to be studied is at least 150 (Table 2). See clause 8 also.
The student has to appear in the examinations for these credits in all components of evaluation as
specified in the scheme of studies.
11. Minimum Credits required to be earned is atleast 180 (out of the 200 non Honours papers credits, see
clause 10 also) for students admitted in the 1st year and 1st semester. And, for lateral entry students
admitted in the 2nd year and 3rd semester of the degree programme, the minimum credit required to be
earned Is at least 135 (out of the 150 non Honours papers credits, see clause 10 also). See clause 6 also.
12. The following degree route can be taken by a student (also refer point 13):
a. The students shall be awarded one minor specialization, one from EAE/OEA route under the following
conditions:
i. The student has earned the mandatory credits as defined in Table 1 or Table 2 (as applicable) and
clause 6.
ii. The student earns 20 credits from one group of EAE / OAE courses offered as a minor
specialization by the institute.
iii. In addition, the total credits (including the above specified credits) earned by the student is atleast
as specified in clause 11.
The degree nomenclature of the degree shall be as: “Bachelor of Technology in Electrical Engineering
with Minor Specializations in <concerned EAE/OAE discipline>”; if criteria / point 9 is not satisfied for
Honours. Otherwise, if criteria / point 9 is met, then the degree shall be an Honours degree and the

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 122
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

nomenclature shall be as: “Bachelor of Technology in Electrical Engineering with Minor

Specializations in <concerned EAE/OAE discipline>) (Honours)”, if in addition to point 12.a.i, 12.a.ii,
and 12.a.iii, the student fulfils the criteria for Honours as specified at point 9.
b. The students shall be awarded the degree without any minor specialization under the following
conditions:
i. The student has earned the mandatory credits as defined in Table 1 or Table 2 (as applicable) and
clause 6.
ii. In addition, the total credits (including the above specified credits) earned by the student is atleast
as specified in clause 11.
The degree nomenclature of the degree shall be as: “Bachelor of Technology in Electrical
Engineering”; if criteria / point 9 is not satisfied for Honours. Otherwise, if criteria / point 9 is met,
then the degrees shall be an Honours degree and the nomenclature shall be as: “Bachelor of
Technology in Electrical Engineering (Honours)”, if in addition to point 12.b.i and 12.b.ii, the student
fulfils the criteria for Honours as specified at point 9.
c. If the student does not fulfil any of the above criterions (point 12.a, or 12.b), if the student earns at
least the minimum credits specified in clause 11 (disregarding the mandatory credits clause of Table 1
or Table 2 (as applicable) and Clause 6), then the student shall be award the degree as “Bachelor of
Technology in Electrical Engineering”. Such students shall not be eligible for the award of an Honours
degree. Though, if credits are accumulated through MOOCs as per clause 9, the same shall be
reflected in the marksheets of the students.
13. The Honours degree shall only be awarded if the CGPA of the student is above or equal to 7.5 in addition
to fulfilment of criteria / point 10 and 13 above and the degree is awarded after the immediate
completion of the 4th year of the batch from the year of admission. No Honours shall be conferred if the
degree requirements are not completed in the minimum duration.
14. Pass marks in every paper shall be 40.
15. Grading System shall be as per Ordinance 11 of the University.
16. The Programme Core Electives (PCE) shall be specific to a major discipline, minor specializations and papers
for EAE shall be defined by the school defining the syllabus for the particular areas and minor
specializations and papers for OAE shall be defined by the schools defining the elective streams.
17. Minor specialization in non‐engineering disciplines may be offered under the aegis of the other schools
(provided the individual institutions are offering programmes under the aegis of the school offering the
non‐engineering minor specialization). The minor specialization framework of 20 credits has to be
offered within the framework of the current Scheme of Studies of the primary / major discipline.
18. The institution shall offer atleast two elective groups out of the emerging area / open area for students of
each major discipline. The emerging area / open electives can also be offered as standalone papers not
forming a part of any elective groups also. The institute shall decide the group(s) and/or individual papers
to be offered as electives based on the availability of infrastructure and faculty. From the groups / papers
offered by the institute, an elective paper / group shall be taught if and only if the number of students in a
paper is at‐least 20 or at‐least 1/3 of the students of a major / primary discipline for which the paper /
group is to be offered. The APC of the department / institute may define a maximum number of students
allowed to register for a paper as an elective (EAE / OAE).
19. The institution shall offer atleast two elective papers from each program core elective group for students
of each major / primary discipline. The institute shall decide the individual papers to be offered as electives
(PCE) based on the availability of infrastructure and faculty. From the papers offered by the institute, an
elective paper shall be taught if and only if the number of students in a paper is at‐least 20 or at‐least 1/3
of the students of a major / primary discipline for which the paper is to be offered. The APC of the
department / institute may define a maximum number of students allowed to register for a paper as an
elective (PCE).
20. Teachers of the other department(s), as and when deputed by their department, for teaching the students
enrolled in programmes offered by the department offering the programme shall be a part of the

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 123
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Academic Programme Committee of the discipline. Such teachers, for all academic matters, including
teaching, teachers’ continuous evaluation, term end examinations etc. shall be governed by the decisions
of the APC of department offering the programme of study. Similarly, the guest faculty, the visiting faculty
and the Contract / Ad Hoc faculty as and when deputed to teach students of a particular department shall
form a part of APC of the department.
21. The Paper IDs will be generated / issued / assigned by the Examination Division of the University.

22. The medium of instructions shall be English.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 124
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Bachelor of Technology in Electrical and Electronics Engineering

(EEE)
2nd Year Onward Scheme and implementation guideline

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 125
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Third Semester
Paper
Group Paper L P Credits
Code
Theory Papers
ES ES‐201 Computational Methods 4 4
HS/MS HS‐203 Indian Knowledge System* 2 2
PC ECC‐205 Signals and Systems 3 3
PC EEC‐209 Electrical Materials 3 3
PC EEC‐211 Electrical Machines ‐ I 4 4
PC ECC‐213 Electromagnetic Field Theory 3 3
PC ECC‐215 Electronics – I 3 3
Practical / Viva Voce
ES ES‐251 Computational Methods Lab 2 1
PC EEC‐257 Electrical Machines – I Lab 2 1
PC EEC‐259 Electrical Engineering Workshop 2 1
PC ECC‐261 Electronics ‐ I Lab 2 1
Total 22 8 26

*NUES:All examinations to be conducted by the concerned teacher as specified in the detailed syllabus of the paper.

Fourth Semester
Paper
Group Paper L P Credits
Code
Theory Papers
BS BS‐202 Probability, Statistics and Linear Programming 4 4
HS/MS HS‐204 Technical Writing* 2 2
PC EEC‐206 Network Analysis and Synthesis 3 3
PC EEC‐210 Electrical Machines ‐ II 4 4
PC EEC‐212 Power Systems ‐ I 4 4
PC ECC‐218 Electronics ‐ II 4 4
Practical / Viva Voce
BS BS‐252 Probability, Statistics and Linear Programming Lab 2 1
PC EEC‐256 Electrical Machines ‐ II Lab 2 1
PC EEC‐260 Power Systems ‐ I Lab 2 1
PC EEC‐262 Network Analysis and Synthesis Lab 2 1
PC ECC‐264 Electronics ‐ II Lab 2 1
Total 21 10 26

*NUES:All examinations to be conducted by the concerned teacher as specified in the detailed syllabus of the paper.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 126
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Fifth Semester
Paper
Group Paper L P Credits
Code
Theory Papers
HS/MS HS‐301 Economics for Engineers 2 2
PC EEC‐303 Power Systems – II 4 4
PC EEC‐305 Electrical and Electronics Measuring Instruments 4 4
PC EEC‐307 Introduction to Control Systems 3 3
PC EEC‐309 Power Electronics 4 4
PC ECC‐313 Microprocessors and Microcontrollers 3 3
Practical / Viva Voce
PC EEC‐351 Power Systems – IILab 2 1
PC EEC‐353 Electrical and Electronics Measurements Lab 2 1
PC EEC‐355 Introduction to Control Systems Lab 2 1
PC EEC‐357 Power Electronics Lab 2 1
PC ECC‐363 Microprocessors and Microcontrollers Lab 2 1
PC / Internship ES‐361 Summer Training Report ‐ 1 * 1
Total 20 10 26

*NUES:Comprehensive evaluation of the Summer Training Report – 1 (after 4th Semester) shall be done by the committee
of teachers, constituted by the Academic Programme Committee, out of 100. The training shall be of 4 to 6 weeks duration.
The training can be under the mentorship of a teacher of the institute.

Sixth Semester
Paper
Group Paper L P Credits
Code
Theory Papers
HS/MS MS‐302 Principles of Management for Engineers 3 3
HS/MS HS‐304 Universal Human Values* 1 1
PCE Programme Core Elective Paper (PCE –1) 4
PCE Programme Core Elective Paper (PCE – 2) 4
PCE Programme Core Elective Paper (PCE – 3) 4
EAE / OAE Emerging Area/Open Area Elective Paper (EAE – 1 /OAE – 1) 4
EAE / OAE Emerging Area/Open Area Elective Paper (EAE – 2 /OAE – 2) 4
Practical / Viva Voce
NSS / NCC / Cultural Clubs / Technical Society / Technical
HS/MS HS‐352 2
Club**
Total 26

*NUES:All examinations to be conducted by the concerned teacher as specified in the detailed syllabus of the paper.

**NUES: Comprehensive evaluation of the students by the concerned coordinator of NCC / NSS / Cultural Clubs / Technical
Society / Technical Clubs, out of 100 as per the evaluation schemes worked out by these activity societies, organizations; the
faculty co‐ordinators shall be responsible for the evaluation of the same. These activities shall start from the 1st semester
and the evaluation shall be conducted at the end of the 6th semester for students admitted in the first semester. Students
nd rd
admitted in the 2 year (3 semester) as lateral entry shall be evaluated on the basis their performance, by the faculty co‐
rd th
ordinator for the period of 3 semester to 6 semester only.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 127
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Seventh Semester
Paper
Group Paper L P Credits
Code
Theory Papers
HS/MS MS‐401 Principles of Entrepreneurship Mindset 2 2
PCE Programme Core Elective Paper (PCE – 4) 4
PCE Programme Core Elective Paper (PCE – 5) 4
EAE / OAE Emerging Area / Open Area Elective Paper (EAE – 3 / OAE – 3) 4
EAE / OAE Emerging Area / Open Area Elective Paper (EAE – 4 / OAE – 4) 4
EAE / OAE Emerging Area / Open Area Elective Paper (EAE – 5 / OAE – 5) 4
Practical / Viva Voce
PC / Project ES‐451 Minor Project** 3
PC / Internship ES‐453 Summer Training Report ‐ 2 * 1
Total 26

*NUES:Comprehensive evaluation of the Summer Training Report – 2 (after 6th Semester) shall be done by the committee
of teachers, constituted by the Academic Programme Committee, out of 100. The training shall be of 4 to 6 weeks duration.
The training can be under the mentorship of a teacher of the institute.

**The student shall be allocated a supervisor / guide for project work at the end 6th semester by the department /
institution, the project shall continue into the 8th semester. In the 7th semester evaluation, the criteria for evaluation shall
be conceptualization of the project work, the background study / literature survey and identification of objectives and
methodology to be followed for project. 40 marks evaluation for the Teachers' Continuous Evaluation / Internal Assessment
shall be done by concerned supervisor while the term end examination of 60 marks shall be conducted by the supervisor
concerned and the external examiner deputed by the Examinations Division. In the absence of the supervisor, the Director
of the Institution / Head of the Department can assign the responsibility of the supervisor (for purpose of examinations) to
any faculty of the Institution / Department.

Eight Semester
Paper
Group Paper L P Credits
Code
%
Practical / Viva Voce
ES‐452 Major Project – Dissertation and Viva Voce# 18
PC / Project
ES‐454 Project Progress Evaluation* 2
#
ES‐456 Internship Report and Viva Voce 18
PC / Internship
ES‐458 Internship Progress Evaluation* 2
Total 0 0 20

*NUES: Comprehensive evaluation by the committee of teachers, constituted by the Academic Programme
Committee, out of 100.

%By default every student shall do the project work (ES‐452 and ES‐454). A student shall either be allowed to
do a project work (ES‐452 and ES‐454) or an internship (ES‐456 and ES‐458). The student must apply for
approval to do internship before the commencement of the 8th semester to the institute, and only after
approval of Principal / Director of the institute through Training and Placement Officer of the institute, shall
proceed for internship.

#Students may be allowed to do internship in this semester in lieu of Major project. The students allowed to
proceed for internship shall be required to maintain a log‐book of activities performed during internship. The
same has to be countersigned by the mentor at the organization where internship is completed.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 128
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

ES‐452: Evaluation shall be conducted of 40 marks (Teachers’ continuous evaluation / internal assessment) by
the supervisor. And, 60 marks by a bench of the supervisor and the external examiner deputed by Examination
Division (COE), for a total of 100 marks.

ES‐454 / ES‐458: Comprehensive evaluation by the committee of teachers, constituted by the Academic
Programme Committee, out of 100.

ES‐456: Evaluation shall be conducted of 40 marks (Teachers’ continuous evaluation / internal assessment) by
the Training and Placement Officer of the department / institute on the basis of the report submitted by the
student. And, 60 marks by a bench of the Training and Placement Officer of the department / institute and the
external examiner deputed by Examination Division (COE), for a total of 100 marks.

In the absence of the supervisor or the Training and Placement Officer (as the case may be), the Director of the
institute / Head of the Department can assign the responsibility of the supervisor or the Training and Placement
Officer (for purpose of examinations) to any faculty of the department.

Note on Elective Papers: The elective papers shall be allowed to be taken / studied by the students, by the
APC of the department / institute, keeping in view that two papers studied by the student should not have a
substantial overlap. All papers studied by the student should be substantially distinct in content.

Note on Examination of Elective Papers:

(a) Papers with only theory component shall have 25 Marks continuous evaluation by the teacher and 75
Marks term‐end examinations. Both these component marks shall be reflected on the marksheet of the
student.
(b) Papers with only practical component shall have 40 Marks continuous evaluation by the teacher and 60
Marks term‐end examinations. Both these component marks shall be reflected on the marksheet of the
student.

Note on Continuous Evaluation of All Papers:

(a) Papers with only theory component shall have 25 Marks continuous evaluation by the teacher which shall
be evaluated as:
i. Mid‐Term Test* ‐ 15 Marks (after 8 weeks of teaching or as
decided by PCC)
ii. Assignments / Project / Quiz / Case Studies, etc. ‐ 5 Marks
iii. Attendance / Class Participation ‐ 5 Marks
(b) Papers with only practical component shall have 40Marks continuous evaluation by the teacher which shall
be evaluated as:
i. Mid‐Term Test and Viva Voce ‐ 20 Marks (after 8 weeks of teaching or as
decided by PCC)
ii. Practical File ‐ 10 Marks
iii. Attendance / Lab Participation ‐ 10 Marks

* The mid‐term test shall be coordinated by the Programme Coordination Committee.

If a student could not appear for a mid‐term test due to situation beyond the control by the student, a
supplementary test may be arranged towards the end of the semester, in a similar manner to the mid‐term
test for such students. The students must apply for this provision to the department / institution. On
examination of the reason for non‐appearing in the mid‐term test by the Head of the Department / Institute,
and with reason for allowing to appear in the supplementary test to recorded by the Head of the Department
/ Institute, the student may be allowed.

The attendance sheets, the question papers and the award sheets for the continuous evaluation to be
retained by the concerned department / institute for at least 6 months after the declaration of the result by
the Examination Division of the University.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 129
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Programme Core Electives

Semester Paper Code PCE – 1 (Choose Any One) L P Credits
EEE‐306T Analog and Digital Communications 3 3
6
EEE‐306P Analog and Digital Communications Lab 2 1
6 EEE‐308 Artificial Intelligence and Machine Learning for Electrical Systems 4 4
EEE‐310T Bio Medical Instrumentation 3 3
6
EEE‐310P Bio Medical Instrumentation Lab 2 1
EEE‐312T Introduction to Digital Signal Processing 3 3
6
EEE‐312P Introduction to Digital Signal Processing Lab 2 1
6 EEE‐314 Powerline Carrier Communication 4 4
EEE‐320T Utilization of Electrical Energy 3 3
6
EEE‐320P Utilization of Electrical Energy Lab 2 1
Semester Paper Code PCE – 2 (Choose Any One) L P Credits
EEE‐324T Introduction to Data Communication and Networking 3 3
6
EEE‐324P Introduction to Data Communication and Networking Lab 2 1
EEE‐326T Discrete Control Systems 3 3
6
EEE‐326P Discrete Control Systems Lab 2 1
6 EEE‐330 Nano Electronics 4 4
6 EEE‐332 Opto Electronics 4 4
EEE‐334T Research Methodology for Electrical & Electronics Engineering 3 3
6 Research Methodology for Electrical & Electronics Engineering
EEE‐334P 2 1
Lab
Introduction to Transmission Lines, Waveguides and Antenna
EEE‐336T 3 3
Design
6
Introduction to Transmission Lines, Waveguides and Antenna
EEE‐336P 2 1
Design Lab
Semester Paper Code PCE – 3 (Choose Any One) L P Credits
EEE‐338T Digital Systems Design 3 3
6
EEE‐338P Digital Systems Design Lab 2 1
EEE‐340T Electric Drives 3 3
6
EEE‐340P Electric Drives Lab 2 1
6 EEE‐354 Electrical Power Generation Systems 4 4
EEE‐356T Optimization using Controllers 3 3
6
EEE‐356P Optimization using Controllers lab 2 1
EEE‐362T VLSI 3 3
6
EEE‐362P VLSI Lab 2 1
6 EEE‐366 Introduction to Information and Coding Theory 4 4
Semester Paper Code PCE – 4 (Choose Any One) L P Credits
7 EEE‐403 Electricity Distribution Schemes and Policies 4 4
EEE‐405T Mathematical Analysis of Complex Systems 3 3
7
EEE‐405P Mathematical Analysis of Complex Systems Lab 2 1
7 EEE‐407 Renewable Energy and Policies 4 4
EEE‐409T Solid State Drives 3 3
7
EEE‐409P Solid State Drives Lab 2 1
EEE‐413T Digital Image Processing 3 3
7
EEE‐413P Digital Image Processing Lab 2 1
EEE‐415T Wireless Sensor Networks 3 3
7
EEE‐415P Wireless Sensor Networks Lab 2 1
EEE‐435T Systems Design and Simulation 3 3
7
EEE‐435P Systems Design and Simulation Lab 2 1
Semester Paper Code PCE – 5 (Choose Any One) L P Credits
EEE‐417T Advanced Semiconductor Devices 3 3
7
EEE‐417P Advanced Semiconductor Devices Lab 2 1

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 130
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

EEE‐419T Communication Systems Analysis 3 3

7
EEE‐419P Communication Systems Analysis Lab 2 1
EEE‐421T e‐Mobility 3 3
7
EEE‐421P e‐Mobility Lab 2 1
7 EEE‐423 Energy Conservation Schemes 4 4
7 EEE‐425 Energy Economics and Policies 4 4
7 EEE‐431 Smart Grid and Distributed Generation 4 4
EEE‐433T Systems Restructuring for Optimization 3 3
7
EEE‐433P Systems Restructuring for Optimization Lab 2 1

Note:
1. An elective shall be offered to the student for each PCE group (That is for PCE‐1, PCE‐2, etc.) based on the
availability of resources and faculty at the institution and at least one third of the batch or at least 20 students
must be willing to take the elective. At least two elective per PCE group must be offered to the students of the
major discipline.

2. Each PCE slot is of 4 credits, if in a particular slot, the paper has no practical component, then it is of 4 credits
(a pure theory paper), otherwise for purpose of examination and conduct of classes, the course is split in two
papers, namely a theory paper of 3 credits and a practical paper of 1 credit. The student has to study for 4
credits per slot of PCE group. This is reflected by suffixing the paper code by T (for Theory component) and P
(for Practical component), if required.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 131
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Implementation Rules:

1. The examinations, attendance criteria to appear in examinations, promotion and award of the degree
shall be governed by the Ordinance 11 of the University. The term “major discipline” / “primary discipline”
in this document refers to the discipline in which student is admitted / studies from 3rd semester onwards.
However credits of courses / paper for OAE / EAE groups shall not be considered for the purpose of
promotion from one year of study to the subsequent year of study.
2. Minimum duration of the Bachelor of Technology programme shall be 4 years (N=4 years) (8 semesters)
for the students admitted in the 1st year and 1st semester of the degree programme. Lateral entry students
shall be admitted in the 2nd year and 3rd semester of the degree programme (effectively in the batch
admitted in the first year in the previous academic session and shall be deemed to have been exempted
from the courses / papers of the first year of the degree programme. No exemption certificate shall be
issued in any case.
A specific lateral entry students’ minimum duration shall be the same as the minimum duration for the
batch in which he/she is admitted as a lateral entry student in the 2nd year.
3. Maximum duration of the Bachelor of Technology programme shall be 6 years (N+2 years). After
completion of N+2 years of study, if the student has appeared in the papers of all the semesters upto 8th
semester, then a maximum extension of 1 year may be given to the student for completing the
requirements of the degree if and only if the number of credits already earned by the student is atleast 150
(for lateral entry students it shall be at least 102 credits) from the (non‐honours components). Otherwise,
the admission of the student shall stand cancelled. After the period of allowed study, the admission of the
student shall be cancelled.
A specific lateral entry students’ maximum duration shall be the same as the minimum duration for the
batch in which he/she is admitted as a lateral entry student in the 2nd year.
4. The degree shall be awarded only after the fulfilment of all requirements of the Scheme and Syllabus of
Examinations and the applicable Ordinance.
5. (a) The students shall undergo the following group of Courses / Papers as enumerated in the scheme (For
the students admitted in the First Year / First Semester).

Semester (Credits) Total Mandatory

Group
I & II III IV V VI VII VIII Credits Credits

BS 24 5 29 14

HS/MS 6 2 2 2 6 2 20 10

ES 20 5 25 15

PC 19 19 24 4 20 86 76

PCE 12 8 20 16

EAE/OAE 8 12 20 16

Total 50 26 26 26 26 26 20 200 147

TABLE 1: Distribution of Credits (Project / Internship credits are 25 out the 86 credits for Programme Core
(PC) credits, while extra‐curricular activities credits are 2 out of 20 credits for Humanities / Management
/ Social Science Group (HS/MS)) . This table is for students admitted in the First Year / First Semester of
the Degree Programme.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 132
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

(b) The students admitted as Lateral Entry shall undergo the following group of Courses / Papers as
enumerated in the scheme.

Semester (Credits) Total Mandatory

Group
III IV V VI VII VIII Credits Credits

BS 5 5 0

HS/MS 2 2 2 6 2 14 7

ES 5 5 0

PC 19 19 24 4 20 86 76

PCE 12 8 20 16

EAE/OAE 8 12 20 16

Total 26 26 26 26 26 20 150 115

TABLE 2: Distribution of Credits (Project / Internship credits are 25 out the 86 credits for Programme Core
(PC) credits, while extra‐curricular activities credits are 2 out of 14 credits for Humanities / Management
/ Social Science Group (HS/MS)) This table is for students admitted as Lateral Entry Students in the
Second Year / Third Semester of the Degree Programme.

6. Mandatory Credits specify the number of credits from each subject group to be mandatorily acquired by
the student for the award of the degree,for students admitted as students in the 1st year and 1st semester
of the degree programme. While for students admitted as lateral entry in the 2nd year and 3rd semester
the Mandatory Credits value is 115, and specify the number of credits from each subject group to be
mandatorily acquired by the student for the award of the degree (Table 2). See clause 11 and 12 also.
7. Some of the papers are droppable in the sense that the student may qualify for the award of the degree
even when the student has not cleared / passed some of the papers of these group. However, the student
has to earn the minimum credits for the programme of study as specified. See clause 11 and 12 also.
8. The students may take 5 subjects from EAE / OAE groups. The open electives of the OAE group of courses
may also be taken through SWAYAM / NPTEL MOOCs platform. The student desirous of doing a MOOC
based course among the OAE group must seek approval of the APC of the institute for the same before the
commencement of the semester. The APC shall allow the MOOC based OAE option to the student if and
only if the MOOC subject / course being considered for the student is being offered in line with the
Academic Calendar applicable. The student shall submit the successful completion certificate with marks to
the institution for onwards transfer to the Examination Division. The Examinations Division shall take these
marks on record for incorporation in the result of the appropriate semester. These marks / grades of these
courses shall be used for calculation of the SGPA/CGPA of the student concerned by the examination
division of the University. If a student takes even one OAE paper through MOOCs, then the student shall
not be eligible for minor specialization. The degree to the student on fulfilment of other requirements for
such cases shall be through clause 12.b. or 12.c.
These MOOC courses taken by the students, if allowed by the APC of the institute shall be of 4 credits or
more collectively to be against or for one paper slot in the scheme, through MOOCs, though the marks
shall be shown individually. That is in one paper slot in the scheme wherever a MOOC course is allowed,
the student may register for more than one paper to aggregate 4 credits or more. If the credits of these
MOOC Courses, allowed to a student is more than 4, then the maximum credit for the programme shall
be amended accordingly for the particular student. Also, in a particular semester, a student may take
more than one MOOC course with the approval of the APC to meet the credit requirements of OAE for the
semester. The cost of taking the MOOC course is to be borne by the concerned student. The results of the
MOOC courses shall be declared separately by the Examination Division from the result for the papers
conducted by the examination division of the University.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 133
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

9. To earn an Honours degree, the student may enrol for 20 credits or more through SWAYAM / NPTEL
MOOCs platform. This point has to be read together with other points specially point 13 and 14. The
acquisition of the credits should be completed before the 15th of the July of the Admission Year plus 4
years. That is, if a student is admitted in the year X, then these credits must be acquired through MOOCs by
15th July of the year (X+4), no extra duration or time shall be allocated, this means, the student must
submit the result of such papers on or before 15th July of the Admission Year plus 4 years.
Honours in the degree shall be awarded if and only if at least 20 credits are acquired through MOOCs. To
obtain Honours in the programme, the student must apply to the institution about the same before the
commencement of the 5th semester. The specific courses through MOOCs shall be registered by the
student only after approval by the Academic Programme Committee (APC) of the Institute. The APC shall
approve the course if it is not already studied by the student or the student shall not study it in future and
adds value to the major area of specialization (which is the degree). The papers for which the student
desires to appear for Honours through MOOCs, all papers results shall be submitted by the student to the
Institute for onwards transfer to Examination Division of the University, to be taken on record of the
University. The results of these papers shall be a part of the records of the examinations of the students.
The records shall be submitted by the student to the Institute, then transferred to the Examination
Division, shall be notified by the Examination Division of the University, and a separate marksheet shall be
issued by the Examination Division. The cost of taking the MOOC course is to be borne by the concerned
student. Such courses shall be reflected as additional courses / papers for the student.
If a student acquires less than 20 credits through MOOCs, following the mechanism specified, then also
the results of these papers shall be taken on record as specified above, though no Honours degree shall
be awarded.
The papers through MOOCs for Honours degree shall not be a part of the set of the papers over which the
SGPA / CGPA of the student shall be calculated.
The papers through MOOCs for Honours degree shall be additional papers studied by the students and are
to be taken into account only for award of Honours in the degree programme, if 20 credits are earned
through MOOCs as approved by APC, by a student. See Clause 13 also.
10. Maximum Credits is at least 200 (Table 1) for students admitted in the 1st year and 1st semester, these are
the credits for which the student shall have to study for the non‐Honours component of the curriculum.
And, for lateral entry students admitted in the 2nd year and 3rd semester of the degree programme, the
maximum credit required to be studied is at least 150 (Table 2). See clause 8 also.
The student has to appear in the examinations for these credits in all components of evaluation as
specified in the scheme of studies.
11. Minimum Credits required to be earned is atleast 180 (out of the 200 non Honours papers credits, see
clause 10 also) for students admitted in the 1st year and 1st semester. And, for lateral entry students
admitted in the 2nd year and 3rd semester of the degree programme, the minimum credit required to be
earned Is at least 135 (out of the 150 non Honours papers credits, see clause 10 also). See clause 6 also.
12. The following degree route can be taken by a student (also refer point 13):
a. The students shall be awarded one minor specialization, one from EAE/OEA route under the following
conditions:
i. The student has earned the mandatory credits as defined in Table 1 or Table 2 (as applicable) and
clause 6.
ii. The student earns 20 credits from one group of EAE / OAE courses offered as a minor
specialization by the institute.
iii. In addition, the total credits (including the above specified credits) earned by the student is atleast
as specified in clause 11.
The degree nomenclature of the degree shall be as: “Bachelor of Technology in Electrical and
Electronics Engineering with Minor Specializations in <concerned EAE/OAE discipline>”; if criteria /
point 9 is not satisfied for Honours. Otherwise, if criteria / point 9 is met, then the degree shall be an

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 134
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Honours degree and the nomenclature shall be as: “Bachelor of Technology in Electrical and
Electronics Engineering with Minor Specializations in <concerned EAE/OAE discipline>) (Honours)”, if
in addition to point 12.a.i, 12.a.ii, and 12.a.iii, the student fulfils the criteria for Honours as specified
at point 9.
b. The students shall be awarded the degree without any minor specialization under the following
conditions:
i. The student has earned the mandatory credits as defined in Table 1 or Table 2 (as applicable) and
clause 6.
ii. In addition, the total credits (including the above specified credits) earned by the student is atleast
as specified in clause 11.
The degree nomenclature of the degree shall be as: “Bachelor of Technology in Electrical and
Electronics Engineering”; if criteria / point 9 is not satisfied for Honours. Otherwise, if criteria / point 9
is met, then the degrees shall be an Honours degree and the nomenclature shall be as: “Bachelor of
Technology in Electrical and Electronics Engineering (Honours)”, if in addition to point 12.b.i and
12.b.ii, the student fulfils the criteria for Honours as specified at point 9.
c. If the student does not fulfil any of the above criterions (point 12.a, or 12.b), if the student earns at
least the minimum credits specified in clause 11 (disregarding the mandatory credits clause of Table 1
or Table 2 (as applicable) and Clause 6), then the student shall be award the degree as “Bachelor of
Technology in Electrical and Electronics Engineering”. Such students shall not be eligible for the
award of an Honours degree. Though, if credits are accumulated through MOOCs as per clause 9, the
same shall be reflected in the marksheets of the students.
13. The Honours degree shall only be awarded if the CGPA of the student is above or equal to 7.5 in addition
to fulfilment of criteria / point 10 and 13 above and the degree is awarded after the immediate
completion of the 4th year of the batch from the year of admission. No Honours shall be conferred if the
degree requirements are not completed in the minimum duration.
14. Pass marks in every paper shall be 40.
15. Grading System shall be as per Ordinance 11 of the University.
16. The Programme Core Electives (PCE) shall be specific to a major discipline, minor specializations and papers
for EAE shall be defined by the school defining the syllabus for the particular areas and minor
specializations and papers for OAE shall be defined by the schools defining the elective streams.
17. Minor specialization in non‐engineering disciplines may be offered under the aegis of the other schools
(provided the individual institutions are offering programmes under the aegis of the school offering the
non‐engineering minor specialization). The minor specialization framework of 20 credits has to be
offered within the framework of the current Scheme of Studies of the primary / major discipline.
18. The institution shall offer atleast two elective groups out of the emerging area / open area for students of
each major discipline. The emerging area / open electives can also be offered as standalone papers not
forming a part of any elective groups also. The institute shall decide the group(s) and/or individual papers
to be offered as electives based on the availability of infrastructure and faculty. From the groups / papers
offered by the institute, an elective paper / group shall be taught if and only if the number of students in a
paper is at‐least 20 or at‐least 1/3 of the students of a major / primary discipline for which the paper /
group is to be offered. The APC of the department / institute may define a maximum number of students
allowed to register for a paper as an elective (EAE / OAE).
19. The institution shall offer atleast two elective papers from each program core elective group for students
of each major / primary discipline. The institute shall decide the individual papers to be offered as electives
(PCE) based on the availability of infrastructure and faculty. From the papers offered by the institute, an
elective paper shall be taught if and only if the number of students in a paper is at‐least 20 or at‐least 1/3
of the students of a major / primary discipline for which the paper is to be offered. The APC of the
department / institute may define a maximum number of students allowed to register for a paper as an
elective (PCE).

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 135
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

20. Teachers of the other department(s), as and when deputed by their department, for teaching the students
enrolled in programmes offered by the department offering the programme shall be a part of the
Academic Programme Committee of the discipline. Such teachers, for all academic matters, including
teaching, teachers’ continuous evaluation, term end examinations etc. shall be governed by the decisions
of the APC of department offering the programme of study. Similarly, the guest faculty, the visiting faculty
and the Contract / Ad Hoc faculty as and when deputed to teach students of a particular department shall
form a part of APC of the department.
21. The Paper IDs will be generated / issued / assigned by the Examination Division of the University.

22. The medium of instructions shall be English.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 136
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Bachelor of Technology in Instrumentation and Control

Engineering (ICE)
2nd Year Onward Scheme and implementation guideline

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 137
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Third Semester
Paper
Group Paper L P Credits
Code
Theory Papers
ES ES‐201 Computational Methods 4 4
HS/MS HS‐203 Indian Knowledge System* 2 2
PC ICC‐205 Engineering Electromagnetics 4 4
PC EEC‐207 Electrical Machines 4 4
PC EEC‐213 Circuits and Systems 4 4
PC ECC‐219 Analog Electronics 4 4
Practical / Viva Voce
ES ES‐251 Computational Methods Lab 2 1
PC EEC‐253 Circuits and Systems Lab 2 1
PC EEC‐255 Electrical Machines Lab 2 1
PC ECC‐265 Analog Electronics Lab 2 1
Total 22 8 26

*NUES:All examinations to be conducted by the concerned teacher as specified in the detailed syllabus of the paper.

Fourth Semester
Paper
Group Paper L P Credits
Code
Theory Papers
BS BS‐202 Probability, Statistics and Linear Programming 4 4
HS/MS HS‐204 Technical Writing* 2 2
PC ECC‐206 Communication Systems 4 4
PC ECC‐208 Digital Electronics 4 4
PC ICC‐210 Sensors and Transducers 4 4
PC EEC‐214 Electrical and Electronics Measurements 4 4

Practical / Viva Voce

BS BS‐252 Probability, Statistics and Linear Programming Lab 2 1
PC ECC‐254 Digital Electronics Lab 2 1
PC ICC‐256 Sensors and Transducers Lab 2 1
PC EEC‐258 Electrical and Electronics Measurements Lab 2 1
Total 22 8 26

*NUES:All examinations to be conducted by the concerned teacher as specified in the detailed syllabus of the paper.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 138
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Fifth Semester
Paper
Group Paper L P Credits
Code
Theory Papers
HS/MS HS‐301 Economics for Engineers 2 2
PC ECC‐303 Digital Signal Processing 4 4
PC EEC‐307 Introduction to Control Systems 3 3
PC ICC‐309 Industrial and Optical Instrumentation 4 4
PC CIC‐313 Computer Networks 4 4
PC ECC‐313 Microprocessors and Microcontrollers 3 3
Practical / Viva Voce
PC ECC‐351 Digital Signal Processing Lab 2 1
PC EEC‐355 Introduction to Control Systems Lab 2 1
PC ICC‐357 Industrial and Optical Instrumentation Lab 2 1
PC ECC‐363 Microprocessors and Microcontrollers Lab 2 1
PC CIC‐365 Computer Networks Lab 2 1
PC / Internship ES‐361 Summer Training Report ‐ 1 * 1
Total 20 10 26

*NUES:Comprehensive evaluation of the Summer Training Report – 1 (after 4th Semester) shall be done by the committee
of teachers, constituted by the Academic Programme Committee, out of 100. The training shall be of 4 to 6 weeks duration.
The training can be under the mentorship of a teacher of the institute.

Sixth Semester
Paper
Group Paper L P Credits
Code
Theory Papers
HS/MS MS‐302 Principles of Management for Engineers 3 3
HS/MS HS‐304 Universal Human Values* 1 1
PCE Programme Core Elective Paper (PCE –1) 4
PCE Programme Core Elective Paper (PCE – 2) 4
PCE Programme Core Elective Paper (PCE – 3) 4
EAE / OAE Emerging Area/Open Area Elective Paper (EAE – 1 /OAE – 1) 4
EAE / OAE Emerging Area/Open Area Elective Paper (EAE – 2 /OAE – 2) 4
Practical / Viva Voce
NSS / NCC / Cultural Clubs / Technical Society / Technical
HS/MS HS‐352 2
Club**
Total 26

*NUES:All examinations to be conducted by the concerned teacher as specified in the detailed syllabus of the paper.

**NUES:Comprehensive evaluation of the students by the concerned coordinator of NCC / NSS / Cultural Clubs / Technical
Society / Technical Clubs, out of 100 as per the evaluation schemes worked out by these activity societies, organizations; the
co‐ordinators shall be responsible for the evaluation of the same. These activities shall start from the 1st semester and the
evaluation shall be conducted at the end of the 6th semester for students admitted in the first semester. Students admitted
nd rd rd th
in the 2 year (3 semester) as lateral entry shall be for the period of 3 semester to 6 semester only.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 139
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Seventh Semester
Paper
Group Paper L P Credits
Code
Theory Papers
HS/MS MS‐401 Principles of Entrepreneurship Mindset 2 2
PCE Programme Core Elective Paper (PCE – 4) 4
PCE Programme Core Elective Paper (PCE – 5) 4
EAE / OAE Emerging Area / Open Area Elective Paper (EAE – 3 / OAE – 3) 4
EAE / OAE Emerging Area / Open Area Elective Paper (EAE – 4 / OAE – 4) 4
EAE / OAE Emerging Area / Open Area Elective Paper (EAE – 5 / OAE – 5) 4
Practical / Viva Voce
PC / Project ES‐451 Minor Project** 3
PC / Internship ES‐453 Summer Training Report ‐ 2 * 1
Total 26

*NUES:Comprehensive evaluation of the Summer Training Report – 2 (after 6th Semester) shall be done by the committee
of teachers, constituted by the Academic Programme Committee, out of 100. The training shall be of 4 to 6 weeks duration.
The training can be under the mentorship of a teacher of the institute.

**The student shall be allocated a supervisor / guide for project work at the end 6th semester by the department /
institution, the project shall continue into the 8th semester. In the 7th semester evaluation, the criteria for evaluation shall
be conceptualization of the project work, the background study / literature survey and identification of objectives and
methodology to be followed for project. 40 marks evaluation for the Teachers' Continuous Evaluation / Internal Assessment
shall be done by concerned supervisor while the term end examination of 60 marks shall be conducted by the supervisor
concerned and the external examiner deputed by the Examinations Division. In the absence of the supervisor, the Director
of the Institution / Head of the Department can assign the responsibility of the supervisor (for purpose of examinations) to
any faculty of the Institution / Department.

Eight Semester
Paper
Group Paper L P Credits
Code
%
Practical / Viva Voce
ES‐452 Major Project – Dissertation and Viva Voce# 18
PC / Project
ES‐454 Project Progress Evaluation* 2
#
ES‐456 Internship Report and Viva Voce 18
PC / Internship
ES‐458 Internship Progress Evaluation* 2
Total 0 0 20

*NUES: Comprehensive evaluation by the committee of teachers, constituted by the Academic Programme
Committee, out of 100.

%By default every student shall do the project work (ES‐452 and ES‐454). A student shall either be allowed to
do a project work (ES‐452 and ES‐454) or an internship (ES‐456 and ES‐458). The student must apply for
approval to do internship before the commencement of the 8th semester to the institute, and only after
approval of Principal / Director of the institute through Training and Placement Officer of the institute, shall
proceed for internship.

#Students may be allowed to do internship in this semester in lieu of Major project. The students allowed to
proceed for internship shall be required to maintain a log‐book of activities performed during internship. The
same has to be countersigned by the mentor at the organization where internship is completed.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 140
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

ES‐452: Evaluation shall be conducted of 40 marks (Teachers’ continuous evaluation / internal assessment) by
the supervisor. And, 60 marks by a bench of the supervisor and the external examiner deputed by Examination
Division (COE), for a total of 100 marks.

ES‐454 / ES‐458: Comprehensive evaluation by the committee of teachers, constituted by the Academic
Programme Committee, out of 100.

ES‐456: Evaluation shall be conducted of 40 marks (Teachers’ continuous evaluation / internal assessment) by
the Training and Placement Officer of the department / institute on the basis of the report submitted by the
student. And, 60 marks by a bench of the Training and Placement Officer of the department / institute and the
external examiner deputed by Examination Division (COE), for a total of 100 marks.

In the absence of the supervisor or the Training and Placement Officer (as the case may be), the Director of the
institute / Head of the Department can assign the responsibility of the supervisor or the Training and Placement
Officer (for purpose of examinations) to any faculty of the department.

Note on Elective Papers: The elective papers shall be allowed to be taken / studied by the students, by the
APC of the department / institute, keeping in view that two papers studied by the student should not have a
substantial overlap. All papers studied by the student should be substantially distinct in content.

Note on Examination of Elective Papers:

(a) Papers with only theory component shall have 25 Marks continuous evaluation by the teacher and 75
Marks term‐end examinations. Both these component marks shall be reflected on the marksheet of the
student.
(b) Papers with only practical component shall have 40 Marks continuous evaluation by the teacher and 60
Marks term‐end examinations. Both these component marks shall be reflected on the marksheet of the
student.

Note on Continuous Evaluation of All Papers:

(a) Papers with only theory component shall have 25 Marks continuous evaluation by the teacher which shall
be evaluated as:
i. Mid‐Term Test* ‐ 15 Marks (after 8 weeks of teaching or as
decided by PCC)
ii. Assignments / Project / Quiz / Case Studies, etc. ‐ 5 Marks
iii. Attendance / Class Participation ‐ 5 Marks
(b) Papers with only practical component shall have 40Marks continuous evaluation by the teacher which shall
be evaluated as:
i. Mid‐Term Test and Viva Voce ‐ 20 Marks (after 8 weeks of teaching or as
decided by PCC)
ii. Practical File ‐ 10 Marks
iii. Attendance / Lab Participation ‐ 10 Marks

* The mid‐term test shall be coordinated by the Programme Coordination Committee.

If a student could not appear for a mid‐term test due to situation beyond the control by the student, a
supplementary test may be arranged towards the end of the semester, in a similar manner to the mid‐term
test for such students. The students must apply for this provision to the department / institution. On
examination of the reason for non‐appearing in the mid‐term test by the Head of the Department / Institute,
and with reason for allowing to appear in the supplementary test to recorded by the Head of the Department
/ Institute, the student may be allowed.

The attendance sheets, the question papers and the award sheets for the continuous evaluation to be
retained by the concerned department / institute for at least 6 months after the declaration of the result by
the Examination Division of the University.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 141
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Programme Core Electives

Semester Paper Code PCE – 1 (Choose Any One) L P Credits
ICE‐306T Process Control 3 3
6
ICE‐306P Process Control Lab 2 1
6 ICE‐308 Measurement Data Analysis 4 4
6 ICE‐310 Control System Components 4 4
6 ICE‐312 Energy Harvesting Techniques 4 4
ICE‐314T Advanced Control Systems for Instrumentation 3 3
6
ICE‐314P Advanced Control Systems for Instrumentation Lab 2 1
Semester Paper Code PCE – 2 (Choose Any One) L P Credits
ICE‐316T Embedded Systems 3 3
6
ICE‐316P Embedded Systems Lab 2 1
ICE‐318T Industrial Automation and Control 3 3
6
ICE‐318P Industrial Automation and Control Lab 2 1
ICE‐320T Hydraulics and Pneumatics 3 3
6
ICE‐320P Hydraulics and Pneumatics Lab 2 1
ICE‐322T Neural Networks and Fuzzy Logic 3 3
6
ICE‐322P Neural Networks and Fuzzy Logic Lab 2 1
ICE‐324T Smart and Wireless Instrumentation 3 3
6
ICE‐324P Smart and Wireless Instrumentation Lab 2 1
Semester Paper Code PCE – 3 (Choose Any One) L P Credits
ICE‐326T Instrumentation Devices 3 3
6
ICE‐326P Instrumentation Devices Lab 2 1
ICE‐328T Introduction to Internet of Things 3 3
6
ICE‐328P Introduction to Internet of Things Lab 2 1
ICE‐330T Logic and Distributed Control 3 3
6
ICE‐330P Logic and Distributed Control Lab 2 1
ICE‐332T Industrial Data Communication 3 3
6
ICE‐332P Industrial Data Communication Lab 2 1
ICE‐334T Industrial Electric Drives 3 3
6
ICE‐334P Industrial Electric Drives Lab 2 1
Semester Paper Code PCE – 4 (Choose Any One) L P Credits
ICE‐403T Virtual Instrumentation 3 3
7
ICE‐403P Virtual Instrumentation Lab 2 1
ICE‐405T Soft Computing 3 3
7
ICE‐405P Soft Computing Lab 2 1
ICE‐407T Bio Medical Instrumentation 3 3
7
ICE‐407P Bio Medical Instrumentation Lab 2 1
ICE‐409T Control System Design 3 3
7
ICE‐409P Control System Design Lab 2 1
ICE‐411T Power Plant Instrumentation 3 3
7
ICE‐411P Power Plant Instrumentation Lab 2 1
Semester Paper Code PCE – 5 (Choose Any One) L P Credits
ICE‐413T Instrumentation System Design 3 3
7
ICE‐413P Instrumentation System Design Lab 2 1
ICE‐415T Design of Sensors and Transducers 3 3
7
ICE‐415P Design of Sensors and Transducers Lab 2 1
ICE‐417T Advanced Process Control 3 3
7
ICE‐417P Advanced Process Control Lab 2 1
ICE‐419T Cyber Security for Industrial Automation 3 3
7
ICE‐419P Cyber Security for Industrial Automation Lab 2 1
ICE‐421T Digital Control System 3 3
7
ICE‐421P Digital Control System Lab 2 1

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 142
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Note:
1. An elective shall be offered to the student for each PCE group (That is for PCE‐1, PCE‐2, etc.) based on the
availability of resources and faculty at the institution and at least one third of the batch or at least 20 students
must be willing to take the elective. At least two elective per PCE group must be offered to the students of the
major discipline.

2. Each PCE slot is of 4 credits, if in a particular slot, the paper has no practical component, then it is of 4 credits
(a pure theory paper), otherwise for purpose of examination and conduct of classes, the course is split in two
papers, namely a theory paper of 3 credits and a practical paper of 1 credit. The student has to study for 4
credits per slot of PCE group. This is reflected by suffixing the paper code by T (for Theory component) and P
(for Practical component), if required.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 143
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Implementation Rules:

1. The examinations, attendance criteria to appear in examinations, promotion and award of the degree
shall be governed by the Ordinance 11 of the University. The term “major discipline” / “primary discipline”
in this document refers to the discipline in which student is admitted / studies from 3rd semester onwards.
However credits of courses / paper for OAE / EAE groups shall not be considered for the purpose of
promotion from one year of study to the subsequent year of study.
2. Minimum duration of the Bachelor of Technology programme shall be 4 years (N=4 years) (8 semesters)
for the students admitted in the 1st year and 1st semester of the degree programme. Lateral entry students
shall be admitted in the 2nd year and 3rd semester of the degree programme (effectively in the batch
admitted in the first year in the previous academic session and shall be deemed to have been exempted
from the courses / papers of the first year of the degree programme. No exemption certificate shall be
issued in any case.
A specific lateral entry students’ minimum duration shall be the same as the minimum duration for the
batch in which he/she is admitted as a lateral entry student in the 2nd year.
3. Maximum duration of the Bachelor of Technology programme shall be 6 years (N+2 years). After
completion of N+2 years of study, if the student has appeared in the papers of all the semesters upto 8th
semester, then a maximum extension of 1 year may be given to the student for completing the
requirements of the degree if and only if the number of credits already earned by the student is atleast 150
(for lateral entry students it shall be at least 102 credits) from the (non‐honours components). Otherwise,
the admission of the student shall stand cancelled. After the period of allowed study, the admission of the
student shall be cancelled.
A specific lateral entry students’ maximum duration shall be the same as the minimum duration for the
batch in which he/she is admitted as a lateral entry student in the 2nd year.
4. The degree shall be awarded only after the fulfilment of all requirements of the Scheme and Syllabus of
Examinations and the applicable Ordinance.
5. (a) The students shall undergo the following group of Courses / Papers as enumerated in the scheme (For
the students admitted in the First Year / First Semester).

Semester (Credits) Total Mandatory

Group
I & II III IV V VI VII VIII Credits Credits

BS 24 5 29 14

HS/MS 6 2 2 2 6 2 20 10

ES 20 5 25 15

PC 19 19 24 4 20 86 76

PCE 12 8 20 16

EAE/OAE 8 12 20 16

Total 50 26 26 26 26 26 20 200 147

TABLE 1: Distribution of Credits (Project / Internship credits are 25 out the 86 credits for Programme Core
(PC) credits, while extra‐curricular activities credits are 2 out of 20 credits for Humanities / Management
/ Social Science Group (HS/MS)) . This table is for students admitted in the First Year / First Semester of
the Degree Programme.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 144
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

(b) The students admitted as Lateral Entry shall undergo the following group of Courses / Papers as
enumerated in the scheme.

Semester (Credits) Total Mandatory

Group
III IV V VI VII VIII Credits Credits

BS 5 5 0

HS/MS 2 2 2 6 2 14 7

ES 5 5 0

PC 19 19 24 4 20 86 76

PCE 12 8 20 16

EAE/OAE 8 12 20 16

Total 26 26 26 26 26 20 150 115

TABLE 2: Distribution of Credits (Project / Internship credits are 25 out the 86 credits for Programme Core
(PC) credits, while extra‐curricular activities credits are 2 out of 14 credits for Humanities / Management
/ Social Science Group (HS/MS)) This table is for students admitted as Lateral Entry Students in the
Second Year / Third Semester of the Degree Programme.

6. Mandatory Credits specify the number of credits from each subject group to be mandatorily acquired by
the student for the award of the degree,for students admitted as students in the 1st year and 1st semester
of the degree programme. While for students admitted as lateral entry in the 2nd year and 3rd semester
the Mandatory Credits value is 115, and specify the number of credits from each subject group to be
mandatorily acquired by the student for the award of the degree (Table 2). See clause 11 and 12 also.
7. Some of the papers are droppable in the sense that the student may qualify for the award of the degree
even when the student has not cleared / passed some of the papers of these group. However, the student
has to earn the minimum credits for the programme of study as specified. See clause 11 and 12 also.
8. The students may take 5 subjects from EAE / OAE groups. The open electives of the OAE group of courses
may also be taken through SWAYAM / NPTEL MOOCs platform. The student desirous of doing a MOOC
based course among the OAE group must seek approval of the APC of the institute for the same before the
commencement of the semester. The APC shall allow the MOOC based OAE option to the student if and
only if the MOOC subject / course being considered for the student is being offered in line with the
Academic Calendar applicable. The student shall submit the successful completion certificate with marks to
the institution for onwards transfer to the Examination Division. The Examinations Division shall take these
marks on record for incorporation in the result of the appropriate semester. These marks / grades of these
courses shall be used for calculation of the SGPA/CGPA of the student concerned by the examination
division of the University. If a student takes even one OAE paper through MOOCs, then the student shall
not be eligible for minor specialization. The degree to the student on fulfilment of other requirements for
such cases shall be through clause 12.b. or 12.c.
These MOOC courses taken by the students, if allowed by the APC of the institute shall be of 4 credits or
more collectively to be against or for one paper slot in the scheme, through MOOCs, though the marks
shall be shown individually. That is in one paper slot in the scheme wherever a MOOC course is allowed,
the student may register for more than one paper to aggregate 4 credits or more. If the credits of these
MOOC Courses, allowed to a student is more than 4, then the maximum credit for the programme shall
be amended accordingly for the particular student. Also, in a particular semester, a student may take
more than one MOOC course with the approval of the APC to meet the credit requirements of OAE for the
semester. The cost of taking the MOOC course is to be borne by the concerned student. The results of the
MOOC courses shall be declared separately by the Examination Division from the result for the papers
conducted by the examination division of the University.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 145
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

9. To earn an Honours degree, the student may enrol for 20 credits or more through SWAYAM / NPTEL
MOOCs platform. This point has to be read together with other points specially point 13 and 14. The
acquisition of the credits should be completed before the 15th of the July of the Admission Year plus 4
years. That is, if a student is admitted in the year X, then these credits must be acquired through MOOCs by
15th July of the year (X+4), no extra duration or time shall be allocated, this means, the student must
submit the result of such papers on or before 15th July of the Admission Year plus 4 years.
Honours in the degree shall be awarded if and only if at least 20 credits are acquired through MOOCs. To
obtain Honours in the programme, the student must apply to the institution about the same before the
commencement of the 5th semester. The specific courses through MOOCs shall be registered by the
student only after approval by the Academic Programme Committee (APC) of the Institute. The APC shall
approve the course if it is not already studied by the student or the student shall not study it in future and
adds value to the major area of specialization (which is the degree). The papers for which the student
desires to appear for Honours through MOOCs, all papers results shall be submitted by the student to the
Institute for onwards transfer to Examination Division of the University, to be taken on record of the
University. The results of these papers shall be a part of the records of the examinations of the students.
The records shall be submitted by the student to the Institute, then transferred to the Examination
Division, shall be notified by the Examination Division of the University, and a separate marksheet shall be
issued by the Examination Division. The cost of taking the MOOC course is to be borne by the concerned
student. Such courses shall be reflected as additional courses / papers for the student.
If a student acquires less than 20 credits through MOOCs, following the mechanism specified, then also
the results of these papers shall be taken on record as specified above, though no Honours degree shall
be awarded.
The papers through MOOCs for Honours degree shall not be a part of the set of the papers over which the
SGPA / CGPA of the student shall be calculated.
The papers through MOOCs for Honours degree shall be additional papers studied by the students and are
to be taken into account only for award of Honours in the degree programme, if 20 credits are earned
through MOOCs as approved by APC, by a student. See Clause 13 also.
10. Maximum Credits is at least 200 (Table 1) for students admitted in the 1st year and 1st semester, these are
the credits for which the student shall have to study for the non‐Honours component of the curriculum.
And, for lateral entry students admitted in the 2nd year and 3rd semester of the degree programme, the
maximum credit required to be studied is at least 150 (Table 2). See clause 8 also.
The student has to appear in the examinations for these credits in all components of evaluation as
specified in the scheme of studies.
11. Minimum Credits required to be earned is atleast 180 (out of the 200 non Honours papers credits, see
clause 10 also) for students admitted in the 1st year and 1st semester. And, for lateral entry students
admitted in the 2nd year and 3rd semester of the degree programme, the minimum credit required to be
earned Is at least 135 (out of the 150 non Honours papers credits, see clause 10 also). See clause 6 also.
12. The following degree route can be taken by a student (also refer point 13):
a. The students shall be awarded one minor specialization, one from EAE/OEA route under the following
conditions:
i. The student has earned the mandatory credits as defined in Table 1 or Table 2 (as applicable) and
clause 6.
ii. The student earns 20 credits from one group of EAE / OAE courses offered as a minor
specialization by the institute.
iii. In addition, the total credits (including the above specified credits) earned by the student is atleast
as specified in clause 11.
The degree nomenclature of the degree shall be as: “Bachelor of Technology in Instrumentation and
Control Engineering with Minor Specializations in <concerned EAE/OAE discipline>”; if criteria / point
9 is not satisfied for Honours. Otherwise, if criteria / point 9 is met, then the degree shall be an

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 146
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Honours degree and the nomenclature shall be as: “Bachelor of Technology in Instrumentation and
Control Engineering with Minor Specializations in <concerned EAE/OAE discipline>) (Honours)”, if in
addition to point 12.a.i, 12.a.ii, and 12.a.iii, the student fulfils the criteria for Honours as specified at
point 9.
b. The students shall be awarded the degree without any minor specialization under the following
conditions:
i. The student has earned the mandatory credits as defined in Table 1 or Table 2 (as applicable) and
clause 6.
ii. In addition, the total credits (including the above specified credits) earned by the student is atleast
as specified in clause 11.
The degree nomenclature of the degree shall be as: “Bachelor of Technology in Instrumentation and
Control Engineering”; if criteria / point 9 is not satisfied for Honours. Otherwise, if criteria / point 9 is
met, then the degrees shall be an Honours degree and the nomenclature shall be as: “Bachelor of
Technology in Instrumentation and Control Engineering (Honours)”, if in addition to point 12.b.i and
12.b.ii, the student fulfils the criteria for Honours as specified at point 9.
c. If the student does not fulfil any of the above criterions (point 12.a, or 12.b), if the student earns at
least the minimum credits specified in clause 11 (disregarding the mandatory credits clause of Table 1
or Table 2 (as applicable) and Clause 6), then the student shall be award the degree as “Bachelor of
Technology in Instrumentation and Control Engineering”. Such students shall not be eligible for the
award of an Honours degree. Though, if credits are accumulated through MOOCs as per clause 9, the
same shall be reflected in the marksheets of the students.
13. The Honours degree shall only be awarded if the CGPA of the student is above or equal to 7.5 in addition
to fulfilment of criteria / point 10 and 13 above and the degree is awarded after the immediate
completion of the 4th year of the batch from the year of admission. No Honours shall be conferred if the
degree requirements are not completed in the minimum duration.
14. Pass marks in every paper shall be 40.
15. Grading System shall be as per Ordinance 11 of the University.
16. The Programme Core Electives (PCE) shall be specific to a major discipline, minor specializations and papers
for EAE shall be defined by the school defining the syllabus for the particular areas and minor
specializations and papers for OAE shall be defined by the schools defining the elective streams.
17. Minor specialization in non‐engineering disciplines may be offered under the aegis of the other schools
(provided the individual institutions are offering programmes under the aegis of the school offering the
non‐engineering minor specialization). The minor specialization framework of 20 credits has to be
offered within the framework of the current Scheme of Studies of the primary / major discipline.
18. The institution shall offer atleast two elective groups out of the emerging area / open area for students of
each major discipline. The emerging area / open electives can also be offered as standalone papers not
forming a part of any elective groups also. The institute shall decide the group(s) and/or individual papers
to be offered as electives based on the availability of infrastructure and faculty. From the groups / papers
offered by the institute, an elective paper / group shall be taught if and only if the number of students in a
paper is at‐least 20 or at‐least 1/3 of the students of a major / primary discipline for which the paper /
group is to be offered. The APC of the department / institute may define a maximum number of students
allowed to register for a paper as an elective (EAE / OAE).
19. The institution shall offer atleast two elective papers from each program core elective group for students
of each major / primary discipline. The institute shall decide the individual papers to be offered as electives
(PCE) based on the availability of infrastructure and faculty. From the papers offered by the institute, an
elective paper shall be taught if and only if the number of students in a paper is at‐least 20 or at‐least 1/3
of the students of a major / primary discipline for which the paper is to be offered. The APC of the
department / institute may define a maximum number of students allowed to register for a paper as an
elective (PCE).

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 147
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

20. Teachers of the other department(s), as and when deputed by their department, for teaching the students
enrolled in programmes offered by the department offering the programme shall be a part of the
Academic Programme Committee of the discipline. Such teachers, for all academic matters, including
teaching, teachers’ continuous evaluation, term end examinations etc. shall be governed by the decisions
of the APC of department offering the programme of study. Similarly, the guest faculty, the visiting faculty
and the Contract / Ad Hoc faculty as and when deputed to teach students of a particular department shall
form a part of APC of the department.
21. The Paper IDs will be generated / issued / assigned by the Examination Division of the University.

22. The medium of instructions shall be English.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 148
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Bachelor of Technology in Mechanical Engineering (ME)

2nd Year Onward Scheme and implementation guideline

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 149
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Third Semester
Paper
Group Paper L P Credits
Code
Theory Papers
ES ES‐201 Computational Methods 4 4
HS/MS HS‐203 Indian Knowledge System* 2 2
PC MEC‐205 Theory of Machines 4 4
PC MEC‐207 Strength of Materials 4 4
PC MEC‐209 Manufacturing Science and Technology‐I 4 4
PC MEC‐211 Thermal Engineering ‐ I 4 4
Practical / Viva Voce
ES ES‐251 Computational Methods Lab 2 1
PC MEC‐253 Theory of Machines Lab 2 1
PC MEC‐255 Strength of Materials Lab 2 1
PC MEC‐257 Thermal Engineering – I Lab 2 1
PC MEC‐259 Manufacturing Science and Technology‐I Lab 2 1
Total 22 10 27

*NUES:All examinations to be conducted by the concerned teacher as specified in the detailed syllabus of the paper.

Fourth Semester
Paper
Group Paper L P Credits
Code
Theory Papers
BS BS‐202 Probability, Statistics and Linear Programming 4 4
HS/MS HS‐204 Technical Writing* 2 2
PC MEC‐206 Manufacturing Science and Technology‐II 4 4
PC MEC‐208 Material Science and Metallurgy 4 4
PC MEC‐210 Thermal Engineering ‐ II 4 4
PC MEC‐212 Machine Design‐I 4 4
Practical / Viva Voce
BS BS‐252 Probability, Statistics and Linear Programming Lab 2 1
PC MEC‐254 Manufacturing Science and Technology‐II Lab 2 1
PC MEC‐256 Thermal Engineering ‐ II Lab 2 1
PC MEC‐258 Machine Design ‐ I Lab 2 1
Total 22 8 26

*NUES:All examinations to be conducted by the concerned teacher as specified in the detailed syllabus of the paper.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 150
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Fifth Semester
Paper
Group Paper L P Credits
Code
Theory Papers
HS/MS HS‐301 Economics for Engineers 2 2
PC MEC‐303 Machine Design‐II 3 3
PC MEC‐305 Fluid Mechanics and Hydraulic Machines 4 4
PC MEC‐307 Metrology and Instrumentation 3 3
PC MEC‐309 Industrial Engineering 4 4
PC MEC‐311 Heat and Mass Transfer 4 4
Practical / Viva Voce
PC MEC‐351 Machine Design‐II Lab 2 1
PC MEC‐353 Fluid Mechanics and Hydraulic Machines Lab 2 1
PC MEC‐355 Metrology and Instrumentation Lab 2 1
PC MEC‐357 Heat and Mass Transfer Lab 2 1
PC / Internship ES‐361 Summer Training Report ‐ 1 * 1
Total 20 8 25

*NUES:Comprehensive evaluation of the Summer Training Report – 1 (after 4th Semester) shall be done by the committee
of teachers, constituted by the Academic Programme Committee, out of 100. The training shall be of 4 to 6 weeks duration.
The training can be under the mentorship of a teacher of the institute.

Sixth Semester
Paper
Group Paper L P Credits
Code
Theory Papers
HS/MS MS‐302 Principles of Management for Engineers 3 3
HS/MS HS‐304 Universal Human Values* 1 1
PCE Programme Core Elective Paper (PCE –1) 4
PCE Programme Core Elective Paper (PCE – 2) 4
PCE Programme Core Elective Paper (PCE – 3) 4
EAE / OAE Emerging Area/Open Area Elective Paper (EAE – 1 /OAE – 1) 4
EAE / OAE Emerging Area/Open Area Elective Paper (EAE – 2 /OAE – 2) 4
Practical / Viva Voce
NSS / NCC / Cultural Clubs / Technical Society / Technical
HS/MS HS‐352 2
Club**
Total 26

*NUES:All examinations to be conducted by the concerned teacher as specified in the detailed syllabus of the paper.

**NUES: Comprehensive evaluation of the students by the concerned coordinator of NCC / NSS / Cultural Clubs / Technical
Society / Technical Clubs, out of 100 as per the evaluation schemes worked out by these activity societies, organizations; the
st
faculty co‐ordinators shall be responsible for the evaluation of the same. These activities shall start from the 1 semester
th
and the evaluation shall be conducted at the end of the 6 semester for students admitted in the first semester. Students
admitted in the 2nd year (3rd semester) as lateral entry shall be evaluated on the basis their performance, by the faculty co‐
rd th
ordinator for the period of 3 semester to 6 semester only.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 151
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Seventh Semester
Paper
Group Paper L P Credits
Code
Theory Papers
HS/MS MS‐401 Principles of Entrepreneurship Mindset 2 2
PCE Programme Core Elective Paper (PCE – 4) 4
PCE Programme Core Elective Paper (PCE – 5) 4
EAE / OAE Emerging Area / Open Area Elective Paper (EAE – 3 / OAE – 3) 4
EAE / OAE Emerging Area / Open Area Elective Paper (EAE – 4 / OAE – 4) 4
EAE / OAE Emerging Area / Open Area Elective Paper (EAE – 5 / OAE – 5) 4
Practical / Viva Voce
PC / Project ES‐451 Minor Project** 3
PC / Internship ES‐453 Summer Training Report ‐ 2 * 1
Total 26

*NUES:Comprehensive evaluation of the Summer Training Report – 2 (after 6th Semester) shall be done by the committee
of teachers, constituted by the Academic Programme Committee, out of 100. The training shall be of 4 to 6 weeks duration.
The training can be under the mentorship of a teacher of the institute.

**The student shall be allocated a supervisor / guide for project work at the end 6th semester by the department /
institution, the project shall continue into the 8th semester. In the 7th semester evaluation, the criteria for evaluation shall
be conceptualization of the project work, the background study / literature survey and identification of objectives and
methodology to be followed for project. 40 marks evaluation for the Teachers' Continuous Evaluation / Internal Assessment
shall be done by concerned supervisor which the term end examination of 60 marks shall be conducted by the supervisor
concerned and the external examiner deputed by the Examinations Division. In the absence of the supervisor, the Director
of the Institution / Head of the Department can assign the responsibility of the supervisor (for purpose of examinations) to
any faculty of the Institution / Department.

Eight Semester
Paper
Group Paper L P Credits
Code
%
Practical / Viva Voce
ES‐452 Major Project – Dissertation and Viva Voce# 18
PC / Project
ES‐454 Project Progress Evaluation* 2
#
ES‐456 Internship Report and Viva Voce 18
PC / Internship
ES‐458 Internship Progress Evaluation* 2
Total 0 0 20

*NUES: Comprehensive evaluation by the committee of teachers, constituted by the Academic Programme
Committee, out of 100.

%By default every student shall do the project work (ES‐452 and ES‐454). A student shall either be allowed to
do a project work (ES‐452 and ES‐454) or an internship (ES‐456 and ES‐458). The student must apply for
approval to do internship before the commencement of the 8th semester to the institute, and only after
approval of Principal / Director of the institute through Training and Placement Officer of the institute, shall
proceed for internship.

#Students may be allowed to do internship in this semester in lieu of Major project. The students allowed to
proceed for internship shall be required to maintain a log‐book of activities performed during internship. The
same has to be countersigned by the mentor at the organization where internship is completed.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 152
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

ES‐452: Evaluation shall be conducted of 40 marks (Teachers’ continuous evaluation / internal assessment) by
the supervisor. And, 60 marks by a bench of the supervisor and the external examiner deputed by Examination
Division (COE), for a total of 100 marks.

ES‐454 / ES‐458: Comprehensive evaluation by the committee of teachers, constituted by the Academic
Programme Committee, out of 100.

ES‐456: Evaluation shall be conducted of 40 marks (Teachers’ continuous evaluation / internal assessment) by
the Training and Placement Officer of the department / institute on the basis of the report submitted by the
student. And, 60 marks by a bench of the Training and Placement Officer of the department / institute and the
external examiner deputed by Examination Division (COE), for a total of 100 marks.

In the absence of the supervisor or the Training and Placement Officer (as the case may be), the Director of the
institute / Head of the Department can assign the responsibility of the supervisor or the Training and Placement
Officer (for purpose of examinations) to any faculty of the department.

Note on Elective Papers: The elective papers shall be allowed to be taken / studied by the students, by the
APC of the department / institute, keeping in view that two papers studied by the student should not have a
substantial overlap. All papers studied by the student should be substantially distinct in content.

Note on Examination of Elective Papers:

(a) Papers with only theory component shall have 25 Marks continuous evaluation by the teacher and 75
Marks term‐end examinations. Both these component marks shall be reflected on the marksheet of the
student.
(b) Papers with only practical component shall have 40 Marks continuous evaluation by the teacher and 60
Marks term‐end examinations. Both these component marks shall be reflected on the marksheet of the
student.

Note on Continuous Evaluation of All Papers:

(a) Papers with only theory component shall have 25 Marks continuous evaluation by the teacher which shall
be evaluated as:
i. Mid‐Term Test* ‐ 15 Marks (after 8 weeks of teaching or as
decided by PCC)
ii. Assignments / Project / Quiz / Case Studies, etc. ‐ 5 Marks
iii. Attendance / Class Participation ‐ 5 Marks
(b) Papers with only practical component shall have 40Marks continuous evaluation by the teacher which shall
be evaluated as:
i. Mid‐Term Test and Viva Voce ‐ 20 Marks (after 8 weeks of teaching or as
decided by PCC)
ii. Practical File ‐ 10 Marks
iii. Attendance / Lab Participation ‐ 10 Marks

* The mid‐term test shall be coordinated by the Programme Coordination Committee.

If a student could not appear for a mid‐term test due to situation beyond the control by the student, a
supplementary test may be arranged towards the end of the semester, in a similar manner to the mid‐term
test for such students. The students must apply for this provision to the department / institution. On
examination of the reason for non‐appearing in the mid‐term test by the Head of the Department / Institute,
and with reason for allowing to appear in the supplementary test to recorded by the Head of the Department
/ Institute, the student may be allowed.

The attendance sheets, the question papers and the award sheets for the continuous evaluation to be
retained by the concerned department / institute for at least 6 months after the declaration of the result by
the Examination Division of the University.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 153
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Programme Core Electives

Semester Paper Code PCE – 1 (Choose Any One) L P Credits

MEE‐306T Automobile Engineering and Electric Vehicles 3 3
6
MEE‐306P Automobile Engineering and Electric Vehicles Lab 2 1
MEE‐308T Turbomachines 3 3
6
MEE‐308P Turbomachines Lab 2 1
MEE‐310T Finite Element Methods 3 3
6
MEE‐310P Finite Element Methods Lab 2 1
MEE‐312T IC Engines and Gas Turbines 3 3
6
MEE‐312P IC Engines and Gas Turbines Lab 2 1
MEE‐314T Gas Dynamics & Jet Propulsion 3 3
6
MEE‐314P Gas Dynamics & Jet Propulsion Lab 2 1
Semester Paper Code PCE – 2 (Choose Any One) L P Credits
MEE‐316T Refrigeration and Airconditioning 3 3
6
MEE‐316P Refrigeration and Airconditioning Lab 2 1
MEE‐318T Power Plant Engineering 3 3
6
MEE‐318P Power Plant Engineering Lab 2 1
MEE‐320T Mechanical Vibrations 3 3
6
MEE‐320P Mechanical Vibrations Lab 2 1
MEE‐322T Reliability & Maintenance Engineering 3 3
6
MEE‐322P Reliability & Maintenance Engineering Lab 2 1
MEE‐324T Advanced Machine Design 3 3
6
MEE‐324P Advanced Machine Design Lab 2 1
MEE‐326T Introduction to CAD/CAM 3 3
6
MEE‐326P Introduction to CAD/CAM Lab 2 1
Semester Paper Code PCE – 3 (Choose Any One) L P Credits
MEE‐328T Robotics Engineering 3 3
6
MEE‐328P Robotics Engineering Lab 2 1
MEE‐330T Advance Material Science and Metallurgy 3 3
6
MEE‐330P Advance Material Science and Metallurgy Lab 2 1
MEE‐332T Metal Forming and Press Working 3 3
6
MEE‐332P Metal Forming and Press Working Lab 2 1
MEE‐334T Advances in Welding & Casting 3 3
6
MEE‐334P Advances in Welding & Casting Lab 2 1
MEE‐336T System Modeling, simulation and Analysis 3 3
6
MEE‐336P System Modeling, Simulation and Analysis Lab 2 1
MEE‐338T Elastic & Plastic Behaviour of Materials 3 3
6
MEE‐338P Elastic & Plastic Behaviour of Materials Lab 2 1
Semester Paper Code PCE – 4 (Choose Any One) L P Credits
MEE‐403T Geometric Modelling and Analysis 3 3
7
MEE‐403P Geometric Modelling and Analysis Lab 2 1
MEE‐405T Computer integrated Manufacturing 3 3
7
MEE‐405P Computer integrated Manufacturing Lab 2 1
MEE‐407T Control Systems and Applications 3 3
7
MEE‐407P Control Systems and Applications Lab 2 1
MEE‐409T Rapid prototyping Tooling and Manufacturing 3 3
7
MEE‐409P Rapid prototyping Tooling and Manufacturing Lab 2 1
MEE‐411T Automation in Manufacturing 3 3
7
MEE‐411P Automation in Manufacturing Lab 2 1
Semester Paper Code PCE – 5 (Choose Any One) L P Credits
MEE‐413T Strength of Materials‐II 3 3
7
MEE‐413P Strength of Materials‐II Lab 2 1

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 154
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

MEE‐415T Design of Mechanical Drives 3 3

7
MEE‐415P Design of Mechanical Drives Lab 2 1
MEE‐417T Design of Experiments 3 3
7
MEE‐417P Design of Experiments Lab 2 1
MEE‐419T Advance Metal Cutting and Tool Design 3 3
7
MEE‐419P Advance Metal Cutting and Tool Design Lab 2 1
MEE‐421T Design of Mechanical Assemblies 3 3
7
MEE‐421P Design of Mechanical Assemblies Lab 2 1
MEE‐423T Non Traditional Manufacturing 3 3
7
MEE‐423P Non Traditional Manufacturing Lab 2 1

Note:
1. An elective shall be offered to the student for each PCE group (That is for PCE‐1, PCE‐2, etc.) based on the
availability of resources and faculty at the institution and at least one third of the batch or at least 20 students
must be willing to take the elective. At least two elective per PCE group must be offered to the students of the
major discipline.

2. Each PCE slot is of 4 credits, if in a particular slot, the paper has no practical component, then it is of 4 credits
(a pure theory paper), otherwise for purpose of examination and conduct of classes, the course is split in two
papers, namely a theory paper of 3 credits and a practical paper of 1 credit. The student has to study for 4
credits per slot of PCE group. This is reflected by suffixing the paper code by T (for Theory component) and P
(for Practical component), if required.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 155
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Implementation Rules:

1. The examinations, attendance criteria to appear in examinations, promotion and award of the degree
shall be governed by the Ordinance 11 of the University. The term “major discipline” / “primary discipline”
in this document refers to the discipline in which student is admitted / studies from 3rd semester onwards.
However credits of courses / paper for OAE / EAE groups shall not be considered for the purpose of
promotion from one year of study to the subsequent year of study.
2. Minimum duration of the Bachelor of Technology programme shall be 4 years (N=4 years) (8 semesters)
for the students admitted in the 1st year and 1st semester of the degree programme. Lateral entry students
shall be admitted in the 2nd year and 3rd semester of the degree programme (effectively in the batch
admitted in the first year in the previous academic session and shall be deemed to have been exempted
from the courses / papers of the first year of the degree programme. No exemption certificate shall be
issued in any case.
A specific lateral entry students’ minimum duration shall be the same as the minimum duration for the
batch in which he/she is admitted as a lateral entry student in the 2nd year.
3. Maximum duration of the Bachelor of Technology programme shall be 6 years (N+2 years). After
completion of N+2 years of study, if the student has appeared in the papers of all the semesters upto 8th
semester, then a maximum extension of 1 year may be given to the student for completing the
requirements of the degree if and only if the number of credits already earned by the student is atleast 150
(for lateral entry students it shall be at least 102 credits) from the (non‐honours components). Otherwise,
the admission of the student shall stand cancelled. After the period of allowed study, the admission of the
student shall be cancelled.
A specific lateral entry students’ maximum duration shall be the same as the minimum duration for the
batch in which he/she is admitted as a lateral entry student in the 2nd year.
4. The degree shall be awarded only after the fulfilment of all requirements of the Scheme and Syllabus of
Examinations and the applicable Ordinance.
5. (a) The students shall undergo the following group of Courses / Papers as enumerated in the scheme (For
the students admitted in the First Year / First Semester).

Semester (Credits) Total Mandatory

Group
I & II III IV V VI VII VIII Credits Credits

BS 24 5 29 14

HS/MS 6 2 2 2 6 2 20 10

ES 20 5 25 15

PC 19 19 24 4 20 86 76

PCE 12 8 20 16

EAE/OAE 8 12 20 16

Total 50 26 26 26 26 26 20 200 147

TABLE 1: Distribution of Credits (Project / Internship credits are 25 out the 86 credits for Programme Core
(PC) credits, while extra‐curricular activities credits are 2 out of 20 credits for Humanities / Management
/ Social Science Group (HS/MS)) . This table is for students admitted in the First Year / First Semester of
the Degree Programme.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 156
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

(b) The students admitted as Lateral Entry shall undergo the following group of Courses / Papers as
enumerated in the scheme.

Semester (Credits) Total Mandatory

Group
III IV V VI VII VIII Credits Credits

BS 5 5 0

HS/MS 2 2 2 6 2 14 7

ES 5 5 0

PC 19 19 24 4 20 86 76

PCE 12 8 20 16

EAE/OAE 8 12 20 16

Total 26 26 26 26 26 20 150 115

TABLE 2: Distribution of Credits (Project / Internship credits are 25 out the 86 credits for Programme Core
(PC) credits, while extra‐curricular activities credits are 2 out of 14 credits for Humanities / Management
/ Social Science Group (HS/MS)) This table is for students admitted as Lateral Entry Students in the
Second Year / Third Semester of the Degree Programme.

6. Mandatory Credits specify the number of credits from each subject group to be mandatorily acquired by
the student for the award of the degree,for students admitted as students in the 1st year and 1st semester
of the degree programme. While for students admitted as lateral entry in the 2nd year and 3rd semester
the Mandatory Credits value is 115, and specify the number of credits from each subject group to be
mandatorily acquired by the student for the award of the degree (Table 2). See clause 11 and 12 also.
7. Some of the papers are droppable in the sense that the student may qualify for the award of the degree
even when the student has not cleared / passed some of the papers of these group. However, the student
has to earn the minimum credits for the programme of study as specified. See clause 11 and 12 also.
8. The students may take 5 subjects from EAE / OAE groups. The open electives of the OAE group of courses
may also be taken through SWAYAM / NPTEL MOOCs platform. The student desirous of doing a MOOC
based course among the OAE group must seek approval of the APC of the institute for the same before the
commencement of the semester. The APC shall allow the MOOC based OAE option to the student if and
only if the MOOC subject / course being considered for the student is being offered in line with the
Academic Calendar applicable. The student shall submit the successful completion certificate with marks to
the institution for onwards transfer to the Examination Division. The Examinations Division shall take these
marks on record for incorporation in the result of the appropriate semester. These marks / grades of these
courses shall be used for calculation of the SGPA/CGPA of the student concerned by the examination
division of the University. If a student takes even one OAE paper through MOOCs, then the student shall
not be eligible for minor specialization. The degree to the student on fulfilment of other requirements for
such cases shall be through clause 12.b. or 12.c.
These MOOC courses taken by the students, if allowed by the APC of the institute shall be of 4 credits or
more collectively to be against or for one paper slot in the scheme, through MOOCs, though the marks
shall be shown individually. That is in one paper slot in the scheme wherever a MOOC course is allowed,
the student may register for more than one paper to aggregate 4 credits or more. If the credits of these
MOOC Courses, allowed to a student is more than 4, then the maximum credit for the programme shall
be amended accordingly for the particular student. Also, in a particular semester, a student may take
more than one MOOC course with the approval of the APC to meet the credit requirements of OAE for the
semester. The cost of taking the MOOC course is to be borne by the concerned student. The results of the
MOOC courses shall be declared separately by the Examination Division from the result for the papers
conducted by the examination division of the University.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 157
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

9. To earn an Honours degree, the student may enrol for 20 credits or more through SWAYAM / NPTEL
MOOCs platform. This point has to be read together with other points specially point 13 and 14. The
acquisition of the credits should be completed before the 15th of the July of the Admission Year plus 4
years. That is, if a student is admitted in the year X, then these credits must be acquired through MOOCs by
15th July of the year (X+4), no extra duration or time shall be allocated, this means, the student must
submit the result of such papers on or before 15th July of the Admission Year plus 4 years.
Honours in the degree shall be awarded if and only if at least 20 credits are acquired through MOOCs. To
obtain Honours in the programme, the student must apply to the institution about the same before the
commencement of the 5th semester. The specific courses through MOOCs shall be registered by the
student only after approval by the Academic Programme Committee (APC) of the Institute. The APC shall
approve the course if it is not already studied by the student or the student shall not study it in future and
adds value to the major area of specialization (which is the degree). The papers for which the student
desires to appear for Honours through MOOCs, all papers results shall be submitted by the student to the
Institute for onwards transfer to Examination Division of the University, to be taken on record of the
University. The results of these papers shall be a part of the records of the examinations of the students.
The records shall be submitted by the student to the Institute, then transferred to the Examination
Division, shall be notified by the Examination Division of the University, and a separate marksheet shall be
issued by the Examination Division. The cost of taking the MOOC course is to be borne by the concerned
student. Such courses shall be reflected as additional courses / papers for the student.
If a student acquires less than 20 credits through MOOCs, following the mechanism specified, then also
the results of these papers shall be taken on record as specified above, though no Honours degree shall
be awarded.
The papers through MOOCs for Honours degree shall not be a part of the set of the papers over which the
SGPA / CGPA of the student shall be calculated.
The papers through MOOCs for Honours degree shall be additional papers studied by the students and are
to be taken into account only for award of Honours in the degree programme, if 20 credits are earned
through MOOCs as approved by APC, by a student. See Clause 13 also.
10. Maximum Credits is at least 200 (Table 1) for students admitted in the 1st year and 1st semester, these are
the credits for which the student shall have to study for the non‐Honours component of the curriculum.
And, for lateral entry students admitted in the 2nd year and 3rd semester of the degree programme, the
maximum credit required to be studied is at least 150 (Table 2). See clause 8 also.
The student has to appear in the examinations for these credits in all components of evaluation as
specified in the scheme of studies.
11. Minimum Credits required to be earned is atleast 180 (out of the 200 non Honours papers credits, see
clause 10 also) for students admitted in the 1st year and 1st semester. And, for lateral entry students
admitted in the 2nd year and 3rd semester of the degree programme, the minimum credit required to be
earned Is at least 135 (out of the 150 non Honours papers credits, see clause 10 also). See clause 6 also.
12. The following degree route can be taken by a student (also refer point 13):
a. The students shall be awarded one minor specialization, one from EAE/OEA route under the following
conditions:
i. The student has earned the mandatory credits as defined in Table 1 or Table 2 (as applicable) and
clause 6.
ii. The student earns 20 credits from one group of EAE / OAE courses offered as a minor
specialization by the institute.
iii. In addition, the total credits (including the above specified credits) earned by the student is atleast
as specified in clause 11.
The degree nomenclature of the degree shall be as: “Bachelor of Technology in Mechanical
Engineering with Minor Specializations in <concerned EAE/OAE discipline>”; if criteria / point 9 is not
satisfied for Honours. Otherwise, if criteria / point 9 is met, then the degree shall be an Honours

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 158
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

degree and the nomenclature shall be as: “Bachelor of Technology in Mechanical Engineering with
Minor Specializations in <concerned EAE/OAE discipline>) (Honours)”, if in addition to point 12.a.i,
12.a.ii, and 12.a.iii, the student fulfils the criteria for Honours as specified at point 9.
b. The students shall be awarded the degree without any minor specialization under the following
conditions:
i. The student has earned the mandatory credits as defined in Table 1 or Table 2 (as applicable) and
clause 6.
ii. In addition, the total credits (including the above specified credits) earned by the student is atleast
as specified in clause 11.
The degree nomenclature of the degree shall be as: “Bachelor of Technology in Mechanical
Engineering”; if criteria / point 9 is not satisfied for Honours. Otherwise, if criteria / point 9 is met,
then the degrees shall be an Honours degree and the nomenclature shall be as: “Bachelor of
Technology in Mechanical Engineering (Honours)”, if in addition to point 12.b.i and 12.b.ii, the
student fulfils the criteria for Honours as specified at point 9.
c. If the student does not fulfil any of the above criterions (point 12.a, or 12.b), if the student earns at
least the minimum credits specified in clause 11 (disregarding the mandatory credits clause of Table 1
or Table 2 (as applicable) and Clause 6), then the student shall be award the degree as “Bachelor of
Technology in Mechanical Engineering”. Such students shall not be eligible for the award of an
Honours degree. Though, if credits are accumulated through MOOCs as per clause 9, the same shall be
reflected in the marksheets of the students.
13. The Honours degree shall only be awarded if the CGPA of the student is above or equal to 7.5 in addition
to fulfilment of criteria / point 10 and 13 above and the degree is awarded after the immediate
completion of the 4th year of the batch from the year of admission. No Honours shall be conferred if the
degree requirements are not completed in the minimum duration.
14. Pass marks in every paper shall be 40.
15. Grading System shall be as per Ordinance 11 of the University.
16. The Programme Core Electives (PCE) shall be specific to a major discipline, minor specializations and papers
for EAE shall be defined by the school defining the syllabus for the particular areas and minor
specializations and papers for OAE shall be defined by the schools defining the elective streams.
17. Minor specialization in non‐engineering disciplines may be offered under the aegis of the other schools
(provided the individual institutions are offering programmes under the aegis of the school offering the
non‐engineering minor specialization). The minor specialization framework of 20 credits has to be
offered within the framework of the current Scheme of Studies of the primary / major discipline.
18. The institution shall offer atleast two elective groups out of the emerging area / open area for students of
each major discipline. The emerging area / open electives can also be offered as standalone papers not
forming a part of any elective groups also. The institute shall decide the group(s) and/or individual papers
to be offered as electives based on the availability of infrastructure and faculty. From the groups / papers
offered by the institute, an elective paper / group shall be taught if and only if the number of students in a
paper is at‐least 20 or at‐least 1/3 of the students of a major / primary discipline for which the paper /
group is to be offered. The APC of the department / institute may define a maximum number of students
allowed to register for a paper as an elective (EAE / OAE).
19. The institution shall offer atleast two elective papers from each program core elective group for students
of each major / primary discipline. The institute shall decide the individual papers to be offered as electives
(PCE) based on the availability of infrastructure and faculty. From the papers offered by the institute, an
elective paper shall be taught if and only if the number of students in a paper is at‐least 20 or at‐least 1/3
of the students of a major / primary discipline for which the paper is to be offered. The APC of the
department / institute may define a maximum number of students allowed to register for a paper as an
elective (PCE).
20. Teachers of the other department(s), as and when deputed by their department, for teaching the students
enrolled in programmes offered by the department offering the programme shall be a part of the

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 159
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Academic Programme Committee of the discipline. Such teachers, for all academic matters, including
teaching, teachers’ continuous evaluation, term end examinations etc. shall be governed by the decisions
of the APC of department offering the programme of study. Similarly, the guest faculty, the visiting faculty
and the Contract / Ad Hoc faculty as and when deputed to teach students of a particular department shall
form a part of APC of the department.
21. The Paper IDs will be generated / issued / assigned by the Examination Division of the University.

22. The medium of instructions shall be English.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 160
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Bachelor of Technology in Civil Engineering (CE)

2nd Year Onward Scheme and implementation guideline

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 161
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Third Semester
Paper
Group Paper L P Credits
Code
Theory Papers
ES ES‐201 Computational Methods 4 4
HS/MS HS‐203 Indian Knowledge System* 2 2
PC CEC‐205 Structural Analysis ‐ I 4 4
PC CEC‐207 Structural Design ‐ I 4 4
PC CEC‐209 Fluid Mechanics 4 4
PC CEC‐211 Geomatics Engineering 4 4
Practical / Viva Voce
ES ES‐251 Computational Methods Lab 2 1
PC CEC‐253 Civil Engineering Drawing Lab 2 1
PC CEC‐255 Fluid Mechanics Lab 2 1
PC CEC‐257 Geomatics Engineering Lab 2 1
Total 22 8 26

*NUES:All examinations to be conducted by the concerned teacher as specified in the detailed syllabus of the paper.

Fourth Semester
Paper
Group Paper L P Credits
Code
Theory Papers
BS BS‐202 Probability, Statistics and Linear Programming 4 4
HS/MS HS‐204 Technical Writing* 2 2
PC CEC‐206 Soil Mechanics 4 4
PC CEC‐208 Hydraulics and Hydrology 4 4
PC CEC‐210 Environmental Engineering ‐ I 4 4
PC CEC‐212 Transportation Engineering 4 4
Practical / Viva Voce
BS BS‐252 Probability, Statistics and Linear Programming Lab 2 1
PC CEC‐254 Soil Mechanics Lab 2 1
PC CEC‐256 Hydraulics Lab 2 1
PC CEC‐258 Transportation Engineering Lab 2 1
Total 22 8 26

*NUES:All examinations to be conducted by the concerned teacher as specified in the detailed syllabus of the paper.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 162
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Fifth Semester
Paper
Group Paper L P Credits
Code
Theory Papers
HS/MS HS‐301 Economics for Engineers 2 2
PC CEC‐303 Structural Analysis ‐ II 4 4
PC CEC‐305 Structural Design ‐ II 3 3
PC CEC‐307 Geotechnical Engineering 4 4
PC CEC‐309 Environmental Engineering ‐ II 4 4
PC CEC‐311 Traffic Engineering and Pavement Design 4 4
Practical / Viva Voce
PC CEC‐351 Structural Design Lab 2 1
PC CEC‐353 Building Material and Concrete Testing Lab 2 1
PC CEC‐355 Geotechnical Engineering Lab 2 1
PC CEC‐357 Environmental Engineering Lab 2 1
PC / Internship ES‐361 Summer Training Report ‐ 1 * 1
Total 21 8 26

*NUES:Comprehensive evaluation of the Summer Training Report – 1 (after 4th Semester) shall be doneby the committee
of teachers, constituted by the Academic Programme Committee, out of 100. The training shall be of 4 to 6 weeks duration.
The training can be under the mentorship of a teacher of the institute.

Sixth Semester
Paper
Group Paper L P Credits
Code
Theory Papers
HS/MS MS‐302 Principles of Management for Engineers 3 3
HS/MS HS‐304 Universal Human Values* 1 1
PCE Programme Core Elective Paper (PCE –1) 4
PCE Programme Core Elective Paper (PCE – 2) 4
PCE Programme Core Elective Paper (PCE – 3) 4
EAE / OAE Emerging Area/Open Area Elective Paper (EAE – 1 /OAE – 1) 4
EAE / OAE Emerging Area/Open Area Elective Paper (EAE – 2 /OAE – 2) 4
Practical / Viva Voce
NSS / NCC / Cultural Clubs / Technical Society / Technical
HS/MS HS‐352 2
Club**
Total 26

*NUES:All examinations to be conducted by the concerned teacher as specified in the detailed syllabus of the paper.

**NUES: Comprehensive evaluation of the students by the concerned coordinator of NCC / NSS / Cultural Clubs / Technical
Society / Technical Clubs, out of 100 as per the evaluation schemes worked out by these activity societies, organizations; the
faculty co‐ordinators shall be responsible for the evaluation of the same. These activities shall start from the 1st semester
and the evaluation shall be conducted at the end of the 6th semester for students admitted in the first semester. Students
nd rd
admitted in the 2 year (3 semester) as lateral entry shall be evaluated on the basis their performance, by the faculty co‐
rd th
ordinator for the period of 3 semester to 6 semester only.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 163
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Seventh Semester
Paper
Group Paper L P Credits
Code
Theory Papers
HS/MS MS‐401 Principles of Entrepreneurship Mindset 2 2
PCE Programme Core Elective Paper (PCE – 4) 4
PCE Programme Core Elective Paper (PCE – 5) 4
EAE / OAE Emerging Area / Open Area Elective Paper (EAE – 3 / OAE – 3) 4
EAE / OAE Emerging Area / Open Area Elective Paper (EAE – 4 / OAE – 4) 4
EAE / OAE Emerging Area / Open Area Elective Paper (EAE – 5 / OAE – 5) 4
Practical / Viva Voce
PC / Project ES‐451 Minor Project** 3
PC / Internship ES‐453 Summer Training Report ‐ 2 * 1
Total 26

*NUES:Comprehensive evaluation of the Summer Training Report – 2 (after 6th Semester) shall be done by the committee
of teachers, constituted by the Academic Programme Committee, out of 100. The training shall be of 4 to 6 weeks duration.
The training can be under the mentorship of a teacher of the institute.

**The student shall be allocated a supervisor / guide for project work at the end 6th semester by the department /
institution, the project shall continue into the 8th semester. In the 7th semester evaluation, the criteria for evaluation shall
be conceptualization of the project work, the background study / literature survey and identification of objectives and
methodology to be followed for project. 40 marks evaluation for the Teachers' Continuous Evaluation / Internal Assessment
shall be done by concerned supervisor while the term end examination of 60 marks shall be conducted by the supervisor
concerned and the external examiner deputed by the Examinations Division. In the absence of the supervisor, the Director
of the Institution / Head of the Department can assign the responsibility of the supervisor (for purpose of examinations) to
any faculty of the Institution / Department.

Eight Semester
Paper
Group Paper L P Credits
Code
%
Practical / Viva Voce
ES‐452 Major Project – Dissertation and Viva Voce# 18
PC / Project
ES‐454 Project Progress Evaluation* 2
#
ES‐456 Internship Report and Viva Voce 18
PC / Internship
ES‐458 Internship Progress Evaluation* 2
Total 0 0 20

*NUES: Comprehensive evaluation by the committee of teachers, constituted by the Academic Programme
Committee, out of 100.

%By default every student shall do the project work (ES‐452 and ES‐454). A student shall either be allowed to
do a project work (ES‐452 and ES‐454) or an internship (ES‐456 and ES‐458). The student must apply for
approval to do internship before the commencement of the 8th semester to the institute, and only after
approval of Principal / Director of the institute through Training and Placement Officer of the institute, shall
proceed for internship.

#Students may be allowed to do internship in this semester in lieu of Major project. The students allowed to
proceed for internship shall be required to maintain a log‐book of activities performed during internship. The
same has to be countersigned by the mentor at the organization where internship is completed.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 164
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

ES‐452: Evaluation shall be conducted of 40 marks (Teachers’ continuous evaluation / internal assessment) by
the supervisor. And, 60 marks by a bench of the supervisor and the external examiner deputed by Examination
Division (COE), for a total of 100 marks.

ES‐454 / ES‐458: Comprehensive evaluation by the committee of teachers, constituted by the Academic
Programme Committee, out of 100.

ES‐456: Evaluation shall be conducted of 40 marks (Teachers’ continuous evaluation / internal assessment) by
the Training and Placement Officer of the department / institute on the basis of the report submitted by the
student. And, 60 marks by a bench of the Training and Placement Officer of the department / institute and the
external examiner deputed by Examination Division (COE), for a total of 100 marks.

In the absence of the supervisor or the Training and Placement Officer (as the case may be), the Director of the
institute / Head of the Department can assign the responsibility of the supervisor or the Training and Placement
Officer (for purpose of examinations) to any faculty of the department.

Note on Elective Papers: The elective papers shall be allowed to be taken / studied by the students, by the
APC of the department / institute, keeping in view that two papers studied by the student should not have a
substantial overlap. All papers studied by the student should be substantially distinct in content.

Note on Examination of Elective Papers:

(a) Papers with only theory component shall have 25 Marks continuous evaluation by the teacher and 75
Marks term‐end examinations. Both these component marks shall be reflected on the marksheet of the
student.
(b) Papers with only practical component shall have 40 Marks continuous evaluation by the teacher and 60
Marks term‐end examinations. Both these component marks shall be reflected on the marksheet of the
student.

Note on Continuous Evaluation of All Papers:

(a) Papers with only theory component shall have 25 Marks continuous evaluation by the teacher which shall
be evaluated as:
i. Mid‐Term Test* ‐ 15 Marks (after 8 weeks of teaching or as
decided by PCC)
ii. Assignments / Project / Quiz / Case Studies, etc. ‐ 5 Marks
iii. Attendance / Class Participation ‐ 5 Marks
(b) Papers with only practical component shall have 40Marks continuous evaluation by the teacher which shall
be evaluated as:
i. Mid‐Term Test and Viva Voce ‐ 20 Marks (after 8 weeks of teaching or as
decided by PCC)
ii. Practical File ‐ 10 Marks
iii. Attendance / Lab Participation ‐ 10 Marks

* The mid‐term test shall be coordinated by the Programme Coordination Committee.

If a student could not appear for a mid‐term test due to situation beyond the control by the student, a
supplementary test may be arranged towards the end of the semester, in a similar manner to the mid‐term
test for such students. The students must apply for this provision to the department / institution. On
examination of the reason for non‐appearing in the mid‐term test by the Head of the Department / Institute,
and with reason for allowing to appear in the supplementary test to recorded by the Head of the Department
/ Institute, the student may be allowed.

The attendance sheets, the question papers and the award sheets for the continuous evaluation to be
retained by the concerned department / institute for at least 6 months after the declaration of the result by
the Examination Division of the University.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 165
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Programme Core Electives

Semester Paper Code PCE – 1 (Choose Any One) L P Credits
6 CEE‐306 Advance Structural Analysis 4 4
6 CEE‐308 Irrigation Engineering and Design of Hydraulic Structures 4 4
6 CEE‐310 Environmental Impact Assessment 4 4
Semester Paper Code PCE – 2 (Choose Any One) L P Credits
CEE‐312T Advanced Structural Design 3 3
6
CEE‐312P Advanced Structural Design Lab 2 1
6 CEE‐314 Water Resource Planning 4 4
6 CEE‐316 Pollution Control and Monitoring 4 4
Semester Paper Code PCE – 3 (Choose Any One) L P Credits
CEE‐318T Non Destructive Evaluation of Structures 3 3
6
CEE‐318P Non Destructive Evaluation of Structures Lab 2 1
6 CEE‐320 Open Chanel Flow and Sediment Transportation 4 4
6 CEE‐322 Disaster Management 4 4
Semester Paper Code PCE – 4 (Choose Any One) L P Credits
7 CEE‐403 Recent Construction Technologies 4 4
CEE‐405T Arc GIS and Remote Sensing 3 3
7
CEE‐405P Arc GIS and Remote Sensing Lab 2 1
CEE‐407T Transport Planning and Intelligent Transportation System 3 3
7
CEE‐407P Transport Planning and Intelligent Transportation System Lab 2 1
Semester Paper Code PCE – 5 (Choose Any One) L P Credits
7 CEE‐409 Structural Dynamics 4 4
7 CEE‐411 Lean Construction Technology and Management 4 4
CEE‐413T Advanced Surveying 3 3
7
CEE‐413P Advanced Surveying Lab 2 1

Note:
1. An elective shall be offered to the student for each PCE group (That is for PCE‐1, PCE‐2, etc.) based on the
availability of resources and faculty at the institution and at least one third of the batch or at least 20 students
must be willing to take the elective. At least two elective per PCE group must be offered to the students of the
major discipline.

2. Each PCE slot is of 4 credits, if in a particular slot, the paper has no practical component, then it is of 4 credits
(a pure theory paper), otherwise for purpose of examination and conduct of classes, the course is split in two
papers, namely a theory paper of 3 credits and a practical paper of 1 credit. The student has to study for 4
credits per slot of PCE group. This is reflected by suffixing the paper code by T (for Theory component) and P
(for Practical component), if required.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 166
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Implementation Rules:

1. The examinations, attendance criteria to appear in examinations, promotion and award of the degree
shall be governed by the Ordinance 11 of the University. The term “major discipline” / “primary discipline”
in this document refers to the discipline in which student is admitted / studies from 3rd semester onwards.
However credits of courses / paper for OAE / EAE groups shall not be considered for the purpose of
promotion from one year of study to the subsequent year of study.
2. Minimum duration of the Bachelor of Technology programme shall be 4 years (N=4 years) (8 semesters)
for the students admitted in the 1st year and 1st semester of the degree programme. Lateral entry students
shall be admitted in the 2nd year and 3rd semester of the degree programme (effectively in the batch
admitted in the first year in the previous academic session and shall be deemed to have been exempted
from the courses / papers of the first year of the degree programme. No exemption certificate shall be
issued in any case.
A specific lateral entry students’ minimum duration shall be the same as the minimum duration for the
batch in which he/she is admitted as a lateral entry student in the 2nd year.
3. Maximum duration of the Bachelor of Technology programme shall be 6 years (N+2 years). After
completion of N+2 years of study, if the student has appeared in the papers of all the semesters upto 8th
semester, then a maximum extension of 1 year may be given to the student for completing the
requirements of the degree if and only if the number of credits already earned by the student is atleast 150
(for lateral entry students it shall be at least 102 credits) from the (non‐honours components). Otherwise,
the admission of the student shall stand cancelled. After the period of allowed study, the admission of the
student shall be cancelled.
A specific lateral entry students’ maximum duration shall be the same as the minimum duration for the
batch in which he/she is admitted as a lateral entry student in the 2nd year.
4. The degree shall be awarded only after the fulfilment of all requirements of the Scheme and Syllabus of
Examinations and the applicable Ordinance.
5. (a) The students shall undergo the following group of Courses / Papers as enumerated in the scheme (For
the students admitted in the First Year / First Semester).

Semester (Credits) Total Mandatory

Group
I & II III IV V VI VII VIII Credits Credits

BS 24 5 29 14

HS/MS 6 2 2 2 6 2 20 10

ES 20 5 25 15

PC 19 19 24 4 20 86 76

PCE 12 8 20 16

EAE/OAE 8 12 20 16

Total 50 26 26 26 26 26 20 200 147

TABLE 1: Distribution of Credits (Project / Internship credits are 25 out the 86 credits for Programme Core
(PC) credits, while extra‐curricular activities credits are 2 out of 20 credits for Humanities / Management
/ Social Science Group (HS/MS)) . This table is for students admitted in the First Year / First Semester of
the Degree Programme.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 167
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

(b) The students admitted as Lateral Entry shall undergo the following group of Courses / Papers as
enumerated in the scheme.

Semester (Credits) Total Mandatory

Group
III IV V VI VII VIII Credits Credits

BS 5 5 0

HS/MS 2 2 2 6 2 14 7

ES 5 5 0

PC 19 19 24 4 20 86 76

PCE 12 8 20 16

EAE/OAE 8 12 20 16

Total 26 26 26 26 26 20 150 115

TABLE 2: Distribution of Credits (Project / Internship credits are 25 out the 86 credits for Programme Core
(PC) credits, while extra‐curricular activities credits are 2 out of 14 credits for Humanities / Management
/ Social Science Group (HS/MS)) This table is for students admitted as Lateral Entry Students in the
Second Year / Third Semester of the Degree Programme.

6. Mandatory Credits specify the number of credits from each subject group to be mandatorily acquired by
the student for the award of the degree,for students admitted as students in the 1st year and 1st semester
of the degree programme. While for students admitted as lateral entry in the 2nd year and 3rd semester
the Mandatory Credits value is 115, and specify the number of credits from each subject group to be
mandatorily acquired by the student for the award of the degree (Table 2). See clause 11 and 12 also.
7. Some of the papers are droppable in the sense that the student may qualify for the award of the degree
even when the student has not cleared / passed some of the papers of these group. However, the student
has to earn the minimum credits for the programme of study as specified. See clause 11 and 12 also.
8. The students may take 5 subjects from EAE / OAE groups. The open electives of the OAE group of courses
may also be taken through SWAYAM / NPTEL MOOCs platform. The student desirous of doing a MOOC
based course among the OAE group must seek approval of the APC of the institute for the same before the
commencement of the semester. The APC shall allow the MOOC based OAE option to the student if and
only if the MOOC subject / course being considered for the student is being offered in line with the
Academic Calendar applicable. The student shall submit the successful completion certificate with marks to
the institution for onwards transfer to the Examination Division. The Examinations Division shall take these
marks on record for incorporation in the result of the appropriate semester. These marks / grades of these
courses shall be used for calculation of the SGPA/CGPA of the student concerned by the examination
division of the University. If a student takes even one OAE paper through MOOCs, then the student shall
not be eligible for minor specialization. The degree to the student on fulfilment of other requirements for
such cases shall be through clause 12.b. or 12.c.
These MOOC courses taken by the students, if allowed by the APC of the institute shall be of 4 credits or
more collectively to be against or for one paper slot in the scheme, through MOOCs, though the marks
shall be shown individually. That is in one paper slot in the scheme wherever a MOOC course is allowed,
the student may register for more than one paper to aggregate 4 credits or more. If the credits of these
MOOC Courses, allowed to a student is more than 4, then the maximum credit for the programme shall
be amended accordingly for the particular student. Also, in a particular semester, a student may take
more than one MOOC course with the approval of the APC to meet the credit requirements of OAE for the
semester. The cost of taking the MOOC course is to be borne by the concerned student. The results of the
MOOC courses shall be declared separately by the Examination Division from the result for the papers
conducted by the examination division of the University.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 168
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

9. To earn an Honours degree, the student may enrol for 20 credits or more through SWAYAM / NPTEL
MOOCs platform. This point has to be read together with other points specially point 13 and 14. The
acquisition of the credits should be completed before the 15th of the July of the Admission Year plus 4
years. That is, if a student is admitted in the year X, then these credits must be acquired through MOOCs by
15th July of the year (X+4), no extra duration or time shall be allocated, this means, the student must
submit the result of such papers on or before 15th July of the Admission Year plus 4 years.
Honours in the degree shall be awarded if and only if at least 20 credits are acquired through MOOCs. To
obtain Honours in the programme, the student must apply to the institution about the same before the
commencement of the 5th semester. The specific courses through MOOCs shall be registered by the
student only after approval by the Academic Programme Committee (APC) of the Institute. The APC shall
approve the course if it is not already studied by the student or the student shall not study it in future and
adds value to the major area of specialization (which is the degree). The papers for which the student
desires to appear for Honours through MOOCs, all papers results shall be submitted by the student to the
Institute for onwards transfer to Examination Division of the University, to be taken on record of the
University. The results of these papers shall be a part of the records of the examinations of the students.
The records shall be submitted by the student to the Institute, then transferred to the Examination
Division, shall be notified by the Examination Division of the University, and a separate marksheet shall be
issued by the Examination Division. The cost of taking the MOOC course is to be borne by the concerned
student. Such courses shall be reflected as additional courses / papers for the student.
If a student acquires less than 20 credits through MOOCs, following the mechanism specified, then also
the results of these papers shall be taken on record as specified above, though no Honours degree shall
be awarded.
The papers through MOOCs for Honours degree shall not be a part of the set of the papers over which the
SGPA / CGPA of the student shall be calculated.
The papers through MOOCs for Honours degree shall be additional papers studied by the students and are
to be taken into account only for award of Honours in the degree programme, if 20 credits are earned
through MOOCs as approved by APC, by a student. See Clause 13 also.
10. Maximum Credits is at least 200 (Table 1) for students admitted in the 1st year and 1st semester, these are
the credits for which the student shall have to study for the non‐Honours component of the curriculum.
And, for lateral entry students admitted in the 2nd year and 3rd semester of the degree programme, the
maximum credit required to be studied is at least 150 (Table 2). See clause 8 also.
The student has to appear in the examinations for these credits in all components of evaluation as
specified in the scheme of studies.
11. Minimum Credits required to be earned is atleast 180 (out of the 200 non Honours papers credits, see
clause 10 also) for students admitted in the 1st year and 1st semester. And, for lateral entry students
admitted in the 2nd year and 3rd semester of the degree programme, the minimum credit required to be
earned Is at least 135 (out of the 150 non Honours papers credits, see clause 10 also). See clause 6 also.
12. The following degree route can be taken by a student (also refer point 13):
a. The students shall be awarded one minor specialization, one from EAE/OEA route under the following
conditions:
i. The student has earned the mandatory credits as defined in Table 1 or Table 2 (as applicable) and
clause 6.
ii. The student earns 20 credits from one group of EAE / OAE courses offered as a minor
specialization by the institute.
iii. In addition, the total credits (including the above specified credits) earned by the student is atleast
as specified in clause 11.
The degree nomenclature of the degree shall be as: “Bachelor of Technology in Civil Engineering with
Minor Specializations in <concerned EAE/OAE discipline>”; if criteria / point 9 is not satisfied for
Honours. Otherwise, if criteria / point 9 is met, then the degree shall be an Honours degree and the

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 169
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

nomenclature shall be as: “Bachelor of Technology in Civil Engineering with Minor Specializations in
<concerned EAE/OAE discipline>) (Honours)”, if in addition to point 12.a.i, 12.a.ii, and 12.a.iii, the
student fulfils the criteria for Honours as specified at point 9.
b. The students shall be awarded the degree without any minor specialization under the following
conditions:
i. The student has earned the mandatory credits as defined in Table 1 or Table 2 (as applicable) and
clause 6.
ii. In addition, the total credits (including the above specified credits) earned by the student is atleast
as specified in clause 11.
The degree nomenclature of the degree shall be as: “Bachelor of Technology in Civil Engineering”; if
criteria / point 9 is not satisfied for Honours. Otherwise, if criteria / point 9 is met, then the degrees
shall be an Honours degree and the nomenclature shall be as: “Bachelor of Technology in Civil
Engineering (Honours)”, if in addition to point 12.b.i and 12.b.ii, the student fulfils the criteria for
Honours as specified at point 9.
c. If the student does not fulfil any of the above criterions (point 12.a, or 12.b), if the student earns at
least the minimum credits specified in clause 11 (disregarding the mandatory credits clause of Table 1
or Table 2 (as applicable) and Clause 6), then the student shall be award the degree as “Bachelor of
Technology in Civil Engineering”. Such students shall not be eligible for the award of an Honours
degree. Though, if credits are accumulated through MOOCs as per clause 9, the same shall be
reflected in the marksheets of the students.
13. The Honours degree shall only be awarded if the CGPA of the student is above or equal to 7.5 in addition
to fulfilment of criteria / point 10 and 13 above and the degree is awarded after the immediate
completion of the 4th year of the batch from the year of admission. No Honours shall be conferred if the
degree requirements are not completed in the minimum duration.
14. Pass marks in every paper shall be 40.
15. Grading System shall be as per Ordinance 11 of the University.
16. The Programme Core Electives (PCE) shall be specific to a major discipline, minor specializations and papers
for EAE shall be defined by the school defining the syllabus for the particular areas and minor
specializations and papers for OAE shall be defined by the schools defining the elective streams.
17. Minor specialization in non‐engineering disciplines may be offered under the aegis of the other schools
(provided the individual institutions are offering programmes under the aegis of the school offering the
non‐engineering minor specialization). The minor specialization framework of 20 credits has to be
offered within the framework of the current Scheme of Studies of the primary / major discipline.
18. The institution shall offer atleast two elective groups out of the emerging area / open area for students of
each major discipline. The emerging area / open electives can also be offered as standalone papers not
forming a part of any elective groups also. The institute shall decide the group(s) and/or individual papers
to be offered as electives based on the availability of infrastructure and faculty. From the groups / papers
offered by the institute, an elective paper / group shall be taught if and only if the number of students in a
paper is at‐least 20 or at‐least 1/3 of the students of a major / primary discipline for which the paper /
group is to be offered. The APC of the department / institute may define a maximum number of students
allowed to register for a paper as an elective (EAE / OAE).
19. The institution shall offer atleast two elective papers from each program core elective group for students
of each major / primary discipline. The institute shall decide the individual papers to be offered as electives
(PCE) based on the availability of infrastructure and faculty. From the papers offered by the institute, an
elective paper shall be taught if and only if the number of students in a paper is at‐least 20 or at‐least 1/3
of the students of a major / primary discipline for which the paper is to be offered. The APC of the
department / institute may define a maximum number of students allowed to register for a paper as an
elective (PCE).
20. Teachers of the other department(s), as and when deputed by their department, for teaching the students
enrolled in programmes offered by the department offering the programme shall be a part of the

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 170
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Academic Programme Committee of the discipline. Such teachers, for all academic matters, including
teaching, teachers’ continuous evaluation, term end examinations etc. shall be governed by the decisions
of the APC of department offering the programme of study. Similarly, the guest faculty, the visiting faculty
and the Contract / Ad Hoc faculty as and when deputed to teach students of a particular department shall
form a part of APC of the department.
21. The Paper IDs will be generated / issued / assigned by the Examination Division of the University.

22. The medium of instructions shall be English.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 171
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

MINOR SPECIALIZATION TO BE OFFERED TO

CORE ENGINEERING DISCIPLINES ONLY

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 172
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Emerging Area Elective Groups (for Minor Specialization) –

Applicable only for Core Disciplines (EAE)

The minor specialization is offered through a set of five papers that the student has to study to acquire the
minor specialization. The number of papers to be studied is two in 6th semester and three in 7th semester. The
minor specialization shall be awarded if and only if 20 credits are earned from an individual / specific minor
specialization area. From each paper group associated with a paper slot in a particular semester, the student
shall be allowed to study only one paper group. The papers shall be allowed to be taken / studied by the
students, by the APC of the department / institute, keeping in view that two papers studied by the student
should not have a substantial overlap. All papers studied by the student should be substantially distinct in
content.
Minor specialization is not necessary for award of the degree, the student may choose five papers from the
groups offered by the institution to a particular student (belonging to a major discipline) across groups.
Minimum two minor specialization groups should be offered by the institution to students of any particular
major discipline from either of the open area or emerging area groups
An elective shall be offered to the student for each Minor Specialization group in Emerging Area (That is for
EAE‐1, EAE‐2, etc.) based on the availability of resources and faculty at the institution and at least one third of
the batch or at least 20 students must be willing to take the elective.
Each EAE slot is of 4 credits, if in a particular slot, the paper has no practical component, then it is of 4 credits (a
pure theory paper), otherwise for purpose of examination and conduct of classes, the course is split in two
papers, namely a theory paper of 3 credits and a practical paper of 1 credit. The student has to study for 4
credits per slot of EAE group. This is reflected by suffixing the paper code by T (for Theory component) and P
(for Practical component), if required. The nomenclature of the paper group is <ACRONYM OF EMERGING
AREA> ‐ EAE ‐ <SLOT NUMBER>< A or B or C etc., if required>. The major disciplines to which the Emerging Area
Elective Group papers can be offered is specified as acronym together with the name of the minor
specialization.
In lieu of Emerging Area Elective, students can study papers from Open Area Elective groups also as offered to
them.

Emerging Area Specialization: Artificial Intelligence (for CSE / IT / CST / ITE / ECE / EE / EEE
/ ICE / ME / CE)
Paper
Semester Paper Group Code Paper Name L P Credits
AI‐302T Artificial Intelligence 3 3
6 AI‐EAE‐1
AI‐302P Artificial Intelligence Lab 2 1
DA‐304T Statistics, Statistical Modelling & Data Analytics 3 3
6 AI‐EAE‐2
DA‐304P Statistics, Statistical Modelling & Data Analytics Lab 2 1
SC‐401T Soft Computing 3 3
7 AI‐EAE‐3
SC‐401P Soft Computing Lab 2 1
AI‐403T Artificial Intelligence Applications 3 3
7 AI‐EAE‐4
AI‐403P Artificial Intelligence Applications Lab 2 1
AI‐405T Intelligent and Expert Systems 3 3
7 AI‐EAE‐5
AI‐405P Intelligent and Expert Systems Lab 2 1

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 173
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Emerging Area Specialization: Artificial Intelligence and Machine Learning (for CSE / IT /
CST / ITE / ECE / EE / EEE / ICE / ME / CE)
Paper
Semester Paper Group Code Paper Name L P Credits
AI‐302T Artificial Intelligence 3 3
6 AIML‐EAE‐1
AI‐302P Artificial Intelligence Lab 2 1
DA‐304T Statistics, Statistical Modelling & Data Analytics 3 3
6 AIML‐EAE‐2
DA‐304P Statistics, Statistical Modelling & Data Analytics Lab 2 1
ML‐407T Machine Learning 3 3
7 AIML‐EAE‐3
ML‐407P Machine Learning Lab 2 1
ML‐409T Reinforcement Learning and Deep Learning 3 3
7 AIML‐EAE‐4
ML‐409P Reinforcement Learning and Deep Learning Lab 2 1
ML‐411T Pattern Recognition and Computer Vision 3 3
7 AIML‐EAE‐5
ML‐411P Pattern Recognition and Computer Vision Lab 2 1

Emerging Area Specialization: Data Science (for CSE / IT / CST / ITE / ECE / EE / EEE / ICE /
ME / CE)
Paper
Semester Paper Group Code Paper Name L P Credits
DA‐304T Statistics, Statistical Modelling & Data Analytics 3 3
6 DS‐EAE‐1
DA‐304P Statistics, Statistical Modelling & Data Analytics Lab 2 1
AI‐316T Artificial Intelligence and Machine Learning 3 3
6 DS‐EAE‐2
AI‐316P Artificial Intelligence and Machine Learning Lab 2 1
DS‐427T Data Science using R 3 3
7 DS‐EAE‐3
DS‐427P Data Science using R Lab 2 1
DS‐429T Big Data Analytics 3 3
7 DS‐EAE‐4
DS‐429P Big Data Analytics Lab 2 1
DS‐EAE‐5A DS‐431T Business Intelligence 3 3
OR DS‐431P Business Intelligence Lab 2 1
7
DS‐433T Exploratory Data Analytics and Data Visualization 3 3
DS‐EAE‐5B
DS‐433P Exploratory Data Analytics and Data Visualization Lab 2 1

Emerging Area Specialization: Block Chain Technology (for CSE / IT / CST / ITE/ECE/EE/EEE)
Paper
Semester Paper Group Code Paper Name L P Credits
CS‐306T Mathematics of Modern Cryptography 3 3
6 BT‐EAE‐1
CS‐306P Mathematics of Modern Cryptography Lab 2 1
BT‐308T Blockchain Technology 3 3
6 BT‐EAE‐2
BT‐308P Blockchain Technology Lab 2 1
BT‐413T Bitcoin and Cryptocurrency Technologies 3 3
7 BT‐EAE‐3
BT‐413P Bitcoin and Cryptocurrency Technologies Lab 2 1
BT‐415T Smart Contracts 3 3
7 BT‐EAE‐4
BT‐415P Smart Contracts Lab 2 1
BT‐EAE‐5A BT‐417T Blockchain for Cyber Security 3 3
OR BT‐417P Blockchain for Cyber Security Lab 2 1
7
BT‐419T Blockchain Technology in Web Development 3 3
BT‐EAE‐5B
BT‐419P Blockchain Technology in Web Development Lab 2 1

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 174
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Emerging Area Specialization: Internet of Things (for CSE / IT / CST / ITE / ECE / EE / EEE /
ICE / ME)
Paper
Semester Paper Group Code Paper Name L P Credits
IOT‐EAE‐1A IOT‐324T Introduction to Internet of Things 3 3
OR IOT‐324P Introduction to Internet of Things Lab 2 1
6
IOT‐326T Introduction to Sensors and Transducers 3 3
IOT‐EAE‐1B
IOT‐326P Introduction to Sensors and Transducers Lab 2 1
IOT‐EAE‐2A ES‐328T Embedded Linux 3 3
OR ES‐328P Embedded Linux Lab 2 1
IOT‐EAE‐2B IOT‐330T Programming in Python 3 3
6
OR IOT‐330P Programming in Python Lab 2 1
IOT‐332T Wireless Sensor Networks 3 3
IOT‐EAE‐2C
IOT‐332P Wireless Sensor Networks Lab 2 1
IOT‐441T IoT with Arduino, ESP and Raspberry Pi 3 3
7 IOT‐EAE‐3
IOT‐441P IoT with Arduino, ESP and Raspberry Pi Lab 2 1
IOT‐443T Design of Smart Systems 3 3
7 IOT‐EAE‐4
IOT‐443P Design of Smart Systems Lab 2 1
IOT‐445T Internet of Things Industrial and Medical Case Studies 3 3
IOT‐EAE‐5A
Internet of Things Industrial and Medical Case Studies
OR IOT‐445P 2 1
Lab
7
IOT‐EAE‐5B IOT‐447T Internet of Things Frameworks 3 3
OR IOT‐447P Internet of Things Frameworks Lab 2 1
IOT‐EAE‐5C IOT‐449 Privacy and Security issues in IoT 4 4

Emerging Area Specialization: Internet of Things and Cyber Security including Block Chain
Technology (for CSE / IT / CST / ITE / ECE / EE / EEE / ICE / ME)

Paper
Semester Paper Group Code Paper Name L P Credits
ICB‐EAE‐1A IOT‐324T Introduction to Internet of Things 3 3
OR IOT‐324P Introduction to Internet of Things Lab 2 1
6
IOT‐326T Introduction to Sensors and Transducers 3 3
ICB‐EAE‐1B
IOT‐326P Introduction to Sensors and Transducers Lab 2 1
ICB‐EAE‐2A ES‐328T Embedded Linux 3 3
OR ES‐328P Embedded Linux Lab 2 1
ICB‐EAE‐2B IOT‐330T Programming in Python 3 3
6
OR IOT‐330P Programming in Python Lab 2 1
IOT‐332T Wireless Sensor Networks 3 3
ICB‐EAE‐2C
IOT‐332P Wireless Sensor Networks Lab 2 1
CS‐423T Cyber Security and Forensics 3 3
7 ICB‐EAE‐3
CS‐423P Cyber Security and Forensics Lab 2 1
IOT‐441T IoT with Arduino, ESP and Raspberry Pi 3 3
7 ICB‐EAE‐4
IOT‐441P IoT with Arduino, ESP and Raspberry Pi Lab 2 1
BT‐443T Blockchain Technology 3 3
7 ICB‐EAE‐5
BT‐443P Blockchain Technology Lab 2 1

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 175
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Emerging Area Specialization: Networks (for CSE / IT / CST / ITE / ECE)

Paper
Semester
Paper Group Code Paper Name L P Credits
NET‐344T Advanced Computer Networks and Administration 3 3
6 NET‐EAE‐1 Advanced Computer Networks and Administration
NET‐344P 2 1
Lab
NET‐346T Linux System Administration 3 3
6 NET‐EAE‐2
NET‐346P Linux System Administration Lab 2 1
NET‐471T Network Programming 3 3
7 NET‐EAE‐3
NET‐471P Network Programming Lab 2 1
NET‐473T Cloud Computing and Security 3 3
7 NET‐EAE‐4
NET‐473P Cloud Computing and Security Lab 2 1
NET‐475T Wireless Sensor Networks 3 3
7 NET‐EAE‐5
NET‐475P Wireless Sensor Networks Lab 2 1

Emerging Area Specialization: Cyber Security (for CSE / IT / CST / ITE / ECE)
Paper
Semester Paper Group Code Paper Name L P Credits
CS‐310T Information Theory and Coding 3 3
6 CS‐EAE‐1
CS‐310P Information Theory and Coding Lab 2 1
CS‐EAE‐2A CS‐312T Network Security and Cryptography 3 3
OR CS‐312P Network Security and Cryptography Lab 2 1
6
CS‐314T Network Security Issues and Challenges 3 3
CS‐EAE‐2B
CS‐314P Network Security Issues and Challenges Lab 2 1
CS‐421T Cyber Crime and Cyber Laws 3 3
7 CS‐EAE‐3
CS‐421P Cyber Crime and Cyber Laws Lab 2 1
CS‐423T Cyber Security and Forensics 3 3
7 CS‐EAE‐4
CS‐423P Cyber Security and Forensics Lab 2 1
CS‐425T Ethical Hacking 3 3
7 CS‐EAE‐5
CS‐425P Ethical Hacking Lab 2 1

Emerging Area Specialization: Soft Computing (for CSE / IT / CST / ITE / ECE / EE / EEE / ICE
/ ME / CE)
Paper
Semester Paper Group Code Paper Name L P Credits
DA‐304T Statistics, Statistical Modelling & Data Analytics 3 3
6 SC‐EAE‐1
DA‐304P Statistics, Statistical Modelling & Data Analytics Lab 2 1
ML‐348T Artificial Neural Networks and Deep Learning 3 3
6 SC‐EAE‐2
ML‐348P Artificial Neural Networks and Deep Learning Lab 2 1
SC‐477T Fuzzy Systems and Applications 3 3
7 SC‐EAE‐3
SC‐477P Fuzzy Systems and Applications Lab 2 1
SC‐479T Global Optimization Methods 3 3
7 SC‐EAE‐4
SC‐479P Global Optimization Methods Lab 2 1
SC‐481T Soft Computing and Expert Systems 3 3
7 SC‐EAE‐5
SC‐481P Soft Computing and Expert Systems Lab 2 1

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 176
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Emerging Area Specialization: Machine Learning & Data Analytics (for CSE / IT / CST / ITE /
ECE / EE / EEE / ICE / ME / CE)
Paper
Semester Paper Group Code Paper Name L P Credits
DA‐304T Statistics, Statistical Modelling & Data Analytics 3 3
6 MLDA‐EAE‐1
DA‐304P Statistics, Statistical Modelling & Data Analytics Lab 2 1
MLDA‐EAE‐2A DA‐338T Data Analytics 3 3
OR DA‐338P Data Analytics Lab 2 1
MLDA‐EAE‐2B DS‐340T Data Visualization 3 3
6
OR DS‐340P Data Visualization Lab 2 1
ML‐342T Machine Learning 3 3
MLDA‐EAE‐2C
ML‐342P Machine Learning Lab 2 1
ML‐463T Supervised and Deep Learning 3 3
7 MLDA‐EAE‐3
ML‐463P Supervised and Deep Learning Lab 2 1
ML‐465T Unsupervised Learning 3 3
7 MLDA‐EAE‐4
ML‐465P Unsupervised Learning Lab 2 1
ML‐467T Machine Learning and Data Analytics Case Studies 3 3
MLDA‐EAE‐5A
Machine Learning and Data Analytics Case Studies
OR ML‐467P 2 1
Lab
7
ML‐469T Machine Learning and Data Analytics Frameworks 3 3
MLDA‐EAE‐5B Machine Learning and Data Analytics Frameworks
ML‐469P 2 1
Lab

Emerging Area Specialization: Software Engineering (for CSE / IT / CST / ITE)

Paper
Semester Paper Group Code Paper Name L P Credits
SE‐350T Software Measurements, Metrics and Modelling 3 3
6 SE‐EAE‐1
SE‐350P Software Measurements, Metrics and Modelling Lab 2 1
SE‐EAE‐2A SE‐352T Service Oriented Architecture 3 3
OR SE‐352P Service Oriented Architecture Lab 2 1
6
SE‐354T Software Project Management 3 3
SE‐EAE‐2B
SE‐354P Software Project Management Lab 2 1
Mining Software Repositories and Predictive
SE‐483T 3 3
Modelling
7 SE‐EAE‐3
Mining Software Repositories and Predictive
SE‐483P 2 1
Modelling Lab
SE‐EAE‐4A
SE‐485 Software Security 4 4
OR
7
SE‐487T Software Verification, Validation and Testing 3 3
SE‐EAE‐4B
SE‐487P Software Verification, Validation and Testing Lab 2 1
7 SE‐EAE‐5 SE‐489 Software Engineering Standards 4 4

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 177
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Emerging Area Specialization: Full Stack Development (for CSE / IT / CST / ITE)
Paper
Semester Paper Group Code Paper Name L P Credits
FSD‐318T Advanced Java Programming 3 3
6 FSD‐EAE‐1
FSD‐318P Advanced Java Programming Lab 2 1
FSD‐EAE‐2A FSD‐320T Web Development using MEAN Stack 3 3
OR FSD‐320P Web Development using MEAN Stack Lab 2 1
6
FSD‐322T Web Development using MERN Stack 3 3
FSD‐EAE‐2B
FSD‐322P Web Development using MERN Stack Lab 2 1
FSD‐435T PHP Programming and MySQL 3 3
7 FSD‐EAE‐3
FSD‐435P PHP Programming and MySQL Lab 2 1
FSD‐437T Mobile App Development 3 3
7 FSD‐EAE‐4
FSD‐437P Mobile App Development Lab 2 1
FSD‐439T Web and Mobile Application Testing and Deployment 3 3
7 FSD‐EAE‐5 Web and Mobile Application Testing and Deployment
FSD‐43P 2 1
Lab

Emerging Area Specialization: Image Processing and Computer Vision (for

CSE/IT/CST/ITE/ECE/ EE / EEE / ICE)
Paper
Semester Paper Group Code Paper Name L P Credits
IPCV‐EAE‐1A IPCV‐334T Digital Image Processing 3 3
OR IPCV‐334P Digital Image Processing Lab 2 1
6
IPCV‐356T Digital Signal and Image Processing 3 3
IPCV‐EAE‐1B
IPCV‐356P Digital Signal and Image Processing Lab 2 1
IPCV‐336T Pattern Recognition 3 3
6 IPCV‐EAE‐2
IPCV‐336P Pattern Recognition Lab 2 1
IPCV‐451T Computer Vision 3 3
7 IPCV‐EAE‐3
IPCV‐451P Computer Vision Lab 2 1
IPCV‐EAE‐4A IPCV‐453T Biometrics 3 3
OR IPCV‐453P Biometrics Lab 2 1
Medical Image Processing, Analysis and
IPCV‐455T 3 3
IPCV‐EAE‐4B Reconstruction
7
OR Medical Image Processing, Analysis and
IPCV‐455P 2 1
Reconstruction Lab
IPCV‐457T Remote Sensing Image Analysis and Classification 3 3
IPCV‐EAE‐4C
IPCV‐457P Remote Sensing Image Analysis and Classification Lab 2 1
Deep Learning for Image Processing and Computer
IPCV‐459T 3 3
IPCV‐EAE‐5A Vision
OR Deep Learning for Image Processing and Computer
7 IPCV‐459P 2 1
Vision Lab
IPCV‐461T Machine Learning for Image and Vision Analysis 3 3
IPCV‐EAE‐5B
IPCV‐461P Machine Learning for Image and Vision Analysis Lab 2 1

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 178
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Emerging Area Specialization: Robotics and Automation (for ECE / ICE / ME)
Paper
Semester Paper Group Code Paper Name L P Credits
RA‐324T Robot Kinematics and Dynamics 3 3
6 RA‐EAE‐1
RA‐324P Robot Kinematics and Dynamics Lab 2 1
IOT‐326T Introduction to Sensors and Transducers 3 3
6 RA‐EAE‐2
IOT‐326P Introduction to Sensors and Transducers Lab 2 1
RA‐437T Robot Actuation Systems 3 3
7 RA‐EAE‐3
RA‐437P Robot Actuation Systems Lab 2 1
RA‐439T Control Hardware and Interfacing 3 3
7 RA‐EAE‐4
RA‐439P Control Hardware and Interfacing Lab 2 1
RA‐441T AI in Robotics 3 3
7 RA‐EAE‐5
RA‐441P AI in Robotics Lab 2 1

Emerging Area Specialization: Embedded Systems (for CSE/IT/CST/ITE/ECE/EE/EEE /ICE)

Paper
Semester Paper Group Code Paper Name L P Credits
ES‐EAE‐1A ES‐302T Microprocessors and Interfacing 3 3
OR ES‐302P Microprocessors and Interfacing Lab 2 1
ES‐308T Introduction to Data Communication and Networking 3 3
ES‐EAE‐1B
6 Introduction to Data Communication and Networking
OR ES‐308P 2 1
Lab
ES‐310T Advanced Microprocessors (ARM) & Interfacing 3 3
ES‐EAE‐1C
ES‐310P Advanced Microprocessors (ARM) & Interfacing Lab 2 1
ES‐EAE‐2A
ES‐304 Real Time Operating Systems 4 4
OR
6
ES‐306T Embedded System Architecture and Design 3 3
ES‐EAE‐2B
ES‐306P Embedded System Architecture and Design Lab 2 1
ES‐EAE‐3A ES‐401T Programming in C for Embedded Systems 3 3
OR ES‐401P Programming in C for Embedded Systems Lab 2 1
7
ES‐403T VHDL Programming 3 3
ES‐EAE‐3B
ES‐403P VHDL Programming Lab 2 1
ES‐405T Real Time Embedded System Programming 3 3
7 ES‐EAE‐4
ES‐405P Real Time Embedded System Programming Lab 2 1
ES‐EAE‐5A ES‐407T Embedded Linux 3 3
OR ES‐407P Embedded Linux Lab 2 1
ES‐EAE‐5B IOT‐409T Introduction to Sensors and Transducers 3 3
7
OR IOT‐409P Introduction to Sensors and Transducers Lab 2 1
ES‐411T Logic Design and Analysis using Verilog 3 3
ES‐EAE‐5C
ES‐411P Logic Design and Analysis using Verilog Lab 2 1

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 179
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Emerging Area Specialization: VLSI Design (for ECE/ EE /EEE)

Paper
Semester Paper Group Code Paper Name L P Credits
VLSI‐328T Semiconductor Devices and Modelling 3 3
6 VLSI‐EAE‐1
VLSI‐328P Semiconductor Devices and Modelling Lab 2 1
VLSI‐330T VLSI 3 3
6 VLSI‐EAE‐2
VLSI‐330P VLSI Lab 2 1
VLSI‐443T CMOS Analog Integrated Circuit Design 3 3
7 VLSI‐EAE‐3
VLSI‐443P CMOS Analog Integrated Circuit Design Lab 2 1
VLSI‐445T CMOS Digital Circuits Design 3 3
7 VLSI‐EAE‐4
VLSI‐445P CMOS Digital Circuits Design Lab 2 1
VLSI‐EAE‐5A
VLSI‐447 CMOS Mixed Signal Circuit Design 4 4
OR
7 VLSI‐EAE‐5B VLSI‐449T Low Power VLSI Design 3 3
OR VLSI‐449P Low Power VLSI Design Lab 2 1
VLSI‐EAE‐5C VLSI‐451 VLSI Testing 4 4

Emerging Area Specialization: Wireless and Mobile Communications (for ECE/ EE /EEE)

Semester Paper Group Paper Code Paper Name L P Credits

WMC‐EAE‐1A WMC‐332T Optical Networks 3 3
OR WMC‐332P Optical Networks Lab 2 1
WMC‐EAE‐1B WMC‐334T Random Processes and Stochastic Systems 3 3
6
OR WMC‐334P Random Processes and Stochastic Systems Lab 2 1
WMC‐336T Wireless Communication and Networks 3 3
WMC‐EAE‐1C
WMC‐336P Wireless Communication and Networks Lab 2 1
WMC‐338T Cellular and Mobile Communication 3 3
6 WMC‐EAE‐2
WMC‐338P Cellular and Mobile Communication Lab 2 1
WMC‐EAE‐3A WMC‐453T Ad hoc and Sensor Networks 3 3
OR WMC‐453P Ad hoc and Sensor Networks Lab 2 1
7
WMC‐455T Mobile Computing 3 3
WMC‐EAE‐3B
WMC‐455P Mobile Computing Lab 2 1
7 WMC‐EAE‐4 WMC‐457 Cognitive Radio & Networks 4 4
7 WMC‐EAE‐5 WMC‐459 Privacy and Security in Wireless Networks 4 4

Emerging Area Specialization: Electrical Vehicles (for EE / EEE / ICE / ME)

Paper
Semester Paper Group Code Paper Name L P Credits
EV‐308T Electric Vehicle Powertrain and Motor Design 3 3
6 EV‐EAE‐1
EV‐308P Electric Vehicle Powertrain and Motor Design Lab 2 1
EV‐310T Battery Management Systems 3 3
6 EV‐EAE‐2
EV‐310P Battery Management Systems Lab 2 1
EV‐413T EV Charging Infrastructure Technology 3 3
7 EV‐EAE‐3
EV‐413P EV Charging Infrastructure Technology Lab 2 1
7 EV‐EAE‐4 EV‐415 Economics and Policies of e‐Mobility 4 4
EV‐417T Embedded Systems for Electric Vehicles 3 3
7 EV‐EAE‐5
EV‐417P Embedded Systems for Electric Vehicles Lab 2 1

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 180
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Emerging Area Specialization: Microgrid Technologies (for EE / EEE)

Paper
Semester Paper Group Code Paper Name L P Credits
MT‐312T Energy Storage Systems in Microgrids 3 3
6 MT‐EAE‐1
MT‐312P Energy Storage Systems in Microgrids Lab 2 1
MT‐314T Modeling and Analysis of Microgrids 3 3
6 MT‐EAE‐2
MT‐314P Modeling and Analysis of Microgrids Lab 2 1
MT‐419T Microgrid Stability Assessment and Protection 3 3
7 MT‐EAE‐3
MT‐419P Microgrid Stability Assessment and Protection Lab 2 1
MT‐421T Human Machine Interface for Microgrids 3 3
7 MT‐EAE‐4
MT‐421P Human Machine Interface for Microgrids Lab 2 1
MT‐423T Power Quality for Microgrids 3 3
7 MT‐EAE‐5
MT‐423P Power Quality for Microgrids Lab 2 1

Emerging Area Specialization: Power Systems (for EE / EEE)

Paper
Semester Paper Group Code Paper Name L P Credits
PS‐320T Electricity Generation, Transmission and Utilization 3 3
6 PS‐EAE‐1 Electricity Generation, Transmission and Utilization
PS‐320P 2 1
Lab
PS‐322T EHVAC and HVDC Transmission 3 3
6 PS‐EAE‐2
PS‐322P EHVAC and HVDC Transmission Lab 2 1
PS‐431T Power System Operation and Control 3 3
7 PS‐EAE‐3
PS‐431P Power System Operation and Control Lab 2 1
PS‐433T Flexible AC Transmission System 3 3
7 PS‐EAE‐4
PS‐433P Flexible AC Transmission System Lab 2 1
PS‐435T Power System Analysis and Stability 3 3
7 PS‐EAE‐5
PS‐435P Power System Analysis and Stability Lab 2 1

Emerging Area Specialization: Power Electronics and Drives (for EE / EEE)

Paper
Semester Paper Group Code Paper Name L P Credits
PED‐316T Advanced Power Electronic Converters 3 3
6 PED‐EAE‐1
PED‐316P Advanced Power Electronic Converters Lab 2 1
PED‐318T Industrial Control Electronics 3 3
6 PED‐EAE‐2
PED‐318P Industrial Control Electronics Lab 2 1
PED‐425T Switch Mode Power Conversion 3 3
7 PED‐EAE‐3
PED‐425P Switch Mode Power Conversion Lab 2 1
PED‐427T Solid State Drives 3 3
7 PED‐EAE‐4
PED‐427P Solid State Drives Lab 2 1
PED‐429T Solar Photovoltaic Systems 3 3
7 PED‐EAE‐5
PED‐429P Solar Photovoltaic Systems Lab 2 1

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 181
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Emerging Area Specialization: Control and Instrumentation (for EE / EEE / ICE)

Paper
Semester Paper Group Code Paper Name L P Credits
CI‐306T PLC and SCADA Systems 3 3
6 CI‐EAE‐1
CI‐306P PLC and SCADA Systems Lab 2 1
IOT‐326T Introduction to Sensors and Transducers 3 3
6 CI‐EAE‐2
IOT‐326P Introduction to Sensors and Transducers Lab 2 1
CI‐407T Advanced Control Systems for Instrumentation 3 3
7 CI‐EAE‐3
CI‐407P Advanced Control Systems for Instrumentation Lab 2 1
CI‐409T Neuro Fuzzy Systems 3 3
7 CI‐EAE‐4
CI‐409P Neuro Fuzzy Systems Lab 2 1
CI‐411T Non‐linear System Design 3 3
7 CI‐EAE‐5
CI‐411P Non‐linear System Design Lab 2 1

Emerging Area Specialization: Computer Aided Design and Manufacturing (for ME)
Semester Group Paper Code Paper Name L P Credits
CADM‐302T Introduction to CAD/CAM 3 3
6 CADM‐EAE‐1
CADM‐302P Introduction to CAD/CAM Lab 2 1
CADM‐304T Injection Moulding and Mould Design 3 3
6 CADM‐EAE‐2
CADM‐304P Injection Moulding and Mould Design Lab 2 1
CADM‐401T Computational Fluid Dynamics 3 3
7 CADM‐EAE‐3
CADM‐401P Computational Fluid Dynamics Lab 2 1
CADM‐403T Computer Aided Design and Drafting 3 3
7 CADM‐EAE‐4
CADM‐403P Computer Aided Design and Drafting Lab 2 1
CADM‐405T Industrial Robotics 3 3
7 CADM‐EAE‐5
CADM‐405P Industrial Robotics Lab 2 1

Emerging Area Specialization: Design and Measurement Systems (for ME)

Paper
Semester Paper Group Code Paper Name L P Credits
DMS‐312T Industrial Tribology 3 3
6 DMS‐EAE‐1
DMS‐312P Industrial Tribology Lab 2 1
DMS‐314T Quality Management & Quality Control 3 3
6 DMS‐EAE‐2
DMS‐314P Quality Management & Quality Control Lab 2 1
DMS‐419T Fracture Mechanics 3 3
7 DMS‐EAE‐3
DMS‐419P Fracture Mechanics Lab 2 1
DMS‐421T Advance Manufacturing Process 3 3
7 DMS‐EAE‐4
DMS‐421P Advance Manufacturing Process Lab 2 1
DMS‐423T Pressure vessels and Piping Technology 3 3
7 DMS‐EAE‐5
DMS‐423P Pressure vessels and Piping Technology Lab 2 1

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 182
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Emerging Area Specialization: Design Trends (for EE / EEE / ICE)

Paper
Semester Paper Group Code Paper Name L P Credits
DMS‐314T Quality Management & Quality Control 3 3
6 DT‐EAE‐1
DMS‐314P Quality Management & Quality Control Lab 2 1
DT‐316T Automobile Engineering 3 3
6 DT‐EAE‐2
DT‐316P Automobile Engineering Lab 2 1
DMS‐421T Advance Manufacturing Process 3 3
7 DT‐EAE‐3
DMS‐421P Advance Manufacturing Process Lab 2 1
DT‐425T Mechanical Vibrations 3 3
7 DT‐EAE‐4
DT‐425P Mechanical Vibrations Lab 2 1
DT‐427T Industrial Tribology 3 3
7 DT‐EAE‐5
DT‐427P Industrial Tribology Lab 2 1

Emerging Area Specialization: Thermal Energy Sources (for ME)

Paper
Semester Paper Group Code Paper Name L P Credits
TES‐330T Cryogenic Engineering 3 3
6 TES‐EAE‐1
TES‐330P Cryogenic Engineering Lab 2 1
TES‐332T Energy Systems and Technologies 3 3
6 TES‐EAE‐2
TES‐332P Energy Systems and Technologies Lab 2 1
TES‐447T Compressible Flow and Jet Propulsion 3 3
7 TES‐EAE‐3
TES‐447P Compressible Flow and Jet Propulsion Lab 2 1
TES‐449T Green Energy Technology 3 3
7 TES‐EAE‐4
TES‐449P Green Energy Technology Lab 2 1
TES‐451T Advanced IC Engines 3 3
7 TES‐EAE‐5
TES‐451P Advanced IC Engines Lab 2 1

Emerging Area Specialization: Quality Management (for ME)

Paper
Semester Paper Group Code Paper Name L P Credits
QM‐326T Supply Chain Management 3 3
6 QM‐EAE‐1
QM‐326P Supply Chain Management Lab 2 1
QM‐328T Flexible Manufacturing Systems 3 3
6 QM‐EAE‐2
QM‐328P Flexible Manufacturing Systems Lab 2 1
QM‐441T Total Quality Management 3 3
7 QM‐EAE‐3
QM‐441P Total Quality Management Lab 2 1
QM‐443T Statistical Quality Control 3 3
7 QM‐EAE‐4
QM‐443P Statistical Quality Control Lab 2 1
7 QM‐EAE‐5 QM‐445 Organizational Behaviour 4 4

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 183
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Emerging Area Specialization: Construction Technology and Management (for CE)

Paper
Semester Paper Group Code Paper Name L P Credits
6 CTM‐EAE‐1 CEC‐308 Contract Management 4 4
6 CTM‐EAE‐2 CEC‐310 Advanced Construction Materials and Practices 4 4
7 CTM‐EAE‐3 CEC‐413 Quality and Safety Management 4 4
7 CTM‐EAE‐4 CEC‐415 Lean Construction Technology and Management 4 4
7 CTM‐EAE‐5 CEC‐417 Recent Construction Technologies 4 4

Emerging Area Specialization: Infrastructure Engineering (for CE)

Paper
Semester Paper Group Code Paper Name L P Credits
6 IE‐EAE‐1 IE‐322 Water Resource Planning 4 4
6 IE‐EAE‐2 IE‐324 Advanced Environmental Engineering and Design 4 4
7 IE‐EAE‐3 IE‐435 Metro Systems Engineering 4 4
Transport Planning and Intelligent Transportation
IE‐437T 3 3
System
7 IE‐EAE‐4
Transport Planning and Intelligent Transportation
IE‐437P 2 1
System Lab
7 IE‐EAE‐5 IE‐439 Analysis and Design of High‐rise Buildings and Bridges 4 4

Emerging Area Specialization: Green Technology and Sustainability Engineering (for CE)
Paper
Semester Paper Group Code Paper Name L P Credits
6 GTSE‐EAE‐1 GTSE‐318 Planning and Design of Green Buildings 4 4
6 GTSE‐EAE‐2 GTSE‐320 Sustainable Materials and Practices 4 4
7 GTSE‐EAE‐3 GTSE‐429 Green Energy Concepts in Smart Cities 4 4
7 GTSE‐EAE‐4 GTSE‐431 Intelligent Transportation System 4 4
7 GTSE‐EAE‐5 GTSE‐433 Sustainable Engineering Technologies 4 4

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 184
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Open Area Elective Groups (for Minor Specialization) – Applicable

only for Core Disciplines (OAE)

The minor specialization is offered through a set of five papers that the student has to study to acquire the
minor specialization. The number of papers to be studied is two in 6th semester and three in 7th semester. The
minor specialization shall be awarded if and only if 20 credits are earned from an individual / specific minor
specialization area. From each paper group associated with a paper paper slot in a particular semester, the
student shall be allowed to study only one paper group. The papers shall be allowed to be taken / studied by
the students, by the APC of the department / institute, keeping in view that two papers studied by the student
should not have a substantial overlap. All papers studied by the student should be substantially distinct in
content.
Minor specialization is not necessary for award of the degree, the student may choose five papers from the
groups offered by the institution to a particular student (belonging to a major discipline) across groups.
Minimum two minor specialization groups should be offered by the institution to students of any particular
major discipline from either of the open area or emerging area groups.
An elective shall be offered to the student for each Minor Specialization group in Open Area (That is for OAE‐1,
OAE‐2, etc.) based on the availability of resources and faculty at the institution and at least one third of the
batch or at least 20 students must be willing to take the elective.
Each OAE slot is of 4 credits, if in a particular slot, the paper has no practical component, then it is of 4 credits
(a pure theory paper), otherwise for purpose of examination and conduct of classes, the course is split in two
papers, namely a theory paper of 3 credits and a practical paper of 1 credit. The student has to study for 4
credits per slot of OAE group. This is reflected by suffixing the paper code by T (for Theory component) and P
(for Practical component), if required. The nomenclature of the paper group is <ACRONYM OF EMERGING
AREA> ‐ OAE ‐ <SLOT NUMBER><A or B or C etc., if required>. The major disciplines to which the open Area
Elective Group papers can be offered is specified as acronym together with the name of the minor
specialization.
In lieu of Open Area Elective, students can study papers from Emerging Area Elective groups also as offered to
them.
The Open Area Electives described / enumerated are the one offered by engineering departments. If other
departments, offering minor specialization or elective papers as Open Area Electives to engineering students
(approved by the University Academic Council) are possible at the concerned institution, the same may also be
offered to the engineering students studying in the major disciplines under the aegis of the University School of
Information, Communication and Technology. The APC of the department / intuition shall allow the choice of
such electives, provided they follow the credit framework of the programme of study for Open Area Electives.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 185
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Open Area Specialization: Computer Science and Engineering (for ECE / EE / EEE / ICE / ME
/ CE)
Semester Paper Group Paper Code Paper Name L P Credits
CSE‐OAE‐1A OCSE‐306T C++ Programming 3 3
6 OR OCSE‐306P C++ Programming Lab 2 1
CSE‐OAE‐1B OCSE‐308 Digital Logic and Computer Design 4 4
CSE‐OAE‐2A OCSE‐310T Data Structures and Algorithms 3 3
OR OCSE‐310P Data Structures and Algorithms Lab 2 1
6
OCSE‐342T Programming in Java 3 3
CSE‐OAE‐2B
OCSE‐342P Programming in Java Lab 2 1
OCSE‐407T Introduction to Database Management Systems 3 3
7 CSE‐OAE‐3
OCSE‐407P Introduction to Database Management Systems Lab 2 1
7 CSE‐OAE‐4 OCSE‐409 Operating Systems 4 4
CSE‐OAE‐5A OCSE‐411T Introduction to Computer Networks 3 3
OR OCSE‐411P Introduction to Computer Networks Lab 2 1
7
OCSE‐413T Introduction to Software Engineering 3 3
CSE‐OAE‐5B
OCSE‐413P Introduction to Software Engineering Lab 2 1

Open Area Specialization: Electronics and Communications Engineering (for CSE / IT / CST /
ITE / ME / CE)
Semester Paper Group Paper Code Paper Name L P Credits
ECE‐OAE‐ OECE‐312T Introduction to Circuits and Systems 3 3
1AOR OECE‐312P Introduction to Circuits and Systems Lab 2 1
6
OECE‐344T Introduction to Analog Electronics 3 3
ECE‐OAE‐1B
OECE‐344P Introduction to Analog Electronics Lab 2 1
OECE‐314T Electronic Devices and Circuits 3 3
6 ECE‐OAE‐2
OECE‐314P Electronic Devices and Circuits Lab 2 1
ECE‐OAE‐3A
OECE‐415 Digital Logic and Computer Design 4 4
OR
7
OECE‐417T Microprocessors and Interfacing 3 3
ECE‐OAE‐3B
OECE‐417P Microprocessors and Interfacing Lab 2 1
ECE‐OAE‐4A OECE‐419T Analog and Digital Communications 3 3
OR OECE‐419P Analog and Digital Communications Lab 2 1
7
OECE‐421T Wireless Sensor Networks 3 3
ECE‐OAE‐4B
OECE‐421P Wireless Sensor Networks Lab 2 1
ECE‐OAE‐5A
OECE‐423 Control Systems 4 4
OR
7
OECE‐425T Introduction to Computer Networks 3 3
ECE‐OAE‐5B
OECE‐425P Introduction to Computer Networks Lab 2 1

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 186
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Open Area Specialization: Electrical Engineering (for CSE / IT / CST / ITE / ME / CE)
Paper
Semester Paper Group Code Paper Name L P Credits
EE‐OAE‐1A OEE‐316T Introduction to Circuits and Systems 3 3
OR OEE‐316P Introduction to Circuits and Systems Lab 2 1
6
OEE‐346T Introduction to Analog Electronics 3 3
EE‐OAE‐1B
OEE‐346P Introduction to Analog Electronics Lab 2 1
OEE‐318T Introduction to Electrical Machines 3 3
EE‐OAE‐2
6 OEE‐318P Introduction to Electrical Machines Lab 2 1
OEE‐427T Control Systems for Electrical Engineering 3 3
EE‐OAE‐3
7 OEE‐427P Control Systems for Electrical Engineering Lab 2 1
OEE‐429T Generation, Transmission and Distribution 3 3
EE‐OAE‐4
7 OEE‐429P Generation, Transmission and Distribution Lab 2 1
OEE‐431T Introduction to Power Electronics 3 3
EE‐OAE‐5
7 OEE‐431P Introduction to Power Electronics Lab 2 1

Open Area Specialization: Software Development (for CSE / IT / CST / ITE / ECE / EE / EEE /
ICE / ME / CE)
Paper
Semester Paper Group Code Paper Name L P Credits
SD‐OAE‐1A OSD‐328T C++ Programming 3 3
OR OSD‐328P C++ Programming Lab 2 1
SD‐OAE‐1B OSD‐330T Programming in Windows Environment 3 3
6
OR OSD‐330P Programming in Windows Environment Lab 2 1
OSD‐332T Programming in Java 3 3
SD‐OAE‐1C
OSD‐332P Programming in Java Lab 2 1
SD‐OAE‐2A OSD‐334T Android App Development 3 3
OR OSD‐334P Android App Development Lab 2 1
6
OSD‐336T Introduction to Database Management Systems 3 3
SD‐OAE‐2B
OSD‐336P Introduction to Database Management Systems Lab 2 1
SD‐OAE‐3A OSD‐445T Data Structures and Algorithms 3 3
OR OSD‐445P Data Structures and Algorithms Lab 2 1
7
OSD‐447T Project Management 3 3
SD‐OAE‐3B
OSD‐447P Project Management Lab 2 1
SD‐OAE‐4A OSD‐449T Design Patterns 3 3
OR OSD‐449P Design Patterns Lab 2 1
7
OSD‐451T Introduction to Software Engineering 3 3
SD‐OAE‐4B
OSD‐451P Introduction to Software Engineering Lab 2 1
SD‐OAE‐5A OSD‐453T Advanced Java Programming 3 3
OR OSD‐453P Advanced Java Programming Lab 2 1
7
OSD‐455T Programming in Linux Environment 3 3
SD‐OAE‐5B
OSD‐455P Programming in Linux Environment Lab 2 1

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 187
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Open Area Specialization: Mechanical Engineering (for CSE / IT / CST / ITE / ECE / EE / EEE /
ICE / CE)
Semester Paper Group Paper Code Paper Name L P Credits
OME‐324T Theory of Machines 3 3
6 ME‐OAE‐1
OME‐324P Theory of Machines Lab 2 1
OME‐326T Materials and Machine Technology 3 3
6 ME‐OAE‐2
OME‐326P Materials and Machine Technology Lab 2 1
OME‐439T Fluids and Thermal Engineering 3 3
7 ME‐OAE‐3
OME‐439P Fluids and Thermal Engineering Lab 2 1
OME‐441T Mechanics and Design of Solids 3 3
7 ME‐OAE‐4
OME‐441P Mechanics and Design of Solids Lab 2 1
OME‐443T Automation in Manufacturing 3 3
7 ME‐OAE‐5
OME‐443P Automation in Manufacturing Lab 2 1

Open Area Specialization: Instrumentation and Control Engineering (for CSE / IT / CST / ITE
/ ECE / EE / EEE / ME / CE)
Paper
Semester Paper Group Code Paper Name L P Credits
OICE‐320T Introduction to Sensors and Transducers 3 3
6 ICE‐OAE‐1
OICE‐320P Introduction to Sensors and Transducers Lab 2 1
OICE‐322T Measurement and Control 3 3
6 ICE‐OAE‐2
OICE‐322P Measurement and Control Lab 2 1
7 ICE‐OAE‐3 OICE‐433 Process Control 4 4
OICE‐435T Introduction to Industrial Instrumentation 3 3
7 ICE‐OAE‐4
OICE‐435P Introduction to Industrial Instrumentation Lab 2 1
OICE‐437T Bio Medical Instrumentation 3 3
7 ICE‐OAE‐5
OICE‐437P Bio Medical Instrumentation Lab 2 1

Open Area Specialization: Civil Engineering (for CSE / IT / CST / ITE / ECE / EE / EEE / ICE /
ME)
Paper
Semester Paper Group Code Paper Name L P Credits
6 CE‐OAE‐1 OCE‐302 Structural Analysis and Design 4 4
6 CE‐OAE‐2 OCE‐304 Pipe and Open Channel Hydraulics 4 4
7 CE‐OAE‐3 OCE‐401 Green Building Construction Materials and Practices 4 4
7 CE‐OAE‐4 OCE‐403 Public Health Engineering 4 4
7 CE‐OAE‐5 OCE‐405 Geotechnical and Transportation Engineering 4 4

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 188
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Open Area Specialization: Universal Human Values (for CSE / IT / CST / ITE / ECE / EE / EEE
/ ICE / ME / CE)
Semester Paper Group Paper Code Paper Name L P Credits
Understanding Human Being, Nature and Existence
6 UHV‐OAE‐1 OUHV‐338 4 4
Comprehensively
6 UHV‐OAE‐2 OUHV‐340 Vision for Humane Society 4 4
UHV‐OAE‐3A
OUHV‐457 Human Values and Madhyasth Darshan 4 4
OR
UHV‐OAE‐3B
7 OUHV‐459 Human Values in Buddh and Jain Darshan 4 4
OR
Human Values in Vedic Darshan (Sankhya, Yoga and
UHV‐OAE‐3C OUHV‐461 4 4
Vedanta)
UHV‐OAE‐4A
OUHV‐463 Holistic Human Health 4 4
7 OR
UHV‐OAE‐4B OUHV‐465 Human Sociology 4 4
7 UHV‐OAE‐5 OUHV‐467 Human Economics 4 4

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 189
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

2nd Year Onward Scheme and Implementation Guideline for

Bachelor of Technology Programme(s) in Emerging Areas
Disciplines:

The programmes in the emerging areas shall have the first year curriculum as specified in the
beginning of this document. The fundamental change in these programmes is that these
programmes are oriented towards not only core area expertise but also expertise in
emerging areas and multi‐disciplinary areas(s) of engineering and technology. Therefore, the
major change in the structure of the curriculum vis‐à‐vis the core area programme is
reduction in the number of electives so that emerging areas can be given a complete
coverage. The following emerging area and / or multi‐disciplinary area degree programmes
shall be offered:

1. Mechanical and Automation Engineering (MAE)

2. Computer Science and Engineering (Artificial Intelligence) (CSE‐AI)
3. Computer Science and Engineering (Artificial Intelligence and
Machine Learning) (CSE‐AIML)
4. Computer Science and Engineering (Data Science) (CSE‐DS)
5. Computer Science and Engineering (Internet of Things) (CSE‐IoT)
6. Computer Science and Engineering (Internet of Things and Cyber
Security including Block Chain Technology) (CSE‐ICB)
7. Computer Science and Engineering (Networks) (CSE‐Net)
8. Computer Science and Engineering (Cyber Security) (CSE‐CS)
9. Electronics Engineering (VLSI Design and Technology) (EE‐VDT)*
10. Electronics and Communication (Advanced Communication
Technology) (EC‐ACT)*

* Addition from AY 2023‐24

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 190
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Bachelor of Technology in Mechanical and Automation

Engineering (MAE)
2nd Year Onward Scheme and implementation guideline

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 191
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Third Semester
Paper
Group Paper L P Credits
Code
Theory Papers
ES ES‐201 Computational Methods 4 4
HS/MS HS‐203 Indian Knowledge System* 2 2
PC MEC‐205 Theory of Machines 4 4
PC MEC‐207 Strength of Materials 4 4
PC MEC‐209 Manufacturing Science and Technology‐I 4 4
PC ECC‐217 Analog and Digital Electronics 3 3
Practical / Viva Voce
ES ES‐251 Computational Methods Lab 2 1
PC MEC‐253 Theory of Machines Lab 2 1
PC MEC‐255 Strength of Materials Lab 2 1
PC MEC‐259 Manufacturing Science and Technology‐I Lab 2 1
PC ECC‐263 Analog and Digital Electronics Lab 2 1
Total 21 10 26

*NUES:All examinations to be conducted by the concerned teacher as specified in the detailed syllabus of the paper.

Fourth Semester
Paper
Group Paper L P Credits
Code
Theory Papers
BS BS‐202 Probability, Statistics and Linear Programming 4 4
HS/MS HS‐204 Technical Writing* 2 2
PC MEC‐206 Manufacturing Science and Technology‐II 4 4
PC MEC‐208 Material Science and Metallurgy 4 4
PC MAC‐210 Database Management Systems 4 4
PC MAC‐212 Thermodynamics and Applications 4 4
Practical / Viva Voce
BS BS‐252 Probability, Statistics and Linear Programming Lab 2 1
PC MEC‐254 Manufacturing Science and Technology‐II Lab 2 1
PC MAC‐256 Database Management Systems Lab 2 1
PC MAC‐258 Thermodynamics and Applications Lab 2 1
Total 22 8 26

*NUES:All examinations to be conducted by the concerned teacher as specified in the detailed syllabus of the paper.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 192
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Fifth Semester
Paper
Group Paper L P Credits
Code
Theory Papers
HS/MS HS‐301 Economics for Engineers 2 2
PC MAC‐303 Machine Design‐I 4 4
PC MEC‐305 Heat and Mass Transfer 4 4
PC MEC‐309 Industrial Engineering 4 4
PC MAC‐311 Sensors and Transducers 4 4
PC MAC‐313 Control Systems and Applications 3 3
Practical / Viva Voce
PC MAC‐351 Machine Design‐I Lab 2 1
PC MEC‐353 Heat and Mass Transfer Lab 2 1
PC MAC‐355 Sensors and Transducers Lab 2 1
PC MAC‐359 Control Systems and Applications Lab 2 1
PC / Internship ES‐361 Summer Training Report ‐ 1 * 1
Total 21 5 26

*NUES:Comprehensive evaluation of the Summer Training Report – 1 (after 4th Semester) shall be done by the committee
of teachers, constituted by the Academic Programme Committee, out of 100. The training shall be of 4 to 6 weeks duration.
The training can be under the mentorship of a teacher of the institute.

Sixth Semester
Paper
Group Paper L P Credits
Code
Theory Papers
HS/MS MS‐302 Principles of Management for Engineers 3 3
HS/MS HS‐304 Universal Human Values* 1 1
PC MAC‐306 Machine Design‐II 4 4
PC MEC‐308 Fluid Mechanics and Hydraulic Machines 4 4
PC MAC‐310 Mechatronics 4 4
PC MAC‐312 CAD/CAM 4 4
Practical / Viva Voce
PC MAC‐352 Machine Design‐II Lab 2 1
PC MEC‐354 Fluid Mechanics and Hydraulic Machines Lab 2 1
PC MAC‐356 Mechatronics Lab 2 1
PC MAC‐358 CAD/CAM Lab 2 1
NSS / NCC / Cultural Clubs / Technical Society / Technical
HS/MS HS‐352 2
Club**
Total 20 8 26

*NUES:All examinations to be conducted by the concerned teacher as specified in the detailed syllabus of the paper.

**NUES: Comprehensive evaluation of the students by the concerned coordinator of NCC / NSS / Cultural Clubs / Technical
Society / Technical Clubs, out of 100 as per the evaluation schemes worked out by these activity societies, organizations; the
st
faculty co‐ordinators shall be responsible for the evaluation of the same. These activities shall start from the 1 semester
th
and the evaluation shall be conducted at the end of the 6 semester for students admitted in the first semester. Students
admitted in the 2nd year (3rd semester) as lateral entry shall be evaluated on the basis their performance, by the faculty co‐
ordinator for the period of 3rd semester to 6th semester only.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 193
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Seventh Semester
Paper
Group Paper L P Credits
Code
Theory Papers
HS/MS MS‐401 Principles of Entrepreneurship Mindset 2 2
PC MAC‐403 Computer Integrated Manufacturing 3 3
PC MAC‐405 Embedded Systems and Internet of Things 3 3
PC MAC‐407 Introduction to Metrology and Instrumentation 3 3
PC MAC‐409 Robotics Engineering 3 3
OAE Open Area Elective Paper (OAE) 4
Practical / Viva Voce
PC MAC‐455 Computer Integrated Manufacturing Lab 2 1
PC MAC‐457 Embedded Systems and Internet of Things Lab 2 1
PC MAC‐459 Introduction to Metrology and Instrumentation Lab 2 1
PC MAC‐461 Robotics Engineering Lab 2 1
PC / Project ES‐451 Minor Project** 3
PC / Internship ES‐453 Summer Training Report ‐ 2 * 1
Total 26

th
*NUES:Comprehensive evaluation of the Summer Training Report – 2 (after 6 Semester) shall be done by the committee
of teachers, constituted by the Academic Programme Committee, out of 100. The training shall be of 4 to 6 weeks duration.
The training can be under the mentorship of a teacher of the institute.

**The student shall be allocated a supervisor / guide for project work at the end 6th semester by the department /
institution, the project shall continue into the 8th semester. In the 7th semester evaluation, the criteria for evaluation shall
be conceptualization of the project work, the background study / literature survey and identification of objectives and
methodology to be followed for project. 40 marks evaluation for the Teachers' Continuous Evaluation / Internal Assessment
shall be done by concerned supervisor while the term end examination of 60 marks shall be conducted by the supervisor
concerned and the external examiner deputed by the Examinations Division. In the absence of the supervisor, the Director
of the Institution / Head of the Department can assign the responsibility of the supervisor (for purpose of examinations) to
any faculty of the Institution / Department.

Eight Semester
Paper
Group Paper L P Credits
Code
Practical / Viva Voce%
ES‐452 Major Project – Dissertation and Viva Voce# 18
PC / Project
ES‐454 Project Progress Evaluation* 2
ES‐456 Internship Report and Viva Voce# 18
PC / Internship
ES‐458 Internship Progress Evaluation* 2
Total 0 0 20

*NUES: Comprehensive evaluation by the committee of teachers, constituted by the Academic Programme
Committee, out of 100.

%By default every student shall do the project work (ES‐452 and ES‐454). A student shall either be allowed to
do a project work (ES‐452 and ES‐454) or an internship (ES‐456 and ES‐458). The student must apply for
approval to do internship before the commencement of the 8th semester to the institute, and only after
approval of Principal / Director of the institute through Training and Placement Officer of the institute, shall
proceed for internship.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 194
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

#Students may be allowed to do internship in this semester in lieu of Major project. The students allowed to
proceed for internship shall be required to maintain a log‐book of activities performed during internship. The
same has to be countersigned by the mentor at the organization where internship is completed.
ES‐452: Evaluation shall be conducted of 40 marks (Teachers’ continuous evaluation / internal assessment) by
the supervisor. And, 60 marks by a bench of the supervisor and the external examiner deputed by Examination
Division (COE), for a total of 100 marks.

ES‐454 / ES‐458: Comprehensive evaluation by the committee of teachers, constituted by the Academic
Programme Committee, out of 100.

ES‐456: Evaluation shall be conducted of 40 marks (Teachers’ continuous evaluation / internal assessment) by
the Training and Placement Officer of the department / institute on the basis of the report submitted by the
student. And, 60 marks by a bench of the Training and Placement Officer of the department / institute and the
external examiner deputed by Examination Division (COE), for a total of 100 marks.

In the absence of the supervisor or the Training and Placement Officer (as the case may be), the Director of the
institute / Head of the Department can assign the responsibility of the supervisor or the Training and Placement
Officer (for purpose of examinations) to any faculty of the department.

Note on Elective Papers: The elective papers shall be allowed to be taken / studied by the students, by the
APC of the department / institute, keeping in view that two papers studied by the student should not have a
substantial overlap. All papers studied by the student should be substantially distinct in content.

Note on Examination of Elective Papers:

(a) Papers with only theory component shall have 25 Marks continuous evaluation by the teacher and 75
Marks term‐end examinations. Both these component marks shall be reflected on the marksheet of the
student.
(b) Papers with only practical component shall have 40 Marks continuous evaluation by the teacher and 60
Marks term‐end examinations. Both these component marks shall be reflected on the marksheet of the
student.

Note on Continuous Evaluation of All Papers:

(a) Papers with only theory component shall have 25 Marks continuous evaluation by the teacher which shall
be evaluated as:
i. Mid‐Term Test* ‐ 15 Marks (after 8 weeks of teaching or as
decided by PCC)
ii. Assignments / Project / Quiz / Case Studies, etc. ‐ 5 Marks
iii. Attendance / Class Participation ‐ 5 Marks
(b) Papers with only practical component shall have 40Marks continuous evaluation by the teacher which shall
be evaluated as:
i. Mid‐Term Test and Viva Voce ‐ 20 Marks (after 8 weeks of teaching or as
decided by PCC)
ii. Practical File ‐ 10 Marks
iii. Attendance / Lab Participation ‐ 10 Marks

* The mid‐term test shall be coordinated by the Programme Coordination Committee.

If a student could not appear for a mid‐term test due to situation beyond the control by the student, a
supplementary test may be arranged towards the end of the semester, in a similar manner to the mid‐term
test for such students. The students must apply for this provision to the department / institution. On
examination of the reason for non‐appearing in the mid‐term test by the Head of the Department / Institute,
and with reason for allowing to appear in the supplementary test to recorded by the Head of the Department
/ Institute, the student may be allowed.
The attendance sheets, the question papers and the award sheets for the continuous evaluation to be
retained by the concerned department / institute for at least 6 months after the declaration of the result by
the Examination Division of the University.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 195
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Open Area Electives

Semester Paper Code OAE (Choose Any One) L P Credits
7 MAO‐411T Additive Manufacturing 3 3
MAO‐411P Additive Manufacturing Lab 2 1
7 MAO‐413T Advance Metal Cutting and Tool Design 3 3
MAO‐413P Advance Metal Cutting and Tool Design Lab 2 1
7 MAO‐415T Automation in Manufacturing 3 3
MAO‐415P Automation in Manufacturing Lab 2 1
7 MAO‐417T Data Science 3 3
MAO‐417P Data Science Lab 2 1
7 MAO‐419T Design of Experiments 3 3
MAO‐419P Design of Experiments Lab 2 1
7 MAO‐421T Design of Mechanical Assemblies 3 3
MAO‐421P Design of Mechanical Assemblies Lab 2 1
7 MAO‐423T Design of Mechanical Drives 3 3
MAO‐423P Design of Mechanical Drives Lab 2 1
7 MAO‐425T Geometric Modelling and Analysis 3 3
MAO‐425P Geometric Modelling and Analysis Lab 2 1
7 MAO‐427 Non Traditional Manufacturing 4 4
7 MAO‐429T Rapid prototyping Tooling and Manufacturing 3 3
MAO‐429P Rapid prototyping Tooling and Manufacturing Lab 2 1
7 MAO‐431T Artificial Intelligence and Machine Learning 3 3
MAO‐431P Artificial Intelligence and Machine Learning Lab 2 1
7 MOOCs (Swayam / NPTEL) 4

Note:
1. Each OAE slot is of 4 credits, if in a particular slot, the paper has no practical component, then it is of 4 credits
(a pure theory paper), otherwise for purpose of examination and conduct of classes, the course is split in two
papers, namely a theory paper of 3 credits and a practical paper of 1 credit. The student has to study for 4
credits per slot of OAE group. This is reflected by suffixing the paper code by T (for Theory component) and P
(for Practical component), if required. The nomenclature of the paper code is <MAO> ‐ <PAPER CODE><T (for
Theory or P (for practical)., if required>.

2. The Open Area Electives described / enumerated are the one offered by engineering departments. If other
departments, offering minor specialization or elective papers as open area electives to engineering students
(approved by the university Academic Council) are possible at the concerned institution, the same may also be
offered to the engineering students studying in the major disciplines under the aegis of the University School of
Information, Communication and Technology. The APC of the department / intuition shall allow the choice of
such electives, provided they follow the credit framework of the programme of study for open area electives.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 196
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Implementation Rules:

1. The examinations, attendance criteria to appear in examinations, promotion and award of the degree
shall be governed by the Ordinance 11 of the University. The term “major discipline” / “primary discipline”
in this document refers to the discipline in which student is admitted / studies from 3rd semester onwards.
However credits of courses / paper for OAE / EAE groups shall not be considered for the purpose of
promotion from one year of study to the subsequent year of study.
2. Minimum duration of the Bachelor of Technology programme shall be 4 years (N=4 years) (8 semesters)
for the students admitted in the 1st year and 1st semester of the degree programme. Lateral entry students
shall be admitted in the 2nd year and 3rd semester of the degree programme (effectively in the batch
admitted in the first year in the previous academic session and shall be deemed to have been exempted
from the courses / papers of the first year of the degree programme. No exemption certificate shall be
issued in any case.
A specific lateral entry students’ minimum duration shall be the same as the minimum duration for the
batch in which he/she is admitted as a lateral entry student in the 2nd year.
3. Maximum duration of the Bachelor of Technology programme shall be 6 years (N+2 years). After
completion of N+2 years of study, if the student has appeared in the papers of all the semesters upto 8th
semester, then a maximum extension of 1 year may be given to the student for completing the
requirements of the degree if and only if the number of credits already earned by the student is atleast 150
(for lateral entry students it shall be at least 102 credits) from the (non‐honours components). Otherwise,
the admission of the student shall stand cancelled. After the period of allowed study, the admission of the
student shall be cancelled.
A specific lateral entry students’ maximum duration shall be the same as the minimum duration for the
batch in which he/she is admitted as a lateral entry student in the 2nd year.
4. The degree shall be awarded only after the fulfilment of all requirements of the Scheme and Syllabus of
Examinations and the applicable Ordinance.
5. (a) The students shall undergo the following group of Courses / Papers as enumerated in the scheme (For
the students admitted in the First Year / First Semester).

Semester (Credits) Total Mandatory

Group
I & II III IV V VI VII VIII Credits Credits

BS 24 5 29 14

HS/MS 6 2 2 2 6 2 20 10

ES 20 5 25 15

PC 19 19 24 20 20 20 122 108

OAE 4 4 0

Total 50 26 26 26 26 26 20 200 147

TABLE 1: Distribution of Credits (Project / Internship credits are 25 out the 118 credits for Programme
Core (PC) credits, while extra‐curricular activities credits are 2 out of 20 credits for Humanities /
Management / Social Science Group (HS/MS)) . This table is for students admitted in the First Year / First
Semester of the Degree Programme.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 197
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

(b) The students admitted as Lateral Entry shall undergo the following group of Courses / Papers as
enumerated in the scheme.

Semester (Credits) Total Mandatory

Group
III IV V VI VII VIII Credits Credits

BS 5 5 0

HS/MS 2 2 2 6 2 14 7

ES 5 5 0

PC 19 19 24 20 20 20 122 108

OAE 4 4 0

Total 26 26 26 26 26 20 150 115

TABLE 2: Distribution of Credits (Project / Internship credits are 25 out the 118 credits for Programme
Core (PC) credits, while extra‐curricular activities credits are 2 out of 14 credits for Humanities /
Management / Social Science Group (HS/MS)) This table is for students admitted as Lateral Entry
Students in the Second Year / Third Semester of the Degree Programme.

6. Mandatory Credits specify the number of credits from each subject group to be mandatorily acquired by
the student for the award of the degree,for students admitted as students in the 1st year and 1st semester
of the degree programme. While for students admitted as lateral entry in the 2nd year and 3rd semester
the Mandatory Credits value is 115, and specify the number of credits from each subject group to be
mandatorily acquired by the student for the award of the degree (Table 2). See clause 11 and 12 also.
7. Some of the papers are droppable in the sense that the student may qualify for the award of the degree
even when the student has not cleared / passed some of the papers of these group. However, the student
has to earn the minimum credits for the programme of study as specified. See clause 11 and 12 also.
8. The students may take 1 subject from OAE group. The open electives of the OAE group of courses may also
be taken through SWAYAM / NPTEL MOOCs platform. The student desirous of doing a MOOC based course
among the OAE group must seek approval of the APC of the institute for the same before the
commencement of the semester. The APC shall allow the MOOC based OAE option to the student if and
only if the MOOC subject / course being considered for the student is being offered in line with the
Academic Calendar applicable. The student shall submit the successful completion certificate with marks to
the institution for onwards transfer to the Examination Division. The Examinations Division shall take these
marks on record for incorporation in the result of the appropriate semester. These marks / grades of these
courses shall be used for calculation of the SGPA/CGPA of the student concerned by the examination
division of the University. The degree to the student on fulfilment of other requirements for such cases
shall be through clause 12.a. or 12.b.
These MOOC courses taken by the students, if allowed by the APC of the institute shall be of 4 credits or
more collectively to be against or for one paper slot in the scheme, through MOOCs, though the marks
shall be shown individually. That is in one paper slot in the scheme wherever a MOOC course is allowed,
the student may register for more than one paper to aggregate 4 credits or more. If the credits of these
MOOC Courses, allowed to a student is more than 4, then the maximum credit for the programme shall
be amended accordingly for the particular student. Also, in a particular semester, a student may take
more than one MOOC course with the approval of the APC to meet the credit requirements of OAE for the
semester. The cost of taking the MOOC course is to be borne by the concerned student. The results of the
MOOC courses shall be declared separately by the Examination Division from the result for the papers
conducted by the examination division of the University.
No minor specialization shall be offered / awarded.
9. To earn an Honours degree, the student may enrol for 20 credits or more through SWAYAM / NPTEL
MOOCs platform. This point has to be read together with other points specially point 13 and 14. The

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 198
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

acquisition of the credits should be completed before the 15th of the July of the Admission Year plus 4
years. That is, if a student is admitted in the year X, then these credits must be acquired through MOOCs by
15th July of the year (X+4), no extra duration or time shall be allocated, this means, the student must
submit the result of such papers on or before 15th July of the Admission Year plus 4 years.
Honours in the degree shall be awarded if and only if at least 20 credits are acquired through MOOCs. To
obtain Honours in the programme, the student must apply to the institution about the same before the
commencement of the 5th semester. The specific courses through MOOCs shall be registered by the
student only after approval by the Academic Programme Committee (APC) of the Institute. The APC shall
approve the course if it is not already studied by the student or the student shall not study it in future and
adds value to the major area of specialization (which is the degree). The papers for which the student
desires to appear for Honours through MOOCs, all papers results shall be submitted by the student to the
Institute for onwards transfer to Examination Division of the University, to be taken on record of the
University. The results of these papers shall be a part of the records of the examinations of the students.
The records shall be submitted by the student to the Institute, then transferred to the Examination
Division, shall be notified by the Examination Division of the University, and a separate marksheet shall be
issued by the Examination Division. The cost of taking the MOOC course is to be borne by the concerned
student. Such courses shall be reflected as additional courses / papers for the student.
If a student acquires less than 20 credits through MOOCs, following the mechanism specified, then also
the results of these papers shall be taken on record as specified above, though no Honours degree shall
be awarded.
The papers through MOOCs for Honours degree shall not be a part of the set of the papers over which the
SGPA / CGPA of the student shall be calculated.
The papers through MOOCs for Honours degree shall be additional papers studied by the students and are
to be taken into account only for award of Honours in the degree programme, if 20 credits are earned
through MOOCs as approved by APC, by a student. See Clause 13 also.
10. Maximum Credits is at least 200 (Table 1) for students admitted in the 1st year and 1st semester, these are
the credits for which the student shall have to study for the non‐Honours component of the curriculum.
And, for lateral entry students admitted in the 2nd year and 3rd semester of the degree programme, the
maximum credit required to be studied is at least 150 (Table 2). See clause 8 also.
The student has to appear in the examinations for these credits in all components of evaluation as
specified in the scheme of studies.
11. Minimum Credits required to be earned is atleast 180 (out of the 200 non Honours papers credits, see
clause 10 also) for students admitted in the 1st year and 1st semester. And, for lateral entry students
admitted in the 2nd year and 3rd semester of the degree programme, the minimum credit required to be
earned Is at least 135 (out of the 150 non Honours papers credits, see clause 10 also). See clause 6 also.
12. The following degree route can be taken by a student (also refer point 13):
a. The students shall be awarded the degree without any minor specialization under the following
conditions:
i. The student has earned the mandatory credits as defined in Table 1 or Table 2 (as applicable) and
clause 6.
ii. In addition, the total credits (including the above specified credits) earned by the student is atleast
as specified in clause 11.
The degree nomenclature of the degree shall be as: “Bachelor of Technology in Mechanical and
Automation Engineering”; if criteria / point 9 is not satisfied for Honours. Otherwise, if criteria / point
9 is met, then the degrees shall be an Honours degree and the nomenclature shall be as: “Bachelor of
Technology in Mechanical and Automation Engineering (Honours)”, if in addition to point 12.b.i and
12.b.ii, the student fulfils the criteria for Honours as specified at point 9.
b. If the student does not fulfil any of the above criterions (point 12.a, or 12.b), if the student earns at
least the minimum credits specified in clause 11 (disregarding the mandatory credits clause of Table 1

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 199
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

or Table 2 (as applicable) and Clause 6), then the student shall be award the degree as “Bachelor of
Technology in Mechanical and Automation Engineering”. Such students shall not be eligible for the
award of an Honours degree. Though, if credits are accumulated through MOOCs as per clause 9, the
same shall be reflected in the marksheets of the students.
13. The Honours degree shall only be awarded if the CGPA of the student is above or equal to 7.5 in addition
to fulfilment of criteria / point 10 and 13 above and the degree is awarded after the immediate
completion of the 4th year of the batch from the year of admission. No Honours shall be conferred if the
degree requirements are not completed in the minimum duration.
14. Pass marks in every paper shall be 40.
15. Grading System shall be as per Ordinance 11 of the University.
16. The institution shall offer atleast two elective groups out of the open area for students of each major
discipline. The institute shall decide the group(s) and/or individual papers to be offered as electives based
on the availability of infrastructure and faculty. From the groups / papers offered by the institute, an
elective paper / group shall be taught if and only if the number of students in a paper is at‐least 20 or at‐
least 1/3 of the students of a major discipline for which the paper / group is to be offered. The APC of the
department / institute may define a maximum number of students allowed to register for a paper as an
open area elective.
17. Teachers of the other department(s), as and when deputed by their department, for teaching the students
enrolled in programmes offered by the department offering the programme shall be a part of the
Academic Programme Committee of the discipline. Such teachers, for all academic matters, including
teaching, teachers’ continuous evaluation, term end examinations etc. shall be governed by the decisions
of the APC of department offering the programme of study. Similarly, the guest faculty, the visiting faculty
and the Contract / Ad Hoc faculty as and when deputed to teach students of a particular department shall
form a part of APC of the department.
18. The Paper IDs will be generated / issued / assigned by the Examination Division of the University.

19. The medium of instructions shall be English.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 200
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Bachelor of Technology in Computer Science and Engineering

(Artificial Intelligence) (CSE-AI)
2nd Year Onward Scheme and implementation guideline

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 201
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Third Semester
Paper
Group Paper L P Credits
Code
Theory Papers
ES ES‐201 Computational Methods 4 4
HS/MS HS‐203 Indian Knowledge System* 2 2
PC CIC‐205 Discrete Mathematics 4 4
PC ECC‐207 Digital Logic and Computer Design 4 4
PC CIC‐209 Data Structures 4 4
PC CIC‐211 Object‐Oriented Programming using C++ 4 4
Practical / Viva Voce
ES ES‐251 Computational Methods Lab 2 1
PC ECC‐253 Digital Logic and Computer Design Lab 2 1
PC CIC‐255 Data Structures Lab 2 1
PC CIC‐257 Object‐Oriented Programming using C++ Lab 2 1
Total 22 8 26

*NUES:All examinations to be conducted by the concerned teacher as specified in the detailed syllabus of the paper.

Fourth Semester
Paper
Group Paper L P Credits
Code
Theory Papers
BS BS‐202 Probability, Statistics and Linear Programming 4 4
HS/MS HS‐204 Technical Writing* 2 2
PC CIC‐206 Theory of Computation 4 4
PC EEC‐208 Circuits and Systems 4 4
PC CIC‐210 Database Management Systems 4 4
PC CIC‐212 Programming in Java 4 4
Practical / Viva Voce
BS BS‐252 Probability, Statistics and Linear Programming Lab 2 1
PC EEC‐254 Circuits and Systems Lab 2 1
PC CIC‐256 Database Management Systems Lab 2 1
PC CIC‐258 Programming in Java Lab 2 1
Total 22 8 26

*NUES:All examinations to be conducted by the concerned teacher as specified in the detailed syllabus of the paper.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 202
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Fifth Semester
Group Paper Code Paper L P Credits
Theory Papers
HS/MS HS‐301 Economics for Engineers 2 2
PC CIC‐303 Compiler Design 3 3
PC CIC‐305 Operating Systems 4 4
PC CIC‐307 Computer Networks 4 4
PC CIC‐309 Software Engineering 3 3
PC CIC‐311 Design and Analysis of Algorithm 4 4
Practical / Viva Voce
PC CIC‐351 Compiler Design Lab 2 1
PC CIC‐353 Operating Systems Lab 2 1
PC CIC‐355 Computer Networks Lab 2 1
PC CIC‐357 Software Engineering Lab 2 1
PC CIC‐359 Design and Analysis of Algorithm Lab 2 1
PC / Internship ES‐361 Summer Training Report ‐ 1 * 1
Total 20 10 26

*NUES:Comprehensive evaluation of the Summer Training Report – 1 (after 4th Semester) shall be done by the committee
of teachers, constituted by the Academic Programme Committee, out of 100. The training shall be of 4 to 6 weeks duration.
The training can be under the mentorship of a teacher of the institute.

Sixth Semester
Group Paper Code Paper L P Credits
Theory Papers
HS/MS MS‐302 Principles of Management for Engineers 3 3
HS/MS HS‐304 Universal Human Values* 1 1
PC AI‐302T Artificial Intelligence 3 3
PC DA‐304T Statistics, Statistical Modelling & Data Analytics 3 3
PC AI‐318T Fuzzy Systems and Applications 3 3
PC ML‐350T Artificial Neural Networks 3 3
OAE Open Area Elective Paper (OAE – 1) 4
Practical / Viva Voce
PC AI‐302P Artificial Intelligence Lab 2 1
PC DA‐304P Statistics, Statistical Modelling & Data Analytics Lab 2 1
PC AI‐318P Fuzzy Systems and Applications Lab 2 1
PC ML‐350P Artificial Neural Networks Lab 2 1
NSS / NCC / Cultural Clubs / Technical Society / Technical
HS/MS HS‐352 2
Club*
Total 26

*NUES:All examinations to be conducted by the concerned teacher as specified in the detailed syllabus of the paper.

**NUES: Comprehensive evaluation of the students by the concerned coordinator of NCC / NSS / Cultural Clubs / Technical
Society / Technical Clubs, out of 100 as per the evaluation schemes worked out by these activity societies, organizations; the
faculty co‐ordinators shall be responsible for the evaluation of the same. These activities shall start from the 1st semester
and the evaluation shall be conducted at the end of the 6th semester for students admitted in the first semester. Students
nd rd
admitted in the 2 year (3 semester) as lateral entry shall be evaluated on the basis their performance, by the faculty co‐
rd th
ordinator for the period of 3 semester to 6 semester only.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 203
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Seventh Semester
Group Paper Code Paper L P Credits
Theory Papers
HS/MS MS‐401 Principles of Entrepreneurship Mindset 2 2
PC AI‐403T Artificial Intelligence Applications 3 3
PC AI‐405T Intelligent and Expert Systems 3 3
PC AI‐407T Evolutionary Computation 3 3
PC AI‐409T Natural Language Processing 3 3
OAE Open Area Elective Paper (OAE – 2) 4
Practical / Viva Voce
PC AI‐403P Artificial Intelligence Applications Lab 2 1
PC AI‐405P Intelligent and Expert Systems Lab 2 1
PC AI‐407P Evolutionary Computation Lab 2 1
PC AI‐409P Natural Language Processing Lab 2 1
PC / Project ES‐451 Minor Project** 3
PC / Internship ES‐453 Summer Training (after 6th semester) Report * 1
Total 26

th
*NUES:Comprehensive evaluation of the Summer Training Report – 2 (after 6 Semester) shall be done by the committee
of teachers, constituted by the Academic Programme Committee, out of 100. The training shall be of 4 to 6 weeks duration.
The training can be under the mentorship of a teacher of the institute.

**The student shall be allocated a supervisor / guide for project work at the end 6th semester by the department /
institution, the project shall continue into the 8th semester. In the 7th semester evaluation, the criteria for evaluation shall
be conceptualization of the project work, the background study / literature survey and identification of objectives and
methodology to be followed for project. 40 marks evaluation for the Teachers' Continuous Evaluation / Internal Assessment
shall be done by concerned supervisor while the term end examination of 60 marks shall be conducted by the supervisor
concerned and the external examiner deputed by the Examinations Division. In the absence of the supervisor, the Director
of the Institution / Head of the Department can assign the responsibility of the supervisor (for purpose of examinations) to
any faculty of the Institution / Department.

Eight Semester
Paper
Group Paper L P Credits
Code
Practical / Viva Voce%
ES‐452 Major Project – Dissertation and Viva Voce# 18
PC / Project
ES‐454 Project Progress Evaluation* 2
#
ES‐456 Internship Report and Viva Voce 18
PC / Internship
ES‐458 Internship Progress Evaluation* 2
Total 0 0 20

*NUES: Comprehensive evaluation by the committee of teachers, constituted by the Academic Programme
Committee, out of 100.

%By default every student shall do the project work (ES‐452 and ES‐454). A student shall either be allowed to
do a project work (ES‐452 and ES‐454) or an internship (ES‐456 and ES‐458). The student must apply for
th
approval to do internship before the commencement of the 8 semester to the institute, and only after
approval of Principal / Director of the institute through Training and Placement Officer of the institute, shall
proceed for internship.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 204
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

#Students may be allowed to do internship in this semester in lieu of Major project. The students allowed to
proceed for internship shall be required to maintain a log‐book of activities performed during internship. The
same has to be countersigned by the mentor at the organization where internship is completed.
ES‐452: Evaluation shall be conducted of 40 marks (Teachers’ continuous evaluation / internal assessment) by
the supervisor. And, 60 marks by a bench of the supervisor and the external examiner deputed by Examination
Division (COE), for a total of 100 marks.

ES‐454 / ES‐458: Comprehensive evaluation by the committee of teachers, constituted by the Academic
Programme Committee, out of 100.

ES‐456: Evaluation shall be conducted of 40 marks (Teachers’ continuous evaluation / internal assessment) by
the Training and Placement Officer of the department / institute on the basis of the report submitted by the
student. And, 60 marks by a bench of the Training and Placement Officer of the department / institute and the
external examiner deputed by Examination Division (COE), for a total of 100 marks.

In the absence of the supervisor or the Training and Placement Officer (as the case may be), the Director of the
institute / Head of the Department can assign the responsibility of the supervisor or the Training and Placement
Officer (for purpose of examinations) to any faculty of the department.

Note on Elective Papers: The elective papers shall be allowed to be taken / studied by the students, by the
APC of the department / institute, keeping in view that two papers studied by the student should not have a
substantial overlap. All papers studied by the student should be substantially distinct in content.

Note on Examination of Elective Papers:

(a) Papers with only theory component shall have 25 Marks continuous evaluation by the teacher and 75
Marks term‐end examinations. Both these component marks shall be reflected on the marksheet of the
student.
(b) Papers with only practical component shall have 40 Marks continuous evaluation by the teacher and 60
Marks term‐end examinations. Both these component marks shall be reflected on the marksheet of the
student.

Note on Continuous Evaluation of All Papers:

(a) Papers with only theory component shall have 25 Marks continuous evaluation by the teacher which shall
be evaluated as:
i. Mid‐Term Test* ‐ 15 Marks (after 8 weeks of teaching or as
decided by PCC)
ii. Assignments / Project / Quiz / Case Studies, etc. ‐ 5 Marks
iii. Attendance / Class Participation ‐ 5 Marks
(b) Papers with only practical component shall have 40Marks continuous evaluation by the teacher which shall
be evaluated as:
i. Mid‐Term Test and Viva Voce ‐ 20 Marks (after 8 weeks of teaching or as
decided by PCC)
ii. Practical File ‐ 10 Marks
iii. Attendance / Lab Participation ‐ 10 Marks

* The mid‐term test shall be coordinated by the Programme Coordination Committee.

If a student could not appear for a mid‐term test due to situation beyond the control by the student, a
supplementary test may be arranged towards the end of the semester, in a similar manner to the mid‐term
test for such students. The students must apply for this provision to the department / institution. On
examination of the reason for non‐appearing in the mid‐term test by the Head of the Department / Institute,
and with reason for allowing to appear in the supplementary test to recorded by the Head of the Department
/ Institute, the student may be allowed.
The attendance sheets, the question papers and the award sheets for the continuous evaluation to be
retained by the concerned department / institute for at least 6 months after the declaration of the result by
the Examination Division of the University.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 205
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Open Area Electives

Semester Paper Code OAE – 1 (Choose Any One) L P Credits
6 ES‐304 Real Time Operating Systems 4 4
ES‐306T Embedded System Architecture and Design 3 3
6
ES‐306P Embedded System Architecture and Design Lab 2 1
FSD‐320T Web Development using MEAN Stack 3 3
6
FSD‐320P Web Development using MEAN Stack Lab 2 1
FSD‐322T Web Development using MERN Stack 3 3
6
FSD‐322P Web Development using MERN Stack Lab 2 1
OSD‐330T Programming in Windows Environment 3 3
6
OSD‐330P Programming in Windows Environment Lab 2 1
OSD‐334T Android App Development 3 3
6
OSD‐334P Android App Development Lab 2 1
IPCV‐334T Digital Image Processing 3 3
6
IPCV‐334P Digital Image Processing Lab 2 1
Understanding Human Being, Nature and Existence
6 4 4
OUHV‐338 Comprehensively
6 OUHV‐340 Vision for Humane Society 4 4
SE‐350T Software Measurements, Metrics and Modelling 3 3
6
SE‐350P Software Measurements, Metrics and Modelling Lab 2 1
SE‐352T Service Oriented Architecture 3 3
6
SE‐352P Service Oriented Architecture Lab 2 1
SE‐354T Software Project Management 3 3
6
SE‐354P Software Project Management Lab 2 1
6 MOOCs (Swayam / NPTEL) 4
Semester Paper Code OAE – 2 (Choose Any One) L P Credits
ES‐403T VHDL Programming 3 3
7
ES‐403P VHDL Programming Lab 2 1
ES‐405T Real Time Embedded System Programming 3 3
7
ES‐405P Real Time Embedded System Programming Lab 2 1
FSD‐435T PHP Programming and MySQL 3 3
7
FSD‐435P PHP Programming and MySQL Lab 2 1
MAC‐409T Robotics Engineering 3 3
7
MAC‐409P Robotics Engineering Lab 2 1
OECE‐417T Microprocessors and Interfacing 3 3
7
OECE‐417P Microprocessors and Interfacing Lab 2 1
OECE‐419T Analog and Digital Communications 3 3
7
OECE‐419P Analog and Digital Communications Lab 2 1
OECE‐421T Wireless Sensor Networks 3 3
7
OECE‐421P Wireless Sensor Networks Lab 2 1
OSD‐449T Design Patterns 3 3
7
OSD‐449P Design Patterns Lab 2 1
OSD‐453T Advanced Java Programming 3 3
7
OSD‐453P Advanced Java Programming Lab 2 1
OSD‐455T Programming in Linux Environment 3 3
7
OSD‐455P Programming in Linux Environment Lab 2 1
7 OUHV‐463 Holistic Human Health 4 4
SC‐479T Global Optimization Methods 3 3
7
SC‐479P Global Optimization Methods Lab 2 1
SE‐487T Software Verification, Validation and Testing 3 3
7
SE‐487P Software Verification, Validation and Testing Lab 2 1
7 MOOCs (Swayam / NPTEL) 4

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 206
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Note:
1. Each OAE slot is of 4 credits, if in a particular slot, the paper has no practical component, then it is of 4 credits
(a pure theory paper), otherwise for purpose of examination and conduct of classes, the course is split in two
papers, namely a theory paper of 3 credits and a practical paper of 1 credit. The student has to study for 4
credits per slot of OAE group. This is reflected by suffixing the paper code by T (for Theory component) and P
(for Practical component), if required

2. The Open Area Electives described / enumerated are the one offered by engineering departments. If other
departments, offering minor specialization or elective papers as open area electives to engineering students
(approved by the university Academic Council) are possible at the concerned institution, the same may also be
offered to the engineering students studying in the major disciplines under the aegis of the University School of
Information, Communication and Technology. The APC of the department / intuition shall allow the choice of
such electives, provided they follow the credit framework of the programme of study for open area electives.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 207
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Implementation Rules:

1. The examinations, attendance criteria to appear in examinations, promotion and award of the degree
shall be governed by the Ordinance 11 of the University. The term “major discipline” / “primary discipline”
in this document refers to the discipline in which student is admitted / studies from 3rd semester onwards.
However credits of courses / paper for OAE / EAE groups shall not be considered for the purpose of
promotion from one year of study to the subsequent year of study.
2. Minimum duration of the Bachelor of Technology programme shall be 4 years (N=4 years) (8 semesters)
for the students admitted in the 1st year and 1st semester of the degree programme. Lateral entry students
shall be admitted in the 2nd year and 3rd semester of the degree programme (effectively in the batch
admitted in the first year in the previous academic session and shall be deemed to have been exempted
from the courses / papers of the first year of the degree programme. No exemption certificate shall be
issued in any case.
A specific lateral entry students’ minimum duration shall be the same as the minimum duration for the
batch in which he/she is admitted as a lateral entry student in the 2nd year.
3. Maximum duration of the Bachelor of Technology programme shall be 6 years (N+2 years). After
completion of N+2 years of study, if the student has appeared in the papers of all the semesters upto 8th
semester, then a maximum extension of 1 year may be given to the student for completing the
requirements of the degree if and only if the number of credits already earned by the student is atleast 150
(for lateral entry students it shall be at least 102 credits) from the (non‐honours components). Otherwise,
the admission of the student shall stand cancelled. After the period of allowed study, the admission of the
student shall be cancelled.
A specific lateral entry students’ maximum duration shall be the same as the minimum duration for the
batch in which he/she is admitted as a lateral entry student in the 2nd year.
4. The degree shall be awarded only after the fulfilment of all requirements of the Scheme and Syllabus of
Examinations and the applicable Ordinance.
5. (a) The students shall undergo the following group of Courses / Papers as enumerated in the scheme (For
the students admitted in the First Year / First Semester).

Semester (Credits) Total Mandatory

Group
I & II III IV V VI VII VIII Credits Credits

BS 24 5 29 14

HS/MS 6 2 2 2 6 2 20 10

ES 20 5 25 15

PC 19 19 24 16 20 20 118 104

OAE 4 4 8 4

Total 50 26 26 26 26 26 20 200 147

TABLE 1: Distribution of Credits (Project / Internship credits are 25 out the 118 credits for Programme
Core (PC) credits, while extra‐curricular activities credits are 2 out of 20 credits for Humanities /
Management / Social Science Group (HS/MS)) . This table is for students admitted in the First Year / First
Semester of the Degree Programme.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 208
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

(b) The students admitted as Lateral Entry shall undergo the following group of Courses / Papers as
enumerated in the scheme.

Semester (Credits) Total Mandatory

Group
III IV V VI VII VIII Credits Credits

BS 5 5 0

HS/MS 2 2 2 6 2 14 7

ES 5 5 0

PC 19 19 24 16 20 20 118 104

OAE 4 4 8 4

Total 26 26 26 26 26 20 150 115

TABLE 2: Distribution of Credits (Project / Internship credits are 25 out the 118 credits for Programme
Core (PC) credits, while extra‐curricular activities credits are 2 out of 14 credits for Humanities /
Management / Social Science Group (HS/MS)) This table is for students admitted as Lateral Entry
Students in the Second Year / Third Semester of the Degree Programme.

6. Mandatory Credits specify the number of credits from each subject group to be mandatorily acquired by
the student for the award of the degree,for students admitted as students in the 1st year and 1st semester
of the degree programme. While for students admitted as lateral entry in the 2nd year and 3rd semester
the Mandatory Credits value is 115, and specify the number of credits from each subject group to be
mandatorily acquired by the student for the award of the degree (Table 2). See clause 11 and 12 also.
7. Some of the papers are droppable in the sense that the student may qualify for the award of the degree
even when the student has not cleared / passed some of the papers of these group. However, the student
has to earn the minimum credits for the programme of study as specified. See clause 11 and 12 also.
8. The students may take 2 subjects from OAE group. The open electives of the OAE group of courses may
also be taken through SWAYAM / NPTEL MOOCs platform. The student desirous of doing a MOOC based
course among the OAE group must seek approval of the APC of the institute for the same before the
commencement of the semester. The APC shall allow the MOOC based OAE option to the student if and
only if the MOOC subject / course being considered for the student is being offered in line with the
Academic Calendar applicable. The student shall submit the successful completion certificate with marks to
the institution for onwards transfer to the Examination Division. The Examinations Division shall take these
marks on record for incorporation in the result of the appropriate semester. These marks / grades of these
courses shall be used for calculation of the SGPA/CGPA of the student concerned by the examination
division of the University. The degree to the student on fulfilment of other requirements for such cases
shall be through clause 12.a. or 12.b.
These MOOC courses taken by the students, if allowed by the APC of the institute shall be of 4 credits or
more collectively to be against or for one paper slot in the scheme, through MOOCs, though the marks
shall be shown individually. That is in one paper slot in the scheme wherever a MOOC course is allowed,
the student may register for more than one paper to aggregate 4 credits or more. If the credits of these
MOOC Courses, allowed to a student is more than 4, then the maximum credit for the programme shall
be amended accordingly for the particular student. Also, in a particular semester, a student may take
more than one MOOC course with the approval of the APC to meet the credit requirements of OAE for the
semester. The cost of taking the MOOC course is to be borne by the concerned student. The results of the
MOOC courses shall be declared separately by the Examination Division from the result for the papers
conducted by the examination division of the University.
No minor specialization shall be offered / awarded.
9. To earn an Honours degree, the student may enrol for 20 credits or more through SWAYAM / NPTEL
MOOCs platform. This point has to be read together with other points specially point 13 and 14. The

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 209
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

acquisition of the credits should be completed before the 15th of the July of the Admission Year plus 4
years. That is, if a student is admitted in the year X, then these credits must be acquired through MOOCs by
15th July of the year (X+4), no extra duration or time shall be allocated, this means, the student must
submit the result of such papers on or before 15th July of the Admission Year plus 4 years.
Honours in the degree shall be awarded if and only if at least 20 credits are acquired through MOOCs. To
obtain Honours in the programme, the student must apply to the institution about the same before the
commencement of the 5th semester. The specific courses through MOOCs shall be registered by the
student only after approval by the Academic Programme Committee (APC) of the Institute. The APC shall
approve the course if it is not already studied by the student or the student shall not study it in future and
adds value to the major area of specialization (which is the degree). The papers for which the student
desires to appear for Honours through MOOCs, all papers results shall be submitted by the student to the
Institute for onwards transfer to Examination Division of the University, to be taken on record of the
University. The results of these papers shall be a part of the records of the examinations of the students.
The records shall be submitted by the student to the Institute, then transferred to the Examination
Division, shall be notified by the Examination Division of the University, and a separate marksheet shall be
issued by the Examination Division. The cost of taking the MOOC course is to be borne by the concerned
student. Such courses shall be reflected as additional courses / papers for the student.
If a student acquires less than 20 credits through MOOCs, following the mechanism specified, then also
the results of these papers shall be taken on record as specified above, though no Honours degree shall
be awarded.
The papers through MOOCs for Honours degree shall not be a part of the set of the papers over which the
SGPA / CGPA of the student shall be calculated.
The papers through MOOCs for Honours degree shall be additional papers studied by the students and are
to be taken into account only for award of Honours in the degree programme, if 20 credits are earned
through MOOCs as approved by APC, by a student. See Clause 13 also.
10. Maximum Credits is at least 200 (Table 1) for students admitted in the 1st year and 1st semester, these are
the credits for which the student shall have to study for the non‐Honours component of the curriculum.
And, for lateral entry students admitted in the 2nd year and 3rd semester of the degree programme, the
maximum credit required to be studied is at least 150 (Table 2). See clause 8 also.
The student has to appear in the examinations for these credits in all components of evaluation as
specified in the scheme of studies.
11. Minimum Credits required to be earned is atleast 180 (out of the 200 non Honours papers credits, see
clause 10 also) for students admitted in the 1st year and 1st semester. And, for lateral entry students
admitted in the 2nd year and 3rd semester of the degree programme, the minimum credit required to be
earned Is at least 135 (out of the 150 non Honours papers credits, see clause 10 also). See clause 6 also.
12. The following degree route can be taken by a student (also refer point 13):
a. The students shall be awarded the degree without any minor specialization under the following
conditions:
i. The student has earned the mandatory credits as defined in Table 1 or Table 2 (as applicable) and
clause 6.
ii. In addition, the total credits (including the above specified credits) earned by the student is atleast
as specified in clause 11.
The degree nomenclature of the degree shall be as: “Bachelor of Technology in Computer Science and
Engineering (Artificial Intelligence)”; if criteria / point 9 is not satisfied for Honours. Otherwise, if
criteria / point 9 is met, then the degrees shall be an Honours degree and the nomenclature shall be
as: “Bachelor of Technology in Computer Science and Engineering (Artificial Intelligence) (Honours)”,
if in addition to point 12.b.i and 12.b.ii, the student fulfils the criteria for Honours as specified at point
9.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 210
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

b. If the student does not fulfil any of the above criterions (point 12.a, or 12.b), if the student earns at
least the minimum credits specified in clause 11 (disregarding the mandatory credits clause of Table 1
or Table 2 (as applicable) and Clause 6), then the student shall be award the degree as “Bachelor of
Technology in Computer Science and Engineering (Artificial Intelligence)”. Such students shall not be
eligible for the award of an Honours degree. Though, if credits are accumulated through MOOCs as per
clause 9, the same shall be reflected in the marksheets of the students.
13. The Honours degree shall only be awarded if the CGPA of the student is above or equal to 7.5 in addition
to fulfilment of criteria / point 10 and 13 above and the degree is awarded after the immediate
completion of the 4th year of the batch from the year of admission. No Honours shall be conferred if the
degree requirements are not completed in the minimum duration.
14. Pass marks in every paper shall be 40.
15. Grading System shall be as per Ordinance 11 of the University.
16. The institution shall offer atleast two elective groups out of the open area for students of each major
discipline. The institute shall decide the group(s) and/or individual papers to be offered as electives based
on the availability of infrastructure and faculty. From the groups / papers offered by the institute, an
elective paper / group shall be taught if and only if the number of students in a paper is at‐least 20 or at‐
least 1/3 of the students of a major discipline for which the paper / group is to be offered. The APC of the
department / institute may define a maximum number of students allowed to register for a paper as an
open area elective.
17. Teachers of the other department(s), as and when deputed by their department, for teaching the students
enrolled in programmes offered by the department offering the programme shall be a part of the
Academic Programme Committee of the discipline. Such teachers, for all academic matters, including
teaching, teachers’ continuous evaluation, term end examinations etc. shall be governed by the decisions
of the APC of department offering the programme of study. Similarly, the guest faculty, the visiting faculty
and the Contract / Ad Hoc faculty as and when deputed to teach students of a particular department shall
form a part of APC of the department.
18. The Paper IDs will be generated / issued / assigned by the Examination Division of the University.

19. The medium of instructions shall be English.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 211
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Bachelor of Technology in Computer Science and Engineering

(Artificial Intelligence and Machine Learning) (CSE-AIML)
2nd Year Onward Scheme and implementation guideline

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 212
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Third Semester
Paper
Group Paper L P Credits
Code
Theory Papers
ES ES‐201 Computational Methods 4 4
HS/MS HS‐203 Indian Knowledge System* 2 2
PC CIC‐205 Discrete Mathematics 4 4
PC ECC‐207 Digital Logic and Computer Design 4 4
PC CIC‐209 Data Structures 4 4
PC CIC‐211 Object‐Oriented Programming using C++ 4 4
Practical / Viva Voce
ES ES‐251 Computational Methods Lab 2 1
PC ECC‐253 Digital Logic and Computer Design Lab 2 1
PC CIC‐255 Data Structures Lab 2 1
PC CIC‐257 Object‐Oriented Programming using C++ Lab 2 1
Total 22 8 26

*NUES:All examinations to be conducted by the concerned teacher as specified in the detailed syllabus of the paper.

Fourth Semester
Paper
Group Paper L P Credits
Code
Theory Papers
BS BS‐202 Probability, Statistics and Linear Programming 4 4
HS/MS HS‐204 Technical Writing* 2 2
PC CIC‐206 Theory of Computation 4 4
PC EEC‐208 Circuits and Systems 4 4
PC CIC‐210 Database Management Systems 4 4
PC CIC‐212 Programming in Java 4 4
Practical / Viva Voce
BS BS‐252 Probability, Statistics and Linear Programming Lab 2 1
PC EEC‐254 Circuits and Systems Lab 2 1
PC CIC‐256 Database Management Systems Lab 2 1
PC CIC‐258 Programming in Java Lab 2 1
Total 22 8 26

*NUES:All examinations to be conducted by the concerned teacher as specified in the detailed syllabus of the paper.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 213
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Fifth Semester
Paper
Group Paper L P Credits
Code
Theory Papers
HS/MS HS‐301 Economics for Engineers 2 2
PC CIC‐303 Compiler Design 3 3
PC CIC‐305 Operating Systems 4 4
PC CIC‐307 Computer Networks 4 4
PC CIC‐309 Software Engineering 3 3
PC CIC‐311 Design and Analysis of Algorithm 4 4
Practical / Viva Voce
PC CIC‐351 Compiler Design Lab 2 1
PC CIC‐353 Operating Systems Lab 2 1
PC CIC‐355 Computer Networks Lab 2 1
PC CIC‐357 Software Engineering Lab 2 1
PC CIC‐359 Design and Analysis of Algorithm Lab 2 1
PC / Internship ES‐361 Summer Training Report ‐ 1 * 1
Total 20 10 26

*NUES:Comprehensive evaluation of the Summer Training Report – 1 (after 4th Semester) shall be done by the committee
of teachers, constituted by the Academic Programme Committee, out of 100. The training shall be of 4 to 6 weeks duration.
The training can be under the mentorship of a teacher of the institute.

Sixth Semester
Group Paper Code Paper L P Credits
Theory Papers
HS/MS MS‐302 Principles of Management for Engineers 3 3
HS/MS HS‐304 Universal Human Values* 1 1
PC AI‐302T Artificial Intelligence 3 3
PC DA‐304T Statistics, Statistical Modelling & Data Analytics 3 3
PC AI‐320T Optimization Techniques 3 3
PC ML‐352T Supervised and Unsupervised Learning 3 3
OAE Open Area Elective Paper (OAE – 1) 4
Practical / Viva Voce
PC AI‐302P Artificial Intelligence Lab 2 1
PC DA‐304P Statistics, Statistical Modelling & Data Analytics Lab 2 1
PC AI‐320P Optimization Techniques Lab 2 1
PC ML‐352P Supervised and Unsupervised Learning Lab 2 1
NSS / NCC / Cultural Clubs / Technical Society / Technical
HS/MS HS‐352 2
Club*
Total 26

*NUES:All examinations to be conducted by the concerned teacher as specified in the detailed syllabus of the paper.

**NUES: Comprehensive evaluation of the students by the concerned coordinator of NCC / NSS / Cultural Clubs / Technical
Society / Technical Clubs, out of 100 as per the evaluation schemes worked out by these activity societies, organizations; the
faculty co‐ordinators shall be responsible for the evaluation of the same. These activities shall start from the 1st semester
and the evaluation shall be conducted at the end of the 6th semester for students admitted in the first semester. Students
nd rd
admitted in the 2 year (3 semester) as lateral entry shall be evaluated on the basis their performance, by the faculty co‐
rd th
ordinator for the period of 3 semester to 6 semester only.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 214
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Seventh Semester
Group Paper Code Paper L P Credits
Theory Papers
HS/MS MS‐401 Principles of Entrepreneurship Mindset 2 2
PC SC‐401T Soft Computing 3 3
PC ML‐407T Machine Learning 3 3
PC ML‐409T Reinforcement Learning and Deep Learning 3 3
PC ML‐411T Pattern Recognition and Computer Vision 3 3
OAE Open Area Elective Paper (OAE – 2) 4
Practical / Viva Voce
PC SC‐401P Soft Computing Lab 2 1
PC ML‐407P Machine Learning Lab 2 1
PC ML‐409P Reinforcement Learning and Deep Learning Lab 2 1
PC ML‐411P Pattern Recognition and Computer Vision Lab 2 1
PC / Project ES‐451 Minor Project** 3
PC / Internship ES‐453 Summer Training (after 6th semester) Report * 1
Total 26

th
*NUES:Comprehensive evaluation of the Summer Training Report – 2 (after 6 Semester) shall be done by the committee
of teachers, constituted by the Academic Programme Committee, out of 100. The training shall be of 4 to 6 weeks duration.
The training can be under the mentorship of a teacher of the institute.

**The student shall be allocated a supervisor / guide for project work at the end 6th semester by the department /
institution, the project shall continue into the 8th semester. In the 7th semester evaluation, the criteria for evaluation shall
be conceptualization of the project work, the background study / literature survey and identification of objectives and
methodology to be followed for project. 40 marks evaluation for the Teachers' Continuous Evaluation / Internal Assessment
shall be done by concerned supervisor while the term end examination of 60 marks shall be conducted by the supervisor
concerned and the external examiner deputed by the Examinations Division. In the absence of the supervisor, the Director
of the Institution / Head of the Department can assign the responsibility of the supervisor (for purpose of examinations) to
any faculty of the Institution / Department.

Eight Semester
Paper
Group Paper L P Credits
Code
Practical / Viva Voce%
ES‐452 Major Project – Dissertation and Viva Voce# 18
PC / Project
ES‐454 Project Progress Evaluation* 2
#
ES‐456 Internship Report and Viva Voce 18
PC / Internship
ES‐458 Internship Progress Evaluation* 2
Total 0 0 20

*NUES: Comprehensive evaluation by the committee of teachers, constituted by the Academic Programme
Committee, out of 100.

%By default every student shall do the project work (ES‐452 and ES‐454). A student shall either be allowed to
do a project work (ES‐452 and ES‐454) or an internship (ES‐456 and ES‐458). The student must apply for
th
approval to do internship before the commencement of the 8 semester to the institute, and only after
approval of Principal / Director of the institute through Training and Placement Officer of the institute, shall
proceed for internship.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 215
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

#Students may be allowed to do internship in this semester in lieu of Major project. The students allowed to
proceed for internship shall be required to maintain a log‐book of activities performed during internship. The
same has to be countersigned by the mentor at the organization where internship is completed.
ES‐452: Evaluation shall be conducted of 40 marks (Teachers’ continuous evaluation / internal assessment) by
the supervisor. And, 60 marks by a bench of the supervisor and the external examiner deputed by Examination
Division (COE), for a total of 100 marks.

ES‐454 / ES‐458: Comprehensive evaluation by the committee of teachers, constituted by the Academic
Programme Committee, out of 100.

ES‐456: Evaluation shall be conducted of 40 marks (Teachers’ continuous evaluation / internal assessment) by
the Training and Placement Officer of the department / institute on the basis of the report submitted by the
student. And, 60 marks by a bench of the Training and Placement Officer of the department / institute and the
external examiner deputed by Examination Division (COE), for a total of 100 marks.

In the absence of the supervisor or the Training and Placement Officer (as the case may be), the Director of the
institute / Head of the Department can assign the responsibility of the supervisor or the Training and Placement
Officer (for purpose of examinations) to any faculty of the department.

Note on Elective Papers: The elective papers shall be allowed to be taken / studied by the students, by the
APC of the department / institute, keeping in view that two papers studied by the student should not have a
substantial overlap. All papers studied by the student should be substantially distinct in content.

Note on Examination of Elective Papers:

(a) Papers with only theory component shall have 25 Marks continuous evaluation by the teacher and 75
Marks term‐end examinations. Both these component marks shall be reflected on the marksheet of the
student.
(b) Papers with only practical component shall have 40 Marks continuous evaluation by the teacher and 60
Marks term‐end examinations. Both these component marks shall be reflected on the marksheet of the
student.

Note on Continuous Evaluation of All Papers:

(a) Papers with only theory component shall have 25 Marks continuous evaluation by the teacher which shall
be evaluated as:
i. Mid‐Term Test* ‐ 15 Marks (after 8 weeks of teaching or as
decided by PCC)
ii. Assignments / Project / Quiz / Case Studies, etc. ‐ 5 Marks
iii. Attendance / Class Participation ‐ 5 Marks
(b) Papers with only practical component shall have 40Marks continuous evaluation by the teacher which shall
be evaluated as:
i. Mid‐Term Test and Viva Voce ‐ 20 Marks (after 8 weeks of teaching or as
decided by PCC)
ii. Practical File ‐ 10 Marks
iii. Attendance / Lab Participation ‐ 10 Marks

* The mid‐term test shall be coordinated by the Programme Coordination Committee.

If a student could not appear for a mid‐term test due to situation beyond the control by the student, a
supplementary test may be arranged towards the end of the semester, in a similar manner to the mid‐term
test for such students. The students must apply for this provision to the department / institution. On
examination of the reason for non‐appearing in the mid‐term test by the Head of the Department / Institute,
and with reason for allowing to appear in the supplementary test to recorded by the Head of the Department
/ Institute, the student may be allowed.
The attendance sheets, the question papers and the award sheets for the continuous evaluation to be
retained by the concerned department / institute for at least 6 months after the declaration of the result by
the Examination Division of the University.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 216
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Open Area Electives

Semester Paper Code OAE – 1 (Choose Any One) L P Credits
6 ES‐304 Real Time Operating Systems 4 4
ES‐306T Embedded System Architecture and Design 3 3
6
ES‐306P Embedded System Architecture and Design Lab 2 1
FSD‐320T Web Development using MEAN Stack 3 3
6
FSD‐320P Web Development using MEAN Stack Lab 2 1
FSD‐322T Web Development using MERN Stack 3 3
6
FSD‐322P Web Development using MERN Stack Lab 2 1
OSD‐330T Programming in Windows Environment 3 3
6
OSD‐330P Programming in Windows Environment Lab 2 1
OSD‐334T Android App Development 3 3
6
OSD‐334P Android App Development Lab 2 1
IPCV‐334T Digital Image Processing 3 3
6
IPCV‐334P Digital Image Processing Lab 2 1
Understanding Human Being, Nature and Existence
6 4 4
OUHV‐338 Comprehensively
6 OUHV‐340 Vision for Humane Society 4 4
SE‐350T Software Measurements, Metrics and Modelling 3 3
6
SE‐350P Software Measurements, Metrics and Modelling Lab 2 1
SE‐352T Service Oriented Architecture 3 3
6
SE‐352P Service Oriented Architecture Lab 2 1
SE‐354T Software Project Management 3 3
6
SE‐354P Software Project Management Lab 2 1
6 MOOCs (Swayam / NPTEL) 4
Semester Paper Code OAE – 2 (Choose Any One) L P Credits
ES‐403T VHDL Programming 3 3
7
ES‐403P VHDL Programming Lab 2 1
ES‐405T Real Time Embedded System Programming 3 3
7
ES‐405P Real Time Embedded System Programming Lab 2 1
FSD‐435T PHP Programming and MySQL 3 3
7
FSD‐435P PHP Programming and MySQL Lab 2 1
MAC‐409T Robotics Engineering 3 3
7
MAC‐409P Robotics Engineering Lab 2 1
OECE‐417T Microprocessors and Interfacing 3 3
7
OECE‐417P Microprocessors and Interfacing Lab 2 1
OECE‐419T Analog and Digital Communications 3 3
7
OECE‐419P Analog and Digital Communications Lab 2 1
OECE‐421T Wireless Sensor Networks 3 3
7
OECE‐421P Wireless Sensor Networks Lab 2 1
OSD‐449T Design Patterns 3 3
7
OSD‐449P Design Patterns Lab 2 1
OSD‐453T Advanced Java Programming 3 3
7
OSD‐453P Advanced Java Programming Lab 2 1
OSD‐455T Programming in Linux Environment 3 3
7
OSD‐455P Programming in Linux Environment Lab 2 1
7 OUHV‐463 Holistic Human Health 4 4
SC‐479PT Global Optimization Methods 3 3
7
SC‐479P Global Optimization Methods Lab 2 1
SE‐487T Software Verification, Validation and Testing 3 3
7
SE‐487P Software Verification, Validation and Testing Lab 2 1
7 MOOCs (Swayam / NPTEL) 4

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 217
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Note:
1. Each OAE slot is of 4 credits, if in a particular slot, the paper has no practical component, then it is of 4 credits
(a pure theory paper), otherwise for purpose of examination and conduct of classes, the course is split in two
papers, namely a theory paper of 3 credits and a practical paper of 1 credit. The student has to study for 4
credits per slot of OAE group. This is reflected by suffixing the paper code by T (for Theory component) and P
(for Practical component), if required

2. The Open Area Electives described / enumerated are the one offered by engineering departments. If other
departments, offering minor specialization or elective papers as open area electives to engineering students
(approved by the university Academic Council) are possible at the concerned institution, the same may also be
offered to the engineering students studying in the major disciplines under the aegis of the University School of
Information, Communication and Technology. The APC of the department / intuition shall allow the choice of
such electives, provided they follow the credit framework of the programme of study for open area electives.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 218
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Implementation Rules:

1. The examinations, attendance criteria to appear in examinations, promotion and award of the degree
shall be governed by the Ordinance 11 of the University. The term “major discipline” / “primary discipline”
in this document refers to the discipline in which student is admitted / studies from 3rd semester onwards.
However credits of courses / paper for OAE / EAE groups shall not be considered for the purpose of
promotion from one year of study to the subsequent year of study.
2. Minimum duration of the Bachelor of Technology programme shall be 4 years (N=4 years) (8 semesters)
for the students admitted in the 1st year and 1st semester of the degree programme. Lateral entry students
shall be admitted in the 2nd year and 3rd semester of the degree programme (effectively in the batch
admitted in the first year in the previous academic session and shall be deemed to have been exempted
from the courses / papers of the first year of the degree programme. No exemption certificate shall be
issued in any case.
A specific lateral entry students’ minimum duration shall be the same as the minimum duration for the
batch in which he/she is admitted as a lateral entry student in the 2nd year.
3. Maximum duration of the Bachelor of Technology programme shall be 6 years (N+2 years). After
completion of N+2 years of study, if the student has appeared in the papers of all the semesters upto 8th
semester, then a maximum extension of 1 year may be given to the student for completing the
requirements of the degree if and only if the number of credits already earned by the student is atleast 150
(for lateral entry students it shall be at least 102 credits) from the (non‐honours components). Otherwise,
the admission of the student shall stand cancelled. After the period of allowed study, the admission of the
student shall be cancelled.
A specific lateral entry students’ maximum duration shall be the same as the minimum duration for the
batch in which he/she is admitted as a lateral entry student in the 2nd year.
4. The degree shall be awarded only after the fulfilment of all requirements of the Scheme and Syllabus of
Examinations and the applicable Ordinance.
5. (a) The students shall undergo the following group of Courses / Papers as enumerated in the scheme (For
the students admitted in the First Year / First Semester).

Semester (Credits) Total Mandatory

Group
I & II III IV V VI VII VIII Credits Credits

BS 24 5 29 14

HS/MS 6 2 2 2 6 2 20 10

ES 20 5 25 15

PC 19 19 24 16 20 20 118 104

OAE 4 4 8 4

Total 50 26 26 26 26 26 20 200 147

TABLE 1: Distribution of Credits (Project / Internship credits are 25 out the 118 credits for Programme
Core (PC) credits, while extra‐curricular activities credits are 2 out of 20 credits for Humanities /
Management / Social Science Group (HS/MS)) . This table is for students admitted in the First Year / First
Semester of the Degree Programme.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 219
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

(b) The students admitted as Lateral Entry shall undergo the following group of Courses / Papers as
enumerated in the scheme.

Semester (Credits) Total Mandatory

Group
III IV V VI VII VIII Credits Credits

BS 5 5 0

HS/MS 2 2 2 6 2 14 7

ES 5 5 0

PC 19 19 24 16 20 20 118 104

OAE 4 4 8 4

Total 26 26 26 26 26 20 150 115

TABLE 2: Distribution of Credits (Project / Internship credits are 25 out the 118 credits for Programme
Core (PC) credits, while extra‐curricular activities credits are 2 out of 14 credits for Humanities /
Management / Social Science Group (HS/MS)) This table is for students admitted as Lateral Entry
Students in the Second Year / Third Semester of the Degree Programme.

6. Mandatory Credits specify the number of credits from each subject group to be mandatorily acquired by
the student for the award of the degree,for students admitted as students in the 1st year and 1st semester
of the degree programme. While for students admitted as lateral entry in the 2nd year and 3rd semester
the Mandatory Credits value is 115, and specify the number of credits from each subject group to be
mandatorily acquired by the student for the award of the degree (Table 2). See clause 11 and 12 also.
7. Some of the papers are droppable in the sense that the student may qualify for the award of the degree
even when the student has not cleared / passed some of the papers of these group. However, the student
has to earn the minimum credits for the programme of study as specified. See clause 11 and 12 also.
8. The students may take 2 subjects from OAE group. The open electives of the OAE group of courses may
also be taken through SWAYAM / NPTEL MOOCs platform. The student desirous of doing a MOOC based
course among the OAE group must seek approval of the APC of the institute for the same before the
commencement of the semester. The APC shall allow the MOOC based OAE option to the student if and
only if the MOOC subject / course being considered for the student is being offered in line with the
Academic Calendar applicable. The student shall submit the successful completion certificate with marks to
the institution for onwards transfer to the Examination Division. The Examinations Division shall take these
marks on record for incorporation in the result of the appropriate semester. These marks / grades of these
courses shall be used for calculation of the SGPA/CGPA of the student concerned by the examination
division of the University. The degree to the student on fulfilment of other requirements for such cases
shall be through clause 12.a. or 12.b.
These MOOC courses taken by the students, if allowed by the APC of the institute shall be of 4 credits or
more collectively to be against or for one paper slot in the scheme, through MOOCs, though the marks
shall be shown individually. That is in one paper slot in the scheme wherever a MOOC course is allowed,
the student may register for more than one paper to aggregate 4 credits or more. If the credits of these
MOOC Courses, allowed to a student is more than 4, then the maximum credit for the programme shall
be amended accordingly for the particular student. Also, in a particular semester, a student may take
more than one MOOC course with the approval of the APC to meet the credit requirements of OAE for the
semester. The cost of taking the MOOC course is to be borne by the concerned student. The results of the
MOOC courses shall be declared separately by the Examination Division from the result for the papers
conducted by the examination division of the University.
No minor specialization shall be offered / awarded.
9. To earn an Honours degree, the student may enrol for 20 credits or more through SWAYAM / NPTEL
MOOCs platform. This point has to be read together with other points specially point 13 and 14. The

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 220
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

acquisition of the credits should be completed before the 15th of the July of the Admission Year plus 4
years. That is, if a student is admitted in the year X, then these credits must be acquired through MOOCs by
15th July of the year (X+4), no extra duration or time shall be allocated, this means, the student must
submit the result of such papers on or before 15th July of the Admission Year plus 4 years.
Honours in the degree shall be awarded if and only if at least 20 credits are acquired through MOOCs. To
obtain Honours in the programme, the student must apply to the institution about the same before the
commencement of the 5th semester. The specific courses through MOOCs shall be registered by the
student only after approval by the Academic Programme Committee (APC) of the Institute. The APC shall
approve the course if it is not already studied by the student or the student shall not study it in future and
adds value to the major area of specialization (which is the degree). The papers for which the student
desires to appear for Honours through MOOCs, all papers results shall be submitted by the student to the
Institute for onwards transfer to Examination Division of the University, to be taken on record of the
University. The results of these papers shall be a part of the records of the examinations of the students.
The records shall be submitted by the student to the Institute, then transferred to the Examination
Division, shall be notified by the Examination Division of the University, and a separate marksheet shall be
issued by the Examination Division. The cost of taking the MOOC course is to be borne by the concerned
student. Such courses shall be reflected as additional courses / papers for the student.
If a student acquires less than 20 credits through MOOCs, following the mechanism specified, then also
the results of these papers shall be taken on record as specified above, though no Honours degree shall
be awarded.
The papers through MOOCs for Honours degree shall not be a part of the set of the papers over which the
SGPA / CGPA of the student shall be calculated.
The papers through MOOCs for Honours degree shall be additional papers studied by the students and are
to be taken into account only for award of Honours in the degree programme, if 20 credits are earned
through MOOCs as approved by APC, by a student. See Clause 13 also.
10. Maximum Credits is at least 200 (Table 1) for students admitted in the 1st year and 1st semester, these are
the credits for which the student shall have to study for the non‐Honours component of the curriculum.
And, for lateral entry students admitted in the 2nd year and 3rd semester of the degree programme, the
maximum credit required to be studied is at least 150 (Table 2). See clause 8 also.
The student has to appear in the examinations for these credits in all components of evaluation as
specified in the scheme of studies.
11. Minimum Credits required to be earned is atleast 180 (out of the 200 non Honours papers credits, see
clause 10 also) for students admitted in the 1st year and 1st semester. And, for lateral entry students
admitted in the 2nd year and 3rd semester of the degree programme, the minimum credit required to be
earned Is at least 135 (out of the 150 non Honours papers credits, see clause 10 also). See clause 6 also.
12. The following degree route can be taken by a student (also refer point 13):
a. The students shall be awarded the degree without any minor specialization under the following
conditions:
i. The student has earned the mandatory credits as defined in Table 1 or Table 2 (as applicable) and
clause 6.
ii. In addition, the total credits (including the above specified credits) earned by the student is atleast
as specified in clause 11.
The degree nomenclature of the degree shall be as: “Bachelor of Technology in Computer Science and
Engineering (Artificial Intelligence and Machine Learning)”; if criteria / point 9 is not satisfied for
Honours. Otherwise, if criteria / point 9 is met, then the degrees shall be an Honours degree and the
nomenclature shall be as: “Bachelor of Technology in Computer Science and Engineering (Artificial
Intelligence and Machine Learning) (Honours)”, if in addition to point 12.b.i and 12.b.ii, the student
fulfils the criteria for Honours as specified at point 9.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 221
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

b. If the student does not fulfil any of the above criterions (point 12.a, or 12.b), if the student earns at
least the minimum credits specified in clause 11 (disregarding the mandatory credits clause of Table 1
or Table 2 (as applicable) and Clause 6), then the student shall be award the degree as “Bachelor of
Technology in Computer Science and Engineering (Artificial Intelligence and Machine Learning)”.
Such students shall not be eligible for the award of an Honours degree. Though, if credits are
accumulated through MOOCs as per clause 9, the same shall be reflected in the marksheets of the
students.
13. The Honours degree shall only be awarded if the CGPA of the student is above or equal to 7.5 in addition
to fulfilment of criteria / point 10 and 13 above and the degree is awarded after the immediate
completion of the 4th year of the batch from the year of admission. No Honours shall be conferred if the
degree requirements are not completed in the minimum duration.
14. Pass marks in every paper shall be 40.
15. Grading System shall be as per Ordinance 11 of the University.
16. The institution shall offer atleast two elective groups out of the open area for students of each major
discipline. The institute shall decide the group(s) and/or individual papers to be offered as electives based
on the availability of infrastructure and faculty. From the groups / papers offered by the institute, an
elective paper / group shall be taught if and only if the number of students in a paper is at‐least 20 or at‐
least 1/3 of the students of a major discipline for which the paper / group is to be offered. The APC of the
department / institute may define a maximum number of students allowed to register for a paper as an
open area elective.
17. Teachers of the other department(s), as and when deputed by their department, for teaching the students
enrolled in programmes offered by the department offering the programme shall be a part of the
Academic Programme Committee of the discipline. Such teachers, for all academic matters, including
teaching, teachers’ continuous evaluation, term end examinations etc. shall be governed by the decisions
of the APC of department offering the programme of study. Similarly, the guest faculty, the visiting faculty
and the Contract / Ad Hoc faculty as and when deputed to teach students of a particular department shall
form a part of APC of the department.
18. The Paper IDs will be generated / issued / assigned by the Examination Division of the University.

19. The medium of instructions shall be English.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 222
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Bachelor of Technology in Computer Science and Engineering

(Data Science) (CSE-DS)
2nd Year Onward Scheme and implementation guideline

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 223
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Third Semester
Paper
Group Paper L P Credits
Code
Theory Papers
ES ES‐201 Computational Methods 4 4
HS/MS HS‐203 Indian Knowledge System* 2 2
PC CIC‐205 Discrete Mathematics 4 4
PC ECC‐207 Digital Logic and Computer Design 4 4
PC CIC‐209 Data Structures 4 4
PC CIC‐211 Object‐Oriented Programming using C++ 4 4
Practical / Viva Voce
ES ES‐251 Computational Methods Lab 2 1
PC ECC‐253 Digital Logic and Computer Design Lab 2 1
PC CIC‐255 Data Structures Lab 2 1
PC CIC‐257 Object‐Oriented Programming using C++ Lab 2 1
Total 22 8 26

*NUES:All examinations to be conducted by the concerned teacher as specified in the detailed syllabus of the paper.

Fourth Semester
Paper
Group Paper L P Credits
Code
Theory Papers
BS BS‐202 Probability, Statistics and Linear Programming 4 4
HS/MS HS‐204 Technical Writing* 2 2
PC CIC‐206 Theory of Computation 4 4
PC EEC‐208 Circuits and Systems 4 4
PC CIC‐210 Database Management Systems 4 4
PC CIC‐212 Programming in Java 4 4
Practical / Viva Voce
BS BS‐252 Probability, Statistics and Linear Programming Lab 2 1
PC EEC‐254 Circuits and Systems Lab 2 1
PC CIC‐256 Database Management Systems Lab 2 1
PC CIC‐258 Programming in Java Lab 2 1
Total 22 8 26

*NUES:All examinations to be conducted by the concerned teacher as specified in the detailed syllabus of the paper.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 224
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Fifth Semester
Paper
Group Paper L P Credits
Code
Theory Papers
HS/MS HS‐301 Economics for Engineers 2 2
PC CIC‐303 Compiler Design 3 3
PC CIC‐305 Operating Systems 4 4
PC CIC‐307 Computer Networks 4 4
PC CIC‐309 Software Engineering 3 3
PC CIC‐311 Design and Analysis of Algorithm 4 4
Practical / Viva Voce
PC CIC‐351 Compiler Design Lab 2 1
PC CIC‐353 Operating Systems Lab 2 1
PC CIC‐355 Computer Networks Lab 2 1
PC CIC‐357 Software Engineering Lab 2 1
PC CIC‐359 Design and Analysis of Algorithm Lab 2 1
PC / Internship ES‐361 Summer Training Report ‐ 1 * 1
Total 20 10 26

*NUES:Comprehensive evaluation of the Summer Training Report – 1 (after 4th Semester) shall be done by the committee
of teachers, constituted by the Academic Programme Committee, out of 100. The training shall be of 4 to 6 weeks duration.
The training can be under the mentorship of a teacher of the institute.

Sixth Semester
Group Paper Code Paper L P Credits
Theory Papers
HS/MS MS‐302 Principles of Management for Engineers 3 3
HS/MS HS‐304 Universal Human Values* 1 1
PC DA‐304T Statistics, Statistical Modelling & Data Analytics 3 3
PC AI‐316T Artificial Intelligence and Machine Learning 3 3
PC DS‐342T Programming in R and Python 3 3
PC DS‐344T Data Pre‐processing and Post Processing 3 3
OAE Open Area Elective Paper (OAE – 1) 4
Practical / Viva Voce
PC DA‐304P Statistics, Statistical Modelling & Data Analytics Lab 2 1
PC AI‐316P Artificial Intelligence and Machine Learning Lab 2 1
PC DS‐342P Programming in R and Python Lab 2 1
PC DS‐344P Data Pre‐processing and Post Processing Lab 2 1
NSS / NCC / Cultural Clubs / Technical Society / Technical
HS/MS HS‐352 2
Club*
Total 26

*NUES:All examinations to be conducted by the concerned teacher as specified in the detailed syllabus of the paper.

**NUES: Comprehensive evaluation of the students by the concerned coordinator of NCC / NSS / Cultural Clubs / Technical
Society / Technical Clubs, out of 100 as per the evaluation schemes worked out by these activity societies, organizations; the
faculty co‐ordinators shall be responsible for the evaluation of the same. These activities shall start from the 1st semester
and the evaluation shall be conducted at the end of the 6th semester for students admitted in the first semester. Students
nd rd
admitted in the 2 year (3 semester) as lateral entry shall be evaluated on the basis their performance, by the faculty co‐
rd th
ordinator for the period of 3 semester to 6 semester only.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 225
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Seventh Semester
Group Paper Code Paper L P Credits
Theory Papers
HS/MS MS‐401 Principles of Entrepreneurship Mindset 2 2
PC DS‐427T Data Science using R 3 3
PC DS‐429T Big Data Analytics 3 3
PC DS‐431T Business Intelligence 3 3
PC DS‐433T Exploratory Data Analytics and Data Visualization 3 3
OAE Open Area Elective Paper (OAE – 2) 4
Practical / Viva Voce
PC DS‐427P Data Science using R Lab 2 1
PC DS‐429P Big Data Analytics Lab 2 1
PC DS‐431P Business Intelligence Lab 2 1
PC DS‐433P Exploratory Data Analytics and Data Visualization Lab 2 1
PC / Project ES‐451 Minor Project** 3
PC / Internship ES‐453 Summer Training (after 6th semester) Report * 1
Total 26

th
*NUES:Comprehensive evaluation of the Summer Training Report – 2 (after 6 Semester) shall be done by the committee
of teachers, constituted by the Academic Programme Committee, out of 100. The training shall be of 4 to 6 weeks duration.
The training can be under the mentorship of a teacher of the institute.

**The student shall be allocated a supervisor / guide for project work at the end 6th semester by the department /
institution, the project shall continue into the 8th semester. In the 7th semester evaluation, the criteria for evaluation shall
be conceptualization of the project work, the background study / literature survey and identification of objectives and
methodology to be followed for project. 40 marks evaluation for the Teachers' Continuous Evaluation / Internal Assessment
shall be done by concerned supervisor while the term end examination of 60 marks shall be conducted by the supervisor
concerned and the external examiner deputed by the Examinations Division. In the absence of the supervisor, the Director
of the Institution / Head of the Department can assign the responsibility of the supervisor (for purpose of examinations) to
any faculty of the Institution / Department.

Eight Semester
Paper
Group Paper L P Credits
Code
Practical / Viva Voce%
ES‐452 Major Project – Dissertation and Viva Voce# 18
PC / Project
ES‐454 Project Progress Evaluation* 2
#
ES‐456 Internship Report and Viva Voce 18
PC / Internship
ES‐458 Internship Progress Evaluation* 2
Total 0 0 20

*NUES: Comprehensive evaluation by the committee of teachers, constituted by the Academic Programme
Committee, out of 100.

%By default every student shall do the project work (ES‐452 and ES‐454). A student shall either be allowed to
do a project work (ES‐452 and ES‐454) or an internship (ES‐456 and ES‐458). The student must apply for
th
approval to do internship before the commencement of the 8 semester to the institute, and only after
approval of Principal / Director of the institute through Training and Placement Officer of the institute, shall
proceed for internship.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 226
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

#Students may be allowed to do internship in this semester in lieu of Major project. The students allowed to
proceed for internship shall be required to maintain a log‐book of activities performed during internship. The
same has to be countersigned by the mentor at the organization where internship is completed.
ES‐452: Evaluation shall be conducted of 40 marks (Teachers’ continuous evaluation / internal assessment) by
the supervisor. And, 60 marks by a bench of the supervisor and the external examiner deputed by Examination
Division (COE), for a total of 100 marks.

ES‐454 / ES‐458: Comprehensive evaluation by the committee of teachers, constituted by the Academic
Programme Committee, out of 100.

ES‐456: Evaluation shall be conducted of 40 marks (Teachers’ continuous evaluation / internal assessment) by
the Training and Placement Officer of the department / institute on the basis of the report submitted by the
student. And, 60 marks by a bench of the Training and Placement Officer of the department / institute and the
external examiner deputed by Examination Division (COE), for a total of 100 marks.

In the absence of the supervisor or the Training and Placement Officer (as the case may be), the Director of the
institute / Head of the Department can assign the responsibility of the supervisor or the Training and Placement
Officer (for purpose of examinations) to any faculty of the department.

Note on Elective Papers: The elective papers shall be allowed to be taken / studied by the students, by the
APC of the department / institute, keeping in view that two papers studied by the student should not have a
substantial overlap. All papers studied by the student should be substantially distinct in content.

Note on Examination of Elective Papers:

(a) Papers with only theory component shall have 25 Marks continuous evaluation by the teacher and 75
Marks term‐end examinations. Both these component marks shall be reflected on the marksheet of the
student.
(b) Papers with only practical component shall have 40 Marks continuous evaluation by the teacher and 60
Marks term‐end examinations. Both these component marks shall be reflected on the marksheet of the
student.

Note on Continuous Evaluation of All Papers:

(a) Papers with only theory component shall have 25 Marks continuous evaluation by the teacher which shall
be evaluated as:
i. Mid‐Term Test* ‐ 15 Marks (after 8 weeks of teaching or as
decided by PCC)
ii. Assignments / Project / Quiz / Case Studies, etc. ‐ 5 Marks
iii. Attendance / Class Participation ‐ 5 Marks
(b) Papers with only practical component shall have 40Marks continuous evaluation by the teacher which shall
be evaluated as:
i. Mid‐Term Test and Viva Voce ‐ 20 Marks (after 8 weeks of teaching or as
decided by PCC)
ii. Practical File ‐ 10 Marks
iii. Attendance / Lab Participation ‐ 10 Marks

* The mid‐term test shall be coordinated by the Programme Coordination Committee.

If a student could not appear for a mid‐term test due to situation beyond the control by the student, a
supplementary test may be arranged towards the end of the semester, in a similar manner to the mid‐term
test for such students. The students must apply for this provision to the department / institution. On
examination of the reason for non‐appearing in the mid‐term test by the Head of the Department / Institute,
and with reason for allowing to appear in the supplementary test to recorded by the Head of the Department
/ Institute, the student may be allowed.
The attendance sheets, the question papers and the award sheets for the continuous evaluation to be
retained by the concerned department / institute for at least 6 months after the declaration of the result by
the Examination Division of the University.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 227
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Open Area Electives

Semester Paper Code OAE – 1 (Choose Any One) L P Credits
6 ES‐304 Real Time Operating Systems 4 4
ES‐306T Embedded System Architecture and Design 3 3
6
ES‐306P Embedded System Architecture and Design Lab 2 1
FSD‐320T Web Development using MEAN Stack 3 3
6
FSD‐320P Web Development using MEAN Stack Lab 2 1
FSD‐322T Web Development using MERN Stack 3 3
6
FSD‐322P Web Development using MERN Stack Lab 2 1
OSD‐330T Programming in Windows Environment 3 3
6
OSD‐330P Programming in Windows Environment Lab 2 1
OSD‐334T Android App Development 3 3
6
OSD‐334P Android App Development Lab 2 1
IPCV‐334T Digital Image Processing 3 3
6
IPCV‐334P Digital Image Processing Lab 2 1
Understanding Human Being, Nature and Existence
6 4 4
OUHV‐338 Comprehensively
6 OUHV‐340 Vision for Humane Society 4 4
SE‐350T Software Measurements, Metrics and Modelling 3 3
6
SE‐350P Software Measurements, Metrics and Modelling Lab 2 1
SE‐352T Service Oriented Architecture 3 3
6
SE‐352P Service Oriented Architecture Lab 2 1
SE‐354T Software Project Management 3 3
6
SE‐354P Software Project Management Lab 2 1
6 MOOCs (Swayam / NPTEL) 4
Semester Paper Code OAE – 2 (Choose Any One) L P Credits
ES‐403T VHDL Programming 3 3
7
ES‐403P VHDL Programming Lab 2 1
ES‐405T Real Time Embedded System Programming 3 3
7
ES‐405P Real Time Embedded System Programming Lab 2 1
FSD‐435T PHP Programming and MySQL 3 3
7
FSD‐435P PHP Programming and MySQL Lab 2 1
MAC‐409T Robotics Engineering 3 3
7
MAC‐409P Robotics Engineering Lab 2 1
OECE‐417T Microprocessors and Interfacing 3 3
7
OECE‐417P Microprocessors and Interfacing Lab 2 1
OECE‐419T Analog and Digital Communications 3 3
7
OECE‐419P Analog and Digital Communications Lab 2 1
OECE‐421T Wireless Sensor Networks 3 3
7
OECE‐421P Wireless Sensor Networks Lab 2 1
OSD‐449T Design Patterns 3 3
7
OSD‐449P Design Patterns Lab 2 1
OSD‐453T Advanced Java Programming 3 3
7
OSD‐453P Advanced Java Programming Lab 2 1
OSD‐455T Programming in Linux Environment 3 3
7
OSD‐455P Programming in Linux Environment Lab 2 1
7 OUHV‐463 Holistic Human Health 4 4
SC‐479T Global Optimization Methods 3 3
7
SC‐479P Global Optimization Methods Lab 2 1
SE‐487T Software Verification, Validation and Testing 3 3
7
SE‐487P Software Verification, Validation and Testing Lab 2 1
7 MOOCs (Swayam / NPTEL) 4

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 228
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Note:
1. Each OAE slot is of 4 credits, if in a particular slot, the paper has no practical component, then it is of 4 credits
(a pure theory paper), otherwise for purpose of examination and conduct of classes, the course is split in two
papers, namely a theory paper of 3 credits and a practical paper of 1 credit. The student has to study for 4
credits per slot of OAE group. This is reflected by suffixing the paper code by T (for Theory component) and P
(for Practical component), if required

2. The Open Area Electives described / enumerated are the one offered by engineering departments. If other
departments, offering minor specialization or elective papers as open area electives to engineering students
(approved by the university Academic Council) are possible at the concerned institution, the same may also be
offered to the engineering students studying in the major disciplines under the aegis of the University School of
Information, Communication and Technology. The APC of the department / intuition shall allow the choice of
such electives, provided they follow the credit framework of the programme of study for open area electives.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 229
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Implementation Rules:

1. The examinations, attendance criteria to appear in examinations, promotion and award of the degree
shall be governed by the Ordinance 11 of the University. The term “major discipline” / “primary discipline”
in this document refers to the discipline in which student is admitted / studies from 3rd semester onwards.
However credits of courses / paper for OAE / EAE groups shall not be considered for the purpose of
promotion from one year of study to the subsequent year of study.
2. Minimum duration of the Bachelor of Technology programme shall be 4 years (N=4 years) (8 semesters)
for the students admitted in the 1st year and 1st semester of the degree programme. Lateral entry students
shall be admitted in the 2nd year and 3rd semester of the degree programme (effectively in the batch
admitted in the first year in the previous academic session and shall be deemed to have been exempted
from the courses / papers of the first year of the degree programme. No exemption certificate shall be
issued in any case.
A specific lateral entry students’ minimum duration shall be the same as the minimum duration for the
batch in which he/she is admitted as a lateral entry student in the 2nd year.
3. Maximum duration of the Bachelor of Technology programme shall be 6 years (N+2 years). After
completion of N+2 years of study, if the student has appeared in the papers of all the semesters upto 8th
semester, then a maximum extension of 1 year may be given to the student for completing the
requirements of the degree if and only if the number of credits already earned by the student is atleast 150
(for lateral entry students it shall be at least 102 credits) from the (non‐honours components). Otherwise,
the admission of the student shall stand cancelled. After the period of allowed study, the admission of the
student shall be cancelled.
A specific lateral entry students’ maximum duration shall be the same as the minimum duration for the
batch in which he/she is admitted as a lateral entry student in the 2nd year.
4. The degree shall be awarded only after the fulfilment of all requirements of the Scheme and Syllabus of
Examinations and the applicable Ordinance.
5. (a) The students shall undergo the following group of Courses / Papers as enumerated in the scheme (For
the students admitted in the First Year / First Semester).

Semester (Credits) Total Mandatory

Group
I & II III IV V VI VII VIII Credits Credits

BS 24 5 29 14

HS/MS 6 2 2 2 6 2 20 10

ES 20 5 25 15

PC 19 19 24 16 20 20 118 104

OAE 4 4 8 4

Total 50 26 26 26 26 26 20 200 147

TABLE 1: Distribution of Credits (Project / Internship credits are 25 out the 118 credits for Programme
Core (PC) credits, while extra‐curricular activities credits are 2 out of 20 credits for Humanities /
Management / Social Science Group (HS/MS)) . This table is for students admitted in the First Year / First
Semester of the Degree Programme.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 230
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

(b) The students admitted as Lateral Entry shall undergo the following group of Courses / Papers as
enumerated in the scheme.

Semester (Credits) Total Mandatory

Group
III IV V VI VII VIII Credits Credits

BS 5 5 0

HS/MS 2 2 2 6 2 14 7

ES 5 5 0

PC 19 19 24 16 20 20 118 104

OAE 4 4 8 4

Total 26 26 26 26 26 20 150 115

TABLE 2: Distribution of Credits (Project / Internship credits are 25 out the 118 credits for Programme
Core (PC) credits, while extra‐curricular activities credits are 2 out of 14 credits for Humanities /
Management / Social Science Group (HS/MS)) This table is for students admitted as Lateral Entry
Students in the Second Year / Third Semester of the Degree Programme.

6. Mandatory Credits specify the number of credits from each subject group to be mandatorily acquired by
the student for the award of the degree,for students admitted as students in the 1st year and 1st semester
of the degree programme. While for students admitted as lateral entry in the 2nd year and 3rd semester
the Mandatory Credits value is 115, and specify the number of credits from each subject group to be
mandatorily acquired by the student for the award of the degree (Table 2). See clause 11 and 12 also.
7. Some of the papers are droppable in the sense that the student may qualify for the award of the degree
even when the student has not cleared / passed some of the papers of these group. However, the student
has to earn the minimum credits for the programme of study as specified. See clause 11 and 12 also.
8. The students may take 2 subjects from OAE group. The open electives of the OAE group of courses may
also be taken through SWAYAM / NPTEL MOOCs platform. The student desirous of doing a MOOC based
course among the OAE group must seek approval of the APC of the institute for the same before the
commencement of the semester. The APC shall allow the MOOC based OAE option to the student if and
only if the MOOC subject / course being considered for the student is being offered in line with the
Academic Calendar applicable. The student shall submit the successful completion certificate with marks to
the institution for onwards transfer to the Examination Division. The Examinations Division shall take these
marks on record for incorporation in the result of the appropriate semester. These marks / grades of these
courses shall be used for calculation of the SGPA/CGPA of the student concerned by the examination
division of the University. The degree to the student on fulfilment of other requirements for such cases
shall be through clause 12.a. or 12.b.
These MOOC courses taken by the students, if allowed by the APC of the institute shall be of 4 credits or
more collectively to be against or for one paper slot in the scheme, through MOOCs, though the marks
shall be shown individually. That is in one paper slot in the scheme wherever a MOOC course is allowed,
the student may register for more than one paper to aggregate 4 credits or more. If the credits of these
MOOC Courses, allowed to a student is more than 4, then the maximum credit for the programme shall
be amended accordingly for the particular student. Also, in a particular semester, a student may take
more than one MOOC course with the approval of the APC to meet the credit requirements of OAE for the
semester. The cost of taking the MOOC course is to be borne by the concerned student. The results of the
MOOC courses shall be declared separately by the Examination Division from the result for the papers
conducted by the examination division of the University.
No minor specialization shall be offered / awarded.
9. To earn an Honours degree, the student may enrol for 20 credits or more through SWAYAM / NPTEL
MOOCs platform. This point has to be read together with other points specially point 13 and 14. The

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 231
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

acquisition of the credits should be completed before the 15th of the July of the Admission Year plus 4
years. That is, if a student is admitted in the year X, then these credits must be acquired through MOOCs by
15th July of the year (X+4), no extra duration or time shall be allocated, this means, the student must
submit the result of such papers on or before 15th July of the Admission Year plus 4 years.
Honours in the degree shall be awarded if and only if at least 20 credits are acquired through MOOCs. To
obtain Honours in the programme, the student must apply to the institution about the same before the
commencement of the 5th semester. The specific courses through MOOCs shall be registered by the
student only after approval by the Academic Programme Committee (APC) of the Institute. The APC shall
approve the course if it is not already studied by the student or the student shall not study it in future and
adds value to the major area of specialization (which is the degree). The papers for which the student
desires to appear for Honours through MOOCs, all papers results shall be submitted by the student to the
Institute for onwards transfer to Examination Division of the University, to be taken on record of the
University. The results of these papers shall be a part of the records of the examinations of the students.
The records shall be submitted by the student to the Institute, then transferred to the Examination
Division, shall be notified by the Examination Division of the University, and a separate marksheet shall be
issued by the Examination Division. The cost of taking the MOOC course is to be borne by the concerned
student. Such courses shall be reflected as additional courses / papers for the student.
If a student acquires less than 20 credits through MOOCs, following the mechanism specified, then also
the results of these papers shall be taken on record as specified above, though no Honours degree shall
be awarded.
The papers through MOOCs for Honours degree shall not be a part of the set of the papers over which the
SGPA / CGPA of the student shall be calculated.
The papers through MOOCs for Honours degree shall be additional papers studied by the students and are
to be taken into account only for award of Honours in the degree programme, if 20 credits are earned
through MOOCs as approved by APC, by a student. See Clause 13 also.
10. Maximum Credits is at least 200 (Table 1) for students admitted in the 1st year and 1st semester, these are
the credits for which the student shall have to study for the non‐Honours component of the curriculum.
And, for lateral entry students admitted in the 2nd year and 3rd semester of the degree programme, the
maximum credit required to be studied is at least 150 (Table 2). See clause 8 also.
The student has to appear in the examinations for these credits in all components of evaluation as
specified in the scheme of studies.
11. Minimum Credits required to be earned is atleast 180 (out of the 200 non Honours papers credits, see
clause 10 also) for students admitted in the 1st year and 1st semester. And, for lateral entry students
admitted in the 2nd year and 3rd semester of the degree programme, the minimum credit required to be
earned Is at least 135 (out of the 150 non Honours papers credits, see clause 10 also). See clause 6 also.
12. The following degree route can be taken by a student (also refer point 13):
a. The students shall be awarded the degree without any minor specialization under the following
conditions:
i. The student has earned the mandatory credits as defined in Table 1 or Table 2 (as applicable) and
clause 6.
ii. In addition, the total credits (including the above specified credits) earned by the student is atleast
as specified in clause 11.
The degree nomenclature of the degree shall be as: “Bachelor of Technology in Computer Science and
Engineering (Data Science)”; if criteria / point 9 is not satisfied for Honours. Otherwise, if criteria /
point 9 is met, then the degrees shall be an Honours degree and the nomenclature shall be as:
“Bachelor of Technology in Computer Science and Engineering (Data Science) (Honours)”, if in
addition to point 12.b.i and 12.b.ii, the student fulfils the criteria for Honours as specified at point 9.
b. If the student does not fulfil any of the above criterions (point 12.a, or 12.b), if the student earns at
least the minimum credits specified in clause 11 (disregarding the mandatory credits clause of Table 1

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 232
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

or Table 2 (as applicable) and Clause 6), then the student shall be award the degree as “Bachelor of
Technology in Computer Science and Engineering (Data Science)”. Such students shall not be eligible
for the award of an Honours degree. Though, if credits are accumulated through MOOCs as per clause
9, the same shall be reflected in the marksheets of the students.
13. The Honours degree shall only be awarded if the CGPA of the student is above or equal to 7.5 in addition
to fulfilment of criteria / point 10 and 13 above and the degree is awarded after the immediate
completion of the 4th year of the batch from the year of admission. No Honours shall be conferred if the
degree requirements are not completed in the minimum duration.
14. Pass marks in every paper shall be 40.
15. Grading System shall be as per Ordinance 11 of the University.
16. The institution shall offer atleast two elective groups out of the open area for students of each major
discipline. The institute shall decide the group(s) and/or individual papers to be offered as electives based
on the availability of infrastructure and faculty. From the groups / papers offered by the institute, an
elective paper / group shall be taught if and only if the number of students in a paper is at‐least 20 or at‐
least 1/3 of the students of a major discipline for which the paper / group is to be offered. The APC of the
department / institute may define a maximum number of students allowed to register for a paper as an
open area elective.
17. Teachers of the other department(s), as and when deputed by their department, for teaching the students
enrolled in programmes offered by the department offering the programme shall be a part of the
Academic Programme Committee of the discipline. Such teachers, for all academic matters, including
teaching, teachers’ continuous evaluation, term end examinations etc. shall be governed by the decisions
of the APC of department offering the programme of study. Similarly, the guest faculty, the visiting faculty
and the Contract / Ad Hoc faculty as and when deputed to teach students of a particular department shall
form a part of APC of the department.
18. The Paper IDs will be generated / issued / assigned by the Examination Division of the University.

19. The medium of instructions shall be English.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 233
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Bachelor of Technology in Computer Science and Engineering

(Internet of Things) (CSE-IoT)
2nd Year Onward Scheme and implementation guideline

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 234
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Third Semester
Paper
Group Paper L P Credits
Code
Theory Papers
ES ES‐201 Computational Methods 4 4
HS/MS HS‐203 Indian Knowledge System* 2 2
PC CIC‐205 Discrete Mathematics 4 4
PC ECC‐207 Digital Logic and Computer Design 4 4
PC CIC‐209 Data Structures 4 4
PC CIC‐211 Object‐Oriented Programming using C++ 4 4
Practical / Viva Voce
ES ES‐251 Computational Methods Lab 2 1
PC ECC‐253 Digital Logic and Computer Design Lab 2 1
PC CIC‐255 Data Structures Lab 2 1
PC CIC‐257 Object‐Oriented Programming using C++ Lab 2 1
Total 22 8 26

*NUES:All examinations to be conducted by the concerned teacher as specified in the detailed syllabus of the paper.

Fourth Semester
Paper
Group Paper L P Credits
Code
Theory Papers
BS BS‐202 Probability, Statistics and Linear Programming 4 4
HS/MS HS‐204 Technical Writing* 2 2
PC CIC‐206 Theory of Computation 4 4
PC EEC‐208 Circuits and Systems 4 4
PC CIC‐210 Database Management Systems 4 4
PC CIC‐212 Programming in Java 4 4
Practical / Viva Voce
BS BS‐252 Probability, Statistics and Linear Programming Lab 2 1
PC EEC‐254 Circuits and Systems Lab 2 1
PC CIC‐256 Database Management Systems Lab 2 1
PC CIC‐258 Programming in Java Lab 2 1
Total 22 8 26

*NUES:All examinations to be conducted by the concerned teacher as specified in the detailed syllabus of the paper.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 235
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Fifth Semester
Paper
Group Paper L P Credits
Code
Theory Papers
HS/MS HS‐301 Economics for Engineers 2 2
PC CIC‐303 Compiler Design 3 3
PC CIC‐305 Operating Systems 4 4
PC CIC‐307 Computer Networks 4 4
PC CIC‐309 Software Engineering 3 3
PC CIC‐311 Design and Analysis of Algorithm 4 4
Practical / Viva Voce
PC CIC‐351 Compiler Design Lab 2 1
PC CIC‐353 Operating Systems Lab 2 1
PC CIC‐355 Computer Networks Lab 2 1
PC CIC‐357 Software Engineering Lab 2 1
PC CIC‐359 Design and Analysis of Algorithm Lab 2 1
PC / Internship ES‐361 Summer Training Report ‐ 1 * 1
Total 20 10 26

*NUES:Comprehensive evaluation of the Summer Training Report – 1 (after 4th Semester) shall be doneby the committee
of teachers, constituted by the Academic Programme Committee, out of 100. The training shall be of 4 to 6 weeks duration.
The training can be under the mentorship of a teacher of the institute.

Sixth Semester
Group Paper Code Paper L P Credits
Theory Papers
HS/MS MS‐302 Principles of Management for Engineers 3 3
HS/MS HS‐304 Universal Human Values* 1 1
PC IOT‐320T Programming in Python 3 3
PC IOT‐324T Introduction to Internet of Things 3 3
PC IOT‐326T Introduction to Sensors and Transducers 3 3
PC IOT‐328T Wireless Sensor Networks 3 3
OAE Open Area Elective Paper (OAE – 1) 4
Practical / Viva Voce
PC IOT‐320P Programming in Python Lab 2 1
PC IOT‐324P Introduction to Internet of Things Lab 2 1
PC IOT‐326P Introduction to Sensors and Transducers Lab 2 1
PC IOT‐328P Wireless Sensor Networks Lab 2 1
NSS / NCC / Cultural Clubs / Technical Society / Technical
HS/MS HS‐352 2
Club*
Total 26

*NUES:All examinations to be conducted by the concerned teacher as specified in the detailed syllabus of the paper.

**NUES: Comprehensive evaluation of the students by the concerned coordinator of NCC / NSS / Cultural Clubs / Technical
Society / Technical Clubs, out of 100 as per the evaluation schemes worked out by these activity societies, organizations; the
faculty co‐ordinators shall be responsible for the evaluation of the same. These activities shall start from the 1st semester
and the evaluation shall be conducted at the end of the 6th semester for students admitted in the first semester. Students
nd rd
admitted in the 2 year (3 semester) as lateral entry shall be evaluated on the basis their performance, by the faculty co‐
rd th
ordinator for the period of 3 semester to 6 semester only.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 236
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Seventh Semester
Group Paper Code Paper L P Credits
Theory Papers
HS/MS MS‐401 Principles of Entrepreneurship Mindset 2 2
PC IOT‐441T IoT with Arduino, ESP and Raspberry Pi 3 3
PC IOT‐443T Design of Smart Systems 3 3
PC IOT‐447T Internet of Things Frameworks 3 3
PC IOT‐449T Privacy and Security issues in IoT 4 4
OAE Open Area Elective Paper (OAE – 2) 4
Practical / Viva Voce
PC IOT‐441P IoT with Arduino, ESP and Raspberry Pi Lab 2 1
PC IOT‐443P Design of Smart Systems Lab 2 1
PC IOT‐447P Internet of Things Frameworks Lab 2 1
PC / Project ES‐451 Minor Project** 3
PC / Internship ES‐453 Summer Training (after 6th semester) Report * 1
Total 26

*NUES:Comprehensive evaluation of the Summer Training Report – 2 (after 6th Semester) shall be done by the committee
of teachers, constituted by the Academic Programme Committee, out of 100. The training shall be of 4 to 6 weeks duration.
The training can be under the mentorship of a teacher of the institute.

**The student shall be allocated a supervisor / guide for project work at the end 6th semester by the department /
institution, the project shall continue into the 8th semester. In the 7th semester evaluation, the criteria for evaluation shall
be conceptualization of the project work, the background study / literature survey and identification of objectives and
methodology to be followed for project. 40 marks evaluation for the Teachers' Continuous Evaluation / Internal Assessment
shall be done by concerned supervisor while the term end examination of 60 marks shall be conducted by the supervisor
concerned and the external examiner deputed by the Examinations Division. In the absence of the supervisor, the Director
of the Institution / Head of the Department can assign the responsibility of the supervisor (for purpose of examinations) to
any faculty of the Institution / Department.

Eight Semester
Paper
Group Paper L P Credits
Code
Practical / Viva Voce%
ES‐452 Major Project – Dissertation and Viva Voce# 18
PC / Project
ES‐454 Project Progress Evaluation* 2
ES‐456 Internship Report and Viva Voce# 18
PC / Internship
ES‐458 Internship Progress Evaluation* 2
Total 0 0 20

*NUES: Comprehensive evaluation by the committee of teachers, constituted by the Academic Programme
Committee, out of 100.

%By default every student shall do the project work (ES‐452 and ES‐454). A student shall either be allowed to
do a project work (ES‐452 and ES‐454) or an internship (ES‐456 and ES‐458). The student must apply for
approval to do internship before the commencement of the 8th semester to the institute, and only after
approval of Principal / Director of the institute through Training and Placement Officer of the institute, shall
proceed for internship.

#Students may be allowed to do internship in this semester in lieu of Major project. The students allowed to
proceed for internship shall be required to maintain a log‐book of activities performed during internship. The
same has to be countersigned by the mentor at the organization where internship is completed.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 237
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

ES‐452: Evaluation shall be conducted of 40 marks (Teachers’ continuous evaluation / internal assessment) by
the supervisor. And, 60 marks by a bench of the supervisor and the external examiner deputed by Examination
Division (COE), for a total of 100 marks.

ES‐454 / ES‐458: Comprehensive evaluation by the committee of teachers, constituted by the Academic
Programme Committee, out of 100.

ES‐456: Evaluation shall be conducted of 40 marks (Teachers’ continuous evaluation / internal assessment) by
the Training and Placement Officer of the department / institute on the basis of the report submitted by the
student. And, 60 marks by a bench of the Training and Placement Officer of the department / institute and the
external examiner deputed by Examination Division (COE), for a total of 100 marks.

In the absence of the supervisor or the Training and Placement Officer (as the case may be), the Director of the
institute / Head of the Department can assign the responsibility of the supervisor or the Training and Placement
Officer (for purpose of examinations) to any faculty of the department.

Note on Elective Papers: The elective papers shall be allowed to be taken / studied by the students, by the
APC of the department / institute, keeping in view that two papers studied by the student should not have a
substantial overlap. All papers studied by the student should be substantially distinct in content.

Note on Examination of Elective Papers:

(a) Papers with only theory component shall have 25 Marks continuous evaluation by the teacher and 75
Marks term‐end examinations. Both these component marks shall be reflected on the marksheet of the
student.
(b) Papers with only practical component shall have 40 Marks continuous evaluation by the teacher and 60
Marks term‐end examinations. Both these component marks shall be reflected on the marksheet of the
student.

Note on Continuous Evaluation of All Papers:

(a) Papers with only theory component shall have 25 Marks continuous evaluation by the teacher which shall
be evaluated as:
i. Mid‐Term Test* ‐ 15 Marks (after 8 weeks of teaching or as
decided by PCC)
ii. Assignments / Project / Quiz / Case Studies, etc. ‐ 5 Marks
iii. Attendance / Class Participation ‐ 5 Marks
(b) Papers with only practical component shall have 40Marks continuous evaluation by the teacher which shall
be evaluated as:
i. Mid‐Term Test and Viva Voce ‐ 20 Marks (after 8 weeks of teaching or as
decided by PCC)
ii. Practical File ‐ 10 Marks
iii. Attendance / Lab Participation ‐ 10 Marks

* The mid‐term test shall be coordinated by the Programme Coordination Committee.

If a student could not appear for a mid‐term test due to situation beyond the control by the student, a
supplementary test may be arranged towards the end of the semester, in a similar manner to the mid‐term
test for such students. The students must apply for this provision to the department / institution. On
examination of the reason for non‐appearing in the mid‐term test by the Head of the Department / Institute,
and with reason for allowing to appear in the supplementary test to recorded by the Head of the Department
/ Institute, the student may be allowed.

The attendance sheets, the question papers and the award sheets for the continuous evaluation to be
retained by the concerned department / institute for at least 6 months after the declaration of the result by
the Examination Division of the University.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 238
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Open Area Electives

Semester Paper Code OAE – 1 (Choose Any One) L P Credits
6 ES‐304 Real Time Operating Systems 4 4
ES‐306T Embedded System Architecture and Design 3 3
6
ES‐306P Embedded System Architecture and Design Lab 2 1
FSD‐320T Web Development using MEAN Stack 3 3
6
FSD‐320P Web Development using MEAN Stack Lab 2 1
FSD‐322T Web Development using MERN Stack 3 3
6
FSD‐322P Web Development using MERN Stack Lab 2 1
OSD‐330T Programming in Windows Environment 3 3
6
OSD‐330P Programming in Windows Environment Lab 2 1
OSD‐334T Android App Development 3 3
6
OSD‐334P Android App Development Lab 2 1
IPCV‐334T Digital Image Processing 3 3
6
IPCV‐334P Digital Image Processing Lab 2 1
Understanding Human Being, Nature and Existence
6 4 4
OUHV‐338 Comprehensively
6 OUHV‐340 Vision for Humane Society 4 4
SE‐350T Software Measurements, Metrics and Modelling 3 3
6
SE‐350P Software Measurements, Metrics and Modelling Lab 2 1
SE‐352T Service Oriented Architecture 3 3
6
SE‐352P Service Oriented Architecture Lab 2 1
SE‐354T Software Project Management 3 3
6
SE‐354P Software Project Management Lab 2 1
6 MOOCs (Swayam / NPTEL) 4
Semester Paper Code OAE – 2 (Choose Any One) L P Credits
ES‐403T VHDL Programming 3 3
7
ES‐403P VHDL Programming Lab 2 1
ES‐405T Real Time Embedded System Programming 3 3
7
ES‐405P Real Time Embedded System Programming Lab 2 1
FSD‐435T PHP Programming and MySQL 3 3
7
FSD‐435P PHP Programming and MySQL Lab 2 1
MAC‐409T Robotics Engineering 3 3
7
MAC‐409P Robotics Engineering Lab 2 1
OECE‐417T Microprocessors and Interfacing 3 3
7
OECE‐417P Microprocessors and Interfacing Lab 2 1
OECE‐419T Analog and Digital Communications 3 3
7
OECE‐419P Analog and Digital Communications Lab 2 1
OECE‐421T Wireless Sensor Networks 3 3
7
OECE‐421P Wireless Sensor Networks Lab 2 1
OSD‐449T Design Patterns 3 3
7
OSD‐449P Design Patterns Lab 2 1
OSD‐453T Advanced Java Programming 3 3
7
OSD‐453P Advanced Java Programming Lab 2 1
OSD‐455T Programming in Linux Environment 3 3
7
OSD‐455P Programming in Linux Environment Lab 2 1
7 OUHV‐463 Holistic Human Health 4 4
SC‐479T Global Optimization Methods 3 3
7
SC‐479P Global Optimization Methods Lab 2 1
SE‐487T Software Verification, Validation and Testing 3 3
7
SE‐487P Software Verification, Validation and Testing Lab 2 1
7 MOOCs (Swayam / NPTEL) 4

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 239
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Note:
1. Each OAE slot is of 4 credits, if in a particular slot, the paper has no practical component, then it is of 4 credits
(a pure theory paper), otherwise for purpose of examination and conduct of classes, the course is split in two
papers, namely a theory paper of 3 credits and a practical paper of 1 credit. The student has to study for 4
credits per slot of OAE group. This is reflected by suffixing the paper code by T (for Theory component) and P
(for Practical component), if required

2. The Open Area Electives described / enumerated are the one offered by engineering departments. If other
departments, offering minor specialization or elective papers as open area electives to engineering students
(approved by the university Academic Council) are possible at the concerned institution, the same may also be
offered to the engineering students studying in the major disciplines under the aegis of the University School of
Information, Communication and Technology. The APC of the department / intuition shall allow the choice of
such electives, provided they follow the credit framework of the programme of study for open area electives.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 240
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Implementation Rules:

1. The examinations, attendance criteria to appear in examinations, promotion and award of the degree
shall be governed by the Ordinance 11 of the University. The term “major discipline” / “primary discipline”
in this document refers to the discipline in which student is admitted / studies from 3rd semester onwards.
However credits of courses / paper for OAE / EAE groups shall not be considered for the purpose of
promotion from one year of study to the subsequent year of study.
2. Minimum duration of the Bachelor of Technology programme shall be 4 years (N=4 years) (8 semesters)
for the students admitted in the 1st year and 1st semester of the degree programme. Lateral entry students
shall be admitted in the 2nd year and 3rd semester of the degree programme (effectively in the batch
admitted in the first year in the previous academic session and shall be deemed to have been exempted
from the courses / papers of the first year of the degree programme. No exemption certificate shall be
issued in any case.
A specific lateral entry students’ minimum duration shall be the same as the minimum duration for the
batch in which he/she is admitted as a lateral entry student in the 2nd year.
3. Maximum duration of the Bachelor of Technology programme shall be 6 years (N+2 years). After
completion of N+2 years of study, if the student has appeared in the papers of all the semesters upto 8th
semester, then a maximum extension of 1 year may be given to the student for completing the
requirements of the degree if and only if the number of credits already earned by the student is atleast 150
(for lateral entry students it shall be at least 102 credits) from the (non‐honours components). Otherwise,
the admission of the student shall stand cancelled. After the period of allowed study, the admission of the
student shall be cancelled.
A specific lateral entry students’ maximum duration shall be the same as the minimum duration for the
batch in which he/she is admitted as a lateral entry student in the 2nd year.
4. The degree shall be awarded only after the fulfilment of all requirements of the Scheme and Syllabus of
Examinations and the applicable Ordinance.
5. (a) The students shall undergo the following group of Courses / Papers as enumerated in the scheme (For
the students admitted in the First Year / First Semester).

Semester (Credits) Total Mandatory

Group
I & II III IV V VI VII VIII Credits Credits

BS 24 5 29 14

HS/MS 6 2 2 2 6 2 20 10

ES 20 5 25 15

PC 19 19 24 16 20 20 118 104

OAE 4 4 8 4

Total 50 26 26 26 26 26 20 200 147

TABLE 1: Distribution of Credits (Project / Internship credits are 25 out the 118 credits for Programme
Core (PC) credits, while extra‐curricular activities credits are 2 out of 20 credits for Humanities /
Management / Social Science Group (HS/MS)) . This table is for students admitted in the First Year / First
Semester of the Degree Programme.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 241
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

(b) The students admitted as Lateral Entry shall undergo the following group of Courses / Papers as
enumerated in the scheme.

Semester (Credits) Total Mandatory

Group
III IV V VI VII VIII Credits Credits

BS 5 5 0

HS/MS 2 2 2 6 2 14 7

ES 5 5 0

PC 19 19 24 16 20 20 118 104

OAE 4 4 8 4

Total 26 26 26 26 26 20 150 115

TABLE 2: Distribution of Credits (Project / Internship credits are 25 out the 118 credits for Programme
Core (PC) credits, while extra‐curricular activities credits are 2 out of 14 credits for Humanities /
Management / Social Science Group (HS/MS)) This table is for students admitted as Lateral Entry
Students in the Second Year / Third Semester of the Degree Programme.

6. Mandatory Credits specify the number of credits from each subject group to be mandatorily acquired by
the student for the award of the degree,for students admitted as students in the 1st year and 1st semester
of the degree programme. While for students admitted as lateral entry in the 2nd year and 3rd semester
the Mandatory Credits value is 115, and specify the number of credits from each subject group to be
mandatorily acquired by the student for the award of the degree (Table 2). See clause 11 and 12 also.
7. Some of the papers are droppable in the sense that the student may qualify for the award of the degree
even when the student has not cleared / passed some of the papers of these group. However, the student
has to earn the minimum credits for the programme of study as specified. See clause 11 and 12 also.
8. The students may take 2 subjects from OAE group. The open electives of the OAE group of courses may
also be taken through SWAYAM / NPTEL MOOCs platform. The student desirous of doing a MOOC based
course among the OAE group must seek approval of the APC of the institute for the same before the
commencement of the semester. The APC shall allow the MOOC based OAE option to the student if and
only if the MOOC subject / course being considered for the student is being offered in line with the
Academic Calendar applicable. The student shall submit the successful completion certificate with marks to
the institution for onwards transfer to the Examination Division. The Examinations Division shall take these
marks on record for incorporation in the result of the appropriate semester. These marks / grades of these
courses shall be used for calculation of the SGPA/CGPA of the student concerned by the examination
division of the University. The degree to the student on fulfilment of other requirements for such cases
shall be through clause 12.a. or 12.b.
These MOOC courses taken by the students, if allowed by the APC of the institute shall be of 4 credits or
more collectively to be against or for one paper slot in the scheme, through MOOCs, though the marks
shall be shown individually. That is in one paper slot in the scheme wherever a MOOC course is allowed,
the student may register for more than one paper to aggregate 4 credits or more. If the credits of these
MOOC Courses, allowed to a student is more than 4, then the maximum credit for the programme shall
be amended accordingly for the particular student. Also, in a particular semester, a student may take
more than one MOOC course with the approval of the APC to meet the credit requirements of OAE for the
semester. The cost of taking the MOOC course is to be borne by the concerned student. The results of the
MOOC courses shall be declared separately by the Examination Division from the result for the papers
conducted by the examination division of the University.
No minor specialization shall be offered / awarded.
9. To earn an Honours degree, the student may enrol for 20 credits or more through SWAYAM / NPTEL
MOOCs platform. This point has to be read together with other points specially point 13 and 14. The

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 242
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

acquisition of the credits should be completed before the 15th of the July of the Admission Year plus 4
years. That is, if a student is admitted in the year X, then these credits must be acquired through MOOCs by
15th July of the year (X+4), no extra duration or time shall be allocated, this means, the student must
submit the result of such papers on or before 15th July of the Admission Year plus 4 years.
Honours in the degree shall be awarded if and only if at least 20 credits are acquired through MOOCs. To
obtain Honours in the programme, the student must apply to the institution about the same before the
commencement of the 5th semester. The specific courses through MOOCs shall be registered by the
student only after approval by the Academic Programme Committee (APC) of the Institute. The APC shall
approve the course if it is not already studied by the student or the student shall not study it in future and
adds value to the major area of specialization (which is the degree). The papers for which the student
desires to appear for Honours through MOOCs, all papers results shall be submitted by the student to the
Institute for onwards transfer to Examination Division of the University, to be taken on record of the
University. The results of these papers shall be a part of the records of the examinations of the students.
The records shall be submitted by the student to the Institute, then transferred to the Examination
Division, shall be notified by the Examination Division of the University, and a separate marksheet shall be
issued by the Examination Division. The cost of taking the MOOC course is to be borne by the concerned
student. Such courses shall be reflected as additional courses / papers for the student.
If a student acquires less than 20 credits through MOOCs, following the mechanism specified, then also
the results of these papers shall be taken on record as specified above, though no Honours degree shall
be awarded.
The papers through MOOCs for Honours degree shall not be a part of the set of the papers over which the
SGPA / CGPA of the student shall be calculated.
The papers through MOOCs for Honours degree shall be additional papers studied by the students and are
to be taken into account only for award of Honours in the degree programme, if 20 credits are earned
through MOOCs as approved by APC, by a student. See Clause 13 also.
10. Maximum Credits is at least 200 (Table 1) for students admitted in the 1st year and 1st semester, these are
the credits for which the student shall have to study for the non‐Honours component of the curriculum.
And, for lateral entry students admitted in the 2nd year and 3rd semester of the degree programme, the
maximum credit required to be studied is at least 150 (Table 2). See clause 8 also.
The student has to appear in the examinations for these credits in all components of evaluation as
specified in the scheme of studies.
11. Minimum Credits required to be earned is atleast 180 (out of the 200 non Honours papers credits, see
clause 10 also) for students admitted in the 1st year and 1st semester. And, for lateral entry students
admitted in the 2nd year and 3rd semester of the degree programme, the minimum credit required to be
earned Is at least 135 (out of the 150 non Honours papers credits, see clause 10 also). See clause 6 also.
12. The following degree route can be taken by a student (also refer point 13):
a. The students shall be awarded the degree without any minor specialization under the following
conditions:
i. The student has earned the mandatory credits as defined in Table 1 or Table 2 (as applicable) and
clause 6.
ii. In addition, the total credits (including the above specified credits) earned by the student is atleast
as specified in clause 11.
The degree nomenclature of the degree shall be as: “Bachelor of Technology in Computer Science and
Engineering (Internet of Things)”; if criteria / point 9 is not satisfied for Honours. Otherwise, if criteria
/ point 9 is met, then the degrees shall be an Honours degree and the nomenclature shall be as:
“Bachelor of Technology in Computer Science and Engineering (Internet of Things) (Honours)”, if in
addition to point 12.b.i and 12.b.ii, the student fulfils the criteria for Honours as specified at point 9.
b. If the student does not fulfil any of the above criterions (point 12.a, or 12.b), if the student earns at
least the minimum credits specified in clause 11 (disregarding the mandatory credits clause of Table 1

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 243
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

or Table 2 (as applicable) and Clause 6), then the student shall be award the degree as “Bachelor of
Technology in Computer Science and Engineering (Internet of Things)”. Such students shall not be
eligible for the award of an Honours degree. Though, if credits are accumulated through MOOCs as per
clause 9, the same shall be reflected in the marksheets of the students.
13. The Honours degree shall only be awarded if the CGPA of the student is above or equal to 7.5 in addition
to fulfilment of criteria / point 10 and 13 above and the degree is awarded after the immediate
completion of the 4th year of the batch from the year of admission. No Honours shall be conferred if the
degree requirements are not completed in the minimum duration.
14. Pass marks in every paper shall be 40.
15. Grading System shall be as per Ordinance 11 of the University.
16. The institution shall offer atleast two elective groups out of the open area for students of each major
discipline. The institute shall decide the group(s) and/or individual papers to be offered as electives based
on the availability of infrastructure and faculty. From the groups / papers offered by the institute, an
elective paper / group shall be taught if and only if the number of students in a paper is at‐least 20 or at‐
least 1/3 of the students of a major discipline for which the paper / group is to be offered. The APC of the
department / institute may define a maximum number of students allowed to register for a paper as an
open area elective.
17. Teachers of the other department(s), as and when deputed by their department, for teaching the students
enrolled in programmes offered by the department offering the programme shall be a part of the
Academic Programme Committee of the discipline. Such teachers, for all academic matters, including
teaching, teachers’ continuous evaluation, term end examinations etc. shall be governed by the decisions
of the APC of department offering the programme of study. Similarly, the guest faculty, the visiting faculty
and the Contract / Ad Hoc faculty as and when deputed to teach students of a particular department shall
form a part of APC of the department.
18. The Paper IDs will be generated / issued / assigned by the Examination Division of the University.

19. The medium of instructions shall be English.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 244
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Bachelor of Technology in Computer Science and Engineering

(Internet of Things and Cyber Security including Block Chain
Technology) (CSE-ICB)
2nd Year Onward Scheme and implementation guideline

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 245
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Third Semester
Paper
Group Paper L P Credits
Code
Theory Papers
ES ES‐201 Computational Methods 4 4
HS/MS HS‐203 Indian Knowledge System* 2 2
PC CIC‐205 Discrete Mathematics 4 4
PC ECC‐207 Digital Logic and Computer Design 4 4
PC CIC‐209 Data Structures 4 4
PC CIC‐211 Object‐Oriented Programming using C++ 4 4
Practical / Viva Voce
ES ES‐251 Computational Methods Lab 2 1
PC ECC‐253 Digital Logic and Computer Design Lab 2 1
PC CIC‐255 Data Structures Lab 2 1
PC CIC‐257 Object‐Oriented Programming using C++ Lab 2 1
Total 22 8 26

*NUES:All examinations to be conducted by the concerned teacher as specified in the detailed syllabus of the paper.

Fourth Semester
Paper
Group Paper L P Credits
Code
Theory Papers
BS BS‐202 Probability, Statistics and Linear Programming 4 4
HS/MS HS‐204 Technical Writing* 2 2
PC CIC‐206 Theory of Computation 4 4
PC EEC‐208 Circuits and Systems 4 4
PC CIC‐210 Database Management Systems 4 4
PC CIC‐212 Programming in Java 4 4
Practical / Viva Voce
BS BS‐252 Probability, Statistics and Linear Programming Lab 2 1
PC EEC‐254 Circuits and Systems Lab 2 1
PC CIC‐256 Database Management Systems Lab 2 1
PC CIC‐258 Programming in Java Lab 2 1
Total 22 8 26

*NUES:All examinations to be conducted by the concerned teacher as specified in the detailed syllabus of the paper.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 246
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Fifth Semester
Paper
Group Paper L P Credits
Code
Theory Papers
HS/MS HS‐301 Economics for Engineers 2 2
PC CIC‐303 Compiler Design 3 3
PC CIC‐305 Operating Systems 4 4
PC CIC‐307 Computer Networks 4 4
PC CIC‐309 Software Engineering 3 3
PC CIC‐311 Design and Analysis of Algorithm 4 4
Practical / Viva Voce
PC CIC‐351 Compiler Design Lab 2 1
PC CIC‐353 Operating Systems Lab 2 1
PC CIC‐355 Computer Networks Lab 2 1
PC CIC‐357 Software Engineering Lab 2 1
PC CIC‐359 Design and Analysis of Algorithm Lab 2 1
PC / Internship ES‐361 Summer Training Report ‐ 1 * 1
Total 20 10 26

*NUES:Comprehensive evaluation of the Summer Training Report – 1 (after 4th Semester) shall be doneby the committee
of teachers, constituted by the Academic Programme Committee, out of 100. The training shall be of 4 to 6 weeks duration.
The training can be under the mentorship of a teacher of the institute.

Sixth Semester
Group Paper Code Paper L P Credits
Theory Papers
HS/MS MS‐302 Principles of Management for Engineers 3 3
HS/MS HS‐304 Universal Human Values* 1 1
PC BT‐308T Blockchain Technology 3 3
PC IOT‐320T Programming in Python 3 3
PC IOT‐324T Introduction to Internet of Things 3 3
PC IOT‐326T Introduction to Sensors and Transducers 3 3
OAE Open Area Elective Paper (OAE – 1) 4
Practical / Viva Voce
PC BT‐308P Blockchain Technology Lab 2 1
PC IOT‐320P Programming in Python Lab 2 1
PC IOT‐324P Introduction to Internet of Things Lab 2 1
PC IOT‐326P Introduction to Sensors and Transducers Lab 2 1
NSS / NCC / Cultural Clubs / Technical Society / Technical
HS/MS HS‐352 2
Club*
Total 26

*NUES:All examinations to be conducted by the concerned teacher as specified in the detailed syllabus of the paper.

**NUES: Comprehensive evaluation of the students by the concerned coordinator of NCC / NSS / Cultural Clubs / Technical
Society / Technical Clubs, out of 100 as per the evaluation schemes worked out by these activity societies, organizations; the
faculty co‐ordinators shall be responsible for the evaluation of the same. These activities shall start from the 1st semester
and the evaluation shall be conducted at the end of the 6th semester for students admitted in the first semester. Students
nd rd
admitted in the 2 year (3 semester) as lateral entry shall be evaluated on the basis their performance, by the faculty co‐
rd th
ordinator for the period of 3 semester to 6 semester only.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 247
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Seventh Semester
Group Paper Code Paper L P Credits
Theory Papers
HS/MS MS‐401 Principles of Entrepreneurship Mindset 2 2
PC BT‐415T Smart Contracts 3 3
PC CS‐421 Cyber Crime and Cyber Laws 4 4
PC CS‐427T Network Security and Cryptography 3 3
PC IOT‐441T IoT with Arduino, ESP and Raspberry Pi 3 3
OAE Open Area Elective Paper (OAE – 2) 4
Practical / Viva Voce
PC BT‐415P Smart Contracts Lab 2 1
PC CS‐427P Network Security and Cryptography Lab 2 1
PC IOT‐441P IoT with Arduino, ESP and Raspberry Pi Lab 2 1
PC / Project ES‐451 Minor Project** 3
PC / Internship ES‐453 Summer Training (after 6th semester) Report * 1
Total 26

*NUES:Comprehensive evaluation of the Summer Training Report – 2 (after 6th Semester) shall be done by the committee
of teachers, constituted by the Academic Programme Committee, out of 100. The training shall be of 4 to 6 weeks duration.
The training can be under the mentorship of a teacher of the institute.

**The student shall be allocated a supervisor / guide for project work at the end 6th semester by the department /
institution, the project shall continue into the 8th semester. In the 7th semester evaluation, the criteria for evaluation shall
be conceptualization of the project work, the background study / literature survey and identification of objectives and
methodology to be followed for project. 40 marks evaluation for the Teachers' Continuous Evaluation / Internal Assessment
shall be done by concerned supervisor while the term end examination of 60 marks shall be conducted by the supervisor
concerned and the external examiner deputed by the Examinations Division. In the absence of the supervisor, the Director
of the Institution / Head of the Department can assign the responsibility of the supervisor (for purpose of examinations) to
any faculty of the Institution / Department.

Eight Semester
Paper
Group Paper L P Credits
Code
Practical / Viva Voce%
ES‐452 Major Project – Dissertation and Viva Voce# 18
PC / Project
ES‐454 Project Progress Evaluation* 2
ES‐456 Internship Report and Viva Voce# 18
PC / Internship
ES‐458 Internship Progress Evaluation* 2
Total 0 0 20

*NUES: Comprehensive evaluation by the committee of teachers, constituted by the Academic Programme
Committee, out of 100.

%By default every student shall do the project work (ES‐452 and ES‐454). A student shall either be allowed to
do a project work (ES‐452 and ES‐454) or an internship (ES‐456 and ES‐458). The student must apply for
approval to do internship before the commencement of the 8th semester to the institute, and only after
approval of Principal / Director of the institute through Training and Placement Officer of the institute, shall
proceed for internship.

#Students may be allowed to do internship in this semester in lieu of Major project. The students allowed to
proceed for internship shall be required to maintain a log‐book of activities performed during internship. The
same has to be countersigned by the mentor at the organization where internship is completed.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 248
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

ES‐452: Evaluation shall be conducted of 40 marks (Teachers’ continuous evaluation / internal assessment) by
the supervisor. And, 60 marks by a bench of the supervisor and the external examiner deputed by Examination
Division (COE), for a total of 100 marks.

ES‐454 / ES‐458: Comprehensive evaluation by the committee of teachers, constituted by the Academic
Programme Committee, out of 100.

ES‐456: Evaluation shall be conducted of 40 marks (Teachers’ continuous evaluation / internal assessment) by
the Training and Placement Officer of the department / institute on the basis of the report submitted by the
student. And, 60 marks by a bench of the Training and Placement Officer of the department / institute and the
external examiner deputed by Examination Division (COE), for a total of 100 marks.

In the absence of the supervisor or the Training and Placement Officer (as the case may be), the Director of the
institute / Head of the Department can assign the responsibility of the supervisor or the Training and Placement
Officer (for purpose of examinations) to any faculty of the department.

Note on Elective Papers: The elective papers shall be allowed to be taken / studied by the students, by the
APC of the department / institute, keeping in view that two papers studied by the student should not have a
substantial overlap. All papers studied by the student should be substantially distinct in content.

Note on Examination of Elective Papers:

(a) Papers with only theory component shall have 25 Marks continuous evaluation by the teacher and 75
Marks term‐end examinations. Both these component marks shall be reflected on the marksheet of the
student.
(b) Papers with only practical component shall have 40 Marks continuous evaluation by the teacher and 60
Marks term‐end examinations. Both these component marks shall be reflected on the marksheet of the
student.

Note on Continuous Evaluation of All Papers:

(a) Papers with only theory component shall have 25 Marks continuous evaluation by the teacher which shall
be evaluated as:
i. Mid‐Term Test* ‐ 15 Marks (after 8 weeks of teaching or as
decided by PCC)
ii. Assignments / Project / Quiz / Case Studies, etc. ‐ 5 Marks
iii. Attendance / Class Participation ‐ 5 Marks
(b) Papers with only practical component shall have 40Marks continuous evaluation by the teacher which shall
be evaluated as:
i. Mid‐Term Test and Viva Voce ‐ 20 Marks (after 8 weeks of teaching or as
decided by PCC)
ii. Practical File ‐ 10 Marks
iii. Attendance / Lab Participation ‐ 10 Marks

* The mid‐term test shall be coordinated by the Programme Coordination Committee.

If a student could not appear for a mid‐term test due to situation beyond the control by the student, a
supplementary test may be arranged towards the end of the semester, in a similar manner to the mid‐term
test for such students. The students must apply for this provision to the department / institution. On
examination of the reason for non‐appearing in the mid‐term test by the Head of the Department / Institute,
and with reason for allowing to appear in the supplementary test to recorded by the Head of the Department
/ Institute, the student may be allowed.

The attendance sheets, the question papers and the award sheets for the continuous evaluation to be
retained by the concerned department / institute for at least 6 months after the declaration of the result by
the Examination Division of the University.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 249
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Open Area Electives

Semester Paper Code OAE – 1 (Choose Any One) L P Credits
6 ES‐304 Real Time Operating Systems 4 4
ES‐306T Embedded System Architecture and Design 3 3
6
ES‐306P Embedded System Architecture and Design Lab 2 1
FSD‐320T Web Development using MEAN Stack 3 3
6
FSD‐320P Web Development using MEAN Stack Lab 2 1
FSD‐322T Web Development using MERN Stack 3 3
6
FSD‐322P Web Development using MERN Stack Lab 2 1
OSD‐330T Programming in Windows Environment 3 3
6
OSD‐330P Programming in Windows Environment Lab 2 1
OSD‐334T Android App Development 3 3
6
OSD‐334P Android App Development Lab 2 1
IPCV‐334T Digital Image Processing 3 3
6
IPCV‐334P Digital Image Processing Lab 2 1
Understanding Human Being, Nature and Existence
6 4 4
OUHV‐338 Comprehensively
6 OUHV‐340 Vision for Humane Society 4 4
SE‐350T Software Measurements, Metrics and Modelling 3 3
6
SE‐350P Software Measurements, Metrics and Modelling Lab 2 1
SE‐352T Service Oriented Architecture 3 3
6
SE‐352P Service Oriented Architecture Lab 2 1
SE‐354T Software Project Management 3 3
6
SE‐354P Software Project Management Lab 2 1
6 MOOCs (Swayam / NPTEL) 4
Semester Paper Code OAE – 2 (Choose Any One) L P Credits
ES‐403T VHDL Programming 3 3
7
ES‐403P VHDL Programming Lab 2 1
ES‐405T Real Time Embedded System Programming 3 3
7
ES‐405P Real Time Embedded System Programming Lab 2 1
FSD‐435T PHP Programming and MySQL 3 3
7
FSD‐435P PHP Programming and MySQL Lab 2 1
MAC‐409T Robotics Engineering 3 3
7
MAC‐409P Robotics Engineering Lab 2 1
OECE‐417T Microprocessors and Interfacing 3 3
7
OECE‐417P Microprocessors and Interfacing Lab 2 1
OECE‐419T Analog and Digital Communications 3 3
7
OECE‐419P Analog and Digital Communications Lab 2 1
OECE‐421T Wireless Sensor Networks 3 3
7
OECE‐421P Wireless Sensor Networks Lab 2 1
OSD‐449T Design Patterns 3 3
7
OSD‐449P Design Patterns Lab 2 1
OSD‐453T Advanced Java Programming 3 3
7
OSD‐453P Advanced Java Programming Lab 2 1
OSD‐455T Programming in Linux Environment 3 3
7
OSD‐455P Programming in Linux Environment Lab 2 1
7 OUHV‐463 Holistic Human Health 4 4
SC‐479T Global Optimization Methods 3 3
7
SC‐479P Global Optimization Methods Lab 2 1
SE‐487T Software Verification, Validation and Testing 3 3
7
SE‐487P Software Verification, Validation and Testing Lab 2 1
7 MOOCs (Swayam / NPTEL) 4

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 250
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Note:
1. Each OAE slot is of 4 credits, if in a particular slot, the paper has no practical component, then it is of 4 credits
(a pure theory paper), otherwise for purpose of examination and conduct of classes, the course is split in two
papers, namely a theory paper of 3 credits and a practical paper of 1 credit. The student has to study for 4
credits per slot of OAE group. This is reflected by suffixing the paper code by T (for Theory component) and P
(for Practical component), if required

2. The Open Area Electives described / enumerated are the one offered by engineering departments. If other
departments, offering minor specialization or elective papers as open area electives to engineering students
(approved by the university Academic Council) are possible at the concerned institution, the same may also be
offered to the engineering students studying in the major disciplines under the aegis of the University School of
Information, Communication and Technology. The APC of the department / intuition shall allow the choice of
such electives, provided they follow the credit framework of the programme of study for open area electives.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 251
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Implementation Rules:

1. The examinations, attendance criteria to appear in examinations, promotion and award of the degree
shall be governed by the Ordinance 11 of the University. The term “major discipline” / “primary discipline”
in this document refers to the discipline in which student is admitted / studies from 3rd semester onwards.
However credits of courses / paper for OAE / EAE groups shall not be considered for the purpose of
promotion from one year of study to the subsequent year of study.
2. Minimum duration of the Bachelor of Technology programme shall be 4 years (N=4 years) (8 semesters)
for the students admitted in the 1st year and 1st semester of the degree programme. Lateral entry students
shall be admitted in the 2nd year and 3rd semester of the degree programme (effectively in the batch
admitted in the first year in the previous academic session and shall be deemed to have been exempted
from the courses / papers of the first year of the degree programme. No exemption certificate shall be
issued in any case.
A specific lateral entry students’ minimum duration shall be the same as the minimum duration for the
batch in which he/she is admitted as a lateral entry student in the 2nd year.
3. Maximum duration of the Bachelor of Technology programme shall be 6 years (N+2 years). After
completion of N+2 years of study, if the student has appeared in the papers of all the semesters upto 8th
semester, then a maximum extension of 1 year may be given to the student for completing the
requirements of the degree if and only if the number of credits already earned by the student is atleast 150
(for lateral entry students it shall be at least 102 credits) from the (non‐honours components). Otherwise,
the admission of the student shall stand cancelled. After the period of allowed study, the admission of the
student shall be cancelled.
A specific lateral entry students’ maximum duration shall be the same as the minimum duration for the
batch in which he/she is admitted as a lateral entry student in the 2nd year.
4. The degree shall be awarded only after the fulfilment of all requirements of the Scheme and Syllabus of
Examinations and the applicable Ordinance.
5. (a) The students shall undergo the following group of Courses / Papers as enumerated in the scheme (For
the students admitted in the First Year / First Semester).

Semester (Credits) Total Mandatory

Group
I & II III IV V VI VII VIII Credits Credits

BS 24 5 29 14

HS/MS 6 2 2 2 6 2 20 10

ES 20 5 25 15

PC 19 19 24 16 20 20 118 104

OAE 4 4 8 4

Total 50 26 26 26 26 26 20 200 147

TABLE 1: Distribution of Credits (Project / Internship credits are 25 out the 118 credits for Programme
Core (PC) credits, while extra‐curricular activities credits are 2 out of 20 credits for Humanities /
Management / Social Science Group (HS/MS)) . This table is for students admitted in the First Year / First
Semester of the Degree Programme.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 252
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

(b) The students admitted as Lateral Entry shall undergo the following group of Courses / Papers as
enumerated in the scheme.

Semester (Credits) Total Mandatory

Group
III IV V VI VII VIII Credits Credits

BS 5 5 0

HS/MS 2 2 2 6 2 14 7

ES 5 5 0

PC 19 19 24 16 20 20 118 104

OAE 4 4 8 4

Total 26 26 26 26 26 20 150 115

TABLE 2: Distribution of Credits (Project / Internship credits are 25 out the 118 credits for Programme
Core (PC) credits, while extra‐curricular activities credits are 2 out of 14 credits for Humanities /
Management / Social Science Group (HS/MS)) This table is for students admitted as Lateral Entry
Students in the Second Year / Third Semester of the Degree Programme.

6. Mandatory Credits specify the number of credits from each subject group to be mandatorily acquired by
the student for the award of the degree,for students admitted as students in the 1st year and 1st semester
of the degree programme. While for students admitted as lateral entry in the 2nd year and 3rd semester
the Mandatory Credits value is 115, and specify the number of credits from each subject group to be
mandatorily acquired by the student for the award of the degree (Table 2). See clause 11 and 12 also.
7. Some of the papers are droppable in the sense that the student may qualify for the award of the degree
even when the student has not cleared / passed some of the papers of these group. However, the student
has to earn the minimum credits for the programme of study as specified. See clause 11 and 12 also.
8. The students may take 2 subjects from OAE group. The open electives of the OAE group of courses may
also be taken through SWAYAM / NPTEL MOOCs platform. The student desirous of doing a MOOC based
course among the OAE group must seek approval of the APC of the institute for the same before the
commencement of the semester. The APC shall allow the MOOC based OAE option to the student if and
only if the MOOC subject / course being considered for the student is being offered in line with the
Academic Calendar applicable. The student shall submit the successful completion certificate with marks to
the institution for onwards transfer to the Examination Division. The Examinations Division shall take these
marks on record for incorporation in the result of the appropriate semester. These marks / grades of these
courses shall be used for calculation of the SGPA/CGPA of the student concerned by the examination
division of the University. The degree to the student on fulfilment of other requirements for such cases
shall be through clause 12.a. or 12.b.
These MOOC courses taken by the students, if allowed by the APC of the institute shall be of 4 credits or
more collectively to be against or for one paper slot in the scheme, through MOOCs, though the marks
shall be shown individually. That is in one paper slot in the scheme wherever a MOOC course is allowed,
the student may register for more than one paper to aggregate 4 credits or more. If the credits of these
MOOC Courses, allowed to a student is more than 4, then the maximum credit for the programme shall
be amended accordingly for the particular student. Also, in a particular semester, a student may take
more than one MOOC course with the approval of the APC to meet the credit requirements of OAE for the
semester. The cost of taking the MOOC course is to be borne by the concerned student. The results of the
MOOC courses shall be declared separately by the Examination Division from the result for the papers
conducted by the examination division of the University.
No minor specialization shall be offered / awarded.
9. To earn an Honours degree, the student may enrol for 20 credits or more through SWAYAM / NPTEL
MOOCs platform. This point has to be read together with other points specially point 13 and 14. The

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 253
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

acquisition of the credits should be completed before the 15th of the July of the Admission Year plus 4
years. That is, if a student is admitted in the year X, then these credits must be acquired through MOOCs by
15th July of the year (X+4), no extra duration or time shall be allocated, this means, the student must
submit the result of such papers on or before 15th July of the Admission Year plus 4 years.
Honours in the degree shall be awarded if and only if at least 20 credits are acquired through MOOCs. To
obtain Honours in the programme, the student must apply to the institution about the same before the
commencement of the 5th semester. The specific courses through MOOCs shall be registered by the
student only after approval by the Academic Programme Committee (APC) of the Institute. The APC shall
approve the course if it is not already studied by the student or the student shall not study it in future and
adds value to the major area of specialization (which is the degree). The papers for which the student
desires to appear for Honours through MOOCs, all papers results shall be submitted by the student to the
Institute for onwards transfer to Examination Division of the University, to be taken on record of the
University. The results of these papers shall be a part of the records of the examinations of the students.
The records shall be submitted by the student to the Institute, then transferred to the Examination
Division, shall be notified by the Examination Division of the University, and a separate marksheet shall be
issued by the Examination Division. The cost of taking the MOOC course is to be borne by the concerned
student. Such courses shall be reflected as additional courses / papers for the student.
If a student acquires less than 20 credits through MOOCs, following the mechanism specified, then also
the results of these papers shall be taken on record as specified above, though no Honours degree shall
be awarded.
The papers through MOOCs for Honours degree shall not be a part of the set of the papers over which the
SGPA / CGPA of the student shall be calculated.
The papers through MOOCs for Honours degree shall be additional papers studied by the students and are
to be taken into account only for award of Honours in the degree programme, if 20 credits are earned
through MOOCs as approved by APC, by a student. See Clause 13 also.
10. Maximum Credits is at least 200 (Table 1) for students admitted in the 1st year and 1st semester, these are
the credits for which the student shall have to study for the non‐Honours component of the curriculum.
And, for lateral entry students admitted in the 2nd year and 3rd semester of the degree programme, the
maximum credit required to be studied is at least 150 (Table 2). See clause 8 also.
The student has to appear in the examinations for these credits in all components of evaluation as
specified in the scheme of studies.
11. Minimum Credits required to be earned is atleast 180 (out of the 200 non Honours papers credits, see
clause 10 also) for students admitted in the 1st year and 1st semester. And, for lateral entry students
admitted in the 2nd year and 3rd semester of the degree programme, the minimum credit required to be
earned Is at least 135 (out of the 150 non Honours papers credits, see clause 10 also). See clause 6 also.
12. The following degree route can be taken by a student (also refer point 13):
a. The students shall be awarded the degree without any minor specialization under the following
conditions:
i. The student has earned the mandatory credits as defined in Table 1 or Table 2 (as applicable) and
clause 6.
ii. In addition, the total credits (including the above specified credits) earned by the student is atleast
as specified in clause 11.
The degree nomenclature of the degree shall be as: “Bachelor of Technology in Computer Science and
Engineering (Internet of Things and Cyber Security including Block Chain Technology)”; if criteria /
point 9 is not satisfied for Honours. Otherwise, if criteria / point 9 is met, then the degrees shall be an
Honours degree and the nomenclature shall be as: “Bachelor of Technology in Computer Science and
Engineering (Internet of Things and Cyber Security including Block Chain Technology) (Honours)”, if
in addition to point 12.b.i and 12.b.ii, the student fulfils the criteria for Honours as specified at point
9.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 254
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

b. If the student does not fulfil any of the above criterions (point 12.a, or 12.b), if the student earns at
least the minimum credits specified in clause 11 (disregarding the mandatory credits clause of Table 1
or Table 2 (as applicable) and Clause 6), then the student shall be award the degree as “Bachelor of
Technology in Computer Science and Engineering (Internet of Things and Cyber Security including
Block Chain Technology)”. Such students shall not be eligible for the award of an Honours degree.
Though, if credits are accumulated through MOOCs as per clause 9, the same shall be reflected in the
marksheets of the students.
13. The Honours degree shall only be awarded if the CGPA of the student is above or equal to 7.5 in addition
to fulfilment of criteria / point 10 and 13 above and the degree is awarded after the immediate
completion of the 4th year of the batch from the year of admission. No Honours shall be conferred if the
degree requirements are not completed in the minimum duration.
14. Pass marks in every paper shall be 40.
15. Grading System shall be as per Ordinance 11 of the University.
16. The institution shall offer atleast two elective groups out of the open area for students of each major
discipline. The institute shall decide the group(s) and/or individual papers to be offered as electives based
on the availability of infrastructure and faculty. From the groups / papers offered by the institute, an
elective paper / group shall be taught if and only if the number of students in a paper is at‐least 20 or at‐
least 1/3 of the students of a major discipline for which the paper / group is to be offered. The APC of the
department / institute may define a maximum number of students allowed to register for a paper as an
open area elective.
17. Teachers of the other department(s), as and when deputed by their department, for teaching the students
enrolled in programmes offered by the department offering the programme shall be a part of the
Academic Programme Committee of the discipline. Such teachers, for all academic matters, including
teaching, teachers’ continuous evaluation, term end examinations etc. shall be governed by the decisions
of the APC of department offering the programme of study. Similarly, the guest faculty, the visiting faculty
and the Contract / Ad Hoc faculty as and when deputed to teach students of a particular department shall
form a part of APC of the department.
18. The Paper IDs will be generated / issued / assigned by the Examination Division of the University.

19. The medium of instructions shall be English.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 255
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Bachelor of Technology in Computer Science and Engineering

(Networks) (CSE-NET)
2nd Year Onward Scheme and implementation guideline

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 256
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Third Semester
Paper
Group Paper L P Credits
Code
Theory Papers
ES ES‐201 Computational Methods 4 4
HS/MS HS‐203 Indian Knowledge System* 2 2
PC CIC‐205 Discrete Mathematics 4 4
PC ECC‐207 Digital Logic and Computer Design 4 4
PC CIC‐209 Data Structures 4 4
PC CIC‐211 Object‐Oriented Programming using C++ 4 4
Practical / Viva Voce
ES ES‐251 Computational Methods Lab 2 1
PC ECC‐253 Digital Logic and Computer Design Lab 2 1
PC CIC‐255 Data Structures Lab 2 1
PC CIC‐257 Object‐Oriented Programming using C++ Lab 2 1
Total 22 8 26

*NUES:All examinations to be conducted by the concerned teacher as specified in the detailed syllabus of the paper.

Fourth Semester
Paper
Group Paper L P Credits
Code
Theory Papers
BS BS‐202 Probability, Statistics and Linear Programming 4 4
HS/MS HS‐204 Technical Writing* 2 2
PC CIC‐206 Theory of Computation 4 4
PC EEC‐208 Circuits and Systems 4 4
PC CIC‐210 Database Management Systems 4 4
PC CIC‐212 Programming in Java 4 4
Practical / Viva Voce
BS BS‐252 Probability, Statistics and Linear Programming Lab 2 1
PC EEC‐254 Circuits and Systems Lab 2 1
PC CIC‐256 Database Management Systems Lab 2 1
PC CIC‐258 Programming in Java Lab 2 1
Total 22 8 26

*NUES:All examinations to be conducted by the concerned teacher as specified in the detailed syllabus of the paper.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 257
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Fifth Semester
Paper
Group Paper L P Credits
Code
Theory Papers
HS/MS HS‐301 Economics for Engineers 2 2
PC CIC‐303 Compiler Design 3 3
PC CIC‐305 Operating Systems 4 4
PC CIC‐307 Computer Networks 4 4
PC CIC‐309 Software Engineering 3 3
PC CIC‐311 Design and Analysis of Algorithm 4 4
Practical / Viva Voce
PC CIC‐351 Compiler Design Lab 2 1
PC CIC‐353 Operating Systems Lab 2 1
PC CIC‐355 Computer Networks Lab 2 1
PC CIC‐357 Software Engineering Lab 2 1
PC CIC‐359 Design and Analysis of Algorithm Lab 2 1
PC / Internship ES‐361 Summer Training Report ‐ 1 * 1
Total 20 10 26

*NUES:Comprehensive evaluation of the Summer Training Report – 1 (after 4th Semester) shall be doneby the committee
of teachers, constituted by the Academic Programme Committee, out of 100. The training shall be of 4 to 6 weeks duration.
The training can be under the mentorship of a teacher of the institute.

Sixth Semester
Group Paper Code Paper L P Credits
Theory Papers
HS/MS MS‐302 Principles of Management for Engineers 3 3
HS/MS HS‐304 Universal Human Values* 1 1
PC CS‐312T Network Security and Cryptography 3 3
PC WMC‐340T Wireless Communication and Networks 3 3
PC NET‐344T Advanced Computer Networks and Administration 3 3
PC NET‐346T Linux System Administration 3 3
OAE Open Area Elective Paper (OAE – 1) 4
Practical / Viva Voce
PC CS‐312P Network Security and Cryptography Lab 2 1
PC WMC‐340P Wireless Communication and Networks Lab 2 1
PC NET‐344P Advanced Computer Networks and Administration Lab 2 1
PC NET‐346P Linux System Administration Lab 2 1
NSS / NCC / Cultural Clubs / Technical Society / Technical
HS/MS HS‐352 2
Club*
Total 26

*NUES:All examinations to be conducted by the concerned teacher as specified in the detailed syllabus of the paper.

**NUES: Comprehensive evaluation of the students by the concerned coordinator of NCC / NSS / Cultural Clubs / Technical
Society / Technical Clubs, out of 100 as per the evaluation schemes worked out by these activity societies, organizations; the
faculty co‐ordinators shall be responsible for the evaluation of the same. These activities shall start from the 1st semester
and the evaluation shall be conducted at the end of the 6th semester for students admitted in the first semester. Students
nd rd
admitted in the 2 year (3 semester) as lateral entry shall be evaluated on the basis their performance, by the faculty co‐
rd th
ordinator for the period of 3 semester to 6 semester only.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 258
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Seventh Semester
Group Paper Code Paper L P Credits
Theory Papers
HS/MS MS‐401 Principles of Entrepreneurship Mindset 2 2
PC NET‐471T Network Programming 3 3
PC NET‐473T Cloud Computing and Security 3 3
PC NET‐475T Wireless Sensor Networks 3 3
PC NET‐477T Network Simulation and Optimization 3 3
OAE Open Area Elective Paper (OAE – 2) 4
Practical / Viva Voce
PC NET‐471P Network Programming Lab 2 1
PC NET‐473P Cloud Computing and Security Lab 2 1
PC NET‐475P Wireless Sensor Networks Lab 2 1
PC NET‐477P Network Simulation and Optimization Lab 2 1
PC / Project ES‐451 Minor Project** 3
PC / Internship ES‐453 Summer Training (after 6th semester) Report * 1
Total 26

th
*NUES:Comprehensive evaluation of the Summer Training Report – 2 (after 6 Semester) shall be done by the committee
of teachers, constituted by the Academic Programme Committee, out of 100. The training shall be of 4 to 6 weeks duration.
The training can be under the mentorship of a teacher of the institute.

**The student shall be allocated a supervisor / guide for project work at the end 6th semester by the department /
institution, the project shall continue into the 8th semester. In the 7th semester evaluation, the criteria for evaluation shall
be conceptualization of the project work, the background study / literature survey and identification of objectives and
methodology to be followed for project. 40 marks evaluation for the Teachers' Continuous Evaluation / Internal Assessment
shall be done by concerned supervisor while the term end examination of 60 marks shall be conducted by the supervisor
concerned and the external examiner deputed by the Examinations Division. In the absence of the supervisor, the Director
of the Institution / Head of the Department can assign the responsibility of the supervisor (for purpose of examinations) to
any faculty of the Institution / Department.

Eight Semester
Paper
Group Paper L P Credits
Code
Practical / Viva Voce%
ES‐452 Major Project – Dissertation and Viva Voce# 18
PC / Project
ES‐454 Project Progress Evaluation* 2
#
ES‐456 Internship Report and Viva Voce 18
PC / Internship
ES‐458 Internship Progress Evaluation* 2
Total 0 0 20

*NUES: Comprehensive evaluation by the committee of teachers, constituted by the Academic Programme
Committee, out of 100.

%By default every student shall do the project work (ES‐452 and ES‐454). A student shall either be allowed to
do a project work (ES‐452 and ES‐454) or an internship (ES‐456 and ES‐458). The student must apply for
th
approval to do internship before the commencement of the 8 semester to the institute, and only after
approval of Principal / Director of the institute through Training and Placement Officer of the institute, shall
proceed for internship.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 259
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

#Students may be allowed to do internship in this semester in lieu of Major project. The students allowed to
proceed for internship shall be required to maintain a log‐book of activities performed during internship. The
same has to be countersigned by the mentor at the organization where internship is completed.
ES‐452: Evaluation shall be conducted of 40 marks (Teachers’ continuous evaluation / internal assessment) by
the supervisor. And, 60 marks by a bench of the supervisor and the external examiner deputed by Examination
Division (COE), for a total of 100 marks.

ES‐454 / ES‐458: Comprehensive evaluation by the committee of teachers, constituted by the Academic
Programme Committee, out of 100.

ES‐456: Evaluation shall be conducted of 40 marks (Teachers’ continuous evaluation / internal assessment) by
the Training and Placement Officer of the department / institute on the basis of the report submitted by the
student. And, 60 marks by a bench of the Training and Placement Officer of the department / institute and the
external examiner deputed by Examination Division (COE), for a total of 100 marks.

In the absence of the supervisor or the Training and Placement Officer (as the case may be), the Director of the
institute / Head of the Department can assign the responsibility of the supervisor or the Training and Placement
Officer (for purpose of examinations) to any faculty of the department.

Note on Elective Papers: The elective papers shall be allowed to be taken / studied by the students, by the
APC of the department / institute, keeping in view that two papers studied by the student should not have a
substantial overlap. All papers studied by the student should be substantially distinct in content.

Note on Examination of Elective Papers:

(a) Papers with only theory component shall have 25 Marks continuous evaluation by the teacher and 75
Marks term‐end examinations. Both these component marks shall be reflected on the marksheet of the
student.
(b) Papers with only practical component shall have 40 Marks continuous evaluation by the teacher and 60
Marks term‐end examinations. Both these component marks shall be reflected on the marksheet of the
student.

Note on Continuous Evaluation of All Papers:

(a) Papers with only theory component shall have 25 Marks continuous evaluation by the teacher which shall
be evaluated as:
i. Mid‐Term Test* ‐ 15 Marks (after 8 weeks of teaching or as
decided by PCC)
ii. Assignments / Project / Quiz / Case Studies, etc. ‐ 5 Marks
iii. Attendance / Class Participation ‐ 5 Marks
(b) Papers with only practical component shall have 40Marks continuous evaluation by the teacher which shall
be evaluated as:
i. Mid‐Term Test and Viva Voce ‐ 20 Marks (after 8 weeks of teaching or as
decided by PCC)
ii. Practical File ‐ 10 Marks
iii. Attendance / Lab Participation ‐ 10 Marks

* The mid‐term test shall be coordinated by the Programme Coordination Committee.

If a student could not appear for a mid‐term test due to situation beyond the control by the student, a
supplementary test may be arranged towards the end of the semester, in a similar manner to the mid‐term
test for such students. The students must apply for this provision to the department / institution. On
examination of the reason for non‐appearing in the mid‐term test by the Head of the Department / Institute,
and with reason for allowing to appear in the supplementary test to recorded by the Head of the Department
/ Institute, the student may be allowed.
The attendance sheets, the question papers and the award sheets for the continuous evaluation to be
retained by the concerned department / institute for at least 6 months after the declaration of the result by
the Examination Division of the University.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 260
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Open Area Electives

Semester Paper Code OAE – 1 (Choose Any One) L P Credits
6 ES‐304 Real Time Operating Systems 4 4
ES‐306T Embedded System Architecture and Design 3 3
6
ES‐306P Embedded System Architecture and Design Lab 2 1
FSD‐320T Web Development using MEAN Stack 3 3
6
FSD‐320P Web Development using MEAN Stack Lab 2 1
FSD‐322T Web Development using MERN Stack 3 3
6
FSD‐322P Web Development using MERN Stack Lab 2 1
OSD‐330T Programming in Windows Environment 3 3
6
OSD‐330P Programming in Windows Environment Lab 2 1
OSD‐334T Android App Development 3 3
6
OSD‐334P Android App Development Lab 2 1
IPCV‐334T Digital Image Processing 3 3
6
IPCV‐334P Digital Image Processing Lab 2 1
Understanding Human Being, Nature and Existence
6 4 4
OUHV‐338 Comprehensively
6 OUHV‐340 Vision for Humane Society 4 4
SE‐350T Software Measurements, Metrics and Modelling 3 3
6
SE‐350P Software Measurements, Metrics and Modelling Lab 2 1
SE‐352T Service Oriented Architecture 3 3
6
SE‐352P Service Oriented Architecture Lab 2 1
SE‐354T Software Project Management 3 3
6
SE‐354P Software Project Management Lab 2 1
6 MOOCs (Swayam / NPTEL) 4
Semester Paper Code OAE – 2 (Choose Any One) L P Credits
ES‐403T VHDL Programming 3 3
7
ES‐403P VHDL Programming Lab 2 1
ES‐405T Real Time Embedded System Programming 3 3
7
ES‐405P Real Time Embedded System Programming Lab 2 1
FSD‐435T PHP Programming and MySQL 3 3
7
FSD‐435P PHP Programming and MySQL Lab 2 1
MAC‐409T Robotics Engineering 3 3
7
MAC‐409P Robotics Engineering Lab 2 1
OECE‐417T Microprocessors and Interfacing 3 3
7
OECE‐417P Microprocessors and Interfacing Lab 2 1
OECE‐419T Analog and Digital Communications 3 3
7
OECE‐419P Analog and Digital Communications Lab 2 1
OECE‐421T Wireless Sensor Networks 3 3
7
OECE‐421P Wireless Sensor Networks Lab 2 1
OSD‐449T Design Patterns 3 3
7
OSD‐449P Design Patterns Lab 2 1
OSD‐453T Advanced Java Programming 3 3
7
OSD‐453P Advanced Java Programming Lab 2 1
OSD‐455T Programming in Linux Environment 3 3
7
OSD‐455P Programming in Linux Environment Lab 2 1
7 OUHV‐463 Holistic Human Health 4 4
SC‐479T Global Optimization Methods 3 3
7
SC‐479P Global Optimization Methods Lab 2 1
SE‐487T Software Verification, Validation and Testing 3 3
7
SE‐487P Software Verification, Validation and Testing Lab 2 1
7 MOOCs (Swayam / NPTEL) 4

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 261
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Note:
1. Each OAE slot is of 4 credits, if in a particular slot, the paper has no practical component, then it is of 4 credits
(a pure theory paper), otherwise for purpose of examination and conduct of classes, the course is split in two
papers, namely a theory paper of 3 credits and a practical paper of 1 credit. The student has to study for 4
credits per slot of OAE group. This is reflected by suffixing the paper code by T (for Theory component) and P
(for Practical component), if required

2. The Open Area Electives described / enumerated are the one offered by engineering departments. If other
departments, offering minor specialization or elective papers as open area electives to engineering students
(approved by the university Academic Council) are possible at the concerned institution, the same may also be
offered to the engineering students studying in the major disciplines under the aegis of the University School of
Information, Communication and Technology. The APC of the department / intuition shall allow the choice of
such electives, provided they follow the credit framework of the programme of study for open area electives.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 262
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Implementation Rules:

1. The examinations, attendance criteria to appear in examinations, promotion and award of the degree
shall be governed by the Ordinance 11 of the University. The term “major discipline” / “primary discipline”
in this document refers to the discipline in which student is admitted / studies from 3rd semester onwards.
However credits of courses / paper for OAE / EAE groups shall not be considered for the purpose of
promotion from one year of study to the subsequent year of study.
2. Minimum duration of the Bachelor of Technology programme shall be 4 years (N=4 years) (8 semesters)
for the students admitted in the 1st year and 1st semester of the degree programme. Lateral entry students
shall be admitted in the 2nd year and 3rd semester of the degree programme (effectively in the batch
admitted in the first year in the previous academic session and shall be deemed to have been exempted
from the courses / papers of the first year of the degree programme. No exemption certificate shall be
issued in any case.
A specific lateral entry students’ minimum duration shall be the same as the minimum duration for the
batch in which he/she is admitted as a lateral entry student in the 2nd year.
3. Maximum duration of the Bachelor of Technology programme shall be 6 years (N+2 years). After
completion of N+2 years of study, if the student has appeared in the papers of all the semesters upto 8th
semester, then a maximum extension of 1 year may be given to the student for completing the
requirements of the degree if and only if the number of credits already earned by the student is atleast 150
(for lateral entry students it shall be at least 102 credits) from the (non‐honours components). Otherwise,
the admission of the student shall stand cancelled. After the period of allowed study, the admission of the
student shall be cancelled.
A specific lateral entry students’ maximum duration shall be the same as the minimum duration for the
batch in which he/she is admitted as a lateral entry student in the 2nd year.
4. The degree shall be awarded only after the fulfilment of all requirements of the Scheme and Syllabus of
Examinations and the applicable Ordinance.
5. (a) The students shall undergo the following group of Courses / Papers as enumerated in the scheme (For
the students admitted in the First Year / First Semester).

Semester (Credits) Total Mandatory

Group
I & II III IV V VI VII VIII Credits Credits

BS 24 5 29 14

HS/MS 6 2 2 2 6 2 20 10

ES 20 5 25 15

PC 19 19 24 16 20 20 118 104

OAE 4 4 8 4

Total 50 26 26 26 26 26 20 200 147

TABLE 1: Distribution of Credits (Project / Internship credits are 25 out the 118 credits for Programme
Core (PC) credits, while extra‐curricular activities credits are 2 out of 20 credits for Humanities /
Management / Social Science Group (HS/MS)) . This table is for students admitted in the First Year / First
Semester of the Degree Programme.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 263
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

(b) The students admitted as Lateral Entry shall undergo the following group of Courses / Papers as
enumerated in the scheme.

Semester (Credits) Total Mandatory

Group
III IV V VI VII VIII Credits Credits

BS 5 5 0

HS/MS 2 2 2 6 2 14 7

ES 5 5 0

PC 19 19 24 16 20 20 118 104

OAE 4 4 8 4

Total 26 26 26 26 26 20 150 115

TABLE 2: Distribution of Credits (Project / Internship credits are 25 out the 118 credits for Programme
Core (PC) credits, while extra‐curricular activities credits are 2 out of 14 credits for Humanities /
Management / Social Science Group (HS/MS)) This table is for students admitted as Lateral Entry
Students in the Second Year / Third Semester of the Degree Programme.

6. Mandatory Credits specify the number of credits from each subject group to be mandatorily acquired by
the student for the award of the degree,for students admitted as students in the 1st year and 1st semester
of the degree programme. While for students admitted as lateral entry in the 2nd year and 3rd semester
the Mandatory Credits value is 115, and specify the number of credits from each subject group to be
mandatorily acquired by the student for the award of the degree (Table 2). See clause 11 and 12 also.
7. Some of the papers are droppable in the sense that the student may qualify for the award of the degree
even when the student has not cleared / passed some of the papers of these group. However, the student
has to earn the minimum credits for the programme of study as specified. See clause 11 and 12 also.
8. The students may take 2 subjects from OAE group. The open electives of the OAE group of courses may
also be taken through SWAYAM / NPTEL MOOCs platform. The student desirous of doing a MOOC based
course among the OAE group must seek approval of the APC of the institute for the same before the
commencement of the semester. The APC shall allow the MOOC based OAE option to the student if and
only if the MOOC subject / course being considered for the student is being offered in line with the
Academic Calendar applicable. The student shall submit the successful completion certificate with marks to
the institution for onwards transfer to the Examination Division. The Examinations Division shall take these
marks on record for incorporation in the result of the appropriate semester. These marks / grades of these
courses shall be used for calculation of the SGPA/CGPA of the student concerned by the examination
division of the University. The degree to the student on fulfilment of other requirements for such cases
shall be through clause 12.a. or 12.b.
These MOOC courses taken by the students, if allowed by the APC of the institute shall be of 4 credits or
more collectively to be against or for one paper slot in the scheme, through MOOCs, though the marks
shall be shown individually. That is in one paper slot in the scheme wherever a MOOC course is allowed,
the student may register for more than one paper to aggregate 4 credits or more. If the credits of these
MOOC Courses, allowed to a student is more than 4, then the maximum credit for the programme shall
be amended accordingly for the particular student. Also, in a particular semester, a student may take
more than one MOOC course with the approval of the APC to meet the credit requirements of OAE for the
semester. The cost of taking the MOOC course is to be borne by the concerned student. The results of the
MOOC courses shall be declared separately by the Examination Division from the result for the papers
conducted by the examination division of the University.
No minor specialization shall be offered / awarded.
9. To earn an Honours degree, the student may enrol for 20 credits or more through SWAYAM / NPTEL
MOOCs platform. This point has to be read together with other points specially point 13 and 14. The

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 264
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

acquisition of the credits should be completed before the 15th of the July of the Admission Year plus 4
years. That is, if a student is admitted in the year X, then these credits must be acquired through MOOCs by
15th July of the year (X+4), no extra duration or time shall be allocated, this means, the student must
submit the result of such papers on or before 15th July of the Admission Year plus 4 years.
Honours in the degree shall be awarded if and only if at least 20 credits are acquired through MOOCs. To
obtain Honours in the programme, the student must apply to the institution about the same before the
commencement of the 5th semester. The specific courses through MOOCs shall be registered by the
student only after approval by the Academic Programme Committee (APC) of the Institute. The APC shall
approve the course if it is not already studied by the student or the student shall not study it in future and
adds value to the major area of specialization (which is the degree). The papers for which the student
desires to appear for Honours through MOOCs, all papers results shall be submitted by the student to the
Institute for onwards transfer to Examination Division of the University, to be taken on record of the
University. The results of these papers shall be a part of the records of the examinations of the students.
The records shall be submitted by the student to the Institute, then transferred to the Examination
Division, shall be notified by the Examination Division of the University, and a separate marksheet shall be
issued by the Examination Division. The cost of taking the MOOC course is to be borne by the concerned
student. Such courses shall be reflected as additional courses / papers for the student.
If a student acquires less than 20 credits through MOOCs, following the mechanism specified, then also
the results of these papers shall be taken on record as specified above, though no Honours degree shall
be awarded.
The papers through MOOCs for Honours degree shall not be a part of the set of the papers over which the
SGPA / CGPA of the student shall be calculated.
The papers through MOOCs for Honours degree shall be additional papers studied by the students and are
to be taken into account only for award of Honours in the degree programme, if 20 credits are earned
through MOOCs as approved by APC, by a student. See Clause 13 also.
10. Maximum Credits is at least 200 (Table 1) for students admitted in the 1st year and 1st semester, these are
the credits for which the student shall have to study for the non‐Honours component of the curriculum.
And, for lateral entry students admitted in the 2nd year and 3rd semester of the degree programme, the
maximum credit required to be studied is at least 150 (Table 2). See clause 8 also.
The student has to appear in the examinations for these credits in all components of evaluation as
specified in the scheme of studies.
11. Minimum Credits required to be earned is atleast 180 (out of the 200 non Honours papers credits, see
clause 10 also) for students admitted in the 1st year and 1st semester. And, for lateral entry students
admitted in the 2nd year and 3rd semester of the degree programme, the minimum credit required to be
earned Is at least 135 (out of the 150 non Honours papers credits, see clause 10 also). See clause 6 also.
12. The following degree route can be taken by a student (also refer point 13):
a. The students shall be awarded the degree without any minor specialization under the following
conditions:
i. The student has earned the mandatory credits as defined in Table 1 or Table 2 (as applicable) and
clause 6.
ii. In addition, the total credits (including the above specified credits) earned by the student is atleast
as specified in clause 11.
The degree nomenclature of the degree shall be as: “Bachelor of Technology in Computer Science and
Engineering (Networks)”; if criteria / point 9 is not satisfied for Honours. Otherwise, if criteria / point
9 is met, then the degrees shall be an Honours degree and the nomenclature shall be as: “Bachelor of
Technology in Computer Science and Engineering (Networks) (Honours)”, if in addition to point 12.b.i
and 12.b.ii, the student fulfils the criteria for Honours as specified at point 9.
b. If the student does not fulfil any of the above criterions (point 12.a, or 12.b), if the student earns at
least the minimum credits specified in clause 11 (disregarding the mandatory credits clause of Table 1

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 265
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

or Table 2 (as applicable) and Clause 6), then the student shall be award the degree as “Bachelor of
Technology in Computer Science and Engineering (Networks)”. Such students shall not be eligible for
the award of an Honours degree. Though, if credits are accumulated through MOOCs as per clause 9,
the same shall be reflected in the marksheets of the students.
13. The Honours degree shall only be awarded if the CGPA of the student is above or equal to 7.5 in addition
to fulfilment of criteria / point 10 and 13 above and the degree is awarded after the immediate
completion of the 4th year of the batch from the year of admission. No Honours shall be conferred if the
degree requirements are not completed in the minimum duration.
14. Pass marks in every paper shall be 40.
15. Grading System shall be as per Ordinance 11 of the University.
16. The institution shall offer atleast two elective groups out of the open area for students of each major
discipline. The institute shall decide the group(s) and/or individual papers to be offered as electives based
on the availability of infrastructure and faculty. From the groups / papers offered by the institute, an
elective paper / group shall be taught if and only if the number of students in a paper is at‐least 20 or at‐
least 1/3 of the students of a major discipline for which the paper / group is to be offered. The APC of the
department / institute may define a maximum number of students allowed to register for a paper as an
open area elective.
17. Teachers of the other department(s), as and when deputed by their department, for teaching the students
enrolled in programmes offered by the department offering the programme shall be a part of the
Academic Programme Committee of the discipline. Such teachers, for all academic matters, including
teaching, teachers’ continuous evaluation, term end examinations etc. shall be governed by the decisions
of the APC of department offering the programme of study. Similarly, the guest faculty, the visiting faculty
and the Contract / Ad Hoc faculty as and when deputed to teach students of a particular department shall
form a part of APC of the department.
18. The Paper IDs will be generated / issued / assigned by the Examination Division of the University.

19. The medium of instructions shall be English.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 266
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Bachelor of Technology in Computer Science and Engineering

(Cyber Security) (CSE-CS)
2nd Year Onward Scheme and implementation guideline

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 267
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Third Semester
Paper
Group Paper L P Credits
Code
Theory Papers
ES ES‐201 Computational Methods 4 4
HS/MS HS‐203 Indian Knowledge System* 2 2
PC CIC‐205 Discrete Mathematics 4 4
PC ECC‐207 Digital Logic and Computer Design 4 4
PC CIC‐209 Data Structures 4 4
PC CIC‐211 Object‐Oriented Programming using C++ 4 4
Practical / Viva Voce
ES ES‐251 Computational Methods Lab 2 1
PC ECC‐253 Digital Logic and Computer Design Lab 2 1
PC CIC‐255 Data Structures Lab 2 1
PC CIC‐257 Object‐Oriented Programming using C++ Lab 2 1
Total 22 8 26

*NUES:All examinations to be conducted by the concerned teacher as specified in the detailed syllabus of the paper.

Fourth Semester
Paper
Group Paper L P Credits
Code
Theory Papers
BS BS‐202 Probability, Statistics and Linear Programming 4 4
HS/MS HS‐204 Technical Writing* 2 2
PC CIC‐206 Theory of Computation 4 4
PC EEC‐208 Circuits and Systems 4 4
PC CIC‐210 Database Management Systems 4 4
PC CIC‐212 Programming in Java 4 4
Practical / Viva Voce
BS BS‐252 Probability, Statistics and Linear Programming Lab 2 1
PC EEC‐254 Circuits and Systems Lab 2 1
PC CIC‐256 Database Management Systems Lab 2 1
PC CIC‐258 Programming in Java Lab 2 1
Total 22 8 26

*NUES:All examinations to be conducted by the concerned teacher as specified in the detailed syllabus of the paper.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 268
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Fifth Semester
Paper
Group Paper L P Credits
Code
Theory Papers
HS/MS HS‐301 Economics for Engineers 2 2
PC CIC‐303 Compiler Design 3 3
PC CIC‐305 Operating Systems 4 4
PC CIC‐307 Computer Networks 4 4
PC CIC‐309 Software Engineering 3 3
PC CIC‐311 Design and Analysis of Algorithm 4 4
Practical / Viva Voce
PC CIC‐351 Compiler Design Lab 2 1
PC CIC‐353 Operating Systems Lab 2 1
PC CIC‐355 Computer Networks Lab 2 1
PC CIC‐357 Software Engineering Lab 2 1
PC CIC‐359 Design and Analysis of Algorithm Lab 2 1
PC / Internship ES‐361 Summer Training Report ‐ 1 * 1
Total 20 10 26

*NUES:Comprehensive evaluation of the Summer Training Report – 1 (after 4th Semester) shall be doneby the committee
of teachers, constituted by the Academic Programme Committee, out of 100. The training shall be of 4 to 6 weeks duration.
The training can be under the mentorship of a teacher of the institute.

Sixth Semester
Group Paper Code Paper L P Credits
Theory Papers
HS/MS MS‐302 Principles of Management for Engineers 3 3
HS/MS HS‐304 Universal Human Values* 1 1
PC BT‐308T Blockchain Technology 3 3
PC CS‐310T Information Theory and Coding 3 3
PC CS‐312T Network Security and Cryptography 3 3
PC CS‐316T Cloud Computing and Security 3 3
OAE Open Area Elective Paper (OAE – 1) 4
Practical / Viva Voce
PC BT‐308P Blockchain Technology Lab 2 1
PC CS‐310P Information Theory and Coding Lab 2 1
PC CS‐312P Network Security and Cryptography Lab 2 1
PC CS‐316P Cloud Computing and Security Lab 2 1
NSS / NCC / Cultural Clubs / Technical Society / Technical
HS/MS HS‐352 2
Club*
Total 26

*NUES:All examinations to be conducted by the concerned teacher as specified in the detailed syllabus of the paper.

**NUES: Comprehensive evaluation of the students by the concerned coordinator of NCC / NSS / Cultural Clubs / Technical
Society / Technical Clubs, out of 100 as per the evaluation schemes worked out by these activity societies, organizations; the
faculty co‐ordinators shall be responsible for the evaluation of the same. These activities shall start from the 1st semester
and the evaluation shall be conducted at the end of the 6th semester for students admitted in the first semester. Students
nd rd
admitted in the 2 year (3 semester) as lateral entry shall be evaluated on the basis their performance, by the faculty co‐
rd th
ordinator for the period of 3 semester to 6 semester only.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 269
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Seventh Semester
Group Paper Code Paper L P Credits
Theory Papers
HS/MS MS‐401 Principles of Entrepreneurship Mindset 2 2
PC CS‐421 Cyber Crime and Cyber Laws 4 4
PC CS‐423T Cyber Security and Forensics 3 3
PC CS‐425T Ethical Hacking 3 3
PC CS‐429T Network Security Issues and Challenges 3 3
OAE Open Area Elective Paper (OAE – 2) 4
Practical / Viva Voce
PC CS‐423P Cyber Security and Forensics Lab 2 1
PC CS‐425P Ethical Hacking Lab 2 1
PC CS‐429P Network Security Issues and Challenges Lab 2 1
PC / Project ES‐451 Minor Project** 3
PC / Internship ES‐453 Summer Training (after 6th semester) Report * 1
Total 26

*NUES:Comprehensive evaluation of the Summer Training Report – 2 (after 6th Semester) shall be done by the committee
of teachers, constituted by the Academic Programme Committee, out of 100. The training shall be of 4 to 6 weeks duration.
The training can be under the mentorship of a teacher of the institute.

**The student shall be allocated a supervisor / guide for project work at the end 6th semester by the department /
institution, the project shall continue into the 8th semester. In the 7th semester evaluation, the criteria for evaluation shall
be conceptualization of the project work, the background study / literature survey and identification of objectives and
methodology to be followed for project. 40 marks evaluation for the Teachers' Continuous Evaluation / Internal Assessment
shall be done by concerned supervisor while the term end examination of 60 marks shall be conducted by the supervisor
concerned and the external examiner deputed by the Examinations Division. In the absence of the supervisor, the Director
of the Institution / Head of the Department can assign the responsibility of the supervisor (for purpose of examinations) to
any faculty of the Institution / Department.

Eight Semester
Paper
Group Paper L P Credits
Code
Practical / Viva Voce%
ES‐452 Major Project – Dissertation and Viva Voce# 18
PC / Project
ES‐454 Project Progress Evaluation* 2
ES‐456 Internship Report and Viva Voce# 18
PC / Internship
ES‐458 Internship Progress Evaluation* 2
Total 0 0 20

*NUES: Comprehensive evaluation by the committee of teachers, constituted by the Academic Programme
Committee, out of 100.

%By default every student shall do the project work (ES‐452 and ES‐454). A student shall either be allowed to
do a project work (ES‐452 and ES‐454) or an internship (ES‐456 and ES‐458). The student must apply for
approval to do internship before the commencement of the 8th semester to the institute, and only after
approval of Principal / Director of the institute through Training and Placement Officer of the institute, shall
proceed for internship.

#Students may be allowed to do internship in this semester in lieu of Major project. The students allowed to
proceed for internship shall be required to maintain a log‐book of activities performed during internship. The
same has to be countersigned by the mentor at the organization where internship is completed.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 270
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

ES‐452: Evaluation shall be conducted of 40 marks (Teachers’ continuous evaluation / internal assessment) by
the supervisor. And, 60 marks by a bench of the supervisor and the external examiner deputed by Examination
Division (COE), for a total of 100 marks.

ES‐454 / ES‐458: Comprehensive evaluation by the committee of teachers, constituted by the Academic
Programme Committee, out of 100.

ES‐456: Evaluation shall be conducted of 40 marks (Teachers’ continuous evaluation / internal assessment) by
the Training and Placement Officer of the department / institute on the basis of the report submitted by the
student. And, 60 marks by a bench of the Training and Placement Officer of the department / institute and the
external examiner deputed by Examination Division (COE), for a total of 100 marks.

In the absence of the supervisor or the Training and Placement Officer (as the case may be), the Director of the
institute / Head of the Department can assign the responsibility of the supervisor or the Training and Placement
Officer (for purpose of examinations) to any faculty of the department.

Note on Elective Papers: The elective papers shall be allowed to be taken / studied by the students, by the
APC of the department / institute, keeping in view that two papers studied by the student should not have a
substantial overlap. All papers studied by the student should be substantially distinct in content.

Note on Examination of Elective Papers:

(a) Papers with only theory component shall have 25 Marks continuous evaluation by the teacher and 75
Marks term‐end examinations. Both these component marks shall be reflected on the marksheet of the
student.
(b) Papers with only practical component shall have 40 Marks continuous evaluation by the teacher and 60
Marks term‐end examinations. Both these component marks shall be reflected on the marksheet of the
student.

Note on Continuous Evaluation of All Papers:

(a) Papers with only theory component shall have 25 Marks continuous evaluation by the teacher which shall
be evaluated as:
i. Mid‐Term Test* ‐ 15 Marks (after 8 weeks of teaching or as
decided by PCC)
ii. Assignments / Project / Quiz / Case Studies, etc. ‐ 5 Marks
iii. Attendance / Class Participation ‐ 5 Marks
(b) Papers with only practical component shall have 40Marks continuous evaluation by the teacher which shall
be evaluated as:
i. Mid‐Term Test and Viva Voce ‐ 20 Marks (after 8 weeks of teaching or as
decided by PCC)
ii. Practical File ‐ 10 Marks
iii. Attendance / Lab Participation ‐ 10 Marks

* The mid‐term test shall be coordinated by the Programme Coordination Committee.

If a student could not appear for a mid‐term test due to situation beyond the control by the student, a
supplementary test may be arranged towards the end of the semester, in a similar manner to the mid‐term
test for such students. The students must apply for this provision to the department / institution. On
examination of the reason for non‐appearing in the mid‐term test by the Head of the Department / Institute,
and with reason for allowing to appear in the supplementary test to recorded by the Head of the Department
/ Institute, the student may be allowed.

The attendance sheets, the question papers and the award sheets for the continuous evaluation to be
retained by the concerned department / institute for at least 6 months after the declaration of the result by
the Examination Division of the University.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 271
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Open Area Electives

Semester Paper Code OAE – 1 (Choose Any One) L P Credits
6 ES‐304 Real Time Operating Systems 4 4
ES‐306T Embedded System Architecture and Design 3 3
6
ES‐306P Embedded System Architecture and Design Lab 2 1
FSD‐320T Web Development using MEAN Stack 3 3
6
FSD‐320P Web Development using MEAN Stack Lab 2 1
FSD‐322T Web Development using MERN Stack 3 3
6
FSD‐322P Web Development using MERN Stack Lab 2 1
OSD‐330T Programming in Windows Environment 3 3
6
OSD‐330P Programming in Windows Environment Lab 2 1
OSD‐334T Android App Development 3 3
6
OSD‐334P Android App Development Lab 2 1
IPCV‐334T Digital Image Processing 3 3
6
IPCV‐334P Digital Image Processing Lab 2 1
Understanding Human Being, Nature and Existence
6 4 4
OUHV‐338 Comprehensively
6 OUHV‐340 Vision for Humane Society 4 4
SE‐350T Software Measurements, Metrics and Modelling 3 3
6
SE‐350P Software Measurements, Metrics and Modelling Lab 2 1
SE‐352T Service Oriented Architecture 3 3
6
SE‐352P Service Oriented Architecture Lab 2 1
SE‐354T Software Project Management 3 3
6
SE‐354P Software Project Management Lab 2 1
6 MOOCs (Swayam / NPTEL) 4
Semester Paper Code OAE – 2 (Choose Any One) L P Credits
ES‐403T VHDL Programming 3 3
7
ES‐403P VHDL Programming Lab 2 1
ES‐405T Real Time Embedded System Programming 3 3
7
ES‐405P Real Time Embedded System Programming Lab 2 1
FSD‐435T PHP Programming and MySQL 3 3
7
FSD‐435P PHP Programming and MySQL Lab 2 1
MAC‐409T Robotics Engineering 3 3
7
MAC‐409P Robotics Engineering Lab 2 1
OECE‐417T Microprocessors and Interfacing 3 3
7
OECE‐417P Microprocessors and Interfacing Lab 2 1
OECE‐419T Analog and Digital Communications 3 3
7
OECE‐419P Analog and Digital Communications Lab 2 1
OECE‐421T Wireless Sensor Networks 3 3
7
OECE‐421P Wireless Sensor Networks Lab 2 1
OSD‐449T Design Patterns 3 3
7
OSD‐449P Design Patterns Lab 2 1
OSD‐453T Advanced Java Programming 3 3
7
OSD‐453P Advanced Java Programming Lab 2 1
OSD‐455T Programming in Linux Environment 3 3
7
OSD‐455P Programming in Linux Environment Lab 2 1
7 OUHV‐463 Holistic Human Health 4 4
SC‐479T Global Optimization Methods 3 3
7
SC‐479P Global Optimization Methods Lab 2 1
SE‐487T Software Verification, Validation and Testing 3 3
7
SE‐487P Software Verification, Validation and Testing Lab 2 1
7 MOOCs (Swayam / NPTEL) 4

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 272
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Note:
1. Each OAE slot is of 4 credits, if in a particular slot, the paper has no practical component, then it is of 4 credits
(a pure theory paper), otherwise for purpose of examination and conduct of classes, the course is split in two
papers, namely a theory paper of 3 credits and a practical paper of 1 credit. The student has to study for 4
credits per slot of OAE group. This is reflected by suffixing the paper code by T (for Theory component) and P
(for Practical component), if required

2. The Open Area Electives described / enumerated are the one offered by engineering departments. If other
departments, offering minor specialization or elective papers as open area electives to engineering students
(approved by the university Academic Council) are possible at the concerned institution, the same may also be
offered to the engineering students studying in the major disciplines under the aegis of the University School of
Information, Communication and Technology. The APC of the department / intuition shall allow the choice of
such electives, provided they follow the credit framework of the programme of study for open area electives.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 273
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Implementation Rules:

1. The examinations, attendance criteria to appear in examinations, promotion and award of the degree
shall be governed by the Ordinance 11 of the University. The term “major discipline” / “primary discipline”
in this document refers to the discipline in which student is admitted / studies from 3rd semester onwards.
However credits of courses / paper for OAE / EAE groups shall not be considered for the purpose of
promotion from one year of study to the subsequent year of study.
2. Minimum duration of the Bachelor of Technology programme shall be 4 years (N=4 years) (8 semesters)
for the students admitted in the 1st year and 1st semester of the degree programme. Lateral entry students
shall be admitted in the 2nd year and 3rd semester of the degree programme (effectively in the batch
admitted in the first year in the previous academic session and shall be deemed to have been exempted
from the courses / papers of the first year of the degree programme. No exemption certificate shall be
issued in any case.
A specific lateral entry students’ minimum duration shall be the same as the minimum duration for the
batch in which he/she is admitted as a lateral entry student in the 2nd year.
3. Maximum duration of the Bachelor of Technology programme shall be 6 years (N+2 years). After
completion of N+2 years of study, if the student has appeared in the papers of all the semesters upto 8th
semester, then a maximum extension of 1 year may be given to the student for completing the
requirements of the degree if and only if the number of credits already earned by the student is atleast 150
(for lateral entry students it shall be at least 102 credits) from the (non‐honours components). Otherwise,
the admission of the student shall stand cancelled. After the period of allowed study, the admission of the
student shall be cancelled.
A specific lateral entry students’ maximum duration shall be the same as the minimum duration for the
batch in which he/she is admitted as a lateral entry student in the 2nd year.
4. The degree shall be awarded only after the fulfilment of all requirements of the Scheme and Syllabus of
Examinations and the applicable Ordinance.
5. (a) The students shall undergo the following group of Courses / Papers as enumerated in the scheme (For
the students admitted in the First Year / First Semester).

Semester (Credits) Total Mandatory

Group
I & II III IV V VI VII VIII Credits Credits

BS 24 5 29 14

HS/MS 6 2 2 2 6 2 20 10

ES 20 5 25 15

PC 19 19 24 16 20 20 118 104

OAE 4 4 8 4

Total 50 26 26 26 26 26 20 200 147

TABLE 1: Distribution of Credits (Project / Internship credits are 25 out the 118 credits for Programme
Core (PC) credits, while extra‐curricular activities credits are 2 out of 20 credits for Humanities /
Management / Social Science Group (HS/MS)) . This table is for students admitted in the First Year / First
Semester of the Degree Programme.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 274
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

(b) The students admitted as Lateral Entry shall undergo the following group of Courses / Papers as
enumerated in the scheme.

Semester (Credits) Total Mandatory

Group
III IV V VI VII VIII Credits Credits

BS 5 5 0

HS/MS 2 2 2 6 2 14 7

ES 5 5 0

PC 19 19 24 16 20 20 118 104

OAE 4 4 8 4

Total 26 26 26 26 26 20 150 115

TABLE 2: Distribution of Credits (Project / Internship credits are 25 out the 118 credits for Programme
Core (PC) credits, while extra‐curricular activities credits are 2 out of 14 credits for Humanities /
Management / Social Science Group (HS/MS)) This table is for students admitted as Lateral Entry
Students in the Second Year / Third Semester of the Degree Programme.

6. Mandatory Credits specify the number of credits from each subject group to be mandatorily acquired by
the student for the award of the degree,for students admitted as students in the 1st year and 1st semester
of the degree programme. While for students admitted as lateral entry in the 2nd year and 3rd semester
the Mandatory Credits value is 115, and specify the number of credits from each subject group to be
mandatorily acquired by the student for the award of the degree (Table 2). See clause 11 and 12 also.
7. Some of the papers are droppable in the sense that the student may qualify for the award of the degree
even when the student has not cleared / passed some of the papers of these group. However, the student
has to earn the minimum credits for the programme of study as specified. See clause 11 and 12 also.
8. The students may take 2 subjects from OAE group. The open electives of the OAE group of courses may
also be taken through SWAYAM / NPTEL MOOCs platform. The student desirous of doing a MOOC based
course among the OAE group must seek approval of the APC of the institute for the same before the
commencement of the semester. The APC shall allow the MOOC based OAE option to the student if and
only if the MOOC subject / course being considered for the student is being offered in line with the
Academic Calendar applicable. The student shall submit the successful completion certificate with marks to
the institution for onwards transfer to the Examination Division. The Examinations Division shall take these
marks on record for incorporation in the result of the appropriate semester. These marks / grades of these
courses shall be used for calculation of the SGPA/CGPA of the student concerned by the examination
division of the University. The degree to the student on fulfilment of other requirements for such cases
shall be through clause 12.a. or 12.b.
These MOOC courses taken by the students, if allowed by the APC of the institute shall be of 4 credits or
more collectively to be against or for one paper slot in the scheme, through MOOCs, though the marks
shall be shown individually. That is in one paper slot in the scheme wherever a MOOC course is allowed,
the student may register for more than one paper to aggregate 4 credits or more. If the credits of these
MOOC Courses, allowed to a student is more than 4, then the maximum credit for the programme shall
be amended accordingly for the particular student. Also, in a particular semester, a student may take
more than one MOOC course with the approval of the APC to meet the credit requirements of OAE for the
semester. The cost of taking the MOOC course is to be borne by the concerned student. The results of the
MOOC courses shall be declared separately by the Examination Division from the result for the papers
conducted by the examination division of the University.
No minor specialization shall be offered / awarded.
9. To earn an Honours degree, the student may enrol for 20 credits or more through SWAYAM / NPTEL
MOOCs platform. This point has to be read together with other points specially point 13 and 14. The

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 275
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

acquisition of the credits should be completed before the 15th of the July of the Admission Year plus 4
years. That is, if a student is admitted in the year X, then these credits must be acquired through MOOCs by
15th July of the year (X+4), no extra duration or time shall be allocated, this means, the student must
submit the result of such papers on or before 15th July of the Admission Year plus 4 years.
Honours in the degree shall be awarded if and only if at least 20 credits are acquired through MOOCs. To
obtain Honours in the programme, the student must apply to the institution about the same before the
commencement of the 5th semester. The specific courses through MOOCs shall be registered by the
student only after approval by the Academic Programme Committee (APC) of the Institute. The APC shall
approve the course if it is not already studied by the student or the student shall not study it in future and
adds value to the major area of specialization (which is the degree). The papers for which the student
desires to appear for Honours through MOOCs, all papers results shall be submitted by the student to the
Institute for onwards transfer to Examination Division of the University, to be taken on record of the
University. The results of these papers shall be a part of the records of the examinations of the students.
The records shall be submitted by the student to the Institute, then transferred to the Examination
Division, shall be notified by the Examination Division of the University, and a separate marksheet shall be
issued by the Examination Division. The cost of taking the MOOC course is to be borne by the concerned
student. Such courses shall be reflected as additional courses / papers for the student.
If a student acquires less than 20 credits through MOOCs, following the mechanism specified, then also
the results of these papers shall be taken on record as specified above, though no Honours degree shall
be awarded.
The papers through MOOCs for Honours degree shall not be a part of the set of the papers over which the
SGPA / CGPA of the student shall be calculated.
The papers through MOOCs for Honours degree shall be additional papers studied by the students and are
to be taken into account only for award of Honours in the degree programme, if 20 credits are earned
through MOOCs as approved by APC, by a student. See Clause 13 also.
10. Maximum Credits is at least 200 (Table 1) for students admitted in the 1st year and 1st semester, these are
the credits for which the student shall have to study for the non‐Honours component of the curriculum.
And, for lateral entry students admitted in the 2nd year and 3rd semester of the degree programme, the
maximum credit required to be studied is at least 150 (Table 2). See clause 8 also.
The student has to appear in the examinations for these credits in all components of evaluation as
specified in the scheme of studies.
11. Minimum Credits required to be earned is atleast 180 (out of the 200 non Honours papers credits, see
clause 10 also) for students admitted in the 1st year and 1st semester. And, for lateral entry students
admitted in the 2nd year and 3rd semester of the degree programme, the minimum credit required to be
earned Is at least 135 (out of the 150 non Honours papers credits, see clause 10 also). See clause 6 also.
12. The following degree route can be taken by a student (also refer point 13):
a. The students shall be awarded the degree without any minor specialization under the following
conditions:
i. The student has earned the mandatory credits as defined in Table 1 or Table 2 (as applicable) and
clause 6.
ii. In addition, the total credits (including the above specified credits) earned by the student is atleast
as specified in clause 11.
The degree nomenclature of the degree shall be as: “Bachelor of Technology in Computer Science and
Engineering (Cyber Security)”; if criteria / point 9 is not satisfied for Honours. Otherwise, if criteria /
point 9 is met, then the degrees shall be an Honours degree and the nomenclature shall be as:
“Bachelor of Technology in Computer Science and Engineering (Cyber Security) (Honours)”, if in
addition to point 12.b.i and 12.b.ii, the student fulfils the criteria for Honours as specified at point 9.
b. If the student does not fulfil any of the above criterions (point 12.a, or 12.b), if the student earns at
least the minimum credits specified in clause 11 (disregarding the mandatory credits clause of Table 1

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 276
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

or Table 2 (as applicable) and Clause 6), then the student shall be award the degree as “Bachelor of
Technology in Computer Science and Engineering (Cyber Security)”. Such students shall not be eligible
for the award of an Honours degree. Though, if credits are accumulated through MOOCs as per clause
9, the same shall be reflected in the marksheets of the students.
13. The Honours degree shall only be awarded if the CGPA of the student is above or equal to 7.5 in addition
to fulfilment of criteria / point 10 and 13 above and the degree is awarded after the immediate
completion of the 4th year of the batch from the year of admission. No Honours shall be conferred if the
degree requirements are not completed in the minimum duration.
14. Pass marks in every paper shall be 40.
15. Grading System shall be as per Ordinance 11 of the University.
16. The institution shall offer atleast two elective groups out of the open area for students of each major
discipline. The institute shall decide the group(s) and/or individual papers to be offered as electives based
on the availability of infrastructure and faculty. From the groups / papers offered by the institute, an
elective paper / group shall be taught if and only if the number of students in a paper is at‐least 20 or at‐
least 1/3 of the students of a major discipline for which the paper / group is to be offered. The APC of the
department / institute may define a maximum number of students allowed to register for a paper as an
open area elective.
17. Teachers of the other department(s), as and when deputed by their department, for teaching the students
enrolled in programmes offered by the department offering the programme shall be a part of the
Academic Programme Committee of the discipline. Such teachers, for all academic matters, including
teaching, teachers’ continuous evaluation, term end examinations etc. shall be governed by the decisions
of the APC of department offering the programme of study. Similarly, the guest faculty, the visiting faculty
and the Contract / Ad Hoc faculty as and when deputed to teach students of a particular department shall
form a part of APC of the department.
18. The Paper IDs will be generated / issued / assigned by the Examination Division of the University.

19. The medium of instructions shall be English.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 277
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Bachelor of Technology in Electronics Engineering (VLSI Design

and Technology) (EE-VDT)
2nd Year Onward Scheme and implementation guideline

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 278
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Third Semester
Paper
Group Paper L P Credits
Code
Theory Papers
ES ES‐201 Computational Methods 4 4
HS/MS HS‐203 Indian Knowledge System* 2 2
PC ECC‐205 Signals and Systems 3 3
PC ECC‐207 Digital Logic and Computer Design 4 4
PC ECC‐209 Analog Communications 4 4
PC ECC‐211 Analog Electronics‐I 4 4
Practical / Viva Voce
ES ES‐251 Computational Methods Lab 2 1
PC ECC‐253 Digital Logic and Computer Design Lab 2 1
PC ECC‐255 Analog Communications Lab 2 1
PC ECC‐257 Analog Electronics‐I Lab 2 1
PC ECC‐259 Signals and Systems Lab 2 1
Total 21 10 26

*NUES:All examinations to be conducted by the concerned teacher as specified in the detailed syllabus of the paper.

Fourth Semester
Paper
Group Paper L P Credits
Code
Theory Papers
BS BS‐202 Probability, Statistics and Linear Programming 4 4
HS/MS HS‐204 Technical Writing* 2 2
PC EEC‐206 Network Analysis and Synthesis 3 3
PC ECC‐210 Microprocessors and Microcontrollers 3 3
PC ECC‐212 Digital Communications 3 3
PC ECC‐214 Analog Electronics‐II 3 3
PC ECC‐216 Electromagnetic Field Theory 3 3
Practical / Viva Voce
BS BS‐252 Probability, Statistics and Linear Programming Lab 2 1
PC ECC‐256 Microprocessors and Microcontrollers Lab 2 1
PC ECC‐258 Digital Communications Lab 2 1
PC ECC‐260 Analog Electronics‐II Lab 2 1
PC EEC‐262 Network Analysis and Synthesis Lab 2 1
Total 21 10 26

*NUES:All examinations to be conducted by the concerned teacher as specified in the detailed syllabus of the paper.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 279
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Fifth Semester
Group Paper Code Paper L P Credits
Theory Papers
HS/MS HS‐301 Economics for Engineers 2 2
PC ECC‐303 Digital Signal Processing 4 4
PC ECC‐305 Microelectronics 3 3
PC EEC‐307 Introduction to Control Systems 3 3
PC ECC‐309 Transmission Lines, Waveguides and Antenna Design 4 4
PC ECC‐311 Data Communication and Networking 4 4
Practical / Viva Voce
PC ECC‐351 Digital Signal Processing Lab 2 1
PC ECC‐353 Microelectronics Lab 2 1
PC EEC‐355 Introduction to Control Systems Lab 2 1
PC ECC‐357 Transmission Lines, Waveguides and Antenna Design Lab 2 1
PC ECC‐359 Data Communication and Networking Lab 2 1
PC / Internship ES‐361 Summer Training Report ‐ 1 * 1
Total 20 10 26

*NUES:Comprehensive evaluation of the Summer Training Report – 1 (after 4th Semester) shall be done by the committee
of teachers, constituted by the Academic Programme Committee, out of 100. The training shall be of 4 to 6 weeks duration.
The training can be under the mentorship of a teacher of the institute.

Sixth Semester
Group Paper Code Paper L P Credits
Theory Papers
HS/MS MS‐302 Principles of Management for Engineers 3 3
HS/MS HS‐304 Universal Human Values* 1 1
PC ES‐306T Embedded System Architecture and Design 3 3
PC ECE‐306T VHDL Programming 3 3
PC VLSI‐328T Semiconductor Devices and Modelling 3 3
PC VLSI‐330T VLSI 3 3
OAE Open Area Elective Paper (OAE – 1) 4
Practical / Viva Voce
PC ES‐306P Embedded System Architecture and Design Lab 2 1
PC ECE‐306P VHDL Programming Lab 2 1
PC VLSI‐328P Semiconductor Devices and Modelling Lab 2 1
PC VLSI‐330P VLSI Lab 2 1
NSS / NCC / Cultural Clubs / Technical Society / Technical
HS/MS HS‐352 2
Club*
Total 26

*NUES:All examinations to be conducted by the concerned teacher as specified in the detailed syllabus of the paper.

**NUES: Comprehensive evaluation of the students by the concerned coordinator of NCC / NSS / Cultural Clubs / Technical
Society / Technical Clubs, out of 100 as per the evaluation schemes worked out by these activity societies, organizations; the
faculty co‐ordinators shall be responsible for the evaluation of the same. These activities shall start from the 1st semester
and the evaluation shall be conducted at the end of the 6th semester for students admitted in the first semester. Students
nd rd
admitted in the 2 year (3 semester) as lateral entry shall be evaluated on the basis their performance, by the faculty co‐
rd th
ordinator for the period of 3 semester to 6 semester only.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 280
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Seventh Semester
Group Paper Code Paper L P Credits
Theory Papers
HS/MS MS‐401 Principles of Entrepreneurship Mindset 2 2
PC VLSI‐443T CMOS Analog Integrated Circuit Design 3 3
PC VLSI‐445T CMOS Digital Circuits Design 3 3
PC VLSI‐449T Low Power VLSI Design 3 3
PC VLSI‐451 VLSI Testing 4 4
OAE Open Area Elective Paper (OAE – 2) 4
Practical / Viva Voce
PC VLSI‐443P CMOS Analog Integrated Circuit Design Lab 2 1
PC VLSI‐445P CMOS Digital Circuits Design Lab 2 1
PC VLSI‐449P Low Power VLSI Design Lab 2 1
PC / Project ES‐451 Minor Project** 3
PC / Internship ES‐453 Summer Training (after 6th semester) Report * 1
Total 26

*NUES:Comprehensive evaluation of the Summer Training Report – 2 (after 6th Semester) shall be done by the committee
of teachers, constituted by the Academic Programme Committee, out of 100. The training shall be of 4 to 6 weeks duration.
The training can be under the mentorship of a teacher of the institute.

**The student shall be allocated a supervisor / guide for project work at the end 6th semester by the department /
institution, the project shall continue into the 8th semester. In the 7th semester evaluation, the criteria for evaluation shall
be conceptualization of the project work, the background study / literature survey and identification of objectives and
methodology to be followed for project. 40 marks evaluation for the Teachers' Continuous Evaluation / Internal Assessment
shall be done by concerned supervisor while the term end examination of 60 marks shall be conducted by the supervisor
concerned and the external examiner deputed by the Examinations Division. In the absence of the supervisor, the Director
of the Institution / Head of the Department can assign the responsibility of the supervisor (for purpose of examinations) to
any faculty of the Institution / Department.

Eight Semester
Paper
Group Paper L P Credits
Code
Practical / Viva Voce%
ES‐452 Major Project – Dissertation and Viva Voce# 18
PC / Project
ES‐454 Project Progress Evaluation* 2
ES‐456 Internship Report and Viva Voce# 18
PC / Internship
ES‐458 Internship Progress Evaluation* 2
Total 0 0 20

*NUES: Comprehensive evaluation by the committee of teachers, constituted by the Academic Programme
Committee, out of 100.

%By default every student shall do the project work (ES‐452 and ES‐454). A student shall either be allowed to
do a project work (ES‐452 and ES‐454) or an internship (ES‐456 and ES‐458). The student must apply for
approval to do internship before the commencement of the 8th semester to the institute, and only after
approval of Principal / Director of the institute through Training and Placement Officer of the institute, shall
proceed for internship.

#Students may be allowed to do internship in this semester in lieu of Major project. The students allowed to
proceed for internship shall be required to maintain a log‐book of activities performed during internship. The
same has to be countersigned by the mentor at the organization where internship is completed.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 281
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

ES‐452: Evaluation shall be conducted of 40 marks (Teachers’ continuous evaluation / internal assessment) by
the supervisor. And, 60 marks by a bench of the supervisor and the external examiner deputed by Examination
Division (COE), for a total of 100 marks.

ES‐454 / ES‐458: Comprehensive evaluation by the committee of teachers, constituted by the Academic
Programme Committee, out of 100.

ES‐456: Evaluation shall be conducted of 40 marks (Teachers’ continuous evaluation / internal assessment) by
the Training and Placement Officer of the department / institute on the basis of the report submitted by the
student. And, 60 marks by a bench of the Training and Placement Officer of the department / institute and the
external examiner deputed by Examination Division (COE), for a total of 100 marks.

In the absence of the supervisor or the Training and Placement Officer (as the case may be), the Director of the
institute / Head of the Department can assign the responsibility of the supervisor or the Training and Placement
Officer (for purpose of examinations) to any faculty of the department.

Note on Elective Papers: The elective papers shall be allowed to be taken / studied by the students, by the
APC of the department / institute, keeping in view that two papers studied by the student should not have a
substantial overlap. All papers studied by the student should be substantially distinct in content.

Note on Examination of Elective Papers:

(a) Papers with only theory component shall have 25 Marks continuous evaluation by the teacher and 75
Marks term‐end examinations. Both these component marks shall be reflected on the marksheet of the
student.
(b) Papers with only practical component shall have 40 Marks continuous evaluation by the teacher and 60
Marks term‐end examinations. Both these component marks shall be reflected on the marksheet of the
student.

Note on Continuous Evaluation of All Papers:

(a) Papers with only theory component shall have 25 Marks continuous evaluation by the teacher which shall
be evaluated as:
i. Mid‐Term Test* ‐ 15 Marks (after 8 weeks of teaching or as
decided by PCC)
ii. Assignments / Project / Quiz / Case Studies, etc. ‐ 5 Marks
iii. Attendance / Class Participation ‐ 5 Marks
(b) Papers with only practical component shall have 40Marks continuous evaluation by the teacher which shall
be evaluated as:
i. Mid‐Term Test and Viva Voce ‐ 20 Marks (after 8 weeks of teaching or as
decided by PCC)
ii. Practical File ‐ 10 Marks
iii. Attendance / Lab Participation ‐ 10 Marks

* The mid‐term test shall be coordinated by the Programme Coordination Committee.

If a student could not appear for a mid‐term test due to situation beyond the control by the student, a
supplementary test may be arranged towards the end of the semester, in a similar manner to the mid‐term
test for such students. The students must apply for this provision to the department / institution. On
examination of the reason for non‐appearing in the mid‐term test by the Head of the Department / Institute,
and with reason for allowing to appear in the supplementary test to recorded by the Head of the Department
/ Institute, the student may be allowed.
The attendance sheets, the question papers and the award sheets for the continuous evaluation to be
retained by the concerned department / institute for at least 6 months after the declaration of the result by
the Examination Division of the University.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 282
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Open Area Electives

Semester Paper Code OAE – 1 (Choose Any One) L P Credits
6 ES‐304 Real Time Operating Systems 4 4
WMC‐336T Wireless Communication and Networks 3 3
6
WMC‐336P Wireless Communication and Networks Lab 2 1
OCSE‐306T C++ Programming 3 3
6
OCSE‐306P C++ Programming Lab 2 1
OCSE‐342T Programming in Java 3 3
6
OCSE‐342P Programming in Java Lab 2 1
AI‐316T Artificial Intelligence and Machine Learning 3 3
6
AI‐316P Artificial Intelligence and Machine Learning Lab 2 1
OSD‐334T Android App Development 3 3
6
OSD‐334P Android App Development Lab 2 1
IPCV‐334T Digital Image Processing 3 3
6
IPCV‐334P Digital Image Processing Lab 2 1
Understanding Human Being, Nature and Existence
6 4 4
OUHV‐338 Comprehensively
6 OUHV‐340 Vision for Humane Society 4 4
CS‐312T Network Security and Cryptography 3 3
6
CS‐312P Network Security and Cryptography Lab 2 1
IOT‐324T Introduction to Internet of Things 3 3
6
IOT‐324P Introduction to Internet of Things Lab 2 1
IOT‐326T Introduction to Sensors and Transducers 3 3
6
IOT‐326P Introduction to Sensors and Transducers Lab 2 1
6 MOOCs (Swayam / NPTEL) 4
Semester Paper Code OAE – 2 (Choose Any One) L P Credits
WMC‐453T Ad hoc and Sensor Networks 3 3
7
WMC‐453P Ad hoc and Sensor Networks Lab 2 1
ES‐405T Real Time Embedded System Programming 3 3
7
ES‐405P Real Time Embedded System Programming Lab 2 1
FSD‐435T PHP Programming and MySQL 3 3
7
FSD‐435P PHP Programming and MySQL Lab 2 1
MAC‐409T Robotics Engineering 3 3
7
MAC‐409P Robotics Engineering Lab 2 1
OSD‐445T Data Structures and Algorithms 3 3
7
OSD‐445P Data Structures and Algorithms Lab 2 1
OCSE‐407T Introduction to Database Management Systems 3 3
7
OCSE‐407P Introduction to Database Management Systems Lab 2 1
SC‐401T Soft Computing 3 3
7
SC‐401P Soft Computing Lab 2 1
DS‐427T Data Science using R 3 3
7
DS‐427P Data Science using R Lab 2 1
IOT‐441T IoT with Arduino, ESP and Raspberry Pi 3 3
7
IOT‐441P IoT with Arduino, ESP and Raspberry Pi Lab 2 1
NET‐473T Cloud Computing and Security 3 3
7
NET‐473P Cloud Computing and Security Lab 2 1
7 OUHV‐463 Holistic Human Health 4 4
FSD‐437T Mobile App Development 3 3
7
FSD‐437P Mobile App Development Lab 2 1
IPCV‐461T Machine Learning for Image and Vision Analysis 3 3
7
IPCV‐461P Machine Learning for Image and Vision Analysis Lab 2 1
7 MOOCs (Swayam / NPTEL) 4

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 283
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Note:
1. Each OAE slot is of 4 credits, if in a particular slot, the paper has no practical component, then it is of 4 credits
(a pure theory paper), otherwise for purpose of examination and conduct of classes, the course is split in two
papers, namely a theory paper of 3 credits and a practical paper of 1 credit. The student has to study for 4
credits per slot of OAE group. This is reflected by suffixing the paper code by T (for Theory component) and P
(for Practical component), if required

2. The Open Area Electives described / enumerated are the one offered by engineering departments. If other
departments, offering minor specialization or elective papers as open area electives to engineering students
(approved by the university Academic Council) are possible at the concerned institution, the same may also be
offered to the engineering students studying in the major disciplines under the aegis of the University School of
Information, Communication and Technology. The APC of the department / intuition shall allow the choice of
such electives, provided they follow the credit framework of the programme of study for open area electives.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 284
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Implementation Rules:

1. The examinations, attendance criteria to appear in examinations, promotion and award of the degree
shall be governed by the Ordinance 11 of the University. The term “major discipline” / “primary discipline”
in this document refers to the discipline in which student is admitted / studies from 3rd semester onwards.
However credits of courses / paper for OAE / EAE groups shall not be considered for the purpose of
promotion from one year of study to the subsequent year of study.
2. Minimum duration of the Bachelor of Technology programme shall be 4 years (N=4 years) (8 semesters)
for the students admitted in the 1st year and 1st semester of the degree programme. Lateral entry students
shall be admitted in the 2nd year and 3rd semester of the degree programme (effectively in the batch
admitted in the first year in the previous academic session and shall be deemed to have been exempted
from the courses / papers of the first year of the degree programme. No exemption certificate shall be
issued in any case.
A specific lateral entry students’ minimum duration shall be the same as the minimum duration for the
batch in which he/she is admitted as a lateral entry student in the 2nd year.
3. Maximum duration of the Bachelor of Technology programme shall be 6 years (N+2 years). After
completion of N+2 years of study, if the student has appeared in the papers of all the semesters upto 8th
semester, then a maximum extension of 1 year may be given to the student for completing the
requirements of the degree if and only if the number of credits already earned by the student is atleast 150
(for lateral entry students it shall be at least 102 credits) from the (non‐honours components). Otherwise,
the admission of the student shall stand cancelled. After the period of allowed study, the admission of the
student shall be cancelled.
A specific lateral entry students’ maximum duration shall be the same as the minimum duration for the
batch in which he/she is admitted as a lateral entry student in the 2nd year.
4. The degree shall be awarded only after the fulfilment of all requirements of the Scheme and Syllabus of
Examinations and the applicable Ordinance.
5. (a) The students shall undergo the following group of Courses / Papers as enumerated in the scheme (For
the students admitted in the First Year / First Semester).

Semester (Credits) Total Mandatory

Group
I & II III IV V VI VII VIII Credits Credits

BS 24 5 29 14

HS/MS 6 2 2 2 6 2 20 10

ES 20 5 25 15

PC 19 19 24 16 20 20 118 104

OAE 4 4 8 4

Total 50 26 26 26 26 26 20 200 147

TABLE 1: Distribution of Credits (Project / Internship credits are 25 out the 118 credits for Programme
Core (PC) credits, while extra‐curricular activities credits are 2 out of 20 credits for Humanities /
Management / Social Science Group (HS/MS)) . This table is for students admitted in the First Year / First
Semester of the Degree Programme.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 285
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

(b) The students admitted as Lateral Entry shall undergo the following group of Courses / Papers as
enumerated in the scheme.

Semester (Credits) Total Mandatory

Group
III IV V VI VII VIII Credits Credits

BS 5 5 0

HS/MS 2 2 2 6 2 14 7

ES 5 5 0

PC 19 19 24 16 20 20 118 104

OAE 4 4 8 4

Total 26 26 26 26 26 20 150 115

TABLE 2: Distribution of Credits (Project / Internship credits are 25 out the 118 credits for Programme
Core (PC) credits, while extra‐curricular activities credits are 2 out of 14 credits for Humanities /
Management / Social Science Group (HS/MS)) This table is for students admitted as Lateral Entry
Students in the Second Year / Third Semester of the Degree Programme.

6. Mandatory Credits specify the number of credits from each subject group to be mandatorily acquired by
the student for the award of the degree,for students admitted as students in the 1st year and 1st semester
of the degree programme. While for students admitted as lateral entry in the 2nd year and 3rd semester
the Mandatory Credits value is 115, and specify the number of credits from each subject group to be
mandatorily acquired by the student for the award of the degree (Table 2). See clause 11 and 12 also.
7. Some of the papers are droppable in the sense that the student may qualify for the award of the degree
even when the student has not cleared / passed some of the papers of these group. However, the student
has to earn the minimum credits for the programme of study as specified. See clause 11 and 12 also.
8. The students may take 2 subjects from OAE group. The open electives of the OAE group of courses may
also be taken through SWAYAM / NPTEL MOOCs platform. The student desirous of doing a MOOC based
course among the OAE group must seek approval of the APC of the institute for the same before the
commencement of the semester. The APC shall allow the MOOC based OAE option to the student if and
only if the MOOC subject / course being considered for the student is being offered in line with the
Academic Calendar applicable. The student shall submit the successful completion certificate with marks to
the institution for onwards transfer to the Examination Division. The Examinations Division shall take these
marks on record for incorporation in the result of the appropriate semester. These marks / grades of these
courses shall be used for calculation of the SGPA/CGPA of the student concerned by the examination
division of the University. The degree to the student on fulfilment of other requirements for such cases
shall be through clause 12.a. or 12.b.
These MOOC courses taken by the students, if allowed by the APC of the institute shall be of 4 credits or
more collectively to be against or for one paper slot in the scheme, through MOOCs, though the marks
shall be shown individually. That is in one paper slot in the scheme wherever a MOOC course is allowed,
the student may register for more than one paper to aggregate 4 credits or more. If the credits of these
MOOC Courses, allowed to a student is more than 4, then the maximum credit for the programme shall
be amended accordingly for the particular student. Also, in a particular semester, a student may take
more than one MOOC course with the approval of the APC to meet the credit requirements of OAE for the
semester. The cost of taking the MOOC course is to be borne by the concerned student. The results of the
MOOC courses shall be declared separately by the Examination Division from the result for the papers
conducted by the examination division of the University.
No minor specialization shall be offered / awarded.
9. To earn an Honours degree, the student may enrol for 20 credits or more through SWAYAM / NPTEL
MOOCs platform. This point has to be read together with other points specially point 13 and 14. The

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 286
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

acquisition of the credits should be completed before the 15th of the July of the Admission Year plus 4
years. That is, if a student is admitted in the year X, then these credits must be acquired through MOOCs by
15th July of the year (X+4), no extra duration or time shall be allocated, this means, the student must
submit the result of such papers on or before 15th July of the Admission Year plus 4 years.
Honours in the degree shall be awarded if and only if at least 20 credits are acquired through MOOCs. To
obtain Honours in the programme, the student must apply to the institution about the same before the
commencement of the 5th semester. The specific courses through MOOCs shall be registered by the
student only after approval by the Academic Programme Committee (APC) of the Institute. The APC shall
approve the course if it is not already studied by the student or the student shall not study it in future and
adds value to the major area of specialization (which is the degree). The papers for which the student
desires to appear for Honours through MOOCs, all papers results shall be submitted by the student to the
Institute for onwards transfer to Examination Division of the University, to be taken on record of the
University. The results of these papers shall be a part of the records of the examinations of the students.
The records shall be submitted by the student to the Institute, then transferred to the Examination
Division, shall be notified by the Examination Division of the University, and a separate marksheet shall be
issued by the Examination Division. The cost of taking the MOOC course is to be borne by the concerned
student. Such courses shall be reflected as additional courses / papers for the student.
If a student acquires less than 20 credits through MOOCs, following the mechanism specified, then also
the results of these papers shall be taken on record as specified above, though no Honours degree shall
be awarded.
The papers through MOOCs for Honours degree shall not be a part of the set of the papers over which the
SGPA / CGPA of the student shall be calculated.
The papers through MOOCs for Honours degree shall be additional papers studied by the students and are
to be taken into account only for award of Honours in the degree programme, if 20 credits are earned
through MOOCs as approved by APC, by a student. See Clause 13 also.
10. Maximum Credits is at least 200 (Table 1) for students admitted in the 1st year and 1st semester, these are
the credits for which the student shall have to study for the non‐Honours component of the curriculum.
And, for lateral entry students admitted in the 2nd year and 3rd semester of the degree programme, the
maximum credit required to be studied is at least 150 (Table 2). See clause 8 also.
The student has to appear in the examinations for these credits in all components of evaluation as
specified in the scheme of studies.
11. Minimum Credits required to be earned is atleast 180 (out of the 200 non Honours papers credits, see
clause 10 also) for students admitted in the 1st year and 1st semester. And, for lateral entry students
admitted in the 2nd year and 3rd semester of the degree programme, the minimum credit required to be
earned Is at least 135 (out of the 150 non Honours papers credits, see clause 10 also). See clause 6 also.
12. The following degree route can be taken by a student (also refer point 13):
a. The students shall be awarded the degree without any minor specialization under the following
conditions:
i. The student has earned the mandatory credits as defined in Table 1 or Table 2 (as applicable) and
clause 6.
ii. In addition, the total credits (including the above specified credits) earned by the student is atleast
as specified in clause 11.
The degree nomenclature of the degree shall be as: “Bachelor of Technology in Electronics
Engineering (VLSI Design and Technology)”; if criteria / point 9 is not satisfied for Honours. Otherwise,
if criteria / point 9 is met, then the degrees shall be an Honours degree and the nomenclature shall be
as: “Bachelor of Technology in Electronics Engineering (VLSI Design and Technology) (Honours)”, if in
addition to point 12.b.i and 12.b.ii, the student fulfils the criteria for Honours as specified at point 9.
b. If the student does not fulfil any of the above criterions (point 12.a, or 12.b), if the student earns at
least the minimum credits specified in clause 11 (disregarding the mandatory credits clause of Table 1

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 287
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

or Table 2 (as applicable) and Clause 6), then the student shall be award the degree as “Bachelor of
Technology in Electronics Engineering (VLSI Design and Technology)”. Such students shall not be
eligible for the award of an Honours degree. Though, if credits are accumulated through MOOCs as per
clause 9, the same shall be reflected in the marksheets of the students.
13. The Honours degree shall only be awarded if the CGPA of the student is above or equal to 7.5 in addition
to fulfilment of criteria / point 10 and 13 above and the degree is awarded after the immediate
completion of the 4th year of the batch from the year of admission. No Honours shall be conferred if the
degree requirements are not completed in the minimum duration.
14. Pass marks in every paper shall be 40.
15. Grading System shall be as per Ordinance 11 of the University.
16. The institution shall offer atleast two elective groups out of the open area for students of each major
discipline. The institute shall decide the group(s) and/or individual papers to be offered as electives based
on the availability of infrastructure and faculty. From the groups / papers offered by the institute, an
elective paper / group shall be taught if and only if the number of students in a paper is at‐least 20 or at‐
least 1/3 of the students of a major discipline for which the paper / group is to be offered. The APC of the
department / institute may define a maximum number of students allowed to register for a paper as an
open area elective.
17. Teachers of the other department(s), as and when deputed by their department, for teaching the students
enrolled in programmes offered by the department offering the programme shall be a part of the
Academic Programme Committee of the discipline. Such teachers, for all academic matters, including
teaching, teachers’ continuous evaluation, term end examinations etc. shall be governed by the decisions
of the APC of department offering the programme of study. Similarly, the guest faculty, the visiting faculty
and the Contract / Ad Hoc faculty as and when deputed to teach students of a particular department shall
form a part of APC of the department.
18. The Paper IDs will be generated / issued / assigned by the Examination Division of the University.

19. The medium of instructions shall be English.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 288
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Bachelor of Technology in Electronics and Communication

(Advanced Communication Technology)
2nd Year Onward Scheme and implementation guideline

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 289
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Third Semester
Paper
Group Paper L P Credits
Code
Theory Papers
ES ES‐201 Computational Methods 4 4
HS/MS HS‐203 Indian Knowledge System* 2 2
PC ECC‐205 Signals and Systems 3 3
PC ECC‐207 Digital Logic and Computer Design 4 4
PC ECC‐209 Analog Communications 4 4
PC ECC‐211 Analog Electronics‐I 4 4
Practical / Viva Voce
ES ES‐251 Computational Methods Lab 2 1
PC ECC‐253 Digital Logic and Computer Design Lab 2 1
PC ECC‐255 Analog Communications Lab 2 1
PC ECC‐257 Analog Electronics‐I Lab 2 1
PC ECC‐259 Signals and Systems Lab 2 1
Total 21 10 26

*NUES:All examinations to be conducted by the concerned teacher as specified in the detailed syllabus of the paper.

Fourth Semester
Paper
Group Paper L P Credits
Code
Theory Papers
BS BS‐202 Probability, Statistics and Linear Programming 4 4
HS/MS HS‐204 Technical Writing* 2 2
PC EEC‐206 Network Analysis and Synthesis 3 3
PC ECC‐210 Microprocessors and Microcontrollers 3 3
PC ECC‐212 Digital Communications 3 3
PC ECC‐214 Analog Electronics‐II 3 3
PC ECC‐216 Electromagnetic Field Theory 3 3
Practical / Viva Voce
BS BS‐252 Probability, Statistics and Linear Programming Lab 2 1
PC ECC‐256 Microprocessors and Microcontrollers Lab 2 1
PC ECC‐258 Digital Communications Lab 2 1
PC ECC‐260 Analog Electronics‐II Lab 2 1
PC EEC‐262 Network Analysis and Synthesis Lab 2 1
Total 21 10 26

*NUES:All examinations to be conducted by the concerned teacher as specified in the detailed syllabus of the paper.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 290
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Fifth Semester
Group Paper Code Paper L P Credits
Theory Papers
HS/MS HS‐301 Economics for Engineers 2 2
PC ECC‐303 Digital Signal Processing 4 4
PC ECC‐305 Microelectronics 3 3
PC EEC‐307 Introduction to Control Systems 3 3
PC ECC‐309 Transmission Lines, Waveguides and Antenna Design 4 4
PC ECC‐311 Data Communication and Networking 4 4
Practical / Viva Voce
PC ECC‐351 Digital Signal Processing Lab 2 1
PC ECC‐353 Microelectronics Lab 2 1
PC EEC‐355 Introduction to Control Systems Lab 2 1
PC ECC‐357 Transmission Lines, Waveguides and Antenna Design Lab 2 1
PC ECC‐359 Data Communication and Networking Lab 2 1
PC / Internship ES‐361 Summer Training Report ‐ 1 * 1
Total 20 10 26

*NUES:Comprehensive evaluation of the Summer Training Report – 1 (after 4th Semester) shall be done by the committee
of teachers, constituted by the Academic Programme Committee, out of 100. The training shall be of 4 to 6 weeks duration.
The training can be under the mentorship of a teacher of the institute.

Sixth Semester
Group Paper Code Paper L P Credits
Theory Papers
HS/MS MS‐302 Principles of Management for Engineers 3 3
HS/MS HS‐304 Universal Human Values* 1 1
PC ECE‐314T RF and Microwave Engineering 3 3
PC ECE‐330T Antenna Design and Radiating Systems 3 3
PC WMC‐332T Optical Networks 3 3
PC WMC‐336T Wireless Communication and Networks 3 3
OAE Open Area Elective Paper (OAE – 1) 4
Practical / Viva Voce
PC ECE‐314P RF and Microwave Engineering Lab 2 1
PC ECE‐330P Antenna Design and Radiating Systems Lab 2 1
PC WMC‐332P Optical Networks Lab 2 1
PC WMC‐336P Wireless Communication and Networks Lab 2 1
NSS / NCC / Cultural Clubs / Technical Society / Technical
HS/MS HS‐352 2
Club*
Total 26

*NUES:All examinations to be conducted by the concerned teacher as specified in the detailed syllabus of the paper.

**NUES: Comprehensive evaluation of the students by the concerned coordinator of NCC / NSS / Cultural Clubs / Technical
Society / Technical Clubs, out of 100 as per the evaluation schemes worked out by these activity societies, organizations; the
faculty co‐ordinators shall be responsible for the evaluation of the same. These activities shall start from the 1st semester
and the evaluation shall be conducted at the end of the 6th semester for students admitted in the first semester. Students
nd rd
admitted in the 2 year (3 semester) as lateral entry shall be evaluated on the basis their performance, by the faculty co‐
rd th
ordinator for the period of 3 semester to 6 semester only.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 291
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Seventh Semester
Group Paper Code Paper L P Credits
Theory Papers
HS/MS MS‐401 Principles of Entrepreneurship Mindset 2 2
PC ACT‐403 Introduction to Information and Coding Theory 4 4
PC ACT‐405 Radar and Satellite Communications 4 4
PC ACT‐407T Cellular and Mobile Communication 3 3
PC WMC‐453T Ad hoc and Sensor Networks 3 3
OAE Open Area Elective Paper (OAE – 2) 4
Practical / Viva Voce
PC ACT‐407P Cellular and Mobile Communication Lab 2 1
PC WMC‐453P Ad hoc and Sensor Networks Lab 2 1
PC / Project ES‐451 Minor Project** 3
PC / Internship ES‐453 Summer Training (after 6th semester) Report * 1
Total 26

*NUES:Comprehensive evaluation of the Summer Training Report – 2 (after 6th Semester) shall be done by the committee
of teachers, constituted by the Academic Programme Committee, out of 100. The training shall be of 4 to 6 weeks duration.
The training can be under the mentorship of a teacher of the institute.

**The student shall be allocated a supervisor / guide for project work at the end 6th semester by the department /
institution, the project shall continue into the 8th semester. In the 7th semester evaluation, the criteria for evaluation shall
be conceptualization of the project work, the background study / literature survey and identification of objectives and
methodology to be followed for project. 40 marks evaluation for the Teachers' Continuous Evaluation / Internal Assessment
shall be done by concerned supervisor while the term end examination of 60 marks shall be conducted by the supervisor
concerned and the external examiner deputed by the Examinations Division. In the absence of the supervisor, the Director
of the Institution / Head of the Department can assign the responsibility of the supervisor (for purpose of examinations) to
any faculty of the Institution / Department.

Eight Semester
Paper
Group Paper L P Credits
Code
Practical / Viva Voce%
ES‐452 Major Project – Dissertation and Viva Voce# 18
PC / Project
ES‐454 Project Progress Evaluation* 2
ES‐456 Internship Report and Viva Voce# 18
PC / Internship
ES‐458 Internship Progress Evaluation* 2
Total 0 0 20

*NUES: Comprehensive evaluation by the committee of teachers, constituted by the Academic Programme
Committee, out of 100.

%By default every student shall do the project work (ES‐452 and ES‐454). A student shall either be allowed to
do a project work (ES‐452 and ES‐454) or an internship (ES‐456 and ES‐458). The student must apply for
approval to do internship before the commencement of the 8th semester to the institute, and only after
approval of Principal / Director of the institute through Training and Placement Officer of the institute, shall
proceed for internship.

#Students may be allowed to do internship in this semester in lieu of Major project. The students allowed to
proceed for internship shall be required to maintain a log‐book of activities performed during internship. The
same has to be countersigned by the mentor at the organization where internship is completed.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 292
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

ES‐452: Evaluation shall be conducted of 40 marks (Teachers’ continuous evaluation / internal assessment) by
the supervisor. And, 60 marks by a bench of the supervisor and the external examiner deputed by Examination
Division (COE), for a total of 100 marks.

ES‐454 / ES‐458: Comprehensive evaluation by the committee of teachers, constituted by the Academic
Programme Committee, out of 100.

ES‐456: Evaluation shall be conducted of 40 marks (Teachers’ continuous evaluation / internal assessment) by
the Training and Placement Officer of the department / institute on the basis of the report submitted by the
student. And, 60 marks by a bench of the Training and Placement Officer of the department / institute and the
external examiner deputed by Examination Division (COE), for a total of 100 marks.

In the absence of the supervisor or the Training and Placement Officer (as the case may be), the Director of the
institute / Head of the Department can assign the responsibility of the supervisor or the Training and Placement
Officer (for purpose of examinations) to any faculty of the department.

Note on Elective Papers: The elective papers shall be allowed to be taken / studied by the students, by the
APC of the department / institute, keeping in view that two papers studied by the student should not have a
substantial overlap. All papers studied by the student should be substantially distinct in content.

Note on Examination of Elective Papers:

(a) Papers with only theory component shall have 25 Marks continuous evaluation by the teacher and 75
Marks term‐end examinations. Both these component marks shall be reflected on the marksheet of the
student.
(b) Papers with only practical component shall have 40 Marks continuous evaluation by the teacher and 60
Marks term‐end examinations. Both these component marks shall be reflected on the marksheet of the
student.

Note on Continuous Evaluation of All Papers:

(a) Papers with only theory component shall have 25 Marks continuous evaluation by the teacher which shall
be evaluated as:
i. Mid‐Term Test* ‐ 15 Marks (after 8 weeks of teaching or as
decided by PCC)
ii. Assignments / Project / Quiz / Case Studies, etc. ‐ 5 Marks
iii. Attendance / Class Participation ‐ 5 Marks
(b) Papers with only practical component shall have 40Marks continuous evaluation by the teacher which shall
be evaluated as:
i. Mid‐Term Test and Viva Voce ‐ 20 Marks (after 8 weeks of teaching or as
decided by PCC)
ii. Practical File ‐ 10 Marks
iii. Attendance / Lab Participation ‐ 10 Marks

* The mid‐term test shall be coordinated by the Programme Coordination Committee.

If a student could not appear for a mid‐term test due to situation beyond the control by the student, a
supplementary test may be arranged towards the end of the semester, in a similar manner to the mid‐term
test for such students. The students must apply for this provision to the department / institution. On
examination of the reason for non‐appearing in the mid‐term test by the Head of the Department / Institute,
and with reason for allowing to appear in the supplementary test to recorded by the Head of the Department
/ Institute, the student may be allowed.
The attendance sheets, the question papers and the award sheets for the continuous evaluation to be
retained by the concerned department / institute for at least 6 months after the declaration of the result by
the Examination Division of the University.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 293
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Open Area Electives

Semester Paper Code OAE – 1 (Choose Any One) L P Credits
6 ES‐304 Real Time Operating Systems 4 4
ES‐306T Embedded System Architecture and Design 3 3
6
ES‐306P Embedded System Architecture and Design Lab 2 1
OCSE‐306T C++ Programming 3 3
6
OCSE‐306P C++ Programming Lab 2 1
OCSE‐342T Programming in Java 3 3
6
OCSE‐342P Programming in Java Lab 2 1
AI‐316T Artificial Intelligence and Machine Learning 3 3
6
AI‐316P Artificial Intelligence and Machine Learning Lab 2 1
OSD‐334T Android App Development 3 3
6
OSD‐334P Android App Development Lab 2 1
IPCV‐334T Digital Image Processing 3 3
6
IPCV‐334P Digital Image Processing Lab 2 1
Understanding Human Being, Nature and Existence
6 4 4
OUHV‐338 Comprehensively
6 OUHV‐340 Vision for Humane Society 4 4
CS‐312T Network Security and Cryptography 3 3
6
CS‐312P Network Security and Cryptography Lab 2 1
IOT‐324T Introduction to Internet of Things 3 3
6
IOT‐324P Introduction to Internet of Things Lab 2 1
IOT‐326T Introduction to Sensors and Transducers 3 3
6
IOT‐326P Introduction to Sensors and Transducers Lab 2 1
6 MOOCs (Swayam / NPTEL) 4
Semester Paper Code OAE – 2 (Choose Any One) L P Credits
ES‐403T VHDL Programming 3 3
7
ES‐403P VHDL Programming Lab 2 1
ES‐405T Real Time Embedded System Programming 3 3
7
ES‐405P Real Time Embedded System Programming Lab 2 1
FSD‐435T PHP Programming and MySQL 3 3
7
FSD‐435P PHP Programming and MySQL Lab 2 1
MAC‐409T Robotics Engineering 3 3
7
MAC‐409P Robotics Engineering Lab 2 1
OSD‐445T Data Structures and Algorithms 3 3
7
OSD‐445P Data Structures and Algorithms Lab 2 1
OCSE‐407T Introduction to Database Management Systems 3 3
7
OCSE‐407P Introduction to Database Management Systems Lab 2 1
SC‐401T Soft Computing 3 3
7
SC‐401P Soft Computing Lab 2 1
DS‐427T Data Science using R 3 3
7
DS‐427P Data Science using R Lab 2 1
IOT‐441T IoT with Arduino, ESP and Raspberry Pi 3 3
7
IOT‐441P IoT with Arduino, ESP and Raspberry Pi Lab 2 1
NET‐473T Cloud Computing and Security 3 3
7
NET‐473P Cloud Computing and Security Lab 2 1
7 OUHV‐463 Holistic Human Health 4 4
FSD‐437T Mobile App Development 3 3
7
FSD‐437P Mobile App Development Lab 2 1
IPCV‐461T Machine Learning for Image and Vision Analysis 3 3
7
IPCV‐461P Machine Learning for Image and Vision Analysis Lab 2 1
7 MOOCs (Swayam / NPTEL) 4

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 294
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Note:
1. Each OAE slot is of 4 credits, if in a particular slot, the paper has no practical component, then it is of 4 credits
(a pure theory paper), otherwise for purpose of examination and conduct of classes, the course is split in two
papers, namely a theory paper of 3 credits and a practical paper of 1 credit. The student has to study for 4
credits per slot of OAE group. This is reflected by suffixing the paper code by T (for Theory component) and P
(for Practical component), if required

2. The Open Area Electives described / enumerated are the one offered by engineering departments. If other
departments, offering minor specialization or elective papers as open area electives to engineering students
(approved by the university Academic Council) are possible at the concerned institution, the same may also be
offered to the engineering students studying in the major disciplines under the aegis of the University School of
Information, Communication and Technology. The APC of the department / intuition shall allow the choice of
such electives, provided they follow the credit framework of the programme of study for open area electives.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 295
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Implementation Rules:

1. The examinations, attendance criteria to appear in examinations, promotion and award of the degree
shall be governed by the Ordinance 11 of the University. The term “major discipline” / “primary discipline”
in this document refers to the discipline in which student is admitted / studies from 3rd semester onwards.
However credits of courses / paper for OAE / EAE groups shall not be considered for the purpose of
promotion from one year of study to the subsequent year of study.
2. Minimum duration of the Bachelor of Technology programme shall be 4 years (N=4 years) (8 semesters)
for the students admitted in the 1st year and 1st semester of the degree programme. Lateral entry students
shall be admitted in the 2nd year and 3rd semester of the degree programme (effectively in the batch
admitted in the first year in the previous academic session and shall be deemed to have been exempted
from the courses / papers of the first year of the degree programme. No exemption certificate shall be
issued in any case.
A specific lateral entry students’ minimum duration shall be the same as the minimum duration for the
batch in which he/she is admitted as a lateral entry student in the 2nd year.
3. Maximum duration of the Bachelor of Technology programme shall be 6 years (N+2 years). After
completion of N+2 years of study, if the student has appeared in the papers of all the semesters upto 8th
semester, then a maximum extension of 1 year may be given to the student for completing the
requirements of the degree if and only if the number of credits already earned by the student is atleast 150
(for lateral entry students it shall be at least 102 credits) from the (non‐honours components). Otherwise,
the admission of the student shall stand cancelled. After the period of allowed study, the admission of the
student shall be cancelled.
A specific lateral entry students’ maximum duration shall be the same as the minimum duration for the
batch in which he/she is admitted as a lateral entry student in the 2nd year.
4. The degree shall be awarded only after the fulfilment of all requirements of the Scheme and Syllabus of
Examinations and the applicable Ordinance.
5. (a) The students shall undergo the following group of Courses / Papers as enumerated in the scheme (For
the students admitted in the First Year / First Semester).

Semester (Credits) Total Mandatory

Group
I & II III IV V VI VII VIII Credits Credits

BS 24 5 29 14

HS/MS 6 2 2 2 6 2 20 10

ES 20 5 25 15

PC 19 19 24 16 20 20 118 104

OAE 4 4 8 4

Total 50 26 26 26 26 26 20 200 147

TABLE 1: Distribution of Credits (Project / Internship credits are 25 out the 118 credits for Programme
Core (PC) credits, while extra‐curricular activities credits are 2 out of 20 credits for Humanities /
Management / Social Science Group (HS/MS)) . This table is for students admitted in the First Year / First
Semester of the Degree Programme.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 296
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

(b) The students admitted as Lateral Entry shall undergo the following group of Courses / Papers as
enumerated in the scheme.

Semester (Credits) Total Mandatory

Group
III IV V VI VII VIII Credits Credits

BS 5 5 0

HS/MS 2 2 2 6 2 14 7

ES 5 5 0

PC 19 19 24 16 20 20 118 104

OAE 4 4 8 4

Total 26 26 26 26 26 20 150 115

TABLE 2: Distribution of Credits (Project / Internship credits are 25 out the 118 credits for Programme
Core (PC) credits, while extra‐curricular activities credits are 2 out of 14 credits for Humanities /
Management / Social Science Group (HS/MS)) This table is for students admitted as Lateral Entry
Students in the Second Year / Third Semester of the Degree Programme.

6. Mandatory Credits specify the number of credits from each subject group to be mandatorily acquired by
the student for the award of the degree,for students admitted as students in the 1st year and 1st semester
of the degree programme. While for students admitted as lateral entry in the 2nd year and 3rd semester
the Mandatory Credits value is 115, and specify the number of credits from each subject group to be
mandatorily acquired by the student for the award of the degree (Table 2). See clause 11 and 12 also.
7. Some of the papers are droppable in the sense that the student may qualify for the award of the degree
even when the student has not cleared / passed some of the papers of these group. However, the student
has to earn the minimum credits for the programme of study as specified. See clause 11 and 12 also.
8. The students may take 2 subjects from OAE group. The open electives of the OAE group of courses may
also be taken through SWAYAM / NPTEL MOOCs platform. The student desirous of doing a MOOC based
course among the OAE group must seek approval of the APC of the institute for the same before the
commencement of the semester. The APC shall allow the MOOC based OAE option to the student if and
only if the MOOC subject / course being considered for the student is being offered in line with the
Academic Calendar applicable. The student shall submit the successful completion certificate with marks to
the institution for onwards transfer to the Examination Division. The Examinations Division shall take these
marks on record for incorporation in the result of the appropriate semester. These marks / grades of these
courses shall be used for calculation of the SGPA/CGPA of the student concerned by the examination
division of the University. The degree to the student on fulfilment of other requirements for such cases
shall be through clause 12.a. or 12.b.
These MOOC courses taken by the students, if allowed by the APC of the institute shall be of 4 credits or
more collectively to be against or for one paper slot in the scheme, through MOOCs, though the marks
shall be shown individually. That is in one paper slot in the scheme wherever a MOOC course is allowed,
the student may register for more than one paper to aggregate 4 credits or more. If the credits of these
MOOC Courses, allowed to a student is more than 4, then the maximum credit for the programme shall
be amended accordingly for the particular student. Also, in a particular semester, a student may take
more than one MOOC course with the approval of the APC to meet the credit requirements of OAE for the
semester. The cost of taking the MOOC course is to be borne by the concerned student. The results of the
MOOC courses shall be declared separately by the Examination Division from the result for the papers
conducted by the examination division of the University.
No minor specialization shall be offered / awarded.
9. To earn an Honours degree, the student may enrol for 20 credits or more through SWAYAM / NPTEL
MOOCs platform. This point has to be read together with other points specially point 13 and 14. The

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 297
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

acquisition of the credits should be completed before the 15th of the July of the Admission Year plus 4
years. That is, if a student is admitted in the year X, then these credits must be acquired through MOOCs by
15th July of the year (X+4), no extra duration or time shall be allocated, this means, the student must
submit the result of such papers on or before 15th July of the Admission Year plus 4 years.
Honours in the degree shall be awarded if and only if at least 20 credits are acquired through MOOCs. To
obtain Honours in the programme, the student must apply to the institution about the same before the
commencement of the 5th semester. The specific courses through MOOCs shall be registered by the
student only after approval by the Academic Programme Committee (APC) of the Institute. The APC shall
approve the course if it is not already studied by the student or the student shall not study it in future and
adds value to the major area of specialization (which is the degree). The papers for which the student
desires to appear for Honours through MOOCs, all papers results shall be submitted by the student to the
Institute for onwards transfer to Examination Division of the University, to be taken on record of the
University. The results of these papers shall be a part of the records of the examinations of the students.
The records shall be submitted by the student to the Institute, then transferred to the Examination
Division, shall be notified by the Examination Division of the University, and a separate marksheet shall be
issued by the Examination Division. The cost of taking the MOOC course is to be borne by the concerned
student. Such courses shall be reflected as additional courses / papers for the student.
If a student acquires less than 20 credits through MOOCs, following the mechanism specified, then also
the results of these papers shall be taken on record as specified above, though no Honours degree shall
be awarded.
The papers through MOOCs for Honours degree shall not be a part of the set of the papers over which the
SGPA / CGPA of the student shall be calculated.
The papers through MOOCs for Honours degree shall be additional papers studied by the students and are
to be taken into account only for award of Honours in the degree programme, if 20 credits are earned
through MOOCs as approved by APC, by a student. See Clause 13 also.
10. Maximum Credits is at least 200 (Table 1) for students admitted in the 1st year and 1st semester, these are
the credits for which the student shall have to study for the non‐Honours component of the curriculum.
And, for lateral entry students admitted in the 2nd year and 3rd semester of the degree programme, the
maximum credit required to be studied is at least 150 (Table 2). See clause 8 also.
The student has to appear in the examinations for these credits in all components of evaluation as
specified in the scheme of studies.
11. Minimum Credits required to be earned is atleast 180 (out of the 200 non Honours papers credits, see
clause 10 also) for students admitted in the 1st year and 1st semester. And, for lateral entry students
admitted in the 2nd year and 3rd semester of the degree programme, the minimum credit required to be
earned Is at least 135 (out of the 150 non Honours papers credits, see clause 10 also). See clause 6 also.
12. The following degree route can be taken by a student (also refer point 13):
a. The students shall be awarded the degree without any minor specialization under the following
conditions:
i. The student has earned the mandatory credits as defined in Table 1 or Table 2 (as applicable) and
clause 6.
ii. In addition, the total credits (including the above specified credits) earned by the student is atleast
as specified in clause 11.
The degree nomenclature of the degree shall be as: “Bachelor of Technology in Electronics and
Communication (Advanced Communication Technology)”; if criteria / point 9 is not satisfied for
Honours. Otherwise, if criteria / point 9 is met, then the degrees shall be an Honours degree and the
nomenclature shall be as: “Bachelor of Technology in Electronics and Communication (Advanced
Communication Technology) (Honours)”, if in addition to point 12.b.i and 12.b.ii, the student fulfils
the criteria for Honours as specified at point 9.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 298
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

b. If the student does not fulfil any of the above criterions (point 12.a, or 12.b), if the student earns at
least the minimum credits specified in clause 11 (disregarding the mandatory credits clause of Table 1
or Table 2 (as applicable) and Clause 6), then the student shall be award the degree as “Bachelor of
Technology in Electronics and Communication (Advanced Communication Technology)”. Such
students shall not be eligible for the award of an Honours degree. Though, if credits are accumulated
through MOOCs as per clause 9, the same shall be reflected in the marksheets of the students.
13. The Honours degree shall only be awarded if the CGPA of the student is above or equal to 7.5 in addition
to fulfilment of criteria / point 10 and 13 above and the degree is awarded after the immediate
completion of the 4th year of the batch from the year of admission. No Honours shall be conferred if the
degree requirements are not completed in the minimum duration.
14. Pass marks in every paper shall be 40.
15. Grading System shall be as per Ordinance 11 of the University.
16. The institution shall offer atleast two elective groups out of the open area for students of each major
discipline. The institute shall decide the group(s) and/or individual papers to be offered as electives based
on the availability of infrastructure and faculty. From the groups / papers offered by the institute, an
elective paper / group shall be taught if and only if the number of students in a paper is at‐least 20 or at‐
least 1/3 of the students of a major discipline for which the paper / group is to be offered. The APC of the
department / institute may define a maximum number of students allowed to register for a paper as an
open area elective.
17. Teachers of the other department(s), as and when deputed by their department, for teaching the students
enrolled in programmes offered by the department offering the programme shall be a part of the
Academic Programme Committee of the discipline. Such teachers, for all academic matters, including
teaching, teachers’ continuous evaluation, term end examinations etc. shall be governed by the decisions
of the APC of department offering the programme of study. Similarly, the guest faculty, the visiting faculty
and the Contract / Ad Hoc faculty as and when deputed to teach students of a particular department shall
form a part of APC of the department.
18. The Paper IDs will be generated / issued / assigned by the Examination Division of the University.

19. The medium of instructions shall be English.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 299
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Assessment of Outcomes Achieved in a Course / Paper. That

is, Learning Outcome Assessment Alignment Grid.

Learning Course/Project How Learning Resources Attainment Level

Outcome Will Be Assessed

To complete the alignment grid, start by listing one learning outcome per row beneath the
“Learning Outcome” column. Make sure that each learning outcome can be assessed by a single
method.

Next, beneath the "Course/ Project" column, list the course(s) or project(s) or assignments or tests
that students will complete in order to achieve the learning outcome.

In the "How Learning Will Be Assessed" column, list the assessment(s) tool that will be used for that
particular learning outcome. It is fine for there to be more than one assessment used for a
particular outcome, so long as each assessment captures the outcome in its entirety. Likewise, it is
fine for a single assessment to be used for multiple outcomes.

In the column entitled "Resources", list any additional materials, technologies, or resources needed
for students to meet the learning outcome.

In the column entitled "Attainment Level", list in a quantifiable manner the average attainment
level.

Every teacher must make this sheet for every paper taught. Be that a paper with only theory
component, only practical component or with both theory and practical component.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 300
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Syllabus of 2nd Year Papers

(3rd Semester for Lateral Entry Students only)

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 301
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Paper Code(s): BC‐181 L/P

Paper: Bridge Course in Mathematics 3

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
3. This is NUES, non‐credit and qualifying Paper. All examinations to be conducted by the concerned teacher.
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives:
1: To understand the limits, differentiation and integration.
2: To understand differential equations.
3: To understand the concepts of matrices.
4: To understand the concept of vectors and to find out Eigen values.
Course Outcomes (CO):
CO1 Ability to understand the use of limits, differentiation and integration.
CO2 Ability to understand and apply the ordinary differential equations.
CO3 Ability to use matrices to solve linear equations.
CO4 Ability to understand linear independence and dependence of vectors.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) Mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
CO/PO PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 3 2 1 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 1 1 3
CO2 3 3 2 1 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 1 1 3
CO3 3 3 3 1 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 1 1 3
CO4 3 3 3 1 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 1 1 3

Unit I
Differentiation: Limits, Definition, Formulas, Differentiation Rules, Real life applications of Differentiation
Integration: Definition, Indefinite Integral, Integration formulas, Definite Integral and its properties,
Real life applications of Integration
Unit II
Ordinary Differential Equations: Definition, Solution of ordinary differential equation, linear differential
equation of first order, initial value problem, linear differential equation of higher order with constant
coefficients
Unit III
Matrices‐I: Definition of Matrix and Determinant, Type of Matrices, Properties of Determinants, Transpose of a
matrix, Inverse of a matrix, Solution of system of linear equations using the inverse of a matrix, Rank of a
matrix.
Unit IV
Matrices‐II: Vectors, Linear independence and dependence of vectors; Eigen values and Eigen vectors or matrix.
Textbooks:
1. Higher Engineering Mathematics by B S Grewal, Khanna Publishing.
References:
1. Advanced Engineering Mathematics by Erwin Kreyszig, John Wiley, 10th Ed., 2011.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 302
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Paper Code(s): BC‐183 L/P

Paper: Bridge Course in Programming in C 3
Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
3. This is NUES, non‐credit and qualifying Paper. All examinations to be conducted by the concerned teacher.
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives:
1: To impart basic knowledge about simple algorithms for arithmetic and logical problems so that
students can understand how to write a program, syntax and logical errors in ‘C’.
2: To impart knowledge about how to implement conditional branching, iteration and recursion in ‘C’.
3: To impart knowledge about using arrays, pointers and structures to develop programs in ‘C’.
4: To impart knowledge about using structures, unions and strings to develop programs in ‘C’.
Course Outcomes (CO):
CO1 Ability to write simple programs in in ‘C’.
CO2 Ability to implement conditional branching, iteration and arrays in ‘C’
CO3 Ability to implement functions and pointers in ‘C’
CO4 Ability to use structures, unions and strings in the programs in ‘C’.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) Mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
CO/PO PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 3 2 1 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 1 1 3
CO2 3 3 2 1 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 1 1 3
CO3 3 3 3 1 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 1 1 3
CO4 3 3 3 1 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 1 1 3

Unit I
Introduction to Programming: Creating and running programs, Preprocessor, Compilation process, role of
linker, idea of invocation and execution of a programme.
Introduction to C language: Basic structure of C programs, C tokens, variables, data types, I/O statements. Inter‐
conversion of variables.
Operators and expressions: Operators, arithmetic, relational and logical, assignment operators, increment and
decrement operators operator precedence and associativity, evaluation of expressions, type conversions in
expressions.
Unit II
Control structures: Decision statements; if and switch statement; Loop control statements: while, for and do
while loops, jump statements, break, continue, goto statements.
Arrays: Concepts, One dimensional array, declaration and initialization of one dimensional arrays, two
dimensional arrays, initialization and accessing, multi‐dimensional arrays.
Unit III
Functions: User defined and built‐in Functions, storage classes, Parameter passing in functions, call by value,
Passing arrays to functions: idea of call by reference, Recursion.
Pointers: Pointer basics, pointer arithmetic, functions returning pointers, Dynamic memory allocation. Pointers
and Strings.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 303
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Unit IV
Structures and unions: Structure definition, initialization, accessing structures, structures and functions, self‐
referential structures, unions, typedef.
Strings: Arrays of characters, variable length character strings, inputting character strings, character library
function.

Textbooks:
1. The C programming language by B W Kernighan and D M Ritchie, Pearson Education, 1988.
References:
1. Engineering Problem Solving With C by Delores M. Etter, Pearson, 2013.
2. Problem Solving and Program Design in C by Jeri R. Hanly and Elliot B. Koffman, Pearson, 2016.
3. ANSI/ISO 9899‐1990, American National Standard for Programming Languages ‘C’ by American National
Standards Institute, Information Technology Industry Council, 1990 (C89).

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 304
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Syllabus of 2nd Year Papers

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 305
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Paper Code(s): ES‐201 L P C

Paper: Computational Methods 4 ‐ 4

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To understand numerical methods to find roots of functions and first order unconstrained
minimization of functions.
2. To introduce concept of interpolation methods and numerical integration.
3. To understand numerical methods to solve systems of algebraic equations and curve fitting by splines.
4. To understand numerical methods for the solution of Ordinary and partial differential equations.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Ability to develop mathematical models of low level engineering problems
CO 2 Ability to apply interpolation methods and numerical integration.
CO 3 Ability to solve simultaneous linear equations and curve fitting by splines
CO 4 Ability to numerically solve ordinary differential equations that are initial value or boundary value
problems
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 2 2 2 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 2 2 3
CO 2 3 2 2 2 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 2 2 3
CO 3 3 3 3 3 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 2 2 3
CO 4 3 3 3 3 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 2 2 3

UNIT‐I

Review of Taylor Series, Rolle ’s Theorem and Mean Value Theorem, Approximations and Errors in numerical
computations, Data representation and computer arithmetic, Loss of significance in computation
Location of roots of equation: Bisection method (convergence analysis and implementation), Newton Method
(convergence analysis and implementation), Secant Method (convergence analysis and implementation).
Unconstrained one variable function minimization by Fibonacci search, Golden Section Search and Newton’s
method. Multivariate function minimization by the method of steepest descent, Nelder‐ Mead Algorithm.

UNIT‐II

Interpolation: Assumptions for interpolation, errors in polynomial interpolation, Finite differences, Gregory‐
Newton’s Forward Interpolation, Gregory‐Newton’s backward Interpolation, Lagrange’s Interpolation,
Newton’s divided difference interpolation
Numerical Integration: Definite Integral, Newton‐Cote’s Quadrature formula, Trapezoidal Rule, Simpson’s one‐
third rule, simpson’s three‐eight rule, Errors in quadrature formulae, Romberg’s Algorithm, Gaussian
Quadrature formula.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 306
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT‐III

System of Linear Algebraic Equations: Existence of solution, Gauss elimination method and its computational
effort, concept of Pivoting, Gauss Jordan method and its computational effort, Triangular Matrix factorization
methods: Dolittle algorithm, Crout’s Algorithm, Cholesky method, Eigen value problem: Power method
Approximation by Spline Function: First‐Degree and second degree Splines, Natural Cubic Splines, B Splines,
Interpolation and Approximation

UNIT ‐ IV

Numerical solution of ordinary Differential Equations: Picard’s method, Taylor series method, Euler’s and
Runge‐Kutta’s methods, Predictor‐corrector methods: Euler’s method, Adams‐Bashforth method, Milne’s
method.
Numerical Solution of Partial Differential equations: Parabolic, Hyperbolic, and elliptic equations
Implementation to be done in C/C++

Textbook(s):
1. E. Ward Cheney & David R. Kincaid , “Numerical Mathematics and Computing” Cengage; 7th ed (2013).

References:
1. R. L. Burden and J. D. Faires, “Numerical Analysis”, CENGAGE Learning Custom Publishing; 10th Edition
(2015).
2. S. D. Conte and C. de Boor, “Elementary Numerical Analysis: An Algorithmic Approach”, McGraw Hill, 3rd ed.
(2005).
3. H. M. Antia, “Numerical Methods for Scientists & Engineers”, Hindustan Book Agency, (2002).
4. E Balagurusamy “Numerical Methods” McGraw Hill Education (2017).

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 307
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Paper Code(s): HS‐203 L P C

Paper: Indian Knowledge System 2 ‐ 2

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
3. This is an NUES paper, hence all examinations to be conducted by the concerned teacher.
Instruction for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To understand the Indian knowledge System.
2. To understand the foundational concepts for science and technology.
3. To understand the ancient Indian mathematics and astronomy.
4. To understand the ancient Indian engineering and technology.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Ability to understand the Indian knowledge System.
CO 2 Ability to understand and apply foundational concepts for science and technology.
CO 3 Ability to understand and apply ancient Indian mathematics and astronomy
CO 4 Ability to understand ancient Indian engineering and technology.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 ‐ 2
CO 3 3 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 4 3 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2

UNIT‐I

Indian Knowledge System (IKS) ‐ An Introduction:

Overview of IKS ‐ Importance of Ancient Knowledge; Defining IKS; The IKS Corpus – A Classification Framework;
Chaturdaśa‐Vidyāsthāna; History of IKS, Some unique aspects of IKS;
The Vedic Corpus – Introduction to Vedas; The Four Vedas and their divisions; Vedāngas; Vedic Life;
Philosophical Systems – Indian Philosophical Systems; Vedic Schools of Philosophy; Non‐Vedic Philosophical
Systems; Wisdom through the Ages – Purānas, Itihāsa as source of wisdom, Rāmāyana, Mahābhārata, Niti‐
śāstras, Subhāssitas.

UNIT‐II

Foundational Concepts for Science and Technology:

Linguistics ‐ Components of Language; Pānini’s work on Sanskrit Grammar; Phonetics in Sanskrit; Patterns in
Sanskrit Vocabulary; Computational Concepts in Astādhyāyi, Logic for Sentence Construction; Importance of
Verbs; Role of Sanskrit in Natural Language Processing
Number System and Units of Measurement – Number System in India; Salient Features of the Indian Numeral
System; Unique approaches to represent numbers; Measurements for Time, Distance and Weight; Pingala and

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 308
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

the Binary System

Knowledge: Framework and Classification – The Knowledge Triangle; Prameya; Pramāna; Samśaya; Framework
for establishing Valid Knowledge

UNIT‐III

Mathematic and Astronomy in IKS:

Mathematics – Unique aspects of Indian Mathematics; Great Mathematicians and their Contributions;
Arithmetic; Geometry; Trigonometry; Algebra; Binary Mathematics and Combinatorial Problems in Chandah‐
śāstra of Pingala, Magic Squares in India
Astronomy ‐ Unique aspects of Indian Astronomy; Historical Development of Astronomy in India; The Celestial
Coordinate System; Elements of the Indian Calendar; Āryabhatiya and the Siddhāntic Tradition; Pancānga;
Astronomical Instruments; Jantar Mantar of Rājā Jai Singh Sawai

UNIT ‐ IV

Engineering and Technology in IKS:

Engineering and Technology: Metals and Metalworking – The Indian S & T Heritage; Mining and Ore Extraction;
Metals and Metalworking Technology; Iron and Steel in India; Lost wax casting of Idols and Artefacts;
Apparatuses used for Extraction of Metallic Components
Engineering and Technology: Other Applications – Literary sources for Science and Technology; Physical
Structures in India; Irrigation and Water Management; Dyes and Painting Technology; Surgical Techniques;
Shipbuilding; Sixty‐four Art Forums; Status of Indigenous S & T

Textbook(s):
1. B. Mahadevan, Vinayaka Rajat Bhat & Nagendra Pavana R.N., “Introduction to Knowledge System: Concepts
and Applications” PHI (2022).

References:
1. C.M Neelakandhan & K.A. Ravindran, “Vedic Texts and The Knowledge Systems of India”, Sri Sankaracharya
University of Sanskrit, Kalady (2010).
2. P.P. Divakaran, “The Mathematics of India: Concepts, Methods, Connections”, Springer (2018)
3. C.A. Sharma, “Critical Survey of Indian Philosophy”, Motilal Banarasidass Publication (1964)
4. G. Huet, A. Kulkarni & P. Scharf, “Sanskrit Computational Linguistics”, Springer (2009).
5. A.K. Bag, “History of Technology in India”, Indian National Science Academy, Vol 1, (1997)

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 309
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Paper Code(s): CIC‐205 L P C

Paper: Discrete Mathematics 4 ‐ 4

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
st
2. The first (1 ) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To introduce the concept of Mathematical Logic, concepts of sets, relation and functions
2. To introduce the concept of Algorithm and number theory
3. To understand Group theory and related examples
4. To use Graph theory for solving problems
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO1: Ability for constructing mathematical logic to solve problems
CO2: Ability to Analyze/ quantify the efficiency of a developed solution (algorithm) of a computational
problem
CO3: Ability to Understand mathematical preliminaries to be used in the subsequent courses of the
curriculum. This includes Boolean algebra, number theory, group theory, and combinatorics.
CO4: Ability to Understand diverse relevant topics in discrete mathematics and computation theory with an
emphasis on their applicability as mathematical tools in computer science.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 3 2 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 2 3 3
CO 2 3 3 3 2 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 2 3 3
CO 3 3 3 3 3 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 2 3 3
CO 4 3 3 3 3 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 2 3 3

UNIT – I

Sets, Logic, and Relation: Sets, Subsets, powerset, operations on sets, Propositional Logic, Rules of inferences
in propositional logic, Quantifiers, Predicates and validity, Predicate Logic, normal forms. Proof Techniques‐
Direct Proof, Proof by Contraposition, and proof by contradiction. Principle of inclusion and exclusion,
pigeonhole principle, permutation and combination. Principle of Well Ordering, principle of mathematical
induction, principle of complete induction. Relation, properties of binary relation, equivalence relation and
class, closures (symmetric, reflexive, and transitive).

UNIT – II

Functions, Order relations and Boolean Algebra: Functions, Growth of functions, Permutation functions,
Partially ordered sets, lattices, Boolean algebra, Minimization of Boolean Expressions. GCD, LCM, prime
numbers.
Recurrence relations, solution methods for linear, first‐order recurrence relations with constant coefficients,
generating functions, Analysis of Algorithms involving recurrence relations, solution method for a divide‐and‐

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 310
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

conquer recurrence relation. Masters theorem (with proof).

UNIT – III

Group theory: Semi‐group, Monoid, Groups, Group identity and uniqueness, inverse and its uniqueness,
isomorphism and homomorphism, subgroups, Cosets and Lagrange’s theorem, Permutation group and Cayley’s
theorem (without proof), Normal subgroup and quotient groups. Groups and Coding.

UNIT – IV

Graph theory: Graph Terminology, Planar graphs, Euler’s formula (proof), Euler and Hamiltonian path/circuit.
Chromatic number of a graph, five color theorem (proof), Shortest path and minimal spanning trees and
algorithms, Depth‐first and breadth first search, trees associated with DFS & BFS, Connected components.
Complexity Analysis of the graph MST.

Textbook(s):
1. B. Kolman, R. C. Busby & S.C. Ross “Discrete Mathematical Structures”, 6th edition, PHI/Pearson, 2009.
2. R. L. Graham, D. E. Knuth & O. Patashnik, “Concrete Mathematics”, Pearson Education, 2000.

References:
1. Neal Koblitz, “A course in number theory and cryptography”, Springer – Verlag, 1994.
2. J.P. Tremblay & R. Manohar, “Discrete Mathematical Structure with Application to Computer Science,” TMH,
New Delhi (2000).
3. Norman L. Biggs, “Discrete Mathematics”, Second edition, Oxford University Press, New Delhi (2002).
4. T .H . Cormen, C . E . Leiserson, R .L . Rivest “Introduction to Algorithms”, 3rd edition, PHI/Pearson.
5. Anne Benoit, Yves Robert, Frédéric Vivien “A Guide to Algorithm Design: Paradigms, Methods, and
Complexity Analysis”, CRC Press, 2013.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 311
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Paper Code(s): ECC‐207 L P C

Paper: Digital Logic and Computer Design 4 ‐ 4

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To introduce basic concepts of Boolean Algebra and Combinational Logic
2. To introduce various sequential circuits, designing with examples
3. To relate combination circuit design and sequential circuit design with respect to the design of a
computer system
4. To introduce machine learning, computer arithmetic, modes of data transfer with respect to I/O and
Memory organization of a computer
Course Outcomes (CO) :
CO 1 Ability to understand Boolean Algebra and Design Combinational Circuits .
CO 2 Ability to understand and Design Sequential Circuits.
CO 3 Ability to understand Design of a basic computer.
CO 4 Ability to understand Input‐Output and Memory Organization of a Computer.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 2 3 2 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 2 2 3
CO 2 3 2 3 2 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 2 2 3
CO 3 3 2 3 3 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 2 2 3
CO 4 3 3 3 3 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 2 2 3

UNIT – I

Boolean Algebra and Combinational Logic: Review of number systems , signed, unsigned, fixed point, floating
point numbers, Binary Codes, Boolean algebra – basic postulates, theorems , Simplification of Boolean
function using Karnaugh map and Quine‐McCluskey method – Implementations of combinational logic
functions using gates, Adders, Subtractors, Magnitude comparator, encoder and decoders, multiplexers, code
converters , parity generator/checker, implementation of combinational circuits using multiplexers.

UNIT – II

Sequential Circuits: General model of sequential circuits, Flip‐flops, latches , level triggering, edge triggering,
master slave configuration , concept of state diagram , state table, state reduction procedures , Design of
synchronous sequential circuits , up/down and modulus counters , shift registers, Ring counter , Johnson
counter , timing diagram , serial adder , sequence detector, Programmable Logic Array (PLA), Programmable
Array Logic (PAL), Memory Unit, Random Access Memory

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 312
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT – III

Basic Computer organization: Stored Program, Organization, Computer registers, bus system, instruction set
completeness, instruction cycle, Register Transfer Language, Arithmetic, Logic and Shift Micro‐operations,
Instruction Codes, Design of a simple computer, Design of Arithmetic Logic unit, shifter, Design of a simple
hardwired control unit, Programming the basic computer, Machine language instructions, assembly language,
Microprogrammed control, Horizontal and Vertical Microprogramming, Central Processing Unit, instruction
sets and formats, addressing modes, data paths, RISC and CISC characteristics.

UNIT – IV

Computer Arithmetic, addition, subtraction, multiplication and division algorithms, Input‐Output Organization,
Modes of data transfer, Interrupt cycle, direct memory access, Input‐Output processor, Memory Organization,
Memory Hierarchy, Associative Memory, Cache Memory, Internal and external Memory, Virtual Memory.

Text Book(s)
1. M. Morris Mano, “Digital Logic and Computer Design”, Pearson Education, 2016
2. M. Morris Mano, Rajib Mall “Computer System Architecture”, 3rd Edition Pearson Education, 2017

References:
1. Leach, D. P., Albert P. Malvino, “Digital Principles and Applications”, McGraw Hill Education, 8th Edition ,
2014
2. Jain, R.P. ,”Modern Digital Electronics”, McGraw Hill Education, 4th Edition , 2010
3. Floyd, Thomas L. , “Digital Fundamentals” Pearson Education, 11th Edition, 2017
4. M. Rafiquzzaman, “Fundamentals of Digital Logic and Microcomputer Design”, Wiley, 5th Ed., 2005.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 313
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Paper Code(s): CIC‐209 L P C

Paper: Data Structures 4 ‐ 4

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
st
2. The first (1 ) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To introduce basics of Data structures (Arrays, strings, linked list etc.)
2. To understand the concepts of Stacks, Queues and Trees, related operations and their implementation
3. To understand sets, heaps and graphs
4. To introduce various Sorting and searching Algorithms
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 To be able to understand difference between structured data and data structure
CO 2 To be able to create common basic data structures and trees
CO 3 To have a knowledge of sets, heaps and graphs
CO 4 To have basic knowledge of sorting and searching algorithms
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 2 2 2 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 2 2 3
CO 2 3 2 2 2 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 2 2 3
CO 3 3 2 2 2 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 2 2 3
CO 4 3 2 2 2 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 2 2 3

UNIT – I

Overview of data structure, Basics of Algorithm Analysis including Running Time Calculations, Abstract Data
Types, Arrays, Arrays and Pointers, Multidimensional Array, String processing, General Lists and List ADT, List
manipulations, Single, double and circular lists. Stacks and Stack ADT, Stack Manipulation, Prefix, infix and
postfix expressions, recursion. Queues and Queue ADT, Queue manipulation.

UNIT – II

Sparse Matrix Representation (Array and Link List representation) and arithmetic (addition, subtraction and
multiplication), polynomials and polynomial arithmetic.
Trees, Properties of Trees, Binary trees, Binary Tree traversal, Tree manipulation algorithms, Expression trees
and their usage, binary search trees, AVL Trees, Heaps and their implementation, Priority Queues, B‐Trees, B*
Tree, B+ Tree

UNIT – III

Sorting concept, order, stability, Selection sorts (straight, heap), insertion sort (Straight Insertion, Shell sort),
Exchange Sort (Bubble, quicksort), Merge sort (External Sorting) (Natural merge, balanced merge and

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 314
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

polyphase merge). Searching – List search, sequential search, binary search, hashing methods, collision
resolution in hashing.

UNIT – IV

Disjoint sets representation, union find algorithm, Graphs, Graph representation, Graph Traversals and their
implementations (BFS and DFS). Minimum Spanning Tree algorithms, Shortest Path Algorithms

Textbook(s):
1. Richard Gilberg , Behrouz A. Forouzan, “Data Structures: A Pseudocode Approach with C, 2nd Edition,
Cengage Learning, Oct 2004
2. E. Horowitz, S. Sahni, S. Anderson‐Freed, "Fundamentals of Data Structures in C", 2nd Edition, Silicon Press
(US), 2007.

References:
1. Mark Allen Weiss, “Data Structures and Algorithm Analysis in C”, 2nd Edition, Pearson, September, 1996
2. Robert Kruse, “Data Structures and Program Design in C”, 2nd Edition, Pearson, November, 1990
3. Seymour Lipschutz, “Data Structures with C (Schaum's Outline Series)”, McGrawhill, 2017
4. A. M. Tenenbaum, “Data structures using C”. Pearson Education, India, 1st Edition 2003.
5. Weiss M.A., “Data structures and algorithm analysis in C++”, Pearson Education, 2014.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 315
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Paper Code(s): CIC‐211 L P C

Paper: Object‐Oriented Programming Using C++ 4 ‐ 4

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To introduce the basic Concepts of Object Oriented Programming (data types, operators and
functions) using C++
2. To introduce concepts of Classes and Objects with the examples of C++ programming
3. To understand object oriented features such as Inheritance and Polymorphism
4. To use various object oriented concepts (exceptional handling) to solve different problems
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Ability to have an in‐depth knowledge of object oriented programming paradigm
CO 2 To be able to develop basic C++ programming skills
CO 3 To be able to apply various object oriented features using C++
CO 4 Ability to have an understanding of generic programming & standard templates
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 2 2 2 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 2 2 3
CO 2 3 2 2 2 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 2 2 3
CO 3 3 2 2 2 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 2 2 3
CO 4 3 2 2 2 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 2 2 3

UNIT – I

Object Oriented Programming Paradigm, Basic Concepts of Object Oriented Programming, Benefits of Object
Oriented Programming, Object Oriented Languages, Applications of Object Oriented Programming, C++
Programming Language, Tokens, Keywords, Identifiers and Constants, Data Types, Type Compatibility,
Variables, Operators in C++, Implicit Type Conversions, Operator Precedence, The Main Function, Function
Prototyping, Call by Reference, Return by Reference, Inline Functions, Function Overloading, Friend Functions,
default parameter value.

UNIT – II

Specifying a class, Member Functions, Encapsulation, information hiding, abstract data types, objects & classes,
Static Member Functions, Arrays of Objects, Constructors & Destructors, Parameterized Constructors, Copy
Constructors, Dynamic Constructors, Destructors, identity and behaviour of an object, C++ garbage collection,
dynamic memory allocation, Explicit Type Conversions, Operator Overloading.

UNIT – III

Inheritance, inheritance methods, Class hierarchy, derivation – public, private & protected, aggregation,

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 316
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Inheritance Constructors, composition vs. classification hierarchies, Containership, Initialization List,

Polymorphism, categorization of polymorphic techniques, polymorphism by parameter, parametric
polymorphism, generic function – template function, function overriding, run time polymorphism, virtual
functions.

UNIT – IV

Standard C++ classes, using multiple inheritance, persistant objects, streams and files, namespaces, exception
handling, generic classes, standard template library: Library organization and containers, standard containers,
algorithm and Function objects, iterators and allocators, strings, streams, manipulators, user defined
manipulators, vectors.

Textbook(s):
1. Stanley B. Lippman, Josée Lajoie, Barbara E. Moo, “C++ Primer”, Addison‐Wesley Professional, 2012.
2. Ivor Horton, “Using the C++ Standard Template Libraries”, Apress, 2015.
3. R. Lafore, “Object Oriented Programming using C++”, Galgotia.

References:
1. A.R.Venugopal, Rajkumar, T. Ravishanker “Mastering C++”, TMH
2. Bjarne Stroustrup, “Programming: principles and practice using C++”, Addison‐Wesley, 2015.
3. Bjarne Stroustrup, “A Tour of C++”, Addison‐Wesley Professional, 2018.
4. Bjarne Stroustrup, “The C++ Programming Language”, 4th Edition, Addison‐Wesley Professional, 2013.
5. Peter Van Weert and Marc Gregoire, “C++17 Standard Library Quick Reference: A Pocket Guide to Data
Structures, Algorithms, and Functions”, Apress (2019)
6. Rumbaugh et. al. “ Object Oriented Modelling & Design”, Prentice Hall
7. G . Booch “Object Oriented Design & Applications”, Benjamin,Cummings.
8. E.Balaguruswamy, “Objected Oriented Programming with C++”, TMH
9. Steven C. Lawlor, “The Art of Programming Computer Science with C++”, Vikas Publication.
10. Slobodan Dmitrović, Modern C++ for Absolute Beginners”:A Friendly Introduction to C++ Programming
Language and C++11 to C++20 Standards”, Apress, 2020.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 317
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Paper Code(s): ECC‐205 L P C

Paper: Signals and Systems 3 ‐ 3

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives:
1. To impart understanding about various types of signals and systems, their classifications, analysis
and operations.
2. To impart knowledge of use of transforms in analysis of signals and system.
3. To impart skill to carry out simulation on signals and systems for observing effects of applying
various properties and operations.
4. To impart strong foundation of communication and signal processing to be studied in the
subsequent semester
Course Outcome (CO):
CO 1 Ability to understand about various types of signals and systems, classify them, analyze them, and
perform various operations on them.
CO 2 Ability to understand use of transforms in analysis of signals and system.
CO 3 Ability to carry out simulation on signals and systems for observing effects of applying various
properties and operations.
CO 4 Ability to create strong foundation of communication and signal processing to be studied in the
subsequently.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) Mapping (Scale ‐ 1: Low, 2: medium, 3: High)
CO/PO PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 3 3 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ 1 1 1 1
CO 2 3 3 3 3 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ 1 1 1 1
CO 3 3 3 3 3 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ 1 1 1 1
CO 4 3 3 3 3 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ 1 1 1 1

Unit I

Continuous and discrete time signals: Classification of Signals – Periodic aperiodic even – odd – energy and
power signals – Deterministic and random signals – complex exponential and sinusoidal signals – periodicity –
properties of discrete time complex exponential unit impulse – unit step impulse functions – Transformation in
independent variable of signals: time scaling, time shifting. Determination of Fourier series representation of
continuous time and discrete time periodic signals – Explanation of properties of continuous time and discrete
time Fourier series. Representation of continuous time signals by its sample ‐ Sampling theorem –
Reconstruction of a Signal from its samples, aliasing – discrete time processing of continuous time signals,
sampling of band pass signals.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 318
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Unit II

Continuous time Fourier Transform and Laplace Transform analysis with examples – properties of the
Continuous‐time Fourier Transform and Laplace Transform basic properties, Parseval’s relation, and
convolution in time and frequency domains.
Basic properties of continuous time systems: Linearity, Causality, time invariance, stability, magnitude and
Phase representations of frequency response of LTI systems ‐Analysis and characterization of LTI systems using
Differential Equations and Continuous time LTI systems. Laplace transform: Computation of impulse response
and transfer function using Laplace transform.

Unit III

Discrete time system analysis using Difference equations, Discrete Time Fourier Transform, Discrete Fourier
Transform, FFT and their property and usage in the analysis of Discrete time systems.

Unit IV

Basic principles of z‐transform ‐ z‐transform definition – region of convergence – properties of ROC – Properties
of z‐transform – Poles and Zeros – inverse z‐transform using Contour integration ‐ Residue Theorem, Power
Series expansion and Partial fraction expansion, Relationship between z‐transform and Fourier transform.
Properties of convolution and the interconnection of LTI Systems – Causality and stability of LTI Systems.
Computation of Impulse & response & Transfer function using Z Transform.

Textbook(s):
1. Alan V. Oppenheim, Alan S. Willsky with S. Hamid Nawab, “Signals & Systems”, 2nd ed., Pearson Education,
1997.
2. Simon Haykin and Barry Van Veen, “Signals and Systems”, John Wiley, 1999

References:
1. M. J. Roberts, “Signals and Systems Analysis using Transform method and MATLAB”, TMH 2003.
2. K. Lindner, “Signals and Systems”, McGraw Hill International, 1999.
3. Moman .H. Hays,” Digital Signal Processing “, Schaum’s outlines, Tata McGraw‐Hill Co Ltd., 2004.
4. B. P. Lathi, “Signal Processing and Linear System”, Berkeley Cambridge Press, 1998.
5. H. P. Hsu, “Schaum’s Outlines of The Theory and Problems of Signals and Systems”, McGraw‐Hill, 1995.
6. John G.Proakis and Dimitris G.Manolakis, “Digital Signal Processing, Principles, Algorithms and Applications,
3rd edn., PHI, 2000.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 319
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Paper Code(s): ECC‐209 L P C

Paper: Analog Communication 4 ‐ 4

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives:
1. To impart understanding of the concepts of analog communication systems.
2. To impart understanding of various modulation and demodulation techniques of analog
communication.
3. To impart understanding of transmitters and receivers in analog communication.
4. To impart understanding of the causes of noise and noise performance of analog communication.
Course Outcome (CO):
CO 1 To understand the concepts of analog communication systems.
CO 2 To understand various modulation and demodulation techniques of analog communication.
CO 3 To understand transmitters and receivers in analog communication.
CO 4 To understand the causes of noise and noise performance of analog communication.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) Mapping (Scale ‐ 1: Low, 2: medium, 3: High)
CO/PO PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 ‐ 2 1 ‐ 2
CO 2 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 ‐ 2 1 ‐ 2
CO 3 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 ‐ 2 1 ‐ 2
CO 4 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 ‐ 2 1 ‐ 2

UNIT I

The Communication Process, Review of Fourier Transforms and Dirac Delta Functions, Transmission through
Linear Systems, Filters (low pass and band pass signals), Phase and Group Delay, Sources of Information.
Amplitude Modulation: Introduction, Double Sideband – Suppressed Carrier Modulation, Quadrature – Carrier
Multiplexing, Single‐Sideband and Vestigial‐Sideband methods of modulation, Frequency Translation,
Frequency‐Division Multiplexing

UNIT II

Angle Modulation: Introduction, Basic Definitions, Frequency Modulation, Phase‐Locked Loop, Nonlinear
Effects in FM Systems, Superheterodyne receiver.

UNIT III

Probability and Random Processes: Introduction; Probability; Random Variables, Statistical Averages; Random
Processes; Mean, Correlation, and Covariance functions; Transmission of a Random Process Through a Linear
Filter, Power Spectral Density, Gaussian Process, Noise, Narrowband Noise

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 320
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT IV

Noise: Introduction, Receiver Model, Noise in DSB‐SC Receivers, Noise in AM Receivers, Noise in FM Receivers,
Pre‐emphasis and De‐emphasis in FM.

Textbook(s):
1. Simon Haykins and Michael Moher, “Communication Systems” John Wiley &sons Inc, 5th edition, 2009.

References:
1. B P Lathi and Zhi Ding, “Modern Digital and Analog Communication Systems”, OUP, 5th edition, 2019.
2. H. Taub, D. L. Schilling and Gaotam Saha, “Taub’s Principles of Communication Systems”, McGraw Hill
Eduction, 4th edition, 2017.
3. J. G. Proakis, M. Salehi, “Fundamentals of Communications Systems”, Pearson, 2nd Edition, 2014.
4. W. Tomasi, “Electronic communications systems (Fundamentals Through Advanced)”, Pearson Education, 5th
Edition, 2008.
5. G. Kennedy and B. Davis, “Electronic communication systems”, TMH, 4th Edition, 2008 (reprint)

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 321
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Paper Code(s): ECC‐211 L P C

Paper: Analog Electronics – I 4 ‐ 4

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard /
level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives:
1. To develop understanding of operation, characteristics, parameters and applications of p‐n junction
diode
2. To develop understanding about BJT and FET in terms of structure, operation, configurations and
characteristics. Also analyse stability and amplifier circuit using small signal models
3. To impart knowledge of cascade amplifiers, coupling schemes, power amplifiers and their analysis
4. To impart knowledge of Feedback amplifiers and oscillators
Course Outcome (CO):
CO 1 Ability to understand of operation, characteristics, parameters and applications of p‐n junction diode
CO 2 Ability to understand about BJT and FET in terms of structure, operation, configurations and
characteristics and able to analyse stability and amplifier circuit using small signal models
CO 3 Ability to understand and analyse cascade amplifiers, coupling schemes in amplifiers and power
amplifiers
CO 4 Ability to understand feedback amplifiers and oscillators
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) Mapping (Scale ‐ 1: Low, 2: medium, 3: High)
CO/PO PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 ‐ 2 1 ‐ 2
CO 2 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 ‐ 2 1 ‐ 2
CO 3 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 ‐ 2 1 ‐ 2
CO 4 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 ‐ 2 1 ‐ 2

UNIT – I

Open circuit P‐N junction diode, Forward and reverse biased diode, I‐V characteristics of diode, Diode Equation,
Temperature dependence of diode. Breakdown phenomena, diffusion and transition capacitance of diode.
Diode equivalent circuit, Ideal diode. Solar cell.
Diode circuits: half‐wave and full‐wave rectifiers with capacitor filter, clamping and clipping circuits. Zener
diodes as voltage regulator.

UNIT – II

Bipolar Junction transistor (BJT): Structure, modes of operation, Configurations, I‐V characteristics, early effect,
junction voltages; Transistor Biasing: Need of biasing, load line concept, fixed bias, self‐bias, collector to base
bias, stability factors, Current Mirrors; hybrid model of BJT amplifier, small signal analysis of CE BJT amplifier
using h parameter
JFET: Physical structure, I‐V characteristics; MOSFET: Depletion and enhancement types, Physical structure and
I‐V characteristics; FET small‐signal model (low & high frequency); MOSFET as resistance and switch,

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 322
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT – III

Cascade amplifiers: Analysis of cascade amplifier (voltage gain, current gain, input and output impedances);
Darlington pair, Cascode amplifier; Types of coupling: DC, RC and Transformer; RC coupled Amplifier and its
frequency response; Differential Amplifier: differential and Common mode operation, CMRR.
Power Amplifiers: Classification of output stages (Class A, B, C & AB), Class A Amplifier, Transformer coupled
class A amplifier, Push pull amplifiers: Class A and Class B, Harmonic distortion, efficiency, crossover distortion,
class AB operation, Class C amplifier.

UNIT – IV

Feedback Amplifiers: classification, Feedback concept, basic feedback topologies, Characteristics of Negative
Feedback, Feedback and stability, gain margin, Noise margin,
Sinusoidal Oscillator, Barkhausen criterion, RC phase shift, LC (Colpitt’s, Hartley, Clapp), Crystal Oscillator.

Textbook(s):
1. J. Millman, C.C. Halkias and Satyabrata Jit, “Electronic Devices and Circuits”, Tata McGraw Hill, 4th ed. ,
1998
2. R. L. Boylestad and N. Nashlesky, “Electronic Devices and Circuit Theory”, Pearson Education, 11th Ed.,
2014

References:
1. Adel S. Sedra and Kenneth C. Smith, “Micro Electronic Circuits Theory and Applications,” 5th Edition , OUP,
2004.
2. B. Kumar and S. B. Jain, “Electronic Devices and Circuits””, Prentice Hall of India, 2007
3. S Salivahanan, and N. Suresh Kumar, “Electronic Devices and Circuits”, McGraw Hill Education (India), 2018
4. B.P. Singh and Rekha Singh, “Electronic Devices and Integrated Circuits”, Pearson Education, 2009.
5. J. J. Cathey, “Schaum’s Outline of Theory and Problems in Electronic Devices and Circuits”, McGraw Hill,
2002.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 323
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Paper Code(s): EEC‐209 L P C

Paper: Electrical Materials 3 ‐ 3

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To impart the knowledge of conducting materials.
2. To impart the knowledge of insulating materials.
3. To impart the knowledge of magnetic materials.
4. To impart the knowledge of special materials.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Ability to understand properties and applications of conducting materials.
CO 2 Ability to understand properties and applications of insulating materials.
CO 3 Ability to understand properties and applications of magnetic materials.
CO 4 Ability to understand properties and applications of special materials.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 2 2 1 1 2 1 ‐ 1 1 ‐ 1
CO 2 3 2 2 1 1 2 1 ‐ 1 1 ‐ 1
CO 3 3 2 2 1 1 2 1 ‐ 1 1 ‐ 1
CO 4 3 2 2 1 1 2 1 ‐ 1 1 ‐ 1

UNIT I

Conducting Materials: Energy band diagram of conductors, semiconductors and insulators. Conductivity and
Resistivity, factors affecting the resistivity, classification of conducting materials, electrical, mechanical and
thermal properties and applications of low resistance materials like copper, aluminium, steel, silver, gold,
platinum, brass and bronze. Electrical, mechanical and thermal properties and applications of high resistance
materials like manganin, constantan, nichrome, mercury, tungsten and carbon. Introduction of super
conductors. [T1,T2]

UNIT II

Insulating Materials: Classification of insulating materials, electrical, physical, thermal, chemical, mechanical
properties of insulating materials. Thermoplastic and natural insulating materials, Gaseous and liquid insulating
materials, properties and applications of ceramics and synthetic insulating materials. . [T1,T2]

UNIT III

Magnetic Materials: Introduction and classification of magnetic materials, permeability, B‐H curve, magnetic
saturation, hysteresis loop, coercive force and residual magnetism, concept of eddy current and hysteresis loss,
curie temperature, magnetostriction effect. Soft and hard magnetic materials, ferro and ferri magnetic

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 324
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

materials, special purpose magnetic materials. [T1,T2]

UNIT IV

Special Materials and components: Properties and applications of different materials used in electrical systems
like – thermocouples, bimetallic, fusing, and soldering. Introduction to different types of materials used in
electromagnetic and electromechanical systems, resistors, capacitors, inductors, special semiconductors used
in electrical engineering. [T1,T2]

Textbook(s):
1. Electrical properties of materials by L. Solymer, Oxford University Press, 2014
2. An Introduction to Electrical Engineering Materials, C.S. Indulkar, S.Thiruvengadam, S. Chand Publishing,
4th edition, 2004

Reference Books:
1. Electronic Engineering Materials and Devices,J. Allison, Tata McGraw Hill Education,1973
2. Electrical Materials, Rob Zachariason, Delmar Cengage Learning, 2nd Revised edition 2011
3. Electrical Engineering Materials, Dekker Adrianu., PHI,1st edition, 2011
4. A Course In Electrical Engineering Materials, Seth S P, Dhanpat Rai, 3rd edition, 2011
5. Electrical and Electronic Engineering Materials by S.K. Bhattacharya, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 325
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Paper Code(s): EEC‐211 L P C

Paper: Electrical Machines – I 4 ‐ 4

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To impart the knowledge of magnetic circuit and EMEC devices.
2. To understand the concept of DC machines.
3. To impart the knowledge of single phase transformer.
4. To impart the knowledge of three phase transformer.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Ability to understand the magnetic circuit and working of EMEC devices.
CO 2 Ability to understand the working and applications of DC motors.
CO 3 Ability to analyse of single phase transformer and solution of numerical problems.
CO 4 Ability to analyse of three phase transformer and solution of numerical problems.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 2 2 2 1 2 1 ‐ 2 2 ‐ 3
CO 2 3 3 2 2 1 2 1 ‐ 2 2 ‐ 2
CO 3 2 1 2 1 2 1 ‐ 2 2 ‐ 2
CO 4 3 2 2 2 1 2 1 ‐ 2 2 ‐ 2

UNIT I

Principles of EMEC: Fundamentals of Magnetic Circuits, Energy in Electro‐Magnetic Systems, Flow of Energy in
Electro‐Mechanical Devices, Energy and co‐energy in Magnetic field, Singly and doubly excited systems,
Electromagnetic and Reluctance Torque.
DC Generators: Constructional features, Armature winding details, lap & wave connections, EMF equation,
separately excited, shunt, series and compound connected D.C. generators process of voltage build up in shunt
generators, Characteristics and applications of separately/self‐excited generators. [T1,T2]

UNIT II

DC Generators (Contd.): Armature Reaction, Demagnetizing and Cross‐magnetizing armature MMF, Interpoles
and compensating windings, commutation process and its improvement.
D.C. Motors: Speed and Torque Equation of D.C. motors, Characteristics of D.C. series, shunt and compound
motors and their applications, Starting and speed control of D.C. motors, Braking of D.C. motors, Efficiency and
testing of D.C. Machines, Introduction of D.C. servo motor and permanent magnet / brushless D.C. motors.
[T1,T2]

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 326
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT III

Single phase Transformers: Transformer construction and practical considerations. Equivalent circuit(Exact and
approximate), per unit values, Phasor diagram, Transformer testing : open circuit test, Short Circuit test,
Sumpner’s test, Efficiency and voltage regulation, All day efficiency. [T1,T2]

UNIT IV

3 phase Transformers: Three‐phase Bank of Single‐phase Transformers, Parallel operations of 1‐phase and 3‐
phase transformers, load division between transformers in parallel. Three winding transformers, Zigzag
connections, vector grouping with clock convention, tertiary winding, tap changing, phase conversions‐3phase
to 2 phase and 3phase to 6 phase.
Special Purpose Transformers: Auto‐transformers. Welding, Traction, Instruments and pulse Transformers.
[T1,T2]

Textbook(s):
1. Electric Machinery, A Fitzgerald, Charles Kingsley, Stephen Umans, Tata McGraw Hill Education, 6th
Edition, 2002.
2. Electrical Machines with MATLAB, Turan Gnen, CRC Press,Taylor&Francis, 2nd edition, 1998.

Reference Books:
1. The Performance and Design of Alternating Current Machines, M.G. Say, CBS Publishers, 2005
2. Electro‐Mechanical Energy Conversion with Dynamics of Machines, Rakosh Das Begamudre, Wiley‐
Blackwell, 1988.
3. Performance and Design of Direct Current Machines: AE Clayton and NN Hancock, CBSPublishers, 2014
4. Oblems in Electrical Engineering: Power engineering and electronics with answers Partly Solved in I. Units:
Parker Smith , CBS Publishers, 9th edition, 2003
5. Electric Machines, I J Nagrath D P Kothari, Mc Graw‐Hill Education, 3rd edition, 2011
6. Samarjit Ghosh, “Electrical Machines”, Pearson.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 327
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Paper Code(s): ECC‐213 / ECC‐216 L P C

Paper: Electromagnetic Field Theory 3 ‐ 3

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To impart the basic laws of electrostatics.
2. To impart the knowledge of electromagnetics.
3. To impart the knowledge of solution to real life plan wave problems for various boundary conditions.
4. To impart the knowledge of characteristics and impudence transformation on high frequency
transmission lines.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Ability to understand the basic laws of electrostatics.
CO 2 To understand the basic laws of electromagnetics.
CO 3 Ability to provide solution of real life plan wave problems for various boundary conditions.
CO 4 To understand the characteristics and impudence transformation on high frequency transmission lines
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 ‐ 2 1 ‐ 2
CO 2 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 ‐ 2 1 ‐ 2
CO 3 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 ‐ 2 1 ‐ 2
CO 4 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 ‐ 2 1 ‐ 2

UNIT I

Introduction: Review of scalar and vector field, Dot and Cross products, Coordinate Systems‐Cartesian,
cylindrical and spherical. Vector representation of surface, Physical interpretation of gradient divergence and
curl, Transformation of vectors in different co‐ordinate systems, dirac‐delta function.
Electrostatics: Electric field due to point‐charges, line charges and surface charges, Electrostatic potential,
Solution of Laplace and Poisson’s equation in one dimension, M‐method of image applied to plain boundaries,
field mapping and conformal transformation, Electric flux density, Boundary conditions. Capacitance:
calculation of capacitance for simple rectangular, cylindrical and spherical geometries, Electrostatic energy.
[T1,T2]

UNIT II

Magnetostatics : Magnetic Induction and Faraday’s Law, Magnetic Flux Density, Magnetic Field Strength H,
Ampere, Gauss Law in the Differential Vector Form, Permeability, Energy Stored in a Magnetic Field, Ampere’s
Law for a Current Element, Volume Distribution of Current , Ampere’s Law Force Law, Magnetic Vector
Potential, The Far Field of a Current Distribution, Maxwell’s Equations: The Equation of Continuity for Time
Varying Fields, Inconsistency of Ampere’s Law, Maxwell’s Equations, Conditions at a Boundary Surface.
[T1,T2]

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 328
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT III

Electromagnetic Waves: Continuity equations, Displacement current, Maxwell’s equation, Boundary conditions,
Plane wave equation and its solution in conducting and non‐conducting media, Phasor notation, Phase velocity,
Group velocity, Depth of penetration, Conductors and dielectrics, Impedance of conducting medium.
Polarization, Reflection and refraction of plane waves at plane boundaries, Poynting vectors, and Poynting
theorem. [T1,T2]

UNIT IV

Transmission Lines: Transmission line equations, Characteristic impendence, Distortion‐less lines, Input
impendence of a loss less line, computation of primary and secondary constants, Open and Short circuited
lines, Standing wave and reflection losses, Impedance matching, Loading of lines, Input impedance of
transmission lines, RF lines, Relation between reflection coefficient and voltage standing wave ratio (VSWR),
Lines of different lengths – λ/2, λ/4, λ/8 lines, Losses in transmission lines, Smith chart and applications,
impedance matching Single stub, Double stub. [T1,T2]

Textbook(s):
1. Matthew N. O. Sadiku , “Elements of Electromagnetics”, Oxford University Press
2. E. C. Jordon, K. G. Balman, “Electromagnetic Waves & Radiation System” PHI – 2nd Edition

Reference Books:
1. William H. Hayt, “Engineering Electromagnetics”, TMH
2. J.D. Kraus, “Electromagnetics”, TMH
3. David K. Cheng,” Field and Wave Electromagnetic”, 2nd Edition, Pearson Education Asia,2001
4. John R. Reitz, “Foundations of Electromagnetic Theory”. Pearson

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 329
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Paper Code(s): ECC‐215 L P C

Paper: Electronics – I 3 ‐ 3

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To Impart the knowledge of semi‐conductor diodes and their applications.
2. To Impart the knowledge of Transistors.
3. To Impart the knowledge of code, logic gates and combinational logic circuits
4. To Impart the knowledge of sequential logic circuits.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 The students are able to understand the working of various diodes.
CO 2 The students are able to understand the working of transistor and their applications.
CO 3 The students are able to understand the function of logic gates and design of combinational logic
circuits.
CO 4 The students are able to understand the function and design of sequential logic circuits.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 ‐ 2 1 ‐ 2
CO 2 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 ‐ 2 1 ‐ 2
CO 3 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 ‐ 2 1 ‐ 2
CO 4 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 ‐ 2 1 ‐ 2

UNIT‐I

Evaluation of Electronics: Energy Band Structures In Metals, Semiconductors And Insulators, Theory Of
Semiconductors: Classification Of Semiconductors, Conductivity Of Semiconductors, Carrier Concentration In
Intrinsic & Extrinsic Semiconductors, Properties Of Intrinsic And Extrinsic Semiconductors, Fermi Level In A
Semiconductor Drift And Diffusion Currents.
Theory of p‐n junction Diode: Diode Current Equation, Diode Resistance, Transition Capacitance, Diffusion
Capacitance, (Elementary treatment only), Effect of Temperature on p‐n Junction Diode, Switching
Characteristics,
Special Diodes: Zener Diode, Varactor Diode, Tunnel Diode, Photodiode, Light Emitting Diodes, Schottky Barrier
Diode, Applications of Diodes: Half‐Wave Diode Rectifier, Full‐Wave Rectifier, Clippers and Clampers
(Elementary treatment only). [T1]

Unit – II

Bipolar junction transistor: Introduction of transistor, construction, transistor operations, BJT characteristics,
load line, operating point, leakage currents, saturation and cut off mode of operations CB, CE, CC
configurations, hybrid model for transistor at low frequencies, Introduction to FETs and MOSFETs. [T1]

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 330
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Unit – III

Number Systems and Codes:‐ Decimal, Binary, Octal and Hexadecimal Number systems, Codes‐ BCD, Gray
Code, Excess‐3 Code, ASCII, EBCDIC, Conversion between various Codes.
Combinational Logic Circuits:‐ Review of basic gates‐ Universal gates, Adder, Subtractor ,Serial Adder, Parallel
Adder‐ Carry Propagate Adder, Carry Look‐ahead Adder, Carry Save Adder, Comparators, Parity Generators,
Decoder and Encoder, Multiplexer and De‐multiplexer, ALU, PLA and PAL. [T2]

UNIT‐ IV

Sequential Logic Circuits: ‐ Latches and Flip Flops‐ SR, , D, T and MS‐JK Flip Flops, Asynchronous Inputs.
Counters and Shift Registers:‐ Design of Synchronous and Asynchronous Counters:‐ Binary, BCD, Decade and
Up/Down Counters , Shift Registers, Types of Shift Registers, Counters using Shift Registers‐ Ring Counter and
Johnson Counter. [T2]

Textbook(s):
1. S. Salivahanan, N. Suresh Kr. & A. Vallavaraj, “Electronic Devices & Circuit”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2008
2. R.P. Jain, “Modern Digital Electronics”, TMH, 2nd Ed.

Reference:
1. Sedra & Smith, “Micro Electronic Circuits” Oxford University Press, 2000.
2. B.Kumar & Shail Bala Jain, “Electronic Devices And Circuits” PHI.
3. Boylestad & Nashelsky, “Electronic Devices & Circuits”, Pearson Education, 10TH Edition.
4. Morris Mano, Digital Logic and Computer Design”, Pearson.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 331
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Paper Code(s): ICC‐205 L P C

Paper: Engineering Electromagnetics 4 ‐ 4

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To impart the basic laws of electromagnetism.
2. To impart the knowledge of solution to real life plane wave problems for various boundary conditions
and analyse the field equations for the wave propagation in special cases.
3. To impart the knowledge of characteristics and carryout impudence transformation on high frequency
transmission lines.
4. To impart the knowledge of the wave propagation on metallic waveguides.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 To understand the basic laws of electromagnetism.
CO 2 To provide solution of real life plane wave problems for various boundary conditions and analyse the
field equations for the wave propagation in special cases.
CO 3 Understand the characteristics and carryout impudence transformation on high frequency transmission
lines.
CO 4 Analyze wave propagation on metallic waveguides in modal form.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 ‐ 2 1 ‐ 2
CO 2 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 ‐ 2 1 ‐ 2
CO 3 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 ‐ 2 1 ‐ 2
CO 4 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 ‐ 2 1 ‐ 2

UNIT I

Vector algebra and vector calculus with significance of del operators‐theorems and applications, Maxwell’s
equations (for static, time varying fields) in integral and differential forms, Continuity equation, boundary
conditions for electric magnetic fields, Programmatic solutions to Maxwell’s equations using MATLAB, Poisson’s
and Laplace’s equations.

UNIT II

Electromagnetic waves: wave generation and equations in free space, lossy and lossless dielectrics, conductors‐
skin depth – Plane wave reflection and refraction – Standing Wave – Applications. Wave propagation in lossless
and conducting medium, phase and group velocity, Reflection by a perfect conductor, insulator, Brewster
Angle, surface impedance. Guided waves and flow of power: Poynting vector and Poynting theorem,
applications, power less in a conductor.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 332
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT III

Transmission Lines: General solution for transmission lines – Equations of voltage and current, Standing waves
and impedance transformation, Lossless and low‐loss transmission lines, meaning of reflection coefficient
wavelength and velocity of propagation, distortion less transmission line, impedance matching – quarter wave
line, single stub matching, double stub matching, Power transfer, Microstrip transmission line, Smith chart.

UNIT IV

Waveguides: Rectangular waveguide, characteristic of TE and TM waves‐cutoff wavelength and phase velocity
impossibility of TEM waves in waveguides‐dominant mode, Surface currents, Attenuation, impedances. Circular
wave guides‐solution of field equations in cylindrical coordinates‐TE and TM waves in circular guides – wave
impedance and characteristic impedance, Microwave cavities: rectangular cavity resonators, circular cavity
resonators‐Q‐factor.
Introduction to antenna: monopole and dipole antenna.

Textbook(s):
1. M. N. O. Sadiku , “Elements of Electromagnetics”, Oxford University Press 2007
2. W. H. Hayt, “Engineering Electromagnetics”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2006

Reference Books:
1. E. C. Jordon, K. G. Balman, “Electromagnetic Waves & Radiation System” Prentice Hall, India
2. G. S. Rao, “Electromagnetic Field Theory and Transmission lines” Wiley India.
3. David M. Pozar, “Microwave Engineering” John Wiley – 2nd edition.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 333
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Paper Code(s): EEC‐207 L P C

Paper: Electrical Machines 4 ‐ 4

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To impart the concepts of DC Machines.
2. To impart the concepts of Transformers.
3. To impart the concepts of Induction Motors.
4. To impart the concepts of Synchronous Motors.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Ability to understand working and applications of DC Motors.
CO 2 Ability to understand working and analysis of Transformers.
CO 3 Ability to understand working and applications of Induction Motors.
CO 4 Ability to understand working and applications of Synchronous Machines
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 ‐ 2 1 ‐ 2
CO 2 3 3 1 3 3 2 1 ‐ 3 1 ‐ 2
CO 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 1 ‐ 2 1 ‐ 1
CO 4 3 3 3 3 3 2 1 ‐ 2 1 ‐ 2

UNIT‐ I

Principles of Electromechanical Energy Conversion.DC machines: construction, armature windings, induced

EMF equation, torque production, magnetization curve. Types of generators and motors, characteristics,
commutation and interpoles, armature reaction, Speed control of dc motor and starting.
PMDC machine: Introduction and need of brushless motors [T1, T2]

UNIT‐ II

Transformers: construction, ideal and practical transformer, equivalent circuits, voltage regulation, maximum
efficiency criterion. Open circuit and short circuit tests. Phasor diagrams on no load, full load, lagging and
leading power factor loads. Three phase transformer.
Introduction to polyphase induction machines, production of rotating magnetic flux vector, principle of
operation, importance of air gap, comparison with transformer, types of rotor. [T1, T2]

UNIT‐ III

Induction motors: Development of an equivalent circuit, estimation of parameters, no load and block rotor
tests. Torque slip characteristics, starting of induction motors methods, deep bar and double cage rotor, power
relations, speed control of induction motors.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 334
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Single phase induction motor, double field revolving theory, starting methods of single phase induction motors,
universal motor and introduction to switched reluctance motor. [T1, T2]

UNIT‐ IV

Synchronous Machine: construction, pitch factor and distribution factor, induced emf equation, equivalent
circuits and phasor diagrams, power relations, OCC and SCC characteristics for voltage regulation of alternator,
salient pole and cylindrical rotor machines and phasors. Effect of excitation and V curves. Power factor
correction and parallel operation of synchronous generator. [T1, T2]

Textbook(s):
1. I.J Nagrath and D.P.Kothari, “Electrical Machines”, Tata Mc Graw Hill, 2010, Fourth Edition.
2. Bhag S. Guru, Huseyin R. Hiziroglu, “Electric Machinery and Transformers”, Oxford Pub., 3rd Ed.

Reference Books:
1. M. V. Deshpande, “Electrical Machines” PHI.
2. PC Sen, “Principles of Electric Machinery and Power Electronics”, Wiley and Sons, Third Edition.
3. Ashfaq Hussain, “Electrical Machines”, Dhanpat Rai.
4. Fitzgeral, A.E. , C.Kingslay & Umans, “Electrical Machines”, Mc Graw Hill.
5. Ghosh, “ Electrical Machines”, Pearson.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 335
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Paper Code(s): EEC‐213 / EEC‐208 L P C

Paper: Circuits and Systems 4 ‐ 4

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To impart the knowledge of various signal and system.
2. To understand modelling of circuit.
3. To impart knowledge of theorems in AC circuit.
4. To impart knowledge of two port network and transfer function.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Ability to understand properties of signal and system.
CO 2 Ability to determine transient respond of circuit.
CO 3 Ability to solve AC circuit.
CO 4 Ability to determine two port parameter and transfer function.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 3 3 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ 1 1 1 1
CO 2 3 3 3 3 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ 1 1 1 1
CO 3 3 3 3 3 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ 1 1 1 1
CO 4 3 3 3 3 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ 1 1 1 1

UNIT – I

Signals, Classification of Signals, Systems, Classification of Systems, Linear Time Invariant (LTI) Systems; Laplace
Transform, z‐Transform, Fourier Series and Transform (Continuous and Discrete) and their properties. Laplace
Transform and Continuous Time LTI systems, z‐Transform and Discrete Time LTI systems, Fourier analysis of
signals and systems, State Space Analysis. [T1]

UNIT‐II

System modeling in terms of differential equations and transient response of R, L, C, series and parallel circuits
for impulse, step, ramp, sinusoidal and exponential signals by classical method and using Laplace transform.
[T2]

UNIT – III

AC Circuits: Circuits containing Capacitors and Inductors, Transient Response, Alternating Current and Voltages,
Phasors, Impedances and Admittance, Mesh Analysis, Loop Analysis, Nodal Analysis, Thevenin’s and Norton’s
Theorem, Y ‐ D and D‐ Y Transformation, Bridge Circuits. Resonant Circuits, Complex Frequency and Network
Function, Two port Networks. Passive Filters. [T2]

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 336
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT – IV

Graph theory: concept of tree, tie set matrix, cut set matrix and application to solve electric networks.
Two port networks – Introduction of two port parameters and their interconversion, interconnection of two 2‐
port networks, open circuit and short circuit impedances and ABCD constants, relation between image
impedances and short circuit and open circuit impedances. Network functions, their properties and concept of
transform impedance, Hurwitz polynomial. [T2]

Textbook(s):
1. B. P. Lathi, “Signal Processing and Linear System”, Berkeley Cambridge Press, 1998.
2. A. H. Robbins and W. C. Miller, “Circuit Analysis: Theory and Practice”, Thomson Learning/Delmar Pub.,
2007.

Reference Books:
1. S. Haykin and B. V. Veen, “Signal and Systems”, John Wiley and Sons, 1999.
2. H. P. Hsu, “Schaum’s Outlines of The Theory and Problems of Signals and Systems”, McGraw‐Hill, 1995.
3. S. Madhu, “Linear Circuit Analysis”, Prentice Hall, 1988.
4. S. Ghosh, “Signals and Systems”, Pearson Education, 2006.
5. S. Poornachandra, “Signal and Systems”, Thomson Learning, 2004.
6. M. Nahvi and J. A. Edminister, “Schaum’s Outline of Theory and Problems of Electric Circuits”, McGraw‐Hill,
2003.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 337
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Paper Code(s): ECC‐219 L P C

Paper: Analog Electronics 4 ‐ 4

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To impart the knowledge of Diodes.
2. To understand the working of transistor based amplifiers.
3. To impart the knowledge of operational amplifier and its applications.
4. To impart the knowledge of various wave form generators.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Ability to understand working and application of various Diodes.
CO 2 Ability to analyse various amplifier circuits.
CO 3 Ability to understand working and applications of operational amplifier.
CO 4 Ability to analyse different waveform generators.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 2 2 2 2 1 2 1 ‐ 2 2 ‐ 3
CO 2 3 3 2 2 1 2 1 ‐ 2 2 ‐ 2
CO 3 2 2 1 2 1 2 1 ‐ 2 2 ‐ 2
CO 4 2 2 2 2 1 2 1 ‐ 2 2 ‐ 2

Unit I

Evaluation Of Electronics: Energy Band Structures In Metals, Semiconductors And Insulators, Properties Of
Intrinsic And Extrinsic Semiconductors,
Theory of p‐n junction Diode: Diode Current Equation, Diode Resistance, Transition Capacitance, Diffusion
Capacitance, Switching Characteristics, Special Diodes: Zener Diode, Varactor Diode, Tunnel Diode, Photodiode,
Light Emitting Diodes, Schottky Barrier Diode, Applications of Diodes: Half‐Wave Rectifier, Full‐Wave Rectifier,
Clippers and Clampers (Elementary treatment only). [T1]

Unit II

Bipolar junction transistor: Introduction of transistor, construction, transistor operations, BJT characteristics,
load line, operating point, leakage currents, saturation and cut off mode of operations CB, CE, CC
configurations
Small signal amplifiers: CB, CE, CC configurations, hybrid model for transistor at low frequencies, RC coupled
amplifiers, mid band model, gain & impedance, comparisons of different configurations, Emitter follower,
Darlington pair, Multistage amplifiers, Feedback amplifiers. [T1]

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 338
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT III

Linear & Non Linear Wave shaping: , Inverting and non‐inverting amplifiers, voltage follower, difference amp,
adders, Voltage to current with floating & grounded load, current to voltage converter, practical integrator &
differentiator, Clipping & Clamping circuits, Comparators, log/antilog circuits using Op‐Amps, precision
rectifiers(half & full wave),peak detector, Inverting & non inverting Schmitt trigger circuit.
Waveform generations: Sine wave generator (Phase shift, Wein bridge, Hartley & Colpitts), Barkhausen criteria
of oscillations, conditions for oscillation, cystal oscillator. [T2]

UNIT IV

Waveform generators: Square and triangular waveform generators (determine period and frequency), saw
tooth wave generator, Astable multi‐vibrator, Monostable and Bistable Multivibrator.
Active RC Filters: Idealistic & Realistic response of filters (LPF, BPF, HPF, BRF), Butter worth & Chebyshev
approximation filter functions All pass, Notch Filter. IC phase locked loops, IC voltage regulators, IC VCO.
[T2]

Textbook(s):
1. Salivahanan , Suresh Kumar, Vallavaraj, “Electronic Devices and Circuits” TMH, 1999
2. D. Roy Choudhary, Shail B Jain, “Linear Integrated Circuits” New Age Publisher, 1999.

Reference Books:
1. B. Kumar ,Shail Bala Jain, “Electronic Devices and Circuits” PHI.
2. M.Rashid , “Microelectronic Circuit”, Cengage Learning Publication.
3. Sedra & Smith, “Micro Electronic Circuits” Oxford University Press, 2000
4. David A Bell, “Operational Amplifiers and Linear IC’s”, PHI.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 339
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Paper Code(s): MEC‐205 L P C

Paper: Theory of Machines 4 ‐ 4

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To impart knowledge of various types of mechanisms and perform their synthesis by analytical and
graphical method.
2. To develop the understanding of Gears, Gear trains and Gyroscope.
3. To facilitate students to understand the function and working of flywheels and governor.
4. To learn and study the phenomena of balancing and mechanical vibrations.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Examine various types of mechanisms and execute their kinematic analysis.
CO 2 Explain the concept of Gears, Gear Trains and Gyroscope.
CO 3 Describe the working principle of flywheel and governor.
CO 4 Understand the concept of balancing and mechanical vibration system.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 3 3 ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 2 3 3 3 3 ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 3 3 3 3 3 ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 4 3 3 3 3 ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2

UNIT‐I

Mechanisms And Machines: Introduction of Simple mechanism, Different types of Kinematics pair, Grubler’s
rule for degree of freedom, Grashof’s Criterion for mobility determination, Inversions of 4R, 3R‐P, and 2R‐2P
chains. Kinematic Analysis of Planar Mechanisms: Velocity and acceleration diagrams, Application of relative
velocity method in Slider crank and four bar mechanism, Instantaneous centre method, Kennedy‐Arnold
theorem, Acceleration diagrams for simple mechanism.
Cams: Classification, Construction of Cam profile, Analysis of Cams with uniform acceleration, and retardation,
SHM, Cycloidal motion.

UNIT‐II

Gears and Gear Trains: Classification of gears, Terminology, Geometry of tooth profiles, Law of gearing,
Cycloidal and Involute profile, Undercutting and interference, Methods to avoid interference, Condition for
minimum number of teeth to avoid interference, Contact ratio, Interference, Simple, Compound and Epicyclic
gear trains, Tabular column method for Epicyclic gear trains, Fixing torque.
Gyroscopes: Principles of Gyroscope, Effect of Gyroscopic couple on automobiles, ships and aircrafts.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 340
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT‐III

Dynamic Analysis: Analysis of single slider crank mechanism for displacement, velocity and acceleration using
analytical method, Klein’s Construction, Turning moment diagrams, Flywheel.
Mechanical governors:Function of a governor, types of governors: weight and spring loaded, Hunting and
Sensitivity, efforts and power of a governor, controlling diagrams.

UNIT ‐ IV

Balancing: Static and Dynamic balancing, balancing of rotating and reciprocating masses, single and
multicylinder engines.
Vibrations: Free vibration of a body, single degree of freedom system, Rayleigh method, free vibrations with
viscous damping, Logarithmic decrement, Response of damped spring mass system to harmonic forces,
Whirling of shafts, Vibration isolation, Transmissibility Ratio.

Textbook(s):
1. S.S. Rattan, “Theory of Machines”, Tata McGraw Hill.
2. V.P. Singh, “Theory of Machines”, Dhanpat Rai & Co.(P)Ltd.

References:
1. J E Shigley “Theory of Machines”, Pearson.
2. Thomas Beven, “The Theory of Machines”, CBS Publishers.
3. R.L. Norton, “Kinematics and Dynamics of Machinery”, Tata McGraw‐Hill.
4. P.L. Ballaney, “Theory of Machines & Mechanism”, Khanna Publishers.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 341
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Paper Code(s): MEC‐207 L P C

Paper: Strength of Materials 4 ‐ 4

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To understand about different types of load conditions and determine the stress, strain and change in
geometrical parameters of different types of materials.
2. To understand the resistance mechanism of beams due to bending and shearing.
3. To understand the principal stresses, behaviour of torsional members, columns and failure
mechanisms in materials.
4. To understand the difference between thin & thick pressure vessels and the design of springs.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Evaluate the stress induced in structural members subjected to tension, compression, tangential and
thermal loads.
CO 2 Analyse the performance of the beam for different types of loads and support conditions using SFD
and BMD and determine the bending stress, shear stress and deflection induced.
CO 3 Analyse the stress induced in columns and members under torsion.
CO 4 Distinguish between thin and thick pressure vessels and estimate the different stresses induced in
pressure vessels and springs.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 3 3 ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 2 3 3 3 3 ‐ 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 3 3 3 3 3 ‐ 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 4 3 3 3 2 ‐ 3 ‐ ‐ ‐‐ ‐ ‐ 2

UNIT‐I

Simple Stresses & strains: Concept of stress and strain. Hooke’s law, Stress‐Strain diagram, factor of safety,
Elongation of tapering bars of circular and rectangular cross sections, Elongation due to self‐weight. Saint
Venant’s principle, Compound bars, state of simple shear, complementary shear stress, Volumetric stresses and
Strains, Elastic constants and their relationship, Thermal stresses, Compound section subjected to thermal
stresses, Sudden, gradual & impact load, Strain energy & Proof Resilience, Strain energy under normal and
shear stress.

UNIT‐II

Shear Force and Bending Moment in Beams: Types of beams, supports and loadings, Definition of bending
moment and shear force, Sign conventions, relationship between load intensity, Bending moment and shear

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 342
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

force, Shear force and bending moment diagrams for statically determinate beams subjected to points load,
Uniformly distributed loads, Uniformly varying loads, Couple and their combinations.

Bending and Shear Stresses in Beams: Introduction, Pure bending theory, Assumptions, Derivation of bending
equation, Modulus of rupture, Section modulus, Flexural rigidity, Beam of uniform strength, Expression for
transverse shear stress in beams, Bending and shear stress distribution diagrams for circular, rectangular, ‘I’,
and ‘T’ sections, Castigliano’s theorem, Shear Centre (only concept).

Slope and deflection of Beams: Definition of slope, Deflection and curvature, Sign conventions, Derivation of
moment curvature equation, Double integration method, Macaulay’s method and Principle of superposition
method, Slope and deflection for standard loading cases and for determinate prismatic beams subjected to
point loads, UDL, UVL and couple. [12]

UNIT‐III

Columns: Introduction, Short, Medium and Long columns, Slenderness ratio, Euler’s theory; Assumptions,
Derivation for Euler’s Buckling load for different end conditions, Limitations of Euler’s theory, Rankine‐Gordon’s
formula for columns.

Torsion: Stresses and strains in pure torsion of solid circular shafts and hollow circular shafts, Power
transmitted by shafts, Shaft in series and parallel, Combined bending and torsion.

Compound stresses and strains: State of stress at a point, General two‐dimensional stress system, Principal
stresses and strains, Principal planes. Mohr’s circle of stresses, Theories of Failures.

UNIT ‐ IV

Springs: Analysis of Close‐coiled helical springs, Springs in series and parallel, Stress in leaf springs.

Pressure vessels: Thin cylindrical and Spherical vessels subjected to internal pressure, Hoop stresses,
Longitudinal stress and change in volume, Thick cylinders subjected to internal and external pressure, Lame’s
equation, Radial and hoop stress distribution.

Textbook(s):
1. Sadhu Singh, “Strength of Materials”, Khanna Pub.
2. S.S. Bhavikatti, “Strength of Materials”, Vikas Publishers;(2000)
3. R.K. Bansal, “A Textbook of Strength of Materials”, Laxmi Publications; 4th ed.(2010)

References:
1. S.P. Timoshenko and J. Gere, “Elements of Strength of Materials”, East‐West affiliated, New Delhi.
2. R.C. Hibbler, “Mechanics of Materials”, Prentice Hall, New Delhi;(1994)
3. L.S. Sri Nath et.al., “Strength of Materials”, McMillan, New Delhi;(2001)
4. Eger P. Popov, “Engg. Mechanics of solids”, Prentice Hall, New Delhi;(1998)
5. Roger T. Fenner, “Mechanics of Solids”, U.K. B.C. Publication, New Delhi;(1990)

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 343
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Paper Code(s): MEC‐209 L P C

Paper: Manufacturing Science & Technology ‐ I 4 ‐ 4

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To acquire knowledge in casting processes and develop an understanding of the various variables
which control the casting process.
2. To introduce students to different welding processes, weld testing and advanced processes.
3. To acquire a fundamental knowledge on metal forming technology.
4. To make student familiar with the various sheet metal work and powder metallurgy.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Understand the working of different manufacturing processes and apply knowledge to use appropriate
manufacturing process based on the need.
CO 2 Identify the capabilities of the different manufacturing processes.
CO 3 Analyse the different design aspects of the manufacturing processes
CO 4 Evaluate the effects of process parameters on the performance of Manufacturing processes and
prepare a report in a team for different processes.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 2 2 ‐ ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐
CO 2 3 2 2 ‐ ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐
CO 3 3 3 3 2 ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐
CO 4 3 3 3 3 ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ 3 3 ‐ ‐

UNIT‐I

Casting: Introduction to sand moulding, Testing of moulding sand, Moulding and core making machine, Design
of metal moulds, Gating system and its design, Riser design and its placement, Mould filling time, Melting,
Pouring and Fluidity, Selection of melting furnaces, Control of melt and Cupola charge calculations,
Solidification of pure metals and alloys, Solidification time, Fundamentals of Casting of complicated shapes:
automotive components, casting of light alloys – Aluminium, Magnesium and Titanium alloys and Other casting
processes, like investment, continuous, slush, squeeze casting, stir casting.

UNIT‐II

Welding: Types of metal transfer in arc welding, Analysis of Voltage‐Arc length Characteristics, Welding
processes like GTAW, GMAW and SAW processes and their recent variants, Plasma arc welding process:
transferred and non‐ transferred arc welding and their applications, Plasma cutting, Surfacing and plasma spray
forming, Explosive, Ultrasonic, Laser Beam, Electron Beam, Friction Stir, Thermit, Atomic Hydrogen welding,

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 344
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Cold metal transfer Welding, Resistance welding, Soldering and brazing, welding of special materials – Stainless
steel, Aluminium etc. weldability of cast iron, steel, stainless steel, aluminium alloys, Soldering, Brazing and
their applications, Joint design, welding symbols and Joint evaluation through destructive and non‐destructive
testing methods, Defects in welding: causes and remedies, Related numerical problems on electric arc welding
and resistance welding.

UNIT‐III

Forming: Plastic deformation of metals, Elements of theory of plasticity, Flow curve, True stress & true strain,
stress‐strain relationships, Yield criteria for ductile metals, Von Misses & Teresa yield criteria, combined stress
tests, Hot working and Cold working, Friction and lubrication in metal working, Analysis of bulk forming
Process: Extrusion: Analysis of extrusion process, extrusion pressure, Rolling: Forces & geometrical relationship
in rolling, Rolling load and torque in cold rolling, Von‐Karman work equation, Wire and Tube Drawing, Drawing
stress, Reduction factor, Unconventional forming processes, Defects in metal forming.

UNIT ‐ IV

Sheet Metal and other Processes: Classification ‐ conventional and HERF processes‐presses‐types and selection
of presses, formability of sheet metals‐ principle, process parameters, equipment and application of the
following processes: deep drawing, spinning, stretch forming. Plate bending, spring back, press brake forming,
Introduction to forming, electro hydraulic forming, magnetic pulse forming. Introduction to press work –
coining, embossing etc., Design of sheet metal dies. Powder Metallurgy: fabrication routes, powder size
determination – micro and nano level, powder consolidation routes, compacting, sintering, hot pressing,
sintering, hot isostatic pressing, field assisted sintering technologies.

Textbook(s):
1. Kalpakjian, “Manufacturing Engineering and Technology”, Addison Wesley.
2.A. Ghosh and A.K. Mallik, “Manufacturing Science”, East West Press.

References:
1. M.P. Groover, “Modern Manufacturing Processes”.
2. R. W. Heine, C. R. Loper and P. C. Rosenthal, “Principles of Metal Casting”, Tata‐McGraw Hill.
3. G. E. Dieter, “Mechanical Metallurgy (Part IV)”, Tata‐McGraw Hill.
4. B. Avitzur, “Metal Forming: Processes and Analysis”.
5. G.W. Rowe, “Industrial Metal Working Processes”.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 345
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Paper Code(s): MEC‐211 L P C

Paper: Thermal Engineering – I 4 ‐ 4

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard /
level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To understand the concepts of laws of thermodynamic and apply them to determine the feasibility
of any process.
2. To understand the principles of pure substance and to be able to determine exergy of any system.
3. To understand the principle of vapour power cycle and its thermal refinement.
4. To understand the working of I.C engine and Gas Turbine engine and able to compute its
performance parameters.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Develop understanding of first and second law of thermodynamics and use it to determine feasibility
of a process
CO 2 Evaluate the properties of a pure substance using different property relations and determine
entropy changes for different types of processes and the reversibility or irreversibility of such
processes.
CO 3 Analyze the performance of simple Rankine cycle and improve its performance with thermal
refinement.
CO 4 Examine various gas power cycles and their applications in automotive and aviation sector.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 3 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 2 3 3 3 3 ‐ ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 3 3 3 3 3 ‐ ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 4 3 3 3 3 ‐ ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2

UNIT‐I

Basic definitions and Laws of Thermodynamics: Thermodynamic systems: Closed, Open and Isolated systems,
Microscopic and Macroscopic view, Intensive and Extensive properties, Zeroth law of Thermodynamics, Phase,
State, Process, Cycle, Point functions and Path functions, Work and Heat, First Law of Thermodynamics, Internal
energy, Non flow processes, Concept of Flow work, Analysis of steady flow and unsteady flow processes and
their applications, Limitations of First law, Second Law of Thermodynamics, Reversible and Irreversible
processes, Reversed Carnot cycle, Carnot‘s Theorem, Clausius inequality, Entropy, Change in Entropy during
various processes.

UNIT‐II

Availability and Irreversibility: High grade and low grade energy, Available and unavailable energy, Dead state,
Loss of available energy due to Heat transfer through a Finite temperature difference, Availability, Reversible

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 346
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

work and Irreversibility, Availability in non flow systems, Second law efficiency.
Thermodynamic Property Relations: Maxwell Relations, Clapeyron Equation.
Properties of a Pure Substance: Phase equilibrium of a pure substance on T‐V diagram, Normal boiling point of
Pure substance, Saturation states, Compressed liquid, P‐V & P‐T diagram of a pure substance, Steam and its
different states, Use of Steam tables and Mollier diagram, Different processes of vapour on P‐V and T‐S
diagrams, Measurement of Dryness fraction.

UNIT‐III

Vapour Power Cycles: Carnot vapour power cycles, drawbacks as a reference cycle, Simple Rankine cycle,
description, T‐ S diagram, Analysis for performance, comparison of Carnot and Rankine cycles, Effects of
pressure and temperature on Rankine cycle performance, Actual vapour power cycles, Ideal and practical
regenerative Rankine cycle, open and closed feed water heaters, Reheat Rankine cycle.
Boiler: Classification of Boiler, Boiler mountings and Boiler Accessories, Once through Boiler, Working and
construction of Babcock and Wilcox boiler, Lancashire boiler.

UNIT – IV

Gas power cycle: Carnot cycle, Otto cycle, Diesel cycle, Dual cycle, Two stroke and Four stroke Cycles, Working
of S.I Engine and C.I Engine, Valve timing diagram of S.I engine and C.I engine.
Gas Turbines: Brayton cycle, Thermal refinements, Performance of Gas turbines, Combined cycle, Principles of
Jet Propulsion, Turbojet engines.

Textbook(s):
1. P K Nag Basic and Applied Thermodynamics 5th edition McGraw Hill
2. Mathur & Sharma Internal Combustion Engine, Dhanpat Rai Publication.

References:
1. M.J. Moran & H.N. Shapiro “Fundamentals of Thermal Engineering” John Wiley & sons.
2. S L Somasundaram “Engineering Thermodynamics”, New Age International Publishers.
3. R. K. Rajput, “Engineering Thermodynamics”, Lakshmi Publications
4. Y. A. Cengel & M. A Boles “Thermodynamics‐ An Engineering Approach ”, 6th edition Tata McGraw Hill
5. Gordon Rosers, & Yon Mahew; Engineering Thermodynamics”, Pearson.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 347
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Paper Code(s): CEC‐205 L P C

Paper: Structural Analysis – I 4 ‐ 4

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard /
level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To know the concept of stress and strain for the calculation of internal forces in the structural
member.
2. To know the concept of shear force and bending moment.
3. To calculate deflection in beams and column
4. To familiarize students about the failure modes of materials.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Define stress, strain, elastic constants, Hooke’s Law, shear force, bending moment.
CO 2 Construct Mohr circle , shear force diagrams and bending moment diagrams to solve complex
problems.
CO 3 Analyze principal stresses and principal strains, load carrying capacity of long columns with
different end conditions.
CO 4 Determine bending and shear stress, slope and deflection of beams using various techniques,
torsion of shafts.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 2 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐
CO 2 ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐
CO 3 ‐ 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐
CO 4 ‐ 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐

UNIT‐I

Simple Stresses and Strains

Introduction, Normal and Shear stresses, Stress‐Strain Diagrams, Hook’s law, Modulus of elasticity, Elastic
Constants, Principle stresses and strains, Mohr’s circle.
One dimensional loading & Torsion
One dimensional loading on members of varying cross‐section. Torsion: Introduction, Torsion of shafts of
circular section, torque and twist‐ shear stress due to torque

UNIT‐II

Shear Force and Bending Moment

Types of beams, loads and supports, shear force and bending moment diagram, bending stresses and shear
stresses in beams.
Deflection of Beams
Deflection due to bending: The moment curvature relation, Macaulay’s method, Moment area and Conjugate

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 348
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

beam method, Deflection of determinate plane frames using strain energy and unit load method, Elastic curve
sketch.

UNIT‐III

Analysis of determinate structure

Classification of Structures, Stress Resultants, Degree of Freedom per node, Static and Kinematic degrees of
indeterminacy. Work and Energy. Strain energy of deformable systems, Betti’s theorem of reciprocal work and
Maxwell’s theorem. Principle of virtual work and complementary virtual work, Principle of total minimum
stationary potential energy, Stable and unstable equilibrium, Castigliano’s Theorem I and II

UNIT ‐ IV

Columns and Struts

Theory of Columns, long column and short column, Euler’s formula, Columns with eccentric axial loads,
Rankine’s formula, Secant formula, Buckling and stability, slenderness ratio, combined bending and direct
stress, effect of end conditions on column buckling.

Textbook(s):
1. A Textbook of Strength of Materials, Prof. R. K Bansal, Laxmi Publications.
2. Strength of Materials, RK Rajput, S Chand
3. Strength of Materials, B.C. Punmia, Laxmi Publications.

References:
1. Strength of Materials, Vol. I: Elementary Theory and Problems Paperback – 2004 ,S. Timoshenko CBS
Publishers & Distributors Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi
2. Strength of Materials by Pytel and Singer, Harper Collins.
3. Strength of Materials by Ryder, Macmillan.
4. Strength of Materials by Timoshenko and &Youngs, East West Press.
5. Mechanics of Materials, Popov Nagarjan & Lu, Prentice Hall of India, N. Delhi.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 349
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Paper Code(s): CEC‐207 L P C

Paper: Structural Design ‐ I 4 ‐ 4

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives:
1. To develop basic understanding of reinforced concrete and steel as a construction material
2. To develop understanding of various design philosophies and their differences.
3. To understand mix design and its implementation in structure.
4. To understand and analyse construction management in structure.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Define different types of concrete its characteristic and parameters as per the requirement of the
structure.
CO 2 Infer the properties of concrete, the concept of design philosophies, and behavior of load bearing
masonry walls and the principles of retaining wall.
CO 3 Identify preliminary data of concrete structure by the code recommendations and concept of limit
states.
CO 4 Analyse construction management methods including project scheduling and networking.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐
CO 2 2 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 1 ‐ ‐
CO 3 ‐ ‐ 2 ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ ‐
CO 4 ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 ‐

UNIT‐I

Construction Materials:Properties of Cement & Aggregate, Bulking of Sand. Hydration of cement, initial and
final setting type.
Structural Steel – Composition and its type, material properties and behaviour; stress strain curve, relaxation of
steel.
Concrete: Mechanical properties of concrete: elastic modules, poisson’s ratio, creep, shrinkage and durability
of concrete.

UNIT‐II

Working stress and Limit state design concepts.

Introduction to Various Design Philosophies including characteristic strength, Partial Safety Factor, Factored
Load, Design stress strain curve. Assumptions in Limit State Design Method. Constituents, mix design, short‐
term and long‐term properties. (IS 456, IS 800, IS 10262)

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 350
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT‐III

Structural Steel, and its designation as per IS: 800:2007, Properties of Structural steel. Basics of types of
members (Tension member, Compression member and flexural member)
Connections – Types of connections. Rivet Connections, Bolted Connections and Welded Connections.

UNIT‐ IV

Project Planning: Project Scheduling, Controlling, Method of Planning.

PERT & CPM: Activity time estimate, Start and finish time of Activities, Critical Path and critical activities.
Development of PERT Network. Time estimate using PERT.

Textbook(s):
1. S.K. Duggal, “Building Materials”, New Age International Publications.
2. L.S Negi, “Design of Steel Structure”, Tata McGraw‐Hill.
3. N Subramanyam, “PERT & CPM”, Tata McGraw‐Hill.

References:
1. Jain A.K., “Limit State Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures”., Nem Chand Publishers, Roorkee.
2. B.C. Purnima , R.C.C. Designs, Laxmi Publication
3. Raju K., “Reinforced Concrete”, New Age International (P) Ltd., New Delhi.
4. Unikrishna Pillai S., “Reinforced Concrete Design”., Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Ltd., New Delhi.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 351
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Paper Code(s): CEC‐209 L P C

Paper: Fluid Mechanics 4 ‐ 4

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To introduce fundamentals of stagnant fluid.
2. To elaborate fundamentals of flowing fluid and governing equations
3. To understand fluid flow through different conduits and measurement techniques for it.
4. To study the effect of fluid flow using the concepts of dimensional analysis
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Define the fundamental properties of fluid.
CO 2 Explain pressure forces acting on body(submerged and floating)
CO 3 Solve flow rate problems to determine the flow condition and forces exerted
CO 4 Examine flow around Models or Prototype using Dimensional Analysis approach.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 2 1 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 1 ‐ ‐
CO 2 3 3 3 2 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 1 ‐ ‐
CO 3 3 3 2 1 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 1 ‐ ‐
CO 4 2 3 3 3 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 1 ‐ ‐

UNIT‐I

Introduction: Fluid properties, Ideal and real fluids, Density, Specific weight, specific volume, compressibility,
specific gravity, Concept of viscosity, viscometer, cohesion, adhesion, surface tension, Capillarity, Newtonian
and Non Newtonian Fluids;
Fluid Statics: Fluid pressure and its measurement, types of manometers, Total pressure and centre of pressure,
principles of equilibrium, buoyancy, centre of buoyancy, meta centre, stability conditions of floating and
submerged bodies, Evaluation of pressure force on dams, lock gates, curved surfaces, pressure distribution in
liquid subjected to constant horizontal/vertical acceleration.

UNIT‐II

Fluid Kinematics: Variation of flow parameters in space and time, Lagrangian and Eularian concepts in fluid
motion, Types of fluid flow: steady and unsteady, uniform and non‐uniform, rotational and irrotational,
Laminar and turbulent, one, two and three dimensional flow, control volume, streamline, pathline and
streakline, Continuity equation and its applications, Velocity potential and stream function, Cauchy‐Riemann
equation, flownet.
Types of motion: Linear translation, linear deformation, Angular deformation, Rotation, Vorticity, Free and
forced vortex flow

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 352
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT‐III

Fluid Dynamics : Newton’s, Reynolds’s, Navier‐Stokes and Euler’s equations of motion, Derivation of Bernoulli’s
equation from Euler’s equation and its limitations, Applications of Bernoulli’s equations‐Orifice and Mouth
piece, Orifice‐meter, Venturimeter, Weir and notch, Pitot’s tube, Siphon, etc; hydraulic gradient and total
energy lines and their Engineering significance. Momentum equation, Moment of momentum equation‐
Assumptions and limitations, applications, impact of jets and forces in bends.

UNIT ‐ IV

Dimensional and Model Analysis: Dimensional homogeneity, methods of dimensional analysis, Buckingham’s π
theorem, selection of Repeating variables, Forces acting on moving fluid, Dimensionless numbers and their
Engineering significance, Model analysis, Geometric, Kinematic and Dynamic similarity, Model testing of
partially submerged bodies, scale ratios for distorted models.

Textbook(s):
1. P. N. Modi and S. M. Seth “Hydraulics and Fluid Mechanics (incl Hydraulic Machines)” Standard Publications
2.Frank White, “Fluid mechanics” Tata McGraw Hill Publications.

References:
1. S. Ramamrutham, Hydraulics Fluid Mechanics and Fluid Machines, Dhanpat Rai Publishing Company
2. Victor Streeter, “Fluid Mechanics”, International Edition, Tata McGraw Hill Publications.
3. Hughes and Brighton, “Fluid Mechanics”, Tata McGraw Hill.
4. Neville, “Fluid Mechanics”, Pearson Education.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 353
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Paper Code(s): CEC‐211 L P C

Paper: Geomatics Engineering 4 ‐ 4

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the
student shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may
contain upto 5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The
standard / level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To know the different methods and techniques used in surveying and the applications.
2. To apply concepts of tachometry and levelling in surveying difficult and hilly terrains to obtain the
topographical map of area.
3. To use survey instruments in carrying out survey, collect data, write reports and able to perform
required calculations.
4. To build a map or plan of an area using surveying and levelling.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Ability to understand the basic principles of surveying.
CO 2 Analyse and explain the various methods used in surveying and levelling.
CO 3 Apply the concepts various types of surveying in computation of distance, direction and elevation.
CO 4 Compare types of errors for different surveying techniques.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 ‐ ‐ 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐
CO 2 1 ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐
CO 3 ‐ ‐ 2 ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐
CO 4 ‐ 2 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐

UNIT‐I

Linear Measurement: Introduction, Principles of chain survey, use and adjustment of various instruments
employed in chain survey, chaining on sloping grounds, Offsets and error in offsets, Obstructions in chaining,
chaining angles, Errors and sources of error, Introduction to advance linear measuring instruments, Field book.
Compass Survey: Use and adjustment of prismatic and surveyor’s compass, Methods of surveying with a
compass, Magnetic declination, local attraction, Errors in prismatic survey, plotting of compass survey,
distribution of closing error.

UNIT‐II

Levelling: definitions of terms used in levelling, different types of levels, parallax, staves, adjustments, bench
marks, classification of levelling, booking and reducing the levels, rise and fall method, line of collimation
method, errors in levelling, permanent adjustments, Two peg test, reciprocal levelling, Corrections to curvature
and refraction, cross sections and longitudinal levelling.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 354
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Trigonometric Levelling: Definitions & terms, curvature & refraction Methods: direct & reciprocal, eye and
object correction, coefficient of refraction. Contours: Definition, representation of reliefs, horizontal equivalent,
contour interval, characteristics of contours, methods of contouring, contour gradient, uses of contour maps.

UNIT‐III

Theodolite Traversing: types of theodolities, measurement of angles, temporary and permanent adjustments,
closed & open traverse consecutive and independent co‐ordinates, advantages & disadvantages of traversing
closing error, Bowditch, Transit rules.

Triangulation: Principal, selection of base line and stations, order of triangulation, triangulation figures,scaffold
and signals, marking of stations, Intervisibility and heights of stations, satellite stations, base linemeasurement
and corrections, Introduction to adjustment of observations.

UNIT ‐ IV

Photogrammetric Survey: Basic principles, elevation of a point, determination of focal length of lens, aerial
camera, scale of a vertical photograph, relief displacement of a vertical photograph, height of object from relief
displacement.

Curves: Types of curves, Elements of a curve, Simple curves, different methods of setting out, Introduction to
compound, reverse, transition and vertical curves. Introduction to modern surveying Instruments /Techniques
like Total station; Basics of remote sensing &GPS etc.

Textbook(s):
1 Surveying ,B.C. Punmia Vol ‐ I,/II, Laxmi Publication
3 Surveying Vol ‐1 by K.R. Arora

References:
1. Plane and Geodetic Surveying by D. Clark
2. Plane and Geodetic Surveying by S. Ramamrutham
2 Surveying Vol.2, Duggal, McGraw Hill Education (I) Pvt.Ltd.
4 Surveying and Levelling by R. Subramanian

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 355
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Paper Code(s): ECC‐217 L P C

Paper: Analog and Digital Electronics 3 ‐ 3

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To impart the knowledge of different types of Diodes.
2. To impart the knowledge of Transistors.
3. To impart the knowledge of logic gates and flip flops.
4. To impart the knowledge of operational amplifier.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Ability to understand working and applications of various Diodes.
CO 2 Ability to understand working of Transistors.
CO 3 Ability to understand function of gates and flip flops.
CO 4 Ability to understand applications of operational amplifier.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 ‐ 2 1 ‐ 2
CO 2 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 ‐ 2 1 ‐ 2
CO 3 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 ‐ 2 1 ‐ 2
CO 4 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 ‐ 2 1 ‐ 2

UNIT‐I

Evaluation of Electronics: Energy Band Structures In Metals, Semiconductors And Insulators, Theory Of
Semiconductors: Classification Of Semiconductors, Properties Of Intrinsic And Extrinsic Semiconductors,
Theory of p‐n junction Diode: Diode Current Equation, Diode Resistance, Effect of Temperature on p‐n Junction
Diode, Switching Characteristics, Special Diodes: Zener Diode, Varactor Diode, Tunnel Diode, Photodiode, Light
Emitting Diodes, Schottky Barrier Diode, Applications of Diodes: Half‐Wave Diode Rectifier, Full‐Wave Rectifier,
Clippers and Clampers (Elementary treatment only). [T1]

UNIT – II

Bipolar junction transistor: Introduction of transistor, construction, transistor operations, BJT characteristics,
load line, operating point, leakage currents, saturation and cut off mode of operations CB, CE, CC
configurations, hybrid model for transistor at low frequencies, Introduction to FETs and MOSFETs. [T1]

UNIT – III

Number Systems and Codes:‐ Decimal, Binary, Octal and Hexadecimal Number systems Conversion between
various Codes.
Logic Circuits:‐ Review of basic gates‐ Universal gates, Adder, Subtractor , Comparators, ‐ Latches and Flip

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 356
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Flops‐ SR, , D, T and MS‐JK Flip Flops [T2]

UNIT‐ IV

Op‐Amp and its applications: Inverting and Non‐inverting amplifiers, adder, sub‐tractor, integrators,
differentiator, instrumentation amplifiers, oscillators, multi vibrators, A to D and D to A converter. [T1]

Textbook(s):
1. S. Salivahanan, N. Suresh Kr. & A. Vallavaraj, “Electronic Devices & Circuit”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2008
2. R.P. Jain, “Modern Digital Electronics”, TMH, 2nd Ed.

Reference Books:
1. Sedra & Smith, “Micro Electronic Circuits” Oxford University Press, 2000.
2. B.Kumar & Shail Bala Jain, “Electronic Devices And Circuits” PHI.
3. Boylestad & Nashelsky, “Electronic Devices & Circuits”, Pearson Education, 10TH Edition.
4. Morris Mano, Digital Logic and Computer Design”, Pearson.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 357
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Paper Code(s): ES‐251 L P C

Paper: Computational Methods Lab ‐ 2 1

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Computational Methods) as this is the
practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

Implementation to be done in C/C++

1. Program for finding roots of f(x)=0 Newton Raphson method.
2. Program for finding roots of f(x)=0 by bisection method.
3. Program for finding roots of f(x)=0 by secant method.
4. To implement Langrange’s Interpolation formula.
5. To implement Newton’s Divided Difference formula.
6. Program for solving numerical integration by Trapezoidal rule
7. Program for solving numerical integration by Simpson’s 1/3 rule
8. To implement Numerical Integration Simpson 3/8 rule.
9. Inverse of a system of linear equations using Gauss‐Jordan method.
10. Find the Eigen values using Power method.
11. Program for solving ordinary differential equation by Runge‐Kutta Method.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 358
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Paper Code(s): ECC‐253 L P C

Paper: Digital Logic and Computer Design Lab ‐ 2 1

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Digital Logic and Computer Design) as
this is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Design and implementation of adders and subtractors using logic gates.

2. Design and implementation of 4‐bit binary adder/subtractor.
3. Design and implementation of multiplexer and demultiplexer.
4. Design and implementation of encoder and decoder.
5. Construction and verification of 4‐bit ripple counter and Mod‐10/Mod‐12 ripple counter.
6. Design and implementation of 3‐bit synchronous up/down counter.
7. Design and computer architecture: Design a processor with minimum number of instructions, so that it can
do the basic arithmetic and logic operations.
8. Write an assembly language code in GNUsim8085 to implement data transfer instruction.
9. Write an assembly language code in GNUsim8085 to store numbers in reverse order in memory location.
10. Write an assembly language code in GNUsim8085 to implement arithmetic instruction.
11. Write an assembly language code in GNUsim8085 to add two 8 bit numbers.
12. Write an assembly language code in GNUsim8085 to find the factorial of a number.
13. Write an assembly language code in GNUsim8085 to implement logical instructions.
14. Write an assembly language code in GNUsim8085 to implement stack and branch instructions.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 359
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Paper Code(s): CIC‐255 L P C

Paper: Data Structures Lab ‐ 2 1

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Data Structures) as this is the practical
component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Implement sparse matrix using array. Description of program:

a. Read a 2D array from the user.
b. Store it in the sparse matrix form, use array of structures.
c. Print the final array.
2. Create a linked list with nodes having information about a student and perform
a. Insert a new node at specified position.
b. Delete of a node with the roll number of student specified.
c. Reversal of that linked list.
3. Create doubly linked list with nodes having information about an employee and perform Insertion at front
of doubly linked list and perform deletion at end of that doubly linked list.
4. Create circular linked list having information about a college and perform Insertion at front perform
Deletion at end.
5. Implement two stacks in a using single array.
6. Create a stack and perform Push, Pop, Peek and Traverse operations on the stack using Linked list.
7. Create a Linear Queue using Linked List and implement different operations such as Insert, Delete, and
Display the queue elements.
8. Implement Experiment‐2 using liked list.
9. Create a Binary Tree and perform Tree traversals (Preorder, Postorder, Inorder) using the concept of
recursion.
10. Implement insertion, deletion and traversals (inorder, preorder and postorder) on binary search tree with
the information in the tree about the details of an automobile (type, company, year of make).
11. Implement Selection Sort, Bubble Sort, Insertion sort, Merge sort, Quick sort, and Heap Sort using array as
a data structure.
12. Perform Linear Search and Binary Search on an array. Description of programs:
a. Read an array of type integer.
b. Input element from user for searching.
c. Search the element by passing the array to a function and then returning the position of the element
from the function else return ‐1 if the element is not found.
d. Display the position where the element has been found.
13. Implement the searching using hashing method.
14. Create a graph and perform DFS and BFS traversals.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 360
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Paper Code(s): CIC‐257 L P C

Paper: Object‐Oriented Programming Using C++ Lab ‐ 2 1

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Object‐Oriented Programming Using
C++) as this is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Write a program for multiplication of two matrices using OOP.

2. Write a program to perform addition of two complex numbers using constructor overloading. The first
constructor which takes no argument is used to create objects which are not initialized, second which takes
one argument is used to initialize real and imag parts to equal values and third which takes two argument
is used to initialized real and imag to two different values.
3. Write a program to find the greatest of two given numbers in two different classes using friend function.
4. Implement a class string containing the following functions:
a. Overload + operator to carry out the concatenation of strings.
b. Overload = operator to carry out string copy.
c. Overload <= operator to carry out the comparison of strings.
d. Function to display the length of a string.
e. Function tolower( ) to convert upper case letters to lower case.
f. Function toupper( ) to convert lower case letters to upper case.
5. Create a class called LIST with two pure virtual function store() and retrieve().To store a value call store and
to retrieve call retrieve function. Derive two classes stack and queue from it and override store and
retrieve.
6. Write a program to define the function template for calculating the square of given numbers with different
data types.
7. Write a program to demonstrate the use of special functions, constructor and destructor in the class
template. The program is used to find the bigger of two entered numbers.
8. Write a program to perform the deletion of white spaces such as horizontal tab, vertical tab, space ,line
feed ,new line and carriage return from a text file and store the contents of the file without the white
spaces on another file.
9. Write a program to read the class object of student info such as name , age ,sex ,height and weight from
the keyboard and to store them on a specified file using read() and write() functions. Again the same file is
opened for reading and displaying the contents of the file on the screen.
10. Write a program to raise an exception if any attempt is made to refer to an element whose index is beyond
the array size.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 361
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Paper Code(s): ECC‐255 L P C

Paper: Analog Communications Lab ‐ 2 1

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Analog Communications) as this is the
practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Generation of DSB‐SC AM signal using balanced modulator.

2. To study amplitude demodulation by linear diode detector
3. Generation of SSB AM signal.
4. To study envelop detector for demodulation of AM signal and observe diagonal peak clipping effect.
5. To generate FM signal using voltage controlled oscillator.
6. To generate a FM Signal using Varactor & reactance modulation.
7. Detection of FM Signal using PLL & foster seelay method.
8. To study Super heterodyne AM receiver and measurement of receiver parameters viz.sensitivity, selectivity
& fidelity.
9. To study Pre‐emphasis and De‐emphasis in FM.
10. Generation of Phase modulated and demodulated signal.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 362
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Paper Code(s): ECC‐257 L P C

Paper: Analog Electronics – I Lab ‐ 2 1

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Analog Electronics ‐ I) as this is the
practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. To plot V‐I characteristics of a semiconductor diode & Calculate Static & Dynamic Resistance.
2. To Study the Reverse characteristics of Zener diode
3. To Study the Rectifier circuit (With and Without Filter).
a. Half Wave Rectifier
b. Centre Tapped Rectifier.
c. Bridge Rectifier.
4. Plotting input and output characteristics and calculation of parameters of a transistor in common
emitter configuration.
5. Transistor biasing circuit. Measurement of operating point (Ic and Vce) for a :‐
a. fixed bias circuit
b. potential divider biasing circuit.
6. Plot the FET characteristics & MOSFET characteristics.
7. To measure the overall gain of two stages at 1 KHz and compare it with gain of Ist stage,
Also to observe the loading effect of second stage on the first stage
8. To plot the frequency response curve of two stage amplifier.
9. To study Emitter follower circuit & measurement of voltage gain and plotting of frequency response
Curve.
10. Feedback in Amplifier. Single stage amplifier with and without bypass capacitor, measurement of voltage
gain and plotting the frequency response in both cases.
11. To determine and plot firing characteristics of SCR by varying anode to cathode voltage, and varying gate
current.
12. To note the wave shapes and voltages at various points of a UJT relaxation oscillator circuit.
13. For Transistorized push pull amplifier Measurement of optimum load, maximum undistorted power (by
giving maximum allowable signal) Efficiency and percentage distortion factor.
14. To study the characteristics of single tuned & double tuned amplifier.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 363
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Paper Code(s): ECC‐259 L P C

Paper: Signals and Systems Lab ‐ 2 1

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Signals and Systems) as this is the
practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Introduction to MATLAB and its basic commands.

2. Plot unit step, unit impulse, unit ramp, exponential, parabolic functions and sinusoidal signals
3. Plot the linear convolution of two sequences.
4. Plot the correlation of two sequences.
5. Plot the magnitude and phase spectra of a signal using Fourier transforms.
6. Plot the magnitude and phase spectrum of signal using Fourier series.
7. Find out the Z transform of a signal and check the stability using pole zero location.
8. Plot the spectra of ideally sampled signal w.r.t. sampling of Discrete time signals.
9. Verification of few properties of Fourier transform.
10. Evaluate the DTFS coefficients of a signal and plot them.
11. Plot the step response for any impulse response entered by user.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 364
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Paper Code(s): EEC‐257 L P C

Paper: Electrical Machines – I Lab ‐ 2 1

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Electrical Machines ‐ I) as this is the
practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. To study the construction and operation of various types of starters available in the laboratory for
starting DC motors.
2. To study the magnetization characteristics of a separately excited D.C generator at different speeds and
to find the critical field resistance at those speeds.
2. To perform the load test on D.C. shunt motor and to draw the performance characteristics.
3. To control the speed of a DC shunt motor by using
(a) Field control
(b) Armature/Rheostatic control
(c) Supply voltage control
4. To perform the Swinburne’s test on a D.C. shunt Machine and to pre determine its efficiency when
running as a motor as well as generator and also draw the characteristic curves.
5. To conduct load test on DC shunt generator and obtain its internal and external characteristics.
6. To perform O.C./S.C. tests on a single phase transformer and determine equivalent circuit parameters.
7. To perform Sumpner’s (back to back) test on two identical single phase transformers and draw the load
efficiency graphs.
8. To perform load test on a single‐phase transformer and determine the following:
(a) Voltage ratio of transformer.
(b) Efficiency at different loads.
(c) Voltage regulation of the transformer.
9. To perform Polarity test on two single‐phase transformers, connect them in parallel and study the load
sharing between them.
10. To convert a three‐phase supply into two phase supply using Scott‐connection between two single phase
transformers with suitable tapping. Verify the following:
(a) Turn ratio between windings of main and teaser transformers.
(b) Voltage of both phases of two phase supply is equal.
(c) Whether the phase angle between them is 900.
11. To connect three‐phase transformers in Y‐ Y / Y ‐ ∆, ∆‐∆/∆‐ Y connections and study line /phase voltage
relationships.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 365
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Paper Code(s): EEC‐259 L P C

Paper: Electrical Engineering Workshop ‐ 2 1

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions for paper setter
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are given below.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more.
Course Objectives :
1. To Impart the knowledge components and design of DC power supply.
2. To Impart the knowledge of components and accessories used in electrical installations.
3. To Impart the knowledge of various illumination devices.
4. To Impart the knowledge of fabrication of transformer and its testing.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 The students are able to understand the symbols, specification and application of components.
CO 2 The students are able to understand the connections/ wiring diagrams used in electrical installations.
CO 3 The students are able to understand the function of illumination devices.
CO 4 The students are able to understand to fabricate the transformer and assembly of domestic
appliances.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 ‐ 2 1 ‐ 2
CO 2 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 ‐ 2 1 ‐ 2
CO 3 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 ‐ 2 1 ‐ 2
CO 4 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 ‐ 2 1 ‐ 2

UNIT 1

Identification of hand tools, their specifications and purpose, safety precautions, first aid for electric shock,
identification, specification of various types of resistors, capacitors, inductors, diodes, zener diodes, transistors,
thyristors, LDR, VDR, UJT. Soldering and desoldering practice on wire and PCB.
Design and fabricate dc power supply using single diode half wave rectifier, two diodes full wave rectifier, 4
diode bride rectifier, capacitor filter, without and with regulator.

UNIT 2

Introduction to various electrical components and accessories used in wiring installation for example fuse,
MCB, ELCB, switches etc. Introduction of different types of electrical wiring and wiring diagrams, selection
(gauges, size etc.) and ratings of wires. Introduction to domestic and industrial wiring installations.

UNIT 3

Fabrication of different types of extension board. Study and wiring of a tube light circuit. Connection of fan
with regulator circuit. Demonstration of various types of illumination devices like lamp, tube light, CFL and LED
lamps. Trouble shooting of various home appliances.

UNIT 4

Study of various components of a small single phase step down transformer & its fabrication and testing. Safety
measures regarding electric fire. Introduction to relays, contactors and starters, their specification and

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 366
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

applications. Connecting a 3‐phase induction motor through (a) D.O.L. starter (b) Star/delta starter, running &
reversing the direction of rotation of motor.

Textbook(s):
1. Electrical Workshop: A Textbook Paperback by R. P. Singh, I K International Publishing House Pvt. Ltd; 2nd
edition.
2. A Textbook of Electrical Workshop Practices by Umesh Rathore, Naresh Kumar Sharma, S.K. Kataria &
Sons.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 367
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Paper Code(s): ECC‐261 L P C

Paper: Electronics – I Lab ‐ 2 1

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Electronics ‐ I) as this is the practical
component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. To plot V‐I characteristics of a semiconductor diode & calculate static & dynamic resistance.
2. To Study the Reverse characteristics of Zener diode
3. To Study the Rectifier circuit (With and Without Filter).
a) Half Wave Rectifier
b) Centre Tapped Rectifier.
c) Bridge Rectifier.
4. To Plot Input & Output characteristics CB/CE/CC transistor.
5. Realization of basic gates.
6. Implementation of Boolean functions (two or three variables).
7. Realize all gates using NAND & NOR gates
8. Realize Half Adder, Full Adder, Half subtracter, Full subtracter
9. Realize Master‐Save J K Flip‐Flop, using NAND/NOR gates
10. Realize Universal Shift Register
11. Realize Self‐Starting, Self Correcting Ring Counter
12. Realize Multiplexer and De‐Multiplexer

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 368
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Paper Code(s): EEC‐253 / EEC‐254 L P C

Paper: Circuits and Systems Lab ‐ 2 1

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Circuits and Systems) as this is the
practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Introduction to MATLAB and its basic commands.

2. Plot unit step, unit impulse, unit ramp, exponential, parabolic functions and sinusoidal signals
3. Plot the linear convolution of two sequences
4. Study the transient response of series RLC circuit for different types of waveforms on CRO and verify using
MATLAB
5. Study the time response of a simulated linear system and verify the unit step and square wave response of
first order and second order, type 0,1 system
6. To determine Z and Y parameters of the given two port network.
7. To determine ABCD parameters of the given two port network.
8. To verify various theorems in AC Circuits.
9. To determine Hybrid parameters of the given two port network.
10. To design Cascade Connection and determine ABCD parameters of the given two port network.
11. To design Series‐Series Connection and determine Z parameters of the given two port network.
12. To design Parallel‐Parallel Connection and determine Y parameters of the given two port network.
13. To design Series‐Parallel Connection and determine h parameters of the given two port network.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 369
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Paper Code(s): EEC‐255 L P C

Paper: Electrical Machines Lab ‐ 2 1

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Electrical Machines) as this is the
practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. To obtain magnetization characteristics of DC shunt generator and determine critical field resistance and
critical speed.
2. To perform load test on DC shunt generator and determine the characteristics.
3. To perform speed control of DC shunt motor by field and armature control.
4. To perform the load test on D.C. shunt motor and to draw the performance characteristics.
5. To perform the Swinburne’s test on a D.C. shunt Machine and to pre determine its efficiency when running
as a motor as well as generator and also draw the characteristic curves.
6. To perform Open circuit and short circuit tests on single phase transformer for parameter estimation of
the transformer.
7. To obtain star‐star, star‐delta and delta‐delta connections for three phase transformers.
8. To perform parallel operation of two single phase transformers.
9. To perform block rotor test and no load test on induction motor(single phase) for parameter estimation.
10. To perform block rotor test and no load test on induction motor (three phase) for parameter estimation.
11. To perform SCC and OCC of an alternator and calculate voltage regulation at UPF, .8 leading and .8 lagging
pf.
12. To perform load test on alternator.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 370
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Paper Code(s): ECC‐265 L P C

Paper: Analog Electronics Lab ‐ 2 1
Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Analog Electronics) as this is the
practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. To plot V‐I characteristics of a semiconductor diode & Calculate Static & Dynamic Resistance
2. To Study the Reverse characteristics of Zener diode
3. To Study the Rectifier circuit (With and Without Filter).
a) Half Wave Rectifier
b) Centre Tapped Rectifier.
c) Bridge Rectifier.
4. To Plot Input & Output characteristics CB/CE/CC transistor.
5. Plot the FET characteristics & MOSFET characteristics.
6. Two Stage R.C. Coupled Amplifier.
a) To measure the overall gain of two stages at 1 KHz and compare it with gain ofIst stage,
b) To observe the loading effect of second stage on the first stage.
c) To plot the frequency response curve of two stage amplifier.
7. To study Emitter follower circuit & measurement of voltage gain and plotting of frequency response Curve.
8. Feedback in Amplifier. Single stage amplifier with and without by pass capacitor, measurement of voltage
gain and plotting the frequency response in both cases.
9. To study the opamp (IC 741) as inverting and non inverting amplifier and calculate its gain.
10. To study the opamp (IC 741) as adder, sub‐tractor and voltage follower, calculate its output voltage.
11. To study RC phase shift/WIEN BRIDGE oscillator
12. To study the waveform of square wave generator using 741 OP‐AMP IC.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 371
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Paper Code(s): MEC‐253 L P C

Paper: Theory of Machines Lab ‐ 2 1

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Theory of Machines) as this is the
practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. To study and verify the inversions of four bar (4R), single slider (3R‐1P) crank and double slider (2R‐2P)
crank mechanism and also prove Grashof’s Law.
2. To find out experimentally the Coriolis component of acceleration and compare with theoretical values
3. To study various types of CAM and follower mechanisms. Also, draw the CAM profile for the given CAM
apparatus and determine jumping speed.
4. Draw velocity and acceleration diagram of engine mechanism using Klien’s construction
5. To study various types of gear and gear trains and to determine gear ratio of simple, compound and
epicyclic gear trains.
6. To calculate the torque on a Planet Carrier and torque on internal gear using epicyclic gear train and
holding torque apparatus.
7. To determine the radius of gyration and moment of Inertia of a given rod.
8. To study and verify the motion of any one Governor.
9. To study and verify the gyroscopic law of motion.
10. To study and verify the dynamic balancing of rotating masses.
11. To determine the natural frequency of undamped free vibration of the given spring mass system.
12. To find the moment of inertia of a fly wheel.
13. To determine whirling speed of shaft theoretically and experimentally.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 372
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Paper Code(s): MEC‐255 L P C

Paper: Strength of Materials Lab ‐ 2 1

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Strength of Materials) as this is the
practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. To perform the Hardness Test (Rockwell, Brinell & Vicker’s test) and find the Hardness Number of different
materials (MS, HSS, Wood, C.I., Al specimens).
2. To perform the Impact Test on a standard notched specimen to evaluate its Impact Number.
3. To perform the Tensile/Compression Test in ductile/brittle materials, draw a stress‐strain curve and evaluate
various mechanical properties of a given specimen.
4. To perform Shear Test and find maximum (ultimate) shear strength of given test specimen.
5. To perform the Bending /Deflection Test on a beam and evaluate its Young’s Modulus.
6. To perform the Torsion Test and find modulus of rigidity, rupture stress (maximum shear stress), shear stress
at yield point.
7. To determine Buckling loads of long columns with different end conditions.
8. To measure mechanical strain in a given beam using strain gauges.
9. To determine the different mechanical properties of given material under creep failure.
10. To determine flexural strength (modulus of rupture) of concrete beam.
11. To determine the endurance limit of the given specimen under fatigue or cyclic loading.
12. To find the Shear Modulus of two different materials; Aluminium and Steel using two twist and bent test
rigs are used.
13. To determine the different mechanical properties of a given close coiled helical spring.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 373
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Paper Code(s): MEC‐257 L P C

Paper: Thermal Engineering – I Lab ‐ 2 1

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Thermal Engineering ‐ I) as this is the
practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. To draw the valve timing diagram of a Single Cylinder Four Stroke CI Engine.

2. To draw the valve timing diagram of a Single Cylinder Four Stroke SI Engine.

3. To determine Exergy destruction of Exhaust Gas Calorimeter of Petrol Engine test rig at different load.

4. To determine Exergy destruction of Exhaust Gas Calorimeter of Diesel Engine test rig at different load.

5. To determine the dryness fraction of given steam sample.

6. Visit and understanding of thermal power plant.

7. Thermodynamic analysis of Rankine cycle.

8. Comparative thermodynamic analysis of Otto, diesel and dual for the given condition.

9. Comparative analysis of air standard cycles under stated condition.

10. Study and analysis of Gas‐Turbine cycle.

11. To study the working and construction different type of Boilers.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 374
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Paper Code(s): MEC‐259 L P C

Paper: Manufacturing Science and Technology – I Lab ‐ 2 1

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Manufacturing Science and Technology
‐ I) as this is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. To determine the percentage of clay content in dry sand.

2. To determine the grain fineness number of a given sand specimen.
3. To Determine the moisture content quickly in fresh sand and moulding sand.
4. To determine the compressive strength of moulding sand.
5. To determine the permeability number of moulding sand.
6. Mould preparation and casting of metals after preparation of suitable moulds.
7. Laboratory experiments in fabrication processes using GMAW process.
8. Laboratory experiments in fabrication processes using Plasma Arc welding.
9. Laboratory experiments in fabrication processes using GTAW process.
10. Inspection of weld joints and welding defects.
11. Develop a flat blank layout, transfer the layout to the sheet metal, cut and form to the desired shape.
12. Practicing smithy or forging of carbon steels and testing of its property changes.
13. Form parts from metallic powders, record and plot pressing data, perform destructives tests on sintered
powder metal parts.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 375
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Paper Code(s): CEC‐253 L P C

Paper: Civil Engineering Drawing Lab ‐ 2 1

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions for paper setter
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are given below.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more.
Course Objectives :
1. To understand the basics of Civil Engineering.
2. To use software(s) for development of civil engineering drawing.
3. To calculate item/component quantity using software.
4. To develop civil engineering drawing.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 To understand and draw the symbols and conventions in civil engineering drawing.
CO 2 To develop the building drawing for the given line plan and data.
CO 3 To draw the different types of staircases
CO 4 To measure the item quantities from the drawing.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 ‐ ‐
CO 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 ‐ ‐
CO 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 ‐ ‐
CO 4 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 ‐

UNIT‐I
Symbols and conventions of materials: concrete, brickwork, glazing, wood, iron etc.
Symbols and conventions of building components‐ doors and windows; and fittings used in buildings: electrical,
mechanical, plumbing and firefighting, sanitary etc.

UNIT‐II
Double line plan, elevation, sectional elevation at different sections for a RCC framed and load bearing/
structure building
Structural detailing – beam, column, slab, foundation,

UNIT‐III
Details of various staircases, perspective view of building/structure

UNIT – IV
Measurement of various item/component quantities‐ excavation, brickwork, concrete, plastering etc.

Text Books
1. Computer Aided design and Manufacture, Grover M.P.Simmers, E.W. Prentice Hall
2. CAD/CAM/CIM, Radhakrishnan & Subramanyam, Willey Eastern Limited Publications (Reprint 2015)

Reference Books
1. A Guide to the Preparation of Civil Engineering Drawings, M. V. Thomas, springer link
2. Civil Engineering Drawing & House Planning, Dr. B.P. Verma, Khanna Publishers

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 376
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Paper Code(s): CEC‐255 L P C

Paper: Fluid Mechanics Lab ‐ 2 1

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Fluid Mechanics) as this is the practical
component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. To determine the pressure in a pipe line using various pressure measuring instruments.
2. To determine the metacentric height.
3. To verify the impulse momentum equation [impact of jet].
4. To verify Bernoulli’s theorem using Bernoulli Instrument.
5. To determine cc, cv and cd of an orifice.
6. To calibrate a V‐ notch rectangular notch.
7. To calibrate a V‐ notch rectangular notch
8. To calibrate orifice meter.
9. To calibrate venturimeter.
10. To validate type of flow using Reynolds dye experiment.
11. Determination of frictional losses in pipes of different diameters.
12. Determination of minor losses in pipes.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 377
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Paper Code(s): CEC‐257 L P C

Paper: Geomatics Engineering Lab ‐ 2 1

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Geomatics Engineering) as this is the
practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Study of various instruments used in chain surveying.

2. To conduct the chain survey closed traverse around a building and plot the existing building.
3. To plot the plan of a given area by compass traversing
4. Study of theodolite in detail & measuring of horizontal angles by method of repetition
5. Locating given building by theodolite traversing.
6. Determination of elevation of various points with Auto level by collimation plane method and rise & fall
method.
7. Determination of elevation of object if base of object accessible, using the principle of trigonometric
levelling.
8. Determination of elevation of object if base of the object inaccessible and instrument stations in the same
vertical plane as the elevated object
9. Determination of elevation of object if base of the object inaccessible and instrument stations not in same
vertical plane as the elevated object, adopt trigonometrical levelling.
10. To study of various components of total station and measuring horizontal angle, vertical angle, horizontal
distance and slope distance
11 To study about the stereoscope and determination of the line of flight on Aerial Photo.
12. Setting out a simple circular curve by different methods

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 378
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Paper Code(s): ECC‐263 L P C

Paper: Analog and Digital Electronics Lab ‐ 2 1

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Analog and Digital Electronics) as this is
the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. To plot V‐I characteristics of a semiconductor diode & Calculate Static & Dynamic Resistance
2. To Study the Reverse characteristics of Zener diode
3. To Study the Rectifier circuit (With and Without Filter).
a. Half Wave Rectifier
b. Centre Tapped Rectifier.
c. Bridge Rectifier.
4. To Plot Input & Output characteristics CB/CE/CC transistor.
5. Realization of basic gates.
6. Implementation of Boolean functions (two or three variables).
7. Realize all gates using NAND & NOR gates
8. Realize Half Adder, Full Adder, Half subtracter, Full subtracter
9. Realize Master‐Slave J K Flip‐Flop, using NAND/NOR gates..
10. To study the opamp (IC 741) as inverting and non inverting amplifier and calculate its gain.
11. To study the opamp (IC 741) as adder, sub‐tractor and voltage follower, calculate its output voltage.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 379
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Paper Code(s): BS‐202 L P C

Paper: Probability, Statistics and Linear Programming 4 ‐ 4

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives:
1: To understand probability and probability distributions.
2: To understand methods of summarization of data.
3: To understand and use test for hypothesis.
4: To understand methods for solving linear programming problems.
Course Outcomes (CO):
CO1: Ability to solve probability problems and describe probability distributions.
CO2: Ability to describe and summarize data.
CO3: Ability to use test for hypothesis.
CO4: Ability to formulate and solve linear programming problems.
Course Outcomes (CO to Programme Outcomes (PO) Mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High
CO/PO PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 ‐ 3 1 1 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 1 2
CO2 ‐ 3 1 1 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 1 2
CO3 ‐ 3 2 2 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 2
CO4 ‐ 3 3 3 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 2

Unit I

Basics: Probability and Statistical models, Sample Spaces and Events, Counting Techniques, Interpretations and
Axioms of Probability, Unions of Events and Addition Rules, Conditional Probability, Intersections of Events and
Multiplication and Total Probability Rules, Independence, Bayes’ Theorem, Random Variables.
Discrete and Continuous Random Variables and Distributions: Probability Distributions and Probability Mass /
density Functions, Cumulative Distribution Functions, Mean and Variance of a Random Variable, Discrete and
continuous Uniform Distribution, Binomial Distribution, Geometric and Negative Binomial Distributions,
Hypergeometric Distribution, Poisson Distribution. Normal Distribution, Normal Approximation to the Binomial,
and Poisson Distributions; Exponential Distribution, Erlang and Gamma Distributions, Weibull Distribution,
Lognormal Distribution, Beta Distribution.

Unit II

Joint Probability Distributions for Two Random Variables, Conditional Probability Distributions and
Independence, Joint Probability Distributions for Two Random Variables, Covariance and Correlation, Common
Joint Distributions, Linear Functions of RandomVariables, General Functions of Random Variables, Moment‐
Generating Functions.
Numerical Summaries of Data, Stem‐and‐Leaf Diagrams, Frequency Distributions and Histograms, Box Plots,
Time Sequence Plots, Scatter Diagrams, Probability Plots. Point Estimation, Sampling Distributions and the

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 380
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Central Limit Theorem without proof, General Concepts of Point Estimation, Methods of Point Estimation,
Statistical Intervals for a Single Sample.

Unit III

Hypotheses Testing for a SingleSample: Tests on the Mean of a Normal Distribution with Variance Known /
Unknown, Tests on the Variance and Standard Deviationof a Normal Distribution, Tests on a Population
Proportion, Testing for Goodness of Fit, Nonparametric tests (Signed, Wilcoxon), Similarly Statistical Inference
forTwo Samples.
Regression and Correlation: Linear Regression, Least Squares Estimators, Hypotheses testing for simple linear
regression, Confidence Intervals, Adequacy of model, Correlation, Transformed Variables, Logistic Regression.
Similarly, for multiple linear regression including aspects of MLR.

Unit IV

Linear Programming: Introduction, formulation of problem, Graphical method, Canonical and Standard form of
LPP, Simplex method, Duality concept, Dual simplex method, Transportation and Assignment problem.

Textbooks:
1. Applied Statistics and Probability for Engineers by Douglas G. Montgomery and Runger, Wiley, 2018
2. Linear Programming by G. Hadley, Narosa, 2002

References:
1. Miller and Freund’s Probability and Statistics for Engineers by Richard A. Johnson, Pearson, 10th Ed., 2018.
2. Probability & Statistics for Engineers & Scientists by Ronald E. Walpole, Raymond H. Myers, Sharon L. Myers
and Keying Ye, Pearson, 2016.
3. Statistics and probability with applications for engineers and scientists using Minitab, R and JMP, C. Gupta,
Irwin Guttman, and Kalanka P. Jayalath, Wiley, 2020.
4. Probability and Statistics for Engineering and the Sciences, Jay Devore, Cengage Learning, 2014.
5. Probability and Statistics in Emgineering, William W. Hines, Douglas C. Montgomery, David M. Goldman,
and Connie M. Borror, Wiley, 2003.
6. Operations Research: An Introduction by Hamdy A. Taha, Pearson, 10th Edition, 2016

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 381
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Paper Code(s): HS‐204 L P C

Paper: Technical Writing 2 ‐ 2

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
3. This is an NUES paper, hence all examinations to be conducted by the concerned teacher.
Instruction for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives:
1: To improve grammar and sentence structure and build vocabulary.
2: To understand how to write different types of writings.
3: To understand how to compose different types of business documents.
4: To understand business ethics and develop soft skills.
Course Outcomes (CO):
CO1: Ability to improve grammar and sentence structure and build vocabulary.
CO2: Ability to write different types of writings with clarity.
CO3: Ability to write different types of business documents.
CO4: Ability to apply business ethics and enhance personality.
Course Outcomes (CO to Programme Outcomes (PO) Mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High
CO/PO PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 ‐ ‐
CO2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 ‐ ‐
CO3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 ‐ ‐
CO4 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 1 ‐ 3 ‐ 3 ‐ ‐

Unit I

Grammar and Vocabulary‐‐‐ Types of sentences (simple, complex and compound) and use of connectives in
sentences, Subject‐verb agreement, Comprehension, Synonyms and Antonyms, Homophones and Homonyms,
Word Formation: Prefixes and Suffixes, Indianism, Misappropriation and Redundant Words, Question Tags and
Short Responses.

Unit II

Writing Styles ‐‐ Expository, Explanatory, Descriptive, Argumentative and Narrative.

Precis writing, Visual Aids in Technical Writing, Plagiarism and Language Sensitivity in Technical Writing,
Dialogue Writing, Proposals: Purpose and Types.

Unit III

Letters at the Workplace—letter writing: Request, Sales, Enquiry, Order and Complaint.
Job Application‐‐‐Resume and Cover letter, Difference between Resume and CV, Preparation for Interview.
Meeting Documentation‐‐‐ Notice, Memorandum, Circular, Agenda, Office Order and Minutes of meeting,
Writing Instructions.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 382
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Unit IV

Ethics and Personality Development‐‐‐‐‐The Role of Ethics in Business Communication—Ethical Principles, Time
Management, Self‐Analysis through SWOT and JOHARI Window, Emotional Intelligence and Leadership Skills,
Team Building, Career Planning, Self Esteem.

Textbook:
1. Meenakshi Raman and Sangeeta Sharma, Technical Communication: Principles and Practice, Oxford
University Press, New Delhi (2015).

References:
1. Sanjay Kumar and Pushp Lata, Communication Skills, Oxford University Press, New Delhi (2015).
2. Herta A Murphy, Herbert W Hildebrandt, Jane P Thomas, Effective Business Communication, Tata McGraw‐
Hill, Hill Publishing Company Limited, Seventh Edition.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 383
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Paper Code(s): CIC‐206 L P C

Paper: Theory of Computation 4 ‐ 4

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
st
2. The first (1 ) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To understand Automata (Deterministic and Non‐Deterministic) and Language Theory
2. To understand Context Free Grammar (CFG), Parse Trees and Push Down Automata
3. To introduce the concepts of Turing Machines and Computability Theory
4. To understand Complexity Theory (NP‐completess NP‐hardness) and Space complexity
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Ability to understand the design aspects of “abstract models” of computers like finite automata,
pushdown automata, and Turing machines.
CO 2 Ability to comprehend the recognizability (decidability) of grammar (language) with specific
characteristics through these abstract models.
CO 3 Ability to decide what makes some problems computationally hard and others easy?
CO 4 A ability to deliberate the problems that can be solved by computers and the ones that cannot?
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 2 2 2 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 1 1 3
CO 2 3 2 2 2 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 1 1 3
CO 3 3 2 2 2 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 1 1 3
CO 4 3 2 2 2 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 1 1 3

UNIT – I

Automata and Language Theory: Chomsky Classification, Finite Automata, Deterministic Finite Automata (DFA),
Non‐Deterministic Finite Automata (NFA), Regular Expressions, Equivalence of DFAs, NFAs and Regular
Expressions, Closure properties of Regular grammar, Non‐Regular Languages, Pumping Lemma.

UNIT – II

Context Free Languages: Context Free Grammar (CFG), Parse Trees, Push Down Automata (deterministic and
non‐deterministic) (PDA), Equivalence of CFGs and PDAs, Closure properties of CFLs, Pumping Lemma, Parsing,
LL(K) grammar.

UNIT – III

Turing Machines and Computability Theory: Definition, design and extensions of Turing Machine, Equivalence
of various Turing Machine Formalisms, Church – Turing Thesis, Decidability, Halting Problem, Reducibility and
its use in proving undecidability. Rices theorem. Undecidability of Posts correspondence problem., Recursion

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 384
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Theorem.

UNIT – IV

Complexity Theory: The class P as consensus class of tractable sets. Classes NP, co‐NP. Polynomial time
reductions. NP‐completess, NP‐hardness. Cook‐ Levin theorem (With proof). Space complexity, PSPACE and
NPSPACE complexity classes, Savitch theorem (With proof). Probabilistic computation, BPP class. Interactive
proof systems and IP class. relativized computation and oracles.

Textbook(s):
1. Sipser, Michael. Introduction to the Theory of Computation, Cengage Learning, 2012.
2. J. Hopcroft, R. Motwani, and J. Ullman, Introduction to Automata Theory, Language and Computation,
Pearson, 2nd Ed, 2006.

References:
1. Peter Linz, An Introduction to Formal Languages and Automata, 6th edition, Viva Books, 2017
1. Maxim Mozgovoy, Algorithms, Languages, Automata, and Compilers, Jones and Bartlett, 2010.
2. D. Cohen, Introduction to Computer Theory, Wiley, N. York, 2nd Ed, 1996.
3. J. C. Martin, Introduction to Languages and the Theory of Computation, TMH, 2nd Ed. 2003.
4. K. L. Mishra and N. Chandrasekharan, Theory of Computer Science: Automata, Languages and Computation,
PHI, 2006.
5. Anne Benoit, Yves Robert, Frédéric Vivien, A Guide to Algorithm Design: Paradigms, Methods, and
Complexity Analysis, CRC Press, 2013.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 385
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Paper Code(s): CIC‐210 L P C

Paper: Database Management System 4 ‐ 4

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To introduce basic concepts, architecture and characteristics of database systems
2. To introduce relational model concepts and PL/SQL programming
3. To introduce relational database design and Normal forms based on functional dependencies
4. To introduce concepts of object oriented & distributed databases
Course Outcomes (CO) :
CO 1 Ability to understand advantages of database systems
CO 2 Ability to use SQL as DDL, DCL and DML
CO 3 Ability to design database and manage transaction processing
CO 4 Understand object oriented & distributed databases systems and use them
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 2 2 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 2 2 3
CO 2 3 3 2 2 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 2 2 3
CO 3 3 3 2 3 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 2 2 3
CO 4 3 3 2 3 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 2 2 3

UNIT – I

Basic concepts: database & database users, characteristics of the database systems, concepts and architecture,
date models, schemas & instances, DBMS architecture & data independence, database languages & interfaces,
data modelling using the entity‐relationship approach. Enhanced ER concepts ‐ Specialization/Generalization,
Aggregation, Mapping of ER model to Relational Model.
SQL – DDL, DCL & DML views and indexes in SQL. Basics of SQL, DDL, DML,DCL, structure – creation, alteration,
defining constraints – Primary key, foreign key, unique, not null, check, IN operator.

UNIT ‐ II:

Relational model concepts, relational model constraints, relational algebra, relational calculus.
SQL – Functions ‐ aggregate functions, Built‐in functions – numeric, date, string functions, set operations, sub‐
queries, correlated sub‐queries, Use of group by, having, order by, join and its types, Exist, Any, All , view and
its types. Transaction control commands – Commit, Rollback, Save point.

UNIT ‐ III

Relational data base design: functional dependencies & normalization for relational databases, normal forms
based on functional dependencies, (1NF, 2NF, 3NF & BCNF), lossless join and dependency preserving

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 386
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

decomposition, normal forms based on multivalued & join dependencies (4NF & 5NF) & domain key normal
form
Properties of Transaction, Transaction states, Transaction Schedule, Serializability, Concurrency control
techniques, locking techniques, time stamp ordering, Recoverable schedules, granularity of data items,
Deadlock detection and Recovery, recovery techniques: recovery concepts, database backup and recovery from
catastrophic failures.
Database Programming – control structures, exception handling, stored procedures, Triggers.

UNIT ‐ IV

File Structures and Indexing: Secondary Storage Devices, Operations on Files, Heap Files, Sorted Files, Hashing,
Single level indexes, Multi‐level indexes, B and B+ tree indexes.
Concepts of Object Oriented Database Management systems & Distributed Database Management Systems

Textbooks:
1. R. Elmsari and S. B. Navathe, “Fundamentals of database systems”, Pearson Education, 7th Edition, 2018
2. V. M. Grippa and S. Kumichev, “Learning MySQL”, O’Reilly, 2021.
3. SQL/ PL/SQL, The programming language of Oracle, Ivan Bayross, 4th Edition BPB Publications

References:
1. A. Silberschatz, H. F. Korth and S. Sudershan, “Database System Concept”, McGraw Hill, 6th Edition,2013.
2. Date, C. J., “An introduction to database systems”, 8th Edition, Pearson Education, 2008.
3. P. Rob & C. Coronel, “Database Systems: Design Implementation & Management”, Thomson Learning, 6th
Edition, 2004
4. Desai, B., “An introduction to database concepts”, Galgotia publications, 2010
5. H. Garcia‐Molina, J. D. Ullman, J. Widom, “Database System: The Complete Book”, PH.
6. Joel Murach, Murach's Mysql””, 3rd Edition‐Mike Murach and Associates, Incorporated, 2019.
7. Oracle and MySQL manuals.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 387
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Paper Code(s): CIC‐212 L P C

Paper: Programming in Java 4 ‐ 4

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To understand and gain knowledge of characteristics of Java, JVM, instruction set, control flow,
programming and the sandbox model.
2. To learn the Java programming, use of exceptional handling and inheritance.
3. To understand threads, thread synchronization, AWT components and event handling mechanism.
4. To understand the concepts of I/O streams, JDBC, object serialization, sockets, RMI, JNI, Collection API
interfaces, Vector, Stack, Hash table classes, list etc.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Ability to understand the compilation process of Java, role of JVM as an emulator and various types of
instructions.
CO 2 Ability to learn and apply concepts of Java programming, exceptional handling and inheritance.
CO 3 Ability to understand the use of multi‐threading, AWT components and event handling mechanism in
Java.
CO 4 Ability to understand the concepts of I/O streams, IDBC, object serialization, sockets, RMI, JNI,
Collection API interfaces, Vector, Stack, Hash table classes, list etc.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 2 2 2 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 2 2 3
CO 2 3 2 2 2 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 2 2 3
CO 3 3 2 2 2 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 2 2 3
CO 4 3 2 2 2 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 2 2 3

UNIT ‐ I

Overview and characteristics of Java, Java program Compilation and Execution Process Organization of the Java
Virtual Machine, JVM as an interpreter and emulator, Instruction Set, class File Format, Verification, Class Area,
Java Stack, Heap, Garbage Collection. Security Promises of the JVM, Security Architecture and Security Policy.
Class loaders and security aspects, sandbox model

UNIT ‐ II

Java Fundamentals, Data Types & Literals Variables, Wrapper Classes, Arrays, Arithmetic Operators, Logical
Operators, Control of Flow, Classes and Instances, Class Member Modifiers Anonymous Inner Class Interfaces
and Abstract Classes, inheritance, throw and throws clauses, user defined Exceptions, The String Buffer Class,
tokenizer, applets, Life cycle of applet and Security concerns.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 388
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT ‐ III

Threads: Creating Threads, Thread Priority, Blocked States, Extending Thread Class, Runnable Interface, Starting
Threads, Thread Synchronization, Synchronize Threads, Sync Code Block, Overriding Synced Methods, Thread
Communication, wait, notify and notify all.
AWT Components, Component Class, Container Class, Layout Manager Interface Default Layouts, Insets and
Dimensions, Border Layout, Flow Layout, Grid Layout, Card Layout Grid Bag Layout AWT Events, Event Models,
Listeners, Class Listener, Adapters, Action Event Methods Focus Event Key Event, Mouse Events, Window Event

UNIT ‐ IV

Input/Output Stream, Stream Filters, Buffered Streams, Data input and Output Stream, Print Stream Random
Access File, JDBC (Database connectivity with MS‐Access, Oracle, MS‐SQL Server), Object serialization, Sockets,
development of client Server applications, design of multithreaded server. Remote Method invocation, Java
Native interfaces, Development of a JNI based application.
Collection API Interfaces, Vector, stack, Hashtable classes, enumerations, set, List, Map, Iterators.

Textbook(s):
1. Patrick Naughton and Herbertz Schidt, “Java‐2 the Complete Reference”,TMH

References:
1. E. Balaguruswamy, “Programming with Java”, TMH
2. Horstmann, “Computing Concepts with Java 2 Essentials”, John Wiley.
3. Decker & Hirshfield, “Programming Java”, Vikas Publication.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 389
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Paper Code(s): EEC‐206 L P C

Paper: Network Analysis and Synthesis 3 ‐ 3

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives:
1. To understand the network theorem in AC circuit.
2. To understand mathematical modelling of circuit.
3. To understand two port parameter and transfer function.
4. To understand realization of passive network and filter.
Course Outcome (CO):
CO 1 Ability to apply network theorems in AC circuit.
CO 2 Ability to determine transient respond of circuit.
CO 3 Ability to determine two port parameter of circuit.
CO 4 Ability to realize the circuit from their transfer function.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) Mapping (Scale ‐ 1: Low, 2: medium, 3: High)
CO/PO PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 ‐ 2 1 ‐ 2
CO 2 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 ‐ 2 1 ‐ 2
CO 3 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 ‐ 2 1 ‐ 2
CO 4 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 ‐ 2 1 ‐ 2

UNIT‐I

Application of Mesh current analysis, Node voltage analysis and Network theorems in AC circuits.
Graph theory: concept of tree, tie set matrix, cut set matrix and application to solve electric networks.

UNIT‐II

Periodic waveforms and signal synthesis, properties and applications of Laplace transform of complex
waveform.
System modeling in terms of differential equations and transient response of R, L, C, series and parallel circuits
for impulse, step, ramp, sinusoidal and exponential signals by classical method and using Laplace transform.

UNIT‐III

Two port networks – Introduction of two port parameters and their interconversion, interconnection of two
2‐port networks, open circuit and short circuit impedances and ABCD constants, relation between image
impedances and short circuit and open circuit impedances. Network functions, their properties and concept of
transform impedance, Hurwitz polynomial.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 390
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT IV

Positive real function and synthesis of LC, RC, RL Networks in Foster’s I and II, Cauer’s I& II forms, Introduction
of passive filter and their classification, frequency response, characteristic impedance of low pass, high pass,
Band Pass and Band reject prototype section.

Textbook(s):
1. W H Hayt “Engineering Circuit Analysis” TMH Eighth Edition
2. Kuo, “Network analysis and synthesis” John Weily and Sons, 2nd Edition.

Reference Books:
1. S Salivahanan “Circuit Theory ” Vikas Publishing House 1st Edition 2014
2. Van Valkenburg, “ Network analysis” PHI, 2000.
3. Bhise, Chadda, Kulshreshtha, “ Engineering network analysis and filter design” Umesh publication, 2000.
4. D. R. Choudhary, “Networks and Systems” New Age International, 1999
5. Allan H Robbins, W.C.Miller “Circuit Analysis theory and Practice”Cengage Learning Pub 5th Edition 2013
6. Bell “Electric Circuit” Oxford Publications 7th Edition.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 391
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Paper Code(s): ECC‐210 / ECC‐313 L P C

Paper: Microprocessors and Microcontrollers 3 ‐ 3

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives:
1. To impart knowledge about architecture and instruction set of 8085 microprocessor so that students
can implement 8085 assembly language programs.
2. To impart knowledge about architecture and instruction set of 8086 microprocessor so that students
can implement 8086 assembly language programs.
3. To impart knowledge about interfacing of 8255, 8254/8253, 8251, 8259 and I/O devices with 8086
microprocessor.
4. To impart knowledge about architecture and operation of 8051 microcontroller and their interfacing
with memory and I/O.
Course Outcome (CO):
CO 1 Ability to understand and distinguish the use of different 8085 instructions, timing diagram,
addressing modes, interrupts and apply those instructions for implementing assembly language
programs.
CO 2 Ability to analyse the timing diagrams, understand its instruction set, assess its memory organisation
and will implement the assembly language programs , interfacing of memory with 8086 successfully
CO 3 Understand and realize the interfacing of 8255 (PPI), 8254/8255 (PIT), 8251 (USART), 8259 (PIC),
8279 (Keyboard and display), Sample and hold circuit, DAC/ADC, LCD & Stepper motor with 8086
microprocessor.
CO 4 Understand the architecture and operation of 8051 microcontroller and ability to use them for
designing various applications based on 8051 by implementing the elaborate instruction set.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) Mapping (Scale ‐ 1: Low, 2: medium, 3: High)
CO/PO PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 3 2 ‐ 1 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 1
CO 2 3 3 3 2 3 1 1 ‐ ‐ 1
CO 3 3 3 3 2 3 1 1 ‐ 1 ‐ ‐ 1
CO 4 3 3 3 2 3 1 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 1

UNIT ‐ I

Introduction to Microprocessor Systems: Architecture and PIN diagram of 8085, Timing Diagram, memory
organization, addressing modes, interrupts. Assembly Language Programming.

UNIT – II

8086 Microprocessor: 8086 Architecture, difference between 8085 and 8086 architecture, generation of
physical address, PIN diagram of 8086, Minimum Mode and Maximum mode, Bus cycle, Memory Organization,

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 392
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Memory Interfacing, Addressing Modes, Assembler Directives, Instruction set of 8086, Assembly Language
Programming, Hardware and Software Interrupts.

UNIT – III

Interfacing of 8086 with 8255, 8254/8253, 8251, 8259: Introduction, Generation of I/O Ports, Programmable
Peripheral Interface (PPI)‐Intel 8255, Sample‐and‐Hold Circuit and Multiplexer, Keyboard and Display Interface,
Keyboard and Display Controller (8279), Programmable Interval timers (Intel 8253/8254), USART (8251), PIC
(8259), DAC, ADC, LCD, Stepper Motor.

UNIT – IV

Overview of Microcontroller 8051: Introduction to 8051 Micro‐controller, Architecture, Memory organization,

Special function registers, Port Operation, Memory Interfacing, I/O Interfacing, Programming 8051 resources,
interrupts, Programmer’s model of 8051, Operand types, Operand addressing, Data transfer instructions,
Arithmetic instructions, Logic instructions, Control transfer instructions, Timer & Counter Programming,
Interrupt Programming.

Textbook(s):
1. Muhammad Ali Mazidi, “Microprocessors and Microcontrollers”, Pearson, 2006
2. Douglas V Hall, “Microprocessors and Interfacing, Programming and Hardware” Tata McGraw Hill, 2006.
3. Ramesh Gaonkar, “MicroProcessor Architecture, Programming and Applications with the 8085”, PHI

References:
1. Muhammad Ali Mazidi, Janice GillispieMazidi, Rolin D. MCKinlay “The 8051 Microcontroller and Embedded
Systems”,2nd Edition, Pearson Education 2008.
2. Kenneth J. Ayala, “The 8086 Microprocessor: Programming & Interfacing The PC”, Delmar Publishers, 2007.
3. A K Ray, K M Bhurchandi, “Advanced Microprocessors and Peripherals”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2007.
4. Vaneet Singh, Gurmeet Singh, “Microprocessor and Interfacing”, Satya Prakashan, 2007.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 393
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Paper Code(s): ECC‐212 L P C

Paper: Digital Communications 3 ‐ 3

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives:
1. To understand importance of information theory in digital communication and various PCM
modulation.
2. To understand the various basic concepts of digital communication.
3. To understand the various digital Modulation‐demodulation techniques
4. To understand various coding in digital communications.
Course Outcome (CO):
CO 1 Ability to understand the need of digital communication and conversion of analog to digital signals.
CO 2 Ability to understand the effect of additive white Gaussian Noise on digital communication
modulation techniques.
CO 3 Ability to analyse the effect of inter symbol interference as the source of channel impairment and
the effect of multipath phenomenon.
CO 4 Ability to use and design communication systems for reliable communication
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) Mapping (Scale ‐ 1: Low, 2: medium, 3: High)
CO/PO PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 ‐ 2 1 ‐ 2
CO 2 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 ‐ 2 1 ‐ 2
CO 3 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 ‐ 2 1 ‐ 2
CO 4 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 ‐ 2 1 ‐ 2

UNIT I

Review of probability theory and Stochastic processes, Poisson and Gaussian Process, Noise, Narrowband
Noise, Sinewave plus Narrowband Noise. Sampling Theory, PAM, Quantization characteristics, PCM, DPCM,
Delta Modulation, Adaptive Delta Modulation, Line Codes.

UNIT II

AWGN Channel Signalling: Geometric Representation of Signals, Conversion of Continuous AWGN Channel to a
vector channel: ASK, QASK, FSK, M‐array FSK, BPSK, DPSK, DEPSK, QPSK, M‐array PSK, QAM, MSK, GMSK,
Coherent and non‐coherent detection and other keying techniques.

UNIT III

Band Limited Channels: Error rate due to channel noise in a matched filer receiver, Intersymbol Interference,
Signal Design for Zero ISI, Raised cosine and square root raised cosine spectrum, Eye pattern, Adaptive
equalization, signalling over multiple baseband channel, Fading Channels: Propagation effects, Jakes Model,

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 394
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Statistical Characteristics of wideband wireless channel, Diversity techniques, MIMO, MIMO Capacity for
channel known at receiver, OFDM, Spread‐spectrum signals.

UNIT IV

Information Theory: Entropy, Source Coding Theorem, Lossless data compression, Discrete Memoryless
channel, Mutual Information, Channel Capacity, Channel Coding Theorem, Differential Entropy and Mutual
Information for Continuous Random Ensembles, Information Capacity Law. Error Control Coding: Introduction,
Error Control using forward correction, Linear Block Code, Cyclic Codes, Convolutional Codes.

Textbook(s):
1. Simon Haykins, “Digital Communication Systems” John Wiley, 2014

References:
1. Simon Haykins and Michael Moher, “Communication Systems” John Wiley &sons Inc, 5th edition, 2009.
2. B P Lathi and Zhi Ding, “Modern Digital and Analog Communication Systems”, OUP, 5th edition, 2019
3. H P Hsu, Schaum Outline Series, Analog and Digital Communications, TMH 2006
4. J.G Proakis, Digital Communication, 4th Edition, Tata Mc Graw Hill Company, 2001.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 395
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Paper Code(s): ECC‐214 L P C

Paper: Analog Electronics – II 3 ‐ 3

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives:
1. To understand Basic building block and characteristic of Op‐Amp
2. To understand the frequency response and Configurations of Op‐Amp
3. To analyze and design linear, nonlinear and Oscillators circuits using Op‐Amp
4. To analyze and design active filters and to understand function of Op‐Amp based special ICs
Course Outcome (CO):
CO 1 Ability to understand and use Op‐Amps to design open‐loop and closed loop configuration.
CO 2 Ability to analyse frequency response of and Op‐Amp circuit.
CO 3 Ability to use Op‐Amp in linear and non‐linear applications.
CO 4 Ability to design Active Filters
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) Mapping (Scale ‐ 1: Low, 2: medium, 3: High)
CO/PO PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 ‐ 2 1 ‐ 2
CO 2 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 ‐ 2 1 ‐ 2
CO 3 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 ‐ 2 1 ‐ 2
CO 4 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 ‐ 2 1 ‐ 2

UNIT – I

The Operational Amplifiers: Block diagram representation of OP‐AMP; Evolution of IC and types, Power supply
for Op‐Amp; The Ideal Op‐Amp: schematic, characteristics, equivalent circuit, Ideal voltage transfer curve,
typical IC 741 characteristics
Open Loop Op‐Amp configurations: The differential amplifier, inverting amplifier, non‐inverting amplifier
Closed loop Op‐Amp configurations: inverting and non‐inverting amplifiers, voltage followers, differential
amplifiers, closed loop frequency response & circuit stability, single supply operation of OP‐AMP, Inverting and
Non‐Inverting op‐amp.

UNIT – II

The Practical Op‐Amp: Input offset voltage, input bias current, input offset current, Total output offset voltage,
thermal drift, error voltage, Supply voltage rejection ration (SVRR), CMRR
Frequency Response of An Op‐Amp: Frequency response compensator networks, High frequency OP‐AMP
equivalent circuit, open loop voltage gain as a function of frequency, Slew rate, causes of slew rates and its
effects in application.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 396
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT – III

Linear applications of Op‐Amps: Summing, scaling and averaging amplifier (inverting, non‐inverting &
differential configuration), voltage to current & current to voltage converters, Integrator, Differentiator,
Non‐Linear applications of IC op‐amps: Comparator, Zero crossing detector, Schmitt Trigger, Clipping &
Clamping Circuits, Precision Rectifiers, sample and hold circuit
Oscillators: Principles & Types; Phase shift, Wein‐bridge & quadrature. Square wave, triangular wave and saw
tooth wave generators, voltage‐controlled oscillator

UNIT – IV

Active Filters: Classification and frequency response of filters, response Advantages of active filters,
characteristics of butter worth, chebyshev, first order and second order butter worth filters‐ low pass and high
pass types. Band pass & band reject filters.
Specialised IC‐ The 555 Timer: functional diagram, Monostable and Astable multivibrators; PLL: Basic PLL
principle, monolithic 565 PLL; Voltage Regulators, Three terminal IC voltage regulators(LM 317

Textbook(s):
1. Ramakant A. Gayakwad, “OP‐AMP and Linear ICs”, 4th Edition, Prentice Hall / Pearson Education, 2001.
2. D. Roy Choudhary & S. B Jain, “Linear Integrated Circuit”, 2nd ed. New age publication.2018.

References:
1. Adel S. Sedra and Kenneth C. Smith, “Micro Electronic Circuits Theory and Applications,” 5th Edition , OUP,
2004.
2. David A. Bell, “Op‐amp & Linear ICs”, Oxford, 2013.
3. James M. Fiore, “Op Amps & Linear Integrated Circuits Concepts & Applications”, Cengage, 2010.
4. J. Michel Jacob, “Applications and Design with Analog Integrated Circuits”, PHI, 2004.
5. R. L. Boylestad and N. Nashlesky, “Electronic Devices and Circuit Theory”, Pearson Education, 11th Ed., 2014
6. J. Millman, C. Halkias, and C. D. Parikh, “Millman’s Integrated Electronics: Analog and Digital circuits and
system”, McGraw Hill Education, 2018.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 397
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Paper Code(s): EEC‐210 L P C

Paper: Electrical Machines – II 4 ‐ 4

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To understand the concept of synchronous generator.
2. To understand the concept of three phase induction motor.
3. To understand the concept of synchronous motor.
4. To understand the concept of single phase motor.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Ability to analyse the synchronous generator.
CO 2 Ability to analyse ofthree phase induction motor
CO 3 Ability to analyse ofsynchronous motor.
CO 4 Ability to analyse ofsingle phase motor.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 2 2 2 2 1 2 1 ‐ 2 2 ‐ 3
CO 2 3 3 2 2 1 2 1 ‐ 2 2 ‐ 2
CO 3 2 2 1 2 1 2 1 ‐ 2 2 ‐ 2
CO 4 2 2 2 2 1 2 1 ‐ 2 2 ‐ 2

Unit I

Synchronous Alternators Constructional features, armature windings, E.M.F. equation, winding coefficients,
harmonics in the induced E.M.F., armature reaction, O.C. and S.C. tests, voltage regulation‐Synchronous
impedance method, MMF Method, Potier’s triangle method parallel operation, operation on infinite bus,
cooling. Two reaction theory, power expressions for cylindrical and salient pole machines, performance
characteristics. [T1,T2]

Unit II

Poly phase Induction Machines Constructional features, production of rotating magnetic field, working of 3‐
phase Induction motor, phasor diagram, equivalent circuit, power and torque relations, torque and slip
relations, no load and blocked rotor tests and efficiency. speed control by rotor resistance, injected e.m.f,
frequency variation and pole changing, DOL, Y‐∆ and autotransformer starters, deep bar and double cage rotor
motors, cogging and crawling, operation of Induction machine as generator and phasor diagram. [T1,T2]

Unit III

Synchronous Motors – Principle of operation, starting methods, phasor diagram torque‐angle characteristics,

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 398
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

V‐curves hunting and damping, synchronous condenser, introduction to single phase synchronous motors:
Reluctance and Hysteresis motors. [T1,T2]

Unit IV

Fractional Horse Power Motors Single Phase Induction Motor: Double revolving field theory, equivalent circuit,
no load and blocked rotor tests, starting methods, split phase Induction motor‐ capacitor start, two value
capacitor motor.
Introduction and applications of single phase AC series motor, universal motor, AC servo motor, stepper motor,
permanent magnet AC motors. [T1,T2]

Textbook(s):
1. A Fitzgeral, Charles Kingsley, Stephen Umans, “Electric Machinery”, Tata McGraw Hill Education, 6th
Edition, 2002
2. I J Nagrath D P Kothari, “Electric Machines”, McGraw‐Hill Education, 3rd edition, 2011.

Reference Books:
1. The Performance and Design of Alternating Current Machines, M.G. Say, CBS Publishers, 2005
2. Oblems in Electrical Engineering: Power engineering and electronics with answers Partly Solved in I. Units:
Parker Smith , CBS Publishers, 9th edition, 2003
3. Electric Machines, I J Nagrath D P Kothari, Mc Graw‐Hill Education, 3rd edition, 2011
4. Samarjit Ghosh, “Electrical Machines”, Pearson

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 399
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Paper Code(s): EEC‐212 L P C

Paper: Power Systems – I 4 ‐ 4

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To impart the knowledge of transmission line parameter.
2. To impart the knowledge of transmission line.
3. To impart the knowledge of cables.
4. To impart the knowledge of load flow studies.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Ability to calculate the transmission line parameters.
CO 2 Ability to analyse performance of transmission line.
CO 3 Ability to understand working of cables.
CO 4 Ability to solve load flow in power system.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 2 2 2 2 1 2 1 ‐ 2 2 ‐ 3
CO 2 3 3 2 2 1 2 1 ‐ 2 2 ‐ 2
CO 3 2 2 1 2 1 2 1 ‐ 2 2 ‐ 2
CO 4 2 2 2 2 1 2 1 ‐ 2 2 ‐ 2

UNIT I

Power System Components: Block diagram of electric power system, Single line diagram of power system, brief
description of power system elements such as, synchronous machine, transformer, transmission line, bus bar
and circuit breaker.
Transmission line: Configurations, type of conductors, Mechanical Design of Transmission Line: catenary curve,
calculation of sag and tension, effects of wind and ice loadings on sag, sag template, vibration dampers.
Overhead Lines Insulators: Types of insulators and their applications, potential distribution over a string of
insulators, methods of equalizing the potential. [T1,T2]

UNIT II

Overhead Transmission Lines: Corona and Interference: Phenomenon of corona, corona loss, factors affecting
corona, methods of reducing corona, bundle conductors and interference.
Calculation of resistance (skin & proximity effects), inductance and capacitance of single phase, three phase,
single circuit and double circuit transmission lines. Modeling and performance analysis of short, medium and
long transmission line. Ferranti effect, Transposition of transmission conductors, surge impedance loading.
Introduction and analysis of travelling wave use of Bewley Diagram. [T1,T2]

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 400
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT III

Insulated Cables: Types of cables, dielectric stress, grading of cables, insulation resistance, capacitance of single
phase and three phase cables, dielectric loss, heating of cables.
Fault Analysis: Per unit system, symmetrical component, calculation of symmetrical and unsymmetrical fault,
use of current limiting reactors. [T1,T2]

UNIT IV

Power Flow Analysis: Formulation of Y‐bus Matrix, Power flow equations, Classification of buses, Data for load
flow, Gauss‐Seidal Method, acceleration factor of convergence; Newton Raphson Method Fast Decoupled load
flow; Comparison of power Flow Methods. [T1,T2]

Textbook(s):
1. C.L.Wadhava, “Electrical Power Systems”, New Age International, 2004
2. Hadi Saddat, “Electric power systems”, Tata McGraw Hill. 2014.

Reference Books:
1. S. L. Uppal, “Electrical Power”, Khanna Publishers, 13th edition 2003
2. W. H. Stevension, ”Elements of Power System Analysis”, McGraw Hill, 1982
3. Ashfaq Hussain, “Electrical Power System” CBS Publishers and Distributors.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 401
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Paper Code(s): ECC‐218 L P C

Paper: Electronics – II 4 ‐ 4

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To understand the working of amplifier circuits.
2. To understand the working of multi‐stage, feedback and power amplifier.
3. To understand working of operational amplifier and linear applications.
4. To understand the function of waveform generators.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Ability to solve problems related to amplifier circuits.
CO 2 Ability to apply the amplifiers circuits in real world.
CO 3 Ability to analyse various operational amplifier circuits.
CO 4 Ability to understand the function of various waveform generators.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 ‐ 2 1 ‐ 2
CO 2 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 ‐ 2 1 ‐ 2
CO 3 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 ‐ 2 1 ‐ 2
CO 4 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 ‐ 2 1 ‐ 2

UNIT – I

BJT, FET MOSFET Bias stabilization: Need for stabilization, fixed Bias, emitter bias, self‐bias, bias stability with
respect to variations in ICO, Small signal amplifiers:, hybrid model for transistor at low frequencies, RC coupled
amplifiers, mid band model, gain & impedance, comparisons of different configurations, Emitter follower,
Darlington pair(derive voltage gain, current gain, input and output impedance). [T1]

UNIT – II

Multistage Amplifiers
Feedback Amplifiers: Feedback concept, Classification of Feedback amplifiers, Properties of negative Feedback
amplifiers, Impedance considerations in different Configurations,
Power Amplifiers: Power dissipations in transistors, Amplifiers Classification, (Class‐A, Class‐B, Class‐C, Class‐
AB) Efficiency analysis, Push‐pull and complementary Push‐pull amplifiers. [T1]

UNIT – III

Linear & Non Linear Wave shaping: , Inverting and non‐inverting amplifiers, voltage follower, difference amp,
adders, Voltage to current with floating & grounded load, current to voltage converter, practical integrator &
differentiator, Clipping & Clamping circuits, Comparators, log/antilog circuits using Op‐Amps, precision

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 402
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

rectifiers(half & full wave),peak detector, Inverting & non inverting Schmitt trigger circuit.
Waveform generations: Sine wave generator (Phase shift, Wein bridge, Hartley & Colpitts), Barkhausen criteria
of oscillations, conditions for oscillation, crystal oscillator. [T2]

UNIT IV

Waveform generators: Square and triangular waveform generators (determine period and frequency), saw
tooth wave generator, Astable multi‐vibrator, Monostable and Bistable Multivibrator.
Active RC Filters: Idealistic & Realistic response of filters (LPF, BPF, HPF, BRF), Butter worth & Chebyshev
approximation filter functions All pass, Notch Filter. [T2]

Textbook(s):
1. Salivahanan , Suresh Kumar, Vallavaraj, “Electronic Devices and Circuits” TMH, 1999
2. D. Roy Choudhary, Shail B Jain, “Linear Integrated Circuits” New Age Publisher, 1999.

Reference Books:
1. B. Kumar ,Shail Bala Jain, “Electronic Devices and Circuits” PHI.
2. M.Rashid , “Microelectronic Circuit”, Cengage Learning Publication.
3. Sedra & Smith, “Micro Electronic Circuits” Oxford University Press, 2000
4. David A Bell, “Operational Amplifiers and Linear IC’s”, PHI.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 403
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Paper Code(s): ECC‐206 L P C

Paper: Communication Systems 4 ‐ 4

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. Understand working of general instrument system, types of error, methods of measurement etc.
2. To give an overview of test and measuring instruments.
3. To expose the students to the design of bridges for the measurement of resistance, capacitance and
inductance.
4. Understand the principle and working of various electrical and electronic measuring instruments
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Ability to understand principal and working of electric and electronic measuring instruments
CO 2 Ability to analyse various errors in measurement
CO 3 Ability to evaluate the unknown quantities using measuring instruments
CO 4 Ability to design bridge circuits for measurement of resistance, capacitance and inductance
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 2 2 2 2 1 2 1 ‐ 2 2 ‐ 3
CO 2 3 3 2 2 1 2 1 ‐ 2 2 ‐ 2
CO 3 2 2 1 2 1 2 1 ‐ 2 2 ‐ 2
CO 4 2 2 2 2 1 2 1 ‐ 2 2 ‐ 2

UNIT I

Introduction: Overview of Communication system, Communication channels, Mathematical Models for

Communication Channels
Introduction of random Variables: Definition of random variables, PDF, CDF and its properties, joint PDF, CDF,
Marginalized PDF, CDF, WSS wide stationery, strict sense stationery, non‐stationery signals, UDF, GDF, RDF,
Binomial distribution, White process, Poisson process, Wiener process. [T1, T2]

UNIT II

Analog Modulation: Modulation‐ Need for Modulation, Amplitude Modulation theory: DSB‐SC, SSB, VSB.
Modulators and Demodulators. Angle Modulation, Relation between FM and PM Wave. Generation of FM
wave‐ Direct and Indirect Methods. Bandwidth of FM (NBFM, WBFM)
Pulse Analog Modulation: Sampling‐Natural and Flat top. reconstruction, TDM‐Pulse Amplitude Modulation
(TDM‐PAM), Pulse Width Modulation (PWM), Pulse Position Modulation(PPM), Generation and Recovery.
Pulse Digital Modulation: Pulse Code Modulation (PCM), Differential Pulse Code Modulation (DPCM), Delta
Modulation (DM), ADPCM. [T1, T2]

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 404
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT III

Digital Modulation and Transmission: Advantages of digital communication. Modulation schemes: ASK, PSK,
FSK. Spectral Analysis. Comparison. Digital Signaling Formats‐Line coding.
Information and Coding Theory: Entropy, Information, Channel Capacity. Source Coding Theorem: Shannon
Fano Coding, Huffman Coding. [T1, T2]

UNIT IV

Fiber Optical System: Basic Optical Communication System. Optical fibers versus metallic cables, Light
propagation through optical fibers. Acceptance angle and acceptance cone, Fiber configurations. Losses in
optical fibers. Introduction to Lasers and light detectors. Applications: Military, Civil and Industrial applications.
Advanced Communication Systems: Introduction to cellular radio telephones. Introduction to satellite
Communication. [T1, T2]

Textbook(s):
1. George Kennedy, “Electronics Communication System”, TMH 1993.
2. B.P. Lathi, “Analog& Digital Communication”, Oxford University Press 1999.

Reference Books:
1. Simon Haykin, “Introduction to Analog & Digital Communication”, Wiley, 2000
2. Tannenbaum, “Computer networks”, Pearson, 5th Edition.
3. K. Sam Shanmugam, “Digital & Analog Communication system”, John Wiley & Sons 1998

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 405
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Paper Code(s): ECC‐208 L P C

Paper: Digital Electronics 4 ‐ 4

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To impart the knowledge of codes and switching functions in digital electronics.
2. To understand working of combinational logic circuits.
3. To impart the knowledge of sequential logic circuits.
4. To understand the applications of 555 timer and A to D and D to A converters.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Ability to understand conversion of codes and switching operations.
CO 2 Ability to design combinational logic circuits using gates.
CO 3 Ability to analyse sequential logic circuits.
CO 4 Ability to understand applications of 555 timer and A to D and D to A converters.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 ‐ 2 1 ‐ 2
CO 2 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 ‐ 2 1 ‐ 2
CO 3 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 ‐ 2 1 ‐ 2
CO 4 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 ‐ 2 1 ‐ 2

UNIT I

Number Systems and Codes:‐ Decimal, Binary, Octal and Hexadecimal Number systems, Codes‐ BCD, Gray
Code, Excess‐3 Code, ASCII, EBCDIC, Conversion between various Codes.
Switching Theory: ‐ Boolean Algebra‐ Postulates and Theorems, De’ Morgan’s Theorem, Switching Functions‐
Canonical Forms‐ Simplification of Switching Functions‐ Karnaugh Map and Quine Mc‐Clusky Methods. .
[T1,T2]
UNIT II

Combinational Logic Circuits:‐ Review of basic gates‐ Universal gates, Adder, Subtractor ,Serial Adder, Parallel
Adder‐ Carry Propagate Adder, Carry Look‐ahead Adder, Carry Save Adder, Comparators, Parity Generators,
Decoder and Encoder, Multiplexer and De‐multiplexer, ALU, PLA and PAL.
Integrated circuits: ‐ TTL and CMOS logic families and their characteristics. Brief introduction to RAM and ROM.
[T1,T2]

UNIT III

Sequential Logic Circuits: ‐ Latches and Flip Flops‐ SR, , D, T and MS‐JK Flip Flops, Asynchronous Inputs.
Counters and Shift Registers:‐ Design of Synchronous and Asynchronous Counters:‐ Binary, BCD, Decade and
Up/Down Counters , Shift Registers, Types of Shift Registers, Counters using Shift Registers‐ Ring Counter and

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 406
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Johnson Counter, Sample and Hold Circuit. [T1,T2]

UNIT IV

Introduction to 555 Timer IC: Functional and block diagram of 555 timer, Application of 555 timer as astable
and monostable multivibrator.
Analog‐to‐digital (successive approximation, integrating, flash and sigma‐delta) and digital‐to‐analog converters
(weighted R, R‐2R ladder and current steering logic). Characteristics of ADC and DAC (resolution, quantization,
significant bits, conversion/settling time). [T1,T2]

Textbook(s):
1. Zyi Kohavi, “Switching & Finite Automata Theory”, TMH, 2nd Edition
2. Morris Mano, Digital Logic and Computer Design”, Pearson

Reference Books:
1. A Anand Kumar, “Fundamentals of Digital Logic Circuits”, PHI
2. Taub ,Helbert and Schilling, “Digital Integrated Electronics”, TMH

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 407
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Paper Code(s): ICC‐210 L P C

Paper: Sensors and Transducers 4 ‐ 4

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To provide an understanding about the concepts of measurement system its static and dynamic
characteristics.
2. To expose the students to various sensors and transducers for measuring mechanical quantities and
their applications.
3. To teach the basic conditioning circuits for various sensors and transducers.
4. To introduce about advancements in sensor technology and smart sensors.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Ability to define, understand various Sensors, their need and properties of sensors.
CO 2 Ability to apply knowledge of various types of transducers in domestic and industrial applications
CO 3 Ability to analyse various types of sensors for particular application.
CO 4 Ability to design signal conditioning circuit for various sensors and transducers.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 2 1 1 1 1 ‐ 1 3 ‐ 3
CO 2 3 2 1 3 2 1 1 ‐ 1 3 ‐ 1
CO 3 3 2 1 2 3 1 1 ‐ 1 3 ‐ 3
CO 4 3 3 2 1 1 1 1 ‐ 1 3 ‐ 3

UNIT I

[Introduction to sensors and Transducers] General concepts and terminology of measurement systems and its
functional elements, transducer classification, static and dynamic characteristics of a measurement system,
criteria for transducer selection.
Resistive Transducers: Principles of operation, construction, theory, signal conditioning circuits and applications
of resistance potentiometers, strain gauges (metallic and semi‐conductor type), resistance thermometer,
thermistors, photo transistors. [T1,T2]

UNIT II

[Displacement Sensors and Transducers] Capacitive Transducers: Types of capacitive transducer, Principles of
operation, construction, theory, signal conditioning circuits and applications of capacitive transducers
Inductive Transducers: Types of Inductive transducer, Principles of operation, construction, signal conditioning
circuits and applications of various variable inductive transducers, LVDT , RVDT Eddy current sensors, Synchros.
[T1,T2]

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 408
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT III

[Temperature and Radiation Sensors] Active Transducers: Principle of operation, construction, theory, signal
conditioning and applications of Piezo‐electric transducer, Magneto‐strictive transducer, Hall effect
transducer, Photo‐voltaic transducer and Thermocouple
Optical transducers: photo‐emissive, photo‐conductive and Photovoltaic cells, photomultipliers
Digital Transducers: Optical encoders translational and rotary encoders (absolute position and incremental
position encoders) and magnetic pickups. [T1,T2]

UNIT IV
[ Smart Sensors] Other transducers: Ultrasonic sensors, Vibration pickups and accelerometers and its dynamic
response, stroboscope, sound and humidity sensors Microelectromechanical. system (MEMS), Biosensors:
Glucometer, Oxymeter, Nanosensors and its application, Smart sensor system. [T1,T2]

Textbook(s):
1. D. Patranabis, ―Sensors and Transducers‖, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd., 2nd edi on.
2. D V S Murty, ―Transducers and Instrumenta on‖, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd.

Reference Books:
1. E.O. Doebelin,Dhanesh N Manik, ―Measurement Systems‖,6th Edi on, McGraw Hill Edu.
2. John P. Bentely, ―Principles of Measurement System‖, 4th Edi on, Pearson Pren ce Hal .

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 409
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Paper Code(s): EEC‐214 L P C

Paper: Electrical and Electronics Measurements 4 ‐ 4

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. Understand working of general instrument system, types of error, methods of measurement.
2. To give an overview of test and measuring instruments.
3. To expose the students to the design of bridges for the measurement of resistance, capacitance and
inductance.
4. Understand the principle and working of various electrical and electronic measuring instruments
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Ability to understand principal and working of electric and electronic measuring instruments
CO 2 Ability to analyse various errors in measurement
CO 3 Ability to evaluate the unknown quantities using measuring instruments
CO 4 Ability to design bridge circuits for measurement of resistance, capacitance and inductance
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 3
CO 2 3 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 3
CO 3 3 3 2 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 ‐ 3
CO 4 3 3 3 3 ‐ 2 2 ‐ 2 2 ‐ 3

UNIT I

Basics of Measurement: Measurement & its significance, Direct & Indirect methods of measurement,
classification of measurement
Characteristics of Measurement: Static and dynamic characteristics
Units & Standards: SI units, standards of Measurement (R, L, C, Voltage, current & frequency)
Errors in Measurement: types of errors in measurement system, Error and Uncertainty analysis, Propagation of
errors, Linear and weighted regression. [T1,T2]

UNIT II

AC Bridges: Wheatstone bridge, kelvin double bridge, Maxwell bridge, Megohm bridge, Anderson bridge,
Schering and Wein’s bridge for measurement of R, L, C and frequency respectively. Q meter, Shielding and
grounding. [T1,T2]

UNIT III

AC Instruments: Measurement of voltage, current and power in single phase and three phase circuits, ac and dc
current probes, true rms meter, voltage and current scaling.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 410
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Instrument Transformers: Construction, operation & ratio and phase errors in current and potential
transformers, compensation technique for error in current and potential transformers. [T1,T2]

UNIT IV

Electronic Measuring Instruments: General purpose cathode ray oscilloscope (CRO); Construction & working &
principleTimer/counter, Measurement of time, phase& frequency, digital voltmeter, digital multimeter.
[T1,T2]

Textbook(s):
1. Albert D.Helfrick, William D.Cooper, ―Modern Electronic Instrumenta on and Measurement Techniques‖,
PHI India.
2. Electronic Instrumentation by HS Kalsi, Tata McGraw‐ Hill.

Reference Books:
1. A.K. Sawhney, Puneet Sawhney – A course in Electrical and Electronic Measurements and Instrumentation.
2. J.B GUPTA – A courseinElectrical and Electronic Measurements and Instrumentation.
3. B. C. Nakra., K. K. Chaudhry, ―Instrumenta on, Measurement and Analysis, 4th Edi on, McGraw Hill
Education.
4. Electrical Measurements & Measuring Instruments by Golding & Widdis, Wheeler’s.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 411
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Paper Code(s): MEC‐206 L P C

Paper: Manufacturing Science & Technology ‐ II 4 ‐ 4

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To understand the concepts of metal cutting and tool materials.
2. To develop an understanding of the various machine tools.
3. To introduce students to different gear forming methods and jigs & fixtures
4. To acquire a fundamental knowledge on non‐traditional machining processes.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Understand and apply concepts of cutting tool geometry, materials, mechanism of chip formation and
mechanics of metal cutting
CO 2 Illustrate and identify the various constructional features and operations performed on machine tools.
CO 3 Analyse the kinematic motions and associated mathematical relationships in a machine tool.
CO 4 Select a machine tool, cutting tool and holding devices as per the requirement of metal cutting and
submit report in a team.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 ‐ 3 ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐
CO 2 3 ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐
CO 3 3 3 2 2 ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐
CO 4 3 2 2 3 ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ 3 3 ‐ ‐

UNIT‐I

Theory of Metal Cutting: Single point cutting tool nomenclature, geometry. Mechanics of Chip Formation,
Types of Chips. Merchants circle diagram and analysis, Ernst Merchant’s solution, shear angle relationship,
problems of Merchant’s analysis. Tool Wear and Tool failure, tool life. Effects of cutting parameters on tool life.
Tool Failure Criteria, Taylor’s Tool Life equation. Problems on tool life evaluation.

Cutting Tool Materials: Desired properties and types of cutting tool materials, Cutting fluids and its desired
properties, types and selection. Heat generation in metal cutting, factors affecting heat generation. Heat
distribution in tool, work piece and chip. Measurement of tool tip temperature.

UNIT‐II

Lathe, Shaper, Planer and Slotter: Classification, constructional features, work and tool holding devices for
General lathe, Turret and Capstan Lathe. Tool Layout, shaping Machine, Planing Machine, Driving mechanisms
of lathe, shaping and planing machine tools, Different operations on lathe, shaping machine, planing, slotting

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 412
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

machine tools. Problems on machining time calculations, thread cutting.

Drilling: Classification, constructional features, drilling & related operations. Types of drill & drill bit
nomenclature, Basic principle of design of drill bits, drill materials, related problems.

UNIT‐III

Milling and Grinding: Classification, constructional features, milling cutters nomenclature, milling operations,
up milling and down milling concepts. Various milling operations. Indexing Methods: Simple and compound.
Problems on indexing and machining time calculation. Grinding: Selection of grinding wheel, Classification,
constructional features of grinding machines (Centerless, cylindrical and surface grinding), Dressing and truing
of grinding wheels.

Broaching process: Principle of broaching, Applications, advantages and limitations. Finishing and other
Processes Lapping and Honing operations – Principles, arrangement of set up and application. Super finishing
process, polishing, buffing operation and application.

Gear Manufacturing: Gear forming, gear generation, gear shaping and gear hobbing.

UNIT ‐ IV

Jigs & Fixtures: Important considerations in jigs and fixture design. Main principles of designing of jigs &
fixtures, elements of Jigs and fixtures. Different devices and methods of locations. Different types of clamps
used in jigs & fixtures.

Introduction to CNC machines‐ Principles of operation. Basics of Manual part programming methods.

Non‐ Traditional Machining: Need and classification of non‐traditional machining, Principle, equipment &
operation of Electric discharge machining, Laser Beam Machining, Electro Chemical Machining, Ultrasonic
Machining, Abrasive Jet Machining, Water Jet Machining, Electron Beam Machining.

Textbook(s):
1. B.L. Juneja, G. S. Sekhon, Nitin Seth, “Fundamental of Metal Cutting and Machine Tools”, New Age
International; 2nded.
2. A. Ghosh and A.K. Mallik, “Manufacturing Science”, East West Press.
3. P. H. Joshi, “Jigs and Fixtures”, Tata McGraw Hill;2nd ed.

References:
1. G. Boothroyd, “Fundamentals of Metal Machining and Machine Tools”, Taylor and Francis; 3rd ed.
2. M. C. Shaw, “Metal Cutting Principles”, Oxford University Press.
3. J.A. McGeough, “Advanced Methods of Machining”, Springer International Edition.
4. P.C. Sharma, “A Text Book of Production Engineering”, S. Chand, New Delhi;(2004)
5. H. S. Bawa, “Workshop Technology”, Vol.2, Tata McGraw Hill;(2004)
6. G.K. Lal, “Introduction to Machining Science”, New age International.
7. A. Bhattacharya,Metal cutting Theory and Practice‐ New Central Book Agency.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 413
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Paper Code(s): MEC‐208 L P C

Paper: Material Science and Metallurgy 4 ‐ 4

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard /
level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To develop the knowledge of lattice structure and their defects.
2. To develop the relation between structural and mechanical properties of metals for the selection of
product design.
3. Identify the microstructure and properties of Iron‐Iron carbide Phase diagram.
4. To develop the knowledge of various composite materials and their applications.
Course Outcomes (CO)
After completion of the course, the students will be able to:
CO 1 Summarize the properties of crystal structures of metallic elements and understand the mechanism of
diffusion and deformation.
CO 2 To relate the material behaviour under environmental conditions and interpret the characteristics of
steel through iron‐ iron carbide and TTT diagram.
CO 3 Relate the properties of steel with heat treatment processes and study the effect of alloying elements
in steel.
CO 4 Classify types of corrosion and composites.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (Scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 1 3 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 3
CO 2 3 2 3 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 3
CO 3 3 2 3 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 3
CO 4 3 ‐ ‐ 2 ‐ 3 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 3

UNIT – I

Structure of metal: Crystal structure (BCC, FCC and HCP), Packing factor and density calculation, miller indices,
imperfections in solids.

Diffusion: Diffusion mechanisms, steady state and non‐steady state diffusion, factors affecting diffusion.

Deformation: Slip, twinning, critical resolved shear stress, effect of cold working and hot working on mechanical
properties, principles of recovery, re‐crystallization and gain growth.

UNIT – II

Fracture: Types of fracture‐ ductile and brittle, ductile to brittle transition temperature (DBTT), Fatigue‐
Endurance limit, S‐N Curve, factors affecting fatigue.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 414
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Creep: Mechanism of creep, creep curve, basic consideration in the selection of material for high temperature
service.

Equilibrium diagram: solids solutions and alloys, Gibbs phase rule, unary and binary eutectic phase diagram,
lever rule, Iron‐ Iron carbide Phase diagram, TTT‐diagram, Effect of alloying elements on TTT diagram.

UNIT–III

Heat Treatment: Principles and purpose of heat treatment of plain carbon steels, annealing, normalizing,
hardening, tempering, quenching, austempering, martempering, case hardening processes – carburizing,
nitriding, cyaniding, induction and flame hardening, Hardenability: determination of hardenability, Jominy end
quench test.

Materials: Types of Plain carbon steels, effect of alloying elements on steel, Cast iron‐white, grey, malleable and
nodular cast iron, properties and application of cast iron, properties and uses of high speed steel, stainless
steel, spring steel, Non‐ferrous materials.

UNIT– IV

Corrosion: Types of corrosion, mechanism of corrosion, preventions against corrosion.

Introduction to composite materials‐ Classification, Properties and applications of composite materials.

Surface Coatings: Introduction to metallic coating and coating methods.

Text Books (s):

1. W. D. Callister, David G. Rethwisch, “Materials Science and Engineering: An Introduction”, Wiley & Sons;
9thed. (2013).
2. K. I. Parashivamurthy, “Material Science and Metallurgy”, Pearson.
3. Sidney H. Avner, “Introduction to Physical Metallurgy”, Tata McGraw‐Hill, New Delhi; (1997).

Reference Books:
1. L. Krishna Reddi, “Principles of Engineering Metallurgy”, New Age Publication, New Delhi; (2001)
2. Buduisky et. al., “Engineering Materials & Properties”, Prentice Hall India, New Delhi; (2004)
3. Peter Haasten, “Physical Metallurgy”, Cambridge Univ. Press; (1996)
4. Raymond A. Higgin., “Engineering Metallurgy Part 1”, Prentice Hall India, New Delhi; (1998)

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 415
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Paper Code(s): MEC‐210 L P C

Paper: Thermal Engineering – II 4 ‐ 4

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To understand the working of steam nozzle at design condition and off design condition. To
differentiate clearly between impulse and impulse‐reaction turbine.
2. To understand the working of reciprocating compressor & refrigeration cycle.
3. To understand the combustion in I.C engine and appreciate the concept of knocking.
4. To be able to compute performance parameters of an I.C engine and to determine components of
heat balance of given i.C engine.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 To determine the mass flow rate through steam nozzle and to be able to determine blade efficiency
and stage efficiency of steam turbine blading.
CO 2 To determine work requirement of a reciprocating compressor and to analyze refrigeration system
based on vapour compression refrigeration system.
CO 3 Explain the combustion in I.C engine and enumerate the factors responsible for knocking.
CO 4 Evaluate performance parameter of I.C engine and draw heat balance sheet of specified engine.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 3 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 2 3 3 3 3 ‐ ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 3 3 3 3 3 ‐ ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 4 3 3 3 3 ‐ ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2

UNIT‐I

Steam Nozzle: Types of nozzles, flow of steam through nozzles, condition for maximum discharge through
nozzle, nozzle efficiency, effect of friction and off design condition of convergent nozzle and convergent‐
divergent nozzle.

Steam Turbine: Working principle and types of steam turbines, velocity diagrams for impulse and reaction
turbines, compounding of impulse turbines, optimum velocity ratio and maximum efficiency, comparison of
impulse and reaction turbines, reheat factor.

UNIT‐II

Air Compressors: Steady flow analysis, isothermal, adiabatic and polytropic compression, single‐ and multi‐
stage compression, ideal intermediate pressure, compressor clearance, volumetric and isothermal efficiency,
minimum work requirement of a compressor.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 416
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Refrigeration Cycle: Vapour compression refrigeration cycle, description, analysis, refrigerating effect, power
required, unit of refrigeration, COP, Refrigerants and its desirable properties. Vapor absorption refrigeration
system.

UNIT‐III

Internal Combustion Engine: Combustion in S.I. engine, Combustion in C.I. engine and its stages, Knocking in S.I.
and C.I. engine and its detrimental effect, Factors affecting knocking in S.I. and C.I. engine.

UNIT – IV

I.C. Engine performance: Measurement of performance parameters of an engine, different methods to

determine Indicated power and friction power of an engine, components of heat balance sheet of a given
Engine, Ignition system, Fuel injection system, Lubrication system.

Textbook(s):
1. S. Domkundwar, Thermal Engineering, Dhanpat Rai & Co (p) Ltd.
2. P.K Nag, Applied Thermodynamics, Tata McGraw Hill (p) Limited.
3. Mathur & Sharma, Internal Combustion Engine, Dhanpat Rai Publication.

References:
1. Onkar Singh, Applied Thermodynamics, New Age International (p) Limited.
2. Cohen & Rogers, Gas Turbines, Pearson Prentice Hall, ISBN‐ 9780582236325.
3. R. K. Rajput, “Engineering Thermodynamics”, Lakshmi Publications.
4. V.Ganesan, “Internal Combustion Engine “, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Co., New Delhi.
5. Gordon Rosers, & Yon Mahew; Engineering Thermodynamics”, Pearson.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 417
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Paper Code(s): MEC‐212 L P C

Paper: Machine Design – I 4 ‐ 4

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard /
level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To understand ab‐initio design concepts under various constraints, stress concentration and dynamic
loading. Also analyse the design of static joints and pipes.
2. To conceptualise joints for power transmission in rotating parts, suspension parts and in leverage.
3. To analyse bolted & screwed fastenings and structural plates joining for complex engineering
applications under myriad of loads.
4. To thoroughly understand the design procedure for speed variation effects in toothed elements and
power screws.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Grasp the systematic design procedure & design principles considering constraints of various methods
of manufacture and effect of static & dynamic forces on joints for rods.
CO 2 Synthesis of keyed‐coupled shafts and stress analysis of flexible elements & levers.
CO 3 Design analysis of fastening threads and various temporary & permanent joints for plates.
CO 4 Analyse the effect of changing speeds on designed toothed elements and efficient power transmitting
devices.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 1 1 2 3
CO 2 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 1 1 2 3
CO 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 1 1 2 3
CO 4 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 1 1 2 3

UNIT‐I

Introduction: Systematic Design Process (SDP), Basic principles for mechanical design, Use of standards.
Manufacturing consideration in design of casting & machining parts.
Dynamic and fluctuating stresses, fatigue failure and endurance limit, design under combined direct & varying
stresses. Stress concentration, causes and remedies in design.
Factor of safety and it’s affecting factors, Tolerances and fits as per BIS, Materials selection, Designation of
steels.
Detailed design procedure of Spigot & Socket Cotter joint, Knuckle joint, Pipe joint. Numerical Design Problems.

UNIT‐II

Shafts, keys and couplings: Transmission Shafts, materials, design of shafts on strength & rigidity basis and
under combined torsional and bending loads as per ASME code. Keys, types and applications. Design of rigid
and pin bushed flexible couplings.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 418
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Levers, types, Design of Bell crank lever.

Springs and their applications, design of close coiled helical springs. Numerical Design Problems.

UNIT‐III

Riveted & Welded Joints: Types of riveted joints, Failure modes, strength equations, joint efficiency, Riveted
joint for boiler shells, Riveted joints under direct and eccentric loads. Welded joints, strength of parallel,
transverse & combined filled welded joints, axially loaded unsymmetrical welded joint, eccentrically loaded
welded joints, welded joints subjected to bending moment and torsional moment.
Threaded Joints: Types of screwed fastenings, Initial tightening loads in bolts, Torque requirement, Uniform
strength bolt, Direct & eccentrically loaded bolted joints. Numerical Design Problems.

UNIT ‐ IV

Power Screws: Types of threads of power screws ‐ Square, trapezoidal & Acme threads, Torque requirement,
efficiency, irreversibility & self‐locking, Complete analysis of design of screw jack.
Spur Gear: Classification of Gears, spur gear terminology, Gear tooth failure, Lewis equation for beam strength
of tooth, dynamic and wear loads. Numerical Design Problems.

Textbook(s):
1. V.B. Bhandari, “Design of Machine elements”, Tata McGraw Hill Education Private Ltd. Third Edition (2012)
2. Maleeve Hartman and O.P. Grover, “Machine Design”, CBS Publishers& Distributors Pvt. Ltd. Sixth Edition
(2015)

References:
1. K. Mahadevan, “Design Data Book”, CBS Publishers & Distributors.
2. J.E. Shigley & C.R. Mischke, "Mechanical Engineering Design”, Tata McGraw Hill Co. Inc.
3. P.C. Sharma and D.K Aggarwal., “Machine Design”, S.K. Kataria & Sons.
4. R.C. Juvinal andK.M. Marshek, “Fundamentals of Machine component Design”, Wiley India .
5. R.I. Norton, “Machine Design” Pearson.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 419
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Paper Code(s): CEC‐206 L P C

Paper: Soil Mechanics 4 ‐ 4

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To explain the methods of classifying the soils
2. To analyse the flow of water through soils and to estimate the stress distribution in the soil mass
3. To interpret the compaction characteristics, compressibility characteristics, settlements
4. To assess the shear strength of the soils.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Classify the soil and determine its Index properties.
CO 2 Evaluate the permeability, seepage and compaction characteristics of soil.
CO 3 Apply the knowledge of effective stress and consolidation to determine settlement of soil.
CO 4 Analyse the shear strength parameters of various types of soil.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 2 1 2 3 ‐ ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ 1 ‐
CO 2 3 2 2 3 2 1 1 ‐ 1 1 1 2
CO 3 3 3 2 3 2 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ 1 1 1
CO 4 2 2 3 2 2 1 2 ‐ 1 1 1 1

UNIT‐I

Introduction & Basic Properties of Soil: Scope of Soil Mechanics, Soil formation, Soil as a three‐phase system,
Definitions of various parameters and their Interrelationships, Index properties‐water content, specific gravity,
particle size distribution, sieve analysis, hydrometer method, consistency of soils, activity, sensitivity,
thixotropic.

Soil Classification & Clay Mineralogy: Unified and Indian standard soil classification system, Soil structure, Clay
Minerals.

UNIT‐II

Soil Hydraulics: Stress conditions in soil–total, effective and neutral stresses and relationships. Permeability–
Darcy's Law, Hydraulic conductivity, Equivalent hydraulic conductivity in stratified soil, Seepage through soils,
Flow nets, Seepage calculation from a flow net, Flow nets in anisotropic soils, Uplift pressure, Piping, Capillarity,
Seepage force, Quicksand condition, Seepage through earth dam, Phreatic line of an earth dam.

Stress Distribution in Soil: Boussinesq equations, Vertical stress distribution diagrams, Vertical stress beneath
loaded areas, Westergaard’s equation, Contact pressure.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 420
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT‐III

Soil Compaction: Laboratory tests: Standard proctor test, modified proctor test, OMC, Factors affecting
compaction, Compaction specifications and field control.

Consolidation: Primary and secondary consolidation, Normal and Over Consolidated soils, Over Consolidation
Ratio, Spring analogy for primary consolidation, Terzaghi's one dimensional consolidation theory and equation,
Solutions of Terzaghi’s equation, Determination of coefficient of consolidation, Determination of primary
consolidation settlement, Secondary consolidation.

UNIT–IV

Shear Strength of soil: Introduction, Mohr’s circle of stress, Mohr‐Coulomb failure criterion, shear parameters,
Various Laboratory tests for measurement of shear strength, UU, CU and CD tests and their relevance to field
problems, unconfined compression test, Pore pressure parameters, Shear characteristics of sand, liquefaction.

Textbook(s):
1. Gopal Ranjan and ASR Rao, “Basic and Applied Soil Mechanics”, New Age International Publishers, 4th
Edition (2‐22).
2. Dr B.C. Punmia, Er. AK Jain, & Dr. AK Jain, “Soil Mechanics and Foundations”, Laxmi Publications, 17th Edition
(2021).

Reference Books:
1. Dr KR Arora, “Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering”, Standard Publishers Distributors (2‐2‐).
2. JE Bowles, Foundation Analysis and Design, McGraw‐Hill, New Delhi (1996).
3. Venkataramaiah, “Geotechnical Engineering”, New Age International Publishers.
4. VNS Murthy, “Geotechnical Engineering: Principles and Practices of Soil Mechanics and Foundation
Engineering” (2‐16).
5. P. Purushothama Raj, “Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering”, Pearson Education India (2‐13).
6. DP Coduto, MR Yeung, WA Kitch, “Geotechnical Engineering: Principles and Practices”, Pearson Education,
Singapore, 2nd Edition (2‐17).
7. K Terzaghi, R B Peck, G Mesri, “Soil Mechanics in Engineering Practice”, John Wiley and Sons, New Jersey
(1996).

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 421
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Paper Code(s): CEC‐208 L P C

Paper: Hydraulics and Hydrology 4 ‐ 4

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To study different types of flow and forces exerted by flow on the boundary of conduit.
2. To explain forces on submerged bodies, flow through pipes and principles of turbines.
3. To assess the storage capacity of the reservoir and the process of mitigating floods.
4. To determine runoff characteristics.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Able To Define different types of flow, and hydraulic machines
CO 2 Able To Determine Various Components Of The hydrologic cycle affecting movement of water in the
earth and various Stream flow measurements technique
CO 3 Able to analyse complex flow problems on boundary layers, pipe network and hydraulic turbines &
pumps.
CO 4 Able to determine and analyse ground water hydraulics.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 1 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 1 ‐ ‐
CO 2 2 3 2 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 1 ‐ ‐
CO 3 2 3 2 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 1 ‐
CO 4 3 2 3 2 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐

UNIT‐I

Laminar Flow : Flow through circular pipe and parallel plates, Kinetic energy correction factor, Momentum
correction factor; Loss of head due to friction; determination of coefficient of viscosity.
Boundary Layer: Concept and development of boundary layer, Laminar and turbulent boundary layers and
their analysis, boundary layer thickness; Critical Reynolds number; Boundary layer separation and control.
Forces on submerged bodies: Forces exerted by flowing fluid, Concept and expression for Drag and lift;
Pressure drag and friction drag; Stream line and bluff body; Drag on sphere and cylinder, Terminal velocity of a
body, Lift on a circular cylinder, Drag force acting on a rotating cylinder, Development of lift on Airfoil.

UNIT‐II

Flow through pipes: Loss of head / energy in pipes ‐ Major losses‐friction loss by Darcy Weisbach formula,
Chezy’s formula; Types of minor losses; Hydraulic gradient and total energy line, Flow through siphon, Pipes in
series, concept of equivalent pipe, flow through parallel and branched pipes; Water hammer in pipes, sudden
and gradual closure of valve; Analysis of Pipe network using Hardy Cross method.
Hydraulic machines: General layout of hydroelectric power plant, classification of hydraulic turbines, Pelton
turbine and its main parts, Analysis and design of Pelton turbine for jet diameter, wheel diameter, width, depth

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 422
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

and number of buckets; Hydraulic, mechanical and overall efficiencies of turbine, Introduction to other turbines
like Francis and Kaplan turbines, Specific speed and its significance.
Pumps: Centrifugal Pump, Introduction, Main parts; Head, efficiencies, specific speed, Cavitations in turbines
and centrifugal pumps and their effects and precautions, Main parts of Reciprocating Pump.

UNIT‐III

Hydrology: Hydrologic Cycle. Water Budget Equation, Precipitation: Types, measurements and analysis, error in
estimation, missing data, consistency of rainfall records, Intensity during frequency (IDF) and probabilistic
maximum Precipitation (PMP) curves. Evaporation and consumptive use: Process affecting factors, estimation,
and measurement techniques. Infiltration: Process affecting factors, measurement and estimation, Infiltration
Indices.
Surface Runoff: Components and factors affecting runoff, methods of estimation of runoff volume and peak
runoff, rating curve, Rainfall – runoff relationships.
Hydrograph analysis: components, factors affecting hydrographs, base flow separation, Direct Runoff
Hydrograph, Unit Hydrograph: Theory and assumptions. Derivation of Unit Hydrograph, Synthetic Unit
Hydrograph.

UNIT – IV

Ground Water Hydrology: Zones of underground water, Aquifers and their types, important terms,
Determination of discharge through unconfined and confined aquifers with steady flow conditions,
Interference among wells, determination of aquifer constants, Well loss and specific capacity, efficiency of a
well, types of water wells, bored and open wells, specific yield of a well, type of tube wells, well shrouding and
well development, Suitable site selection for tube well, Types of open wells, Methods of lifting water.
Infiltration galleries and Infiltration well.

Textbook(s):
1. P.N. Modi & S.M. Seth, Hydraulics and Fluid Mechanics including Hydraulics Machine Standard Book House,
New Delhi.
2. Subramanya,K.,Engineering Hydrology,Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi
3. Ramamrutham S., Hydraulics Fluid Mechanics and Fluid Machines, Dhanpat Rai Publicating Company, Delhi.
4. Fluid Mechanics: Including Hydraulic Machines by A.K. Jain.

References:
1. Modi,P.N.,IrrigationWaterResources,andWaterPowerEngineering,StandardBookHouse,NewDelhi.
2. Todd,D.K.,GroundwaterHydrology,1993JohnWiley&Sons.
3. Raghunath, H.M, Hydrology–Principles,AnalysisandDesign,1986,Wiley
4. Dr. P. Jaya Rami Reddy, A Textbook of Hydrology, University Science Press.
5. Garg S.K., Hydrology and Water Resources Engineering

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 423
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Paper Code(s): CEC‐210 L P C

Paper: Environmental Engineering ‐ I 4 ‐ 4

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To analyse water quality and its quantity requirements for given uses.
2. To understand the distribution system and assess the capacity of reservoir.
3. To design water treatment plant based upon quality of raw water and desired quality of treated water.
4. To explain different air pollutants, their effects and control strategies
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Analyze water quality and its quantity requirements for given uses.
CO 2 Understand the distribution system and assess the capacity of reservoir.
CO 3 Design water treatment plant based upon quality of raw water and desired quality of treated water.
CO 4 Explain different air pollutants, their effects and control strategies
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 2 1 2 1 ‐ ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ 1 ‐
CO 2 3 2 2 2 1 1 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ 1 2
CO 3 3 3 2 1 1 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ 1 ‐ 1
CO 4 2 2 2 ‐ 1 1 2 ‐ 1 1 1 1

UNIT‐I

Water Demand: Various types of Water demands, factors affecting per capita demand, variations in demand,
population forecasting by various methods, design life and design discharge of different units in water scheme
Sources of Water: Ground water development, types of geological formations, different forms of extraction of
ground water, yield of open well and tube well.
Water Quality Parameters (WQP): physical WQP–Suspended solids, turbidity, colour, taste & odour,
Temperature; Chemical WQP–Total dissolved solids, alkalinity, pH, hardness, chloride & nitrogen content,
fluorides, metals and gases; Biological WQP–Membrane filter technique, most probable number test.

UNIT‐II

Transmission of Water: Various types of conduits, capacity and sizes including economical sizes of rising main,
structural requirements, laying and testing of water supply pipelines, pipe materials, joints, appurtenances and
valves, leakages and control.
Storage and Distribution System: Methods of distribution, pressure and gravity distribution systems, Concept
of service and balancing reservoirs, Capacity of distribution reservoirs–general design guidelines for distribution
system.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 424
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT‐III

Treatment of water: Objectives of water treatment, process details and design considerations of treatment
units such as screening, aeration, sedimentation, coagulation, flocculation, theory of filtration, hydraulics of
filtration, slow sand, rapid sand and pressure filters, backwashing, design of slow and rapid sand filters,
operational troubles in rapid sand filter, different methods of disinfection, requirements of an ideal
disinfectant, chlorination and practices of chlorination, water softening and ion‐exchange process, Minor
methods of treatments such as treatment with activated carbon, copper sulphate, deferrization, fluoridation,
de‐fluoridation, desalination and reverse osmosis.

UNIT – IV

Air Pollution and Control: Introduction, primary and secondary air pollutants, their sources and effects, super
adiabatic, sub adiabatic, and neutral environment, inversion, types of plumes, Control of gaseous and
particulate air pollutants.
Noise Pollution: Introduction, level of noise, rating of noise.

Text Books:
1. Garg, S.K.: Water Supply Engineering (Environmental Engineering Vol. – I & II)
2. Peavy, Howard S., Rowe, Donald R and Tchobanoglous, George, “Environmental Engineering” McGraw Hill
Education (India) Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi.

References:
1. Manual on Water Supply and Treatment, C. P. H. E. E. O.,Ministry of Urban Development, Government of
India, New Delhi
2. Punmia: Water Supply and Wastewater Engineering Vol. I and II
3. Ramalho: Introduction to Wastewater Treatment Processes
4. Davis Mackenzie L., Cornwell, David A., “Introduction to Environmental Engineering” McGraw Hill
Education (India) Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 425
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Paper Code(s): CEC‐212 L P C

Paper: Transportation Engineering 4 ‐ 4

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To explain the basic modes of transportation and their importance in selecting the effective
transportation mode.
2. To analyse the various parameters including surveys for planning of new transportation systems.
3. To design the layout of terminal facilities like railway stations, yards for railways, docks & harbours for
waterways and airport for airways.
4. To identify the forces and stresses to be considered while designing various transportation structures
like railway track, harbour components, runways, and tunnels.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Explain the basic modes of transportation and their importance in selecting the effective
transportation mode considering the socio‐economical and geographical aspects.
CO 2 Analyse the various parameters including surveys for planning of new transportation systems
(Highways, Railways, Waterways and Airways).
CO 3 Design the layout of terminal facilities like railway stations, yards for railways, docks and harbours for
waterways and airport for airways.
CO 4 Identify the forces and stresses to be considered while designing various transportation structures like
railway track, harbour components, runway, and tunnels.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 ‐ 2 ‐ 1 ‐ 3 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 2 1 3 3 2 ‐ 1 2 ‐ 2 1 2 1
CO 3 3 ‐ 3 3 3 1 3 ‐ 3 1 3 2
CO 4 2 3 3 2 1 1 ‐ ‐ 1 ‐ ‐ ‐

UNIT‐I

Introduction to Transportation Systems: Modes of transportation, introduction to road, rail, air and water
transportation, Comparison of various modes of transportation.
Highway Development and Planning: History of road development, Highway development in India,
Classification of roads, Road patterns, Saturation system, Engineering surveys for highway alignment.
Introduction to Rail Transportation: Types of surveys, Permanent way–its various components and functions
of rails, sleepers, ballast, etc., Requirements of an ideal permanent way, Defects in rails, Gauges in railway
track, Coning of wheels, Tilting of rails, Rail joints, Rail fastenings, Sleeper density, Creep of rail.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 426
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT‐II

Geometric Design of Railway Track: Gradient and grade compensation, Superelevation, concepts of cant
excess and deficiency, Negative superelevation, Safe permissible speed, transition curves, Widening of gauge
on curves.
Railway Operation and Control: Points and crossings, Types of turnouts, Design of turnouts, Types of switches,
Types of track junctions, Different types of stations and yards, Equipment in station yards, Signalling and
Control systems–Classification of Signals, Absolute block system, Centralized traffic control system, Interlocking
of signals.
Railway Construction and Maintenance: Construction of railway track–earthwork, plate laying and laying of
ballast, Maintenance of railway tracks, Modern methods of track maintenance, Concept of high‐speed trains.

UNIT‐III

Water Transportation: Classification of Harbour, Harbour planning, Sounding methods, Classification of Ports,
tide, wind and wave, Shore protection work, Littoral drift, Types of breakwaters, Classification and shape of
Docks and basins, Jetties and wharves.
Tunnel Engineering: Necessity of tunnels, Classification of tunnels, Shape of tunnels, Shafts in tunnels,
Methods of Tunnelling in rocks and in soft ground, Shield method, Compressed air method, Ventilation,
drainage and lighting for tunnels.

UNIT – IV

Airport Planning and Design: Aircraft characteristics affecting airport, Airport planning, Surveys for site
selection, Wind rose diagram and its utility, Concept of airport runway length, calculations and corrections,
taxiway, Apron, Hanger, Radar, Air traffic control, and service equipment.

Text Books
1. S.C. Saxena & S.P. Arora, “A Textbook of Railway Engineering”, Dhanpat Rai Publications, 7th Edition (2018).
2. S.K. Khanna, M.G. Arora & S.S. Jain, “Airport Planning and Design”, Nem Chand & Bros., 6th Edition (2012).

Reference Books
1. S.K. Khanna, C.E.G. Justo, A. Veeraragavan, “Highway Engineering”, Nem Chand & Bros., 10th Edition (2021).
2. V.N. Vazirani & S.P. Chandola, “Transportation Engineering–Vol. II”, Khanna Publishers (2012).
3. Satish Chandra & M.M. Agarwal, “Railway Engineering”, Oxford University Press, 2nd Edition (2013).
4. R. Srinivasan, “Harbour, Dock and Tunnel Engineering”, Charotar Publishing House, 30th Edition (2022).
5. S.C. Rangwala, “Railway Engineering”, Charotar Publishing House, 27th Edition (2017).

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 427
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Paper Code(s): MAC‐210 L P C

Paper: Database Management Systems 4 ‐ 4

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To understand the basic concept of Database management system and Client Server Architecture
2. To understand the concepts of the ER model and Relation model
3. To introduce basics of relational database design, PL SQL and NO SQL
4. To introduce concept of transaction, security and learn basics of DBMS for CAD/CAM
Course Outcomes (CO) :
CO 1 To understand basics of database management system and SQL
CO 2 To learn the concepts of the ER model and Relation model
CO 3 To understand benefits of relational database design, PL SQL and NO SQL
CO 4 To understand properties of transaction, security and relationship of CAD/CAM with DBMS
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 1 1 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 2 2 3
CO 2 3 3 2 2 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 2 2 3
CO 3 3 3 2 2 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 2 2 3
CO 4 3 2 1 1 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 2 2 3

UNIT – I

Basic concepts: Advantages of a DBMS over file processing system, Data Abstraction, Database Languages, Data
Independence. , Components of a DBMS and overall structure of a DBMS, Three views of Data (External View,
Conceptual View, Internal View), Three level architecture of DBMS, Data Independence, Client Server
Architecture

SQL: Data definition language, Data manipulation language, SQL, Object naming conventions, Object naming
guidelines, Data types, Tables (Creating , Inserting, Updating and deleting tables and using constraints), Views,
Indexes, SQL Command :‐ DESCRIBE, SELECT, WHERE CLAUSE, DISTINCT CLAUSE, ORDER BY,HAVING, LOGICAL
OPERATIONS, SQL OPERATORS, JOIN Aggregate functions, String functions and date time functions, Null values

UNIT ‐ II

ER Model : Entity sets and relationship sets‐ Attributes ‐ Keys in entity and relationship sets : (a) Super Key (b)
Candidate Key (c) Primary Key (e) Unique Key ‐ Mapping constraints, Participation Constraint, E‐R diagram,
Notations. Strong Entity Set and Weak Entity Set

Relation Model: Advantages, Disadvantages, Codd's 12 rules, Definition of Relations, Schema, Sub schema.
Relational Model Constraints (Domain, Tuple Uniqueness, Key Constraints, Integrity Constraints, Entity

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 428
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

constraints). Relations algebra (Basic operation: Union intersection difference and Cartesian product),
Additional Relational Algebraic Operations (Projection, Selection rows, Division, rename and join ) , Converting
ER Model to Relational Model

UNIT – III

Relational Database Design: Purpose of Normalization, Data redundancy and updating anomalies, Functional
Dependencies and Decomposition, Process of Normalization using 1NF, 2NF, 3NF, multivalued dependencies
and BCNF, Forth Normal Form, Fifth Normal Form

Database Programming: User defined function, Control of flow statement, Procedures/Stored procedures,
triggers, granting and revoking.

NO‐SQL: Introduction, Usages and Application.

UNIT ‐ IV

Properties of Transaction, Transaction states, Transaction Schedule, Serializability, Concurrency control

techniques, locking techniques, time stamp ordering, Recoverable schedules, granularity of data items,
Deadlock detection and Recovery, recovery techniques: recovery concepts, database backup and recovery from
catastrophic failures.

Security: Authorization and View‐ Security constraints ‐ Integrity Constraints‐ Encryption

CAD/CAM and database management: The need for CAD/CAM Database management system, CAD/CAM
applications using DBMS

Textbooks:
1. Date, C. J., “An introduction to database systems”, 8th Edition, Pearson Education, 2008.
2. R. Elmsari and S. B. Navathe, “Fundamentals of database systems”, Pearson Education, 7th Edition, 2018
3. SQL/ PL/SQL, The programming language of Oracle, Ivan Bayross, 4th Edition BPB Publications
4. V. M. Grippa and S. Kumichev, “Learning MySQL”, O’Reilly, 2021.

References:
1. A. Silberschatz, H. F. Korth and S. Sudershan, “Database System Concept”, McGraw Hill, 6th Edition,2013.
2. P. Rob & C. Coronel, “Database Systems: Design Implementation & Management”, Thomson Learning, 6th
Edition, 2004
3. Joel Murach, “Murach's Mysql”, 3rd Edition‐Mike Murach and Associates, Incorporated, 2019.
4. Desai, B., “An introduction to database concepts”, Galgotia publications, 2010
5. H. Garcia‐Molina, J. D. Ullman, J. Widom, “Database System: The Complete Book”, PH.
6. Kenndy E Lee. CAD: Drawing design, Data Management, Watson‐Guptill, 1986
7. Oracle and MySQL manuals.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 429
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Paper Code(s): MAC‐212 L P C

Paper: Thermodynamics and Applications 4 ‐ 4

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To understand the concepts of phase change and to be able to determine entropy change for a
process.
2. To understand the working of Vapor power & refrigeration cycle.
3. To understand the working of Internal combustion engine and to be able to compare the performance
of Air standard cycle under stated condition.
4. To be able to compute performance parameters of an I.C engine and to determine components of
heat balance of given I.C. engine.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Evaluate the properties of a pure substance and determine entropy changes for different types of
processes
CO 2 Analyze the performance of vapor power & refrigeration cycle.
CO 3 Examine various gas power cycles and compare their performance under specified conditions
CO 4 Evaluate performance parameter of I.C engine and draw heat balance sheet of specified engine.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 3 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 2 3 3 3 3 ‐ ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 3 3 3 3 3 ‐ ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 4 3 3 3 3 ‐ ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2

UNIT‐I

Basic definitions and Laws of Thermodynamics: Revision of concept of heat and work transfer for different
processes, First law analysis of open system, Steady flow energy equation and its application for nozzle,
diffuser, heat exchangers, Turbine and Compressors and throttling device, Second law of thermodynamics and
its significance, Concept of entropy, entropy property of system, entropy change of various reversible
processes, Entropy generation and its significance.
Steam: Generation of steam at constant pressure, difference between saturated liquid, wet steam, dry
saturated steam, superheated steam and compressed liquid and their properties determination by using
Pressure base steam table and temperature base steam table, Use of Moiller chart to determine properties of
steam at a state and for a process.

UNIT‐II

Vapour Power Cycle: Carnot Cycle and why it is impracticable, Basic Rankine Cycle and its thermal analysis,
Concept of mean temperature of heat addition, Comparison of Carnot cycle and Rankine cycle, Performance

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 430
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

parameter of Rankine cycle.

Refrigeration Cycle: Vapour compression refrigeration cycle; description, analysis, refrigerating effect, power
required, unit of refrigeration, COP, Refrigerants and its desirable properties, Vapor absorption refrigeration
system.

UNIT‐III

Gas power cycle: Air Standard Power Cycle, Otto, diesel and dual cycles, Representation on P‐V and T‐S
diagram, Thermal efficiency and Mean effective pressure of Otto, Diesel and Dual cycle, Comparison of air
standard cycle based on same maximum pressure, same compression ratio.
Internal Combustion Engine: Combustion in S.I. engine, Combustion in C.I. engine and its stages, Knocking in S.I.
and C.I. engine and its detrimental effect, Factors affecting knocking in S.I. and C.I. engine.

UNIT – IV

I.C. Engine performance: Two stroke and four stroke cycle, Measurement of performance parameters of engine
i.e., B.P, I.P., F.P, SFC, thermal efficiency, mechanical efficiency and volumetric efficiency of engine, Different
methods to determine Indicated power of an engine, components of heat balance sheet of a given engine.

Textbook(s):
1. P K Nag, “Basic and Applied Thermodynamics” 5th edition McGraw Hill.
2. Y. A. Cengel & M. A Boles “Thermodynamics‐ An Engineering Approach”, 6th edition Tata McGraw Hill.
3. M.L. Mathur and R.P. Sharma Internal Combustion Engine, Dhanpat Rai Publication

References:
1. M.J. Moran & H.N. Shapiro “Fundamentals of Thermal Engineering” John Wiley & son.
2. S L Somasundaram “Engineering Thermodynamics”, New Age International Publishers.
3. R. K. Rajput, “Engineering Thermodynamics”, Lakshmi Publications.
4. Gordon Rosers, & Yon Mahew; Engineering Thermodynamics”, Pearson

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 431
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Paper Code(s): BS‐252 L P C

Paper: Probability, Statistics and Linear Programming Lab ‐ 2 1

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Probability, Statistics and Linear
Programming) as this is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

Implementation to be done in MATLAB or in equivalent software.

1. Installation of Scilab and demonstration of simple programming concepts like marix multiplication (scalar
and vector), loop, conditional statements and plotting.
2. Program for demonstration of theoretical probability limits.
3. Program to plot normal distributions and exponential distributions for various parametric values.
4. Fitting of binomial distributions for given n and p.
5. Fitting of binomial distributions after computing mean and variance.
6. Fitting of Poisson distributions for given value of lambda.
7. Fitting of Poisson distributions after computing mean.
8. Fitting of normal distribution when parameters are given.
9. Fitting of linear regression line through given data set and testing of goodness of fit using mean error.
10. Fitting of Multiple Linear Regression (MLR) curve through given data set and testing of goodness of fit
using mean error.
11. Solve a LPP of three variable using Simplex Method.
12. Solve a Transportation problem of three variables.
13. Solve an Assignment problem of three variables.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 432
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Paper Code(s): CIC‐256 L P C

Paper: Database Management System Lab ‐ 2 1

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Database Management System) as this
is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Experiments based on DDL commands – CREATE, ALTER, DROP and TRUNCATE.

2. Apply the integrity constraints like Primary Key, Foreign key, Check, NOT NULL, etc. to the tables.
3. Experiments based on basic DML commands – SELECT, INSERT, UPDATE and DELETE.
4. Write the queries for implementing Built‐in functions, GROUP BY, HAVING and ORDER BY.
5. Write the queries to implement the joins.
6. Write the queries to implement the subqueries.
7. Write the queries to implement the set operations.
8. Write the queries to create the views and queries based on views.
9. Demonstrate the concept of Control Structures.
10. Demonstrate the concept of Exception Handling.
11. Demonstrate the concept of Functions and Procedures.
12. Demonstrate the concept of Triggers.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 433
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Paper Code(s): CIC‐258 L P C

Paper: Programming in Java Lab ‐ 2 1

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Programming in Java) as this is the
practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Write a java program to implement stack and queue concept.

2. Write a java program to produce the tokens from given long string.
3. Write a java package to show dynamic polymorphism and interfaces.
4. Write a java program to show multithreaded producer and consumer application.
5. Create a customized exception and also make use of all the 5 exception keywords.
6. Convert the content of a given file into the uppercase content of the same file.
7. Write a program in java to sort the content of a given text file.
8. Develop an analog clock using applet.
9. Develop a scientific calculator using swings.
10. Create an editor like MS‐word using swings.
11. Create a servlet that uses Cookies to store the number of times a user has visited your servlet.
12. Create a simple java bean having bound and constrained properties.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 434
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Paper Code(s): ECC‐256 / ECC‐363 L P C

Paper: Microprocessors and Microcontrollers Lab ‐ 2 1

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Microprocessors and Microcontrollers)
as this is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Write a program to add and subtract two 16‐bit numbers with/ without carry using 8086.
2. Write a program to multiply two 8 bit numbers by repetitive addition method using 8086.
3. Write a Program to generate Fibonacci series.
4. Write a Program to generate Factorial of a number.
5. Write a Program to read 16‐bit Data from a port and display the same in another port.
6. Write a Program to generate a square wave using 8254.
7. Write a Program to generate a square wave of 10 kHz using Timer 1 in mode 1(using 8051).
8. Write a Program to transfer data from external ROM to internal (using 8051).
9. Design a Minor project using 8086 Microprocessor (Ex: Traffic light controller/temperature controller etc)
10. Design a Minor project using 8051 Micro controller

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 435
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Paper Code(s): ECC‐258 L P C

Paper: Digital Communications Lab ‐ 2 1

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Digital Communications) as this is the
practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. To Study Sampling Theorem.

2. To Study Pulse Code Modulation.
3. To Study Differential Pulse Code Modulation.
4. To Study Delta Modulation.
5. To Study Adaptive Delta Modulation.
6. To Study Amplitude Shift Keying (ASK) and calculate its S/N ratio and Probability of error.
7. To Study Phase Shift Keying (PSK) and calculate its S/N ratio and Probability of error.
8. To Study frequency Shift Keying (FSK) and calculate its S/N ratio and Probability of error.
9. To Study Differential Phase Shift Keying Modulation (DPSK) and calculate its S/N ratio and Probability of
error.
10. To Study Quadrature Phase Shift Keying Modulation (QPSK) and calculate its S/N ratio and Probability of
error.
11. To Study Quadrature Amplitude Modulation (QAM) and calculate its S/N ratio and Probability of error.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 436
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Paper Code(s): ECC‐260 L P C

Paper: Analog Electronics – II Lab ‐ 2 1

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Analog Electronics ‐ II) as this is the
practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. To study the op‐amp (IC 741) as inverting and non‐inverting amplifier and calculate its gain.
2. Observe and plot the output Wave shape of Op‐Amp R‐C differentiating circuits, R‐C integrating circuits
for square wave input
3. To study the op‐amp (IC 741) as adder, subtractor and voltage follower, calculate its output voltage..
4. Construct biased and unbiased series and shunt clipping circuits & combinational clipper
circuit for positive and negative peak clipping of a sine wave.
5. To study RC phase shift/Wien Bridge oscillator
measurement of frequency and amplitude of oscillations using Op‐Amp.
6. To study the waveform of square wave generator using 741 Op‐Amp IC.
7. To study the waveform of Schmitt Trigger circuit & Precision Rectifier using 741 OP‐AMP IC.
8. To make and test the operations of Monostable Multivibrator circuits using 555 timer.
9. To make and test the operations of Astable Multivibrator circuits using 555 timer.
10. To study the Sallen Key Voltage controlled voltage source active filters.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 437
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Paper Code(s): EEC‐262 L P C

Paper: Network Analysis and Synthesis Lab ‐ 2 1

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Network Analysis and Synthesis) as this
is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Introduction to MATLAB and its basic commands.

2. Plot unit step, unit impulse, unit ramp, exponential, parabolic functions and sinusoidal signals
3. Study the transient response of series RLC circuit for different types of waveforms on CRO and verify using
MATLAB
4. Study the time response of a simulated linear system and verify the unit step and square wave response of
first order and second order, type 0,1 system
5. Using MATLAB determine current in various resistors connected in network using mesh current and node
voltage analysis.
6. To determine Z and Y parameters of the given two port network.
7. To determine ABCD parameters of the given two port network.
8. To verify Reciprocity Theorem for the given two port network.
9. To determine Hybrid parameters of the given two port network.
10. To design Cascade Connection and determine ABCD parameters of the given two port network.
11. To design Series‐Series Connection and determine Z parameters of the given two port network.
12. To design Parallel‐Parallel Connection and determine Y parameters of the given two port network.
13. To design Series‐Parallel Connection and determine h parameters of the given two port network
14. Study the frequency response of different filter circuits.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 438
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Paper Code(s): EEC‐256 L P C

Paper: Electrical Machines – II Lab ‐ 2 1

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Electrical Machines ‐ II) as this is the
practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. To conduct no‐load and blocked rotor test on three phase squirrel cage Induction motor and draw the
equivalent circuit.
2. To conduct the load test on three phase squirrel cage Induction motor
(a) Compute torque, output power, efficiency, input power factor and slip for various load settings.
(b) To plot the following curves on the same graph sheet from the data obtained in part
(1) Efficiency vs. output power.
(2) Torque vs. output power.
(3) Line current vs. output power.
(4) Power factor vs. output power.
(5) Slip vs. output power.
(c) Also plot Torque‐slip characteristic.
3. To conduct the load test on three phase slip ring Induction motor
(a) Compute torque, output power, efficiency, input power factor and slip for various load settings.
(b) To plot the following curves on the same graph sheet from the data obtained in part
(1) Efficiency vs. output power.
(2) Torque vs. output power.
(3) Line current vs. output power.
(4) Power factor vs. output power.
(5) Slip vs. output power.
(c) Also plot Torque‐slip characteristic.
4. To study the different methods available in laboratory for of starting three‐phase Induction motor and
compare them.
5. To find the effect of the variation of supply voltage on the performance of three‐phase Induction motor at
120%, 100%, 80%, 60%, and 50% of rated voltage and plot the variation of power factor, speed, current
and input power for different voltages.
6. a) Perform no load and short circuit test on a three‐phase synchronous generator.
b) Measure the resistance of the stator windings
c) Find the voltage regulation at full load at
(i) Unity power factor
(ii) 0.85 power factor leading
(iii) 0.85 power factor lagging by synchronous impendence method.
7. To synchronize a three‐phase synchronous generator with the infinite bus bar. (main supply)
8. To start a synchronous motor and study the effect of variation of field current upon the stator current
and power factor, hence draw V and inverted V curves of the motor for ½ load, ¾th load and full load.
Also draw the unity power factor curve.
9. To perform slip test on a 3 phase synchronous machine and find direct axix and quadrature axix
synchronous reactances (Xd, Xq).
10. To study voltage build up in isolated Induction generator and find its load characteristics using suitable
terminal capacitor.
11. To conduct no‐load and blocked rotor test on single phase squirrel cage Induction motor and draw the
equivalent circuit.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 439
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Paper Code(s): EEC‐260 L P C

Paper: Power Systems – I Lab ‐ 2 1

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Power Systems ‐ I) as this is the
practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Study of constructional features, applications, power rating of LT and HT cables

2. Measurement of Inductance, Capacitance, Resistance and Insulation Resistance of multi‐core cables.
3. Study of different types of distribution systems by physical inspection of these systems.
4. Study and calculation of ABCD parameters for a Transmission Line.
5. Study of Ferranti Effect for Transmission Line.
6. Study of different types of insulators with rating. Enumerate the different application of the different types
of insulators, with their properties.
7. Calculate the resistance of earth using earth electrodes and Megger.
8. Calculate the dielectric strength of the transformer oil.
9. Enumerate the different applications involved in the power generating station. Write a report on visit of
Thermal/Hydro/Nuclear power station.
10. Estimation and Costing of overhead lines/distribution lines of specified voltage level and length.
11. Estimation and Costing of service mains for single face, three face domestic/industrial consumers.
12. Estimation and Costing of pole mounted sub‐station /indoor outdoor sub‐station.
13. To locate fault in a cable by Murray loop test.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 440
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Paper Code(s): ECC‐264 L P C

Paper: Electronics – II Lab ‐ 2 1

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Electronics ‐ II) as this is the practical
component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Plotting input and output characteristics and calculation of parameters of a transistor in common emittr
configuration.
2. Transistor biasing circuit. Measurement of operating point (Ic and Vce) for a :‐
a) fixed bias circuit
b) Potential divider biasing circuit.
3. Plot the FET characteristics & MOSFET characteristics.
4. Two Stage R.C. Coupled Amplifier.
a) To measure the overall gain of two stages at 1 KHz and compare it with gain of Ist stage,
b) To observe the loading effect of second stage on the first stage.
c) To plot the frequency response curve of two stage amplifier.
5. To study Emitter follower circuit & measurement of voltage gain and plotting of frequency response Curve.
6. Feedback in Amplifier. Single stage amplifier with and without bypass capacitor,measurement of voltage
gain and plotting the frequency response in both cases.
7. To study the opamp (IC 741) as inverting and non‐inverting amplifier and calculate its gain.
8. To study the opamp (IC 741) as adder, sub‐tractor and voltage follower, calculate its output voltage.
9. Construct biased and unbiased series and shunt clipping circuits & combinational clipper
circuit for positive and negative peak clipping of a sine wave.
10. To study RC phase shift/WIEN BRIDGE oscillator
11. To study the waveform of square wave generator using 741 OP‐AMP IC.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 441
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Paper Code(s): ECC‐254 L P C

Paper: Digital Electronics Lab ‐ 2 1

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Digital Electronics) as this is the
practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Realize all gates using NAND & NOR gates

2. Realize Half Adder, Full Adder, Half subtracter, Full subtracter
3. Realize a BCD adder
4. Realize a Serial Adder
5. Realize a four bit ALU
6. Realize Master‐Save J K Flip‐Flop, using NAND/NOR gates
7. Realize Universal Shift Register
8. Realize Self‐Starting, Self Correcting Ring Counter
9. Realize Multiplexer and De‐Multiplexer
10. Realize Carry Look ahead Adder / Priority Encoder
11. To make and test the operations of Monostable Multivibrator circuits using 555 timer.
12. To make and test the operations of Astable Multivibrator circuits using 555 timer.
13. To be familiar with Digital to Analog converters.
14. To be familiar with Analog to Digital converters.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 442
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Paper Code(s): ICC‐256 L P C

Paper: Sensors and Transducers Lab ‐ 2 1

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Sensors and Transducers) as this is the
practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Study of static and dynamic characteristics of sensors.

2. Measurement of displacement using LVDT
3. Measurement of strain using strain gauge transducer.
4. Measurement of displacement using potentiometer.
5. Measurement of temperature using RTD and plot the characteristics of RTD.
6. Measurement of temperature using thermister.
7. Measurement of pressure using Load cell.
8. Measurement of speed using magnetic sensor.
9. Measurement of speed using photoelectric sensors.
10. Measurement of pressure using pressure transducer.
11. Measurement of liquid level using capacitive sensor.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 443
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Paper Code(s): EEC‐258 L P C

Paper: Electrical and Electronics Measurements Lab ‐ 2 1

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Electrical and Electronics
Measurement) as this is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. To measure inductance using Maxwell bridge.

2. To measure inductance using Anderson’s bridge.
3. To measure capacitance using Schering bridge.
4. To measure low resistance using kelvin double bridge.
5. To measure Time, phase and frequency using CRO.
6. Testing of ratio error and phase error using Current Transformer.
7. Measurement of power line parameters (V, I, W, F, VAR, KWH etc.) using series R, RL & RLC Load.
8. Measurement of power in 3‐phase circuit.
9. To study Instrumentation amplifier.
10. To measure unknown voltage using potentiometer.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 444
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Paper Code(s): MEC‐254 L P C

Paper: Manufacturing Science and Technology – II Lab ‐ 2 1

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Manufacturing Science and Technology
‐ II) as this is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Generation of different angles of a single point cutting tool on a sample workpiece.

2. Perform various machining operations on lathe machine tool.
3. To evaluate shear angle as a function of the rake angle of the tool.
4. Measurement and analysis of cutting forces in orthogonal turning for different materials at different speeds,
feed and depth of cut.
5. Measurement of temperature at tool chip interface.
6. A study of chips formed at different speed, feed, depth of cut, for different materials
7. Flank wear – time characteristics for single point cutting tools for different materials at different speeds, feed
and depth of cut.
8. To study the characteristic features of milling machine and to machine the hexagonal head of a workpiece.
9. To study the characteristic features of Shaper and to machine a V‐block out of the workpiece provided.
10. To study the characteristic features of a Drilling machine and to drill, ream and tap holes on the given
workpiece.
11. To study the characteristics of CNC Lathe and CNC milling machines.
12. To study the characteristic features of Electric Discharge Machining processes.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 445
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Paper Code(s): MEC‐256 L P C

Paper: Thermal Engineering – II Lab ‐ 2 1

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Thermal Engineering ‐ II) as this is the
practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1.To conduct the performance test on the Diesel engine test rig.
2. To conduct the performance test on the Petrol engine test rig
3. To prepare heat balance sheet of single cylinder four stroke diesel engine.
4. To prepare heat balance sheet of single cylinder four stroke Petrol engine.
5. To determine COP of refrigeration system based on vapor compression Cycle.
6. Study the working of different types of Compressors.
7. Visit to the refrigeration plant.
8. Determine the effect of load on the components of Heat balance of an I.C engine.
9. Determine the composition of exhaust gas by Orsat Apparatus.
10. Study the working of Vapor Absorption Refrigeration System.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 446
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Paper Code(s): MEC‐258 L P C

Paper: Machine Design – I Lab ‐ 2 1

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Machine Design ‐ I) as this is the
practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. To design and draw a Spigot and Socket Cotter Joint for a given load under the allowable stress properties
of the material.
2. To design and draw a Knuckle Joint for a given load under the material properties constraints.
3. To design and draw a pipe joint carrying pressured fluid within safe stress capabilities of the givens
material.
4. To design and draw a protected type Rigid Flanged Coupling for connecting two power transmitting perfect
coaxial shafts.
5. To design and draw a bushed pin type Flexible Coupling (Ajax) for connecting two slightly misaligned shafts.
6. To design a quadruple riveted double strap butt joint for the longitudinal seam and circumferential seam of
a boiler shell.
7. To design and find the size of an eccentrically loaded Welded Joint.
8. To design and draw a Screw Jack for lifting a given load.
9. To design a pair of Spur Gear Reducer for transmitting a given power between two shafts.
10. To design a Bell Crank Lever for moving a given load with a given mechanical advantage.
11. To design a closed coiled helical spring for the valve mechanism of an engine.

Note:The drawing/drafting of the designed parts based on the actual calculations must be done on any suitable
available drafting software.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 447
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Paper Code(s): CEC‐254 L P C

Paper: Soil Mechanics Lab ‐ 2 1

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Soil Mechanics) as this is the practical
component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Determination of Water content by oven drying method.

2. Determination of Water content by pycnometer.
3. Determination of Water content by rapid moisture meter method.
4. Determination of Specific Gravity by:
a) Density bottle.
b) Pycnometer.
5. Determination of Particle size distribution by sieving.
6. Determination of Particle size distribution by hydrometer.
7. Determination of liquid Limit of soil.
8. Determination of Plastic Limit of soil.
9. Determination of Shrinkage limit, shrinkage ratio, and volumetric shrinkage of soil.
10. Determination of In‐situ (Field density) by core cutter method.
11. Determination of In‐situ (Field density) by sand replacement method.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 448
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Paper Code(s): CEC‐256 L P C

Paper: Hydraulics Lab ‐ 2 1

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Hydraulics and Hydrology) as this is the
practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. To study and compare the losses due to flow in smooth and rough pipes.
2. To draw the performance characteristics of variable speed centrifugal pump and single stage reciprocating
pump.
3. To determine operating characteristics of pelton wheel turbine.
4. To determine operating characteristics of Francis turbine.
5. To determine operating characteristics of Kaplan turbine.
6. Reynolds dye experiment for flow characterization.
7. To determine the lift and drag force on different airfoils.
8. Measurement of Rainfall by non –recording rain gauge.
9. Measurement of rainfall by recording rain gauge.
10. To determine mean rainfall of an area by Thiessen mean Polygon method and isohyetal method.
11. To determine the velocity of a running of a stream in a canal by current meter and calculate the
approximate discharge of the canal.
12. To design a regime channel by Lacey’s theory for a given pattern of crops and area to be irrigated.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 449
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Paper Code(s): CEC‐258 L P C

Paper: Transportation Engineering Lab ‐ 2 1

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Transportation Engineering) as this is
the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Aggregate crushing strength test.

2. Los Angeles Abrasion test.
3. Aggregate impact test.
4. Flakiness index and elongation index test.
5. Penetration test
6. Ductility test
7. Viscosity test.
8. Softening point test.
9. Flash and fire point test.
10. Determination of bitumen content by centrifuge extractor
11. Determination of marshal stability value.
12. Determination of rebound deflection of pavement by Benkelman beam.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 450
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Paper Code(s): MAC‐256 L P C

Paper: Database Management Systems Lab ‐ 2 1

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Database Management System) as this
is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Experiments based on DDL commands – CREATE, ALTER, DROP and TRUNCATE.

2. Apply the integrity constraints like Primary Key, Foreign key, Check, NOT NULL, etc. to the tables.
3. Experiments based on basic DML commands – SELECT, INSERT, UPDATE and DELETE.
4. Write the queries for implementing Built‐in functions, GROUP BY, HAVING and ORDER BY.
5. Write the queries to implement the joins.
6. Write the queries to implement the subqueries.
7. Write the queries to implement the set operations.
8. Write the queries to create the views and queries based on views.
9. Demonstrate the concept of Control Structures.
10. Demonstrate the concept of Exception Handling.
11. Demonstrate the concept of Functions and Procedures.
12. Demonstrate the concept of Triggers.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 451
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Paper Code(s): MAC‐258 L P C

Paper: Thermodynamics and Applications Lab ‐ 2 1

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Thermodynamics and Applications) as
this is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. To draw the valve timing diagram of a Single Cylinder Four Stroke CI Engine.

2. To draw the valve timing diagram of a Single Cylinder Four Stroke SI Engine.

3. To conduct the performance test on the Diesel engine test rig.

4. To conduct the performance test on the Petrol engine test rig

5. To prepare heat balance sheet of single cylinder four stroke diesel engine.

6. To prepare heat balance sheet of single cylinder four stroke Petrol engine.

7. To determine Exergy destruction of Exhaust Gas Calorimeter of Petrol Engine test rig at different load.

8. To determine Exergy destruction of Exhaust Gas Calorimeter of Diesel Engine test rig at different load.

9. To determine COP of refrigeration system based on vapor compression Cycle.

10. Visit to the thermal power plant/refrigeration plant.

11. Thermodynamic analysis of Rankine cycle.

12. Comparative thermodynamic analysis of Otto, Diesel and Dual for the given condition.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 452
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Syllabus of 3rd Year and 4th Year Papers

(in Alphabetical Order of Paper Name)

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 453
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Ad hoc and Sensor Networks L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ECE 7 PCE PCE‐4 ECE‐413T
EC‐ACT 7 PC PC WMC‐453T
EE‐VDT 7 OAE‐ECE‐EA OAE‐2 WMC‐453T
EAE 7 WMC‐EAE WMC‐EAE‐3A WMC‐453T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To know the issues in Ad Hoc wireless networks and designing a MAC Protocol for the same and
summarize and compare various types of MAC protocols.
2. To analyze and explain issues in designing, goals and classification of Routing algorithm
3. To know the sensor network architecture, data dissemination, data gathering, MAC protocols for
sensor networks.
4. To know the basics of wireless geolocation architecture with technologies.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Identify the issues in Ad Hoc wireless networks and designing a MAC Protocol for the same and
summarize and compare various types of MAC protocols
CO 2 Analyze and explain issues in designing, goals and classification of Routing algorithm.
CO 3 Develop an understanding of sensor network architecture and explain data dissemination, data
gathering, MAC protocols for sensor networks.
CO 4 Develop the knowledge about the basics of wireless geolocation architecture with technologies.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 1 2 2 3 2 2 ‐ 2 2 3 3
CO 2 3 1 2 2 2 2 3 ‐ 3 2 2 3
CO 3 3 2 1 2 3 2 3 ‐ 2 2 3 2
CO 4 3 1 2 3 3 3 2 ‐ 2 3 3 2

UNIT I

Ad Hoc Wireless Networks: Introduction. Issues in Ad Hoc Wireless Networks. Ad Hoc Wireless Internet.
MAC Protocols for Ad Hoc Wireless Networks: Introduction, Issues in Designing a MAC Protocol for Ad Hoc
Wireless Networks. Design Goals of a MAC Protocol for Ad Hoc Wireless Networks. Classifications of MAC
Protocols. Contention‐Based Protocols. Contention‐Based Protocols with Reservation Mechanisms. Different
digital topology. MAC Protocols in Directional Antennas.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 454
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT II

Routing Protocols for Ad Hoc Wireless Networks: Introduction to Routing algorithm, Issues in Designing a
Routing Protocol for Ad Hoc Wireless Networks. Classifications of Routing Protocols. Table‐Driven Routing
Protocols. On‐Demand Routing Protocol, Routing Protocols with Efficient Flooding Mechanisms. Hierarchical
Routing Protocols.
Transport Layer and Security Protocols for Ad Hoc Wireless Networks: Introduction. Issues in Designing a
Transport Layer Protocol for Ad Hoc Wireless Networks. Design Goals of a Transport Layer Protocol for Ad Hoc
Wireless Networks. Classification of Transport Layer Solutions. TCP Over Ad Hoc Wireless Networks. Security in
Ad Hoc Wireless Networks. Network Security Requirements. Issues and Challenges in Security Provisioning.
Network Security Attacks. Key Management. Secure Routing in Ad Hoc Wireless Networks.

UNIT III

Wireless Sensor Networks: Introduction. Sensor Network Architecture. Data Dissemination. Data Gathering.
MAC Protocols for Sensor Networks. Location Discovery. Quality of a Sensor Network. Evolving Standards.
Other Issues.
Hybrid wireless Networks: Introduction. Next‐Generation Hybrid Wireless Architectures. Routing in Hybrid
Wireless Networks. Pricing in Multi‐Hop Wireless Networks. Power Control Schemes in Hybrid Wireless
Networks. Load Balancing in Hybrid Wireless Networks.

UNIT IV

Wireless Geolocation Systems: Introduction. What is wireless Geolocation? Wireless Geolocation System
Architecture. Technologies for Wireless Geolocation. Geolocation Standards for E‐911 Services. Performance
Measures for Geolocation Systems.

Recent Advances in Wireless Networks: Introduction. Ultra‐Wide‐Band Radio Communication. Wireless

Fidelity Systems. Optical Wireless Networks. The Meghadoot Architecture, introduction to vehicular sensor
networks.

Text Books:
1. Siva Ram Murthy, C. and Manoj,B. S., Adhoc Wireless Networks Architectures and Protocols, Prentice Hall,
PTR, (2004) 2nd ed.
2. Perkins, Charles E., Ad hoc Networking, Addison Wesley, (2000) 3rd ed.

Reference Books:
1. Toh, C. K., Ad hoc Mobile Wireless Networks Protocols and Systems, Prentice Hall, PTR, (2001) 3rd Edition.
2. Pahlavan, Kaveh, Krishnamoorthy, Prashant, Principles of Wireless Networks, ‐ A united approach, Pearson,
(2002) 2nd ed.
3. Wang X. and Poor H.V., Wireless Communication Systems, Pearson education, (2004) 3rd ed.
4. Schiller Jochen, Mobile Communications, Person Education – 2003, 2nd ed.
5. Carlos De Morais Cordeiro and Dharam P Agrawal, “Adhoc and Sensor Networks‐ Theory & Applications”,
2nd Ed, Cambridge Univ Press India Ltd.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 455
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Ad hoc and Sensor Networks Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ECE 7 PCE PCE‐4 ECE‐413P
EC‐ACT 7 PC PC WMC‐453P
EE‐VDT 7 OAE‐ECE‐EA OAE‐2 WMC‐453P
EAE 7 WMC‐EAE WMC‐EAE‐3A WMC‐453P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Ad hoc and Sensor Networks) as this is
the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Create a sample wireless topology using Simulation Tool.

2. Create a mobile Ad‐hoc networks using Simulation Tool.
3. Implement an Ad‐hoc On‐demand Distance Vector protocol using Simulation Tool.
4. Implement a Transmission Control Protocol using Simulation Tool.
5. Implement an User Datagram Protocol using Simulation Tool.
6. Implement a Low Energy Adaptive Hierarchy protocol using Simulation Tool.
7. Implement a Power Efficient Gathering in Sensor Information System using Simulation Tool.
8. Implement a Sensor Protocol for Information via Negotiation (SPIN) using Simulation Tool.
9. Implement a Proactive and Reactive based MAC protocol using Simulation Tool.
10. Implement a Scheduling based protocol for WSNs using Simulation Tool.
11. Implement a Predictive Wake‐up MAC protocol using Simulation Tool.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 456
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Additive Manufacturing L P C
3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

MAE 7 OAE‐MAE OAE‐1 MAO‐411T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To understand the working principles and process parameters of additive manufacturing processes.
2. Explore different additive manufacturing processes and suggest suitable methods for building a
particular component
3. Perform suitable post processing operation based on product repair requirement.
4. Design and develop a working model using additive manufacturing Processes.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Identify, Explain, and solve problems related to additive manufacturing.
CO 2 Select suitable additive manufacturing process as per the requirement.
CO 3 Select suitable additive manufacturing material as per the requirement.
CO 4 Design and develop a working model using additive manufacturing Processes.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 2 2
CO 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 2 2 2
CO 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 2 2 2
CO 4 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 2

UNIT‐I

Introduction to Additive Manufacturing: Introduction to AM, AM evolution, Steps in AM, Classification of AM

processes, Advantages of AM and Types of materials for AM. Additive Manufacturing Data Formats and Pre‐
processing.

UNIT‐II

Additive Manufacturing Methods‐Vat Photopolymerization: Stereolithography (SL), Materials, Process

Modelling, Process Benefits and Drawbacks, Applications.
Material Jetting AM Processes: Materials, Process Benefits and Drawbacks, Applications.
Binder Jetting AM Processes: Materials, Process Benefits and Drawbacks, Applications

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 457
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT‐III

Extrusion‐Based AM Processes: Fused Deposition Modelling (FDM), Principles, Materials, Process Modelling,
Process Benefits and Drawbacks, Applications.
Sheet Lamination AM Processes: Bonding Mechanisms, Materials, Laminated Object Manufacturing (LOM),
Ultrasonic Consolidation (UC), Gluing, Thermal bonding, LOM and UC applications
Powder Bed Fusion AM Processes: Selective laser Sintering (SLS), Materials, Powder fusion mechanism and
powder handling, Process Modelling, SLS Metal and ceramic part creation. Electron Beam melting (EBM),
Process Benefits and Drawbacks, Applications of Powder Bed Fusion Processes,

UNIT – IV

Additive Manufacturing Materials: Multifunctional and graded materials in AM, Role of solidification rate,
Evolution of non‐equilibrium structure, microstructure studies, Structure property relationship.
Post Processing of Additive Manufacturing Parts: Support Material Removal, Surface Texture Improvement,
Accuracy Improvement, Aesthetic Improvement, Preparation for use as a Pattern, Property Enhancements
using Non‐thermal and Thermal Techniques.

Textbook(s):
1. C.P Paul, A.N Junoop, “Additive Manufacturing: Principles, Technologies and Applications”, McGrawHill,
2021.
2. Ian Gibson, David W Rosen, Brent Stucker, “Additive Manufacturing Technologies: 3D Printing, Rapid
Prototyping, and Direct Digital manufacturing” , Springer, 2015, 2nd Edition.

References:
1. Patri K. Venuvinod and WeiyinMa, “Rapid Prototyping: Laser‐based and Other Technologies”, Springer,
2004.
2. D.T. Pham, S.S. Dimov, “Rapid Manufacturing: The Technologies and Applications of Rapid Prototyping and
Rapid Tooling”, Springer 2001.
3. Rafiq Noorani, “Rapid Prototyping: Principles and Applications in Manufacturing” , John Wiley & Sons,
2006.
4. Amit Bandyopadhyay Susmita Bose, “Additive Manufacturing, Second Edition”, CRC Press Taylor & Francis
Group, 2020.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 458
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Additive Manufacturing Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

MAE 7 OAE‐MAE OAE‐1 MAO‐411P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Additive Manufacturing) as this is the
practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. To Study the working of Stereolithography (SL) additive manufacturing machine.

2. To Study the working of Material Jetting additive manufacturing machine.

3. To Study the working of Binder Jetting additive manufacturing machine.

4. To Study the working of Fused Deposition Modelling (FDM) additive manufacturing machine.

5. To Study the working of Sheet Lamination additive manufacturing machine.

6. To Study the working of Selective laser Sintering (SLS) additive manufacturing machine.

7. To Study the working of Electron Beam melting (EBM) additive manufacturing machine.

8. To Study the working of Electron Beam melting (EBM) additive manufacturing machine.

9. Manufacture the part by any of additive manufacturing process without Support Material.

10. Manufacture the part by any of additive manufacturing process with Support Material.

11. Prepare the 3D‐CAD model in STL format of single point cutting tool.

12. Prepare the 3D‐CAD model in STL format of multi point cutting tool.

13. Improve the accuracy of part manufacture by any AM process by post process technique.

14. Manufacture the hollow part by any of additive manufacturing process.

15. Reconstruction the 3D‐CAD model of part using reverse engineering and manufacture the part by any AM
process.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 459
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Advance Manufacturing Process L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 7 DMS‐EAE DMS‐EAE‐4 DMS‐421T
EAE 7 DT‐EAE DT‐EAE‐3 DMS‐421T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To Understand the classifications of non‐traditional machining processes based on industrial
applications.
2. To describe the working of modern machining methods based on mechanical, chemical, thermal and
thermo‐electric energy.
3. To explain, how to investigate the of process parameters of advanced machining methods on its
characteristics.
4. To Understand the classifications of non‐traditional machining processes based on industrial
applications.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Explain Categories of non‐ traditional machining processes based on industrial applications.
CO 2 Analyse the working principle of modern machining methods based on mechanical, chemical, thermal
and thermo‐electric energy.
CO 3 Carryout the investigation of process parameters of advanced machining methods on its
characteristics.
CO 4 Evaluating the effects of process parameters (numerically) on the output parameters of Non‐
traditional methods.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 3 3 ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 2 3 3 3 3 ‐ 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 3 3 3 3 3 ‐ 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 4 3 3 3 2 ‐ 3 ‐ ‐ ‐‐ ‐ ‐ 2

UNIT I

Introduction: An overview of Modern Manufacturing Methods (MMM) ‐ Classification, their comparative study,
Need of MMM.
Process Selection: Physical Parameters, Shape applications, Material applications, Process capability, Effects on
equipment and Tooling, Process economy.
Electric Discharge Machining: Working Principle, Mechanism of metal removal, Basic EDM circuits, selection of
tool material and dielectrics, Flushing, Advantages, Disadvantages and Applications

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 460
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT II

Ultrasonic Machining: Construction and working Principle, Elements of Process, Effect of process parameters,
Applications and limitations.
Abrasive Jet Machining: Working Principle, equipment used, Variables in AJM, Advantages, Disadvantages,
Application.
Water Jet Machining: Working Principle, equipment used, process parameter, Advantages, Disadvantages,
Application.
Abrasive Flow Machining: Working Principle, equipment used, process parameter, Advantages, Disadvantages,
Application.

UNIT III

Chemical Machining: Working Principle, equipment used, process parameter, Advantages, Disadvantages,
Application.
Electro Chemical Machining (ECM): Principle, Elements of ECM process, Electrochemistry of ECM, selection of
electrolytes and analysis of ECM, Advantages, Limitations, Applications.
Electro Chemical Grinding (ECG): Process: Working principle, equipment used.
Rapid Prototyping Introduction Stereo Lithography Systems Introduction: Need for the compression in
product development, history of RP systems, Survey of applications, Growth of RP industry, and classification of
RP systems. Stereo Lithography Systems: Principle, Process parameter, Process details, Data preparation, data
files and machine details, Application.

UNIT IV

Laser Beam Machining: Working principle, equipment, Process parameters, Advantages, Disadvantages and
Application.
Plasma Arc Machining: Working Principle, Parameters, Safety precautions, Applications.
Electron Beam Machining: Principle, beam control techniques, Process capabilities, Comparison of thermal and
non‐thermal processes, Advantages and limitations.

Text Books:
1. P.C. Pandey & H.S. Shan, “Modern Machining Process”, Tata McGraw Hills, 2006.
2. Amitabh Gosh and A.K. Mallik, “Manufacturing Science”, Affiliated East‐West Press Pvt. Ltd., 1985.

Reference books:
1. Vijay K Jain, “Advance Machining Processes”, Allied Publishers Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2002.
2. P K Mishra, “Nonconventional Machining”, Narosa Publication, 1997.
3. McGeough, “Advanced Methods of Machining”, Chapman and Hall, London, 1998.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 461
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Advance Manufacturing Process Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 7 DMS‐EAE DMS‐EAE‐4 DMS‐421P
EAE 7 DT‐EAE DT‐EAE‐3 DMS‐421P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Advance Manufacturing Process) as
this is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Study of electric discharge machining process.

2. Determination of material removal rate on electric discharge machine (EDM).
3. Determination of surface roughness on EDM.
4. Study of electrochemical machining process.
5. Determination of material removal rate on electro chemical machine (ECM).
6. Determination of surface roughness on ECM.
7. Study of Flexible manufacturing system.
8. Case study of Rapid Prototyping
9. Study the effect of current on material removal rate in EDM.
10. Determine the effect of different tool material on material removal rate in EDM.
11. Determine the effect of current on surface finish rate in EDM.
12. Determine the effect of different tool surface finish on surface finish in EDM.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 462
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Advance Material Science and Metallurgy L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ME 6 PCE PCE‐3 MEE‐330T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To study and understand about ultra‐light materials and metallic foams.
2. To study bio‐Materials, its classifications and applications.
3. To study the composites materials, its classifications and applications in industries.
4. To study about coating and high temperature materials for MSME application.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 To understand about ultra‐light materials and metallic foams.
CO 2 To analyse bio‐Materials, its classifications and applications.
CO 3 To composites materials, its classifications and applications in industries.
CO 4 To study about coating and high temperature materials for MSME application.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 3 3 ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 2 3 3 3 3 ‐ 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 3 3 3 3 3 ‐ 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 4 3 3 3 2 ‐ 3 ‐ ‐ ‐‐ ‐ ‐ 2

UNIT‐I

Ultra‐light Materials and Metallic Foams ‐Material Definition and Processing Characterization of cellular metals
Material properties.

UNIT‐II

Bio‐Materials‐Classes of materials used in medicine Application of materials in medicine and dentistry various
materials and coatings for implants.

UNIT‐III

Composite material definition and classifications composite material properties and applications, piezoelectric
ceramics, magnetostrictive materials, electro‐rheological fluids.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 463
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT – IV

Coatings and High‐ Temperature Materials Thin Film Shape Memory Alloys for MEMS application. Introduction
to Nano‐engineered materials.

Textbook(s):
1. Handbook of Cellular metals, Production, Processing, Application, Edited by Hans Peter Degischer and
Brigitte Kriszt, Wiley ‐ VCH, 2002.
2. Materials Science and Engineering, An Introduction, 5th Edition, William D. Callister, Jr., John Wiley & Sons,
Inc., New York, 1999, with CD‐ROM.

References Books:
1. Mikell P. Grover, “Fundamentals of Modern Manufacturing, Materials, Processing, and Systems”, 2nd
2. Edition, John Wiley & Sons, inc.
3. L.J. Gibson, and M.F. Ashby, “Cellular Solids, Structure and Properties”, 2nd Edition, Cambridge University
Press, 1999.
4. Ashby, M. F., Evans, A., Fleck, N. A., Gibson, L. J., Hutchinson, J. W., & Wadley, H. N. G., Metal Foams:
Design Guide, Butterworth‐Heinmann, Massachusetts; 2000.
5. Milton Ohring, “Materials Science of Thin Films”, 2 nd Edition, Academic Press, 2002.
6. C.T. Herakovich, “Mechanics of Fibrous Composites”, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., New York, 1998.
7. Biomaterials Science, An Introduction to Materials in Medicine, Edited by B.D. Ratner, A.S. Hoffman, F.J.
Sckoen, and J.E.L Emons, Academic Press, second edition, 2004.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 464
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Advance Material Science and Metallurgy Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ME 6 PCE PCE‐3 MEE‐330P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Advanced Material Science and
Metallurgy) as this is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Making a plastic mould for small metallic specimen.

2. Specimen preparation for micro structural examination‐cutting, grinding, polishing, etching.
3. Grain Size determination of a given specimen.
4. Comparative study of microstructures of different given specimens (mild steel, a. Gray C.I., brass, copper
etc.)
5. Effect of annealing, normalizing and hardening on hardness of the specimen.
6. Effect of annealing, normalizing and hardening on toughness of the specimen.
7. Effect of case hardening on the hardness of the specimen.
8. Material identification of, say, 50 common items kept in a box.
9. Faradays law of electrolysis experiment.
10. Study of corrosion and its effects.
11. Study of microstructure of welded component and HAZ Macro & Micro Examination.
12. Suitable experiment on Magnetic/ Electrical/Electronic materials.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 465
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Advance Metal Cutting and Tool Design L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ME 7 PCE PCE‐5 MEE‐419T
MAE 7 OAE‐MAE OAE‐1 MAO‐413T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. Understand the principles of mechanics to metal cutting process and develop analytical relation
between input and output process parameters.
2. Understand the models of the machining economics and optimization, tool wear and its
measurement.
3. Understand the concept of tool design.
4. Understand the working principle of advance metal cutting process.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Identify, Explain, and solve problems related to metal cutting.
CO 2 Explain, and solve the problems related to economics and optimization, tool wear.
CO 3 Analysis and solve the problems related to tool design.
CO 4 Identify, Explain and select the advance metal cutting process as per requirement.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 3 3 ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 2 3 3 3 3 2 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 3 3 3 3 3 ‐ 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 4 3 3 3 2 3 3 ‐ ‐ ‐‐ ‐ ‐ 2

UNIT‐I

Theory of Metal Cutting: Orthogonal and oblique cutting, tool geometry, types of chips, cutting forces in
orthogonal cutting and their measurement, Merchant circle and derivation of relationships between the
cutting forces, chip thickness ratio. Ernst Merchant Theory, its assumptions and modifications. Relationship
between cutting velocity, shear velocity and chip flow velocity. Lee & Shafer Theory – slip line method,
determination of shear angle by Mohrs circle.

UNIT‐II

Machinability: Machinability and its criteria, forms of tool‐wear in metal cutting, tool‐life and its criteria, effect
of different cutting parameters on tool‐life. Economics of machining and numerical. Cutting fluids, their
physical action, and applications.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 466
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Heat Generation in Metal Cutting: Heat generation and temperature distribution in metal cutting. Calculation
of temperature in primary and secondary deformation zones and their measuring methods.

UNIT‐III

Cutting Tool Design: General considerations, study of angle for single point cutting and drill. Principles of
different cutting tool materials and their important characteristics. Basic principles of design of a single point
and multiple point tools i.e. broaches and twist drill.
Jigs & Fixtures: Important considerations in jigs and fixture design. Main principles of designing of jigs &
fixtures, elements of Jigs and fixtures. Different devices and methods of locations. Different types of clamps
used in jigs & fixtures.

UNIT ‐ IV

Ultrasonic Machining: Construction and working Principle, Elements of Process, Effect of process parameters,
Applications and limitations.
Electric Discharge Machining: Working Principle, Mechanism of metal removal, Basic EDM circuits, selection of
tool material and dielectrics, Flushing, Advantages, Disadvantages and Applications.
Electro Chemical Machining (ECM): Principle, Elements of ECM process, Electrochemistry of ECM, selection of
electrolytes and analysis of ECM, Advantages, Limitations, Applications.

Textbook(s):
1. Geoffrey Boothroyd, “Fundamentals of Metal Machining & Machine Tools”, TMH.
2. P.C. Pandey & H.S. Shan, “Modern Machining Process”, Tata McGraw Hills, 2006.

References:
1. P.N. Rao, “Manufacturing Technology”, Tata McGraw Hill Publication Ltd.
2. B.J. Ranganath, “Metal Cutting & Tool Design” Vikas Publishing House Pvt. Ltd.
3. Amitabh Gosh and A.K. Mallik, “Manufacturing Science”, Affiliated East‐West Press Pvt. Ltd., 1985.
4. Vijay K Jain, “Advance Machining Processes”, Allied Publishers Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2002.
5. P. H. Joshi” Jigs and Fixtures”, 2nd Edition TMH.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 467
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Advance Metal Cutting and Tool Design Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ME 7 PCE PCE‐5 MEE‐419P
MAE 7 OAE‐MAE OAE‐1 MAO‐413P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Advance Metal Cutting and Tool
Design) as this is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. A study of chips formed at different speed, feed, depth of cut, for different materials.
2. Measurement and analysis of cutting forces in orthogonal turning for different materials at different
speeds.
3. Measurement and analysis of cutting forces in orthogonal turning for different materials at different feed
and depth of cut.
4. Flank wear – time characteristics for single point cutting tools for different materials at different speeds.
5. Flank wear – time characteristics for single point cutting tools for different materials at different feed and
depth of cut.
6. Find temperature at tool chip interface.
7. Study of electric discharge machining process (EDM).
8. Determination of material removal rate on electric discharge machine (EDM).
9. Determination of material removal rate on electro chemical machine (ECM).
10. Study of Ultrasonic Machining process.
11. Determination of material removal rate on Ultrasonic Machining process.
12. Study the effect of current on surface finish rate in EDM.
13. Study of the effect of different tool surface finish on surface finish in EDM.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 468
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Advance Structural Analysis L P C

4 4

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CE 6 PCE PCE‐1 CEE‐306

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To discuss concept of arches and its ILDs, curved beams.
2. To find behaviour of cables, structure by plastic theory.
3. To explain basics of matrix methods and its use in flexibility matrix method.
4. To use stiffness matrix method, direct stiffness methods for analysis of structures.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Explain reactions and forces in arches, curved beam.
CO 2 Evaluate structural response of cables, plastic theory.
CO 3 Determine relation between stiffness and flexibility matrix, unknowns in indeterminate structures by
flexibility matrix method.
CO 4 Analyse indeterminate structures by stiffness methods
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 2 1 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐
CO 2 2 3 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐
CO 3 1 3 ‐ ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐
CO 4 1 3 ‐ ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐

UNIT‐I

Arches: Theory of arches, Eddy’s theorem, Circular, parabolic and geometric arches, Linear arch, concept of
radial shear force and axial thrust, analysis of three hinged and two hinged arches with various loads, Effect of
yielding of supports, rib shortening and temperature changes, tied arches, ILD for two hinged arches, ILD for
three‐hinged arches.
Curved beam: Introduction, forces on curved beams, analysis of circular arch cantilever beam.

UNIT‐II

Cables: Introduction, components and functions, Equilibrium of cable, Cables subjected to concentrated load
and uniformly distributed load, length of cable, effect of change in temperature in suspension cables.
Plastic Analysis of structures: Introduction, Plastic bending of beams, shape factors, Plastic hinges, Types of
Mechanisms, Load Factors, Numerical‐ beams and frames

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 469
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT‐III

Matrix Analysis of structure: Introduction, Force and displacement methods of analysis, flexibility influence
coefficients and stiffness influence coefficients, Relation between flexibility matrix and stiffness matrix.
Flexibility matrix method: Development of flexibility matrices by physical approach, Flexibility matrices for
truss and frame elements, load transformation matrix, development of total flexibility matrix of the structure,
analysis of simple structures, plane truss and plane frame, nodal loads and element loads, lack of fit and
temperature effects.

UNIT – IV

Stiffness matrix method: Development of stiffness matrices by physical approach, stiffness matrices for truss
and frame elements, displacement transformation matrix, development of total stiffness matrix, analysis of
simple structures, plane truss and plane frame, nodal loads and element loads, lack of fit and temperature
effects.
Direct stiffness method: Introduction, element stiffness matrix, rotation transformation matrix, transformation
of displacement and load vectors and stiffness matrix, Introduction to finite element method.

Textbook(s):
1. S S Bhavikatti, “Structural Analysis (Vol.I and II)”, Vikas Publication, Fourth Edition (2011)
2. S. Ramamrutham, R. Narayan, “Theory of Structures”, Dhanpat Rai Publishing Company, (2017)

References:
1. C.S. Reddy, “Basic Structural Analysis”, Tata McGraw Hill (2017)
2. Devdas Menon, “Advanced Structural Analysis”, Narosa Publishing House (2015)
3. R.C. Hibbler, “Structural Analysis”, Pearson Education
4. C.K. Wang, “Matrix methods of structural analysis”, International Textbook Company

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 470
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Advanced Computer Architecture L P C

4 4

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

IT 6 PCE PCE‐1 CIE‐314
ECE 6 PCE PCE‐2 ECE‐328

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To understand different parallel computer models and analyze different network properties.
2. To compute and analyze efficiency of various pipelining.
3. To understand and perform binary arithmetic operations.
4. To analyze the need of memory hierarchy.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Able to understand different parallel computer models and analyze different network properties.
CO 2 Able to compute and analyze efficiency of various pipelining.
CO 3 Able to understand and perform binary arithmetic operations.
CO 4 Able to analyze the need of memory hierarchy.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 2 2 3 2 1 2 1 ‐ ‐ 1 1 1
CO 2 2 2 3 2 1 2 1 ‐ ‐ 1 1 1
CO 3 2 2 3 2 1 2 1 ‐ ‐ 1 1 1
CO 4 2 2 3 2 1 2 1 ‐ ‐ 1 1 1

UNIT‐I

Parallel Computer Models: The state of computing, Classification of parallel computers, Multiprocessors and
multicomputers, Multivector and SIMD computers.
Program and Network Properties: Conditions of parallelism, Data and resource Dependences, Hardware and
software parallelism, Program partitioning and scheduling, Grain Size and latency, Program flow mechanisms,
Control flow versus data flow, Data flow Architecture, Demand driven mechanisms, Comparisons of flow
mechanisms

UNIT‐II

Pipelining: Linear pipeline processor, nonlinear pipeline processor, Instruction pipeline Design, Mechanisms for
instruction pipelining, Dynamic instruction scheduling, Branch Handling techniques, branch prediction,
Arithmetic Pipeline Design, Computer arithmetic principles, Static Arithmetic pipeline, Multifunctional
arithmetic pipelines

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 471
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT‐III

Arithmetic for Computers: Signed and unsigned Numbers, Addition and Subtraction, Multiplication, Division,
Floating Point.
CPU Performance and Its factors, Evaluating performance of CPU.

UNIT‐IV

Memory Hierarchy: Introduction, The basics of Cache, Measuring and Improving of Cache Performance, Virtual
Memory, Common framework for memory hierarchies
Case study of PIV and AMD opteron memory hierarchies

Text Books:
1. Kai Hwang, “Advanced computer architecture”; TMH. 2000
2. D. A. Patterson and J. L. Hennessey, “Computer organization and design”, Morgan Kaufmann, 2nd Ed. 2002

Reference Books:
1. J.P.Hayes, “computer Architecture and organization”; MGH. 1998
2. Harvey G.Cragon,”Memory System and Pipelined processors”; Narosa Publication. 1998
3. V.Rajaranam & C.S.R.Murthy, “Parallel computer”; PHI. 2002
4. R.K.Ghose, Rajan Moona & Phalguni Gupta, “Foundation of Parallel Processing”, Narosa Publications, 2003
5. Kai Hwang and Zu, “Scalable Parallel Computers Architecture”, MGH. 2001
6. Stalling W, “Computer Organisation & Architecture”, PHI. 2000
7. D.Sima, T.Fountain, P.Kasuk, “Advanced Computer Architecture‐A Design space Approach” Addison
Wesley, 1997.
8. M.J Flynn, “Computer Architecture, Pipelined and Parallel Processor Design”; Narosa Publishing. 1998
9. D.A.Patterson, J.L.Hennessy, “Computer Architecture: A quantitative approach”; Morgan Kauffmann feb,
2002.
10. Hwan and Briggs, “Computer Architecture and Parallel Processing”; MGH. 1999

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 472
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Advanced Computer Networks and Administration L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CSE‐NET 6 PC PC NET‐344T
EAE 6 NET‐EAE NET‐EAE‐1 NET‐344T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. Demonstrate proficiency in configuring and managing routing protocols.
2. Evaluate and implement multicast technologies in IP environments.
3. Explore the concepts and architecture of Highspeed network technologies.
4. Understand network administration process.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Analyze TCP/IP variants, network Algorithm’s, Protocols and their functionalities.
CO 2 Evaluate the appropriate network protocols in real network environment.
CO 3 Recognize issues/complexities encountered in a computer network.
CO 4 Understand and perform network administration.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 3 2 2 ‐ 1 1 1 2 ‐ 3
CO 2 3 2 3 2 2 ‐ 1 1 1 2 ‐ 3
CO 3 3 2 3 2 2 ‐ 1 1 1 2 ‐ 3
CO 4 3 3 3 2 2 ‐ 1 1 1 2 1 3

UNIT‐I

Network Layer: ARP, RARP, ICMP, IPv4 Routing Principles, Routing and overview, DVR and LSR, the IGRP and
EIGRP, BGP, Routing Information Protocol (RIP), OSPF (IPv4 / IPv6).
Multicasting in IP Environments‐Broadcasting, Multicasting, IGMP and Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD). The
Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol (DVMRP), Multicast OSPF (MOSPF), Protocol Independent Multicast
(PIM).

UNIT‐II

Transport Layer: Transport layer overview, UDP, TCP (Flow Control, Error Control, and Connection
Establishment), TCP Protocol: TCP Tahoe, TCP Reno.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 473
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT‐III

Optical Networking: Introduction to Optical networking, its benefits and drawbacks, SONET layered
architecture, frame format, SONET network configuration, its advantages and benefits.
TCP/IP Applications: VoIP, NFS, Telnet ,FTP, SMTP, SNMP, Finger, Whois and WWW, IP v6 and Next
Generation Networks, xAAS (PAAS, SAAS, HAAS) and Cloud Computing, Big data, Elements of Social Network.

UNIT‐IV

Administration: Introduction to Server Hardware, alternative network options such as peer to peer and server‐
based networks, Design and configure a domain environment, Connect clients to a network, Introduce the
concepts involved with accessing and administrating data.

Text Books:
1. Douglas E. Comer, "Internet networking with TCP/IP", Pearson. TCP/IP, Vol. 2
2. B. A. Forouzan, "TCP/IP Protocol Suite", TMH, 2nd Ed., 2004.
3. Mark Minasi, “Mastering Windows 2000 Server”, Sybex, ISBN: 0‐7821‐2774‐6

Reference Books:
1. TCP/IP Illustrated, Volume 1 (The Protocols) by W. Richard Stevens, Pearson Education.
2. U. Black, "Computer Networks‐Protocols, Standards and Interfaces", PHI, 1996.
3. W. Stallings, "Computer Communication Networks", PHI, 1999.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 474
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Advanced Computer Networks and Administration Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CSE‐NET 6 PC PC NET‐344P
EAE 6 NET‐EAE NET‐EAE‐1 NET‐344P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Advanced Computer Networks and
Administration) as this is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Configuration and logging to a CISCO Router and introduction to the basic user Interfaces. Introduction to
the basic router configuration and basic commands.
2. Configuration of IP addressing for a given scenario for a given set of topologies.
3. Configure a DHCP Server to serve contiguous IP addresses to a pool of four IP devices with a default
gateway and a default DNS address. Integrate the DHCP server with a BOOTP demon to automatically serve
Windows and Linux OS Binaries based on client MAC address.
4. Configure, implement and debug the following: Use open source tools for debugging and diagnostics.
a. ARP/RARP protocols
b. RIP routing protocols
c. BGP routing
d. OSPF routing protocols
e. Static routes (check using netstat)
5. Configure DNS: Make a caching DNS client, and a DNS Proxy; implement reverse DNS and forward DNS,
using TCP dump/Wireshark characterise traffic when the DNS server is up and when it is down.
6. Configure FTP Server on a Linux/Windows machine using a FTP client/SFTP client characterise file transfer
rate for a cluster of small files 100k each and a video file of 700mb.Use a TFTP client and repeat the
experiment.
7. Configure a mail server for IMAP/POP protocols and write a simple SMTP client in C/C++/Java client to send
and receive mails.
8. Implement Open NMS+ SNMPD for checking Device status of devices in community MIB of a linux PC.
9. Using yellow pages and NIS/NFS protocols implement Network Attached Storage Controller (NAS).
10. Extend this to serve a windows client using SMB. Characterise the NAS traffic using wireshark.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 475
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Advanced Construction Materials and Practices L P C

4 4

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 6 CTM‐EAE CTM‐EAE‐2 CEC‐310

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To learn about the different type of advanced material like timber, plastic, sound insulated material.
2. To understand the technique used in tunnelling and formwork
3. To know about the concept of Low cost housing and pre‐fabricated structure.
4. To learn the applications of Ferro cement in construction industry.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Characterise and specify advanced construction materials for thermal and sound insulation, smart
materials and plastic and timber products.
CO 2 Identify and Specify construction techniques for earthwork, tunnelling and formwork.
CO 3 Know how to Design Low Cost Housing and cost analysis of In‐ Situ Pre‐Cast, Prefabricated and
Modular construction.
CO 4 Identify and Specify construction technique for application of Ferro cement
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 1 2 ‐ 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐
CO 2 3 1 ‐ 2 3 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐
CO 3 ‐ 1 2 2 3 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐
CO 4 3 1 2 2 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐

UNIT‐I

Advanced Construction Materials: Plastics, Timber products and Preservation, materials for thermal insulation,
materials for sound insulation. Smart Materials and their applications. Special Concretes: Light Weight
Concrete, Vacuum Concrete, Waste Material Based.
Advance Concreting: Concrete, Fibre reinforced concrete, Polymer Concrete Composites, Ferro cement,
concreting at High and Low Temperatures, Self‐ Compacting Concrete (SCC), Ready Mixed Concrete (RMC) and
its characteristics and advantages, Shotcrete and concreting in tunnels.

UNIT‐II

Techniques for Tunnelling and Formwork: Earthwork including cut and cover method, TBM, EBM and
trenchless technology, Slip Form Shuttering, Latest type of Formwork, e.g. DOKA.
High Rise Structures: Construction techniques for high rise buildings, chimneys, dams. Special problems of

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 476
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

high‐rise construction & optimization of space.

UNIT‐III

Fire Resistance in Structures: Fire Protection ‐ Fire Alarm & Detection Systems, Fire Extinguishers, Fire hazards
in buildings and preventive measures. Fixed Installations– Fire doors, Smoke Ceiling, compartmentation,
pressurisation, etc., Fire Safety Practice, Fire Safety Management
Low Cost Housing: Definition and Types of low cost housing, Design process of low cost housing and
advantages and disadvantages, Special Constructions.
Precast and Prefabricated Construction and Modular Construction: production and utilisation in various types
of structures, Environmental and Economic Benefits.

UNIT ‐ IV

Ferro cement : Definition of Ferro cement, applications of Ferro cement, materials used in Ferro cement,
parameters and properties of materials used in Ferro cement, cement mortar mix, skeletal steel, steel mesh
reinforcement, fibre reinforced polymeric meshes, advantages of FRP, disadvantages of FRP, behaviour of Ferro
cement in tension, advantages of Ferro cement, difference between Ferro cement and reinforced cement
concrete: Physical and Mechanical properties, Concrete and other cementitious composite materials

Textbook(s):
1. M.L. Gambhir , Neha Jamwal, Building Materials, Products, properties and systems, Mc Graw Hill(2011)
2. M.L. Gambhir, Concrete Technology, Mc Graw Hill(2013)

References:
1. Low Cost Houses, Publications by HUDCO, India Habitat Centre, Lodhi Road, New Delhi(1982)
2. F. Glower, Structural Pre‐cast Concrete, Oxford Publishers.(1974)
3. Shetty, M.S., “Concrete Technology”, SCC Ltd., New Delhi
4. Neville, A.M., “Properties of Concrete”, Longman, India

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 477
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Advanced Control Systems for Instrumentation L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ICE 6 PCE PCE‐1 ICE‐314T
EAE 7 CI‐EAE CI‐EAE‐3 CI‐407T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To understand the mathematical modelling of physical systems using state space.
2. To do the discrete‐time mathematical modelling of physical system in both Time domain and
frequency domain.
3. To evaluate the non‐linear system behaviour in phase plane and its stability.
4. To assessdistinct systems stability using Lyapunov stability criterion.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Understand and derive discrete‐time mathematical model in both time domain and frequency domain
CO 2 Apply and formulate mathematical model and state space model of physical systems.
CO 3 Evaluate nonlinear system behaviour by phase plane and describing function methods and analyse its
stability.
CO 4 Design and assess different systems stability using Lyapunov stability analysis.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 3 2 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 3
CO 2 3 3 1 3 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 3
CO 3 3 3 3 3 3 ‐ 2 ‐ 1 ‐ ‐ 3
CO 4 3 3 2 3 3 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 3

Unit I

State Space Analysis: Introduction, state space representation of continuous LTI systems, transfer function and
state variables, transfermatrix, EIGEN values and EIGEN vectors, Solution of State equations, controllability and
observability,canonical forms (CCF, OCF, DCF, JCF).

Unit II

Discrete System: Introduction to discrete time systems, sampling process, Z‐transform and inverse Z‐transforms
and hold circuits,presentation by difference equation and its solution, pulse transfer function, transient and
steady state responses,Dead beat response, steady state error, Representation of discrete systems in state
variable form and its solution,stability of digital control system, digital equivalent of conventional
controller/compensator.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 478
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Unit III

Non‐Linear System: Introduction, Non‐linear system behaviour and different types of non‐linearities, Describing
function analysis,assumptions and definitions, DF of common non‐linearities, Phase Plane Analysis, singular
points, constructionof phase portrait, phase plane analysis of linear/non‐linear systems, existence of limit
cycles, jump phenomenon,stability analysis.

Unit IV

Lyapunov Theory and Adaptive Control: Lyapunov direct method, positive definite functions and Lyapunov
functions, existence of Lyapunov functions,Lyapunov analysis of LTI systems, variable gradient method,
performance analysis, Popov’sstability criteria.Introduction to basic approaches to adaptive control ‐ Model
reference adaptive control systems, self ‐tuningregulators, Applications of adaptive control.

Textbooks:
1. Dorf‐State Space Analysis, Modern Control System, Pearson 4th edition, 2002
2. M. Gopal‐Digital Control and State Variable Methods, TMH 4th Edition.

References:
1. K. Ogata, “Discrete Time Control System”, Prentice Hall International.
2. J. J. Stoline, Nonlinear Control System.
3. B. C. Kuo, “Digital Control Systems”, Oxford, 2007.
4. Kirk, Donald E. Optimal control theory: an introduction. Courier Corporation, 2004.
5. Brian D.O.Adnerson & John B. Moore, Optimal Control.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 479
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Advanced Control Systems for Instrumentation Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ICE 6 PCE PCE‐1 ICE‐314P
EAE 7 CI‐EAE CI‐EAE‐3 CI‐407P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Advanced Control Systems for
Instrumentation) as this is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Study of open loop and closed loop time/ frequency responses of first/second order LTI system.
2. Conversion of transfer functions to state model of LTI system and vice versa.
3. Determine State Space Model of a given system and determine its controllability and observability.
4. Analysis of Zero order hold and first order hold circuits.
5. Conversion of transfer functions to state model of discrete time system.
6. To determine state transition matrix of a given system.
7. Study of saturation and dead zone non‐linearity using describing function technique of a relay
controlsystem.
8. To draw phase trajectory of a given non‐linear system.
9. Experiments based on PLC applications e.g., Lift control models, pick and place module etc.
10. Study of operation of a stepper motor interface with microprocessor.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 480
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Advanced DBMS L P C
3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CST/ITE 6 PCE PCE‐1 CIE‐310T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To do database programming.
2. To learn various advance concepts of relational model.
3. To learn the need and concepts of object relational model.
4. To know about emerging databases.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Able to perform database programming.
CO 2 Able to understand the various advance concepts of databases such as transaction processing
CO 3 Able to differentiate between relational model and object relational model.
CO 4 Able to identify the emerging developments in the field of database technologies
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 2 2 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 2 2 3
CO 2 3 3 2 2 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 2 2 3
CO 3 3 3 2 3 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 2 2 3
CO 4 3 3 2 3 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 2 2 3

UNIT‐I

Concept of advanced database techniques, Impact of emerging database standards, Study of DDBMS
architecture, New developments in database technology
Database Programming: Introduction, Database Objects, Procedures, Functions, Packages, Triggers,
Programmatic SQL, Embedded SQL, Dynamic SQL, and ODBC Standard. Parallel Database Architecture, Data
base System Structure, Storage Manager, Query Processor.

UNIT‐II

Introduction to the Relational Model, Advanced Transaction Processing, Relational model conformity and
Integrity, Data Replication, Security considerations, Querying relational data and relational Algebra, Query
processing & optimization, Integrity Constraints.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 481
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT‐III

Object Oriented database concepts, Object relational database concepts, Temporal database concepts, Mobile
Databases, Object based databases Complex data types, structured types and inheritance in SQL, object
identity and reference types in SQL

UNIT ‐ IV

Structure of XML, Document Schema, Querying and Transformation, API in XML, XML applications. Postgre SQL,
Oracle, SQL standards, SQL1999, SQL: 2003, Standards for interoperability and integration, XML related
specifications, X‐Query, X‐Path, Web Services, SOAP

Textbook(s):
1. Elmasri, Navathe, Fundamentals of Database Systems, 5th Edition, Pearson Education, India.
2. Data base System Concepts, Silberschatz, Korth, McGraw hill, V edition.

References:
1. Raghu Ramakrishnan, Johannes Gehrke, Database Management Systems, McGraw‐ Hill
2. Fundamentals of Database Systems, Elmasri Navrate Pearson Education
3. S.R. Prabhu, “Object‐Oriented Database Systems: Approaches and Architectures”, Prentice‐Hall of India,
Pvt. Ltd., Second edition, 2005.
4. SQL/ PL/SQL, The programming language of Oracle, Ivan Bayross, 4th Edition BPB Publications.
5. Rajesh Narang, “Object Oriented Interfaces and Databases”, Prentice‐Hall of India, Pvt. Ltd., 2004.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 482
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Advanced DBMS Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CST/ITE 6 PCE PCE‐1 CIE‐310P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Advanced DBMS) as this is the practical
component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Creation of tables using all types of constraints.

2. Queries based on join of more than two tables with respect of vertical fragmentats of table.
3. Queries based on set operators with respect to horizonal fragmentation of table.
4. Queries based on nested subqueries.
5. Queries based on corelated subqueries.
6. Creation of views based on multiple tables.
7. Queries based on views.
8. Creation of procedures using cursor with exception handling.
9. Creation of triggers on tables.
10. Creation of triggers on views.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 483
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Advanced Environmental Engineering and Design L P C

4 4

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 6 IE‐EAE IE‐EAE‐2 IE‐324

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To introduce the concepts and understand the importance of designing water supply structures.
2. To study and gain knowledge about the water treatment process and design.
3. To Know the facts and information about the various process involved in treatment of wastewater
4. To Realise the potential of application of software in designing water distribution networks.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Understand the concept and need of environmental engineering design work.
CO 2 Learn about the design stages and process.
CO 3 Analyse the process involved and their feasibility.
CO 4 Understand the mechanism and processes of designing water distribution network
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 ‐ 1 ‐ 2 1 ‐ ‐ 1 3 2 1
CO 2 ‐ 3 1 1 1 ‐ 1 ‐ 2 ‐ 1 1
CO 3 2 ‐ 3 2 ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 ‐ 1
CO 4 2 ‐ ‐ 1 1 ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ 1 2 1

UNIT‐I

Design of Intake structures. Site investigations for subsurface water sources and design of Infiltration wells,
Infiltration galleries. Concept and design of Ranney wells.
Size and Cost Optimization of Rising main. Introduction to Linear Programming, dynamic programming, and
Nonlinear Programming. Their application to optimization problems in design of Environmental Engineering
Work.

UNIT‐II

Detailed design of Water treatment that include Screens, Plain sedimentation, Mixing, Flocculators, Clarifiers,
Filtration units and Disinfector units Nano‐filtration softening and Desalination. Design of different types of
Aerators, filters, Coagulation and flocculation,Rapid mix, Clari‐flocculators, Flocculation basin,Softeners, Sludge
processing units etc.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 484
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT‐III

Detailed Design and arrangement of Sewage Treatment Plant: Preliminary/ Primary treatment ‐ Screens, Grit
chamber, skimming tank, Primary sedimentation etc; Physico‐ chemical & Chemical treatment systems;
Biological treatment systems‐ Activated Sludge process, Fixed Film (Trickling Filter), Oxidation Ditch, Oxidation
Pond, UASB; Disposal/ treatment of sludge‐Anaerobic digestion, sludge drying beds.

UNIT – IV

Water treatment Plant using CPHEEO Manual on Water Supply & treatment Design and arrangement of
Sewage Treatment Plant units using CPHEEO Manual on Sewerage and Sewage treatment. Design of Water
distribution network. Use of EPA NET & WATER GEMS in distribution network design. Planning and Design of
storm and sanitary sewers. Computation ‐ flow, cross section size and grade. Hydraulic modelling and design
using SEWER GEMS, / CAD, STORM CAD/ CIVIL STORM.

Textbook(s):
1. Garg, S.K, “Water Supply Engineering, Vol 1”, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi. (ISBN 0‐ 07‐6080479‐3).
2. Garg, S.K, “Sewage Disposal and Air Pollution Engineering, Vol 2”, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi (ISBN 0‐
74‐7458244‐7)

References:
1. Qasim, SR; Motley, EM and Zhu, G. “Water Works Engineering.: Planning, design and operation, Prentice
Hall NJ, USA ISBN 0‐72‐579462‐7) 2000
2. Metcalf & Eddy. “Waste Water Engineering: Treatment and reuse, TMH, 2003
3. CPHEEO Manual on Water Supply & treatment, Min of Urban GOI 1999
4. CPHEEO Manual on Sewerage and Sewage treatment, Min of Urban GOI 2013
5. Arceewala SJ, Waste water treatment for Pollution control, TMH, New Delhi
6. Reynolds, T.D., Richards, P.A., Unit Operations and Processes in Environmental Engineering, PWS
Publishing Company, Boston, 1996.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 485
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Advanced IC Engines L P C
3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 7 TES‐EAE TES‐EAE‐5 TES‐451T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To make the students familiar with the engine fuel and air supply systems, electronic injection systems
used in modern automotive engines.
2. To make the students understand about the combustion in SI and CI engines.
3. To teach the students about the production and utilization of solid, liquid and gaseous fuels.
4. To make students learn about pollutants and advancements in IC engines.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 To learn the components and techniques of an IC engine.
CO 2 To understand concepts of combustion in IC engines.
CO 3 To understand fundamentals and type of fuels.
CO 4 To analyse emissions, emission control and modern trends in IC engines.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 2 2 2 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 2 3 3
CO 2 3 2 2 2 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 2 3 3
CO 3 3 3 2 2 3 ‐ 1 ‐ 2 2 3 3
CO 4 3 2 3 2 3 1 2 ‐ 2 2 3 3

UNIT – I

Fuel supply systems in SI Engine, introduction‐carburetion, mixture requirements, simple carburettor,

compensation devices.
Lubrication systems, high altitude fuel supply device, Electronic injection system, CI engine‐ Injection systems.

UNIT – II

Combustion in SI and CI engines, Ignition ‐ Stages of combustion, Normal and abnormal combustion, Factors
affecting knock, Combustion chambers, Fuel spray behaviour, spray structure, spray penetration‐and
evaporation, air motion, stages of combustion, Factors affecting combustion, Direct and indirect injection
systems, Combustion chambers.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 486
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT ‐ III

Required properties of Fuels for IC engine, Introduction to alternate fuels‐biofuels, thermochemical and
biochemical conversion, Vegetable oils and Biodiesel, Ethanol, LPG, Natural gas, Hydrogen‐Production and
Utilization perspective.
Rating of fuels, High and low tension ignition systems. Ignition timing.

UNIT ‐ IV

Introduction to Turbo charging and supercharging, Exhaust emission from SI and Cl engines, control of
emissions.
Modern trends in I.C. engines‐ Free piston engines, lean burning engines‐rotary engines, modification in I.C
engines to use CNG/Biofuels, HCCI and GDI concepts.

Textbooks:
1. M.L. Mathur and R.P. Sharma, Internal combustion engine, Dhanpat Rai Publications.
2. V. Ganesan, Internal combustion engines, 2nd Edition, TMH Education, 2002.

References:
1. Heinz Heisler, Advanced Engine Technology, Trafalgar Square, 1997.
2. Ferguson & Kirkpatrick, Internal Combustion Engines – Applied Thermosciences, 3rd Edition, Wiley.
3. K.K. Ramalingam, Internal Combustion Engine Fundamentals, Scitech Publications.
4. D. Smith, Auto fuel Systems, The Good Heart Willox Company, Inc.
5. V. Ganesan, Computer simulation of spark ignition process: University process, Hyderabad 1993.
6. V. Ganesan, Computer simulation of compression ignition engine. Orient Long man.
7. P K Nag, Basic and Applied Thermodynamics, McGraw ‐ Hill Education.
8. G. D. Rai, Non conventional energy sources, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 487
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Advanced IC Engines Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 7 TES‐EAE TES‐EAE‐5 TES‐451P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Advanced IC Engines) as this is the
practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Study the comparison between the Spark Ignition engine and Compression Ignition Engine.
2. Study of different types of carburettor in S.I. Engine.
3. Study Ignition Systems in I.C. Engine.
4. Study Fuel Injection Systems in C.I. Engine.
5. Prepare the heat balance sheet of a multi cylinder petrol engine at different load.
6. Prepare the heat balance sheet of a single cylinder 4 stroke diesel engine at different load.
7. Determine the indicated power of a petrol engine by Morse test apparatus.
8. Conduct exergy analysis of exhaust gas calorimeter at different load.
9. Carry out the analysis of an engine performance of a S.I. Engine.
10. Carry out the analysis of an engine performance of a C.I. Engine.
11. Determine the impact of various parameters on the knocking tendency of a S.I. Engine.
12. Determine the impact of various parameters on the knocking tendency of a C.I. Engine.
13. Visit to Automobile Research Lab facility.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 488
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Advanced Java Programming L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CSE/IT/CST/ITE 6 PCE PCE‐1 CIE‐306T
EAE 6 FSD‐EAE FSD‐EAE‐1 FSD‐318T
CSE‐in‐EA 7 OAE‐CSE‐EA OAE‐2 OSD‐453T
OAE 7 SD‐OAE SD‐OAE‐5A OSD‐453T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To learn the ability to design console based, GUI based and web based applications
2. To learn how to create dynamic web pages, using Servlets and JSP.
3. To learn Designing applications using pre‐built framework.
4. To learn how to do distributed programming in Java using RMI, CORBA.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Able to Understand advanced programming concepts.
CO 2 Able to Develop server side programs using JSP and Servlets
CO 3 Able to Develop component‐based java software using java beans.
CO 4 Able to develop advanced projects based on java.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 2 2 3 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 2 2 3
CO 2 3 2 2 3 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 2 2 3
CO 3 3 2 2 3 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 2 2 3
CO 4 3 2 2 3 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 2 2 3

UNIT‐I

Introduction to Java, Inheritance, Exception Handling, Multithreading, Applet Programming. Connecting to a

Server, Implementing Servers, Making URL Connections, Socket Programming.

UNIT‐II

Preparing a Class to be a Java Bean, Creating a Java Bean, Java Bean Properties, Types of beans, Stateful Session
bean, Stateless Session bean, Entity bean Servlet Overview and Architecture, Interface Servlet and the Servlet
Life Cycle, Handling, HTTP GET Requests, Handling HTTP POST Requests, Session Tracking, Cookies.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 489
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT‐III

JSP‐ Introduction, Java Server Pages Overview, Implicit Objects, Scripting, Standard Actions, Directives, Custom
Tag Libraries.

UNIT‐ IV

The Roles of Client and Server, Remote Method Invocations, Setup for Remote Method Invocation, Parameter
Passing in Remote Methods, Introduction of HB, HB Architecture.

Textbook(s):
1. Kathy Sierra, Head First Servlets and JSP, O'Reilly Media.
2. Kanika Lakhani, Advance Java Programming, S.K. Kataria & Sons

References:
1. Brett Spell, Professional Java Programming, WROX Publication.
2. Harvey. M. Dietal, Advanced Java 2 Platform, How to Program, Prentice Hall.
3. Gajendra Gupta, Advanced Java, Firewall Media.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 490
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Advanced Java Programming Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CSE/IT/CST/ITE 6 PCE PCE‐1 CIE‐306P
EAE 6 FSD‐EAE FSD‐EAE‐1 FSD‐318P
CSE‐in‐EA 7 OAE‐CSE‐EA OAE‐2 OSD‐453P
OAE 7 SD‐OAE SD‐OAE‐5A OSD‐453P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Advanced Java Programming) as this is
the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Write a Java program to demonstrate the concept of socket programming.

2. Write a Java program to demonstrate the concept of applet programming.
3. Write a Java program to demonstrate the concept of multi‐threading.

4. Write a Java program to demonstrate the concept of applet.

5. Write a Java program to demonstrate the use of Java Beans.

6. Write a Java program to insert data into a table using JSP.

7. Write JSP program to implement form data validation.

8. Write a Java program to show user validation using Servlet.
9. Write a program to set cookie information using Servlet.
10. Develop a small web program using Servlets, JSPs with Database connectivity.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 491
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Advanced Machine Design L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ME 6 PCE PCE‐2 MEE‐324T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To be able to apply the fluctuating loads concepts in diverse design cases.
2. To understand the stresses in materials at elevated temperatures and to determine the creep rates.
3. To analyse the fracture criterion in the design of steam turbine rotors and pressure vessels.
4. To thoroughly understand the design procedure for flywheels, screw gears, crankshafts.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Conceptualise the dynamic loading designs where elements may fail under yield stress with criticality
of presence of stress concentration.
CO 2 Sustainability synthesis of strain rates in machine parts at higher temperatures under various
parameter methods.
CO 3 Design analysis of fracture development and propagation effects in high speed and high pressure
elements.
CO 4 Conceptualise the dynamic loading designs where elements may fail under yield stress with criticality
of presence of stress concentration.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 3 3 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 1 1 2 3
CO 2 3 3 3 3 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 1 1 2 3
CO 3 3 3 3 3 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 1 1 2 3
CO 4 3 3 3 3 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 1 1 2 3

UNIT‐I

Introduction: Review of failure theories for static and dynamic loading (including fatigue failure).
Design against Fatigue: Dynamic loading and fluctuating stresses, fatigue failure and endurance limit, fatigue
behaviour affecting factors, design under combined direct & varying stresses, Fatigue strength reduction due to
stress raisers, Notch sensitivity, Fatigue design for finite‐life, Low cycle and high cycle fatigue designs.
Design of shafts, springs, plates under variable fatigue loadings, Bolted& Welded joint under fluctuating loads.
Numerical Design Problems.

UNIT‐II

Design against Creep: True stress‐true strain relationship, Creep of solids, Creep phenomenon – transient

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 492
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

creep, secondary creep, Creep ‐ Parameter methods, correlation of creep rupture data, Creep under biaxial
stresses, Stress relaxation, Materials for application at elevated temperatures. Numerical Design Problems.

UNIT‐III

Design against Fracture: Stress intensity factor of a crack in finite bodies, Fracture criterion, Fracture
toughness, Fatigue crack propagation, Plastic deformation around crack tip, Effect of plastic deformation on
fatigue crack growth rate, Crack opening displacement, Design of steam turbine rotors, rotor discs, Design of
thin walled pressure vessel & pressure pipings, Partial crack in thin walled cylinder. Numerical Design Problems.

UNIT – IV

Flywheel: Need for flywheel and flywheel action, flywheel‐ governor differentiation, Materials, Torque analysis
and coefficient of fluctuation of energy, Stresses in rimmed flywheel, Design analysis of Flywheel.
Screw Gearing: General considerations, Geometric relations, Design procedure. Numerical Problems.
Miscellaneous machine elements: Oil seals, Valves, rocker arm, Center and side crankshafts.

Textbook(s):
1. Maleeve Hartman and O.P.Grover, “Machine Design”, CBS Publishers, Sixth Edition (2015).
2. V.B. Bhandari, “Design of Machine elements”, Tata McGraw Hill Education Private Ltd. Third Edition (2012).

References:
1. Mahadevan, “Design Data Book”, CBS Publishers & Distributors.
2. J.E. Shigley& C.R. Mischke, "Mechanical Engineering Design”, Tata McGraw Hill Co. Inc.
3. Juvinal R C, Marshek K M, “Fundamentals of Machine Component Design”, Wiley India.
4. Norton Robert. L. “Machine Design‐An integrated approach” Pearson, Second Edition (2010).
5. Abdul Mubeen, “Machine Design” Khanna Publishers, Fourth Edition (2005).

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 493
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Advanced Machine Design Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ME 6 PCE PCE‐2 MEE‐324P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Advanced Machine Design) as this is
the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. To perform standard rotating beam experiment on specimens on Fatigue testing machine under reversed
bending load and to draw the S‐N or log S‐log N curve for the specimen material.

2. To establish the fatigue curve, Goodman diagram and Soderberg diagram for a non‐ferrous material.
3. To establish the creep curve and steady state creep rate for a given material at different temperatures and
stress levels.
4. To establish various creep parameters for a given material.
5. To determine the theoretical stress concentration factor Kt for a given geometrical configuration for a gear
tooth with crack at its bottom.
6. To determine the theoretical stress concentration factor Kt for a given geometrical configuration for a shaft
with crack at its shoulder.
7. To determine the law of fatigue crack propagation for a given material under given loading condition.

8. To determine the fracture toughness of material.

9. To determine the main dimensions of a flywheel for a given operation conditions.
10. To find the main dimensions of a crankshaft for a 2‐stroke gas engine running at a speed. The maximum
pressure and distance between cylinder centre lines being given.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 494
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Advanced Microprocessors (ARM) & Interfacing L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 6 ES‐EAE ES‐EAE‐1C ES‐310T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To learn Generalized structures of embedded system.
2. To understand ARM processor in detail.
3. Apply hardware interfacing of ARM with different devices.
4. To create different real time application based embedded system design.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Ability to Understand and apply the concepts of ARM processors and understand various Bus
structures in programming.
CO 2 Ability to understand different control units of ARM processor.
CO 3 To apply the knowledge of embedded bus structures to understand interfacing concepts.
CO 4 Ability to apply interfacing for real time applications.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 2 2 1 3 2 ‐ ‐ 2 3 3 3
CO 2 2 2 3 2 3 2 ‐ ‐ 2 3 3 3
CO 3 2 2 2 1 3 2 ‐ ‐ 2 3 2 3
CO 4 3 3 3 3 3 2 ‐ ‐ 2 3 3 3

UNIT‐I

Generalized ARM Concepts: ARM Processors: ARM Processor Fundamentals, Comparison of ARM architecture
with previous microcontrollers, ARM 7 Data Path, Registers, Memory Organization, Instruction set, Barrel
shifter, Programming, Exception programming, Interrupt Handling, Thumb mode Architecture and instruction
set. Bus structure: Time multiplexing, serial, parallel communication bus structure. Bus arbitration, DMA, PCI,
AMBA, I2C and SPI Buses.

UNIT‐II

Specific ARM: LPC 2148‐ Salient features, applications, block diagram, memory mapping. Functional features of
Interrupt controller, RTC, USB, UART, I2C, SPI, SSP controllers, watch dog timers and other system control units.

UNIT‐III

ARM and Digital Signal Processing (DSP): Interfacing and applications: Digital signal processing: Operating on

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 495
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Values Stored in Fixed‐Point Format, Addition and Subtraction of Fixed‐Point Signals, Multiplication of Fixed‐
Point Signals, Division of Fixed‐Point Signals, Square Root of a Fixed‐Point Signal, FIR filters, IIR filters, The
Discrete Fourier Transform

UNIT‐IV

Hardware Interfacing: LCD and keyboard interfacing, ADC, DAC, and Sensor Interfacing, RTC Interfacing, Relay,
Opto‐ isolator, and Stepper Motor Interfacing, PWM and DC Motor Control, DRAM Memory Technology and
DMA Controller

Textbook(s):
5. ARM System Developer’s Guide Designing and Optimizing System Software, Andrew N. Sloss, Dominic Symes,
Chris Wright, Elsevier.
6. ARM Architecture Reference Manual, David Seal, Addison Wesley.

Reference Books:
4. TI ARM Peripherals Programming and Interfacing Using C Language for ARM Cortex, Muhammad Ali Mazidi,
Shujen Chen, Sarmad Naimi, Sepehr Naimi.
5. ARM Assembly Language Programming &amp; Architecture, Muhammad Ali Mazidi, Sarmad Naimi, Sepehr
Naimi, Janice Mazidi.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 496
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Advanced Microprocessors (ARM) & Interfacing Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 6 ES‐EAE ES‐EAE‐1C ES‐310P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Advanced Microprocessors (ARM) &
Interfacing) as this is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Learn how to use Embest IDE for ARM and ARM Software Emulator.
2. Write a program to change ARM state mode by using MRS/MMSR instruction.
3. Write a delay function using C language. Use embedded assembly code.
4. Write a random number generation function using assembly language.
5. Use assembly and C language to read/write words, half‐words, bytes, half bytes from/to RAM.
6. Get familiar with the method of configuring the ARM I/O port via programming. Implement the lighting and
winking LED1, LED2 of the hardware board.
7. Write programs that implement an interrupt service routine.
8. Write programs that use the RTC. Modify the setting of time and date. Display the current system clock
time through the serial port.
9. Write a program that displays 0‐9, A‐F to the 8‐SEG LED.
10. Develop a project that accepts the keys of the keyboard pad through interrupt service routine and display
the values on the 8‐SEG LED.
11. Write programs to get the coordinate values when the touch panel is pressed. Write programs to output
the coordinate values of the touch panel through the serial port. Write programs to display 0‐9, A‐F on the
LCD to show the range of the coordinate.
12. Download the code to the target board through the local LAN using TFTP/IP protocol.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 497
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Advanced Microprocessors and Microcontroller L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ECE 6 PCE PCE‐1 ECE‐312T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. Understand the internal organization of 16‐bit Intel microprocessors and apply the knowledge to
develop assembly language programs using 8086 microprocessor.
2. Understand the architecture and operation of Programmable Peripheral Devices and their interfacing
with 8086 microprocessor.
3. Understand the architecture and operation of advanced microprocessors.
4. Understand the internal organization of 8‐bit Intel microcontrollers and apply the knowledge to
develop assembly language programs using 8051 microcontroller..
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Ability to understand and distinguish the use of different 8086 instructions and apply those
instructions for implementing assembly language programs.
CO 2 Understand the architecture and operation of Programmable Peripheral Devices and ability to use
them for interfacing I/O devices.
CO 3 Understand the architecture and operation of 80186, 80286, 80386, 80486 and Pentium processors.
CO 4 Design and implement assembly language programs for 8051 microcontroller.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 3 2 ‐ ‐ 1 2 2 1 1 1
CO 2 3 3 3 2 3 ‐ 1 2 2 1 1 1
CO 3 3 2 2 2 2 ‐ 1 2 2 1 1 1
CO 4 3 3 3 2 3 ‐ 1 2 2 1 1 1

UNIT‐I

8086 Microprocessor: Architecture of 8086, Difference between 8086 and 8088, Programming Model,
generation of physical address, Memory Segmentation, PIN diagram of 8086, Minimum mode and Maximum
mode configurations, Timing Diagrams. Instruction set of 8086, Assembler Directives, Assembly Language
Programming, 8086 Interrupts, Memory Interfacing. Architecture of NDP 8087.

UNIT‐II

IInterfacing and Programming of 8086 with 8255, 8254/ 8253, 8251, 8259, 8257: Introduction, Generation of
I/O Ports, Programmable Peripheral Interface (PPI)‐Intel 8255, Sample‐and‐Hold Circuit and Multiplexer,

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 498
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Keyboard and Display Interface, Keyboard and Display Controller (8279), Programmable Interval timers (Intel
8253/8254), USART (8251), PIC (8259), DMA (8257).

UNIT‐III

Architecture of 80186, 80286, 80386, 80486 and Pentium Processors. Generation of physical address of 80286,
80386 and 80486.

UNIT‐IV

Overview of Microcontroller 8051: Introduction to 8051 Microcontroller, Architecture, Memory organization,

Special function registers, Port Operation, Memory Interfacing, I/O Interfacing, Programming 8051 resources,
interrupts, Programmer‘s model of 8051, Operand types, Operand addressing, Data transfer instructions,
Arithmetic instructions, Logic instructions, Control transfer instructions, Timer & Counter Programming,
Interrupt Programming. Interfacing of DAC, ADC and Stepper Motor with 8051.

Textbook(s):
1. Sunil Mathur and Jeebananda Panda, “Microprocessors and Microcontrollers: Programming and
Interfacing”, PHI, 2019.
2. Muhammad Ali Mazidi, “Microprocessors and Microcontrollers”, Pearson, 2006.
3. Barry B. Brey, “The Intel Microprocessors: Architecture, Programming and Interfacing”, Eighth Edition, PHI.

References:
1. Douglas V Hall, “Microprocessors and Interfacing, Programming and Hardware” Tata McGraw Hill, 2006.
2. A K Ray, K M Bhurchandi, “Advanced Microprocessors and Peripherals”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2007.
3. Muhammad Ali Mazidi, Janice Gillispie Mazidi, Rolin D. MCKinlay, “The 8051 Microcontroller and
Embedded Systems”, Second Edition, Pearson Education 2008.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 499
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Advanced Microprocessors and Microcontroller Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ECE 6 PCE PCE‐1 ECE‐312P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Advanced Microprocessors and
Microcontroller) as this is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Write a program to add & subtract two 16‐bit numbers with/ without carry using 8086.
2. Write a program to multiply & divide two 8 bit numbers using 8086.
3. Write a program in 8086 to add two binary numbers of 16 byte lengths.
4. Write a program in 8086 to find the largest/ smallest numbers from ten bytes stored in consecutive
memory location.
5. Write a Program to generate Fibonacci series using 8086.
6. Write a Program to generate Factorial of a number using 8086.
7. Write a Program to read 16‐bit Data from a port and display the same in another port.
8. Write a Program to generate a square wave using 8254.
9. Write a Program to subtract the 16bit data of register R0 – R1 from another 16 bit data stored in R2 – R3.
Save the result in memory location 40H and 41H using 8051.
10. Write a Program to multiply two numbers stored in external RAM location 8000H and 8001H and save the
result in 8002H and 8003H using 8051.
11. Write a Program to transfer a block of 16 bytes from RAM location starting at 50H to RAM location starting
at 70H using 8051.
12. Write a program in 8051 to find the largest/ smallest numbers from ten bytes stored in consecutive
memory location.
13. Design a Minor project using 8086 Microprocessor (Ex: Traffic light controller/temperature controller etc)

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 500
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Advanced Power Electronic Converters L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 6 PED‐EAE PED‐EAE‐1 PED‐316T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To impart the knowledge of controlled rectifiers, their operation and analysis.
2. To impart understanding of switching mode regulators, their classification and performance.
3. To impart the knowledge of AC voltage controllers & cycloconverters, their working and applications.
4. To impart the knowledge of Inverters, their working principle, voltage control techniques and design.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 The students will be able to understand about various types of converters, their working and analyse
them at different type loads.
CO 2 The students will be able to understand the use of different converters in real time applications.
CO 3 The students will be able to carry out simulation of various converters and observing their response
under different load conditions.
CO 4 The students will be able to select a converter for the desired applications.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1
CO 2 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1
CO 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1
CO 4 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1

UNIT‐I

AC‐DC Converters: Single phase half controlled and fully controlled converters‐Evaluation of input power factor
and harmonic factor, Continuous & discontinuous load current, Single phase dual converters, Power factor
improvements‐Extinction angle control, Symmetric angle control, PWM, Single phase sinusoidal PWM, Three
phase half controlled and fully controlled converters‐Evaluation of input power factor and harmonic factor,
Continuous & discontinuous load current, Three phase dual converters, Power factor improvements, Three
phase PWM, Twelve pulse converter.

UNIT‐II

DC‐DC Converters: Analysis of step‐down and step‐up DC‐DC converters with resistive and resistive‐inductive
loads, Performance parameters‐Ripple current of inductor, Maximum switching frequency, Switching mode
regulators‐Analysis of Buck regulators, Boost regulators, Buck‐Boost Regulators and Cuk regulators, Condition

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 501
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

for continuous inductor current and capacitor voltage, Comparison of regulators.

UNIT‐III

AC‐AC Converters: Working principle of single phase unidirectional and bidirectional AC voltage controllers,
Analysis with resistive and resistive‐inductive loads, single phase transformer connection changer, Three phase
AC voltage controllers‐Analysis with star and delta connected resistive, resistive‐inductive loads, Effect of
source inductances.
Cycloconverters: Analysis of midpoint and bridge configuration of single‐single & three‐three phase
cycloconverters, advantages, limitations and applications of cycloconverters.

UNIT ‐ IV

DC‐AC Converters: Single Phase pulse width modulated inverters‐ Principle of operation, Performance
parameters, Single phase bridge inverter‐Evaluation of output voltage and current with resistive, inductive and
capacitive loads, Voltage control of single‐phase inverters‐Single PWM, Multiple PWM, Sinusoidal PWM,
Modified sinusoidal PWM, Phase displacement control.
Three phase pulse width modulated inverters‐ Analysis of 180‐ & 120‐degree conduction for output voltage
with resistive and resistive‐inductive loads, Voltage control of three phase inverters,
Current source inverter, variable d.c. link inverter, boost inverter, buck and boost inverter design, introduction
to multilevel inverters.

Textbook(s):
1. M.H. Rashid “Power Electronics: Circuits, Devices & Applications”, Pearson Education.
2. Ned Mohan, T.M.Undeland and W.P. Robbins “Power Electronics: Converters, Applications and Design”,
Wiley India Ltd.

References:
1. D.W. Hart “Introduction to Power Electronics”, Prentice Hall Inc.
2. P. C. Sen, “Power Electronics”, TataMc Graw‐Hill.
3. P.S. Bimbhra, “Power Electronics”, Khanna Publishers.
4. R.S. Ananda Murthy, V. Nattarasu, “Power Electronics”, Pearson.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 502
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Advanced Power Electronic Converters Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 6 PED‐EAE PED‐EAE‐1 PED‐316P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Advanced Power Electronic
Converters) as this is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. To study single phase fully controlled bridge rectifier with resistive and inductive load.
2. To study single phase fully controlled bridge rectifier with DC motor load.
3. To study three phase fully controlled bridge rectifier with resistive and inductive load.
4. To study single phase AC voltage regulator with resistive and inductive load.
5. To study the operation of single phase cyclo‐converter.
6. To study MOSFET/IGBT based single phase bridge inverter.
7. To simulate a single‐phase half wave‐controlled rectifier with R and RL loads and attain plot of load voltage
and load current waveforms.
8. To obtain the simulation of single‐phase fully controlled rectifier and plot the load voltage and load current
waveforms for inductive load.
9. To obtain the simulation of single‐phase full wave AC voltage controller and plot the load voltage and load
current waveforms for inductive load.
10. To simulate the model of a Buk converter and plot the output voltage waveform.
11. To obtain the simulation of single‐phase cyclo‐converter feeding R and RL loads and plot load voltage
waveforms.
12. To study the operation of SPWM Inverter.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 503
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Advanced Process Control L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ICE 7 PCE PCE‐5 ICE‐417T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To understand the basic concepts of advanced process control schemes.
2. To Learn the basics of linear and non‐linear controllers.
3. To Learn the multivariable control systems
4. To study the evolution and advantages of computer control.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Realization of stability techniques in Process Control System.
CO 2 Apply the concept of advanced control schemes in various processes
CO 3 Implement the linear and nonlinear controller on distinct systems..
CO 4 Design of control systems for multivariable process
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 2 3 2 3 1 2 1 2 2 ‐ 3
CO 2 3 3 3 3 3 2 ‐ 2 3 2 2 3
CO 3 3 3 2 2 3 2 2 3 2 2 2 3
CO 4 3 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 3

Unit I

Introduction to advanced Control Schemes: Cascade, Feed‐forward, Feed‐forward plus Feedback, Ratio
control,Inferential control, Dead time and Inverse response compensation, Adaptive control, Model reference
adaptive control, Self‐tuning regulator Interactions and Decoupling of Control Loops.

Unit II

Nonlinear Control Systems: Definition and characteristics of nonlinear systems, Difference between linear and
nonlinear systems,PID controller, Derivative action, Problems with proportional kick and reset wind‐up,Internal
Model Control(IMC), Dahlin’s method,Stability Analysis, Interaction Analysis and Multi‐loop Control, Soft
Sensing and State Estimation.

Unit III

Design of control systems for multivariable process: Study of interactions and its effects, Modelling and

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 504
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

transfer functions, Multivariable control system, multi‐loop control Performance through: Loop Pairing, tuning,
Enhancement through Decoupling, Single LoopEnhancements.Stability Analysis‐ Lyapunov Functions,
Interaction Analysis and Multi‐loop Control, inferential control.

Unit IV

Distributed Control System (DCS): Evolution and advantages of computer control, Configuration of
Supervisory, Direct digital control (DDC), Model predictive control (MPC), Linear Quadratic Gaussian (LQG)
Control, Statistical Process Control, Process Control System Synthesis‐ Some Case Studies.

Textbooks:
1. B.W. Bequette, “Process Control: Modeling, Design and Simulation”, Prentice Hall.
2. K. Ogata, Modern Control Engineering, Prentice Hall of India, 4th edition, 2002.

References:
1. Johnson Curtis D, “Process Control Instrumentation Technology”, Prentice Hall ofIndia, New Delhi (1997).
2. Liptak B G, “Handbook of Process Control “, 3rd Ed., Chilton Press (1995).
3. S.Bhanot, Process Control: Principles and Applications, Oxford University Press, 2008.
4. George Stephanopoulos, “Chemical Process Control – An introduction to Theory &
Practice”, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi (1995).
5. W.L. Luyben, Process Modelling Simulation and Control for Chemical Engineers, McGraw Hill, 2nd Ed,
1990.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 505
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Advanced Process Control Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ICE 7 PCE PCE‐5 ICE‐417P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Advanced Process Control) as this is
the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. To study the performance of ON –OFF/P/PI/PD/PID controllers on level process

2. To study the performance of ON –OFF/P/PI/PD/PID controllers on flow process.
3. To study the performance of ON‐OFF/P/PI/PD/PID controllers on temperature process.
4. To obtain the open and closed loop response of a higher order system usingSIMULINK software.Given
transfer function = 𝐺 𝑠

5. To study the complex control system using MATLAB and to compare theresponse of simple and cascade
loop.
6. To study the response of process with and without transportation lag.
7. Internal Model Control based controller design forContinuous Stirred Tank Reactor(CSTR).
8. Study and perform Lyapunov‐Function Based Control Schemes for inverted pendulum.
9. To obtain the time domain specification for a second order system using PID controller.
10. To study Distributed Control Systems application and logic operations with master and slave controllers.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 506
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Advanced Semiconductor Devices L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EEE 7 PCE PCE‐5 EEE‐417T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To impart the basic Knowledge of p‐n junctions
2. To impart the knowledge of functioning of Unipolar devices, working principle and characteristics.
3. To impart the knowledge of special microwave devices and tunnelling phenomenon.
4. To impart the knowledge of photonic devices and solar cells.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 To understand the basic laws of p‐n junctions.
CO 2 To understand functioning of Unipolar devices, working principle and characteristics.
CO 3 Understand the characteristics special microwave devices and tunnelling devices.
CO 4 To analyse photonic devices and solar cells,
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 ‐ 2 1 ‐ 2
CO 2 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 ‐ 2 1 ‐ 2
CO 3 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 ‐ 2 1 ‐ 2
CO 4 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 ‐ 2 1 ‐ 2

UNIT I

Junctions and Interfaces: Description of p‐n junction, Action, The Abrupt Junction, Example of an Abrupt
Junction, The linearly graded Junction. The Ideal Diode Model, Real Diodes, Temperature Dependence of I‐V
Characteristics, High Level Injection Effects, Example of Diodes. Transient behaviour and Noise.
Junction breakdown: Description of Breakdown Mechanism, Zener and Avalanche Breakdown in p‐n Junction,
Introduction to Schottky junctions.

UNIT II

MOS Transistors: Basic Structures and the Operating Principle, I‐V Characteristics,. Hetero junctions, Schottky
effect, Metal insulator‐ Semiconductor diodes. Charge coupled devices.
Metal Semiconductor Field Effect Transistors: Basic Types of MESFETs, Models for I‐V Characteristics of Short
Channel MESFETs, High Frequency Performance, MESFETs Structures.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 507
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT III

Tunnel Devices: Tunnel Diode, TUNNEL Transistors, Related Tunnel Devices, Resonant Tunneling Diode. IMPATT
Diodes: Static Characteristics, Dynamic Characteristics, Power and Efficiency Noise Behaviour, Device Design
and Performance, BARITT Diode, Trapatt diode.

UNIT IV

Photonic devices: Light Emitting Diodes (LED), semiconductor laser physics. Photo detectors: Photodiodes,
Avalanche Photodiode and Phototransistor and Solar Cells

Textbook(s):
1. S. M. Sze, Kwok K. NG, Physics of Semiconductor Devices, 3rd Edition, Wiley Publication
2. B. G. Streetman and S. Banerjee Solid state electronics devices, 5th Edition, PHI.

References:
1. J. P. Colinge and C. A. Colinge, “Physics of Semiconductor Devices”, Kluwer Academic Publishers
2. M.S. Tyagi, “Introduction to Semiconductor Materials And Devices”, John Willy‐India Pvt. Ltd

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 508
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Advanced Semiconductor Devices Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EEE 7 PCE PCE‐5 EEE‐417P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Advanced Semiconductor Devices) as
this is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. To study I‐V characteristics and temperature dependent I‐V characteristics of Diode.

2. To study I‐V characteristics of Zener diode.
3. To study characteristics of NMOS and /or PMOS.
4. To study the various Short Channel Effects on MOSFET Structures.
a) DIBL
b) Threshold voltage roll off
5. To study the characteristics of heterojunction‐based device (diode/ FET).
6. To study Schottky effect‐based device (diode/ FET).
7. To study characteristics of Tunnel effect‐based device (diode/ FET).
8. To study characteristics of IMPATT diode.
9. To study characteristics of photo effect‐based device (diode/ FET).
10. To study characteristics of basic Solar cell.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 509
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Advanced Structural Design L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CE 6 PCE PCE‐2 CEE‐312T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To know the concept of designing RCC structure using Indian codes.
2. To know the concept design and analysis of earthquake‐resistant structure.
3. To calculate and design plate girder and gantry girder.
4. To familiarize students about flat slab and its design.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Analyse earthquake‐resistant structure using IS: 1893:2016. Design of G+3 Building using IS: 456:2000
CO 2 Design of water tank using IS: 3370.
CO 3 Calculate and design girder using IS: 800:2007
CO 4 Analysis and Design of Industrial Building.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 2 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 3
CO 2 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 3
CO 3 3 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐
CO 4 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2

Unit I

Introduction to Seismic design: General principles of seismic design, Introduction to IS 1893 : 2002, Building
equivalent static analysis, Vertical distribution of seismic forces and horizontal shears, dynamic analysis, design
spectrum, Seismic weights, Modal combination, Load combinations and permissible stresses, Guidelines for
earthquake resistant design, Ductile detailing for seismic design, Analysis for lateral Loads: Introduction to IS
875 Part‐III. Design of G+3 Building. Design of slab, beam, column and footing as per IS 456:2000.

Unit II

Concrete structure design: Design of elevated and underground water tanks as per IS: 3370 and IS: 1893 Part‐V.
Forces acting on the water tank. Types of water tanks. Design of retaining walls, Types of retaining wall, Various
conditions of backfill, Components of Retaining wall, Forces acting on retaining wall, stability checks, Design of
Box culvert.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 510
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Unit III

Beam supported and unsupported, Plate girder, Types of Plate Girder, Components of Plate Girder, Gantry
girder including lateral and flexural torsional building, design of structural elements, Components of plate
girder. Components of Gantry Girder, Loads acting on gantry girder, Types of gantry girder, and design of gantry
girder as per IS: 800:2007

Unit IV

Design of Industrial Building. Introduction, Roof and side coverings, Design loads, purlins, end bearings, general
framing of industrial buildings, bracings. Components of Industrial Building. Wind load analysis using
IS:875:2016 (All Parts), Orientation of Purlins. Types of Roof Coverings, Permissible loads to be considered for
each component of industrial building.

Textbook(s):
1. N. Krishna Raju, R.N.Pranesh, “Reinforced concrete Design”, CBS Publishers
2. S.K Duggal, Design of Steel Structure, P.C.Varghese, “Advance Reinforced Concrete Design” PHI Delhi

References:
1. N. Krishna Raju, “Prestressed concrete”, Tata McGraw Hill.
2. Arther H. Nilson, “Design of concrete structures”, Tata McGraw Hill
3. Arya and Ajamani, “Design of steel structures”, Nem Chand and Bros. Publishers
4. C. Syal and A.K. Goel, “Reinforced concrete structures”, S. Chand.
5. Prestressed concrete, Pandit and Gupta, CBS
6. T.Y. Lin, Design of Prestressed Concrete Structures, Asia Publishing House, 1955.
7. Edward Nawy, Prestressed Concrete: A fundamental approach, prentice hall, New Jersey
8. BIS 1893 – 2002 and BIS 875 Part III
9. Krishna Raju, “Advance Reinforced concrete Design” CBS Publishers

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 511
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Advanced Structural Design Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CE 6 PCE PCE‐2 CEE‐312P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Advanced Structural Design) as this is
the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. To design G+3 Building using STAAD PRO.

2. To determine and design a water tank in STAAD PRO using IS:3370 (Part IV)
3. Earthquake Analysis of Buildings as per IS:1893:2016.
4. Wind Analysis of Buildings as per IS 875:2007(Part 3).
5. Design of Retaining Wall.
6. Design of Industrial Building.
7. Design of gantry girder using IS:800:2007
8. Design of Prestressed Concrete Structure as per IS:1343
9. Design and prepare a prototype model of all structural components showing detailing of reinforcement.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 512
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Advanced Surveying L P C
3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CE 7 PCE PCE‐5 CEE‐413T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To prepare the students to handle the errors they are likely to come across any large scale survey
works.
2. To make students aware with different advance surveying methodologies applied to carry out large
scale survey works as modern instruments have largely changed the approach to survey works with
the principles being same.
3. Apply geometric principles to arrive at solutions to surveying problems.
4. Use the concepts of advanced data capturing methods necessary for engineering practice.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Define the fundamental of triangulation, theory of error, setting out of works, photogrammetric
surveying and astronomical surveying.
CO 2 Explain geodetical observation, corrections in triangulation, and principles of photogrametry.
CO 3 Apply the concept of triangulation, probability curve, astronomy for coordinate study.
CO 4 Analyze triangulation survey, aerial photogramety, and time systems.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 1 1 ‐ 2 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ 1 1 ‐ ‐
CO 2 1 1 1 2 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐
CO 3 1 2 ‐ 1 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 3
CO 4 1 1 ‐ 2 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 3

UNIT‐I

Geodetic Surveying: Introduction & object of Geodetic Surveying, principal & classification of triangulation
system, selection of base line and stations, order of triangulation, triangulation figures, scaffold and signals,
marking of stations, Indivisibility and heights of stations, satellite stations, base line measurement and
corrections, Introduction to adjustment of observations.
Survey Adjustments and Theory of Errors: Types of errors, law of errors, law of weights, distribution of error
and field measurements, Probability cures, method of lest squares, determination of most probable value by
normal adjustment and method of correlates, most probable error. Triangulation adjustments: Adjustment of
geodetic quadrilateral with and without central station.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 513
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT‐II

Setting out works: Setting out of buildings, culverts, roads, pipelines, sewers, underground tunnels and centre
line of dams, bridge survey, mine survey.
Route surveying: Reconnaissance, preliminary and location surveys for road, railway, canal and pipe alignments
longitudinal and cross sections, computation of earthwork and mass haul curve.
Introduction to Hydrographic surveying: Shore line survey, soundings, tide and its characteristics, tide gauges,
mean sea level as datum.

UNIT‐III

Photogrammetric Survey: Basic principles, elevation of a point, determination of focal length of lens, aerial
camera, scale of a vertical photograph, relief displacement of a vertical photograph, height of object from relief
displacement, scale of a tilted photograph, tilt distortion, relief displacement of a tilted photograph, combined
effects of tilt and relief, flight planning for aerial photography, selection of altitude, interval between
exposures, crab and drift, location of principal points, transfer image from photograph to map, stereoscope
parallax, parallax in aerial stereoscopic views, parallax equations.

UNIT ‐ IV

Field Astronomy: Co‐ordinate systems, latitude and longitude, spherical trigonometry, relation between
degrees and hours of time, conversion of local time to standard time, conversion of mean time interval to
sidereal time interval, to find local sidereal time (LST) at local mean midnight for given Greenwich sidereal time
(GST) at Greenwich Mean midnight (GMN), determination of LST from LMT at any instant, determination of
LMT of transit of a known star across the meridian for given GST of GMN, Local sidereal time of elongation of
star, interpolation of values, instrumental and astronomical correction to observed altitude to the azimuth,
observation for time by meridian transit of star and by meridian transit of Sun. Azimuth by observation on
Polaris and ex‐meridian observation on stars, determination of latitude, calculation of true altitude,
declination, latitude, polar distance, determination of longitude

Textbook(s):
1. Surveying, B.C. Punmia Vol ‐ I, II, III, Laxmi Publication
2. Duggal, S. K., Surveying Vol. I & II, Tata Mcgraw Hill, New Delhi

References:
1. Plane and Geodetic Surveying by D. Clark
2. Plane and Geodetic Surveying by S. Ramamrutham
3. Subramanian, R., Surveying & Levelling, Oxford University Press, New Delhi
4. Arora, K.R., Surveying Vol. I, II & III, Standard Book House. New Delhi

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 514
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Advanced Surveying Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CE 7 PCE PCE‐5 CEE‐413P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Advanced Surveying) as this is the
practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Adjustment of close traverse.

2. Adjustment of angles of a given triangulation network.
3. Computation of missing side/ angle of a polygon (triangle/ quadrilateral) and error estimation.
4. To give Layout for given plan of building.
5. To study of various components of total station and measuring horizontal angle, vertical angle, horizontal
distance and slope distance.
6. To Form a Closed Traverse of about 1km periphery and Find the Area of a piece of land Using Total Station.
7. Measurement of Height (Remote elevation measurement‐ REM) by Total Station.
8. Fixing of missing pillars (or) Setting out (or) Stake out using Total Station.
9. Preparation of contour maps of given area drawn on the sheet / surfer software using total station.
10. Traverse computation using appropriate softwares like Autoplotter.
11. Mapping using handheld GPS.
12. Use of DGPS for drawing a map of roads covering an area of about 5 sq. kms.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 515
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Advances in Welding & Casting L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ME 6 PCE PCE‐3 MEE‐334T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. Study of various metal casting and joining processes.
2. To understand the effects of design considerations on the quality of cast and weld products. And
Thermal and fluid transfer mechanism during these processes.
3. To understand the NDT techniques for the evaluation of cast and weld components and Control of
parameters for sound casting and welding.
4. To acquire the knowledge of Metallurgical effects of casting and joining and application of welding in
Heavy Engineering and nuclear industries.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Discriminate the knowledge of principles, operations and applications of different casting and welding
processes.
CO 2 Analyse the effects of design parameters on the quality of cast and weld products.
CO 3 Select the NDT techniques for the evaluation of cast and weld components.
CO 4 Apply the knowledge of welding in Heavy Engineering nuclear industries.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 3 3 ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 2 3 3 3 3 ‐ 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 3 3 3 3 3 ‐ 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 4 3 3 3 2 ‐ 3 ‐ ‐ ‐‐ ‐ ‐ 2

UNIT‐I

Gating system for casting, Elements of a gating system, Sprue, Sprue base well, Gates, Gating System Design,
pouring time, Choke area, Gating Ratios, In‐gate design, Slag Trap Systems, Risering Design, Caine’s Method,
Modulus Method, Naval Research Lab Method, Chills, Feeding aids. Simple numerical problems on all topics

UNIT – II

Solidification of Metals, freezing of a pure Metal, Nucleation and Growth, Shrinkage, freezing of alloys, Thermal
characteristics of the mould, casting defects, gas defects, pouring metal defects, Metallurgical defects.
Castability of steel, Cast Iron, Al alloys, Babbit alloy and Cu alloy, Simple numerical problems. Recent Trends in
Casting and Foundry Layout:

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 516
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Shell molding, Stir Casting, CO2 molding, die casting, Continuous casting, Counter gravity low pressure casting,
Squeeze casting and semisolid processes. Layout of mechanized foundry – sand reclamation – material
handling in foundry pollution control in foundry –– Computer aided design of casting.

UNIT – III

Basic Metallurgy of fusion welds, general theory of solidification of metals and alloys, homogeneous and
heterogeneous nucleation, Effect of welding speed on grain structure, properties of weld metals, fusion
boundary zone, heat affected zone, properties of heat affected zone, Hydrogen embrittlement – Lamellar
tearing Welding stress and distortion and its control, residual stress, causes and remedies of residual stress,
effect of weld thermal cycle and shrinkage on residual stresses, Reaction stresses, stresses generated by phase
transformation, Measurement and calculation of residual stresses in weld metals.

UNIT – IV

Weldability of steels, cast iron, stainless steel, aluminium, Mg, Cu, Zirconium and titanium alloys – Carbon
Equivalent of Plain and alloy steels–l. Heat transfer and solidification ‐ Analysis of stresses in welded structures
– pre and post welding heat treatments – weld joint design – welding defects –, Methods of Pre‐heating, Weld
inspection and Testing, residual inspection, NDT testing.
Recent trends in welding: Friction welding, explosive welding – diffusion bonding – high frequency induction
welding ‐ narrow gap, hybrid twin wire active TIG – Tandem MIG‐ modern brazing and soldering techniques –
induction, dip resistance, diffusion processes – Hot gas, wave and vapour phase soldering. Overview of
automation of welding in aerospace, nuclear, surface transport vehicles and under water welding.

Text Books:
1. P.N.Rao, “Manufacturing Technology”, Vol.1, TATA Mc Graw Hill.
2. R.S.Parmar, “Welding Engineering and Technology”, Khanna Publication.

Reference Books:
1. Carrry B., Modern Welding Technology, Prentice Hall Pvt Ltd., 2002.
2. Jain P.L., Principles of Foundry Technology, Tata McGraw Hill Publishers, 2003.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 517
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Advances in Welding & Casting Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ME 6 PCE PCE‐3 MEE‐334P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Advances in Welding & Casting) as this
is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Study the effect of sand permeability for three sand‐bind mixing ratios, 20, 25 and 30%.
2. Study the strength of the green sand moulding for the given three sand‐bind mixing Ratios Moisture
percent kept the same for all experimental tests.
3. To assess the finger casting fluidity of short arid long freezing range aluminium alloys.
4. Shrinkage behaviour during permanent mould casting by studying the pipe formation in a cast metal ingot
in 3 different conditions.
5. Make a part using investment casting process to understand various steps involved

6. Perform and write the effect of heat affected zone (HAZ) on the microstructure and properties of steel
weldment. (Plot hardness vs distance for various processes) with SMAW, MAG and TIG welded steel.
7. To prepare a butt joint with mild steel strips using brazing technique.
8. To compare the welding strength of single V joint of mild steel specimens with SMAW and MIG/TIG
welding processes.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 518
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

AI in Robotics L P C
3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 7 RA‐EAE RA‐EAE‐5 RA‐441T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To expose the students to Artificial Intelligence and Robotics
2. To impart knowledge on search methods
3. To expose the students on robot kinematics
4. To impart knowledge on expert systems
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Ability to understand the basic fundamental of artificial intelligence and components of robot system
CO 2 Ability to apply the search methods and to apply the basic concepts of robot kinematics to find
position of robot joints
CO 3 Ability to analyze the robot sensor
CO 4 Ability to evaluate the expert system
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 ‐ 3
CO 2 3 3 2 ‐ ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ 2 2 ‐ 3
CO 3 3 3 2 3 ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ 2 3 2 3
CO 4 3 3 3 3 ‐ 2 2 2 2 3 2 3

Unit‐I

Introduction to Artificial Intelligence: Introduction to Artificial Intelligence. Applications‐ Games, theorem

proving, natural language processing, vision and speech processing, robotics, expert systems. AI techniques‐
search knowledge, abstraction. Introduction – History, Definition of AI, Emulation of human cognitive process,

Unit‐II

Search Methods: Problem – Solving Agents : Problem Definitions, Formulating Problems, Searching for
solutions – Measuring Problem – Solving Performance with examples. Search Strategies : Uninformed search
strategies – Breadth – first Search, Uniform – Cost Search, depth –first search, depth – limited search, Iterative
deepening depth – first search, bidirectional search, comparing uniformed search strategies. Informed search
strategies – Heuristic information, Hill climbing methods, best – first search, branch and – bound search,
optimal search and A* and Iterative deepening A*.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 519
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Unit‐III

Introduction to Robotics: Robot anatomy‐Definition, law of robotics, History and Terminology of Robotics‐
Accuracy and repeatability of Robotics, Fundamentals of Robotics, Robot kinematics‐Types‐ 2D, 3D
Transformation‐Scaling, Rotation, Translation‐ Homogeneous coordinates, multiple transformation‐Simple
problems. Sensors in robot – Touch sensors‐Tactile sensor – Proximity and range sensors – Robotic vision
sensor‐Force sensor‐Light sensors, Pressure sensors.

Unit‐IV

Expert System: Expert system – Introduction, difference between expert system and conventional programs,
basic activities of expert system – Interpretation, Prediction, Diagnosis, Design, Planning, Monitoring,
Debugging, Repair, Instruction, Control. Basic aspects of expert system – Acquisition module, Knowledge base –
Production rules, semantic net, frames. Inference engine – Backward chaining and forward chaining.
Text & References:

Textbook(s):
1. E. Rich and K. Knight, “Artificial intelligence”, TMH, 2nd ed., 1992.
2. John J. Craig, “Introduction to Robotics”, Addison Wesley Publication

References:
1. Dan.W.Patterson, “Introduction to Artificial Intelligence and Expert Systems”, PHI Learning, 2009.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 520
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

AI in Robotics Lab L P C
2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 7 RA‐EAE RA‐EAE‐5 RA‐441P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (AI in Robotics) as this is the practical
component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Study of PROLOG
2. Write a program to solve 8 queens problem
3. Solve any problem using depth first search
4. Solve any problem using breadth search
5. Solve 8 puzzle problem using breadth first search
6. Study of different types of robots based on configuration and application.
7. Study of different type of links and joints used in robots
8. Study of components of robots with drive system and end effectors.
9. Determination of maximum and minimum position of links.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 521
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Analog and Digital Communications L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

IT 6 PCE PCE‐1 CIE‐328T
EEE 6 PCE PCE‐1 EEE‐306T
CSE‐in‐EA 7 OAE‐CSE‐EA OAE‐2 OECE‐419T
OAE 7 ECE‐OAE ECE‐OAE‐4A OECE‐419T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To understand and introduce the concepts of communication systems, its channels and understand
the handling of noise in communication systems.
2. To understand the concept of analog communication system and its classification in detail.
3. To understand the concept of digital communication system and its classification in detail.
4. To interpret the various digital signalling formats, the multiplexing techniques and information coding
methods.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Identify and Solve basic random variable and random process‐based problems.
CO 2 Identify, Analyze and Comparison of generation and detection circuits of different analog methods
CO 3 Identify, Analyze and Comparison of generation and detection circuits of different digital methods
CO 4 Identify the different signalling formats, multiplexing techniques and basics of information signal
theory and its coding.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 2 1 1 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 1 ‐ 3
CO 2 2 2 2 2 2 ‐ 2 ‐ 3 2 2 2
CO 3 1 3 1 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 1 1 1 2
CO 4 2 2 2 2 2 ‐ 2 ‐ 2 2 1 2

UNIT I

Introduction: Overview of Communication system, Types and Modes of Communication System, Frequency
Spectrum of EM Waves, Mathematical Models for Communication Channels, Shannon‐Hartley Law.
Introduction of random Variables: Probability, Concept of Random variable (Stationary, Non stationary),
Classification of Random process(WSS, SSS), CDF, PDF, Joint CDF, Joint PDF, marginal PDF, Mean, Moments,
Central Moment, Auto‐correlation & Cross‐correlation, covariance functions, ergodicity, Uniform distribution
,Gaussian distribution, Rayleigh distribution, Exponential Distribution, Binomial distribution, Poisson
distribution, Wiener‐Khinchine theorem, Power spectral density.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 522
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT II

Amplitude Modulation: Need for modulation, AM: modulation and demodulation, DSB‐SC: Modulation and
demodulation, SSB: modulation and demodulation, VSB: modulation and demodulation, Power relation,
modulation index, Bandwidth efficiency.
Angle Modulation Systems: Frequency Modulation, Types of Frequency Modulation, Generation of NBFM,
WBFM, Transmission BW of FM (NBFM, WBFM), Phase Modulation, Comparison of AM, FM & PM.
Pulse Analog Modulation: Sampling‐Ideal, Natural and Flat Top, Aliasing, Aperture Effect, Pulse Amplitude
Modulation (PAM), Pulse Width Modulation (PWM), Pulse Position Modulation (PPM)‐ Generation and
Recovery.

UNIT III

Pulse Digital Modulation: Pulse Code Modulation (PCM), Differential Pulse Code Modulation (DPCM), Delta
Modulation (DM), ADPCM.
Digital Modulation and Transmission: Advantages of digital communication. Modulation & Detection of ASK,
FSK, & PSK, Comparison.

UNIT IV

Line coding: Unipolar, Polar and Bipolar (AMI) NRZ & RZ, Manchester encoding, Differential Manchester
encoding, High density bipolar code, Binary with n‐zero substitution codes.
Multiplexing: Time Division Multiplexing and Frequency Division Multiplexing
Information and Coding Theory: Entropy, Information, Channel Capacity, Source Coding Theorem: Shannon
Fano Coding, Huffman Coding.

Textbook(s):
1. George Kennedy, “Electronics Communication System”, 5th Edition, 2012
2. B.P. Lathi, “Modern Digital & Analog & Communication Systems”, Oxford University Press 2011.
3. John G. Proakis & Masoud Salehi, “Communication System Engineering”, Pearson Education.

Reference Books:
1. Simon Haykins, “Communication Systems”, John Wiley, 5th Edition, 2013
2. Taub Schilling, “Principles of Communication Systems” TMH, 3rd Edition, 2008
3. Bernard Sklar, Digital Communications: Fundamentals and Applications, 2nd Edition, Pearson, 2009
4. W. Tomasi, “Electronic Communication systems”, Prentice Hall, 5th Edition, 2003.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 523
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Analog and Digital Communications Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

IT 6 PCE PCE‐1 CIE‐328P
EEE 6 PCE PCE‐1 EEE‐306P
CSE‐in‐EA 7 OAE‐CSE‐EA OAE‐2 OECE‐419P
OAE 7 ECE‐OAE ECE‐OAE‐4A OECE‐419P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Analog and Digital Communications) as
this is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. To perform DSB‐FC Modulation & Demodulation.

2. To perform DSB‐SC Modulation & Demodulation.

3. To perform SSB‐SC Modulation & Demodulation.

4. To perform Frequency Modulation & Demodulation.

5. To perform Signal Sampling and Reconstruction Techniques.

6. To perform Pulse Amplitude Modulation and Demodulation.

7. To perform Pulse Width Modulation and Demodulation.

8. To perform ASK Modulation & Demodulation.
9. To perform PSK Modulation & Demodulation.
10. To perform FSK Modulation & Demodulation.
11. To perform Delta Modulation & Demodulation.
12. To perform different Line Codes – NRZ‐L, NRZ‐M, RZ, Biphase (Manchester), Biphase (Mark) and AMI.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 524
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Analysis and Design of High‐rise Buildings and Bridges L P C

4 4

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 7 IE‐EAE IE‐EAE‐5 IE‐439

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To introduce the concept of High rise buildings
2. To impart knowledge on the planning and designing aspects of high rise buildings
3. To expose the students to various types of structural systems that are employed for high rise buildings
4. To impart knowledge about the special service requirements of high rise buildings
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 The student should be able to sufficiently design a high rise building
CO 2 The students should be able to have sufficient knowledge to suggest appropriate structural systems
for high rise buildings.
CO 3 The students should be able to design vertical transportation systems, Water supply systems, Electrical
and Communication systems and Fire protection systems
CO 4 To enable student to apply aspects of sustainability in high rise building design
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 1 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐
CO 2 1 ‐ ‐ 2 ‐ 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐
CO 3 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐
CO 4 ‐ ‐ ‐ 1 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2

UNIT‐I

Introduction: Definition of High rise in different contexts – need – scope – advantages and disadvantages–
History of high‐rise structures –ages of high‐rise structures ‐Current tall buildings and their salient features.
Types of tall buildings. Various structural systems to be used in tall buildings.

UNIT‐II

Design of High‐Rise Buildings: High‐rise building design approach – planning strategies–Building form – Plan
shape efficiencies – Core Planning – Types, Components – Planning strategy for shafts and ducts – Parking
strategies. Introduction to IS:16700 Criteria for Structural Safety of Tall Concrete Buildings.
Bridges:Understand the concept and application of FEM for bridge analyses, Use probabilistic methods in
design and assessment of bridges, Calculate life‐cycle‐costs of bridges, Fatigue analysis, Use a commercial FE
program to model and analyse bridges in 3D, Bearings and types of bearings, Joints used in bridges, Bridges

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 525
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

used in metro construction. Prestressed Bridges.

UNIT‐III

Structure Aerodynamics – Structural systems RCC – height vs footprint ‐ Wind load issues – Seismic issues –
Materials– foundation. Parameters to check the efficiency of highrise buildings. Various failure case studies of
high‐rise buildings. Finite Element Method adopted for highrise building. Efficiency of various grids in highrise
buildings.

UNIT ‐ IV

Services Vertical transportation –HVAC systems ‐ Water supply transmission & distribution – waste disposal –
Firefighting regulations & Strategies ‐ Service Floor – relevant regulations in Indian Context SUSTAINABILITY 8
Building Automation – Green Elements – Passive and Active design – Works of Architects like Ken Yeang,
Norman Foster.

Textbook(s):
1. Designing Tall Buildings: Structure as Architecture By Mark Sarkisian
2. Bryan Stafford and Alex Coull, Tall Building Structures, Analysis and Design, John Wiley & Sons, NewYork,
1991

References:
1. Krishna Raju .N, Pre Stressed Concrete, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Ltd., New Delhi, 1988 2.
2. Taranath .B.S, Structural Analysis and Design of Tall Buildings, McGraw Hill, New York, 1988.
3. Bennetts Ian & others – Tall building structural systems.
4. Proceedings of the Council for Tall buildings – Vol 1 to 10 Books – 1997.
5. Handbook on building fire codes by G.B.Menon.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 526
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Android App Development L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CSE‐in‐EA 6 OAE‐CSE‐EA OAE‐1 OSD‐334T
EE‐VDT/EC‐ACT 6 OAE‐ECE‐EA OAE‐1 OSD‐334T
OAE 6 SD‐OAE SD‐OAE‐2A OSD‐334T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. Understand the basics of Android app development.
2. Design user‐friendly and visually appealing interfaces for Android apps.
3. Implement various features and functionalities in Android applications.
4. Analyze and debug Android applications.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Understand the basics of Android app development, including the Android ecosystem, architecture,
and components.
CO 2 Design user‐friendly and visually appealing interfaces for Android apps using XML and various user
interface components then Implement various features and functionalities in Android applications,
such as activities, fragments, services, broadcast receivers, and content providers
CO 3 Debug and test Android applications, ensuring functionality, performance optimization, and
adherence to best practices
CO 4 Work collaboratively in teams to develop complex Android applications and showcase their work
through a final project
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 2 2 3 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 2 2 3
CO 2 3 2 2 3 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 2 2 3
CO 3 3 2 2 3 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 2 2 3
CO 4 3 2 2 3 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 2 2 3

UNIT I

Introduction to Android Development: Introduction to Android ecosystem, History and evolution of Android,
Android architecture and components, Setting up the development environment, Introduction to Android
Studio. Java Programming for Android: Introduction to Java programming language, Variables, data types, and
operators, Control structures: loops and conditional statements, Arrays and collections, Object‐oriented
programming in Java, Handling exceptions

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 527
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT II

User Interface Design: Introduction to user interface (UI) design for mobile apps, Building layouts using XML,
User interface components: views, widgets, and layouts, Handling user input and events, Creating interactive
and responsive UIs. Android App Components: Activities: lifecycle, intents, and activity navigation, Fragments:
creating reusable UI components, Services: background processing and long‐running tasks, Broadcast receivers:
responding to system‐wide events, Content providers: accessing and sharing data between apps

UNIT III

Data Storage and Retrieval: Saving and retrieving data using shared preferences, Working with databases:
SQLite and Room, Using web services: RESTful APIs and JSON parsing, Accessing device sensors and hardware
features. Multimedia and Location Services: Working with images and multimedia in Android, Using the
camera and gallery, Integrating location‐based services, Google Maps integration

UNIT IV

Application Deployment and Testing: Debugging and testing Android applications, Performance optimization
and best practices, Deploying apps to the Google Play Store, App monetization strategies

Text Books:
1. "Android Application Development Cookbook ‐ Second Edition" by Rick Boyer.
2. "Professional Android Application Development" by Reto Meier.
3. "Learning Android: Develop Mobile Apps Using Java and Eclipse" by Marko Gargenta.

Reference Books:
1. "Head First Android Development" by Dawn Griffiths and David Griffiths
2. "Android Programming: The Big Nerd Ranch Guide" by Bill Phillips and Brian Hardy
3. "Android Programming" by C. K. Velmurugan

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 528
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Android App Development Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CSE‐in‐EA 6 OAE‐CSE‐EA OAE‐1 OSD‐334P
EE‐VDT/EC‐ACT 6 OAE‐ECE‐EA OAE‐1 OSD‐334P
OAE 6 SD‐OAE SD‐OAE‐2A OSD‐334P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Android App Development) as this is
the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

Experiment 1: Setting Up the Development Environment

● Install and configure Android Studio.
● Create a new Android project.
● Familiarize yourself with the project structure.
Experiment 2: Building a Basic User Interface
● Design a simple user interface using XML.
● Add various user interface components, such as buttons, text fields, and images.
● Implement event handling for user interactions.
Experiment 3: Creating Activities and Navigating Between Screens
● Create multiple activities within an app.
● Implement navigation between activities using intents.
● Pass data between activities using intent extras.
Experiment 4: Implementing Fragments
● Create fragments to represent reusable UI components.
● Integrate fragments into activities.
● Manage fragment transactions and backstack.
Experiment 5: Implementing Services and Broadcast Receivers
● Implement a background service for performing a long‐running task.
● Register and receive broadcasts using broadcast receivers.
● Communicate between services, broadcast receivers, and activities.
Experiment 6: Implementing Data Storage and Retrieval
● Use shared preferences for saving and retrieving data.
● Implement SQLite database for data persistence.
● Fetch data from web services and parse JSON responses.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 529
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Experiment 7: Integrating Multimedia and Location Services

● Capture and display images using the camera and gallery.
● Implement audio and video playback in the app.
● Integrate location‐based services and display maps.
Experiment 8: Testing and Debugging Android Apps
● Use debugging tools in Android Studio to identify and fix issues.
● Perform unit testing to ensure app functionality.
● Optimize app performance using profiling tools.
Experiment 9: Deploying Android Apps
● Create a signed APK for deployment.
● Install and run the app on physical devices and emulators.
● Publish the app to the Google Play Store.
Experiment 10: Team Project
● Collaborate in a team to develop a complete Android app.
● Plan and document the project requirements, design, and implementation.
● Present the final app and demonstrate its functionality.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 530
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Antenna Design and Radiating Systems L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ECE 6 PCE PCE‐2 ECE‐330T
EC‐ACT 6 PC PC ECE‐330T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To impart knowledge of the antenna basics, matching techniques and broadband antenna
2. To design various microstrip lines and various patch antennas.
3. To discuss the concept of antenna array.
4. To study the antenna measurements
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Understand the basics of antenna parameters, radiation fields and matching networks.
CO 2 Analyze the designing of microstrip lines and microstrip patch antenna.
CO 3 Understand the concept of antenna array
CO 4 Perform measurements of the various antenna parameters.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 1 3 2 1 2
CO 2 3 2 2 2 3 2 2 2 2 3 3 2
CO 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 2 2 3 3 1 1
CO 4 2 2 3 3 3 2 2 2 3 3 2 1

UNIT‐I

ANTENNA FUNDAMENTALS: Antenna parameters, Radiation potentials and Auxiliary potential functions, Fields
radiated by an alternating current element and half wave dipole, monopole, loop antenna: Total power
radiated and radiation resistance. Broadband antennas and matching techniques: balun and quarter wave
transformer, polarization states, Introduction to various simulation tool for antenna design.

Unit‐II

Analysis and Design of Microstrip Line and Microstrip Patch Antenna: Transmission Line and cavity model of
rectangular patch, Design of various microstrip lines, Design of rectangular patch and circular patch, triangular
patch antenna. Design of arrays and feed networks. Design of broad band antennas

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 531
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Unit III

Antenna Array Theory: Array synthesis of linear elements, Linear and Planar arrays, Active and passive beam
scanning, Excitation techniques in Array, synthesis of antenna arrays using Schelkunoff polynomial method,
Fourier‐transform method, and Woodward‐Lawson method.

Unit IV

Antenna Measurements: Measurements of radiation pattern, Antenna Gain, Power, Half power Beam Width
(HPBW,) Impedance and antenna factor. Experimentation of antenna parameters using Microwave test bench,
anechoic chamber and VNA.

Text Books:
1. E.C. Jordan and Balmain, "Electromagnetic Waves and Radiating Systems", PHI, 1968, Reprint 2003.
2. C. A. Balanis, “ Antenna theory, analysis and design”, 3rd Edition, Wiley‐publications

Reference books:
1. R. Garg, P. Bhartia, I. Bhel and A. Ittipiboon, “Microstrip antenna design handbook” Artech House
Publication.
2. Girish Kumar, K. P. Ray, “Broadband Microstrip antennas”, Artech House publications
3. John D.Kraus and Ronald J. Marhefka, "Antennas for all applications", 3 rd Edition Tata McGraw‐Hill Book
Company, 2006.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 532
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Antenna Design and Radiating Systems Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ECE 6 PCE PCE‐2 ECE‐330P
EC‐ACT 6 PC PC ECE‐330P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Antenna Design and Radiating
Systems) as this is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. To design a half wave dipole antenna.

2. To design a microstrip feed line with different characteristic impedances.
3. To design rectangular patch antennas using different feed lines.
4. To design rectangular patch antennas using different feed lines.
5. To design a broad band microstrip patch antenna.
6. To design a circularly polarized microstrip patch antenna.
7. To design a rectangular microstrip antenna array.
8. To design a circular microstrip antenna array.
9. To design a microstrip patch antenna with electronic band gap (EBG) structure.
10. To design a slotted / fractal microstrip patch antenna.
11. To design a triangular microstrip patch antenna.

Note: These experiments may be performed using simulation software like HFSS, CST or IE3D (for planar
circuits) etc.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 533
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Arc GIS and Remote Sensing L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CE 7 PCE PCE‐4 CEE‐405T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. Understanding map projection and working with coordinate systems
2. Understanding vector‐based and raster‐based data data analysis,
3. Review of application areas of GIS in Civil Engineering,
4. Understanding basic principles of remote sensing.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Apply the concept of physics to the solution of complex engineering problems of Remote sensing and
GIS world.
CO 2 Classify different types of data systems for complex engineering problems considering accuracy and
economic factors.
CO 3 Categorise the information into a geo reference system that meets the specified needs with
appropriate considerations.
CO 4 Design new or alternate solution of complex Remote sensing, GIS and GPS problems considering
societal and environmental contexts.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 2 ‐ 3 1 2 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐
CO 2 ‐ 2 3 1 1 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐
CO 3 ‐ 2 3 1 2 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐
CO 4 2 3 2 1 2 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐

UNIT‐I

Introduction, concepts and physical basis of Remote Sensing, Electromagnetic spectrum, radiation laws,
atmospheric effects, image characteristics. Remote sensing systems; sources of remote sensing information,
spectral quantities spectral signatures and characteristics spectral reflectance curves for rocks, soil, vegetation
and water.

UNIT‐II

Optical, thermal and microwave sensors and their resolution, salient features of some of operating Remote
Sensing satellites, Digital image processing; introduction, image rectification and restoration, image
enhancement, manipulation, image classification, fusion.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 534
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Introduction to Aerial and space borne platforms. Global positioning system (GPS) photogrammetry – analog,
analytical and digital photogrammetry, height and plan metric

UNIT‐III

GIS system : Definition terminology and data types, Map projection and Coordinate system, basic components
of GIS software, data models, data acquisition, both raster based and vector based data input and data
processing and management including topology, overlaying and integration and finally data product and report
generation, principle of cartography and cartographic design. GIS customization concepts, approaches of Multi‐
criteria decision making, concepts and applications of Geostatistics.

UNIT‐IV

Application of Geo‐spatial technology in Civil Engineering, assessment of cyclones, rainfall, atmospheric

humidity etc., weather analysis, forecasting and modelling.Land use, inventory and monitoring, urban planning,
snow and glaciers, coastal zone management, air and water pollution, commercially available remote sensing
and GIS software.

Textbook(s):
1. Chang K.T., “Introduction to Geographic Information System”, Tata McGraw Hill Education (P) Ltd.,
2. John R.Jensen, “Remote Sensing of the Environment”, Pearson Education

References:
1. Clarke K.C., Parks B.O., Crane M.P., “GIS and Environmental Modeling”, PHI Learning (P) Ltd., ND
2. Lillesand T.M. and Kiefer R.W, “Remote Sensing and Image Interpretation”, John Wiley and Sons, NY
3. Lo C.P. and Yeung A.K.W., “Concept and Techniques of Geographic Information Systems”, PHI
4. Chakraborty D. and Sahoo R.N., “Fundamentals of Geographic Information System”, Viva Books, ND.
5. Joseph G., “Fundamentals of Remote Sensing”, University Press (India) Ltd., Hyderabad.
6. L.R.A. Narayan, “Remote Sensing and its Applications”, University Press.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 535
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Arc GIS and Remote Sensing Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CE 7 PCE PCE‐4 CEE‐405P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Arc GIS and Remote Sensing) as this is
the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Introduction to basics of digital images and Data (Vector and Raster).

2. Interpretation of satellite images.
3. Understanding the basic principles of Photogrammetry.
4. An introduction to image classification.
5. Interpreting RADAR images.
6. Extracting information from thermal remote sensing data.
7. Using GIS Software for plotting points, lines, polygons on maps.
8. Application of GIS Software in Map making.
9. Calculate Geometry by using GIS Software.
10. Overlay analysis by using GIS software.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 536
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Artificial Intelligence L P C
3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CSE/IT/CST/ITE 6 PCE PCE‐3 CIE‐374T
ECE 6 PCE PCE‐1 ECE‐318T
CSE‐AI/CSE‐AIML 6 PC PC AI‐302T
EAE 6 AI‐EAE AI‐EAE‐1 AI‐302T
EAE 6 AIML‐EAE AIML‐EAE‐1 AI‐302T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To impart the definition and basic knowledge of Artificial Intelligence.
2. To introduces AI by examining the nature of the difficult problems.
3. To understand with AI demonstration that intelligence requires ability to find reason.
4. To understand the latest techniques and the future scope of the technology.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Ability to use AI methods and control strategies to solve the problems.
CO 2 Understand the production system and its applications. Also, to understand the properties and
applications for the different search algorithms.
CO 3 Applying the different algorithms and the techniques, also analyse the reason for the results.
CO 4 Study the expert systems and the modern approaches.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 2 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 4 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2

UNIT‐I

AI Definition, Problems, The Foundations of Artificial Intelligence, Techniques, Models, Defining Problem as a
state space search, production system, Intelligent Agents: Agents and Environments, Characteristics, Search
methods and issues in the design of search problems.

UNIT‐II

Knowledge representation issues, mapping, frame problem. Predicate logic, facts in logic, representing instance
and Isa relationship, Resolution, procedural and declarative knowledge, matching, control knowledge. Symbolic
reasoning under uncertainty, Non monotonic reasoning, statistical reasoning.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 537
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT‐III

Game Playing, minimax search, Alfa beta cut‐offs, Natural Language Processing, Learning, Explanation‐based
learning, discovery, analogy, Neural net learning and Genetic Learning.

UNIT ‐ IV

Fuzzy logic systems, Perception and action, Expert systems, Inference in Bayesian Networks, K‐means
Clustering Algorithm, Machine learning.

Textbook(s):
1. Elaine Rich, Kevin Knight, and Shivashankar B Nair, “Artificial Intelligence”, Tata McGraw Hill.
2. S. Russel and P. Norvig, “Artificial Intelligence: A Modern Approach”, Pearson Edu.

References:
1. Deepak Khemani, “A First Choice in Artificial Intelligence”, McGraw Hill.
2. K M Fu, “Neural Networks in Computer Intelligence”, McGraw Hill.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 538
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Artificial Intelligence Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CSE/IT/CST/ITE 6 PCE PCE‐3 CIE‐374P
ECE 6 PCE PCE‐1 ECE‐318P
CSE‐AI/CSE‐AIML 6 PC PC AI‐302P
EAE 6 AI‐EAE AI‐EAE‐1 AI‐302P
EAE 6 AIML‐EAE AIML‐EAE‐1 AI‐302P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Artificial Intelligence) as this is the
practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Study of PROLOG.
2. Write simple fact for the statements using PROLOG
a. Ram likes mango.
b. Seema is a girl.
c. Bill likes Cindy.
d. Rose is red.
e. John owns gold.
3. Write predicates, one converts centigrade temperatures to Fahrenheit, the other checksif a temperature is
below freezing using PROLOG.
4. Write a program to implement Breath First Search Traversal.
5. Write a program to implement Water Jug Problem.
6. Write a program to remove punctuations from the given string.
7. Write a program to sort the sentence in alphabetical order.
8. Write a program to implement Hangman game using python.
9. Write a program to implement Hangman game.
10. Write a program to implement Tic‐Tac‐Toe game.
11. Write a program to remove stop words for a given passage from a text file using NLTK.
12. Write a program to implement stemming for a given sentence using NLTK.
13. Write a program to POS (part of speech) tagging for the give sentence using NLTK.
14. Write a program to implement Lemmatization using NLTK.
15. Write a program for Text Classification for the given sentence using NLTK.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 539
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Artificial Intelligence and Machine Learning L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CSE‐DS 6 PC PC AI‐316T
EE‐VDT/EC‐ACT 6 OAE‐ECE‐EA OAE‐1 AI‐316T
EAE 6 DS‐EAE DS‐EAE‐2 AI‐316T
MAE 7 OAE‐MAE OAE‐1 MAO‐431T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To acquire knowledge on intelligent systems and agents
2. Learn the methods of solving problems using Artificial Intelligence
3. To understand fundamental concepts of machine learning and learning techniques
4. To understand various Machine learning algorithms related to classification and prediction
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Understand intelligent agents, search techniques and apply various problem‐solving strategies to
common AI applications
CO 2 Apply propositional logic and first order logic in reasoning
CO 3 Understand basic concepts of machine learning, its goals and applications.
CO 4 Analyse supervised learning techniques.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 2 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 4 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2

UNIT‐I

Artificial Intelligence: Introduction to intelligent agents, Problem solving: Problem formulation, uninformed
search strategies, heuristics, informed search strategies, constraint satisfaction Solving problems by searching,
state space formulation, depth first and breadth first search, iterative deepening

UNIT‐II

Logical Reasoning : Logical agents , propositional logic, inferences ,first‐order logic, inferences in first order
logic, forward chaining, backward chaining, unification, resolution

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 540
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT‐III

Machine Learning: Introduction, Basic concepts: Definition of learning systems, Goals and applications of
machine learning. Aspects of developing a learning system: training data, concept representation, function
approximation.
Types of Learning: Supervised learning and unsupervised learning. Overview of classification: setup, training,
test, validation dataset, over fitting.
Classification Families: linear discriminative, non‐linear discriminative, decision trees, probabilistic (conditional
and generative), nearest neighbor.

UNIT‐IV

Logistic regression, Perceptron, Exponential family, Generative learning algorithms, Gaussian discriminant
analysis, Naive Bayes, Support vector machines: Optimal hyper plane, Kernels. Model selection and feature
selection. Combining classifiers: Bagging, boosting (The Ada boost algorithm), Evaluating and debugging
learning algorithms, Classification errors.

Textbook(s):
1. Rich and Knight, “Artificial Intelligence”, Tata McGraw Hill, 1992
2. Tom M Mitchell, Machine Learning, McGraw Hill Education

References:
1. S. Russel and P. Norvig, “Artificial Intelligence — A Modern Approach”, Second Edition, Pearson Edu
2. Introduction to Machine Learning ‐ Ethem Alpaydin, MIT Press, Prentice hall of India.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 541
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Artificial Intelligence and Machine Learning Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CSE‐DS 6 PC PC AI‐316P
EE‐VDT/EC‐ACT 6 OAE‐ECE‐EA OAE‐1 AI‐316P
EAE 6 DS‐EAE DS‐EAE‐2 AI‐316P
MAE 7 OAE‐MAE OAE‐1 MAO‐431P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Artificial Intelligence and Machine
Learning) as this is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Write a program to implement Breath First Search Traversal.

2. Write a program to implement Water Jug Problem
3. Write a program in Python to predict the class of the flower based on available attributes.
4. Write a program in Python to predict if a loan will get approved or not.
5. Write a program to implement Hangman game using python.
6. Write a program in Python to indentify the tweets which are hate tweets and which are not.
7. Write a program to POS (part of speech) tagging for the given sentence using NLTK
8. Write a Program to implement HR Analytics on Employee Attrition & Performance using Random Forest
Classifier
9. Write a program for face detection using machine learning
10. Write a program to show the concept of Ensemble Technique
11. Write a program for Text Classification for the given sentence using NLTK

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 542
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Artificial Intelligence and Machine Learning for Electrical Systems L P C

4 4

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EE/EEE 6 PCE PCE‐1 EEE‐308

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To analyse basic concepts of probability and linear algebra
2. To understand various aspects of self‐learning.
3. To implement AI in real time electrical based problems
4. To create automatic systems in electrical engineering using ML
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Analyse basic concepts of probability and linear algebra
CO 2 Understand various aspects of self‐learning systems
CO 3 Implement AI in real time electrical based problems
CO 4 Create electrical based automatic systems using ML.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 2 2 3 1 1 1 1 2 2 1
CO 2 3 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 1 3 3 1
CO 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 1 3 3 3 3
CO 4 2 3 3 3 3 3 2 1 3 3 3 3

UNIT I

Basic Familiarity: Familiarity with the basic probability theory, Familiarity with the basic linear algebra.

UNIT II

Supervised Learning: Generative/discriminative learning, parametric/non‐parametric learning, neural networks,

support vector machines.
Unsupervised Learning: clustering, dimensionality reduction, kernel methods.

UNIT III

Recent applications of AI and ML: Speed Control of Motor, Smart Grid Using Machine Learning, Battery
Management, Home Automation, Fault Detection, Solar Power Plant, Control System.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 543
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT IV

Recent applications of machine learning: Robotic control, data mining, autonomous navigation, bioinformatics,
speech and text recognition, Autonomous Vehicle.

Textbook(s):
1. Rich and Knight, “Artificial Intelligence”, Tata McGraw Hill, 1992
2. Tom M Mitchell, Machine Learning, McGraw Hill Education
3. The Elements of Statistical Learning Data Mining, Inference, and Prediction, Trevor Hastie, Robert
Tibshirani Jerome Friedman.

References:
1. S. Russel and P. Norvig, “Artificial Intelligence — A Modern Approach”, Second Edition, Pearson Edu
2. Introduction to Machine Learning ‐ Ethem Alpaydin, MIT Press, Prentice hall of India.
3. Machine Learning A Probabilistic Perspective, Kevin P. Murphy
4. Computer Vision: Algorithms and Applications Richard Szeliski, 2010 Springer.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 544
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Artificial Intelligence Applications L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CSE‐AI 7 PC PC AI‐403T
EAE 7 AI‐EAE AI‐EAE‐4 AI‐403T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To acquire knowledge on intelligent systems and agents
2. To understand fundamental concepts of machine learning and learning techniques
3. To understand the fundamental concepts and techniques of natural language processing (NLP)
4. Familiarize with soft computing concepts, introduce and use the idea of Neural networks, fuzzy logic
and use of heuristics based on human experience
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Understand intelligent agents, search techniques and apply various problem solving strategies to common AI
applications
CO 2 Understand basic concepts of machine learning, its goals and applications.
CO 3 Understand the algorithmic approach to NLP
CO 4 Understand basic principles, techniques, and applications of soft computing
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 2 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 4 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2

UNIT‐I

Introduction: Introduction to intelligent agents

Problem solving: Problem formulation, uninformed search strategies, heuristics, informed search strategies,
constraint satisfaction Solving problems by searching, state space formulation, depth first and breadth first
search, iterative deepening

UNIT‐II

Basic concepts: Definition of learning systems, Goals and applications of machine learning. Aspects of
developing a learning system: training data, concept representation, function approximation.
Types of Learning: Supervised learning and unsupervised learning. Overview of classification: setup, training,
test, validation dataset, over fitting.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 545
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Classification Families: linear discriminative, non‐linear discriminative, decision trees, probabilistic (conditional
and generative), nearest neighbor

UNIT‐III

Introduction to NLP: Characteristics of Natural Language, Language structure, Sentence Structure, Language
analyzer, Lexicon, word formation, Morphology, syntax analysis (parsing), semantics, ambiguity, pragmatics
and discourse

UNIT‐IV

Introduction of soft computing, soft computing vs. hard computing, various types of soft computing
techniques, Neural Computing, Fuzzy Computing, Genetic Algorithms, Associative Memory, Adaptive
Resonance Theory, Classification, Clustering, Bayesian Networks, Probabilistic reasoning, Various applications
of Soft Computing.

Textbook(s):
1. Rich and Knight, “Artificial Intelligence”, Tata McGraw Hill, 1992
2. Tom M Mitchell, Machine Learning, McGraw Hill Education
3. Chaitanya, Vineet, Rajeev Sangal, and AksharBharati. “Natural language processing: A Paninian
perspective”. Prentice‐Hall of India, 1996.
4. S.N.Sivanandam, S.N.Deepa, “Principles of Soft Computing “, Wiley India, 2007

References:
1. S. Russel and P. Norvig, “Artificial Intelligence — A Modern Approach”, Second Edition, Pearson Edu
2. Introduction to Machine Learning ‐ Ethem Alpaydin, MIT Press, Prentice hall of India.
3. Syal, Pushpinder, and DharamVir Jindal. “An introduction to linguistics: Language, grammar and semantics”
PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd., 2007.
4. S. Rajasekaran, G.A.V.Pai, “Neural Networks, Fuzzy Logic and Genetic Algorithms”, PHI, 2003.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 546
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Artificial Intelligence Applications Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CSE‐AI 7 PC PC AI‐403P
EAE 7 AI‐EAE AI‐EAE‐4 AI‐403P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Artificial Intelligence Applications) as
this is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Write a program to implement Breath First Search Traversal.

2. Write a program to implement Water Jug Problem.
3. Write a program to solve the Monkey Banana problem using PROLOG.
4. Write a program to remove stop words for a given passage from a text file using NLTK.
5. Write a program to POS (part of speech) tagging for the give sentence using NLTK.
6. Write a program to implement Lemmatization using NLTK.
7. Write a program for Text Classification for the given sentence using NLTK.
8. Program to demonstrate Simple Linear Regression
9. Program to demonstrate k‐Nearest Neighbor flowers classification
10. Program to demonstrate Naïve‐ Bayes Classifier
11. Implement Union, Intersection, Complement and Difference operations on fuzzy sets. Also create fuzzy
relation by Cartesian product of any two fuzzy sets and perform maxmin composition on any two fuzzy
relations.
12. Solve Greg Viot’s fuzzy cruise controller using MATLAB Fuzzy logic toolbox.
13. Solve Air Conditioner Controller using MATLAB Fuzzy logic toolbox.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 547
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Artificial Neural Networks L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CSE‐AI 6 PC PC ML‐350T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. Impart the knowledge of neural network, models of neuron and knowledge representation
2. Analyse single layer and multi layer perceptrons and also describe application areas of each of them.
3. Understand the importance of back propagation and self organization maps.
4. Describe neuro dynamics and Hopfiled models.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Compare the similarity between of Biological networks and Neural networks
CO 2 Perform the training of neural networks using various learning rules.
CO 3 Describe the concepts of forward and backward propagations
CO 4 Analyze and construct Hopfield Models
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 ‐ 3 ‐ 2 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 ‐ ‐
CO 2 ‐ 3 2 3 2 ‐ ‐ 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐
CO 3 3 2 3 3 ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐
CO 4 ‐ 3 3 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐

UNIT‐I

Introduction: A Neural Network, Human Brain, Models of a Neuron, Neural Networks viewed as Directed
Graphs, Network Architectures, Knowledge Representation, Artificial Intelligence and Neural Networks
Learning Process: Error Correction Learning, Memory Based Learning, Hebbian Learning, Competitive,
Boltzmann Learning, Credit Assignment Problem, Memory, Adaption, Statistical Nature of the Learning Process

UNIT‐II

Single Layer Perceptrons: Adaptive Filtering Problem, Unconstrained Organization Techniques, Linear Least
Square Filters, Least Mean Square Algorithm, Learning Curves, Learning Rate Annealing Techniques, Perceptron
–Convergence Theorem, Relation Between Perceptron and Bayes Classifier for a Gaussian Environment
Multilayer Perceptron: Back Propagation Algorithm XOR Problem, Heuristics, Output Representation and
Decision Rule, Computer Experiment, Feature Detection

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 548
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT‐III

Back Propagation: Back Propagation and Differentiation, Hessian Matrix, Generalization, Cross Validation,
Network Pruning Techniques, Virtues and Limitations of Back Propagation Learning, Accelerated Convergence,
Supervised Learning

UNIT – IV

Self‐Organization Maps (SOM): Two Basic Feature Mapping Models, Self‐Organization Map, SOM Algorithm,
Properties of Feature Map, Computer Simulations, Learning Vector Quantization, Adaptive Patter Classification
Neuro Dynamics: Dynamical Systems, Stability of Equilibrium States, Attractors, Neuro Dynamical Models,
Manipulation of Attractors as a Recurrent Network Paradigm Hopfield Models – Hopfield Models, Computer
Experiment

Textbook(s):
1. Introduction to Artificial Neural Systems by Jacek M.Zurada. Jaico Publ.House.
2. Neural networks in Computer intelligence, Li Min Fu TMH 2003.

References:
1. “Neural Networks :A Comprehensive formulation”, Simon Haykin, 1998, AW
2. “Neural Network Fundamentals” – N.K. Bose , P. Liang, 2002, T.M.H

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 549
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Artificial Neural Networks Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CSE‐AI 6 PC PC ML‐350P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Artificial Neural Networks) as this is
the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Setting up the Spyder IDE Environment and Executing a Python Program

2. Implementation of different activation function to train ANN.
3. Implementation of different learning rules.
4. Implementation of Perceptron Networks.
5. Program to calculate output in a multi‐layer feed forward network.
6. How the Perceptron Learning rule works for Linearly Separable Problem.
7. How the Perceptron Learning rule works for Non‐Linearly Separable Problem.
8. Program to train a neural network to classify two clusters in a 2‐dimensional space
9. Make Predictions with k‐nearest neighbors on the Iris Flowers Dataset
10. Installing Keras, Tensorflow and Pytorch libraries and making use of them

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 550
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Artificial Neural Networks and Deep Learning L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 6 SC‐EAE SC‐EAE‐2 ML‐348T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To introduce the foundations of Artificial Neural Networks
2. To acquire the knowledge on Deep Learning concepts
3. To learn various types of Artificial Neural Networks
4. To gain knowledge to apply optimization strategies
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Impart the knowledge of neural networks concepts

CO 2 Ability to select the Learning Networks in modelling real world systems

CO 3 Ability to use an efficient algorithm for Deep Models
CO 4 Apply optimization strategies for large scale applications
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 2 2 ‐ ‐ 3 ‐ ‐ 3 ‐ ‐
CO 2 3 2 2 3 2 3 ‐ 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐
CO 3 ‐ ‐ 3 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 3 2
CO 4 ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ 3 3 ‐ 3 ‐ 2 ‐ ‐

UNIT‐I

Artificial Neural Networks Introduction, Basic models of ANN, important terminologies, Supervised Learning
Networks, Perceptron Networks, Adaptive Linear Neuron, Back‐propagation Network. Associative Memory
Networks. Training Algorithms for pattern association, BAM and Hopfield Networks.
Unsupervised Learning Network‐ Introduction, Fixed Weight Competitive Nets, Maxnet, Hamming Network,
Kohonen Self‐Organizing Feature Maps, Learning Vector Quantization, Counter Propagation Networks,
Adaptive Resonance Theory Networks. Special Networks‐Introduction to various networks.

UNIT‐II

Introduction to Deep Learning, Historical Trends in Deep learning, Deep Feed ‐ forward networks, Gradient‐
Based learning, Hidden Units, Architecture Design, Back‐Propagation and Other Differentiation Algorithms

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 551
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT‐III

Regularization for Deep Learning: Parameter norm Penalties, Norm Penalties as Constrained Optimization,
Regularization and Under‐Constrained Problems, Dataset Augmentation, Noise Robustness, Semi‐Supervised
learning, Multi‐task learning, Early Stopping, Parameter Typing and Parameter Sharing, Sparse Representations,
Bagging and other Ensemble Methods, Dropout, Adversarial Training, Tangent Distance, tangent Prop and
Manifold, Tangent Classifier

UNIT – IV

Optimization for Train Deep Models: Challenges in Neural Network Optimization, Basic Algorithms, Parameter
Initialization Strategies, Algorithms with Adaptive Learning Rates, Approximate Second‐ Order Methods,
Optimization Strategies and Meta‐Algorithms
Applications: Large‐Scale Deep Learning, Computer Vision, Speech Recognition, Natural Language Processing

Textbook(s):
1. Li Min Fu, “Neural Networks in Computer Intelligence”, McGraw‐Hill, Inc. 2012.
2. Ian J. Goodfellow, Yoshua Bengio and Aaron Courville, “Deep Learning”, MIT Press, 2016.

References:
1. “Neural Networks :A Comprehensive formulation”, Simon Haykin, 1998, AW
2. Deep Learning, Rajiv Chopra, Khanna Book Publication, Delhi 2020

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 552
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Artificial Neural Networks and Deep Learning Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 6 SC‐EAE SC‐EAE‐2 ML‐348P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Artificial Neural Networks and Deep
Learning) as this is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Setting up the Spyder IDE Environment and Executing a Python Program

2. Installing Keras, Tensorflow and Pytorch libraries and making use of them
3. Implementation of different activation function to train ANN.
4. Implementation of different learning rules.
5. Implementation of Perceptron Networks.
6. Applying the Convolution Neural Network on computer vision problems
7. Image classification on MNIST dataset (CNN model with Fully connected layer)
8. Applying the Deep Learning Models in the field of Natural Language Processing
9. Train a sentiment analysis model on IMDB dataset, use RNN layers with LSTM/GRU notes
10. Applying the Autoencoder algorithms for encoding the real‐world data
11. Applying Generative Adversial Networks for image generation and unsupervised tasks.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 553
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Automation in Manufacturing L P C
3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ME 7 PCE PCE‐4 MEE‐411T
MAE 7 OAE‐MAE OAE‐1 MAO‐415T
OAE 7 ME‐OAE ME‐OAE‐5 OME‐443T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To understand about the fundamental concepts, the necessary knowledge and the basic skills related
to automated manufacturing systems.
2. To understand the techniques of Machine Tool Automation and NC systems.
3. To understand working principle of different CNC Machine Tools.
4. To provide an introduction to Robotics and Automation including robot classification, design and
selection, analysis and applications in industry.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 To Provides theoretical and practical aspects of implementing automation in industry.
CO 2 To Understand the basic procedures and concepts of programming, set up and operation of a CNC
Machining Centre.
CO 3 To Identify and define the functions of the CNC machine control.
CO 4 To understand basic components of robotics, classification of robots and their applications
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 3 3 ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 2 3 3 3 3 ‐ 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 ‐ 2
CO 3 3 3 3 3 ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ 2 2 ‐ 3
CO 4 3 3 3 2 ‐ 3 ‐ ‐ 2 2 ‐ 3

UNIT‐I

Introduction: Concept of Mechanization and Automation; Need philosophy; basic elements; classification of
automated manufacturing systems [hard, programmable and flexible automation]; strategies for automation in
production systems; on line condition monitoring of automated systems, Level of automation.
Parts handling automation: Basic concepts of chute, magazine, hopper, separator, feeders, ejectors, orienters
and transfer machines

UNIT‐II

Machine tool automation: Single and multi‐spindle automats, Swiss type automats and design of automat for a

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 554
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

specific product.
Basic principles of NC system: Components and their functions in NC machines; MCU, DPU and CLU; drives;
special motors and screw‐nut system; advantages of CNC over NC machines; Basic systems of NC and CNC
machines: coordinate system, open loop and closed loop control; absolute and incremental mode.

UNIT‐III

CNC machine tools: structure and working principle; examples and use of CNC machines; machining centre
(MC) – characteristics and applications; Control of tool–work travel; PTP and Continuous; interpolation – linear
and circular
Part programming for NC, CNC and MC systems: Manual part programming: different controllers and codes
used; sequential steps of part programming; examples: part programming for machining in CNC lathes [step
turning, taper turning, grooving, thread cutting, drilling, boring, facing, contouring etc. and milling [pocketing,
island pocketing, grooving, peck drilling

UNIT – IV

Introduction to Robotics: Brief history of robotics; definition of robot; Main components of robot: manipulator,
sensors, controller, power conversion unit; Robot geometry: types of joints, workspace, number of degrees of
freedom; Common configurations used in arms: rectangular, cylindrical, spherical, joined; Classification of
robot according to coordinate system: Cartesian, cylindrical, polar, articulated or jointed; Classification of
robots according to control method: non‐servo, servo; Robot specifications: payload, accuracy, repeatability
resolution, maximum tip speed, reach stroke.

Textbook(s):
1. Automation, Production Systems and CIM–M.P.Groover, Pub‐ Prentice‐Hall of India (P) Ltd.New Delhi
2. Fundamentals of Industrial Automation by V Tergan, I Andreev and B. Liberman, MIR Publisher.

References:
1. CNC Machines by N. K. Tewari, Kundra and P. N. Rao.
2. Introduction to Robotics by J. J. Craig, Addison‐Wesley.
3. Computer Control of Manufacturing Systems by Y. Koren, Tata Mc Graw Hill.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 555
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Automation in Manufacturing Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ME 7 PCE PCE‐4 MEE‐411P
MAE 7 OAE‐MAE OAE‐1 MAO‐415P
OAE 7 ME‐OAE ME‐OAE‐5 OME‐443P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Automation in Manufacturing) as this
is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. To study CNC Lathe and CNC Mill

2. To develop programs on CNC Lathe
3. To develop programs on CNC milling
4. To study working of a Flexible manufacturing system
5. To prepare APT program for the given diagram.
6. To prepare APT program for the given diagram.
7. To study working principle of Robotic Arm.
8. To operate perform Pick and Place task using Robotic Arm

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 556
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Automobile Engineering L P C
3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 6 DT‐EAE DT‐EAE‐2 DT‐316T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To understand the construction and working principle of various parts of an automobile.
2. To understand the construction and working of clutch, gear box, differential, propeller shaft, joints,
etc.
3. To understand the steering system and suspension system.
4. To understand the alternative energy sources used as a fuel in automobile.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Explain the construction details of chassis, frame, body and I C engine components used in
automobile.
CO 2 Understand Transmission system (Clutch, gearbox, differential, etc.) used in automobile.
CO 3 Comprehend various type of steering system and suspension system.
CO 4 Analyze the alternative fuels used in SI and CI engines, and Electric and Hybrid vehicles.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 3 ‐ ‐ 3 3 ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ 3
CO 2 3 3 3 ‐ ‐ 3 3 ‐ 1 ‐ ‐ 3
CO 3 3 3 3 ‐ ‐ 3 3 ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ 3
CO 4 3 3 3 ‐ ‐ 3 3 ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ 3

UNIT‐I

Types of automobiles, vehicle construction and layouts, chassis, frame and body, vehicle aerodynamics, IC
engines‐components, function and materials, variable valve timing (VVT).
Engine auxiliary systems, electronic injection for SI and CI engines, unit injector system, rotary distributor type
and common rail direct injection system, transistor based coil ignition & capacitive discharge ignition systems,
turbo chargers (WGT, VGT), engine emission control by 3‐way catalytic converter system, Emission norms (Euro
& BS).

UNIT‐II

Transmission systems, clutch types & construction, gear boxes‐ manual and automatic gear shift mechanisms,
over drive, transfer box, flywheel, torque converter, propeller shaft, slip joints, universal joints, differential and

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 557
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

rear axle, Hotchkiss drive and Torque tube drive.

UNIT‐III

Steering geometry and types of steering gear box, power steering, types of front axle, types of suspension
systems, pneumatic and hydraulic braking systems, antilock braking system (ABS),electronic brake force
distribution (EBD) and traction control.

UNIT ‐ IV

Alternative energy sources, natural gas, LPG, biodiesel, bio‐ethanol, gasohol and hydrogen fuels in automobiles,
modifications needed, performance, combustion & emission characteristics of alternative fuels in SI and CI
engines, Electric and Hybrid vehicles, application of Fuel Cells.

Textbook(s):
1. Kripal Singh, “Automobile Engineering”, 7th ed. Standard Publication, New Delhi, (1997).
2. Jain K.K. and Asthana R.B.,” Automobile Engineering”, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, (2002).

References:
1. Heisler H., “Advanced Engine Technology”, SAE International Publ., USA, (1998).
2. N. K. Giri, “Automobile Mechanics”, 5th Edition, Khanna Publishers, (2014).
3. Narang G.B.S., “Automobile Engg.”, Khanna Publishers.
4. Srinivasan, “Automotive Engines”, Tata McGraw Hill.
5. Heitner J., “Automotive Mechanics”, 2nd ed., East‐West Press, (1999).

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 558
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Automobile Engineering Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 6 DT‐EAE DT‐EAE‐2 DT‐316P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Automobile Engineering) as this is the
practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. To Study and Demonstration of different Automobile Engines (disassemble and assemble of any Engine).
2. To study and demonstration of the Fuels supply systems (Carburetor, Diesel Fuel Injection Systems and
Gasoline Fuel Injection Systems.).
3. To study and demonstration of differential used in automobile.
4. To study the constructional details, working principles and operation of the Automotive Clutches.
5. To study the construction details, working principle, operation and demonstration the different types of
gearbox used in Automobile.
6. To study and demonstration the different types of Steering Mechanism.
7. To study the constructional details, working principles and operation of the Automotive Suspension
Systems.
8. To study the constructional details, working principles and operation of the Automotive Brake systems.
9. To study the constructional details, working principles and operation of the Automotive Tyres & wheels.
10. To Study on advanced technologies (ABS, EBD, VVT and Hybrid).

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 559
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Automobile Engineering and Electric Vehicles L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ME 6 PCE PCE‐1 MEE‐306T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To understand the construction and working principle of various parts of an automobile.
2. To understand the construction and working of clutch, gear box, differential, propeller shaft, joint, etc.
3. To understand the steering system and suspension system.
4. To understand the alternative energy sources used as a fuel in automobile.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Explain the construction details of chassis, frame, body and I C engine components used in
automobile.
CO 2 Understand Transmission system (Clutch, gearbox, differential, etc.) used in automobile.
CO 3 Comprehend various type of steering system and suspension system.
CO 4 Analyze the alternative fuels used in SI and CI engines, and Electric and Hybrid vehicles.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 3 ‐ ‐ 3 3 ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ 3
CO 2 3 3 3 ‐ ‐ 3 3 ‐ 1 ‐ ‐ 3
CO 3 3 3 3 ‐ ‐ 3 3 ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ 3
CO 4 3 3 3 ‐ ‐ 3 3 ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ 3

UNIT‐I

Types of automobiles, vehicle construction and layouts, chassis, frame and body, vehicle aerodynamics, IC
engines‐components, function and materials, variable valve timing (VVT).
Engine auxiliary systems, electronic injection for SI and CI engines, unit injector system, rotary distributor type
and common rail direct injection system, transistor based coil ignition & capacitive discharge ignition systems,
turbo chargers (WGT, VGT), engine emission control by 3‐way catalytic converter system, Emission norms (Euro
& BS).

UNIT‐II

Transmission systems, clutch types & construction, gear boxes‐ manual and automatic gear shift mechanisms,
over drive, transfer box, flywheel, torque converter, propeller shaft, slip joints, universal joints, differential and
rear axle, Hotchkiss drive and Torque tube drive.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 560
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT‐III

Steering geometry and types of steering gear box, power steering, types of front axle, types of suspension
systems, pneumatic and hydraulic braking systems, antilock braking system (ABS), electronic brake force
distribution (EBD) and traction control.

UNIT – IV

Alternative energy sources, natural gas, LPG, biodiesel, bio‐ethanol, gasohol and hydrogen fuels in automobiles,
modifications needed, performance, combustion & emission characteristics of alternative fuels in SI and CI
engines, Electric and Hybrid vehicles, application of Fuel Cells.
Introduction to EVs, Comparison with Internal combustion Engine: Technology, Comparison with Internal
combustion Engine: Benefits and Challenges Components of Electric Vehicle, Electric Vehicle Powertrain block
diagram.
Battery Energy Storage Batteries in Electric and Hybrid Vehicles: Battery Basics, Battery Parameters,
Electrochemical Cell Fundamentals.

Textbook(s):
1. Kripal Singh, “Automobile Engineering”, 7th ed. Standard Publication, New Delhi, (1997).
2. Jain K.K. and Asthana R.B.,” Automobile Engineering”, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, (2002).
3. Iqbal Husain , “Electric and Hybrid Vehicles Design Fundamentals”, CRC Press.

References:
1. Heisler H., “Advanced Engine Technology”, SAE International Publ., USA, (1998).
2. N. K. Giri, “Automobile Mechanics”, 5th Edition, Khanna Publishers, (2014).
3. Narang G.B.S., “Automobile Engg.”, Khanna Publishers.
4. Srinivasan, “Automotive Engines”, Tata McGraw Hill.
5. Heitner J., “Automotive Mechanics”, 2nd ed., East‐West Press, (1999).

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 561
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Automobile Engineering and Electric Vehicles Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ME 6 PCE PCE‐1 MEE‐306P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Automobile Engineering and Electric
Vehicles) as this is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. To Study and Demonstration of different Automobile Engines (disassemble and assemble of any Engine).
2. To study and demonstration of the Fuels supply systems (Carburetor, Diesel Fuel Injection Systems and
Gasoline Fuel Injection Systems).
3. To study and demonstration of differential used in automobile.
4. To study the constructional details, working principles and operation of the Automotive Clutches.
5. To study the construction details, working principle, operation and demonstration the different types of
gearbox used in Automobile.
6. To study and demonstration the different types of Steering Mechanism.
7. To study the constructional details, working principles and operation of the Automotive Suspension
Systems.
8. To study the constructional details, working principles and operation of the Automotive Brake systems.
9. To study the constructional details, working principles and operation of the Automotive Tyres& wheels.
10. To Study on advanced technologies (ABS, EBD, VVT and Hybrid).
11. To study the characterization of power, torque and efficiency for EV over drive cycle.
12. To understand the flow of energy in the power train of EV during various modes of operation i.e. charging,
V2G feeding, motoring and braking.
13. To conduct specific gravity test and open voltage test of the given battery used in automobile and find the
state of charge.
14. To study the basics of induction motor used in EV’s.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 562
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Battery Management Systems L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 6 EV‐EAE EV‐EAE‐2 EV‐310T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To understand the different types of energy storage system.
2. To study about the battery characteristic & parameters.
3. To know the concepts of battery management system and design the battery pack.
4. To study about the battery testing, disposal and recycling.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Discuss about the different types of energy storage system.
CO 2 Describe about the battery characteristic & parameters.
CO 3 Apply the concepts of battery management system and design the battery pack.
CO 4 Explain about the battery testing, disposal and recycling.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 ‐ 2 1 ‐ 2
CO 2 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 ‐ 2 1 ‐ 2
CO 3 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 ‐ 2 1 ‐ 2
CO 4 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 ‐ 2 1 ‐ 2

UNIT I

Batteries: Lead Acid Battery, Nickel based batteries, Sodium based batteries, Lithium based batteries – Li‐ion &
Li‐poly, Metal Air Battery, Zine Chloride battery; Ultra capacitors, General approach to modelling batteries.

UNIT II

Cells and Batteries‐ conversion of chemical energy to electrical energy‐ Battery Specifications: Variables
tocharacterize battery operating conditions and Specifications to characterize battery nominal and
maximumcharacteristics; Efficiency of batteries; Electrical parameters‐ Heat generation‐ Battery design‐
Performancecriteria for Electric vehicles batteries‐ Vehicle propulsion factors‐ Power and energy requirements
ofbatteries, Meeting battery performance criteria‐ setting new targets for battery performance.

UNIT III

Selection of battery for EVs & HEVs, Traction Battery Pack design, Requirement of Battery Monitoring,

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 563
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

BatteryState of Charge Estimation methods, Battery Cell equalization problem, thermal control, protection
interface,SOC Estimation, Energy & Power estimation, Battery thermal management system, Battery
ManagementSystem: Definition, Parts: Power Module, Battery, DC/DC Converter, load, communication
channel, BatteryPack Safety, Battery Standards & Tests

UNIT IV

Chemical & structure material properties for cell safety and battery design, battery testing, limitations
fortransport and storage of cells and batteries, Recycling, disposal and second use of batteries. Battery
Leakage:gas generation in batteries, leakage path, leakage rates. Ruptures: Mechanical stress and pressure
tolerance ofcells, safety vents, Explosions: Causes of battery explosions, explosive process, ThermalRunway:
Highdischarge rates, Short circuits, charging and discharging. Environment and Human Health
impactassessments of batteries, General recycling issues and drivers, methods of recycling of EV batteries.

Textbook(s):
1. Ibrahim Dinçer, Halil S. Hamut and Nader Javani, “Thermal Management of Electric VehicleBattery
Systems”, John Wiley& Sons Ltd., 2016.
2. Chris Mi, Abul Masrur& David Wenzhong Gao, “Hybrid electric Vehicle‐ Principles & Applications with
Practical Properties”, Wiley, 2011.
3. Mehrdad Ehsani, Yimin Gao, Ali Emadi, “Modern Electric Hybrid Electric and Fuel Cell Vehicles”,Taylor&
Francis Group, 2010.

Reference Books:
1. G. Pistoia, J.P. Wiaux, S.P. Wolsky, “Used Battery Collection and Recycling”, Elsevier, 2001. (ISBN: 0‐444‐
50562‐8)
2. Guangjin Zhao, “Reuse and Recycling of Lithium‐Ion Power Batteries”, John Wiley & Sons. 2017. (ISBN:
978‐1‐1193‐2185‐9)
3. T R Crompton, “Battery Reference Book”, 3rd Edition, Newnes‐ Reed Educational and
ProfessionalPublishing Ltd., 2000.
4. Arno Kwade, Jan Diekmann, “Recycling of Lithium‐Ion Batteries: The LithoRec Way”, Springer,2018. (ISBN:
978‐3‐319‐70571‐2).
5. James Larminie, John Lowry, “Electric Vehicle Technology Explained”, John Wiley & Sons Ltd, 2003.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 564
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Battery Management Systems Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 6 EV‐EAE EV‐EAE‐2 EV‐310P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Battery Management Systems) as this
is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Study the basic parameters of battery.

2. Measure the charging voltage and current of given battery.
3. Demonstrate any charging technique of lead acid battery/ Lithium Ion battery.
4. Demonstrate the discharging process of battery using various values of C‐rate and compare it.
5. Simulate battery model of given battery using any simulation tool.
6. Simulation on charging techniques of battery.
7. Study the process of battery testing and measure the parameters of battery.
8. Study and Demonstration of Battery Temperature Measurement (Thermocouple, Thermistor etc)
9. Battery pack design for given EV application (Testing Various series parallel combinations for given
application)
10. Case Study: Design, selection, sizing and components of any developed charging station for EV.
11. Visit to any industry/ Research laboratory related to battery and EV.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 565
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Big Data Analytics L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CSE‐DS 7 PC PC DS‐429T
EAE 7 DS‐EAE DS‐EAE‐4 DS‐429T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. Understand the Big Data Platform and its Use cases
2. Provide HDFS Concepts and Interfacing with HDFS
3. Provide hands on Hodoop Eco System
4. Exposure to Data Analytics with R
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Identify Big Data and its Business Implications
CO 2 List the components of Hadoop and Hadoop Eco‐System
CO 3 Develop Big Data Solutions using Hadoop Eco System
CO 4 Manage Job Execution in Hadoop Environment
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 2 ‐ ‐ 2 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 1 ‐ ‐ ‐
CO 2 ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 3 ‐ 1 2 ‐ ‐
CO 3 ‐ 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 ‐ ‐
CO 4 ‐ 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 ‐ ‐

UNIT‐I

Introduction to Big Data: Introduction to Big Data, Big Data characteristics, Challenges of Conventional System,
Types of Big Data, Intelligent data analysis, Traditional vs. Big Data business approach, Case Study of Big Data
Solutions.

UNIT‐II

Hadoop: History of Hadoop, Hadoop Distributed File System: Physical organization of Compte Nodes,
Components of Hadoop Analyzing the Data with Hadoop, Scaling Out, Hadoop Streaming, Design of HDFS,Java
interfaces to HDFS Basics, Developing a Map Reduce Application, How Map Reduce Works, Anatomy of a Map
Reduce Job run, Failures, Job Scheduling, Shuffle and Sort, Task execution, Map Reduce Types and Formats,
Map Reduce Features, Hadoop environment. Setting up a Hadoop Cluster, Cluster specification, Cluster Setup
and Installation, Hadoop Configuration, security in Hadoop, Administering Hadoop, Monitoring‐Maintenance,
Hadoop benchmarks, Hadoop in the cloud

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 566
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT‐III

NoSQL: What is NoSQL? NoSQL business drivers; NoSQL case studies; NoSQL data architecture patterns: Key‐
value stores, Graph stores, Column family (Bigtable) stores, Document stores, Variations of NoSQL architectural
patterns; Using NoSQL to manage big data: What is a big data NoSQL solution? Understanding the types of big
data problems; Analyzing big data with a shared‐nothing architecture; Choosing distribution models: master‐
slave versus peer‐to‐peer; Four ways that NoSQL systems handle big data problems

UNIT – IV

Frameworks: Applications on Big Data Using Pig and Hive, Data processing operators in Pig, Hive services,
HiveQL, Querying Data in Hive, fundamentals of HBase and ZooKeeper, IBM InfoSphere BigInsights and
Streams. Machine Learning: Introduction, Supervised Learning, Unsupervised Learning, Collaborative Filtering.
Big Data Analytics with BigR

Textbook(s):
1. Jiawei Han, Micheline Kamber, Jian Pei, “Data Mining : Concepts and Techniques”, 3rd edition, MK Publisher
2. Tom White “Hadoop: The Definitive Guide” Third Editon, O’reily Media, 2012.

References:
1. Seema Acharya, Subhasini Chellappan, "Big Data Analytics" Wiley 2015.
2. Michael Berthold, David J. Hand, "Intelligent Data Analysis”, Springer, 2007

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 567
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Big Data Analytics Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CSE‐DS 7 PC PC DS‐429P
EAE 7 DS‐EAE DS‐EAE‐4 DS‐429P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Big Data Analytics) as this is the
practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Downloading and installing Hadoop; Understanding different Hadoop modes. Startup scripts, Configuration
files
2. Implement the following file management tasks in Hadoop:
i. Adding files and directories
ii. Retrieving files
iii. Deleting files
Hint: A typical Hadoop workflow creates data files (such as log files) elsewhere and copies them into HDFS
using one of the above command line utilities
3. Implement of Matrix Multiplication with Hadoop Map Reduce
4. Write a Map Reduce program that mines weather data. Hint: Weather sensors collecting data every hour
at many locations across the globe gather a large volume of log data, which is a good candidate for analysis
with Map Reduce, since it is semi structured and record‐oriented
5. Run a basic Word Count Map Reduce program to understand Map Reduce Paradigm.
6. Implementation of K‐means clustering using Map Reduce.
7. Installation of Hive along with practice examples.
8. Installation of HBase, Installing thrift along with Practice examples
9. Run the Pig Latin Scripts to find Word Count.
10. Run the Pig Latin Scripts to find a max temp for each and every year.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 568
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Bio Medical Instrumentation L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EE/EEE 6 PCE PCE‐1 EEE‐310T
ICE 7 PCE PCE‐4 ICE‐407T
OAE 7 ICE‐OAE ICE‐OAE‐5 OICE‐437T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To expose the students to biomedical instrumentation system
2. To impart knowledge on origin of bioelectric potential and measurement system
3. To expose the students on the medical imaging system
4. To impart knowledge on biomedical instruments and their working
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Ability to understand origin bioelectric potential and construction of biomedical instrumentation
system for their measurement
CO 2 Ability to apply measurement principles for measuring human body parameters
CO 3 Ability to analyzeanalog and digital circuits used in biomedical equipments
CO 4 Ability to plan and design computerized critical care unit
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 ‐ 3
CO 2 3 3 2 ‐ ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ 2 2 ‐ 3
CO 3 3 3 2 3 ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ 2 2 2 3
CO 4 3 3 3 3 ‐ 2 2 2 2 2 2 3

UNIT I

Biomedical signals & Physiological transducers: Source of biomedical signal, Origin of bioelectric signals,
recording electrodes, Electrodes for ECG, EMG &EEG .Physiological transducers: Pressure, Temperature,
photoelectric & ultrasound Transducers. Measurement in Respiratory system: Physiology of respiratory system,
Measurement of breathing mechanics Spiro meter, Respiratory therapy equipments Inhalators ventilators
&Respirators , Humidifiers , Nebulizers Aspirators, Biomedical recorders: ECG, EEG & EMG.

UNIT II

Patient Monitoring systems & Audiometers: Cardiac monitor, Bedside patient monitor, measurement of heart
rate, blood pressure, temperature , respiration rate, Arrhythmia monitor, Methods of monitoring fatal heart
rate, Monitoring labor activity . Audiometers: Audiometers, Blood cell counters, Oximeter, Blood flow meter,

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 569
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

cardiac output measurement, Blood gas analyzers.

UNIT III

Modern Imaging systems: Introduction, Basic principle & Block diagram of x‐ray machine, x‐ ray Computed
Tomography (CT), Magnetic resonance imaging system (NMR),ultrasonic imaging system. Eco‐Cardiograph, Eco
Encephalography, Ophthalmic scans, MRI. Therapeutic Equipments: Cardiac pacemakers, cardiac defibrillators,
Hemodialysis machine, Surgical diathermy machine.

UNIT IV

Patients safety & Computer Applications in Biomedical field: Precaution, safety codes for electro medical
equipment, Electric safety analyzer, Testing of biomedical equipment, Use of microprocessors in medical
instruments, Microcontrollers, PC based medical instruments, Computerized Critical care units, Planning &
designing a computerized critical care unit. Physiotherapy: Software Diathermy, microwave diathermy,
Ultrasound therapy unit. Electrotherapy Equipments, Ventilators.

Text Books:
1. Joseph J. Carr& John M. Brown, “Introduction to Biomedical Equipment Technology”, Pearson.
2. Shakti Chatterjee, “Textbook of Biomedical Instrumentation System”, Cengage Learning

Reference Books:
1. R.S.Khandpur, “Hand book of Biomedical Instrumentation”, TMH
2. Walter Welko‐ Witiz and Sid Doutsch,“Biomedical Instruments: Theory and Design”Wiley
3. Lesile Cromwell, Fred J.Weibell& Erich A. Pfeiffer, “Biomedical Instrumentation & Measurements”, PHI

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 570
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Bio Medical Instrumentation Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EE/EEE 6 PCE PCE‐1 EEE‐310P
ICE 7 PCE PCE‐4 ICE‐407P
OAE 7 ICE‐OAE ICE‐OAE‐5 OICE‐437P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Bio Medical Instrumentation) as this is
the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. To study various transducers for biomedical applications

2. To study working principle & measure blood pressure using sphygmomanometer.
3. To study working principle of automatic blood pressure monitor and to measure blood pressure
4. To measure percentage amount of oxygenated arterial blood using oximeter.
5. To record ECG signal using ECG machine.
6. To study working principle & measure body temperature using Digital Thermometer
7. To study working principle of respiration measurement system and measure respiration rate.
8. To study working principle of pacemaker and different operating modes of pacemaker.
9. To study working of EMG machine and hence record EMG signal.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 571
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Biometrics L P C
3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 7 IPCV‐EAE IPCV‐EAE‐4A IPCV‐453T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To introduce the general principles of design of biometric systems and the underlying trade‐offs.
Personal privacy and security implications of biometrics based identification technology.
2. To familiarize with Face recognition and Hand Geometry, feature extraction, pattern classification.
Authentication Methods and their algorithms
3. To acquire knowledge about various parameters involved in Iris and Voice recognition. Authentication
Methods and their algorithms
4. Introduction to multimodal Biometric system and its functional blocks and futuristic biometric
systems.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Demonstrate knowledge engineering principles underlying biometric systems and Finger print feature
processing.
CO 2 Face recognition, how to perform Feature Extraction, classification of features, training of algorithm
using neural network.
CO 3 To acquire knowledge about various parameters involved in Iris and Voice recognition. Authentication
Methods and their algorithms
CO 4 Demonstration of innovative multimodal Biometric system and Statistical Measures of Biometrics
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 1 2 1 1 2
CO 2 3 3 3 3 2 2 1 ‐ 2 1 ‐ 2
CO 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 1 ‐ 2 1 ‐ 2
CO 4 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 ‐ 2 1 ‐ 2

UNIT I

Introduction to biometrics: Biometric technologies, Passive biometrics, Active biometrics, Biometric systems,
Enrolment, Templates, Algorithm, Verification, Authentication technologies, Need for strong authentication,
Protecting privacy and policy, Low level Feature Extraction: Edge Detection, phase congruency, localized
feature extraction, describing image motion. High Level Extraction: Thresholding and subtraction, Template
matching, feature extraction by low level features, Hough transformation.
Fingerprint Technology: History of fingerprint pattern recognition, General description of fingerprints, Finger
print feature processing techniques, Fingerprint sensors using RF imaging techniques, Fingerprint quality

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 572
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

assessment, Computer enhancement and modelling of fingerprint images, Fingerprint enhancement, Feature
extraction, Fingerprint classification, Fingerprint matching

UNIT II

Face recognition & Hand Geometry: Introduction to face recognition, Neural networks for face recognition,
Hand geometry, Scanning, Feature Extraction, Adaptive Classifiers, Classification of 3D biometric imaging
methods, 3D biometric Technologies, 3D palm print capturing systems, Biometric fusion.
Iris and Voice recognition: Iris scan – Features, Components, Operation (Steps), Competing iris Scan
technologies Strength and weakness. Voice Scan – Features, Components, Operation (Steps), Competing voice
Scan (facial) technologies–Strength and weakness

UNIT III

Physiological and Behavioural Biometrics: Retina scan – AFIS (Automatic Finger Print Identification Systems)
Behavioral biometrics – Signature scan‐Keystroke scan biometrics application, Biometric Solution Matrix, Bio
privacy, Comparison of privacy factor in different biometrics technologies.
Multimodal Biometrics: Introduction to multimodal Biometric system, Integration strategies – Architecture,
Level of fusion –Combination strategy –Training and adaptability – Examples of multimodal biometric systems,
Performance evaluation‐ Statistical Measures of Biometrics: FAR – FRR – FTE – EER – Memory requirement and
Allocation

UNIT IV

Biometric Authentication: Biometric Authentication Methods, Biometric Authentication Systems, Biometric

authentication by fingerprint, Biometric Authentication by Face Recognition ‐ Expectation‐Maximization theory
– Support Vector Machines. Biometric authentication by fingerprint –Biometric authentication by hand
geometry‐ Securing and trusting a Biometric transaction – Matching location – local host ‐ authentication
server – Match On Card (MOC) – Multi‐Biometrics and Two‐Factor authentication

Textbook(s):
1. James wayman, Anil k.Jain , Arun A.Ross , Karthik Nandakumar, Introduction to Biometrics, Springer, 2011
2. John Vacca "Biometrics Technologies and Verification Systems" Elsevier 2007
3. James Wayman, Anil Jain, David MAltoni, DasioMaio(Eds) "Biometrics Systems Technology", Design and
Performance Evalution.Springer 2005

Reference Books:
1. Haizhou Li, Liyuan Li, Kar‐Ann Toh, Advanced Topics in Biometrics, 2012, 1st edition, World Scientific
Publisher, Singapore
2. Amine Nail ‐Ali and Regis Fournier "Signal and Image Processing for Biometrics" John wiley and sons,2012

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 573
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Biometrics Lab L P C
2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 7 IPCV‐EAE IPCV‐EAE‐4A IPCV‐453P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Biometrics) as this is the practical
component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Installation and working on various AI tools such as Python / MATLAB.

2. Implement a face recognition system based on Linear Discriminant Analysis Implementation of anyone
classification technique.
3. Implement a face recognition system using Gabor filters to extract features
4. Implementation of different feature extraction methods.
5. Design and Apply Image Acquisition and Feature Extraction for different Iris features
6. Compute the Classification Accuracy of Support Vector Machine & Convolutional Neural Network for a
given dataset
7. Employ morphological operators and enhancement methods to the fingerprint images
8. Implement a center point detection algorithm for fingerprint recognition
9. Design and Development of Biometric Recognition and Matching System
10. Design and Apply 3D Biometric palmprint detection and Mobile Biometrics.
11. Develop simple applications for privacy

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 574
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Bitcoin and Cryptocurrency Technologies L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 7 BT‐EAE BT‐EAE‐3 BT‐413T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. Understanding the mechanism of Blockchain and Cryptocurrency
2. Understanding why current implementations work
3. Understanding the necessary cryptographic background
4. Exploring applications of Blockchain to cryptocurrencies and beyond Understanding limitations
of current Blockchain
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Understand the mechanism of Blockchain and Cryptocurrency
CO 2 Explain current implementations work
CO 3 Understand the necessary cryptographic background
CO 4 Explore applications of Blockchain to cryptocurrencies and beyond Understanding limitations of
current Blockchain
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 1
CO 2 3 3 3 2 3 2 3 1 ‐ ‐ 1 1
CO 3 3 3 2 2 2 3 3 2 2 2 ‐ ‐
CO 4 3 3 2 3 2 3 2 1 1 ‐ ‐ 1

UNIT‐I

Introduction to Cryptography & Cryptocurrencies: Cryptographic Hash Functions, Hash Pointers and Data
Structures, Digital Signatures, Public Keys as Identities, A Simple Cryptocurrency.
How Blockchain Achieves & How to Store and Use: Decentralization‐Centralization vs. Decentralization‐
Distributed consensus, Consensus without identity using a block chain, Incentives and proof of work. Simple
Local Storage, Hot and Cold Storage, Splitting and Sharing Keys, Online Wallets and Exchanges, Payment
Services, Transaction Fees, Currency Exchange Markets.

UNIT‐II

Bitcoin as a Platform: Bitcoin as an Append only Log, Bitcoins as “Smart Property”, Secure Multi Party Lotteries
in Bitcoin, Bitcoin as Public Randomness, Source‐Prediction Markets, and Real World Data Feeds
Mechanics of Bitcoin: Bitcoin transactions, Bitcoin Scripts, Applications of Bitcoin scripts, Bitcoin blocks,

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 575
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

The Bitcoin network, Limitations and improvements.

Bitcoin Mining: The task of Bitcoin miners, Mining Hardware, Energy consumption and ecology, Mining
pools, Mining incentives and strategies.

UNIT‐III

Bitcoin and Anonymity: Anonymity Basics, How to De‐anonymize Bitcoin, Mixing, Decentralized Mixing,
Zerocoin and Zerocash.
Altcoins and the Cryptocurrency Ecosystem: Altcoins: History and Motivation, A Few Altcoins in Detail,
Relationship Between Bitcoin and Altcoins, Merge Mining‐Atomic Cross chain Swaps‐6 Bitcoin Backed
Altcoins, “Side Chains”, Ethereum and Smart Contracts.

UNIT ‐ IV

Community, Politics, and Regulation: Consensus in Bitcoin, Bitcoin Core Software, Stakeholders: Who's in
Charge, Roots of Bitcoin, Governments Notice on Bitcoin, Anti Money Laundering Regulation, New York's
BitLicense Proposal.
Recent Trends & applications

Textbook(s):
1. Narayanan, A., Bonneau, J., Felten, E., Miller, A., & Goldfeder, S. (2016).Bitcoin and cryptocurrency
technologies: a comprehensive introduction. Princeton University Press

References:
1. Nicholas Scott, “Bitcoin and Cryptocurrency Trading for Beginners 2021”
2. Antonopoulos, A.M. (2014). Mastering Bitcoin: unlocking digital cryptocurrencies. “O’Reilly Media, Inc.
3. Franco, P. (2014). Understanding Bitcoin: Cryptography, engineering and economics. John Wiley & Sons.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 576
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Bitcoin and Cryptocurrency Technologies Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 7 BT‐EAE BT‐EAE‐3 BT‐413P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Bitcoin and Cryptocurrency
Technologies) as this is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Setting up a cryptocurrency wallet and conducting transactions.

2. Simulating cryptocurrency mining and analyzing profitability.
3. Analyzing blockchain network propagation and efficiency.
4. Implementing a simple smart contract on a blockchain platform.
5. Conducting a security audit of a cryptocurrency exchange.
6. Exploring privacy‐enhancing techniques in cryptocurrencies.
7. Evaluating scalability solutions for blockchain networks.
8. Understanding compliance and regulatory considerations for cryptocurrencies.
9. Studying and analyzing a decentralized finance (DeFi) application.
10. Collaborating on a group project to develop an innovative cryptocurrency application.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 577
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Blockchain for Cyber Security L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 7 BT‐EAE BT‐EAE‐5A BT‐417T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. Understand the concepts of blockchain in cybersecurity.
2. Understand cryptography and IAM for blockchain.
3. Understand the concept of infrastructure security.
4. Understand the application architecture and incident detection and response.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Ability of students to understand the concepts of blockchain in cybersecurity.
CO 2 Ability of students to understand cryptography and IAM for blockchain.
CO 3 Ability of students to understand the concept of infrastructure security.
CO 4 Ability of students to understand the concepts of application architecture and incident detection and
response.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 1
CO 2 3 3 3 2 3 2 3 1 ‐ ‐ 1 1
CO 3 3 3 2 2 2 3 3 2 2 2 ‐ ‐
CO 4 3 3 2 3 2 3 2 1 1 ‐ ‐ 1

UNIT‐I

Cybersecurity for Blockchain: Introduction, The CIA Triad, The AAA of Security, Non‐repudiation, How to
Measure Risk?, Blockchain Governance, Types of Blockchains,The Blockchain Trilemma, Quantum Computing,
Differences between blockchains.

UNIT‐II

Cryptography, Hashing, and Digital Signatures: Introduction Consensus Mechanisms, Hashing, Hash Function,
Characteristics, Digital Signatures, Multi‐signature, Random Numbers, Prime Numbers, RSA, ECDSA.
IAM for Blockchain: MFA, Authorization and Permission, Permissioned and Permissionless, Node Permissions
and ALC, Least Privilege and Segregation of Duties, Password Security,User Authentication.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 578
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT‐III

Infrastructure Security: Data Encryption, Denial of Service, Man‐in‐The‐Middle Attack, System Resiliency
Infrastructure Hardening, Blockchain Node Infrastructure.
Logging and Monitoring: Lodging and Monitoring.

UNIT ‐ IV

Applications Architecture: Applications Architecture, VPCs, NACLs, Testing your Blockchain Application Other
Security Practices.
Incident Detection and Response: Incident Detection and Response, Contingency Planning

Textbook(s):
1. Hands‐On Cybersecurity with Blockchain: Implement DDoS protection, PKI‐based identity, 2FA, and DNS
security using Blockchain, Rajneesh Gupta, 2018.
2. Transforming Cybersecurity Solutions Using Blockchain, Springer book series, Rashmi Aggarwal and Neha
Gupta (Guest Editors).

References:
1. Mastering ethereum: building smart contracts and dapps Antonopoulos, Andreas M., and Gavin Wood,
O'Reilly Media, 2018

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 579
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Blockchain for Cyber Security Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 7 BT‐EAE BT‐EAE‐5A BT‐417P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Blockchain for Cyber Security) as this is
the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1 Write a program to implement Random Function.

2. Write a program to implement DES and AES algorithm for Encryption and Decryption.
3. Write a program to implement the RSA Algorithm.
4. Write a program to implement MD5 and calculate message digest of a file/image.
5. Write a program to implement SHA‐256 and calculate message digest of a file/image.
6. Write a program to check the strength of the password.
7. Creating Merkle tree
8. Creation of Block Week
9: Block chain Implementation Programming code Week 4:
10. Creating ERC20 token

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 580
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Blockchain Technology L P C
3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CSE‐ICB/CSE‐CS 6 PC PC BT‐308T
EAE 6 BT‐EAE BT‐EAE‐2 BT‐308T
CSE/IT/CST/ITE 7 PCE PCE‐4 CIE‐403T
EAE 7 ICB‐EAE ICB‐EAE‐5 BT‐443T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. Understand the fundamental concepts along with cryptographic techniques of blockchain technology
and analyze the architecture and components of a blockchain system.
2. Explore various consensus algorithms and smart contracts employed in blockchain networks
3. Evaluate the applications and use cases of blockchain technology.
4. Discuss the challenges and potential future developments in blockchain.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 To be able to understand fundamental concepts, architecture, components and cryptographic
techniques of blockchain technology
CO 2 To be able to understand various consensus algorithms and smart contracts
CO 3 To be able to understand the applications and use cases of blockchain technology.
CO 4 To be able to analyze challenges and potential future developments in blockchain technology.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 2 2 2 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 2 2 3
CO 2 3 2 2 2 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 2 2 3
CO 3 3 2 2 2 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 2 2 3
CO 4 3 2 2 2 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 2 2 3

UNIT I

Introduction to Blockchain Technology: Evolution and history of blockchain, Characteristics and features of
blockchain, Blockchain vs. traditional databases. Blockchain Architecture: Distributed ledger technology, Types
of Blockchains, Components of a blockchain: blocks, transactions, nodes, Consensus mechanisms.
Cryptographic Foundations: Hash functions and digital signatures, Public‐key cryptography, Merkle trees and
their applications, Zero‐knowledge proofs

UNIT II

Consensus Algorithms: Proof of Work (PoW), Proof of Stake (PoS), Practical Byzantine Fault Tolerance (PBFT),

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 581
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Delegated Proof of Stake (DPoS). Smart Contracts: Introduction to smart contracts, Solidity programming
language, Ethereum Virtual Machine (EVM), Deploying and executing smart contracts

UNIT III

Blockchain Applications: Cryptocurrencies and digital assets, Supply chain management, Identity management,
Healthcare and medical records. Privacy and Security in Blockchain, Privacy‐enhancing techniques (e.g., ring
signatures, zero‐knowledge proofs), Security vulnerabilities and attacks, Auditing and accountability in
blockchain systems

UNIT IV

Blockchain Governance and Regulations: Decentralized autonomous organizations (DAOs), Legal and regulatory
considerations, Government initiatives and policies. Future Trends and Challenges: Scalability and performance
issues, Integration with emerging technologies (e.g., AI, IoT), Sustainability and energy consumption, Industry
adoption and standards

Text Books:
1. "Mastering Blockchain" by Imran Bashir
2. “Blockchain Basics: A Non‐Technical Introduction in 25 Steps" by Daniel Drescher

Reference Books:
1. "Ethereum: Blockchains, Digital Assets, Smart Contracts, Decentralized Autonomous Organizations" by
Henning Diedrich.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 582
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Blockchain Technology Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CSE‐ICB/CSE‐CS 6 PC PC BT‐308P
EAE 6 BT‐EAE BT‐EAE‐2 BT‐308P
CSE/IT/CST/ITE 7 PCE PCE‐4 CIE‐403P
EAE 7 ICB‐EAE ICB‐EAE‐5 BT‐443P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Blockchain Technology) as this is the
practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Create a Simple Blockchain in any suitable programming language.

2. Use Geth to Implement Private Ethereum Block Chain.
3. Build Hyperledger Fabric Client Application.
4. Create and deploy a block chain network using Hyperledger Fabric SDK for Java Set up and initialize the
channel, install and instantiate chaincode, and perform invoke and query on your block chain network.
5. Interact with a block chain network. Execute transactions and requests against a block chain network by
creating an app to test the network and its rules (https://developer.ibm.com/patterns/interacting‐with‐a‐
block chain‐network/)
6. Deploy an asset‐transfer app using block chain. Learn app development within a Hyperledger Fabric
network (https://developer.ibm.com/patterns/deploy‐an‐asset‐transfer‐app‐using‐block chain/)
7. Use block chain to track fitness club rewards Build a web app that uses Hyperledger Fabric to track and
trace member rewards
8. Interat with a blockchain network. Execute transactions and requestes against a blockchain network by
creatingan app to test the network and its rules.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 583
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Blockchain Technology in Web Development L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 7 BT‐EAE BT‐EAE‐5B BT‐419T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. Understand the fundamental concepts of blockchain technology, including decentralized networks,
distributed ledgers, and consensus algorithms
2. Explain the role of cryptography in blockchain and its importance for secure transactions.
3. Integrate blockchain technology into web applications and understand the process of interacting with
blockchain networks
4. Design and build decentralized applications (DApps) using blockchain platforms
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Ability of students to understand the concepts of BlockChain Technology.
CO 2 Ability of students to analyse basics of Cryptography and the importance of secure transactions
CO 3 Ability of students to understand the integration of blockchain technology into web applications
CO 4 Ability of students to design and build decentralized applications using blockchain platforms
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 1
CO 2 3 3 3 2 3 2 3 1 ‐ ‐ 1 1
CO 3 3 3 2 2 2 3 3 2 2 2 ‐ ‐
CO 4 3 3 2 3 2 3 2 1 1 ‐ ‐ 1

UNIT I

Introduction to Blockchain Technology. Understanding decentralized networks and distributed ledgers. Types
of blockchain: public, private, and consortium. Cryptography Fundamentals for Blockchain. Hash functions,
digital signatures, and encryption techniques. Securing transactions and data using cryptography

UNIT II

Blockchain Architecture and Components‐ blocks, transactions, and Merkle trees. Consensus mechanisms:
proof of work, proof of stake, and others. Blockchain data structures: Merkle Patricia tree, state trie. Smart
contracts and their role in blockchain applications. Programming smart contracts using Solidity. Deploying and
interacting with smart contracts on a blockchain network

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 584
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT III

Web Development and Blockchain Integration. Connecting web applications to public or private blockchain
networks. Handling transactions and data storage on the blockchain. Understanding the architecture of
decentralized applications (DApps). Using blockchain platforms for DApp development (e.g., Ethereum,
Hyperledger). Deploying DApp.

UNIT IV

Security vulnerabilities in blockchain applications. Smart contract development. Blockchain Use Cases and
Industry Applications. Opportunities and Challenges for blockchain adoption. Integration of blockchain with
other technologies (AI, IoT).

Textbooks:
1. Richie Etwaru, “Blockchain Basics: A Practical Approach for Non‐Developers”, Wiley,2019.
2. Santiago Palladino, “Ethereum for Web Developers”, Apress Publications, 2018.
3. Narayan Prusty ,“ Building Blockchain Projects”, Packt Publishing, 2017.

Reference Books:
1. Chris Dannen (2017), “Introducing Ethereum and Solidity: Foundations of Cryptocurrency and Blockchain
Programming for Beginners”.
2. Mark Gates(2018), “Blockchain: Ultimate guide to understanding blockchain, bitcoin, cryptocurrencies,
smart contracts, and the future of money”

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 585
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Blockchain Technology in Web Development Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 7 BT‐EAE BT‐EAE‐5B BT‐419P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Blockchain Technology in Web
Development) as this is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Setting up development environments and tools (Ethereum, Hyperledger, etc.)

2. Introduction to Solidity programming language for smart contracts
3. Understanding Solidity syntax and data types
4. Implementing smart contracts for different use cases
5. Writing code to read and write data to the blockchain for handling events and transactions
6. Implementation of Integrating with smart contracts and blockchain networks
7. Build a user interface for DApps using HTML, CSS, and JavaScript
8. Implementing user authentication and authorization in DApps
9. Write the Program to store data on the blockchain using IPFS (InterPlanetary File System)
10. Program for Integrating DApps with existing web applications and APIs

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 586
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Building Material and Concrete Testing Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CE 5 PC PC CEC‐353

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.
Course Objectives:
1. To understand the building material, characterization and its application
2. To recognize the importance of material characteristics and their contributions to strength
development in Concrete
3. To identify the suitable material for construction and various building components
4. To ascertain and measure engineering properties of concrete in fresh and hardened state which
meet the requirement of real time structures
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Assess the different properties of Cement.
CO 2 Determine the different properties of aggregates.
CO 3 Understand the standard testing procedure of bricks, sand, concrete, aggregate, etc
CO 4 Design & describe the preparation of concrete and testing of concrete
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 ‐ 3 3 2 ‐ ‐ 3 2 ‐ 2
CO 2 3 3 ‐ 3 3 2 ‐ ‐ 3 2 ‐ 2
CO 3 3 3 ‐ 3 3 2 ‐ ‐ 3 2 ‐ 3
CO 4 3 3 ‐ 3 3 2 ‐ ‐ 3 2 ‐ 3

1. Shape & size, water absorption and compressive strength of brick

2. Normal consistency, initial and final setting time of cement.
3. Fineness and soundness of cement.
4. Heat of hydrations of cement, specific gravity of cement, fine and course aggregates.
5. Sieve analysis and fineness modulus of fine and course aggregates.
6. Water absorption fine and coarse aggregates and impurities tests on aggregates.
7. Compressive strength, workability of lime and cement mortars.
8. Proportioning of aggregates and mix design.
9. Work ability by slump test, compaction factors and Vee‐bee consistometer test along with compressive
and tensile strength of concrete.
10. Non‐destructive tests on concrete (Rebound hammer and UPVT)

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 587
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Business Intelligence L P C
3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CSE‐DS 7 PC PC DS‐431T
EAE 7 DS‐EAE DS‐EAE‐5A DS‐431T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To understand the basics of business intelligence, business decisions, data warehouses and its
architecture, KDD process.
2. To understand the applications of data mining in business, data mining techniques for CRM, text
mining and web mining.
3. To acquire knowledge in business intelligence, application in various domains and best practice.
4. To understand the knowledge management, its architecture, approaches and tools.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Understand the basics of business intelligence, business decisions, data warehouses and its
architecture, KDD process.
CO 2 Understand the applications of data mining in business, data mining techniques for CRM, text mining
and web mining.
CO 3 Apply business intelligence in various domains.
CO 4 Understand the knowledge management, its architecture, approaches and tools.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 3 3 1 2 ‐ ‐ 1 ‐ 1 2
CO 2 3 3 3 3 2 2 ‐ ‐ 1 ‐ 1 2
CO 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 ‐ ‐ 1 ‐ 1 2
CO 4 3 3 3 3 1 2 ‐ ‐ 1 ‐ 1 2

UNIT‐I

Introduction to business intelligence and business decisions ‐ Data warehouses and its role in Business
Intelligence, Creating a corporate data warehouse, Data Warehousing architecture, OLAP vs. OLTP, ETL
process, Tools for Data Warehousing, Data Mining, KDD Process

UNIT‐II

Applications of Data Mining in Business ‐ Data Mining Techniques for CRM, Text Mining in BI, Web Mining,
Mining e‐commerce data, Enterprise Information Management, Executive Information Systems

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 588
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT‐III

Business Intelligence, Function, Process, Services & Tools, Application in different domains, Operational BI,
Customizing BI, Managing BI projects vs. Traditional IS projects, Managing BI projects, Best Practices in BI
Strategy

UNIT ‐ IV

The ten key principle of KM, Knowledge Management Architecture, Knowledge Management Vs. Knowledge
Processing, KM approaches, KM Tools, KM Infrastructure, KM models, KM Strategies

Textbook(s):
1 Business Intelligence in the Digital Economy ‐ Opportunities, Limitations and Risks, M.Raisinghani, Idea
Group Publications, 2004
2 Knowledge Management and Business Innovation, Yogesh Malhotra, Idea Group, 2001

References:
1. Introduction to Data Mining and its Applications, Sumathy, Sivanandam, Springer Verlag, 2006

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 589
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Business Intelligence Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CSE‐DS 7 PC PC DS‐431P
EAE 7 DS‐EAE DS‐EAE‐5A DS‐431P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Business Intelligence) as this is the
practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Import the legacy data from different sources such as (Excel, SqlServer, Oracle etc.) and load in the target
system.
2. Perform the Extraction Transformation and Loading (ETL) process to construct the database in the
Sqlserver / Power BI.
3. Data Visualization from ETL Process
4. Creating a Data Cubes
5. Apply the what – if Analysis for data visualization. Design and generate necessary reports based on the
data warehouse data.
6. Implementation of Classification algorithm.
7. Practical Implementation of Decision Tree
8. Implementation of k‐means clustering
9. Prediction Using Linear Regression
10. Data Analysis using Time Series Analysis
11. Data Modelling and Analytics with Pivot Table in Excel
12. Data Analysis and Visualization using Advanced Excel

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 590
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

C#.NET Programming L P C
3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CSE/IT/CST/ITE 7 PCE PCE‐5 CIE‐417T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To learn detailed information and knowledge about successfully managing complex IT projects
2. To learn self‐learn and upskill one‐self to apply advanced techniques and concepts in managing and
completing IT projects
3. To learn required maturity to manage the information security aspect of IT projects
4. To learn necessary confidence and experience to predict challenges and risks and address these to
prevent impact on project outcomes
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Understand the concepts of objects and types in C#, including classes, structs, and inheritance.
CO 2 Develop skills in handling errors and exceptions in C#.
CO 3 Learn to manipulate XML using SAX and DOM in C#.
CO 4 Develop skills in using .NET remoting to build distributed applications in C#.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 2 2 2 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 2 2 3
CO 2 3 2 2 2 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 2 2 3
CO 3 3 2 2 2 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 2 2 3
CO 4 3 2 2 2 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 2 2 3

UNIT‐I

.Net Architecture ‐ Core C# ‐ Variables ‐ Data Types ‐ Flow control ‐ Objects and Types‐ Classes and Structs ‐
Inheritance‐ Generics – Arrays and Tuples ‐ Operators and Casts ‐ Indexers

UNIT‐II

Delegates ‐ Lambdas ‐ Lambda Expressions ‐ Events ‐ Event Publisher ‐ Event Listener ‐ Strings and Regular
Expressions ‐ Generics ‐ Collections ‐ Memory Management and Pointers ‐ Errors and Exceptions ‐ Reflection

UNIT‐III

Diagnostics ‐Tasks, Threads and Synchronization ‐ .Net Security ‐ Localization ‐ Manipulating XML‐ SAX and
DOM ‐ Manipulating files and the Registry‐ Transactions ‐ ADO.NET‐ Peer‐to‐Peer Networking ‐ PNRP ‐ Building

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 591
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

P2P Applications ‐ Windows Presentation Foundation (WPF).

UNIT – IV

Window based applications ‐ Core ASP.NET‐ ASP.NET Web forms ‐Windows Communication Foundation (WCF)‐
Introduction to Web Services ‐ .Net Remoting ‐ Windows Service ‐ Windows Workflow Foundation (WWF) ‐
Activities – Workflows

Textbook(s):
1. "C# 9.0 in a Nutshell: The Definitive Reference" by Joseph Albahari and Eric Johannsen
2. "Head First C#: A Learner's Guide to Real‐World Programming with C#, XAML, and .NET" by Jennifer
Greene and Andrew Stellman

References:
1. "Pro C# 9 with .NET 5: Foundational Principles and Practices in Programming" by Andrew Troelsen and
Philip Japikse
2. "C# Yellow Book" by Rob Miles
3. "CLR via C#" by Jeffrey Richter
4. "C# in Depth" by Jon Skeet
5. "Professional C# 6 and .NET Core 1.0" by Christian Nagel
6. "Microsoft Visual C# Step by Step" by John Sharp
7. "Pro ASP.NET Core MVC 2" by Adam Freeman
8. "Essential C# 7.0" by Mark Michaelis and Eric Lippert

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 592
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

C#.NET Programming Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CSE/IT/CST/ITE 7 PCE PCE‐5 CIE‐417P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (C#.NET Programming) as this is the
practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Basic data types and operators: Create a program that prompts the user for their name and age and prints
a personalized message.
2. Conditional statements: Create a program that prompts the user for their age and tells them if they can
vote in the next election.
3. Loops: Create a program that calculates the factorial of a number entered by the user using a loop.
4. Arrays and lists: Create a program that prompts the user for a list of numbers and then sorts them in
ascending order.
5. Strings and string manipulation: Create a program that prompts the user for a string and then prints out
the string reversed.
6. Functions and methods: Create a program that defines a function to calculate the area of a circle based on
the radius entered by the user.
7. Classes and objects: Create a program that defines a class to represent a car and then creates an object of
that class with specific attributes.
8. File input/output: Create a program that reads data from a file and writes it to another file in a different
format.
9. Exception handling: Create a program that prompts the user for two numbers and then divides them,
handling any exceptions that may arise.
10. Graphical User Interface (GUI) programming: Create a program that uses a graphical user interface to allow
the user to perform simple calculations.
11. Multithreading: Create a program that uses multithreading to perform a time‐consuming task in the
background while the user can continue using the application.
12. LINQ (Language Integrated Query): Create a program that uses LINQ to query and manipulate data from a
database.
13. ASP.NET: Create a web application using ASP.NET that allows the user to perform CRUD (Create, Read,
Update, Delete) operations on a database.
14. Windows Forms: Create a desktop application using Windows Forms that allows the user to perform CRUD
(Create, Read, Update, Delete) operations on a database.
15. WPF (Windows Presentation Foundation): Create a desktop application using WPF that allows the user to
perform CRUD (Create, Read, Update, Delete) operations on a database with a modern user interface.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 593
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

C++ Programming L P C
3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EE‐VDT/EC‐ACT 6 OAE‐ECE‐EA OAE‐1 OCSE‐306T
OAE 6 CSE‐OAE CSE‐OAE‐1A OCSE‐306T
OAE 6 SD‐OAE SD‐OAE‐1A OSD‐328T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. Understand and use the basic programming constructs of C/C++
2. Manipulate various C/C++ datatypes, such as arrays, strings, and pointers
3. Isolate and fix common errors in C++ programs
4. Apply object‐oriented approaches to software problems in C++
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Understand tokens, expressions, and control structures
CO 2 Explain arrays and strings and create programs using them
CO 3 Describe and use constructors and destructors
CO 4 Understand and employ file management
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ 3 2
CO 2 ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ 3 ‐ ‐
CO 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 3 ‐ ‐ 3 ‐ ‐ 2 ‐
CO 4 3 ‐ 3 ‐ ‐ 3 3 ‐ 3 ‐ ‐ 3

UNIT‐I

Review of C, Difference between C and C++, Procedure Oriented and Object Oriented Approach. Basic
Concepts: Objects, classes, Principals like Abstraction, Encapsulation, Inheritance and Polymorphism. Dynamic
Binding, Message Passing. Characteristics of Object‐Oriented Languages. Abstract data types, Object & classes,
attributes, methods, C++ class declaration, Local Class and Global Class, State identity and behaviour of an
object, Local Object and Global Object, Scope resolution operator, Friend Functions, Inline functions,
Constructors and destructors, instantiation of objects, Types of Constructors, Static Class Data, Array of
Objects, Constant member functions and Objects, Memory management Operators.

UNIT‐II

Inheritance, Types of Inheritance, access modes – public, private & protected, Abstract Classes, Ambiguity
resolution using scope resolution operator and Virtual base class, Aggregation, composition vs classification

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 594
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

hierarchies, Overriding inheritance methods, Constructors in derived classes, Nesting of Classes.

UNIT‐III

Polymorphism, Type of Polymorphism – Compile time and runtime, Function Overloading, Operator
Overloading (Unary and Binary) Polymorphism by parameter, Pointer to objects, this pointer, Virtual Functions,
pure virtual functions.

UNIT – IV

Manipulating strings, Streams and files handling, formatted and Unformatted Input output. Exception handling,
Generic Programming – function template, class Template Standard Template Library: Standard Template
Library, Overview of Standard Template Library, Containers, Algorithms, Iterators, Other STL Elements, The
Container Classes, General Theory of Operation, Vectors.

Text Books:
1. A.R. Venugopal, Rajkumar, T. Ravishanker “Mastering C++”, TMH, 1997
2. Schildt Herbert, “C++: The Complete Reference”, Wiley DreamTech, 2005.

References:
1. “Object Oriented Programming with C++” By E. Balagurusamy.
2. R. Lafore, “Object Oriented Programming using C++”, BPB Publications, 2004.
3. Parasons, “Object Oriented Programming with C++”, BPB Publication, 1999.
4. Steven C. Lawlor, “The Art of Programming Computer Science with C++”, Vikas Publication, 2002.
5. Yashwant Kanethkar, “Object Oriented Programming using C++”, BPB, 2004

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 595
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

C++ Programming Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EE‐VDT/EC‐ACT 6 OAE‐ECE‐EA OAE‐1 OCSE‐306P
OAE 6 CSE‐OAE CSE‐OAE‐1A OCSE‐306P
OAE 6 SD‐OAE SD‐OAE‐1A OSD‐328P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (C++ Programming) as this is the
practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Write a program for multiplication of two matrices using OOP.

2. Write a program to perform addition of two complex numbers using constructor overloading.
The first constructor which takes no argument is used to create objects which are not initialized, second
which takes one argument is used to initialize real and imag parts to equal values and third which takes
two argument is used to initialized real and imag to two different values.
3. Write a program to find the greater of two given numbers in two different classes using friend function.
4. Implement a class string containing the following functions:
a. Overload + operator to carry out the concatenation of strings.
b. Overload = operator to carry out string copy.
c. Overload <= operator to carry out the comparison of strings.
d. Function to display the length of a string.
e. Function tolower( ) to convert upper case letters to lower case.
f. Function toupper( ) to convert lower case letters to upper case.
5. Create a class called LIST with two pure virtual function store() and retrieve().To store a value call store and
to retrieve call retrieve function. Derive two classes stack and queue from it and override store and
retrieve.
6. Write a program to define the function template for calculating the square of given numbers with different
data types.
7. Write a program to demonstrate the use of special functions, constructor and destructor in the class
template. The program is used to find the bigger of two entered numbers.
8. Write a program to perform the deletion of white spaces such as horizontal tab, vertical tab, space, line
feed new line and carriage return from a text file and store the contents of the file without the white
spaces on another file.
9. Write a program to read the class object of student info such as name , age ,sex ,height and weight from
the keyboard and to store them on a specified file using read() and write() functions. Again the same file is
opened for reading and displaying the contents of the file on the screen.
10. Write a program to raise an exception if any attempt is made to refer to an element whose index is beyond
the array size.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 596
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

CAD/CAM L P C
4 4

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

MAE 6 PC PC MAC‐312

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. Impart knowledge of computer‐aided design (CAD) techniques.
2. Impart knowledge of computer‐aided manufacturing (CAM) techniques.
3. Develop programming and operating skills for computer numerical control (CNC) machines.
4. Enable students understand various stages of product development and their management.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Understanding the scope and need of computer aided design & manufacturing and computer numeric
technology.
CO 2 Applying the techniques to generate solid model and curves
CO 3 Develop the Skills to program the Computer Numerical Control of Machine Tools
CO 4 Apply the concepts of Automated Material Handling Systems and Advanced Manufacturing Systems
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 3 1 3 2 1 2 2 2 2 3
CO 2 3 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 2 3 3 3
CO 3 3 2 2 3 3 2 1 2 3 3 3 3
CO 4 3 2 3 1 3 2 2 2 3 3 3 3

UNIT‐ I

Introduction: Definition and scope of CAD/CAM, Introduction to design process and role of computers in the
design process.
Mapping of Geometric Models: Translation, Rotational, General, Changes of Coordinate System, Numerical
problems. Three Dimensional Transformations: Point representations, Transformation Matrices, Scaling,
Translation, Rotation, Reflection.
Curves: Representation of Space Curves, Cubic Spline, Normalized Cubic Splines, Bezier Curves, B‐spline Curves,
Numerical problems. Surface Generation: Plane Surfaces, Ruled Surfaces, Surface of Revolution, Sweep Surface,
Bezier Surface, Cubic Surface Patch, B‐Spline Surface, Composite Surface, Numerical problem.

UNIT II

Solid modeling: Solid models, Fundamentals of solid modeling, Different solid representation schemes, Half ‐
spaces, Boundary representation (B‐rep), Constructive solid geometry (CSG), Sweep representation,

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 597
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Perspective, Parallel projection, Hidden line removal algorithms.

CAD/CAM Data Exchange Formats: Types of file formats & their exchange, Graphics standards.

UNIT III

Need of NC technology, Fundamental concepts in numeric control: structure and functions of NC System,
advantages of NC technology over conventional manufacturing.
NC Machine Tools: Types, Definition and designation of control axes,Special constructional and design
characteristics of NC machine tools, Standard tooling used for NC turning and milling centres. NC Part
Programming: Work holding and tool setting procedure for NC turning and milling centres, Tool zero presetting,
Block formats and introduction to ISO based G & M codes for NC part programming, Concepts of tool length
and radius compensation, Standard canned cycles used in CNC turning and milling centres, Introduction to
automatic NC part program generation from CAD models using standard CAD/CAM software for machining of
surfaces, moulds and dies etc.

UNIT IV

Computer Numerical Control of Machine Tools: Types and functions of computer numeric control (CNC), Types
and functions of direct numeric control (DNC), Need of adaptive control types, functions and types of adaptive
control, its uses & benefits, Advantages of combined CNC/DNC systems.
Automated Material Handling Systems and Advanced Manufacturing Systems: Industrial Robots, Conveyors,
AGVs, Automatic Storage and Retrieval Systems; Lean Manufacturing Systems.

Textbook(s):
1. Ibrahim Zeid, CAD/CAM Theory and Practice, Tata McGraw‐Hill Publishing Company Limited. 2nd Edition.
2. S.K. Sinha, CNC Programming, Galgotia Publications 2003.
3. David F. Rogers and J. Alan Adams, Mathematical Elements for Computer Graphics, Prentice Hall India
4. T.K. Kundra, P. N.Rao&N.K.Tiwari, Numerical Control and Computer Aided Manufacturing,TMH

References:
1. Mikell P. Groover, Emory W.Zimmers, “CAD/CAM”, Pearson Education, 2001.
2. P.N. Rao, “CAD/CAM Principles and Applications”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2003.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 598
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

CAD/CAM Lab L P C
2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

MAE 6 PC PC MAC‐358

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (CAD/CAM) as this is the practical
component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. To study the characteristic features of CNC machine.

2. Part programming (in word address format) experiment for turning operation (including operations such as
grooving and threading) and running on CNC machine.
3. Part programming (in word address format or ATP) experiment for drilling operation (point to point) and
running on CNC machine.
4. Part programming (in word address format or ATP) experiment for milling operation (contouring) and
running on CNC machine.
5. Experiment on Robot and programs.
6. Experiment on Transfer Line/Material Handling.
7. Experiment on study of system devices such as motors and feedback devices.
8. Experiment on Mechatronics and Controls.
9. Experiment based on CAD part of the syllabus.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 599
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Cellular and Mobile Communication L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 6 WMC‐EAE WMC‐EAE‐2 WMC‐338T
EC‐ACT 7 PC PC ACT‐407T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To know the evolution of Mobile communication and cell concept to improve capacity of the system
2. To study fading mechanism and types of fading and effect of fading on Mobile communication.
3. To know the types of channel coding techniques, data transmission modes and services of GSM
4. To know the types of channel coding techniques, data transmission modes and services of CDMA
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Demonstrate knowledge on cellular concepts like frequency reuse, fading, equalization, GSM, CDMA
CO 2 Demonstrate knowledge hand‐off and interface and apply the concept to calculate link budget using
path loss model
CO 3 Apply the concept of GSM in real time applications
CO 4 Compare different multiple access techniques in mobile communication.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 1 2 3 3 2 2 ‐ 2 2 3 3
CO 2 3 1 2 2 2 2 3 ‐ 3 2 2 3
CO 3 3 3 3 2 3 2 3 ‐ 2 2 3 2
CO 4 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 ‐ 2 3 3 2

UNIT I

Basic Cellular System – Cellular communication infrastructure: Cells – Clusters – Cell Splitting – Frequency
reuse concept and reuse distance calculation – Cellular system components – Operations of cellular systems –
Handoff/Handover – Channel assignment – Fixed and dynamic – Cellular interferences: Co‐Channel and
adjacent channel and sectorization.

UNIT II

Large Scale Fading: Free space propagation model, Three basic propagation mechanisms, Reflection, Ground
Reflection (Two‐Ray) Model, Diffraction, Scattering, Practical link budget using path loss models.
Small Scale Fading: Multipath Propagation, Types of small‐scale fading, Parameters of Mobile Multipath
channels, fading effects due to multipath time delay Spread and Doppler spread.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 600
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT III

Air Interface – GSM Physical Layer: Logical channels, Physical channels, Synchronization‐ Frequency and clock
synchronization, Adaptive frame synchronization, Mapping of logical onto physical channels, Radio subsystem
link control.

GSM Protocols: Protocol architecture planes, Protocol architecture of the user plane, Protocol architecture of
the signaling plane, Signaling at the air interface (Um), Signaling at the A and Abis interfaces, Signaling at the
user interface.

UNIT IV

GSM Roaming Scenarios and Handover: Handover, Services: Classical GSM services, Popular GSM services: SMS
and MMS.Improved data services in GSM: GPRS, HSCSD and EDGE GPRS System architecture of GPRS, Services,
Session management, mobility management and routing.
Introduction to CDMA: CDMA frequency bands, CDMA Network and System Architecture.

Textbook(s):
1. Theodore S. Rappaport, “Wireless Communications Principles and Practice”, Second Edition, 2002.
2. Gottapu Sasibhushana Rao, “Mobile Cellular Communication” Pearson Education, 2012.

Reference Books:
1. Kamilo Feher ‐ Wireless Digital Communications, PHI, 2003
2. W.C.Y. Lee ‐ Mobile Cellular Communications, 2nd Edition, MC Graw Hill, 1995.
3. Yi‐Bing Lin ‐ Wireless and Mobile Network Architectures, 2nd Edition, Wiley, 2008.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 601
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Cellular and Mobile Communication Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 6 WMC‐EAE WMC‐EAE‐2 WMC‐338P
EC‐ACT 7 PC PC ACT‐407P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Cellular and Mobile Communication)
as this is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Introduction to Computer Simulation and MATLAB.

2. Propagation Models and Path Loss Estimation in Cellular Mobile Communication.
3. Outdoor Propagation using Okumura Model and Hata Model.
4. Estimation of Received Bit Energy for Data Rates in Wireless Communication.
5. Multipath Fading in Cellular Mobile Communication.
6. Power‐Delay Profile and Doppler Spectrum for Channel Classification in Cellular Mobile Communication.
7. Design of Cellular Mobile System.
8. Estimation of Bit Error Probability of Modulation Schemes
9. Radio Resource Allocations and Scheduling in Cellular Mobile Communication
10. Design of Inland Digital Microwave Link
11. Design of Satellite Link
12. Free Space Propagation – Path Loss Model

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 602
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Cloud Computing and Security L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CSE‐CS 6 PC PC CS‐316T
CSE‐NET 7 PC PC NET‐473T
EE‐VDT/EC‐ACT 7 OAE‐ECE‐EA OAE‐2 NET‐473T
EAE 7 NET‐EAE NET‐EAE‐4 NET‐473T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. Provides an in‐depth understanding of cloud computing “concepts”, architectures, and services that
underlie today's cloud computing technologies.
2. To develop cloud computing model and understand the need for different types of securities.
3. To create efficient Cloud‐based Secure Software Systems for Low Latency, Fault Tolerance, High
Availability and Performance
4. To globally deploy security on the Cloud serving millions of users, billions of requests & petabytes of
data.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Explain cloud computing concept, architecture, security issues & challenges.
CO 2 Analyse the need for infrastructure security in a cloud environment and apply it in compute, memory
and storage levels.
CO 3 Explain different types of security on large datasets over cloud platforms. Analyse the security issues
on SPI infrastructure and explain the need for secure encryption.
CO 4 Explain the role of application security, data security & infrastructure security in cloud.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2
CO 2 2 3 2 3 3 2 2 1 2 1 2 3
CO 3 2 3 2 3 3 2 2 1 2 1 2 3
CO 4 2 3 2 3 3 2 2 1 2 1 2 3

UNIT I

Introduction & Identity and Access Management: Introduction of Cloud and Cloud Concepts, Cloud
Architecture, Service Models and Design, Cloud Security Concepts, Legal, Compliance & Industry Standards,
Security Challenges, Introduction to Federated Identity Management: SAML & OAuth, identify security holes in
their cloud account's IAM service, Principle of least privilege access, Discover and protect various secrets
related to cloud service authentication.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 603
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT II

Cloud Infrastructure Security: On‐prem to Cloud Migration security considerations (Hybrid cloud) ‐During
Migration, during integration, Cloud Configuration & Patch Management, Cloud Change management, Securing
Compute and Storage, Cloud Infrastructure Audit (Intro, Audit, Best Practice).

UNIT III

Cloud Data Security: Data Protection (rest, at transit, in use), Data Information lifecycle, Cloud Data Security
Foundational Strategies, Encryption (Egress monitoring, Masking, Obfuscation, Anonymization & tokenization,
Key management), Near‐time data, Real time data, Batch processing, Cloud Data Audit (Intro, Audit, Best
Practice) Cloud Key Management Audit (Intro, Audit, Best Practice).

UNIT IV

Cloud Application Security: Cloud Application Challenges &Development Basics, Cloud applications access to
resource, Common Pitfalls & Vulnerabilities, Cloud Software Assurance and Validation, Secure Software
Development Lifecycle (SDLC), OWSAP Top 10, DevSecOps.

Textbooks:
1. Tim Mather, S. Kumaraswamy and S. Latif, “Cloud Security and Privacy: An EnterprisePerspective on Risks
and Compliance”, O’Reilly Media, 2009
2. Ronald L. Krutz Russell Dean Vines “Cloud Security: A Comprehensive Guide to SecureCloud Computing”,
Wiley ,2010

References:
1. Mastering AWS Security by Albert Anthony.
2. Practical Cloud Security: A Guide for Secure Design and Deployment by Chris Dotson
3. CSA Guide to Cloud Computing: Implementing Cloud Privacy and Security 1st Edition by Raj
Samani (Author), Jim Reavis (Author), Brian Honan (Author).

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 604
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Cloud Computing and Security Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CSE‐CS 6 PC PC CS‐316P
CSE‐NET 7 PC PC NET‐473P
EE‐VDT/EC‐ACT 7 OAE‐ECE‐EA OAE‐2 NET‐473P
EAE 7 NET‐EAE NET‐EAE‐4 NET‐473P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Cloud Computing and Security) as this
is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Install Virtual box /VMware Workstation with different flavours of Linux or Windows OS on top of Windows
7 or 8.
2. Install a C Compiler in virtual machine create using virtual box & execute simple programs
3. Install google app engine. Create hello world app & other simple web application using Python/ Java.
4. Use GAE Launcher to launch the web application.
5. Simulate a cloud scenario using CloudSim & run a scheduling algorithm that is not present in Cloud Sim.
6. Find a procedure to transfer the files from one virtual machine to another virtual machine.
7. Find a procedure to launch virtual machine using trystack (Online Openstack Demo Version).
8. Install Hadoop single node cluster & simple applications like word count.
9. To learn and use version control systems & To develop web applications in cloud.
10. To learn the design and development process involved in creating a cloud based application

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 605
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

CMOS Analog Integrated Circuit Design L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ECE 6 PCE PCE‐3 ECE‐338T
EE‐VDT 7 PC PC VLSI‐443T
EAE 7 VLSI‐EAE VLSI‐EAE‐3 VLSI‐443T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To impart the knowledge of basic MOS device Physics, low and high frequency analog MOSFET
modelling.
2. To provide the concepts of Single Stage and Differential amplifiers and their analysis.
3. To provide the concepts of active and passive current mirrors, large signal analysis, small signal
analysis and frequency response of amplifiers.
4. To provide the concepts of feedback circuits, their topologies, operational amplifier and oscillators.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 To understand the basics of MOS device and its low and high frequency modelling.
CO 2 To understand the concepts of Single Stage and Differential amplifiers and their analysis
CO 3 To understand the concepts current mirrors, large signal analysis, small signal analysis and frequency
response of amplifiers.
CO 4 To understand the concepts of feedback circuits, their topologies, operational amplifier and oscillators
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 2 2 3 3 2 2 2 ‐ 1 2 2 3
CO 2 3 2 3 3 3 2 2 ‐ 1 2 2 3
CO 3 3 2 3 3 3 2 2 ‐ 1 2 2 3
CO 4 3 2 3 3 3 2 2 ‐ 1 2 2 3

UNIT‐I

Introduction: Analog integrated circuit design, Circuit design consideration for MOS challenges in analog circuit
design, Recent trends in analog VLSI circuits.
Basic MOS Device Physics. Analog MOSFET modeling: MOS transistor, Low frequency MOSFET model, High
frequency MOSFET model, temperature effect in MOSFET and Noise in MOSFET.

UNIT‐II

Single Stage Amplifier: Basic concept, Introduction to CS, CD, CG Amplifiers, analysis of CS amplifier with
(resistive load, diode connected load, current source load, triode load, source degeneration), Analysis of Source

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 606
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Follower (CD amplifier), analysis of CG amplifier, analysis of cascode stage and folded cascode.
Differential amplifiers: Single ended and differential operation, basic differential pair, common mode
response.

UNIT‐III

Passive and active current mirrors: Basic current mirrors, cascade current mirrors, active current mirrors; large
signal analysis, small signal analysis, common mode properties.
Frequency Response of amplifiers: General consideration: Association of Poles with Nodes, Miller Effect and
Miller’s Theorem and its dual Frequency Response of CS stage, source follower, common gate stage, cascade
stage. Frequency Response of Differential Amplifier ,

UNIT ‐ IV

Feedback: Properties of Feedback Circuits, Feedback Topologies.

Operational amplifier: one‐stage and two‐ stage Op Amps, gain boosting, comparison, Common‐Mode
Feedback, Input Range Limitations, Slew Rate. Bandgap references, Oscillators: Ring oscillator, LC oscillator,
voltage controlled oscillator.

Textbook(s):
1. Design of Analog CMOS Integrated Circuits” by Behzad Razavi; Tata McGraw‐Hill.
2. CMOS analog Circuit Design by Allen Holberg, Oxford University Press.

References:
1. Analog Integrated Circuit Design by David A. Johns and Ken Martin John Wiley & Son.
2. R. J. Baker, H. W. Li, and D. E. Boyce , " CMOS circuit design, layout, and simulation", Wiley‐IEEE
Press,2007.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 607
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

CMOS Analog Integrated Circuit Design Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ECE 6 PCE PCE‐3 ECE‐338P
EE‐VDT 7 PC PC VLSI‐443P
EAE 7 VLSI‐EAE VLSI‐EAE‐3 VLSI‐443P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (CMOS Analog Integrated Circuit
Design) as this is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Introduction to Cadence Virtuoso full custom design flow.

2. To design and study the Characteristics of MOS transistors.
3. To design and study inverter in CMOS configuration..
4. To study and design CS amplifier using resistive load and diode connected load.
5. To study and design CS amplifier using current source load and triode load.
6. To study and design CS amplifier as source degeneration.
7. To design and analyze source follower (Common Drain) amplifier.
8. To design and analyze Common Gate amplifier.
9. To design and analyze Cascode amplifier using ideal current source and PMOS current source.
10. To design and analyze Basic current mirror and Cascode current mirror.
11. To design and analyze differential amplifier using current mirror.
12. To design and analyze Ring Oscillator circuit.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 608
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

CMOS Digital Circuits Design L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EE‐VDT 7 PC PC VLSI‐445T
EAE 7 VLSI‐EAE VLSI‐EAE‐4 VLSI‐445T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To provide the concepts of VLSI Design flow, basics of MOS device, CMOS Inverter, Circuit
Characterization and Performance Estimation, BiCMOS logic.
2. To provide the concepts of Switching characteristics, Clocking Strategies, combinational and Clocked
sequential circuits.
3. To provide the concepts of Subsystem designing and Semiconductor Memories.
4. To provide the concepts of FSM, digital phase‐locked loop (DPLL), adiabatic logic circuits and
Field Programmable Devices.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 To understand the concepts of VLSI Design flow, basics of MOS device, CMOS Inverter, Circuit
Characterization and Performance Estimation, BiCMOS logic.
CO 2 To understand the concepts of Switching characteristics, Clocking Strategies, combinational and
Clocked sequential circuits.
CO 3 To understand the concepts of Subsystem designing and Semiconductor Memories.
CO 4 To understand the concepts of FSM, digital phase‐locked loop (DPLL), adiabatic logic circuits and
Field Programmable Devices.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 2 2 3 2 3 2 2 ‐ 1 2 2 2
CO 2 2 2 3 3 3 2 2 ‐ 1 2 2 3
CO 3 2 2 3 3 3 2 2 ‐ 1 2 2 3
CO 4 2 2 3 3 3 2 2 ‐ 1 2 2 3

UNIT‐I

VLSI Design flow, Design Hierarchy, Regularity, Modularity and Locality. VLSI design styles, Design quality,
Packaging technology. MOS device design equations, second order effects, the complementary CMOS Inverter
DC characteristics, Circuit Characterization and Performance Estimation: Parasitic effect in Integrated Circuits,
Resistance estimation. Capacitance estimation, Inductance. BiCMOS logic gates, super‐buffers.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 609
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT‐II

Switching characteristics, CMOS ‐ Gate transistor sizing. Power dissipation, CMOS Logic Structures, Clocking
Strategies, CMOS Process Enhancement & Layout Considerations: Interconnect circuit elements. Stick diagram,
Layout design rules, Latch up, Technology related CAD issues. Multiplexer, code converters.
Clocked sequential circuits‐two phase clocking, charge storage, dynamic register element, dynamic shift
register.

UNIT‐III

Subsystem design: Subsystem design process, Design of ALU subsystem, Adders, Multipliers, barrel and
logarithmic shifters.
Semiconductor Memories: Dynamic Random Access Memories (DRAM), Static RAM, non‐volatile memories,
flash memories, low‐power memory.

UNIT – IV

Finite State Machine (FSM), digital phase‐locked loop (DPLL), adiabatic logic circuits
Field Programmable Devices: Definitions of Relevant Terminology, Evolution of Programmable Logic Devices,
User‐Programmable Switch Technologies. Computer Aided Design (CAD) Flow for FPDs, Programmable Logic,
Programmable Logic Structures, Programmable Interconnect. Reprogrammable Gate Array, Commercially
Available SPLDs, CPLDs and FPGAs, Gate Array Design, Sea‐of‐Gates.

Textbook(s):
1. Design of Analog CMOS Integrated Circuits” by Behzad Razavi; Tata McGraw‐Hill.
2. CMOS analog Circuit Design by Allen Holberg, Oxford University Press.
3. Introduction to VLSI Circuits and Systems, John P. Uyemura John Wiley & Sons.

References:
1. Analog Integrated Circuit Design by David A. Johns and Ken Martin John Wiley & Son.
2. R. J. Baker, H. W. Li, and D. E. Boyce, "CMOS circuit design, layout, and simulation", Wiley‐IEEE Press,2007.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 610
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

CMOS Digital Circuits Design Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EE‐VDT 7 PC PC VLSI‐445P
EAE 7 VLSI‐EAE VLSI‐EAE‐4 VLSI‐445P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (CMOS Digital Circuits Design) as this is
the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. To study the MOS characteristics and introduction to tanner EDA software tools.
2. To design and study the transient and DC characteristics of CMOS inverter.
3. To design and study ALU.
4. To design and study the characteristics of CMOS Full adder.
5. To design and study the characteristics of CMOS multiplexer.
6. To design and study the code converters.
7. To design any Boolean function using transmission gates.
8. To design and study the transient characteristics of CMOS XOR/XNOR.
9. To design and study the characteristics of Multiplier circuit.
10. To design and study the characteristics of CMOS D‐ Flip Flop.
11. To design and study the characteristics of CMOS J‐K Flip Flop.
12. To design study 3‐ bit counter.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 611
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

CMOS Mixed Signal Circuit Design L P C

4 4

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 7 VLSI‐EAE VLSI‐EAE‐5A VLSI‐447

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To provide the concepts of CMOS comparator, analog multiplier design, Phase Locked Loop and Delay
locked loop circuits.
2. To provide the concepts of Sampling Circuits and Sample‐and‐Hold Architectures.
3. To provide the concepts of D/A and A/D Converter Architectures
4. To provide the concepts of Integrator Based Filters and Filtering topologies ‐ bilinear transfer function
and bi‐quadratic transfer function.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 To understand the concepts of CMOS comparator, analog multiplier design, Phase Locked Loop and
Delay locked loop circuits.
CO 2 To understand the concepts of Sampling Circuits and Sample‐and‐Hold Architectures.
CO 3 To understand the concepts of D/A and A/D Converter Architectures.
CO 4 To understand the concepts of Integrator Based Filters and Filtering topologies ‐ bilinear transfer
function and bi‐quadratic transfer function.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 2 2 3 3 3 2 3 ‐ 2 2 2 3
CO 2 3 2 3 3 3 2 3 ‐ 2 2 2 3
CO 3 3 2 3 3 3 2 3 ‐ 2 2 2 3
CO 4 3 2 3 3 3 2 3 ‐ 2 2 2 3

UNIT‐I

Phase Locked Loop: Characterization of a comparator, basic CMOS comparator design, analog multiplier
design, simple PLL, charge‐pump PLL, Non‐ideal effects in PLL, Delay locked loop, applications of PLL.

UNIT‐II

Sampling Circuits: Basic sampling circuits for analog signal sampling, performance metrics of sampling circuits,
different types of sampling switches.
Sample‐and‐Hold Architectures‐ Open‐loop & closed‐loop architectures, open‐loop architecture with miller
capacitance, multiplexed‐input architectures, recycling architecture, switched capacitor architecture, current‐

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 612
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

mode architecture.

UNIT‐III

D/A Converter Architectures: Input/output characteristics of an ideal D/A converter, performance metrics of
D/A converter, D/A converter in terms of voltage, current, and charge division or multiplication, switching
functions to generate an analog output corresponding to a digital input. Resistor‐Ladder architectures, Current
steering architectures.
A/D Converter Architectures: Input/output characteristics and quantization error of an A/D converter,
performance metrics of pipelined architectures, Successive approximation architectures, and interleaved
architectures.

UNIT – IV

Integrator Based Filters: Low Pass filters, active RC integrators, MOSFET‐C integrators, trans‐conductance‐c
integrator, discrete time integrators. Filtering topologies ‐ bilinear transfer function and bi‐quadratic transfer
function.

Textbook(s):
1. Design of Analog CMOS Integrated Circuits” by Behzad Razavi; Tata McGraw‐Hill.
2. Baker, Li, Boyce, “CMOS: Circuit Design, layout and Simulation”, PHI, 2000.

References:
1. Analog Integrated Circuit Design by David A. Johns and Ken Martin John Wiley & Son.
2. R. J. Baker, H. W. Li, and D. E. Boyce , " CMOS circuit design, layout, and simulation", Wiley‐IEEE
Press,2007.
3. Razavi, “Principles of data conversion system design”, Wiley IEEE Press, 1st Edition, 1994.
4. Jacob Baker, “CMOS Mixed‐Signal circuit design”, IEEE Press, 2009.
5. Gregorian, Temes, “Analog MOS Integrated Circuit for signal processing”, John Wiley & Sons, 1986.
6. CMOS analog Circuit Design by Allen Holberg, Oxford University Press.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 613
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Cognitive Radio & Networks L P C

4 4

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 7 WMC‐EAE WMC‐EAE‐4 WMC‐457

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To impart the knowledge of basic features of software defined radio & cognitive radio & using SDR as a
platform for CR.
2. To understand spectrum sensing, detection & sharing techniques & related models.
3. To impart the knowledge of capabilities & limits of CR, algorithms for DSA, and mathematical models
for CR networks.
4. To impart the knowledge of network coding for CR relay networks, CRN architecture, different type of
relay networks and performance parameters such as QOS.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Able to understand the basic definitions of software defined radio & cognitive radio & implement CR
using SDR.
CO 2 Able to understand spectrum sensing, detection & sharing techniques & related models.
CO 3 Able to understand & analyze the capabilities & limits of CR, algorithms for DSA, and mathematical
models for CR networks.
CO 4 Able to understand & apply network coding for CR relay networks, CRN architecture, different type of
relay networks and performance measures such as QOS.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 2 2 3 1 2 1 1 1 1 2 1 3
CO 2 2 3 2 2 1 ‐ 1 1 ‐ 2 1 2
CO 3 2 3 1 1 ‐ 1 1 1 ‐ 3 2 3
CO 4 2 3 2 3 2 1 1 2 ‐ 3 2 3

UNIT I

Introduction: Definition & Evolution of software defined radio (SDR) & cognitive radio (CR), key applications‐
Interoperability & dynamic spectrum access (DSA), SDR as a platform for CR, SDR architecture; brief review of
digital communication fundamentals (from CR perspective), multicarrier modulation & OFDM.

UNIT II

Spectrum Sensing & Identification: primary signal detection (energy detector, cyclostationary feature detector,
matched filter, cooperative sensing), spectrum opportunity detection‐ fundamental tradeoffs, MAC layer

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 614
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

performance measures, global & local interference models.

UNIT III

Cognitive Radio Communications: capabilities of CR, spectrum sharing models of DSA, basic components of
opportunistic spectrum access, algorithms for DSA, fundamental limits of cognitive radios, mathematical
models for networking CRs.

UNIT IV

CR Networks (CRNs): Network coding for CR relay network ‐ system model, assumptions, decode and forward
cooperation policy, one‐hop relay network, tandem & cooperative relay networks, CRN architecture, terminal
architecture of CRN (CR device architecture), QOS provisional diversity radio access networks, scaling laws of
CRNs.

Textbooks:
1. Alexander M. Wyglinski, Maziar Nekovee, and Y. Thomas Hou, “Cognitive Radio Communications and
Networks ‐ Principles and Practice”, Academic Press (Elsevier Inc.), 2010.
2. Kwang‐Cheng Chen, Ramjee Prasad, “Cognitive Radio Networks”, John Wiley and Sons Ltd., 2009.

Reference Books:
nd
1. Bruce A Fette, “Cognitive Radio Technology”, 2 ed., Academic Press (Elsevier Inc.), 2009.
2. Jeffrey H. Reed “Software Radio: A Modern Approach to Radio Engineering”, Pearson Education Asia.
3. Markus Dillinger, Kambiz Madani, Nancy Alonistioti, “Software Defined Radio: Architectures, Systems and
Functions”, Wiley, 2007.
4. Huseyin Arslan, “Cognitive Radio, Software Defined Radio, and Adaptive Wireless Systems”, Springer, 2007.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 615
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Communication Systems Analysis L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EEE 7 PCE PCE‐5 EEE‐419T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To introduce and analyse the concepts of communication systems, modulations and analyse the
random nature of noise in communication systems.
2. To analyse the concept of analog communication systems and its types in detail.
3. To analyse the concept of sampling, Pulse analog modulation systems and Pulse digital modulation
systems and its classification in detail.
4. To analyse various kinds of receivers and various digital modulation techniques in delail.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 To analyse basic communication systems, basic random variables and associated problems.
CO 2 Identify & Analyze the concepts of sampling and use it to understand analog communication systems.
CO 3 Identify and analyze various pulse modulation systems and Compare various parameters of those
systems.
CO 4 Design different types of filters and receivers and analyse various digital modulation systems.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 2 1 1 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 1 ‐ 3
CO 2 2 2 2 2 2 ‐ 2 ‐ 2 2 2 2
CO 3 1 3 1 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 1 1 1 2
CO 4 2 2 2 2 2 ‐ 2 ‐ 2 2 1 2

UNIT I

Introduction: Frequency spectrum of EM waves, Basic electronic communication system, Modulation: need &
types, Frequency translation, Bandwidth and Information capacity, Shannon‐Hartley law.
Random variables: Concept of random variables: discrete, continuous, Classification of random processes
(WSS, SSS), CDF and it’s properties, PDF, Joint distributions, Mean, Moment, Central moment, Auto‐correlation
& Cross‐correlation, Covariance functions, Ergodicity, Uniform distribution ,Gaussian distribution, Rayleigh
distribution, Binomial distribution, Poisson distribution, Power spectral density, Central limit theorem.

UNIT II

Amplitude Modulation Systems: AM: modulation and demodulation, principle, spectrum, modulation index,
power relations, bandwidth, efficiency, DSB‐SC: Modulation and demodulation, SSB: modulation and

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 616
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

demodulation.
Angle Modulation Systems: Frequency Modulation, Types of Frequency modulation, Modulation index,
Frequency spectrum & Transmission BW of FM, Generation and demodulation of FM, Introduction to Phase
modulation, Comparison of AM, FM & PM.

UNIT III

Pulse Analog Modulation: Sampling, Types of sampling, Aliasing, Aperture effect, Pulse amplitude modulation
(PAM), Pulse width modulation (PWM), Pulse position modulation (PPM), Generation and Demodulation of all
three.
Pulse Digital Modulation: Analog to digital conversion, Uniform & Nonuniform quantisation, Companding,
Concept and Analysis of Pulse code modulation (PCM), Differential pulse code modulation (DPCM), Delta
modulation (DM), Adaptive delta modulation (ADM), S/N ratio for all modulations.

UNIT IV

Receiver Analysis: Orthogonal signals, Gram‐Schmidt Orthogonalization procedure, Analysis of Digital

receiver, Analysis & Properties of Matched filter, Prediction filter, Maximum likelihood receiver, Inter symbol
interference.
Digital Modulation and Transmission: Advantages of digital communication.
Coherent Binary Schemes: ASK, FSK, PSK, & QPSK, Comparison, Incoherent Schemes: DPSK & DEPSK, Average
probability of error & Power specra of various digitally modulated signals.
Multiplexing: Time Division Multiplexing and Frequency Division Multiplexing

Textbook(s):
1. B.P. Lathi, “Modern Digital & Analog Communication Systems”, Oxford University Press 2011.
2. R.P.Singh & S.D.Sapre, “Communication Systems: Analog & Digital”, 2nd Edition, TMH.

Reference Books:
1. Simon Haykins, “Communication Systems”, 5th Edition, John Wiley.
2. Taub Schilling, “Principles of Communication Systems”, 3rd Edition, TMH.
th
3. George Kennedy, “Electronics Communication System”, 5 Edition, MGH.
th
4. W. Tomasi, “Electronic Communication systems”, 5 Edition, Prentice Hall.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 617
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Communication Systems Analysis Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EEE 7 PCE PCE‐5 EEE‐419P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Communication Systems Analysis) as
this is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. To perform AM Modulation & Demodulation.

2. To perform DSB‐SC Modulation & Demodulation.
3. To perform SSB‐SC Modulation & Demodulation.
4. To perform Frequency Modulation & Demodulation.
5. To perform Signal Sampling and Reconstruction Techniques.
6. To perform Time Division Multiplexed Pulse Amplitude Modulation and Demodulation.
7. To perform Pulse Width Modulation and Demodulation.
8. To perform Pulse Code Modulation and Demodulation.
9. To perform Delta Modulation & Demodulation.
10. To perform ASK Modulation & Demodulation.
11. To perform PSK Modulation & Demodulation.
12. To perform FSK Modulation & Demodulation.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 618
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Compiler Design L P C
3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CSE/IT/CST/ITE 5 PC PC CIC‐303

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. introduce the major concept areas of language translation and compiler design.
2. To enrich the knowledge in various phases of compiler ant its use, code optimization techniques,
machine code generation, and use of symbol table.
3. To extend the knowledge of parser by parsing LL parser and LR parser.
4. To provide practical programming skills necessary for constructing a compiler.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Able to apply the knowledge of LEX tool & YACC tool to develop a scanner & parser.
CO 2 Able to design & implement a software system for backend of the compiler.
CO 3 Able to design syntax tree and intermediate code generator.
CO 4 To understand the concept of symbol table and to use various code optimization techniques
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 2 ‐ 2 3 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 3
CO 2 3 2 ‐ 2 3 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 3
CO 3 3 2 ‐ 2 3 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 3
CO 4 3 2 ‐ 2 3 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 3

UNIT‐I

Compilers and translators, need of translators, structure of compiler: its different phases, compiler
construction tools, Lexical analysis: Role of lexical analyzer, Input Buffering, A simple approach to the design of
Lexical Analyzers, Specification and recognition of tokens, Finite automata, From regular expressions to
automata, and vice versa, minimizing number of states of DFA, A language for specifying Lexical Analyzers,
Design and implementation of lexical analyzer.

UNIT‐II

The role of the parser, Context free grammars, Writing a grammar: Lexical versus Syntactic analysis, Eliminating
ambiguity, Elimination of left recursion, Left factoring, Top Down Parsing: Recursive‐ Decent parsing, Non‐
recursive Predictive parsing, LL(1) grammars, Bottom Up Parsing: Shift Reduce Parsing, Operator precedence
parsing, LR Parsing: SLR, LALR and Canonical LR parser, Parser Generators.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 619
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT‐III

Syntax Directed Translation: Syntax directed definitions, Evaluation orders for SDD’s, construction of syntax
trees, syntax directed translation schemes, implementation of syntax directed translation,
Intermediate Code Generation: Kinds of intermediate code: Postfix notation, Parse trees and syntax trees,
Three‐address code, quadruples and triples, Semantic Analysis: Types and Declarations, Translation of
Expressions, Type checking.

UNIT ‐ IV

Symbol Table: Symbol tables, its contents, Data Structure for Symbol Table: lists, trees, linked lists, hash tables,
Error Detection and Recovery: Errors, lexical phase errors, syntactic phase errors, semantic errors, Error seen
by each phase.
Code Optimization: The principal sources of optimizations, Loop optimization, Basic blocks and Flow Graphs,
DAG representation of basic blocks, Code Generation: Issues in the design of code generation, A simple target
machine mode, A Simple Code Generator, Peep‐hole optimization, Register allocation and assignment.

Textbook(s):
1. Alfred V. Aho, Monica S. Lam, Ravi Sethi and Jeffrey D. Ullman, “Compilers Principle, Techniques, and
Tool”, Pearson.
2. Alfred V. Aho, Ravi Sethi and Jeffrey D. Ullman, “Compilers Principle, Techniques, and Tool”, Addison
Wesley.

References:
1. Trembley and Sorenson, “Theory and Practice of Compiler Writing”, McGraw Hill.
2. Jhon R. Levine, Tony Mason and Doug Brown, ―Lex &Yacc, O‘Reilly.
3. M. Joseph, “Elements compiler Design”, University Science Press.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 620
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Compiler Design Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CSE/IT/CST/ITE 5 PC PC CIC‐351

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Compiler Design) as this is the practical
component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Practice of LEX/YACC of compiler writing.

2. Write a program to check whether a string belong to the grammar or not.
3. Write a program to check whether a string include Keyword or not.
4. Write a program to remove left Recursion from a Grammar.
5. Write a program to perform Left Factoring on a Grammar.
6. Write a program to show all the operations of a stack.
7. Write a program to find out the leading of the non‐terminals in a grammar.
8. Write a program to Implement Shift Reduce parsing for a String.
9. Write a program to find out the FIRST of the Non‐terminals in a grammar.
10. Write a program to check whether a grammar is operator precedent.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 621
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Compressible Flow and Jet Propulsion L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 7 TES‐EAE TES‐EAE‐3 TES‐447T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To understand the basic concepts and isentropic flow.
2. To understand physical science governing normal and oblique shocks.
3. To understand the jet propulsion.
4. To understand the space propulsion.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Explain the basic fluid and thermodynamic principles governing compressible flow.
CO 2 Analyse the flows containing normal and oblique shocks.
CO 3 Apply gas dynamics principles in the jet Propulsion.
CO 4 Apply gas dynamics principles in the Space Propulsion.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 3 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 2 3 3 3 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 3 3 3 3 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 4 3 3 3 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐‐ ‐ ‐ 2

UNIT‐I

Introduction to compressible flow: governing equations of compressible fluid flows, speed of sound – definition
and derivation, Types of flow‐ Mach number and Mach cone, reference stagnation and critical conditions,
Numerical problems.
Isentropic Flow: Basic equations for one‐dimensional isentropic compressible flow, Isentropic flow of an ideal
gas with area variation, reference stagnation and critical conditions for isentropic flow of an ideal gas,
isentropic flow in a converging nozzle, isentropic flow in a converging‐diverging nozzle, Numerical problems.

UNIT‐II

Normal shocks: introduction to shock waves, types and conditions for shock, Mach number across the shock,
Static properties across the shock, Stagnation properties across the shock, Fanno and Rayleigh interpretation of
normal shock, flow in converging‐diverging flow with normal shock, supersonic wind tunnels, Numerical
problems.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 622
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Oblique shocks: introduction to oblique waves, Flow with oblique shock waves Relations, Variation of Flow
Parameters with the oblique shock, Use of table and charts – Applications, Numerical problems.

UNIT‐III

Jet propulsion: Introduction to Jet propulsion, Types of jet propulsive systems, turbo jet engine and turbo prop
engine, Ram jet engine, turbo fan engine and Pulse jet engine, Energy relations equations, Thrust Power and
efficiencies, Numerical problems.

UNIT ‐ IV

Introduction to rocket propulsion, Types of Rocket Engine ‐Propellants, Feeding system, Ignition and
combustion, Theory of rocket propulsion – performance study, terminal and characteristics velocity, power and
efficiencies, rocket engine applications, space flight, Numerical problems.

Textbook(s):
1. R. W. Fox, A. T. Mcdonald, P. J. Pritchard, “Fluid Mechanics”, John Wiley & Sons, 8th ed. (2013).
2. S. Balamurali, and T. Prakash, “Gas dynamics and jet propulsion”, A. R. S. Publications, (2015).

References:
1. S. M. Yahya, “Fundamentals of Compressible flow”, New Age International Publishers, 6th ed. (2018).
2. J. D. Anderson Jr. – ‘’Modern Compressible Flow with historical perspective’’, McGraw Hill, 2nd ed. (1990).
3. George P. Sutton, “Rocket Propulsion Elements”, John Wiley & Sons, 9th ed. (2017).

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 623
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Compressible Flow and Jet Propulsion Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 7 TES‐EAE TES‐EAE‐3 TES‐447P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Compressible Flow and Jet Propulsion)
as this is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Study sound speed in different solids and fluids.

2. Study wave propagation at different Mach number.
3. Study isentropic flow from variable area duct.
4. Study Fanno flow (flow with constant area duct with friction).
5. Study Rayleigh flow (flow with constant area duct with heat transfer).
6. Study the flow through supersonic wind tunnel.
7. Study the different types of aerospace vehicles.
8. Study the shock wave generated in the flow field.
9. Simulate the shock generated in a compressible flow around a wedge.
10. Carry out the parametric analysis of the shock generated in a compressible flow around a wedge.
11. Study or simulate the compressible flow in a converging nozzle.
12. Study or simulate the compressible flow in a converging‐diverging nozzle.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 624
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Computational Fluid Dynamics L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 7 CADM‐EAE CADM‐EAE‐3 CADM‐401T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To understand about the Governing Differential Equations and application of Finite Difference
Method.
2. To understand the Conduction Heat Transfer and Convection Heat Transfer.
3. To understand the Incompressible Fluid Flow.
4. To understand the Applications of Computational Fluid Dynamics using some software (e.g. ANSYS).
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Able to write the Governing Differential Equations and apply Finite Difference Method for a physical
problem.
CO 2 Analyse the Conduction Heat Transfer and Convection Heat Transfer for steady state and unsteady
state heat transfer problem.
CO 3 Analyse the Incompressible Fluid Flow using Navier‐ Stokes equations.
CO 4 Able to apply Computational Fluid Dynamics using some software for different types of problems in
heat transfer and fluid flow.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 3 3 ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 2 3 3 3 3 ‐ 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 3 3 3 3 3 ‐ 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 4 3 3 3 2 ‐ 3 ‐ ‐ ‐‐ ‐ ‐ 2

UNIT‐I

Governing Differential Equations and Finite Difference Method: Classification of PDEs, Initial and Boundary
conditions, Initial and Boundary value problems, Finite difference method Central, Forward, Backward
difference for a uniform grid, Central difference expressions for a non‐uniform grid, Numerical error, Accuracy
of solution, Grid independence test.

UNIT‐II

Conduction Heat Transfer: Applications of Heat conduction:Steady and Unsteady conductions, One dimensional
steady state problems, Two dimensional steady state problems, Three dimensional steady state problems,
Transient one dimensional problems,

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 625
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Convection Heat Transfer: Introduction, Steady one dimensional convection, Diffusion, unsteady one
Dimensional Convection – Diffusion – Unsteady two dimensional, Convection, Diffusion.

UNIT‐III

Incompressible Fluid Flow: Introduction‐ Governing equations, Difficulties in solving Navier‐ Stokes equation,
Stream function, Vorticity method, In viscid flow (steady) Determination of pressure for viscous flow.

UNIT ‐ IV

Applications of Computational Fluid Dynamics, Computer graphics in CFD, Future of CFD, Enhancing the design
process, understanding, Applications, Automobile, Engine, Industrial, Civil, Environmental.

Textbook(s):
1. Muralidhar, K., and Sundararajan, T., “Computational Fluid flow and Heat Transfer", Narosa Publishing
House.
2. Ghoshdasdidar, P.S., “Computer simulation of flow and heat transfer", Tata McGraw – Hill, New Delhi.

References:
1. Anderson, D. A., Tannehill, J. L, and Pletcher, R.H., “Computational fluid mechanics and Heat Transfer",
Hemisphere Publishing Corporation.
2. John David Anderson, "Computational Fluid Dynamics: The Basics with Applications", McGraw Hill

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 626
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Computational Fluid Dynamics Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 7 CADM‐EAE CADM‐EAE‐3 CADM‐401P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Computational Fluid Dynamics) as this
is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Introduction to Computational Fluid Dynamics.

2. Introduction to commercial software package (e.g. ANSYS).
3. Flow over a flat plate.
4. Flow through a pipe.
5. Flow through a diffuser.
6. Flow over a circular cylinder.
7. Flow over a wedge.
8. Flow over a cone.
9. Flow over a symmetric aerofoil.
10. Flow over a cambered aerofoil.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 627
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Computer Aided Design and Drafting L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 7 CADM‐EAE CADM‐EAE‐4 CADM‐403T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. Impart knowledge of computer‐aided design (CAD) basics, concepts and methods with introduction to
drafting.
2. Empower with knowledge of programmable parametric space curves and surfaces for industrial
applications.
3. Develop drafting and solid modelling programming and operating skills for parts for assemblage
purpose.
4. Enable the students to understand data exchange between CAD‐CAM systems and to familiarise them
with FEM analysis process.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Understand CAD hardware & software concepts and methods of 2D‐3D transformations & projections
in traditional manufacturing system using CAD.
CO 2 Apply representation of Curves and Surface generation in modelling of the machine and automobile
parts.
CO 3 Develop skills in Solid Modelling and Create part drawings as 3D models using CAD software.
CO 4 Understand the need of CAD/CAM data exchange and build skill in Finite Element Analysis of a
machine part.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 3 2 3 2 2 2 2 3 3 3
CO 2 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 1 3 3 2 3
CO 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 3 3 1 3
CO 4 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 1 3 3 2 3

UNIT‐I

Introduction to CAD: Need for CAD tools over manual drafting, CAD product cycle, CAD Systems Evaluation
Criteria.
CAD Software: Database (Global) Coordinate System, Working (User) Coordinate System, Screen Coordinate
System, User Interface, Modelling and Viewing. Computer graphics software and configuration.
2‐D & 3‐D Transformations: Point representations, Homogeneous Transformation Representation,
Transformation Matrices for Translation, Rotation, Scaling, Reflection and Shearing, Composite
transformations, Geometric Model Mappings, Numerical problems.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 628
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Projections: Orthographic, Oblique, Isometric and Perspective Projections.

UNIT‐II

Parametric Curves: Representation of Space Curves, Analytical and synthetic curves, Cubic Polynomial curves
&Splines, Hermite curves, Bezier Curves, B‐spline Curves, NURBS, Numerical problems.
Mathematical Representation of Surface Entities: Analytical surfaces ‐ Plane Surface, Ruled Surface, Tabulated
Surface, Surface of Revolution, Sweep Surface. Synthetic Surfaces ‐ Hermite‐Bicubic surface, Bezier Surface, B‐
Spline Surface, Coons Surface, Numerical problems.

UNIT‐ III

Computer Aided Drafting and Geometric Modelling: Computer aided drafting system – layers, grid & snap,
Basic features of a drafting software, Use of drafting commands‐ Loft, Extrude, Revolve, Sweep, Mirror,
Pattern, Pocket, Fillet, Chamfering.
Generation of graphic elements (Primitives), Addition, Subtraction, Intersection for drafting of 3D geometric
model.
Geometric Modelling: Need & requirements of geometric modelling, Representation schemes of geometric
models – Wireframe, surface and solid modelling. Comparative Analysis.
Solid Modelling: Set Theory, Boolean Operations, B‐rep Modelling, Constructive Solid Geometry, Sweep
Representations, Pure primitive Instancing, Cellular Decomposition, Spatial Occupancy Enumeration Numerical
problems.

UNIT‐IV

CAD/CAM Data Exchange: Introduction, IGES – Initial Graphic Exchange Specification, STEP – Standard for
Exchange of Product Data, PDS.
Finite Element Method: General Method for FEM of a geometric model, Finite Element Analysis Process,
Element and Global Stiffness Matrix formulation, Solution methods, Numerical problems for FEM on 1D Bar
element only.

Textbook(s):
1. Ibrahim Zeid, “CAD/CAM Theory and Practice”, Tata McGraw‐Hill Publishing Company Limited. 2nd
Edition.
2. Srinivas J., “CAD/CAM‐Principles and Applications”, Oxford University Press, 2017.
3. David F. Rogers and J. Alan Adams, “Mathematical Elements for Computer Graphics”, Prentice Hall India,
Tata McGraw‐Hill.

References:
1. Ibrahim Zeid, “Mastering CAD/CAM”, Tata McGraw‐Hill Publishing Company Limited.
2. Foley et. al., “Computer Graphics Principles & practice”, Addison Wesley,1999.
3. Chougule N.K., “CAD/CAM/CAE”, Scitech Publications (India) Pvt. Ltd., 2014.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 629
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Computer Aided Design and Drafting Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 7 CADM‐EAE CADM‐EAE‐4 CADM‐403P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Computer Aided Design and Drafting)
as this is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Write a program to implement Digital Differential Analyzer (DDA) Algorithm for drawing a line segment
between two given end pixel points A (x1, y1) & B (x2, y2) with any slope.
2. Write a program to implement (Bresenham’s) Mid‐point Circle drawing algorithm for drawing a circle with
a given center of circle C(Xc,Yc) and radius R in terms of pixels.
3. Write a program to apply the basic 2D transformations ‐ Translation, Reflection & Scaling, for a given 2D
polynomial of side n.
4. Write a program to apply the basic 2D transformations ‐ Rotation & Shearing for a given 2D object
(rectangle).
5. To apply the basic transformations such as Translation, Scaling, & Rotation for a given 3D object (cube or
triangle).
6. Write a program to generate a smooth curve by using Bezier Curve technique for a given set of 4 control
points.
7. Draft a dimensioned component 3D model using Extrude, Loft, Revolve, Sweep or their combination on a
suitable available drafting software.
8. Draft the assembly of Rigid coupling on the suitable drafting software.
9. Write a program to generate a smooth curve by using Hermit’s Cubic Curve technique for a given set of 2
control points. and 2 tangents.
10. Write a program for displaying 3D objects as 2D display using Perspective Projection.
11. Write a program for displaying 3D objects as 2D display using Orthographic Projection.

Note: 1. The Program codes may be written on C++ or MATLAB.

2. Drafting/Sketching may be done on suitable available commercial software e.g. FUSION 360,
SOLIDWORKS, Pro‐E, CATIA etc.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 630
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Computer Aided Electrical Machine Design L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EE 6 PCE PCE‐2 EEE‐322T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To design DC Machine
2. To design Transformer
3. To design Induction Motor
4. To design Synchronous Machines
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Ability to Create Various Part of Dc machine
CO 2 Ability to Design Various Part of Transformer
CO 3 Ability to Design Various Part of Induction motor
CO 4 Ability to Design Various Part of Synchronous Machines
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 3 3 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 1 1 1 2
CO 2 3 3 3 3 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 1 1 1 2
CO 3 3 3 3 3 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 1 1 1 2
CO 4 3 3 3 3 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 1 1 1 2

UNIT I

General Concepts: Major considerations in Design of Electrical Machines Electrical Engineering Materials,
Space factor, Choice of Specific Electrical and Magnetic loadings, Thermal considerations, Heat flow,
Temperature rise, Rating of machines, Standard specifications.
DC Machines :Output Equations, Main Dimensions, Magnetic circuit calculations, Carter’s Coefficient, Net
length of Iron, Real & Apparent flux densities, Selection of number of poles, Design of Armature, Design of
commutated and brushes, performance prediction using design values. Computer based design of machine

UNIT II

Transformers: Output Equations, Main Dimensions, KVA output for single and three phase transformers,
Window space factor, Overall dimensions, Operating characteristics, Regulation, No load current,
Temperature rise in Transformers, Design of Tank, Methods of cooling of Transformers. Computer based
design of machine

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 631
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT III

Induction Motors: Output equation of Induction motor, Main dimensions, Length of air gap, Rules for
selecting rotor slots of squirrel cage machines, Design of rotor bars & slots, Design of end rings, Design of
wound rotor, Magnetic leakage calculations, leakage reactance of polyphase machines, Magnetizing current,
Short circuit current, Circle diagram, Operating characteristics. Computer based design of machine

UNIT IV

Synchronous Machines: Output equations, choice of loadings, Design of salient pole machines, Short circuit
ratio, shape of pole face, Armature design, Armature parameters, Estimation of air gap length, Design of rotor,
Design of damper winding, Determination of full load field mmf, Design of field winding, Design of turbo
alternators, Rotor design. Computer based design of machine

Text Books:
1. Electrical Machine Design the Design and Specification of Direct and Alternating Current Machinery,
Alexander Gray, Nabu Press, First reprint edition, 2014
2. Electric Machines Steady State, Transients, and Design with MATLAB, IonBoldea, Lucian Tutelea, CRC
Press, Taylor & Francis, First edition, 2010.

Reference
1. Principles of Electrical Machine Designs with Computer Programmes, Sen, S.K., Oxford and IBH Publishing
Co. Pvt. Ltd. New Delhi, 1987.
2. Electrical Machine Design Data Book, A. Shanmugasundaram, G. Gangadharan, R. Palani, New Age
International Pvt. Ltd., Reprint 2007.
3. Design and Testing of Electrical Machines, M.V. Deshpande, PHI, 2013.
4. Sawhney, A.K., ‘A Course in Electrical Machine Design’, Dhanpat Rai & Co., New Delhi, 6th Edition, 2013.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 632
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Computer Aided Electrical Machine Design Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EE 6 PCE PCE‐2 EEE‐322P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Computer Aided Electrical Machine
Design) as this is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

Perform the following experiments using C++/MATLAB or any other related software.

1. Design of Armature
2. Design of Commutator
3. Design of Armature winding
4. Design of Magnetic Core of Transformer
5. Design of rotor bars and slots of squirrel cage induction motor
6. Design of rotor core of slip ring induction motor
7. Design of salient pole rotor of synchronous machine
8. Design of stator core and winding for synchronous machine
9. Design of rotor for turbo alternators
10. Design of damper winding

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 633
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Computer Graphics and Multimedia Technologies L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CST/ITE 7 PCE PCE‐4 CIE‐411T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To provide the necessary theoretical background of applications of the computer graphics and learn to
generate basic graphical objects using Scan conversion algorithms.
2. To learn the reposition of the objects on the 2‐D and 3‐D coordinate system by understanding the
concepts of homogeneous coordinate system.
3. To provide the insight into the mapping of 3D to 2D coordinate systems.
4. To understand various aspects of media and to learn the concept of sound, images and videos.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Understood various input/output devices for computer graphics and able to implement various
graphical transformations.
CO 2 Apply various clipping algorithms and design parametric curves.
CO 3 Apply Illumination models, Shading models and hidden surface algorithms as well as understood
various multimedia file formats.
CO 4 Evaluate various image compression methods.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 ‐ ‐ 3 2 2 ‐ 2 3 2 3
CO 2 3 3 ‐ 3 3 ‐ 2 ‐ 2 3 2 2
CO 3 2 2 ‐ 2 3 2 2 ‐ 2 3 2 2
CO 4 2 2 ‐ 3 3 3 2 ‐ 2 3 2 3

UNIT‐I

Introduction, Applications areas, Components of Interactive Computer Graphics System. Overview of Input
devices, Output devices, raster scan CRT displays, random scan CRT displays. Scan Conversion algorithms: DDA
and Bresenham’s Line Drawing Algorithms, Bresenham’s and Mid‐Point Circle Drawing Algorithms, Mid‐ Point
Ellipse Drawing Algorithm.
Transformations: Homogeneous Coordinate System for 2D and 3D, Various 2D, 3D Transformations
(Translation, Scaling, Rotation, Reflection, Shear), Composite Geometric Transformations.

UNIT‐II

Window to Viewport Normalization, Clipping Algorithms: Point Clipping, Cohen‐Sutherland line Clipping

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 634
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Algorithm, Sutherland‐Hodgeman Polygon Clipping Algorithm.

Representing Curves and Surfaces: Polygon Mesh, Parametric and Geometric curves, Bezier Curves, B‐Spline
Curves. Projection: Taxonomy of Projection‐ Parallel Projection, Perspective Projection.

UNIT‐III

Illumination Model for diffused Reflection, Ambient light, Specular Reflection Model, Reflection Vector.
Shading Models: Flat shading, Gourard Shading, Phong Model. Visible surface detection, Back Face Detection,
Depth Buffer (Z‐Buffer, A‐Buffer) Method. Overview of multimedia: Classification, basic concepts of
sound/audio MIDI: devices, messages, software, Authoring tools, Video and Animation: controlling animation,
display and transmission of animation

UNIT ‐ IV

Data Compression: storage space, coding requirements, Basic compression techniques: run length code,
Huffman code, Lempel‐Ziv JPEG: Image preparation, Lossy sequential DCT, expanded lossy DCT, Lossless mode,
Hierarchical mode. MPEG, Media synchronization, Media Integration, Production Standards.

Textbook(s):
1. Donald Hearn and M.Pauline Baker, “Computer Graphics C version”, Second Edition, Pearson Education.
2. Ralf Steinmetz & Klara Nahrstedt, “Multimedia Computing Communication & Applications”, Pearson
Education.

References:
1. C, Foley, VanDam, Feiner and Hughes, “Computer Graphics Principles & practice”, 2nd Edition.
2. R. Plastock and G. Kalley, “Theory and Problems of Computer Graphics”, McGraw Hill, 2nd edition.
3. Fred Halsall, “Multimedia Communications Applications, Networks, Protocols & Standards”, Pearson.
4. David F. Rogers, “Procedural elements for computer graphics”, McGraw‐ Hill.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 635
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Computer Graphics and Multimedia Technologies Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CST/ITE 7 PCE PCE‐4 CIE‐411P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Computer Graphics and Multimedia
Technologies) as this is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Study of Fundamental Graphics Functions.

2. Implementation of Line drawing algorithms: DDA Algorithm, Bresenham's Algorithm
3. Implementation of Circle drawing algorithms: Bresenham's Algorithm, Mid Point Algorithm.
4. Implementation of Ellipse drawing algorithms: Mid Point Algorithm.
5. Programs on 2D transformations: Translation, Scaling, Rotation
6. Implement window to viewport transformation.
7. Write a program to implement cohen Sutherland line clipping algorithm
8. Write a program to draw Bezier curve.
9. Using Flash/Maya/Blender perform different operations (rotation, scaling move etc.) on objects
10. Create a Bouncing Ball using Key frame animation and Path animation.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 636
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Computer Integrated Manufacturing L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ME 7 PCE PCE‐4 MEE‐405T
MAE 7 PC PC MAC‐403

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To understand the need, scope and importance of computers in machining industry.
2. To study different codes, their meaning and write the program for turning and milling operation using
these codes.
3. To study the use of CIM and various planning tools for automation of an industry.
4. To study CAPP, FMS and Group technology tools and various material handling methods in an industry.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Understand CNC machines and its various aspects with various terminologies related to its constituting
parts in CIM environment.
CO 2 Desing fabrication of CNC programs for turning and milling operations using various canned cycles and
study of different feedback system used in CNC machines.
CO 3 Understand importance of CIM environment for automation in industry considering various planning
and scheduling function.
CO 4 Apply CAPP approaches in CIM system, importance of FMS & Group technology, study of various
material handling system in automated industry.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 2 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 3
CO 2 3 3 3 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 3
CO 3 3 3 2 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 3
CO 4 3 3 3 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 3

UNIT‐1

Functions and Components of CIM System: CIM, Definition, elements of CIM system‐benefits, Production
system facilities low‐medium‐high‐Manufacturing support systems, Automation in production systems,
Automated manufacturing systems‐Computerized Manufacturing Support Systems, Reasons for Automating.
An overview of CNC machines: Need, benefits & limitations, classification of CNC machines, DNC,
Constructional features of CNC machines, Design considerations of CNC machine tools, elements of CNC
machine & systems, precision measuring & positioning of CNC, Function of MCU, Machining centre, Turning
centre, Tool and pallet changer, Adaptive Control system, Punch tape and reader, Ball screw mechanism.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 637
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT‐ II

Manual part programming: Preparatory and miscellaneous functions‐ Fanuc control (M Codes and G Codes).
Linear interpolation, circular interpolation, canned cycles, cycles of threading & grooving operations, tool
compensation, part programming structure, work co‐ordinate system, absolute & incremental commands, axis
and co‐ordinate system, process planning & flow chart for part programming, scaling, rotating, mirroring, copy
& special canned cycles for CNC lathe and milling.
Open loop and closed loop systems, Precision in NC positioning systems: Control resolution, Accuracy and
repeatability. Actuators: DC servomotor, AC servomotor, stepper motor. Transducers and feedback elements:
resolvers, inductosyn optical grating and encoders.

UNIT‐III

Automation principles, scheduling functions and strategies, CNC controller & motion control in CNC system.
Application of CNC and recent advances in CNC machines. Planning and scheduling functions like APP, MPS,
MRP, MRPII and JIT.
Automatically Programmed tool: Terminologies and Part Programming.

UNIT‐IV

Group Technology: Definition, Advantages and limitations of GT‐Part family formation, Classification and
coding‐Opitz coding system, Applications & benefits of GT.
Flexible manufacturing system: Scope of FMS, FMS elements, benefits.
Automated Material Handling Systems and Advanced Manufacturing Systems: Industrial Robots, Conveyors,
AGVs, Automatic Storage and Retrieval System. Advantages and application in Industries. Inspection and
quality control using CMM machine, Machine Vision.

Textbook(s):
1. Mikell P. Groover, “Automation, Production Systems and Computer‐ Integrated Manufacturing”, 2nd
Edition, Prentice Hall, 2001.
2. S.K. Sinha, “CNC Programming”, Galgotia Publications, 2003.

References:
1. P. Radhakrishnan, “Computer Numerical Control Machine & Computer Aided Manufacturing”, New
Academic Science Limited.
2. U.Rembold, “Computer Integrated Manufacturing and Engineering”, Addison Wesley Publishers, 1993
3. S. Kant Vajpayee, “Principles of Computer Integrated Manufacturing”, PHI Learning Private Limited, 2012.
4. M. Adithan, B.S. Pabla, “CNC Machines”, New Age.
5. Binit Kumar Jha, “CNC programming made easy”, Vikas Publications.
6. T.K. Kundra, P. N.Rao & N.K.Tiwari, “Numerical Control and Computer Aided Manufacturing”, TMH.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 638
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Computer Integrated Manufacturing Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ME 7 PCE PCE‐4 MEE‐405P
MAE 7 PC PC MAC‐455

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Computer Integrated Manufacturing)
as this is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. To study the basic characteristics of CNC Machine, types of CNC machine.

2. Part programming (in word address format) experiment for turning operation (including operations such as
grooving and threading) and running on CNC machine/simulator.
3. Part programming (in word address format) experiment for milling operation (including operations such as
engraving a character, pocketing and mirroring) and running on CNC machine/simulator.
4. Part programming (in word address format or APT) experiment for drilling operation (point to point.
5. Part programming (in word address format or APT) experiment for milling operation (contouring).
6. Experiment on Transfer Line/Material Handling.
7. Experiment on difference between ordinary and NC machine, study or retrofitting.
8. Experiment on study of system devices such as motors and feedback devices.
9. Study about the FMS and its applications in industry with a case study.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 639
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Computer Networks L P C
4 4

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CSE/IT/CST/ITE 5 PC PC CIC‐307
ICE 5 PC PC CIC‐313

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. ild an understanding of the fundamental concepts of computer networking.
2. Familiarize the student with the basic taxonomy and terminology of the computer networking area.
3. Introduce the student to advanced networking concepts, preparing the student for entry Advanced
courses in computer networking.
4. Allow the student to gain expertise in some specific areas of networking such as the design and
maintenance of individual networks.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Understand basic computer network technology.
CO 2 Understand and explain Data Communications System and its components.
CO 3 Implements various network topologies and IP addressing, subnetting.
CO 4 Enumerate the layers of the OSI model and TCP/IP.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 2 1 1 3 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 3
CO 2 3 2 1 1 3 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 3
CO 3 3 2 1 1 3 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 3
CO 4 3 2 1 1 3 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 3

UNIT‐I

Data Communications: Components, Networks, The Internet, Protocols and Standards, Network Models: The
OSI Model, TCP/IP Protocol Suite , A Comparison of the OSI and TCP/IP Reference Models, Addressing, Physical
Layer: Analog and Digital Signals, Transmission modes, Transmission Media: Guided Media, Unguided Media,
Review of Error Detection and Correction codes.
Switching: Circuit switching (space‐division, time division and space‐time division), packet switching (virtual
circuit and Datagram approach), message switching.

UNIT‐II

Data Link Layer: Design issues, Data Link Control and Protocols: Flow and Error Control, Stop‐and‐wait ARQ.
Sliding window protocol, Go‐Back‐N ARQ, Selective Repeat ARQ, HDLC, Point‐to –Point Access: PPP Point –to‐

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 640
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Point Protocol, PPP Stack,

Medium Access Sub layer: Channel allocation problem, Controlled Access, Channelization, multiple access
protocols, IEEE standard 802.3 & 802.11 for LANS and WLAN, high‐speed LANs, Token ring, Token Bus, FDDI
based LAN, Network Devices‐repeaters, hubs, switches bridges.

UNIT‐III

Network Layer: Design issues, Routing algorithms, Congestion control algorithms, Host to Host Delivery:
Internetworking, addressing and routing, IP addressing (class full & Classless), Subnet, Network Layer Protocols:
ARP, IPV4, ICMP, IPV6 ad ICMPV6.

UNIT ‐ IV

Transport Layer: Process to Process Delivery: UDP; TCP, congestion control and Quality of service. Application
Layer: Client Server Model, Socket Interface, Domain Name System (DNS): Electronic Mail (SMTP), file transfer
(FTP), HTTP and WWW.

Textbook(s):
1. Behrouz A. Forouzan, “Data Communications and Networking”, Tata McGraw‐Hill.

References:
1. A. S. Tannenbum, D. Wetherall,, “Computer Networks”, Prentice Hall, Pearson.
2. Fred Halsall, “Computer Networks”, Addison – Wesley.
3. Tomasi, “Introduction To Data Communications & Networking”, Pearson.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 641
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Computer Networks Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CSE/IT/CST/ITE 5 PC PC CIC‐355
ICE 5 PC PC CIC‐365

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Computer Networks) as this is the
practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Introduction to Networking Simulation Tools: Wireshark, Cisco Packet Tracer.

2. To understand the operation of TELNET by accessing the router in server room from a PC in IT office.

3. To implement an IP Addressing Scheme and Subnetting in small networks using Cisco Packet Tracer.
4. To implement the static routing using Cisco Packet Tracer.
5. To implement the DHCP onto the Network Topology using Cisco Packet Tracer.
6. To implement the DNS, Email Services in the Network using Cisco Packet Tracer.
7. To implement the Dynamic Routing Protocols: RIP, IGRP using Cisco Packet Tracer.
8. To construct multiple router networks and implement the EIGRP Protocol.
9. To implement the Network Address Resolution (NAT) using Cisco Packet Tracer.
10. Conducting a Network Capture and Monitoring with Wireshark Simulation Tool.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 642
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Computer Vision L P C
3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 7 IPCV‐EAE IPCV‐EAE‐3 IPCV‐451T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To understand the basics of Computer Vision.
2. To understand and apply theories, models and methods in the field of computer vision.
3. To discuss the model reconstruction and tracking system.
4. To understand the motion analysis and object recognition system
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Understand the concept of computer vision.
CO 2 Understand and apply filtering, feature detection and model fitting methods in Computer Vision
CO 3 Analyse and apply the different types of model reconstruction and motion tracking methods.
CO 4 Apply the different concepts of computer vision for motion analysis and object recognition.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 3 3 3 1 1 ‐ 1 1 ‐ 2
CO 2 3 3 3 3 3 1 1 ‐ 1 1 ‐ 2
CO 3 3 3 3 3 3 1 1 ‐ 1 1 ‐ 2
CO 4 3 3 3 3 3 1 1 ‐ 1 1 ‐ 2

UNIT I

Introduction and Fundamentals:Anoverview of computer vision, related areas, and applications; overview of
software tools; overview of course objectives.; introduction to OpenCV.
Image formation and representation: Image formation and representation: imaging geometry, radiometry,
digitization, cameras and projections, rigid and affine transformations.

UNIT II

Filtering and Feature Detection: convolution, smoothing, differencing, and scale space. edge detection, corner
detection, line and curve detection, active contours, SIFT and HOG descriptors, and shape context descriptors.
Model Fitting: Hough transform, line fitting, ellipse and conic sections fitting algebraic and Euclidean distance
measures.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 643
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT III

Model Reconstruction: reconstruction by triangulation; Euclidean reconstruction; affine and projective

reconstruction.
Motion tracking: statistical filtering; iterated estimation; observability and linear systems; the Kalman filter; the
extended Kalman filter.

UNIT IV

Motion analysis: the motion field of rigid objects; motion parallax; optical flow, the image brightness constancy
equation, affine flow; differential techniques; feature‐based techniques; regularization and robust estimation;
motion segmentation through EM.
Object recognition and shape representation: alignment, appearance‐based methods, invariants, image
eigenspaces, data‐based techniques.

Textbook(s):
1. Shah M., Fundamentals of Computer Vision, 1997.
2. Szeliski R., Computer Vision: Algorithms and Applications, Springer, 2011.

Reference Books:
1. Computer Vision: A Reference Guide by by Katsushi Ikeuchi .
2. Computer Vision: Models, Learning, and Inferenceby Simon J. D. Prince

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 644
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Computer Vision Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 7 IPCV‐EAE IPCV‐EAE‐3 IPCV‐451P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Computer Vision) as this is the
practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Write a Program to Flip the image around the vertical and horizontal line
2. Write a Program to display the colour components of the image and also get its negative image.
3. Calculate the Histogram of a given image and Histogram Equalization of an image.
4. Write a Program for Image Filtering (low pass filter)
1) Average filter
2) Weighted Average filter
3) Median filter
high pass filters using
1) Sobel operator
2) Laplacian operator
5. Implement the Edge detection Technique of an Image.
6. Write a Program to find the threshold of the grayscale image.
7. Write a Program to detect a line and circle in an Image.
8. Write a Program for the detection and tracking of an object
9. Write a program to detect an object using YOLO.
10. Write a program for Human Pose Estimation.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 645
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Contract Management L P C
4 4

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 6 CTM‐EAE CTM‐EAE‐1 CEC‐308

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To make students who take this course be able to design sound contracts by training to interpret legal
provisions and effectively administer and fulfill the requirements of a contract
2. To be able to effectively administer contract and identify tools available for contract preparation and
administration
3. To identify good practice important stages of contract and wordings in contract
4. Understand jurisprudence to effectively administer contracts and a construction organization
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Prepare contract schedules, notice inviting tender and contract documents.
CO 2 Understand laws of construction contract.
CO 3 Implement dispute resolution.
CO 4 Prepare contract management plan as per standards.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 2 3 2 ‐ 2 ‐ 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐
CO 2 2 3 1 ‐ 2 ‐ 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐
CO 3 2 2 3 ‐ 2 ‐ 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐
CO 4 2 2 1 ‐ 2 ‐ 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐

UNIT‐I

Definition of Contract Legal issues in contract – Standard forms of contracts‐ General and special conditions of
contracts‐ Contract pricing by the client, project management consultants and the contractor, Contract
correspondence and contract closure.
Construction Laws: Public law, Government Department and Local authorities, Private law, contracts, Tort,
property law and building law.
Construction contracts: Contract specification, types of contract documents used for construction. Contract
procurement: Selecting a contractor.

UNIT‐II

Construction Contracts: Type of construction contracts: Lump sum contracts, fixed price contracts, Percentage
rate contracts, cost plus contracts, Target contracts, Design‐Build contracts, Turn‐key contracts, BOT contracts.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 646
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Parties to a Contract, Contract Formation, Common contract clauses: Notice to proceed, rights and duties of
various parties, Contract Duration and Price.
Tendering: Process of tendering: Tender notice, EOI, RFQ & RFP, Bid security, Prequalification process, Bidding
Models and bidding strategy, Tender submission and evaluation, Tender rejection, Security deposits /
performance guarantee & Defect liability, Contract agreement & contract documents

UNIT‐III

Contract Management: Scope of work, Detailed Estimate [approved plan], Administrative approval/Estimate
Sanction, Notice inviting tenders and its types, Tender, earnest money deposit, security deposit, types of
contracts, Essentials of legally valid contract, Contract between Engineer and Employers, Appointment and
authority of Engineer for execution of civil construction works, Category of contractors.
Public Works Administration: C.P.W.D. Organization set up, system of accounts, classes of works in PWD,
Estimates, Delhi Scheduled Rules [CPWD], Cost adjustment indices sub head, sub works, administrative
approval, technical sanction, possession of funds, expenditure sanction, Various methods of executing works.

UNIT ‐ IV

Arbitration: Comparison of Actions and Laws – Agreements –Appointment of Arbitrators Contract procedure:
Disputes, arbitration and litigation procedure‐preparation, settlement, evidence. Arbitration Tribunals, Powers
and Duties of Arbitrator, Enforcement of Award, Arbitration and Conciliation Act 1996 ‐ Arbitration case study.
Building formulae: Price adjustment‐need for formulae, comparison with previous system, civil engineering and
building formulae, practical implication.

Textbook(s):
1. Jimmie Hinze, Construction Contracts, 3rd Edition, McGraw Hill, New Delhi, (2013)
2. Sharma M.R., Fundamentals of Construction Planning & Management S.K. Kataria & Sons, (2013)

References:
1. Joseph T. Bockrath and Fredric L. Plotnick, Contracts and the Legal Environment: for Engineers and
Architects, 7th Edition, McGraw Hill, New Delhi, (2013)
2 Markanda P.C., Naresh Markanda and Rajesh Markanda, Law Relating to Arbitration and Conciliation, 9th
Edition, Lexis Nexis, New York., (2016)
3. Martin Brook, Estimating and Tendering for Construction Work, 5th Edition, Routledge, Taylor & Francis.
(2016)
4. Govt of India, Central Public Works Department, CPWD Works Manual(2019)

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 647
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Control Hardware and Interfacing L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 7 RA‐EAE RA‐EAE‐4 RA‐439T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To create control structures
2. To create interface between contol hardware and PLC
3. To design hydraulic and pneumatic sequential circuits
4. To create control circuits for ACdrives
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Ability to create control structures
CO 2 Ability to create interface between contol hardware and PLC
CO 3 Ability to design hydraulic and pneumatic sequential circuits
CO 4 Ability to create control circuits for ACdrives
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 2 1 1 1 1 ‐ 1 3 ‐ 3
CO 2 3 2 1 3 2 1 1 ‐ 1 3 ‐ 1
CO 3 3 2 1 2 3 1 1 ‐ 1 3 ‐ 3
CO 4 3 3 2 1 1 1 1 ‐ 1 3 ‐ 3

UNIT I

Automatic Control Introduction, P‐I‐D Control, manual and auto PID Control Tuning, Feed forward Control Ratio
Control, Time Delay Systems and Inverse Response Systems, Special Control Structures. Temperature controller
hardware architecture.

UNIT II

PLC Introduction to Sequence Control, PLC, RLL (Relay Ladder Logic), Sequence Control. Scan Cycle, Simple RLL
Programs, Sequence Control. More RLL Elements, RLL Syntax, A Structured Design Approach to Sequence, PLC
Hardware Environment, Introduction To CNC Machines, Contour generation and Motion Control, Allen Bradley
PLC and SIEMEN PLC.

UNIT III

Industrial Control Basics of hydraulics, Hydraulic components their functions and symbols Hydraulic actuators,

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 648
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Pumps and its operation, pump control, Hydraulic valves (Direction control, pressure and flow control), special
valves, pressure gauges and switches, hydraulic logic circuits, Hydraulic Control System, Multiple pressure and
speed operations, Industrial Hydraulic Circuit, Pneumatic systems and components Pneumatic Control Systems,
compressor operation and control, air treatment.

UNIT IV

Industrial Drives AC Drive basics, Electrical specifications and hardware architecture .AC drive and AC motor
specification matching. AC drive power wiring and Interfacing input and output signals. Operation and control
of AC motor in scalar mode. Operation and control of AC drive in vector. control mode. Performance
verifications of special features of AC drive. Requirement and specifications of input and output chokes, braking
applications, methodology and specifications of braking resistors. Selection of power, motor and signal cables
for AC drive application. Wiring and lay outing guidelines of AC drive .Energy Savings with Variable Speed
Drives, DC Motor Drives, DC and BLDC Servo Drives

Text Books:
1. Lingefeng Wang, Kay Chen Tan,"Modern Industrial Automation and Software Design" John Wiley & Sons
2. Kok Kiong “Drives and Control for Industrial Automation”, Springer

Reference Books:
1. Norman S. Nise, “Control systems engineering” John Wiley & Sons (Asia) Singapore.
2. Raymond T. Stefani, Design of Feedback Control System, Oxford University Press.
3. K. Ogata, “Modern control engineering”, Pearson 2002.
4. S. P.Eugene Xavier, “Modern control systems”, S. Chand & Company.
5. M. Gopal “Control Systems‐Principles and Design” TMH 4th Edition 20

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 649
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Control Hardware and Interfacing Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 7 RA‐EAE RA‐EAE‐4 RA‐439P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Control Hardware and Interfacing) as
this is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Study, understand and perform experiments on timers and counters.

2. To control the water level in a Process Tank using Feed forward Control.
3. To control the batch process reactor using programmable logic controller.
4. Logic implementation for Bottle Filling Application.
5. Write a program for sequencing of two cylinders using pneumatic components only.
6. Write a program for sequencing of two cylinders using electro pneumatic components.
7. Sequencing of multiple double acting piston cylinder arrangement using electro‐pneumatic components.
8. PLC programming‐ Operate single acting cylinder and double acting cylinder using push button and
direction
9. Control valve. Use push buttons in the AND, OR and Latching conditions.
10. Write a PLC program for to and fro motion of single acting cylinder and double acting cylinder
automatically.
11. Write a PLC program for sequencing of three cylinders in following sequence
A+B+C+ A‐B+C+ A‐ B‐C+ A‐B‐C

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 650
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Control System Components L P C

4 4

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ICE 6 PCE PCE‐1 ICE‐310

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To familiarize with various control system components with their working and construction
2. To get knowledge about various electrical control system components to apply in various control
projects
3. To get knowledge about various hydraulic and mechanical components used in control system
4. To learn about different electronic components to be used in control system
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 pply the knowledge of control system components to solve any control system problem
CO 2 bility to develop the control system using different components.
CO 3 Understanding of mechanical and hydraulic components to develop a control system
CO 4 Design and development of electronic components for control purpose
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 1 1 1 2 ‐ 2 3 1 ‐ 2 3 2
CO 2 3 1 2 1 ‐ 1 1 1 ‐ 2 1 3
CO 3 3 2 1 2 ‐ ‐ 1 ‐ ‐ 1 2 3
CO 4 2 1 2 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 1 1 1

Unit I

Introduction: Introduction to control system components; Different types of potentiometer and its
applications, synchro’s construction and operation, synchro’scharacteristics, synchro’s application, synchro’s
pair as an error detector, Rotating Amplifier, Magnetic Amplifier

Unit II

Electrical components: DC servomotor,AC servomotor,Permanent magnet stepper motor,VariableReluctance

stepper motor,applications of stepper motor,Tachometers: Characteristic and requirement of Tachogenerator,
DC tachogenerator,ACtachogenerator,applications of tachogenerator,Ac and DC relays,electromechanical and
solid‐state relays.Power relays,plunger relays,optoelectronic relays,vacuum relays,Relay Problems and
Remedies.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 651
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Unit III

Hydraulic and Mechanical components: Hydraulic Tank,Filter,Pumps,accumulator,Relief valves,check

valve,Needle Valve,Pressure regulator,spur Gear and pinion,Rack and Pinion,Helical Gear,Bevel Gear.

Unit IV

Electronic components: Modulators and Demodulators,Diode discriminators,push buttons,limit switches and

other special switches,Cam switches, pilot light.

Textbooks:
1. M.D Desai, “Control system Components”, PHI Learning Pvt.Ltd.
2. I.G Nagrath, M. Gopal, “Control system engineering”, New age International.

References:
1. Arun K. Ghosh, “Introduction to control system”PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd.
2. Norman S. Nise, “Nise’s Control system engineering”, Wiley.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 652
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Control System Design L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ICE 7 PCE PCE‐4 ICE‐409T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To make student capable in analyzing the system in time and frequency domain.
2. To make students capable of doing reliazation of compensators.
3. To make students enable to design the controllers
4. To make students remember the concepts of stste feedback controllers and observers.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Analyze the system in time and frequency domain as well as design the compensator using root locus
approach
CO 2 Realization of compensator using frequency response approach.
CO 3 Design the controllers using classical method as well as synthesis of controller
CO 4 Understand the concept of state feedback controllers and observers
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 3 ‐ 3 ‐ 3 3 3 ‐ ‐ 3
CO 2 3 3 ‐ ‐ 3 ‐ 3 3 3 ‐ ‐ 3
CO 3 3 2 3 ‐ 3 ‐ 3 3 3 ‐ ‐ 3
CO 4 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 3

Unit I

State Space Representation of Continuous Time Systems: Terminology of state space representation,
advantages of state space representation over classical representation, physical variable form, phase variable
forms: controllable canonical form (companion I), observable canonical form (companion II), diagonal/Jordon
canonical form (parallel realization), cascade realization, conversion of state model to transfer function.
Solution of State Equation: State Transition Matrix and its properties, computation of state transition matrix
using Laplace transformation method, Cayley Hamilton theorem

Unit II

Analysis and Design of Control System in State Space: Controllability, obersvability and detectability
properties, Necessary and sufficiency conditions for complete state controllability and observability, State
feedback structure, Pole placement design using state feedback. State observers – Full state observer.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 653
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Unit III

Introduction to Compensator: Derivative and integral error compensation, Analysis of the basic approaches to
compensation, cascade compensation, feedback compensation
Compensator Design using Root‐locus: Improving steady‐state error and transient response by feedback
compensation, cascade compensation, integral, derivative compensation, Lag, Lead, Lag‐Lead compensation

Unit IV

Compensator Design using Frequency response: Systems with time delay, transient response through gain
adjustment, Lag, Lead, Lag‐Lead compensation
PID Controller Design: PID controller tuning: Ziegler‐Nichols method, Cohen‐coon method, Designing PID
controller using Root‐Locus

Textbooks:
1. I.J Nagrath, M.Gopal, “Control system engineering”, 3rd ed. John Wiley & Sons 2003.
2. K.Ogata, “Modern Control Engineering”, 2nd ed. PHI New Delhi, 1994.

References:
1. Norman S. Nise, “Control System Engineering”, 4th ed. John Wiley and Sons, 2003.
2. B.C. Kuo, “Automatic Control Systems”, 3rd ed., PHI New Delhi, 1979.
3. Graham C. Goodwin, Stefan F. Graebe and M.E. Salgado, “Control System Design”, PHI, New Delhi , 2002

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 654
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Control System Design Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ICE 7 PCE PCE‐4 ICE‐409P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Control System Design) as this is the
practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Study of magnitude and phase characteristics of lead, lag and lead‐lag compensator.
2. Design a lead/lag compensator for getting desired specifications by root locus approach.
3. Design a lead/lag compensator for getting desired specifications by bode plot approach.
4. Simulation of controller settings of P, PI ,PID controllers (Kᴘ ,Tᵢ , Tꓒ) obtained through Ziegler‐Nichols first
and second method.
5. Design of PI/PD/PID controller for getting required performance specifications (damping factor, natural
frequency, steady state error, phase margin, static error constants) using root locus and bode plot
approaches.
6. Design a controller using direct controller synthesis for getting specified closed loop response.
7. Conversion of transfer function model to state space and vice versa.
8. Check for complete state controllability and complete state observability of a given system.
9. Design full order state observer using principle of duality between state feedback gain matrix K and
observer gain matrix Ke
10. Performance comparison two controller tuning methods based on performance indices such as ISE, IAE,
ITAE and ITSE.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 655
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Control Systems L P C
4 4

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

OAE 7 ECE‐OAE ECE‐OAE‐5A OECE‐423

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To understand basics of control systems and its mathematical modelling.
2. To analyse non‐linear control system and determine the describing function and stability.
3. To represent various systems in state space form and evaluate their transfer function.
4. To compare advanced control systems and study their applications.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Able to classify control systems and derive transfer function using various methods. They will easily
demonstrate mathematical modelling of various control systems.
CO 2 Able to understand significance of non‐linear systems and relevance of describing function approach.
CO 3 Able to represent systems in matrix form.
CO 4 Able to gain knowledge about modern control systems and their advantages to assess modern
technology.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3 3
CO 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 2 3
CO 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 3
CO 4 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3 3

UNIT‐I

Introduction to Control Systems and its Applications: Introduction to Control systems and its significance,
Importance and limitation of transfer function approach, Mathematical modelling of Translational, Rotational,
Electrical Analog of Mechanical Systems

UNIT‐II

Non‐Linear Control Systems: Introduction to Non‐linear Control System, Methods to find transfer function of
non‐linear systems, Describing function analysis of dead zone, relay, backlash, saturation and element with
hysteresis, Lyapunov’s stability.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 656
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT‐III

State Space Analysis: Concept of state, state space equations, state space representation of multivariable
systems, Deriving state equation from transfer function, Properties of linear transformation, Vander‐monde
Matrix.

UNIT‐IV

Analysis of Modern Control systems: Introduction to controllability and observability, State observer, Design of
state Observer, Transfer function Matrix, Introduction to Adaptive control, Fuzzy logic and Neuro‐Fuzzy control
system with their applications, block diagram representation and limitations.

Textbook(s):
1. B. C. Kuo, “Automatic control system”, Prentice Hall of India, 7th edition 2001.
2. Nagrath Gopal, “Control Systems Engineering: Principles and Design”, New Age Publications.
3. M. Gopal, “Control Systems‐Principles and Design” TMH 4th Edition 2012.
4. K. Ogata, “Modern Control Engineering” Pearson 5th Edition 2009.

Reference Book(s):
1. Norman S. Nise, “Control systems engineering” John Wiley & Sons (Asia) Singapore.
2. Raymond T. Stefani, Design of Feedback Control System, Oxford University Press.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 657
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Control Systems and Applications L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

MAE 5 PC PC MAC‐313
ME 7 PCE PCE‐4 MEE‐407T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To provide an understanding about the concepts of transfer unction and its evaluation.
2. To expose the students to time response of control systems
3. To understand the frequency response of control systems
4. To study compensators and controllers
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Ability to define, understand various terms related to control system and evaluation of transfer
function
CO 2 Ability to apply knowledge of various types of signals in time response of systems
CO 3 Ability to analyse frequency response of systems
CO 4 Ability to design compensators and controllers
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 2 1 1 1 1 ‐ 1 3 ‐ 3
CO 2 3 2 1 3 2 1 1 ‐ 1 3 ‐ 1
CO 3 3 2 1 2 3 1 1 ‐ 1 3 ‐ 3
CO 4 3 3 2 1 1 1 1 ‐ 1 3 ‐ 3

UNIT I

Control Systems ‐ Basics & Components Introduction to basic terms, classifications & types of Control Systems,
Mathematical modelling of real life systems, block diagrams & signal flow graphs. Transfer function,
determination of transfer function using block diagram reduction techniques and Mason’s Gain formula.
Control system components: Electrical/ Mechanical/Electromechanical/A.C./D.C. Servo Motors, Stepper
Motors, Tacho Generators,thermal , hydraulic and pneumatic systems.

UNIT II

Time – Domain Analysis of real life problems, Time domain performance specifications, transient response of
first & second order systems, steady state errors and static error constants in unity feedback control systems,
response with P, PI and PID controllers, limitations of time domain analysis.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 658
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT III

Frequency Domain Analysis Polar and inverse polar plots, frequency domain specifications and performance of
LTI systems, Logarithmic plots (Bode plots), gain and phase margins, relative stability. Correlations with time
domain performance closes loop frequency responses from open loop response. Limitations of frequency
domain analysis, minimum/nonminimum phase systems.

UNIT IV

Stability & Compensation Techniques Concepts, absolute, asymptotic, conditional and marginal stability,
Routh–Hurwitz and Nyquist stability criterion, Root locus technique and its application. Concepts of
compensation, series/parallel/ series‐parallel/feedback compensation, Lag/Lead/Lag‐Lead networks for
compensation, compensation using P, PI, PID controllers.

Text Books:
1. B. C. Kuo, “Automatic control system”, Prentice Hall of India, 7th edition 2001.
2. Nagraath Gopal “Control Systems Engineering ‐Principles and Design” New Age Publishers

Reference Books:
1. Norman S. Nise, “Control systems engineering” John Wiley & Sons (Asia) Singapore.
2. Raymond T. Stefani, Design of Feedback Control System, Oxford University Press.
3. K. Ogata, “Modern control engineering”, Pearson 2002.
4. S. P.Eugene Xavier, “Modern control systems”, S. Chand & Company.
5. M. Gopal “Control Systems‐Principles and Design” TMH 4th Edition 201

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 659
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Control Systems and Applications Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

MAE 5 PC PC MAC‐359
ME 7 PCE PCE‐4 MEE‐407P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Control Systems and Applications) as
this is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Study of open loop and closed loop time/ frequency responses of first/second order LTI system
2. Conversion of transfer functions to state model of LTI system and vice versa
3. Determine State Space Model of a given system and determine its controllability and observability.
4. Analysis of Zero order hold and first order hold circuits.
5. Conversion of transfer functions to state model of discrete time system.
6. To determine state transition matrix of a given system.
7. Study of saturation and dead zone non‐linearity using describing function technique of a relay control
system.
8. To draw phase trajectory of a given non‐linear system.
9. Experiments based on PLC applications e.g. Lift control models, pick and place module etc.
10. Study of operation of a stepper motor interface with microprocessor.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 660
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Control Systems for Electrical Engineering L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

OAE 7 EE‐OAE EE‐OAE‐3 OEE‐427T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To provide an understanding about the concepts of transfer unction and its evaluation.
2. To expose the students to time response of control systems
3. To understand the frequency response of control systems
4. To study compensators and controllers
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Ability to define, understand various terms related to control system and evaluation of transfer
function
CO 2 Ability to apply knowledge of various types of signals in time response of systems
CO 3 Ability to analyse frequency response of systems
CO 4 Ability to design compensators and controllers
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 2 1 1 1 1 ‐ 1 3 ‐ 3
CO 2 3 2 1 3 2 1 1 ‐ 1 3 ‐ 1
CO 3 3 2 1 2 3 1 1 ‐ 1 3 ‐ 3
CO 4 3 3 2 1 1 1 1 ‐ 1 3 ‐ 3

UNIT I

Control Systems ‐ Basics & Components Introduction to basic terms, classifications & types of Control Systems,
Mathematical modelling of real life systems, block diagrams & signal flow graphs. Transfer function,
determination of transfer function using block diagram reduction techniques and Mason’s Gain formula.
Control system components: Electrical/ Mechanical/Electromechanical/A.C./D.C. Servo Motors, Stepper
Motors, Tacho Generators, Synchros, Magnetic Amplifiers, Servo Amplifiers.

UNIT II

Time – Domain Analysis of real life problems, Time domain performance specifications, transient response of
first & second order systems, steady state errors and static error constants in unity feedback control systems,
response with P, PI and PID controllers, limitations of time domain analysis.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 661
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT III

Frequency Domain Analysis Polar and inverse polar plots, frequency domain specifications and performance of
LTI systems, Logarithmic plots (Bode plots), gain and phase margins, relative stability. Correlation with time
domain performance closes loop frequency responses from open loop response. Limitations of frequency
domain analysis, minimum/nonminimum phase systems.

UNIT IV

Stability & Compensation Techniques Concepts, absolute, asymptotic, conditional and marginal stability,
Routh–Hurwitz and Nyquist stability criterion, Root locus technique and its application. Concepts of
compensation, series / parallel / series‐parallel / feedback compensation, Lag / Lead / Lag‐Lead networks for
compensation, compensation using P, PI, PID controllers.

Text Books:
1. B. C. Kuo, “Automatic control system”, Prentice Hall of India, 7th edition 2001.
2. Nagraath Gopal “Control Systems Engineering ‐Principles and Design” New Age Publishers

Reference Books:
1. Norman S. Nise, “Control systems engineering” John Wiley & Sons (Asia) Singapore.
2. Raymond T. Stefani, Design of Feedback Control System, Oxford University Press.
3. K. Ogata, “Modern control engineering”, Pearson 2002.
4. S. P. Eugene Xavier, “Modern control systems”, S. Chand & Company.
5. M. Gopal “Control Systems‐Principles and Design” TMH 4th Edition 201

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 662
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Control Systems for Electrical Engineering Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

OAE 7 EE‐OAE EE‐OAE‐3 OEE‐427P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Control Systems for Electrical
Engineering) as this is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Study of open loop and closed loop time/ frequency responses of first/second order LTI system
2. Conversion of transfer functions to state model of LTI system and vice versa
3. Determine State Space Model of a given system and determine its controllability and observability.
4. Analysis of Zero order hold and first order hold circuits.
5. Conversion of transfer functions to state model of discrete time system.
6. To determine state transition matrix of a given system.
7. Study of saturation and dead zone non‐linearity using describing function technique of a relay control
system.
8. To draw phase trajectory of a given non‐linear system.
9. Experiments based on PLC applications e.g. Lift control models, pick and place module etc.
10. Study of operation of a stepper motor interface with microprocessor.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 663
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Cryogenic Engineering L P C
3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 6 TES‐EAE TES‐EAE‐1 TES‐330T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To understand the history, developments, principles, scope and applications of Cryogenic Engineering
and materials.
2. To understand the thermal analysis of Liquefaction cycles.
3. To understand the operation of various cryogen liquefaction systems with critical components
involved.
4. To understand the vacuum technology as well as safety aspects in the domain of Cryogenic
engineering.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 To explain and exemplify the history and developments as well as scope and applications of Cryogenic
Engineering and interpret behaviour of engineering materials and fluids at cryogenic temperatures.
CO 2 To discuss and analyse Liquefaction cycles.
CO 3 To explain the fundamental principles of various cryogen liquefaction systems with critical
components involved.
CO 4 To interpret the various vacuum technology and apply various safety aspects in Cryogenic engineering.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 3 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 2 3 3 3 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 3 3 3 3 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 4 3 3 3 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐‐ ‐ ‐ 2

UNIT‐I

Introduction & History of Cryogenic Engineering: Historical background, Developments, Scope of application,
Present areas involving Cryogenic Engineering, Principles of Thermodynamics, Heat Transfer, Momentum
Transfer, Cool down.
Low Temperature Properties of Engineering Materials: Mechanical Properties, Thermal Properties, Electrical
and Magnetic Properties of solids including metals and nonmetals (insulators), Design considerations, Material
selection criterion.
Cryogenic Fluids: P‐V‐T Behaviour of a Pure substance, T‐s and T‐h diagrams of a Pure substance, Properties of
cryogenic fluids.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 664
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT‐II

Thermodynamics of Ideal Liquefaction Cycles: Joule‐Thompson effect, Linde cycle, Precooled Linde cycle,
Exercise, Claude, Heylandt, and Kapitza cycles.
Measurement of Temperature: Gas and vapour pressure Thermometers, Thermocouple, RTD and
Semiconductors sensors, Types of cryogenic.
Insulation: Foam, Fibre, Powder vacuum.

UNIT‐III

Gas Liquefaction Systems: Properties of materials at cryogenic temperature, Gas Liquefaction and Refrigeration
Systems, Heat exchangers and definition of effectiveness, Coiled tube (Hampson type) and Brazed Aluminum
heat exchangers, Cryogenic expansion engines and turbines, Principal of binary Distillation, Linde signal &
double column system, Liquefaction systems for Neon and Hydrogen, Liquefaction systems for Helium.

UNIT ‐ IV

Vacuum Technology: Importance of vacuum technology in cryogenic, Flow regimes in vacuum systems,
Conductance in vacuum system, Components of vacuum system, Different types of vacuum pumps, Cryo
pumping, Getter sand sorption pumping, Vacuum gauges, Vacuum valves.
Safety with Cryogenic Systems: Introduction, Physiological hazards, Suitability of materials and construction
techniques, Explosions and flammability, Excessive pressure gas, Special considerations for Hydrogen and
Oxygen gas, General safety principles, Safety checklist.

Textbook(s):
1. R. F. Barron, "Cryogenics Systems", Oxford Univesity Press New York, Clarendon Press, Oxford.
2. Flynn & M Thomas, "Cryogenic Engineering”, CRC Press, New York.

References:
1. Pipkov, "Fundamentals of Vacuum Engineering", Meer Publication.
2. G.M Walker, "Cryocooler‐Part 1 Fundamentals", Plenum Press, New York and London.
3. 3. G.M Walker, "Cryocooler‐Part 2" Plenum Press”, New York and London.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 665
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Cryogenic Engineering Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 6 TES‐EAE TES‐EAE‐1 TES‐330P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Cryogenic Engineering) as this is the
practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Study and analysis of cryogenic properties of hydrogen and helium.

2. Study of low temperature measurement instrument.
3. Study of flow measurement and quality measurement instrument.
4. Study of liquid level measurement.
5. Study of insulation used in cryogenic equipment.
6. Study of cryogenic application (superconductivity).
7. Study of cryogenic application in space technology.
8. Study of cryogenic application in bio medical and food preservation.
9. Study of safety while handling fluid.
10. Study and analysis of ideal liquefaction system.
11. Study and analysis of isothermal source cryo‐refrigeration system.
12. Study and analysis of hydrogen liquefaction system.
13. Study and analysis of helium liquefaction system.
14. Thermodynamic analysis of low temperature application refrigeration system.
15. Performance evaluation of low temperature application refrigeration system.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 666
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Cyber Crime and Cyber Laws L P C

4 4

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CSE‐ICB/CSE‐CS 7 PC PC CS‐421

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. Understand the threats in networks and security concepts.
2. Apply authentication applications in different networks.
3. Understand security services for email.
4. Awareness of firewall and it applications
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Understands the different elements of cybercrime and how to deal with such issues with clarity
CO 2 Analysis of various legal provisions of cyber‐crimes and the mechanism of their enforcement.
CO 3 To Know the essential legal provisions of internet‐governance.
CO 4 To understand the Prevention of Cyber Crimes.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 2 1 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ 1 1 ‐ 1
CO 2 3 3 2 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ 1 1 ‐ 1
CO 3 3 2 1 2 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ 1 1 ‐ 2
CO 4 3 3 1 1 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ 1 1 ‐ 1

UNIT‐I

Cyber Crime‐ Overview, Internal and External Attacks, Attack Vectors. Cybercrimes against Individuals – E‐mail
spoofing and online frauds, Phishing and its forms, Spamming, Cyber‐defamation, Cyberstalking, Cyber Bullying
and harassment, Computer Sabotage, Pornographic offenses, Password Sniffing. Keyloggers and Screenloggers.

UNIT‐II

Cybercrime against organization – Unauthorized access of computer, Password Sniffing, Denial‐of‐service (DOS)
attack, Backdoors and Malwares and its types, E‐mail Bombing, Salami Attack, Software Piracy, Industrial
Espionage, Intruder attacks. Security policies violations, Crimes related to Social Media, ATM, Online and
Banking Frauds. Intellectual Property Frauds. Cyber Crimes against Women and Children

UNIT‐III

The World Wide Web, Web Centric Business, e‐Business Architecture, Models of e‐Business, e‐Commerce,

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 667
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Threats to virtual world. IT Act 2000 ‐ Objectives, Applicability, Non‐applicability, Definitions, Amendments and
Limitations. Cyber Crimes‐ Cyber Squatting, Cyber Espionage, Cyber Warfare, Cyber Terrorism, Cyber
Defamation. Social Media‐Online Safety for women and children, Misuse of Private information.

UNIT ‐ IV

Information Technology Act 2000, Digital Signature, E‐Signature, Electronic Records, Electronic Evidence and
Electronic Governance. Controller, Certifying Authority and Cyber Appellate Tribunal. (Rules announced under
the Act), Network and Network Security, Access and Unauthorized Access, Data Security, E Contracts and E
Forms.

Textbook(s):
1. Nina Godbole and Sunit Belapore; “Cyber Security: Understanding Cyber Crimes, Computer Forensics and
Legal Perspectives”, Wiley Publications, 2011.
2. Karnika Seth; “Computers, Internet and New Technology Laws”, Lexis Nexis Buttersworth Wadhwa, 2012.
3. Vikas Vashishth.; “Law and practice of intellectual property in India”

References:
1. William Stallings; “Cryptography and Network Security: Principles and Practices”, Fifth Edition, Prentice
Hall Publication Inc., 2007.
2. Harish Chander; “Cyber Laws and IT Protection”, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd, 2012
3. Shon Harris, “All in One CISSP, Exam Guide Sixth Edition”, McGraw Hill, 2013.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 668
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Cyber Crime and Cyber Laws L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 7 CS‐EAE CS‐EAE‐3 CS‐421T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. Understand the threats in networks and security concepts.
2. Apply authentication applications in different networks.
3. Understand security services for email.
4. Awareness of firewall and it applications
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Understands the different elements of cybercrime and how to deal with such issues with clarity
CO 2 Analysis of various legal provisions of cyber‐crimes and the mechanism of their enforcement.
CO 3 To Know the essential legal provisions of internet‐governance.
CO 4 To understand the Prevention of Cyber Crimes.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 2 1 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 1 1 ‐ 1
CO 2 3 3 2 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 1 1 ‐ 1
CO 3 3 2 1 2 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ 1 1 ‐ 2
CO 4 3 3 1 1 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ 1 1 ‐ 1

UNIT‐I

Cyber Crime‐ Overview, Internal and External Attacks, Attack Vectors. Cybercrimes against Individuals – E‐mail
spoofing and online frauds, Phishing and its forms, Spamming, Cyber‐defamation, Cyberstalking, Cyber Bullying
and harassment, Computer Sabotage, Pornographic offenses, Password Sniffing. Keyloggers and Screenloggers.

UNIT‐II

Cybercrime against organization – Unauthorized access of computer, Password Sniffing, Denial‐of‐service (DOS)
attack, Backdoors and Malwares and its types, E‐mail Bombing, Salami Attack, Software Piracy, Industrial
Espionage, Intruder attacks. Security policies violations, Crimes related to Social Media, ATM, Online and
Banking Frauds. Intellectual Property Frauds.

UNIT‐III

The World Wide Web, Web Centric Business, e‐Business Architecture, Models of e‐Business, e‐Commerce,

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 669
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Threats to virtual world. IT Act 2000 ‐ Objectives, Applicability, Non‐applicability, Definitions, Amendments and
Limitations. Cyber Crimes‐ Cyber Squatting, Cyber Espionage, Cyber Warfare, Cyber Terrorism, Cyber
Defamation.

UNIT ‐ IV

Digital Signature, E‐Signature, Electronic Records, Electronic Evidence and Electronic Governance. Controller,
Certifying Authority and Cyber Appellate Tribunal. (Rules announced under the Act), Network and Network
Security, Access and Unauthorized Access,.

Textbook(s):
1. Nina Godbole and Sunit Belapore; “Cyber Security: Understanding Cyber Crimes, Computer Forensics and
Legal Perspectives”, Wiley Publications, 2011.
2. Karnika Seth; “Computers, Internet and New Technology Laws”, Lexis Nexis Buttersworth Wadhwa, 2012.
3. Vikas Vashishth. “Law and practice of intellectual property in India”

References:
1. William Stallings; “Cryptography and Network Security: Principles and Practices”, Fifth Edition, Prentice
Hall Publication Inc., 2007.
2. Harish Chander; “Cyber Laws and IT Protection”, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd, 2012
3. Shon Harris, “All in One CISSP, Exam Guide Sixth Edition”, McGraw Hill, 2013.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 670
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Cyber Crime and Cyber Laws Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 7 CS‐EAE CS‐EAE‐3 CS‐421P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Cyber Crime and Cyber Laws) as this is
the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Checklist for reporting cyber crime at Cyber crime Police Station.

2. Checklist for reporting cyber crime online.
3. Reporting phishing emails.
4. Demonstration of email phishing attack and preventive measures.
5. Basic checklist, privacy and security settings for popular Social media platforms.
6. Reporting and redressal mechanism for violations and misuse of Social media platforms.
7. Do’s and Don’ts for posting content on Social media platforms.
8. Registering complaints on a Social media platform.
9. List out security controls for mobile phone and implement technical security controls in the personal
mobile phone.
10. Log into computer system as an administrator and check the security policies in the system.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 671
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Cyber Security and Forensics L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CSE‐CS 7 PC PC CS‐423T
EAE 7 ICB‐EAE ICB‐EAE‐3 CS‐423T
EAE 7 CS‐EAE CS‐EAE‐4 CS‐423T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To Understand the threats in networks and security concepts.
2. To Apply authentication applications in different networks.
3. To correctly define and cite appropriate instances for the application of computer forensics Correctly
collect and analyze computer forensic evidence
4. Identify the essential and up‐to‐date concepts, algorithms, protocols, tools, and methodology of
Computer Forensics
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Understand the foundations of Cyber security and threat landscape
CO 2 Analyze governance, regulatory, legal, economic, environmental, social and ethical contexts of cyber
security
CO 3 Understand the concept of Cyber security and issues and challenges associated with it.
CO 4 Understand the cyber crimes, their nature, legal remedies and as to how report the crimes through
available platforms and procedures
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 2 1 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 1 1 1
CO 2 3 3 2 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 1 1 1
CO 3 3 2 1 2 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 1 2
CO 4 3 3 1 1 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 1 1 1

UNIT‐I

Introduction to Incident Response Process Computer Security Incident, Goals of Incident response, Who is
involved in Incident response, Incidence Response Methodology, Preincident preparation, Detection of
Incidents, Initial response, Formulate a response strategy, Investigate the incident, Reporting and Resolution.

UNIT‐II

Preparing for Incidence Response : preparing Individual Hosts, Recording of Cryptographic Checksum of critical
files, enabling secure Audit Logging, Building Up your Hosts Defense, Preparing a Network : Installing Firewalls

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 672
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

and IDS, User access control Lists, Establishing Appropriate Policies and procedures, creating a response tool
Kit, Establishing an Incident Response Team, Incident handling After Detection of an Incident.

UNIT‐III

Fundamentals of Computer Forensics, Computer Forensics Technology, Live data collection from Windows
systems, Live data Collection from Unix systems, Data Acquisition of digital evidence from electronic media,
Evidence collection and preservation, Network Forensics, Email Investigations, Mobile device forensics,
Computer Forensics Analysis and Validation, Macro Threats,

UNIT ‐ IV

Data analysis Techniques : Preparation for Forensic Analysis, Restoring a forensics Duplicate, Recovering
deleted files on Windows systems, recovering Unallocated Space, Free Space and Slack space, Writing forensic
Reports, Report Writing Guidelines.

Textbook(s):
1. K Mandla, C. Prosise , Matt Pepe, “ Incident Response and Computer Forensics”, 2nd Edition, 2003, TMH
2. John R. Vacca, “Computer Forensics”, 2nd Edition, 2004, Firewall Media.

References:
1. Chad Steel, “Windows Forensics”, 1 st Edition, 2006, Wiley India,
2. R M Slade, “ Software Forensics”, 1 st Edition, 2004, TMH
3. Majid Yar, “Cybercrime and Society”, 1 st Edition, 2006, Sage Publications.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 673
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Cyber Security and Forensics Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CSE‐CS 7 PC PC CS‐423P
EAE 7 ICB‐EAE ICB‐EAE‐3 CS‐423P
EAE 7 CS‐EAE CS‐EAE‐4 CS‐423P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Cyber Security and Forensics) as this is
the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Creating a Forensic Image using FTK Imager/Encase Imager

2. Perform data acquisition using USB Write Blocker and FTK Imager
3. Forensics Case Study : Solve the Case study (image file) provide in lab using Encase
Investigator or Autopsy
4. Capturing and analyzing network packets using Wireshark Recovering and Inspecting deleted files
‐ Check for Deleted Files
‐ Recover the Deleted Files
‐ Analyzing and inspecting the recovered files
5. Installation and configuration of Computer Host Firewall.
6. Demonstration of email phishing attack and preventive measures.
7. Installation and configuration of computer Anti‐virus.
8. Do’s and Don’ts for posting content on Social media platforms
9. Wi‐Fi security management in computer and mobile
10. Setting and configuring two factor authentications in the Mobile phone.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 674
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Cyber Security for Industrial Automation L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ICE 7 PCE PCE‐5 ICE‐419T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To introduce the knowledge of internet along with the changing trends in the cyber technologies.
2. Understand the various security threats and vulnerabilities of the cyber world keeping in line with the
industrial trends.
3. Understand how web technology works, how web server capability is used in industry, and the
security problems engendered by such use
4. Locate web technologies where they can be used securely for industrial automation.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Understand concept of security mechanisms, standards and state‐of–the‐art capabilities.
CO 2 Identify and solve different cyber security threats.675
CO 3 Develop and maintain new tools and technologies to enhance the security of applications in industrial
automation.
CO 4 Design new systems and infrastructure level security solutions.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 ‐ 2 2 2 3
CO 2 3 3 2 3 ‐ ‐ 3 ‐ 2 3 3 3
CO 3 3 3 2 3 ‐ ‐ 3 ‐ 2 3 3 3
CO 4 3 3 3 3 ‐ ‐ 3 ‐ 3 3 3 3

Unit I

Information System Security Technology‐ Types and classes of attack, Policies, Standards, Guidelines and
procedures, Malicious code and attacks, Firewalls, Cryptography, Attacks against cryptosystems. Industrial
Automation Culture versus Information Technology (IT) Paradigms‐ Considerations in adapting IT security
methods to industrial automation, Threats, IT and industrial automation.

Unit II

Risk Management for Industrial Automation‐ Risk management, ANSI/ISA‐62443‐2‐1 (99.02.01)‐2009 cyber
security, Risk analysis, Addressing risk, NIST SP 800‐39 Integrated enterprise risk management, Threats.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 675
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Unit III

Industrial Automation Trends, Approaches, and Issues‐ Automation trends, Formal methods used to quantify
and standardize, Important concepts and applications ‐Information security continuous monitoring (ISCM)
strategy, The Smart Grid Maturity Model (SGMM), Future smart grid issues and automation security issues.

Unit IV

Emerging Approaches to Industrial Automation Security‐ Internet of Things, Open platform communications
unified architecture, Security and privacy, Big data analytics and the industrial Internet of Things, The National
Institute of Standards Technology (NIST) Cyber‐Physical Systems (CPS) Framework

Textbooks:
1. Ronald L. Krutz, “Industrial Automation and Control System Security Principles: Protecting the Critical
Infrastructure”, 2nd Edition, International Society of Automation, 2017.
2. David J. Teumim, “Industrial Network Security, Second Edition”, International Society of Automation, 2010.

References:
1. Lawrence M. Thompson and Tim Shaw, “Industrial Data Communications”, Fifth Edition, International
Society of Automation, 2015.
2. Dick Caro, “Automation Network Selection: A Reference Manual”, 3rd Edition, Paperback, International
Society of Automation, 2016.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 676
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Cyber Security for Industrial Automation Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ICE 7 PCE PCE‐5 ICE‐419P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Cyber Security for Industrial
Automation) as this is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Implement following substitution and transportation techniques concepts i)Caesar Chiperb ii) Rail fence
row and column transformation
2. Implement the following Attack: a) Dictionary Attack b) Brute Force Attack.
3. Perform an Experiment to Sniff Traffic using ARP Poisoning.
4. Demonstrate intrusion detection system using any tool (snort or any other s/w)
5. Demonstrate how to provide secure data storage, secure data transmission and for creating digital
signatures.
6. Installation of rootkits and study about the variety of options.
7. Network enumeration through port scanning, SYN flooding
8. Find vulnerabilities of target system through Nessus vulnerability Scanner
9. Perform anonymity through e‐mail spoofing and bombing using PHP. Subsequently detect these attacks
through analyzing the e‐mail header.
10. Generating password hashes using Open SSL

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 677
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Data Analytics L P C
3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 6 MLDA‐EAE MLDA‐EAE‐2A DA‐338T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To develop the fundamental concepts such as data analysis, data pre‐processing
2. To learn about the various data modelling techniques
3. To learn three different mining techniques.
4. Exposure to Data Analytics with R
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Discuss various concepts of data analytics
CO 2 Apply classification and regression techniques
CO 3 Explain and apply mining techniques on streaming data
CO 4 Describe the concept of R programming and implement analytics on Big data using R.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 1 ‐ 3 ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐
CO 2 1 ‐ 3 ‐ ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ 3 1 ‐ ‐
CO 3 1 ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐
CO 4 1 ‐ 3 ‐ ‐ 3 1 ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ ‐

UNIT‐I

Introduction to Data Analytics: Sources and nature of data, classification of data (structured, semi‐structured,
unstructured), characteristics of data, introduction to Big Data platform, need of data analytics, evolution of
analytic scalability, analytic process and tools, analysis vs reporting, modern data analytic tools, applications of
data analytics. Data Analytics Lifecycle: Need, key roles for successful analytic projects, various phases of data
analytics lifecycle – discovery, data preparation, model planning, model building, communicating results, and
operationalization.

UNIT‐II

Data Analysis: Regression modeling, multivariate analysis, Bayesian modeling, inference and Bayesian
networks, support vector and kernel methods, analysis of time series: linear systems analysis & nonlinear
dynamics, rule induction, neural networks: learning and generalisation, competitive learning, principal
component analysis and neural networks.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 678
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT‐III

Mining Data Streams: Introduction to streams concepts, stream data model and architecture, stream
computing, sampling data in a stream, filtering streams, counting distinct elements in a stream, estimating
moments, counting oneness in a window, decaying window, Real‐time Analytics Platform ( RTAP) applications,
Case studies – real time sentiment analysis, stock market predictions.

UNIT – IV

Frame Works and Visualization: MapReduce, Hadoop, Pig, Hive, HBase, MapR, Sharding, NoSQL Databases, S3,
Hadoop Distributed File Systems, Visualization: visual data analysis techniques, interaction techniques, systems
and applications. Introduction to R ‐ R graphical user interfaces, data import and export, attribute and data
types, descriptive statistics, exploratory data analysis, visualization before analysis, analytics for unstructured
data.

Textbook(s):
1. Jiawei Han, Micheline Kamber “Data Mining Concepts and Techniques”, Second Edition, Elsevier.
2. Michael Berthold, David J. Hand, Intelligent Data Analysis, Springer

References:
1. Michael Minelli, Michelle Chambers, and Ambiga Dhiraj, "Big Data, Big Analytics: Emerging Business
Intelligence and Analytic Trends for Today's Businesses", Wiley.
2. David Dietrich, Barry Heller, Beibei Yang, “Data Science and Big Data Analytics”, EMC Education Series,
John Wiley

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 679
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Data Analytics Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 6 MLDA‐EAE MLDA‐EAE‐2A DA‐338P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Data Analytics) as this is the practical
component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. To get the input from user and perform numerical operations (MAX, MIN, AVG, SUM, SQRT, ROUND) using
in R.
2. To perform data import/export (.CSV, .XLS, .TXT) operations using data frames in R
3. To get the input matrix from user and perform Matrix addition, subtraction, multiplication, inverse
transpose and division operations using vector concept in R
4. To perform statistical operations (Mean, Median, Mode and Standard deviation) using R
5. To perform data pre‐processing operations i) Handling Missing data ii) Min‐Max normalization
6. To perform dimensionality reduction operation using PCA for Houses Data Set.
7. To perform Simple Linear Regression with R..
8. To perform K‐Means clustering operation and visualize for iris data set
9. Write R script to diagnose any disease using KNN classification and plot the results.
10. To perform market basket analysis using Association Rules (Apriori).

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 680
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Data Communication and Networking L P C

4 4

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ECE/EE‐VDT/EC‐ACT 5 PC PC ECC‐311

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To build an understanding of the fundamental concepts of data communication.
2. To familiarize the student with the basic taxonomy of data link layer.
3. To understand and implements the network routing, IP addressing, subnetting.
4. To enumerate the functions of transport layer and application layer.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Understand basic concepts of data communications.
CO 2 Understand and explain various functions of data link layerr.
CO 3 Understand and implements the network routing, IP addressing, subnetting.
CO 4 Enumerate the functions of transport layer and application layer.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 2 1 1 3 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 3
CO 2 3 2 1 1 3 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 3
CO 3 3 2 1 1 3 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 3
CO 4 3 2 1 1 3 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 3

UNIT‐ I

Data Communications : Components, protocols and standards, Network and Protocol Architecture, Reference
Model ISO‐OSI, TCP/IP‐Overview ,topology, transmission mode, digital signals, digital to digital encoding, digital
data transmission, DTE‐DCE interface, interface standards, modems, cable modem, transmission media‐ guided
and unguided, transmission impairment, Performance, wavelength and Shannon capacity. Review of Error
Detection and Correction codes.
Switching: Circuit switching (space‐division, time division and space‐time division), packet switching (virtual
circuit and Datagram approach), message switching.

UNIT‐ II

Data Link Layer: Design issues, Data Link Control and Protocols: Flow and Error Control, Stop‐and‐wait ARQ.
Sliding window protocol, Go‐Back‐N ARQ, Selective Repeat ARQ, HDLC, Point‐to –Point Access: PPP Point –to‐
Point Protocol, PPP Stack
Medium Access Sub layer: Channel allocation problem, Controlled Access, Channelization, multiple access

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 681
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

protocols, IEEE standard 802.3 & 802.11 for LANS and WLAN, high‐speed LANs, Token ring, FDDI based LAN,
Network Devices‐repeaters, hubs, switches bridges.

UNIT‐ III

Network Layer: Design issues, Routing algorithms, Congestion control algorithms,

Host to Host Delivery: Internetworking, addressing and routing, IP addressing (class full & Classless), Subnet,
Network Layer Protocols: ARP, IPV4, ICMP, IPV6 ad ICMPV6.

UNIT‐ IV

Transport Layer: Process to Process Delivery: UDP; TCP, congestion control and Quality of service.
Application Layer: Client Server Model, Socket Interface, Domain Name System (DNS): Electronic Mail (SMTP),
file transfer (FTP), HTTP and WWW.

Text Books:
th
1. A. S. Tannenbum, D. Wetherall, “Computer Networks”, Prentice Hall, Pearson, 5 Ed
2. Behrouz A. Forouzan, “Data Communications and Networking”, Tata McGraw‐Hill, 4th Ed

Reference Books:
1. Fred Halsall, “Computer Networks”, Addison – Wesley Pub. Co. 1996.
th
2. Larry L, Peterson and Bruce S. Davie, “Computer Networks: A system Approach”, Elsevier, 4 Ed
3. Tomasi, “Introduction To Data Communications & Networking”, Pearson 7th impression 2011
th
4. William Stallings, “Data and Computer Communications”, Prentice Hall, Imprint of Pearson, 9 Ed.
5. Zheng , “Network for Computer Scientists & Engineers”, Oxford University Press
6. Data Communications and Networking: White, Cengage Learning

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 682
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Data Communication and Networking Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ECE/EE‐VDT/EC‐ACT 5 PC PC ECC‐359

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Data Communication and Networking)
as this is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.
1. Introduction to Computer Network laboratory
Introduction to Discrete Event Simulation
Discrete Event Simulation Tools ‐ ns2/ns3, Omnet++
2. Using Free Open Source Software tools for network simulation – I Preliminary usage of the tool ns3
Simulate telnet and ftp between N sources ‐ N sinks (N = 1, 2, 3). Evaluate the effect of increasing data rate
on congestion.
3. Using Free Open Source Software tools for network simulation ‐ II
Advanced usage of the tool ns3
Simulating the effect of queueing disciplines on network performance ‐ Random Early Detection/Weighted
RED / Adaptive RED (This can be used as a lead up to DiffServ / IntServ later).
4. Using Free Open Source Software tools for network simulation ‐ III
Advanced usage of the tool ns3 Simulate http, ftp and DBMS access in networks
5. Using Free Open Source Software tools for network simulation ‐ IV
Advanced usage of the tool ns3
Effect of VLAN on network performance ‐ multiple VLANs and single router.
6. Using Free Open Source Software tools for network simulation ‐ IV
Advanced usage of the tool ns3
Effect of VLAN on network performance ‐ multiple VLANs with separate
multiple routers.
7. Using Free Open Source Software tools for network simulation ‐ V
Advanced usage of the tool ns3
Simulating the effect of DiffServ / IntServ in routers on throughput enhancement.
8. Using Free Open Source Software tools for network simulation ‐ VI
Advanced usage of the tool ns3
Simulating the performance of wireless networks
9. Case Study I : Evaluating the effect of Network Components on Network Performance
To Design and Implement LAN With Various Topologies and To Evaluate Network Performance Parameters
for DBMS etc)
10. Case Study II : Evaluating the effect of Network Components on Network Performance
To Design and Implement LAN Using Switch/Hub/Router As Interconnecting Devices For Two Different
LANs and To Evaluate Network Performance Parameters.
11. Mini project ‐ one experiment to be styled as a project of duration 1 month (the last month)

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 683
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Data Pre‐processing and Post Processing L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CSE‐DS 6 PC PC DS‐344T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. Build an understanding of the fundamental concepts of data science and to make them understand
the importance of data collection and pre‐processing tasks.
2. Familiarize the student with various exploratory data analytics techniques.
3. Introduce the student to model development and evaluation techniques.
4. Will be able to learn model evaluation and generalization error techniques.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Understand the fundamental concepts of data science and to make them understand the importance
of data collection and pre‐processing tasks.
CO 2 Explain various exploratory data analytics techniques.
CO 3 Understand of various model development and evaluation techniques.
CO 4 Apply mechanism for model evaluation and generalizing error techniques.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 2 2 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 2 3 3
CO 2 3 3 2 2 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 3 2 3
CO 3 3 3 2 3 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 3 3 3
CO 4 3 3 2 3 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 3 3 3

UNIT‐I

Introduction to Data Science – Evolution of Data Science – Data Science Roles – Stages in a Data Science
Project – Applications of Data Science in various fields – Data Security Issues.
Data Collection and Data Pre‐Processing Data Collection Strategies – Data Pre‐Processing Overview – Data
Cleaning – Data Integration and Transformation – Data Reduction – Data Discretization.

UNIT‐II

Exploratory Data Analytics Descriptive Statistics – Mean, Standard Deviation, Skewness and Kurtosis – Box
Plots – Pivot Table – Heat Map – Correlation Statistics – ANOVA.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 684
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT‐III

Model Development Simple and Multiple Regression – Model Evaluation using Visualization – Residual Plot –
Distribution Plot – Polynomial Regression and Pipelines – Measures for In‐sample Evaluation – Prediction and
Decision Making.

UNIT – IV

Model Evaluation Generalization Error – Out‐of‐Sample Evaluation Metrics – Cross Validation – Overfitting –
Under Fitting and Model Selection – Prediction by using Ridge Regression – Testing Multiple Parameters by
using Grid Search

Textbook(s):
1. Daniel T. Larose; Chantal D. Larose, "Data Preprocessing," in Discovering Knowledge in Data: An
Introduction to Data Mining, Wiley, 2014, pp.16‐50, doi: 10.1002/9781118874059.ch2.

References:
1. Cathy O’Neil and Rachel Schutt , “Doing Data Science”, O'Reilly, 2015
2. Machine Learning and Big Data: Concepts, Algorithms, Tools, and Applications Uma N. Dulhare, Khaleel
Ahmad, Khairol Amali Bin Ahmad First published: 15 July 2020

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 685
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Data Pre‐processing and Post Processing Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CSE‐DS 6 PC PC DS‐344P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Data Pre‐processing and Post
Processing) as this is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Download, install and explore the features of NumPy, SciPy, Jupyter, Stats models and Pandas packages.
2. Working with NumPy arrays
3. Working with Pandas data frames
4. Reading data from text files, Excel and the web and exploring various commands for doing descriptive
analytics on the Iris data set.
5. Use the diabetes data set from UCI and Pima Indians Diabetes data set for performing the following:
a. Univariate analysis: Frequency, Mean, Median, Mode, Variance, Standard Deviation, Skewness and
Kurtosis.
b. Bivariate analysis: Linear and logistic regression modelling
c. Multiple Regression analysis
d. Also compare the results of the above analysis for the two data sets.
6. Perform following pre‐processing techniques on loan prediction dataset
a. Feature Scaling
b. Feature Standardization
c. Label Encoding
d. One Hot Encoding
7. Apply and explore various plotting functions on UCI data sets.
a. Normal curves
b. Density and contour plots
c. Correlation and scatter plots
d. Histograms
e. Three‐dimensional plotting
8. Perform following visualizations using matplotlib: Bar Graph, Pie Chart, Box Plot, Histogram, Line Chart and
Subplots, Scatter Plot.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 686
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Data Science L P C
3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CSE/IT/CST/ITE 7 PCE PCE‐4 CIE‐405T
MAE 7 OAE‐MAE OAE‐1 MAO‐417T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To introduce the students about the knowledge and overview of R or Octave statistical package, data
transformation and merging, data visualization and illustration of techniques through R or Octave.
2. To understand statistical techniques like regression analysis and structural equation modelling.
3. To promote deeper understanding of forecasting, time series data analysis and auto regression
models.
4. To provide overview of support vector machine, linear discriminant analysis and clustering techniques.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Develop relevant programming abilities.
CO 2 Demonstrate proficiency with statistical analysis of data.
CO 3 Develop the ability to build and assess data‐based models.
CO 4 Execute statistical analyses with professional statistical software.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 2 3 3 ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 2 3 2 2 3 ‐ 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 3 2 2 3 3 ‐ 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 4 3 3 2 3 ‐ 3 ‐ ‐ ‐‐ ‐ ‐ 2

UNIT‐ I

Overview of R or Octave statistical package.

Introduction to R, Variables, Comments, Data Types, Strings, Operators, If‐Else, Loops, Functions, Vectors, Lists,
Arrays, Data Frames
Data Pre‐processing, Data Scales, Similarity and Dissimilarity measures, sampling and quantization of data,
filtering, Data transformation and merging, Data visualization, PCA, Correlation, Chi‐Square test. Illustration of
These techniques through R, or Octave.

UNIT‐ II

Regression Analysis, linear, generalized, regularized regression, Cross‐validation, Training and Testing data set,
Overview of nonlinear regression, Overview of Ridge regression, Latent variables, Structure Equation

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 687
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

modelling. Illustration of These techniques through R, or Octave.

UNIT‐ III

Forecasting, time series data analysis, Stationarity, Seasonality, recurrent models, autoregressive models.
Illustration of These techniques through R, or Octave.

UNIT‐ IV

Classification, Linear discriminant analysis, overview of support vector machine, Decision trees, Clustering,
Clustering techniques. Illustration of These techniques through R, or Octave.

Text Books:
1. Runkler, Thomas A., “Data Analytics: Models and Algorithms for Intelligent Data Analysis”, Springer, 2012.
2. Friedman, Jerome, Trevor Hastie, and Robert Tibshirani, “The elements of statistical learning”. Vol. 1. New
York: Springer Series in Statistics, 2001.

References Books:
1. Zuur, Alain, Elena N. Ieno, and Erik Meesters. “A Beginner's Guide to R”. Springer, 2009.
2. Hansen, Jesper Schmidt, “GNU Octave: Beginner's Guide: Become a Proficient Octave, User by Learning
this High‐level Scientific Numerical Tool from the Ground Up”, Packt Publishing Ltd, 2011.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 688
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Data Science Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CSE/IT/CST/ITE 7 PCE PCE‐4 CIE‐405P
MAE 7 OAE‐MAE OAE‐1 MAO‐417P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Data Science) as this is the practical
component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Installation of R, basic syntax of R.

2. Describing data, viewing and manipulating data using R.
3. To plot the probability distribution curve through R software.
4. To perform chi square test on various data sets.
5. To use Python as a programming tool for the analysis of data structures.
6. To perform various operations such as data storage, analysis and visualization through R software.
7. To perform descriptive statistics analysis and data visualization in python.
8. To perform Principal Component Analysis on datasets using R software.
9. To perform linear regression on datasets using R software.
10. To perform Data Aggregation and GroupWise Operations.
11. To edit and execute programs involving Flow Controls.
12. To edit and execute programs involving functions.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 689
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Data Science using R L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CSE‐DS 7 PC PC DS‐427T
EE‐VDT/EC‐ACT 7 OAE‐ECE‐EA OAE‐2 DS‐427T
EAE 7 DS‐EAE DS‐EAE‐3 DS‐427T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. The fundamental knowledge on basics of data science and R programming.
2. The programs in R language for understanding and visualization of data using statistical functions and
plots.
3. The fundamentals of how to obtain, store, explore, and model data efficiently.
4. The fundamentals of probability and statistics for data science.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Understand basics of data science and R programming.
CO 2 Understand and visualize data using statistical functions and plots.
CO 3 Explain how to obtain, store, explore, and model data efficiently.
CO 4 Apply probability and statistics for data science.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 1 2 ‐ 3 2 ‐ 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐
CO 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 2 ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐
CO 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 2 ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐
CO 4 ‐ 1 ‐ 3 2 ‐ 3 2 2 ‐ ‐ ‐

UNIT‐I

Structured versus unstructured data, Quantitative and qualitative data, The four levels of data: Nominal level,
Ordinal level, Interval level, and Ratio level, The five steps of Data Science: Ask an interesting question, obtain
the data, explore the data, model the data, communicate and visualize the results, Explore the data.

UNIT‐II

How to run R, R Sessions and Functions, Basic Math, Variables, Data Types, Vectors, Conclusion, Advanced Data
Structures, Data Frames, Lists, Matrices, Arrays, Classes, R Programming Structures, Control Statements, Loops,
‐ Looping Over Nonvector Sets,‐ If‐Else, Arithmetic and Boolean Operators and values, Default Values for
Argument, Return Values, Functions are Objects, Recursion.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 690
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT‐III

Mathematics: Vectors and matrices, Arithmetic symbols, Graphs, Logarithms/exponents, Set theory, Linear
algebra. Probability: Basic definitions, Probability, Bayesian versus Frequentist, Compound events, Conditional
Probability, The rules of probability, Collectively exhaustive events, Bayes theorem, Random variables

UNIT ‐ IV

Statistics: Obtaining data, Sampling data, Measuring Statistics, The Empirical rule, Point estimates, Sampling
distributions, Confidence intervals, Hypothesis tests

Textbook(s):
1. Sinan Ozdemir, “Principles of Data Science”, Packt.
2. Norman Matloff, “The Art of R Programming”, Cengage Learning.

References:
1. G. Jay Kerns, “Introduction to Probability and Statistics Using R”, First Edition.
2. Nina Zumel, John Mount, “Practical Data Science with R”, Manning Publications, 1st Edition, 2014

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 691
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Data Science using R Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CSE‐DS 7 PC PC DS‐427P
EE‐VDT/EC‐ACT 7 OAE‐ECE‐EA OAE‐2 DS‐427P
EAE 7 DS‐EAE DS‐EAE‐3 DS‐427P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Data Science using R) as this is the
practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Installation of R, basic syntax of R.

2. Describing data, viewing and manipulating data using R.
3. Visualizing data‐ tables, charts, plots using R.
4. Implementing binomial distribution and plotting density and distribution function.
5. Implementation probability distribution
6. Exploratory data analysis‐ range, mean, variance, median, standard deviation.
7. Implementation densities of random numbers‐ distribution in R, making histogram.
8. Correlations‐ making of scatter plots, use of scatter plots to investigate relationship between two variables.
9. Statistical function in R‐Statistical inference, contingency tables, chi‐square goodness of fit
10 Implement linear and logistics regression in R.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 692
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Data Structures and Algorithms L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

OAE 6 CSE‐OAE CSE‐OAE‐2A OCSE‐310T
EE‐VDT/EC‐ACT 7 OAE‐ECE‐EA OAE‐2 OSD‐445T
OAE 7 SD‐OAE SD‐OAE‐3A OSD‐445T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To introduce basics of Data structures (Arrays, strings, linked list etc.) and concepts of Stacks, Queues
2. To understand the concepts of and Trees, heaps and related operations and their implementation
3. To introduce various Sorting and searching Algorithms and Hashing
4. To understand sets and the concept of Graphs and their applications.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Understand data structures like Arrays Stack,Queues,Linked lists and ability to choose the efficient
data structures for given problem
CO 2 Construct Binary Search trees ,Heap trees and AVL trees and learn about sparse matrix
CO 3 Apply sorting and searching techniques efficiently and learn about Hashing and its types
CO 4 Apply graph theory and its concepts in various applications and able to differentiate between trees
and graphs
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 2 2 3 2 3 2 1 2 3 2 1
CO 2 2 3 1 2 3 3 2 1 2 2 1 3
CO 3 1 2 3 3 2 1 1 2 3 3 2 1
CO 4 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 3 2 1

UNIT‐I

Overview of data structure, Basics of Algorithm Analysis including Running Time Calculations, Abstract Data
Types, Arrays, Arrays and Pointers, Multidimensional Array, String processing, General Lists and List ADT, List
manipulations, Single, double and circular lists. Stacks and Stack ADT, Stack Manipulation, Prefix, infix and
postfix expressions, recursion. Queues and Queue ADT, Queue manipulation.

UNIT – II

Trees, Properties of Trees, Binary trees, Binary Tree traversal, Tree manipulation algorithms, Expression trees
and their usage, binary search trees, Heaps and their implementation, Priority Queues

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 693
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT‐III

Sparse Matrix Representation (Array and Link List representation), polynomials and polynomial arithmetic.
Sorting: Selection Sort, Insertion Sort, Bubble Sort, Quick Sort, Merge Sort, Heap Sort;
Searching: List Search, Sequential Search, Binary Search, Hashing Methods, Collision Resolution in Hashing.

UNIT – IV

Overview of algorithm design approaches – Divide and Conquer, Greedy, Dynamic Programming.
Graphs, Graph representation, Graph Traversals (DFS and BFS) and their implementations using divide and
conquer approach. Minimum Spanning Tree algorithms – Prim’s algorithm using Greedy approach and Kruskal’s
algorithm, Shortest Path Algorithms – Dijkastra’s, Bellman Ford’s, Floyd Warshall’s algorithm (implement using
dynamic programming approach).

Textbook(s):
1. Richard Gilberg , Behrouz A. Forouzan, “Data Structures: A Pseudocode Approach with C, 2nd Edition,
Cengage Learning, 2004
2. E. Horowitz, S. Sahni, S. Anderson‐Freed, "Fundamentals of Data Structures in C", 2nd Ed, Silicon Press,
2007.
3. T.H. Cormen, C.E. Leiserson, R.L. Rivest, Clifford Stein, Introduction to Algorithms, 3rd Ed., PHI

References:
1. Mark Allen Weiss, “Data Structures and Algorithm Analysis in C”, 2nd Edition, Pearson, 1996
2. Robert Kruse, “Data Structures and Program Design in C”, 2nd Edition, Pearson, 1990
3. Seymour Lipschutz, “Data Structures with C (Schaum's Outline Series)”, McGrawhill, 2017
4. A. M. Tenenbaum, “Data structures using C”. Pearson Education, 1st Edition 2003.
5. Weiss M.A., “Data structures and algorithm analysis in C++”, Pearson Education, 2014.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 694
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Data Structures and Algorithms Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

OAE 6 CSE‐OAE CSE‐OAE‐2A OCSE‐310P
EE‐VDT/EC‐ACT 7 OAE‐ECE‐EA OAE‐2 OSD‐445P
OAE 7 SD‐OAE SD‐OAE‐3A OSD‐445P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Data Structures and Algorithms) as this
is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Implement sparse matrix using array. Description of program: a. Read a 2D array from the user. b. Store it
in the sparse matrix form, use array of structures. c. Print the final array.
2. Create a linked list with nodes having information about a student and perform a. Insert a new node at
specified position. b. Delete of a node with the roll number of student specified. c. Reversal of that linked
list.
3. Create doubly linked list with nodes having information about an employee and perform Insertion at front
of doubly linked list and perform deletion at end of that doubly linked list.
4. Create circular linked list having information about a college and perform Insertion at front perform
Deletion at end.
5. Implement two stacks in a using single array.
6. Create a stack and perform Push, Pop, Peek and Traverse operations on the stack using Linked list.
7. Create a Linear Queue using Linked List and implement different operations such as Insert, Delete, and
Display the queue elements.
8. Implement Experiment‐2 using liked list.
9. Create a Binary Tree and perform Tree traversals (Preorder, Postorder, Inorder) using the concept of
recursion.
10. Implement insertion, deletion and traversals (inorder, preorder and postorder) on binary search tree with
the information in the tree about the details of an automobile (type, company, year of make).
11. Implement Selection Sort, Bubble Sort, Insertion sort, Merge sort, Quick sort, and Heap Sort using array as
a data structure.
12. Perform Linear Search and Binary Search on an array. Description of programs: a. Read an array of type
integer. b. Input element from user for searching. c. Search the element by passing the array to a function
and then returning the position of the element from the function else return ‐1 if the element is not found.
d. Display the position where the element has been found.
13. Implement the searching using hashing method.
14. Create a graph and perform DFS and BFS traversals.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 695
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Data Visualization L P C
3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 6 MLDA‐EAE MLDA‐EAE‐2B DS‐340T
CST/ITE 7 PCE PCE‐5 CIE‐423T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To understand the key techniques and theory behind data visualization
2. To use effectively the various visualization structures (like tables, spatial data, tree and network etc.)
3. To evaluate information visualization systems and other forms of visual presentation for their
effectiveness
4. To design and build data visualization systems with box plots, heat maps etc.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Understand the key techniques and theory behind data visualization
CO 2 Use effectively the various visualization structures (like tables, spatial data, tree and network etc.)
CO 3 Evaluate information visualization systems and other forms of visual presentation for their
effectiveness
CO 4 Design and build data visualization systems with box plots, heat maps etc.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 3 3 3 ‐ ‐ 1 2 ‐ ‐ 3
CO 2 3 3 3 3 3 ‐ ‐ 1 2 ‐ ‐ 3
CO 3 3 3 3 3 3 ‐ ‐ 1 2 ‐ ‐ 3
CO 4 3 3 3 3 3 ‐ ‐ 1 2 ‐ ‐ 3

UNIT‐I

Value of Visualization – What is Visualization and Why do it: External representation – Interactivity – Difficulty
in Validation. Data Abstraction: Dataset types – Attribute types – Semantics. Task Abstraction – Analyze,
Produce, Search, Query. Four levels of validation – Validation approaches – Validation examples. Marks and
Channels

UNIT‐II

Rules of thumb – Arrange tables: Categorical regions – Spatial axis orientation – Spatial layout density. Arrange
spatial data: Geometry – Scalar fields – Vector fields – Tensor fields. Arrange networks and trees: Connections,
Matrix views – Containment. Map color: Color theory, Color maps and other channels.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 696
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT‐III

Manipulate view: Change view over time – Select elements – Changing viewpoint – Reducing attributes. Facet
into multiple views: Juxtapose and Coordinate views – Partition into views – Static and Dynamic layers –
Reduce items and attributes: Filter – Aggregate. Focus and context: Elide – Superimpose – Distort – Case
studies.

UNIT – IV

Applied Visualizations: Box plot ‐ Density Plot ‐ Area Chart ‐ Heat map ‐ Tree map ‐ Graph Networks

Textbook(s):
1. Tamara Munzner, Visualization Analysis and Design, A K Peters Visualization Series, CRC Press, 2014.
2. Scott Murray, Interactive Data Visualization for the Web, O’Reilly, 2013.

References:
1. Alberto Cairo, The Functional Art: An Introduction to Information Graphics and Visualization, New Riders,
2012
2. Nathan Yau, Visualize This: The FlowingData Guide to Design, Visualization and Statistics, John Wiley &
Sons, 2011.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 697
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Data Visualization Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 6 MLDA‐EAE MLDA‐EAE‐2B DS‐340P
CST/ITE 7 PCE PCE‐5 CIE‐423P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Data Visualization) as this is the
practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Loading and Distinguishing Dependent and Independent parameters

2. Exploring Data Visualization tools
3. Drawing Charts
4. Drawing Graphs
5. Data mapping
6. Creating Scatter Plot maps
7. Using BNF Notations
8. Working with REGEX
9. Visualize Network Data
10. Understanding Data Visualization frameworks

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 698
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Data Warehousing and Data Mining L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CSE/CST 7 PCE PCE‐5 CIE‐425T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To understand the need of data warehousing for data analysis
2. To understand and apply OLAP operations
3. To identify the need of various data mining techniques.
4. To apply various data mining techniques.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Able to understand ETL Process.
CO 2 Able to understand and apply OLAP operations for data analysis.
CO 3 Able to apply supervised learning based data mining techniques.
CO 4 Able to apply unsupervised learning based data mining techniques.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 2 2 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 2 2 3
CO 2 3 3 2 2 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 2 2 3
CO 3 3 3 2 3 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 2 2 3
CO 4 3 3 2 3 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 2 2 3

UNIT‐I

Introduction to Data Warehousing: Overview, Difference between Database System and Data Warehouse, The
Compelling Need for data warehousing, Data warehouse – The building Blocks: Defining Features, data
warehouses and data marts, overview of the components, Three tier architecture, Metadata in the data
warehouse.
Data pre‐processing: Data cleaning, Data transformation ETL Process. ETL tools.
Defining the business requirements: Dimensional analysis, information packages – a new concept,
requirements gathering methods, requirements definition: scope and content.

UNIT‐II

Principles of Dimensional Modelling: Objectives, From Requirements to data design, Multi‐Dimensional Data
Model, Schemas: the STAR schema, the Snowflake schema, fact constellation schema.
OLAP in the Data Warehouse: Demand for Online Analytical Processing, limitations of other analysis methods‐
OLAP is the answer, OLAP definitions and rules, OLAP characteristics, major features and functions, hyper

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 699
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

cubes.
OLAP Operations: Drill‐down and roll‐up, slice‐and‐dice , pivot or rotation, OLAP models, overview of
variations, the MOLAP model, the ROLAP model, the DOLAP model, ROLAP versus MOLAP, OLAP
implementation considerations. Query and Reporting, Executive Information Systems (EIS), Data Warehouse
and Business Strategy.

UNIT‐III

Data Mining Basics: What is Data Mining, Data Mining Defined, The knowledge discovery process (KDD
Process), Data Mining Applications‐ The Business Context of Data Mining, Data Mining for Process
Improvement, Data Mining as a Research Tool, Data Mining for Marketing, Benefits of data mining,
Major Data Mining Techniques: Classification and Prediction: Issues Regarding Classification and Prediction,
Classification by Decision Tree Induction, KNN Algorithm.

UNIT ‐ IV

Cluster detection, K‐ means Algorithm, Outlier Analysis, memory‐based reasoning, link analysis, Mining
Association Rules in Large Databases: Association Rule Mining, genetic algorithms, neural networks.
Data mining tools.

Textbook(s):
1. Paul Raj Poonia, “Fundamentals of Data Warehousing”, John Wiley & Sons, 2004
2. Kamber and Han, “Data Mining Concepts and Techniques”, Hart Court India P. Ltd. Elsevier, 2nd Ed, 2001

References:
1. W. H. Inmon, “Building the operational data store”, 2nd Ed., John Wiley, 1999.
2. Pang‐ Ning Tan, Michael Steinbach, Viach, Vipin Kumar, Introduction to Data Mining, Pearson
3. Shmueli, “Data Mining for Business Intelligence : Concepts, Techniques and Applications in Microsoft Excel
with XLMiner”, Wiley Publications

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 700
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Data Warehousing and Data Mining Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CSE/CST 7 PCE PCE‐5 CIE‐425P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Data Warehousing and Data Mining) as
this is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Study of ETL process and its tools.

2. Program of Data warehouse cleansing to input names from users (inconsistent) and format them.
3. Program of Data warehouse cleansing to remove redundancy in data.
4. Introduction to WEKA tool.
5. Implementation of Classification technique on ARFF files using WEKA.
6. Implementation of Clustering technique on ARFF files using WEKA.
7. Implementation of Association Rule technique on ARFF files using WEKA.
8. Implementation of Visualization technique on ARFF files using WEKA.
9. Perform Data Similarity Measure (Euclidean, Manhattan Distance).
10. Perform Apriori algorithm to mine frequent item‐sets.
11. Develop different clustering algorithms like K‐Means, KMedoids Algorithm, Partitioning Algorithm and
Hierarchical
12. Apply Validity Measures to evaluate the quality of Data

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 701
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Database Modelling and Design L P C

4 4

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

IT 6 PCE PCE‐1 CIE‐316

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To understand the database design life cycle and design conceptual model of database system.
2. To design logical model of database system.
3. To physically implement the database.
4. To understand the need of database tuning and security.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Able to understand the database design life cycle and design conceptual model of database system.
CO 2 Able to design logical model of database system.
CO 3 Able to physically implement the database.
CO 4 Able to perform database tuning.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 2 2 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 2 2 3
CO 2 3 3 2 2 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 2 2 3
CO 3 3 3 2 3 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 2 2 3
CO 4 3 3 2 3 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 2 2 3

UNIT‐I

Introduction: Overview of database systems architecture and components, database design life cycle
Conceptual data modelling: ER Modeling, EER Modeling, Modeling complex relationships, Design issues in ER &
EER modeling

UNIT‐II

Logical data modelling: Overview of relational data model, Integrity constraints, Mapping ER Model to a logical
schema, Mapping EER Model to a logical schema, Mapping of higher degree relationships, Mapping of
Aggregation, Mapping complex ER Model Constructs to a logical schema
Normalization: Introduction, Anomalies, Normal forms – 1NF, 2NF, 3NF, BCNF, 4NF & 5NF

UNIT‐III

Database implementation and physical database design: Database creation using SQL, SQL commands – DDL &

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 702
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

DML; Views; Advanced data manipulation using SQL

Database Programming: Cursor, Exception Handling, Procedures, Functions, Packages, Triggers

UNIT ‐ IV

Database tuning and maintenance: Introduction, Clustering and indexing, guidelines for index selection,
de‐normalization, database tuning
Database security: Introduction, Access control DCL Commands, views

Textbook(s):
1. Database Modelling and Database Design. Narayan S. Umanath and Richard W. Scamell. Cengage Learning,
2nd Edition.
2. Database Management Systems. Raghu Ramakrishnana and Johannes Gehrke, Mc Graw Hill, 3rd Edition.

References:
1. Database Modelling and Design. Toby Teorey, Sam Lightstone, Tom Nadeau and H. V. Jagadish. Morgan
Kaufmann Publishers, 5th Edition
2. Elmasri, Navathe, Fundamentals of Database Systems, 5th Edition, Pearson Education, India.
3. Database System Concepts, Silberschatz, Korth, McGraw hill, V edition.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 703
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Deep Learning for Image Processing and Computer Vision L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 7 IPCV‐EAE IPCV‐EAE‐5A IPCV‐459T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To impart the basic knowledge about deep learning, computer vision and image processing.
2. To impart knowledge about linear regression and basic concepts of decision functions.
3. To impart knowledge about deep learning algorithms like Feed Forward and Convolutional Neural
Networks.
4. To impart knowledge about Recurrent Neural Networks, Generative Modelling, Image Classification
and Data Labeling use Deep Learning.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Understand concepts of deep learning, computer vision and image processing.
CO 2 Understand linear regression and basic concepts of decision functions.
CO 3 Implement Feed Forward and Convolutional Neural Networks.
CO 4 Implement advanced deep learning techniques for image related applications.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 ‐ 2 1 ‐ 3
CO 2 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 ‐ 2 1 ‐ 3
CO 3 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 ‐ 2 1 ‐ 3
CO 4 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 ‐ 2 1 ‐ 3

UNIT I

Introduction to Deep Learning, Computer Vision and Image Processing, Image Formation Concepts. Geometric
Transformations, Image Transforms, Image Filtering, Colour Image Processing, Image Segmentation Texture
Descriptors, Colour Features, Edges/Boundaries. Object Boundary and Shape Representations.

UNIT II

Linear Regression, Basic Concepts of Decision Functions, Elementary Statistical Decision Theory, Parameter
Estimation, Clustering for Knowledge Representation, Dimension Reduction, Artificial Neural Network for
Classification.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 704
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT III

Feed Forward Neural Networks, Introduction to CNNs, Optimization for training Deep neural networks, Deep
Neural Network, Tricks for Improving the Learning.

UNIT IV

Introduction to DL packages/ Important architectures , Visualizing CNNs , Recurrent Neural Networks,

Generative Modelling using Deep networks, Deep Reinforcement Learning, Image Classification and Data
Labelling using Deep Learning.

Textbook(s):
1. Mahmoud Hassaballah (Edit.), Ali Ismail Awad (Edit.) : Deep Learning in Computer Vision: Principles and
Applications, CRC Press, 2020
2. Rafael C. Gonzalez, Richard E. Woods, Digital Image Processing‘, Pearson, Third Edition, 2010.
3. Rajalingappaa Shanmugamani: Deep Learning for Computer Vision: Expert techniques to train advanced
neural networks using TensorFlow and Keras, Packt Publishing Limited, 2018

References:
1. Bernd Jahne: Digital Image Processing, 5th Ed., Springer, 2002.
2. William K Pratt: Digital Image Processing: Piks Inside, John Wiley & Sons, 2001.
3. Deep Learning: Ian Goodfellow, Yoshua Bengio, and Aaron Courville, MIT Press, 2016

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 705
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Deep Learning for Image Processing and Computer Vision Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 7 IPCV‐EAE IPCV‐EAE‐5A IPCV‐459P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Deep Learning for Image Processing
and Computer Vision) as this is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Introduction to Python programming fundamentals.

2. Illustration of list, tuple and dictionary in Python.
3. Illustration of exception handling and debugging concepts in python
4. Introduction and application of Panda and Numpy libraries in image analysis
5. Introduction and application of Open CV, PIL (Python Image Library) and other relevant libraries in image
processing.
6. To learn and understand Tensor Flow.
7. To learn to make a Deep Learning model in Keras for an image related application.
8. To learn to apply Convolutional Neural Networks (CNNs) for an image related application.
9. To learn to apply Recurrent Neural Networks (RNNs) for an image related application.
10. To learn to apply Multilayer Perceptrons (MLPs) for an image related application.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 706
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Design and Analysis of Algorithm L P C

4 4

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CSE/IT/CST/ITE 5 PC PC CIC‐311

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To Introduce various designing techniques and methods for algorithms
2. Performance analysis of Algorithms using asymptotic and empirical approaches
3. Demonstrate a familiarity with major algorithms and data structures.
4. To give clear idea on algorithmic design paradigms like Divide‐and‐Conquer, Dynamic Programming,
Greedy, Branch & Bound, Back tracking and string matching and network flow. .
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Analyse asymptotic runtime complexity of algorithms including formulating recurrence relations and
divide and conquer designing method.
CO 2 Describe the greedy paradigm and apply Greedy strategy for solving various problems.
CO 3 Apply dynamic programming and Branch & Bound approach to solve suitable problems
CO 4 Understand the concept of NP problems and string matching algorithm and various flow & sorting
networks
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 1 1 1
CO 2 2 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 2
CO 3 2 2 1 1 2 3 3 2 1 3 1 2
CO 4 3 2 2 3 2 1 3 2 1 1 2 3

UNIT‐I

Asymptotic notations for time and space complexity, Methods for solving Recurrence relations, Brief Review of
Graphs, Sets and disjoint sets, union, sorting and searching algorithms and their analysis in terms of space and
time complexity.
Divide and Conquer: General method, binary search, merge sort, Quick sort, selection sort, Strassen’s matrix
multiplication algorithms and analysis of algorithms for these problems.

UNIT‐II

Greedy Method: General method, knapsack problem, Huffman Codes, job sequencing with deadlines,
minimum spanning trees, single souce paths and analysis of these problems.
Back Tracking: General method, 8 queen’s problem, graph colouring, Hamiltonian cycles, and analysis of these

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 707
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

problems.

UNIT‐III

Dynamic Programming: Ingredients of Dynamic Programming. Matrix Chain Multiplication, Longest common
subsequence and optimal binary search trees problems, 0‐1 knapsack problem, Traveling salesperson problem,
Floyd Warshall algorithm.
Branch and Bound: Method, O/I knapsack and traveling salesperson problem

UNIT ‐ IV

String Matching: The naïve String Matching algorithm, The Rabin‐Karp Algorithm, String Matching with finite
automata, The Knuth‐Morris Pratt algorithm.
Computational Complexity: Basic Concepts, Polynomial vs Non‐Polynomial Complexity, NP‐ hard & NP‐
complete classes. Approximation Algorithms
Flow and Sorting Network:, Ford‐ Fulkerson method, Maximum bipartite matching, Sorting Networks,
Comparison network, Zero‐ one principle, Bitonic sorting network, merging network

Textbook(s):
1. T. H. Cormen, C. E. Leiserson, R. L. Rivest, Clifford Stein, Introduction to Algorithms, 3rd Ed., PHI, 2013.
2. Udit Aggarwal, Algorithm Design and Analysis, Dhanpat Rai and Co.

References:
1. Ellis Horowitz, Sartaj Sahni, Sanguthevar Rajasekaran, Computer Algorithms/C++, Second Edition,
Universities Press.
2. Jon Klenberg, Eva Tardos, Algorithm Design, Pearson Publications,2014.
3. A. V. Aho, J. E. Hopcroft, J. D. Ullman, The Design and Analysis of Computer Algorithms, Pearson, 2013.
4. Richard Neapolitan, Foundations of Algorithms, Fifth Edition, Jones & Bartlett Learning
5. Sara Base, Introduction to Design & analysis,Pearson

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 708
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Design and Analysis of Algorithm Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CSE/IT/CST/ITE 5 PC PC CIC‐359

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Design and Analysis of Algorithm) as
this is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. To implement following algorithm using array as a data structure and analyse its time complexity.
a) Merge sort
b) Quick sort
c) Bubble sort
d) Selection sort
e) Heap sort
2. To implement Linear search and Binary search and analyse its time complexity.
3. To implement Huffman Coding and analyse its time complexity.
4. To implement Minimum Spanning Tree and analyse its time complexity.
5. To implement Dijkstra‘s algorithm and analyse its time complexity.
6. To implement Bellman Ford algorithm and analyse its time complexity.
7. Implement N Queen's problem using Back Tracking.
8. To implement Matrix Multiplication and analyse its time complexity.
9. To implement Longest Common Subsequence problem and analyse its time complexity.
10. To implement naïve String Matching algorithm, Rabin Karp algorithm and Knuth Morris Pratt algorithm and
analyse its time complexity.
11. To implement Sorting Network.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 709
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Design of Experiments L P C
3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ME 7 PCE PCE‐5 MEE‐417T
MAE 7 OAE‐MAE OAE‐1 MAO‐419T

Marking Scheme:
Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be objective,
single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus. Every
unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student shall be
asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5 sub‐parts /
sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard /
level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To explain theory of probability and statistics with regards to this course.
2. To explain experimental design for more than two factors and interpretation of models.
3. To impart knowledge about parameter design, tolerance design and reliability improvement.
4. To explain experimental design using Taguchi’s orthogonal arrays.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Apply statistics for experimental design.
CO 2 Analyse the factorial design of experiments.
CO 3 Explain methods to improve the reliability through experiments.
CO 4 Design experiments using Taguchi’s Orthogonal Arrays.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 2 3 2 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 2 3 3 2 3 2 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 3 3 2 2 3 2 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 4 3 3 2 2 2 3 ‐ ‐ ‐‐ ‐ ‐ 2

UNIT‐I

Introduction: Strategy of Experimentation, Typical applications of Experimental design, Basic Principles,

Guidelines for Designing Experiments.
Basic Statistical Concepts: Concepts of random variable, probability, density function cumulative distribution
function. Sample and population, Measure of Central tendency; Mean median and mode, Measures of
Variability, Concept of confidence level. Statistical Distributions: Normal, Log Normal & Weibull distributions.
Hypothesis testing, Probability plots, choice of sample size. Illustration through Numerical examples.

UNIT‐II

Experimental Design: Classical Experiments: Factorial Experiments: Terminology: factors, levels, interactions,
treatment combination, randomization, Two‐level experimental designs for two factors and three factors.
Three‐level experimental designs for two factors and three factors, Factor effects, Factor interactions,
Fractional factorial design, Saturated Designs, Central composite designs. Illustration through Numerical

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 710
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

examples.
Analysis and Interpretation Methods: Measures of variability, Ranking method, Column effect method &
Plotting method, Analysis of variance (ANOVA) in Factorial Experiments: YATE’s algorithm for ANOVA,
Regression analysis, Mathematical models from experimental data. Illustration through Numerical examples.

UNIT‐III

Quality By Experimental Design: Quality, Western and Taguchi’s quality philosophy, elements of cost, Noise
factors causes of variation. Quadratic loss function & variations of quadratic loss function. Robust Design: Steps
in Robust Design: Parameter design and Tolerance Design. Reliability Improvement through experiments,
Illustration through Numerical examples.

UNIT ‐ IV

Experiment Design Using Taguchi’s Orthogonal Arrays: Types of Orthogonal Arrays, selection of standard
orthogonal arrays, Linear graphs and Interaction assignment, Dummy level Technique, Compound factor
method, Modification of linear graphs. Illustration through Numerical examples.

Textbook(s):
1. Montgomery, D.C., “Design and Analysis of Experiments”, 5 Ed., John Wiley and Sons Inc., New York.
2. D. Cox and N. Reid, “The Theory of the Design of Experiments”, CRC Press, 2000.

References:
1. George. E. P. Box, J. Stuart Hunter, William G. Hunter, “Statistics for Experimenters: Design, Innovation,
and Discovery”, 2nd Edition, Wiley.
2. K. Hinkelmann and O. Kempthorne, “Design and Analysis of Experiments, Wiley.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 711
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Design of Experiments Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ME 7 PCE PCE‐5 MEE‐417P
MAE 7 OAE‐MAE OAE‐1 MAO‐419P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Design of Experiments) as this is the
practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Installation and demonstration of MINITAB software

2. Installation and demonstration of DESIGN EXPERT software.
3. To determine whether a factor, or a collection of factors, has an effect on the response.
4. To determine whether factors interact in their effect on the response.
5. To model the behaviour of the response as a function of the factors.
6. To carry out the ANOVA on the experimental data.
7. To make a Mathematical model from experimental data.
8. To check the reliability of experimental data.
9. To perform the experimental design using Taguchi’s orthogonal arrays.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 712
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Design of Mechanical Assemblies L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ME 7 PCE PCE‐5 MEE‐421T
MAE 7 OAE‐MAE OAE‐1 MAO‐421T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To understand the working of a gear box used in automobiles and design entire assembly.
2. To conceptualise the assemblage design needs for entire parts involved in force, motion and power
transfer from fuel combustion in engine to wheels.
3. To study the whole assembly of governor and crane hooks.
4. To critically analyze the design procedure for double shoe brake assembly for hoisting mechanism.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Design analysis of power & torque transmission through gear box of an automobile causing speed
variations.
CO 2 Analyze the effect of transmissions in various mechanical drives of an internal combustion engine.
CO 3 Evaluate and justify the assemblage systems for speed control mechanisms and crane hooks.
CO 4 Justify the design needs for double shoe brake assembly for hoisting mechanism.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 3 3 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 1 1 2 3
CO 2 3 3 3 3 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 1 2 3
CO 3 3 3 3 3 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ 1 1 2 3
CO 4 3 3 3 2 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 1 2 3

UNIT‐I

Introduction: Need for Mechanical assemblies, part alignments, efficiency and reliability.
Gear box‐ geometric progression, standard step ratio; layout diagram of gears, Types of gear boxes ‐ sliding
mesh gear box, constant mesh gear box, Synchromesh gear box and Epicyclic gear box. Design of multi‐seed
gear box for machine tool applications; Detailed design of constant mesh gear box, speed reducer unit; Variable
speed gear box; Fluid couplings, Torque converters for automotive applications.

UNIT‐II

Engine part assembly design for an Internal Combustion engine: Separate design analysis of Piston,
Connecting rod, Crankshaft and Flywheel. Calorific value of fuel, brake power, mechanical efficiency. Design of
drive shafts, propeller shafts, entire drive transmission ratio, efficiency, power losses at various stages. Wheel

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 713
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

power, velocity ratio, vehicle velocity, air resistance, power calculations for entire automobile movement.
Design of Flywheel, Rim dimensions.

UNIT‐III

Mechanical Assemblage of Governors: Need of governor assembly, Types ‐ Watt, Porter, Proell, Hartnell,
Hartung, Pickering, spring controlled gravity e governors. Governor height, controlling force diagrams,
Equilibrium speed, effort & power of governor. Parts of governor assembly. Design of levers and springs.
Complete assembly design analysis of Hartnell Governor. Numerical Problems.
Assembly design of Crane Hooks: Bending stresses in curved structures, stresses in critical sections, Hook
design procedure. Complete assembly design of hook with side plates, cross‐piece, thrust bearing, standard
bolts selection. Numerical Problems.

UNIT ‐ IV

Double Shoe brake assembly for hoisting mechanism: Necessity for braking mechanism,Single and Double
shoe brake analysis, hoisting mechanism concept, Standard drum sizes, friction materials for braking
applications, heat dissipation characteristics, Bell crank lever design, design of closed coiled helical spring.
Detailed design procedure of double shoe brake assembly for hoisting mechanism including design of levers,
springs and side plates. Numerical Problems.

Textbook(s):
1. Maleeve Hartman and O.P.Grover, “Machine Design”, CBS Publishers& Distributors Pvt. Ltd. Sixth Ed
(2015).
2. Jindal U.C., “Machine Design: Design of Transmission System”, Dorling Kindersley, 2010.

References:
1. Mahadevan, “Design Data Book”, CBS Publishers & Distributors.
2. J.E. Shigley& C.R. Mischke, "Mechanical Engineering Design”, Tata McGraw Hill Co. Inc.
3. Shigley J.E. and Vicker J.J, Theory of Machines and Mechanisms, McGraw Hill, 1981.
4. P.C. Sharma and D.K Aggarwal., “Machine Design”, S.K. Kataria& Sons.
5. Juvinal R C, Marshek K M, “Fundamentals of Machine Component Design”, Wiley India.
6. Norton R. l. “Machine Design” Pearson.
7. Singh V.P., “Theory of Machines” Dhanpat Rai & Co.(Pvt.) Ltd. (2005).

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 714
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Design of Mechanical Assemblies Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ME 7 PCE PCE‐5 MEE‐421P
MAE 7 OAE‐MAE OAE‐1 MAO‐421P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Design of Mechanical Assemblies) as
this is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. To design a two stage gear reducer assembly (Differential) with input and output shafts on opposite sides
and at right angles to transmit a given propellor shaft power equally to two wheel axles.
2. To design a constant mesh gear box assembly for a heavy commercial vehicle, including complete design
parameters of all gears, shaft diameters and bearing selection.
3. To design a Piston, Cylinder and Connecting rod assembly for an Internal combustion engine from give
data.
4. To design a complete assembly of Hartnell governor including bell crank lever, spring design from given
data set.
5. To design a complete assembly for a hook of a crane for lifting/lowering given load along with the design of
side plates, cross‐piece, bolts and thrust bearings selection.
6. To design a double shoe brake for a hoisting mechanism using standard drum sizes and friction materials
and check for heat dissipation.
7. To design Hartnell Governor with complete assembly.
8. To design a closed coil helical spring.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 715
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Design of Mechanical Drives L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ME 7 PCE PCE‐5 MEE‐415T
MAE 7 OAE‐MAE OAE‐1 MAO‐423T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To understand relative application suitability of various flexible drives over medium distances i.e. belt
drives and chain drives.
2. To conceptualise the design needs for short distance non flexible toothed element drives for industrial
applications.
3. To study the means of transporting power over long distances through wire ropes.
4. To critically analyze the design procedure for cams, brakes & clutches.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Design analysis of transmission drives through flexible machine elements over medium distances.
CO 2 Analyze the effect of changing speeds on varied power transmission mechanical drives with toothed
elements over short distance between shafts.
CO 3 Evaluate, Design, select and suitably justify systems for transmission at long distances.
CO 4 Justify the design needs for power drives through Cams and mechanisms for stoppage,
engagement/disengagement of parts with relative motion in vehicles.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 3 3 3 ‐ ‐ 1 1 1 2 3
CO 2 3 3 2 3 2 1 ‐ ‐ 2 1 2 3
CO 3 3 3 2 3 1 ‐ 1 ‐ 1 1 2 3
CO 4 3 3 3 3 3 1 ‐ 1 2 1 2 3

UNIT‐I

Mechanical Drives: Introduction, need of transmission, Classification of various mechanical drives,

Comparative analysis and Choice of transmission drives based on centre distance, velocity, velocity ratio,
efficiency, weight, cost.
Flexible Drives for medium distances: Design of Flat belt drives and pulleys, Belt constructions, open & crossed
belts, belt lengths, belt materials, belt tensions, belt stresses in one revolution, Flat belt selection from
manufacturer’s catalogue, Pulley crowning. Numerical belt drive design problems
Design and selection of A‐E Type V‐belt drives from manufacturer’s catalogue based on power ratings and
calculation if number of belts.
Chain drives: Need for chain drives, roller chains, Polygonal effect, Power ratings, sprocket wheels, silent or

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 716
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

inverted chains, design procedure for roller chain drives.

.
UNIT‐II

Short distance non flexible geared drives: Introduction, Classification of gears based on centre distances,
position and alignment of shaft axes, efficiency, characteristics, Materials, Theory of gearing and forces on
gears.
Design of industrial gear drives:
Spur gears: Design based on tooth strength Lewis equation, Dynamic & Wear loads, gear tooth failures.
Design of Helical Gears based on modified Lewis Equation. Virtual teeth, herringbone gears, Dynamic and wear
loads. Use in gearbox.
Design of Bevel Gears. Terminology and force analysis, Dynamic and wear loads. Spiral bevel gears.
Design of Worm & Worm Wheel Gears, Efficiency, Worm gear‐ merits & demerits, Thermal considerations for
checking for heat dissipation suitability, estimating the size of worm gear pair.

UNIT‐III

Large distance transmission drives: Introduction to hoisting machinery.

Wire ropes: Classification &Types, regular lay and lang lay wire ropes, Industrial applications of wire ropes,
stresses in hoisting rope, Design procedure of Wire Ropes, designation of wire ropes, rope sheaves and drums,
Numerical problems.
Design of Crane Hooks. Stresses at critical sections. Bending stresses in curved beams of circular, triangular,
trapezoidal sections. Numerical problems.

UNIT ‐ IV

Cam design: types, pressure angle and undercutting base circle determination, forces and surface stresses.
Clutches: Design of plate clutches, axial clutches, cone clutches, Centrifugal clutches, Use in automobiles.
Brakes: Band and Block brakes, external shoe brakes, internal expanding shoe brake.

Textbook(s):
1. V.B. Bhandari, “Design of Machine elements”, Tata McGraw Hill Education Private Ltd. Third Edition (2012).
2. Jindal U.C., “Machine Design: Design of Transmission System”, Dorling Kindersley, 2010.

References:
1. Mahadevan, “Design Data Book”, CBS Publishers & Distributors .
2. J.E. Shigley& C.R. Mischke, "Mechanical Engineering Design”, Tata McGraw Hill Co. Inc.
3. Shigley J.E. and Vicker J.J, Theory of Machines and Mechanisms, McGraw Hill, 1981.
4. P.C. Sharma and D.K Aggarwal., “Machine Design”, S.K. Kataria& Sons.
5. Juvinal R C, Marshek K M, “Fundamentals of Machine component Design”, Wiley India.
6. Maleeve Hartman and O.P.Grover, “Machine Design”, CBS Publishers& Distributors Pvt. Ltd. Sixth Ed
(2015).

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 717
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Design of Mechanical Drives Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ME 7 PCE PCE‐5 MEE‐415P
MAE 7 OAE‐MAE OAE‐1 MAO‐423P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Design of Mechanical Drives) as this is
the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. To design a suitable Flat belt or V‐belt drive for given power transmission, speeds and velocity ratio. Other
necessary data may be suitably selected from Design Data Handbook.
2. To design and select a suitable Chain drive for given power transmission, speeds, velocity ratio, center
distance and service conditions using Design Data Handbook and manufacturer’s catalogue.
3. To design a worm gear drive for transmitting a power from worm wheel to worm gear, selecting suitable
materials from handbook. Also find efficiency and check heat dissipation capacity of the drive.
4. To design a gear box for a heavy commercial vehicle ‐ Selection of type of gearbox and calculation of no. of
teeth, PCDs, module, center distances of all gears and gear ratios within ±2% error.
5. Identification and design of a most heavily stressed gear and selection of material for all gears and shafts of
the same gear box.
6. To find the diameters of input, output & countershaft as per ASTM recommendations, finding support
reactions and selecting suitable bearings using catalogues.
7. To design a wire rope for a lift to be used for lifting a given load in a building over given height.
8. To design a hook of a crane for hoisting a given load along with side plates, Centre plates, bolts and thrust
bearings selection.
9. To design a double shoe brake for a hoisting mechanism using standard drum sizes and friction materials
and check for heat dissipation.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 718
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Design of Sensors and Transducers L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ICE 7 PCE PCE‐5 ICE‐415T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To introduce thermal, mechanical sensors
2. To introduce signal conditioning devices required for sensors
3. To introduce design of instrumentation amplifier
4. To introduce design of signal conditioning circuit of thermal sensors
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Ability to understand operating principle of different sensors
CO 2 Ability to apply analog and digital signal conditioning techniques
CO 3 Ability to analyze signal conditioning devices
CO 4 Ability to design signal conditioning circuit
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 2 2 ‐ ‐ 3
CO 2 3 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 2 2 ‐ ‐ 3
CO 3 3 3 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 2 2 ‐ ‐ 3
CO 4 3 2 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 3 3 ‐ ‐ 3

UNIT I

Thermal and Electrical Sensors: Thermistors, Thermocouples, Semiconductor Resistance versus Temperature,
Design of temperature indicator using IC sensors, Hall effect sensor, CT, PT, Practical designing of a capacitor
measurement circuit, Ratio transformer technique, Differential capacitor measurement.

UNIT II

Mechanical Sensors: Pressure sensors‐ differential pressure transmitter, Flow sensors ‐ Head type flow meters,
Variable area type, Turbine, Electromagnetic, Ultrasonic, Displacement ‐ LVDT, Practical design of 4‐20 mA
current transmitter for resistance sensors and LVDT sensor, Level Sensor‐ Ultrasonic, Capacitive, Radioactive
type, laser type transducers and their calibration.

UNIT III

Sensor signal conditioning devices: Basics of instrumentation amplifiers, use of instrumentation amplifiers in

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 719
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

measurement, design of instrumentation amplifier, Errors due to resistance drift, effects of Op amp offset
voltage drift, offset current drift. Error budgeting, Design of signal conditioning circuit: Thermocouple, RTD,
Thermistor, load cell, potentiometric sensors, capacitive level sensor, LVDT, optical sensors (LDR, photodiode,
photo transistor, photocell)

UNIT IV

Design of Instrumentation amplifier and design of signal conditioning circuit: Introduction, signal level and
bias changes, linearization, conversion, filtering and impedance matching, concept of loading, divider circuits,
bridge circuits, lead compensation, excitation techniques (constant power, current, bridge), filters(low pass,
high pass), Boolean algebra, converters (comparators, DAC, ADC), Readout/meter.

Textbooks:
1. D.Patranabis,”Principle of Industrial Instrumentation” Tata McGraw Hill.
2. B.C Nakra and K.K Choudhari, “Instrumentation Measurements and Analysis”, Tata McGraw Hill Education

References:
1. D.V.S. Murty, “Instrumentation & Measurement principles”, PHI New Delhi
2. E.O. Doebelin,”Measurement Systems”, McGraw Hill.
3. B.G. Liptak, “Process Measurement & Analysis”, chilton book company
4. Andrew parr, “Industrial control handbook”, 3rd ed. Newnes Industrial press.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 720
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Design of Sensors and Transducers Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ICE 7 PCE PCE‐5 ICE‐415P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Design of Sensors and Transducers) as
this is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Calibration of Rotameter
2. Measurement of flow using DP cell
3. Level measurement using capacitive/resistive method.
4. Measurement of viscocity and density.
5. Deign and implementation of temperature indicator using thermocouple with cold junction temperature
technique.
6. Design and implementation of temperature indicator using RTD.
7. Design and implementation of signal conditioning circuit for weighing machine using load cell
8. Design and implementation of signal conditioning circuit for liquid level indicator using electromechanical
system.
9. Design and implementation of digital control logic for process using electronic hardware/software.
10. Design and implementation of through beam/reflected beam type optical proximity sensors.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 721
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Design of Smart Systems L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CSE‐IoT 7 PC PC IOT‐443T
EAE 7 IOT‐EAE IOT‐EAE‐4 IOT‐443T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To make students understand the concept the design of smart systems.
2. To make students aware of CPS systems, Pervasive Computing
3. To make students understand the concepts of distributed systems, sensors, NFCs, RFID etc
4. To explain the ethical considerations while developing the smart systems
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Able to describe the importance of smart systems.
CO 2 Able to conceptualize real world situations to develop the smart systems.
CO 3 Able to understand the underlying architectures of smart systems
CO 4 Interpret and explain the impact of smart systems , ethical, legal, social and environmental
implications
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 2 3 2 1 ‐ ‐ 2 2 ‐ 1 ‐ ‐
CO 2 2 3 ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐
CO 3 3 2 2 2 ‐ ‐ 2 1 ‐ 2 ‐ ‐
CO 4 2 2 3 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐

UNIT‐I

Introduction to Smart Systems: Smart Systems and System Environment, Components of Smart Systems,
Applications, and challenges of Smart Systems. Advantages and disadvantages of smart systems, models of
smart systems, Augmented Intelligent Smart Systems, Product Service Systems, Explain IoT in developing smart
systems.

UNIT‐II

Smartness and Pervasive Computing: Pervasive computing, Problems and applications of Pervasive computing.
Infrastructure of pervasive computing – UbiCloud , Sensors , Distributed Networks/Systems, mobile computing
, Cloud computing, Methods and tools for developing smart systems, NFCs, RFID and their purpose, Blockchain,
AI and machine learning and its use in developing smart systems, Integration of Big Data with Smart Systems.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 722
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT‐III

Cyber Physical Systems and Security of Smart Systems: CPS, Architecture, Applications, and classification of
CPS, Operational and Information Technology Security, differences, and purposes, uses and challenges, Cyber
Physical Systems risk management, purpose, security concerns and elements of CPS, Industry 4.0 concepts‐
Horizontal and vertical integration

UNIT ‐ IV

Applications: Smart homes, smart appliances, smart things, healthcare applications, smart spaces. Ethical,
sustainability and economic impacts, privacy, and security concerns. Application standard of implementing
smart systems. Metrics to measure the performance of Smart Systems and improvement

Textbook(s):
1. Handbook of Industry 4.0 and smart systems, D. Pascual, P.Daponate and A.Kumar
2. Big Data : Using SMART Big Data, Analytics and Metrics to Make Better Decisions and Improve
Performance, B.Marr

References:
1. Cyber Physical Systems security : Analysis , challenges and solutions
2. Framework for cyber Physical Systems : Vol1

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 723
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Design of Smart Systems Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CSE‐IoT 7 PC PC IOT‐443P
EAE 7 IOT‐EAE IOT‐EAE‐4 IOT‐443P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Design of Smart Systems) as this is the
practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

Equipments: Code Composer Studio Version 6, MSP430 based launch pads, Wi‐Fi booster pack.

1. Introduction to MSP430 launch pad and Programming Environment.

2. Read input from switch and Automatic control/flash LED (soft‐ware delay).

3. Interrupts programming example using GPIO.

4. Configure watchdog timer in watchdog mode & interval mode.

5. Configure timer block for signal generation (with given frequency)

6. Read Temperature of MSP430 with the help of ADC. 16

7. Test various Power Down modes in MSP430.

8. PWM Generator 23

9. Use Comparator to compare the signal threshold level 25

10. Speed Control of DC Motor 26

11. Master slave communication between MSPs using SPI 30

12. Networking MSPs using Wi

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 724
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Design Patterns L P C
3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CSE‐in‐EA 7 OAE‐CSE‐EA OAE‐2 OSD‐449T
OAE 7 SD‐OAE SD‐OAE‐4A OSD‐449T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. Understand the concept of Design patterns and its importance.
2. Understand the behavioral knowledge of the problem and solutions.
3. Relate the Creational, Structural , behavioral Design patterns.
4. Apply the suitable design patterns to refine the basic design for given context.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Identify the appropriate design patterns to solve object oriented design problems.
CO 2 Develop design solutions using creational patterns.
CO 3 Apply structural patterns to solve design problems.
CO 4 Construct design solutions by using behavioral patterns.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 2 2 2 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 2 2 3
CO 2 3 2 2 2 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 2 2 3
CO 3 3 2 2 2 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 2 2 3
CO 4 3 2 2 2 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 2 2 3

UNIT‐I

Introduction: What Is a Design Pattern?, Design Patterns in Smalltalk MVC, Describing Design Patterns, The
Catalog of Design Patterns, Organizing the Catalog, How Design Patterns Solve Design Problems, How to Select
a Design Pattern, How to Use a Design Pattern.

UNIT‐II

A Case Study: Designing a Document Editor: Design Problems, Document Structure, Formatting, Embellishing
the User Interface, Supporting Multiple Look‐and‐Feel Standards, Supporting Multiple Window Systems, User
Operations Spelling Checking and Hyphenation.

UNIT‐III

Creational Patterns: Abstract Factory, Builder, Factory Method, Prototype, Singleton.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 725
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Structural Patterns: Adapter, Bridge, Composite, Decorator, Façade, Flyweight, Proxy

UNIT ‐ IV

Behavioral Patterns: Chain of Responsibility, Command, Interpreter, Iterator, Mediator, Memento, Observer,
Strategy, Template Method, Visitor.
Conclusion: What to Expect from Design Patterns, The Pattern Community.

Textbook(s):
1. Design Patterns By Erich Gamma, Pearson Education
2. Design Patterns Explained By Alan Shalloway,Pearson Education..
3. Meta Patterns designed by Wolf gang , Pearson.

References:
1. Head First Design Patterns By Eric Freeman‐Oreilly‐spd
2. JAVA Enterprise Design Patterns Vol‐III By Mark Grand ,Wiley DreamTech.
3. Pattern‟s in JAVA Vol‐I By Mark Grand ,Wiley DreamTech.
4. Pattern‟s in JAVA Vol‐II By Mark Grand ,Wiley DreamTech.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 726
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Design Patterns Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CSE‐in‐EA 7 OAE‐CSE‐EA OAE‐2 OSD‐449P
OAE 7 SD‐OAE SD‐OAE‐4A OSD‐449P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Design Patterns) as this is the practical
component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. The Strategy pattern

2. The Observer Pattern
3. The Decorator Pattern
4. The Simple Factory Pattern
5. The Factory Methods
6. The Abstract Factory Patterns
7. The Singleton Pattern
8. The Command Pattern.
9. The Adapter and Facade Patterns.
10. The Template Method Pattern
11. The Iterator and Composite Patterns.
12. The State Pattern.
13. The Proxy Pattern.
14. Compound Patterns.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 727
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Digital Control System L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ICE 7 PCE PCE‐5 ICE‐421T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To understand the basic concept of Digital control system.
2. To apply the knowledge of control theory for discrete‐time models in various engineering applications
3. To do the stability analysis of discrete‐time system.
4. To design discrete‐time controllers for hybrid systems.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Ability to define, understand and explain the concept of Digital control system.
CO 2 Ability to apply the knowledge of control theory for discrete‐time models in various engineering
applications.
CO 3 Ability to analyze discrete time control systems with different methods of stability in Z domain.
CO 4 Ability to design discrete time controller using DSPs and Microcontrollers
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 ‐ 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 3
CO 2 3 2 ‐ 2 3 3 ‐ 3 3 ‐ ‐ 3
CO 3 3 3 ‐ 2 3 ‐ 2 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 3
CO 4 3 2 3 3 3 3 ‐ 3 3 3 ‐ 3

UNIT I

Introduction to Discrete Time Control Systems: Introduction, Digital control systems, Sampling Process and its
Mathematical Analysis, Quantization, Data Acquisition, Mathematical Description of the Ideal Sampling
Process‐The Ideal Sampler, Construction of Sampled Signals, Data Reconstruction by Polynomial Extrapolation,
Z‐Transforms, Important properties and theorems of the Z‐transform,Inverse Z‐Transformation, z transform
method for solving Difference Equations, The Limitations ofZ‐Transform Method, Modified z transform.

UNIT II

Z‐plane Analysis of Discrete‐Time control systems: Introduction, Impulse sampling and Data Hold circuits, Block
Diagram Analysis and Transfer Functions of Closed Loop Sampled Data Systems, Signal FlowGraphs of Sampled
Data Systems, The pulse transfer function, Pulse transfer function of a digital PID controller, Realization of
digital controllers and filters.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 728
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT III

Design of Discrete –Time control system by Conventional Methods: System characteristic equation, Time
response, Mapping S‐plane into Z‐plane, Steady state accuracy, Stability Techniques, Bi‐linear transformation,
Routh Hurwitz Criterion, Jury stability test, Root locus, Nyquist criterion, Bode diagram, interpretation of
frequency response, Closed loop frequency response, State‐Space Representations of Discrete‐time system,
Solving Discrete‐time State –space Equations, Pulse Transfer function matrix, Discretization of continuous‐ time
state–space equations

UNIT IV

Digital Controller Design: Introduction to controller design, Control system specification, Compensation,
Implementation of digital control systems using DSPs and Microcontrollers, Large‐scale industrial applications
usingPLCs and SCADA, Introduction to Discrete‐event systems and Hybrid Systems

Textbooks:
1. K. Ogata, “Discrete Time Control System”, Prentice Hall International.
2. B.C. Kuo, “Digital Control Systems”, Oxford, 2007

References:
1. Charles L.Phillips & H.Troy Nagle, “Digital Control system Analysis and Design” PHI
2. G. F. Franklin, J. D. Powell and M. L. Workman, Digital Control of Dynamic Systems, Pearson, 3rd Ed, 2000.
3. V.I. George, C.P. Kurian, “Digital Control Systems” Cenage Learning 2012.
4. M. Gopal, “Digital Control & Sate Variable Methods”, TMH
5. Kavita Singh, Rashmi Vashisth, “Digital Control Systems”, Galgotia Publications, 2013.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 729
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Digital Control System Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ICE 7 PCE PCE‐5 ICE‐421P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Digital Control System) as this is the
practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Obtain the inverse Z –transform of the following:

𝑋 𝑧 and 𝑓 𝑧

2. For the LTI systems described by the following difference equations generate its impulse response and unit
step response:
(a) Y n x n 2x n 1
(b) 𝑌 𝑛 0.9𝑦 𝑛 1 𝑥 𝑛 also find the analytical expression.
(c) 𝑌 𝑛 0.3695𝑦 𝑛 1 0.1958𝑦 𝑛 2 0.2066𝑥 𝑛 0.4131𝑥 𝑛 1 0.2066𝑥 𝑛 2
3. For the discrete‐time transfer function
0.25³ 0.6273z² 0.5153z 0.1367
𝐻 𝑧
Z³ 2.811z² 2.652z 0.8395
obtain the following
(a) Transfer function to polo‐zero conversion
(b) Draw the polo‐zero plot
(c) Polo‐zero to transfer function
(d) Find the partial fraction expression of the transfer function
(e) r, p, k to transfer function
(f) Root locus and stability analysis
4. Find the ZOH equivalent transfer function of . Obtained with the sampling period Ts=0.5sec.

5. Obtain the six different realizations of the pulse transfer function.

y z z 3
u z z 9z 24z 20

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 730
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

6. For the sampled data system shown in fig. below, find the response to step input.

7. Find the gain for stability.

8. Determine whether the system is observable and state controllable.

2 1 3 2
𝑥 0 2 1 𝑋 1 𝑢; 𝑦 4 6 8𝑥
7 8 9 2
9. Obtain bilinear transformation for
(a) 𝑧 1.3𝑧 0.08𝑧 0.24 0analyze the stability.
(b) Obtain the root locus and analyse the stability.
10. Find the pulse transfer function of the given continuous‐time system given below
𝐴 0 0; 1 0.1 ; [𝐵 0.1 0 ; 𝐶 0 1 ;𝐷 0 , For sampling time 𝑇 0.2 𝑠.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 731
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Digital Image Processing L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ECE 6 PCE PCE‐1 ECE‐308T
CSE‐in‐EA 6 OAE‐CSE‐EA OAE‐1 IPCV‐334T
EE‐VDT/EC‐ACT 6 OAE‐ECE‐EA OAE‐1 IPCV‐334T
EAE 6 IPCV‐EAE IPCV‐EAE‐1A IPCV‐334T
EE/EEE 7 PCE PCE‐4 EEE‐413T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To impart the basic knowledge of image fundamentals.
2. To impart the knowledge of simple image enhancement techniques in Spatial and Frequency domain.
3. To impart the knowledge of image compression and image segmentation techniques
4. To impart the knowledge of image representation and recognition techniques
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Understand the basics and fundamentals of digital image processing, such as digitization, sampling,
quantization, and basic neighbour operations.
CO 2 Understand the techniques of smoothing, sharpening and enhancement.
CO 3 Understand the concept of image compression and image segmentation techniques
CO 4 Explain basic concepts of image representation and recognition techniques.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 ‐ 2 1 ‐ 2
CO 2 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 ‐ 2 1 ‐ 2
CO 3 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 ‐ 2 1 ‐ 2
CO 4 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 ‐ 2 1 ‐ 2

UNIT I

Introduction and Digital Image Fundamentals: The origins of Digital Image Processing, Examples of Fields that
Use Digital Image Processing, Fundamentals Steps in Image Processing, Elements of Digital Image Processing
Systems, Image Sampling and Quantization, Some basic relationships like Neighbours, Connectivity, Distance
Measures between pixels, Linear and Non Linear Operations

UNIT II

Image Enhancement in the Spatial Domain: Some basic Gray Level Transformations, Histogram Processing,

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 732
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Enhancement Using Arithmetic and Logic operations, Basics of Spatial Filters, Smoothening and Sharpening
Spatial Filters, Combining Spatial Enhancement Methods.
Frequency Domain: Introduction to Fourier Transform– Smoothing and Sharpening frequency domain filters –
Ideal, Butterworth and Gaussian filters, Homomorphic filtering, Color image enhancement.

UNIT III

Image Compression: Coding, Interpixel and Psychovisual Redundancy, Image Compression models, Elements
of Information Theory, Error free comparison, Lossy compression, Image compression standards.
Image Segmentation: Detection of Discontinuities, Edge linking and boundary detection, Thresholding, Region
Oriented Segmentation, Motion basedsegmentation.

UNIT IV

Image Representation and Description: Representation, Boundary Descriptors, Regional Descriptors, Use of
Principal Components for Description, Introduction to Morphology, Some basic Morphological Algorithms.
Object Recognition: Patterns and Pattern Classes, Decision ‐ Theoretic Methods, Structural Methods.

Textbook(s):
1. Rafael C. Gonzalez, Richard E. Woods, ‗Digital Image Processing‘, Pearson, Third Edition, 2010.
2. Anil K. Jain, ‘Fundamentals of Digital Image Processing‘, Pearson, 2002.

References:
1. Bernd Jahne, “Digital Image Processing”, 5th Ed., Springer, 2002.
2. William K Pratt, “Digital Image Processing: Piks Inside”, John Wiley & Sons, 2001.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 733
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Digital Image Processing Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ECE 6 PCE PCE‐1 ECE‐308P
CSE‐in‐EA 6 OAE‐CSE‐EA OAE‐1 IPCV‐334P
EE‐VDT/EC‐ACT 6 OAE‐ECE‐EA OAE‐1 IPCV‐334P
EAE 6 IPCV‐EAE IPCV‐EAE‐1A IPCV‐334P
EE/EEE 7 PCE PCE‐4 EEE‐413P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Digital Image Processing) as this is the
practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Write Program to read any image, resize it to 256 × 256. Apply a square mask so that only middle part of
the image is visible.
2. Contrast stretching of a low contrast image, Histogram, and Histogram Equalization.
3. Write and execute program for geometric transformation of image (a) Translation (b) Scaling (c) Rotation
(d) Shrinking (e) Zooming
4. Prepare any two images of size 256 × 256 in paint. Save it in JPEG format 256 gray levels. Perform logical
NOR, NAND operations between two images. Write program and paste your results
5. To Implement smoothing or averaging filter in spatial domain
6. Program of sharpen image using gradient mask.
7. To implement sharpening in frequency domain using High pass filtering
8. Program for DCT/IDCT computation
9. To add salt and pepper noise in the image and apply image restoration technique using Wiener filter and
median filter
10. Write and execute programs for image frequency domain filtering (a) Apply FFT on given image (b) Perform
low pass and high pass filtering in frequency domain (c) Apply IFFT to reconstruct image
11. Edge Detection using Sobel, Prewitt and Roberts Operators
12. To create a program to eliminate the high frequency components of an image
13. Write a program for image compression
14. To fill the region of interest for the image
15. Morphological Operations on Binary Images: erosion and dilation

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 734
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Digital Logic and Computer Design L P C

4 4

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CSE/IT/CST/ITE/ECE 3 PC PC ECC‐207
OAE 6 CSE‐OAE CSE‐OAE‐1B OCSE‐308
OAE 7 ECE‐OAE ECE‐OAE‐3A OECE‐415

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To introduce basic concepts of Boolean Algebra and Combinational Logic
2. To introduce various sequential circuits, designing with examples
3. To relate combination circuit design and sequential circuit design with respect to the design of a
computer system
4. To introduce machine learning, computer arithmetic, modes of data transfer with respect to I/O and
Memory organization of a computer
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Ability to understand Boolean Algebra and Design Combinational Circuit.
CO 2 Ability to understand and Design Sequential Circuits.
CO 3 Ability to understand Design of a basic computer.
CO 4 Ability to understand Input‐Output and Memory Organization of a Computer.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 2 3 2 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 2 2 3
CO 2 3 2 3 2 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 2 2 3
CO 3 3 2 3 3 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 2 2 3
CO 4 3 3 3 3 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 2 2 3

UNIT – I

Boolean Algebra and Combinational Logic: Review of number systems , signed, unsigned, fixed point, floating
point numbers, Binary Codes, Boolean algebra – basic postulates, theorems , Simplification of Boolean
function using Karnaugh map and Quine‐McCluskey method – Implementations of combinational logic
functions using gates, Adders, Subtractors, Magnitude comparator, encoder and decoders, multiplexers, code
converters , parity generator/checker, implementation of combinational circuits using multiplexers.

UNIT – II

Sequential Circuits: General model of sequential circuits, Flip‐flops, latches , level triggering, edge triggering,

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 735
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

master slave configuration , concept of state diagram , state table, state reduction procedures , Design of
synchronous sequential circuits , up/down and modulus counters , shift registers, Ring counter , Johnson
counter , timing diagram , serial adder , sequence detector, Programmable Logic Array (PLA), Programmable
Array Logic (PAL), Memory Unit, Random Access Memory

UNIT – III

Basic Computer organization: Stored Program, Organization, Computer registers, bus system, instruction set
completeness, instruction cycle, Register Transfer Language, Arithmetic, Logic and Shift Micro‐operations,
Instruction Codes, Design of a simple computer, Design of Arithmetic Logic unit, shifter, Design of a simple
hardwired control unit, Programming the basic computer, Machine language instructions, assembly language,
Microprogrammed control, Horizontal and Vertical Microprogramming, Central Processing Unit, instruction
sets and formats, addressing modes, data paths, RISC and CISC characteristics.

UNIT – IV

Computer Arithmetic, addition, subtraction, multiplication and division algorithms, Input‐Output Organization,
Modes of data transfer, Interrupt cycle, direct memory access, Input‐Output processor, Memory Organization,
Memory Hierarchy, Associative Memory, Cache Memory, Internal and external Memory, Virtual Memory.

Text Book(s)
1. M. Morris Mano, “Digital Logic and Computer Design”, Pearson Education, 2016
2. M. Morris Mano, Rajib Mall “Computer System Architecture”, 3rd Edition Pearson Education, 2017

References:
1. Leach, D. P., Albert P. Malvino, “Digital Principles and Applications”, McGraw Hill, 8th Edition , 2014
2. Jain, R.P. ,”Modern Digital Electronics”, McGraw Hill Education, 4th Edition , 2010
3. Floyd, Thomas L. , “Digital Fundamentals” Pearson Education, 11th Edition, 2017
4. M. Rafiquzzaman, “Fundamentals of Digital Logic and Microcomputer Design”, Wiley, 5th Ed., 2005.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 736
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Digital Signal and Image Processing L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 6 IPCV‐EAE IPCV‐EAE‐1B IPCV‐356T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To impart the concept of DT Signal and DT Systems along with Classifying and analysing discrete‐time
signals and systems.
2. To impart the Digital Signal Transform techniques DFT and FFT
3. To impart the basics of image processing and Representation of Digital Image
4. To impart the knowledge to Use the enhancement techniques for digital Image Processing
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 To understand the basicconcept of DT Signal and DT Systems along with Classifying and analysing
discrete‐time signals and systems.
CO 2 To Acquire a clear idea of Digital Signal Transform techniques DFT and FFT
CO 3 To understand the basics of image processing and Representation of Digital Image.
CO 4 To understand the Use of the enhancement techniques for Digital Image Processing
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 ‐ 2 1 ‐ 2
CO 2 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 ‐ 2 1 ‐ 2
CO 3 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 ‐ 2 1 ‐ 2
CO 4 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 ‐ 2 1 ‐ 2

UNIT I

Review of Discrete Time Fourier Transform, Z‐ transform and Discrete Fourier Transform, Properties of the DFT:
Periodicity, Linearity and Symmetry properties, Multiplication of two DFTs, concept of circular convolution,
computation of circular convolution by graphical and matrix form, relationship between linear convolution and
circular convolution, computation of linear convolution from circular convolution, , linear filtering using DFT,
aliasing error, filtering of long data sequences – Overlap‐Save and Overlap‐Add methods
Efficient computation of the DFT: Complexity analysis of direct computation of DFT, Concept of Fast Fourier
transformation, Radix‐2 computation of FFT using decimation‐in‐time and decimation‐in‐frequency algorithms,
signal flow graphs, Butterflies, computations of FFT in one place using both algorithms, bit‐reversal process,
examples for DIT & DIF FFT Butterfly computations.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 737
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT II

Design & structure of FIR filters: Basic concepts of IIR and FIR filters, Gibbs Phenomenon, Design of Linear‐
phase FIR filters using windows‐ Rectangular, Hamming, Hanning, Bartlett windows, Design of FIR filters using
frequency sampling method. Structure for FIR Systems: Direct form, Cascade form and Lattice structures.
Design & Structure of IIR filters: Concept of IIR digital filter, analog to digital domain transformation, procedure
to design Butterworth and Chebyshev digital IIR filters. Direct, Cascade, Parallel , Signal Flow graph and
transposed structure, Lattice structures, Lattice and Lattice‐Ladder Structures, Schur ‐ Cohn stability Test for IIR
filters.

UNIT III

Digital Image Fundamentals‐Introduction to Digital Image, Digital Image Processing System, Sampling and
Quantization. Representation of Digital Image, Connectivity. Image File Formats: BMP, TIFF and JPEG.
Image Enhancement in Spatial domain‐Gray Level Transformations, Zero Memory Point Operations, Histogram
Processing and Histogram equalization, Neighbourhood Processing, Spatial Filtering, Smoothing and Sharpening
Filters, Median Filter.

UNIT IV

Image Compression: Coding, Interpixel and Psychovisual Redundancy, Image Compression models, Elements
of Information Theory, Error free comparison, Lossy compression, Image compression standards.
Image Segmentation: Detection of Discontinuities, Edge linking and boundary detection, Thresholding, Region
Oriented Segmentation, Motion basedsegmentation.

Textbook(s):
1. John G. Proakis, Dimitris and G.Manolakis, Digital Signal Processing: Principles, Algorithms, and
Applications 4th Edition 2007, Pearson Education.
2. Rafel C. Gonzalez and Richard E. Woods, Digital Image Processing, Pearson Education Asia, 3rd Ed, 2009,
3. Oppenheim & Schafer, Digital Signal Processing, PHI‐latest edition

Reference Books:
1. R.Babu ,Digital Signal Processing , Scitech Publication
2. S. K. Mitra, Digital Signal Processing, TMH edition 2006
3. Bernd Jahne, “Digital Image Processing”, 5th Ed., Springer,2002.
4. William K Pratt, “Digital Image Processing: Piks Inside”, John Wiley & Sons, 2001.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 738
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Digital Signal and Image Processing Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 6 IPCV‐EAE IPCV‐EAE‐1B IPCV‐356P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Digital Signal and Image Processing) as
this is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Generation of basic signals sine, cosine, ramp, step, impulse and exponential in continuous and discrete
domains using user‐defined functions.
2. Write a MATLAB program to find convolution (linear/circular) and correlation of two discrete signals.
3. Perform linear convolution using circular convolution and vice versa.
4. Write a MATLAB program to
5. Find 8‐point DFT, its magnitude and phase plot and inverse DFT.
6. Find 16‐point DFT, its magnitude and phase plot and inverse DFT.
7. Perform the following properties of DFT: a. Circular shift of a sequence b. Circular fold of a sequence.
8. Write Program to read any image, resize it to 256 × 256. Apply a square mask so that only middle part of
the image is visible.
9. Contrast stretching of a low contrast image, Histogram, and Histogram Equalization.
10. Write and execute program for geometric transformation of image (a) Translation (b) Scaling (c) Rotation
(d) Shrinking (e) Zooming
11. Prepare any two images of size 256 × 256 in paint. Save it in JPEG format 256 gray levels. Perform logical
NOR, NAND operations between two images. Write program and paste your results
12. To Implement smoothing or averaging filter in spatial domain

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 739
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Digital Signal Processing L P C

4 4

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ECE/ICE/EE‐VDT/EC‐ACT 5 PC PC ECC‐303

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To impart the basic knowledge of DFT, its properties, FFT and its applications.
2. To impart the knowledge of designing and realization of FIR filters.
3. To impart the knowledge of designing and realization of IIR filters.
4. To impart the knowledge of quantization errors in Digital Signal Processing and the concept of
Multirate signal processing.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 To understand the basic concept of DFT and FFT.
CO 2 To Acquire a clear idea of FIR filter designing techniques and realization methods.
CO 3 To understand the IIR filter designing techniques and realization methods and the stability.
CO 4 To understand the quantization errors in Digital Signal Processing and the concept of Multirate signal
processing.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 ‐ 2 1 ‐ 2
CO 2 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 ‐ 2 1 ‐ 2
CO 3 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 ‐ 2 1 ‐ 2
CO 4 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 ‐ 2 1 ‐ 2

UNIT I

Review of Discrete Time Fourier Transform, Z‐ transform and Discrete Fourier Transform, Properties of the DFT:
Periodicity, Linearity and Symmetry properties, Multiplication of two DFTs, concept of circular convolution,
computation of circular convolution by graphical and matrix form, relationship between linear convolution and
circular convolution, computation of linear convolution from circular convolution, , linear filtering using DFT,
aliasing error, filtering of long data sequences – Overlap‐Save and Overlap‐Add methods
Efficient computation of the DFT: Complexity analysis of direct computation of DFT, Concept of Fast Fourier
transformation, Radix‐2 computation of FFT using decimation‐in‐time and decimation‐in‐frequency algorithms,
signal flow graphs, Butterflies, computations of FFT in one place using both algorithms, bit‐reversal process,
examples for DIT & DIF FFT Butterfly computations

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 740
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT II

Design & structure of FIR filters: Characteristics of practical frequency‐selective filters, Basic concepts of IIR
and FIR filters, Gibbs Phenomenon, Symmetric and Anti‐symmetric FIR filters, Design of Linear‐phase FIR filters
using windows‐ Rectangular, Hamming, Hanning, Bartlett windows, FIR differentiator, FIR Hilbert Transformer.
Design of FIR filters using frequency sampling method. Structure for FIR Systems: Direct form, Cascade form
and Lattice structures.

UNIT III

Design & Structure of IIR filters: Concept of IIR digital filter, recursive and non‐recursive system analog to
digital domain transformation‐ Approximation of derivatives ,impulse invariant method and bilinear
transformation and their properties, limitations of bilinear transformation, frequency warping and prewarping,
methods to find out the order of IIR filter, mapping of poles and zeroes of filter in analog domain, computation
of filter transfer function in analog domain, digital filter realization techniques, procedure to design
Butterworth and Chebyshev digital IIR filters. Direct, Cascade, Parallel , Signal Flow graph and transposed
structure, Lattice structures, Lattice and Lattice‐Ladder Structures, Schur ‐ Cohn stability Test for IIR filters

UNIT IV

Quantization Errors in Digital Signal Processing: Fixed point and floating point representation of numbers,
Errors resulting from Rounding and Truncation, Digital Quantization of filter coefficients, Round‐off effects in
digital filters, Dead Band Effects.
Multirate Digital Signal Processing: Decimation, Interpolation, Sampling rate conversion by a rational factor;
Frequency domain characterization of Interpolator and Decimator; Polyphase decomposition, Applications of
Multirate signal processing.

Textbook(s):
1. Oppenheim & Schafer, Digital Signal Processing, PHI‐latest edition.
2. Proakis and Manolakis, Digital Signal Processing, PHI Publication

Reference Books:
1. S. K. Mitra, Digital Signal Processing, TMH edition2006
2. Johny. R. Johnson, Introduction to Digital Signal Processing, PHI, Latest edition
3. R.Babu, Digital Signal Processing, Scitech Publication.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 741
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Digital Signal Processing Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ECE/ICE/EE‐VDT/EC‐ACT 5 PC PC ECC‐351

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Digital Signal Processing) as this is the
practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Write Program to compute N point DFT of a given sequence and to plot magnitude and phase spectrum.
2. To implement Parseval theorem of DFT
3. To implement Time shifting and time reversal property of DFT
4. To find linear convolution of two given sequences.
5. To find circular convolution of two given sequences
6. To perform linear convolution from circular convolution and vice versa
7. To design LP FIR filter using windowing techniques
8. To design HP FIR filter using windowing techniques
9. To design LP IIR Butterworth filter for given specifications
10. To design LP IIR Chebyshev type‐1 filter for given specifications
11. To verify the decimation of a given sequence
12. To verify the interpolation of a given sequence

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 742
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Digital Systems Design L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EEE 6 PCE PCE‐3 EEE‐338T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To learn the basics of VHDL hardware
2. To apply combinational logic circuits using VHDL
3. To apply synchronous circuit using VHDL
4. To apply asynchronous circuit using VHDL
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Understand the VHDL as a programming language
CO 2 Design combination logic circuit using VHDL
CO 3 Design sequential synchronous circuit using VHDL
CO 4 Design asynchronous circuit using VHDL
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 2 1 1 ‐ ‐ 2 3 ‐ 3 1
CO 2 1 2 2 2 ‐ 3 ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐
CO 3 2 1 3 1 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐
CO 4 1 1 2 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐

UNIT I

Introduction to VHDL, design units, data objects, signal drivers, inertial and transport delays, delta delay, VHDL
data types, concurrent and sequential statements. Subprograms – Functions, Procedures, attributes, generio,
generate, package, IEEE standard logic library, file I/O, test bench, component declaration, instantiation,
configuration.

UNIT II

Combinational logic circuit design and VHDL implementation of following circuits –first adder, Subtractor,
decoder, encoder, multiplexer, ALU, barrel shifter, 4X4 key board encoder, multiplier, divider, Hamming code
encoder and correction circuits.

UNIT III

Synchronous sequential circuits design – finite state machines, Mealy and Moore, state assignments, design

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 743
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

and VHDL implementation of FSMs, Linear feedback shift register (Pseudorandom and CRC).

UNIT IV

Asynchronous sequential circuit design – primitive flow table, concept of race, critical race and hazards, design
issues like metastability, synchronizers, clock skew and timing considerations
Introduction to place & route process, Introduction to ROM, PLA, PAL, Architecture of CPLD (Xilinx/Altera).

Text Books:
1. Douglas Perry ,”VHDL” 4th Edition, TMH
2. Stephen Brown, Zvonko Vranesic, “Fundamentals of Digital Logic with VHDL design”, TMH.

Reference Books:
1. Charles. H.Roth ,“Digital System Design using VHDL”, PWS (1998)
2. John F. Wakerley ,“Digital Design Principles And Practices” ,Pearson Education
3. Navabi Z , “VHDL‐Analysis & Modelling of Digital Systems”,McGraw Hill.
4. William I. Fletcher, “An Engineering Approach To Digital Design”, Prentice Hall
5. Bhasker, “A VHDL Primer”, Prentice Hall 1995.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 744
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Digital Systems Design Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EEE 6 PCE PCE‐3 EEE‐338P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Digital Systems Design) as this is the
practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Design all gates using VHDL.

2. Write VHDL programs for the following circuits, check the wave forms and the hardware generated
i) half adder
ii) full adder
3. Write VHDL programs for the following circuits, check the wave forms and the hardware generated
i) multiplexer
ii) demultiplexer
4. Write VHDL programs for the following circuits, check the wave forms and the hardware generated
i) decoder
ii) encoder
5. Write a VHDL program for a comparator and check the wave forms and the hardware generated
6. Write a VHDL program for a code converter and check the wave forms and the hardware generated
7. Write a VHDL program for a FLIP‐FLOP and check the wave forms and the hardware generated
8. Write a VHDL program for a counter and check the wave forms and the hardware generated
9. Write VHDL programs for the following circuits, check the wave forms and the hardware generated
i) ALU
ii) shift register
10. Write a VHDL program for a seven segment display interface and check the waveforms and the hardware
generated.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 745
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Disaster Management L P C
4 4

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CE 6 PCE PCE‐3 CEE‐322

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To provide a general concept in the dimensions of disasters caused by nature beyond the human
control
2. To familiarize the student about the disasters and environmental hazards induced by human activities
3. To aware about disaster preparedness, response and recovery.
4. To know about the latest technology in mitigation of disasters
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Understand the knowledge of the significance of disaster management,
CO 2 Analyse the occurrences, reasons and mechanism of various types of disaster
CO 3 Understand the preventive measures as Civil Engineer with latest codal provisions
CO 4 Apply the latest technology in mitigation of disasters
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 1 1 2 2 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐
CO 2 3 3 1 2 1 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐
CO 3 2 2 3 2 2 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐
CO 4 2 2 3 1 1 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐

UNIT‐I

Introduction: Disaster, Emergency, Hazard, Mitigation, Disaster Prevention,

Geological based disasters: Earthquake, Tsunamis, Landslides and avalanches: Definition, causes and structure;
past lesson learnt and measures taken; their Characteristic features, Impact and prevention, Atlas (BMTRPC);
structural and non‐structural measures.
Man‐made Disaster: Fire, Industrial Pollution, Nuclear Disaster, Biological Disasters, Accidents (Air, Sea, Rail &
Road), Structural failures (Building and Bridge), War & Terrorism etc. Causes, effects and practical examples for
all disasters.

UNIT‐II

Hydro‐meteorological based disasters: Disaster Management Act 2005, Role of NDMA, NDRF, NIDM, Tropical
Cyclones, Floods, droughts, mechanism, causes, role of Indian Meteorological Department, Central Water

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 746
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Commission, structure and their impacts, classifications, vulnerability. Desertification Zones, causes and
impacts of desertification, Characteristics, Vulnerability to India and Step to combat desertification, Forest
Fires; Causes of Forest Fires; Impact of Forest Fires, Prevention.

UNIT‐III

Disaster Preparedness and Response Preparedness: Disaster Preparedness: Concept and Nature, Disaster
Preparedness Plan, Prediction, Early Warnings and Safety Measures of Disaster, Role of Information, Education,
Communication, and Training, Role of Government, International and NGO Bodies, Role of IT in Disaster
Preparedness, Role of Engineers on Disaster Management
Response: Introduction to Disaster Response, Response Plan, Communication, Participation, and Activation of
Emergency Preparedness Plan, Search, Rescue, Evacuation and Logistic Management, Role of Government,
International and NGO Bodies.

UNIT – IV

Rehabilitation, Reconstruction and Recovery: Reconstruction and Rehabilitation as a Means of Development,

Damage Assessment, Post Disaster effects and Remedial Measures, Creation of Long‐term Job Opportunities
and Livelihood Options, Disaster Resistant House Construction, Sanitation and Hygiene, Education and
Awareness, Dealing with Victims’ Psychology, Long‐term Counter Disaster Planning, Role of Educational
Institute

Textbook(s):
1. J. P. Singhal Disaster Management Laxmi Publications
2. Dr. Mrinalini Pandey Disaster Management Wiley India Pvt. Ltd.

References:
1. Savindra Singh and Jeetendra Singh, Disaster Management, Pravalika Publications, Allahabad
2. Nidhi GaubaDhawan and Ambrina Sardar Khan, Disaster Management and Preparedness, CBS
Publishers & Distribution
3. Selected Resources Published by the National Disaster Management Institute of Home Affairs, Govt. of
India, New Delhi.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 747
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Discrete Control Systems L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EE/EEE 6 PCE PCE‐2 EEE‐326T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. Acquire working knowledge of discrete system science related mathematics
2. Use of techniques, tools and skills to identify, formulate and solve discrete control problems
3. Design of discrete control systems and implementation of different techniques to analyse response
4. Develop designs skills using state space model, design Lyapunov criterion and pole placement
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Understand the concept of discrete system and apply of z transform for its representation
CO 2 Realization of digital controller and digital filters
CO 3 Analyse stability in discrete time using z transform and Pulse transform
CO 4 Stability and performance analysis of discrete control systems
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
CO 2 3 3 3 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 2
CO 3 3 3 3 2 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 3
CO 4 3 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 3

UNIT I

Introduction to Discrete Time Control Systems: Digital control Systems, Quantizing and Quantization errors,
data acquisition, conversion and distribution systems.
The Z Transform‐Z transforms of elementary functions, Properties and theorems of z transform, Inverse Z
transform, z transform for solving difference equations.

UNIT II

Z plane Analysis of Discrete Time Control Systems: Impulse sampling and data hold, Obtaining Z transform by
convolution Integral method, Reconstructing original signals from sampled signals, Pulse transfer function,
Realization of digital controllers and digital filters.

UNIT III

Design of Discrete‐ Time Control Systems by Conventional Methods : Mapping between the s plane and the Z

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 748
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

plane, stability analysis of closed loop systems in z plane, transient and steady state response analysis, design
based on root locus and frequency response methods.

UNIT IV

State Space Analysis: State space representations of Discrete time systems, Pulse transfer function matrix,
Discretrization of continous time state space equations, Liapunov stability analysis. Pole Placement and
Obseverer Design: Controllabity, Observability, Design via pole placement.

Textbooks:
1. Discrete ‐ Time Control Systems by Katsuhiko Ogata, PHI, 2nd Ed, 2005

References:
1. Advanced Discrete Time control: Designs and Applications by J X Xu & K. Abidi, Springer
2. Discrete Time Control system design with Applications by CA Rabbath and Nelecheiva, Springer

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 749
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Discrete Control Systems Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EE/EEE 6 PCE PCE‐2 EEE‐326P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Discrete Control Systems) as this is the
practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Study of open loop and closed loop time/ frequency responses of first/second order LTI system
2. Conversion of transfer functions to state model of LTI system and vice versa
3. Determine State Space Model of a given system and determine its controllability and observability.
4. Analysis of Zero order hold and first order hold circuits.
5. Conversion of transfer functions to state model of discrete time system.
6. To determine state transition matrix of a given system.
7. Study of saturation and dead zone non‐linearity using describing function technique of a relay control
system.
8. To draw phase trajectory of a given non‐linear system.
9. Experiments based on PLC applications e.g. Lift control models, pick and place module etc.
10. Study of operation of a stepper motor interface with microprocessor.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 750
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Distributed Systems and Cloud Computing L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CSE/IT/CST/ITE 7 PCE PCE‐4 CIE‐407T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. This course provides an insight into Distributed systems.
2. The course Discusses important paradigms in distributed systems
3. The course helps the students to understand process synchronization
4. The course tells about basics of cloud computing and cloud migration
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Select appropriate distributed system and inter process communication method
CO 2 Understand various process synchronization problems in distributed systems
CO 3 Create distributed file systems using Hadoop
CO 4 Choose appropriate cloud migration approach for the organization
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 2 2 3 ‐ 1 ‐ ‐ 1 ‐ 1
CO 2 3 3 3 3 1 ‐ ‐ 1 ‐ ‐ 1
CO 3 2 ‐ 3 2 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 1 ‐ ‐ 1
CO 4 2 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2

UNIT‐I

Introduction to Distributed Systems: Characteristics of Distributed Systems‐Introduction, Examples of

Distributed systems (Client server, peer to peer, grid and cloud computing), Advantages of distributed systems,
System models ‐Introduction, Architectural and Fundamental models, Networking and Internetworking,
Interposes Communication ( message passing and shared memory), Distributed objects and Remote Method
Invocation, RPC, Events and notifications, Case study‐Java RMI.

UNIT‐II

Synchronization: Time and Global States‐Introduction, Logical Clocks, Synchronizing physical clocks events and
Process states, Synchronizing physical clocks, logical time and logical clocks, global states, distributed
debugging, Coordination and Agreement: Distributed mutual exclusion, Elections, Multicast communication,
consensus and related problems.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 751
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT‐III

Distributed File Systems: Introduction – File Models – File accessing, sharing and caching – File Replication –
Atomic transactions Case Study HADOOP. : Resource and process management – Task assignment approach –
Load balancing approach – Load sharing approach

UNIT – IV

Cloud Computing, Roots of Cloud Computing, Layers and Types of Clouds, Desired Features of a Cloud, Cloud
Infrastructure Management, Infrastructure as a Service, Hardware as a service, platform as a Service, Software
as a service, Challenges and Risks. Migrating into a Cloud:‐Introduction, Broad Approaches to Migrating into
the Cloud, The Seven‐Step Model of Migration into a Cloud

Textbook(s):
1. Distributed Systems Concepts and Design, G Coulouris, J Dollimore and T Kindberg, Fourth Edition, Pearson
2. R. Buyya, CLOUD COMPUTING Principles and Paradigms, Willey
3. Distributed Systems, S.Ghosh, Chapman & Hall/CRC, Taylor & Francis Group, 2010.

References:
1. Distributed Systems – Principles and Paradigms, A.S. Tanenbaum and M.V. Steen, Pearson Education.
2. Distributed Computing, Principles, Algorithms and Systems, Ajay D. Kshemakalyani and Mukesh Singhal,
Cambridge, rp 2010.
3. Gerard Tel, “Introduction to Distributed algorithms”, Cambridge University Press, USA, 2000.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 752
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Distributed Systems and Cloud Computing Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CSE/IT/CST/ITE 7 PCE PCE‐4 CIE‐407P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Distributed Systems and Cloud
Computing) as this is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Write a Program in Java to implement RPC

2. Implement the concept of Remote Method Invocation in Java.
3. Write a java program to implement Lamport’s Logical clock
4. Implement mutual exclusion service using Lamport’s Mutual Exclusion Algorithm
5. Install Hadoop on Windows
6. Run a simple application on single node Hadoop Cluster
7. Install Google App Engine and develop a simple web application.
8. Launch Web application using Google App Engine
9. Install Virtualbox / VMware Workstation with different flavours of linux on windows.
10. Simulate a cloud scenario using CloudSim and run a scheduling algorithm

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 753
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

E‐Commerce and M‐Commerce L P C

4 4

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

IT 6 PCE PCE‐2 CIE‐336

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To impart knowledge about the fundamentals and advancements in the fields of Electronic Commerce
(E‐Commerce) with the aim of enabling the students to explore the possibilities of practical
applications and research aspects in the field of integrating business with Information Technology.
2. To impart knowledge of Electronic Payment Systems, Electronic Data Interchange, online selling
techniques, and Internet tools.
3. To understand the concept of Supply chain management, E‐procurement, and Customer relationship
management.
4. To impart knowledge about the fundamentals and advancements in the fields of Mobile Commerce
(M‐Commerce) with the aim of enabling the students to explore the possibilities of practical
applications and research aspects in the field of integrating business with Information Technology.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Ability to have in‐depth knowledge in the fields of Electronic Commerce (E‐Commerce)
CO 2 Ablility to understand Electronic Payment Systems, Electronic Data Interchange, online selling
techniques, and Internet tools.
CO 3 Ability to understand the concept of Supply chain management, E‐procurement, and Customer
relationship management.
CO 4 Ability to have an understanding of Mobile Commerce (M‐Commerce)
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 2 2 2 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 2 3 3
CO 2 3 2 2 2 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 2 3 3
CO 3 3 2 2 2 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 2 3 3
CO 4 3 2 2 2 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 2 3 3

UNIT‐I

Introduction and Concepts: Networks and commercial transactions – Internet and other novelties; networks
and electronic transactions today, Model for commercial transactions; Internet environment – internet
advantage, worlds wide web and other internet sales venues; Online commerce solutions.
Security Technologies: Insecurity Internet; A brief introduction to Cryptography; Public key solution; Key
distribution and certification; prominent cryptographic applications.
Electronic Payment Methods: Updating traditional transactions; secure online transaction models; Online

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 754
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

commercial environments; digital currencies and payment systems; Offline secure processing; private data
networks.

UNIT‐II

Protocols for Public Transport of Private Information: Security protocols; secure protocols; Secure hypertext
transfer protocols; Secure sockets layers; Integrating security protocols into the web; Non technical provide.
Electronic Commerce Providers: On‐line Commerce options: Company profiles.
Electronic Payment Systems: Digital payment systems; First virtual internet payment system; cyber cash model.
On‐line Commerce Environments: Servers and commercial environments; Netscape product line; Netscape
commerce server; Microsoft internet explorer and servers; open market.
Digital Currencies: Optional process of Digicash, Ecash Trail; Using Ecash; Smart cards, Electronic Data
Interchange; Its basics; EDI versus Internet and EDI over Internet.
Strategies, Techniques and Tools: Internet Strategies: Internet Techniques, Shopping techniques and online
selling techniques; Internet tools.

UNIT‐III

Supply chain management: Introduction, What is supply chain management? Focus on the value chain, Option
for restructuring the supply chain, Using e‐business to restructure the supply chain, Supply chain management
implementation.
E‐procurement: Introduction, What is e‐procurement?, Drivers of e‐procurement, Focus on estimating
e‐procurement cost savings, Risks and impacts of e‐procurement, Implementing e‐procurement, Focus on
electronics B2B marketplaces, The future of e‐procurement?
Customer relationship management: Introduction, What is e‐CRM?, conversion marketing, the online buying
process, customer acquisition management, focus on marketing communications for customer acquisition,
customer retention management focus on excelling in e‐commerce service quality, customer extension
Analysis and design: Introduction, process modeling, Data modeling, Design for e‐business, Focus on user –
centered site design, Focus on security design for e‐business.
Implementation and maintenance: Introduction, Alternatives for acquiring e‐business systems, Development of
web‐based content and services, focus on developing dynamic web content, testing, Changeover, Content
management and maintenance, focus on measuring and improving performance of e‐ business systems.

UNIT – IV

Introduction to M‐commerce: Emerging applications, different players in m‐commerce, M‐commerce life cycle
Mobile financial services, mobile entertainment services, and proactive service management. Management of
mobile commerce services, Content development and distribution to hand‐held devices, content caching,
pricing of mobile commerce services; emerging issues in mobile commerce: The role of emerging wireless LANs
and 3G/4G wireless networks, personalized content management, implementation challenges in m‐commerce,
futuristic m‐commerce services.

Textbook(s):
1. Ravi Kalakota, Andrew B. Whinston, “Frontiers of E‐Commerce”, 1st Edition, Sept. 1996, Addison Wesley
2. Dave Chaffey, “E‐Business and E‐Commerce Management”, 3rd Edition, 2009, Pearson Education.

References:
1. Henry Chan, Raymod Lee and etl., “E‐Commerce Fundamental and Applications”, 1st Edition, Wiley, 2001
2. Brian Mennecke and Troy Strader, “Mobile Commerce: Technology, Theory and Applications”, Idea Group,
2003.
3. Nansi Shi, “Mobile Commerce Applications”, IGI Global, 2004.
4. Gary P. Schneider, “Electronic Commerce”, Tenth Edition, May 2012, CENGAGE Learning India
5. K. K. Bajaj, D. Nag “E‐Commerce”, 2nd Edition, Sept. 2005, McGraw Hill Education.
6. P. T. Joseph, “E‐Commerce an Indian Perspective”, 4th Edition, July 2013, PHI Publication.
7. Bhaskar Bharat, “Electronic Commerce ‐ Technology and Application”, 4th Edition, May 2013, McGraw Hill.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 755
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Economics and Policies of e‐Mobility L P C

4 4

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 7 EV‐EAE EV‐EAE‐4 EV‐415

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To impart the knowledge of Indian and global scenario of E‐ Mobility.
2. To impart the knowledge of Dynamics testing of Vehicles.
3. To impart the knowledge of vehicle component testing.
4. To impart the knowledge of the static testing of vehicles.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 To understand the Indian and global scenario of E‐ Mobility.
CO 2 To provide the knowledge of Dynamics testing of Vehicles.
CO 3 To understand the vehicle component testing
CO 4 To analyze and understand the knowledge of the static testing of vehicles.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 ‐ 2 1 ‐ 2
CO 2 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 ‐ 2 1 ‐ 2
CO 3 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 ‐ 2 1 ‐ 2
CO 4 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 ‐ 2 1 ‐ 2

UNIT I

Indian and Global Scenario: Technology Scenario ‐ Market Scenario ‐ Policies and Regulations ‐ Payback and
commercial model ‐ Polices in India – opportunities
Introduction: Specification & Classification of Vehicles (including M, N and O layout) ‐ Homologation & its Types
‐ Regulations overview (EEC, ECE, FMVSS, AIS, CMVR) ‐ Type approval Scheme.

UNIT II

Dynamics Testing of Vehicle: Speedo‐meter Calibration, Range Test, Maximum Speed, Acceleration Test,
Coast‐down test, Brakes Performance ABS Test, Broadband / Narrowband EMI Test, Electric vehicle, RangeTest.

UNIT III

Vehicle Component Testing: Horn Testing ‐ Safety Glasses Test ‐ Windscreen laminated and toughened safety
glass ‐ Rear View Mirror Test ‐ Hydraulic Brakes Hoses Fuel Tank Test ‐ Metallic & Plastic ‐ Hinges and Latches

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 756
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Test, Tyre & Wheel Rim Test ‐ Bumper Impact Test ‐ Side Door Intrusion ‐ Crash test with dummies ‐ Demist test
‐ Defrost Test.

UNIT IV

STATIC TESTING OF VEHICLE: CMVR physical verification ‐ Tyre Tread Depth Test ‐ Vehicle Weightment ‐ Horn
installation ‐ Rear view mirror installation ‐ External Projection ‐ tell‐tale ‐ Wheel Guard ‐ Arrangement of Foot
Controls for M1 Vehicle ‐ Angle & Dimensions Measurement of Vehicle ‐ The Requirement of Temporary Cabin
For Drive away ‐ Chassis.

Textbook(s):
1. “Vehicle Inspection Handbook”, Indian Association of Motor Vehicle Administrators

References:
1. Proceedings‐ Automotive Testing & Certification held on 20th to 24th July 2010 at ARAI PUNE
2. Bosch Automotive Handbook, Robert Bosch, 7th Edition, 2007

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 757
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Economics for Engineers L P C

2 2

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

All 5 HS/MS HS HS‐301

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To explain the basic micro and macro economics concepts.
2. To analyze the theories of production, cost, profit and break even analysis.
3. To evaluate the different market structures and their implications for thebehavior of the firm.
4. To apply the basics of national income accounting and business cycles toIndian economy.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Analyze the theories of demand, supply, elasticity and consumer choicein the market.
CO 2 Analyze the theories of production, cost, profit and break even analysis.
CO 3 Evaluate the different market structures and their implications for thebehavior of the firm.
CO 4 Apply the basics of national income accounting and business cycles toIndian economy.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 1 2 1 2 1 ‐ 1 ‐ 1 1 3 1
CO 2 1 2 1 2 1 ‐ 1 ‐ 1 1 3 1
CO 3 1 2 1 2 1 ‐ 1 ‐ 1 1 3 1
CO 4 1 2 1 2 1 ‐ 1 ‐ 1 1 3 1

UNIT‐I

Introduction: Economics Definition, Basic economic problems, Resource constraints and welfare maximization.
Microand Macro economics. Production Possibility Curve.Circular flow of economic activities.
Basics of Demand, Supply and Equilibrium: Demand side and supply side of the market. Factors affecting
demand & supply. Elasticity of demand & supply – price, income and cross‐price elasticity. Market equilibrium
price.

UNIT‐II

Theory of Consumer Choice: Theory of Utility and consumer’s equilibrium.Indifference Curve analysis, Budget
Constraints, Consumer Equilibrium.
Demand forecasting:Regression Technique, Time‐series, Smoothing Techniques: Exponential, Moving
AveragesMethod

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 758
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT‐III

Cost Theory and Analysis:Nature and types of cost, Cost functions‐ short run and long run, Economies and
diseconomies of scale
Market Structure:Market structure and degree of competitionPerfect competition, Monopoly, Monopolistic
competition, Oligopoly

UNIT ‐ IV

National Income Accounting:Overview of Macroeconomics, Basic concepts of NationalIncome Accounting

Macro Economics Issues: Introduction to Business Cycle, Inflation‐causes,consequences and remedies:
Monetary and Fiscal policy.

Textbook(s):
1. H.C. Petersen, W.C. Lewis, Managerial Economics, 4th ed., Pearson Education 2001.

References:
1. S.K. Misra& V. K. Puri, Indian Economy, 38th ed., Himalaya Publishing House, 2020.
2. D.N. Dwivedi, Managerial Economics, 8th Edition, Vikas Publishing house
3. D. Salvatore, Managerial Economics in a Global Economy, 8th ed., Oxford University Press, 2015.
4. S. Damodaran, Managerial Economics, 2 nd ed., Oxford University Press, 2010.
5. M. Hirschey, Managerial Economics, 12th ed., Cengage India, 2013.
6. P.A. Samuelson, W.D. Nordhaus, S. Nordhaus,Economics,18th ed., Tata Mc‐Graw Hill, 2006.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 759
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

EHVAC and HVDC Transmission L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 6 PS‐EAE PS‐EAE‐2 PS‐322T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To teach about the basic concepts of EHV AC transmission and understand its need
2. Description of voltage control methods for EHV AC transmission System
3. Description of the concepts of HVDC Transmission over AC Transmission
4. To teach the concepts of the control of HVDC Converters and system
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Understand the trends in EHV AC Transmission
CO 2 Analyse compensated devices for voltage control
CO 3 Understand the advantages of DC transmission over AC transmission
CO 4 Analyze Line Commutated Converters and Voltage Source Converters in HVDC Transmission
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 1 1 1
CO 2 1 1 2 2 2 2 1 2 1 2 1 1
CO 3 1 2 2 2 1 3 2 1 1 2 1 3
CO 4 2 2 3 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 2 2

UNIT‐I

EHV AC Transmission System: Necessity advantages of EHV AC transmission lines, EHV AC transmission lines
analysis – nominal and equivalent circuits; Problems related with long lines: corona loss, audible noise
generation and characteristic corona pulses, RI effect, ferro‐resonance, and principles of half wave
transmission.

UNIT‐II

Reactive Power Management in EHV AC System: Reactive power management of power system, reactive
power problems associated with EHV AC systems; reactive power devices – operation and control, series and
shunt compensation of EHV AC system, different equipment and scheme details with analysis, application of
FACTS Technology, extra high voltage testing: Characteristics and generation of impulse voltage, generation of
high AC and DC voltages, measurement of high voltage by sphere gaps and potential dividers.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 760
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT‐III

HVDC Transmission: Introduction, historical developments, comparison of AC and DC Transmission( Economics,

Technical Performance and Reliability); types of HVDC systems, components of HVDC systems and their ratings,
construction and characteristics; Applications of DC transmission; power converter circuits associated with
HVDC systems, design aspects of 12‐ pulse converters, simple design problems of HVDC systems.

UNIT – IV

Control of HVDC Converters and System: Types of DC link, principle of DC link control, converter controls
characteristics, firing angle control, current and excitation angle control, power control, starting and stopping
of DC link, harmonic filters – HVDC current and voltage filters, different types of filters, fundamental aspects of
HVDC circuit breaking, MTDC systems: types, control and application.

Textbook(s):
1. S.Rao, EHV AC & HVDC Transmission Engineering & Practice, Khanna Publishers.
2. K.R Padiyar HVDC power Transmission System, New Age Publication.

References:
1. R.D. Begamudre, Extra high Voltage AC transmission Engineering, Wiley Eastern.
2. Naidu, Kamaraju, High Voltage Engineering, 5th ed., TMH Publishing.
3. Kamakshaiah, Kamaraju, HVDC Transmission, McGraw‐Hill Publication.
4. Nagsarkar, Sukhija, Power System Analysis, Oxford Publication.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 761
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

EHVAC and HVDC Transmission Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 6 PS‐EAE PS‐EAE‐2 PS‐322P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (EHVAC and HVDC Transmission) as this
is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Study of various HVDC transmission system components and their applications.

2. Study of AC/DC side voltage and current waveform of six pulse converter system under variable RL load
using simulation.
3. Study the methods of measurement of EHVAC.
4. Study of AC/DC side voltage and current waveform of twelve pulse converter system under variable RL
Load using simulation.
5. Study of various types of Multi terminal HVDC transmission system.
6. Study of DC link control in VSC based HVDC transmission system.
7. Study of reactive power control in HVDC transmission system.
8. Study of various passive filters used in LCC based HVDC transmission system.
9. Study of some simulation practice based on HVDC power and voltage stability system
10. Operation of VSC for power factor correction at AC side of HVDC using sinusoidal PWM.

Note: The above practical list is based on model. However, Hands on MATLAB/SCILAB simulation based
models related to the course contents can be carried out.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 762
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Elastic & Plastic Behaviour of Materials L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ME 6 PCE PCE‐3 MEE‐338T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To understand about different types metal forming processes.
2. To understand theory of plastic deformation.
3. To understand the mechanics of various deformation processes and problems associated with them.
4. To understand the importance of lubrication.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Classify various forming process.
CO 2 Analyze theory of stress strain.
CO 3 Identify and analyze various methods bulk metal forming processes.
CO 4 Explain the importance of lubrication in metal deformation processes.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 3 3 ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 2 3 3 3 3 ‐ 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 3 3 3 3 3 ‐ 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 4 3 3 3 2 ‐ 3 ‐ ‐ ‐‐ ‐ ‐ 2

UNIT‐I

Stress‐Strain relations in Elastic and plastic Deformations, True stress and true strain, true stress‐strain curves,
selection of stress‐strain curves for cold and hot working, yield of Isotropic plastic material.

UNIT‐II

Von Mises’ hypothesis of yielding, Tresca’s hypothesis of yielding, graphical representation of yield criteria,
plastic incompressibility, Idealized stress strain relations in plastic deformations, Poisson’s ratio for plastic
deformation flow rule, application of theory of plasticity for solving metal forming Problems using Slab method,
Upper and lower Bound methods, Slip line field theory.

UNIT‐III

Technology and analysis of important metal forming processes‐ Forging, Roiling, Extrusion. Wiredrawing, Sheet
Metal forming processes like Deep drawing, Stretch forming, Bending, defects in various metal forming

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 763
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

processes like rolling, forging, extrusion, wiredrawing and deep drawing and their causes and remedial
measures.

UNIT – IV

Lubrication in metal forming processes, principles and mechanism of lubrications, hydrodynamic and their film
lubrication, boundary and extreme pressure lubricants, solid Lubricants, lubricants used for rolling and cold
drawing, forging. Effects of temperature and strain rate in metal working, friction in Hot and Cold working.

Textbook(s):
1. Ghosh A. and Mallik A. K., "Manufacturing Science", East ‐West Press, New Delhi, 1998.
2. Juneja B. L., “Fundamentals of Metal Forming Processes”, New Age International Publishers, 2010.

References Books:
1. Dieter G. E., "Mechanical Metallurgy", McGraw Hill, 1988.
2. Rao P.N., "Manufacturing Technology", Tata McGraw Hill, 1990.
3. Wangoner Robert H. and Jean‐Loup Chenot, "Fundamentals of Metal Forming”, John Wiley & Sons, 1997.
4. Beddoes J. and Bibby M. J., "Principles of Metal Manufacturing Processes", Viva Books, 2000.
5. Sharma P. C., "Production Engineering", S. Chand & Co., New Delhi, 2003
6. Hosford William F. and Caddell R. M., "Metal Forming Mechanics and Metallurgy", Prentice Hall, 1993.
7. Mielnik Edward M., "Metal Working Science and Engineering", McGraw Hill, 1991.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 764
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Elastic & Plastic Behaviour of Materials Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ME 6 PCE PCE‐3 MEE‐338P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Elastic and Plastic Behaviour of
Materials) as this is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Introduction to Forming Process

2. To study of Yield Condition
3. To Study of Slip lines, Upper bound and lower bound.
4. To study and analysis of Forging Process
5. To study and analysis of Rolling Process
6. To study Extrusion & Drawing process
7. To study and analysis of Sheet metal forming process
8. To study and analysis of deep drawing process

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 765
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Electric Drives L P C
3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EE/EEE 6 PCE PCE‐3 EEE‐340T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To describe dynamics of electric drives and selection of motors
2. To study the characteristics of DC motor drives
3. To discuss operations and characteristics of induction motor drives
4. To demonstrate working of special machines used in electrical drives
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 To develop the capability to choose a suitable motor in drives
CO 2 To acquire knowledge of DC series and DC shunt motor operations
CO 3 To design frequency controlled converters used in induction motor drives
CO 4 To demonstrate working of special machines used in electrical drives.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 2 3 2 2 3 3 2 2 2 2 3
CO 2 3 1 3 2 2 2 3 3 3 2 1 2
CO 3 3 3 3 2 3 2 3 2 2 3 3 2
CO 4 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 3 3 3

UNIT‐ I

Dynamics of Electric Drives: Types of loads, quadrant diagram of speed time characteristics, Basic and modified
characteristics of dc and ac motors, equalization of load, steady state stability, calculation of time and energy
loss, control of electric drives, modes of operation, speed control and drive classifications, closed loop control
of drives, selection of motor power rating, class of duty, thermal considerations.

UNIT‐ II

DC Motor Drives: DC motor speed control, Methods of armature control, field weakening, semiconductor
controlled drives, starting, braking, transient analysis, controlled rectifier fed dc drives, chopper controlled dc
drives.

UNIT‐ III

Induction Motor Drives: Three phase induction motor starting, braking, transient analysis, speed control from

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 766
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

stator and rotor sides, stator voltage control, variable frequency control from voltage sources and current
sources, static rotor resistance control, slip power recovery, static Scherbius and static Kramer drive.

UNIT‐IV

Drives with Special Machine: Introduction to permanent magnet machines, thermal properties of PM, concept
of BLDC motor, 120 and 180 operation, rotor position detection, open loop voltage control, closed loop
current control, high speed single pulse operation, permanent magnet synchronous machines, rotor position
detection and synchronization, sinusoidal PWM excitation, closed and open loop control, PMSG and its
application to wind energy, stepper motor, current and voltage control, drive circuits, SRM drive, modelingand
analysis of SRM, different configurations of converters, closed and open loop operation, high speed operation
with angle of advance.

Text Books:
1. G K Dubey, “Principle of Electrical Drives”,Narosa Publishing House
2. VedamSubrahmanyam, “Electrical Drives”, Tata McGraw‐Hill

References Books:
1. R Krishnan, “Electrical Motor Drives” PHI Publications.
2. Ned Mohan, “Electrical Machines And Drives” Wiley India Publication
3. Bimal K Bose, “Modern Power Electronics and AC Drives”, PHI Publications.
4. De, Sen, “Electric Drives”, PHI Publications.
5. Bimal K Bose, “Power Electronics and Variable Frequency Drives” Wiley India Publication

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 767
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Electric Drives Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EE/EEE 6 PCE PCE‐3 EEE‐340P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Electric Drives) as this is the practical
component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Load equalization by flywheel for intermittent duty loads.

2. Comparison of various braking methods and their range of braking for induction motor.
3. Open loop AC voltage Control of single phase capacitor run induction motor.
4. Verification of linear relationship between duty cycle vs speed in open loop step down chopper controlled
DC motor drive.
5. Single phase thyristorised full converter fed closed loop speed control of DC motor drive.
6. Closed loop speed control of 4 quadrant DC motor drive.
7. Closed Loop constant v/f speed control of Induction motor drive.
8. Closed Loop speed control through static rotor resistance controlled slip ring Induction motor.
9. Closed loop speed control of BLDC motor drive.
10. Closed Loop speed control of SRM drive.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 768
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Electric Vehicle Powertrain and Motor Design L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 6 EV‐EAE EV‐EAE‐1 EV‐308T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To impart the basic knowledge of EV technologies.
2. To impart the knowledge of different storage technologies.
3. To impart the knowledge of Electric Machines and Drives in EVs.
4. To impart the knowledge of converters and controllers used in EVs.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 To understand the different EV technologies.
CO 2 To provide the solution of energy storage in EVs.
CO 3 To understand the Electric machines and Drives in EVs.
CO 4 To understand the different converters and controllers in EVs.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 ‐ 2 1 ‐ 2
CO 2 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 ‐ 2 1 ‐ 2
CO 3 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 ‐ 2 1 ‐ 2
CO 4 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 ‐ 2 1 ‐ 2

UNIT I

Introduction to EVs, Comparison with Internal combustion Engine : Technology, Comparison with Internal
combustion Engine: Benefits and Challenges Components of Electric Vehicle, Electric Vehicle Powertrain block
diagram,

UNIT II

Battery Energy StorageBatteries in Electric and Hybrid Vehicles: Battery Basics, Battery Parameters,
Electrochemical Cell Fundamentals. Battery Modeling: Electric Circuit ModelsBasic Battery Model, Run‐Time
Battery Model, Impedance‐Based Model, First Principle Model, Empirical Models: Range Prediction with
Constant Current Discharge, Range Prediction with Power Density Approach. Traction Batteries, Battery Pack
Management

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 769
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT III

Electric Machines and Drives in EVs: Principle of Induction Motors,Speed Control of Induction Machine,
Variable Frequency, Variable Voltage Control of Induction Motors, Field‐Oriented Control of Induction
Machine, Basic Principle and Operation of PM Motors, Design and Sizing of Traction Motors. Speed Rating of
the Traction Motor, Determination of the Inner Power, Thermal Analysis and Modeling of Traction Motors.

UNIT IV

Introduction to Power Electronic Switches, DC/DC Converters, Buck Converter, Boost Converter, Buck‐Boost
Converter, EV Powertrain Converters: Powertrain Boost Converter, Traction Inverter:Power Device Selection,
Busbar and Packaging, DC Bus Filtering, Gate Drive Design, Controller and Sensors,Thermal Design. High‐ to
Low‐Voltage DC/DC Converter, On‐Board Battery Charger, Cell‐Balancing Converters

Textbook(s):
1. Iqbal Husain , “Electric and Hybrid VehiclesDesign Fundamentals”, CRC Press
2. John G. Hayes, “Electric Powertrain Energy Systems, Power Electronics and Drives for Hybrid,Electric and
Fuel Cell Vehicles”, Wiley
3. Electric Vehicle Technology Explained, James Larminie, John Lowry, Wiley, 2003

Reference Books:
1. Mehrdad Ehsani, “Modern Electric,Hybrid Electric, andFuel Cell Vehicles” CRC Press
2. Electric and Hybrid Vehicles Technologies, Modeling and Control: A Mechatronic Approach By Amir
Khajepour, Saber Fallah, AvestaGoodarzi, Wiley

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 770
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Electric Vehicle Powertrain and Motor Design Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 6 EV‐EAE EV‐EAE‐1 EV‐308P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Electric Vehicle Powertrain and Motor
Design) as this is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1 Battery testing
2 Alternator testing.
3 Starter motor testing
4 Diagnosis of ignition system.
5 Diagnosis of automotive electrical wiring.
6 Fault finding of relay & fuses in car using Off Board Diagnostics Systems (OBDS).
7 Relay & fuse Fault diagnostic of a car using OBDS
8 Powertrain Design‐ Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) and Belt Drive

9 Powertrain Design‐ Using Planetary Gear Sets

10 Powertrain Design‐ Using CVT and a Bevel Gearbox

11 Driving Cycle Simulation

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 771
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Electrical and Electronics Measuring Instruments L P C

4 4

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EE/EEE 5 PC PC EEC‐305

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. Introduce how to measure power and energy
2. Understand working and applications of potentiometers and bridges
3. Knowledge to use printers and recorders
4. Selection of proper type and specification of transducers
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Identify and classify various types of instruments for power and energy measurement
CO 2 Develop the knowledge of working and applications of potentiometers and bridges
CO 3 Ability to apply proper recorder and printer in measurement
CO 4 Describe working principle selection criteria and application of various transducers in measurement
system.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 2 3 2 3 3 2 2 1 1 1 1 3
CO 2 3 3 2 3 3 2 2 1 1 1 1 3
CO 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 1 1 1 1 3
CO 4 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 1 1 1 1 3

UNIT I

Power and Energy Measurement

Instrument transformers:, CT and PT, Ratio and phase angle errors.
Measurement of Power: Single phase and three phase dynamometer wattmeter, LPF and UPF, expression for
deflecting and control torques. Type of P.F. Meters, dynamometer and moving iron type, Frequency meters,
Resonance type and Weston type, synchoroscopes.
Measurement of Energy: single phase and three phase induction type energy meter, driving and braking
torques, errors and compensations, testing by phantom loading, trivector meter, maximum demand meters.

UNIT II

Potentiometers and Bridges: Basics of DC potentiometers, laboratory type potentiometer, multi range
potentiometer, applications of DC potentiometers, AC potentiometer; polar and coordinate type,, Drydale
polar potentiometer, Gall Trinsley potentiometer, applications of AC potentiometer, Bridges for measuring

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 772
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

low, medium and high resistance; Carey Foster’s bridge, Kelvin’s double bridge, Mega ohm bridge, Megger.
A.C. Bridges: Measurement of inductance and capacitance, Maxwell’s bridge, Hay’s bridge, Anderson’s bridge,
Owen’s bridge, Heaviside Bridge and its modifications, Desauty bridge. Wien’s bridge, Schering Bridge..

UNIT III

Display Devices and Recorders: Introduction of various display devices, LCD, LED and plasma display, CRO & its
applications, measurement of frequency (lissajous patterns), sampling oscilloscope, DSO. Recorders:
requirement of recording data, selection of recorder for a particular application, analog, graphic, strip chart,
galvanometeric, circular chart, XY, digital recorders, single point and multipoint recorders.
Printers: Types of Printers, Drum type printer, dot matrix type printer, Ink‐jet and Laser jet printers

UNIT IV

Transducers: Introductionon and Classification of Transducers. Primary and secondary sensing elements, Basic
Working principle and applications of resistive, inductive and capacitive transducers. Working principle and
applications of. LVDT, RTD, Thermistor, piezoresistors, strain gauze, angular velocity transducers, opto
electronic transducers, inverse tranducers

Textbook(s):
1. D. Patranabis, “Sensors and Transducers”, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd., 2nd edition
2. D V S Murty, “Transducers and Instrumentation”, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd.
3. E. W. Golding and F. C. Widdis ‐ Electrical Measurements and measuring Instruments, Wheeler Publishing,
5th Ed..
4. A. K. Sahwney ‐ Electrical & Electronic Measurement & Instrumention, Dhanpat Rai & Co., 2000

Reference Books:
1. Buckingham and Price ‐ Principles of Electrical Measurements, Prentice Hall, 1970
2. Reissland, M. U. ‐ Electrical Measurements: Fundamentals, Concepts, Applications New Age.
3. W. D. Cooper, “Modern Electronic Instrumentation & Measurement Technique” PHI, 1998

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 773
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Electrical and Electronics Measuring Instruments Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EE/EEE 5 PC PC EEC‐353

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Electrical and Electronics Measuring
Instruments) as this is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Testing of single phase and three phase electromechanical and electronic energy meters.
2. Measurement of three phase power by two watt meters using instrument transformer.
3. Study and demonstration of Trivector Meter.
4. Calibration of D.C. and A.C. potentiometers.
5. Measurement of low resistance using Kelvin’s double bridge.
6. Measurement of inductance using Maxwell’s bridge/ Hay’s bridge/ Anderson’s bridge/ Owen’s bridge.
7 . Study and use of different types of Recorders / Printers.
8 . Study of different types of transducers.
9 Study of LVDT and RTD.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 774
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Electrical Power Generation Systems L P C

4 4

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EE 6 PCE PCE‐1 EEE‐358
EEE 6 PCE PCE‐3 EEE‐354

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. Study the effect of renewable energy resources and thermal power plant
2. Explore Gas turbine Power plant and hydro electric methods used in power system
3. Deep knowledge of various components of substations.
4. Design of various new technologies to optimize the economic operations
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Understand the economics of power generation.
CO 2 Understand Gas turbine Power plant and hydroelectric methods used in power system
CO 3 Have a deep knowledge of various components of substations.
CO 4 Apply various new technologies to optimize the economic operations
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ 1 2
CO 2 3 2 2 ‐ 2 2 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ 1 2
CO 3 3 2 2 ‐ ‐ 2 1 ‐ ‐ 1 2 2
CO 4 3 ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 2

UNIT I

Different form of energy sources: Fossils fuels, Nuclear energy and Hydro power
Renewable Energy Sources: Introduction to Solar energy, geo‐thermal energy, tidal energy, wind energy, bio‐
gas energy and M.H.D. Power generation.
Thermal Power Plant: Location and Site selection, general layout and working of plant, boilers, economizers,
super heaters, draft equipments, fuel and ash handling plants.

UNIT II

Gas Turbine Power Plant: Lay out, Working and components of gas turbine power plant, combined gas and
steam turbine plant.
Hydro Electric Plant: Location and site selection, general layout and operation of plant, Types of Hydro
Turbines and their characteristics – Impulse and reaction type (Pelton Wheel, Francis and Kaplan turbines),
speed governing system.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 775
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Diesel Power Plant: Layout and components of plant auxiliary equipments.

UNIT III

Nuclear Power Plant: Location and site selection, general layout and operation of plant, brief description of
reactors, moderators and reflectors.
Substation Layout: Types of substations, typical layout and constructional details of pole mounted, Indoor,
Outdoor sub‐stations, hybrid gas insulated sub stations, bus bar arrangements, application of substation
equipment like transformer , circuit breaker, isolator, metering equipments and protecting equipment ,
substation grounding.

UNIT IV

Economic Operation Of Power System: Performance curves, Economic generation scheduling neglecting losses
and generator limits, Economic generation scheduling Economic Dispatch including transmission losses –
approximate penalty factor, iterative technique for solution of economic dispatch with losses; Derivation of
transmission loss formula. Cost analysis and economics of power generation.

Textbooks:
1. M. V. Deshpande, “Elements of Electric Power Station Design”, Wheeler Publishing Co.
2. B. G. A. Skrotzki& W. A. Vopat, “Power Station Engineering and Economy”, Tata McGraw Hill. 5th Ed. 2013
3. Harish.C.Rai, “Power Plant Engineering”, I.K. International Publishers.

References:
1. S. L. Uppal, “Electrical Power”, Khanna Publishers. 13th edition 2003
2. M. L. Soni, P. V. Gupta and U. S. Bhatnagar, “A Course in Electrical Power”, Dhanpat Rai & Sons, 1st Ed 2005
3. B. R. Gupta, “Generation of Electrical Energy”, S. Chand & Co. Ltd.
4. C.L. Wadhwa, “Generation distribution and utilization of Electrical Energy”, New Age International
Publishers, 3rd Ed, 2017

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 776
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Electricity Distribution Schemes and Policies L P C

4 4

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EE/EEE 7 PCE PCE‐4 EEE‐403

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To model and characterise the transmission and distribution systems
2. To design transmission and distribution systems
3. Analysis of Distribution systems based on economic considerations
4. To understand Coordination of protective devices
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Ability to model and characterise the transmission and distribution systems
CO 2 Ability to design transmission and distribution systems
CO 3 Ability to analyse distribution systems based on economic considerations
CO 4 Ability to understand Coordination of protective devices
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 2 3 2 2 2 1 1 ‐ 2 1 2 2
CO 2 2 3 2 2 2 1 1 ‐ 2 1 2 2
CO 3 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 ‐ 2 1 2 2
CO 4 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 ‐ 2 1 2 2

UNIT‐ I

Introduction to sub‐transmission and distribution system; classification of loads – residential, commercial,

agricultural, industrial and their characteristics; distribution system planning – short‐term, mid‐term, long‐
term, load modeling and characteristics; definition of demand factor, utilization factor, load factor, plant factor,
diversity factor, loss factor; computer applications to distribution system automation; tariff.

UNIT‐ II

Distribution feeders, transformers and sub‐stations; primary feeders – voltage level, radial and loop types,
uniformly distributed and non‐uniformly distributed load; design considerations for secondary system – voltage
level, location of substation, rating, service area with primary feeders, optimal location; existing system
improvement.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 777
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT‐ III

System analysis – voltage drop and power loss calculation; methods of solution for radial networks, three‐
phase balanced primary lines, non‐three‐phase primary lines; loss reduction, voltage regulation, voltage control
and improvement, issues in quality of service – voltage sag, swell and flicker; application of capacitors to
distribution system – effect of series and shunt capacitors, power factor correction, economic justification for
capacitor with cost‐benefit analysis aiming at most economic power factor, optimum location of capacitor.

UNIT‐IV

Distribution sub‐station bus schemes, description, and comparison of switching schemes; types of common
faults and procedure for system fault calculation; protection – objectives, over current protection devices –
fuses, automatic circuit re‐closers, automatic line sectionalizing, coordination of protective devices – fuse to
fuse, fuse to circuit breaker, re‐closer to circuit breaker.

Textbooks:
1. Turan Gonen, “Electric Power Distribution System Engineering”, McGraw Hill, 3rd Ed, 2014
2. Dale R. Patrick, ”Electrical Distribution System”, 2nd Edition, 2021, River Publications

References:
1. James A. Momoh, “Electric Power Distribution Automation, Protection and Control”, CRC Press
2. A. S. Pabla, “Electric Power Distribution”, Tata McGraw Hill, 7th Ed, 2019

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 778
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Electricity Generation, Transmission and Utilization L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 6 PS‐EAE PS‐EAE‐1 PS‐320T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To understand the concepts of various methods of generation of power.
2. To explain the features of energy transmission system and transmission line structure.
3. To acquire Knowledge of traction system and its speed time curve.
4. To study illumination concepts and designing
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Understand the process of power generation.
CO 2 Explain the standard electric power transmission methods.
CO 3 understand the speed time curves for traction.
CO 4 Understand the design illumination scheme for class rooms, workshops and factories.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 2 3 2 1 1 1 2 2 2 2
CO 2 3 3 2 3 2 1 1 1 2 2 2 2
CO 3 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 1 2 2 2 2
CO 4 3 3 3 3 2 2 1 1 2 2 2 2

UNIT I

Electric Power Generation: Different forms of energy sources: Fossils fuels, Nuclear energy and Hydro power.
Thermal Power Plant: Location and Site selection, general layout and working of plant, boilers, economizers,
super heaters, fuel and ash handling plants. Gas Turbine Power Plant: Lay out, Working and components of gas
turbine power plant, combined gas and steam turbine plant. Hydro Electric Power Plant: Location and site
selection, general layout and operation of plant, Types of Hydro Turbines and their characteristics – Impulse
and reaction type (Pelton Wheel, Francis and Kaplan turbines. Diesel Power Plant: Layout and components of
plant auxiliary equipment. Nuclear Power Plant: Location and site selection, general layout and operation of
plant, brief description of reactors, moderators and reflectors.

UNIT II

Transmission: AC transmission and distribution system – Schematic layout diagram, standard transmission and
distribution voltages, advantages and limitations of high voltage transmission, various systems for power
transmission and distribution, transmission through overhead and underground system, comparison of HVDC

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 779
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

and HVAC system. Overhead transmission lines: Main components of overhead transmission lines, classification
of transmission lines based on the distance, Line constants ‐resistance, inductance and capacitance. Short
transmission line‐ Equivalent circuit, vector diagram, equations for receiving end voltage, efficiency, voltage
regulation and power factor. Underground transmission lines: Classification of UG cables, types of cables,
general construction of a single core UG cable, construction of 3 core XLPE cables, essential properties required
for insulating material of UG cables, methods of laying UG cables.

UNIT III

Electric Traction: Advantages of electric traction, requirements of an ideal traction system, different system of
electric traction; comparison between D.C. and A.C. systems of railway electrification; speed – time curves,
different types of traction motors and their characteristics; parallel operation of traction motors. Starting and
speed control of 3 phase induction motors, electric braking, advantages and disadvantages of regenerative
braking. Calculation of energy returned during regeneration.

UNIT IV

Illumination: Introduction, terms used in illumination, laws of illumination, polar curves, photometry,
integrating sphere, sources of light, discharge lamps, mercury vapour and sodium vapour lamps‐ their
characteristic and applications, performance comparison between tungsten filament lamps, fluorescent tubes,
CFL and LED lights, basic principles of light control, types and design of lighting schemes and flood lighting.

Textbook(s):
1. C.L. Wadhwa, “Generation, Distribution and Utilization of Electrical Energy” New Age International
Publications.
2. Pratap. H., “Art and Science of Utilization of Electrical Energy”, Dhanpat Rai & Sons.

References:
1. G. C. Garg, “Utilisation of Electric power and electric traction”, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi.
2. R K Rajput, “Utilisation of Electrical Power”, Laxmi Publications Pvt. Ltd, New Delhi.
3. A. Pabla, “Electric Power Distribution”, McGraw Hill.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 780
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Electricity Generation, Transmission and Utilization Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 6 PS‐EAE PS‐EAE‐1 PS‐320P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Electricity Generation, Transmission
and Utilization) as this is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. To plot polar curves for various lamps.

2. Design of lighting schemes for house / commercial complex / industry / street light / flood light with the
help of designing software ‘CALCULUX’.
3. To control the speed of various traction motors.
4. To verify illumination laws.
5. To study of charging method of batteries and calculation of their life cycle.
6. To conduct performance comparison of MV lamps, SV lamps, filament lamps, CFL & LED lights.
7. Characteristics of welding transformer.
8. Demonstration of large size cut model of different types of batteries.
9. Study of charging and discharging of battery under MATLAB/SIMULINK.
10. To dissect the power cable into its distinguished parts and selection of the appropriate cable size for the
given load.
11. To study major substation equipment and make a one‐line diagram.
12. To improve power factor of distribution load.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 781
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Electronic Devices and Circuits L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

OAE 6 ECE‐OAE ECE‐OAE‐2 OECE‐314T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To impart the knowledge of Electronics, associated semiconductor devices and application areas and
also to understand the movement of charge carriers in semiconductors
2. To impart the knowledge of PN junction diode, special diodes and the circuits using these diodes for
various applications.
3. To impart the knowledge of various semiconductor transistors.
4. To impart the knowledge of circuits with different transistor configurations. Also, to understand the
basics of digital electronics, Boolean algebra and minimization techniques to analyse circuits using
logic gates.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Define the concepts of Electronics, associated semiconductor devices and application areas.
Demonstrate the movement of charge carriers in semiconductors
CO 2 Summarize various properties of a PN junction diode. Design and analyses special diodes and the
circuits using these diodes for various applications.
CO 3 Classify the concepts of various semiconductor transistors.
CO 4 Design and analyse various circuits with different transistor configurations. Illustrate the basics of
digital electronics, Boolean algebra and minimization techniques to analyse circuits using logic gates.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 2 3 3 2 3 3 2 3 2 3
CO 2 3 2 3 3 2 1 2 2 1 1 3 1
CO 3 3 2 2 2 2 1 1 2 2 2 2 1
CO 4 3 3 3 2 3 2 1 2 3 2 3 2

UNIT I

Evaluation Of Electronics: Introduction & Application Of Electronics, Energy Band Theory Of Crystals, Energy
Band Structures In Metals, Semiconductors And Insulators, Theory of Semiconductors: Classification Of
Semiconductors, Conductivity Of Semiconductors, Carrier Concentration In Intrinsic & Extrinsic
Semiconductors, Properties Of Intrinsic And Extrinsic Semiconductors, Variation In Semiconductors Parameters
With Temperature, Fermi‐Dirac Function, Fermi Level In A Semiconductor Having Impurities, Band Structure Of
Open‐Circuited P‐N Junction, Drift And Diffusion Currents, Carrier Life Time (Elementary Treatment Only)

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 782
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT II

Theory of p‐n junction Diode: Ideal diode, Diode Current Equation, AC & DC Resistance, Transition and
Diffusion Capacitance, (Elementary treatment only), Effect of Temperature on p‐n Junction Diode, Switching
Characteristics, Piecewise Linear Model
Special Diodes: Zener Diode, Tunnel Diode, Photodiode, Light Emitting Diodes, Schottky Barrier Diode
Applications of Diodes: Half‐Wave Diode Rectifier, Full‐Wave Rectifier, Clippers and Clampers (Elementary
treatment only).

UNIT III

Bipolar junction transistor: Introduction of transistor, construction, transistor operations, BJT characteristics,
load line, operating point, leakage currents, saturation and cut off mode of operations, Eber‐moll ‘s model.

UNIT IV

Application of BJT: CB, CE, CC configurations, hybrid model for transistor at low frequencies, Introduction to
FETs and MOSFETs.
Fundamentals of digital electronics: Digital and analog signals, number systems, Boolean algebra, logic gates
with simple applications, karnaugh maps.

Textbook(s):
1. S. Salivahanan, N. Suresh Kr. & A. Vallavaraj, Electronic Devices & Circuit, Tata McGraw Hill, 2008
2. Millman, Halkias and Jit, Electronic devices and circuits McGraw Hill
3. Boylestad & Nashelsky, Electronic Devices & Circuits, Pearson Education, 10TH Edition.

Reference Books:
1. Sedra & Smith, Micro Electronic Circuits Oxford University Press, VI Edition
2. Robert T. Paynter, Introducing Electronic Devices & Circuits, Pearson Education, VII Edition, 2006
3. Vincent Del Toro, Electrical Engineering Fundamentals, Prentice Hall of India

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 783
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Electronic Devices and Circuits Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

OAE 6 ECE‐OAE ECE‐OAE‐2 OECE‐314P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Electronic Devices and Circuits) as this
is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Introduction to CRO, Function Generator& Bread Board & to generate different types of waveforms with
the help of Function Generator & to calculate their frequency.
2. Identification & testing of Active & passive components.
3. To plot V‐I characteristics of a semiconductor diode.
4. To Study the Reverse characteristics of Zener diode.
5. To Study the Rectifier circuit: a) Half Wave Rectifier b) Centre Tapped Rectifier c) Bridge Rectifier.
6. To Study the output waveforms of different Filter Circuits of Rectifier.
7. To Plot Input & Output characteristics CB transistor.
8. To Plot Input & Output characteristics of CE transistor.
9. Realization of basic gates.
10. Implementation of Boolean functions (two or three variables).
11. Few experiments mentioned above to be performed on P‐spice.
12. To develop a working model of any electronic circuit.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 784
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Electronic Measurements L P C
3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ECE 6 PCE PCE‐1 ECE‐320T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To provide an exposure to performance characteristics of Electronic measurements.
2. To impart the knowledge about the working and use of different measuring instruments.
3. To impart the detailed knowledge about cathode ray oscilloscope and its various types.
4. To provide understanding about various signal analyzers and transducers along with Data Acquisition
System.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Identify and analyze different performance characteristics of measuring in detail.
CO 2 Analyze/Illustrate the working of various basic meters such as voltmeter and ammeter.
CO 3 Implement the working of different types of oscilloscopes with their applications.
CO 4 Explain different types of signal analyzers and transducers along with Data Acquisition System.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 2 2 ‐ 2 1 1 2 2 2 2
CO 2 3 3 3 3 1 2 2 ‐ 2 2 ‐ 3
CO 3 3 3 1 3 2 2 ‐ ‐ 1 1 1 2
CO 4 1 1 1 3 2 2 ‐ ‐ 1 2 ‐ 2

UNIT I

Performance Characteristics of Instruments: Static Characteristics, Dynamic Characteristics.

Errors in Measurement: Types of Static Errors, Gross Errors, Systematic Errors, Random Errors, Sources of
Errors.
Basic Meter Movement: Moving Coil and Moving Iron type of instruments.
Display Devices: Digital display system and indicators, Classification of displays, Light Emitting Diodes (LED),
Liquid Crystal Display (LCD).
Printers: Classification of Printers, Drum Printer, Dot‐Matrix, ink‐jet & Laser‐jet Printers.
Electrical Standards & Calibration.

UNIT II

DC Ammeter, Multi range ammeters, Extending of ammeter ranges, RF Ammeter, Effect of frequency on
calibration. DC Voltmeter, Multi range voltmeter, extending Voltmeter ranges, Transistor Voltmeter, Chopper

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 785
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

type DC amplifier Voltmeter (Micro‐voltmeter), Solid‐State Voltmeter, AC Voltmeter using rectifiers, True RMS
Voltmeter.
Digital Metering: Dual slope integrating type DVM (Voltage to Time conversion), Integrating type DVM (Voltage
to Frequency Conversion), Resolution and sensitivity of digital meters, General specifications of a DVM, Digital
Multimeters, Digital frequency meter, Digital measurement of time, Universal counter, Electronic counter,
Digital tachometer, Digital pH meter, Digital phase meter, Digital capacitance meter.

UNIT III

Basic Principle, CRT features, Block diagram of oscilloscope, single/dual beam CRO, dual trace oscilloscope,
(VHF) sampling oscilloscope, storage oscilloscope (For VLF Signal). Measurement of phase and frequency by
Lissajous figures method. Oscilloscope as a Bridge Null detector, standard specifications of a single beam CRO,
probes for CRO, Digital Storage Oscilloscope (DSO), Fiber Optic CRT recording oscilloscope.

UNIT IV

Fixed / Variable Frequency AF Oscillator, Signal Generator, Function Generator, (sine, square and triangular
wave generator), Frequency selective and Heterodyne Wave Analyzer. Digital Data Recording, Potentiometric
Recorder (Multipoint), Digital Memory Waveform Recorder (DWR),
Introduction to transducers, Data Acquisition System: Introduction, Objective of a DAS, Single Channel Data
Acquisition System, Multi‐Channel DAS.

Textbook(s):
1. A. K. Shawney ‐ Electrical & Electronic Measurement & Instruments, Dhanpat Rai & Sons Publication
2. H.S. Kalsi, “Electronic Instrumentation” Tata McGraw‐Hill.

References:
1. W. D. Cooper, “Modern Electronics Instrumentation & Measurement Techniques” PHI, 1998.
2. E. W. Gloding and F. C. Widdis ‐ Electrical Measurements and measuring Instruments, Wheeler Publishing,
fifth Edition.
3. Reissland, M. U. “Electrical Measurements: Fundamentals, Concepts, Applications”, New Age International
(P) Limited, Publishers.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 786
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Electronic Measurements Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ECE 6 PCE PCE‐1 ECE‐320P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Electronic Measurements) as this is the
practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Study and demonstration of different types of display devices.

2. Measurement of resistance, voltage and current using digital multimeter / clamp meter.
3. Calibration of Ammeter and Voltmeter.
4. Measurement of resistance, inductance and capacitance using digital RLC meter.
5. Measurement of frequency and time period using digital frequency meter.
6. Study and demonstration of universal frequency counter.
7. Study and measurement of voltage, frequency and phase difference of a.c. quantities using C.R.O.
8. Measurement of inductance and capacitance using C.R.O.
9. Study and measurement of quantities using D.S.O.
10. Study of function generator.
11. Study and use of different types of transducers (Temperature, Pressure, Optical Transducers).
12. Study of different types of recorders /Printers.
13. Study and use different types of ADC and DAC.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 787
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Embedded Linux L P C
3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 6 IOT‐EAE IOT‐EAE‐2A ES‐328T
EAE 6 ICB‐EAE ICB‐EAE‐2A ES‐328T
EAE 7 ES‐EAE ES‐EAE‐5A ES‐407T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. This course provides an insight into Architecture of Embedded Linux
2. The course helps the students to understand Hardware Abstraction Layer and BSP
3. The course helps the students to understand the basics of device drivers
4. The course tells about basics of Real Time Operating Systems
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Understand architecture of Embedded Linux
CO 2 Configure Board Support Package and HAL with proper memory management
CO 3 Design Device drivers for various type of devices
CO 4 Port Application Developed for embedded systems
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 2 2 3 ‐ 1 ‐ ‐ 1 ‐ 1
CO 2 3 3 3 3 1 ‐ ‐ 1 ‐ ‐ 1
CO 3 2 ‐ 3 2 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 1 ‐ ‐ 1
CO 4 2 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2

UNIT‐I

Introduction to Embedded Linux: Introduction to Embedded Systems, Real time Operating Systems, Embedded
Linux, Embedded Linux Distributions, Architecture of Embedded Linux, Linux Kernel, Architecture of Linux Boot
Sequence, GNU Cross Platform Tool chain.

UNIT‐II

Board Support Package & HAL: Inserting BSP during build process, Boot Loader, Memory Map, PCI Subsystem,
Interrupt Management, , UART, Timers, and Power Management.
Storage: Flash Map, MTD—Memory Technology Device, MTD Architecture, Flash‐ Mapping Drivers, MTD Block
and Character devices, Embedded File systems, Optimizing Storage Space.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 788
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT‐III

Device Drivers: Basics of Device drivers, Ethernet Driver, Linux Serial Driver, I2C subsystem on Linux, USB,
Watchdog Timer, and Kernel Modules.

UNIT – IV

Porting Applications: Architectural Comparison, Application Porting Road Map, Programming with Pthreads,
Operating System Porting Layer (OSPL), Kernel API Driver.

Textbook(s):
1. Embedded Linux System Design and Development, P. Raghavan, Amol Lad, Sriram Neelakandan, 2006,
Auerbach Publications

References:
1. Karim Yaghmour, Jon Masters, Gillad Ben Yossef, Philippe Gerum, “Building embedded Linux systems”,
O'Reilly, 2008.
2. Christopher Hallinan, “Embedded Linux Primer: A practical real world approach”, Prentice Hall, 2007.
3. Craig Hollabaugh, “Embedded Linux: Hardware, software and Interfacing”, Pearson Education, 2002.
4. Doug Abbott, “Linux for embedded and real time applications”, Elsevier Science, 2003.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 789
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Embedded Linux Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 6 IOT‐EAE IOT‐EAE‐2A ES‐328P
EAE 6 ICB‐EAE ICB‐EAE‐2A ES‐328P
EAE 7 ES‐EAE ES‐EAE‐5A ES‐407P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Embedded Linux) as this is the practical
component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Write a multi‐threaded program using pthread

2. Write a program to use fork( ) system call to create a child process.
3. Write a program to show CPU scheduling using fork ( ).
4. Write a program to implement semaphore using pthread library.
5. Install & configure busy box
6. Run busy box and check Version.
7. Execute important Busybox commands.
8. Build a minimal RootFS using busy box
9. create symlinks to busybox for a command
10. Use HttpD server on busy box

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 790
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Embedded System Architecture and Design L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ECE 6 PCE PCE‐3 ECE‐344T
CSE‐in‐EA 6 OAE‐CSE‐EA OAE‐1 ES‐306T
EE‐VDT 6 PC PC ES‐306T
EC‐ACT 6 OAE‐ECE‐EA OAE‐1 ES‐306T
EAE 6 ES‐EAE ES‐EAE‐2B ES‐306T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To learn the architectural design of Embedded system.
2. To understand the communication protocols in respect to advanced processors.
3. Develop real time applications based on embedded systems.
4. Apply embedded device based processing on RTOS.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Ability to understand the architecture and features of microcontrollers 8051 and PIC.
CO 2 Ability to understand and apply the concepts of ARM processors and understand various Bus
structures in programming.
CO 3 Ability to understand the concept of embedded software, RTOS and apply it in Embedded
Programming.
CO 4 Ability to apply the knowledge of embedded operating systems to understand Mutli‐Tasking,
Scheduling and RTOS linux kernel.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 2 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 ‐ 1
CO 2 2 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 ‐ 2
CO 3 2 1 1 2 2 2 2 ‐ ‐ 2 ‐ 1
CO 4 ‐ 1 1 2 2 2 2 ‐ ‐ 2 ‐ 1

UNIT I

Overview of Embedded Systems: Characteristics of Embedded Systems. Comparison of Embedded Systems

with general purpose processors. General architecture and functioning of micro controllers. 8051
microcontrollers. PIC Microcontrollers: Architecture, Registers, memory interfacing, interrupts, Instructions,
programming and peripherals.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 791
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT II

ARM Processors: Comparison of ARM architecture with PIC micro controller, ARM 7 Data Path, Registers,
Memory Organization, Instruction set, Programming, Exception programming, Interrupt Handling, Thumb
mode Architecture. Bus structure: Time multiplexing, serial, parallel communication bus structure. Bus
arbitration, DMA, PCI, AMBA, I2C and SPI Buses.

UNIT III

Embedded Software, Concept of Real Time Systems, Software Quality Measurement, and Compilers for
Embedded System.

UNIT IV
RTOS: Embedded Operating Systems, Multi‐Tasking, Multi‐Threading, Real‐time Operating Systems, RTLinux
introduction, RTOS kernel, Real‐Time Scheduling.

Textbook(s):
1. Design with PIC Microcontrollers, John B. Peatman, Pearson Education Asia, 2002.
2. ARM System Developer’s Guide: Designing and Optimizing System Software, Andrew N. Sloss, Dominic
Symes, Chris Wright, Morgan Kaufman Publication, 2004.
3. Computers as components: Principles of Embedded Computing System Design, Wayne Wolf, Morgan
Kaufman Publication, 2000.

References:
1. The Design of Small‐Scale embedded systems, Tim Wilmshurst, Palgrave 2003.
2. Embedded System Design, Mar wedel, Peter , Kluwer Publishers , 2004.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 792
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Embedded System Architecture and Design Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ECE 6 PCE PCE‐3 ECE‐344P
CSE‐in‐EA 6 OAE‐CSE‐EA OAE‐1 ES‐306P
EE‐VDT 6 PC PC ES‐306P
EC‐ACT 6 OAE‐ECE‐EA OAE‐1 ES‐306P
EAE 6 ES‐EAE ES‐EAE‐2B ES‐306P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Embedded System Architecture and
Design) as this is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Write a program to load three numbers into Accumulator and send them to port 1. (Keil)
2. Write an 8051 C program to send hex values for ASCII characters of 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, A, B, C, D and
E to port P1.
3. Write a program to configure watchdog timer in watchdog mode & interval mode.
4. Write an 8051 C program to get a byte of data form P1, wait ½ second (i.e., 500 ms) and then send it to
P2.
5. Write an 8051 C Program to send the two messages “first name” and “last name” to the serial port. If SW
= 0, send first name else if SW = 1, send last name. Set the baud rate at 9600, 8‐bit data, and 1 stop bit.
6. Learn how to use Embest IDE for ARM and ARM Software Emulator.
7. Program to interface Stepper Motor to rotate the motor in clockwise and anticlockwise Directions.
8. Write a program to change ARM state mode by using MRS/MMSR instruction.
9. Write a random number generation function using assembly language.
10. Use assembly and C language to read/write words, half‐words, bytes, half bytes from/to RAM.
11. Write programs that implement an interrupt service routine.
12. Write programs that use the RTC. Modify the setting of time and date. Display the current system clock
time through the serial port.
13. Develop a project that accepts the keys of the keyboard pad through interrupt service routine and display
the values on the 8‐SEG LED.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 793
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Embedded Systems L P C
3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ICE 6 PCE PCE‐2 ICE‐316T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To expose students to the basics of embedded system
2. To expose students to the RTOS and inter process communication
3. To acquaint the students with the different tools for testing and debugging
4. To acquaint the students with the design knowledge of embedded system
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Understand the RTOS and inter‐process communication.
CO 2 Identify and describe various characteristic features and applications of Embedded systems
CO 3 Evaluate and use various tools for testing and debugging embedded systems
CO 4 Design real time embedded systems using the concepts of RTOS.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ 2 ‐ 3
CO 2 3 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ 2 ‐ 3
CO 3 3 3 2 2 ‐ ‐ 3 ‐ 2 3 2 3
CO 4 3 3 3 3 ‐ ‐ 3 ‐ 3 3 3 3

Unit I

Introduction to Embedded Systems: Introduction to Embedded Systems –Structural units in Embeded

procesor, selection of procesor & memory devices‐ DMA – Memory management methods‐ Timer and
Counting devices, Watchdog Timer, Real Time Clock, In circuit emulator, Target Hardware Debuging.

Unit II

Embedded Networking: Introduction, I/O Device Ports & Buses– Serial Bus communication protocols RS232
standard – RS42 – RS 485 – CAN Bus ‐Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI) – Inter Integrated Circuits (I2C) – need for
device drivers.

Unit III

Embedded Firmware Development Environment: Embedded Product Development Life Cycle‐ objectives,
different phases of EDLC, Modeling of EDLC; issues in Hardware‐software Co‐design, Data Flow Graph, state

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 794
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

machine model, Sequential Program Model, concurrent Model, object oriented Model.

Unit IV

RTOS Based Embedded System Design: Introduction to basic concepts of RTOS‐ Task, process & threads,
interrupt routines in RTOS, Multiprocessing and Multitasking, Preemptive and non‐preemptive scheduling, Task
communication shared memory, message passing‐, Inter process Communication – synchronization between
processes‐semaphores, Mailbox, pipes, priority inversion, priority inheritance.

Textbooks:
1. Rajkamal, “Embedded Systems: Architecture, Programming and Design”, McGraw Hill Education (India)
Private Limited, New Delhi, 2015, 3rd Edition.
2. Lawrence M Thompson, Industrial Data Communication, 2nd edition, 1997.
3. Sriram Iyer, Pankaj Gupta, “Embedded Real Time Systems Programming”, Tata McGraw Hill

References:
1. David Simon, “An Embedded Software Primer”, Pearson, 2009.
2. Dr. K. V. K. K. Prasad, “Embedded Real Time System: Concepts, Design and Programming”
3. K.V. Shibu, Introduction To Embedded Systems, Tata McGraw, 2009.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 795
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Embedded Systems Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ICE 6 PCE PCE‐2 ICE‐316P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Embedded Systems) as this is the
practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Read input from switch and Automatic control/flash LED (soft‐ware delay).
2. Interrupts programming example using GPIO.
3. Configure watchdog timer in watchdog mode & interval mode.
4. Display numbers from 0‐9 on seven segment display
5. To read key code from 4x4 matrix keyboard and LCD display
6. Display string on 16x2 LCD
7. Configure timer block for signal generation (with given frequency)
8. PWM Generator
9. DC motor speed control
10. Stepper motor control

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 796
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Embedded Systems and Internet of Things L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

MAE 7 PC PC MAC‐405

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. Explain the real time embedded system and its components.
2. Understand basic components and building blocks of Internet of Things.
3. Apply skills to conduct interfacing of embedded boards with components, actuators and sensors.
4. Design embedded and IOT Systems for various applications.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Explain the real time embedded system and its components.
CO 2 Understand basic components and building blocks of Internet of Things.
CO 3 Apply skills to conduct interfacing of embedded boards with components, actuators and sensors.
CO 4 Design embedded and IOT Systems for various applications.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ 2 ‐ 3
CO 2 3 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ 2 ‐ 3
CO 3 3 3 2 2 ‐ ‐ 3 ‐ 2 3 2 3
CO 4 3 3 3 3 ‐ ‐ 3 ‐ 3 3 3 3

Unit‐I

Introduction to Embedded and IoT Systems: Definition, Examples and components of embedded and IoT
Systems, Embedded and IoT Systems Design Process, Various Embedded and IoT cores controllers.
Hardware/Software Co‐design for Embedded and IoT Systems, design challenge, Simplified IoT Architecture.

Unit‐II

Microcontrollers for Embedded Systems: Arduino embedded platform, Peripheral interfacing and
programming with Arduino platform, Sensors and Actuator interfacing, Cloud support with Arduino platform.
Arduino–Board details, IDE programming, Raspberry Pi and Interfaces.

Unit‐III

Protocols for Embedded and IoT Systems: Serial protocols, UART, I2C, and SPI. NFC, Wireless protocols like,
RFID, Zig‐bee, IEEE 802.15.4e, Thread, 6LoWPAN, Constrained Application Protocol (CoAP), Extensible

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 797
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Messaging Protocol (XMPP) , WebSocket , Advanced Message Queueing Protocol (AMQP) , Message Queue
Telemetry Transport (MQTT), Web Real Time Communications (WebRTC), LoRa, SIGFOX, Z Wave.

Unit‐IV

IoT Based Embedded Systems: Basic architecture of an IoT based Embedded Systems, Embedded Hardware for
IoT applications, like Raspberry Pi, Arduino, and Raspberry Pi based development board, IoT Cloud Platform
and IoT client applications on mobile phones. Case Studies of Embedded and IoT Systems: Embedded
application development through Arduino and Raspberry Pi based development boards.

Textbook(s):
1. “Embedded Systems: Architecture, Programming and Design”, McGraw Hill Education (India) Private
Limited, New Delhi, 2015, 3rd Edition.
2. Dr. OvidiuVermesan, Dr. Peter Friess, Internet of Things: Converging Technologies for Smart Environments
and Integrated Ecosystems, River Publishers

References:
1. Olivier Hersent, David Boswarthick and Omar Elloumi, The Internet of Things: Key Applications and
Protocols, John Wiley and Sons Ltd., UK 2012.
2. Abubeker K M, Open Source Programming & Embedded System Design Using Arduino IDE
3. Internet of Things by Raj Kamal, Tata McGraw Hill Publication

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 798
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Embedded Systems and Internet of Things Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

MAE 7 PC PC MAC‐457

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Embedded Systems and Internet of
Things) as this is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Interfacing Push button Switch interfacing with Arduino based Embedded System
2. External Peripheral Interfacing with Arduino based Embedded System.
3. On Chip peripheral programming with Arduino/Raspberry Pi based Embedded System
4. Serial Communication Protocol programming with Arduino/Raspberry Pi based Embedded Systems.
5. Wireless communications with Arduino/Raspberry Pi Embedded IOT Platform.
6. Bluetooth communication interfacing with Arduino/Raspberry PiEmbedded IOT Board.
7. WiFi module interfacing with Arduino/Raspberry Pi Embedded IOT Board.
8. Embedded Systems design with IOT capability.
9. IOT based Temperature monitoring embedded system with open source cloud tools.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 799
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Embedded Systems for Electric Vehicles L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 7 EV‐EAE EV‐EAE‐5 EV‐417T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To impart the knowledge of automotive fundamentals.
2. To impart the knowledge of vehicle management system.
3. To impart the knowledge of vehicle automotive telematics.
4. To impart the knowledge of electronic diagnostics of vehicles.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 To understand the basics of automotive fundamentals.
CO 2 To understand the vehicle management system.
CO 3 To understand the vehicle automotive telematics.
CO 4 To understand system diagnostic standard and regulation requirement.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 ‐ 2 1 ‐ 2
CO 2 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 ‐ 2 1 ‐ 2
CO 3 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 ‐ 2 1 ‐ 2
CO 4 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 ‐ 2 1 ‐ 2

UNIT I

Automotive Fundamentals: Automotive physical configuration, drive train, suspension, brakes, steering
system. Systemsapproach to control and instrumentation: Characteristics of digital electronic system,
Instruments, Control system. Vehicle motion control: Cruise control system, Antilock brakingsystem, Electronic
suspension system, Electronic steering control, automotive instrumentation,on board and off – board
diagnostics, occupant protection systems.

UNIT II

Vehicle Management Systems: Vehicle cruise control‐ speed control anti‐locking braking system‐electronic
suspension ‐ electronic steering, wiper control; Vehicle system schematic for interfacing with EMS, ECU. Energy
Management system for electric vehicles‐ for sensors, accelerators, brake Battery management, Electric
Vehicles‐Electrical loads, power management system‐electrically assisted power steering system

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 800
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT III

Automotive Telematics: Role of Bluetooth, CAN, LIN and flex ray communication protocols in automotive
applications; Multiplexed vehicle system architecture for signal and data / parameter exchange between EMS,
ECUs with other vehicle system components and other control systems; Realizing bus interfaces for diagnostics,
dashboard display, multimedia electronics.

UNIT IV

Electronic Diagnostics For Vehicles: System diagnostic standards and regulation requirements – On board
diagnosis of vehicles electronic units & electric units‐Speedometer, oil and temperature gauges, and audio
system.

Textbook(s):
1. William B. Ribbens,”Understanding Automotive Electronics”, Elseiver,2012
2. Ali Emedi, Mehrdedehsani, John M Miller , “Vehicular Electric power system‐ land, Sea, AirAnd Space
Vehicles” Marcel Decker, 2004.
3. L.Vlacic, M.Parent, F.Harahima,”Intelligent Vehicle Technologies”, SAE International, 2001.
4. Jack Erjavec,Jeff Arias,”Alternate Fuel Technology‐Electric ,Hybrid & FuelCellVehicles”,Cengage ,2012

References:
1. Tom Denton, “Automotive Electricals / Electronics System and Components”, 3rd Edition, 2004.
2. Uwe Kiencke, Lars Nielsen, “Automotive Control Systems: For Engine, Driveline, andVehicle”, Springer; 1st
edition, March 30, 2000.
3. Automotive Electricals Electronics System and Components, Robert Bosch Gmbh, 4th Edition, 2004.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 801
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Embedded Systems for Electric Vehicles Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 7 EV‐EAE EV‐EAE‐5 EV‐417P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Embedded Systems for Electric
Vehicles) as this is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Program to toggle all the bits of port P1 continuously with 250 ms delay.
2. Program to interface a switch and a buzzer to two different pins of a port such that the buzzer
3. Program to interface LCD data pins to port P1 and display a message on it
4. Program to interface seven segment display using 89V51RD2
5. Program to interface keypad. Whenever a key is pressed, it should be displayed on LCD.
6. Program to transmit message from microcontroller to PC serially using RS232 and Program to receive a
message from PC to microcontroller serially using RS232.
7. Program to interface Stepper Motor to rotate the motor in clockwise and anticlockwise Directions.
8. Program to read data from temperature sensor and display the temperature value.
9. Port RTOS on to 89V51 Microcontroller and verify. Run 2 to 3 tasks simultaneously on 89V51 SDK. Use LCD
interface, LED interface, Serial communication.
10. Program to convert analog signal into digital (ADC).
11. Program to convert Digital into Analog (DAC).

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 802
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

e‐Mobility L P C
3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EE/EEE 7 PCE PCE‐5 EEE‐421T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. Develop a comprehensive understanding of electric mobility.
2. Analyse and evaluate electric vehicle systems.
3. Explore charging infrastructure and techniques.
4. Assess the environmental and energy aspects of electric mobility.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Understand the fundamental concepts and components of electric mobility.
CO 2 Analyse and design electric vehicle systems.
CO 3 Evaluate of charging infrastructure and techniques.
CO 4 Examine the environmental and energy aspects of electric mobility.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 2 2 1 ‐ 1 2 1 ‐ 1 ‐ 1
CO 2 3 3 2 1 ‐ ‐ 2 1 ‐ 1 ‐ 1
CO 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 1 1 ‐ 1 ‐ 1
CO 4 3 2 2 1 ‐ ‐ 1 1 ‐ 1 ‐ 1

UNIT‐I

Introduction to E‐Mobility: Overview of electric mobility, Environmental and energy‐related challenges in

transportation, Electric vehicles vs. internal combustion engine vehicles; Electric Vehicle Systems: Electric
vehicle architecture and components, Electric powertrain: electric motor, power electronics, and energy
storage systems, Electric vehicle control and management systems.

UNIT‐II

Power Electronics for Electric Vehicles: Power electronic converters and their functions, Power semiconductor
devices for electric vehicle applications, Power electronics for electric vehicle motor drives; Electric Motor
Drives: Electric motor types used in electric vehicles, Electric motor characteristics and control techniques,
Sensor‐less control & field‐oriented control (FOC) of electric motors.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 803
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT‐III

Energy Storage Systems for Electric Vehicles: Battery technologies and characteristics, Battery management
systems (BMS) and state‐of‐charge estimation; Charging Infrastructure and Techniques: Charging infrastructure
for electric vehicles, Charging techniques: slow charging, fast charging, and rapid charging, Charging standards
and protocols (e.g., CHAdeMO, CCS, and Tesla Supercharger)

UNIT – IV

Environmental and Energy Aspects of Electric Mobility: Environmental impact of electric vehicles, Life cycle
assessment (LCA) of electric vehicles, Policy and regulatory framework for promoting electric mobility;
Practical Exercises and Case Studies: Hands‐on exercises on electric vehicle components and systems, Case
studies on electric vehicle design, performance analysis, and optimization, Simulation and modeling of electric
vehicle systems using software tools.

Textbook(s):
1. James Larminie and John Lowry, "Electrical Vehicle Technology Explained", Wiley
2. Ali Emadi "Advanced Electric Drive Vehicles" online at kindle

References:
1. Tom Denton, Taylor and Francis “Electric And Hybrid Vehicles”

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 804
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

e‐Mobility Lab L P C
2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EE/EEE 7 PCE PCE‐5 EEE‐421P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (e‐Mobility) as this is the practical
component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Study of electric vehicle powertrain components identification.

2. Study of electric Vehicle Performance Analysis.
3. Studt of power electronics converter efficiency.
4. Study of Electric Motor Control Techniques.
5. Battery Management System (BMS) Operation and State‐of‐Charge Estimation.
6. Study of charging efficiency and time analysis.
7. Study of Electric Vehicle Thermal Management.
8. Study of energy storage system comparison.
9. Study of impact of electric vehicle charging on the electrical grid.
10. Study of Life Cycle Assessment (LCA) of Electric Vehicles.
11. Study of commonly used pulse width techniques.
12. Study of Buck converter closed loop voltage control.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 805
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Energy Conservation Schemes L P C

4 4

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EE/EEE 7 PCE PCE‐5 EEE‐423

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To Develop a strategic direction for organizations involved with energy and power
2. To Understand the role of energy management and energy Auditing.
3. To Understand the various types of theft in Electro‐mechanical & Electronics meters
4. To Understand Energy Conservation in Green Building
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Develop a strategic direction for organizations involved with energy and power
CO 2 Understand the role of energy management and energy Auditing.
CO 3 Understand the various types of theft in Electro‐mechanical & Electronics meters
CO 4 Understand Energy Conservation in Green Building
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 2 2 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ 2 1
CO 2 3 2 2 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ 2 1
CO 3 3 2 2 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ 2 2
CO 4 3 2 2 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ 2 2

UNIT I

Energy Conservation and Energy Policies: Energy policies of India and their development, Central and estate
Policies on the consumption and wastage of energy, need of renewable energy in India, Energy efficiency,
Energy accounting, monitoring and control, Electricity audit and related instruments, Energy consumption
models, Specific Energy Consumption, Eco assessment and Evaluation methods, Energy conservation schemes,
Investment in energy saving equipments, subsidies and tax rebates, Development of Energy Management
System.

UNIT II

Energy Conservation in Electrical Installations: Electric loads of air conditioning and refrigeration, Energy
conservation, Power consumption in compressors, Energy conservation measures, Electrolytic process, Electric
heating, Furnace operation and scheduling, Transformer loading, Efficiency analysis, Feeder loss evaluation,
Reactive Power, Power factor and its improvement, Capacitor sizing, Capacitor losses, location, placement and
maintenance, Case studies.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 806
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT III

Energy Efficient Motors: Types and operating characteristics of electric motors, Energy efficient control and
starting – Load matching, Selection of motors, Efficiency and load analysis, Energy efficiency, High efficiency
motors, Industrial drives, Control schemes, Variable speed drives and Energy conservation schemes, Pumps and
fans, Efficient control strategies, Over‐sizing Case studies.

UNIT IV

Energy Efficient Building / Green Building: Energy Conservation in Buildings Air conditioning, monitoring and
control systems of energy efficient buildings. Principle of Energy efficient building design water heading system,
photovoltaic systems and Energy conservation in lighting schemes, Energy efficient light sources, Domestic,
commercial and industrial lighting, Lighting controls, Luminaries.

Textbooks:‐
1. H. Partab, “Art and Science of Utilisation of Electrical Energy”, BBES, 1970.
2. S.C. Tripathy, “ Electric Energy Utilization and Conservation”, Tata McGraw Hill, 1991

References:
1. Bureau of Energy efficiency of India.
2. IEEE Bronze Book: IEEE Standard 739‐1984 – Recommended Practice for Energy Conservation and Cost
Effective Planning in Industrial Facilities, IEEE Publications, 1996.
3. Albent & Steve Doty Thumann: Plant Engineers and Managers Guide to Energy conservation, 10e, River
Publications, 2002.
4. W.C. Turner, Energy Management Handbook, 8e, Fairmont press, 2012.
5. UNESCAP – Guide Book on Promotion of Sustainable Energy Consumption.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 807
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Energy Economics and Policies L P C

4 4

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EE/EEE 7 PCE PCE‐5 EEE‐425

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. Understand energy conservation and energy efficiency.
2. Understand energy generation
3. Understand energy pricing and financial aspects
4. Understand energy security and policies
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Ability to understand energy conservation and energy efficiency.
CO 2 Ability to understand energy generation
CO 3 Ability to understand energy pricing and financial aspects
CO 4 Ability to understand energy security and policies
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 2 1 1 1 1 ‐ 1 3 ‐ 3
CO 2 3 2 1 3 2 1 1 ‐ 1 3 ‐ 1
CO 3 3 2 1 2 3 1 1 ‐ 1 3 ‐ 3
CO 4 3 3 2 1 1 1 1 ‐ 1 3 ‐ 3

UNIT I

Origin and Definitions of Energy Economics, Link between Economics and Energy, Energy Resources and Energy
Commodities; Properties of Energy Resources and Energy Commodities, concept of Energy conservation and
Energy efficiency.

UNIT II

Demand for Energy as a Derived Demand, World Energy Consumption ⎯ Economic Growth and World Energy
Consumption, Demand substitution and energy use Classification of Energy supplies: renewable and non‐
renewable, Fossil fuels (coal, oil, natural gas), Renewable energy (Hydro, Marine, Wind, Solar, Geothermal,
Biomass), Nuclear power, Trend and patterns of energy production

UNIT III

Global and National scenario Trend and Patterns of Energy Consumption and the Energy Crisis (since Oil shocks

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 808
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

of 1970 and other events) Energy Pricing and Taxation: Production Cost versus Return on Investment, Models
of Pricing, Market Failures, Peak and Off‐peak Pricing, Subsidies, The role of regulatory bodies like MERC,
Energy Finance: Banks, International organisations, Green Finance initiatives .

UNIT IV

Concept of Sustainable Development and SDGs, Energy Security: India’s initiatives, Energy and Climate Change,
Energy Efficiency and carbon emissions: Global and National trends, Energy Policy The Economics of Climate
Change, Climate Change Background, Overview of GHG Emissions, Economic Approach to Control the
Greenhouse Effect, Options to Cope with Global Warming, Generic Options, National Policy Options, Emissions
Trading System (ETS).

Textbooks:
1. Energy Economics: Concepts, Issues, Markets and Governance by Subhes C. Bhattacharyya, 2nd Ed, 2019,
Springer Science & Business Media
2. International Energy Markets: Understanding Pricing, Policies, and Profits. 2nd Edition. Carol A. Dahl.
PennWell.

References:
1. Pindyck, R., and D. Rubinfeld. Microeconomics. 8th ed., Pearson
2. Energy Economics: Theory and Applications Peter Zweifel, Aaron Praktiknjo, Georg Erdmann, 2017,
Springer.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 809
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Energy Harvesting Techniques L P C

4 4

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ICE 6 PCE PCE‐1 ICE‐312

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To introduce the fundamentals of solar energy conversion and familiarize with solar PV and Solar
thermal systems
2. To familiarize with the wind resource and hydropower, principles of conversion and technologies
3. To familiarize with the biomass resource, appropriate conversion technology for the given biomass
resource and end use
4. To introduce design of solar PV system and wind power system
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Understand the fundamentals of solar energy, wind energy conversion and familiarize with biomass
resource, hydropower and ocean power technology
CO 2 Identify an appropriate conversion technology for the given biomass resource & end use.
CO 3 Analyse the PV systems performance based on performance indices
CO 4 Design maximum power point circuit for solar PV system and wind turbine system
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 ‐ ‐ 2 ‐ 3
CO 2 3 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 ‐ ‐ 2 ‐ 3
CO 3 3 3 2 2 ‐ ‐ 3 ‐ 2 3 2 3
CO 4 3 3 3 3 ‐ ‐ 3 ‐ 3 3 3 3

Unit I

Solar PV and Solar Thermal Energy : Solar Energy: radiation – extra terrestrial, spectral distribution, solar
radiation on earth, measurements; solar thermal system – solar thermal power and its conversion, solar
collectors, flat plate, solar concentrating collectors, Solar Photovoltaic (PV) technology ‐ photovoltaic effect,
efficiency of solar cells, semi‐conductor materials, solar PV system, characteristics of photovoltaic (PV) systems,
PV models and equivalent circuits, Efficiency of Solar cell

Unit II

Wind Energy harvesting: Fundamentals of Wind energy , characteristics and measurement, Wind energy
conversion principles, Forces of the Blades, meteorology of wind, world distribution of wind, wind speed
variation with height, Types of a wind turbine generator unit, Horizontal axis propeller type wind turbine

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 810
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

generator, Advantages and drawbacks

Small Hydropower Energy: Overview of small, mini and micro hydro power plants and their resource
assessment, Structural parts of Hydropower Station

Unit III

Other Non‐conventional Energy Sources

Biomass: Biomass resources, types, production, classification and characterization; Techniques for biomass
assessment. Concept of Waste segregation, management and treatment. thermo‐chemical biomass conversion
to energy, gasification, Biological Conversion: Biodegradation substrate; Anaerobic digestion‐biogas production
Ocean and Tidal Energy – Principle of ocean thermal energy conversion, wave energy conversion machines,
problems and limitations, fundamentals of tidal power, conversion systems and limitations;
Hydrogen Energy – properties of hydrogen, sources, production and storage, transportation, problems for use
as fuel; fuel cells – introduction with types, principle of operation and advantages.

Unit IV

Design of Solar PV System and Wind System

Solar PV system: Maximizing the solar PV output, and load matching, Design of maximum power point tracker
Design of Wind Turbine: Wind turbine design considerations; Horizontal axis machines, vertical axis machines,
grid‐connected systems –types, topology, characteristics, fixed speed and variable speed systems, Role of non‐
conventional energy system in smart grid.

Textbook(s):
1. Non‐Conventional Energy Sources, G.D.Rai, NewDelhi.
2. Fundamentals of Renewable Energy Resources by G.N.Tiwari, M.K.Ghosal, Narosa Pub., 2007.

References:
1. Solar Energy Principles, Thermal Collection &Storage, S.P.Sukhatme: Tata McGraw Hill Pub., NewDelhi.
2. Non‐Conventional Energy Resources by B.H. Khan, Tata McGraw Hill Pub., 2009.
3. Renewable Energy, power for a sustainable future, Godfrey Boyle,2004,

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 811
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Energy Storage Systems in Microgrids L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 6 MT‐EAE MT‐EAE‐1 MT‐312T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To impart the introductory knowledge of energy storage systems and microgrids.
2. To impart the knowledge of energy storage systems
3. To impart the knowledge of battery energy storage system
4. To impart the knowledge of pumped hydropower energy storage
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 To understand the introductory knowledge of energy storage systems and microgrids.
CO 2 To understand the knowledge of energy storage systems
CO 3 To understand the knowledge of battery energy storage systems
CO 4 To understand the knowledge of pumped hydropower energy storage systems
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 2 2 2 1 3
CO 2 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 2 2 2 1 3
CO 3 3 3 2 3 2 3 1 2 2 2 1 3
CO 4 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 2 2 2 1 3

UNIT‐I

Introduction to Microgrids: Basic concept of microgrid, operation of microgrids in grid connected and isolated
mode, emerging and future microgrids, issues and challenges to renewable energy systems, distributed power
generation – need and contribution, applications of energy storage systems in renewable energy microgrids,
interfacing between an energy storage system and a microgrid.

UNIT‐II

Energy Storage Systems: Scope of energy storage, need and opportunities of energy storage, basic principle of
energy storage, classification and key disciplines, introduction to various energy storage systems and their
technological overview, importance of energy storage systems in renewable power generation.

UNIT‐III

Battery Energy Storage Systems: Fundamental concept of batteries, battery performance, charging and

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 812
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

discharging of a battery, storage density, energy density, safety issues, advantages and disadvantages of
battery energy storage. Introduction to (i) Lead‐Acid (ii) Nickel‐Cadmium, (iii) Zinc Manganese dioxide, and
modern batteries: (i) Zinc‐Air (ii) Nickel Hydride, (iii) Lithium Battery. Battery energy storage in solar and wind
energy microgrids.

UNIT‐IV

Pumped Hydropower Energy Storage: Basic principle, constructional details, benefits and drawbacks,
comparison with battery energy storage, pumped hydropower storage in solar and wind energy microgrids,
microgrids with hybrid energy storage systems and their benefits. Use of power electronic converters in energy
storage systems.

Textbook(s):
1. Huggins, Robert ‘Energy Storage’, Springer, 2010
2. David Wenzhong Gao, “Energy Storage for Sustainable Microgrid”, Science Direct, 2015.

References:
1. Ter‐Gazarian ‘Energy Storage for Power Systems’, Institution of Engineering and Technology, 1994.
2. Sandeep Dhundhara, Yajvender Pal Verma, “Energy Storage for Modern Power System Operations” 1st Ed.
September 2021 Wiley

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 813
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Energy Storage Systems in Microgrids Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 6 MT‐EAE MT‐EAE‐1 MT‐312P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Energy Storage Systems in Microgrids)
as this is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. To design and study the performance of a microgrid consisting of solar photovoltaic and battery energy
storage.
2. To conduct the study of the operation of microgrid under various load conditions using Matlab Simmulink.
3. To study the effect of change in wind speed and pitch angle on the operation of DC Microgrid system using
Matlab/Simulink.
4. To study the series‐parallel behaviour of different PV panels for a stand‐alone microgrid
5. To study and plot the state of charge characteristics of a battery at rated load
6. To determine the system performance of a wind energy microgrid with battery energy storage using
Matlab/Simulink.
7. To determine the system performance of a solar energy microgrid with battery energy storage using
Matlab/Simulink.
8. To determine the system performance of a wind energy microgrid with pumped hydropower storage using
Matlab/Simulink.
9. To evaluate the system performance of a hybrid wind and solar energy microgrid with Battery energy
storage using Matlab/Simulink.
10. To evaluate the system performance with three renewable sources connected together to form a microgrid
with battery storage using Matlab/Simulink.
11. To conduct the study of the effect of changes in solar irradiation on the operation of a solar energy
microgrid system.
12. To study the buck and boost mode of operation of bidirectional converter in the battery back‐up system

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 814
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Energy Systems and Technologies L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 6 TES‐EAE TES‐EAE‐2 TES‐332T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To understand the fundamentals of energy, energy resources and analyze the thermal energy systems.
2. To learn the fundamentals of different energy storage devices.
3. To learn the fundamentals of different fuel cells.
4. To design and develop zero energy buildings.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Understand the basics of energy, energy sources and analyze the thermal energy systems.
CO 2 Learn the fundamentals of different energy storage devices.
CO 3 Learn the fundamentals of different fuel cells.
CO 4 Design and development of zero energy buildings.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 2 ‐ ‐ 2 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 3
CO 2 3 2 2 ‐ ‐ 2 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 3
CO 3 3 2 2 ‐ ‐ 2 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 3
CO 4 3 2 2 ‐ ‐ 2 3 ‐ ‐‐ ‐ ‐ 3

UNIT‐I

Basics of Energy: Major sectors of energy consumption and standard of living, classification of energy
resources: classification of Energy Sources, Common forms of energy, environmental aspects of energy,
Consumption trend of India’s and world’s energy resources, developments in renewable energy Sector.
Thermal energy systems: cogeneration: cogeneration system of Rankine and vapor compression cycle,
cogeneration system of Brayton and vapor absorption cycle, their construction, working, and thermodynamic
analysis.

UNIT‐II

Energy storage: necessity of energy storage; energy storage methods; mechanical energy storage: pumped
storage, compressed air storage, flywheel storage; chemical energy storage: battery storage, hydrogen storage,
reversible chemical reaction storage; Thermal energy storage: sensible heat storage, latent heat storage,
biological storage.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 815
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT‐III

Fuel cell: Definition, working principle of a fuel cell, fuel cell characteristics, fuel cell efficiency, classification of
fuel cells: phosphoric acid fuel cell, alkaline fuel cell, moltencarbonate fuel cells, polymer electrolyte membrane
(PEM) fuel cells, solid oxide fuel cell, performance and limitations.

UNIT ‐ IV

Zero Energy Buildings: Definitions, concepts, classification, advantages and disadvantages, zero energy building
vs green building, Building performance metrics, net zero retrofits for existing buildings, data on zero energy
building worldwide, technologies and applications: Building Integrated Photovoltaic System (BIPV), Solar
Thermal Collectors (STC), Building‐Integrated Wind Turbine (BIWT), Rooftop PV System, Ground‐Mounted Solar
Panels, Geothermal Heat Pumps (GHP), Combined Heat and Power (CHP) system, LED Lighting, etc.

Textbook(s):
1. Chauhan, D.S., “Non‐Conventional Energy Resources”, New Age International PvtLtd. (2006).
2. Khan, B. H., “Non‐conventional energy resources”, Mc Graw Hill (2012).
3. Moran, M. J., Shapiro, H. N., “Fundamentals of Engineering Thermodynamics”, John Wiley & Sons (2014).
4. Attia S., “Net Zero Energy Buildings (NZEB): Concepts, Frameworks and Roadmap for Project Analysis and
Implementation”, Butterworth‐Heinemann (2018).

References:
1. Sorensen B., “Renewable Energy” Second Edition, Academic Press, 2000.
2. Soli J. Arceivala, “Green Technologies for a better Future”, McGraw Hill Education (India) Private Ltd., New
Delhi, 2014.
3. Asdrubali, F., Desideri U., “Handbook of Energy Efficiency in Buildings”, Butterworth‐Heinemann (2018).
4. Nag, P. K., “Engineering Thermodynamics”, Mc Graw Hill Education (2017).

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 816
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Energy Systems and Technologies Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 6 TES‐EAE TES‐EAE‐2 TES‐332P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Energy Systems and Technologies) as
this is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Study different renewable energy utilization techniques.

2. Study and compare different biomass based fuels.
3. Carry out exergy analysis of an Rankine cycle using suitable software.
4. Carry out exergy analysis of a cogeneration system using suitable software.
5. Carry out optimization of a Rankine system.
6. Carry out optimization of a cogeneration system.
7. Carry out exergy and environmental analysis of a refrigeration cycle.
8. Study the effect of design variable on the emission of greenhouse gases for the refrigeration system.
9. Visit to net zero energy building.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 817
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Engineering Optimization L P C
4 4

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CSE/CST 6 PCE PCE‐1 CIE‐312
ECE 7 PCE PCE‐4 ECE‐415

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. This course will expose students to operations research modelling and essential tools for optimization.
2. Analyse models using optimization techniques based upon the fundamentals of engineering
mathematics
3. The stochastic models for discrete and continuous variables to control inventory and simulation for
decision making.
4. Formulation of mathematical models for quantitative analysis of managerial problems in industry.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 To Identify appropriate optimization method to solve complex problems involved in various industries.
CO 2 To Find the appropriate algorithm for resource management using mathematical foundations.
CO 3 To Explain the theoretical workings of the analytical methods for making effective decision on
variables so as to optimize the objective function.
CO 4 To Apply the knowledge of modern methods of meta‐heuristic concepts to articulate real‐world
competitive situations to identify strategic decisions to counter the consequences.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 1 1 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 2 2 2 ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 3 2 1 ‐ 2 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 4 2 1 ‐ 2 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2

UNIT‐I

Introduction to Optimization: Engineering application of Optimization – Statement of an Optimization problem

– Optimal Problem formulation – Classification of Optimization problem. Definition of Global and Local optima
– Optimality criteria.

UNIT‐II

Optimization algorithms for solving unconstrained optimization problems – Gradient based method: Cauchy’s
steepest descent method, Newton’s method, Conjugate gradient method.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 818
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT‐III

Optimization algorithms for solving constrained optimization problems – direct methods – penalty function
methods – steepest descent method – Engineering applications of constrained and unconstrained algorithms.

UNIT ‐ IV

Modern methods of Optimization: Genetic Algorithms – Simulated Annealing – Ant colony optimization – Tabu
search – Neural‐Network based Optimization – Fuzzy optimization techniques

Textbook(s):
1. Rao S. S., ‘Engineering Optimization: Theory and Practice’, New Age Publishers , 2012, 4th Ed

References:
1. Deb K., ‘Optimization for Engineering Design Algorithms and Examples’, PHI, 2000
2. Arora J., ‘Introduction to Optimization Design’, Elsevier Academic Press, New Delhi, 2004
3. Saravanan R., ‘Manufacturing Optimization through Intelligent Techniques’, Taylor & Francis (CRC Press),
2006
4. Hardley G., ‘Linear Programming’, Narosa Book Distributors Private Ltd., 2002

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 819
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Environmental Engineering ‐ II L P C
4 4

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CE 5 PC PC CEC‐309

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To analyse the Physical, Chemical and Biological characteristics of wastewater.
2. To understand various processes of disposal of sewage.
3. Able to differentiate various unit operations and processes with design applications.
4. To explain municipal solid waste sources, its characteristics and treatment options.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Analyse the Physical, Chemical and Biological characteristics of wastewater.
CO 2 Understand various processes of disposal of sewage.
CO 3 Differentiate various unit operations and processes with design applications.
CO 4 Explain municipal solid waste sources, its characteristics and treatment options.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 1 3 2 3 0 0 2 0 0 0 1 0
CO 2 2 1 3 3 2 1 1 0 1 1 1 2
CO 3 1 2 3 3 2 1 0 0 0 1 1 1
CO 4 2 1 1 2 2 1 2 0 1 1 1 1

UNIT‐I

Sewerage systems and their components: Introduction to sewerage system, Estimation of sewerage and
drainage discharge, Dry weather flow, capacity of sewers, self‐cleansing and non‐scouring velocities,
calculations of sizes and grades, forms and cross sections of sewers, hydraulic characteristics of circular sewer
sections, egg shaped sewers, systems of drainage, separate, combined and partially combined systems.
Quality and characteristics of sewage: physical, chemical and biological characteristics of sewage, Aerobic and
anaerobic decomposition of sewage, nitrogen, sulphur and carbon cycles, population equivalent, relative
stability.

UNIT‐II

Disposal of Sewage Effluents: Disposal of treated / untreated / partially treated effluents in natural water
bodies, Self‐purification of stream, Standard for effluent disposal on land, Disposal by land treatment / sewage
farming methods, sewage sickness and its preventive measures, Treatment standards for sewage effluents.
Primary Treatment of Wastewater: Types of treatment units in primary treatment, their functions and
efficiencies, analysis and design of screening, grit chambers, detritus tank, skimming tanks and primary

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 820
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

sedimentation tank.

UNIT III

Secondary Treatment of Wastewater: Concepts of Biological treatment and removal mechanism, Aerobic and
Anaerobic systems, analysis and design of attached and suspended growth systems like–trickling filter,
Rotatory biological contractor, activated sludge process, septic tank, upflow anaerobic sludge blanket reactor
(UASB), Imhoff tank, and oxidation pond; secondary sedimentation tank.
Sludge Thickening and Sludge Digestion: Sludge characteristics, sludge volume and solids relationships,
Aerobic and anaerobic digestion, Factors affecting sludge digestion and their control, disposal of digested
sludge.

UNIT IV

Municipal Solid Wastes and its Disposal: Sources and collection of municipal solid wastes, characteristics of
solid wastes, treatment and disposal–sanitary landfilling method, composting, incineration, thermal pyrolysis,
dumping in to the sea, pulverisation and shredding, autoclaving.

Textbook(s):
1. S.K. Garg, Sewage Disposal and Air Pollution Engineering (Environmental Engineering Vol.‐II).
2. Dr. B.C. Punmia, Ashok Kr. Jain, Arun Kr. Jain, Wastewater Engineering, Laxmi Publications.

References:
1. Metcalf and Eddy, Wastewater Engineering: Treatment and Reuse, Tata McGraw‐Hill, New Delhi.
2. G L Karia and R A Christian, Wastewater Treatment Concepts and Design Approach, Prentice Learning
Private Ltd., New Delhi.
3. Manuel of Sewerage and Sewage Treatment, CPH and EE organization, Ministry of Works and Housing,
Govt. of India, New Delhi, 2006.
4. S R Qasim, and G Zhu, Wastewater Treatment and Reuse, CRC Press, Taylor and Francis Group, New York.
5. M L Davis, Water and Wastewater Engineering, McGraw‐Hill, New Delhi.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 821
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Environmental Engineering Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CE 5 PC PC CEC‐357

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Environmental Engineering) as this is
the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. To determine pH, turbidity, electrical conductivity of the given sample.

2. To determine the total hardness, calcium and magnesium in the given sample.
3. To find the amount of Fluoride, Sulfate, iron and manganese in the given sample.
4. To determine the optimum coagulant dose quantity for a given sample of raw water.
5. To determine chlorine demand and residual chlorine.
6. To determine the most probable number [MPN] of coli‐forms of the given sample.
7. To determine the solids [total, suspended and dissolved] of the given sample
8. To find out total settle‐able solids [by Imhoff Cone] in the given wastewater sample.
9. To estimate the amount of dissolved oxygen present in the given wastewater sample.
10. To estimate the value of biochemical oxygen demand [BOD] in the given water sample/sewage sample.
11. To find out chemical oxygen demand [COD] of the given wastewater sample.
12. Field visit of water/sewage treatment plant.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 822
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Environmental Impact Assessment L P C

4 4

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CE 6 PCE PCE‐1 CEE‐310

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To Define and Classify Environmental Impacts and the terminology
2. To Understand the environmental Impact assessment procedure
3. To Explain the EIA methodology
4. To List and describe environmental audits
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Identify the environmental attributes to be considered for the EIA study
CO 2 Formulate objectives of the EIA studies
CO 3 Identify the methodology to prepare rapid EIA
CO 4 Prepare EIA reports and environmental management plans
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 1 ‐ ‐ 2 ‐ 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 ‐
CO 2 ‐ 1 ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 1 ‐ 1
CO 3 ‐ 3 1 ‐ 1 ‐ 2 ‐ 1 1 ‐ ‐
CO 4 ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ 1 ‐ 1 ‐ 2 ‐ 1 3

UNIT‐I

Introduction: The Need for EIA, Indian Policies Requiring EIA, The EIA Cycle and Procedures, Screening, Scoping,
Baseline Data, Impact Prediction, Assessment of Alternatives, Delineation of Mitigation Measure and EIA
Report, Public Hearing, Decision Making, Monitoring the Clearance Conditions, Components of EIA, Roles in the
EIA Process. Government of India Ministry of Environment and Forest Notification (2000), List of projects
requiring Environmental clearance, Composition of Expert Committee, Ecological sensitive places, International
agreements.

UNIT‐II

EIA Methodologies: Environmental attributes‐Criteria for the selection of EIA methodology, impact
identification, impact measurement, impact interpretation & Evaluation, impact communication, Methods‐Ad
Hoc methods, Checklists methods, Matrices methods, Networks methods, Overlays methods. EIA review‐
Baseline Conditions ‐Construction Stage Impacts, post project impacts.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 823
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT‐III

Environmental Management Plan: Environment Management Plan Preparation, Monitoring of Environmental

Management Plan, Identification of Significant or Unacceptable Impacts Requiring Mitigation, Mitigation Plans
and Relief & Rehabilitation, Stipulating the Conditions, Monitoring Methods, Pre‐ Appraisal and Appraisal.
Preparation of EIA for developmental projects‐ Factors to be considered in making assessment decisions.

UNIT – IV

Environmental Legislation and Life cycle Assessment: Environmental laws and protection acts, Constitutional
provisions‐powers and functions of Central and State government, The Environment (Protection) Act 1986, The
Water Act 1974, The Air act 1981, Wild Life act 1972, Guidelines for control of noise, loss of biodiversity, solid
and Hazardous waste management rules.
Life cycle assessment: Life cycle analysis, Methodology, Management, Flow of materials‐cost criteria‐ case
studies.

Textbook(s):
1. Barthwal, R. R., Environmental Impact Assessment, New Age International Publishers, 2002
2. Anjaneyulu. Y and Manickam. V., Environmental Impact Assessment Methodologies, B.S. Publications,
2007

References:
1. Jain, R.K., Urban, L.V., Stracy, G.S., Environmental Impact Analysis, Van Nostrand Reinhold Co., 1991.
2. Rau, J.G. and Wooten, D.C., Environmental Impact Assessment, McGraw Hill Pub. Co., 1996.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 824
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Ethical Hacking L P C
3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CSE‐CS 7 PC PC CS‐425T
EAE 7 CS‐EAE CS‐EAE‐5 CS‐425T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To acquire knowledge on about various security threats that exists and can be exploited.
2. To learn how bots, botnets, viruses, worms, Trojans, DOS attacks, DDOS attacks etc. work and are
utilized for hacking.
3. To learn various ethical laws that exist in India and abroad and their significance.
4. To understand how loopholes and potential risks can be detected and learn wide variety of solutions
that can be applied to protect data and networks.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Ability of students to understand concepts of Ethical hacking tools and techniques.
CO 2 Ability of students to learn aspects of security, importance of data gathering, foot printing and system
hacking.
CO 3 Ability of students to learn and analyze advanced concepts such as DDoS Attacks, Buffer Overflows,
SQL Injection, Cross Site Scripting, Virus Creation.
CO 4 Apply and use ethical hacking techniques to real world problems.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 2 ‐ 2 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ 1 2 2 2
CO 2 3 2 2 2 1 1 ‐ ‐ 1 2 2 2
CO 3 3 2 1 1 1 2 ‐ ‐ 1 2 2 2
CO 4 3 2 1 1 1 2 ‐ ‐ 1 2 2 2

UNIT‐I

Introduction to Ethical Hacking, Hacking Laws, Foot‐printing, Reconnaissance,, Scanning,System hacking Cycle,
Enumeration, Cracking Password, Types of password attacks, Trojans and Backdoors, Types of Trojans, Viruses,
Worms, Rootkits.

UNIT‐II

Sniffers, Types of Sniffing, Phishing, Methods of Phishing, Types of Phishing Attacks, Process of Phishing, Denial
of Service, Classification of DoS attacks, Bots and Botnets, Botnets Life Cycle, System and Network
Vulnerability.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 825
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT‐III

Ping of Death attack, Session Hijacking, Spoofing vs Hijacking, Session Hijacking Levels, Network Level Hijacking,
3 way handshake, IP Spoofing, RST Hijacking, TCP/IP Hijacking, SQL Injection, Cross Site Scripting.

UNIT – IV

Dark web, Darknet and Tor ,Layers of Web, Uses of Deep Web, Ethical use of Darknet, How to access Darknet
safely, Accessing the Deep Web Authentication: RSA Secur ID Token, Biometrics, Hacking Wireless Networks,
Tools for ethical hacking.

Textbook(s):
1. S. McClure, J. Scambray and G. Kurtz, Hacking Exposed 7: Network Security Secrets & Solutions, Tata Mc
Graw Hill Publishers, 3rd ed., 2012.
2. Sean‐Philip Oriyano, CEH v9: Certified Ethical Hacker Version 9, 1st Ed., Wiley & Sons, 2016.

References:
1. M.T. Simpson, N. Antill, “Hands‐On Ethical Hacking and Network Defense”, 3rd Ed., Cengage Learning ,
2016
2. Rafay Baloch, “A Beginners Guide to Ethical Hacking”, 1st Ed., CRC Press, 2014

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 826
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Ethical Hacking Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CSE‐CS 7 PC PC CS‐425P
EAE 7 CS‐EAE CS‐EAE‐5 CS‐425P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Ethical Hacking) as this is the practical
component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Introduction to ethical hacking. Fundamentals of computer networking. TCP/IP protocol stack.

2. Setup a honey pot and monitor the honey pot on network
3. Write a script or code to demonstrate SQL injection attacks
4. Create a social networking website login page using phishing techniques
5. Write a code to demonstrate DoS attacks
6. Install rootkits and study variety of options
7. Study of Techniques uses for Web Based Password Capturing.
8. Install jcrypt tool (or any other equivalent) and demonstrate Asymmetric, Symmetric Crypto algorithm,
Hash and Digital/PKI signatures studied in theory Network Security And Management
9. Implement Passive scanning, active scanning, session hizaking, cookies extraction using Burp suit tool
10. Case studies: various attacks scenarios and their remedies.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 827
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

EV Charging Infrastructure Technology L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 7 EV‐EAE EV‐EAE‐3 EV‐413T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To impart the basics of energy storage system and charging technologies.
2. To impart the knowledge different types of EV chargers.
3. To impart the knowledge EVSE Power Module selection and technical specification.
4. To impart the knowledge of EV Charging Infrastructure.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 To understand the different charging technologies.
CO 2 To understand the different types of chargers.
CO 3 Understand the EVSE modules and their selection.
CO 4 To understand EV charging infrastructure’s principle, objective, and selection.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 ‐ 2 1 ‐ 2
CO 2 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 ‐ 2 1 ‐ 2
CO 3 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 ‐ 2 1 ‐ 2
CO 4 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 ‐ 2 1 ‐ 2

UNIT I

Introduction: Introduction to Energy Storage Requirements in Hybrid and Electric Vehicles ‐ Battery based
energy storage ‐ Fuel Cell based energy storage ‐ Super Capacitor based energy storage ‐ Fly wheel based
energy storage.
Charging Methods: Electric Vehicle Technology and Charging Equipment’s, Basic charging Block Diagram of
Charger, Difference between Slow charger and fast charger, Slow charger design rating, Fast charger design
rating

UNIT II

Types of Chargers: AC charging and DC charging ‐ On board and off board charger specification ‐ Type of Mode
of charger Mode 2, Mode 3 and Mode 4 ‐ Electric vehicle supply equipment (EVSE) associated charging time
calculation ‐ Selection and sizing of fast and slow charger (AC & DC) ‐ AC Pile Charger, DC Pile Charger.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 828
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT III

EVSE Power Module Selection and Technical Specification ‐ Selection of EVSE Communication Protocol (PLC /
Ethernet / Modbus/ CAN Module ) ‐ Communication gateway ‐ Specification of open charge point protocol
(OCCP 1.6/2.0) ‐ Bharat DC001 & AC001 Charger specification ‐ Communication Interface between charger and
CMS ( Central Management System) – Payment apps.

UNIT IV

The EV Charging Infrastructure (EVCI): The critical role of EVCI to enable massive EV adoption;
interdependence and interactions of EVCI with existing infrastructures; principal objectives in the
establishment of EVCI; role of renewable and storage resources and their effective integration; location,
planning and implementation of EVCI stations; current EV charging providers and their business models;
identified gaps and major challenges; policy and regulatory aspects

Textbook(s):
1. Iqbal Hussein, Electric and Hybrid Vehicles: Design Fundamentals, CRC Press, 2010.
2. Dr.Yogini Dilip Borole, DR. V. Shanmugasundram, ‘Electric Vehicle Adoption to Revolutionize Automobile
Sector’, IIP press, 2021.

References:
1. Michael Plint& Anthony Martyr, “Engine Testing & Practice”, Butterworth Heinmenn, 3rd ed, 2007

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 829
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

EV Charging Infrastructure Technology Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 7 EV‐EAE EV‐EAE‐3 EV‐413P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (EV Charging Infrastructure Technology)
as this is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. To create a basic Electric Vehicle model using MATLAB/Simulink‐ Powertrain Blocksets

2. To create a basic Electric Vehicle model using MATLAB/Simulink‐ Driver Controller
3. To create a basic Electric Vehicle model using MATLAB/Simulink‐ Power Converter
4. To create a basic Electric Vehicle model using MATLAB/Simulink‐ Vehicle body
5. To create a basic Electric Vehicle model using MATLAB/Simulink‐ SOC (Stage of Charge)
6. To create a basic Electric Vehicle model using MATLAB/Simulink‐ Output circuit
7. To create complete Electric vehicle model and perform simulation various drive cycles.
8. To Model batteries and develop battery management systems (BMS).
9. To Model traction motors and develop Motor Control Units (MCU).
10. To Model fuel cell systems (FCS) and develop fuel cell control systems (FCCS)
11. Induction Motor Mathematical Modelling In MATLAB Simulink
12. Passive Cell Balancing Of Three Lithium‐ion Cells For Electric Vehicle Projects
13. Capacitor Based Active Cell Balancing Of Four(4) Lithium‐Ion Cells

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 830
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Evolutionary Computation L P C
3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CSE‐AI 7 PC PC AI‐407T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To understand Evolutionary Algorithms in the context of meta‐heuristics
2. To understand Evolutionary Algorithm’s important parametric components
3. To learn to formulate a given problem as an optimization problem and apply EAs
4. To understand and appreciate the state‐of‐the‐art research in EC
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 To Formulate a given problem amenable for evolutionary optimization/search
CO 2 To analyse and apply appropriate evolutionary algorithms for a given problem
CO 3 To Analyse the state‐of‐the‐art evolutionary computation research literature and apply them for
solving dynamic problems
CO 4 To Design suitable evolutionary algorithms for a real world application
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 1 1 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 2 2 2 ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 3 2 1 ‐ 2 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 4 2 1 ‐ 2 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2

UNIT‐I

Introduction to Evolutionary Computation – Evolutionary Algorithms (Genetic Algorithms, Genetic

Programming, Differential Evolution, Evolution Strategies, Covariance Matrix Adaptation etc.) – Different
Components of Evolutionary Algorithms.

UNIT‐II

Fitness Landscapes – Adaptive Parameter Control and Tuning – Constraint Handling – Niching and Fitness
Sharing – Memetic Algorithms – Ensemble Evolutionary Algorithms

UNIT‐III

Multi‐Objective Optimization – Hyper‐Heuristics – Special Forms of Evolution (Co‐evolution and Speciation) –

Theoretical Analysis of Evolutionary Algorithms – Interactive Evolutionary Algorithms –

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 831
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT ‐ IV

Evolutionary Machine Learning – Surrogate Assisted Optimization –NeuroEvolution‐Open Ended Evolution.

Applications of Evolutionary Algorithms

Textbook(s):
1. E. Eiben and J. E. Smith, “An Introduction to Evolutionary Computing”, Natural Computing Series, Springer,
2nd Edition, 2015.

References:
1. Eyal Wirsansky, “Hands‐On Genetic Algorithms with Python: Applying Genetic Algorithms to Solve Real‐
World Deep Learning and Artificial Intelligence Problems”, Packt Publishing, 2020.
2. Iaroslav Omelianenko, “Hands‐on Neuroevolution with Python: Build HighPerforming Artificial Neural
Network Architectures using Neuroevolution‐based Algorithm”, Packt Publishing, 2019.
3. Slim Bechikh, Rituparna Datta and Abhishek Gupta (Eds.), “Recent Advances in Evolutionary Multi‐
objective Optimization”, Adaptation, Learning, and Optimization Book – 20, Springer, 2017.
4. Nelishia Pillay and Rong Qu, “Hyper‐Heuristics: Theory and Applications”, Springer, 2018.
5. Hitoshi Iba, “Evolutionary Approach to Machine Learning and Deep Neural Networks: Neuro‐Evolution and
Gene Regulatory Networks”, Springer, 2018.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 832
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Evolutionary Computation Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CSE‐AI 7 PC PC AI‐407P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Evolutionary Computation) as this is
the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

Case study based experimentation to be followed for all the experiments.

1. Deep Neural Network Architecture Search: Discover optimal architectures for deep neural networks,
improving their performance on tasks like image recognition and natural language processing.
2. Swarm Robotics: To optimize the collective behaviour of swarms of robots, enabling them to coordinate
and perform tasks efficiently, such as cooperative transport or exploration missions.
3. Automated Machine Learning: Study the process of machine learning, including feature selection, hyper‐
parameter tuning, and model selection, making it easier for non‐experts to apply machine learning
algorithms effectively.
4. Energy Management in Smart Grids: Study to optimize energy management in smart grids, facilitating
demand‐response scheduling, load balancing, and renewable energy integration.
5. Drug Discovery: To study and analyse molecules for drug discovery, accelerating the identification of
potential candidates with desired properties and reducing the time and cost of the development process.
6. Cybersecurity: To optimize intrusion detection systems, network security protocols, and malware detection
algorithms, enhancing the ability to detect and respond to cyber threats.
7. Multi‐Objective Optimization: To solve multi‐objective optimization problems in various domains,
including, resource allocation, and decision‐making.
8. Traffic Signal Control: Study to optimize traffic signal timings and control strategies, improving traffic flow,
reducing congestion, and minimizing travel time in urban areas.
9. Renewable Energy System Design: Understand and study to optimize the design and placement of
renewable energy systems, such as solar panels and wind turbines, maximizing energy generation and
minimizing costs.
10. Supply Chain Optimization: Study to optimize supply chain networks, including inventory management,
distribution routing, and supplier selection, improving efficiency and reducing costs.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 833
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Exploratory Data Analytics and Data Visualization L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CSE‐DS 7 PC PC DS‐433T
EAE 7 DS‐EAE DS‐EAE‐5B DS‐433T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To understand the need for Data Mining and advantages to the business world.
2. To get a clear idea of various classes of Data Mining techniques, their need, scenarios (situations) and
scope of their applicability
3. To learn the algorithms used for various type of Data Mining problems
4. To understand how to explore and communicate data using data visualization techniques
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Describe the life cycle phases of Data Analytics through discovery, planning and building.
CO 2 Understand and apply Data Analysis Techniques.
CO 3 Implement various Data streams.
CO 4 Understand item sets, Clustering, frame works & Visualizations.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 ‐ 1 2 ‐ 3 ‐ 2 3 ‐ 1 ‐ ‐
CO 2 ‐ 1 2 ‐ 3 ‐ 2 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐
CO 3 ‐ 1 2 ‐ 2 ‐ 3 ‐ ‐ 1 ‐ ‐
CO 4 ‐ 2 2 ‐ 2 ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐

UNIT‐I

Introduction to Data Analytics: Sources and nature of data, classification of data (structured, semi‐structured,
unstructured), characteristics of data, introduction to Big Data platform, need of data analytics, evolution of
analytic scalability, analytic process and tools, analysis vs reporting, modern data analytic tools, applications of
data analytics. Data Analytics Lifecycle: Need, key roles for successful analytic projects, various phases of data
analytics lifecycle – discovery, data preparation, model planning, model building, communicating results, and
operationalization.

UNIT‐II

Data Analysis: Regression modeling, multivariate analysis, Bayesian modeling, inference and Bayesian
networks, support vector and kernel methods, analysis of time series: linear systems analysis & nonlinear
dynamics, rule induction, neural networks: learning and generalisation, competitive learning, principal

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 834
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

component analysis and neural networks, fuzzy logic: extracting fuzzy models from data, fuzzy decision trees,
stochastic search methods.

UNIT‐III

Mining Data Streams: Introduction to streams concepts, stream data model and architecture, stream
computing, sampling data in a stream, filtering streams, counting distinct elements in a stream, estimating
moments, counting oneness in a window, decaying window, Real‐time Analytics Platform ( RTAP) applications,
Case studies – real time sentiment analysis, stock market predictions.

UNIT – IV

Introduction to Visualization and Stages – Computational Support – Issues – Different Types of Tasks – Data
representation – Limitation: Display Space‐ Rendering Time – Navigation Links. Human Vision – Space
Limitation – Time Limitations – Design – Exploration of Complex Information Space – Figure Caption in Visual
Interface – Visual Objects and Data Objects ‐Space Perception and Data in Space – Images, Narrative and
Gestures for Explanation.

Textbook(s):
1. Michael Berthold, David J. Hand, Intelligent Data Analysis, Springer.
2. Jiawei Han, Micheline Kamber “Data Mining Concepts and Techniques”, Second Edition, ElsevierRobert

References:
1. Anand Rajaraman and Jeffrey David Ullman, Mining of Massive Datasets, Cambridge University Press.
2. David Dietrich, Barry Heller, Beibei Yang, “Data Science and Big Data Analytics”, John Wiley

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 835
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Exploratory Data Analytics and Data Visualization Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CSE‐DS 7 PC PC DS‐433P
EAE 7 DS‐EAE DS‐EAE‐5B DS‐433P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Exploratory Data Analytics and Data
Visualization) as this is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. To get the input from user and perform numerical operations (MAX, MIN, AVG, SUM, SQRT, ROUND) using
in R.
2. To perform data import/export (.CSV, .XLS, .TXT) operations using data frames in R.
3. To get the input matrix from user and perform Matrix addition, subtraction, multiplication, inverse
transpose and division operations using vector concept in R
4. To perform statistical operations (Mean, Median, Mode and Standard deviation) using R
5. To perform data pre‐processing operations i) Handling Missing data ii) Min‐Max normalization.
6. To perform dimensionality reduction operation using PCA for Houses Data Set
7. To perform Simple Linear Regression with R..
8. To perform K‐Means clustering operation and visualize for iris data set
9. Learn how to collect data via web‐scraping, APIs and data connectors from suitable sources as specified by
the instructor.
10. Perform association analysis on a given dataset and evaluate its accuracy

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 836
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Fabrication Technology L P C
3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ECE 6 PCE PCE‐2 ECE‐322T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To impart the knowledge of various processes of IC fabrication
2. To impart the knowledge of properties of semiconductor crystal.
3. To impart the knowledge of different methods used in VLSI fabrication process.
4. To impart the knowledge of process integration.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 To understand the properties of semiconductor crystal.
CO 2 To Analyse the fundamentals of IC fabrication.
CO 3 To understand the different methods used in VLSI fabrication process.
CO 4 To build the basic knowledge of process integration.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 2 2 1 3 1 ‐ ‐ 1 1 ‐ 1
CO 2 3 2 2 1 3 1 ‐ ‐ 1 1 ‐ 1
CO 3 3 2 2 1 3 1 ‐ ‐ 1 1 ‐ 1
CO 4 3 2 2 1 3 1 ‐ ‐ 1 1 ‐ 1

UNIT I

Introduction: History of IC’s; Operation & Models for Devices of Interest: CMOS and MEMS. Clean room and
Wafer Cleaning: Definition, Need of Clean Room, RCA cleaning of Si. Oxidation: Dry and Wet Oxidation, Kinetics
of Oxidation, Oxidation Rate Constants, Dopant Redistribution, Oxide Charges, Device Isolation, LOCOS,
Oxidation System.

UNIT II

Lithography: Overview of Lithography, Radiation Sources, Masks, Photoresist, Components of Photoresist

Optical Aligners, Resolution, Depth of Focus, Advanced Lithography: E‐beam Lithography, X‐ray Lithography,
Ion Beam Lithography. Diffusion: Pre‐Deposition and Drive‐in Diffusion Modelling, Dose, 2‐Step Diffusions,
Successive Diffusion, Lateral Diffusion, Series Resistance, Junction Depth, Irvin’s Curves, Diffusion System.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 837
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT III

Ion Implantation: Problems in Thermal Diffusion, Advantages of Ion Implantation, Applications in ICs, Ion
Implantation System, Mask, Energy Loss Mechanisms, Depth Profile, Range & Straggle, Lateral Straggle, Dose,
Junction Depth, Ion Implantation Damage, Post Implantation Annealing, Ion Channelling, Multi Energy
Implantation. Thin Film Deposition: Physical Vapor Deposition: Thermal evaporation, Resistive Evaporation,
Electron beam evaporation, Laser ablation, Sputtering Chemical Vapor Deposition: Advantages and
disadvantages of Chemical Vapor deposition (CVD) techniques over PVD techniques, reaction types, Boundaries
and Flow.

UNIT IV

Different kinds of CVD techniques: APCVD, LPCVD, Metal organic CVD (MOCVD), Plasma Enhanced CVD etc.
Etching: Anisotropy, Selectivity, Wet Etching, Plasma Etching, Reactive Ion Etching. Metallization/Interconnects:
Overview of Interconnects, Contacts, Metal gate/Poly Gate, Metallization, Problems in Aluminum Metal
contacts, Al spike, Electromigration, Metal Silicides, Multi‐Level Metallization, Planarization, Inter Metal
Dielectric. NMOS, CMOS process etc.

Textbook(s):
1. VLSI Technology, S. M. Sze, 2nd Edition, McGraw Hill, 2003.
2. Silicon Process Technology, S K Gandhi,2nd Edition, Wiley India,2009
3. Testing of Digital Systems, N. K. Jha and S. Gupta, 2nd, Cambridge University Press. 2003.

References:
1. Silicon VLSI Technology, Plummer, Deal and Griffin ,1st Edition, Pearson Education, 2009
2. Fundamental of Semiconductor Fabrication, Sze and May, 2nd Edition, Wiley India, 2000.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 838
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Fabrication Technology Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ECE 6 PCE PCE‐2 ECE‐322P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Fabrication Technology) as this is the
practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Design the layout of NMOS and PMOS.

2. Design layout of CMOS inverter using CMOS Technology.
3. Design layout of NAND/NOR structure using CMOS Technology.
4. Design layout of multiplexer using CMOS Technology.
5. Simulation and analysis of MOS Amplifier using CMOS Technology.
6. Simulation, Analysis and layout of Current Source using CMOS Technology
7. Simulation, Analysis and layout of Current Sink using CMOS Technology.
8. Simulation, Analysis and layout of Differential Amplifier using CMOS Technology.
9. Simulation, Analysis and layout of Current Mirror using CMOS Technology.
10. Simulation, Analysis and layout of MOS diode/ active resistor.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 839
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Finite Element Methods L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ME 6 PCE PCE‐1 MEE‐310T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To understand various fundamentals of Finite Element Analysis.
2. To understand the application of Finite Element Analysis in different types of discrete system.
3. To understand the formulation of Eigen value problem and boundary value problem.
4. To understand the applications of FEM in solving various structural problems.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Able to apply various fundamental concept of Finite Element Analysis.
CO 2 Able to apply Finite Element Analysis in different types of discrete system.
CO 3 Able to formulate and solve Eigen value problem and two dimensional single value problems.
CO 4 Able to perform structural analysis using Finite Element Analysis.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 3 3 ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 2 3 3 3 3 ‐ 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 3 3 3 3 3 ‐ 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 4 3 3 3 2 ‐ 3 ‐ ‐ ‐‐ ‐ ‐ 2

UNIT‐I

Basic of Finite Element Method, Variational calculus, Integral formulation, variational methods: Methods of
weighted residuals, Approximate solution using variational method, Modified Galerkin method, Boundary
conditions.
Basic Finite Element Concepts: Basic ideas in a finite element solution, General finite element solution
procedure, Finite element equations using modified Galerkin method, Axis symmetric Problems .

UNIT‐II

Discrete System: Axial spring element, Axial bars, Torsion bars, Application in Heat transfer and Solid Mechanic
Problems, Plane truss problem, software application ANSYS etc.
Beam: Euler Beam element and its application.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 840
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT‐III

Eigen value problems: Formulation and problems

Single value problem in 2D: Boundary value problem, axis symmetric problems

UNIT – IV

Numerical on 2D Solid mechanics, Interpolation function (triangular, Quadrilateral, serendipity elements),

numerical integration and modelling consideration.

Textbook(s):
1. J N Reddy “An Introduction to finite element method” Tata Mc Graw Hill 3rd edition.
2. S.S. Rao, “Finite Element Method In Engineering”, Pergaman Press.

References:
1. O.C. ZienKiewicz, “The Finite Element Method”, Tata McGraw Hill.
2. Larry J. Segerlind, “Applied Finite‐Element Analysis”, John Wiley and Sons.
3. Kenneth H. Huebner, “Finite Element Method for Engineers”, John Wiley and Sons.
4. Darell W. Pepper, J.C Heinrich “The Finite Element Method” CRC press.
5. V.Ramamurti “Finite Element Method in Machine Design”Norosa Publishing House.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 841
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Finite Element Methods Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ME 6 PCE PCE‐1 MEE‐310P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Finite Element Methods) as this is the
practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Force and stress analysis using link elements in Trusses.

2. Stress and deflection analysis in beams with different support conditions.
3. Stress analysis of axi‐symmetric components.
4. Stress analysis of flat plates.
5. Stress analysis of flat plates and simple shells.
6. Thermal stress and heat transfer analysis of plate.
7. Thermal stress analysis of cylindrical shells.
8. Thermal stress analysis of spherical shells.
9. Vibration analysis of spring‐mass systems.
10. Model analysis of beams.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 842
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Flexible AC Transmission System L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 7 PS‐EAE PS‐EAE‐4 PS‐433T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To impart knowledge of various FACTS devices which are used for proper operation of AC system.
2. To understand the techniques of practical FACTS controller design for various applications.
3. To impart knowledge of the operating principles, control system of different FACTS controllers.
4. To understand the various advanced FACTS controllers used in power system and its applications.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Ability to understand the concepts of FACTS and compensation in transmission line.
CO 2 Ability to understand the basic VAR compensator and its application.
CO 3 Ability to understand the static series controller and its applications.
CO 4 Ability to understand various types of power controllers in transmission system.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 2 1 2 3 1 1 1 2 2 3 3
CO 2 3 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 3 3 3
CO 3 3 2 1 2 2 1 2 1 1 3 3 3
CO 4 3 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 3 3

UNIT‐I

FACTS Concepts:Transmission, Interconnection, Flow of Power in AC system, Power Flow and Dynamic Stability
Consideration of a Transmission Interconnection, Relative Importance of Controllable Parameters, Real and
Reactive PowerControl in Electrical Power Transmission Lines–Loads & System Compensation‐Uncompensated
TransmissionLine–Shunt and Series Compensation.

UNIT‐II

Static Shunt Compensator and Applications:Objectives of Shunt Compensation, Mid‐Point VoltageRegulation,

Voltage Instability Prevention, Improvement of Transient Stability, Power Oscillation Damping, Methods of
Controllable VAR Generation, Variable Impedance Type Static VAR Generators Switching ConverterType VAR
Generators Hybrid VAR Generators.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 843
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT‐III

Static Series Compensator and Applications:Concept of Series Capacitive Compensation,Improvement of

Transient Stability, Power Oscillation Damping, Thyristor Switched Series Capacitor (TSSC), and Thyristor
Controlled Series Capacitor (TCSC) Control schemes for GSC TSSC and TCSC.

UNIT – IV

Advanced FACTS Controllers: SVC, STATCOM, Unified Power flow controller (UPFC) ‐ Interline power flow
controller (IPFC) ‐ Unified Power quality conditioner (UPQC), generalised unified power flow controller
(GUPFC).

Textbook(s):
1. Hingorani H G and Gyugyi. L “Understanding FACTS‐Concepts and Technology of Flexible AC Transmission
Systems” New York, IEEE Press, 2000.
2. Padiyar.K.R, “ FACTS Controllers in Power Transmission and Distribution” New Age Int. Publishers, 2007

References:
1. Zhang, Xiao‐Ping, Rehtanz, Christian, Pal, Bikash “Flexible AC Transmission Systems: Modeling and
Control”, Springer, 2012
2. Yong‐Hua Song, Allan Johns, “Flexible AC Transmission Systems”, IET, 1999

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 844
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Flexible AC Transmission System Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 7 PS‐EAE PS‐EAE‐4 PS‐433P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Flexible AC Transmission System) as
this is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. To Compute Transmission Line Parameters using MATLAB.

2. Modelling of TCSC controller for Transient Stability Enhancement.
3. To Simulate the V‐I characteristics of Static VAR Compensator.
4. To Study the Effects of Series and Shunt Compensation on Long Transmission Line.
5. To Study Series Compensated Transmission Line using Matlab.
6. To Study Shunt Compensated Transmission Line using Matlab.
7. Matlab simulation for calculation of Series and Parallel Capacitor.
8. To Simulate the Dynamic Response of the STATCOM.
9. To Determine the Reactive Power Compensation by using FACTS Devices.
10. Matlab program on Series‐Series Compensated Transmission Line.
11. Matlab program on Shunt–Shunt Compensated Transmission Line.
12. To Design Short and Medium Transmission Line in Matlab.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 845
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Flexible Manufacturing Systems L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 6 QM‐EAE QM‐EAE‐2 QM‐328T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To study different aspects of Flexible Manufacturing System and determine difference between
traditional manufacturing system and Flexible Manufacturing System.
2. To understand different components of Computer Integrated Manufacturing System with its
importance in modern manufacturing environments pertaining to managing different projects.
3. To understand how Automated Material Movement is achieved through the use of AGV, ATC and ASRS
and its importance as an integral part of Flexible Manufacturing System.
4. To understand how Artificial Intelligence and Computer Aided Quality Control helps Flexible
Manufacturing System works effectively.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Analyse different aspects of Flexible Manufacturing System and determine difference between
traditional manufacturing system and Flexible Manufacturing System.
CO 2 To analyse and explain different components of Computer Integrated Manufacturing System with its
importance in modern manufacturing environments pertaining to managing different projects.
CO 3 To analyse and explain how Automated Material Movement is achieved through the use of AGV, ATC
and ASRS and its importance as an integral part of Flexible Manufacturing System.
CO 4 To Evaluate how Artificial Intelligence and Computer Aided Quality Control helps Flexible
Manufacturing System works effectively.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 3 2 ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 2 3 3 3 2 ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 3 3 3 3 2 ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 4 3 3 3 2 ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ ‐‐ ‐ ‐ 2

UNIT I

Introduction and Definition: Flexible Automation and Manufacturing Cell and Flexible Manufacturing System.
Flexible Automation and Manufacturing systems and its productivity, History of FMS systems, definition,
concept, benefits, problems in batch production, Types of FMS, Components of FMS, control of workstation,
AGV systems, Functions of FMS, Scheduling and loading FMS, Layout configurations for FMS, communication in
FMS, simulation in FMS, Installation and examples of FMS, optimization of FMS, typical layout of FMS, The FMS
software. Feasibility report of FMS, advanced control cycle of FMS.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 846
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT II

CIM System: Introduction to CAD & CAM and its tools, Concept and origin of CIM, components of CIM,
Emerging technologies of CIM, computer control system, sensing and identifying for manufacturing, CIMS data
files, factors affecting performance, advantages and limitations, performance evaluation of a CIM system.
Human centered CIM system, CIM technology in manufacturing environments, Factory information system,
Sequential and concurrent engineering.

UNIT III

High Volume Production System: Types of Automated assembly systems, Automated production or transfer
lines, Equipment and arrangement of transfer lines, methods of work transport, transfer mechanisms,
Assembly line balancing, numericals on line balancing, computerized line balancing methods.
Automated Material Movement: Function, Types of material movement systems, material movement through
conveyors, material movement through robots, material movement through AGVs, automated guided vehicle
operation and control, Advantages and limitations of AGVs, economic considerations.
Automatic tool changer (ATC), Storage and automated production line, Automated storage and retrieval system
(ASRS), Carousel storage system, In‐process storage system, communication with material in storage and in
movement.

UNIT IV

Introduction to artificial intelligence in manufacturing automation, expert systems, AI programming for expert
systems.
Computer Aided Quality Control: CNC 3D Coordinate Measuring machines, TQM, QC & CIM, Inspection and
Testing, SPC, Role of computers in QC, Non contact inspection methods, Post process Metrology, Computer
aided inspection using robots, integration of CAD / CAM with inspection system, Flexible Inspection system,
Reverse Engineering.

Textbook(s):
1. P Radhakrishnan, S subramanym, V Raju; CAD/CAM/CIM; New Age International Publishers.
2. K.C. Jain, Sanjay Jain, Principles of Automation and Advanced Manufacturing systems, Khanna Publications.

References:
1. Ibrahim Zeid, R Sivsubramanian, CAD/ CAM Theory & Practice, MCGraw Hill.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 847
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Flexible Manufacturing Systems Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 6 QM‐EAE QM‐EAE‐2 QM‐328P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Flexible Manufacturing Systems) as
this is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Develop programs on CNC lathe.

2. Develop programs on CNC milling.
3. Study and operate a Coordinated Measuring Machine and 6 axis robot.
4. Study working of a Flexible manufacturing system.
5. Operate FMS with automatic storage and retrieval, conveyor, lathe, robot milling machine.
6. Simulation of CIM and scheduling problem 1 on CIM Software (such as ER‐Virtual / any other).
7. Simulation of CIM and scheduling problem 2 on CIM Software.
8. Simulation of CIM and scheduling problem 3 on CIM Software.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 848
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Fluid Mechanics and Hydraulic Machines L P C

4 4

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ME 5 PC PC MEC‐305
MAE 6 PC PC MEC‐308

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To understand fundamental concepts of fluid flow and fluid statics.
2. To understand various kinematic, dynamic, and boundary layer concepts of fluid flow.
3. To understand the concepts of dimensional analysis to predict fluid flow behaviour and different flows
and energy losses through pipe.
4. To study impulse and reaction turbines, and centrifugal pump.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Analyse the basic concept of fluid flow and evaluate the problems related to fluid statics and fluid
kinematics.
CO 2 Analyse various kinematic, dynamic, and boundary layer concepts of fluid flow.
CO 3 Apply dimensional analysis to predict fluid flow behaviour and different flows and energy losses
through pipe.
CO 4 Analyse and evaluate the hydraulic performance of hydraulic turbines and pumps.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 3 2 ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 2 3 3 3 2 ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 3 3 3 3 2 ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 4 3 3 3 2 ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ ‐‐ ‐ ‐ 2

UNIT‐I

Fundamental Concepts of Fluid Flow: Fundamental definitions, Fluid properties, classification of fluids, Pressure
and its measurements, Pascal’s law, pressure variation in a fluid at rest, manometers (piezometer, simple and
differential manometers).
Fluid Statics: Forces on solid surfaces (vertical, horizontal, inclined, and curved), Buoyancy, buoyant force,
center of buoyancy, Stability of submerged and floating bodies Metacenter and Metacentric height.

UNIT‐II

Kinematics of Fluid Flow: Types of fluid flow, streamline, path line and streak line, Equations for acceleration,
Irrotational and rotational flow, velocity potential and stream function, Continuity equation.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 849
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Dynamics of Fluid Flow: Navier‐Stokes (momentum) Equation, Euler’s equation of motion, Bernoulli’s equation,
Venturi meter; Pitot tube.
Boundary Layer Flow: Boundary Layer Theory and Applications: Boundary Layer thickness, displacement,
momentum and energy thickness, Flow separation.

UNIT‐III

Dimensional Analysis and Principles of Similarity: Buckingham’s Theorem and its applications, Dimensionless
Numbers‐Reynolds, Froude, Euler, Mach, Weber Number and their significance.
Laminar & Turbulent Flow: Developing and fully developed flow, Hagen–Poiseuille flow through a circular pipe,
characteristics of turbulent flow in pipe, Shear stress and Velocity distribution for turbulent flow in smooth and
rough pipes.
Pipe Flow Systems: Darcy‐Weisbach equation, Energy losses in pipelines.

UNIT – IV

Introduction: Introduction and classification of hydraulic turbines, impulse and reaction turbines, Pelton wheel,
Francis turbine and Kaplan turbine‐working proportions, work done, efficiencies, hydraulic design –draft tube‐
theory functions and efficiency.
Centrifugal Pumps: classifications, working, work done, manometric head‐ losses and efficiencies, specific
speed, cavitation & NPSH.

Textbook(s):
1. R.K. Bansal, “Fluid Mechanics and Hydraulic Machines”, Laxmi Publications (P) Ltd; (2002).
2. Jagadish Lal, “Fluid machines Including Fluid mechanics”, Metropolitan Book Co., New Delhi, 1995.

References:
1. D.S. Kumar, “Fluid Mechanics & Fluid Power Engineering”, S.K. Kataria& Sons, 2001.
2. Kumar, K.L, “Engineering Fluid Mechanics”, Eurasia Publishing House, New Delhi, 1995.
3. P.N Modi and S.M Seth, “Hydraulics and Fluid Mechanics”, Standard Book House.
4. S.K Agrawal, “Fluid mechanics and machinery”, Tata McGraw hill.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 850
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Fluid Mechanics and Hydraulic Machines Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ME 5 PC PC MEC‐353
MAE 6 PC PC MEC‐354

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Fluid Mechanics and Hydraulic
Machines) as this is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Determination of metacentric height of a given ship model.

2. To verify the Bernoulli’s theorem.
3. To determine the coefficient of discharge for a given venturimeter.
4. To determine the coefficient of discharge for a given orifice plate.
5. To determine the Reynolds’s number and hence the type of flow either laminar or turbulent
6. To determine the head loss due to friction in pipe and hence to determine the head loss coefficient.
7. Determination of coefficient for minor losses.
8. To conduct an experiment on the Jet on vane apparatus and determine the efficiency of jet.
9. To study and conduct performance test on the given Pelton wheel turbine and draw its performance
characteristics curves.
10. To study and conduct performance test on the given Francis wheel turbine and draw its performance
characteristics curves.
11. To study and conduct performance test on the given centrifugal pump and draw its performance
characteristics curves.
12. To study the constructional details of hydraulic ram and draw its layout.
13. Performance test on reciprocating pump.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 851
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Fluids and Thermal Engineering L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

OAE 7 ME‐OAE ME‐OAE‐3 OME‐439T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To understand about fundamental concepts of fluid flow and fluid statics.

2. To understand various kinematic, dynamic, and boundary layer concepts of fluid flow.
3. To understand the concepts of dimensional analysis to predict fluid flow behaviour and different flows
through pipe
4. To understand fundamental concepts of thermodynamic principles.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Explain fundamental concepts of fluid flow and fluid static principles
CO 2 Analyse various kinematic, dynamic, and boundary layer concepts of fluid flow
CO 3 Apply dimensional analysis to predict fluid flow behaviour and examine different flow through pipe
CO 4 Explain fundamental concepts of thermodynamic principles.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 3 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 2 3 3 3 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 3 3 3 3 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 4 3 3 3 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐‐ ‐ ‐ 2

UNIT‐I

Fundamental Concepts of Fluid Flow: Fundamental definitions, applications of fluid mechanics, difference
between fluid and solid, continuum hypothesis, fluid properties: density, specific volume, specific gravity,
specific weight, viscosity‐ dynamic viscosity, kinematic viscosity, Newton’s law of viscosity, and types of fluid.
Fluid statics: pressure definition, types of pressure, Pascal’s law, pressure variation in a fluid at rest,
manometers: piezometer, simple U tube manometer, and differential U tube manometer.

UNIT‐II

Fluid Kinematics and Dynamics – types of flow – velocity field and acceleration – continuity equation (in
cartesian co‐ordinates)‐ stream line‐streak line‐path line‐ stream function – velocity potential function – flow
net, Bernoulli’s equation – applications – venturi meter, orifice meter and Pitot tube.
Boundary layer – definition‐ boundary layer on a flat plate – laminar and turbulent boundary layer‐

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 852
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

displacement, energy and momentum thickness, boundary layer separation.

UNIT‐III

Flow through a pipe: Fully developing and developed flow, laminar flow through circular pipe (Hagen
poiseulle’s equation), turbulent flow through circular pipe: introduction, characteristics, turbulence intensity,
velocity profile, major and minor losses.
Dimensional analysis: significance, Buckingham Pi‐ theorem, dimensionless parameters: Reynolds number,
Mach number, Froude’s number, Euler number, Weber number.

UNIT ‐ IV

Thermal engineering: Thermodynamic systems: Closed, Open and Isolated systems. Microscopic and
Macroscopic view. Intensive and Extensive properties. Zeroth law of Thermodynamics, State, Process, Cycle.
Point functions and Path functions, Equation of State. Work and Heat.
Introduction to First Law of Thermodynamics, Internal energy. Non flow and processes, p‐v diagrams,
Application of first law for steady flow processes, Limitation of first law of thermodynamics.

Textbook(s):
1. D. S. Kumar, “Fluid Mechanics and Fluid Power Engineering”, S. K. Kataria & Sons, (2012)
2. R. K. Bansal, “ A text book of fluid mechanics and hydraulic machines”, Laxmi Pub., (2019)
3. P. K. Nag, “Engineering Thermodynamics”, Mc Graw Hill Education, 6th ed. (2017)

References:
1. R. W. Fox, A. T. McDonald, P. J. Pritchard, “Fluid Mechanics”, John Wiley & Sons, 8th ed. (2013).
th
2. M. J. Moran, H. N. Shapiro, “Fundamentals of Engineering Thermodynamics”, John Wiley, 8 ed. (2014).
nd
3. S. K. Som, G. Biswas, “Introduction to fluid mechanics and fluid machines”, McGraw Hill, 2 ed. (2008)

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 853
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Fluids and Thermal Engineering Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

OAE 7 ME‐OAE ME‐OAE‐3 OME‐439P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Fluids and Thermal Engineering) as this
is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. To verify the Bernoulli’s theorem.

2. To determine the coefficient of discharge for a given venturimeter.
3. To determine the coefficient of discharge for a given orifice plate.
4. To determine the Reynold’s number and hence the type of flow either laminar or turbulent.
5. To determine the coefficient of discharge using orifice meter.
6. To determine the head loss due to friction in pipe and hence to determine the head loss coefficient
(major).
7. To determine the head loss in pipe fittings (minor losses).
8. To determine the coefficient of discharge using mouthpiece.
9. To create a python code to determine the coefficient of discharge for a given venturi meter for different
heads
10. To create a python code to determine the coefficient of discharge for a given orifice meter for different
heads
11. To create a python code to determine the final temperature of a hot steel ingot immersed in cold water
using first law of thermodynamics.
12. To create a python code to determine the coefficient of performance of a refrigerator working under a
given set of conditions.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 854
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Fracture Mechanics L P C
3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 7 DMS‐EAE DMS‐EAE‐3 DMS‐419T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To understand the different modes of fracture failure and identify the fractured surfaces of some
common materials.
2. To understand the concept of stress intensity factor, stress concentration and Airy’s stress function.
3. To understand the concept of anelastic deformation at the crack tip, J integral and Crack Tip Opening
Displacements (CTOD).
4. To understand various test methods for the calculation of critical fracture mechanics parameters and
several NDT techniques for crack detection.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Describe mechanisms of fracture failure and identify the fractured surfaces of various materials.
CO 2 Understand the linear elastic fracture mechanics using the principle of stress intensity factor and Airy’s
stress function.
CO 3 Analyse the elastic‐plastic fracture mechanics problem using the J integral and CTOD approach.
CO 4 Evaluate fracture mechanics parameters through various test methods and examine cracks by several
NDT techniques.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 3 3 ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 3
CO 2 3 3 3 3 ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 3 3 3 3 3 ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 4 3 3 3 3 ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ ‐‐ ‐ ‐ 3

UNIT‐I

Introduction: Introduction and historical review, Sources of micro and macro cracks. Stress concentration due
to elliptical hole, Brittle and ductile fracture, Modes of fracture failure. Energy release rate (G), Griffith's theory.
Fractured surfaces: Acquaintance with some common fracture surfaces of various materials, like steels, C.I, non
ferrous alloys etc.

UNIT‐II

Linear Elastic Fracture Mechanics: Stress concentration in the vicinity of notches and cracks, concept of stress
intensity factor (K), Stress intensity factor for different types of cracks and geometry. Airy’s stress function,

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 855
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Westergaard's Approach.

UNIT‐III

Anelastic Deformation at the Crack Tip: Crack tip plastic zones and its evaluation, Effective Crack Length, Irwin
Plastic Zone Correction, Dugdale approach.
Elastic Plastic Fracture Mechanics (EPFM): J‐integral and its evaluation, application of J‐integral. Concepts of
Crack Tip Opening Displacements (CTOD), Relationship between CTOD and J.

UNIT – IV

Evaluation of Fracture Mechanics Parameters: Test methods to determine critical stress intensity factor (KIc), J‐
integral (JIc), Energy release rate (GIc), CTOD.
Crack Detection through various Non‐Destructive Testing (NDT) techniques: Liquid penetration, Ultrasonic
testing, Radiographic, Magnetic particle inspection.

Textbook(s):
1. Prashant Kumar, ‘Elements of Fracture Mechanics”; Tata McGraw‐ Hill Publishing Company Limited.
2. T.L. Anderson, ‘Fracture Mechanics”; 3rd edition, Taylor & Francis, ISBN0849316561, 2005.

References:
1. D.Breok, ‘Elementary Fracture Mechanics”; Noordhoff International, 1985.
2. J.F. Knott, “Fundamentals of Fracture Mechanics”, John Wiley & Sons, New York.
3. E.E.Gdoutos, “Fracture Mechanics‐ An introduction”; Springer.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 856
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Fracture Mechanics Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 7 DMS‐EAE DMS‐EAE‐3 DMS‐419P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Fracture Mechanics) as this is the
practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. To determine the fatigue behaviour of the given material using Fatigue testing machine.
2. Optical measurement of stress intensity factor.
3. To inspect cracks in bodies using various FEM software like: IDEAS, NASTRAN / PATRAN, ABAQUS etc.
4. To detect cracks using various Non‐Destructive Testing (NDT) techniques: Liquid penetration, Ultrasonic
testing, Radiographic, Magnetic particle inspection.
5. Measurement of Fatigue Crack Growth Rates.
6. To determine fracture mechanics parameters using various indirect methods like J‐integral, energy release
rate, singular element method etc.
7. Thermoelastic stress analysis (TSA) technique for the evaluation of fatigue crack propagation.
8. To measure Linear‐Elastic Plane‐Strain Fracture Toughness KIc of metallic materials.
9. To measure Elastic‐Plastic Fracture Toughness JIc of metallic materials.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 857
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Fuzzy Logic and Neural Networks L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ECE 7 PCE PCE‐4 ECE‐411T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. Introduce students to the various neural network and fuzzy systems models.
2. Reveal different applications of these models to solve engineering and other problems.
3. Introduce the theory and applications of artificial neural network and fuzzy systems to engineering
applications with emphasis on image processing and control.
4. Discuss neural networks and fuzzy systems, architectures, algorithms and applications, including Back‐
propagation, BAM, Hopfield network, Competitive Learning, ART, SOFM, Fuzzy inference methods and
expert systems.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Comprehend the concepts of feed forward neural networks
CO 2 Analyze the various feedback networks.
CO 3 Understand the concept of fuzziness involved in various systems and fuzzy set theory.
CO 4 Comprehend the fuzzy logic control and adaptive fuzzy logic and to design the fuzzy control using
genetic algorithm.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 2 2 3 3 ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ 1 3 2
CO 2 3 3 1 1 1 ‐ 1 1 ‐ 2 2 1
CO 3 3 2 3 3 2 ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ 2 3 1
CO 4 1 2 3 2 2 ‐ 1 ‐ ‐ 1 2 2

UNIT‐I

Artificial Neural Network:History, Overview Of Biological Neuro‐System, Mathematical Models Of Neurons,

ANN architecture, Learning Rules, Learning Paradigms‐Supervised, Unsupervised and Reinforcement Learning,
ANN training Algorithms‐perceptions, Training rules, , Back Propagation Algorithm, K Means clustering,
Probabilistic Neural Network, Multilayer Perception Model, Hopfield Networks, Associative Memories,
Applications of Artificial Neural Networks.

UNIT‐II

Fuzzy Logic: Introduction to fuzzy logic, Classical and fuzzy sets: Overview of Classical Sets, Membership
Function and Fuzzy rule Generation. Operation on Fuzzy Sets: Compliment, Intersection, Unions, Combinations

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 858
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

of Operations, Aggregation Operations Fuzzy Arithmetic: Fuzzy numbers, Linguistic variables, arithmetic
operations on Intervals & Numbers, Lattice of Fuzzy Numbers, Fuzzy Equations.

UNIT‐III

Fuzzy Logic: Classical Logic, Multivalued logics, Fuzzy Propositions, Fuzzy Qualifiers, Linguistic Hedges.
Uncertainty based Information: Information& Uncertainty, Nonspecificity of Fuzzy & Crisp Sets, and Fuzziness
of Fuzzy Sets.

UNIT ‐ IV

Introduction of Neuro‐Fuzzy Systems, Architecture of Neuro Fuzzy Networks. Application of Fuzzy Logic &
Neural Networks in Intelligent Machine Design.

Textbook(s):
1. Haykins S., Neural Networks, Pearson Education, 2009
2. Yen J. & Langari R., Fuzzy Logic—Intelligence Control & Information, Pearson Education Asia, 1999.

References:
1. Lee H.H., First Course on Fuzzy Theory & Application, Springer Publications, 2005.
2. Ross T.J., Fuzzy Logic with Engineering Applications, Wiley India, 2011
3. Kumar S., Neural Networks, Tata Mc GrawHill Publications, 2004.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 859
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Fuzzy Logic and Neural Networks Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ECE 7 PCE PCE‐4 ECE‐411P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Fuzzy Logic and Neural Networks) as
this is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Plot the correlation plot on some suitable dataset and visualize giving an overview of relationships among
data.
2. Create a perceptron with appropriate number of inputs and outputs. Train it using fixed increment learning
algorithm until no change in weights is required. Output the final weights
3. Write a program to implement artificial neural network without back propagation.
4. Write a program to implement artificial neural network with back propagation.
5. Implement crisp partitions for real‐life iris dataset.
6. Write a program to implement logic gates.
7. Implement SVM classification by fuzzy concepts.
8. Implement linear regression and multi‐regression for a set of data points
9. Implement Union, Intersection, Complement and Difference operations on fuzzy sets.
10. Create fuzzy relation by Cartesian product of any two fuzzy sets and perform max‐min composition on any
two fuzzy relations.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 860
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Fuzzy Systems and Applications L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CSE‐AI 6 PC PC AI‐318T
EAE 7 SC‐EAE SC‐EAE‐3 SC‐477T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. develop the fundamental concepts such as fuzzy sets, operations and fuzzy relations
2. lean about the fuzzification of scalar variables and the defuzzification of membership functions
3. learn three different inference methods to design fuzzy rule based system.
4. develop fuzzy decision making by introducing some concepts and also Bayesian decision methods
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 To understand the basic ideas of fuzzy sets, operations and properties of fuzzy sets and also about
fuzzy relations
CO 2 To understand the basic features of membership functions, fuzzification process and defuzzification
process
CO 3 To design fuzzy rule‐based system.
CO 4 To know about combining fuzzy set theory with probability to handle random and non‐random
uncertainty, and the decision‐making process.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 2 2 ‐ 3 ‐ 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 ‐
CO 2 ‐ ‐ 3 ‐ 3 ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 ‐
CO 3 ‐ 3 3 3 ‐ ‐ 3 ‐ ‐ 2 ‐
CO 4 3 2 ‐ 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2

UNIT‐I

Classical sets: Operations and properties of classical sets, Mapping of classical sets to the functions. Fuzzy sets ‐
Membership functions, Fuzzy set operations, Properties of fuzzy sets. Classical and Fuzzy relations: Cartesian
product, crisp relations‐cardinality, operations and properties of crisp relations. Fuzzy relations‐cardinality,
operations, properties of fuzzy relations, fuzzy Cartesian product and composition, Fuzzy tolerance and
equivalence relations, value assignments and other format of the composition operation

UNIT‐II

Fuzzification and Defuzzification: Features of the membership functions, various forms, fuzzification,
defuzzification to crisp sets, ‐ cuts for fuzzy relations, Defuzzification to scalars. Fuzzy logic and approximate

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 861
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

reasoning, other forms of the implication operation.

UNIT‐III

Fuzzy Systems: Natural language, Linguistic hedges, Fuzzy (Rule based) System, Aggregation of fuzzy rules,
Graphical techniques of inference, Membership value assignments: Intuition, Inference, rank ordering, Fuzzy
Associative memories.

UNIT – IV

Fuzzy decision making: Fuzzy synthetic evaluation, Fuzzy ordering, Preference and consensus, Multi objective
decision making, Fuzzy Bayesian, Decision method, Decision making under Fuzzy states and fuzzy actions.
Classification by equivalence relations‐crisp relations, Fuzzy relations, Cluster analysis, Cluster validity, C‐Means
clustering, Hard C‐Means clustering, Fuzzy C‐Means algorithm, Classification metric, Hardening the Fuzzy C‐
Partition.

Textbook(s):
1. Timothy J.Ross ‐ Fuzzy logic with engineering applications, 3rd edition, Wiley,2010
2. George J.KlirBo Yuan ‐ Fuzzy sets and Fuzzy logic theory and Applications, PHI, New Delhi,1995

References:
1. S.Rajasekaran, G.A.Vijayalakshmi ‐ Neural Networks and Fuzzy logic and Genetic Algorithms, Synthesis and
Applications, PHI, New Delhi,2003..

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 862
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Fuzzy Systems and Applications Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CSE‐AI 6 PC PC AI‐318P
EAE 7 SC‐EAE SC‐EAE‐3 SC‐477P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Fuzzy Systems and Applications) as this
is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Implementation of Fuzzy Operations.

2. Implementation of Fuzzy Relations (Max‐min Composition)
3. Implementation of Fuzzy Controller (Washing Machine).
4. Implementation of Simple Neural Network (McCulloh‐Pitts model)
5. Implementation of Perceptron Learning Algorithm.
6. Implementation of Unsupervised Learning Algorithm.
7. Implementation of Simple Genetic Application.
8. Study of ANFIS Architecture

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 863
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Gas Dynamics & Jet Propulsion L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ME 6 PCE PCE‐1 MEE‐314T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To understand the features of compressible isentropic flows.
2. To understand the features of irreversibilities like shocks.
3. To understand the jet and rocket propulsion technologies.
4. To understand the jet and rocket propulsion technologies.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Able to analyse the compressible isentropic flows.
CO 2 Able to analyse the non‐isentropic flows like shocks.
CO 3 Able to apply gas dynamics principles to jet and space propulsion systems.
CO 4 Able to apply gas dynamics principles to jet and space propulsion systems.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 3 3 ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 2 3 3 3 3 ‐ 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 3 3 3 3 3 ‐ 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 4 3 3 3 2 ‐ 3 ‐ ‐ ‐‐ ‐ ‐ 2

UNIT‐I

Compressible flow, definition, Mach waves and Mach cone, stagnation states, Mass, momentum and energy
equations of one‐dimensional flow, Isentropic flow through variable area ducts, nozzle s and diffusers, subsonic
and supersonic flow I variable area ducts, choked flow, Area‐Mach number relations for isentropic flow

UNIT‐II

Non‐isentropic flow in constant area ducts, Rayleigh and Fanno flows, Normal shock relations, oblique shock
relations, isentropic and shock tables

UNIT‐III

Theory of jet propulsion, thrust equation, thrust power and propulsive efficiency, Operating principle and cycle
analysis of ramjet, turbojet, turbofan and turboprop engines.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 864
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT – IV

Types of rocket engines, propellants & feeding systems, ignition and combustion, theory ofrocket propulsion,
performance study, staging, terminal and characteristic velocity, spaceflights

Textbook(s):
1. Ahmed F. El‐Sayed, Aircraft Propulsion and Gas Turbine Engines, CRC Press, 2008.
2. Hill P. and Peterson C., Mechanics & Thermodynamics of Propulsion, Addison Wesley, 1992.

References:
1. Zucrow N. J., Aircraft and Missile Propulsion, Vol.I& II, John Wiley, 1975.
2. Sutton G.P., Rocket Propulsion Elements, John Wiley, New York, 1986.
3. H.S. Mukunda, “Understanding Aerospace Chemical Propulsion”, Interline Publishing, 2004.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 865
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Gas Dynamics & Jet Propulsion Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ME 6 PCE PCE‐1 MEE‐314P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Gas Dynamics & Jet Propulsion) as this
is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. To study sound velocity in different solids and fluids.

2. To study various gas properties for different altitude in atmosphere.
3. To study the wave propagation at different Mach number.
4. To study the flow through constant area duct with friction. (Fanno flow)
5. To study the flow in constant area duct with heat transfer. (Rayleigh flow)
6. To study the shock waves generated in the flow field.
7. Study of free jet
8. To find the calorific value of fuel by using Bomb Calorimeter.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 866
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Generation, Transmission and Distribution L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

OAE 7 EE‐OAE EE‐OAE‐4 OEE‐429T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. Understand the function of various parts of electrical generating stations.
2. Normal operation of the electric transmission and distribution systems.
3. Functioning of the medium and high voltage transmission system.
4. Components of the transmission and distribution lines.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Ability to understand the function of various parts of electrical generating stations.
CO 2 Interpret the normal operation of the electric transmission and distribution systems.
CO 3 Maintain the functioning of the medium and high voltage transmission system.
CO 4 Maintain the components of the transmission and distribution lines.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 2 1 1 1 1 ‐ 1 3 ‐ 3
CO 2 3 2 1 3 2 1 1 ‐ 1 3 ‐ 1
CO 3 3 2 1 2 3 1 1 ‐ 1 3 ‐ 3
CO 4 3 3 2 1 1 1 1 ‐ 1 3 ‐ 3

UNIT I

Introduction of conventional and non‐conventional electrical power generating stations, Solar power plant,
Wind power plant, Coal power plant, Hydro power plant and Nuclear power plant.

UNIT II

Basics of Transmission and Distribution Single line diagrams with components of the electric supply
transmission and distribution systems.Classification of transmission lines: Primary and secondary transmission;
standard voltage level used in India.Classification of transmission lines: based on type of voltage, voltage level,
length and others Characteristics of high voltage for power transmission. Method of construction of electric
supply transmission system – 110 kV, 220 kV, 400 kV.Method of construction of electric supply distribution
systems – 220 V, 400V, 11 kV, 33 kV.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 867
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT III

Transmission Line Parameters and Performance Line Parameters: Concepts of R, L and C of line parameters and
types of lines. Performance of short line: Efficiency, regulation and its derivation, effect of power factor, vector
diagram for different power factor. Performance of medium line: representation, nominal ‘T’, nominal ‘π’ and
end condenser methods. Transposition of conductors and its necessity. Skin effect and proximity effect.

UNIT IV

A.C Distribution System AC distribution: Components classification, requirements of an ideal distribution

system, primary and secondary distribution system.Feeder and distributor, factors to be considered in design of
feeder and distributor. Types of different distribution schemes: radial, ring, and grid, layout, advantages,
disadvantages and applications. Voltage drop, sending end and receiving end voltage.Distribution Sub‐Station:
Classification, site selection, advantages, disadvantages and applications.Single Line diagram (layout) of
33/11KV Sub‐Station, 11KV/400V substation, Symbols and functions of their components.

Textbook(s):
1. Mehta, V.K., Principles of Power System, S. Chand and Co. New Delhi
2. Soni;Gupta; Bhatnagar, A Course in Electrical Power, Dhanpat Rai and Sons New Delhi

References:
1. Gupta, J.B., A Course in Power Systems, S.K. Kataria and sons, New Delhi
2. Uppal, S.L., A Course in Electrical Power, S.K.Khanna Publisher New Delhi

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 868
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Generation, Transmission and Distribution Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

OAE 7 EE‐OAE EE‐OAE‐4 OEE‐429P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Generation, Transmission and
Distribution) as this is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Demonstrate cable jointing procedures of unarmored cables

2. Demonstrate cable jointing procedures of armored cables
3. Prepare a report on different types of insulators and bushings used in transmission systems with their
specifications.
4. Prepare a report on different type of Transmission Towers used in the industry
5. Prepare a report on different types of connectors used in the transmission lines
6. Prepare a report after studying distribution system of a residential colony
7. Interpret and explain the given Blueprint of a Substation,
8. Understand use of crimping tools to fit lugs at cable ends of unarmored cables
9. Understand use of crimping tools to fit lugs at cable ends of armored cables
10. Understand use of earth tester

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 869
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Geometric Modelling and Analysis L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ME 7 PCE PCE‐4 MEE‐403T
MAE 7 OAE‐MAE OAE‐1 MAO‐425T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To understand the need, scope and importance of geometric modelling in industry.
2. To make the students understand about the various geometric co‐ordinate systems.
3. To study the use of graphics standard and various CAD/CAE tools for automation of an industry.
4. To study research assignments based on use of standard CADand CAE packages for modelling of
mechanical elements.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 To learn geometric modelling and different modelling package.
CO 2 To understand the various geometric co‐ordinate systems.
CO 3 To understand graphics standards and various optimization techniques for analysis.
CO 4 To analyse research assignments based on use of standard CADand CAE packages for modelling of
mechanical elements.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 3 3 ‐ ‐ 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 2 3 3 3 3 ‐ ‐ 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 3 3 3 3 3 ‐ ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 4 3 3 3 2 ‐ ‐ 2 ‐ ‐‐ ‐ ‐ 2

UNIT‐I

Geometric Modeling: Classification of Geometric Modelling – Wire frame, Surface and Solid Modelling,
applications – representation of curves and surfaces – Parametric form. Design of curved shapes‐ Cubic spline –
Bezier curve – B‐spline – Design of Surfaces ‐ features of Surface Modelling Package – Solid Primitives, CSG. B‐
rep and description of other modelling techniques, creating 3D objects from 2D profiles (extrusion, revolving
etc).

UNIT‐II

Geometric co‐ordinate systems ‐ Cartesian, Cylindrical and Spherical coordinate systems. Display co‐ordinate
systems ‐ Global, Local, View and Screen coordinate systems. Computer graphics, Non‐interactive Vs interactive
computer graphics, applications, graphics system configuration. 2D and 3D transformation techniques ‐

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 870
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Translation, Rotation, Scaling and Reflection principles. Principle of concatenated transformation. Orthographic
and Perspective Projections of Geometric Models. Introduction to computer aided animation system.

UNIT‐III

Definition of graphics standard, geometrical data, direct and indirect data transfer. Neutral file formats ‐ Data
Exchange Format (DXF) and Initial Graphics Exchange Specification (IGES) Mechanical Design Analysis and
Optimization: Design analysis for mass properties, Stress, Thermal stress, using CAD/CAE packages, Optimum
design of machine components using multivariable nonlinear optimization techniques using iterative CAD/CAE
software tools.

UNIT – IV

Research Assignments: Individual research assignments will be based on use of standard CADand CAE packages
for modeling of mechanical elements, Assembly and Automated Drawing. Project involving assembly, position,
kinematic and dynamic analysis of a mechanism. Interference analysis in motion. Optimization of mechanical
system design using CAD/CAE software tools, Project on mechanical systems design and analysis. Make a
prototype for design validation.

Textbook(s):
1. Ibrahim Zeid, "Mastering CAD/CAM", Tata McGraw Hill Education (P) Ltd., Special Indian Edition, 2008.
2. Amarendra N Sinha and Arun D Udai, "Computer Graphics", Second reprint, Tata McGraw Hill, 2009.

References:
1. Hill F. S. and Kelley S. M, “Computer Graphics using Open G”, third edition, Prentice Hall, 2007.
2. Dr. Sadhu Singh, ”Computer Aided Design and Manufacturing”, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi.
3. Kelley David S, “Pro/ENGINEER Wildfire 5.0 Instructor”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2011.
4. Shih Randy H, “Introduction to Finite Element Analysis Using Creo Simulate 1.0”, SDC Publications, 2011.
5. Shih Randy H, “Parametric Modeling with Creo Parametric 1.0‐An Introduction to Creo Parametric 1.0”,
SDC Publications, USA, 2011.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 871
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Geometric Modelling and Analysis Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ME 7 PCE PCE‐4 MEE‐403P
MAE 7 OAE‐MAE OAE‐1 MAO‐425P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Geometric Modelling and Analysis) as
this is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. CAD Introduction – Sketcher.

2. Solid modeling: Extrude, Revolve, Sweep, Vibrational sweep and Loft.
3. Surface modeling: Extrude, Sweep, Trim, Mesh of curves and Free form.
4. Exercises in Modeling and drafting of Mechanical Components.
5. Force and Stress analysis using link elements in Trusses.
6. Stress analysis of flat plate.
7. Modeling curves (B‐Splines and Bezier).
8. Tool path generation for Turning and Milling.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 872
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Geotechnical and Transportation Engineering L P C

4 4

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

OAE 7 CE‐OAE CE‐OAE‐5 OCE‐405

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To introduce the concept of Geotech engineering.
2. To impart knowledge on understanding geogrids.
3. To expose the students to various types of policies and various approaches.
4. To impart knowledge about the special services of moving transactions
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Able to understand geotech engineering.
CO 2 Able to have sufficient knowledge to suggest appropriate materials for geogrids.
CO 3 Able to understand various characteristics of transport and its integration.
CO 4 Able to apply aspects of sustainability moving transactions & Simulation of ports
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 1 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐
CO 2 1 ‐ ‐ 2 ‐ 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐
CO 3 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ 1 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐
CO 4 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 1 3 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐

UNIT‐I

Shell foundations Prestressing in foundations Special construction problems Pile driving and well sinking
Drainage of soil and dewatering of foundations Prestressed ground anchors. Shell foundations Prestressing in
foundations Special construction problems Pile driving and well sinking Drainage of soil and dewatering of
foundations Prestressed ground anchors Diaphragm walls Bored pile walls Reinforced earth and soil nailing Use
of geotextiles in geotechnical engineering Sanitary landfills Gabions, Cribs Controlled yielding technique for
reduction of lateral earth pressure Retaining walls with relieving shelves

UNIT‐II

Geogrids: Materials used for geogrids Advantages and disadvantages of geogrids, categories of geogrids,
Application of Geogrids on the Geotechnical Properties of Subgrade Materials. Subgrade Stabilization with
Geotextiles. Advances in Geosynthetics Materials and Applications for Soil Reinforcement. The Orientation of
Polymers to Produce High Performance Materials

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 873
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT‐III

Exploring Rural Road Impacts Using Fuzzy Multi‐criteria Approach. Safer Autonomous Navigation, Historical
development of transport in India ‐ 20 year Road Plans, National Transport Policy Recommendations, IRC, CRRI,
Vision 2021, NHDP, PMGSY. Characteristics of different modes of transport and their integration and
interactions ‐ impact on environment. Probability concepts ‐ Random numbers ‐ Pseudo random generators ‐
Arrival patterns ‐ Service time distributions, Queue discipline – Manual simulation of simple queuing system.

UNIT ‐ IV

Introduction to systems approach ‐ Typical transportation systems ‐ Mathematical models. Fundamentals of

simulation ‐ Monte Carlo method ‐ Continuous and discrete models ‐ Simulation languages. Probability
concepts ‐ Random numbers ‐ Pseudo random generators ‐ Arrival patterns ‐ Service time distributions –
Manual simulation of simple queuing system

Textbook(s):
1. Kadiyali, L. R., “Traffic Engineering and Transportation Planning”, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi
2. Soil Mechanics in Engineering Practice" by Karl Terzaghi
3. Gordon, G., System Simulation, Prentice‐Hall of India, 2005

References:
1. Traffic Engineering and Transport planning, Dr. L.R.Kadiyali, Khanna Publishers
2. Highway engineering, , Dr. L.R.Kadiyali, Khanna Publishers, ISBN No: 81‐7409‐165‐3 1993
3. Principles of Traffic and Highway Engineering,Nicholas J. Garber and Lester A. Hoel,Cengage Learning
4. Transportation Engineering and Planning, C.S.Papacostas, PHI, ISBN‐81‐203‐2154‐5

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 874
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Geotechnical Engineering L P C
4 4

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CE 5 PC PC CEC‐307

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To analyse bearing capacity and settlement of soil for shallow foundation.
2. To understand the basics of pile foundation and evaluate the pile load carrying capacity.
3. To interpret the earth pressure and understand various sheet pile walls.
4. To analyse the stability of slopes and classify various soil stabilization methods.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Understand various methods of soil exploration and analyse bearing capacity as well as settlement of
soil for shallow foundation.
CO 2 Evaluate the load carrying capacity of pile foundation.
CO 3 Interpret the earth pressure and understand various types of sheet pile walls.
CO 4 Analyse the stability of slopes and classify various stabilization methods.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 2 1 2 3 0 0 2 0 0 0 1 0
CO 2 3 2 2 3 2 1 1 0 1 1 1 2
CO 3 3 3 2 3 2 1 0 0 0 1 1 1
CO 4 2 2 3 2 2 1 2 0 1 1 1 1

UNIT‐I

Sub‐soil Exploration: Methods of site exploration, Soil samples and samplers, Penetration tests, Geophysical
methods‐seismic refraction method, Electrical resistivity method.
Shallow Foundations: Types of foundations, guidelines for selection of foundation, Factors influencing
selection of depth of foundation, Terminologies used for analysis of bearing capacity, Modes of shear failures,
Factors affecting bearing capacity, Terzaghi’s, Skempton’s and Meyerhof’s bearing capacity theories, Effect of
water table, IS code method, Plate load test, Standard penetration test, Static cone penetration test.
Settlement of Shallow Foundations: Components of settlement, Immediate settlement, Differential
settlement, Angular settlement, Contact pressure and settlement under rigid and flexible footings.

UNIT‐II

Deep Foundation: Classification of piles, Selection of type of pile, Static methods for determining pile load
capacity, Dynamic methods for determining pile load capacity, Pile load test, Penetration tests, Group action of

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 875
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

piles, Group efficiency, Group settlement ratio, Settlement of pile group in clay, Negative skin friction, Under
reamed pile foundations.
Well Foundation: Introduction, Types & components of a Well Foundation, Shapes of well.

UNIT‐III

Earth Pressure: Introduction, Earth pressure at rest, Active and passive state, Rankine's earth pressure theory,
his approach for determining active and passive earth pressure in frictional and c‐𝜙 soil, Coulomb’s theory of
earth pressure, Graphical method.
Sheet Pile walls: Classification of sheet pile walls, Cantilever sheet pile wall, Anchored sheet pile wall and
Braced sheeting.

UNIT – IV

Stability analysis of slopes: Introduction, Factor of safety analysis of finite and infinite slopes, Types of slope
failure, Swedish slip circle method, Taylors stability number, Friction circle method.
Stabilisation of soils: Methods of stabilisation, Mechanical stabilisation, Cement stabilisation, Lime
stabilisation, Bitumen stabilisation, Chemical stabilisation, Stabilisation by heating and Electrical stabilisation.
Geotextiles: Reinforced Earth, Geotextiles‐definitions, Types and functions.

Textbook(s):
1. Gopal Ranjan & ASR Rao, “Basic and Applied Soil Mechanics”, New Age International Publishers, 4th Ed 2022.
2. Dr B.C. Punmia, Er. AK Jain, & Dr. AK Jain, “Soil Mechanics and Foundations”, Laxmi Publications, 17th Ed
2021.

Reference Books:
1. Dr KR Arora, “Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering”, Standard Publishers Distributors (2020).
2. JE Bowles, Foundation Analysis and Design, McGraw‐Hill, New Delhi (1996).
3. Venkataramaiah, “Geotechnical Engineering”, New Age International Publishers.
4. VNS Murthy, “Geotechnical Engineering: Principles and Practices of Soil Mechanics and Foundation
Engineering” (2016).
5. P. Purushothama Raj, “Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering”, Pearson Education India (2013).
6. DP Coduto, MR Yeung, WA Kitch, “Geotechnical Engineering: Principles and Practices”, Pearson, 2nd Ed
(2017).
7. K Terzaghi, R B Peck, G Mesri, “Soil Mechanics in Engineering Practice”, John Wiley and Sons, (1996).

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 876
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Geotechnical Engineering Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CE 5 PC PC CEC‐355

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Geotechnical Engineering) as this is the
practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Determination of California Bearing Ratio by unsoaked method.

2. Determination of California Bearing Ratio by soaked method.
3. Determination of Optimum moisture content (OMC) and Maximum dry density (MDD) by proctor test
using light compaction.
4. Determination of Optimum moisture content (OMC) and Maximum dry density (MDD) by proctor test
using heavy compaction.
5. Determination of Consolidation properties.
6. Determination of Shear parameters by direct shear test.
7. Determination of Unconfined compressive strength of soil.
8. Determination of Shear parameters by triaxial test.
9. Determination of Undrained shears strength of cohesive soil by vane shear test.
10. Determination of Permeability by constant head test.
11. Determination of Permeability by falling head test
12. Determination of swelling pressure of an expansive soil (black cotton soil) by consolidometer method.
13. Determination of Free swell index of soil.
14. To conduct the Standard penetration test for soil.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 877
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Global Optimization Methods L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CSE‐in‐EA 7 OAE‐CSE‐EA OAE‐2 SC‐479T
EAE 7 SC‐EAE SC‐EAE‐4 SC‐479T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To gain an understanding and appreciation of the principles and methodologies relevant to global
optimization
2. To solve advanced problems with the sophisticated global optimization techniques
3. To build a solid theoretical background in optimization
4. Explore the recent topics for future research and study
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 To understand the basic concepts of global optimization
CO 2 To understand and analyse the concept of convex functions and its applications
CO 3 To understand and analyse the concept of non‐convex functions and its applications
CO 4 To analyse the application of global optimization in various research fields.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 1 1 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 2 2 2 ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 3 2 1 ‐ 2 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 4 2 1 ‐ 2 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2

UNIT‐I

History of global optimization, structure of global optimization algorithms – stochastic and deterministic global
phase‐ fathoming.

UNIT‐II

Notions of convex analysis, necessary and sufficient conditions for local optimality, concave Minimization,
Lipschitz Optimization

UNIT‐III

Properties of Non‐convex Functions, Convex Envelopes, Duality, Complexity, Applications and Software Issues,
Decomposition algorithms

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 878
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT ‐ IV

Case Study: Meta‐heuristic algorithms, Surrogate modelling, global optimation in machine learning, parallel and
distributed global optimization

Textbook(s):
1. R. Horst, P.M. Pardalos and N.V. Thoai, “Introduction to Global Optimization”, Kluwer Academic Publishers,
2001, ISBN: 0‐7923‐6756‐1 (2nd edition).
2. Liberti, L. (2008). Introduction to global optimization. Ecole Polytechnique.

References:
1. "Global Optimization: Theory, Algorithms, and Applications" by D.T. Pham, X.S. Yang, and N.K. Nishikawa.
2. "Introduction to Global Optimization" by E. A. Easdown.
3. "Global Optimization: Deterministic Approaches" by I. E. Grossmann and C. A. Floudas.
4. "Global Optimization Algorithms: Theory and Application" by T. Terlaky, P.M. Pardalos, and M.G.C. Resende.
5. "Global Optimization Methods in Geophysical Inversion" by M. A. Alfonseca and L. Tenorio.
6. "Handbook of Global Optimization" edited by R. Horst and P. M. Pardalos.
7. "Global Optimization: A Stochastic Approach" by R. Umetani.
8. "Introduction to Global Optimization Exploiting Space‐Filling Curves" by J. Mockus, V. Tiesis, and A. Zilinskas.
9. "Convexification and Global Optimization in Continuous and Mixed‐Integer Nonlinear Programming" by C. J.
Buchheim and C. M. Büskens.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 879
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Global Optimization Methods Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CSE‐in‐EA 7 OAE‐CSE‐EA OAE‐2 SC‐479P
EAE 7 SC‐EAE SC‐EAE‐4 SC‐479P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Global Optimization Methods) as this is
the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Study Ackley's Function: A classic multimodal optimization problem with many local minima.
2. Study Rastrigin's Function: A non‐convex function with a large number of local minima.
3. Analyse Traveling Salesman Problem (TSP): Finding the shortest route for a salesman visiting multiple cities
and returning to the starting city.
4. Knapsack Problem: Selecting a combination of items with maximum value while staying within a given
weight constraint.
5. Neural Network Architecture Search: Optimizing the structure and hyper‐parameters of a neural network
for a given task.
6. Global Parameter Estimation: Fitting a mathematical model to experimental data to estimate the values of
model parameters.
7. Study Sphere Function ‐ a widely used function for testing optimization algorithms.
8. Supply Chain Optimization: Optimizing the flow of goods, materials, and information across a supply chain
network to minimize costs and maximize efficiency.
9. Optimal Power Flow: Optimizing the generation and distribution of electrical power in a power system
while satisfying various constraints.
10. Implementing and studying the performance of the PSO algorithm on various benchmark functions.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 880
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Graph Theory for Computer Science L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CSE 6 PCE PCE‐2 CIE‐338T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To understand and apply the fundamental concepts in graph theory .
2. To apply graph theory based tools in solving practical problems
3. Model problems using graphs and to solve these problems algorithmically
4. Reason from definitions to construct mathematical proofs by integrating core theoretical knowledge.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Understand precise and accurate mathematical definitions of objects in graph theory.
CO 2 Able to formulate and prove central theorems about trees, matching, connectivity, colouring and
planar graphs;
CO 3 Able to describe and apply some basic algorithms for graphs;
CO 4 Able to construct mathematical proofs by integrating core theoretical knowledge.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 1 1 1 2 3 3 1 3 1 2 1 1
CO 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
CO 3 2 2 1 2 2 2 3 2 3 2 3 3
CO 4 3 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 1

UNIT‐I

Introduction: Graphs‐ Introduction, Isomorphism, Sub Graphs, Walks, Paths, Circuits, Connectedness,
Components, Euler Graphs, Hamiltonian Paths and Circuits, Trees ‐ Properties of Trees, Distance and
Centers in Tree, Rooted and Binary Trees. Special Classes of Graphs: Bipartite Graphs, Line Graphs, Chordal
Graphs
Graphs‐ Introduction, Isomorphism, Sub Graphs, Walks, Paths, Circuits, Connectedness, Components,
Euler Graphs, Hamiltonian Paths and Circuits, Trees‐Properties of Trees, Distance and Centers in Tree,
Rooted and Binary Trees. Special Classes of Graphs: Bipartite Graphs, Line Graphs, Chordal Graphs.

UNIT‐II

Spanning Trees: Fundamental Circuits, Spanning Trees in a Weighted Graph, Cut Sets: Properties of Cut Set,
All Cut Sets, Fundamental Circuits and Cut Sets, Connectivity and Sep‐arability, Network Flows, 1‐Isomorphism,
2‐Isomorphism, Combinational and Geometric Graphs, Planer Graphs, Different Representation of a Planer

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 881
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Graph

UNIT‐III

Chromatic Number, Chromatic Partitioning, Chromatic Polynomial, Matching, Covering, Greedy Coloring
Algorithm, Four Color Problem, Directed Graphs ‐Types of Directed Graphs, Digraphs and Binary
Relations, Directed Paths and Connectedness, Euler Graphs

UNIT ‐ IV

Fundamental principles of counting – Permutations and combinations – Binomial theorem – combinations with
repetition – Combinatorial numbers – Principle of inclusion and exclusion – Derangement – Arrangements with
forbidden positions.
Generating functions – Partitions of integers – Exponential generating function – Summation operator –
Recurrence relations – First order and second order – Non‐homogeneous recurrence relations – Method of
generating functions.

Textbook(s):
1. Narsingh Deo, “Graph Theory: With Application to Engineering and Computer Science”, PHI, 2003.
2. Grimaldi R.P. “Discrete and Combinatorial Mathematics: An Applied Introduction”, Addison Wesley, 1994.

References:
1. Clark J. and Holton D.A, “A First Look at Graph Theory”, Allied Publishers, 1995.
2. Mott J.L., Kandel A. and Baker T.P. “Discrete Mathematics for Computer Scientists and Mathematicians”,
PHI, 1996.
3. Liu C.L., “Elements of Discrete Mathematics”, Mc Graw Hill, 1985.
4. Rosen K.H., “Discrete Mathematics and Its Applications”, Mc Graw Hill, 2007.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 882
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Graph Theory for Computer Science Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CSE 6 PCE PCE‐2 CIE‐338P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Graph Theory for Computer Science) as
this is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Program to find the number of vertices, even vertices, odd vertices and number of edges in a Graph.
2. Program to Find Union, Intersection and ring‐sum of 2 graphs.
3. Program to Find Minimum Spanning tree Using Prim's Algorithm
4. Program to Find Minimum Spanning tree Using Kruskal's Algorithm
5. Program to find Shortest Path between 2 Vertices using Dijkstra Algorithm
6. Program to find Shortest Path between every pair of vertices in a graph using Floyd‐Warshall's Algorithm.
7. Program to find Shortest Path between 2 Vertices using Bellman Ford's Algorithm.
8. Program For finding maximum Matching for bipartite graph
9. Program For finding maximum Matching for General Path
10. Program to find maximum flow from source node to sink node using Ford‐Fulkerson Algorithm

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 883
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Green Building Construction Materials and Practices L P C

4 4

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

OAE 7 CE‐OAE CE‐OAE‐3 OCE‐401

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To introduce the concepts of Green Building
2. To imbibe the basics of green design and sustainable development concepts.
3. To analyse problems related to conventional building and determine effect of green building
4. To learn guidelines for design, development, and certification of green buildings.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Define fundamental concepts of green building and various types of techniques involved.
CO 2 Analyse the complexities and problems associated with conventional building
CO 3 Determine the parameters that are required to design a green building.
CO 4 Design a green building in different scenarios and conditions.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 2 ‐ 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 1 ‐ 1
CO 2 3 2 2 2 ‐ 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐
CO 3 1 3 1 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐
CO 4 3 3 3 2 1 ‐ ‐ 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ 1

UNIT‐I

Green Building Concept: Overview of green building movement; Concept of Green building and sustainable
development; Issues and strategies of green building and sustainable development; Objectives Principles and
Benefits of Green building design; Introduction to High performance building; integrated design process of
high‐performance building; Green project requirements and strategies; Overview of various green rating
systems worldwide.

UNIT‐II

Indoor Built Environment: Problem of Existing Buildings and Built Environment; Energy use in buildings;
Greenhouse Gas Emissions and Indoor Air pollution; Building Water Use; Land use and consumption;
Construction Materials; Construction, Operation and Demolition Waste, Low emitting materials; Building and
material reuse, Factors affecting indoor environment quality; Ventilation and filtration; Building materials and
finishes‐ Emittance level; Indoor Environment quality best practice.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 884
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT‐III

Green Building Design: Passive Design Strategies: Optimum Design, Performing Insulation Solution, Ventilation;
Active Strategies: Equipment, Renewable Energy; Retrofitting; Net Zero Building Design; Embodied Energy
Estimation; Life Cycle Assessment Analysis.
Building energy simulation: Building energy efficiency standards‐ Lighting system design‐ Lighting economics
and aesthetics‐ Impacts of lighting efficiency‐ Energy audit and energy targeting, Technological options for
energy management.

UNIT ‐ IV

Green Building Assessment: Green Building Organizations, Green Building Rating Tools, Green building
certification procedure.
IGBC Guidelines: Introduction; IGBC green new building Rating system – Overview and process – project
checklist; Sustainable architecture and design; Site selection and planning; Water conservation and energy
efficiency; Building materials and resources; Indoor Environment quality; Innovation and development.

Textbook(s):
1. Green Building Technology Guide: Volume 1 ‐ Residential, Fred Andreas, Academic Press Inc., 2020, First
Ed.
2. The Idea of Green Building, A. K. Jain, Khanna Publishers, 2014, First Edition.

References:
1. Green Building Guidance: The Ultimate Guide for IGBC Accredited Professional Examination, Karthik
Karuppu, Notion Press, 2019, First Edition.
2. Sustainable Construction: Green Building Design and Delivery, Charles Kibert, John Wiley & Sons, 2005.
3. Alternative Energy Systems in Building Design, Peter Gevorkian, McGraw‐Hill Education, 2009, First Edition.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 885
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Green Energy Concepts in Smart Cities L P C

4 4

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 7 GTSE‐EAE GTSE‐EAE‐3 GTSE‐429

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To understand the concept of green energy, smart city and associated challenges.
2. To understand latest technologies used in smart building.
3. To understand concepts in smart cities.
4. To understand the importance of different smart system.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Define types of green energy and smart cities fundamentals.
CO 2 Apply knowledge of green energy in smart cities.
CO 3 Explain application of IoT in smart cities.
CO 4 Discuss management of Green Energy in Smart Cities.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 1 1 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐
CO 2 1 ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ 1 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐
CO 3 1 ‐ 1 ‐ 3 1 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐
CO 4 ‐ 2 3 ‐ ‐ 1 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐

UNIT‐I

Green smart cities: Fundamental of smart city & Infrastructure: Introduction of Smart City, Concept of smart
city, Objective for smart cities, History of Smart city world and India. Need to develop smart city, Dimension of
smart cities, Global Standards and performance benchmarks, Practice codes, Smart city planning and
development, financing smart cities development, Governance of smart cities, Challenges of managing
infrastructure in India and world, various types of Infrastructure systems, technology innovation, main areas of
intervention: green building, smart grid, smart lighting, smart mobility.

UNIT‐II

Planning and development of Smart city Infrastructure: Energy and ecology, solar energy for smart city,
Housing, sustainable green building, safety, security, disaster management, economy, cyber security, Project
management. Green Building Requirements: Principles of Energy, Heat Flow, Fuel Types, Air Flow, Moisture
Flow, Condensation and Dew Point, Relative Humidity, Concept of Earth air Tunnel System for moderating air
temperature, Waste and Material Management in Green Cities

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 886
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Green Energy for Sustainability and Energy Security: Introduction, Energy Systems: Their Composition,
Systems: Their Adverse Impacts, Green Energy and Sustainability: The Target and Solution, Diversification and
Localization of Energy Systems: A Means to Sustainability and Energy Security.

UNIT‐III

Transforming smart cities with IoT: Internet of Things (IoT) and the Smart City, IoT architectures of smart cities,
IoT Technologies for Smart Cities, Radio‐Frequency Identification, Near‐Field Communication, Low‐Power
Wide‐Area, Wireless Telecommunications, Wireless Sensor Network, IoT Applications for Smart Cities, Smart
Urban Mobility: Traffic Monitoring, Smart Parking, Connected Vehicles, Urban Sustainability: Smart Lighting,
Smart Meters, Smart Waste Management, Smart Buildings and Environment, Air Quality Monitoring, Building
Automation, Noise Monitoring, smart sensors and its types, IoT challenges in smart cities.

UNIT ‐ IV

Green Energy Management in Smart Cities: Introduction, Energy Requirements of Smart Cities, Industrial and
Ecological System, Air Pollution Reduction Plan, Air Pollution Reduction Plan, Peak Data Management, Energy
Management: Low‐Carbon Transportation, Industrial Waste Reduction, Energy‐Efficient Buildings, Green and
Flexible Infrastructure, Intelligent System Development.
Electromagnetic Pollution and Its Management: Introduction, causes of Electromagnetic Pollution, possible
effects and consequences of Electromagnetic Pollution, possible solution to Electromagnetic Pollution.

Textbook(s):
1. K. Saravanan and G. Sakthinathan, “Handbook of Green Engineering Technologies for Sustainable Smart
Cities”, CRC Press, Taylor and Francis Group, First edition (2022).

References:
1. Xianguo Li, “Green Energy Basic Concepts and Fundamentals”, Springer‐Verlag London Limited (2011).
2. Kibert C.J., “Sustainable Construction ‐ Green Building Design and Delivery” John Wiley and Sons, New York
3. Vijay Laxmi Kalyani, “Green Energy: The Need of the World” (2015).

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 887
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Green Energy Technology L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 7 TES‐EAE TES‐EAE‐4 TES‐449T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To understand about different types of Solar thermal Systems.
2. To understand the classification of Solar Photovoltaic systems.
3. To understand the wind energy systems and construction of various turbines.
4. To understand micro hydro power systems and bio‐energy systems.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Determine the need for solar energy and its applications.
CO 2 Analyse the Solar Photovoltaic Systems and compare Grid connected,Off‐grid, stand‐alone systems.
CO 3 Utilize the technology for harnessing the wind power.
CO 4 Design and analysis of micro hydro power plant and biomass energy conversion systems.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 2 ‐ ‐ 2 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 3
CO 2 3 3 2 ‐ ‐ 2 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 3
CO 3 3 3 2 ‐ ‐ 2 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 3
CO 4 3 3 2 ‐ ‐ 2 3 ‐ ‐‐ ‐ ‐ 3

UNIT‐I

Solar Energy: The sun as a source of energy, radiation – extra‐terrestrial and terrestrial, spectral distribution,
solar constant, solar radiation measurements, solar radiation data, solar radiation geometry.
Solar Thermal Systems: Classification of solar thermal systems, Concentrated and non‐concentrating solar
Power (CSP) systems— Flat plate collectors, parabolic collectors, parabolic dish collector, solar tower.
Solar thermal systems: Solar water heater, solar refrigeration and air conditioning systems, solar furnace, solar
dryer, and solar distillation systems.

UNIT‐II

Solar Photovoltaic (PV) Systems: Solar cell fundamentals, p‐n junction, solar cell characteristics, efficiency of PV
cell, Fill factor, effect of solar insolation and temperature on solar cell performance, classification of PV cells,
solar cell, module, and array.
Solar PV systems: Classification: Grid connected, Off‐grid, stand‐alone systems, hybrid solar PV system, solar PV

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 888
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

applications: water pumping, lighting, medical refrigeration, telecommunication, signalling, and village power.

UNIT‐III

Basics of wind energy: introduction, types of wind: global winds, local winds, factors affecting distribution of
wind energy on earth surface, wind data collection, variation of wind speed with height and time.
Wind turbine: Energy estimation of wind, power extraction from wind, axial thrust on wind turbine, torque
developed by wind turbine.
Wind Energy Systems: Types of wind energy systems—Horizontal axis wind turbines (HAWTs): construction,
working, specifications, vertical axis wind turbines (VAWTs): construction, working, specifications.

UNIT ‐ IV

Micro Hydro Power Systems: advantages and disadvantages, layout of micro‐hydro scheme, Classification:
impulse turbines, reaction turbines, turbine selection, characteristics, and selection.
Biomass‐energy Systems: Classification of bio‐fuels‐ biogas, biodiesel, charcoal, producer gas, Biomass
resources, biomass conversion technologies, waste to heat energy conversion system and sewage to energy
conversion system.

Textbook(s):
1. Khan B. H., “Non‐conventional energy resources”, Mc Graw Hill (2012).
2. Sukhatme S.P., Nayak J.K., “Solar Energy”, Tata Mcgraw (2010).
3. Balfour John R., Shaw Michael L., JarosekSharlave,” Introduction to Photovoltaics”, Jones and Bartlett
Publishers, Burlington (2011).
4. Ackermann Thomas, “Wind Power in Power Systems”, John Wiley and Sons, UK (2012).

References:
1. Nelson Vaughn C., Kenneth L. Starcher, “Introduction to Bioenergy”, CRC press, UK; (2015).
2. Garg H. and Prakash J., “Solar Energy: Fundamentals and Applications”, McGraw Hill Education, 2017.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 889
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Green Energy Technology Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 7 TES‐EAE TES‐EAE‐4 TES‐449P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Green Energy Technology) as this is the
practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Study different types of solar collectors.

2. Study different types of solar thermal based systems.
3. Analyze the performance of solar thermal power system.
4. Analyze the performance of solar refrigeration system.
5. Carry energy analysis of a flat plate solar collector.
6. Carry exergy analysis of a flat plate solar collector.
7. Study and compare different bio‐fuels.
8. Learn the assembling of a PV system.
9. Simulate the performance of a PV cell.
10. Study and compare HAWT and VAWT.
11. Visit to solar based energy system.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 890
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Heat and Mass Transfer L P C

4 4

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ME 5 PC PC MEC‐311
MAE 5 PC PC MEC‐305

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To introduce the students about the knowledge of conduction, convection, thermal radiation.
2. To enable them to make calculations of heat transfers that will help them in design and analysis of any
thermal system.
3. To introduce the students about different types of heat exchangers.
4. To introduce the students about the knowledge of condensation, boiling and mass transfer.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Evaluate rate of heat transfer by conduction, convection and radiation for standard industrial
configuration and solve problems.
CO 2 Apply free and forced convective heat transfer correlations to internal and external flows
through/over various surface configurations and solve problems.
CO 3 Apply LMTD and NTU methods of thermal analysis to different types of heat exchanger configurations;
and explain basic laws for radiation and apply these principles to radiative heat transfer between
different types of surfaces to solve problems.
CO 4 Explain the phenomena of boiling and condensation; and apply diffusive and convective mass transfer
equations and correlations to solve problems for different applications.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 3 3 ‐ 1 2 ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ 2
CO 2 3 3 3 3 2 ‐ 2 ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ 2
CO 3 3 3 3 3 ‐ ‐ 2 ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ 2
CO 4 3 3 3 3 2 ‐ 2 ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ 2

UNIT‐I

Conduction: Introduction to Heat Transfer, Various modes of heat transfer, Fourier’s Law, thermal conductivity
of solids, liquids and gases, factors influencing conductivity, general differential equation of conduction, one
dimensional steady state conduction, simple cases of conduction through a plane and composite wall, cylinder
and sphere, thermal diffusivity, overall heat transfer coefficient, Heat transfer through cylindrical & Spherical
surfaces, Critical thickness of insulation.
Fins and Transient Conduction: Heat transfer from extended surfaces, conduction convection system, general
conduction analysis, fins of uniform cross‐sectional area, fin performance, Transient heat conduction: lumped

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 891
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

system analysis.

UNIT‐II

Forced Convection: Introduction, dimensional analysis of forced convection and important dimensionless
numbers, velocity and thermal boundary layer, laminar boundary layer equations for internal and external
flows, laminar forced convection on a flat plate and in a tube.
Natural Convection: Basic Concepts, dimensional analysis of natural convection and important
dimensionless numbers, empirical relationship for natural convection, natural convection on a flat plate and
in a tube.

UNIT‐III

Heat Exchanger –Types of Heat exchangers, overall heat transfer coefficient, design of heat exchangers
logarithmic mean temperature difference (LMTD) method, effectiveness‐NTU method of heat exchangers,
fouling factor and correction factor.
Thermal Radiation: Concept of thermal radiations, radiation properties of surfaces, type of bodies (black and
non black bodies), Kirchhoff’s law, Planck’s distribution law, Wein’s displacement law, Stefan‐Boltzmann’s
relation, intensity of radiation, radiant heat exchange between black and grey surfaces, configuration factor,
radiation shielding, solar radiation; green house effect.

UNIT – IV

Condensation and Boiling: Introduction to condensation phenomena, Film and Drop wise condensation, Film‐
wise condensation on vertical plate and horizontal tubes. Boiling: Classification, Flow Regimes of Pool boiling,
Heat transfer correlations in boiling and condensation.
Mass Transfer: Basic Concepts, Diffusion Mass Transfer, Fick’s Law of Diffusion, Molecular and eddy diffusion;
concept of mass transfer coefficients, theories of mass transfer, Heat and mass transfer phenomenon,
molecular diffusion from an evaporating fluid surfaces, dimensionless analysis of convective mass transfer.

Textbook(s):
1. Incropera, Dewitt, “Fundamentals of Heat and Mass Transfer”, Wiley India Pvt. Ltd.
2. R. C. Sachdeva, “Heat Transfers” McGraw Hill.

References:
1. Mahesh M. Rathore, “Engineering Heat and Mass Transfer”, University Science Press.
2. P. K. Nag, “Heat and Mass Transfer”, Tata McGraw Hill Book Company.
3. Holman, J.P., "Heat Transfer", Tata McGraw Hill Book Company.
4. Domkundwar S., Arora S. C., Domkundwar Anand V., “A Course in Heat and Mass Transfer”, Dhanpat Rai &
Company.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 892
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Heat and Mass Transfer Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ME 5 PC PC MEC‐357
MAE 5 PC PC MEC‐353

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Heat and Mass Transfer) as this is the
practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. To find the thermal conductivity of an asbestos sheet.

2. To determine the thermal conductivity of metal rod.
3. To determine thermal conductivity of an insulating powder.
4. To determine overall heat transfer coefficient and the temperature distribution across the width of a
composite wall.
5. To determine convective heat transfer coefficient, temperature distribution, efficiency and effectiveness of
PIN‐FIN in natural convection.
6. To determine convective heat transfer coefficient, temperature distribution, efficiency and effectiveness of
PIN‐FIN in forced convection.
7. To determine LMTD and effectiveness of parallel and counter flow heat exchanger.
8. To determine the forced convective heat transfer coefficient, for flow of air inside a horizontal pipe.
9. To determine the surface heat transfer coefficient for a heated vertical cylinder in natural convection
10. To determine Stefan‐Boltzmann constant of radiation heat transfer.
11. To study boiling heat transfer phenomenon for pool boiling.
12. To determine emissivity of a test surface.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 893
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

High Voltage Engineering L P C

4 4

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EE 7 PCE PCE‐5 EEE‐427

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To Understand the concept of High voltage Breakdown in materials
2. To Design and development of high voltage equipment and utility establishment
3. To Analyze and measure the magnitude of HVDC, HVAC (power frequency & high frequency) and
impulse by different measurement schemes.
4. To analyze insulation coordination and testing
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Understand the concept of High voltage Breakdown in materials
CO 2 Design and development of high voltage equipment and utility establishment
CO 3 Analyze and measure the magnitude of HVDC, HVAC (power frequency & high frequency) and impulse
by different measurement schemes.
CO 4 Analyze insulation coordination and testing
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 2 3 2 2 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ 1 ‐ 2 2
CO 2 2 3 2 2 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ 1 ‐ 2 3
CO 3 2 3 2 2 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ 1 ‐ 2 2
CO 4 2 3 2 2 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ 1 ‐ 2 2

UNIT I

High Voltage and Breakdown Phenomenon: Electric field stress due to high voltage, gas ,vacuum, liquid, solids
and composites as dielectrics and insulator, estimation and control of electric stress and numerical methods for
its computation, surge voltages and their distribution and control, application of insulating materials in
transformer, rotating machines, circuit breakers, cable, power capacitors, bushings; breakdown in gaseous and
liquid dielectrics, collision process, ionization process, Townsend’s Criteria of breakdown in gases, Paschen’s
law, breakdown in pure and commercial liquids as insulator; intrinsic, electromechanical and thermal
breakdown of solid dielectrics, breakdown in composite dielectrics.

UNIT II

Generation of High Voltages and Currents: Generation of high direct current voltages and high alternating
current voltages, generation of impulse voltages and impulse currents, tripping and control of impulse

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 894
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

generators.

UNIT III

Measurement of High Voltages and Currents: Measurements of high voltages ‐ direct, alternating and impulse,
measurements of high currents–direct, alternating and impulse, Oscilloscope for impulse voltage and current
measurements.

UNIT IV

Over Voltage, Insulation Coordination and Testing: Causes of over voltage – lightning, switching, faults and
other abnormal conditions, principles of insulation coordination in high voltage, extra high voltage and ultra
high voltage power systems, measurement of DC resistivity, dielectric constant, loss factor and partial
discharge, testing of insulators and bushings, isolators and circuit breakers, cables, transformers, surge
arresters, measurement of Radio Interference.

Textbook(s):
1. M. S. Naidu & V. Kamaraju, “High Voltage Engineering”, Tata McGraw Hill Publications, 3rd Edition.
2. E. Kuffel, W.S. Zaengl & J. Kuffel, “High Voltage Engineering – Fundamentals”, Elsevier, 2nd Edition.

References:
1. C. L. Wadhwa, “High Voltage Engineering”, New Age International (P) Ltd, 1997.
2. Ravindra Arora & Wolfgang Mosh, “High Voltage Insulation Engineering”, New Age International (P) Ltd,
1995.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 895
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Holistic Human Health L P C

4 4

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CSE‐in‐EA 7 OAE‐CSE‐EA OAE‐2 OUHV‐463
EE‐VDT/EC‐ACT 7 OAE‐ECE‐EA OAE‐2 OUHV‐463
OAE 7 UHV‐OAE UHV‐OAE‐4A OUHV‐463

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To introduce students to the universal health principles
2. To initiate / strengthen the process and practices to keep the Body in harmony
3. To generate interest, commitment and to make effort for realising holistic human health and staying
healthy
4. To develop the vision for holistic human health
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Develop the feeling of self‐regulation or responsibility for the nurturing and protection of the Body.
CO 2 Formulate the program to take personal responsibility for his/her own health.
CO 3 Develop the vision for holistic human health and Model healthy habits in personal & professional life
CO 4 Formulate the strategy to contribute in maintaining the health of his/her family, society and nature.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 ‐ 3 1 1 ‐ 1
CO 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 ‐ 3 1 1 ‐ 1
CO 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 ‐ 3 1 1 ‐ 1
CO 4 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 ‐ 3 1 1 ‐ 1

UNIT‐I

Module 1: Introduction and Understanding the Human Being

This module discusses the current perspective on health, its lack of a holistic outlook and shortcomings as a
result of this. It puts forth the necessity for a change in perspective which can be brought about with better
understanding of the reality. It also talks about the entire process of the course. The course learnings are put
forward as proposals that students can verify for themselves in a logical way with reasoning and self‐
exploration rather than in the form of dos and don’ts.
In the process of understanding, the course focuses first and foremost on a complete understanding of the
human being and not merely on the physical body of the human being.
The expected outcome from this module is a thorough understanding of the two realities that constitute the
human being (the Self and the body), the differences in their needs and fulfillment of these needs, the

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 896
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

differences in their activities and responses, the way to maintain harmony and the importance of this
background in understanding health (harmony) in the Self and the body.

I. Current health perspective, need for change and process of understanding

1. Perspective about health – need for change
2. Process of the Course –process of Self–exploration (on the basis of Natural Acceptance)

II. Understanding the Human being, its Aspirations and fulfillment of these
aspirations
3. Human being as a co‐existence of Self and body
4. Basic aspiration of every human being‐ happiness and prosperity in continuity
5. Exploring the meaning of happiness and prosperity
6. Harmony within the Self – desires (feelings) in line with the Natural Acceptance

Practice/activity session for module 1:

1. Observing the Self by the Self (seeing the desires, thoughts and expectations within the Self)
2. Observing the body by the Self

UNIT‐II

Module 2: Universal Health Principles and Guidelines

This module explains, very clearly and in depth, the universal health principles that are derived from an
understanding of the reality as it is. It elaborates separately on the principles relating to the body and those
relating to the Self and its interaction with the body.
The module further charts out the guidelines for health which are drawn from the basic universal health
principles. These guidelines take into account the differences in human beings at the level of their physical
body and personality and the impact of the changes constantly occurring in one’s environment.
The expected outcome of this module is for students to see the universality of the health principles, the logic
and rationality behind them and to understand the guidelines for health drawn from the understanding of the
health principles as the foundation.

III. Universal health principles for all

7. Universal Health principles (in accordance with the reality) – Principles relating to the body
8. Universal Health Principles (contd.) ‐ Principles relating to interaction of the Self with the body
9. Universal health principles (contd.)

IV. Guidelines for health based on the principles

10. Guidelines for health ‐ details
11. Guidelines for Health (contd.)
12. Guidelines for health (contd.)

Practice/Activity session for module 2:

1. Observing the interaction between the Self and the body by the Self
2. Observing (by the Self) who is the decision maker in the interaction between the Self and the body

UNIT‐III

Module 3: Implementation

Module 3 describes the practical details of implementing the health guidelines on a day‐to‐day basis. It deals
with our intake and describes the importance of having our daily routine (lifestyle) in synchronization with the
diurnal and seasonal rhythms in nature.
In continuation this module deals with the practical benefits of physically working with nature, physical
exercises and postures to regulate the internal and external organs of the body (e.g. yoga) and breath
regulation (e.g. pranayam) and incorporating these practices in the daily routine of the student’s life.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 897
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

The module also provides an understanding of common herbs and spices that can be found in the kitchens of
most households (particularly in India) and how these can be used to bring the body back to harmony and
health if and when it does go into disharmony (ill‐health).It also throws light on when an individual can treat
minor ailments at home and when one needs to resort to the use of medication and treatment (a dependence
on external machines etc. if the body has gone into chronic or permanent disharmony).

V. Implementation of Health in the Individual

13. Program for staying healthy – practices and processes
14. Intake
15. Intake (contd.)
16. Intake (contd.)
17. Daily routine
18. Daily routine (contd.)
19. Daily routine (contd.)

VI. Implementation of Health in the Individual (Contd.)

20. Labor
21. Exercise
22. The practice of postures for regulating the internal and external body organs (Yoga) and its impact on the
health of the body
23. The practice of regulation of breath (pranayam) and its impact on the health of the body
24. Use of household remedies to keep body in harmony/bring it back from disharmony to harmony
25. When to resort to medication (when body is in temporary disharmony) and treatment (when the body I in
permanent disharmony)

Practice session for module 3:

1. Maintaining an intake that is nurturing for the body
2. Maintaining a daily routine that is in synchronization with natural cycles
3. Incorporating the practice of yoga and pranayam in the daily routine
4. Practically identifying household remedies and using them for minor ailments

UNIT ‐ IV

Module 4: The Healthy Environment

The fifth module emphasizes the importance of seeing the human being as an integral part of the larger whole.
This larger framework includes all that the human being is interconnected with and interdependent on i.e. the
environment of the human being. This includes relationships within the family, the society and all of nature/
existence. The module helps the student to understand the harmony at all these levels, the importance of living
in harmony at all these levels and the impact of the environment (family, society and nature) on the health of
the human being.

VII. Understanding the role of the environment in the health of an individual

26. Impact of environment (family, society and nature) on health of body
27. Understanding harmony in family (trust in relationships)
28. Understanding harmony in family (contd.) (respect in relationships)
29. Understanding harmony in family (contd.) (other feelings in relationship)
30. Understanding harmony in Society (trust/relationships, system in society)
31. Understanding harmony in Nature (innate order and harmony versus struggle for survival)
32. Understanding existence as co‐existence (units submerged in space)

Practice sessions for Module 4:

1. Practically contributing to the health within the family, working out the possibility of contributing to health
at the level of society
2. Working with nature and making effort to maintain the harmony in nature using cyclic processes

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 898
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Module 5: Holistic Health

This last module is dedicated to a final look at the health of the human being in totality – in a holistic manner. It
also briefly touches on implementation of health guidelines at levels beyond those of the individual i.e.
implementation at the level of family and society.
The module ends with providing an understanding about the purpose or goal of the human being and looks at
health in the body as a means of attaining this higher purpose rather than assuming health in the body as being
the goal in itself.
A final sum‐up of the entire course is also provided in this module.

VIII. Holistic Human health

33. Holistic Human Health (Health of Self + Health of body + Health of Environment (i.e. family, society, nature)
34. Implementation of health at level of family – designated family member to take responsibility
35. Implementation of health at level of society – health systems
36. Purpose of a healthy body and Sum up

Practice/Activity sessions for Module 5:

1. Observing what contributes to harmony within the Self (feeling of relationship, harmony and co‐existence)
2. Designing a health system for society that contributes to harmony at every level. The student also needs to
work out how he/she can contribute in this system and process.

Textbooks:
1. A Foundation Course in Human Values and Professional Ethics, R R Gaur, R Asthana, G P Bagaria, 2nd Revised
Edition, Excel Books, New Delhi, 2019. ISBN 978‐93‐87034‐47‐1
2. Professional Ethics and Human Values, Premvir Kapoor, Khanna Book Publishing, New Delhi, 2022.

References:
1. Charaka Samhita
2. The Complete Book of Ayurvedic Home Remedies, Vasant D. Lad
3. Quantum Healing‐Exploring the frontiers of Mind‐Body Medicine, Deepak Chopra
4. Ageless Body, Timeless Mind, Deepak Chopra
5. Jeevan Vidya EkParichay, A Nagraj
6. A Practical Guide to Holistic Health, Swami Rama
7. Ayurveda: The Science of Self‐healing: A Practical Guide, Vasant D. Lad
8. PranayamRahasya, Swami Ramdev
9. Yog – Its Philosophy and Practice
10. The China Study, Thomas Campbell, T. Colin Campbell, 2006 (A Comprehensive Study of Nutrition,
Implications for Diet, Weight Loss, And Long‐term Health)

Documentaries and Videos

1. Forks over Knives
2. Plant Pure Nation
3. The Earthing Movie

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 899
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Human Computer Interface L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CST 6 PCE PCE‐3 CIE‐358T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To understand the importance of good user interface design and usability engineering.
2. To learn the technique to use keyboard keys, event recognition and prototype models.
3. To equip with the knowledge of visual presentation, appropriate selection of content and colour, with
dialog design.
4. To understand the various design methodologies of interface and interaction models.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Ability to understand the features and importance of good user interface design using usability
engineering.
CO 2 Ability to implement keystroke features, speech and handwriting recognition and Prototype tools.
CO 3 Apply, adapt, and extend colour and content usage and dialog design.
CO 4 Ability to understand and analyse various user interface models and design issues.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 2 2 2 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 2 2 3
CO 2 3 2 2 2 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 2 2 3
CO 3 3 2 2 2 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 2 2 3
CO 4 3 2 2 2 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 2 2 3

UNIT‐I

Human Computer Interface ‐ Human Computer Interface and Its Importance, Importance of User Interface ‐
History of Human Computer Interface ‐ Importance of Good Design ‐ Benefits of Good Design ‐ Principles of
User Interface Design. Concept of Usability Engineering.

UNIT‐II

Interaction Devices, Keyboard Keys, Function Keys, Pointing Devices, Speech Recognition, Handwriting
Recognition, Speech Generation, Image Display, Video Display, Device Drivers, Techniques of Speech
Recognition, Applications of Speech Recognition, Handwriting Recognition, Speech Generation. Prototypes in
Human Computer Interface, Prototyping Tools, Wizard of OZ Technique

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 900
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT‐III

Color and Content, color uses and limitations, content uses and limitations, Why Colors, Color Uses, Choosing
Colors, Possible Problems with Colors, Page Title, Headings, Text, Messages, Error Messages, Icons. Formalism
in Dialog Design, StateCharts, Petri Nets.

UNIT ‐ IV

User Interface Design Process, User Interface Models, Design Methodologies, Cognitive Architecture, Object
Oriented Modelling of User Interface Design, Designing an Interface, Process of Interaction Design.

Textbook(s):
1. Alan Dix, Janet Finlay, Gregory D. Abowd, Russell Beale, “Human‐Computer Interaction”, Pearson.

References:
1. Dr. Kavita Saini, Sanjay Saxena, Anirban Mukhopadhyay, Arup Chattopadhyay , “Human Computer Interface”, Vikas
Publishing House.
2. Jonathan Lazar Jinjuan Heidi Feng, Harry Hochheiser, Research Methods in HumanComputer Interaction, Wiley, 2010.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 901
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Human Computer Interface Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CST 6 PCE PCE‐3 CIE‐358P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Human Computer Interface) as this is
the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

Software: FIGMA, Adobe XD

1. Study the evolution of Human Computer Interaction and usability engineering.

2. Design a system based on user‐ centred approach.
3. Understand the principles of good screen design by heuristic evaluation.
4. Calculate the screen complexity of existing Graphical User Interface and redesign to minimize it.
5. Create prototype and add interactions to it.
6. Design Cascading Menu and Pop‐up Menu for Graphical System.
7. Design appropriate icons to resemble their use in a GUI.
8. Design a Low Fi Wireframe for Homepage and Search Result page of a website.
9. Study and implement Lemieux' practical guide to colour mixing and colour combinations in painting and
Newton's colour wheel, along with the use of colour in branding and marketing.
10. Study and implement Nielsen’s 10 Principles for Interaction Design.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 902
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Human Economics L P C
4 4

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

OAE 7 UHV‐OAE UHV‐OAE‐5 OUHV‐467

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To introduce students to the basic ideas about economic prosperity, which they can apply in their day‐
to‐day life as responsible members of their family and as responsible citizens
2. To understand and evaluate the role of economics in societal development
3. To help students develop sensitivity to the economic issues in the development of the nation and
commitment to participate in resolving them
4. To equip the students with basic economic measures, tools and techniques to analyse economic issues
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Analyze the basic concepts in human economics and evaluate the efforts made to understand human
economics
CO 2 Explain the sustainable & mutually fulfilling production & management systems and Evaluate the role
of economics in societal development
CO 3 Compare the various theories in economics in the tradition and modern era
CO 4 Appraise the concepts and notions proposed in economics and see the way forward
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 ‐ 3 1 1 ‐ 1
CO 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 ‐ 3 1 1 ‐ 1
CO 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 ‐ 3 1 1 ‐ 1
CO 4 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 ‐ 3 1 1 ‐ 1

UNIT‐I

Introduction to Human Economics: Human economics, Vision for universal human order and role of economics
therein, Human needs and their fulfillment, three types of economics, Efforts in the tradition and modern era
to understand human economics, Role of economics in day to day life

UNIT‐II

Sustainable Ways of Wealth Generation and Sharing: Meaning of Wealth, Sustainable ways of wealth
generation (production), Preservation and right utilization of wealth, Feeling of prosperity, Marketplace,
Distribution and exchange, Value and price, Measures, tools and techniques for production and management
Role of Economics in Societal Development: Role of different societal orders in Societal Development and their

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 903
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

interdependence, Wealth and Economics Contributing to overall societal order‐ certainly not contradicting it

UNIT‐III

Concepts in Economics in the Tradition and Modern Era: Concepts in Economics in the Indian and Western
tradition, Theories of Economics in the modern era, Placement of various issues addressed in economics
(demand and supply, price determination, national income, money and banking, budgeting, economic reforms,
etc.)

UNIT ‐ IV

Appraisal of the Concepts in Economics and the Way Forward: Evaluation of present day notion of Human
Needs, Natural Resources, Wealth, economics etc., Inherent contradictions and dilemmas in modern day
management, Way forward.

Textbook(s):
1. Sociology & Economics for Engineers, Premvir Kapoor, Khanna Publishing House, New Delhi, 2018.

References:
1. Schumacher, E.F. (1973) Small Is Beautiful: A Study of Economics as if People Mattered.London: Blond &
Briggs.
2. Club of Rome – Limits to Growth, https://www.clubofrome.org/publication/the‐limits‐to‐growth/
3. Dierksmeier, C. and M. Pirson(2009)Oikonomia and Chrematistike: Learning from Aristotle about the Future
of Management.Journal of Business Ethics, 88(3): 417‐430.
4. GaurRR, Asthana R and BagariaGP (2019)A Foundation Course in Human Values and Professional Ethics.
Textbook and Teachers’ Manual. New Delhi: Excel Books. India, ISBN 978‐93‐87034‐47‐1
5. Professional Ethics and Human Values, Premvir Kapoor, Khanna Book Publishing, New Delhi, 2022.
6. Introductory Microeconomics, Textbook for Class XII (2021‐22), Published by NCERT
7. Macroeconomics, Textbook in Sociology for Class XII (2021‐22), Published by NCERT
8. Illich, I. (1974) Energy and Equity. Worcester and London: The Trinity Press. UK.
9. Julien‐François Gerber and Rajeswari S. Raina (eds.). 2018. Post‐Growth Thinking in India: Towards
Sustainable Egalitarian Alternatives, Orient Blackswan: New Delhi, ISBN: 9789352873937
10. Kumarappa, J.C. (1946) Economy of Permanence. Varanasi: SarvaSevaSanghPrakashan. India
11. Nagraj, A. (2001) AvartansheelArthshastra (Cyclical, Mutually Enriching Economics).Divya Path Sansthan,
Amarkantak, India.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 904
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Human Machine Interface for Microgrids L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 7 MT‐EAE MT‐EAE‐4 MT‐421T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To impart knowledge of the microgrid
2. To impart the basic knowledge of Human machine interface
3. To impart knowledge of the various distributed energy resources
4. To impart knowledge of the working of HMI for micro grid
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Ability to understand and use of microgrid & distribution generation.
CO 2 Ability to understand HMI hardware and to design Human_Automaion Interaction
CO 3 Understand the operations of various renewable energy systems
CO 4 Understand design of Human and Machine Multi‐Agent systems and Cooperation between Humans
and Machines.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 2 2 2 2
CO 2 3 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 1 1 2 2
CO 3 3 3 3 3 3 1 2 1 2 1 2 2
CO 4 3 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 1 2 2 2

UNIT‐I

Microgrid: Concept, requirements and applications, Microgrid formation, Distributed generation, Active
distribution network, Microgrid configuration, Interconnections, Technical and Economic advantages.
Challenges in Microgrid development.

UNIT‐II

Human Machine Interface: Hardware components, Description techniques for human machine Interfaces:
Model‐based approaches for the design and evaluation of dependable usable Interactive systems, designing
human automation interaction, effect of Age in HMI, Error on flight Deck: Interfaces, Organizations and culture.

UNIT‐III

Distributed Energy Resources: Solar photovoltaic (PV) systems: Types of PV cell, plastic & organic solar cells,

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 905
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

thin film solar cells, Working and operational constraints. Wind energy conversion systems (WECS): Variable
speed wind generators, Wind turbine operating systems and their features & limitations, Small‐scale
hydroelectric power generation, fuel cells, micro turbines, Captive power plants, Energy storage devices,
Integration of renewable energy sources.

UNIT‐IV

Protection & Control Of Microgrid using HMI: Communication trends, Issues of interconnection, Distributed
control system (DCS), Sub‐station communication standardization, control architecture, Communication
devices, Human–agent interaction, Analysis in the design of human and machine Multi‐Agent systems,
Authority and cooperation between humans and machines, Eye tracking from a Human Factors Perspective.
Protection system, Management and operational issues of a Microgrid, Dynamic interactions of Microgrid with
main grid.

Textbook(s):
1. S. Chowdhury, S.P. Chowdhury and P. Crossley, “Microgrids and Active Distribution Networks”, The
Institution of Engineering and Technology, 2009.
2. Guy A. Boy, “The Handbook of Human‐Machine Interaction (A Human‐Centered Design Approach), 1st
Edition, CRC Press.

References:
1. Stuart Borlase, “Smart Grids (Power Engineering)”, CRC Press.
2. Ali Keyhani, Mohammad N. Marwali, Min Dai, “Integration of Green and Renewable Energy in Electric
Power Systems”, Wiley.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 906
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Human Machine Interface for Microgrids Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 7 MT‐EAE MT‐EAE‐4 MT‐421P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Human Machine Interface for
Microgrids) as this is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Simulation of basic Demand Side Management (DSM) technique for load management in microgrid.
2. To determine open‐circuit voltage & short‐circuit current characteristics of solar cell.
3. To obtain voltage and current characteristics of solar cells in a) Series combination b) Parallel
combination.
4. Simulation of Maximum Power Point Tracking (MPPT) system for Photovoltaic (PV).
5. Simulation of real time data monitoring and logging for a solar power system.
6. To perform the operation of Wind energy conversion system and draw relevant characteristics curves.
7. To study the hardware component of a HMI and their physical verification.
8. To perform the operation of a renewable energy system using HMI.
9. To study the power flow in a bidirectional converter.
10. To build and test a solar powered DC microgrid.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 907
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Human Sociology L P C
4 4

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

OAE 7 UHV‐OAE UHV‐OAE‐4B OUHV‐465

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To introduce students to the basic concepts of sociology that would enable them to observe, interpret
and relate to social life
2. To explain the goals of societal institutions and their role in building a human society
3. To develop an understanding of an equitable and just society and appreciate the various efforts for it
in India and the rest of the world
4. To generate interest, commitment and to make effort for becoming responsible citizens
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Evaluate the efforts made to understand human sociology and explain the goals of societal institutions
and their role in building a human society
CO 2 Evaluate the role of individuals in setting up the tradition of humane culture and civilization
CO 3 Compare the various theories in sociology in the tradition and modern era
CO 4 Appraise the concepts proposed in sociology and formulate the way forward
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 ‐ 3 1 1 ‐ 1
CO 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 ‐ 3 1 1 ‐ 1
CO 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 ‐ 3 1 1 ‐ 1
CO 4 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 ‐ 3 1 1 ‐ 1

UNIT‐I

Introduction to Human Sociology: Human Sociology, Vision for humane society, Dimensions of a society,
Efforts in the tradition and modern era to understand human sociology, Role of sociology in day to day life
Societal Institutions, their Goals and Interdependence: Societal Institutions and their Goals, Types of social
institutions, Relatedness and interdependence of social institutions, Culture and Civilisation, Complimentarity
and opposition, Effort for mutual development, Social organisations, NGOs and GOs

UNIT‐II

Preparing Individuals for the Tradition of Humane Culture and Civilisation: Social efforts for development of
individual Sanskar (pre‐birth to last rites)‐ both at the level of consciousness as well as its expressions in
behaviour (role of culture and civilisation), Individual and collective Behaviour at the family and societal level

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 908
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

givingrise to culture in the society, Basis for successful working of the social institutions, Preservation and
enrichment of culture, Work and Service (seva), Agencies of socialisation

UNIT‐III

Concepts in Sociology in the Tradition and Modern Era: Concepts in Sociology in the Indian and Western
tradition, Theories of Sociology in the modern era, Placement of various issues addressed in sociology (social
inequality, colonialism, nationalism, class and community, social movements, rural‐urban linkages and
divisions, caste system, tribal communities etc.)

UNIT ‐ IV

Appraisal of the Concepts in Sociology and the Way Forward: A comparative study of different concepts
proposed in sociology and the way forward, Role of students in a human society towards Nation building

Textbook(s):
1. A Foundation Course in Human Values and Professional Ethics, R R Gaur, R Asthana, G P Bagaria, 2nd Revised
Edition, Excel Books, New Delhi, 2019. ISBN 978‐93‐87034‐47‐1
2. Sociology & Economics for Engineers, Premvir Kapoor, Khanna Publishing House, New Delhi, 2018.

References:
1. Professional Ethics and Human Values, Premvir Kapoor, Khanna Book Publishing, New Delhi, 2022.
2. Indian Society, Textbook in Sociology for Class XII (2021‐22), Published by NCERT
3. Social Change and Developmentin India, Textbook in Sociology for Class XII (2021‐22), Published by NCERT
4. Hind Swaraj or, Indian home rule Mohandas K. Gandhi, 1909.
5. Science & Humanism – towards a unified worldview, P. L. Dhar & R. R. Gaur (1990), Commonwealth
Publishers, New Delhi
6. VyavaharvadiSamajshastra, A. Nagraj, Divya Path Sansthan, Amarkantak, India.
7. Integral Humanism, Deendayal Upadhyaya, 1965.
8. LohiyaKeVichar, Lok Bharti, RammanoharLohiya, 2008.
9. Human Society, Kingsley Davis, 1949.
10. VyavahatmakJanvad, A. Nagraj, Divya Path Sansthan, Amarkantak, India.
11. The Communist Manifesto, Karl Marx, 1848.
12. Toward a True Kinship of Faiths: How the World's Religions Can Come Together Dalai Lama XIV, 2011.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 909
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Human Values and Madhyasth Darshan L P C

4 4

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

OAE 7 UHV‐OAE UHV‐OAE‐3A OUHV‐457

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To help students understand the basic principles of Madhyasth Darshan
2. To help students understand the existential realities including the human existence through
Madhyasth Darshan
3. To help them to see the participation of human beings in the nature/ existential realities (i.e. human
values) and therefore the human conduct through each one of them
4. To help students apply this understanding to make their living better at different levels‐ individual,
family, society and nature
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Analyze the basic concepts of Madhyasth Darshan
CO 2 Analyze the human being, the needs and activities of human being through Madhyasth Darshan
CO 3 Formulate the role of human being in the entire existence, thus getting clarity about values at all levels
of living and human conduct based on Madhyasth Darshan
CO 4 Model the foundation of human society and human tradition based on Madhyasth Darshan
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 ‐ 3 1 1 ‐ 1
CO 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 ‐ 3 1 1 ‐ 1
CO 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 ‐ 3 1 1 ‐ 1
CO 4 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 ‐ 3 1 1 ‐ 1

UNIT‐I

Introduction to Madhyasth Darshan and its Basics: Need to study Madhyasth Darshan; introduction, basic
formulations of the darshan; the complete expanse of study and the natural outcome of living according to the
darshan.
Submergence of Nature in Space: The ever‐present existence in the form of nature submerged in space; nature
classified into two categories – material and consciousness, and four orders; the form, property, natural
characteristic and self‐organisation of the four orders, General direction and process of evolution in the nature/
existence.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 910
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT‐II

Human Being as an indivisible part of Nature: Human being as an indivisible part of nature; various types (five
classes) of human beings; human being in the combination of self and body; purpose of self as realization,
prosperity for the body; need of behavior and work for attaining the goals of realization and prosperity.

UNIT‐III

Fulfillment of human goal of realization: Following natural, social and psychological principles for actualizing
the human goal; form of conducive society and order for such practices, study process‐ achieving realization
through self‐study and practice while living in such a society (social order).

UNIT ‐ IV

Human Conduct based on Madhyasth Darshan: Description of such a realized self, continuity of happiness,
peace, satisfaction and bliss through realization, conduct of a realized human being. Possibility of finding
solutions to present day problems (such as inequality of rich and poor, man and woman etc.) in the light of it.

Textbook(s):
1. Nagraj, A., “Manav Vyavahar Darshan”, Jeevan Vidya Prakashan, 3rd edition, 2003.

References:
1. Nagraj, A., “Vyavaharvadi Samajshastra”, Jeevan Vidya Prakashan, 2nd edition, 2009.
2. Nagraj, A., “Avartanasheel Arthashastra”, Jeevan Vidya Prakashan, 1st edition, 1998.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 911
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Human Values in Buddh and Jain Darshan L P C

4 4

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

OAE 7 UHV‐OAE UHV‐OAE‐3B OUHV‐459

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To help students understand the basic principles of Bauddh and Jain Darshan
2. To help them see the participation of human beings in the nature/ existential realities (i.e. human
values) and therefore the human conduct through each one of them
3. To help students apply this understanding to make their living better at different levels‐ individual,
family, society and nature
4. To facilitate the students in applying this understanding in their profession and lead an ethical life
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Analyze the basic concepts of Bauddh and Jain Darshan
CO 2 Analyze the human being, the needs and activities of human being through Bauddh and Jain Darshan
CO 3 Formulate the role of human being in the entire existence, thus getting clarity about values at all levels
of living and human conduct based on Bauddh and Jain Darshan
CO 4 Model the foundation of human society and human tradition based on Bauddh and Jain Darshan
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 ‐ 3 1 1 ‐ 1
CO 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 ‐ 3 1 1 ‐ 1
CO 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 ‐ 3 1 1 ‐ 1
CO 4 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 ‐ 3 1 1 ‐ 1

UNIT‐I

Introduction to Bauddh and Jain Darshan: Need to study Bauddh and Jain Darshan; the origin of the two
philosophies, their basic principles and scope for further reading.
Basic Principles of Bauddh Darshan: Law of impermanence (changability); Four noble truths; Eightfold path;
Law of cause‐ action (pratitya‐samutpaad). Definition of some salient words of Bauddh Darshan – nirvana,
dhamma, tri‐ ratna(Bauddh, Dharma and Sangh), pragya, karma, parmi, ashta‐kalap, trishna, shad‐ayatan,
samvedana, vipassana, anitya, maitri, brham‐vihaar, tathagata, arahant.

UNIT‐II

Purpose and Program for a Human Being based on Bauddh Darshan: The purpose and program of a human
being living on the basis of it, clarity and practice of human values and human conduct, the natural outcome of

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 912
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

such a program on society, nature and tradition.

Purpose‐freedom from suffering, nirvana; root of suffering‐ vikaar – raga, dvesha and moha, Progam – various
steps of meditation for attaining knowledge; shamath and vipassana; sheel‐samadhi‐pragya; practice of
equanimity (samatva), eightfold path(Ashtang Marg); combination of understanding and practice.

UNIT‐III

Basic Principles of Jain Darshan: Basic realities – description of nine elements in existence (jeev, ajeev, bandh,
punya, paap, aashrav, samvar, nirjara, moksha), 6 dravya of lok – dharma, adhrma, akash, kaal, pudgal, jeev; tri‐
lakshan, various types of pragya, various stages of realisation; samyak‐gyan, samyak‐darshan, samyak‐charitra,
syadvaad, anekantavaad, naya‐ nishchaya and vyavahar, karma‐phal siddhanta
Definition of some salient words of Jain Darshan –arhant, jin, tirthankara, panch‐parameshthi, atma, pramaan,
kaal, pudgal, paramanu, kashay, leshya.

UNIT ‐ IV

Purpose and Program for a Human Being based on Jain Darshan: The purpose and program of a human being
living on the basis of it, clarity and practice of human values and human conduct, the natural outcome of such a
program on society, nature and tradition, possibility of finding solutions to present day problems in the light of
it.
Purpose (goal) ‐ moksha, Program‐ following mahavrat, anuvrat, 10 lakshan dharma; samyak darshan‐gyan‐
charitra. Commonality with Bauddh Darshan

Textbook(s):
1. Chattejee, S.G. and Datta, D.M., “An Introduction to Indian Philosophy”, University of Calcutta Press, 1960.

References:
1. “Dhammapad”, Vipassana Research Institute, 2001.
2. Drukpa, G., “Musings from the Heart”, Drukpa Publications Private Ltd, 2018.
3. Jyot, “Ekcheezmilegi Wonderful”, A Film Directed by Jyot Foundation, 2013.
4. Goenka, S.N., “The Discourse Summaries”, Vipassana Research Institute, 1987.
5. Madhavacharya, “Sarva‐darshan Samgraha”, Chaukhambha Vidya Bhavan, Varanasi, 1984.
6. Varni, J., “Samansuttam”, SarvaSeva Sangh Prakashan, Varanasi, 7th Edition, 2010.
7. A Foundation Course in Human Values and Profession Ethics (Text Book and Teachers’ Manual), R. R. Gaur, R.
Asthana, G. P. Bagaria (2019 Second Revised Edition), Excel Books, New Delhi [ISBN 978‐93‐87034‐47‐1].
8. Professional Ethics and Human Values, Premvir Kapoor, Khanna Book Publishing, New Delhi, 2022.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 913
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Human Values in Vedic Darshan (Sankhya, Yoga and Vedanta) L P C

4 4

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

OAE 7 UHV‐OAE UHV‐OAE‐3C OUHV‐461

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To help students understand the basic principles of the Vedic Darśana covering Nyāya‐Vaiśeṣika,
Sāṃkhya‐Yoga, and Mīmāṃsā‐Vedanta Darśana and Upaniṣads
2. To help them to see the participation of human beings in the nature/ existential realities (i.e. human
values) and therefore the human conduct through each one of them
3. To help students apply this understanding to make their living better at different levels‐ individual,
family, society and nature
4. To facilitate the students in applying this understanding in their profession and lead an ethical life
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Analyze the basic concepts of the Vedic Darśana ‐ Nyāya‐Vaiśeṣika, Sāṃkhya‐Yoga, Mīmāṃsā‐Vedanta
Darśana and Upaniṣads
CO 2 Analyze the human being, the needs and activities of human beings through Vedic Darśana.
CO 3 Formulate the role of human being in the entire existence, thus getting clarity about values at all levels
of living and human conduct based on Vedic Darśana
CO 4 Model the foundation of human society and human tradition based on Vedic Darśana
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 ‐ 3 1 1 ‐ 1
CO 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 ‐ 3 1 1 ‐ 1
CO 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 ‐ 3 1 1 ‐ 1
CO 4 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 ‐ 3 1 1 ‐ 1

UNIT‐I

Introduction to Vedic Darśana: Need to study Nyāya‐Vaiśeṣika, Sāṃkhya‐Yoga, Mīmāṃsā‐Vedanta Darśana and
Upaniṣads; the origin of these philosophies, their basic principles and scope for further reading.
YogaDarśana: Yoga Darśana‐ the steps of Aṣṭāṃga yoga (yama, niyama, āsana, prāṇāyāma, pratyāhāra,
dhāraṇā, dhyāna and samādhi) and the challenges in following them, afflictions (kleṣa)‐ avidyā, asmitā, rāga,
dveṣa, abhiniveṣa, different types of vṛttis (pramāṇa, viparyaya, vikalpa, nidrā, smṛti), the process of nirodha of
vṛttis; maitri, karuṇā, muditā, upekṣā; description of yama, niyama, āsana and praṇayaama; kriyāyoga –tapa,
svādhyāya and īśvara‐praṇidhāna; different steps of samādhi, different types of saṃyama, vivekakhyāti, prajñā

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 914
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT‐II

NyāyaDarśana: Introduction to NyāyaDarśana, 16 padārthas (pramāṇa, prameya, saṃśaya, prayojana,

dṛṣṭānta, siddhānta, avayava, tarka, nirṇaya, vāda, jalpa, vitaṇḍā, hetuābhāsa, chala, jāti, nigrahasthāna)
paṃcāvayavaprakriyā (pratijñā, hetu, udāharaṇna, upanaya, nigamana)
VaiśeṣikaDarśana: karma phala; mindful dāna; śucitā‐aśucitā; reasons of rāga‐dveśa, avidyā, sukha‐
Introduction to VaiśeṣikaDarśana, definition of Dharma, abhyudaya, niḥśreyasa; 6 padārthas (dravya, guṇa,
karma, sāmānya, viśeśa, samvāya) – their definition, characteristics and relationship; nitya‐anitya; cause‐effect
relationships; dṛṣṭa‐adṛṣṭaduḥkha, etc. and how to get rid of them

UNIT‐III

Upaniṣad and Vedanta Darśana: Introduction to Upaniṣad and Vedanta Darśana; Īśopaniṣad – Idea of
renouncement, Karma Yoga, balance of Vidyā‐Avidyā and Prakṛti‐Vikṛti; Tattirīyopaniṣad – Different names of
the God and their meaning, parting message of Guru to the graduating student (Śikṣāvallī), Nature of Brahma
and Prakṛti, Methods of Upāsanā; Nature of Ātmā, Description of existence, principle of karma‐phala,
description of paṃcakośa, nature of mukti, process and way to achieve it, antaḥkaraṇa‐śuddhi, different nature
of paramātmā/brahma, Īśvara, Four qualifications (Sādhana‐catuṣṭaya)

UNIT ‐ IV

SāṃkhyaDarśana: SāṃkhyaDarśana‐ Puruṣārtha, the nature of Puruṣa and Prakṛti, 24 elements of

Prakṛti,bondage and salvation (liberation), the principle of satkāryavāda, triguṇātmakaprakṛti
Purpose and Program for a Human Being based on the Vedic Darśanas: The purpose and program of a human
being living on the basis of the Vedic Darśana, clarity and practice of human values and human conduct, the
natural outcome of such a program on society, nature and tradition. Vedic system of living in a society ‐
PaṃcaMahāyajṇa, Varṇa System, Āśrama System, 16 Saṃskāras, etc.

Textbook(s):
1. Acharya Udayveer Shastri, Sankhya Darshanam (vidyodaya Bhashyam), GovindramHasanand
2. Acharya Rajveer Shastri, Patanjal Yog Darśana Bhashyam, Arsha Sahitya Prachar Trust
3. Acharya Udayveer Shastri, Brahma Sutra (Vedanta Darshanam), GovindramHasanand

References:
1. Krishna, I. (2010) The SāṃkhyaKarika, BharatiyaVidyaPrakashan, 4th edition
2. Madhavacharya, Sarva‐DarshanaSamgraha, ChaukhambhaVidyabhavan, Varanasi.
3. Muller, F.M. (1928) The Six Systems of Indian Philosophy, London: Longmans Green and Co. Publication.
4. Maharaj O. () Patanjal Yogpradeep, Geeta press Gorakhpur
5. Vachaspati M. Sankhyatatvakaumudi, Motilal Banarasi Das Publication.
6. Shreemad Bhagwat Geeta
7. Shankaracharya, VivekChoodamani
8. Rajyoga, Swami Shivananda
9. The Nyāya Sutras of Gotama, Sinha, N. (Ed.). Motilal Banarsidass Publ. (1990).
10. Professional Ethics and Human Values, Premvir Kapoor, Khanna Book Publishing, New Delhi, 2022.11. Vedic
Vision: Ancient Insights Into Modern Life, Satyavrata Siddhantalankar, Vijay Krishn Lakhanpal, 1999
12. Sanskar Chandrika, Dayananda Saraswati, and Satyavrata Siddhantalankar. Vijay KrishnLakhanpal, 1990.
13. THE TAITTIRIYA Upanishad, Achari, Sri Rama Ramanuja. (2013).
14. Vedic religion: The Taittiriya‐Upanishad with the commentaries of Sankaracharya Suresvaracharya and
Sayana (Vidyarana). Sastri, A. Mahadeva. (2016).
15. Taittiriyopanishad Sankara Bhashya With Hindi Translation Gita Press 1936.
16. Gautama's Nyāyasūtras: With Vātsyāyana‐Bhāṣya. Jha, Ganganatha, ed. Oriental Book Agency, 1939.
17. Nyaya Darshnam, Acharya Udayveer Shastri, Vijaykumar Govindram Hasanand (2018)
18. Vaisheeshika Darshanam, Acharya Udayveer Shastri, Vijaykumar Govindram Hasanand (2017)
19. A Foundation Course in Human Values and Profession Ethics (Text Book and Teachers’ Manual), R. R. Gaur,
R. Asthana, G. P. Bagaria (2019 Second Revised Edition), Excel Books, New Delhi [ISBN 978‐93‐87034‐47‐1].

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 915
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Hydraulics and Pneumatics L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ICE 6 PCE PCE‐2 ICE‐320T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To expose the students to pneumatic and hydraulic system and their applications
2. To impart knowledge on pneumatic and hydraulic actuators and valves
3. To expose the students on the basic pneumatic circuit design
4. To impart knowledge on pneumatic control and its system
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Ability to understand the basic parts of the pneumatic and hydraulic system, pneumatic and electrical
controllers, converters and their applications
CO 2 Ability to apply fundamental concepts of Pneumatic and Hydraulic systems to develop pneumatic and
hydraulic system applications
CO 3 Ability to analyze the piping and instrumentation diagrams used in process industry and pneumatic
and hydraulic system for preventive maintenance and troubleshooting.
CO 4 Ability to design a hydraulic and pneumatic circuit
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 ‐ 3
CO 2 3 3 2 ‐ ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ 2 2 ‐ 3
CO 3 3 3 2 3 ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ 2 3 2 3
CO 4 3 3 3 3 ‐ 2 2 2 2 3 2 3

UNIT I

Pneumatic and Hydraulic System Components

Introduction: Basic requirement for Pneumatic System, Components of pneumatic system: Types of air
compressors, air treatment stages, pressure regulation (FRL unit), Introduction to hydraulic system,
components of hydraulic system, Types of pumps, comparison of pneumatic & hydraulic system.

UNIT II

Control Valves and Actuators

Control valves‐ types of control valves, classification of control valves, Directional Control Valves‐actuators,
cylinders valve positioner, piston & motor actuators, electro pneumatic actuators, hydraulic actuators.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 916
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT III

Basic Pneumatic Circuits

Basic pneumatic circuits, Timing & sequence diagram: Sequence operation of hydraulic and pneumatic
cylinders and motors; Electro Pneumatic & Electro Hydraulic Systems design, Relay Logic circuits, Feedback
control systems, pneumatic telemetry systems: Pneumatic temperature & pressure transmitters their working
and applications, electrical control in pneumatic circuit.

UNIT IV

Pneumatic and Hydraulic Converters and Controllers

Pneumatic Relay, Flapper nozzle assembly, Pneumatic amplifier, Pneumatic & Hydraulic Controllers (P, PI, PID),
P&ID diagrams, converters: I/P, P/I, Maintenance & troubleshooting of pneumatic & hydraulic systems.
Introduction to Mechatronic Systems & their applications

Text Books:
1. C. D. Johnson , “Process Control Instrumentation Technology”, PHI, 2002
2. Andrew Parr, “Pneumatic & Hydraulic”, PHI, 1999.

References:
1. D. Considine, “Process Industrial Instruments & Control Handbook”, McGraw Hill, 1993.
2. B. G Liptak, “Instrument Engineers Handbook”, Chilton Book Co.
3. S. R. Majumdar, “Pneumatic system”, Tata McGraw‐Hill Education

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 917
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Hydraulics and Pneumatics Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ICE 6 PCE PCE‐2 ICE‐320P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Hydraulics and Pneumatics) as this is
the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Operating single acting cylinder and double acting cylinder using 3/2 push button valve.
2. Operating double acting cylinder using 5/2 pilot operated valve.
3. Operating double acting hydraulic cylinder using hydraulic 4/3 and 4/2 valve.
4. Operating single and double acting cylinder using special purpose valve – Time delay valve, Quick exhaust
valve, Twin pressure valve, Check valve etc.
5. Write a program for sequencing of two cylinders using pneumatic components only.
6. Write a program for sequencing of two cylinders using electro pneumatic components.
7. Sequencing of multiple double acting piston cylinder arrangement using electro‐pneumatic components.
8. PLC programming‐ Operate single acting cylinder and double acting cylinder using push button and
direction Control valve. Use push buttons in the AND, OR and Latching conditions.
9. Write a PLC program for to and fro motion of single acting cylinder and double acting cylinder
automatically.
10. Write a PLC program for sequencing of three cylinders in following sequence
A+B+C+ A‐B+C+ A‐ B‐C+ A‐B‐C‐

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 918
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

IC Engines and Gas Turbines L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ME 6 PCE PCE‐1 MEE‐312T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To introduce the students about basic knowledge of components and working principles of different
types of engines and turbines.
2. To understand the basic principles of IC Engines and To know about different components in IC Engine.
3. To know the basics of power generation in IC Engine. To analyse the combustion process in SI and CI
engine. To understand and evaluate the auxiliary system in IC engine such as supercharger/
turbocharger.
4. To understand the principles of compressors and turbines. To teach them principles of gas dynamics
and jet propulsion.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Understand the working principle of engines and fuel system in SI and CI Engine.
CO 2 Explain the combustion phenomenon in SI and CI engines.
CO 3 Explain the performance parameters for IC Engines, Engine Testing, Supercharging, Lubrication and
Engine Cooling.
CO 4 Explain the concept of Gas Turbine and Gas Turbine Cycles for Aircraft Propulsion.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 3 3 1 2 2 ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ 2
CO 2 3 3 3 3 ‐ 3 2 ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ 2
CO 3 3 3 3 3 ‐ 3 2 ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ 2
CO 4 3 3 3 2 ‐ 3 2 ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ 2

UNIT‐ I

Introduction: Basic engine components and nomenclature, Classification of engines, The working principle of
engines, Comparison of 2‐stroke and 4‐stroke engines; CI, and SI Engines, Ideal and actual working cycles and
their analysis, valve and port timing diagram.
Fuel system in SI and CI Engine and Automotive Fuels: Carburetion‐ working principles, chemically correct air‐
fuel ratio and load variation, compensating devices, venture and jet dimension calculation, modern fuel
induction system, multi‐point fuel injection system, fuel injection: common rail direct injection, Petroleum
based fuels and their properties, knock rating of engine, fuels, necessity of alternative fuels, LPG, CNG,
producer gas, biogas, H2, biodiesel and alcohols.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 919
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT‐ II

Combustion Phenomenon in SI engines: Principles of combustion in SI engine, effect of engines and operating
variables on ignition delay & flame propagation, Stages of Combustion, combustion chamber for SI engines,
cycle to cycle variation, pre‐ignition, abnormal combustion, theory of detonation, effect of engine and
operating variables on detonation.
Combustion phenomenon in CI engines: Principles of combustion in CI engine, delay period, variables
affecting, delay period, diesel knock, methods of controlling diesel knock, combustion process & combustion
chambers for CI engines.

UNIT‐ III

Performance parameters for IC Engines: Engine Power, Engine Efficiencies, Performance Characteristics,
Variables Effecting Performance Characteristics, Methods of Improving Engine Performance, Heat Balance.
Engine Testing, Supercharging, Lubrication and Engine Cooling: Engine performance and testing,
measurement of power, supercharging limits of SI &CI engines methods of supercharging, superchargers, turbo
charging, lubrication principles, function of lubricating system, properties of lubricating oil, additives, cooling
system, air cooling, water cooling.

UNIT‐ IV

Gas Turbines: Introduction to gas turbines, simple open and close cycle gas turbine, efficiency and specific
output of simple cycle, effects of regeneration, re‐heating and inter‐cooling on efficiency and work output,
effect of operating variables on thermal efficiency, air rate, work ratio; water injection, Advantages and
disadvantages of gas turbine; gas turbine components, performance and application of gas turbine, Combined
cycle and cogeneration.
Gas Turbine Cycles for Aircraft Propulsion: Criteria of performance, Intake and propelling nozzle efficiencies,
Simple Turbojet Cycle, The turbofan engine The turboprop engine, Thrust augmentation, Gas turbine
combustion systems, Gas Turbine Emissions.

Textbook(s):
1. V. Ganesan, “Internal Combustion Engines”, Tata McGraw‐Hill.
2. H. Cohen, GFC Rogers, HIH Saravanamuttoo, “Gas Turbine Theory”, Addison Wesley Longman Limited.

Reference Books:
1. John B Heywood, “Internal Combustion Engine Fundamentals”, Tata McGraw‐Hill.
2. K. K. Ramalingam, “Internal Combustion Engines” 2nd ed, SCITECH Publications.
3. E.T. Vincent “Theory & Design of Gas Turbine and Jet Engine” Tata McGraw Hill.
4. Gas Turbine Principles and Practice, Cox Newnes.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 920
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

IC Engines and Gas Turbines Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ME 6 PCE PCE‐1 MEE‐312P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (IC Engines and Gas Turbines) as this is
the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. To draw the Valve Timing Diagram using the Cut Section CI Engine Model.
2. To draw the Valve Timing Diagram using the Cut Section SI Engine Model.
3. To make a trial on single cylinder 4‐stroke Diesel Engine to calculate B.H.P., S.F.C. and to draw its
characteristics curves.
4. To make a trial on 4‐stroke high‐speed diesel engine and to draw its Heat Balance Sheet.
5. To make a trial on SI Engine at constant speed to calculate B.H.P., S.F.C., Thermal efficiency and to draw its
characteristic Curves.
6. To make Morse Test to calculate IHP of the multi cylinder petrol engine and to determine its mechanical
efficiency.
7. To Study Lubrication and cooling systems employed in various I. C. Engines in the Lab.
8. To Study Braking system of automobile in the lab.
9. To study a Carburetor.
10. To study (I) the Fuel Injection System of a C.I. Engine, (II) Battery Ignition system of a S.I. Engine.
11. To study multi Cylinder four strokes vertical Diesel Engine test RIG with Hydraulic Dynamometer.
12. To study the Gas Turbine Model.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 921
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Industrial and Optical Instrumentation L P C

4 4

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ICE 5 PC PC ICC‐309

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To expose the students to various measurement techniques used for measuring industrial process
variables
2. To impart knowledge on signal conversion and conditioning methods for measurement of industrial
variables
3. To expose the students on the basics of optical sources and detectors, optical fiber and fiber optic
sensors and industrial application of fiber optic sensors
4. To impart knowledge on various spectroscopic instruments used in the analysis of materials
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Ability to understand various measurement techniques used for measuring industrial process variables
CO 2 Ability to apply knowledge of various types of transducers, optical and analytical instruments for
industrial applications
CO 3 Ability to analyze the Optical sources and detectors and various types of measurement techniques for
industrial applications
CO 4 Ability to design signal conditioning circuit for various sensors and transducers used for measurement
of industrial variables
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 ‐ 3
CO 2 3 3 2 2 ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ 2 2 ‐ 3
CO 3 3 3 3 3 ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ 2 3 2 3
CO 4 3 3 3 3 ‐ 2 ‐ 2 2 3 2 3

UNIT I

Temperature Measurements: Introduction; Definitions, standards, unit systems, points calibration of

thermometers, study of filled in system thermometer, bimetallic thermometers, 3 and 4 wire RTD, high
temperature measurement techniques, Radiation fundamentals ‐Radiation methods of temperature
measurement, Total radiation pyrometers, Optical pyrometers, Bolometers
Level Measurements: Introduction, level measurement‐ differential pressure method, Electrical types of level
gauges using resistance, capacitance, nuclear radiation and ultrasonic sensors

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 922
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT II

Pressure Measurements: Introduction, Definition of absolute pressure, gauge pressure and vacuum, their
relation and units of pressure, Non‐Electric type pressure measurement: manometers: U‐tube, well type,
Elastic type pressure gauge: Bourdon tube, Diaphragm and Bellows, Electrical methods: elastic elements with
LVDT, strain gauges, capacitive type transducers for pressure measurement, Measurement of vacuum: McLeod
gauge, thermal conductivity gauges, Ionization gauge, Electrical pressure transmitter
Flow Measurements: Introduction, units of flow measurement, classification of flow meters, variable head
flow meters‐ orifice plate, venturi tube and flow nozzle, variable area flow meters‐ Rotameter, Electro
Magnetic flow meters and ultrasonic flow meters, turbine and open channel flow meters

UNIT III

Force and Torque Measurement: Electric balance ‐ Different types of load cells ‐ Hydraulic, Pneumatic, strain
gauge, Piezoelectric load cells, Different methods of torque measurement‐ Types of dynamometers,
Absorption dynamometer‐ Prony brake and rope brake dynamometer.
Chemical Composition measurements: pH measurement – principle, electrodes for pH measurements, pH
meter and its calibration, Electrical conductivity measurement – Measuring circuit, Water and steam purity
measurement using electrical conductivity

UNIT IV

Optical Instrumentation: Optical sources and detectors: LED, laser, photo‐diode, light dependent resistor,
square law detectors and their characteristics; interferometer: applications in metrology; Principle of Optical
fiber, basics of fibre optic sensing, Types of optical fibers
UV‐Visible spectrometers, Mass Spectrometer: Introduction, types of mass spectrometers, Quadrupole Mass
spectrometer, Time of Flight Mass spectrometer

Textbooks:
1. Patranbis D, ”Principles of Industrial Instrumentation” , Tata McGraw Hill Pub., New Delhi (1991)
2. Khandpur R S, “Handbook of Analytical Instruments (7th reprint)”, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi (2000)
3. Djafar.K. Mynbaev, Lowell. Scheiner, Fiber‐Optic Communications Technology, Pearson, 1st Edition, 2008.

References:
1. Ernest.O. Doebelin and Dhanesh. N. Manik, Doebelin’s Measurement Systems, McGraw Hill, 6th Ed, 2011.
2. Wilson and Hawkes, Opto Electronics ‐ An Introduction, Prentice Hall, New Delhi, 3rd Edition, 2003.
3. Bela G. Liptak, Instrument Engineers' Handbook, Volume One: Process measurement and analysis, CRC
Press, 4th Edition, 2003.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 923
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Industrial and Optical Instrumentation Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ICE 5 PC PC ICC‐357

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Industrial and Optical Instrumentation)
as this is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Measurement of Temperature using RTD

2. Measurement of level using electrical sensor
3. Measurement of pressure using electrical method
4. Measurement of flow using variable area technique
5. Measurement of force using load cell
6. Measurement of pH using pH meter
7. Measurement of flow using variable flow technique
8. Measurement of vaccum pressure using simulation software
9. Measurement of high temperature based on radiation principle using simulation software
10. Measurement of pressure using pressure transducer level using simulation software

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 924
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Industrial Automation and Control L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ICE 6 PCE PCE‐2 ICE‐318T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To present the importance of automation in manufacturing and process industries.
2. To introduce the basic types, levels, strategies of automation
3. To expose to various control techniques employed in process automation
4. To expose to programming of PLC and SCADA and its interfacing
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Understand the basic types, levels, strategies of automation
CO 2 Apply PLC programming basics for developing simple application
CO 3 Analyse the PLC and SCADA system and its interfacing connection diagram
CO 4 Develop PLC ladder program and SCADA program for given industrial application
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 2 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 3
CO 2 3 2 2 2 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 2 2 3
CO 3 3 3 2 3 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 2 2 3
CO 4 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 ‐ 3 3 3 3

Unit I

Industrial Automation Introduction: Need and benefits of industrial automation, automation hierarchy, basic
components of automation system, description of each components, types of automation system‐ fixed,
programmable, flexible, different systems for industrial automation‐ PLC, HMI, SCADA, DCS, Drives.

Unit II

Industrial Control Systems: Process, Discrete manufacturing industries‐Continuous and Discrete Control
systems‐An overview of Computer process control‐ Fundamentals of automated assembly system, Distributed
Control System: Overview of DCS, DCS software, DCS communication, DCS Supervisory Computer Tasks, DCS
integration with PLC and Computers, Features of DCS, Advantages of DCS.

Unit III

PLC Programming: Building blocks of PLC‐ CPU, Memory organization, I/O modules, fixed and modular PLC and

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 925
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

their types, redundancy in PLC module, I/O module selection criteria, interfacing I/O devices, PLC I/O
addressing, PLC programming language, relay, timer, counter, PLC based applications.

Unit IV

SCADA and its Interfacing with PLC: Introduction to SCADA, typical SCADA architecture/block diagram,
interfacing of SCADA with PLC: typical connection diagram, object linking and embedding for process control
architecture, steps in creating SCADA screen for simple object, Applications of SCADA.

Textbooks:
1. Industrial Instrumentation and Control By. S.K. Singh The McGraw Hill Companies Non‐Conventional
Energy Sources, G.D.Rai, New Delhi.
2. Krishna Kant, “Computer ‐ Based Industrial Control”, 2nd Edition, Prentice Hall, New Delhi, 2011.

References:
1. John W. Webb and Ronald A. Reis, “Programmable Logic Controllers: Principles and Applications”, 5th
Edition, Prentice Hall Inc., New Jersey, 2003.
2. Programmable logic controller, Dunning, Delmar
3. Lukas M.P, “Distributed Control Systems”, Van Nostrand Reinhold Co., New York, 1986.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 926
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Industrial Automation and Control Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ICE 6 PCE PCE‐2 ICE‐318P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Industrial Automation and Control) as
this is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Study hardware and software platforms for DCS

2. Simulate analog and digital function blocks
3. Study, understand and perform experiments on timers and counters
4. Logic implementation for traffic Control Application
5. Logic implementation for Bottle Filling Application
6. Tune PID controller for heat exchanger using DCS
7. Write a PLC program for controlling the temperature of a room using PT100 temperature sensor.
8. Write a PLC program to control the conveyor belt in manufacturing industry.
9. Write a PLC program to control the lift up to 5 floors.
10. Write a PLC ladder diagram program to switch ON the heater on pressing the ON push button and switch
OFF automatically after 20minutes.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 927
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Industrial Control Electronics L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 6 PED‐EAE PED‐EAE‐2 PED‐318T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To impart the knowledge of electric heating and electric welding.
2. To impart the knowledge of various power electronic converters and power supplies.
3. To impart the knowledge of power compensation techniques, power factor improvement and
harmonic control.
4. To impart the knowledge of starting, braking and speed control of electric motors.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Able to understand about electric heating and electric welding.
CO 2 Able to know about various power converters, their operation and applications.
CO 3 Able to understand power factor control techniques and harmonic reduction.
CO 4 Able to understand the speed control methods of DC and Induction motors.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1
CO 2 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1
CO 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1
CO 4 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1

UNIT‐I

Electric Heating: Introduction to electric heating, Advantages of electric heating, Resistance heating,
Temperature control of furnaces, Induction and dielectric heating.
Welding: Introduction and classification of resistance welding, Scheme for AC resistance welding, Ignitron
contactor.

UNIT‐II

Power Converters: Single phase half wave and full wave‐controlled rectifiers, Three phase‐controlled rectifiers,
Semi converters, Dual converters, Step down & step‐up DC‐DC converters, AC Voltage controllers.
Power Supplies: Performance parameters of power supplies, Comparison of rectifier circuits, Filters, Regulated
power supplies, Switching regulators.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 928
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT‐III

Power Factor Control: Static power compensation, Shunt reactive power compensator, Applications of static
SCR controlled shunt compensators for load compensation, Power factor improvement and harmonic control
of converter fed systems.

UNIT – IV

DC Drives: DC motor speed control, Methods of armature control, Field weakening, Semiconductor‐controlled
drives, Starting, Braking, Controlled rectifier fed dc drives, Chopper‐controlled dc drives.
AC Drives: Three phase induction motor starting, braking, transient analysis, speed control from stator and
rotor sides, Stator voltage control, Variable frequency control from voltage sources and current sources, Static
rotor resistance control.

Textbook(s):
1. Biswanath Paul, “Industrial Electronics & Control”, PHI Learning Private Limited.
2. G. K. Dubey, “Power semiconductor‐controlled Drives”, Prentice Hall Inc.

References:
1. M.H. Rashid “Power Electronics: Circuits, Devices & Applications”, Pearson Education.
2. G. K. Dubey, “Electric Drives”, Narosa Publishing House.
3. V. Subrahmanyam, “Electric Drives”, Tata McGraw‐Hill.
4. B. K. Bose, “Modern Power Electronics and AC Drives”, PHI Publications.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 929
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Industrial Control Electronics Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 6 PED‐EAE PED‐EAE‐2 PED‐318P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Industrial Control Electronics) as this is
the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. To perform closed loop speed control of a four quadrant DC motor drive.

2. Study of single phase thyristorised full converter fed closed loop speed control of DC motor drive.
3. To simulate three phase fully controlled bridge rectifier with resistive and inductive loads and plot the load
voltage and load current waveforms.
4. To study single phase AC voltage regulator with resistive and inductive load.
5. To control the speed of a DC motor using MOSFET based chopper and plot voltage v/s speed graph.
6. To study the MOSFET/IGBT based single phase bridge inverter.
7. To simulate the single‐phase half wave‐controlled rectifier with R and RL loads and plot the load voltage
and load current waveforms.
8. To simulate the single‐phase fully controlled rectifier and plot the load voltage and load current waveforms
for inductive load.
9. To simulate the single‐phase full wave AC voltage controller and plot the load voltage and load current
waveforms for inductive load.
10. To compare the various braking methods and their range of braking for an induction motor.
11. To perform closed loop operation for constant v/f control of induction motor drive.
12. To study speed control of a three phase induction motor using a three phase voltage source inverter.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 930
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Industrial Data Communication L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ICE 6 PCE PCE‐3 ICE‐332T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To expose students to the basics of communication
2. To create awareness about the OSI reference model.
3. To acquaint the students with the different types of networks at various levels such as sensor level,
device network and control network.
4. To provide sufficient knowledge about the HART and to impart the fundamentals of foundation field
bus.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Explain the importance of modulation in communication.
CO 2 Examine the importance of OSI,TCP/IP model, various networking components
CO 3 Compare the different types of networks at various levels of field communication
CO 4 Establish Foundation fieldbus communication.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ 2 ‐ 3
CO 2 3 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ 2 ‐ 3
CO 3 3 3 2 2 ‐ ‐ 3 ‐ 2 3 2 3
CO 4 3 3 3 3 ‐ ‐ 3 ‐ 3 3 3 3

Unit I

Introduction to Communication System: Elements of communication system, Noise in communication

Systems. Amplitude Modulation: Introduction, Time and frequency domain analysis, Frequency Modulation,
Phase Modulation, Effect of noise in FM. Digital Modulation, PAM, PPM, PWM, FSK, QPSK.

Unit II

Introduction to Networks: OSI reference model, TCP/IP model, Transmission media, UTP‐STP cable, co‐axial
cable, N/W components: Repeaters, bridge, hub, switch, router, gateways. Open Control N/W: RS232, RS422,
EIA485 Modbus Structure, Implementation, GPIB. Proprietary Control N/W:Modbus Plus

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 931
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Unit III

Networks at Different Levels

Sensor level network: AS‐i, CAN, Devicenet, Interbus and LON
Device networks: Foundation Fieldbus H1‐HART Profibus‐PA
Control Network: BACnet, control‐net, FF‐HSE, Profibus‐DP, Ethernet, TCP/IP

Unit IV

HART and Foundation Filedbus

HART: Introduction ‐ Evolution of Signal standard ‐ HART Communication protocol ‐ Communication modes ‐
HART Commands – HART and the OSI model. Field Bus: Introduction ‐ General Field bus architecture ‐ basic
requirements of field bus standard ‐ field bus topology ‐ Interoperability ‐ Interchangeability.
Fieldbus requirement, features, advantages, fieldbus components, types, architecture–physical, data link,
application layer, system and network management, wiring, segment functionality checking, installation in safe
and hazardous area and troubleshooting

Textbooks:
1. Deon Reynders, Steve Mackay, Edwin Wright, Practical Industrial Data Communications, 1st ed Elseveir,
2005.
2. Lawrence M Thompson, Industrial Data Communication, 2nd edition, 1997.

References:
1. Daniel T Miklovic, Real Time Control Networks, ISA 1993.
2. Bela G Liptak, Process Software and Digital Networks, 3rd edition, 2002.
3. Behrouz A. Forouzan, Data Communications and Networking, 2nd update edition, Tata McGraw Hill, 2000.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 932
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Industrial Data Communication Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ICE 6 PCE PCE‐3 ICE‐332P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Industrial Data Communication) as this
is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. To Study the various modulation techniques (AM,FM,PWM)

2. To Study the networking components
3. To understand LAN
4. To study HART Protocol.
5. To calibrate various transmitters using HART
6. To study the components of Foundation Field Bus.
7. Configure the fieldbus wiring
8. Prepare the termination for Foundation Fieldbus
9. Install and Configure HART point‐to‐point communication Network
10. Connect HART handheld communicator to HART network

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 933
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Industrial Electric Drives L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ICE 6 PCE PCE‐3 ICE‐334T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To make student capable in design and analyze various power converter circuits.
2. To make student capable in analyzingthe operation, application and control of power conversion
systems employing electric drive to cater to industrial needs
3. To familiarize the operation principles, and design of starting, braking, and speed control
arrangements for electric motors and their applications
4. To provide strong foundation to asses performance of different industrial drives considering issues
such as, energy efficiency, power quality, and practical viabilities.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Remember the basics of stepper motor drives, and Industrial Drives
CO 2 Understand the basic operation of Electric Drives and used in industries.
CO 3 Analyse different schemes of speed control of DC motor.
CO 4 Design power electronics converter‐controlled induction motor and synchronous motor drives, and to
find the scope of automations in industries.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 3
CO 2 3 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 3
CO 3 3 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 3 3 ‐ ‐ 3
CO 4 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 3 3 2 ‐ 3

UNIT I

Electrical Drives, Advantages of Electrical Drives. Parts of Electrical Drives, Choice of Electrical Drives, Status of
dc and ac Drives.
Dynamics of Electrical Drives: Types of loads, Fundamental Torque Equations, Energy Loss in Transient
Operations, Steady State Stability, equalization of load, steady state stability, closed loop control of drives,
selection of motor power rating, class of duty.

UNIT II

Direct Current Motor Drives: DC motor speed control, semiconductor controlled drives, starting, braking,
transient analysis, controlled rectifier fed dc drives, chopper controlled dc drives, Single Phase Fully Controlled

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 934
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Rectifier Control of dc Separately Excited Motor, Single Phase Half Controlled Rectifier Control of dc Separately
Excited Motor, Three Phase Fully Controlled Rectifier Control of dc Separately Excited Motor, Multiquadrant
Operation of dc Separately Excited Motor Fed Form Fully Controlled Rectifier.

UNIT III

Induction Motor Drives: Analysis and Performance of Three Phase Induction Motors, three phase induction
motor starting, braking, transient analysis. speed Control Techniques‐Stator Voltage Control, Variable Voltage
Frequency Control from Voltage Sources, slip power recovery, static Scherbius and static Kramer drive.
Synchronous Motor Drives: Operation from fixed frequency supply‐starting, Variable frequency control,Voltage
source inverter fed synchronous motor drive, Brushless dc Motor Drives, Permanent Magnet ac (PMAC) Motor
Drives.

UNIT IV

Stepper Motor Drives: Variable Reluctance, Permanent Magnet, Important Features of Stepper Motors, Torque
Versus Stepping Rate Characteristics, Drive Circuits for Stepper Motor.
Industrial Drives: Textile Mills, Steel Rolling Mills, Cement mills, Paper mills, Cranes and Hoists, Machine Tools.

Textbooks:
1. G K Dubey, Principle of Electrical Drives, Narosa Publishing House
2. Vedam Subrahmanyam, Electrical Drives, Tata McGraw‐Hill

References:
1. Bimal K Bose, “Modern Power Electronics and AC Drives”, PHI Publications.
2. Ned Mohan, “Electrical Machines and Drives” Wiley India Publication
3. R Krishnan, “Electrical Motor Drives” PHI Publications.
4. Bimal K Bose, “Power Electronics and Variable Frequency Drives” Wiley India Publication

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 935
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Industrial Electric Drives Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ICE 6 PCE PCE‐3 ICE‐334P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Industrial Electric Drives) as this is the
practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Single phase thyristorised full converter fed closed loop speed control of DC motor drive.
2. Closed loop speed control of 4 quadrant DC motor drive.
3. Closed Loop constant v/f speed control of Induction motor drive.
4. Closed Loop speed control through static rotor resistance controlled slip ring Induction motor.
5. Chopper fed DC motor drive simulation using MATLAB
6. Speed control DC Motor using BJT‐H bridge simulation using MATLAB.
7. To study speed control of single phase induction motor using micro controller.
8. To study closed loop speed control of brushless DC (BLDC) motors drive.
9. To study closed loop speed control of Switched Reluctance Motor (SRM) drive.
10. To study closed loop Angular Position Control of Stepper Motor drive.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 936
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Industrial Engineering L P C
4 4

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ME/MAE 5 PC PC MEC‐309

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To understand Production System used in Industries and Apply various techniques for forecasting and
Inventory control.
2. To apply the concept of work study and method study and implement the knowledge of control charts
for Quality for quality improvement.
3. To understand the concept of network models and flow shop scheduling.
4. To interpret the concept of Industrial relations, Industrial disputes, Dispute settlement machineries
and factory legislation.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Understand Production System used in Industries and Apply various techniques for forecasting and
Inventory control.
CO 2 Perform work & Method Study and Implement the knowledge of control charts for Quality in quality
improvement
CO 3 Apply the concept of network models and flow shop scheduling in production
CO 4 Interpret the concept of Industrial relations, Industrial disputes, Dispute settlement machineries and
factory legislation.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 2 2 2 ‐ 3 3 3 ‐ 3 2 2
CO 2 3 2 2 2 ‐ 3 3 3 ‐ 3 3 2
CO 3 3 2 2 ‐ ‐ 3 3 3 ‐ 2 2 2
CO 4 3 2 3 ‐ ‐ 3 3 3 ‐ 2 2 2

UNIT‐I

Introduction: Production functions, Management systems, production and productivity.

Plant Organization: Principles of organization, Organization structure‐line and staff organization.
Production Planning & Control: Types of products, demand, demand forecasting, scheduling and control of
scheduling production control. Inventory Models – Deterministic manufacturing and purchase models –
quantity discounts Queueing models – Poisson arrival and exponential service times – Single server and multi‐
server modelSimulation –Monte Carlo simulation – Numerical problems.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 937
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT‐II

Method Study: Definition and concepts, method study procedures, symbols, advantages, Operation process
chart, Flow process charts, Two hand process chart, Motion study, micro motion, SIMO charts, Systems
Concepts, Classification analysis techniques, Principle of motion economics.
Work Measurement: Definition, objectives & techniques, Time study equipment, performance rating,
allowances, standard time, work sampling, PMTS.
Quality Management‐ Quality, Control Charts, Taguchi Philosophy. Service Quality. Total Quality Management
(TQM), Six Sigma,

UNIT – III

Network Models‐ Project Networks‐ CPM / PERT‐ Project Scheduling – crashing networks and cost
considerations – Resource leveling and smoothing, shortest route problem, Game theory – mixed strategies –
dominance property – 2 x n and m x 2 games.
Flow shop scheduling– Johnsons algorithm for n jobs and two machines and n jobs and m machines.

UNIT‐IV

Trade Unionism‐ Definition, Origin, Objectives of Trade Unions. Methods of Trade unions. Size and finance
ofIndian Trade unions‐size, frequency distribution, factors responsible for the small size. Finance‐sources
ofincome, ways of improving finance
Industrial relations‐ Definition and main aspects. Industrial disputes and strikes. Collective bargaining. Labour
Legislation‐ Labour management cooperation/worker ‘s participation in management. Factory legislation.
International Labour Organization.

Textbook(s):
1. Ravi Shankar, Industrial Engg. & Management, Galgotia Publications
2. S.K. Sharma, Industrial Engg. & Operation Management, S.K. Kataria & Sons.

References:
1. Joseph S. Martinich, Production & Operation Management, John Wiley & Sons.
2. Harold T. Amrine, John A. Ritchey, Colin L. Moodie, Joseph F. Kmec, Manufacturing organization and
Management, Pearson publication, 6th edition
3. S. Anil Kumar, N. Suresh, Production and operations management, New age International, 2nd Ed.
4. M. Mahajan, Industrial Engg. & Production Management, Dhanpat Rai & Co.
5. Srivastava, S.C. (2012), Industrial Relations and Labour Laws, Vikas Publishing
6. Telsang, M. (2006), Industrial Engineering and Production Management. S.Chand
7. Thukaram, Rao (2004), M.E. Industrial Management. Himalaya Publishing House.
8. Sinha, P.R.N., Sinha I.B. and ShekharS.M. (2013), Industrial Relations, Trade Unions and Labour Legislation.
Pearson Education
9. Chary, S.N. (2012), Production and Operations Management. Tata McGraw Hill

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 938
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Industrial Robotics L P C
3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 7 CADM‐EAE CADM‐EAE‐5 CADM‐405T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. Ability to analyze and design the motion for robotic system.
2. Ability to acquire the knowledge on robot dynamics, various actuation mechanisms and gripper/tool
selection criteria.
3. Ability to understand the robot kinematics and differential motion through manipulator Jacobian.
4. Ability to have knowledge about the different applications of robots in industries i.e. inspection
techniques and material handling.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Define and relate the relationship between mechanical structures of robot and predict their
operational workspace.
CO 2 Estimate and compute the spatial transformation to demonstrate robot kinematics thorugh Jacobian
matrix.
CO 3 Associate and apply knowledge of robot dynamics and outline the gripper/tool selection criteria.
CO 4 Recognize and summarize the applications of robot in industries i.e. inspection techniques and
material handling.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 1 2 3
CO 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 1 2 3
CO 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 3
CO 4 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 3

UNIT‐I

Fundamentals of robot technology: Robot anatomy. Work volume. Drive systems. Control systems and
dynamic performance. Accuracy and repeatability. Sensors in robotics. Robot reference frames and coordinates
and robot kinematics. Path control.

UNIT‐II

Grippers for Robotics: Grippers for Robotics ‐ Types of Grippers, Guidelines for design for robotic gripper, Force
analysis for various basic gripper systems. Tools as end effectors. Robot and effector interface. Gripper
selection and design. Introduction to robot languages. Mechanical and other types of grippers. Tools as end

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 939
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

effectors. Robot and effector interface.

Sensors and Actuators for Robotics: Sensors for Robots ‐ Types of Sensors used in Robotics, Classification and
applications of sensors, Characteristics of sensing devices, Selections of sensors. Need for sensors and vision
system in the working and control of a robot. Actuating systems, characteristics and types of actuators.

UNIT‐III

Robot Kinematics: Homogeneous transformations, Matrix representation. Homogeneous transformations.

Forward and inverse kinematics, Linear and Angular velocity of rigid link, Velocity along link, Manipulator
Jacobian, Statics: Use of Jacobian.
Robot Dynamics: Differential motions of a frame. Jacobian, static force analysis, Lagrangian Mechanics,
Lagrangian Formulation and numericals. Dynamics, Newton‐Euler Recursive Algorithm, Simulation. Euler‐
Lagrange Equations of motion, Basics of Trajectory planning: Joint‐space and Cartesian space trajectories.

UNIT ‐ IV

Applications for Manufacturing: Flexible automation. Robot cell layouts. Machine interference. Other
considerations in work cell design. Work cell control, interlocks. Robot cycle time analysis. Typical applications
of robots in material transfer, machine loading/unloading; processing operations; assembly, and inspection.

Textbook(s):
1. Saeed B. Niku, “Introduction to Robotics analysis, Systems & Applications”, Pearson, 2002.
2. R.K. Mittal, I.J. Nagrath, “Robotics & Control,” Tata McGraw & Hills, 2005.

References:
1. Robert J. Schilling, “Fundamentals of Robotics, analysis & Control”, Prentice Hall of India P. Ltd., 2002.
2. John J.Craig; “Introduction to Robotics Mechanics & Control”, Pearson Education, 2004.
3. M. Murray, M., Li, Zexiang, Sastry, S.S., “A Mathematical Introduction to Robotic Manipulation,” CRC Press,
1994.
4. Saha, S.K., Introduction to Robotics, 2nd Edition, McGraw‐Hill Education, New Delhi, 2014.
5. S.R. Deb, “Robotic Technology and Flexible Automation”, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Co. Ltd., 2003.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 940
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Industrial Robotics Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 7 CADM‐EAE CADM‐EAE‐5 CADM‐405P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Industrial Robotics) as this is the
practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Introduction to Robo Analyzer and WorkSpace 5.0

2. To make solids objects, modify them in Workspace 5.0 by importing a robot in workspace.
3. To create an auxiliary axis, robot mechanism and new robot in Workspace 5.0.
4. To Understand the Coordinate Frames and Transformations in Robo Analyzer.
5. To understand the robot forward kinematics in Robo Analyzer.
6. To understand the robot inverse kinematics in Robo Analyzer.
7. To understand the robot dynamics in Robo Analyzer.
8. To study various Virtual Models of Industrial Robots in Robo Analyzer.
9. To select the robot in virtual robot module and learn about joint level jogging of robots.
10. To select the robot in virtual robot module and learn about Cartesian controlled jogging of robots.
11. Write a program for joint trajectories of 2‐ link arm in SCILAB.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 941
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Industrial Tribology L P C
3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 6 DMS‐EAE DMS‐EAE‐1 DMS‐312T
EAE 7 DT‐EAE DT‐EAE‐5 DT‐427T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To be able to understand the Wear, friction processes and behaviour of metals & non‐metals.
2. To be able to understand the lubricants, lubrication and instruments for measuring lubricant’s
properties.
3. To have a broad understanding of theory of lubrication and will be able to determine the performance
parameters of hydrodynamic bearings, squeeze film bearings, Hydrostatic bearings.
4. To be able to understand lubrication of rolling element bearings and to solve lubrication issues of
industry.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 To understand the Wear, friction, and lubrication theories.
CO 2 To analyse the working of the wear, friction and lubricant properties measuring instruments.
CO 3 To determine the performance parameters of hydrodynamic bearings, squeeze film bearings,
Hydrostatic bearings.
CO 4 To solve lubrication issues of industry.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 2 2 3 ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 2
CO 2 3 3 3 3 ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 2
CO 3 3 3 3 3 ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 2
CO 4 3 3 3 3 ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 2 2

UNIT I

Introduction: Friction, Wear and Lubrication, Engineering Surfaces – Properties and Measurement; Typical
surface layers, Measurement Methods (Surface Profilometry, Optical Microscopy, Electron Microscopy),
Surface Contact. Friction: Measurement Methods, Adhesion, Deformation, Friction Theories, Stick‐slip, Rolling
Friction, Friction of Metals, Friction of Non‐Metallic Materials.

UNIT II

Wear: Types of Wear and its Mechanisms (Adhesive Wear, Abrasive Wear, Erosive Wear, Corrosive/Oxidative
Wear, Fatigue Wear), Wear of Metals, Wear of Ceramics, Wear of Polymers, Wear Test (Pin on Disc Tribometer,

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 942
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Reciprocating Tribometer), Wear reduction methods. Lubricants and Lubrication: Lubricants and their types,
Purpose of Lubrication, General Properties of Liquid Lubricants, Animal and Vegetable Oils, Mineral oils,
Synthetic oils, Blended Oils, Lubricant Additives, Semi Solid Lubricant or Greases, Solid Lubricants, Testing of
Lubricants (Viscometer, Four Ball Tester).

UNIT III

Lubrication regimes, Viscosity and the rheology of lubricants. Mechanics of Lubricant Film: Momentum
equation, Navier‐Stokes equation, Continuity equation, Energy equation, Reynolds equation, Lubricant flow,
Shear forces, Reynolds equation for power law fluids. Hydrodynamic Lubrication: Hydrodynamic Thrust Pad
Bearing (ILA and ISA), Hydrodynamic Journal Bearing (ILA & ISA), Finite Bearing, Mechanism of hydrodynamic
instability, Dynamic characteristics of hydrodynamic journal bearings.

UNIT IV

Squeeze film Lubrication: Squeeze film of planer, non‐planer, and finite surfaces. Hydrostatic Lubrication:
Circular step externally pressurized thrust bearing (capillary and orifice compensated), Externally pressurized
multi‐recess journal bearing with short and large sill dimensions. Elasto‐hydrodynamic Lubrication:
Introduction, EHL under Line and Point contact, Different regimes in EHL contacts, Mixed Lubrication.

Textbook(s):
1. M. K Ghosh, B C Majumdar, Mihir Sarangi, “Theory of Lubrication”, Tata McGraw Hill, 1st ed, 2013.
2. Gwidon W. Stachowiak and Andrew W. Batchelor, “Engineering Tribology”, 4th Edition, 2014.

Reference(s):
1. M MKhonsari and E R Booser, Applied Tribology‐Bearing Design and Lubrication, John Wiley & Sons, 3rd
edition, 2017.
2. Bernard J. Hamrock, Steven R. Schmid, Bo O. Jacobson, “Fundamental of Fluid Film Lubrication” Boca
Raton, CRC Press, 2nd Edition, 2004.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 943
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Industrial Tribology Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 6 DMS‐EAE DMS‐EAE‐1 DMS‐312P
EAE 7 DT‐EAE DT‐EAE‐5 DT‐427P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Industrial Tribology) as this is the
practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Analysis of Journal bearing system.

2. Methods to improve the wear and frictions.
3. Effect of lubricating oil blends on wear and friction behaviour
4. Study of properties of used lubricating oil.
5. Qualitative Analysis of Wear Debris using Ferrography.
6. Measurement of wear and coefficient of friction using Pin on Disk.
7. Viscosity Measurement of lubricant.
8. Flash Point and Fire Point Measurement of Lubricating oil
9. Water Content Measurement of Lubricating oil
10. Simulation and Modelling of Tribo Pairs
11. Software analysis of wear measurement
12. Optical analysis of wear surfaces.
13. Quantitative Analysis of Wear Particles Using Software

14. Experimental study on Nanolubricants.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 944
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Information Theory and Coding L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CSE‐CS 6 PC PC CS‐310T
EAE 6 CS‐EAE CS‐EAE‐1 CS‐310T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To understand the efficient, error‐free and secure delivery of information using binary streams.
2. To have in‐depth knowledge of error‐control coding.
3. To learn the process of encoding and decoding of digital data streams.
4. To learn and apply the methods of generation of these codes and evaluate the performance of them
over the noisy communication channels.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 To be able to understand the principles behind an efficient and secure transmission of digital data
stream.
CO 2 To be able to demonstrate the knowledge of channel capacity and coding.
CO 3 To be able to implement the knowledge of encoding and decoding of digital data stream using Linear
& Cyclic Codes.
CO 4 To be able to analyse the encoding and decoding of digital data stream using Convolutional codes.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 1 1 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 ‐ 3 ‐ 1
CO 2 3 3 3 3 1 1 ‐ 2 ‐ 2 ‐ 2
CO 3 3 3 3 3 3 1 ‐ 2 ‐ 2 ‐ 2
CO 4 3 3 3 3 3 1 ‐ 2 ‐ 2 ‐ 2

UNIT‐I

Introduction to Information Theory, Uncertainty & Information, Mutual Information, Average mutual
information, Entropy, Relative Entropy, Extension of an Information source and Markov Source, Maximum
Entropy Principle, Information measure of Continuous random Variables, Maximum Entropy Principle, Jensen’s
Inequality, Fano’s Inequality, Introduction to lossless coding, Source coding theorem Block code and its
properties, Instantaneous code and its properties, Kraft‐Mcmillan equality, Huffman Coding, Shannon Fano
coding, Lempel Ziv Algorithm.

UNIT‐II

Introduction to discrete information channels, Equivocation and Mutual Information, Properties of different

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 945
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

information channels, Reduction of information channels, Noiseless channel, Properties of Mutual information,
Introduction to channel capacity, Shannon’s Channel Coding theorem, Bandwidth – S/N Trade Off, Channel
capacity theorem, Shannon Limit, Channel capacity for MIMO system

UNIT‐III

Definition of Terms: Redundancy, code efficiency, systematic codes, Hamming distance, Hamming Weight,
Hamming Bound, Types of Code: Parity check codes, Hamming codes, Linear Block Codes, Generator and Parity
Check matrix, Syndrome decoding. Introduction to Cyclic Codes, Generation and detection of cyclic codes.

UNIT – IV

Burst Error Detecting and correcting codes, Convolutional codes, Code Tree, Trellis and State diagram,
Decoding of convolutional codes, Viterbi’s Algorithm, Sequential Decoding, Transfer function and Distance
properties of convolutional codes, Bound on bit error rate, Coding Gain.

Textbook(s):
1. Ranjan Bose, “Information Theory Coding & Cryptography”, 3rd Edition, McGraw Hill, 2017.
2. T.M. Cover and J.A Thomas, “Elements of Information Theory”, 2nd Edition, Wiley India Pvt Ltd, 2013.

References:
1. Salvatore Gravano, Introduction to Error Control Codes, Oxford University Press, 2017.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 946
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Information Theory and Coding Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CSE‐CS 6 PC PC CS‐310P
EAE 6 CS‐EAE CS‐EAE‐1 CS‐310P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Information Theory and Coding) as this
is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Write a MATLAB program to compute entropy and mutual information for Noise Free and Noisy Channel.
2. Write a MATLAB program to compute entropy and mutual information for Error Free and Binary Symmetric
Channel.
3. Write a MATLAB program to implement algorithm for generation and evaluation of Shannon‐ Fano coding
and decoding. Compute entropy, average length and coding efficiency.
4. Write a MATLAB program to implement algorithm for generation and evaluation of Huffman coding and
decoding. Compute entropy, average length and coding efficiency.
5. Write a MATLAB program to implement algorithm for generation and evaluation of Lempel Ziv dictionary
method. Compute entropy, average length and coding efficiency.
6. Write a MATLAB program to implement the algorithm for encoding and decoding of Linear Block Code.
7. Write a MATLAB program to implement the algorithm for encoding and decoding of Cyclic Code.
8. Write a MATLAB program to implement the algorithm for generating Convolutional code by Code Tree.
9. Write a MATLAB program to implement the algorithm for generating Convolutional code by Code Trellis.
10. Write a MATLAB program to implement the algorithm for encoding and decoding of BCH Code.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 947
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Injection Moulding and Mould Design L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 6 CADM‐EAE CADM‐EAE‐2 CADM‐304T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To understand about different types of injection moulding machines and their components.
2. To understand the constructional details and working features of injection molding process.
3. To understand the process of mould design in injection moulding.
4. To understand the applications of injection moulding.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Understand the Injection Moulding process.
CO 2 Understand different constructional feature of Injection Machine Component.
CO 3 Set up the different parameters of Injection Moulding machine.
CO 4 Operate Injection Moulding Machine.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 3 3 ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 2 3 3 3 3 ‐ 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 3 3 3 3 3 ‐ 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 4 3 3 3 2 ‐ 3 ‐ ‐ ‐‐ ‐ ‐ 2

UNIT‐I

Introduction to Polymer processing, properties of polymers and their compounds, Injection Machine
Operations, working of Injection moulding Machine, types of injection moulding machines, modern trends in
injection moulding, gas assisted injection moulding, water injection technique, powder metal injection
moulding. Types of Injection Machine by Injection Component, Different Terminologies

UNIT‐II

Constructional features: Injection moulding machinery and systems, Hopper, Barrel, Bimetallic Barrel, Grooved
Barrel, Screw and its Types, Plastification, melting zone, Standard Nozzle, Needle Type Nozzle, Nylon Nozzle,
temperature distribution in nozzle, mould filling, Melt Mechanism, filling stage‐control of filling process, control
of metering process, jetting, heat transfer in mould cavity.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 948
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT‐III

Mould Design: ‐ Key parameters for mould design‐ end use, part size, tooling cost, family moulds, Mould for
injection moulding, mould parts, types of mould, feed system design , ejection mechanism, multi material
Injection moulding, multi cavity moulds, hot and cold runner system, mould cooling, surface finish, venting,
flash trimming dies and design consideration for injection moulds.

UNIT – IV

Auxiliaries for injection moulding machine, Hopper Dryers, Ovens, Hopper loaders, Granulators, Mould
Temperature Regulators, Conveyors furnaces and Mould maintenance.
Defects in injection moulding, Bubbles and Voids, Crazing, Discoloration, Flashing, Flow Marks, Silver Streaks,
Nozzle Drooling, Short Shots‐Sink Marks, Sprue Sticking, Cavity Sticking, Surface Sticking, Warping, Weld Lines.

Textbook(s):
1. Irwin I. Rubin “Injection Moulding” Wiley publication.
2. Kazmer “Injection mould design engineering.” Hanser publications.

References:
1. Musa R. Kamal &Avram L. Isayev and Shih‐Jung Liu “Injection Moulding. Technology and Fundamentals.”
2. Johannaber “Injection moulding machine.”
3. Bolur“A Guide to Injection Moulding of Plastics.”
4. John F Monk “Thermosetting Plastics: Moulding Materials and Processes by John Wiley and sons.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 949
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Injection Moulding and Mould Design Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 6 CADM‐EAE CADM‐EAE‐2 CADM‐304P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Injection Moulding and Mould Design)
as this is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. To study and analyse the general injection molding process sequence on an injection molding machine.
2. To study and analyse the properties of injection molding compound and products.
3. To study and analyze of simple Plunger machine.
4. To study and analyze of different types of nozzle used in injection molding machine.
5. To study and analyse the measurement of temperature distribution in casting.
6. To organise an industrial visit to a plant using injection molding machine.
7. To study and analysis of heat transfer in injection molding.
8. To study and analyse the requirements of a sound mold design.
9. To study and analyse the working of hot and cold runner mold system.
10. To study and do analysis of microstructure of injection molded parts.
11. To study and analyse the feed system design in injection molding.
12. To study and compare horizontal and vertical injection molding machines.
13. To study construction and working of powder metal injection molding machine.
14. To study the working of various auxiliaries used in injection molding machine.
15. To study and analyze the causes for defects in Injection molding.
16. To do a case study on the installation cost of Injection molding machine.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 950
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Instrumentation Devices L P C
3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ICE 6 PCE PCE‐3 ICE‐326T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To introduce the fundamentals of measurements & Instrumentation
2. Students should be capable of analyzing various indicating and sensing elements.
3. Ability of student to apply CRO for measuring various quantities.
4. Ability to remember design principles of various digital and recording Instruments.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 understand and explain the fundamentals of measurements & Instrumentation system.
CO 2 analyze various Indicating & sensing elements
CO 3 To apply CRO for measuring various quantities.
CO 4 To study design principles ofvarious digital and Recording Instruments.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 1 ‐ ‐ 3
CO 2 3 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 3 3 ‐ ‐ 3
CO 3 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 2 3 ‐ ‐ 3
CO 4 3 ‐ 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 2 1 ‐ ‐ 3

Unit I

Fundamentals of Measurement: Need for Instrumentation, General Instrumentation system, static & dynamic
characteristics of Measurement systems loading effects in instruments, Fundamentals of measurements, Types
of errors, Calibration of Instruments.

Unit II

Analog Indicating Instruments & Sensing Elements: PMMC and Moving Iron Instruments, voltmeters,
ammeters, ohmmeters Extension of range instruments, AC Indicating Instruments: EDM type Instruments, EDM
Wattmeter, (single phase) and errors present,
Sensors: Velocity sensor, Temp sensor, Pressure sensor, humidity sensor

Unit III

Oscilloscpe: Introduction, General purpose oscilloscope block diagram, Digital storage oscilloscope: Basic block

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 951
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

diagram, working, Cathode ray tube, horizontal and vertical deflection, vertical amplifier time base generator,
horizontal amplifier, attenuator, delay line and specifications.

Unit IV

Digital & Recording Instruments: Introduction to digital Instruments, Advantage of digital Instruments over
analog instruments, Digital multimeter, Digital Tachometer, Ultrasonic distance meter, Digital Thermometer
Recording Instruments: classification of recorders, principle and working of strip chart and X‐Y recorders,
application of recorders, waveform generation methods: Function generator.

Textbooks:
1. Sawhney A.K., Electrical and Electronics Measurements and Instruments
2. W.D.Cooper & A.D. Helfrick, ‘Electronic Instrumentation and Measurement Techniques’, PHI, 4th Ed 1987.

References:
1. David Bell, ‘Electronic Instrumentation and Measurements’, PHI, 2 ed.
2. Anand M.M.S., ‘Electronic Instruments and Instrumentation Technology’, PHI, 2004.
3. Kalsi H.S., ‘Electronic Instrumentation’, TMH, 3rd Ed, 22010.
4. Measurement Systems Application & Design‐ E.O. Doeblin (4/e), Mc Graw‐Hill, International, NY.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 952
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Instrumentation Devices Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ICE 6 PCE PCE‐3 ICE‐326P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Instrumentation Devices) as this is the
practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Loading effect of shunt or series connected instrument.

2. Measurement of power using wattmeter (single phase)
3. Measurement of power using energy meter (single phase)
4. To measure the response time of a relay using DSO.
5. Study of X‐Y, Y‐T recorders.
6. To measure unknown frequency by Z modulation.
7. Measurement of Voltage, phase and frequency using CRO
8. Calibration of Voltmeter & Ammeter.
9. Study of L.T and H.T panels
10. Study of modern energy meters.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 953
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Instrumentation System Design L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ICE 7 PCE PCE‐5 ICE‐413T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To familiarize with flow measurement and temperature measurement devices.
2. To impart design knowledge of controller, control valve and transmitter.
3. To obtain adequate knowledge of Electronic product design.
4. To acquire the knowledge of Control Panel design.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 member the basics of control valves and actuators.
CO 2 nderstand the working of temperature and flow measurement system for process application.
CO 3 Analyse different types control panels, Wiring accessories and Control Room.
CO 4 Design electronic based product
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 3
CO 2 3 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 3
CO 3 3 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 3 3 ‐ ‐ 3
CO 4 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 3 3 2 ‐ 3

Unit I

Measurement of Flow: Design of Orifice meter, Electromagnetic flow meter, Ultrasonic flow meter, Rotameter.
Temperature Measurement: Design of the RTD measurement circuit, cold junction compensation circuit for
thermocouple, linearization of thermistor characteristics and design of temperature transmitter.

Unit II

Valves: Control valves ‐ design of actuators and positioners ‐ types of valve bodies ‐ valve characteristics‐
materials for body and trim ‐ sizing of control valves ‐ selection of body materials and characteristics of control
valves for typical applications.
Valve selection and sizing for liquid service, gas or vapor service, flashing liquids, mixed phase flow. Control
valve noise. Control valve cavitations. Actuator sizing. Design of safety relief valves and rupture discs. Review
of flow equations.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 954
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Unit III

Electronic Based design: Electronic P+I+D controllers ‐ design ‐ adjustment of set point, bias and controller
settings. Enclosure Design: Packing and enclosures design guidelines, Grounding and shielding, front panel and
cabinet design of an electronic product.
Microcontroller Based Design: Design of logic circuits for alarm and annunciator circuits, interlocks ‐ design of
microcontroller based system for data acquisition ‐ design of microprocessor based P+I+D controller.

Unit IV

Control Panel Design: Panel selection‐size, type, construction and IP classification. GA Diagrams, Power wiring
and distribution, Typical wiring diagrams for AI, DI, AO, DO, RTD, and T/C modules. Wiring accessories‐ ferules,
lugs, PVC ducts, spiral etc. Earthing scheme. Panel ventilation, cooling and illumination. Control Room Design:
Layout and environment.

Textbooks:
1. Bela G. Liptak, Instrument Engineer’s Hand Book – Process Control, Chilton Company, 3rd Edition, 1995.
2. Anderson N.A., Instrumentation for Process Measurement and Control, Routledge, 3rd Edition, 1997.
3. Considine D.M., Process Instruments and Controls Handbook, McGraw‐Hill., 5th Edition2009.
4. AlokBaura, Fundamentals of Industrial Instrumentation, Wiley India Pvt. Ltd (2011).

References:
1. R. W. Zape, Valve selection hand book third edition, Jaico publishing house,
2. Les Driskell, Control valve sizing, ISA.
3. Curtis Johnson, Process Control Instrumentation Technology, PHI /Pearson Education 2002.
4. Kim R Fowler, Electronic Instrument Design, Oxford University‐ 1996.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 955
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Instrumentation System Design Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ICE 7 PCE PCE‐5 ICE‐413P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Instrumentation System Design) as this
is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Design of Instrumentation amplifier.

2. Design of active filters – LPF, HPF and BPF.
3. Design of Control valve (sizing and flow‐lift characteristics)
4. Design of PID controller (using operational amplifier and microprocessor)
5. Calibration of Mcleod gauge for low pressure.
6. Calibration of Resistance Temperature Detector (RTD) for temperature measurement.
7. Calibration of Thermocouple for temperature measurement.
8. Study and calibration of a Rotameter for flow measurement.
9. Piping and Instrumentation Diagram‐case study.
10. Study electronic system design employing microcontrollers.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 956
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Intellectual Property Rights L P C

4 4

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CSE/IT/CST/ITE 7 PCE PCE‐5 CIE‐419

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To Understand, define and differentiate different types of intellectual properties (IPs) and their roles
in contributing to organizational competitiveness and Understanding the Framework of Strategic
Management of Intellectual Property (IP).
2. To Appreciate and appraise different IP management (IPM) approaches and describing how pioneering
firms initiate, implement and manage IPM programs.
3. To Explain how to derive value from IP and leverage its value in new product and service development.
4. To Expose to the Legal management of IP and understanding of real life practice of IPM.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 To Identify different types of Intellectual Properties (IPs), the right of ownership, scope of protection
as well as the ways to create and to extract value from IP and Recognize the crucial role of IP in
organizations of different industrial sectors for the purposes of product and technology development.
CO 2 To Identify activities and constitute IP infringements and the remedies available to the IP owner and
describe the precautious steps to be taken to prevent infringement of proprietary rights in products
and technology development and Be familiar with the processes of Intellectual Property Management
(IPM) and various approaches for IPM and conducting IP and IPM auditing and explain how IP can be
managed as a strategic resource and suggest IPM strategy.
CO 3 To be able to anticipate and subject to critical analysis arguments relating to the development and
reform of Geographical Indications of goods and their likely impact on creativity and innovation.
CO 4 To be able to demonstrate a capacity to identify, apply and assess ownership rights and marketing
protection under intellectual property law as applicable to information, ideas, new products and
product marketing
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 2 1 ‐ 2 ‐ 1 1 1 ‐ 1 ‐ ‐
CO 2 2 1 ‐ 2 ‐ 1 1 ‐ ‐ 1 ‐ ‐
CO 3 2 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ 1 1 ‐ ‐ 1 ‐ ‐
CO 4 2 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ 1 1 1 ‐ 1 ‐ ‐

UNIT‐I

Understanding & Overview of IPR Regime & Patents: Introduction, Need of Intellectual Property Rights, Types
of Intellectual property, Rationale for protection of IPR, International Organizations, Agencies and Treaties,

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 957
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Importance of Intellectual Property Rights, IPR in India: Genesis and development, Impact of IPR on
development, health agriculture and genetic resources in India.
Patents: Definition of TRIPS, Kind of inventions protected by Patent, Process and Product Patent, Double
Patent, Legal requirements for patents, Patent Application process, Searching a patent, Drafting and Filling of a
Patent, Type of patent applications, Patent Specification and Claim, Management of IP Assets and IP Portfolio,
Layers of International Patent System: National, Regional and International options

UNIT‐II

Trademarks & Copyrights: Rights of Trademark, Purpose and Function of Trademark, Trademark registration,
Trademark Acquisition, Trademark protection, Trademark Registration process.
Law of Copy Rights, Rights and Protection covered by Copyright, Infringement of Copyright under Copyright
Act, Distinction between related rights and copyright, Celebrity rights, Academic integrity or Plagiarism

UNIT‐III

Geographical Indications of Goods & Traditional Knowledge: Types of Geographical Indications of Goods, Why
Geographical Indications of Goods needs protection, How Geographical Indications of Goods gets protection, GI
Laws, GI Act in India, Case Study: Three Recent famous registered GIs of India.
Examples of medicinal, bioprospecting and Indigenous knowledge Need for their Protection, Positive
protection, Defensive protection and legal aspects.

UNIT – IV

Recent Developments & Institutional Capacity: New Development in Trademark Law, Copyright Law, Patent
Law, Intellectual Property Audits, Protection of Computer Programs, Protection of Communication
Technologies, Protection of Biotechnology, Reprography and Intellectual Property.
International Trademark law, international copyright law, International Patent law, International Development
in Trade Secret Law.
IP Policy making and legislation, Examination and Registration Systems, International Standard Setting: WIPO &
WTO.

Textbook(s):
1. Fundamentals of IP for Engineers, K. Bansal & P. Bansal, BS/BSP Books Publications, 2013
2. Intellectual Property Rights, Deborah. E. Bouchoux, 5th Edition, Delmar Cengage Learing, 2017.

References:
1. Intellectual Property Rights– Unleashmy The Knowledge Economy, Prabuddha Ganguli, Tate Mc‐Graw Hill
Publishing Company Ltd, 2001.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 958
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Intelligent and Expert Systems L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CSE‐AI 7 PC PC AI‐405T
EAE 7 AI‐EAE AI‐EAE‐5 AI‐405T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To study the idea of intelligent agents and search methods.
2. To study about representing knowledge.
3. To study the reasoning and decision making in uncertain world.
4. To study the concepts of expert systems.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Able to understand the idea of intelligent agents and search methods.
CO 2 Able to represent knowledge using various knowledge representation techniques.
CO 3 Able to apply reasoning for decision making in uncertain world.
CO 4 Able to understand the concepts of expert systems and implement expert systems.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 2 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 4 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2

UNIT‐I

Introduction to AI: Intelligent agents – Perception – Natural language processing – Problem – Solving
agents – Searching for solutions: Uniformed search strategies – Informed search strategies.

UNIT‐II

Knowledge and Reasoning: Adversarial search – Optimal and imperfect decisions – Alpha, Beta pruning –
Logical agents: Propositional logic – First order logic – Syntax and semantics – Using first order logic –
Inference in first order logic.

UNIT‐III

Uncertain Knowledge and Reasoning: Uncertainty – Acting under uncertainty – Basic probability notation –
Axioms of probability – Baye’s rule – Probabilistic reasoning – Making simple decisions.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 959
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Learning: Learning decision trees – Knowledge in learning – Neural networks – Reinforcement learning –
Passive and active.

UNIT‐IV

Expert Systems: Definition – Features of an expert system – Organization – Characteristics – Prospector –

Knowledge Representation in expert systems – Expert system tools – MYCIN – EMYCIN.

Textbooks:
1. Stuart Russel and Peter Norvig, ‘Artificial Intelligence A Modern Approach’, 2nd Edition, Pearson, 2003.
2. Donald A.Waterman, ‘A Guide to Expert Systems’, Pearson Education.

References:
1. George F.Luger, ‘Artificial Intelligence – Structures and Strategies for Complex Problem Solving’, 4th Ed,
Pearson Education, 2002.
2. Elain Rich and Kevin Knight, ‘Artificial Intelligence’, Second Edition Tata McGraw Hill, 1995.
3. Rich and Knight, “Artificial Intelligence”, Tata McGraw Hill, 1992

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 960
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Intelligent and Expert Systems Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CSE‐AI 7 PC PC AI‐405P
EAE 7 AI‐EAE AI‐EAE‐5 AI‐405P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Intelligent and Expert Systems) as this
is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Study of PROLOG. Write the following programs using PROLOG / LISP

2. Write simple fact for the statements using PROLOG
a. Ram likes mango.
b. Seema is a girl.
c. Bill likes Cindy.
d. Rose is red.
e. John owns gold.
3. Write predicates, one converts centigrade temperatures to Fahrenheit, the other checksif a temperature is
below freezing using PROLOG.
4. Write a program to solve 8 queens problem
5. Solve any problem using depth first search.
6. Solve any problem using best first search.
7. Solve 8‐puzzle problem using best first search
8. Solve Robot (traversal) problem using means End Analysis
9. Solve traveling salesman problem.
10. Experiment based on knowledge representation.
11. Experiment based on reasoning
12. Study of Expert System – MYCIN.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 961
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Intelligent Transportation System L P C

4 4

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 7 GTSE‐EAE GTSE‐EAE‐4 GTSE‐431

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To learn the fundamentals of ITS
2. To study the ITS functional areas
3. To have an overview of ITS implementation in developing countries
4. To Understand ITS for Transportation Planning
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Understand the concepts of Intelligent transport systems
CO 2 Acquire the basic knowledge on data collection using ITS.
CO 3 Understand the concept of telecommunication in ITS
CO 4 Know about the various functional areas of ITS
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 ‐ 1 2 ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ 3 ‐ ‐ 3
CO 2 2 ‐ 1 2 ‐ 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 1
CO 3 3 2 1 2 ‐ 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 3
CO 4 3 ‐ 1 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ 3

UNIT‐I

Introduction to ITS: History of traffic congestion, Traditional approach to addressing demand vs. capacity.
Development of a modern ITS approach. Costs and benefits. Definition, objectives, and significance of ITS,
Benefits of ITS, Challenges and opportunities in ITS.
ITS significance in modern transportation systems, ITS technologies and components, and data analysis tools,
Systems engineering in ITS and ITS architecture.

UNIT‐II

Data Collection Techniques: ITS Data collection techniques – Detectors, Automatic Vehicle Location (AVL),
Automatic Vehicle Identification (AVI), Geographic Information Systems (GIS), video data collection.
Telecommunications in ITS: Telecommunications in ITS – Importance of telecommunications in the ITS system,
Information Management, Traffic Management Centres (TMC). Vehicle – Road side communication – Vehicle
Positioning System.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 962
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT‐III

ITS Functional Areas: ITS functional areas – Advanced Traffic Management Systems (ATMS), Advanced Traveller
Information Systems (ATIS), Commercial Vehicle Operations (CVO), Advanced Vehicle Control Systems (AVCS),
Advanced Public Transportation Systems (APTS), Advanced Rural Transportation Systems (ARTS), Connected
and autonomous vehicles (C&AV), Supporting ITS Technologies, ITS standards and specifications, Indian Smart
Cities Mission, ITS Case studies.

UNIT – IV

Traffic Management and Automation: ITS User Needs and Services – Travel and Traffic management, Public
Transportation Management, Electronic Payment, Freight and Commercial Vehicle Operations, Personal
transportation, Rural and regional transportation, Sustainable transportation, Emergency Management,
Advanced Vehicle safety systems, Information Management, Mobile Applications; Automated Highway Systems
‐ Vehicles in Platoons – Integration of Automated Highway Systems. ITS Programs in the World – Overview of
ITS implementations in developed countries, ITS in developing countries.

Textbook(s):
1. Ghosh, S., Lee, T.S. Intelligent Transportation Systems: New Principlesand Architectures, CRC Press, 2000.
2. Mashrur A. Chowdhury, and Adel Sadek, Fundamentals of Intelligent Transportation Systems Planning,
Artech House, Inc., 2003.

References:
1. Sussman, J.M. Perspectives on Intelligent Transportation Systems, Springer, Berlin, 2010.
2. Intelligent Transport Systems, Intelligent Transportation Primer, Washington, US, 2001.
3. Henry F.Korth, and Abraham Siberschatz, Data Base System Concepts, McGraw Hill, 1992.
4. E.Turban,”Decision Support and Export Systems Management Support Systems", Maxwell Macmillan, 1998.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 963
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Internet of Things Frameworks L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CSE‐IoT 7 PC PC IOT‐447T
EAE 7 IOT‐EAE IOT‐EAE‐5B IOT‐447T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To understand the concepts of Internet of Things and the application of IoT.
2. To Determine the Market perspective of IoT.
3. To Understand the vision of IoT from a global context
4. To Understand the basic framework of IoT
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Demonstrate basic concepts and principles of IoT Framework
CO 2 Use of Devices, Gateways and Data Management in IoT.
CO 3 Design IoT applications in different domain and be able to analyze their performance
CO 4 Implement basic IoT applications on embedded platform.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 1 2 3 ‐ ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ 3 1 2 ‐
CO 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ 1 2 1 2
CO 3 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ 2
CO 4 1 ‐ 2 ‐ 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 3 ‐

UNIT‐I

IoT & Web Technology, The Internet of Things Today, Time for Convergence, Towards the IoT Universe,
Internet of Things Vision, IoT Strategic Research and Innovation Directions, IoT Applications, Future Internet
Technologies, Infrastructure, Networks and Communication, Processes, Data Management, Security, Privacy &
Trust, Device Level Energy Issues, IoT Related Standardization, Recommendations on Research Topics.

UNIT‐II

M2M to IoT – A Basic Perspective– Introduction, Some Definitions, M2M Value Chains, IoT Value Chains, An
emerging industrial structure for IoT, The international driven global value chain and global information
monopolies. M2M to IoT‐An Architectural Overview– Building an architecture, Main design principles and
needed capabilities, An IoT architecture outline, standards considerations.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 964
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT‐III

IoT Architecture ‐State of the Art – Introduction, State of the art, Architecture. Reference Model Introduction,
Reference Model and architecture, IoT reference Model, IoT Reference Architecture Introduction, Functional
View, Information View, Deployment and Operational View, Other Relevant architectural views.

UNIT ‐ IV

IoT Applications for Value Creations Introduction, IoT applications for industry: Future Factory Concepts,
Brownfield IoT, Smart Objects, Smart Applications, Four Aspects in your Business to Master IoT, Value Creation
from Big Data and Serialization, IoT for Retailing Industry, IoT For Oil and Gas Industry, Opinions on IoT
Application and Value for Industry, Home Management, eHealth.

Textbook(s):
1. Vijay Madisetti and ArshdeepBahga, “Internet of Things: (A Hands‐on Approach)”, Universities Press (INDIA)
Private Limited 2014, 1st Edition.

References:
1. Michael Miller “The Internet of Things” by Pearson
2. Raj Kamal “Internet of Things”, McGraw‐Hill, 1st Edition

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 965
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Internet of Things Frameworks Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CSE‐IoT 7 PC PC IOT‐447P
EAE 7 IOT‐EAE IOT‐EAE‐5B IOT‐447P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Internet of Things Frameworks) as this
is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Sense the Available Networks Using Arduino

2. Measure the Distance Using Ultrasonic Sensor and Make Led Blink Using Arduino
3. Detect the Vibration of an Object Using Arduino.
4. Connect with the Available Wi‐Fi Using Arduino
5. Sense a Finger When it is Placed on Board Using Arduino
6. Temperature Notification Using Arduino
7. LDR to Vary the Light Intensity of LED Using Arduino
8. MySQL Database Installation in Raspberry Pi
9. SQL Queries by Fetching Data from Database in Raspberry Pi
10. Switch Light On and Off Based on the Input of User Using Raspberry Pi

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 966
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Internet of Things Industrial and Medical Case Studies L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 7 IOT‐EAE IOT‐EAE‐5A IOT‐445T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. Overview of IoT
2. To make students know the IoT ecosystem
3. The course will also develop skills on IoT technical planning.
4. To understand the case studies of medical and Industrial applications
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 To understand the basics of Networking and Security.
CO 2 To understand predecessor of IoT technology and emergence of Internet of Things
CO 3 To understand architecture for Internet of Things
CO 4 To recognize various devices, sensors, actuators, and various processing paradigms for IoT.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 1 1 2 1 2 3 ‐ ‐ 3 3 2 1
CO 2 2 1 1 2 ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ 2 2 2 ‐
CO 3 2 1 2 ‐ 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 2 1 2
CO 4 3 2 ‐ 2 3 1 ‐ ‐ 1 3 2 1

UNIT‐I

Fundamentals of IoT: Introduction, Definitions & Characteristics of IoT, IoT Architectures, Physical & Logical
Design of IoT, Enabling Technologies in IoT, History of IoT, About Things in IoT, The Identifiers in IoT, About the
Internet in IoT, IoT frameworks, IoT and M2M

UNIT‐II

IoT Architecture ‐State of the Art – Introduction, State of the art, Architecture Reference Model‐ Introduction,
Reference Model, and architecture, IoT reference Model, IoT Reference Architecture‐ Introduction, Functional
View, Information View, Deployment and Operational View, Other Relevant architectural views.

UNIT‐III

IoT Sensing and Actuation & IoT Processing Topologies and Types: Introduction, Sensors, Sensor Characteristics,
SensorialDeviations, SensingTypes, Sensing Considerations, Actuators, Actuators Types, Actuator Types,

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 967
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Actuator Characteristics, Data Formats, Processing in IoT, Processing Topologies, IoT Device Design and
Selection Considerations, Processing Offloading, Offload location, Offload decision making, Offloading
considerations.

UNIT ‐ IV

IoT Case Studies: Agricultural IoT, Components of an agricultural IoT, Advantages of IoT in agriculture, Case
Studies, Vehicular IoT, Components of vehicular IoT, Advantages of vehicular IoT, Healthcare IoT, Components
of healthcare IoT, Advantages and risk of healthcare IoT, Case Studies, Evolution of New IoT Paradigms,
Challenges Associated with IoT, Emerging Pillars of IoT. .

Textbook(s):
1. David Hanes, Gonzalo Salgueiro, Patrick Grossetete, Robert Barton, Jerome Henry, “IoT Fundamentals:
Networking Technologies, Protocols, and Use Cases for the Internet of Things”, CISCO Press, 2017

References:
1. Michael Miller “The Internet of Things” by Pearson
2. Raj Kamal “Internet of Things”, McGraw‐Hill, 1st Edition

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 968
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Internet of Things Industrial and Medical Case Studies Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 7 IOT‐EAE IOT‐EAE‐5A IOT‐445P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Internet of Things Industrial and
Medical Case Studies) as this is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Introduction to Arduino programming.

2. Introduction to Arduino Uno R3
3. To blink the LED with Arduino.
4. To interface push button with Arduino.
5. To interface LCD with Arduino.
6. To read the analog voltage using ADC on Arduino.
7. To detect occupancy of an area using PIR sensors
8. To interface real time clock IC DS1307 with Arduino.
9. To measure the distance of an object using ultrasonic sensor
10. To display temperature and humidity data.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 969
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Introduction to Analog Electronics L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

OAE 6 ECE‐OAE ECE‐OAE‐1B OECE‐344T
OAE 6 EE‐OAE EE‐OAE‐1B OEE‐346T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To impart the knowledge of a PN junction diode and its various applications.
2. To impart the knowledge about various semiconductor transistors.
3. To impart the knowledge about Op‐Amp and design its application circuits.
4. To impart the knowledge regarding principles of oscillations and about classification of power
amplifiers.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 To understand various properties of a PN junction diode. Design and analyses special diodes and the
circuits using these diodes for various applications.
CO 2 Classify the concepts of various semiconductor transistors.
CO 3 Understand the characteristics of Op‐Amp and design its application circuits.
CO 4 Analyse principles of oscillations and classification of power amplifiers.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 ‐ 1 2 1 3
CO 2 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 ‐ 1 2 1 3
CO 3 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 ‐ 1 2 1 3
CO 4 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 ‐ 1 2 1 3

UNIT I

Review of semiconductor physics, p‐n Junction diode: Physical operation, I‐V characteristic and diode equation,
Large‐signal model, Concept of load line, drift and diffusion current, p‐n junction capacitances (depletion and
diffusion), Breakdown in p‐n diodes, Zener diode.
Diode Applications: Rectifier circuits, Zener diode‐based voltage regulators, limiting and clamping circuits,
voltage multipliers, switching behaviour of p‐n diode.

UNIT II

Bipolar Junction Transistor (BJT): Physical structure and modes of operation, BJT current components, BJT
characteristics in CB, CE & CC mode, operating point, AC/DC Load Line, The Ebers‐Moll model, BJT
characteristics, and large‐signal equivalent circuit.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 970
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Metal oxide semiconductor Field Effect Transistors MOSFET: Physical structure and V‐I characteristics of
Enhancement/Depletion‐ type MOSFETs (n/p‐channel), Biasing in MOS amplifier circuits, small signal equivalent
circuit of MOSFET, MOSFET as an analog switch

UNIT III

Introduction to Op‐Amp: Differential amplifier using BJT, Block diagram of op‐amp, characteristics of ideal Op‐
Amp, ideal voltage transfer curve, Op‐Amp ac and dc parameters. Differential amplifier using single and two
op‐amp, virtual ground.
Circuits using Op‐Amps: Comparators, adder, subtractor, integrator, differentiator.

UNIT IV

Principles of oscillations, Barkhausen criterion, Frequency stability, Various types of oscillators.

Output stage and Power Amplifiers: Classification of output stages, class A, B and AB output stages, Biasing the
class AB circuit, variations on the class AB configuration, Power BJTs, MOS power transistors, IC power
amplifiers.

Textbook(s):
1. Boylestad & Nashelsky, Electronic Devices & Circuit Theory, Pearson Publication.
2. Salivahanan, Suresh Kumar, Vallavaraj, Electronic devices and circuits TMH, 1999.
3. J. Millman and Halkias, Integrated Electronics, Analog & Digital Circuits & Systems TMH – 2000
4. Op ‐ Amps and Linear Integrated Circuits, Ramakant A Gayakwad, PHI.

References:
1. Sedra & Smith, Micro Electronic Circuits, Oxford University Press, 2000
2. B.Kumar & Shail Bala Jain, Electronic Devices And Circuits, PHI

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 971
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Introduction to Analog Electronics Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

OAE 6 ECE‐OAE ECE‐OAE‐1B OECE‐344P
OAE 6 EE‐OAE EE‐OAE‐1B OEE‐346P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Introduction to Analog Electronics) as
this is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. To plot V‐I characteristics of a semiconductor diode and reverse characteristics of Zener diode.
2. To study half wave and full wave rectifiers and calculate ripple factor, efficiency and voltage regulation.
3. To design clipper and clamper circuits.
4. Design and set up the BJT common emitter amplifier using voltage divider bias with and without feedback.
5. To design and test a Darlington emitter follower circuit.
6. To draw the drain and transfer characteristics of a given FET.
7. To study the Op‐Amp (IC 741) as inverting and noninverting amplifier and calculate its gain.
8. To study the Op‐Amp (IC 741) as adder, subtractor, integrator and differentiator.
9. To study Wien Bridge oscillator measurement of frequency and amplitude of oscillations using Op‐Amp.
10. To design a crystal oscillator to oscillate at the specified crystal frequency.
11. Set‐up and study the working of complementary symmetry class B push pull power amplifier and calculate
the efficiency.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 972
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Introduction to CAD/CAM L P C
3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ME 6 PCE PCE‐2 MEE‐326T
EAE 6 CADM‐EAE CADM‐EAE‐1 CADM‐302T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. Impart knowledge of computer‐aided design (CAD) techniques.
2. Impart knowledge of computer‐aided manufacturing (CAM) techniques.
3. Develop programming and operating skills for computer numerical control (CNC) machines.
4. Enable students understand various stages of product development and their management.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Understanding the scope and need of computer aided design & manufacturing and computer numeric
technology.
CO 2 Applying the techniques to generate solid model and curves
CO 3 Develop the Skills to program the Computer Numerical Control of Machine Tools
CO 4 Apply the concepts of Automated Material Handling Systems and Advanced Manufacturing Systems
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 3 1 3 2 1 2 2 2 2 3
CO 2 3 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 2 3 3 3
CO 3 3 2 2 3 3 2 1 2 3 3 3 3
CO 4 3 2 3 1 3 2 2 2 3 3 3 3

UNIT‐ I

Introduction: Definition and scope of CAD/CAM, Introduction to design process and role of computers in the
design process.
Mapping of Geometric Models: Translation, Rotational, General, Changes of Coordinate System, Numerical
problems. Three Dimensional Transformations: Point representations, Transformation Matrices, Scaling,
Translation, Rotation, Reflection.
Curves: Representation of Space Curves, Cubic Spline, Normalized Cubic Splines, Bezier Curves, B‐spline Curves,
Numerical problems. Surface Generation: Plane Surfaces, Ruled Surfaces, Surface of Revolution, Sweep Surface,
Bezier Surface, Cubic Surface Patch, B‐Spline Surface, Composite Surface, Numerical problem.

UNIT II

Solid modeling: Solid models, Fundamentals of solid modeling, Different solid representation schemes, Half ‐

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 973
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

spaces, Boundary representation (B‐rep), Constructive solid geometry (CSG), Sweep representation,
Perspective, Parallel projection, Hidden line removal algorithms.
CAD/CAM Data Exchange Formats: Types of file formats & their exchange, Graphics standards.

UNIT III

Need of NC technology, Fundamental concepts in numeric control: structure and functions of NC System,
advantages of NC technology over conventional manufacturing.
NC Machine Tools: Types, Definition and designation of control axes,Special constructional and design
characteristics of NC machine tools, Standard tooling used for NC turning and milling centres. NC Part
Programming: Work holding and tool setting procedure for NC turning and milling centres, Tool zero presetting,
Block formats and introduction to ISO based G & M codes for NC part programming, Concepts of tool length
and radius compensation, Standard canned cycles used in CNC turning and milling centres, Introduction to
automatic NC part program generation from CAD models using standard CAD/CAM software for machining of
surfaces, moulds and dies etc.

UNIT IV

Computer Numerical Control of Machine Tools: Types and functions of computer numeric control (CNC), Types
and functions of direct numeric control (DNC), Need of adaptive control types, functions and types of adaptive
control, its uses & benefits, Advantages of combined CNC/DNC systems.
Automated Material Handling Systems and Advanced Manufacturing Systems: Industrial Robots, Conveyors,
AGVs, Automatic Storage and Retrieval Systems; Lean Manufacturing Systems.

Textbook(s):
1. Ibrahim Zeid, CAD/CAM Theory and Practice, Tata McGraw‐Hill Publishing Company Limited. 2nd Ed.
2. S.K. Sinha, CNC Programming, Galgotia Publications 2003.
3. David F. Rogers and J. Alan Adams, Mathematical Elements for Computer Graphics, Tata McGraw‐Hill.
4. T.K. Kundra, P. N.Rao & N.K.Tiwari, Numerical Control and Computer Aided Manufacturing, TMH

References:
1. Mikell P. Groover, Emory W.Zimmers, “CAD/CAM”, Pearson Education, 2001.
2. P.N. Rao, “CAD/CAM Principles and Applications”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2003.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 974
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Introduction to CAD/CAM Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ME 6 PCE PCE‐2 MEE‐326P
EAE 6 CADM‐EAE CADM‐EAE‐1 CADM‐302P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Introduction to CAD/CAM) as this is
the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. To study the characteristic features of CNC machine.

2. Part programming (in word address format) experiment for turning operation (including operations such as
grooving and threading) and running on CNC machine.
3. Part programming (in word address format or ATP) experiment for drilling operation (point to point) and
running on CNC machine.
4. Part programming (in word address format or ATP) experiment for milling operation (contouring) and
running on CNC machine.
5. Experiment on Robot and programs.
6. Experiment on Transfer Line/Material Handling.
7. Experiment on study of system devices such as motors and feedback devices.
8. Experiment on Mechatronics and Controls.
9. Experiment based on CAD part of the syllabus.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 975
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Introduction to Circuits and Systems L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

OAE 6 ECE‐OAE ECE‐OAE‐1A OECE‐312T
OAE 6 EE‐OAE EE‐OAE‐1A OEE‐316T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To understand the LTI system and wave form synthesis.
2. To understand mathematical modelling of circuit.
3. To understand two port parameter and transfer function.
4. To understand realization of passive network and filter.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Ability to determine function from waveform.
CO 2 Ability to determine transient respond of circuit.
CO 3 Ability to determine two port parameter of circuit.
CO 4 Ability to realize the circuit from their transfer function.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 ‐ 2 1 ‐ 2
CO 2 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 ‐ 2 1 ‐ 2
CO 3 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 ‐ 2 1 ‐ 2
CO 4 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 ‐ 2 1 ‐ 2

UNIT‐I

Introduction to signals, their classification and properties, different types of systems, LTI systems and their
properties, periodic waveforms and signal synthesis, properties and applications of Laplace transform of
complex waveform.

UNIT‐II

System modeling in terms of differential equations and transient response of R, L, C, series and parallel circuits
for impulse, step, ramp, sinusoidal and exponential signals by classical method and using Laplace transform.

UNIT‐III

Graph theory: concept of tree, tie set matrix, cut set matrix and application to solve electric networks.
Two port networks: Introduction of two port parameters and their interconversion, interconnection of two 2‐

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 976
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

port networks, open circuit and short circuit impedances and ABCD constants, relation between image
impedances and short circuit and open circuit impedances. Network functions, their properties and concept of
transform impedance, Hurwitz polynomial.

UNIT IV

Positive real function and synthesis of LC, RC, RL Networks in Foster’s I and II, Cauer’s I& II forms, Introduction
of passive filter and their classification, frequency response, characteristic impedance of low pass, high pass,
Band Pass and Band reject prototype section.

Textbook(s):
1. W H Hayt “Engineering Circuit Analysis” TMH Eighth Edition
2. Kuo, “Network analysis and synthesis” John Weily and Sons, 2nd Edition.

Reference Books:
st
1. S Salivahanan, “Circuit Theory ”, Vikas Publishing House, 1 Edition, 2014
2. Van Valkenburg, “Network analysis”, PHI, 2000.
3. Bhise, Chadda, Kulshreshtha, “Engineering network analysis and filter design”, Umesh Publication, 2000.
4. D. R. Choudhary, “Networks and Systems”, New Age International, 1999
5. Allan H Robbins, W.C.Miller, “Circuit Analysis theory and Practice”, Cengage Learning Pub, 5th Edition
2013
6. Bell, “Electric Circuit”, Oxford Publications, 7th Edition.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 977
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Introduction to Circuits and Systems Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

OAE 6 ECE‐OAE ECE‐OAE‐1A OECE‐312P
OAE 6 EE‐OAE EE‐OAE‐1A OEE‐316P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Introduction to Circuits and Systems)
as this is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Introduction to MATLAB and its basic commands.

2. Plot unit step, unit impulse, unit ramp, exponential, parabolic functions and sinusoidal signals
3. Study the transient response of series RLC circuit for different types of waveforms on CRO and verify using
MATLAB
4. Study the time response of a simulated linear system and verify the unit step and square wave response of
first order and second order, type 0,1 system
5. Using MATLAB determine current in various resistors connected in network using mesh current and node
voltage analysis.
6. To determine Z and Y parameters of the given two port network.
7. To determine ABCD parameters of the given two port network.
8. To verify Reciprocity Theorem for the given two port network.
9. To determine Hybrid parameters of the given two port network.
10. To design Cascade Connection and determine ABCD parameters of the given two port network.
11. To design Series‐Series Connection and determine Z parameters of the given two port network.
12. To design Parallel‐Parallel Connection and determine Y parameters of the given two port network.
13. To design Series‐Parallel Connection and determine h parameters of the given two port network
14. Study the frequency response of different filter circuits.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 978
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Introduction to Computer Networks L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

OAE 7 CSE‐OAE CSE‐OAE‐5A OCSE‐411T
OAE 7 ECE‐OAE ECE‐OAE‐5B OECE‐425T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. ild an understanding of the fundamental concepts of computer networking.
2. Familiarize the student with the basic taxonomy and terminology of the computer networking area.
3. Introduce the student to advanced networking concepts, preparing the student for entry Advanced
courses in computer networking.
4. Allow the student to gain expertise in some specific areas of networking such as the design and
maintenance of individual networks.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Independently understand basic computer network technology.
CO 2 Understand and explain Data Communications System and its components.
CO 3 Understand and implements the network topology and ip addressing, subnetting.
CO 4 Enumerate the layers of the OSI model and TCP/IP.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 2 1 1 3 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 3
CO 2 3 2 1 1 3 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 3
CO 3 3 2 1 1 3 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 3
CO 4 3 2 1 1 3 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 3

UNIT‐I

Data Communications: Components, Networks, The Internet, Protocols and Standards, Network Models: The
OSI Model, TCP/IP Protocol Suite , A Comparison of the OSI and TCP/IP Reference Models, Addressing, Physical
Layer: Analog and Digital Signals, Transmission modes, Transmission Media: Guided Media, Unguided Media,
Switching: Circuit switching, packet switching), message switching.

UNIT‐II

Data Link Layer: Design issues, Data Link Control and Protocols: Flow and Error Control, Stop‐and‐wait ARQ.
Sliding window protocol, Go‐Back‐N ARQ, Selective Repeat ARQ, HDLC
Medium Access Sub layer: Channel allocation problem, Controlled Access, Channelization, multiple access
protocols, IEEE standard 802.3 & 802.11 for LANS and WLAN, high‐speed LANs, FDDI based LAN, Network

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 979
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Devices‐repeaters, hubs, switches bridges.

UNIT‐III

Network Layer: Design issues, Routing algorithms, Congestion control algorithms, Host to Host Delivery:
Internetworking, addressing and routing, IP addressing (class full & Classless), Subnet, Network Layer Protocols:
ARP, IPV4, ICMP, IPV6 ad ICMPV6.

UNIT ‐ IV

Transport Layer: Process to Process Delivery: UDP; TCP, Congestion Control, Error and Flow Control. Application
Layer: Client Server Model, Domain Name System (DNS): Electronic Mail (SMTP), file transfer (FTP), HTTP and
WWW.

Textbook(s):
1. Behrouz A. Forouzan, “Data Communications and Networking”, Tata McGraw‐Hill.

References:
1. A. S. Tannenbum, D. Wetherall,, “Computer Networks”, Prentice Hall, Pearson.
2. Fred Halsall, “Computer Networks”, Addison – Wesley.
3. Tomasi, “Introduction To Data Communications & Networking”, Pearson.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 980
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Introduction to Computer Networks Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

OAE 7 CSE‐OAE CSE‐OAE‐5A OCSE‐411P
OAE 7 ECE‐OAE ECE‐OAE‐5B OECE‐425P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Introduction to Computer Networks)
as this is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Introduction to Networking Simulation Tools: Wireshark, Cisco Packet Tracer.

2. To understand the operation of TELNET by accessing the router in server room from a PC in IT office.
3. To implement an IP Addressing Scheme and Subnetting in small networks using Cisco Packet Tracer.
4. To implement the static routing using Cisco Packet Tracer.
5. To implement the DHCP onto the Network Topology using Cisco Packet Tracer.
6. To implement the DNS, Email Services in the Network using Cisco Packet Tracer.
7. To implement the Dynamic Routing Protocols: RIP, IGRP using Cisco Packet Tracer.
8. To construct multiple router networks and implement the EIGRP Protocol.
9. To implement the Network Address Resolution (NAT) using Cisco Packet Tracer.
10. Conducting a Network Capture and Monitoring with Wireshark Simulation Tool.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 981
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Introduction to Control Systems L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ECE/EE/EEE/ICE/EE‐VDT/ 5 PC PC EEC‐307
EC‐ACT

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To provide an understanding about the concepts of transfer unction and its evaluation.
2. To expose the students to time response of control systems
3. To understand the frequency response of control systems
4. To study compensators and controllers
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Ability to define, understand various terms related to control system and evaluation of transfer
function
CO 2 Ability to apply knowledge of various types of signals in time response of systems
CO 3 Ability to analyse frequency response of systems
CO 4 Ability to design compensators and controllers
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 2 1 1 1 1 ‐ 1 3 ‐ 3
CO 2 3 2 1 3 2 1 1 ‐ 1 3 ‐ 1
CO 3 3 2 1 2 3 1 1 ‐ 1 3 ‐ 3
CO 4 3 3 2 1 1 1 1 ‐ 1 3 ‐ 3

UNIT I

Control Systems: Basics & Components Introduction to basic terms, classifications & types of Control Systems,
Mathematical modelling of real life systems, block diagrams & signal flow graphs. Transfer function,
determination of transfer function using Block diagram reduction techniques and Mason’s Gain formula.
Control system components: Electrical/ Mechanical/Electromechanical/A.C./D.C. Servo Motors, Stepper
Motors, Tacho Generators, Synchros, Magnetic Amplifiers, Servo Amplifiers.

UNIT II

Time: Domain Analysis of real life problems, Time domain performance specifications, transient response of
first & second order systems, steady state errors and static error constants in unity feedback control systems,
response with P, PI and PID controllers, limitations of time domain analysis.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 982
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT III

Frequency Domain Analysis frequency domain specifications and performance of LTI systems, minimum/non
minimum phase systems, Polar and inverse polar plots, Logarithmic plots (Bode plots), gain and phase margins,
relative stability. Correlation with time domain performance, closed loop frequency responses from open loop
response. Limitations of frequency domain analysis.

UNIT IV

Stability & Compensation Techniques Concepts, absolute, asymptotic, conditional and marginal stability,
Routh–Hurwitz and Nyquist stability criterion, Root locus technique and its application. Concepts of
compensation, series/parallel/ series‐parallel/feedback compensation, Lag/Lead/Lag‐Lead networks for
compensation, compensation using P, PI, PID controllers.

Textbooks:
1. B. C. Kuo, “Automatic control system”, Prentice Hall of India, 7th edition 2001.
2. Nagrath Gopal, “Control Systems Engineering ‐Principles and Design” New Age Publishers

References:
1. Norman S. Nise, “Control systems engineering” John Wiley & Sons (Asia) Singapore.
2. B. S. Manke, Linear Control System, Khanna publication.
3. K. Ogata, “Modern control engineering”, Pearson 2002.
4. A. K. Jaurath , Problems And Solutions Of Control Systems: With Essential Theory (CBS Problems and
Solutions Series)

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 983
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Introduction to Control Systems Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ECE/EE/EEE/ICE/EE‐VDT/ 5 PC PC EEC‐355
EC‐ACT

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Introduction to Control Systems) as
this is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Determination of step & impulse response for a second‐order unity feedback system.
2. To study the speed‐torque characteristics of SERVO MOTOR.
3. Experiment to draw synchro pair characteristics.
4. To determine the Transfer Function of the DC Machine.
5. Plot unit step response of the given transfer function and finds delay time, rise time, and peak overshoot.
6. Plot the pole‐zero configuration in the s‐plane for the given transfer function.
7. To determine the characteristics of Magnetic Amplifiers.
8. Linear System Analysis (Time Domain Analysis, Error Analysis) Using MATLAB.
9. To observe the effect of P, PI, PID, and PD Controller for open loop and closed loop of second order system.
10. To analyze the frequency response of a system by plotting Root locus, Bode plot, and Nyquist plot using
MATLAB software.
11. Experiment to draw the frequency response characteristics of the lag–lead compensator network and
determination of its transfer function.
12. Temperature Controller Using PID Controller.
13. Study of operation of a stepper motor interface with a microprocessor.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 984
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Introduction to Data Communication and Networking L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EE/EEE 6 PCE PCE‐2 EEE‐324T
EAE 6 ES‐EAE ES‐EAE‐1B ES‐308T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To build an understanding of the fundamental concepts of data communication.
2. To familiarize the student with the basic taxonomy of data link layer.
3. To understand and implement the network routing, IP addressing, subnetting.
4. To enumerate the functions of transport layer and application layer.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Understand basic concepts of data communications.
CO 2 Understand and explain various functions of data link layerr.
CO 3 Understand and implements the network routing, IP addressing, subnetting.
CO 4 Enumerate the functions of transport layer and application layer.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 2 1 1 3 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 3
CO 2 3 2 1 1 3 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 3
CO 3 3 2 1 1 3 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 3
CO 4 3 2 1 1 3 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 3

UNIT‐ I

Data Communications : Components, protocols and standards, Network and Protocol Architecture, Reference
Model ISO‐OSI, TCP/IP‐Overview ,topology, transmission mode, digital signals, digital to digital encoding, digital
data transmission, DTE‐DCE interface, interface standards, transmission media‐ guided and unguided,
transmission impairment, Performance, wavelength and Shannon capacity.
Switching: Circuit switching, packet switching, message switching.

UNIT‐ II

Data Link Layer: Design issues, Data Link Control and Protocols: Flow and Error Control, Stop‐and‐wait ARQ.
Sliding window protocol, Go‐Back‐N ARQ, Selective Repeat ARQ, HDLC
Medium Access Sub layer: Channel allocation problem, Controlled Access, Channelization, multiple access
protocols, IEEE standard 802.3 & 802.11 for LANS and WLAN, high‐speed LANs, Network Devices‐repeaters,
hubs, switches, bridges.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 985
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT‐ III

Network Layer: Design issues, Routing algorithms, Congestion control algorithms,

Host to Host Delivery: Internetworking, addressing and routing, IP addressing, Subnet, Network Layer
Protocols: ARP, IPV4, ICMP, IPV6 ad ICMPV6.

UNIT‐ IV

Transport Layer: Process to Process Delivery: UDP; TCP, congestion control.

Application Layer: Client Server Model, Domain Name System (DNS): Electronic Mail (SMTP), file transfer
(FTP), HTTP and WWW.

Textbooks:
th
1. A. S. Tanenbaum, D. Wetherall, “Computer Networks”, Prentice Hall, Pearson, 5 Ed
2. Behrouz A. Forouzan, “Data Communications and Networking”, Tata McGraw‐Hill, 4th Ed

References:
1. Fred Halsall, “Computer Networks”, Addison – Wesley Pub. Co. 1996.
th
2. Larry L Peterson and Bruce S. Davie, “Computer Networks: A system Approach”, Elsevier, 4 Ed
3. W. Tomasi, “Introduction To Data Communications & Networking”, Pearson 7th impression 2011
th
4. William Stallings, “Data and Computer Communications”, Pearson, 9 Ed.
5. Y. Zheng , “Network for Computer Scientists & Engineers”, Oxford University Press
6. Data Communications and Computer Networks: White, Cengage Learning, 8th Ed

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 986
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Introduction to Data Communication and Networking Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EE/EEE 6 PCE PCE‐2 EEE‐324P
EAE 6 ES‐EAE ES‐EAE‐1B ES‐308P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Introduction to Data Communication
and Networking) as this is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Introduction to Computer Network laboratory

Introduction to Discrete Event Simulation
Discrete Event Simulation Tools ‐ ns2/ns3, Omnet++
2. Using Free Open Source Software tools for network simulation – I Preliminary usage of the tool ns3
Simulate telnet and ftp between N sources ‐ N sinks (N = 1, 2, 3). Evaluate the effect of increasing data rate
on congestion.
3. Using Free Open Source Software tools for network simulation ‐ II
Advanced usage of the tool ns3
Simulating the effect of queueing disciplines on network performance ‐ Random Early Detection/Weighted
RED / Adaptive RED (This can be used as a lead up to DiffServ / IntServ later).
4. Using Free Open Source Software tools for network simulation ‐ III
Advanced usage of the tool ns3 Simulate http, ftp and DBMS access in networks
5. Using Free Open Source Software tools for network simulation ‐ IV
Advanced usage of the tool ns3
Effect of VLAN on network performance ‐ multiple VLANs and single router.
6. Using Free Open Source Software tools for network simulation ‐ IV
Advanced usage of the tool ns3
Effect of VLAN on network performance ‐ multiple VLANs with separate
multiple routers.
7. Using Free Open Source Software tools for network simulation ‐ V
Advanced usage of the tool ns3
Simulating the effect of DiffServ / IntServ in routers on throughput enhancement.
8. Using Free Open Source Software tools for network simulation ‐ VI
Advanced usage of the tool ns3
Simulating the performance of wireless networks
9. Case Study I: Evaluating the effect of Network Components on Network Performance
To Design and Implement LAN With Various Topologies and To Evaluate Network Performance Parameters
for DBMS etc.
10. Case Study II: Evaluating the effect of Network Components on Network Performance
To Design and Implement LAN Using Switch/Hub/Router As Interconnecting Devices For Two Different
LANs and To Evaluate Network Performance Parameters.
11. Mini project ‐ one experiment to be styled as a project of duration 1 month (the last month)

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 987
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Introduction to Database Management Systems L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

OAE 6 SD‐OAE SD‐OAE‐2B OSD‐336T
EE‐VDT/EC‐ACT 7 OAE‐ECE‐EA OAE‐2 OCSE‐407T
OAE 7 CSE‐OAE CSE‐OAE‐3 OCSE‐407T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To introduce basic concepts, architecture and characteristics of database systems.
2. To introduce relational model concepts and PL/SQL programming.
3. To introduce relational database design and Normal forms based on functional dependencies.
4. To introduce concepts of object oriented & distributed databases.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Ability to understand advantages of database systems.
CO 2 Ability to use SQL as DDL, DCL and DML.
CO 3 Ability to design database and manage transaction processing.
CO 4 Understand object oriented & distributed databases systems and use them.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 2 2 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 2 2 3
CO 2 3 3 2 2 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 2 2 3
CO 3 3 3 2 3 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 2 2 3
CO 4 3 3 2 3 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 2 2 3

UNIT – I

Basic concepts: database & database users, characteristics of the database systems, concepts and
architecture, date models, schemas & instances, DBMS architecture & data independence, data modelling
using the entity‐relationship approach.
SQL – DDL, DCL & DML views and indexes in SQL. Basics of SQL, DDL, DML,DCL, structure – creation, alteration,
defining constraints – Primary key, foreign key, unique, not null, check, IN operator.

UNIT ‐ II

Enhanced ER Concepts: Specialization/Generalization, Aggregation, Mapping of ER model to Relational Model.

SQL – Functions ‐ aggregate functions, Built‐in functions – numeric, date, string functions, set operations, sub‐
queries, correlated sub‐queries, Use of group by, having, order by, join and its types, Exist, Any, All , view and
its types. Transaction control commands – Commit, Rollback, Save point.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 988
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT ‐ III

Relational Model: Concepts, relational model constraints, relational algebra.

Relational Database Design: functional dependencies & normalization for relational databases, normal forms
based on functional dependencies, (1NF, 2NF, 3NF & BCNF), lossless join and dependency preserving
decomposition.
Database Programming – control structures, exception handling, stored procedures, Triggers.

UNIT ‐ IV

Properties of Transaction, Transaction states, Transaction Schedule, Serializability, Concurrency control

techniques, locking techniques, Recoverable schedules, Deadlock detection and Recovery, recovery techniques:
recovery concepts.
Concepts of Object Oriented Database Management systems & Distributed Database Management Systems

Textbooks:
1. R. Elmsari and S. B. Navathe, “Fundamentals of database systems”, Pearson Education, 7th Edition, 2018
2. V. M. Grippa and S. Kumichev, “Learning MySQL”, O’Reilly, 2021.
3. SQL/ PL/SQL, The programming language of Oracle, Ivan Bayross, 4th Edition BPB Publications

References:
1. A. Silberschatz, H. F. Korth and S. Sudershan, “Database System Concept”, McGraw Hill, 6th Edition,2013.
2. Date, C. J., “An introduction to database systems”, 8th Edition, Pearson Education, 2008.
3. Desai, B., “An introduction to database concepts”, Galgotia publications, 2010
4. H. Garcia‐Molina, J. D. Ullman, J. Widom, “Database System: The Complete Book”, PH.
5. Oracle and MySQL manuals.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 989
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Introduction to Database Management Systems Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

OAE 6 SD‐OAE SD‐OAE‐2B OSD‐336P
EE‐VDT/EC‐ACT 7 OAE‐ECE‐EA OAE‐2 OCSE‐407P
OAE 7 CSE‐OAE CSE‐OAE‐3 OCSE‐407P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Introduction to Database Management
Systems) as this is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

13. Experiments based on DDL commands – CREATE, ALTER, DROP and TRUNCATE.
14. Apply the integrity constraints like Primary Key, Foreign key, Check, NOT NULL, etc. to the tables.
15. Experiments based on basic DML commands – SELECT, INSERT, UPDATE and DELETE.
16. Write the queries for implementing Built‐in functions, GROUP BY, HAVING and ORDER BY.
17. Write the queries to implement the joins.
18. Write the queries to implement the subqueries.
19. Write the queries to implement the set operations.
20. Write the queries to create the views and queries based on views.
21. Demonstrate the concept of Control Structures.
22. Demonstrate the concept of Exception Handling.
23. Demonstrate the concept of Functions and Procedures.
24. Demonstrate the concept of Triggers.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 990
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Introduction to Digital Signal Processing L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CSE/IT/CST/ITE 6 PCE PCE‐3 CIE‐354T
EE/EEE 6 PCE PCE‐1 EEE‐312T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To impart the basic knowledge of DFT, its properties, FFT and its applications.
2. To impart the knowledge of designing and realization of FIR filters.
3. To impart the knowledge of designing and realization of IIR filters.
4. To impart the knowledge of quantization errors in Digital Signal Processing and the concept of
Multirate signal processing.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 To understand the basic concept of DFT and FFT.
CO 2 To Acquire a clear idea of FIR filter designing techniques and realization methods.
CO 3 Understand the IIR filter designing techniques and realization methods and the stability.
CO 4 To understand the quantization errors in Digital Signal Processing and the concept of Multirate signal
processing.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 ‐ 2 1 ‐ 2
CO 2 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 ‐ 2 1 ‐ 2
CO 3 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 ‐ 2 1 ‐ 2
CO 4 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 ‐ 2 1 ‐ 2

UNIT I
Review of Discrete Time Fourier Transform, Z‐ transform and Discrete Fourier Transform,Properties of the DFT:
Periodicity, Linearity and Symmetry properties, Multiplication of two DFTs,concept of circular
convolution,computation of circular convolution by graphical and matrix form, relationship between linear
convolution and circular convolution, computation of linear convolution from circular convolution, , linear
filtering using DFT, aliasing error, filtering of long data sequences – Overlap‐Save and Overlap‐Add methods

UNIT II

Efficient Computation of the DFT: Complexity analysis of direct computation of DFT, Concept of Fast Fourier
Transfor, Radix‐2 computation of FFT using decimation‐in‐time and decimation‐in‐frequency algorithms, signal
flow graphs, Butterflies, computations of FFT in one place using both algorithms, bit‐reversal process, examples
for DIT & DIF FFT Butterfly computations.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 991
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT III

Design & Structure of FIR Filters: Characteristics of practical frequency‐selective filters, Basic concepts of IIR
and FIR filters, Gibbs Phenomenon, Symmetric and Anti‐symmetric FIR filters, Design of Linear‐phase FIR filters
using windows‐ Rectangular, Hamming, Hanning, Bartlett windows, FIR differentiator, FIR Hilbert Transformer.
Design of FIR filters using frequency sampling method. Structure for FIR Systems: Direct form, Cascade form
and Lattice structures.

UNIT IV

Design & Structure of IIR Filters: Concept of IIR digital filter, recursive and non‐recursive systemanalog to
digital domain transformation‐ Approximation of derivatives ,impulse invariant method and bilinear
transformation and their properties, limitations of bilinear transformation, frequency warping and prewarping,
methods to find out the order of IIR filter, mapping of poles and zeroes of filter in analog domain, computation
of filter transfer function in analog domain, digital filter realization techniques, procedure to design
Butterworth and Chebyshev digital IIR filters. Direct, Cascade, Parallel, Signal Flow graph and transposed
structure, Lattice structures, Lattice and Lattice‐Ladder Structures, Schur ‐ Cohn stability Test for IIR filters.

Textbook(s):
1. Oppenheim & Schafer, Digital Signal Processing, PHI, Latest edition.
2. Proakis and Manolakis, Digital Signal Processing, PHI.

References:
1. S. K. Mitra, Digital Signal Processing, TMH, 2006
2. Johny. R. Johnson, Introduction to Digital Signal Processing, PHI, 1989
3. R.Babu, Digital Signal Processing, ScitechPublication.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 992
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Introduction to Digital Signal Processing Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CSE/IT/CST/ITE 6 PCE PCE‐3 CIE‐354P
EE/EEE 6 PCE PCE‐1 EEE‐312P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Introduction to Digital Signal
Processing) as this is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Write Program to compute N point DFT of a given sequence and to plot magnitude and phase spectrum.
2. To implement Parseval theorem of DFT
3. To implement Time shifting and time reversal property of DFT
4. To find linear convolution of two given sequences.
5. To find circular convolution of two given sequences
6. To perform linear convolution from circular convolution and vice versa
7. To design LP FIR filter using windowing techniques
8. To design HP FIR filter using windowing techniques
9. To design LP IIR Butterworth filter for given specifications
10. To design LP IIR Chebyshev type‐1 filter for given specifications
11. To verify the decimation of a given sequence
12. To verify the interpolation of a given sequence

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 993
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Introduction to Electrical Machines L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

OAE 6 EE‐OAE EE‐OAE‐2 OEE‐318T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To impart the concepts of DC Machines.
2. To impart the concepts of Transformers.
3. To impart the concepts of Induction Motors.
4. To impart the concepts of Synchronous Motors.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Ability to understand working and applications of DC Motors.
CO 2 Ability to understand working and analysis of Transformers.
CO 3 Ability to understand working and applications of Induction Motors.
CO 4 Ability to understand working and applications of Synchronous Machines
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 ‐ 2 1 ‐ 2
CO 2 3 3 1 3 3 2 1 ‐ 3 1 ‐ 2
CO 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 1 ‐ 2 1 ‐ 1
CO 4 3 3 3 3 3 2 1 ‐ 2 1 ‐ 2

UNIT‐ I

Principles of Electromechanical Energy Conversion.DC machines: construction, armature windings, induced

EMF equation, torque production, magnetization curve. Types of generators and motors, characteristics,
commutation and interpoles, armature reaction, Speed control of dc motor and starting.
PMDC machine: Introduction and need of brushless motors

UNIT‐ II

Transformers: construction, ideal and practical transformer, equivalent circuits, voltage regulation, maximum
efficiency criterion. Open circuit and short circuit tests. Phasor diagrams on no load, full load, lagging and
leading power factor loads. Three phase transformer.
Introduction to polyphase induction machines, production of rotating magnetic flux vector, principle of
operation, importance of air gap, comparison with transformer, types of rotor.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 994
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT‐ III

Induction motors: Development of an equivalent circuit, estimation of parameters, no load and block rotor
tests. Torque slip characteristics, starting of induction motors methods, deep bar and double cage rotor, power
relations, speed control of induction motors.
Single phase induction motor, double field revolving theory, starting methods of single phase induction motors,
universal motor and introduction to switched reluctance motor.

UNIT‐ IV

Synchronous Machine: construction, pitch factor and distribution factor, induced emf equation, equivalent
circuits and phasor diagrams, power relations, OCC and SCC characteristics for voltage regulation of alternator,
salient pole and cylindrical rotor machines and phasors. Effect of excitation and V curves. Power factor
correction and parallel operation of synchronous generator.

Textbook(s):
1. I.J Nagrath and D.P.Kothari, “Electrical Machines”, Tata Mc Graw Hill, 2010, Fourth Edition.
2. Bhag S. Guru, Huseyin R. Hiziroglu, “Electric Machinery and Transformers”, Oxford Pub., 3rd Ed.

References:
1. M. V. Deshpande, “Electrical Machines” PHI.
2. PC Sen, “Principles of Electric Machinery and Power Electronics”, Wiley and Sons, Third Edition.
3. Ashfaq Hussain, “Electrical Machines”, Dhanpat Rai.
4. Fitzgeral, A.E., C.Kingslay & Umans, “Electrical Machines”, Mc Graw Hill.
5. Ghosh, “Electrical Machines”, Pearson.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 995
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Introduction to Electrical Machines Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

OAE 6 EE‐OAE EE‐OAE‐2 OEE‐318P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Introduction to Electrical Machines) as
this is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. To obtain magnetization characteristics of DC shunt generator and determine critical field resistance and
critical speed.
2. To perform load test on DC shunt generator and determine the characteristics.
3. To perform speed control of DC shunt motor by field and armature control.
4. To perform the load test on D.C. shunt motor and to draw the performance characteristics.
5. To perform the Swinburne’s test on a D.C. shunt Machine and to pre determine its efficiency when running
as a motor as well as generator and also draw the characteristic curves.
6. To perform Open circuit and short circuit tests on single phase transformer for parameter estimation of the
transformer.
7. To obtain star‐star, star‐delta and delta‐delta connections for three phase transformers.
8. To perform parallel operation of two single phase transformers.
9. To perform block rotor test and no load test on induction motor(single phase) for parameter estimation.
10. To perform block rotor test and no load test on induction motor (three phase) for parameter estimation.
11. To perform SCC and OCC of an alternator and calculate voltage regulation at UPF, .8 leading and .8 lagging
pf.
12. To perform load test on alternator.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 996
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Introduction to Industrial Instrumentation L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

OAE 7 ICE‐OAE ICE‐OAE‐4 OICE‐435T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To expose the students to various measurement techniques used for measuring industrial process
variables
2. To expose the students to Principles and working of Humidity, Moisture, temperature , pressure, flow
and level measuring
3. To make the students to understand the selection of temperature, flow, pressure and level measuring
device for specific process measurement.
4. To impart knowledge on signal conversion and conditioning methods for measurement of industrial
variables
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 bility to understand various measurement techniques used for measuring industrial process variables
CO 2 bility to apply knowledge of temperature, pressure, flow, level, humidity for industrial applications
CO 3 Ability to analyze the electrical and non‐electrical methods of temperature, flow, pressure, level
measurement
CO 4 Ability to design signal conditioning circuit for various sensors and transducers used for measurement
of industrial variables
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 ‐ 3
CO 2 3 3 2 2 ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ 2 2 ‐ 3
CO 3 3 3 3 3 ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ 2 3 2 3
CO 4 3 3 3 3 ‐ 2 ‐ 2 2 3 2 3

Unit I

Temperature Measurements: Introduction; Definitions, standards, unit systems, points calibration of

thermometers, study of filled in system thermometer, bimetallic thermometers, 3 and 4 wire RTD, high
temperature measurement techniques, Radiation fundamentals ‐Radiation methods of temperature
measurement, Total radiation pyrometers, Optical pyrometers, Bolometers
Level Measurements: Introduction, level measurement‐ differential pressure method, Electrical types of level
gauges using resistance, capacitance, nuclear radiation and ultrasonic sensors

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 997
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Unit II

Pressure Measurements: Introduction, Definition of absolute pressure, gauge pressure and vacuum, their
relation and units of pressure, Non‐Electric type pressure measurement: manometers: U‐tube, well type,
Elastic type pressure gauge: Bourdon tube, Diaphragm and Bellows, Electrical methods: elastic elements with
LVDT, strain gauges, capacitive type transducers for pressure measurement, Measurement of vacuum: McLeod
gauge, thermal conductivity gauges, Ionization gauge, Electrical pressure transmitter.

Unit III

Flow Measurements: Introduction, units of flow measurement, classification of flow meters, variable head flow
meters‐ orifice plate, venturi tube and flow nozzle, variable area flow meters‐ Rotameter, Electro Magnetic
flow meters and ultrasonic flow meters, turbine and open channel flow meters.

Unit IV

Force and Torque Measurement: Electric balance ‐ Different types of load cells ‐ Hydraulic, Pneumatic, strain
gauge, Piezoelectric load cells, Different methods of torque measurement‐ Types of dynamometers,
Absorption dynamometer‐ Prony brake and rope brake dynamometer.

Humidity: Dry and wet bulb psychrometers – Resistive and capacitive type hygrometers – Dew cell.
Moisture: Different methods of moisture measurements – Thermal Conductivity and Capacitive sensors,
Application of moisture measurement ‐ Moisture measurement in solids.

Textbooks:
1. Patranbis D, ”Principles of Industrial Instrumentation, Tata McGraw Hill Pub., New Delhi (1991)
2. A.K. Sawhney and Puneet Sawhney, “Mechanical Measurements and Instrumentation and Control”,
Dhanpat Rai & Co. (P) Limited, 2015.
3. S.K. Singh, “Industrial Instrumentation and Control”, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Ltd., New Delhi

References:
1. Ernest.O. Doebelin and Dhanesh.N. Manik, Doebelin’s Measurement Systems, McGraw Hill, 6th Ed, 2011.
2. Douglas M. Considine, Process / Industrial Instruments & Controls Handbook, 5th Edition, McGraw Hill,
Singapore, 1999
3. Bela G. Liptak, Instrument Engineers' Handbook, Volume One: Process measurement and analysis, CRC
Press, 4th Edition, 2003.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 998
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Introduction to Industrial Instrumentation Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

OAE 7 ICE‐OAE ICE‐OAE‐4 OICE‐435P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Introduction to Industrial
Instrumentation) as this is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Measurement of Temperature using RTD

2. Measurement of level using electrical sensor
3. Measurement of pressure using electrical method
4. Measurement of flow using variable area technique
5. Measurement of force using load cell
6. Measurement of humidity using hygrometer.
7. Measurement of flow using variable flow technique
8. Measurement of vaccum pressure using simulation software
9. Measurement of high temperature based on radiation principle using simulation software
10. Measurement of pressure using pressure transducer level using simulation software

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 999
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Introduction to Information and Coding Theory L P C

4 4

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ECE 6 PCE PCE‐2 ECE‐332
EE/EEE 6 PCE PCE‐3 EEE‐366
EC‐ACT 7 PC PC ACT‐403

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To understand the efficient, error‐free and secure delivery of information using binary streams.
2. To have in‐depth knowledge of error‐control coding.
3. To learn the process of encoding and decoding of digital data streams.
4. To learn and apply the methods of generation of these codes and evaluate the performance of them
over the noisy communication channels.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 To be able to understand the principles behind an efficient and secure transmission of digital data
stream.
CO 2 To be able to demonstrate the knowledge of channel capacity and coding.
CO 3 To be able to implement the knowledge of encoding and decoding of digital data stream using Linear
& Cyclic Codes.
CO 4 To be able to analyse the encoding and decoding of digital data stream using Convolutional codes.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 1 1 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 ‐ 3 ‐ 1
CO 2 3 3 3 3 1 1 ‐ 2 ‐ 2 ‐ 2
CO 3 3 3 3 3 3 1 ‐ 2 ‐ 2 ‐ 2
CO 4 3 3 3 3 3 1 ‐ 2 ‐ 2 ‐ 2

UNIT‐I

Introduction to Information Theory, Uncertainty & Information, Mutual Information, Average mutual
information, Entropy, Relative Entropy, Extension of an Information source and Markov Source, Maximum
Entropy Principle, Information measure of Continuous random Variables, Maximum Entropy Principle, Jensen’s
Inequality, Fano’s Inequality, Introduction to lossless coding, Source coding theorem Block code and its
properties, Instantaneous code and its properties, Kraft‐Mcmillan equality, Huffman Coding, Shannon Fano
coding, Lempel Ziv Algorithm.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1000
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT‐II

Introduction to discrete information channels, Equivocation and Mutual Information, Properties of different
information channels, Reduction of information channels, Noiseless channel, Properties of Mutual information,
Introduction to channel capacity, Shannon’s Channel Coding theorem, Bandwidth – S/N Trade Off, Channel
capacity theorem, Shannon Limit, Channel capacity for MIMO system

UNIT‐III

Definition of terms: Redundancy, code efficiency, systematic codes, Hamming distance, Hamming Weight,
Hamming Bound, Types of Code: Parity check codes, Hamming codes, BCH Codes, RS Codes, Linear Block
Codes, Generator and Parity Check matrix, Syndrome decoding, LDPC Codes, MDS codes.
Introduction to Cyclic Codes, Polynomials, division algorithm for polynomials, Generation and detection of
cyclic codes, Matrix Description of cyclic codes, Golay Codes, CRC Codes, Circuit implementation of cyclic codes.

UNIT – IV

Burst Error Detecting and correcting codes, Convolutional codes, Time domain and frequency domain
approaches, Code Tree, Trellis and State diagram, Decoding of convolutional codes, Viterbi’s Algorithm,
Sequential Decoding, Transfer function and Distance properties of convolutional codes, Bound on bit error rate,
Coding Gain.

Textbook(s):
1. Ranjan Bose, “Information Theory Coding & Cryptography”, 3rd Edition, McGraw Hill, 2017.
2. T.M. Cover and J.A Thomas, “Elements of Information Theory”, 2nd Edition, Wiley India Pvt Ltd, 2013.

References:
1. Salvatore Gravano, Introduction to Error Control Codes, Oxford University Press, 2017.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1001
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Introduction to Information and Communication Theory L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

IT 6 PCE PCE‐3 CIE‐360T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To understand the basics of probability theory, Digital Information and Communication theory.
2. To learn the knowledge of error‐control coding.
3. To learn the process of encoding and decoding of digital data streams.
4. To learn the methods of generation of these codes.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 To be able to understand the basic principles of probability theory.
CO 2 To be able to demonstrate the knowledge information and basic communication theory.
CO 3 To be able to implement the knowledge of encoding and decoding of digital data stream using Linear
Block Codes.
CO 4 To be able to analyse the encoding and decoding of digital data stream using Convolutional codes.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 1 1 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 ‐ 3 ‐ 1
CO 2 3 3 3 3 1 1 ‐ 2 ‐ 2 ‐ 2
CO 3 3 3 3 3 3 1 ‐ 2 ‐ 2 ‐ 2
CO 4 3 3 3 3 3 1 ‐ 2 ‐ 2 ‐ 2

UNIT‐I

Probability and Random Process: Introduction, Probability, Random variables, Statistical Averages, Random
Processes, Mean, Correlation and Covariance function, Ergodic Process, Power Spectral Density, Gaussian
process, Information measure of Continuous random Variables, Jensen’s Inequality, Fano’s Inequality.

UNIT‐II

Introduction to Information Theory, Uncertainty & Information, Mutual Information, Average mutual
information, Entropy, Relative Entropy, Introduction to lossless coding, Source coding theorem, Block code and
its properties, Kraft‐Mcmillan equality, Huffman Coding, Shannon Fano coding, Lempel Ziv Algorithm.
Communication Process, Primary Communication resources, Sources of Information, Communication Networks
and Communication Channels.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1002
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT‐III

Definition of terms: Redundancy, code efficiency, systematic codes, Hamming distance, Hamming Weight,
Hamming Bound, Types of Code: Parity check codes, Hamming codes, BCH Codes, RS Codes, Linear Block
Codes, Generator and Parity Check matrix, Syndrome decoding.
Introduction to Cyclic Codes, Matrix Description of cyclic codes, Golay Codes, CRC Codes, Circuit
implementation of cyclic codes.

UNIT – IV

Burst Error Detecting and correcting codes, Convolutional codes, Time domain and frequency domain
approaches, Code Tree, Trellis and State diagram, Decoding of convolutional codes, Viterbi’s Algorithm,
Sequential Decoding, Bound on bit error rate, Coding Gain.

Textbook(s):
1. Ranjan Bose, “Information Theory Coding & Cryptography”, 3rd Edition, McGraw Hill, 2017.
2. T.M. Cover and J.A Thomas, “Elements of Information Theory”, 2nd Edition, Wiley India Pvt Ltd, 2013.
3. Simon Haykins and Michael Moher, “Communications Systems”, 5th Edition, John Wiley & Sons Inc, 2009.

References:
1. Salvatore Gravano, Introduction to Error Control Codes, Oxford University Press, 2017.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1003
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Introduction to Information and Communication Theory Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

IT 6 PCE PCE‐3 CIE‐360P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Introduction to Information and
Communication Theory) as this is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Write a MATLAB program to compute entropy and mutual information for Noise Free Channel.
2. Write a MATLAB program to compute entropy and mutual information for Binary Symmetric Channel.
3. Write a MATLAB program to implement algorithm for generation and evaluation of Shannon‐ Fano coding
and decoding.
4. Write a MATLAB program to implement algorithm for generation and evaluation of Huffman coding and
decoding.
5. Write a MATLAB program to implement algorithm for generation and evaluation of Lempel Ziv dictionary
method.
6. Write a MATLAB program to implement the algorithm for encoding and decoding of Linear Block Code.
7. Write a MATLAB program to implement the algorithm for encoding and decoding of Cyclic Code.
8. Write a MATLAB program to implement the algorithm for generating Convolutional code by Code Tree.
9. Write a MATLAB program to implement the algorithm for generating Convolutional code by Code Trellis.
10. Write a MATLAB program to implement the algorithm for encoding and decoding of BCH Code.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1004
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Introduction to Internet of Things L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CSE/IT/CST/ITE 6 PCE PCE‐2 CIE‐330T
ICE 6 PCE PCE‐3 ICE‐328T
CSE‐IoT/CSE‐ICB 6 PC PC IOT‐324T
EE‐VDT/EC‐ACT 6 OAE‐ECE‐EA OAE‐1 IOT‐324T
EAE 6 IOT‐EAE IOT‐EAE‐1A IOT‐324T
EAE 6 ICB‐EAE ICB‐EAE‐1A IOT‐324T
ECE 7 PCE PCE‐5 ECE‐429T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. Describe what IoT is and how it works today
2. Recognise the factors that contributed to the emergence of IoT
3. Design and program IoT devices
4. Define the infrastructure for supporting IoT deployments
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Demonstrate basic concepts, principles and challenges in IoT.
CO 2 Illustrate functioning of hardware devices and sensors used for IoT
CO 3 Analyze network communication aspects and protocols used in IoT
CO 4 Apply IoT for developing real life applications using Ardunio programming.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 ‐ 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ 1 ‐ ‐ 2 ‐ 3 ‐
CO 2 1 ‐ 2 ‐ 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 1 ‐ 2
CO 3 ‐ 2 2 ‐ ‐ 1 ‐ ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ 2
CO 4 2 1 ‐ ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ 1 1 ‐

UNIT‐I

Internet of Things (IoT): Vision, Definition, Conceptual Framework, Architectural view, technology behind IoT,
Sources of the IoT, M2M Communication, IoT Examples. Design Principles for Connected Devices: IoT/M2M
systems layers and design standardization, communication technologies, data enrichment and consolidation,
ease of designing and affordability

UNIT‐II

Hardware for IoT: Sensors, Digital sensors, actuators, radio frequency identification (RFID) technology, wireless

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1005
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

sensor networks, participatory sensing technology. Embedded Platforms for IoT: Embedded computing basics,
Overview of IOT supported Hardware platforms such as Arduino, NetArduino, Raspberry pi, Beagle Bone, Intel
Galileo boards and ARM cortex.

UNIT‐III

Network & Communication aspects in IoT: Wireless Medium access issues, MAC protocol survey, Survey
routing protocols, Sensor deployment & Node discovery, Data aggregation & dissemination

UNIT ‐ IV

Programming the Ardunio: Ardunio Platform Boards Anatomy, Ardunio IDE, coding, using emulator, using
libraries, additions in ardunio, programming the ardunio for IoT.

Textbook(s):
1. Olivier Hersent, David Boswarthick, Omar Elloumi, “The Internet of Things key applications and protocols”,
Willey
2. Jeeva Jose, Internet of Things, Khanna Publishing House

References:
1. Michael Miller, “The Internet of Things”, Pearson
2. Raj Kamal, “Internet of Things”, McGraw‐Hill, 1st Edition

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1006
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Introduction to Internet of Things Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CSE/IT/CST/ITE 6 PCE PCE‐2 CIE‐330P
ICE 6 PCE PCE‐3 ICE‐328P
CSE‐IoT/CSE‐ICB 6 PC PC IOT‐324P
EE‐VDT/EC‐ACT 6 OAE‐ECE‐EA OAE‐1 IOT‐324P
EAE 6 IOT‐EAE IOT‐EAE‐1A IOT‐324P
EAE 6 ICB‐EAE ICB‐EAE‐1A IOT‐324P
ECE 7 PCE PCE‐5 ECE‐429P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Introduction to Internet of Things) as
this is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Start Raspberry Pi and try various Linix commands in command terminal window: ls, cd, touch, mv, rm,
man, mkdir, rmdir, tar, gzip, cat, more, less, ps, sudo, cron, chown, chgrp, ping etc
2. Run some python programs on Pi like: a) Read your name and print Hello message with name b) Read two
numbers and print their sum, difference, product and division. c) Word and character count of a given
string. d) Area of a given shape (rectangle, triangle and circle) reading shape and appropriate values from
standard input.
3. Run some python programs on Pi like: a) Print a name 'n' times, where name and n are read from standard
input, using for and while loops. b) Handle Divided by Zero Exception. c) Print current time for 10 times
with an interval of 10 seconds. d) Read a file line by line and print the word count of each line.
4. Light an LED through Python program
5. Get input from two switches and switch on corresponding LEDs.
6. Flash an LED at a given on time and off time cycle, where the two times are taken from a file.
7. Flash an LED based on cron output (acts as an alarm)
8. Switch on a relay at a given time using cron, where the relay's contact terminals are connected to a load.
9. Get the status of a bulb at a remote place (on the LAN) through web.
10. Push sensor data to cloud and Control an actuator through cloud.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1007
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Introduction to Metrology and Instrumentation L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

MAE 7 PC PC MAC‐407

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. Design of part, tolerances and fits.
2. Principles of measuring instruments and gauges and their uses.
3. Determine error and analysing uncertainty in the measurements.
4. Evaluation and inspection of surface roughness and textures.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Explain the basic knowledge of measurements, metrology, and measuring devices.
CO 2 Understand the fundamentals and the working of comparators.
CO 3 Understand the fundamentals of various methods for the measurements of screw threads and the
working of optical measuring instruments.
CO 4 Understand various advanced measuring devices and machine tool metrology and describe application
of principle of metrology and measurements in industries.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 2 3 3 3 2 2 ‐ 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 2 2 3 2 3 2 3 ‐ 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 3 2 3 2 2 2 3 ‐ 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 4 3 3 3 2 2 3 ‐ 3 ‐‐ ‐ ‐ 2

UNIT‐I

Principles of Measurement: Definition of Metrology, the difference between precision and accuracy. Sources
of errors: Controllable and Random Errors, Effects of Environment and Temperature, Effects of support,
alignment errors, application of Least Square principles, and errors in measurement of quality which is the
function of other variables.
Length Standards: Line standards, end standards, and wavelength standards, transfer from line standards to
end standards. Numerical based on line standards. Slip gauges – its use and care, methods of building different
heights using different sets of slip gauges.
Limits, Fits, and Tolerances: Various definitions, IS919‐1963, different types of fits, and methods to provide
these fits. Numerical to calculate the limits, fits, and tolerances as per IS 919‐ 1963. ISO system of limits and
fits; Gauges and their types, limit gauges – plug and ring gauges. Gauge Design – Taylor’s Principle, wear
allowance on gauges. Different methods of giving tolerances on gauges, Numerical.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1008
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT‐II

Comparators: Mechanical Comparators: JohansonMikrokator and Sigma Mechanical Comparator. Mechanical‐

optical comparator. Principles of Electrical and electronic comparators. Pneumatic comparators – advantages,
systems of Pneumatic Gauging:‐ Flow type and back pressure type, Principle of working of back pressure
gauges, different types of sensitivities and overall magnification, Solex Pneumatic gauges and differential
comparators. Numerical based on pneumatic comparators.

UNIT‐III

Straightness and Flatness: Definition of Straightness and Flatness error. Numerical based on the determination
of straightness error of straight edge with the help of spirit level and auto collimator. Numerical based on the
determination of flatness error of a surface plate with the help of spirit level or auto‐collimator.
Screw Thread Measurement: Errors in threads, Measurement of elements of screw threads – major dia, minor
dia, pitch, flank angle, and effective diameter (Two and three‐wire methods). Effect of errors in pitch and flank
angles and its mathematical derivation. Numericals.

UNIT – IV

Instrument Calibration Methods: Introduction, Definition of Calibration, Need for Calibration, Characteristics of
Calibration, Calibration Overall Requirements and Procedures, Calibration Methods/Procedures, Calibration
Laboratory Requirements, Industry Practices and Regulations, Calibration and Limitations of a Digital System,
Verification and Calibration of CNC Machine Tool, Inspection of the Positioning Accuracy of CNC Machine Tools,
CNC Machine Error Assessment and Calibration, Calibration of 3‐axis CNC Machine Tool, Calibration of a
Coordinate Measuring Machine (CMM)
Surface Texture: Introduction, different types of irregularities, standard measures for assessment and
measurement of surface finish.

Textbook(s):
1. R.K. Jain, “Engineering Metrology”, Khanna Publishers, Delhi.
2. I.C. Gupta, “Engineering Metrology”, Dhanpat Rai Publications, Delhi.

References:
1. F.W. Galyer& C.R. Shotbolt, “Metrology for Engineers”, ELBS edition.
2. Samir Mekid, “Metrology and Instrumentation ‐ Practical Applications for Engineering and Manufacturing”,
John Wiley & Sons, Inc. and ASME Press, 2022.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1009
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Introduction to Metrology and Instrumentation Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

MAE 7 PC PC MAC‐459

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Introduction to Metrology and
Instrumentation) as this is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Study of Slip Gauges along with their usage i.e. wringing of Slip Gauges
2. Study and working of simple measuring instruments: Vernier calipers and micrometer.
3. To study bore gauge diameter with bore gauge.
4. Measurement of angle using sine bar and slip gauges, Study of limit gauges.
5. Study and angular measurement of a given piece using bevel protractor. Study of dial indicator & its
constructional details.
6. Measurement of effective diameter of a screw thread using 3 wire method.
7. To measure major diameter, minor diameter and pitch of screw thread using Profile Projector.
8. To measure major diameter, minor diameter and pitch of screw thread using Tool Maker’s microscope.
9. To measure the surface roughness using MAHR Pocket Surf instrument.
10. To find the flatness error in surface plate.
11. Study of various equipment(s) viz. Laser Distance measuring device, micro weighing device, sound level
meter, etc.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1010
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Introduction to Mobile Ad Hoc Networks L P C

4 4

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

IT 7 PCE PCE‐5 CIE‐427

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. Build an understanding of the fundamental concepts of Mobile Ad hoc Networks.
2. To Understand the advanced concepts and various Ad Hoc Routing Protocols.
3. To Understand the issues in designing Ad hoc Networks and its solutions.
4. To create the awareness of QoS in Ad‐hoc Networks.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Understand the fundamental concepts of Mobile Ad hoc Networks.
CO 2 Understand the advanced concepts and various Ad Hoc Routing Protocols.
CO 3 Analyse the issues in designing Ad hoc Networks and build its solutions.
CO 4 Create the awareness of QoS in Ad‐hoc Networks.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 2 3 2 2 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 2 3 3
CO 2 2 3 2 3 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 3 2 3
CO 3 2 2 2 3 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 3 3 3
CO 4 2 3 2 3 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 3 3 3

UNIT‐I

Introduction to ad‐hoc networks – definition, characteristics features, applications. Characteristics of wireless

channel, ad‐hoc mobility models: indoor and outdoor models.

UNIT‐II

Overview of Ad Hoc Routing Protocols: Table‐Driven Approaches, Destination Sequenced Distance Vector
(DSDV), Wireless Routing Protocol (WRP), Cluster Switch Gateway Routing (CSGR), Source‐Initiated On –
Demand Approaches. Ad Hoc On‐Demand Distance Vector Routing (AODV), Dynamic Source Routing (DSR),
Temporally Ordered Routing Algorithm (TORA), Signal Stability Routing (SSR), Location‐Aided Routing (LAR) ,
Power – Aware Routing (PAR), Zone Routing Protocol (ZRP), Source Tree Adaptive Routing (STAR) , Relative
Distance Micro diversity Routing (RDMAR) , Multicast Routing in Mobile Ad Hoc Networks, Existing Ad Hoc
Multicast Routing Protocols, ABAM : Associativity‐Based Ad Hoc Multicast.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1011
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT‐III

Issues in designing – Transport layer classification, adhoc transport protocols. Security issues in adhoc
networks: issues and challenges, network security attacks, secure routing protocols. Classification of transport
layer solutions, TCP over Adhoc wireless networks (TCP‐F, TCP‐BUS, ATCP, SPLIT‐TCP)

UNIT – IV

Quality of service in Mobile Adhoc Networks: Introduction, Issues and Challenges in providing QoS in Ad hoc
networks, Classification of QoS solutions, MAC layer solutions (Cluster TDMA), network layer solutions (Ticket
based, TDR, QoS enables AoDV, OQR)

Textbook(s):
1. C. Siva Ram Murthy & B.S. Manoj, Adhoc Wireless Networks Architectures and Protocols, ISBN: 978‐81‐
317‐0688‐6, 2014

References:
1. Stefano Basagni, Marco Conti, Silivia Giordano and Ivan Stojmenoic, Mobile Adhoc Networkin, ISBN: 978‐0‐
471‐65688‐3, 2010.
2. C.K.Toh: Adhoc Mobile Wireless Networks‐ Protocols and Systems, Prentice‐Hall, 2007

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1012
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Introduction to Power Electronics L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ECE 6 PCE PCE‐3 ECE‐354T
OAE 7 EE‐OAE EE‐OAE‐5 OEE‐431T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To learn the operation characteristics and firing circuits of power electrons devices.
2. To acquire knowledge of controlled rectifier and choppers control DC Motors
3. To get the exposure of square wave, Quashi square wavePWM and multilevel inverters there use to
control AC drives
4. apply AC controllers cycloconverter and matrix converter to control induction motors
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Understand the operation characteristics and firing circuits of power electronic devices
CO 2 Gain the knowledge of controlled rectifier, choppers and their use to control DC Motors
CO 3 Analyse and design square wave, quashi wave, and multilevel inverters to control AC drive
CO 4 Design AC converter,AC controller,cyclo converter and matrix converter to control induction motor
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 2 3 3 2 3 3 1 1 1 2 3
CO 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 2 3
CO 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 2 3
CO 4 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 2 3

UNIT‐ I

Introduction: Characteristics and switching behaviour of Power Diode, SCR, UJT, TRIAC, DIAC, GTO, MOSFET,
IGBT, MCT and power BJT, two‐transistor analogy of SCR, firing circuits of SCR and TRIAC, SCR gate
characteristics, SCR ratings. Protection of SCR against over current, over voltage, high dV/dt, high dI/dt, thermal
protection, Snubber circuits, Methods of commutation, series and parallel operation of SCR, Driver circuits for
BJT/MOSFET.

UNIT‐ II

A.C. to D.C. Converter: Classification of rectifiers, single and three phase controlled rectifiers, fully controlled
and half controlled rectifiers and their performance parameters, single‐phase and three phase dual converter.
D.C. to D.C. Converter: Classification of choppers as type A, B, C, D and E, principle of operation, switching
mode regulators: Buck, Boost, Buck‐Boost, Cuk regulators.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1013
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

DC Motor Drives: DC motor speed control, controlled rectifier fed dc drives, chopper controlled dc drives.

UNIT‐ III

D.C. to A.C. Converter: single phase single pulse inverter: Square wave, quasi square. Three phase single pulse
inverters (120̊ and 180 ̊ conduction) Modulation Techniques and reduction of harmonics, PWM techniques,
SPWM techniques, SVM, Carrier less modulation. , PWM Inverter, Bidirectional PWM converters, voltage
source inverters and current source inverter, Multi level Inverter: cascaded and NPC Inverters. Introduction of
AC drives

UNIT‐IV

A.C. to A.C. Converter: AC voltage Controllers, Cyclo‐converters : single phase to single phase, three phase to
single phase, three phase to three phase Cyclo‐converter circuit and their operation, Matrix converter.
Induction Motor Drives: Three phase induction motor starting, braking, , speed control from stator and rotor
sides, stator voltage control, variable frequency control from voltage sources and current sources

Textbooks:
1. M.H. Rashid, “Power Electronics: Circuits, Devices and Applications” Pearson Publications.
2. Daniel W. Hart, “Power Electronics “Tata McGraw‐Hill
3. H.C. Rai, “Power Electronics Devices, Circuits, Systems and Application”, Galgotia Publications, 3rd Edition

References:
1. Singh, Kanchandani, “Power Electronics”, Tata McGraw‐Hill.
2. Ned Mohan, Tore M. Undeland and Robbins, “Power Electronics: Converters, Applications and Design”
Wiley India Publication
3. V R Moorthi, “Power Electronics: Devices, Circuits and Industrial Applications”, Oxford Publication.
4. Kassakian, Schlecht, Verghese, “Principles of Power Electronics” , Pearson Publications
5. M.S. Jamil Asghar, “Power Electronics” PHI Publication
6. P. S. Bimbhra “Power Electronics”, Khanna Publishing.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1014
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Introduction to Power Electronics Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ECE 6 PCE PCE‐3 ECE‐354P
OAE 7 EE‐OAE EE‐OAE‐5 OEE‐431P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Introduction to Power Electronics) as
this is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. To study and analyze V‐I characteristics of SCR and TRIAC.

2. To study the switching characteristics of MOSFET and IGBT
3. To study R and RC and UJT based firing circuits using SCR.
4. To study single phase Semi‐converter and Full converters feeding R and RL load
5. To study A.C phase control using SCR (half and full wave) using DIAC and TRIAC for dimmer application.
6. To study single‐phase cyclo‐ converter feeding R and RL loads.
7. To study the operation and duty cycle control of buck and boost converter feeding R loads.
8. To study the operation and duty cycle control of Type‐C chopper.
9. To study the THD in operation of single phase Square wave and Quasi square wave Inverter.
10. To study the operation of SPWM Inverter.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1015
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Introduction to Robotics Engineering L P C

4 4

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ECE 7 PCE PCE‐5 ECE‐433

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To develop the knowledge in various robot structures and their workspace.
2. To develop the skills in performing kinematics analysis of robot systems.
3. To provide the knowledge of the dynamics associated with the operation of robotic systems.
4. To understand material handling and robot applications in industries.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 To understand characteristic features of robots and usage of different grippers for industrial
Applications.
CO 2 To understand direct and inverse kinematics of robot structure.
CO 3 To Illustrate Differential Kinematics of planar and spherical manipulators.
CO 4 To understand classification of robot actuators, robot control and trajectory planning.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 3 2 3 3 2 1 ‐ 2 2 2
CO 2 3 2 3 3 3 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 2 2
CO 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 2 3
CO 4 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 3 3 3

UNIT I

Introduction: Automation and robotic, an over view of robotics, classification by coordinate system and control
systems; Components of the industrial robotics: Degrees of freedom, end effectors: Mechanical gripper,
magnetic, vacuum cup and other types of grippers, general consideration on Gripper selection and design.

UNIT II

Motion analysis: Basic rotation matrices, composite rotation matrices, Euler angles, equivalent angle and axis,
homogeneous transformation, problems; Manipulator kinematics: D‐H notations, joint coordinates and world,
coordinates, forward and inverse kinematics, problems.

UNIT III

Trajectory planning: Joint space scheme, cubic polynomial fit, avoidance of obstacles, types of motion: Slew
motion, joint interpolated motion, straight line motion, problems, Robot actuators and feedback components;

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1016
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Actuators: pneumatic and hydraulic actuators, Control: joint motion control, feedback control, Computed
torque control, Perception, Localisation and mapping.

UNIT IV

Probabilistic robotics, Path planning, BFS; DFS; Dijkstra; A‐star; D‐star; Voronoi; Potential Field; Hybrid
approaches, Introduction to Reinforcement Learning, Electric actuators: DC servo motors, stepper motors,
feedback components: position sensors, potentiometers, resolvers and encoders, velocity sensors, tactile
sensor; Robot application in manufacturing: Material handling, assembly and inspection.

Textbook(s):
1. Groover M. P, “Industrial Robotics”, TataMcGraw‐Hill, 1st Edition, 2013.
2. J.J Criag, “Introduction to Robotic Mechanics and Control”, Pearson, 3rd Edition, 2013.
3. Robert J Schilling, Fundamentals of Robotics, Prentice Hall India.

References:
1. John J Craig, Introduction to Robotics, Prentice Hall International, 2005.
2. Peter Corke, Robotics, Vision and Control, Springer Cham, 2017.
3. Bruno Siciliano, Oussama Khatib, Springer Handbook of Robotics, Springer Berlin, Heidelberg, 2008.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1017
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Introduction to Sensors and Transducers L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CSE‐IoT/CSE‐ICB 6 PC PC IOT‐326T
EE‐VDT/EC‐ACT 6 OAE‐ECE‐EA OAE‐1 IOT‐326T
EAE 6 IOT‐EAE IOT‐EAE‐1B IOT‐326T
EAE 6 ICB‐EAE ICB‐EAE‐1B IOT‐326T
EAE 6 RA‐EAE RA‐EAE‐2 IOT‐326T
EAE 6 CI‐EAE CI‐EAE‐2 IOT‐326T
OAE 6 ICE‐OAE ICE‐OAE‐1 OICE‐320T
EAE 7 ES‐EAE ES‐EAE‐5B IOT‐409T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To provide an understanding about the concepts of measurement system its static and dynamic
characteristics
2. To expose the students to various sensors and transducers for measuring mechanical quantities and
their applications.
3. To teach the basic conditioning circuits for various sensors and transducers.
4. To introduce about advancements in sensor technology and smart sensors
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Ability to define, understand various Sensors, their need and properties of sensors
CO 2 Ability to apply knowledge of various types of transducers in domestic and industrial applications
CO 3 Ability to analyse various types of sensors for particular application
CO 4 Ability to design signal conditioning circuit for various sensors and transducers
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 ‐ 3
CO 2 3 3 2 2 ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ 2 2 ‐ 3
CO 3 3 3 3 3 ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ 2 3 2 3
CO 4 3 3 3 3 ‐ 2 ‐ 2 2 3 2 3

UNIT I

Introduction to sensors and Transducers: General concepts and terminology of measurement systems and its
functional elements, transducer classification, static and dynamic characteristics of a measurement system,
criteria for transducer selection; Resistive Transducers: Principles of operation, construction, theory, signal
conditioning circuits and applications of resistance potentiometers, strain gauges (metallic and semi‐conductor

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1018
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

type), resistance thermometer, thermistors, photo transistors

UNIT II

Displacement Sensors and Transducers: Capacitive Transducers: Types of capacitive transducer, Principles of
operation, construction, theory, signal conditioning circuits and applications of capacitive transducers
Inductive Transducers: Types of Inductive transducer, Principles of operation, construction, signal conditioning
circuits and applications of various variable inductive transducers, LVDT, RVDT, Eddy current sensors, Synchros

UNIT III

Temperature and Radiation Sensors: Active Transducers: Principle of operation, construction, theory, signal
conditioning and applications of Piezo‐electric transducer, Magneto‐strictive transducer, Hall effect
transducer, Photo‐voltaic transducer and Thermocouple; Optical transducers: photo‐emissive, photo‐
conductive and Photovoltaic cells, photomultipliers; Digital Transducers: Optical encoders translational and
rotary encoders (absolute position and incremental position encoders) and magnetic pickups

UNIT IV

Smart Sensors: Other transducers: Ultrasonic sensors, Vibration pickups and accelerometers and its dynamic
response, stroboscope, sound and humidity sensors, Microelectromechanical system (MEMS), Biosensors:
Glucometer, Oxymeter, Nanosensors and its application, Smart sensor system

Textbooks:
1. D. Patranabis, Sensors and Transducers, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd., 2nd edition
2. D V S Murty, Transducers and Instrumentation, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd.

References:
1. E.O. Doebelin, Dhanesh N Manik, Measurement Systems, 6th Edition, McGraw Hill
2. John P. Bentely, Principles of Measurement System, 4th Edition, Pearson Prentice Hall

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1019
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Introduction to Sensors and Transducers Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CSE‐IoT/CSE‐ICB 6 PC PC IOT‐326P
EE‐VDT/EC‐ACT 6 OAE‐ECE‐EA OAE‐1 IOT‐326P
EAE 6 IOT‐EAE IOT‐EAE‐1B IOT‐326P
EAE 6 ICB‐EAE ICB‐EAE‐1B IOT‐326P
EAE 6 RA‐EAE RA‐EAE‐2 IOT‐326P
EAE 6 CI‐EAE CI‐EAE‐2 IOT‐326P
OAE 6 ICE‐OAE ICE‐OAE‐1 OICE‐320P
EAE 7 ES‐EAE ES‐EAE‐5B IOT‐409P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Introduction to Sensors and
Transducers) as this is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Study of static and dynamic characteristics of sensors.

2. Measurement of displacement using LVDT
3. Measurement of strain using strain gauge transducer.
4. Measurement of displacement using potentiometer.
5. Measurement of temperature using RTD and plot the characteristics of RTD.
6. Measurement of temperature using thermister.
7. Measurement of pressure using Load cell.
8. Measurement of speed using magnetic sensor.
9. Measurement of speed using photoelectric sensors.
10. Measurement of pressure using pressure transducer
11. Measurement of liquid level using capacitive sensor.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1020
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Introduction to Software Engineering L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

OAE 7 CSE‐OAE CSE‐OAE‐5B OCSE‐413T
OAE 7 SD‐OAE SD‐OAE‐4B OSD‐451T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To introduce the basic concepts of the software development processes, Software requirements and
specifications
2. To impart knowledge of Software Project Planning and various Software design techniques
3. To understand Software Metrics, Software Reliability, and Reliability Models
4. To impart the knowledge and use of software engineering processes and tools in analysis, design,
implementation, software testing, documentation, and maintenance for software systems.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Ability to have an understanding of SDLC Models, Techniques for Requirement Elicitation, and SRS
Document.
CO 2 To be able to explain Software Project Planning and various methods for software design
CO 3 To Understand Software Metrics, Software Reliability, and Quality assurance
CO 4 Ability to have an understanding of Software testing, documentation and maintenance.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 2 2 2 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 2 2 3
CO 2 3 2 2 2 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 2 2 3
CO 3 3 2 2 2 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 2 2 3
CO 4 3 2 2 2 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 2 2 3

UNIT‐I

Introduction: Introduction to Software Engineering, Importance of software engineering as a discipline,

Software applications, Software Crisis, Software Processes & Characteristics, Software life cycle models,
Waterfall, Prototype, Evolutionary and Spiral Models.
Software Requirements analysis & specifications: Requirement engineering, requirement elicitation
techniques like FAST, QFD & Use case approach, requirements analysis using DFD, Data dictionaries & ER
Diagrams, Requirements documentation, Nature of SRS, Characteristics & organization of SRS, Requirement
Management, IEEE Std. for SRS.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1021
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT‐II

Software Project Planning: Size Estimation like lines of Code & Function Count, Cost Estimation Models,
COCOMO, Putnam resource allocation model, Risk Management.
Software Design: Cohesion & Coupling, Classification of Cohesiveness & Coupling, Function Oriented Design,
Object Oriented Design.

UNIT‐III

Software Metrics: Software measurements: What & Why, Token Count, Halstead Software Science Measures,
Data Structure Metrics, Information Flow Metrics.
Software Reliability: Importance, Hardware Reliability & Software Reliability, Failure and Faults, Software
Quality Models, CMM & ISO 9001.

UNIT – IV

Software Testing: Testing process, Design of test cases, Introduction to functional testing & Structural testing,
Unit Testing, Integration and System Testing, Debugging, Alpha & Beta Testing.
Software Maintenance: Management of Maintenance, Maintenance Process, Maintenance Models, Regression
Testing, Reverse Engineering, Software Re‐engineering, Configuration Management, Documentation.

Textbook(s):
1. K. K. Aggarwal and Yogesh Singh, “Software Engineering”, New Age International, 3rd Ed., 2005.
2. R. S. Pressman, “Software Engineering – A Practitioner's Approach”, McGraw Hill Int., 5th Ed., 2001.
3. Pankaj Jalote, “An Integrated Approach to Software Engineering”, Narosa, 3rd Ed., 2005.

References:
1. Stephen R. Schach, “Classical & Object Oriented Software Engineering”, IRWIN, 1996.
2. James Peter, W. Pedrycz, “Software Engineering: An Engineering Approach”, John Wiley & Sons.
3. I. Sommerville, “Software Engineering”, Addison Wesley,8th Ed., 2009.
4. Frank Tsui and Orlando Karan, “Essentials of Software Engineering”, Joes and Bartlett, 2nd Ed., 2010.
5. Kassem A. Saleh, “Software Engineering”, Cengage Learning, 2009.
6. Rajib Mall, “Fundamrntal of Software Engineering”, PHI, 3rd Ed., 2009.
7. Carlo Ghizzi, Mehdi Jazayeri and Dino Mandrioli, “Fundamental of Software Engineering”, PHI, 2nd Ed., 2003.
8. Carol L. Hoover, Mel Rosso‐Llopart and Gil Taran, “Evaluating Project Decision Case Studies in Software
Engineering”, Pearson, 2010.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1022
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Introduction to Software Engineering Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

OAE 7 CSE‐OAE CSE‐OAE‐5B OCSE‐413P
OAE 7 SD‐OAE SD‐OAE‐4B OSD‐451P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Introduction to Software Engineering)
as this is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Write down the problem statement for a suggested system of relevance.

2. Do requirement analysis and develop Software Requirement Specification Sheet (SRS) for suggested
system.
3. To perform the function oriented diagram: Data Flow Diagram (DFD).
4. Draw the entity relationship diagram for the suggested system.
5. To perform the user’s view analysis for the suggested system: Use case diagram.
6. To draw the structural view diagram for the system: Class diagram, object diagram.
7. To draw the behavioral view diagram: State‐chart diagram, Activity diagram
8. To perform the behavioral view diagram for the suggested system: Sequence diagram, Collaboration
diagram
9. To perform the implementation view diagram: Component diagram for the system.
10. To perform the environmental view diagram: Deployment diagram for the system.
11. To perform various testing using the testing tool unit testing, integration testing for a sample code of the
suggested system.
12. Perform Estimation of effort using FP Estimation for chosen system.
13. To prepare time line chart/Gantt Chart/PERT Chart for selected software project.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1023
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Introduction to Transmission Lines, Waveguides and Antenna L P C

Design 3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EE/EEE 6 PCE PCE‐2 EEE‐336T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To familiarise the various types of transmission lines and to deliberate the losses associated.
2. To communicate information about waveguide concepts
3. To impart the understanding of characteristics of different types of high frequency resonators.
4. To impart the knowledge to define different terminologies of antenna parameters.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 To Understand the primary model of wave propagation in Transmission Lines and Analyze the various
line parameters and Apply smith chart for line parameter and impedance calculations.
CO 2 Discuss the fundamental concepts of wave propagation in rectangular and circular waveguides and
evaluate their characteristics.
CO 3 Understand the characteristics of resonance frequency of different types of resonator and its modes
configuration.
CO 4 To describe the basic parameters of antenna and interpret to solve the radiation components
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 ‐ 2 1 ‐ 2
CO 2 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 ‐ 2 1 ‐ 2
CO 3 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 ‐ 2 1 ‐ 2
CO 4 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 ‐ 2 1 ‐ 2

UNIT I

Microwave Transmission Lines: Transmission‐Line Equations, Solutions of Transmission‐Line Equations. Reflection

Coefficient, Transmission Coefficient. Standing Wave, Standing‐Wave Ratio, Line Impedance, Line Admittance, Open and
short circuited lines. Smith Chart Impedance Matching: Single‐Stub Matching, Double‐Stub Matching. Losses in transmission
lines. Lines of different lengths – λ/2, λ/4, λ/8 lines; Introduction to Microstrip transmission line.

UNIT II

Introduction Rectangular Waveguides: Solutions of Wave Equations in Rectangular Coordinates, TE Modes in Rectangular
Waveguides, TM Modes in Rectangular Waveguides, Power Transmission in Rectangular Waveguides, Losses in Rectangular
Waveguides, Excitations of Modes in Rectangular Waveguides.
Circular Waveguides: Solutions of Wave Equations in Cylindrical Coordinates, TE Modes in Circular Waveguides, TM Modes
in Circular Waveguides, Excitations of Modes in Circular Waveguides.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1024
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT III

Microwave Resonators: Series and Parallel Resonant Circuits: Series Resonant Circuit, Parallel Resonant Circuit, Loaded and
Unloaded Q.; Transmission Line Resonators: Short‐Circuited λ/2 line, Open‐Circuited λ/2, Short‐Circuited λ/4Line;
Rectangular Waveguide Cavities: Resonant Frequencies, Q of the TE10l Mode; Circular Waveguide Cavities: Resonant
Frequencies, Q of the TEnmlMode. Dielectric Resonators: Resonant Frequencies, Q of the TE01δMode. Excitation of
Resonators: Critical Coupling, A Gap‐Coupled Microstrip Resonator.

UNIT IV

Antennas: Introduction, Types of Antennas, Radiation Mechanism, Introduction monopole and dipole antenna.
Fundamental Parameters: Introduction, Radiation Pattern, Radiation Power Density, Radiation Intensity, Beamwidth,
Directivity, Antenna Efficiency, Gain, Realized Gain, Beam Efficiency, Antenna Radiation Efficiency, Friis Transmission
Equation and Radar Range Equation

Textbook(s):
1. M. N. O. Sadiku , “Elements of Electromagnetics”, Oxford University Press 2007
2. S.Y Liao, “Microwave devices and Circuits” Pearson publications
3. D.M Pozar, “Microwave Engineering”, Wiley Publications.
4. Antenna for all Application‐John D Kraus, third edition‐TMH publication
5. Antenna Theory‐Constantine A. Balanis ‐Third edition‐Wiley Publication

References:
1. E. C. Jordon, K. G. Balman, “Electromagnetic Waves & Radiation System” Prentice Hall, India
2. Antennas and Wave Propagation–G. S. N. Raju (Pearson)
3. Foundations of Antenna Theory and Techniques – Vincent F. Fusco(Pearson)

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1025
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Introduction to Transmission Lines, Waveguides and Antenna L P C

Design Lab 2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EE/EEE 6 PCE PCE‐2 EEE‐336P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Introduction to Transmission Lines,
Waveguides and Antenna Design) as this is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. To study the microwave test bench.

2. To measure the frequency and wavelength using a slotted line section and frequency meter.
3. To measure VSWR and reflection coefficient of different loads.
4. To measure an unknown impedance using a microwave test bench.
5. To plot the radiation pattern of a horn antenna using a microwave test bench.
6. To measure unknown impedance using Smith Chart.
7. To design and simulate a rectangular microstrip patch antenna.
8. To design and simulate a circular patch antenna.
9. 9 .To design and simulate a rectangular microstrip patch antenna array.
10. To design and simulate a circular microstrip patch antenna array.
11. To design and simulate a coaxial cable/microstrip line.

Note: These experiments may be performed using simulation software like HFSS, CST and IE3D.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1026
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

IoT with Arduino, ESP and Raspberry Pi L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CSE‐IoT/CSE‐ICB 7 PC PC IOT‐441T
EE‐VDT/EC‐ACT 7 OAE‐ECE‐EA OAE‐2 IOT‐441T
EAE 7 IOT‐EAE IOT‐EAE‐3 IOT‐441T
EAE 7 ICB‐EAE ICB‐EAE‐4 IOT‐441T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. Overview of IoT
2. To get Familiar with the Concept of Arduino
3. Overview of ESP Module
4. To get Familiar with the working of Raspberry Pi
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Demonstrate basic concepts, principles and challenges in IoT.
CO 2 Illustrate functioning of Arduino used for IoT
CO 3 Analyze the working and communication setup of ESP for IoT
CO 4 Applying the IoT networking using Raspberry Pi
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 1 1 2 1 2 3 ‐ ‐ 3 3 2 1
CO 2 2 1 1 2 ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ 2 2 2 ‐
CO 3 2 1 2 ‐ 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 2 1 2
CO 4 3 2 ‐ 2 3 1 ‐ ‐ 1 3 2 1

UNIT‐I

Evolution of Internet of Things, Enabling Technologies, M2M Communication, IoT World Forum (IoTWF)
standardized architecture, Simplified IoT Architecture, Core IoT Functional Stack, Fog, Edge and Cloud in IoT,
Functional blocks of an IoT ecosystem, Sensors, Actuators, Smart Objects and Connecting Smart Objects.

UNIT‐II

Arduino Simulation Environment , Arduino Uno Architecture, Setup the IDE, Writing Arduino Software ,
Arduino Libraries , Basics of Embedded C programming for Arduino, Interfacing LED, push button and buzzer
with Arduino, Interfacing Arduino with LCD, Interfacing of Actuators with Arduino, Interfacing of Relay Switch
and Servo Motor with Arduino.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1027
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT‐III

Basics of Wireless Networking, Introduction to ESP8266 Wi‐Fi Module, Various Wi‐Fi library, Web server‐
introduction, installation, configuration , Posting sensor(s) data to web server, M2M vs. IOT , Communication
Protocols

UNIT ‐ IV

Introduction to Raspberry Pi, Comparison of various Rpi Models, Understanding SoC architecture and SoCs used
in Raspberry Pi, Pin Description of Raspberry Pi, On‐board components of Rpi, Projects using Raspberry Pi .

Textbook(s):
1. Olivier Hersent,David Boswarthick, Omar Elloumi, “The Internet of Things key applications and protocols”,
Willey
2. Jeeva Jose, Internet of Things, Khanna Publishing House

References:
1. Michael Miller “The Internet of Things”, Pearson
2. Raj Kamal, “Internet of Things”, McGraw‐Hill, 1st Edition

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1028
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

IoT with Arduino, ESP and Raspberry Pi Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CSE‐IoT/CSE‐ICB 7 PC PC IOT‐441P
EE‐VDT/EC‐ACT 7 OAE‐ECE‐EA OAE‐2 IOT‐441P
EAE 7 IOT‐EAE IOT‐EAE‐3 IOT‐441P
EAE 7 ICB‐EAE ICB‐EAE‐4 IOT‐441P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (IoT with Arduino, ESP and Raspberry
Pi) as this is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Write a program to sense the available network using Arduino.

2. Write a program to make LED blink using Arduino.
3. Write a program to detect vibration with a sensor using Arduino.
4. Write a program to connect with the available WiFi using Arduino.
5. Write a program to sense a finger when it is placed on Arduino board.
6. Write a program to get temperature notification using Arduino.
7. Write a program to vary light intensity of LED using Arduino
8. Write a program to install MySQL database in Raspberry Pi.
9. Write a program to work with basic MySQL queries by fetching data from database in Raspberry Pi.
10. Write a program to switch light ON and OFF using Raspberry Pi.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1029
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Irrigation Engineering and Design of Hydraulic Structures L P C

4 4

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CE 6 PCE PCE‐1 CEE‐308

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To understand the principles and requirements of irrigation scheme involving canals
2. To design the irrigation channel and develop a knowledge of irrigation water requirement and its
distribution.
3. To analyze water head works and design canal regulation structures.
4. To design hydraulic structures and analyze them under various loading conditions.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Define irrigation techniques and hydraulic structures.
CO 2 Explain water requirement, canal regulation structures, components of dam and river training
structures
CO 3 Develop expression for irrigation water requirement, forces exerted on gravity dam, and it’s stability
analysis.
CO 4 Design a hydraulic structures with due consideration to all safety factors.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 2 1 1 1 ‐ 1 1 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐
CO 2 2 2 1 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ 1 ‐ 1 ‐ ‐
CO 3 2 2 2 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐
CO 4 3 3 3 2 1 ‐ ‐ 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐

UNIT‐I

Major and medium irrigation schemes of India, Command area development, Types of Soils and their suitability
for irrigation, Root Zone soil water, Irrigation requirements, Irrigation water quality, Irrigation canal system,
Duty of water, Canal losses, Estimation of design discharge of a canal, canal outlets, Canal regulation, Water
logging, causes, effects and remedial measures.
Alluvial channels carrying clear water and Sediment‐Laden water, Evaporation and seepage losses in channels,
Cross section of irrigation channels, Berms, Freeboard and service road, Silting of channels.

UNIT‐II

Sheet pile cut‐off walls, Khosla’s theory and its applications, Correction for Floor Thickness, Correction for
Mutual Interference of sheet piles, Correction for the slope of the floor, Method for determination of exit

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1030
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

gradient, Uplift force on the floor of canal structure.

Canal regulation structures, Canal Fall, Types of canal fall, Cistern element, Vertical/ Horizontal/Inclined‐impact
Cisterns, No‐Impact Cisterns, Roughening measures for energy dissipation such as Friction Block, Ribbed
pitching and Provisions such as baffle wall/ deflector/dentated cill etc at the Downstream end of cistern system
Distributary Head Regulator and Cross Regulator and their Design criteria, Control of Sediment Entry into an
offtaking channel.

UNIT‐III

Cross Drainage Structure, their need and types, Design of Transitions for canal waterway using Hind’s Method,
Upiri Method and Vittal and Chiranjeevi’s method,
Canal Headworks, Selection of the site, Weir or Barrage, Undersluices, Divide Wall, Fish Ladder, Canal Head
Regulator, Sediment Excluders and Sediment Ejector.

UNIT ‐ IV

Types of dams, Factors and General Design Criteria for Embankment Dams, Freeboard, Suitability of
Foundation, Slope protection, Factors and General Design Criteria for Gravity Dams, Forces on gravity Dam,
Causes of failure of a gravity Dam, Stability Analysis of Gravity Dams, Galleries and outlets.
Introduction to Spillway, Types of spillways, energy dissipaters, Cavitation erosion on spillway surface
Classification/ behaviour of rivers, Cutoffs, Aggradation and Degradation, River Training and its objectives, River
training Methods such as Levees, Spurs, Guide Banks.

Textbook(s):
1. S.K.Garg‐ Irrigation Engineering and Hydraulic Structures, Khanna Publishers, Delhi
2. B.C. Punmia and Pande B.B. Lal‐ Irrigation and Water Power Engineering, Laxmi Publications (P) Ltd., Delhi.

References:
1. Ralph A.Wurbs, Wisley P.James‐ Water Resources Engineering, PHI, New Delhi.
2. R.K.Sharma and T.K.Sharma‐ Irrigation Engineering. S.Chand and Company Ltd., New Delhi.
3. Satya Narayana Murty Challa‐Water Resources Engineering: Principles and Practice, NewAge Intl.
4. Applied Hydrology ‐ Ven T Chow, David R Maidment, Larry W Mays, McGraw‐Hill, New Delhi.
5. Bharat Singh, Fundamentals of Irrigation Engineering, Nem Chand and Brothers, Roorkee.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1031
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

IT Project Management L P C
4 4

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CST 6 PCE PCE‐2 CIE‐340

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To learn detailed information and knowledge about successfully managing complex IT projects.
2. To learn self‐learn and upskill one‐self to apply advanced techniques and concepts in managing and
completing IT projects
3. To learn required maturity to manage the information security aspect of IT projects
4. To learn necessary confidence and experience to predict challenges and risks and address these to
prevent impact on project outcomes
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Explore the appropriate methods to initiate, plan, execute, control and close projects.
CO 2 Demonstrate the knowledge and understanding of concepts, theories, and principles of IT project
management.
CO 3 Demonstrate the knowledge of IT projects, risk management and application of techniques to manage
risks and deliver value.
CO 4 Analyse different project constraints and their impact on achieving IT project goals.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 2 2 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 2 2 3
CO 2 3 3 2 2 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 2 2 3
CO 3 3 3 2 2 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 2 2 3
CO 4 3 3 2 2 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 2 2 3

UNIT‐I

Introduction to Project Management: What Is a Project?, Program and Project Portfolio Management, The Role
of the Project Manager, The Project Management Profession, The Project Management and Information
Technology Context: A Systems View of Project Management, Understanding Organizations, Stakeholder
Management, Project Phases and the Project Life Cycle, The Context of Information Technology Projects,
Recent Trends Affecting Information Technology Project Management, The Project Management Process
Groups: A Case Study: Project Management Process Groups, Mapping the Process Groups to the Knowledge
Areas Developing an Information Technology Project, Management Methodology, Case Study.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1032
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT‐II

Project Integration Management: What Is Project Integration Management?, Strategic Planning and Project
Selection, Developing a Project Charter, Developing a Project Management Plan, Directing and Managing
Project Execution, Monitoring and Controlling Project Work, Performing Integrated Change Control, Closing
Projects or Phases, Using Software to Assist in Project Integration Management, Project Scope Management:
What Is Project Scope Management?, Collecting Requirements, Defining Scope, Creating the Work Breakdown
Structure, Verifying Scope, Controlling Scope, Using Software to Assist in Project Scope Management.

UNIT‐III

Project Time Management: The Importance of Project Schedules, Defining Activities, Sequencing Activities,
Estimating Activity Resources, Estimating Activity Durations, Developing the Schedule, Controlling the
Schedule, Using Software to Assist in Project Time Management, Project Cost Management: The Importance of
Project Cost Management, Basic Principles of Cost Management, Estimating Costs, Determining the Budge,
Controlling Costs, Using Project Management Software to Assist in Project Cost Management.

UNIT – IV

Project Quality Management: The Importance of Project Quality Management, Planning Quality, Performing
Quality Assurance, Performing Quality Control, Tools and Techniques for Quality Control, Modern Quality
Management, Improving Information Technology Project Quality, Using Software to Assist in Project Quality
Management, Project Human Resource Management: The Importance of Human Resource Management, What
Is Project Human Resource Management?, Keys to Managing People, Developing the Human Resource Plan,
Acquiring the Project Team, Developing the Project Team, Managing the Project Team, Using Software to Assist
in Human Resource Management,
The Importance of Project Communications Management, The Importance of Project Risk Management, The
Importance of Project Procurement.

Textbook(s):
1. Kathy Schwalbe, “Managing Information Technology Projects”, Sixth Edition, Course Technology, 2011.
2. Ramesh Behl, “Information Technology for Management”, Mc Graw Hill.

References:
1. Bob Hughes and Mike Cotterell, “Software Project Management”, Fourth Edition, Tata McGraw‐Hill.
2. Jack T Marchewka, “Information Technology Project Management”, 4Th Edition, John Wiley.
3. Marchewka J.T., Information Technology Project Management Providing Measurable Organizational Value
(Pb 2003), DB JWO.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1033
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Lean Construction Technology and Management L P C

4 4

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CE 7 PCE PCE‐5 CEE‐411
EAE 7 CTM‐EAE CTM‐EAE‐4 CEC‐415

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To Comprehend the principles and concepts in Lean Construction and Projects and apply them.
2. To Learn the techniques used for planning, scheduling and control of construction projects and cost
analysis.
3. To Learn the principles of Contract and tenders
4. To Learn about the Construction equipment and the entire project life cycle from planning to
execution through PRIMAVERA
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 To Apply the application of lean construction in real world through sustainable development
CO 2 To Apply the techniques used for planning, scheduling and control of construction projects and cost
analysis.
CO 3 To analyse the principles and concepts of Contract and Tenders.
CO 4 To evaluate the techniques for a real‐world project and demonstrate the learning.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 ‐ 1 ‐ 2 1 ‐ ‐ 1 3 2 1
CO 2 ‐ 3 1 1 1 ‐ 1 ‐ 2 ‐ 1 1
CO 3 2 ‐ 3 2 ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 ‐ 1
CO 4 2 ‐ ‐ 1 1 ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ 1 2 1

UNIT‐I

Lean Construction and safety, Lean Construction, and sustainable development, Lean and Green, Issues in lean
implementation in the construction industry, case studies.
Project Cycle, Organisation, Planning, Scheduling, Monitoring, updating and Management System in
Construction.

UNIT‐II

Network Techniques: Bar Chart, Milestone chart, work breakdown structure, and preparation of networks.
Network techniques like PERT and CPM.
Project Cost Control: Cost Planning, Direct Cost, Indirect Cost, Total Cost Curve, Cost Slope. Time Value of

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1034
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Money, Present Economy studies, Equivalence Concept, financing of projects, Economic comparisons present
worth method, Equivalent annual cost method, discounted cash flow method. Depreciation and break even
cost analysis of construction projects.

UNIT‐III

Contract Management:
Contracts: ‐Legal Aspects of Contracts, laws related to contracts, land acquisition, labour safety and welfare,
Different types of contracts,
Tenders: ‐ Elements of Tender Preparation, Process of tendering, pre qualifications of contracts, Evaluation of
tenders, contract negotiation and award of work, monitoring of contract, settlement of disputes, arbitration,
and commissioning of project.

UNIT – IV

Equipment Management: Earth moving, hauling equipment, hoisting equipment, Conveying Equipment,
Concrete Production equipment, Tunnelling equipment, Batching Plant and RMC equipment.
PRIMAVERA: Creating a Project, creating a Work Breakdown Structure, Adding Activities, Assigning Calendars,
Creating Relationships, Scheduling, Assigning Constraints, Creating Layouts, Understanding Roles and
Resources, Optimising the Project Plan.

Textbook(s):
1. Construction Project Management: planning and scheduling by Henry F.W. Naylor‐ Delmar Pub.
2. Project Planning and Control Using Primavera P6, Harris, P.E., Eastwood Harris Pty Ltd, 2010.

References:
1. Modern Construction‐Lean project delivery and integrated practices. Forbes, L., Ahmed, S, CRC Press,
2011.
2. Construction Equipment and Management, S. C. Sharma, Khanna Publishing, 2019, First Edition.
3. Danny Myers, Construction Economics: A New Approach, Taylor and Francis Publisher, 2016

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1035
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Linux System Administration L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ITE 6 PCE PCE‐3 CIE‐362T
CSE‐NET 6 PC PC NET‐346T
EAE 6 NET‐EAE NET‐EAE‐2 NET‐346T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. Familiarize students with the Linux environment, and able to run commands on a standard Linux
operating system.
2. Provide the skills needed to develop and customize Linux shell programs and to make effective use of a
wide range of standard Linux programming and development tools.
3. Design Able to write moderate C programs utilizing common system calls.
4. Design Able to write moderate C programs utilizing common system calls.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 nderstand the basic commands of Linux operating system and can write shell scripts
CO 2 eate file systems and directories and operate those using programs.
CO 3 eate file systems and directories and operate those using programs.
CO 4 entify and use Linux utilities to create and manage simple file processing operations
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 2 ‐ 3 3 2 ‐ ‐ 1 3 ‐ 3
CO 2 3 2 ‐ 3 3 2 ‐ ‐ 1 3 ‐ 3
CO 3 3 2 ‐ 3 3 2 ‐ ‐ 1 3 ‐ 3
CO 4 3 2 ‐ 3 3 2 ‐ ‐ 1 3 ‐ 3

UNIT‐I

Introduction to Linux, Linux Distributions, Operating system and Linux, History of Unix and Linux, Linux
Software’s, Internet Servers, Accessing Linux System, Linux documentation, Unix editor vi, Windows Access and
Applications, The Shell: History, Filename Expansion, Standard Input/Output and Redirection, Jobs:
Background, Kills, and Interruptions, Ending Processes, Types of Shell. The Shell Scripts and Programming: Shell
Variables, Shell Scripts: User‐Defined Commands, Environment Variables and Subshells, Control Structures,
Shell Initialization and Configuration Files

UNIT‐II

Linux Files, Directories, and Archives: Linux Files, The File Structure, Listing, Displaying, and Printing Files,

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1036
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Managing Directories, File and Directory Operations, The mtools Utilities, Archiving and Compressing Files.
Network Tools: Network Tools, Network Talk and Messenger Clients, RSH, Kerberos, and SSH Remote Access
Commands.

UNIT‐III

Basic System Administration: Superuser Control: The Root User, System Time and Date, Scheduling Tasks,
System Run Levels, System Directories, Configuration Directories and Files, System Logs, The Linux Auditing
System, Performance Analysis Tools and Processes, Grand Unified Bootloader, Managing Users: GUI User
Management Tools, User Configuration Files, The Password Files, Managing User Environments, Adding and
Removing Users with useradd, usermod, and userdel, Managing Groups, Controlling Access to Directories and
Files, Disk Quotas, Lightweight Directory Access Protocol.

UNIT ‐ IV

File Systems: File System Hierarchy Standard, Mounting File Systems, File System Information, Journaling,
Mounting File Systems Automatically, Mounting File Systems Manually, Creating File Systems, CD‐ROM and
DVD‐ROM Recording, Mono and .NET Support, Backup Management: Individual Backups, BackupPC, Amanda,
Backups with dump and restore.

Textbook(s):
1. Richard Petersen, “The Complete Reference: Linux”, McGraw Hill.
2. Tom Adelstein and Bill Lubanovi , “Linux System Administration”, O’ Reilly.

References:
1. EVI Nemeth, Garth Snyder, Trent R. Hein and Ben Whaley “Unix and Linux System Administration”, Pearson.
2. Sumitabha Das, “Unix Concept and Applications”, The McGraw Hill.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1037
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Linux System Administration Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ITE 6 PCE PCE‐3 CIE‐362P
CSE‐NET 6 PC PC NET‐346P
EAE 6 NET‐EAE NET‐EAE‐2 NET‐346P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Linux System Administration) as this is
the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Study of LINUX operating system.

2. Introduction to various commands in Linux.
3. Study of directory related commands in Linux.
4. Study of various commands to perform operations on files in Linux.
5. Study of process related and other commands in Linux.
6. Study about vi editor and its various modes.
7. Write a program in vi editor to find greatest of three number.
8. Write a program in vi editor to find whether the given number is even or odd.
9. Write a program in vi editor to find factorial of a given number.
10. Write a program in vi editor to find number is prime or not.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1038
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Logic and Distributed Control L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ICE 6 PCE PCE‐3 ICE‐330T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To introduce the importance of process automation techniques.
2. To impart knowledge in PLC based programming.
3. To implement the concept of introduce distributed control system and different communication
protocols. Data manipulation instruction
4. To have adequate information with respect to interfaces used in DCS
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 nderstand the process automation technologies
CO 2 nderstand latest communication technologies like HART and Field bus protocol
CO 3 Able to apply different security design approaches, engineering and operator interface issues for
designing of Distributed Control System.
CO 4 Able to design and develop a PLC ladder programming for simple process applications
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 1 2 ‐ ‐ 2 ‐ 3
CO 2 3 2 1 1 3 3 ‐ 3 3 ‐ 2 3
CO 3 3 3 2 2 3 2 2 3 ‐ 1 ‐ 3
CO 4 3 2 3 3 3 3 ‐ 3 3 3 ‐ 3

Unit I

Review of Computers in Process Control: Data loggers, Data Acquisition Systems (DAS), Direct Digital Control
(DDC). Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition Systems (SCADA), sampling considerations.Functionalblock
diagram of computer control systems.Distributed Control System (DCS) architecture and Comparison
withrespect to different performance attributes.

Unit II

Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) basics: Definition, overview of PLC systems, input/output modules,
power supplies and isolators. General PLC programming procedures, programming on‐off inputs/ outputs.
Auxiliary commands and functions, PLC Basic Functions, register basics, timer functions, counter functions. PLC
Installation, troubleshooting and maintenance.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1039
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Unit III

PLC Data manipulation instruction ‐ Arithmetic and comparison instruction‐ Skip, Master Control Reset (MCR)
and Zone Control Last state (ZCL) instruction. PLC Advanced intermediate functions: Utilizing digital bits,
sequencer functions, matrix functions. PLC Advanced functions: Alternate programming languages, Analog PLC
operation, networking of PLC, PLC‐PID functionsDesign of alarm and interlocks, networking of PLC – Case
studies using above instruction sets.

Unit IV

LCU communication Facilities ‐ Communication system requirements, Architectural Issues, Operator Interfaces,
Engineering Interfaces. Development of Field Control Unit (FCU) diagram for simple control applications.
Interfacing Smart field devices (wired and wireless) with DCS controller, HART and Field bus
protocol.Introduction to Object Linking and Embedding (OLE) for Process Control, Automation in the cloud with
case studies.

Textbooks:
1. John.W. Webb Ronald A Reis, “Programmable Logic Controllers ‐ Principles andApplications”, 4th Ed, PHI
2. Frank D. Petruzella, “Programmable Logic Controllers”, 2nd Edition, McGraw Hill, NewYork

References:
1. Lukcas M.P, “Distributed Control Systems”, Van Nostrand Reinhold Co., New York
2. Deshpande P.B and Ash R.H, “Elements of Process Control Applications”, ISA Press,New York
3. Krishna Kant, Computer‐based Industrial Control, Prentice Hall, NewDelhi, 2nd Edition, 2011.
4. F.D. Petruzella, Programmable Logic Controllers, Tata Mc‐Graw Hill, 3rd Edition, 2010.
5. Curtis D. Johnson, Process Control Instrumentation Technology, Pearson New International, 8th Ed, 2013.
6. D. Popovic and V.P. Bhatkar, Distributed Computer Control for Industrial Automation, Marcel Dekker,
1990.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1040
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Logic and Distributed Control Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ICE 6 PCE PCE‐3 ICE‐330P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Logic and Distributed Control) as this is
the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. To study hardware and software platforms for DCS.

2. To study the MATLAB package for simulation of control system design.
3. Study, understand and perform experiments on timers and counters.
4. To control the water level in a Process Tank using Feed forward Control.
5. To control the batch process reactorusing programmable logic controller.
6. To control the lift plant model using programmable logic controller.
7. To study and perform the variation in settling time and peak overshoot by the variation of the PID
controller settings.
8. Logic implementation for Bottle Filling Application.
9. To acquire Analog/Digital signal by interfacing NI myDAQ with LABVIEW.
10. To study the performance for the material handling system

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1041
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Logic Design and Analysis using Verilog L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ECE 7 PCE PCE‐4 ECE‐435T
EAE 7 ES‐EAE ES‐EAE‐5C ES‐411T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. Learn and understand the architectures of Field‐programmable Gate Arrays.
2. Translate a software application into hardware logic for FPGA architectures
3. Design synthesizable systems based on industry‐standard coding methods
4. Build testbenches and create data models to verify bit‐true accurate designs.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Understand the architecture of FPGAs, tools used in modelling of digital design
CO 2 Analyze and design basic digital circuits with combinatorial and sequential logic circuits using Verilog
HDL.
CO 3 Model complex digital systems at several levels of abstractions.
CO 4 Design real time applications such as vending machine and washing machines etc.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐
CO 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐
CO 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐
CO 4 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐

UNIT‐I

Hardware Description Languages, FPGA Boards and Software Tools, Field‐Programmable Gate Arrays:
Transistor as a Switch, Logic Gates from Switches, FPGA Building Blocks, Layout of the Xilinx Artix‐7 XC7A35T
FPGA, Input/output Blocks, Configurable Logic Blocks, Interconnect Resources, Block RAM, DSP Slices, Clock
Management, The XADC Block, High‐Speed Serial I/O Transceivers, Peripheral Component Interconnect Express
Interface, FPGA‐Based Digital System Design Philosophy, How to Think While Using FPGAs, Advantages and
Disadvantages of FPGAs, Usage Areas of FPGAs.
Verilog Fundamentals: Module Representation, Timing and Delays in Modelling, Hierarchical Module
Representation, Testbench Formation in Verilog, Structure of a Verilog Testbench File, Displaying Test Results.
Data Types in Verilog, Net and Variable Data Types, Data Values, Naming a Net or Variable, Defining Constants
and Parameters, Defining Vectors, Operators in Verilog, Arithmetic Operators, Concatenation and Replication
Operators, Application on Data Types and Operators, FPGA Building Blocks Used in Data Types and Operators,
Implementation Details of Vector Operations, Implementation Details of Arithmetic Operations.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1042
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT‐II

Combinational Circuit Analysis, Logic Function Formation between Input and Output, Boolean Algebra, Gate‐
Level Minimization, Combinational Circuit Implementation, Truth Table‐Based Implementation, Combinational
Circuit Design.
Combinational Circuit Blocks: Adders in Verilog, Comparators in Verilog, Decoders in Verilog, Encoders in
Verilog, Multiplexers in Verilog, Parity Generators and Checkers in Verilog, Applications on Combinational
Circuits, Implementing the Home Alarm System, Implementing the Digital Safe System, Implementing the Car
Park Occupied Slot Counting System, FPGA Building Blocks Used in Combinational Circuits.
Data Storage Elements: Latches in Verilog, Flip‐Flops in Verilog, Register, Memory, Read‐Only Memory, ROM in
Verilog, ROM Formation Using IP Blocks, Random Access Memory, Application on Data Storage Elements, FPGA
Building Blocks Used in Data Storage Elements.

UNIT‐III

Sequential Circuit Analysis, State Table, State Diagram, State Representation in Verilog, Timing in Sequential
Circuits, Synchronous Operation, Asynchronous Operation, Shift Register as a Sequential Circuit, Shift Registers
in Verilog, Multiplication and Division Using Shift Registers, Counter as a Sequential Circuit, Synchronous
Counter, Asynchronous Counter, Counters in Verilog, Frequency Division Using Counters, Sequential Circuit
Design, Applications on Sequential Circuits.

UNIT – IV

Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter (UART) in Verilog, UART Applications, Serial Peripheral Interface
(SPI) in Verilog, , SPI Application, Inter‐Integrated Circuit (I2C) in Verilog, , I2C Application, Video Graphics Array
(VGA) in Verilog, VGA Application, Universal Serial Bus (USB) Receiving Module in Verilog, USB Keyboard
Application, Ethernet, FPGA Building Blocks Used in Digital Interfacing.
Advanced Applications: Vending Machine, Digital Clock, Moving Wave via LEDs, Translator, Air Freshener
Dispenser, Obstacle‐Avoiding Tank, Intelligent Washing Machine, Non‐Touch Paper Towel Dispenser, Car
Parking Sensor System, Digital Table Tennis Game.

Textbook(s):
1. CemUnsalan, Bora Tar “Digital System Design with FPGA Implementation Using Verilog and VHDL”
McGraw‐Hill Education, 2017
2. Design through Verilog HDL, T.R. Padmanabhan and B. Bala Tripura Sundari, WSE, IEEE Press, 2004.

References:
1. Advanced Digital Design with Verilog HDL –Michael D. Ciletti, PHI, 2005.
2. Fundamentals of Logic Design with Verilog –Stephen. Brown and Zvonko Vranesic, TMH, 2005.
3. Samir Palnitkar, "Verilog HDL: A Guide to Digital Design and Synthesis", Pearson Education, Second Edition.
4. A Verilog Primer –J. Bhasker, BSP, 2003. .
5. Donald E. Thomas, Philip R Moorby, 'The Verilog Hardware Description Language", Springer, 5th edition.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1043
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Logic Design and Analysis using Verilog Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ECE 7 PCE PCE‐4 ECE‐435P
EAE 7 ES‐EAE ES‐EAE‐5C ES‐411P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Logic Design and Analysis using
Verilog) as this is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Write Verilog programs of full adder and full subtractor using dataflow modelling, check the wave forms
and the hardware generated.
2. Write Verilog program of 4‐bit binary adder using dataflow modeling, check the wave forms and the
hardware generated.
3. Write Verilog programs of encoder and decoder using dataflow modelling, check the wave forms and the
hardware generated.
4. Write Verilog programs of multiplexer and demultiplexer using dataflow modelling, check the wave forms
and the hardware generated.
5. Write Verilog programs of full adder and full subtractor using structural modelling, check the wave forms
and the hardware generated.
6. Write Verilog program of 4‐bit binary adder/subtractor circuit using structural modelling, check the wave
forms and the hardware generated.
7. Write Verilog programs of D‐latch and D‐flip flop using if‐else statement, check the wave forms and the
hardware generated.
8. Write Verilog program of asynchronous clear and synchronous load negative edge JK flip flop, check the
wave forms and the hardware generated.
9. Write Verilog programs of 4x1multiplexer and 1x4 demultiplexer using behavioural modelling, check the
wave forms and the hardware generated.
10. Write Verilog program of Mod‐10 up counter using behavioural modelling, check the wave forms and the
hardware generated.
11. Write Verilog program of 4‐bit synchronous up/down counter using process statement, check the wave
forms and the hardware generated.
12. Write Verilog program of Melay state machine having four states two inputs and one output, check the
wave forms and the hardware generated.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1044
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Low Power VLSI Design L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ECE 7 PCE PCE‐5 ECE‐419T
EE‐VDT 7 PC PC VLSI‐449T
EAE 7 VLSI‐EAE VLSI‐EAE‐5B VLSI‐449T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To impart the basic principles of low power VLSI design and its need.
2. To impart the knowledge of low power architecture and various low power design approaches.
3. To impart the knowledge of different type of low power techniques and low voltage low power
adders.
4. To impart the knowledge of low voltage low power memories in VLSI design.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 To understand the basic principles of low power VLSI design and its need.
CO 2 To study the low power architecture and various low power design approaches.
CO 3 To provide the knowledge of different type of low power techniques and low voltage low power
adders.
CO 4 Understand low voltage low power memories in VLSI design.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 ‐ 2 2 2 3
CO 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 ‐ 2 1 2 3
CO 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 ‐ 2 1 2 3
CO 4 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 ‐ 2 1 2 2

UNIT I

Introduction to low power VLSI design an overview, Need for low power, low power design Limitations, power
supply voltage, Power and Energy basics, Sources of power dissipation‐Switching Power Dissipation, Short
Circuit Power Dissipation, Leakage Power Dissipation, Glitching Power Dissipation, Short Channel Effects –Drain
Induced Barrier Lowering, Gate Induced Drain leakage and Punch Through, Surface Scattering, Velocity
Saturation, Impact Ionization, Hot Electron Effect, threshold voltage, scaling, interconnect wires. CMOS leakage
current, static current, basic principles of low power design, probabilistic power analysis, random logic signal‐
probability and frequency‐power analysis techniques.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1045
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT II

Low‐Power Design Approaches: Low‐Power Design through Voltage Scaling – VTCMOS circuits, MTCMOS
circuits. To study basics of CMOS. Architectural Level Approach –Pipelining and Parallel Processing Approaches.
Switched Capacitance Minimization Approaches: System Level Measures, Circuit Level Measures, and Mask
level Measures, capacitive power estimation, static state power, gate level capacitance estimation.

UNIT III

Low Power Techniques: Circuit level: Power consumption in circuits. Dynamic Power Optimization: multiple
supply voltages, transistor sizing, and Static power Optimization: Multiple thresholds transistor, Flip Flops and
Latches design, high capacitance nodes, and low power digital cells library.
Low‐Voltage Low‐Power Adders: Introduction, Standard Adder Cells, CMOS Adder’s Architectures
Ripple Carry Adders, Carry Look‐ Ahead Adders, Carry Select Adders, Carry Save Adders.

UNIT IV

Low‐Voltage Low‐Power Memories: Basics of ROM, Low‐Power ROM Technology, Future Trend and
Development of ROMs, Basics of SRAM, Memory Cell, Precharge and Equalization Circuit, Low‐Power SRAM
Technologies, Basics of DRAM, Self‐Refresh Circuit, Future Trend and Development of DRAM.

Textbook(s):
1. Low Power Design Methodologies by J. M. Rabaey, M.Pedram.
2. Low‐Power CMOS VLSI Circuit Design by K. Roy and S. C.Prasad.

References:
1. Practical Low Power Digital VLSI Design by Gary K. Yeap, KAP, 2002.
2. Digital Integrated Circuits: A Design Perspective, Second Edition by J. M. Rabaey, A. P. Chandrakasan
and B. Nikolic, Pearson.
3. Low‐Power CMOS Design, P. Chandrakasan and RW Broderson, IEEE Press.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1046
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Low Power VLSI Design Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ECE 7 PCE PCE‐5 ECE‐419P
EE‐VDT 7 PC PC VLSI‐449P
EAE 7 VLSI‐EAE VLSI‐EAE‐5B VLSI‐449P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Low Power VLSI Design) as this is the
practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

Note: Experiments shall be carried out using Tanner/Mentor Graphics/Cadence

1. Introduction to SPICE (Operating Point Analysis, DC Sweep, Transient Analysis, AC Sweep, Parametric
Sweep, Transfer Function Analysis)
2. Study the equivalent circuit model for MOS Transistor.
3. I‐V Curves of NMOS and PMOS Transistors.
4. DC Characteristics of CMOS Inverters (VTC, Noise Margin).
5. Dynamic Characteristics of CMOS Inverters (Propagation Delay, Power Dissipation).
6. Schematic Entry/Simulation/ Layout of CMOS Combinational Circuits.
7. To study FET model for calculating Drain Induced Barrier Lowering (DIBL).
8. To study FET model for calculating Gate induced drain leakage (GIDL).
9. CMOS Static / Dynamic logic circuit (register cell).
10. CMOS Latch.
11. Flip Flops.
12. Adders: Ripple Carry Adders, Carry Look‐ Ahead Adders
13. Memories and State Machines: Read Only Memory (ROM), Random Access Memory (RAM), Mealy State
Machine, Arithmetic Multipliers using FSMs.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1047
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Machine Design‐I L P C
4 4

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

MAE 5 PC PC MAC‐303

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To understand ab‐initio design concepts under various constraints, stress concentration and dynamic
loading. Also analyse the design of static joints and pipes.
2. To conceptualise joints for power transmission in rotating parts, suspension parts and in leverage.
3. To analyse bolted & screwed fastenings and structural plates joining for complex engineering
applications under myriad of loads.
4. To thoroughly understand the design procedure for speed variation effects in toothed elements and
power screws.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Grasp the systematic design procedure & design principles considering constraints of various methods
of manufacture and effect of static & dynamic forces on joints for rods.
CO 2 Synthesis of keyed‐coupled shafts and stress analysis of flexible elements & levers.
CO 3 Design analysis of fastening threads and various temporary & permanent joints for plates.
CO 4 Analyse the effect of changing speeds on designed toothed elements and efficient power transmitting
devices.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 1 1 2 3
CO 2 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 1 1 2 3
CO 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 1 1 2 3
CO 4 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 1 1 2 3

UNIT‐I

Introduction: Systematic Design Process (SDP), Basic principles of mechanical design, Use of standards.
Dynamic & fluctuating stresses, Fatigue failure and endurance Strength, Design under combined direct &
varying stresses.
Stress concentration, causes and remedies in design. Factor of safety and its affecting factors. Tolerances and
fits as per BIS. Materials selection, Designation of steels. Detailed design procedure of Spigot & Socket Cotter
joint, Knuckle joint, Pipe joint. Numerical Design Problems.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1048
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT‐II

Shafts, Keys and Couplings: Transmission Shafts, materials, design of shafts on strength & rigidity basis and
under combined torsional and bending loads as per ASME code. Keys, types and applications. Design of rigid
and pin bushed flexible couplings.
Levers, types, Design procedure of Bell crank lever.
Springs and their applications, design of close coiled helical springs. Numerical Design Problems

UNIT‐III

Riveted Joints: Types of riveted joints, Failure modes, strength equations, joint efficiency, Riveted joint for
boiler shells, Riveted joints under direct and eccentric loads.
Welded Joints: strength of parallel, transverse & combined filled welded joints, axially loaded unsymmetrical
welded joint, eccentrically loaded welded joints, welded joints subjected to bending moment and torsional
moment.
Threaded Joints: Types of screwed fastenings, Initial tightening loads in bolts, Torque requirement, Uniform
strength bolt, Direct & eccentrically loaded bolted joints. Numerical Design Problems.

UNIT – IV

Power Screws: Types of threads for power screws ‐ Square, trapezoidal & Acme threads, Torque requirement,
efficiency, irreversibility & self‐locking, Complete analysis of design of screw jack.
Spur Gear: Classification of Gears, spur gear terminology, Gear tooth failure, Lewis equation for beam strength
of tooth, dynamic and wear loads. Numerical Design Problems.

Textbook(s):
1. V.B. Bhandari, “Design of Machine elements”, Tata McGraw Hill Education Private Ltd. Third Edition (2012).
2. Maleeve Hartman and O.P.Grover, “Machine Design”, CBS Publishers & Distributors, Sixth Edition (2015).

References:
1. Mahadevan, “Design Data Book”, CBS Publishers & Distributors.
2. J.E.Shigley& C.R. Mischke, "Mechanical Engineering Design”, Tata McGraw Hill Co. Inc.
3. P.C. Sharma and D.K Aggarwal., “Machine Design”, S.K. Kataria & Sons.
4. Juvinal R C, Marshek K M, “Fundamentals of Machine component Design”, Wiley India.
5. Norton R. l. “Machine Design” Pearson.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1049
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Machine Design‐I Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

MAE 5 PC PC MAC‐351

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Machine Design‐I) as this is the
practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. To design and draw a Spigot and Socket Cotter Joint for a given load under the allowable stress properties
of the part materials.
2. To design and draw a Knuckle Joint for a load under the material properties constraints.
3. To design and draw a pipe joint carrying pressured fluid within safe stress limits of the given material.
4. To design and draw a protected type Rigid Flanged Coupling for connecting two power transmitting perfect
coaxial shafts.
5. To design and draw a bushed pin type Flexible Coupling (Ajax) for connecting two slightly misaligned shafts.
6. To design a quadruple riveted double strap butt joint for the longitudinal seam and circumferential seam of
a boiler shell.
7. To design and find the size of an eccentrically loaded Welded Joint for a bracket.
8. To design and draw a Screw Jack for lifting a given load.
9. To design a pair of Spur Gear Reducer for transmitting a given power between two shafts.
10. To design a Bell Crank Lever for moving a given load with a given mechanical advantage.
11. To design a closed coiled helical Spring for the valve mechanism of an engine.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1050
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Machine Design‐II L P C
3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ME 5 PC PC MEC‐303

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To understand relative application suitability of various gears, belt drives and chain drives.
2. To conceptualise the design needs for differential power requirement in a moving object and the
means to achieve them.
3. To study the various methods of supporting a loaded rotating shaft for diverse applications.
4. To critically analyse the design needs for wire ropes, crane hooks and engine parts.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Analyse the effect of changing speeds on varied power transmission mechanical drives with toothed,
chained & flexible elements considering centre distances.
CO 2 Design analysis of mechanisms for stoppage, engagement/disengagement of parts with relative
motion in vehicles, machines & hoists.
CO 3 Justify the arrangement for support & retainment of rotating parts at diversified application points
containing radial, axial & angular loads with lubrications.
CO 4 Evaluate, Design and select system for transmission at long distances and suitably justify design of
Engine parts.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 3 3 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 1 1 2 3
CO 2 3 3 2 3 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 1 2 3
CO 3 3 3 2 3 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ 1 1 2 3
CO 4 3 3 3 3 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 1 2 3

UNIT‐I

Introduction to Mechanical Drives: Selection criterion of various power transmission drives.

Gear Drive Classification.
Design of Helical Gears based on modified Lewis Equation. Dynamic and wear loads. Use in gearbox.
Design of Bevel Gears. Dynamic and wear loads.
Design of Worm & Worm Wheel Gears. Dynamic and wear loads. Checking for heat dissipation suitability.
Design of Flat Belt Drives and Pulleys.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1051
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT‐II

Friction Clutches and Brakes: Introduction, Classification based on direction of operating Forces. Common
Friction Materials.
Clutches Design‐ Single & Multiple Plate Clutches with uniform pressure and uniform wear theories. Cone
Clutch‐ Design Procedure, Design of Centrifugal Clutch.
Brakes Design: Energy Equations, Single and Multiple Shoe Brake Analysis, Band Brakes.

UNIT‐III

Ball & Roller Bearings: Classification &Types, bearing life, Equivalent load, Load‐life relationships, Selection of
bearings from manufacturer’s catalogue based on static and dynamic load carrying capacity. Bearing failures,
Bearings with survival probability other than 90%.
Sliding Bearings: Types, Design of journal bearings using McKee’s equation, checking bearing suitability,
Comparison of rolling and sliding contact bearings, Properties of bearing materials.

UNIT‐IV

Hoisting Elements: Introduction to transmission at long distances.

Design procedure of Wire Ropes, Classification, designation of wire ropes, Numerical problems.
Design of Crane Hooks. Stresses at critical sections.
Introduction to Engine Parts: Design of Piston of I.C Engine and Design of Connecting Rod.

Textbook(s):
1. V.B. Bhandari, “Design of Machine elements”, Tata McGraw Hill Education Private Ltd. Third Edition (2012).
2. Maleeve Hartman and O.P.Grover, “Machine Design”, CBS Publishers & Distributors, Sixth Edition (2015).

References:
1. Mahadevan, “Design Data Book”, CBS Publishers & Distributors.
2. J.E. Shigley & C.R. Mischke, "Mechanical Engineering Design”, Tata McGraw Hill Co. Inc.
3. P.C. Sharma and D.K Aggarwal., “Machine Design”, S.K. Kataria & Sons.
4. Juvinal R C, Marshek K M, “Fundamentals of Machine Component Design”, Wiley India.
5. Norton R. l. “Machine Design” Pearson.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1052
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Machine Design‐II L P C
4 4

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

MAE 6 PC PC MAC‐306

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To understand relative application suitability of various gears, belt drives and chain drives.
2. To conceptualise the design needs for differential power requirement in a moving object and the
means to achieve them.
3. To study the various methods of supporting a loaded rotating shaft for diverse applications.
4. To critically analyze the design needs for wire ropes, crane hooks and engine parts.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Analyze the effect of changing speeds on varied power transmission mechanical drives with toothed,
chained & flexible elements considering centre distances.
CO 2 Design analysis of mechanisms for stoppage, engagement / disengagement of parts with relative
motion in vehicles, machines & hoists.
CO 3 Justify the arrangement for support & retainment of rotating parts at diversified application points
containing radial, axial & angular loads with lubrications.
CO 4 Evaluate, Design and select system for transmission at long distances and suitably justify design of
Engine parts.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 3 3 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 1 1 2 3
CO 2 3 3 2 3 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 1 2 3
CO 3 3 3 2 3 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ 1 1 2 3
CO 4 3 3 3 3 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 1 2 3

UNIT‐I

Introduction to Mechanical drives: Selection criterion of various power transmission drives.

Classification of Gear Drives.
Design of Helical Gears based on modified Lewis Equation. Dynamic and wear loads. Use in gearbox.
Design of Bevel Gears. Dynamic and wear loads.
Design of Worm & Worm Wheel Gears. Dynamic and wear loads. Checking for heat dissipation suitability.
Selection and Design of Flat and V‐Belt Belt Drives and Pulleys
Design of Roller Chain Drives, Applications.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1053
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT‐II

Friction Clutches and Brakes: Introduction, Classification based on direction of operating Forces. Common
Friction Materials.
Clutches Design‐ Single & Multiple Plate Clutches with uniform pressure and uniform wear theories.
Application in 2 & 4 wheeled vehicles. Cone Clutch‐ Design Procedure. Design of Centrifugal Clutch
Brakes Design: Energy Equations, Single and Multiple Shoe Brake Analysis. Band Brake, Band & Block Brake,
internally expanding Brake analysis with leading & lagging shoes.

UNIT‐III

Ball & Roller Bearings: Classification &Types, Bearing life, Equivalent load, Load‐life relationships, Selection of
bearings from manufacturer’s catalogue based on static and dynamic load carrying capacity. Bearing failures,
Bearings with survival probability other than 90%.
Sliding Bearings: Types, Design of journal bearings using McKee’s equation, Checking bearing suitability, Types
of lubrication, Comparison of rolling and sliding contact bearings, Properties of bearing materials.

UNIT ‐ IV

Hoisting Elements : Introduction to transmission at long distances.

Detailed design procedure of Wire Ropes, Classification, designation of wire ropes, applications. Numerical
problems.
Design of Crane Hooks. Stresses at critical sections. Bending of curved beams of triangular, trapezoidal, circular
sections.
Introduction to Engine Parts: Design of Piston of I.C.Engine. Design of Connecting Rod. Design of Crankshaft
for single cylinder engine only.

Textbook(s):
1. V.B. Bhandari, “Design of Machine elements”, Tata McGraw Hill Education Private Ltd. Third Edition (2012).
2. Maleeve Hartman and O.P.Grover, “Machine Design”, CBS Publishers & Distributors, Sixth Edition (2015).

References:
1. Mahadevan, “Design Data Book”, CBS Publishers & Distributors.
2. J.E. Shigley & C.R. Mischke, "Mechanical Engineering Design”, Tata McGraw Hill Co. Inc.
3. P.C. Sharma and D.K Aggarwal., “Machine Design”, S.K. Kataria & Sons.
4. Juvinal R C, Marshek K M, “Fundamentals of Machine Component Design”, Wiley India.
5. Norton R. l. “Machine Design” Pearson.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1054
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Machine Design‐II Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ME 5 PC PC MEC‐351
MAE 6 PC PC MAC‐352

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Machine Design–II) as this is the
practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Teeth, PCDs, module, center distances of all gears and gear ratios within ±2% error.
2. Identification and design of a most heavily stressed gear and selection of material for all gears and shafts of
the same gear box.
3. To find the size/diameters of input, output & countershaft as per ASTM recommendations and finding
support reactions.
4. To select the bearings for all locations, support & retainment of all shafts using SKF bearing manufacturer’s
catalogue.
5. To design a double shoe brake for a hoisting mechanism using standard drum sizes and friction materials
and check for heat dissipation.
6. To design the bell crank lever, side lever and spring for the designed brake in s.no.5.
7. To design a hook of a crane for hoisting a given load.
8. To design the thrust bearing, bolt size, side plates and central plate for the designed crane hook in s.no.7.
9. To design a connecting rod for an internal combustion engine.
10. To design the big end, small end and cap for the designed connecting rod in s.no.9.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1055
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Machine Learning L P C
3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ECE 6 PCE PCE‐3 ECE‐350T
EAE 6 MLDA‐EAE MLDA‐EAE‐2C ML‐342T
CSE/IT/CST/ITE 7 PCE PCE‐5 CIE‐421T
CSE‐AIML 7 PC PC ML‐407T
EAE 7 AIML‐EAE AIML‐EAE‐3 ML‐407T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To understand the need of machine learning
2. To learn about regression and feature selection
3. To understand about classification algorithms
4. To learn clustering algorithms
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 To formulate machine learning problems
CO 2 Learn about regression and feature selection techniques
CO 3 Apply machine learning techniques such as classification to practical applications
CO 4 Apply clustering algorithms
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 2 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 4 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2

UNIT‐I

Introduction: Machine learning, terminologies in machine learning, Perspectives and issues in machine
learning, application of Machine learning, Types of machine learning: supervised, unsupervised, semi‐
supervised learning. Review of probability, Basic Linear Algebra in Machine Learning Techniques, Dataset and
its types,Data preprocessing, Bias and Variance in Machine learning , Function approximation, Overfitting

UNIT‐II

Regression Analysis in Machine Learning: Introduction to regression and its terminologies,Types of

regression,Logistic Regression
Simple Linear regression: Introduction to Simple Linear Regression and its assumption, Simple Linear

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1056
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Regression Model Building,Ordinary Least square estimation, Properties of the least‐squares estimators and
the fitted regression model, Interval estimation in simple linear regression , Residuals
Multiple Linear Regression:Multiple linear regression model and its assumption, Interpret Multiple Linear
Regression Output(R‐Square, Standard error, F, Significance F, Cofficient P values), Access the fit of multiple
linear regression model (R squared, Standard error)
Feature Selection and Dimensionality Reduction: PCA, LDA, ICA

UNIT‐III

Introduction to Classification and Classification Algorithms: What is Classification? General Approach to

Classification, k‐Nearest Neighbor Algorithm, Random Forests, Fuzzy Set Approaches
Support Vector Machine: Introduction, Types of support vector kernel – (Linear kernel, polynomial kernel, and
Gaussiankernel), Hyperplane – (Decision surface), Properties of SVM, and Issues in SVM.
Decision Trees: Decision tree learning algorithm,ID‐3algorithm, Inductive bias, Entropy and information theory,
Information gain,Issues in Decision tree learning.
Bayesian Learning ‐ Bayes theorem, Concept learning, Bayes Optimal Classifier, Naïve Bayes classifier, Bayesian
belief networks, EM algorithm
Ensemble Methods: Bagging, Boosting and AdaBoost and XBoost,
Classification Model Evaluation and Selection: Sensitivity, Specificity, Positive Predictive Value, Negative
Predictive Value, Lift Curves and Gain Curves, ROC Curves, Misclassification Cost Adjustment to Reflect Real‐
World Concerns, Decision Cost/Benefit Analysis

UNIT – IV

Introduction to Cluster Analysis and Clustering Methods: The Clustering Task and the Requirements for
Cluster Analysis , Overview of Some Basic Clustering Methods:‐k‐Means Clustering, k‐Medoids Clustering,
Density‐Based Clustering: DBSCAN ‐ Density‐Based Clustering Based on Connected Regions with High Density,
Gaussian Mixture Model algorithm , Balance Iterative Reducing and Clustering using Hierarchies (BIRCH) ,
Affinity Propagation clustering algorithm,Mean‐Shift clustering algorithm, ordering Points to Identify the
Clustering Structure (OPTICS) algorithm, Agglomerative Hierarchy clustering algorithm, Divisive Hierarchical ,
Measuring Clustering Goodness

Textbook(s):

1. Tom M. Mitchell, “Machine Learning”, McGraw‐Hill Education (India) Private Limited, 2013.
2. M. Gopal, “Applied Machine Learning”, McGraw Hill Education

References:
1. C. M. BISHOP (2006), “Pattern Recognition and Machine Learning”, Springer‐Verlag New York, 1st Edition
2. R. O. Duda, P. E. Hart, D. G. Stork (2000), Pattern Classification, Wiley‐Blackwell, 2nd Edition

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1057
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Machine Learning Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ECE 6 PCE PCE‐3 ECE‐350P
EAE 6 MLDA‐EAE MLDA‐EAE‐2C ML‐342P
CSE/IT/CST/ITE 7 PCE PCE‐5 CIE‐421P
CSE‐AIML 7 PC PC ML‐407P
EAE 7 AIML‐EAE AIML‐EAE‐3 ML‐407P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Machine Learning) as this is the
practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Introduction to JUPYTER IDE and its libraries Pandas and NumPy

2. Program to demonstrate Simple Linear Regression
3. Program to demonstrate Logistic Regression
4. Program to demonstrate Decision Tree – ID3 Algorithm
5. Program to demonstrate k‐Nearest Neighbor flowers classification
6. Program to demonstrate Naïve‐ Bayes Classifier
7. Program to demonstrate PCA and LDA on Iris dataset
8. Program to demonstrate DBSCAN clustering algorithm
9. Program to demonstrate K‐Medoid clustering algorithm
10. Program to demonstrate K‐Means Clustering Algorithm on Handwritten Dataset

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1058
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Machine Learning and Data Analytics Case Studies L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 7 MLDA‐EAE MLDA‐EAE‐5A ML‐467T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. This course provides the fundamental concepts in data science.
2. Learn the Basics of statistical data analysis with examples.
3. Basics of Machine Learning and statistical measures.
4. Compile and visualize data using statistical functions.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Impart the knowledge of data classification, process of big data technology, user roles and skills in data
science.
CO 2 Understand how data is analysed and visualized using statistic functions
CO 3 Analyze the methodologies of data science
CO 4 Design the code for the problems related to data science using R
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 2 3 ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐
CO 2 ‐ 3 ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 ‐
CO 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 3 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 3
CO 4 ‐ ‐ 3 2 ‐ 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 2

UNIT‐I

Unsupervised Machine Learning Algorithms: Dimensionality Reduction, Clustering, Supervised Machine

Learning Problems: Regression and classification.
Case Study: Balanced Scorecard Model for Measuring Organizational Performance, Employee Attrition in an
Organization, Market Capitalization Categories, Performance Appraisal in Organizations, Application of
Technology Acceptance Model in Cloud Computing, Prediction of Customer Buying Intention due to Digital
Marketing.

UNIT‐II

Supervised Machine Learning Algorithms: Naïve Bayes Algorithm, k‐Nearest Neighbor’s (KNN) Algorithm,
Support Vector Machines (SVMs), Decision Trees.
Case Study: Measuring Acceptability of a New Product, Case Study: Predicting Phishing Websites, Fraud
Analysis for Credit Card and Mobile Payment Transactions, Artificial Intelligence and Employment.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1059
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT‐III

Data Analytics‐ Relation: Data Science, Analytics and Big Data Analytics. Data Science Components – Big data
technology – Data Science user‐ roles and skills‐ Data Science use cases. Statistical Measures in R: Measures of
central tendency – Range‐ inter quartile range – Mean – Median – variance‐ Standard deviation – Sampling
distribution – probability distributions‐ hypothesis tests.

UNIT ‐ IV

Mathematics for Data science Probability, Statistics, Linear Algebra, Gradient Descent, Calculus for data
science, ANOVA, Hypothesis testing, Data Visualization using GGPLOT2 and Matplotlib, Data Pre‐processing,
Data Transformation, Data Reduction, Feature Extraction. Univariate and Multi‐variate analysis.
Case study: Insurance policy offers, Discount targeting in online shopping.

Textbook(s):
1. Data analytics with R by Dr. Bharti Motwani , Wiley publication
2. V. Bhuvaneswari (2016). Data Analytics with R, Bharathiar University.

References:
1. Nina Zumal, John Mount (2014). Practical Data science in R, Managing Publication Company
2. Sandip Rakshit, R Programming for Beginners, McGraw Hill Education (India), 2017

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1060
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Machine Learning and Data Analytics Case Studies Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 7 MLDA‐EAE MLDA‐EAE‐5A ML‐467P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Machine Learning and Data Analytics
Case Studies) as this is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

Implement a case study mentioned in syllabus by considering following methods.

1. Define the problem statement: Clearly articulate the problem you want to solve or the objective you want
to achieve using machine learning and data analytics.
2. Gather and preprocess data: Collect relevant data for your case study and perform necessary
preprocessing tasks such as data cleaning, handling missing values, and feature engineering.
3. Exploratory data analysis (EDA): Analyze the dataset to gain insights into the data distribution, identify
patterns, and visualize relationships between variables.
4. Split the data and model training: Divide the dataset into training, validation, and testing sets and train
your models on the training set, tune hyperparameters using the validation set, and evaluate their
performance on the testing set.
5. Model evaluation: Train the selected machine learning models using the training set and evaluate their
performance using appropriate metrics such as accuracy, precision, recall, F1‐score, or mean squared error.
6. Deployment: Implement the chosen model in a real‐world scenario, considering factors such as scalability,
performance, and integration with existing systems.
7. Interpretation and visualization: Interpret the results of your models and visualize them in a meaningful
way. This helps in presenting insights to stakeholders and understanding the impact of different variables
on the outcome.
8. Documentation: Document your case study, including the problem statement, data sources, preprocessing
steps, modeling techniques used, results obtained, and any limitations or assumptions made during the
process.
9. Communication and presentation: Prepare a clear and concise presentation of your case study findings,
highlighting the key insights and recommendations derived from your analysis.
10. Ethical considerations: Consider ethical aspects such as data privacy, bias, and fairness throughout the
entire process. Ensure that your models and analyses are fair, transparent, and aligned with legal and
ethical guidelines.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1061
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Machine Learning and Data Analytics Frameworks L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 7 MLDA‐EAE MLDA‐EAE‐5B ML‐469T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. This course provides the fundamental concepts in data science.
2. Learn the Basics of statistical data analysis with examples.
3. Basics of Machine Learning and statistical measures.
4. Compile and visualize data using statistical functions.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Impart the knowledge of data classification, process of big data technology, user roles and skills in data
science.
CO 2 Understand how data is analysed and visualized using statistic functions
CO 3 Analyze the methodologies of data science
CO 4 To Introduce the concepts of data modelling techniques using Machine Learning for Data Analytics
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 2 3 ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐
CO 2 ‐ 3 ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 ‐
CO 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 3 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 3
CO 4 ‐ ‐ 3 2 ‐ 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 2

UNIT‐I

Introduction and Concepts, Differentiating algorithmic and model based frameworks, Regression: Ordinary
Least Squares, Ridge Regression, Lasso Regression, Regression: Ordinary Least Squares, Ridge Regression, and
Lasso Regression.

UNIT‐II

Linear Discriminant Analysis Quadratic Discriminant Analysis, Support Vector Machine (SVM), Bias‐Variance
Dichotomy Model Validation Approaches, Neural Networks , Clustering, Association Rule Mining ,Deep learning
Concepts.

UNIT‐III

Data Analytics‐ Relation: Data Science, Analytics and Big Data Analytics. Data Science Components – Big data

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1062
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

technology – Data Science user‐ roles and skills‐ Data Science use cases. Statistical methods: Descriptive
Statistics Probability Distributions (Binomial, Poisson, Normal) Sampling Distributions (Chi‐squared, t, F),
Estimation

UNIT ‐ IV

Prescriptive analytics: Creating data for analytics through Active learning, Creating data for analytics through
Reinforcement learning, .Test of Hypothesis, ANOVA.

Textbook(s):
1. Data analytics with R by Dr. Bharti Motwani , wiley publication
2. V. Bhuvaneswari (2016). Data Analytics with R, Bharathiar University.

References:
1. Modellind Techniuqes in Predictive Analytics, Thomas W Miller, Pearson
2. Introduction to Machine Learning with Python, A. C. Muller & S. Guido, O’Reilly

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1063
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Machine Learning and Data Analytics Frameworks Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 7 MLDA‐EAE MLDA‐EAE‐5B ML‐469P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Machine Learning and Data Analytics
Frameworks) as this is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. R AS CALCULATOR APPLICATION
a. Using with and without R objects on console
b. Using mathematical functions on console
c. Write an R script, to create R objects for calculator application and save in a specified location in disk.
2. DESCRIPTIVE STATISTICS IN R
a. Write an R script to find basic descriptive statistics using summary, str, quartile function on mtcars&
cars datasets.
b. Write an R script to find subset of dataset by using subset (), aggregate () functions on iris dataset.
3. READING AND WRITING DIFFERENT TYPES OF DATASETS
a. Reading different types of data sets (.txt, .csv) from Web and disk and writing in file in specific disk
location.
b. Reading Excel data sheet in R.
c. Reading XML dataset in R.
4. VISUALIZATIONS
a. Find the data distributions using box and scatter plot.
b. Find the outliers using plot.
c. Plot the histogram, bar chart and pie chart on sample data.
5. CORRELATION AND COVARIANCE
a. Find the correlation matrix.
b. Plot the correlation plot on dataset and visualize giving an overview of relationships among data on iris
data.
c. Analysis of covariance: variance (ANOVA), if data have categorical variables on iris data
6. REGRESSION MODEL
Import a data from web storage. Name the dataset and now do Logistic Regression to find out relation
between variables that are affecting the admission of a student in an institute based on his or her GRE
score, GPA obtained and rank of the student. Also check the model is fit or not. Require (foreign), require
(MASS).

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1064
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

7. MULTIPLE REGRESSION MODEL

Apply multiple regressions, if data have a continuous Independent variable. Apply on above dataset.
8. REGRESSION MODEL FOR PREDICTION
Apply regression Model techniques to predict the data on above dataset.
9. CLASSIFICATION MODEL
a. Install relevant package for classification.
b. Choose classifier for classification problem.
c. Evaluate the performance of classifier.
10. CLUSTERING MODEL
a. Clustering algorithms for unsupervised classification.
b. Plot the cluster data using R visualizations.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1065
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Machine Learning for Image and Vision Analysis L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EE‐VDT/EC‐ACT 7 OAE‐ECE‐EA OAE‐2 IPCV‐461T
EAE 7 IPCV‐EAE IPCV‐EAE‐5B IPCV‐461T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To impart knowledge about fundamental concepts of machine learning.
2. To impart knowledge about supervised and unsupervised machine learning.
3. To impart knowledge about reinforcement learning.
4. To impart knowledge about using machine learning in image analysis.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Understand fundamental concepts of machine learning.
CO 2 Implement supervised and unsupervised machine learning for small applications.
CO 3 Explain and apply reinforcement learning.
CO 4 Implement machine learning techniques for image related applications.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 ‐ 2 1 ‐ 2
CO 2 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 ‐ 2 1 ‐ 2
CO 3 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 ‐ 2 1 ‐ 2
CO 4 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 ‐ 2 1 ‐ 2

UNIT I

Introduction to Machine Learning‐ Basic concepts, developing a learning system, Learning Issues, and
challenges. Feature selection Mechanisms, Discriminative Models: Least Square Regression, Gradient Descent
Algorithm, Univariate and Multivariate Linear Regression, Prediction Model, Probabilistic Interpretation.

UNIT II

Supervised Learning‐ Linear Regression, Multiple Regression, Logistic Regression, Classification; classifier
models, K Nearest Neighbour (KNN), Decision Trees, Support Vector Machine (SVM), Random Forest.
Unsupervised Learning‐ Dimensionality reduction; Clustering; K‐Means clustering; C‐means clustering; Fuzzy C
means clustering, EM Algorithm, Association Analysis‐ Association Rules in Large Databases, Apriori algorithm,
Markov models: Hidden Markov models (HMMs).

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1066
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT III

Reinforcement Learning‐ Introduction to Reinforcement Learning, Methods and Elements of Reinforcement

Learning, Bellman Equation, Markov Decision Process (MDP), Q Learning, Value Function Approximation,
Temporal Difference Learning, Concept of Neural Networks, Concise Discussion on Applications Of Machine
Learning E.G. Image Analysis, Medical Diagnostics, Fraud Detection, Email Spam Detection.

UNIT IV

Machine Learning in Image Analysis: Image Segmentation Texture Description, Edges/Boundaries, Object
Boundary and Shape Representations, Object Detection, Object Classification, Feature Extraction from Images,
Usage of TensorFlow and Keras for Image Related Applications.

Textbook(s):
1. Tom M. Mitchell: Machine Learning, McGraw‐Hill, 2010.
2. Ethem Alpaydin: Introduction to Machine Learning, MIT Press, Pearson, Third Edition, 2014.
3. Bishop, Christopher: Neural Networks for Pattern Recognition. New York, NY: Oxford University Press, 1995

References:
1. Ethem Alpaydin: Introduction to Machine Learning (Adaptive Computation and Machine Learning), The MIT
Press, 2004.
2. T. Astie, R. Tibshirani, J. H. Friedman: The Elements of Statistical Learning, Springer (2nd ed.), 2009.
3. C. Bishop: Pattern Recognition and Machine Learning. Berlin: Springer‐Verlag, 2016.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1067
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Machine Learning for Image and Vision Analysis Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EE‐VDT/EC‐ACT 7 OAE‐ECE‐EA OAE‐2 IPCV‐461P
EAE 7 IPCV‐EAE IPCV‐EAE‐5B IPCV‐461P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Machine Learning for Image and Vision
Analysis) as this is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Introduction to Python programming fundamentals.

2. Illustration of list, tuple and dictionary in Python.
3. Illustration of exception handling and debugging concepts in python
4. Introduction and application of Panda and Numpy libraries in image analysis
5. Introduction and application of Open CV, PIL (Python Image Library) and other relevant libraries in image
processing.
6. Implement and demonstrate the FIND‐S algorithm for finding the most specific hypothesis based on a given
set of training data samples. Read the training data from a .CSV file.
7. For a given set of training data examples stored in a .CSV file, implement and demonstrate the Candidate‐
Elimination algorithm.
8. Write a program to demonstrate the working of the decision tree based ID3 algorithm. Use an appropriate
data set for building the decision tree and apply this knowledge to classify a new sample.
9. Build an Artificial Neural Network by implementing the Back propagation algorithm and test the same
using appropriate data sets.
10. Write a program to implement k‐Nearest Neighbour algorithm to classify the iris data set. Print both
correct and wrong predictions. Java/Python ML library classes can be used for this problem.
11. Implement the non‐parametric Locally Weighted Regression algorithm in order to fit data points. Select
appropriate data set for your experiment and draw graphs.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1068
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Materials and Machine Technology L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

OAE 6 ME‐OAE ME‐OAE‐2 OME‐326T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To study crystal structures and understand about diffusion and deformation phenomenon.
2. To understand different types of fracture and analyze the phase transformation .
3. To study the construction, working and mechanisms used in lathe machine tool and reciprocating
machine tools.
4. To study the construction, working and mechanisms used in drilling machine and milling machines.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Summarize the properties of crystal structures of metallic elements and understand the mechanism of
diffusion and deformation.
CO 2 To relate the material behaviour under environmental conditions and interpret the characteristics of
steel through iron‐ iron carbide and TTT diagram.
CO 3 Analyse the working mechanism of lathe and reciprocating machine tools.
CO 4 Explain the operations performed on drilling and milling machine tools.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 1 3 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 3
CO 2 3 2 3 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 3
CO 3 3 3 3 3 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 3
CO 4 3 2 ‐ ‐ 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 3

UNIT‐I

Structure of metal: Crystal structure (BCC, FCC and HCP, Packing factor and density calculation), X‐ray
diffraction, miller indices, lattices, imperfections, elementary treatment of point and line defects and their
relation to mechanical properties.
Diffusion: Diffusion mechanisms, steady state and non‐steady state diffusion, factors affecting diffusion
Deformation: Slip, twinning, effect of cold and hot working on mechanical properties, principles of recovery,
re‐crystallization and gain growth.

UNIT‐II

Fracture: Types of fracture ductile and brittle, fatigue

Creep: Basic consideration in the selection of material for high and low temperature service, creep curve, effect

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1069
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

of material variables on creep properties, brittle failure at low temperature.

Solidification: Phases in metal system, lever rule, solidification of metal and alloys, solid solution, eutectic,
eutectoid and inter‐metallic compounds, Iron carbon equilibrium diagram, TTT‐diagram. Effect of alloying
elements on TTT diagram, S‐N curve.

UNIT‐III

Lathe: Lathe machine and its types. Major sub‐assemblies of a lathe: Bed, headstock, tail stock, carriage
consisting of saddle, cross‐slide, compound slide, tool post and apron. Work holding devices used in lathe.
Driving mechanisms, apron mechanism, thread cutting mechanism and calculations, features of half‐nut
engagement – disengagement, indexing dial mechanism. Operations performed on lathe machine.
Reciprocating Type Machine Tools: Shaper, Planer and Slotter: Constructional features, basic machines and
kinematics and related calculations.

UNIT – IV

Drilling Machines: Constructional features of bench drilling machine, radial drilling machine, multi‐spindle
drilling machine, feed mechanism and work holding devices, Tool – holding devices. Different drilling
operations: Drilling, reaming, counter boring and countersinking etc. estimation of drilling time.
Milling Machines: Types of general purpose milling machines and their principal parts. Types of milling cutters
and their applications, different milling operations, work‐holding devices, Indexing mechanisms and its types.
Indexing calculations and machining time calculations. Introduction to machining centres.

Textbook(s):
1. Callister “Materials Science and Engineering”: An Introduction, 6th Edition.
2. B.S. Raghuwanshi, “Workshop Technology”, Vol.2, Dhanpat Rai & Sons, 2003.

References:
1. Parashivamurthy K.I “Material Science and Metallurgy”, Pearson.
2. P.C. Sharma, “A Text Book of Production Engineering”, S. Chand, New Delhi, 2004.
3. Bawa H.S., “Workshop Technology”, Vol.2, Tata McGraw Hill, 2004.
4. Sidney H Avner,” Introduction to Physical Metallurgy”, Tata McGraw‐Hill, New Delhi‐1997.
5. Hazra Chandhari S.K., “Elements of Workshop Technology”, Vol.2, Media Promoters, 2003.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1070
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Materials and Machine Technology Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

OAE 6 ME‐OAE ME‐OAE‐2 OME‐326P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Materials and Machine Technology) as
this is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. To study crystal structure of a given specimen.

2. To study crystal imperfections in a given specimen.
3. To study microstructure of metals/alloys.
4. To prepare solidification curve for a given specimen.
5. To study heat treatment processes (Hardening and tempering) of a steel specimen.
6. To perform facing, turning and step turning operations on the given work piece as per the drawing and
dimensions.
7. To perform drilling, tapping and knurling operations on given work piece as per the drawing and
dimensions.
8. To perform threading and undercutting operations on the given work piece as per the drawing and
dimensions.
9. To study the apron mechanism of lathe machine tool.
10. To study simple indexing mechanism on the given workpiece using milling machine tool.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1071
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Mathematical Analysis of Complex Systems L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EE/EEE 7 PCE PCE‐4 EEE‐405T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To understand and analyze complex systems.
2. To apply network theory and game theory in complex shstems.
3. To understand cellular automata and agent‐based modeling.
4. To apply data analysis and machine learning techniques in the analysis of complex systems.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Able to understand and analyze complex systems.
CO 2 Able to apply network theory and game theory in complex shstems.
CO 3 Able to understand cellular automata and agent‐based modeling.
CO 4 Able to apply data analysis and machine learning techniques in the analysis of complex systems.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 ‐ 2 1 ‐ 2
CO 2 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 ‐ 2 1 ‐ 2
CO 3 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 ‐ 2 1 ‐ 2
CO 4 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 ‐ 2 1 ‐ 2

Unit‐ I

Introduction to Complex Systems: Definition and characteristics of complex systems, Examples of complex
systems in various domains (e.g., physics, biology, economics), Basic concepts of complexity science (e.g.,
emergence, self‐organization)
Dynamical Systems Theory: Introduction to dynamical systems and their behavior, Nonlinear dynamics and
chaos theory, Stability analysis and bifurcations in dynamical systems, Lyapunov exponents and fractal
dimensions

Unit‐II

Network Theory and Complex Networks: Introduction to network theory and graph theory, Basic network
metrics (e.g., degree, clustering coefficient), Scale‐free networks and small‐world networks, Community
detection and network motif analysis
Game Theory and Strategic Interactions: Introduction to game theory concepts and principles, Nash
equilibrium and other equilibrium concepts, Evolutionary game theory and replicator dynamics, Evolutionary

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1072
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

stable strategies and dynamics on networks

Unit‐ III

Cellular Automata and Agent‐Based Modeling: Introduction to cellular automata and their applications in
complex systems, Basics of agent‐based modeling and simulation, Emergent behavior and self‐organization in
cellular automata and agent‐based models, Parameter space exploration and sensitivity analysis
Fractals and Self‐Similarity: Introduction to fractals and their properties, Fractal dimensions and scaling laws,
Fractal analysis techniques (e.g., box‐counting, dimension calculation), Applications of fractals in complex
systems (e.g., geography, finance)

Unit‐IV

Optimization Techniques for Complex Systems: Introduction to optimization in complex systems, Genetic
algorithms and evolutionary computation, Particle swarm optimization and other metaheuristic algorithms,
Multi‐objective optimization in complex systems
Data Analysis and Machine Learning: Introduction to data analysis techniques for complex systems, Time series
analysis and forecasting, Clustering and classification algorithms for complex systems, Machine learning
models for complex systems

Textbooks:
1. “Complex Systems: Chaos and Beyond: A Constructive Approach with Applications in Life Sciences” by
Kunihiko Kaneko
2. “Nonlinear Dynamics and Chaos: With Applications to Physics, Biology, Chemistry, and Engineering” by
Steven H. Strogatz

References :
1. “Complexity: A Guided Tour” by Melanie Mitchell
2. “Networks: An Introduction” by Mark Newman
3. “Game Theory: Analysis of Conflict” by Roger B. Myerson

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1073
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Mathematical Analysis of Complex Systems Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EE/EEE 7 PCE PCE‐4 EEE‐405P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Mathematical Analysis of Complex
Systems) as this is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Study the sensitivity to initial conditions and parameter values, bifurcations, and long‐term behavior.
2. Analyze the fractal properties of complex systems using techniques like the box‐counting method or the
Hausdorff dimension.
3. Build and analyze complex networks, such as social networks or computer networks.
4. Set up and analyze strategic interactions between agents in a complex system using game theory.
5. Design and analyze cellular automata models to study emergent behavior in complex systems.
6. Develop agent‐based models to simulate complex systems and analyze their behavior.
7. Analyze time series data from complex systems using tools like Fourier analysis, wavelet analysis, or
autoregressive models.
8. Develop and apply optimization methods to find optimal solutions or parameters in complex systems.
9. Apply data analysis techniques, such as clustering, classification, or regression, to analyze complex systems'
data.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1074
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Mathematical Model for Reliability of Transmission and L P C

Distribution 3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EE 7 PCE PCE‐5 EEE‐429T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To understand the probability theory and reliability functions
2. To evaluate reliability indices
3. To analyse reliability of interconnected systems
4. To analyse reliability of distributed systems
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Ability to understand the probability theory and reliability functions
CO 2 Ability to evaluate reliability indices
CO 3 Ability to analyse reliability of interconnected systems
CO 4 Ability to analyse reliability of distributed systems
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 2 3 3 2 1 1 1 2 2 3 1
CO 2 3 2 3 3 2 1 1 1 2 2 3 1
CO 3 3 2 3 3 2 1 1 1 2 2 3 1
CO 4 3 2 3 3 2 1 1 1 2 2 3 1

UNIT‐ I

Basic Probability Theory: Elements of probability, probability distributions, Random variables, Density and
Distribution functions‐ Binomial distribution‐ Expected value and standard deviation – Binomial distribution,
Poisson distribution, normal distribution, exponential distribution, Weibull distribution. Definition of Reliability:
Definition of terms used in reliability, Component reliability, Hazard rate, derivation of the reliability function in
terms of the hazard rate. Hazard models – Bath tub curve, Effect of preventive maintenance. Measures of
reliability: Mean Time to Failure and Mean Time between Failures.

UNIT‐ II

Operating Reserve Evaluation: Basic concepts – risk indices – PJM methods – security function approach –
rapid start and hot reserve units – Modelling using STPM approach. Bulk Power System Reliability Evaluation:
Basic configuration – conditional probability approach – system and load point reliability indices – weather
effects on transmission lines – Weighted average rate and Markov model – Common mode failures.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1075
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT‐ III

Inter Connected System Reliability Analysis: Probability array method – Two inter connected systems with
independent loads – effects of limited and unlimited tie capacity – imperfect tie – Two connected Systems with
correlated loads – Expression for cumulative probability and cumulative frequency. Distribution System
Reliability Analysis – I (Radial configuration): Basic Techniques – Radial networks –Evaluation of Basic reliability
indices, performance indices – load point and system reliability indices – customer oriented, loss and energy
oriented indices – Examples.

UNIT‐IV

Distribution System Reliability Analysis – II (Parallel Configuration): Basic techniques – inclusion of bus bar
failures, scheduled maintenance – temporary and transient failures – weather effects – common mode failures
–Evaluation of various indices – Examples Substations and Switching Stations: Effects of short‐circuits – breaker
operation – Open and Shortcircuit failures – Active and Passive failures – switching after faults – circuit breaker
model – preventive maintenance – exponential maintenance times.

Textbooks:
1. Reliability Evaluation of Power systems by R. Billinton, R.N.Allan, BS Publications, 2007.
2. Reliability Modeling in Electric Power Systems by J. Endrenyi, John Wiley and Sons, 1978.

References:
1. Reliability Engineering: Theory and Practice by Alessandro Birolini, Springer Publications.
2. An Introduction to Reliability and Maintainability Engineering by Charles Ebeling, TMH Publications.
3. Reliability Engineering by E. Balaguruswamy, TMH Publications.
4. Reliability Engineering by Elsayed A. Elsayed, Prentice Hall Publications.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1076
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Mathematical Model for Reliability of Transmission and L P C

Distribution Lab 2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EE 7 PCE PCE‐5 EEE‐429P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Mathematical Model for Reliability of
Transmission and Distribution) as this is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

Note: Develop program/Simulink model in MATLAB/SCILAB/PYTHON for the following experiments.

1. Sinusoidal Voltages and Currents

2. Equivalent circuit of a Transformer
3. Determination of voltage and power at the sending end, voltage regulation using medium line model
4. Determination of line performance when loaded at receiving end
5. Formation of bus Admittance matrix
6. Load flow Solution using Gauss Seidel Method
7. Load flow solution using Newton Raphson method in Rectangular Coordinates
8. a) Optimal dispatch neglecting Losses b) Optimal dispatch including Losses
9. Transient Response of an RLC Circuit
10. Three phase short circuit analysis in a Synchronous Machine
11. Unsymmetrical Fault Analysis
12. Zbus Building Algorithm

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1077
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Mathematics of Modern Cryptography L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 6 BT‐EAE BT‐EAE‐1 CS‐306T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. Ability of students to understand an overview of the evolution of cryptography.
2. Ability of students to learn real world applications for cryptography.
3. Ability of students to learn complex formulas and equations needed to master the art of cryptography.
4. Ability of students to learn information security novice critical encryption skill
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Understand the concepts of Cryptography and modern protocols with discussion of hashes.
CO 2 Understand Symmetric Ciphers and latest Encryption Methods.
CO 3 Understand cryptanalysis and modern methods.
CO 4 Understand security protocols for protecting data on networks and be able to digitally sign emails and
files.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 1 2 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 2 2 2
CO 2 3 2 2 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 2 2 2
CO 3 3 2 2 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 2 2 2
CO 4 3 2 2 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 1 2 2

UNIT‐I

Cryptography for Data Security: Basic Concepts and Historical Overview, Mathematical Foundations of
Cryptography, Substitution Ciphers, Transposition Ciphers, Combinations, Information Entropy, Quantifying
Information, Confusion and Diffusion, Hamming Distance, Hamming Weight, Kerchkoff's Principle.

UNIT‐II

Symmetric Ciphers and Hashes, Feistel Networks, Cryptographic Keys, S‐Box & P‐BOX,GOST, Blowfish, Two fish,
Skipjack, CAST, FEAL, MARS, Symmetric Methods, ECB, CBC, PCBC, CFB, Substitution, Permutation Networks,
Serpent Algorithm: Serpent S‐Boxes and Key Schedule.

UNIT‐III

Cryptanalysis, Modern Methods: Linear Cryptanalysis, Differential Cryptanalysis, Integral Cryptanalysis, Mod n

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1078
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Cryptanalysis & RSA, Cryptographic Backdoors, The prevalence of backdoors, The future of Cryptography,
Homo morphic Cryptography, Quantum Cryptography.

UNIT – IV

Message Authentication and Hash Function: Authentication requirements, authentication functions, message
authentication code, hash functions, birthday attacks, security of hash functions and MACS, MD5 message
digest algorithm, Secure hash algorithm(SHA). Digital Signatures: Digital Signatures, authentication protocols,
digital signature standards (DSS), proof of digital signature algorithm.

Textbook(s):
1. Modern Cryptography: Applied Mathematics for Encryption and Information Security, TMH, 2015.
2. William Stallings, “Cryptography and Network Security: Principals and Practice”, Prentice Hall, New Jersy.

References:
1. Menezes, P. van Oorschot, S. Vanstone. “Handbook of Applied Cryptography”, CRC press, 1997
2. Jeffrey Hoffstein, Jill Pipher, Joseph H. Silverman, “An Introduction to Mathematical Cryptography”, Springer

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1079
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Mathematics of Modern Cryptography Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 6 BT‐EAE BT‐EAE‐1 CS‐306P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Mathematics of Modern Cryptography)
as this is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Write a program to implement DES and AES Algorithms for Encryption and Decryption.
2. Write a program to implement the RSA Algorithm for Encryption and Decryption.
3. Write a program to implement Caesar Cipher.
4. Write a program to implement Playfair Cipher Substitution Technique.
5. Make a Detailed Report on Network Security Threats covering Structured, Unstructured, Internal and
External Threats.
6. Write a program to implement Blowfish Algorithm.
7. Write a program to calculate the messagedigest of a text using the SHA‐1 algorithm.
8. Write a program to implement the MD5 hashing technique.
9. Study of various S‐Box Properties.
10. Write a program to implement Serpent Algorithm.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1080
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Measurement and Control L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

OAE 6 ICE‐OAE ICE‐OAE‐2 OICE‐322T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To make students able to understand the basic concepts of Measurement & Control systems
2. To make students capable to understand Calibration and Applying Calibration on various applications
3. To make students capable of Analysing various errors, characteristics & time domain analysis pertaining
to measuring systems, Instruments.
4. To make students understand the concept of Transfer Function and hence to Evaluate them using
different Techniques.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 bility to understand basics of Measurement & Control System
CO 2 bility to apply Calibration Technique for calibrating various instruments.
CO 3 Ability to Analyse various errors in measurement system , static & dynamic characteristics of
Instruments , time domain Analysis of various systems.
CO 4 Ability to Evaluate Transfer Function using different Techniques.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 3
CO 2 3 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 2 2 ‐ 3
CO 3 2 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 2 2 ‐ 3
CO 4 2 2 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 3

Unit I

Introduction to Measurement: Measurement& its significance, different methods of measurement,

Classification of measuring instruments, Application of measurement systems.
Standards: Different standards for measurement
Performance Characteristics: Definition of range, span , accuracy, precision, drift, sensitivity, reproducibility,
repeatability, dead zone, resolution, hysteresis, threshold, zero error, noise , linearity, Static characteristics &
dynamic characteristics (Speed of response, fidelity, measuring lag) of Instruments.

Unit II

Testing & Calibration: Significance of testing & Calibration, Standards for calibration, Different calibration
procedures – Primary, Secondary, direct, indirect, routine calibration, calibration of voltmeter and ammeter.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1081
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Analysis of Errors: Definition, types of errors , Uncertainty in measurement

Instruments: Instrumentation amplifier & its applications , Digital storage Oscilloscope

Unit III

Control System Basics: Introduction to basic terms, classification and types of control system , block diagram
and signal flow graphs, Transfer Function , determination of transfer function using block diagram reduction
technique and Mason’s Gain formula
Control System Components: Electrical, Mechanical, Electronic, Servo Motors, Stepper Motors, Magnetic
Amplifier

Unit IV

Time‐Domain Analysis: Time domain performance specifications, transient response of first order & second
order system steady state errors, response with P, PI, PID controllers, limitation of time domain Analysis.

Textbooks:
1. B. C. Nakara & Chaudhry, “Instrumentation Measurement and Analysis”, TATA McGraw‐Hill, New Delhi.
2. Nagrath Gopal, “Control System Engineering” Prentice Hall of India.

References:
1. Patrick F Dunn, Michael P. Davis. “Measurement and Data Analysis for Engineering and Science 4th Edition,
Kindle Edition, CRC Press
2. K. Ogata, “ Modern Control Engineering” Pearson
3. B.C Kuo “ Automatic control System” Prentice Hall of India
4. A.K Sawhney “Electrical & Electronic Measurement & Instrumentation” Dhanpat Rai Publications

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1082
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Measurement and Control Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

OAE 6 ICE‐OAE ICE‐OAE‐2 OICE‐322P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Measurement and Control) as this is
the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. To perform Calibration of Voltmeter using Potentimeter.

2. To perform Calibration of Ammeter using Potentimeter.
3. To perform Calibration of Energy Meter.
4. To study Instrumentation Amplifier
5. To study digital storage Oscilloscope
6. To determination Transfer Function of DC Machine.
7. To observe the effect of P, PI, PID, PD Controller for open loop and closed loop of second order system.
8. To study the speed torque characteristics of SERVO MOTOR.
9. To determination Characteristics of Magnetic Amplifiers
10. Plot unit step response of given transfer function and finds delay time, rise time, peak overshoot.
11. Determination of step & impulse response for a second order unity feedback system

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1083
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Measurement Data Analysis L P C

4 4

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ICE 6 PCE PCE‐1 ICE‐308

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To expose the students the concepts of measurement, error and uncertainty
2. To introduce mean, variance and moments of random variables
3. To introduce the fundamental concepts relevant to the modeling of experimental data
4. To define and identify some basic probability distributions and random variables
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Ability to understand study about the concepts of measurement, error and uncertainty
CO 2 Ability to identify an appropriate theoretical distribution to fit the empirical data and find out the
properties of data.
CO 3 Apply the concept of linear regression to simple prediction problems, confidence and higher order
analysis
CO 4 To Evaluate the mean, variance and moments of random variables
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 ‐ 3
CO 2 3 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ 2 2 ‐ 3
CO 3 3 3 2 2 ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ 2 2 2 3
CO 4 3 3 2 2 ‐ 2 2 2 2 2 2 3

UNIT I

Errors: Types of errors, Methods of error analysis, uncertainty analysis‐ modeling and experimental uncertainty
probabilistic basics of uncertainty, identifying sources of error, systematic and random errors, quantifying
systematic and random errors, measurement uncertainty analysis

UNIT II

Basic Statistical Concepts: Types of measured quantities, central tendency of data, best estimate of true value
data, measurement of dispersion, standard deviation of the sample of means, evaluation of standard deviation
and sample of means by method of coding, evaluation of best estimate mean value and least error in a multiple
set of data.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1084
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT III

Normal Distribution: Gaussian distribution, area under normal distribution curve, confidence level, central limit
test, significance test, introduction to probability, probability distributions‐binomial distribution, poisson
distribution, hypothesis testing and estimation, one sample t test, two sample t test criteria for goodness of fit

UNIT IV

Graphical representation and curve fitting: Equations of approximating curves, graphical representation of
functional relationships, determination of parameters in linear relationships, least square regression analysis,
linear analysis, higher order analysis, multivariable linear analysis, determining the appropriate fit, regression
confidence levels.

Textbooks:
1. B. C. Nakara & Chaudhry, “Instrumentation Measurement and Analysis”, Tata McGraw‐Hill, New Delhi.

References:
2. Patrick F Dunn, Michael P. Davis. “Measurement and Data Analysis for Engineering and Science 4th Edition,
Kindle Edition, CRC Press

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1085
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Mechanical Vibrations L P C
3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ME 6 PCE PCE‐2 MEE‐320T
EAE 7 DT‐EAE DT‐EAE‐4 DT‐425T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To gain the knowledge of mathematical modelling of a physical system and applying the principles of
Newton’s Second Law and conservation of energy to derive the equations of motion.
2. To familiarize with linear systems with degrees of freedom.
3. To study the response of a vibrating system with periodic excitation and understand the principle of
vibration isolation.
4. To gain the knowledge of multi degree freedom of systems.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Develop a mathematical model for a physical system and derive the governing differential equations.
CO 2 Determine the natural frequencies of single and two degrees of freedom systems
CO 3 Determine and analyse the response of machine members or structures in forced vibration with
different excitation frequencies.
CO 4 Understand and develop numerical methods for multi degree of freedom sytems.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 3 3 ‐ 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 2 3 3 3 3 ‐ 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 3 3 3 3 3 ‐ 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 4 3 3 3 3 ‐ 3 ‐ ‐ ‐‐ ‐ ‐ 2

UNIT‐I

Introduction: Types of vibrations, Definitions, Simple Harmonic Motion (S.H.M.), Work done by harmonic force,
Principle of super position applied to SHM, Beats, Fourier theorem and problems.
Undamped (Single Degree of Freedom) Free Vibrations: Derivations for spring mass systems, Methods of
Analysis, Natural frequencies of simple systems, Springs in series and parallel, Torsional and transverse
vibrations, Effect of mass of spring and Problems.

UNIT‐II

Damped Free Vibrations (1DOF): Types of damping, Analysis with viscous damping ‐ Derivations for over,
critical and under damped systems, Logarithmic decrement and Problems.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1086
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Forced Vibrations (1DOF): Introduction, Analysis of forced vibration with constant harmonic excitation ‐
magnification factor, rotating and reciprocating unbalances, excitation of support (relative and absolute
amplitudes), force and motion transmissibility, Energy dissipated due to damping and Problems.

UNIT‐III

Systems with two degrees of Freedom: Principle modes of vibrations, Normal mode and natural frequencies of
systems (without damping) – Simple spring mass systems, masses on tightly stretched strings, double
pendulum, torsional systems, combined rectilinear and angular systems, geared systems and Problems.
Undamped dynamic vibration absorber and Problems.

UNIT – IV

Numerical Methods for multi degree freedom of systems: Introduction, Maxwell’s reciprocal theorem,
Influence coefficients, Rayleigh’s method, Dunkerley’s method, Stodola method, Holzer’s method,
Orthogonality of principal modes, method of matrix iteration and Problems.

Textbook(s):
1. S.S. Rao, Mechanical Vibration, Pearson.
2. V.P. Singh, Mechanical vibration, Dhanpath Rai &.Co.

References:
1. Thomson, William T, Theory of Vibration with Application, Pearson Education.
2. Graham Kelley,S., Mechanical Vibration – Schaums Outline Series, TMH
3. F.S. Tse, Morse &Hinkle, Mechanical Vibration, Allyn and Bacon.
4. G.S. Grover & Nigam, Mechanical Vibrations, Nem Chand & Bros.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1087
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Mechanical Vibrations Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ME 6 PCE PCE‐2 MEE‐320P
EAE 7 DT‐EAE DT‐EAE‐4 DT‐425P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Mechanical Vibrations) as this is the
practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Determine natural frequency of compound pendulum, equivalent simple pendulum system.

2. Determine natural frequency for longitudinal vibrations of helical springs, and springs in series and parallel
3. Determine natural frequency and nodal points for single rotor and two‐rotor vibratory system
4. Frequency and acceleration measurements of any one vibrating system using National Instruments Lab
VIEW software, DAQ and accelerometer
5. Determination of damping coefficient of any system/media
6. Experimental balancing of single and multi‐rotor system
7. Measurement of vibration response of a system
8. Vibration analysis of mechanical system using MATLAB/SCILAB/GNU Octave
9. Experiment using Frahm tachometer to measure frequency of vibration or speed of rotating parts of a
machine.
10. Experiment on whirling of shaft.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1088
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Mechanics and Design of Solids L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

OAE 7 ME‐OAE ME‐OAE‐4 OME‐441T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To understand about different types of load conditions and determine the stress, strain and change in
geometrical parameters of different types of materials.
2. To understand the resistance mechanism of beams due to bending and shearing.
3. To understand the principal stresses, behaviour of torsional members, columns and failure
mechanisms in materials, the difference between thin & thick pressure vessels and the design of
springs.
4. To learn to design springs, power screws, shafts and pipes.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Evaluate the stress induced in structural members subjected to tension, compression, tangential and
thermal loads.
CO 2 Analyse the performance of the beam for different types of loads and support conditions using SFD
and BMD and determine the bending stress, shear stress and deflection induced.
CO 3 Analyse the stress induced in columns and members under torsion, distinguish between thin and thick
pressure vessels and estimate the different stresses induced in pressure vessels and springs.
CO 4 Developing the practical skills to design and develop any industrial mechanical / machine part.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 3 3 ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 2 3 3 3 3 ‐ 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 3 3 3 3 3 ‐ 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 4 3 3 3 2 ‐ 3 ‐ ‐ ‐‐ ‐ ‐ 2

UNIT‐I

Simple Stresses & strains: Concept of stress and strain. Hooke’s law, Stress‐Strain diagram, factor of safety,
Elongation of tapering bars of circular and rectangular cross sections, Elongation due to self‐weight. Saint
Venant’s principle, Compound bars, state of simple shear, complementary shear stress, Volumetric stresses and
Strains, Elastic constants and their relationship, Thermal stresses, Compound section subjected to thermal
stresses, Sudden, gradual & impact load, Strain energy & Proof Resilience, Strain energy under normal and
shear stress.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1089
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT‐II

Shear Force and Bending Moment in Beams: Types of beams, supports and loadings, Definition of bending
moment and shear force, Sign conventions, relationship between load intensity, Bending moment and shear
force, Shear force and bending moment diagrams for statically determinate beams subjected to points load,
Uniformly distributed loads, Uniformly varying loads, Couple and their combinations.
Bending and Shear Stresses in Beams: Introduction, Pure bending theory, Assumptions, Derivation of bending
equation, Modulus of rupture, Section modulus, Flexural rigidity, Beam of uniform strength, Expression for
transverse shear stress in beams, Bending and shear stress distribution diagrams for circular, rectangular, ‘I’,
and ‘T’ sections, Castigliano’s theorem, Shear Centre (only concept).
Slope and deflection of Beams: Definition of slope, Deflection and curvature, Sign conventions, Derivation of
moment curvature equation, Double integration method, Macaulay’s method and Principle of superposition
method, Slope and deflection for standard loading cases and for determinate prismatic beams subjected to
point loads, UDL, UVL and couple.

UNIT‐III

Columns: Introduction, Short, Medium and Long columns, Slenderness ratio, Euler’s theory; Assumptions,
Derivation for Euler’s Buckling load for different end conditions, Limitations of Euler’s theory, Rankine‐Gordon’s
formula for columns.
Torsion: Stresses and strains in pure torsion of solid circular shafts and hollow circular shafts, Power
transmitted by shafts, Shaft in series and parallel, Combined bending and torsion. Springs: Analysis of Close‐
coiled helical springs, Springs in series and parallel, Stress in leaf springs.
Compound stresses and strains: State of stress at a point, General two‐dimensional stress system, Principal
stresses and strains, Principal planes. Mohr’s circle of stresses. Pressure vessels: Thin cylindrical and Spherical
vessels subjected to internal pressure, Hoop stresses, Longitudinal stress and change in volume, Thick cylinders
subjected to internal and external pressure, Lame’s equation, Radial and hoop stress distribution.

UNIT – IV

Principles of mechanical design, systematic design process, aesthetic and ergonomic considerations in design,
use of standards in design. Manufacturing consideration in design: casting, machining, forging.
Design of Elements: Force analysis and design of power screw jack,uses and design of close coiled helical
springs, design of shafts, design of pipes.

Textbook(s):
1. Sadhu Singh, “Strength of Materials”, Khanna Pub.
2. S.S. Bhavikatti, “Strength of Materials”, Vikas Publishers (2000).

References:
1. S.P. Timoshenko and J. Gere, “Elements of Strength of Materials”, East‐West affiliated, New Delhi.
2. J.E. Shigley& C.R. Mischke, "Mechanical Engineering Design”, Tata McGraw Hill Co. Inc.
3. L.S. Sri Nath et.al., “Strength of Materials”, McMillan, New Delhi;(2001).
4. Eger P. Popov, “Engg. Mechanics of solids”, Prentice Hall, New Delhi;(1998).
5. Roger T. Fenner, “Mechanics of Solids”, U.K. B.C. Publication, New Delhi;(1990).
6. V.B. Bhandari, “Machine Design”, Tata McGraw Hill.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1090
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Mechanics and Design of Solids Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

OAE 7 ME‐OAE ME‐OAE‐4 OME‐441P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Mechanics and Design of Solids) as this
is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. To perform the Hardness Test (Rockwell, Brinell &Vicker’s test) and find the Hardness Number of different
materials (MS, HSS, Wood, C.I., Al specimens).
2. To perform the Impact Test on a standard notched specimen to evaluate its Impact Number.
3. To perform the Tensile/Compression Test in ductile/brittle materials, draw a stress‐strain curve and
evaluate various mechanical properties of a given specimen.
4. To perform Shear Test and find maximum (ultimate) shear strength of given test specimen.
5. To perform the Bending /Deflection Test on a beam and evaluate its Young’s Modulus.
6. To perform the Torsion Test and find modulus of rigidity, rupture stress (maximum shear stress), shear
stress at yield point.
7. To determine Buckling loads of long columns with different end conditions.
8. To design a shaft carrying a pulley and a gear, mounted on two bearings, transmitting power.
9. To design a Screw Jack for lifting a given load.
10. To design a closed coiled helical spring for the valve mechanism of an engine.
11. To design pipes.
12. To find the Shear Modulus of two different materials; Aluminum and Steel using two twist and bent test
rigs are used.
13. To determine the endurance limit of the given specimen under fatigue or cyclic loading.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1091
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Mechatronics L P C
4 4

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

MAE 6 PC PC MAC‐310

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To study the mechanical actuation system, hydraulic and pneumatic actuation system and smart
materials.
2. To gain knowledge about electrical actuation system, and to have the overview of digital electronics
and systems.
3. To have the knowledge of various sensors, transducers and their application. Also to learn the
techniques of system interfacing and data acquisition.
4. Introduction to signal conditioning and to study about programmable logic controller learn ladder
programming. Study various case studies for understanding mechatronic approach to design.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Distinguish between mechanical, hydraulic and pneumatic actuation systems.
CO 2 Develop pneumatic and electro pneumatic sequencing problems with the help of electrical actuation
and digital electronics systems.
CO 3 Describe the characteristics of sensors, transducers, signal conditioning & data acquisition used in
mechatronic systems.
CO 4 Examine the structure, principles of operation & ladder programming of PLC and apply the concepts to
study the real life industrial problems.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 3 2 2 ‐ 3
CO 2 3 3 3 2 2 2 ‐ 3 2 2 ‐ 3
CO 3 3 2 3 2 2 2 ‐ 3 2 2 ‐ 3
CO 4 3 3 3 3 3 2 1 3 2 2 ‐ 3

UNIT – I

Mechanical Actuating Systems: Types of motion, Degrees of freedom, constraints, Kinematic Chains, Cam,
Gear and gear trains, Ratchet and pawl Belt drive, chain drive, Bearing, pre loading. Smart materials: Shape
Memory Alloy, Piezoelectric and Magnetostrictive Actuators: Materials, Static and dynamic characteristics,
illustrative examples for positioning, vibration isolation, etc.
Hydraulic & Pneumatic Actuation Systems: Fluid power systems, hydraulic systems, Pneumatic systems,
system structure and signal flow, hydraulic pumps and Pressure Control Valves and regulation, air compressors
and treatment, Cylinders, Direction Control Valves, Process control valves, Rotary Actuators, Accumulators,

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1092
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Amplifiers, and Pneumatic Sequencing Problems.

UNIT – II

Electrical Actuation Systems: Switching Devices, Mechanical Switches – SPST, SPDT, DPDT, keypads; Relays,
Electronic sensors, Diodes, Thyristors, Transistors, solenoid operating Valve, Solenoid Operated Hydraulic and
Pneumatic Valves, Electro‐Pneumatic Sequencing Problems. Control of DC Motors, Permanent Magnet DC
Motors, Bush less Permanent Magnet DC Motors, AC Motors and speed controls, Stepper Motors and Controls,
Servo Motors.
Digital Electronics and Systems: Number Systems, Binary Mathematics, Boolean Algebra, Gates and Integrated
Circuits Like 7408, 7402, Karnaugh Maps, Application of Logic Gates as: Parity Generators, Digital Comparators,
BCD to Decimal Decoders, Flip Flops and applications, sequential logic, Microprocessor and microcontrollers,
programming, instruction set, assembly language, C programming for Intel 8051 / 8082 micro‐controller.

UNIT – III

Sensors, Transducers and Application: Performance Terminology, Static and Dynamic Characteristics,
Displacement, Position and Proximity Sensors, Potentiometer Sensors, Strain Gauge Element, LVDT, Optical
Encoders, Pneumatic Sensors, Hall Effect Sensors, Tachogenerators, Strain Gauge Load Cell, Thermostats, Photo
Darlington. Interfacing Sensors in Mechatronic System.
System Interfacing and Data Acquisition: Data acquisition systems, Data loggers, SCADA, Interfacing
requirements, Buffers, Darlington Pair, Handshaking, Serial and Parallel Port Interfacing, Peripheral Interface
Adapters, Analog to Digital Conversion, Digital To Analog Conversion, Sample and Hold Amplifiers, Multiplexers,
Time Division Multiplexing, Digital Signal Processing, Pulse Modulation, Component Interconnection and
Impedance Matching, Interfacing Motor drives. Electrical power supply and protection.
Introduction to Signal Conditioning: Signal Conditioning Processes, Inverting Amplifiers, Non Inverting
Amplifiers, Summing, Integrating, Differential, Logarithmic Amplifiers, Comparators, Amplifiers Error, Filtering,
wheatstone Bridge, Temperature Compensation, Thermocouple Compensation.

UNIT – IV

Programmable Logic Controllers: Programmable logic controllers (PLC) Structure, Input / Output Processing,
principles of operation, PLC versus computer, Programming Languages, programming using Ladder Diagrams,
Logic Functions, Latching, Sequencing, Timers, Internal Relays And Counters, Shift Registers, Master and Jump
Controls, Jumps, Data Movement, Code Conversion, Data handling and manipulation, selecting a PLC.
Case studies: Mechatronic approach to design, Boat Auto pilot, high speed tilting train, automatic car park
system, coin counter, engine management system, autonomous mobile system, antilock brake system control,
Auto‐Focus Camera, Printer, Domestic Washing Machine, Optical Mark Reader, Bar Code Reader and Pick and
Place robot Arm, Using PLC for extending and retracting a pneumatic piston and two pneumatic pistons in
different combinations, control of vibrating machine, control of process tank, control of conveyor motor,
detecting, sorting and packaging unit.

Textbooks:
1. W. Bolton, “Mechatronics, “Electronic control systems in Mechanical & Electrical Engineering”, Pearson
Education Ltd., 2003.
2. K. P. Ramachandran, G.K. Vijayaraghavan, M.S. Balasundaram, Mechatronics, “Integrated Mechanical
Electronic Systems”, Wiley.

References:
1. Joji P, “Pneumatic Controls”, Wiley.
2. Dan Necsulescu, “Mechatronics”, Pearson.
3. David g Alciatore, Michael B Histand, “Introduction to Mechatronics and measurement systems”, MGH.
4. A Smaili, F Mrad, “Mechatronics, “Integrated Technologies for Intelligent Machines”, Oxford Higher
Education.
5. NitaigourPremchandMahalik, “Mechatronics Principles, Concepts & Application”, TMH, 2003.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1093
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Mechatronics Lab L P C
2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

MAE 6 PC PC MAC‐356

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Mechatronics) as this is the practical
component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. To study the terminology and use of LADSIM software and develop simple basic circuits on software using
inputs and outputs and develop AND, OR and NOT circuits.
2. To study the use of Latch, flags, timers, counters, BSR, BSL in LADSIM software and develop a circuit to
control an automated inspection conveyor.
3. To study various pneumatic actuation and control valves available in laboratory and develop basic circuits
A+A‐, A+A‐A+A‐.....,A+B+A‐B‐A+B+A‐......, with button starts.
4. To study various electro‐pneumatic control valves and relays available in laboratory and develop basic
circuits A+A‐, A+A‐A+A‐.....,A+B+A‐B‐, using solenoid‐solenoid direction control valves and A+A‐, A+A‐A+A‐
....., using solenoid‐spring direction control valves.
5. To develop higher level pneumatic and electro‐pneumatic circuits using flow control and safety valves of
A+B+B‐A‐, A+A‐B+B‐ on pneumatic sequencer; A+A‐B+B‐, A+B+A‐B‐ using solenoid‐spring direction control
valves.
6. To program a Vinytics make PLC through Keypad and develop basic programs to demonstrate use of Inputs,
outputs, AND inverse, OR and OR Inverse commands.
7. To automate a bottling plant and a traffic control unit using LADSIM simulator.
8. Wire an industrial PLC and program it for AND/ OR/ NAND / XOR logic
9. Wire an industrial PLC and program for single push button start ‐ stop logic.
10. To develop higher level electro‐pneumatic circuits using flow control valves and relays of A+B+C+‐A‐B‐C‐.
11. Wire an industrial PLC and program Timer ON Delay and Counter.
12. To develop higher level electro‐pneumatic circuits using flow control valves and relays of A+B+C+‐A‐B‐C‐.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1094
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Medical Image Processing, Analysis and Reconstruction L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ECE 7 PCE PCE‐5 ECE‐421T
EAE 7 IPCV‐EAE IPCV‐EAE‐4B IPCV‐455T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To define the principles of image sampling, quantization, enhancement and filtering techniques
2. Todiscover the different image compression methods and morphological based processes and
machine learning techniques for image segmentation
3. To develop the methods of image registration and visualization for medical applications
4. To acquire the student with the techniques of shape analysis and image classification using neural
networks for brain computer interface and computer aided diagnosis.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Comprehend image sampling and DFT and process the given medical images to enhance them
CO 2 Explore supervised & unsupervised learning algorithms and apply them for solving problems.
CO 3 Apply compression techniques and morphological operations for segmentation
CO 4 Design and develop algorithms to process and visualize images from different modalities
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 1 ‐ 2 1 ‐ 2
CO 2 3 3 3 3 2 2 1 ‐ 2 1 ‐ 2
CO 3 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 ‐ 2 1 ‐ 2
CO 4 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 ‐ 2 1 ‐ 2

UNIT I

Image Fundamentals : Image perception‐Image model‐Image sampling and quantization ‐2D DFT and DCT
Image Enhancement and Filtering: Image enhancement‐Histogram modelling, Spatial operations ‐Image
restoration, Contrast manipulation, histogram equalization, Laplacian derivatives, Sobel and Klisch operators,
rank operators –textural analysis, Noise models, Image degradation model, Wiener filtering, Maximum entropy
restoration

UNIT II

Medical Image Analysis: Introduction of X‐ray, CT, MRI, Ultrasound Imaging, Texture in Medical Images:
structural & statistical.
Image Segmentation: Region Growing and Clustering, Active contours, Machine Learning based segmentation

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1095
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

algorithms ‐Singular Value Decomposition (SVD), Principal Component Analysis and its applications, Support
Vector Machine and its applications, Independent Component Analysis and its application

UNIT III

Image Registration and Visualization: Image Registration, Medical image Fusion, SPECT/CT, MR/CT, PET/CT,
Image visualization, Volume Rendering, Surface rendering and Maximum Intensity Projection.
Shape Analysis and Image Classification: Topological attributes ‐Shape orientation descriptors, Fourier
descriptors, K means clustering, application of machine learning, deep learning, Neural Network approaches,
Statistical Parametric Mapping in Imaging ‐Regression analysis.

UNIT IV

Image reconstruction from projections, Radon transform, Methods for generating projection data,
Transmission tomography, Reflection tomography, Emission tomography, Magnetic resonance imaging
Image Compression and Morphological Processing: Image compression –Lossyand lossless Compression,
Predictive techniques ‐Dilation, Erosion, Open, Close, Skeleton operations, Top‐hat algorithm ‐Morphology
based segmentation
Recent advances & Analysis: Retinal, CT, MRI, ultrasound, histology images and Brain Computer Interface,
Patient specific modelling ‐Brain Computer Interface (BCI) and its applicationsin Neuroscience.

Textbook(s):
1. Reiner Salzer, “Biomedical Imaging: Principles and Applications”, 2012, 1stEdition, Wiley, New Jersey

References:
1. Jonathan Wolpaw, Elizabeth Winter, (Eds.) “Brain‐Computer Interfaces: Principles and Practice”, 2012,
1stEdition, Oxford University Press, Oxford.
2. Pears, Nick, Liu, Yonghuai, Bunting, Peter (Eds.) “3D Imaging, Analysis and Appliations”, 2012, 2ndEdition,
Springer, Berlin.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1096
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Medical Image Processing, Analysis and Reconstruction Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ECE 7 PCE PCE‐5 ECE‐421P
EAE 7 IPCV‐EAE IPCV‐EAE‐4B IPCV‐455P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Medical Image Processing, Analysis
and Reconstruction) as this is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Implementation of mean and median filters using MATLAB or other software. Use them to filter different
medical images.
2. To implement theThresholding algorithm to different medical and non‐medical images using MATLAB or
other software.
3. Implementation ofthe edge detection concepton different medical images using MATLAB or other
software.
4. To Perform Convolution operation on Images.
5. Implement different morphological tasks including dilation, and erosionusing MATLAB or other software.
6. Apply Morphological operations on different medicalimages.
7. Computation of Mean, Standard Deviation, the Correlation coefficient of the givenMedical Image
8. Write a Program for the Reconstruction of Images from Projection Data.
9. Write a Program to Deblur Medical Images using Regularized Filter and Weiner Filter.
10. Write a Program to do 3‐D Brain Tumour Segmentation using Deep Learning.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1097
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Metal Forming and Press Working L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ME 6 PCE PCE‐3 MEE‐332T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To understand the concept of different metal forming process.
2. To understand the metal forming processes both analytically and numerically.
3. To Design various elements of metal forming processes.
4. To develop approaches and solutions to analyze metal forming processes and the associated problems
and flaws.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Understand the concept of different metal forming process.
CO 2 Approach metal forming processes both analytically and numerically.
CO 3 Design various elements of metal forming processes.
CO 4 Develop approaches and solutions to analyze metal forming processes and the associated problems
and flaws.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 3 3 ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 2 3 3 3 3 ‐ 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 3 3 3 3 3 ‐ 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 4 3 3 3 2 ‐ 3 ‐ ‐ ‐‐ ‐ ‐ 2

UNIT‐I

Introduction to Metal Forming: Classification of metal forming processes, advantages and limitations, stress‐
strain relations in elastic and plastic deformation. Concepts of true stress, true strain, triaxial& biaxial stresses.
Determination of flow stress, principal stresses, yield criteria and their significance, Tresca & Von‐Mises yield
criteria, concepts of plane stress & plane strain. Deformation mechanisms, Hot and Cold working processes and
its effect on mechanical properties. Simple numerical problems.
Effects of Parameters: Metallurgical aspects of metal forming, slip, twinning mechanics of plastic deformation,
Effects of Temperature, strain rate, friction and lubrication, hydrostatic pressure in metalworking, Deformation
zone geometry, workability of materials, and Residual stresses in wrought products. Simple numerical
problems.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1098
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT‐II

Forging: Classification of forging processes. Forging machines equipment. Expressions for forging pressures &
load in open die forging and closed die forging by slab analysis, concepts of friction hill and factors affecting it.
Die‐design parameters. Material flow lines in forging, forging defects, residual stresses in forging. Simple
numerical problems.
Rolling: Classification of rolling processes. Types of rolling mills, expression for rolling load. Roll separating
force. Frictional losses in bearing, power required in rolling, effects of front & back tensions, friction, friction
hill. Maximum possible reduction. Defects in rolled products. Rolling variables. Simple numerical problems.
Drawing: Drawing equipment& dies, expression for drawing load by slab analysis, power requirement.
Redundant work and its estimation, optimal cone angle & dead zone formation, drawing variables, Tube
drawing, classification of tube drawing. Simple numerical problems.

UNIT‐III

Extrusion: Types of extrusion processes, extrusion equipment & dies, deformation, lubrication & defects in
extrusion. Extrusion dies, extrusion of seamless tubes. Extrusion variables. Simple problems.
Sheet Metal Forming: Forming methods, dies & punches, progressive die, compound die, combination die.
Rubber forming. Open back inclinable press (OBI press), piercing, blanking, bending, deep drawing, LDR in
drawing, forming limit criterion, defects of drawn products, stretch forming. Roll bending & contouring. Simple
problems.

UNIT‐IV

High Energy Rate Forming Methods & Powder Metallurgy: High Energy Rate Forming Methods: Principles,
advantages and applications, explosive forming, electro hydraulic forming, Electromagnetic forming.
Powder Metallurgy: Basic steps in Powder metallurgy brief description of methods of production of metal
powders, conditioning and blending powders, compaction and sintering application of powder metallurgy
components, advantages and limitations.

Text books:
1. Amithab Gosh & A.K.Malik, “Manufacturing Science”, East‐West press 2001.
2. O. P. Khanna & Lal,” Production Technology Vol‐II “, Dhanpat Rai Publications‐2012.

Reference Books:
1. E.Paul, Degramo, J.T.Black, Ranold, A.K “.Materials & Process in Manufacturing”, PHI, 2002.
2. S.K.Hajra Choudhury,” Elements of Workshop Technology Vol 1”, Media Promoters & Publishers, 2008.
3. Lal G K,”Fundamentals of Manufacturing Processes” , Narosa.
4. P. C. Sharma,” Textbook of Production Engineering”, S Chand & Company Ltd.
5. 2. R.K Jain, Production “Technology (Manufacturing process technology and Automation”, Khanna
Publishers‐2004.
6. G.E.Dieter, “Mechanical metallurgy (SI Units)”, McGraw hill Pub‐2001.
7. B.S Raghuwanshi, “A Course in Workshop Technology Vol: 1”, Manufacturing Process, Dhanpat Rai, 2014.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1099
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Metal Forming and Press Working Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ME 6 PCE PCE‐3 MEE‐332P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Metal Forming and Press Working) as
this is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. To Study the general safety rules for metalworking operations

2. To carry out cold rolling of nonferrous metal and study its effect on properties
3. To determine the coefficient of interfacial friction during plastic deformation of metals by means of
compression of a ring between two compression platens.
4. To carry out the hot rolling process
5. To make rod/pipe/falt sheet bending using Mechanical/Hydraulic press (or) to perform Bending Operation
and calculate bending force.
6. To draw an Aluminum wire of Ø3.35mm from Ø 9.50mm Rod
7. To study the deep drawing process.
8. To learn the forming characteristics of sheet metal specimens with Deep Drawing operation.
9. To carry out the Extrusion process
10. To examine the microstructure of rolled, forged, extruded and drawn parts
11. To carry out the Forging process

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1100
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Metro Systems Engineering L P C

4 4

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 7 IE‐EAE IE‐EAE‐3 IE‐435

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To introduce the concepts of different metro systems.
2. To study different types of construction methods for elevated and underground section.
3. To analyse problems and determine the construction quality and safety.
4. To design mechanical and rolling stock according to the latest techniques.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Understand the need of the metro and its construction methods.
CO 2 Analyse the quality and safety systems.
CO 3 Determine the factors involved in operation, control, and monitoring.
CO 4 Design the tunnelling ventilation systems, fire control systems of Metro.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 2 ‐ 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 ‐ 1 ‐ 1
CO 2 3 2 ‐ 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 ‐ 1 ‐ 1
CO 3 3 2 ‐ 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 ‐ 1 ‐ 1
CO 4 3 2 ‐ 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 ‐ 1 ‐ 1

UNIT‐I

General: Overview of Metro Systems; Need for Metros; Routing studies; Basic Planning and Financials.
Construction Methods: Civil Engineering‐ Overview and construction methods for elevated and underground
stations. Viaduct spans and bridges; Underground tunnels; Depots; Commercial and Service buildings for
metros. Initial Surveys & Investigations for metro constructions.

UNIT‐II

Quality & Safety Systems: Basics of Construction Planning & Management, Construction Quality & Safety
Systems. Traffic integration to improve metro efficiency, multimodal transfers, and pedestrian facilities;
Environmental and social safeguards; Track systems‐permanent way. Facilities Management required for
smooth transfer and working.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1101
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT‐III

Operation Control Centre: Electronics and Communication Engineering‐ Signalling systems used in metro;
Automatic fare collection; Operation Control Centre (OCC and BCC); Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition
system and other control systems; Platform Screen Doors. Biometric Token System, Driverless Train
Operations, Green Energy, Head on Generation (HOG) System and LiDAR Technology.

UNIT – IV

Mechanical & Rolling Stock: Mechanical & TVS, AC: Rolling stock, vehicle dynamics and structure; Tunnel
Ventilation systems; Air conditioning for stations and buildings; Fire control systems; Lifts and Escalators.
Electrical: OHE, Traction Power; Substations‐ TSS and ASS; Power SCADA; Standby and Back‐up systems; Green
buildings, Carbon credits and clear air mechanics.

Textbook(s):
1. Paul Garbutt, World Metro Systems, Capital Transport Pub; 2nd Edition, 1997.
2. Smart Metro Station Systems: Data Science and Engineering, Elsevier ‐ Health Sciences Division, 2022

References:
1. Procedure for Safety Certification and Technical Clearance of Metro Systems Government of India Ministry
of Railways December 2015 Urban Transport & High‐Speed Directorate Research Designs & Standards
Organisation Manak Nagar, Lucknow
2. Quanwei Liu,Key Technologies of Metro Construction in Hard Rock Stratum,Qingdao West Coast Rail
Transit Co., Ltd, China,September 2020

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1102
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Metrology and Instrumentation L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ME 5 PC PC MEC‐307

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. Design of part, tolerances and fits.
2. Principles of measuring instruments and gauges and their uses.
3. Determine error and analysing uncertainty in the measurements.
4. Evaluation and inspection of surface roughness and textures.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Explain the basic knowledge of measurements, metrology, and measuring devices.
CO 2 Understand the fundamentals and the working of comparators.
CO 3 Understand the fundamentals of various methods for the measurements of screw threads and the
working of optical measuring instruments.
CO 4 Understand various advanced measuring devices and machine tool metrology and describe application
of principle of metrology and measurements in industries.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 3 3 ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 2 3 3 3 3 ‐ 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 3 3 3 3 3 ‐ 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 4 3 3 3 2 ‐ 3 ‐ ‐ ‐‐ ‐ ‐ 2

UNIT‐I

Principles of Measurement: Definition of Metrology, the difference between precision and accuracy. Sources
of errors: Controllable and Random Errors, Effects of Environment and Temperature, Effects of support,
alignment errors, application of Least Square principles, and errors in measurement of quality which is the
function of other variables.
Length Standards: Line standards, end standards, and wavelength standards, transfer from line standards to
end standards. Numerical based on line standards. Slip gauges – its use and care, methods of building different
heights using different sets of slip gauges.
Limits, Fits, and Tolerances: Various definitions, IS919‐1963, different types of fits, and methods to provide
these fits. Numerical to calculate the limits, fits, and tolerances as per IS 919‐ 1963. ISO system of limits and
fits; Gauges and their types, limit gauges – plug and ring gauges. Gauge Design – Taylor’s Principle, wear
allowance on gauges. Different methods of giving tolerances on gauges, Numerical.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1103
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT‐II

Comparators: Mechanical Comparators: Johanson Mikrokator and Sigma Mechanical Comparator. Mechanical‐
optical comparator. Principles of Electrical and electronic comparators. Pneumatic comparators – advantages,
systems of Pneumatic Gauging:‐ Flow type and back pressure type, Principle of working of back pressure
gauges, different types of sensitivities and overall magnification, Solex Pneumatic gauges and differential
comparators. Numerical based on pneumatic comparators.

UNIT‐III

Straightness and Flatness: Definition of Straightness and Flatness error. Numerical based on the determination
of straightness error of straight edge with the help of spirit level and auto collimator. Numerical based on the
determination of flatness error of a surface plate with the help of spirit level or auto‐collimator.
Screw Thread Measurement: Errors in threads, Measurement of elements of screw threads – major dia, minor
dia, pitch, flank angle, and effective diameter (Two and three‐wire methods). Effect of errors in pitch and flank
angles and its mathematical derivation. Numerical.

UNIT – IV

Instrument Calibration Methods: Introduction, Definition of Calibration, Need for Calibration, Characteristics
of Calibration, Calibration Overall Requirements and Procedures, Calibration Methods/Procedures, Calibration
Laboratory Requirements, Industry Practices and Regulations, Calibration and Limitations of a Digital System,
Verification and Calibration of CNC Machine Tool, Inspection of the Positioning Accuracy of CNC Machine Tools,
CNC Machine Error Assessment and Calibration, Calibration of 3‐axis CNC Machine Tool, Calibration of a
Coordinate Measuring Machine (CMM)
Surface Texture: Introduction, different types of irregularities, standard measures for assessment and
measurement of surface finish.

Textbook(s):
1. R.K. Jain, “Engineering Metrology”, Khanna Publishers, Delhi.
2. I.C. Gupta, “Engineering Metrology”, Dhanpat Rai Publications, Delhi.

References:
1. F.W. Galyer& C.R. Shotbolt, “Metrology for Engineers”, ELBS edition.
2. Samir Mekid, Metrology and Instrumentation ‐ Practical Applications for Engineering and Manufacturing,
John Wiley & Sons, Inc. and ASME Press 2022.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1104
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Metrology and Instrumentation Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ME 5 PC PC MEC‐355

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Metrology and Instrumentation) as this
is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Study of Slip Gauges along with their usage i.e. wringing of Slip Gauges
2. Study and working of simple measuring instruments: Vernier calipers and micrometer.
3. To study bore gauge diameter with bore gauge.
4. Measurement of angle using sine bar and slip gauges, Study of limit gauges.
5. Study and angular measurement of a given piece using bevel protractor. Study of dial indicator & its
constructional details.
6. Measurement of effective diameter of a screw thread using 3 wire method.
7. To measure major diameter, minor diameter and pitch of screw thread using Profile Projector.
8. To measure major diameter, minor diameter and pitch of screw thread using Tool Maker’s microscope.
9. To measure the surface roughness using MAHR Pocket Surf instrument.
10. To find the flatness error in surface plate.
11. Study of various equipment(s) viz. Laser Distance measuring device, micro weighing device, sound level
meter, etc.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1105
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Micro‐electromechanical Systems (MEMS) and Sensors L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ECE 7 PCE PCE‐4 ECE‐409T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. An impression of Microsystems and their applications in a variety of branches of Engineering and basic
sciences.
2. Sketch micro machined passive components
3. Investigate consistency issues in MEMS structures
4. Replicate/Model MEMS sensor and packaging techniques
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Understanding various RF for MEMS devices, their parameters
CO 2 Comprehending the MEMS switches and relays
CO 3 Model micro machined passive components such as Inductors, Capacitors, Switches, Transmission
lines and Antennas
CO 4 Understand the concept of micro machined sensor integration and packaging standards of MEMS
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 1 3 2 2 3 3 1 ‐ 2 1 1 2
CO 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 1 ‐ 2 1 1 2
CO 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 1 ‐ 2 1 1 2
CO 4 3 3 3 3 3 3 1 ‐ 2 1 1 2

UNIT‐ I

Introduction and origin of MEMS, Micro fabrications for MEMS, RF MEMS for microwave applications,
Electromechanical transducers, Electrothermal actuators, Microsensing for MEMS, Materials for MEMS,
fabrication techniques, Electrical and chemical properties, Growth and deposition, Thin films for MEMS and
their deposition techniques, Oxide film formation by thermal oxidation, Deposition of silicon dioxide and silicon
nitride, Bulk micromachining for silicon‐based MEMS, Isotropic and orientation‐dependent wet etching, Dry
etching, Silicon surface micromachining, scanning method.

UNIT‐ II

Introduction to MEMS switches; Capacitive shunt and series switches: Physical description, circuit model and
electromagnetic modeling; Techniques of MEMS switch fabrication and packaging; Design of MEMS switches.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1106
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT‐ III

Inductors and Capacitors: Micro machined passive elements; Micro machined inductors: Effect of inductor
layout, reduction of stray capacitance of planar inductors, folded inductors, variable inductors and polymer‐
based inductors; MEMS Capacitors: Gap‐tuning and area‐tuning capacitors, dielectric tunable capacitors.

UNIT‐ IV

MEMS Microsensors (Thermal), Micromachined Microsensors (Mechanical), MEMS Pressure and Flow Sensor,
Micromachined Flow Sensors, MEMS Inertial Sensors, Micromachined Microaccelerometers for MEMS, MEMS
Accelerometers for Avionics, Temperature Drift and Damping Analysis, Piezoresistive Accelerometer
Technology, MEMS Capacitive Accelerometer, MEMS Gyro Sensor, MEMS for Space Application,
Integration and Packaging: Role of MEMS packages, types of MEMS packages, module packaging, packaging
materials and reliability issues.

Textbook(s):
1. Vijay K. Varadan K.J. Vinoy and K.A. Jose, “RF MEMS and Their Applications”, John Wiley USA
2. Mohamed Gad‐el‐Hak, “MEMS Design and Fabrication Edited”, Taylor and Francis.

References:
1. Vijay K Varadan , K J Vinoy and K A Jose, “RF MEMS and their Applications”, John Wiley & Sons, 2002
2. Rebeiz G M, “MEMS: Theory Design and Technology”, John Wiley & Sons, 1999
3. De Los Santos H J, “RF MEMS Circuit Design for Wireless Communications”, Artech House, 1999
4. Christian C. Enz & Andreas Kaiser, “MEMS‐based Circuits and Systems for Wireless Communication”,
Springer

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1107
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Micro‐electromechanical Systems (MEMS) and Sensors Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ECE 7 PCE PCE‐4 ECE‐409P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Micro‐electromechanical Systems
(MEMS) and Sensors) as this is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Presentation to the software COMSOL and its relevance in MEMS/Microfluidics.

2. Simulation of MEMS Sensors/Actuators by means of COMSOL
3. Microfluidic models using COMSOL: Laminar Flow; Convection diffusion; Conjugate heat transfer.
4. Design/Development of PCB/μ‐devices using dry film resist based photolithography.
5. Design/Development of Micro‐device by means of FDM based 3D printing.
6. Design/Development of electrically conductive polymers by means of CO2 Laser.
7. Design/Development of micro‐devices by means of Direct Laser Writing (DLW) & Soft Lithography.
8. Essentials of Clean room and demonstration of Electron Beam Vapour Deposition.
9. Characterization I: Study of Scanning Electron Microscopy, Four Probe, Tensiometer, etc.
10. 10 Case Study: IoT in MEMS & Point of Care Devices
11. Simulation of cantilever.
12. Simulation of micro machined structures

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1108
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Microelectronics L P C
3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ECE/EE‐VDT/EC‐ACT 5 PC PC ECC‐305

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To impart the knowledge of MOSFET based circuits and the small signal models of MOS transistors.
2. To impart the knowledge of CMOS inverter and digital circuitry using MOSFET.
3. To give knowledge of combinational and sequential circuit design using NMOS, PMOS, CMOS
technology.
4. To give knowledge of designing of dynamic logic circuit, clocking issues and low power design concept.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Analyze MOSFET based circuits and the small signal models of MOS transistors
CO 2 Design CMOS inverters and other digital circuits.
CO 3 Design combinational and sequential circuit design using NMOS, PMOS, CMOS technology.
CO 4 Understand designing of dynamic logic circuit, clocking issues and low power design concept.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 3 2 2 1 1 ‐ ‐ 2 1 2
CO 2 2 3 3 2 3 1 2 ‐ 1 2 2 2
CO 3 2 3 3 2 3 1 2 ‐ 1 2 2 2
CO 4 2 3 3 2 3 1 2 ‐ 1 2 2 2

UNIT I

CMOS & NMOS process technology. MOS capacitor, device structure & electrical characteristics. MOS under
external bias, derivation of threshold voltage equation, enhancement & depletion transistor, MOS device
design equations, MOSFET capacitances. MOSFET scaling and various short channel effects, Moore’s law, multi‐
gate MOSFETs, non‐conventional MOSFET, technology nodes and ITRS.

UNIT II

CMOS inverter and its DC characteristics, Static & dynamic power dissipation. Rise time, fall time delays, noise
margin. Combinational CMOS logic circuits, pass transistor and transmission gate designs, Sequential MOS logic
circuits: SR latch, CMOS D latch and edge triggered flip flop. Dynamic CMOS logic circuits: Domino CMOS logic,
NORA CMOS logic, Zipper, TSPC.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1109
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT III

CMOS Logic Gate Design: NAND, NOR, XOR and XNOR gates, Transistor sizing, combinational MOS logic circuits:
pass transistor and transmission gate designs, Pseudo NMOS logic, Complex Logic Circuits. Stick diagram,
Layout design rules. Sequential MOS logic circuits: SR latch, clocked latch and flip flop circuits, CMOS D latch
and edge triggered flip flop.

UNIT – IV

Dynamic Logic Circuits: Basic Principles of Pass Transistor Circuits, dynamic CMOS circuits, High performance
dynamic CMOS circuits: Domino CMOS logic, NORA CMOS logic, Zipper, TSPC. Low power design concepts
using CMOS Technology.

Textbook(s):
1. Adel S. Sedra, Kenneth C. Smith: Microelectronics Circuits, Oxford University Press.
2. Design of Analog CMOS Integrated Circuits, by Behzad Razavi, McGraw‐Hill.
3. Analysis and Design of Analog Integrated Circuit, Paul R. Gray, Paul J. Hurst, Stephen H. Lewis, and Robert
G. Meyer, John Wiley & Sons.

References:
1. R. L. Geiger, Allen and Stradder, VLSI Design Techniques for Analog and Digital Circuits, McGraw‐Hill
Education, 2010.
2. CMOS: Circuit Design, Layout, and Simulation by R. Jacob Baker, Wiley‐IEEE Press (2019).

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1110
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Microelectronics Lab L P C
2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ECE/EE‐VDT/EC‐ACT 5 PC PC ECC‐353

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Microelectronics) as this is the
practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. To study the MOS characteristics and introduction to tanner EDA software tools.
2. To design and study the DC characteristics of PMOS and NMOS.
3. To design and study the DC and AC characteristics of CMOS inverter.
4. To design and study the characteristics of CMOS NAND and NOR gate.
5. To design any Boolean function using transmission gates.
6. To design and study the characteristics of CMOS multiplexer.
7. To design and study the layout of PMOS and NMOS transistors.
8. To design and study the layout of CMOS inverter.
9. To design and study the layout of 2 I/P CMOS NAND gate
10. To design and study the layout of 2 I/P CMOS NOR gate
11. To design and study the layout of CMOS XOR gate.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1111
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Microgrid Stability Assessment and Protection L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 7 MT‐EAE MT‐EAE‐3 MT‐419T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To impart knowledge of Microgrid stability.
2. To impart knowledge of techniques of Microgrid stability.
3. To impart knowledge of the concepts of Microgrid Protection.
4. To impart knowledge of the analysis of Microgrid Protection.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Ability to understand the concepts of Microgrid stability.
CO 2 Ability to understand the techniques of Microgrid stability.
CO 3 Ability to understand the concepts of Microgrid protection.
CO 4 Ability to understand the analysis of Microgrid protection.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 2 2 1 2 1 2 2 2 2 1 3
CO 2 3 2 3 3 3 2 1 2 3 2 1 2
CO 3 3 2 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 2 1 3
CO 4 3 3 3 3 3 2 1 2 3 2 1 2

UNIT‐I

Microgrid Stability Assessment; Introduction, Microgrid with Inertial and Non Inertial Distribution sources,
Power sharing in distributed generation, Supplementary Controller, Grid connected and Island Operation,
Power quality and reliability, Concepts of Microgrid stability.

UNIT‐II

Microgrid Stability Analysis; System Structure and Autonomous Microgrid, Stability analysis of multiple
converter based autonomous microgrid, Droop control, Droop method based control, Stability Improvement,
Network and Load Models analysis, grid coupled microgrid, Stability analysis of grid coupled microgrid.

UNIT‐III

Microgrid Protection; Issues of High integration of the renewable energy resources and distributed generation

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1112
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

(DG), Microgrid fault and classification, Generalised form of Fault model, Microgrid operation under
unbalanced conditions; Concept of grid standards, Low‐voltage ride‐through, high‐voltage ride through, and
reactive current injection. .

UNIT‐IV

Microgrid Protection and Control; Concept of Generalized fault model, Fault detection, Fault Discrimination,
Fault calculations for the microgrids and distributed energy resources, Overcurrent relay coordination in
microgrids, Current limiting strategy, Protection based on Artificial neural networks (ANNs) and transient
monitoring function. .

Textbook(s):
1. Modelling and Stability Analysis of Microgrid, Shuai, Z. (2020). Transient Characteristics, Springer.
2. Microgrid Protection and Control Zhang, W., Wei, D., Netsanet, S., Yue, J., Wang, P., Zheng, D., Bitew, G. T.
(2021). Elsevier.

References:
1. Microgrids and Methods of Analysis, Baghaee, H. R., Garehpetian, G. B., Shabestary, M. M. (2021). Elsevier.
2. Microgrid Architectures, Control and Protection Methods. (2019). Springer.
3. Microgrid: Operation, Control, Monitoring and Protection. (2020). Springer.
4. Microgrid Technologies. (2021). Wiley.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1113
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Microgrid Stability Assessment and Protection Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 7 MT‐EAE MT‐EAE‐3 MT‐419P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Microgrid Stability Assessment and
Protection) as this is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. To study Instantaneous over current protection relay.

2. To study Overcurrent/overload protection scheme.
3. Simulation of islanding protection in microgrids.
4. Study of over current protection of dc microgrid
5. Study of over current protection of ac microgrid
6. To Realise Relay coordination by programmable logic controller
7. Study Mathematical modelling of microgrid and its realization.
8. Realization of Fault model of inverter‐interfaced distributed energy resource in Software viz Matlab/
Labview.
9. Implementing Protection of wind and solar power fed microgrid in Software viz Matlab/ Labview
10. Microgrid Stabiity Assessment using MATLAB.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1114
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Microprocessors and Interfacing L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ITE 6 PCE PCE‐3 CIE‐364T
EAE 6 ES‐EAE ES‐EAE‐1A ES‐302T
CSE‐in‐EA 7 OAE‐CSE‐EA OAE‐2 OECE‐417T
OAE 7 ECE‐OAE ECE‐OAE‐3B OECE‐417T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. Understand the internal organization of 8‐bit Intel microprocessors and apply the knowledge to
develop assembly language programs using 8085 microprocessor.
2. To impart knowledge about interfacing of memory devices and simple I/O devices with 8085
microprocessor.
3. Understand the internal organization of 16‐bit Intel microprocessors and apply the knowledge to
develop assembly language programs using 8086 microprocessor.
4. Understand the architecture and operation of Programmable Peripheral Devices and their interfacing
with 8086 microprocessor.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Ability to understand and distinguish the use of different 8085 instructions and apply those
instructions for implementing assembly language programs.
CO 2 Understand and realize the interfacing of memory devices and simple I/O devices with 8085
microprocessor.
CO 3 Ability to understand and distinguish the use of different 8086 instructions and apply those
instructions for implementing assembly language programs.
CO 4 Understand the architecture and operation of Programmable Peripheral Devices and ability to use
them for interfacing I/O devices.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 3 2 ‐ ‐ 1 2 2 1 1 1
CO 2 3 3 3 2 3 ‐ 1 2 2 1 1 1
CO 3 3 3 3 2 3 ‐ 1 2 2 1 1 1
CO 4 3 3 3 2 3 ‐ 1 2 2 1 1 1

UNIT‐I

Introduction to microprocessors – Single Chip CPU, Microprocessors Evolution, Trends in Microprocessor

Technology.
Introduction to Microprocessor Systems: Architecture and PIN diagram of 8085, Timing Diagram, memory

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1115
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

organization, Addressing modes, Interrupts. Assembly Language Programming.

UNIT‐II

Methods of Data Transfer and Interrupt Structure of 8085‐ Data transfer mechanisms, Memory mapped and
I/O mapped data transfer, Programmed data transfer, Parallel data transfer, Serial data transfer, RS‐232
standard, RS‐485 standard, GPIB/IEEE 488 standard, Interrupt driven data transfer, Interrupt Structure of 8085,
RST instructions, Multiple interrupts and priorities, 8085 vectored interrupts, Direct Memory access concepts.
Interfacing of Memory devices with 8085‐Generation of control signals for memory, Interfacing EPROM and
RAM chips with 8085.

UNIT‐III

8086 Microprocessor: Architecture of 8086, Difference between 8086 and 8088, Programming Model,
generation of physical address, Memory Segmentation, PIN diagram of 8086, Minimum mode and Maximum
mode configurations, Timing Diagrams. Instruction set of 8086, Assembler Directives, Assembly Language
Programming, 8086 Interrupts, Memory Interfacing.

UNIT – IV

Interfacing of 8086 with 8255, 8254/ 8253, 8251, 8259, 8257: Introduction, Generation of I/O Ports,
Programmable Peripheral Interface (PPI)‐Intel 8255, Sample‐and‐Hold Circuit and Multiplexer, Keyboard and
Display Interface, Keyboard and Display Controller (8279), Programmable Interval timers (Intel 8253/8254),
USART (8251), PIC (8259), DMA (8257), DAC, ADC and Stepper Motor.

Textbook(s):
1. Ramesh Gaonkar, Microprocessor Architecture, Programming, and application with 8085, Sixth Edition,
Penram International Publication, 2013.
2. Sunil Mathur, Microprocessor 8086 Architecture, Programming and Interfacing, PHI, 2011.
3. Douglas V. Hall, Microprocessors and Interfacing, Tata McGraw Hill.

References:
1. B. Ram, “Microprocessors and Microcontrollers”, Dhanpat Rai Publications, 2013.
2. John Uffenbeck, Microcomputers and Microprocessors, Third Edition, PHI, 2000.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1116
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Microprocessors and Interfacing Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ITE 6 PCE PCE‐3 CIE‐364P
EAE 6 ES‐EAE ES‐EAE‐1A ES‐302P
CSE‐in‐EA 7 OAE‐CSE‐EA OAE‐2 OECE‐417P
OAE 7 ECE‐OAE ECE‐OAE‐3B OECE‐417P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Microprocessors and Interfacing) as
this is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Write a program in 8085 to add two 8 bit numbers using:

i. Immediate addressing
ii. Direct addressing
iii. Indirect addressing
2. Write a program in 8085 to find the largest/smallest number in an array of 8 bit numbers.
3. Write a program in 8085 to multiply and divide two 8‐bit numbers stored in consecutive memory locations.
4. Write a program in 8085 to sort a series of ten data bytes in ascending/descending order.
5. Write a program to add and subtract two 16‐bit numbers with/ without carry using 8086.
6. Write a program in 8086 to add two binary numbers of 16 byte lengths.
7. Write a program to multiply/divide two 8‐ bit numbers using 8086.
8. Write a Program to generate Fibonacci series.
9. Write a Program to generate Factorial of a number.
10. Write a Program to read 16‐bit Data from a port and display the same in another port.
11. Write a Program to generate a square wave using 8254.
12. Design a Minor project using 8086 Microprocessor (Ex: Traffic light controller/temperature controller etc)

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1117
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Microprocessors and Microcontrollers L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ECE 4 PC PC ECC‐210
EE/EEE/ICE 5 PC PC ECC‐313

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To impart knowledge about architecture and instruction set of 8085 microprocessor so that students
can implement 8085 assembly language programs.
2. To impart knowledge about architecture and instruction set of 8086 microprocessor so that students
can implement 8086 assembly language programs.
3. To impart knowledge about interfacing of 8255, 8254/8253, 8251, 8259 and I/O devices with 8086
microprocessor.
4. To impart knowledge about architecture and operation of 8051 microcontroller and their interfacing
with memory and I/O.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Ability to understand and distinguish the use of different 8085 instructions, timing diagram, addressing
modes, interrupts and apply those instructions for implementing assembly language programs.
CO 2 Ability to analyse the timing diagrams, understand its instruction set, assess its memory organisation
and will implement the assembly language programs , interfacing of memory with 8086 successfully
CO 3 Understand and realize the interfacing of 8255 (PPI), 8254/8255 (PIT), 8251 (USART), 8259 (PIC), 8279
(Keyboard and display), Sample and hold circuit, DAC/ADC, LCD & Stepper motor with 8086
microprocessor.
CO 4 Understand the architecture and operation of 8051 microcontroller and ability to use them for
designing various applications based on 8051 by implementing the elaborate instruction set.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 3 2 ‐ 1 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 1
CO 2 3 3 3 2 3 1 1 ‐ ‐ 1
CO 3 3 3 3 2 3 1 1 ‐ 1 ‐ ‐ 1
CO 4 3 3 3 2 3 1 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 1

UNIT ‐ I

Introduction to Microprocessor Systems: Architecture and PIN diagram of 8085, Timing Diagram, memory
organization, addressing modes, interrupts. Assembly Language Programming.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1118
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT – II

8086 Microprocessor: 8086 Architecture, difference between 8085 and 8086 architecture, generation of
physical address, PIN diagram of 8086, Minimum Mode and Maximum mode, Bus cycle, Memory Organization,
Memory Interfacing, Addressing Modes, Assembler Directives, Instruction set of 8086, Assembly Language
Programming, Hardware and Software Interrupts.

UNIT – III

Interfacing of 8086 with 8255, 8254/8253, 8251, 8259: Introduction, Generation of I/O Ports, Programmable
Peripheral Interface (PPI)‐Intel 8255, Sample‐and‐Hold Circuit and Multiplexer, Keyboard and Display Interface,
Keyboard and Display Controller (8279), Programmable Interval timers (Intel 8253/8254), USART (8251), PIC
(8259), DAC, ADC, LCD, Stepper Motor.

UNIT – IV

Overview of Microcontroller 8051: Introduction to 8051 Micro‐controller, Architecture, Memory organization,

Special function registers, Port Operation, Memory Interfacing, I/O Interfacing, Programming 8051 resources,
interrupts, Programmer’s model of 8051, Operand types, Operand addressing, Data transfer instructions,
Arithmetic instructions, Logic instructions, Control transfer instructions, Timer & Counter Programming,
Interrupt Programming.

Textbook(s):
4. Muhammad Ali Mazidi, “Microprocessors and Microcontrollers”, Pearson, 2006
5. Douglas V Hall, “Microprocessors and Interfacing, Programming and Hardware” Tata McGraw Hill, 2006.
6. Ramesh Gaonkar, “MicroProcessor Architecture, Programming and Applications with the 8085”, PHI

References:
5. Muhammad Ali Mazidi, Janice GillispieMazidi, Rolin D. MCKinlay “The 8051 Microcontroller and Embedded
Systems”,2nd Edition, Pearson Education 2008.
6. Kenneth J. Ayala, “The 8086 Microprocessor: Programming & Interfacing The PC”, Delmar Publishers, 2007.
7. A K Ray, K M Bhurchandi, “Advanced Microprocessors and Peripherals”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2007.
8. Vaneet Singh, Gurmeet Singh, “Microprocessor and Interfacing”, Satya Prakashan, 2007.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1119
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Microprocessors and Microcontrollers Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ECE 4 PC PC ECC‐210
EE/EEE/ICE 5 PC PC ECC‐363

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Microprocessors and Microcontrollers
as this is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Write a program to add and subtract two 16‐bit numbers with/ without carry using 8086.
2. Write a program to multiply two 8 bit numbers by repetitive addition method using 8086.
3. Write a Program to generate Fibonacci series.
4. Write a Program to generate Factorial of a number.
5. Write a Program to read 16‐bit Data from a port and display the same in another port.
6. Write a Program to generate a square wave using 8254.
7. Write a Program to generate a square wave of 10 kHz using Timer 1 in mode 1(using 8051).
8. Write a Program to transfer data from external ROM to internal (using 8051).
9. Design a Minor project using 8086 Microprocessor (Ex: Traffic light controller/temperature controller etc)
10. Design a Minor project using 8051 Micro controller

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1120
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Middleware Technologies L P C
3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

IT 6 PCE PCE‐3 CIE‐366T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. Learn how to use Middleware to Build Distributed Applications
2. Implement Business Processes
3. Learn about Middleware Technologies
4. Implement Business Processes
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Understand Distributed systems design and implementation Use Middleware to Build Distributed
Applications
CO 2 Understand existing Distributed Technologies
CO 3 Understand Middleware Interoperability
CO 4 Understand Web services architectures
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 2 3 2 3 1 ‐ ‐ 3 2 3 2
CO 2 3 2 3 2 3 1 ‐ ‐ 3 2 3 2
CO 3 3 2 3 2 3 1 ‐ ‐ 3 2 3 2
CO 4 3 2 3 2 3 1 ‐ ‐ 3 2 3 2

UNIT‐I

Introduction to client server computing: Evolution of corporate computing models from centralized to
distributed computing, client server models. Benefits of client server computing, pitfalls of client server
programming.
CORBA with Java: Distributed programming with Java RMI; Overview of CORBA, CORBA IDL, Client/server
programming with CORBA & Java.

UNIT‐II

XML Technologya and Soap: XML Technology XML – Name Spaces – Structuring With Schemas and DTD –
Presentation Techniques – Transformation – XML Infrastructure. SOAP: Overview of SOAP – HTTP – XML‐RPC –
SOAP: Protocol – Message Structure – Intermediaries – Actors – Design Patterns And Faults – SOAP With
Attachments

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1121
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT‐III

Webservices Overview: XML Technology XML – Name Spaces – Structuring With Schemas and DTD –
Presentation Techniques – Transformation – XML Infrastructure.SOAP: Overview of SOAP – HTTP – XML‐RPC –
SOAP: Protocol – Message Structure – Intermediaries – Actors – Design Patterns And Faults – SOAP With
Attachments

UNIT – IV

Agent Communication and Collaboration: Agent Communication and Collaboration: Overview of Agent
Oriented Programming ‐ Agent Communication Language – Agent‐Based Framework of Interoperability ‐
Agents for Information Gathering ‐ Open Agent Architecture ‐ Communicative Action for Artificial Agent
Agent Architecture: Agents for Information Gathering ‐ Open Agent Architecture – Communicative Action for
Artificial Agent

Textbooks:
1. Frank. P. Coyle, “XML, Web Services and The Data Revolution”, 1st Edition, Pearson Education, 2002.
2. Jeffrey M. Bradshaw, “Software Agents”, 1st Edition, PHI, 2010.

References:
1. M.L.Liu , “Distributed Computing, Principles and applications”, 1st Edition, Pearson Education, 2008.
2. Ramesh Nagappan, Robert Skoczylas and Rima Patel Sriganesh, “Developing Java Web Services” , 1st Edition,
Willey Publishing , 2004.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1122
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Middleware Technologies Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

IT 6 PCE PCE‐3 CIE‐366P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Middleware Technologies) as this is
the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Create a distributed application to download various files from various servers using RMI
2. Create a Java Bean to draw various graphical shapes and display it.
3. Develop an Enterprise Java Bean for financing operations
4. Develop an Enterprise Java Bean for University operations
5. Create an Active‐X control for all File operations
6. Develop a component for converting the currency values using distributed model
7. Develop a component for encryption and decryption using using distributed model
8. Develop a component for retrieving information from message box using using distributed model
9. Develop a middleware component for retrieving Stock Market Exchange information using CORBA
10. Develop a middleware component for retrieving Weather Forecast information using CORBA

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1123
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Mining Software Repositories and Predictive Modelling L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 7 SE‐EAE SE‐EAE‐3 SE‐483T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. Students will understand the concepts of software testing, quality assurance, and data mining in
software engineering, including software maintenance, static code analysis, and software metrics.
2. Students will gain proficiency in Git for version control and learn how to effectively manage and
collaborate on software development projects.
3. Students will explore software analytics techniques to extract insights from software repositories, such
as identifying error‐prone code, monitoring technical debts, and planning refactoring processes.
4. Students will develop skills in predictive modeling techniques, including linear regression, decision
trees, clustering, and deep neural networks, and apply them to tasks such as defect prediction and
failure prediction in software engineering.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Students will gain knowledge and skills in software testing, quality assurance, data mining, and
predictive modeling techniques.
CO 2 Students will learn to analyze program models, perform static code analysis, and extract valuable
information from software repositories using tools like Git.
CO 3 Students will be proficient in software analytics, identifying error‐prone code, and monitoring
technical debts.
CO 4 Students will develop expertise in predictive modeling, including regression, decision trees, clustering,
and deep neural networks, and understand their applications in defect prediction, refactoring
planning, and redesign processes.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 2 2 2 1 1 2 1 2 1 2 2
CO 2 3 2 2 2 3 1 2 1 2 1 2 2
CO 3 3 3 2 3 3 2 3 1 2 1 2 2
CO 4 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 1 2 3

UNIT‐I

Introduction: Software Testing and Quality Assurance, Program Modelling Software Testing, Fundamentals of
Data mining, Data mining for Software Engineering, Software Maintenance, Static Code Analysis, Software
Metrics, Lines of Code, Nesting Level, Cyclomatic complexity, Module Dependencies, Object Oritented Metrics.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1124
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT‐II

Version Control: Introduction to Version Control, Types of Version Control.

Git: Fundamentals of Git, Git Workflow, Git Setup Basics, Remote Git Repository, Operations on Git
Repositories, Adding Collaborators to Git, Git Local Repository to Remote Repository.
Mining Software Repositories: Coupled Change Analysis, Commit Analysis, Documentation Analysis
Software Analytics‐I: Software Maps, Exploring System Implementations, Discovering Error‐Prone Code,
Monitor Technical Debts

UNIT‐III

Software Analytics‐II: Involvement and Knowledge Distribution, Refactoring Planning, Monitoring Redesign
Processes.
Techniques: Tracing, TraceViews, Code Usage & Test Coverage, Software Effectiveness, Prescriptive Software
Analytics.
Visual tools for Software Analytics: Treemaps, 2.5D Treemaps Hierarchical Circular Bundle Views

UNIT ‐ IV

Fundamentals of Predictive Modelling, Applications of Predictive Modelling

Predictive Modelling Techniques: Linear regression, Decision trees, K‐means clustering, Deep neural networks.
Limitations of Predictive Modelling. Predictive Modelling workflow, Evaluation metrics for Predictive Models,
Deep Learning based Defect Prediction, Cross Project defect Prediction, Just‐in‐Time defect prediction, Failure
Prediction.

Textbook(s):
1. Software Testing, Yogesh Singh, Cambridge University Press,3rd Edition ISBN: 978‐1107652781
2. Hands‐On Predictive Analytics with Python: Master the complete predictive analytics process, from problem
definition to model deployment, Alvaro Fuentes, Packt Publishing, 1st edition, ISBN: 178913871X

References:
1. Software Engineering, Ian Sommerville, Pearson Publication, 10th Edition ISBN: 9332582696
2. Applied Predictive Analytics: Principles and Techniques for the Professional Data Analyst, Dean Abbott,
Wiley, 1st Edition, ISBN: 978‐1‐118‐72796‐6

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1125
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Mining Software Repositories and Predictive Modelling Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 7 SE‐EAE SE‐EAE‐3 SE‐483P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Mining Software Repositories and
Predictive Modelling) as this is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

Experiment 1: Static Code Analysis for Quality Assurance

Objective: To understand the importance of static code analysis in software quality assurance and identify
potential issues in a given codebase.
Select a sample codebase (e.g., a small software project) with multiple modules and classes. Introduce
intentional defects in the codebase, such as logical errors, coding standards violations, and potential security
vulnerabilities. Use a static code analysis tool (e.g., SonarQube, FindBugs) to analyze the codebase and
generate a detailed report. Review the generated report to identify and understand the detected issues.
Prioritize the identified issues based on their severity and potential impact on the software's functionality and
quality. Collaboratively discuss and propose appropriate solutions or code improvements to address the
identified issues. Implement the necessary changes and re‐run the static code analysis tool to verify the
effectiveness of the improvements. Reflect on the process and discuss the importance of static code analysis in
maintaining code quality and reducing potential risks.

Experiment 2: Data Mining for Software Engineering

Objective: To apply data mining techniques to extract meaningful insights from a software repository and make
informed decisions for software engineering purposes
Select a software repository (e.g., a Git repository) containing a significant amount of historical data. Define a
specific research question or hypothesis related to software development or maintenance. Extract relevant
data from the repository, such as commit history, bug reports, code changes, and metrics (e.g., lines of code,
cyclomatic complexity). Clean and preprocess the extracted data to ensure its quality and consistency. Apply
appropriate data mining techniques, such as association rule mining, clustering, or classification, to uncover
patterns, trends, or relationships in the dataset. Analyze the results of the data mining process and interpret
the discovered patterns or relationships in the context of the research question or hypothesis. Discuss the
implications of the findings and their potential impact on software development practices or decision‐making.
Reflect on the limitations and challenges of data mining in the software engineering domain and propose
possible improvements or future research directions.

Experiment 3: Coupled Change Analysis in Mining Software Repositories

Objective: To analyze coupled changes in a software repository and understand the interdependencies
between code changes.
Set up a Git repository locally and create a basic project structure. Explore the Git workflow by initializing the
repository, adding files, committing changes, and branching. Simulate a collaborative scenario by adding

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1126
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

collaborators to the Git repository. Perform operations on the Git repository, such as pushing and pulling
changes, resolving conflicts, and merging branches. Document the workflow and collaboration process,
highlighting the benefits and challenges of using version control systems like Git.

Experiment 4: Coupled Change Analysis in Mining Software Repositories

Objective: To analyze coupled changes in a software repository and understand the interdependencies
between code changes.
Select a software repository or a specific project from a repository. Identify a set of related files or modules
within the project. Analyze the commit history to identify instances where changes in one file/module were
followed by changes in another related file/module. Use data mining techniques to quan`tify and visualize the
coupled changes, such as calculating change coupling metrics or creating a dependency graph. Interpret the
results to understand the impact of coupled changes on the software system and identify potential areas for
improvement or refactoring.

Experiment 5: Error‐Prone Code Analysis using Software Analytics

Objective: To detect and analyze error‐prone code segments in a software system using software analytics
techniques.
Select a software project or a specific codebase for analysis. Create software maps or visual representations of
the codebase, highlighting different modules, classes, or components. Use software analytics techniques to
explore the system implementation, such as identifying complex code segments, high cyclomatic complexity, or
excessive nesting levels. Perform error‐prone code analysis by analyzing historical data, including bug reports,
and correlating it with the identified code segments. Monitor technical debts by identifying code smells,
redundant code, or deprecated methods and evaluate their impact on software quality. Present the findings
and propose recommendations for code refactoring or improvements to mitigate potential errors and technical
debts.

Experiment 6: Comparative Evaluation of Predictive Models

Objective: Compare the performance of linear regression, decision trees, k‐means clustering, and deep neural
networks for a specific software engineering task, such as defect prediction.
Collect relevant data from software repositories, preprocess the data, train and evaluate predictive models
using different techniques, and compare their performance using evaluation metrics such as accuracy,
precision, recall, and F1‐score.

Experiment 7: Deep Learning‐Based Defect Prediction

Objective: Develop a deep learning model for defect prediction based on software repository data.
Gather historical data from software repositories, preprocess the data, design and train a deep neural network
model, evaluate its performance using appropriate evaluation metrics, and compare it with traditional
predictive models (e.g., decision trees) in terms of accuracy and effectiveness.

Experiment 8: Cross‐Project Defect Prediction

Objective: Investigate the feasibility of using predictive models trained on one project to predict defects in
another project.
Select multiple software projects with similar characteristics, collect and preprocess data from their
repositories, train predictive models on one project, and evaluate their performance on the other projects.
Compare the results to assess the effectiveness of cross‐project defect prediction.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1127
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Experiment 9: Just‐in‐Time Defect Prediction

Objective: Develop a predictive model that can identify potential defects in software code during the
development process.
Utilize real‐time or near real‐time data from software repositories, continuously update the model as new data
becomes available, and predict the likelihood of defects in code changes. Evaluate the model's accuracy and
effectiveness in detecting defects in a timely manner.

Experiment10: Failure Prediction Analysis

Objective: Investigate the factors contributing to software system failures and develop a predictive model to
identify potential failures.
Gather historical data on software failures from repositories, extract relevant features and metrics, apply
predictive modeling techniques (e.g., decision trees) to develop a failure prediction model. Evaluate the
model's ability to predict future failures based on its training and testing performance, and analyze the factors
contributing to system failures.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1128
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Mobile App Development L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EE‐VDT/EC‐ACT 7 OAE‐ECE‐EA OAE‐2 FSD‐437T
EAE 7 FSD‐EAE FSD‐EAE‐4 FSD‐437T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To introduce students the fundamentals of mobile app development and its significance in the digital
era.
2. To familiarize students with the Android and iOS platforms as key mobile app development platforms.
3. To provide students with hands‐on experience in designing, developing, testing, and deploying mobile
applications.
4. To expose students to advanced subjects in mobile app development, such as cross‐platform
development and upcoming trends.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Understand the importance, principles of mobile app development, Identify and explain the
characteristics and features of the Android and iOS platforms.
CO 2 Develop mobile applications using programming languages relevant to the platforms and design user‐
friendly and visually appealing mobile app interfaces.
CO 3 Implement data storage, synchronization, and location‐based services in mobile apps. Test and debug
mobile applications for optimal performance and functionality.
CO 4 Demonstrate knowledge and understanding of cross‐platform app development frameworks and Stay
updated with emerging trends and future directions in mobile app development.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 2 1 1 1 2 ‐ 3 ‐ 1 2 3
CO 2 3 2 1 1 1 2 ‐ 3 ‐ 1 2 3
CO 3 3 2 1 1 1 2 ‐ 3 ‐ 1 2 3
CO 4 3 2 1 1 1 2 ‐ 3 ‐ 1 2 3

UNIT I

Introduction to Mobile App Development: Overview, history, and importance, Mobile platforms and operating
systems: Android and iOS, Mobile app development tools and environments, Introduction to programming
languages for mobile app development
User Interface Design and Development: User interface (UI) design principles for mobile apps, UI components
and layouts, designing for multiple screen sizes and resolutions, Implementing navigation and user interaction

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1129
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT II

Mobile App Development Technologies: Mobile app architecture and components, Backend integration and
API consumption, Data storage and synchronization, Location‐based services and mapping.

UNIT III

Mobile App Testing and Deployment: Testing methodologies for mobile apps, Debugging and error handling,
App store submission and deployment process, App performance optimization and analytics

UNIT IV

Advances Topics in Mobile App Development: Mobile app security and privacy considerations, InCross‐
platform app development frameworks (e.g., React Native, Flutter), Emerging trends and future directions in
mobile app development.

Textbooks:
1." Android Programming: The Big Nerd Ranch Guide" by Bill Phillips and Chris Stewart
2. "iOS Programming: The Big Nerd Ranch Guide" by Christian Keur and Aaron Hillegass
3. "Head First Android Development: A Brain‐Friendly Guide" by Dawn Griffiths and David Griffiths
4. "Beginning iOS Cloud and Database Development: Build Data‐Driven Cloud Apps for iOS" by Thomas P.
Fitzpatrick

Reference Books:
1. "Learning Swift: Building Apps for macOS, iOS, and Beyond" by Jonathon Manning, Paris Buttfield‐Addison,
and Tim Nugent
2. "Beginning Android Programming with Kotlin" by Jerome DiMarzio
3. "Designing Interfaces: Patterns for Effective Interaction Design" by Jenifer Tidwell
4. "iOS Human Interface Guidelines: Creating a Great User Experience" by Apple Inc.
5. "Android Studio Development Essentials: Android 10 Edition" by Neil Smyth
6. "Test‐Driven Development with Python" by Harry Percival
7. "Mobile App Development with React Native: Build iOS and Android Apps with JavaScript" by Johnathan
Horton and Muhammed Murtaza
8. "Mobile Design and Development: Practical concepts and techniques for creating mobile sites and web apps"
by Brian Fling

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1130
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Mobile App Development Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EE‐VDT/EC‐ACT 7 OAE‐ECE‐EA OAE‐2 FSD‐437P
EAE 7 FSD‐EAE FSD‐EAE‐4 FSD‐437P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Mobile App Development) as this is the
practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

Experiment 1: Setting up the Development Environment

● Install Android Studio and set up the Android development environment.
● Install Xcode and set up the iOS development environment.
● Create a basic "Hello World" app for Android and iOS platforms.
Experiment 2: User Interface Design and Development
● Design a simple user interface using XML for an Android app.
● Design a user interface using Interface Builder for an iOS app.
● Implement navigation between multiple screens in both Android and iOS apps.
Experiment 3: Database Integration in Mobile Apps
● Create a SQLite database and perform basic CRUD operations in an Android app.
● Implement Core Data framework for data storage in an iOS app.
Experiment 4: Web Services and API Consumption
● Retrieve data from a RESTful API and display it in an Android app.
● Consume a web service and display data in an iOS app using URLSession.
Experiment 5: Location‐Based Services and Mapping
● Implement location tracking and display user location on a map in an Android app using Google Maps
API.
● Integrate MapKit framework in an iOS app to show user location and add annotations on the map.
Experiment 6: Cross‐Platform App Development with React Native or Flutter
● Develop a simple mobile app using React Native, utilizing components and navigation.
● Create a mobile app using Flutter, implementing UI elements and handling user input.
Experiment 7: Testing and Debugging
● Perform unit testing on key functionalities of an Android app using JUnit and Android Testing
frameworks.
● Debug and test an iOS app using Xcode debugger and XCTest framework.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1131
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Experiment 8: App Deployment and Performance Optimization

● Package and deploy an Android app to Google Play Store.
● Package and deploy an iOS app to the App Store.
● Optimize app performance by analyzing and improving resource usage, network efficiency, and
responsiveness.
Experiment 9: Augmented Reality (AR) Integration
● Integrate AR features into an Android app using ARCore or ARKit for iOS.
Experiment 10: IoT Integration in Mobile Apps
● Connect a mobile app with IoT devices, such as smart home devices, sensors, or wearables.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1132
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Mobile Communication L P C
4 4

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ECE 6 PCE PCE‐1 ECE‐310

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To impart the basic concepts of Cellular Mobile Systems and Cellular Radio Systems Design.
2. To impart the conceptual knowledge of cell coverage for signal & antenna structures and frequency
management & channel assignment.
3. To impart the understanding of the modulation methods and coding for error detection and correction
and Multiple access techniques.
4. To impart the knowledge related to the basics of Second generation digital wireless systems.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Understand the concepts of Cellular Mobile Systems and Cellular Radio Systems Design.
CO 2 Develop conceptual knowledge of cell coverage for signal & antenna structures and frequency
management & channel assignment.
CO 3 Understand the modulation methods and coding for error detection and correction and Multiple
access techniques.
CO 4 Integrate the basics of Second generation digital wireless systems.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 2 2 2 2 1 1 ‐ 1 1 ‐ 3
CO 2 3 2 2 2 2 1 1 ‐ 1 1 ‐ 3
CO 3 3 2 2 2 2 1 1 ‐ 1 1 ‐ 3
CO 4 3 2 2 2 2 1 1 ‐ 1 1 ‐ 3

UNIT I

Introduction to Cellular Mobile Systems: A basic cellular system, performance criteria, uniqueness of mobile
radio environment, operation of cellular systems, planning a cellular system, overview of generations of cellular
systems.
Elements of Cellular Radio Systems Design and Interference: General description of the problem, concept of
frequency reuse channels, co‐channel interference reduction factor, desired C/I from a normal case in an omni
directional antenna system, cell splitting, consideration of the components of cellular systems, Introduction to
co‐channel interference, co‐channel measurement design of antenna system, antenna parameter and their
effects.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1133
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT II

Cell Coverage for Signal & Antenna Structures: General introduction, obtaining the mobile point to point mode,
propagation over water or flat open area, foliage loss, propagation near in distance, long distance propagation,
point to point prediction model – characteristics, cell site, antenna heights and signal coverage cells, mobile to
mobile propagation, Characteristics of basic antenna structures, antenna at cell site, mobile antennas.
Frequency Management & Channel Assignment, Hand Off & Dropped Calls: Frequency Management, fixed
channel assignment, non‐fixed channel assignment, traffic & channel assignment, Why hand off, types of
handoff and their characteristics, dropped call rates & their evaluation.

UNIT III

Modulation methods and coding for error detection and correction: Introduction to Digital modulation
techniques, modulation methods in cellular wireless systems, OFDM, Block Coding, convolution coding and
Turbo coding.
Multiple access techniques: FDMA, TDMA, CDMA: Time‐division multiple access (TDMA), code division multiple
access (CDMA), CDMA capacity, probability of bit error considerations, CDMA compared with TDMA.

UNIT IV

Second generation digital wireless systems: GSM, IS_136 (D‐AMPS), IS‐95, mobile management, voice signal
processing and coding.

Textbook(s):
1. William, C. Y. Lee, “Mobile Cellular Telecommunications”, 2nd Edition, McGraw Hill, 1990
2. Mischa Schwartz, “Mobile Wireless Communications”, Cambridge University Press, UK, 2005.

References:
1. “Mobile Communication Hand Books”, 2nd Edition, IEEE Press.
2. Theodore S Rappaport, “Wireless Communication Principles and Practice”, 2nd Edition, Pearson, 2002.
3. Lawrence Harte, “3G Wireless Demystified”, McGraw Hill Publications, 2001.
4. Kaveh Pahlavan and Prashant Krishnamurthy”, Principles of Wireless Networks”, PHI, 2001.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1134
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Mobile Computing L P C
3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CSE 6 PCE PCE‐3 CIE‐368T
ECE 6 PCE PCE‐1 ECE‐316T
EAE 7 WMC‐EAE WMC‐EAE‐3B WMC‐455T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To impart the knowledge of mobile physical layer and mobile computing architecture.
2. To impart the fundamentals of mobile data link layer and Bluetooth.
3. To impart the knowledge of mobile IP network layer and mobile transport layer.
4. To impart the knowledge related to the usage of wireless devices and operating systems and the
concepts of mobile application languages.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Understand and illustrate the concepts of mobile physical layer and mobile computing architecture.
CO 2 Integrate the knowledge of mobile data link layer and Bluetooth.
CO 3 Analyse the features of mobile IP network layer and mobile transport layer.
CO 4 Outline the usage of wireless devices and operating systems and summarizing the concepts of mobile
application languages.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 2 2 2 2 1 1 ‐ 1 1 ‐ 3
CO 2 3 2 2 2 2 1 1 ‐ 1 1 ‐ 3
CO 3 3 2 2 2 2 1 1 ‐ 1 1 ‐ 3
CO 4 3 3 2 2 3 1 1 ‐ 1 1 ‐ 3

UNIT‐I

Mobile Physical layer: Review of generation of mobile services, overview of wireless telephony, cellular
concept, GSM: air‐interface, channel structure, location management: HLR‐VLR, hierarchical, handoffs, channel
allocation in cellular systems, CDMA, GPRS.
Mobile computing Architecture: issues in mobile computing, three tier architecture for mobile computing,
design considerations, Mobile file systems, Mobile databases. WAP: Architecture, protocol stack, Data gram
protocol, Wireless transport layer security, Wireless transaction protocol, wireless session protocol, application
environment, and applications.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1135
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT‐II

Mobile Data link layer: Wireless LAN over view, IEEE 802.11, Motivation for a specialized MAC, Near & far
terminals, Multiple access techniques for wireless LANs such as collision avoidance, polling, Inhibit sense,
spread spectrum, CDMA, LAN system architecture, protocol architecture, physical layer MAC layer and
management, Hiper LAN.
Blue Tooth: IEEE 802.15 Blue tooth User scenarios, physical, MAC layer and link management.
Local Area Wireless systems: WPABX, IrDA, ZigBee, RFID, WiMax

UNIT‐III

MOBILE IP Network Layer: IP and Mobile IP Network Layer‐ Packet delivery and Handover Management‐
Location Management‐ Registration‐ Tunnelling and Encapsulation‐Route Optimization‐ Dynamic Host
Configuration Protocol, Ad Hoc networks, localization, MAC issues, Routing protocols, global state routing
(GSR), Destination sequenced distance vector routing (DSDV), Dynamic source routing (DSR), Ad Hoc on
demand distance vector routing (AODV), VoIP –IPSec,
Mobile Transport Layer: Traditional TCP/IP, Transport Layer Protocols‐Indirect, Snooping, Mobile TCP

UNIT – IV

Support for Mobility: Data bases, data hoarding, Data dissemination, UA Prof and Caching, Service discovery,
Data management issues, data replication for mobile computers, adaptive clustering for mobile wireless
networks, Mobile devices and File systems, Data Synchronization, Sync ML.
Introduction to Wireless Devices and Operating systems: Palm OS, Windows CE, Symbion OS, Android, Mobile
Agents. Introduction to Mobile application languages and tool kits.

Textbook(s):
1. J. Schiller, “Mobile Communications”, 2nd edition, Pearson, 2011.
2. Raj Kamal “Mobile Computing” Oxford Higher Education, Second Edition, 2012.
3. Dharam Prakash Agrawal and Qing‐An Zeng, “Introduction to Wireless and Mobile Systems” 3rd Edition,
Cengage learning 2013.

References:
1. Asoke K Talukder, Hasan Ahmed,Roopa R Yavagal “Mobile Computing”, Tata McGraw Hill.
2. Pei Zheng, Larry L. Peterson, Bruce S. Davie, Adrian Farrell “Wireless Networking Complete” Morgan
Kaufmann Series in Networking , 2009
3. Vijay K Garg “Wireless Communications & Networking” Morgan Kaufmann Series, 2010
4. M. V. D. Heijden, M. Taylor, Understanding WAP, Artech House.
5. Charles Perkins, Mobile IP, Addison Wesley.
6. Charles Perkins, Ad hoc Networks, Addison Wesley.
7. Uwe Hansmann, Lothar Merk, Martin S. Nicklous, Thomas Stober, “Principles of Mobile Computing”,
Springer.
8. Evaggelia Pitoura and George Samarus, “Data Management for Mobile Computing”, Kluwer Academic
Press, 1998
9. V. Jeyasri Arokiamary, “Mobile Computing”, Technical Publications

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1136
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Mobile Computing Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CSE 6 PCE PCE‐3 CIE‐368P
ECE 6 PCE PCE‐1 ECE‐316P
EAE 7 WMC‐EAE WMC‐EAE‐3B WMC‐455P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Mobile Computing) as this is the
practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Write a program to create a card and print "Hello! WML" in <p> tag.
2. Write a program to create and execute external links in WML.
3. Write a program to create multiple cards in WML and perform navigation between them using do tags.
4. Write a program to show images (.wbmp file) in WML page.
5. Write a program to create a table in WML.
6. Write a program to create a form in one card and show entered/selected data in second card in WML. Use
input, select, option and do tags.
7. Write a program to show the usage of onpick and ontimer events in WML page.
8. Write a simple WML script to set and show the value of a variable.
9. Write a WML script to input a number and show the square of that number.
10. Write a WML script to input two numbers and show the sum.
11. Write a WML script and program to create a calculator.
12. Develop an android app which displays “Hello, welcome to Android Lab” message.
13. Using Android, create a login Activity which asks “username” and “password” from user. Display the
welcome message if the username and password are valid.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1137
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Modeling and Analysis of Microgrids L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 6 MT‐EAE MT‐EAE‐2 MT‐314T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To impart the knowledge of Micro‐grid modelling.
2. To impart the knowledge of Micro‐grid converters modelling.
3. To understand the concepts of Micro‐grid analysis.
4. To understand the analysis of Micro‐grid with power electronics interface.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Ability to understand the concepts of Micro‐grid modelling.
CO 2 Ability to understand the techniques of Micro‐grid modelling.
CO 3 Ability to understand the concepts of Micro‐grid analysis.
CO 4 Ability to understand the analysis of Micro‐grid with power electronics interface.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 2 2 1 2 1 2 2 2 2 1 3
CO 2 3 2 3 3 3 2 1 2 3 2 1 3
CO 3 3 2 1 1 2 1 2 2 2 2 1 3
CO 4 3 3 3 3 3 2 1 2 3 2 1 3

UNIT‐I

Concepts of Micro‐grid Modelling: Micro‐grids concept, Review of micro‐grid sources, Structure and
configuration of a micro‐grid, Modes of operation and control, grid connected and islanded mode, anti‐
islanding schemes; Techniques for voltage, frequency, active and reactive power control, Concept of Modelling,
Computer aided modelling.

UNIT‐II

Schemes of Micro‐grid modelling: Modelling of Power Electronics interfaces in DC and AC micro‐grid in isolated
and grid coupled mode; Formulation of load control and frequency control models; Direct load control,
Interruptible load control, Active and reactive power control models; Micro‐grid modelling schemes, anti‐
islanding, and communication based techniques.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1138
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT‐III

Concepts of Micro‐grid Analysis: Analysis of micro‐grid; Power‐flow analysis, Droop‐controlled and

electronically‐coupled distributed energy resources, neural networks based non‐linear equation sets for micro‐
grid analysis. Power Electronics interfaces in DC and AC micro‐grid, analysis of the power supplied to the AC
grid.

UNIT‐IV

Analysis of Micro‐grid with Power Electronics Interface; Analysis of voltage‐controlled inverter‐interfaced

micro‐grid, Fundamental‐frequency deterministic power flow, Probabilistic power flow problem, Extension of
harmonic power flow, Hierarchical droop‐based control scheme, complementary stabilizing control loop.
Directly voltage‐controlled schemes, current limiting strategy in different reference frames, Utilizing neural
networks function.

Textbook(s):
1. Microgrids and Methods of Analysis, Gevork B. Gharehpetian, Hamid Reza Baghaee and Masoud M.
Shabestary Amirnaser
2. “Voltage Source Converters in Power Systems: Modeling, Control and Applications”, Yezdani and Reza
Iravani, IEEE John Wiley Publications, 2009.

References:
1. Microgrids: Architectures and Control, Nikos Hatziargyriou (Editor), ISBN: 978‐1‐118‐ 72068‐4, 340 pages,
December 2013, Wiley‐IEEE Press
2. Microgrids and Active Distribution Networks, S. Chowdhury, S.P. Chowdhury and P. Crossley, The
Institution of Engineering and Technology, London, U.K, 2009.
3. Dorin Neacsu, “Power Switching Converters: Medium and High Power”, CRC Press, Taylor & Francis, 2006.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1139
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Modeling and Analysis of Microgrids Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 6 MT‐EAE MT‐EAE‐2 MT‐314P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Modeling and Analysis of Microgrids)
as this is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. To study time‐domain analysis of AC Microgrid (use platform like MATLAB/SIMULINK environment)

2. To study time ‐domain simulations of DC Microgrid (in platform like MATLAB/SIMULINK environment)
3. To simulate a dc microgrid with two renewable sources and supported by battery storage.
4. Simulation of grid connected Microgrid by using 3‐phase inverter.
5. To study voltage regulation of voltage source.
6. To study the effect of Temperature on Solar Panel Output.
7. Simulation of effect of load on Wind Turbine Output.
8. To study the effect of Variables Affecting Solar Panel Output
9. To study the real/ reactive power control of AC microgrid.
10. To study Power electronic interface of micro‐grid.
11. Simulation of Voltage and frequency regulation of microgrid under load disturbances

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1140
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Multimedia Communication L P C
4 4

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ECE 6 PCE PCE‐2 ECE‐324

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To impart the knowledge of multimedia information representation and various multimedia
applications.
2. To impart the knowledge of text and image compression principles and methodologies.
3. To impart the knowledge of audio and video compression techniques and different multimedia
communication standards.
4. To impart the knowledge of distributed multimedia systems and distributed multimedia applications
and various file formats.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 To illustrate real‐time multimedia network applicationsand to summarize different techniques of
representing multimedia information.
CO 2 To illustrate text and image compression principles and to understand different text and image
compression techniques.
CO 3 To understand different audio and image compression techniques and summarize different video
compression standards.
CO 4 To understand the concept of distributed multimedia systems, networks and applications.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 2 2 2 1 2 ‐ 2 2 ‐ 2
CO 2 3 3 3 3 2 2 1 ‐ 2 1 ‐ 2
CO 3 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 ‐ 2 1 ‐ 2
CO 4 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 ‐ 2 2 ‐ 2

UNIT I

Multimedia Communication: Introduction, Multimedia networks, Multimedia applications, Application and

networking terminology, Multimedia information representation: digitization principles, text representation,
audio representation, video representation.

UNIT II

Text and Image Compression: Compression Principles: Lossless and Lossy compression, Run length encoding,
Statistical encoding, Differential encoding, Transform encoding, Text compression using Static Huffman coding,

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1141
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Dynamic Huffman coding, Arithmetic coding, Lempel‐Ziv coding etc. Image Compression: Graphics interchange
format, Tagged image file format, digitized documents, JPEG Encoding and Decoding.

UNIT III

Audio and Video Compression: Audio compression using DPCM, Adaptive differential PCM, Adaptive Predictive
coding, Linear predictive coding, Perceptual coding, MPEG audio coders, Dolby audio coders etc. Video
compression principles, Video compression standards: H.261, H.263, MPEG‐1, MPEG‐2, MPEG‐4.

UNIT IV

Distributed Multimedia Systems: Features of DMS, Resource Management of DMS, IP Networking, Multimedia
Operating Systems, Distributed Multimedia servers, Distributed Multimedia Applications, Multimedia File
Formats

Textbooks:
1. Fred Halsall, “Multimedia Communications: Applications, Networks, Protocols and Standards”, Pearson
2. Rao, Bojkovic, Milovanovic “Multimedia Communication Systems”, PHI, 2006

Reference Books:
1. Sharda, “Multimedia Information Networking”, PHI
2. Vaughan, “Multimedia making it work”, Tata Mc Graw Hill

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1142
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Multimedia Technologies L P C
3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ITE 6 PCE PCE‐2 CIE‐342T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To identify a range of concepts and introduce the fundamental elements of multimedia.
2. To cover the different compression standards used in multimedia, some current technology and
related issues.
3. To learn about the cost involved in multimedia planning, designing, and producing.
4. To acquire knowledge on the major aspects of creative multimedia such as modelling, animation and
rendering.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 This Course introduces the multimedia systems and their applications to students.
CO 2 Uses different compression techniques of text, audio, video and apply basics of animation.
CO 3 Use multimedia applications and user interface for effective animations.
CO 4 Develop introductory level competencies in the areas of character design, life drawing and animation.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 2 1 2 1 1 1 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 2 3 2 3 2 2 ‐ ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 3 2 1 2 ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 4 3 2 3 2 3 1 2 3 2 1 1 3

UNIT‐I

Introductory Concepts: Concept of Multimedia, Media & data stream, Basic properties of multimedia system,
medium types (Temporal and non‐temporal), Multimedia applications, uses of multimedia. Data stream
characteristics, CD‐ROM and the Multimedia Highway, Uses of Multimedia.
Introduction to making multimedia: The Stages of project, the requirements to make good multimedia,
Multimedia skills and training, Training opportunities in Multimedia. Motivation for multimedia usage,
Frequency domain analysis, Application Domain & ODA etc.
Multimedia‐Hardware and Software: Multimedia Hardware – Macintosh and Windows production Platforms,
Hardware peripherals – Connections, Memory and storage devices, Media software – Basic tools, making
instant multimedia, Multimedia software and Authoring tools, Production Standards.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1143
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT‐II

Multimedia – making it work: multimedia building blocks – Text, Sound, Images, Animation and Video,
Digitization of Audio and Video objects, Data Compression: Different Compression: Introduction, its need,
lossless/lossy compression techniques concern to text, audio, video and images etc.,

UNIT‐III

Multimedia and the Internet: History, Internet working, Connections, Internet Services, The World Wide Web,
Tools for the WWW – Web Servers, Web Browsers, Web page makers and editors, Plug‐Ins and Delivery
Vehicles, HTML, VRML, designing for the WWW – Working on the Web, Multimedia Applications – Media
Communication, Media Consumption, Media Entertainment, Media games.

UNIT ‐ IV

Introduction Animation Tool: Fundamentals, Modeling: NURBS, Polygon, Organic.

Animation: Key frame animation, reactive animation, path animation, Skelton animation, etc., deformers.
Dynamics: soft bodies, Rigid bodies and its usages in the scene etc.
Rendering: soft, Hard rendering. IPR rendering, Line and box rendering etc.
Special Effects: Shading & Texturing Surfaces, Lighting, Special effects.
Working with MEL: Basics & Programming

Textbook(s):
1. Steve Heath, “Multimedia & Communication Systems”, Focal Press, UK, 1999.
2. Tay Vaughan, “Multimedia: Making it work”, TMH, 1999.
3. K. Andleigh and K. Thakkar, “Multimedia System Design”, PHI, PTR, 2000.
4. Autodesk, “Getting Started with Maya”, CA, USA, 2008

References:
1. Keyes, “Multimedia Handbook”, TMH, 2000.
2. Ralf Steinmetz and Klara Naharstedt, “Multimedia: Computing, Communications & Applications”, Pearson,
2001.
3. Steve Rimmer, “Advanced Multimedia Programming”, MHI, 2000.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1144
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Multimedia Technologies Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ITE 6 PCE PCE‐2 CIE‐342P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Multimedia Technologies) as this is the
practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Overview of Multimedia Tools.

2. Perform different operations (rotation, scaling move etc.) on objects.
3. Curves and surfaces representation using NURBS.
4. Implentation of Key frame animation.
5. Implentation of Path animation.
6. Make a Goblet using spin tool and perform basic rendering on it.
7. Create an animation having five images having fade‐in fade‐out effect
8. Devise a routine to produce the animation effect of a square transforming to a triangle then to a circle.
9. Create an scene to show the sunrise (using multiple layers and motion tweening).
10. Simulate the Pool Table or Mine Sweeper Game.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1145
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Nano Electronics L P C
4 4

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EEE 6 PCE PCE‐2 EEE‐330

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. Knowledge of working and applications of basics of Nano‐Technology
2. To understand fabrication of Nano‐Layers.
3. To understand characterization of Nano‐Structures
4. To understand working of MOSFET Structures.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 To understand working and applications of basics of Nano‐Technology
CO 2 Ability to understand fabrication of Nano‐Layers.
CO 3 Ability to understand characterization of Nano‐Structures
CO 4 Ability to understand working of MOSFET Structures.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 ‐ 2 1 ‐ 2
CO 2 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 ‐ 2 1 ‐ 2
CO 3 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 ‐ 2 1 ‐ 2
CO 4 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 ‐ 2 1 ‐ 2

UNIT I

Introduction to nanotechnology, Impacts, Limitations of conventionalmicroelectronics, Trends in

microelectronics and optoelectronics, Mesoscopic physics, trends in microelectronics and optoelectronics,
characteristic lengths in mesoscopic systems, Quantum mechanicalcoherence, Schrodinger’s Equation, wave
function, Low dimensional structures Quantum wells, wires and dots, Density ofstates and dimensionality,
Basic properties of two dimensional semiconductor nanostructures,square quantum wells of finite depth,
parabolic and triangular quantumwells, Quantum wires and quantum dots, carbon nano tube, graphene.

UNIT II

Introduction to methods of fabrication of nano‐layers, different approaches, physical vapour deposition,

chemical vapour deposition, Molecular Beam Epitaxy, Ion Implantation, Formation of Silicon Dioxide‐ dry and
wet oxidation methods, Fabrication of nano particle‐ grinding with iron balls, laser ablation, 15 reduction
methods, sol gel, self assembly, precipitation of quantum dots.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1146
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT III

Introduction to characterization of nanostructures, tools used for of nano materials characterization,

microscope‐optical, electron, and electron microscope, Principle of operation of Scanning Tunnelling
Microscope, Atomic Force Microscope, Scanning Electron microscope, Specimen interaction. Transmission
Electron Microscope, X‐Ray Diffraction analysis, PL & UV Spectroscopy, Particle size analyser.

UNIT IV

MOSFET structures, Heterojunctions, Quantum wells, modulation doped quantum wells, multiple quantum
wells, The concept of super lattices Kronig ‐ Penney model of super lattice.

Textbook(s):
1. J.M. Martinez‐Duart, R.J. Martin Palma, F. Agulle Rueda Nanotechnology for Microelectronics and
optoelectronics, Elsevier, 2006.
2. W.R. Fahrner, Nanotechnology and Nanoelctronics, Springer, 2005

Reference Books:
1. Chattopadhyay, Banerjee, Introduction to Nanoscience & Technology, PHI 2012
2. Poole, Introduction to Nanotechnology, John Wiley 2006.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1147
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Natural Language Processing L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CSE‐AI 7 PC PC AI‐409T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. Analysing the concept and techniques of Natural Language Processing based on Morphology and
CORPUS.
2. Mathematical foundations, Probability theory with Linguistic essentials such as syntactic and semantic
analysis of text.
3. The application of statistical learning methods and cutting‐edge research models from deep learning.
4. Applying the natural language and suitable modelling technique based on the structure.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Understand the knowledge of complex language behaviour in terms of phonetics, morphology etc.
CO 2 Understand the semantic and pragmatics for text processing to compile and analyse the texts based
on digestive approach.
CO 3 Apply Part‐of‐speech (POS) tagging for a given natural language and suitable modelling technique.
CO 4 Apply state of the art algorithms and techniques for text based processing of natural language with
respect to morphology.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 1
CO 2 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 1
CO 3 1 ‐ 1 ‐ 2 ‐ 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 4 1 ‐ 2 ‐ 2 ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2

UNIT‐I

Introduction to NLP, The classical tool kit, Knowledge in speech and Language processing, ambiguity and
models and algorithm, Language and understanding, brief history, Regular Expressions, patterns, words, Text
normalization, Minimum edit distance, Regular Language and FSAs, Raw Text Extraction and Tokenization,
Extracting Terms from Tokens, Normalization.

UNIT‐II

N‐grams, Evaluating language model, Generalization and zeros, smoothing, kneser‐Ney smoothing, huge
language models and stupid back off. Perplexity’s relation to entropy, Inflection, Derivational Morphology,
Finite‐State Morphological Parsing, Lexical and Morphotactics, Morphological Parsing with Finite State

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1148
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Transducers, Combining FST Lexicon and rules.

UNIT‐III

Methodological Preliminaries, Supervised Disambiguation: Bayesian Classification, an information theoretic

approach, Dictionary‐Based Disambiguation: Disambiguation based on sense, Thesaurus based disambiguation,
Disambiguation based on translations in a second‐language corpus.

UNIT ‐ IV

Markov Model: Hidden Markov model Fundamentals, Probabilities of properties, Parameter estimation,
Variants, Multiple input observation. The Information sources in Tagging: Markov model and taggers, Viterbi
algorithm, Applying HMMs to POS tagging, Applications of Tagging.

Textbook(s):
1. Daniel Jurafsky and James H. Martin, “Speech and Language Processing”, Prentice Hall.
2. Christopher D. Manning and Hinrich Schutze, “Foundation of Natural Language Processing”, The MIT Press
Cambridge.

References:
1. James Allen, “Natural Language Understanding:, Pearson Publication.
2. Nitin Indurkhya, Fred J. Damerau, “Handbook of Natural Language Processing”, CRC Press, 2010.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1149
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Natural Language Processing Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CSE‐AI 7 PC PC AI‐409P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Natural Language Processing) as this is
the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Implement word similarity.

2. Implementing simple problems related to word disambiguation.
3. Simple demonstration of part of speech tagging.
4. Lexical Analyzer.
5. Part of speech tagging.
6. Semantic Analyzer.
7. Sentiment Analysis.
8. Natural Language Generation/Summarization.
9. NLP Applications: Text Summarization, Information retrieval and question answering.
10. Grammar formalisms.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1150
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Nature Inspired Biological Optimization Techniques L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ECE 7 PCE PCE‐5 ECE‐431T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To introduce the characteristics of natural agents and building blocks involved in biological processes.
2. To provide an understanding on the application of Genetic algorithms
3. To provide an understanding on the application of bio inspired algorithms to solve complex problems.
4. To provide insights into the implementation of bio inspired algorithms.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 To understand phenomena guiding biological processes through self‐organization and adaptability
CO 2 To visualize the effect of low‐level interactions on high‐level phenomena
CO 3 To analyze complex engineering problems and solve them by adapting biological processes suitably
CO 4 To design and implement simple bio‐inspired algorithms
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 2 2 2 1 1 1 ‐ 1 1 ‐ 1
CO 2 3 3 2 2 3 1 1 ‐ 1 1 ‐ 1
CO 3 3 3 3 3 3 1 1 ‐ 1 1 ‐ 1
CO 4 3 3 3 3 3 1 1 ‐ 1 1 ‐ 1

UNIT I

Artificial Neural Networks – Pattern classification – Single and Multilayer perceptrons – Backpropagation –
Pattern Association – Hebbian learning – Hopfield networks – Bidirectional Associative Memory Networks.

UNIT II

Competitive learning – Kohenen’s Self Organizing Maps‐ Genetic algorithms – Representation – Reproduction –
Crossover and Mutation Operators – Crossover and Mutation rates.

UNIT III

Selection mechanisms – Fitness proportionate – ranking and tournament selection – Building Block –
Hypothesis and Schema Theorem‐ Swarm Intelligence – Stigmergy – Competition and Cooperation.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1151
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT IV

Particle Swarm Optimization – Anatomy of a particle – Velocity and Position updation– PSO topologies –
Control parameters –Ant Colony Optimization – Pheromone updation and evaporation.

Textbook(s):
1. Fundamentals of Natural Computing: Basic Concepts, Algorithms, and Applications, L. N. de Castro (2006),
CRC Press.
2. Leandro Nunes De Castro, Fernando Jose Von Zuben, “Recent Developments in Biologically Inspired
Computing”, Idea Group Publishing, 2005.
3. Laurene Fausett, “Fundamentals of neural networks: architectures, algorithms, and applications”, Prentice‐
Hall, 1994

Reference Books:
1. Goldberg, “Genetic algorithms in search optimization and machine learning”, Addison Wesley, 1999
2. Xin‐She Yang, “Recent Advances in Swarm Intelligence and Evolutionary Computation”, Springer
International Publishing, Switzerland, 2015.
3. Bio‐Inspired Artificial Intelligence: Theories, Methods, and Technologies, D. Floreano and C. Mattiussi
(2008), MIT Press.
4. Evolutionary Optimization Algorithms, D. Simon (2013), Wiley.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1152
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Nature Inspired Biological Optimization Techniques Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ECE 7 PCE PCE‐5 ECE‐431P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Nature Inspired Biological Optimization
Techniques) as this is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Implement linear regression and multi‐regression for a set of data points

2. Plot the correlation plot on some suitable dataset and visualize giving an overview of relationships among
data.
3. Create a perceptron with appropriate number of inputs and outputs. Train it using fixed increment learning
algorithm until no change in weights is required. Output the final weights
4. Write a program to implement artificial neural network without back propagation.
5. Write a program to implement artificial neural network with back propagation.
6. Implement travelling sales person problem using genetic algorithms.
7. Write a program to implement Hebb’s rule
8. Implement crisp partitions for real‐life iris dataset.
9. Write a program to implement logic gates.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1153
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Network Programming L P C
3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CSE‐NET 7 PC PC NET‐471T
EAE 7 NET‐EAE NET‐EAE‐3 NET‐471T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To understand inter process and inter‐system communication.
2. To understand socket programming in its entirety.
3. To understand usage of TCP/UDP / Raw sockets.
4. To understand how to build network applications.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 To write socket API based programs.
CO 2 To design and implement client‐server applications using TCP and UDP sockets.
CO 3 To analyze network programs and to use the IP addressing in networks.
CO 4 To design socket with the help of socket programming.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 2 3 ‐ 2 ‐ 3 ‐ 1 ‐ 3 3
CO 2 3 2 3 ‐ 2 ‐ 3 ‐ 1 ‐ 3 3
CO 3 3 2 3 ‐ 2 ‐ 3 ‐ 1 ‐ 3 3
CO 4 3 2 3 ‐ 2 ‐ 3 ‐ 1 ‐ 3 3

UNIT‐I

Introduction to Network Programming: OSI model, Unix standards, TCP and UDP & TCP connection
establishment and Format, Buffer sizes and limitation, standard internet services, Protocol usage by common
internet application.
Sockets: Address structures, value – result arguments, Byte ordering and manipulation function and related
functions Elementary TCP sockets – Socket, connect, bind, listen, accept, fork and exec function, concurrent
servers. Close function and related function.

UNIT‐II

TCP client server: Introduction, TCP Echo server functions, Normal startup, terminate and signal handling server
process termination, Crashing and Rebooting of server host shutdown of server host. Elementary UDP sockets:
Introduction UDP Echo server function, lost datagram, summary of UDP example, Lack of flow control with
UDP, determining outgoing interface with UDP. I/O Multiplexing: I/O Models, select function, Batch input,

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1154
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

shutdown function, poll function, TCP Echo server. Socket options: getsockopt and setsockopt functions. Socket
states, Generic socket option, IPV4 socket option, ICMPV6 socket option, IPV6 socket options and TCP socket
options. Advanced I/O Functions‐Introduction, Socket Timeouts, recv and send Functions, readv and writev
Functions, recvmsg and sendmsg Functions, Ancillary Data, How Much Data Is Queued? Sockets and Standard
I/O.

UNIT‐III

Elementary name and Address conversions: DNS, gethost by Name function, Resolver option, Function and
IPV6 support, uname function, other networking information. Daemon Processes and inetd Superserver:
Introduction, syslogd Daemon, syslog Function, daemon_init Function, inetd Daemon, daemon_inetd Function
Broadcasting‐ Introduction, Broadcast Addresses, Unicast versus Broadcast, dg_cli Function Using Broadcasting,
Race Conditions Multicasting: Introduction, Multicast Addresses, Multicasting versus Broadcasting on A LAN,
Multicasting on a WAN, Multicast Socket Options, mcast_join and Related Functions, dg_cli Function Using
Multicasting, Receiving MBone Session Announcements, Sending and Receiving, SNTP: Simple Network Time
Protocol, SNTP.

UNIT ‐ IV

Raw Sockets‐Introduction, Raw Socket Creation, Raw Socket Output, Raw Socket Input, Ping Program,
Traceroute Program, An ICMP Message Daemon, Datalink Access‐ Introduction, BPF: BSD Packet Filter, DLPI:
Data Link Provider Interface, Linux: SOCK_PACKET, libpcap: Packet Capture Library, Examining the UDP
Checksum Field. Remote Login: Terminal line disciplines, Pseudo‐Terminals, Terminal modes, Control
Terminals, rlogin Overview, RPC Transparency Issues.

Textbook(s):
1. W. Richard Stevens, Bill Fenner and Andrew M. Rudoff, “UNIX Network Programming”, Pearson Education.
2. W. Richard Stevens, “UNIX Network Programming”, PHI.

References:
1. T Chan, “UNIX Systems Programming using C++”, PHI.
2. Graham GLASS and King abls, “UNIX for Programmers and Users”, Pearson Education.
3. M. J. Rochkind, “Advanced UNIX Programming”, Pearson Education.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1155
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Network Programming Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CSE‐NET 7 PC PC NET‐471P
EAE 7 NET‐EAE NET‐EAE‐3 NET‐471P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Network Programming) as this is the
practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Write a program to Create Sockets for Sending and Receiving data.

2. Write a program to obtain the Local & Remote Socket Address.
3. Write a program to obtain the Local & Remote Socket Address.
4. Write a program to obtain the Information about The (A) Host (B) Network (C) Protocols (D) Domains.
5. Write a program to manipulate the IP Address.
6. Write a program to write a Telnet Client.
7. Write a program to make an FTP Client.
8. Write a program to implement Web Server using sockets
9. Write a program for file access using sockets
10. Write the programs to demonstrate the usage of Advanced socket system calls like getsockopt(),
setsockopt(), getpeername (), getsockname(), readv() and writev()

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1156
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Network Security and Cryptography L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ITE 6 PCE PCE‐1 CIE‐318T
CSE‐NET/CSE‐CS 6 PC PC CS‐312T
EE‐VDT/EC‐ACT 6 OAE‐ECE‐EA OAE‐1 CS‐312T
EAE 6 CS‐EAE CS‐EAE‐2A CS‐312T
ECE 7 PCE PCE‐5 ECE‐423T
CSE‐ICB 7 PC PC CS‐427T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To understand basics of Network Security and Cryptographic techniques.
2. Identify the essential and up‐to‐date concepts, algorithms, protocols, tools, and methodology of
Security
3. To learn about how to maintain the Confidentiality, Integrity and Availability of a data.
4. To understand various protocols for network security to protect against the threats in the networks.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Classify the symmetric encryption techniques and Illustrate various Public key cryptographic
techniques.
CO 2 Understand security protocols for protecting data on networks and be able to digitally sign emails and
files.
CO 3 Understand vulnerability assessments and the weakness of using passwords for authentication
CO 4 Be able to perform simple vulnerability assessments and password audits, Summarize the intrusion
detection and its solutions to overcome the attacks.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 2 2 1 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 1 ‐ 1
CO 2 3 3 2 2 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 1 ‐ 2
CO 3 3 2 2 1 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 1 ‐ 2
CO 4 2 2 1 2 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 1 ‐ 1

UNIT‐I

Introduction to security attacks, services and mechanism, Introduction to Cryptography and basic
Cryptographic Techniques, Computational Complexity, Finite Fields, Number Theory, DES and AES, Public Key
Cryptosystems, IDEA encryption and decryption, strength of IDEA, Traffic Confidentiality , Cryptanalysis,
Intractable (Hard) Problems, Hash Functions, OSI Security Architecture Privacy of Data.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1157
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT‐II

Cryptanalysis: Linear and Differential Cryptanalysis, DES, Triple DES, Message Authentication and Digital
Signatures, Attacks on Protocols, Elliptic Curve Architecture and Cryptography, Public Key Cryptography and
RSA, Evaluation criteria for AES, Key Management, , Introductory idea of Elliptic curve cryptography, Elganel
encryption.

UNIT‐III

Buffer Flow attack, Distributed Denial of service attack, Weak authentication, Design of Substitution Boxes
(SBoxes), Hash Functions , Security of Hash Functions, Secure Hash Algorithm, Authentication applications,
Kerberos, IP security, Pretty Good Privacy (PGP), S/MIME , Web Security Light weight cryptography for mobile
devices, Side channel attacks.

UNIT–IV

System security, Security Standards, Intruders, and Viruses, Firewalls, Malicious software, Intrusion Detection
System, Intrusion Prevention System, Trusted Systems, Virus Counter measures, Authentication Strategies.
Security: Architecture, Authentication header, Encapsulating security payloads, combining security
associations, key management.

Textbook(s):
1. William Stallings, “Cryptography and Network Security: Principals and Practice”, Prentice Hall, New Jersy.
2. Wade Trappe, Lawrence C Washington, “Introduction to Cryptography with coding theory”, Pearson.

References:
1. Menezes, P. van Oorschot, S. Vanstone. “Handbook of Applied Cryptography”, CRC press, 1997
2. Johannes A. Buchmann, “Introduction to Cryptography”, Springer‐Verlag.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1158
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Network Security and Cryptography Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ITE 6 PCE PCE‐1 CIE‐318P
CSE‐NET/CSE‐CS 6 PC PC CS‐312P
EE‐VDT/EC‐ACT 6 OAE‐ECE‐EA OAE‐1 CS‐312P
EAE 6 CS‐EAE CS‐EAE‐2A CS‐312P
ECE 7 PCE PCE‐5 ECE‐423P
CSE‐ICB 7 PC PC CS‐427P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Network Security and Cryptography) as
this is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. To write a program to implement the Playfair Substitution technique.

2. Write a program to implement DES and AES algorithm for Encryption and Decryption.
3. Write a program to implement RSA algorithm for Encryption and Decryption.
4. Study of Account and password management. PAM, password cracking.
5. To configure common services like IIS, Apache, Open SSH, WU‐FTP.
6. Study of Security analysis tools: Nessus, Microsoft baseline security analyzer.
7. Study of Security configuration tools: Bastille, Microsoft IIS lockdown tool.
8. To write a program to implement the signature scheme named digital signature standard (Euclidean
Algorithm).
9. To Calculate the message digest of a text using the SHA‐1 algorithm.
10. To identify organization’s Firewall IP address.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1159
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Network Security Issues and Challenges L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 6 CS‐EAE CS‐EAE‐2B CS‐314T
CSE‐CS 7 PC PC CS‐429T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To explain how various attacks work.
2. To explain how various security mechanisms work, and correlate these security mechanisms with
security principles.
3. To compare various security mechanisms, and articulate their advantages.
4. To apply security principles to solve problems.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 To understand Security goals, attacks,threat and software vulnerabilities.
CO 2 Analyze and design traditional encryption techniques and block ciphers.
CO 3 Understand and analyze public‐key cryptography, RSA and other public‐key cryptosystems
CO 4 Understand network management architecture, its standards and to differentiate the management
protocols.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 1 2 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 1 ‐ 1
CO 2 2 2 2 2 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 1 ‐ 1
CO 3 3 3 2 1 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 1 ‐ 2
CO 4 3 2 1 1 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 1 ‐ 1

UNIT‐I

Security Taxonomy, Domain of information security, Security goals, security attacks, threats Vulnerabilities,
Malicious Software, Virus, Trojan, Worms, spywares, Security services and Mechanism Security Techniques:
Steganography, Digital watermarking, Security Models, Introduction to DB Security. Software vulnerabilities,
Buffer and Stack over flow, Phishing.

UNIT‐II

Mathematics of Cryptography, Integer Arithmetic, modular arithmetic, Linear congruences, Algebraic

structures, GF( 2n) Traditional Symmetric Key ciphers, Substitution, Transposition, Stream and Block Ciphers,
Some Classical systems – Statistical theory of cipher systems‐Complexity theory of crypto systems – Stream
ciphers, Block ciphers.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1160
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT‐III

Modern Block Ciphers – DES and variant, modes of use of DES. Advanced Encryption Standard Transformations,
Key expansion, Public Key Cryptography RSA, ECC, Web security, IP sec, Email Security.

UNIT – IV

Network management Architecture & Applications, Management standards and Models, Network
Management Functions‐ Configurations Configuration Management, Fault management, Identification and
Isolation, Management Protocols SNMP v1, SNMP v3, Network management Accounting & Performance
Functions: accounting Management, Performance Management, Network Usage, Metrics.

Textbook(s):
1. Behrouz A. Forouzan , “Cryptography and Network Security”, 1st Edition, 2007, The McGraw‐Hill
2. William Stallings, “Cryptography and Network security Principles and Practices”, 4th edition, 2005, PHI

References:
1. J. Richard Burkle, “Network Management Concepts and Practice: A hands on approach”, Pearson, 3rd Ed.
2. Gollmann, Dieter, “Computer Security”, 2nd edition, 2005, John Wiley & Sons Ltd.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1161
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Network Security Issues and Challenges Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 6 CS‐EAE CS‐EAE‐2B CS‐314P
CSE‐CS 7 PC PC CS‐429P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Network Security Issues and
Challenges) as this is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. To write a program to implement the Playfair Substitution technique.

2. Write a program to implement DES and AES algorithm for Encryption and Decryption.
3. Write a program to implement RSA algorithm for Encryption and Decryption.
4. Study of Account and password management. PAM, password cracking.
5. To configure common services like IIS, Apache, Open SSH, WU‐FTP.
6. Study of Security analysis tools: Nessus, Microsoft baseline security analyzer.
7. Study of Security configuration tools: Bastille, Microsoft IIS lockdown tool.
8. To write a program to implement the signature scheme named digital signature standard (Euclidean
Algorithm).
9. To calculate the message digest of a text using the SHA‐1 algorithm.
10. To identify organization’s Firewall IP address.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1162
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Network Simulation and Optimization L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CSE‐NET 7 PC PC NET‐477T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. Understand the concepts on Networks and work on how to simulate the same
2. Design Networks and learn how they work
3. Understand the need for Optimization and Optimize a given network
4. Understand the need for different tools for various network scenarios.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Understand the quantitative methods of performance evaluation of networks.
CO 2 Use and evaluate different simulation tools for analyzing networks.
CO 3 Study and analyze different algorithm to solve network optimization problems.
CO 4 Design, Implement and validate various network simulation models.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 2 2 2 1 1 2 1 2 1 2 2
CO 2 3 2 2 2 3 1 2 1 2 1 2 2
CO 3 3 3 2 3 3 2 3 1 2 1 2 2
CO 4 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 1 2 3

UNIT‐I

Basics of Computer Network, Modeling and performance analysis of networks., Classification of the simulators,
design and challenges of discrete event simulators.

UNIT‐II

Tools and software for network simulation (NS2/NS3/GNS3/omnet++/PacketTracer etc.).

UNIT‐III

Design, implementation, verification, and validation of simulation models for analyzing wired and wireless
networks, Evaluation and presentation of simulation results.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1163
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT – IV

Theory, algorithms, and the applications of network optimization problems including the shortest path
problem, the maximum flow problem, the minimum cost flow problem, the minimum spanning tree problem,
and matching problems, case studies.

Textbook(s):
1. High performance TCP/IP Networking : concepts, issues, and solutions, Hassan, Mahbub, Jain, Raj, Pearson
2. Introduction to Network Simulator NS2, Springer
3. Network Flows. Theory, Algorithms and Applications, Ahuja R.K., Magnanti T.L., Orlin J.B., Prentice Hall

References:
1. An Introduction to Network Modeling and Simulation for the Practicing Engineer (The ComSoc Guides to
Communications Technologies), Jack Burbank, William Kasch, Jon Ward, (Wiley‐IEEE Press)
2. Network Modeling and Simulation: A Practical Perspective, Mohsen Guizani, Ammar Rayes, Bilal Khan, Ala
Al‐Fuqaha, (Wiley‐Interscience)
3. GNS3 Network Simulation Guide, Chris Welsh
4. The Book of GNS3, Jason C. Neumann
5. Wireless Network Simulation: A Guide using Ad Hoc Networks and the ns‐3 Simulator, Henry Zárate
Ceballos; Jorge Parra Amaris; Hernan Jiménez Jiménez; Diego Romero Rincón; Oscar Agudelo Rojas; Jorge
Eduardo Ortiz Triviño
6. Computer Network Simulation in Ns2: Basic Concepts and Protocols Implementation, Neeraj Bhargava,
Pramod Singh Rathore, Dr. Ritu Bhargava, Dr. Abhishek Kumar (BPB Publication)
7. Network Simulation, Richard M. Fujimoto, George Riley, Kalyan Perumalla (Morgan and Claypool
Publishers)

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1164
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Network Simulation and Optimization Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CSE‐NET 7 PC PC NET‐477P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Network Simulation and Optimization)
as this is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. To create Scenario and study the performance of CSMA/CD protocol through simulation.
2. To create scenario and study the performance of token bus and token ring protocols through simulation.
3. To create scenario and study the performance of wireless network with CSMA/CA protocol and compare
with CSMA/CD protocols.
4. Implementation and study of Stop and Wait protocol.
5. Implementation and study of Go back N and Selective Repeat protocols.
6. Implementation of Distance Vector Routing algorithm.
7. Implementation of Link state routing algorithm.
8. Implementation of data encryption and decryption.
9. Implement and configure basic EIGRP and Route Summarization.
10. Implement Load Balancing across Equal Cost Path & Unequal Cost Path.
11. Configure EIGRP Authentication (MD5) and EIGRP Stub.
12. Configure EIGRP redistribution with RIPv2 and OSPF.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1165
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Neural Networks and Fuzzy Logic L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ICE 6 PCE PCE‐2 ICE‐322T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To provide in‐depth knowledge on various learning rules of neural networks.
2. To explain some applications of neural network in different fields.
3. To introduce fuzzy logic, fuzzy relation, and fuzzy mathematics
4. To understand the principle of fuzzy set theory,fuzzy logic to design real world problem.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Apply artificial neural network concept for real‐world problem with scientific tools.
CO 2 Analyse the supervised and unsupervised learning algorithms and its applications.
CO 3 Application of Fuzzy logic concepts to real world problem.
CO 4 Develop fuzzy logic controller using fuzzy logic concepts.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 2 2 3 3 ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ 1 3 2
CO 2 3 3 1 1 1 ‐ 1 1 ‐ 2 2 1
CO 3 3 2 3 3 2 ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ 2 3 1
CO 4 1 2 3 2 2 ‐ 1 ‐ ‐ 1 2 2

Unit I

Introduction to Networks: Basic concepts of Neural networks, Human Brain, Model of an Artificial Neuron,
Neural network architectures, Characteristics of Neural Networks.

Unit II

Learning Methods:supervised and unsupervised learning, Reinforcementlearning methods Hebb, delta and
back propagation methods, Architecture of a Back propagation network, thePerceptron Model, The solution,
Single layer Artificial Neural Network, Model forMultilayer Perceptron, Back propagation Learning, Illustration,
Applications, Selection of Various Parameters in BPN

Unit III

Fuzzy Set Theory: Fuzzy versus Crisp, Crisp sets, Fuzzy Sets, Crisp Relations, Membership functionsFuzzy
Relations. Fuzzy Logic and Inference, Fuzzy Logic, Fuzzy Rulebased System, Defuzzification Methods.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1166
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Unit IV

Applications of Fuzzy logic and Fuzzy System: Fuzzy controller design for washing machine, DC motor, Power
Converter, and air conditioning system.

Textbooks:
1. N.P. Padhy, S.P. Simon, "Soft Computing with MATLAB Programming", Oxford University Press, 2015.
2. S.N. Sivanandam, S.N. Deepa, "Principles of Soft Computing", Wiley India Pvt.Ltd, 2nd Edition, 2011.

References:
1. Simon Haykin, Neural Network‐ A Comprehensive Foundation, Pearson Education.
2. Timothy J. Ross, Fuzzy Logic with Engineering Applications, John Wiley and sons, 2010
3. S. Rajasekaran, G.A. Vijayalakshmi Pai, "Neural Networks, Fuzzy Logic and Genetic Algorithm, Synthesis and
Applications ", PHI Learning Pvt.Ltd, 2017.
4. N.P. Padhy, S.P. Simon, "Soft Computing with MATLAB Programming", Oxford University Press, 2015.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1167
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Neural Networks and Fuzzy Logic Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ICE 6 PCE PCE‐2 ICE‐322P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Neural Networks and Fuzzy Logic) as
this is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Create a fuzzy based decision‐making system to select 11 players out of 50 using MATLAB.
2. Design a fuzzy controller to calculate the washing time of washing machine.
3. Simulate a Fuzzy logic‐based boost converter.
4. Write a program in MATLAB to plot triangular, trapezoidal, and bell‐shaped membership functions.
5. Write a program in MATLAB to implement OR gate using artificial neural network using delta method.
6. Write a program in MATLAB to implement AND gate using artificial neural network with Back Propagation
algorithm.
7. Write MATLAB program for Back Propagation Neural Network Algorithm.
8. To write a MATLAB program to generate AND function using McCulloch‐Pitts neural net.
9. To write a Program in MATLAB to perform addition, subtraction, and multiplication operations of fuzzy set.
10. Design and simulate an air conditioning system using fuzzy logic control.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1168
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Neuro Fuzzy Systems L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 7 CI‐EAE CI‐EAE‐4 CI‐409T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. Understanding the concept of neural network and related algorithms.
2. Introduce fuzzy logic and set theory operations and ruled for demonstration of fuzzy logic
3. Learn the different for fuzzy models to design neuro fuzzy control
4. Understanding the basic concept of optimization technique
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Comprehend fuzzy logic, neural network and optimization algorithm
CO 2 Identify and describe for fuzzy logic and ANN technique in building intelligent machine for effective
problem‐solving methodologies
CO 3 Integrate neural network and Fuzzy logic to extend the capabilities.
CO 4 Apply knowledge of fuzzy logic, Ann and GA to design controller.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 1 2 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 3
CO 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 1 2 3 1 3
CO 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 1 2 3 1 3
CO 4 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 1 3 3 1 3

UNIT –I

Neural Networks: Fundamental of neural network, overview of biological Neuro‐system, Mathematical Models
of Neurons, ANN architecture, Learning Methods, Learning Paradigms‐Supervised, Unsupervised and
reinforcement Learning, ANN training Algorithms‐perceptions, Training rules, Delta, Back Propagation
Algorithm, Multilayer Perception Model, Radial Basis functions, Hopfield Networks, Associative Memories,
Applications of Artificial Neural Networks.

UNIT‐II

Fuzzy sets: Introduction to Fuzzy Logic, Classical and Fuzzy Sets: Overview of Classical Sets, Operations on Fuzzy
Sets: Compliment, Intersections, Unions, Combinations of Operations, Extension principle and fuzzy
relationsFuzzy Logic: Fuzzification and defuzzification, Membership Function, Linguistic Variables, Linguistic
hedges, Fuzzy rules and reasoning, lamda cut‐sets. Arithmetic operations on Fuzzy numbers.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1169
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT‐III

Fuzzy Inference System: Fuzzy Modeling, Mamdani Fuzzy model, TSK Fuzzy model, Fuzzy Controller, Industrial
Applications.
Introduction of Neuro‐Fuzzy Systems, Architecture of Neuro Fuzzy Networks, Hybrid learning algorithms,
Neuro‐fuzzy Control.

UNIT‐IV

Introduction to Evolutionary Techniques: Genetic Algorithm, Basic Concepts, Flow Chart of GA, Genetic
representations (Encoding), Initialization and Selection, Genetic Operators, Mutation, Generational Cycle,
Convergence of GA and Applications.

Text Books:
1. Neural Network,Fuzzy Logic and Genetic Algorithms by S.Rajasekaran PHI Learning India 2011
2. Principles of Soft Computing by S. N. Sivanandam, S.N. Deepa, Wiley India.

References Books:
1. Artificial Intelligence, Patricks Henry,Winston,Pearson Education,2001
2. Artificial Intelligence, Nilsson, Morgon, Kufmann 1998.
3. Neuro‐Fuzzy and Soft Computing by J.‐S.R.Jung, c.T.Sun PHI Learning India 2011
4. Hagan Demuth, Beale” Neural Network Design “ Cengage Learning 2013
5. S N Sivanandam, “Neural Network using Matlab” TMH 2013

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1170
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Neuro Fuzzy Systems Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 7 CI‐EAE CI‐EAE‐4 CI‐409P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Neuro Fuzzy Systems) as this is the
practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Create a fuzzy based decision‐making system to select 11 players out of 50 using MATLAB.
2. Design a fuzzy controller to calculate the washing time of washing machine.
3. Simulate a Fuzzy logic‐based boost converter.
4. Write a program in MATLAB to plot triangular, trapezoidal, and bell‐shaped membership functions.
5. Write a program in MATLAB to implement OR gate using artificial neural network using delta method.
6. Write a program in MATLAB to implement AND gate using artificial neural network with Back Propagation
algorithm.
7. Write MATLAB program for Back Propagation Neural Network Algorithm.
8. To write a MATLAB program to generate AND function using McCulloch‐Pitts neural net.
9. To write a Program in MATLAB to perform addition, subtraction, and multiplication operations of fuzzy set.
10. Design and simulate an air conditioning system using fuzzy logic control.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1171
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Next Generation Networks L P C

4 4

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ECE 7 PCE PCE‐4 ECE‐407

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard /
level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To introduce the basics of the next generation networks.
2. To impart the knowledge about the various new technologies and topologies on which NGN are
based upon.
3. To provide exposure to the various new services that telecommunication operators have as they
create new 3G networks and beyond.
4. To impart the knowledge of the numerous applications it offers.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Develop the basic knowledge of NGN, its building blocks and various services.
CO 2 Understand IP networks, LAN and WAN technologies and topologies.
CO 3 Study concept of ATM, MPLS and multiservice networks.
CO 4 Understand various NGN applications
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 2 2 2 2 3 2 3 ‐ ‐ 1 1 3
CO 2 2 3 2 1 3 2 3 ‐ ‐ 1 2 3
CO 3 2 2 2 1 2 2 3 ‐ ‐ 1 1 2
CO 4 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 1 ‐ 2 2 2

UNIT I

Introduction to next generation networks. Communicating in the new Era, New Era of Networking,
Technologies influencing change, IP Everywhere, Optical fiber anywhere, wireless access, building blocks for
NGN, IP Networks, VOIP, Multi service Flexible Networks architecture. VPNs, Optical Networks, Wire line &
Wireless Networks, NGN Services, Network Infrastructure convergence, services convergence, from technology
push to service pull.

UNIT II

IP Networks, IP past, present and future, IP influence and confluence, IP version 4, I. P. Version 6, IP Network
convergence, LAN Technologies, IP Routing, LAN Switching, WAN’s, WAN Technologies and Topologies.
Wireless IP LANS, Mobility Networks, Global IP Networks, Global capacity, Globally Resilient IP, Internet – A
Network of Networks. Beyond IP, Technology Brief – IP Networks, Business Drivers, Success factors,

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1172
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Applications and Service Value.

UNIT III

Muti service Networks Origin of multi service ATM, Next Generation Multi service Networks, Next Generation
Multi service ATM switching, Multi protocol Label switching, Networks, Frame Based MPLS, Cell based MPLS,
MPLS services and their benefits, multi service provisioning platforms (MSPP) & Multi service switching
platform (MSSP).

UNIT IV

NGN Applications Internet connectivity, e‐commerce, call center, third party application service provision,
UMTS, WAP, WiMAX, integrated billing, security and directory enabled networks.

Textbook(s):
1. Neill Wilkinson, “Next Generation Networks Services, Technologies and Strategies”, Wiley.
2. Robet Wood, “Next Generation Network Services”, Pearson.

Reference Books:
1. Next Generation Telecommunications Network, Parliament office of Science and Technology (Postnote).
Dec 2007, No. 296, Ref. http://www.parliament.uk/briefing‐papers/POST‐PN‐296.pdf
2. Huber, J.F.’ “Mobile Next Generation Networks”, IEEE Multimedia Vol. 11, Issue I Jan‐ March 2004.
3. J.C. Crimi, “Next Generation Network (NGN) Service”, A Telecoolia Technologies white paper; refer
www.telecodia.com
4. International Conference on Next Generation Networks & Basestations Tackles LTE, WiMAX, Femtocells,
Backhaul, Spectum Re‐farming and Also Goes.
http://www.thefreelibrary.com/International+Conference+on+Next+Generation+Networks+%26+Basestati
ons...‐a0176872977
5. Carugi, M.; Hirschman, B.; Narita, A., "Introduction to the ITU‐T NGN focus group release 1: target
environment, services, and capabilities, “Communications Magazine, IEEE , vol.43, no.10, pp. 42‐48, Oct.
2005 doi: 10.1109/MCOM.2005.1522123
URL:http://ieeexplore.ieee.org/stamp/stamp.jsp?tp=&arnumber=1522123&isnumber=32552http://encyc
lopedia2.thefreedictionary.com/LTE

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1173
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Next Generation Web L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CSE 7 PCE PCE‐4 CIE‐413T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To introduce the basic concept associated with Internet and internet protocols
2. To understand the Database Connectivity.
3. To understand the Web Page, Website and Web Application
4. To describe the various Web attacks and their preventions
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 To understand the basic concepts of Internet and World Wide Web
CO 2 To develop the concept of Web Technologies
CO 3 Understand the functionalities of Web Engineering Technologies in distributed systems.
CO 4 Identifying the issues in Security Threats and Security risks of a site.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 2 3 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 2 2 3
CO 2 3 3 2 3 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 3 2 3
CO 3 3 3 2 3 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 3 2 3
CO 4 3 3 2 3 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 3 3 3

UNIT‐I

Growth of Internet, Basic internet protocols, History of the Internet, World Wide Web, HTTP: Hypertext
Transfer Protocol, Markup languages‐XHTML, Introduction to HTML, Basics of XTHML, DHTML, and XML
Anatomy of Internet, APRANET and Internet history of the World Web, Basic Internet Terminology, Internet
Protocols: TCP/IP, Router, Internet Addressing Scheme, Machine Addressing (IP address), E‐mail Address, XML
versions & declarations, Introduction to WML.

UNIT‐II

Database Connectivity: JDBC, ODBC, Database‐to web connectivity, Web Page, Website and Web Application,
Technology Framework for development, Client‐side scripting: JavaScript, Client Side Programming: JAVA
Scripts, basic syntax, variables & data‐types, literals, functions, objects, arrays and built‐in objects, Server side
programming , Java Servlets, Life cycle, parameter data, sessions, cookies, servlets capabilities, servlets &
concurrency.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1174
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT‐III

Web attacks and their prevention, Security Threats, Security risks of a site, Session management,
authentication, HTTPS and certificates, Firewalls (WAFs), Web security model, Client‐side security, Cookies
security policy, HTTP security extensions, Web user tracking, Server‐side security tools, Web Application and
Fuzzers.

UNIT ‐ IV

Concept and issues of Web 2.0 and Web 3.0, Latest Trends in Web Technologies, Search Engines, Web
Crawling, Search Engine Optimization, Web Security concerns, Applications of Web Engineering Technologies in
distributed systems etc, Case studies using different tools, Web IR System, Web Analytics, Web Mining
Framework, Social Web Mining and Text Mining.

Textbook(s):
1. Internet and Web Technologies by Raj Kamal, Tata McGraw Hill edition. (ISBN: 9780070472969), 2002
2. Web Technologies: A Computer Science Perspective, Jackson, Pearson Education India, 2007.
3. Modeling the Internet and the Web, Pierre Baldi, Paolo Frasconi, Padhraic Smyth, John Wiley and Sons Ltd.

References:
1. Achyut Godbole, Atul Kahate, “Web Technologies”, McGraw‐Hill Education, Third Edition.
2. PHP and MySQL for Dynamic Web Sites, Ullman, Larry, Peachpit Press.1 (ISBN: 978‐0‐321‐784070), 2012.
3. Chris Bates, "Web Programming", Wiley

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1175
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Next Generation Web Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CSE 7 PCE PCE‐4 CIE‐413P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Next Generation Web) as this is the
practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Create a webpage with HTML using paragraph and list tags.

2. Experiments based on PHP and MySQL to be implemented.
3. Experiment based on developing websites and portals using HTML, CSS, Java Script.
4. Exercise based on implementation of XML technologies.
5. Design the static web pages required for any online web site.
6. Create a simple JSP page. Separate the JSP and HTML coding in different files and link them together.
7. Demonstrate the concept of Database Connectivity using JDBC and ODBC.
8. Demonstrate the concept of Database to web connectivity.
9. Demonstrate the concept of Servlets.
10. Experiment based on Client Side Programming.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1176
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Non Destructive Evaluation of Structures L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CE 6 PCE PCE‐3 CEE‐318T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To introduce the basic principles, techniques, equipment, applications and limitations of NDT methods
such as Visual, Penetrant Testing, Magnetic Particle Testing, Ultrasonic Testing, Radiography, Eddy
Current.
2. To enable selection of appropriate NDT methods.
3. To identify advantages and limitations of non‐destructive testing methods
4. To make aware the developments and future trends in NDT.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Apply the various NDT techniques to identify the defects
CO 2 Select the suitable NDT techniques for various defects
CO 3 Understand the various factors affecting the concrete and Advanced Non‐Destructive Testing
Methods.
CO 4 Illustrate knowledge on Non‐destructive testing (NDT) equipment’s – Rebound
hammer, Ultrasonic pulse velocity meter
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 1
CO 2 2 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 1
CO 3 1 2 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 4 3 2 2 2 3 2 2 2 1 ‐ 2 1

UNIT‐I

Introduction to DT, NDT and NDE, necessity of NDE and SHM; Fundamental differences between NDE and SHM
philosophies; Causes of degradation in concrete and steel structures; General methods of NDT of civil
engineering structures according to Indian Standards, future progress in NDT, economics aspects of NDT. Visual
Inspection ‐ tools, applications and limitations ‐Fundamentals of visual testing: vision, lighting, material
attributes, environmental factors. Visual perception, direct and indirect methods mirrors, magnifiers,
boroscopes, fibroscopes, closed circuit television, light sources.

UNIT‐II

Permeability test: Fundamental principle, General procedure for permeability test, Equipment for permeability

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1177
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

test, Initial surface absorption test, Modified Figg permeability test, In situ rapid chloride ion permeability test,
Applications of permeability test, Range and limitations of permeability test, Half‐cell electrical potential
method.

UNIT‐III

Penetration resistance or windsor probe test, resistivity measurement Sensor based SHM of civil structures –
optical, piezoelectric and non‐contact approaches; Imaging as a tool for NDT – A scan, Bscan, C‐scan, time of
flight based reconstruction, synthetic aperture focusing technique.

UNIT – IV

Electromagnetic imaging – fundamentals, ground penetrating radar; Thermography – fundamentals, Infrared

thermography; Elastic wave based methods – impact echo; Ultrasonics – fundamentals, instrumentation,
imaging methodologies; Future directions.

Textbook(s):
1. Grandt Jr A F, Fundamentals of Structural Integrity: Damage Tolerant Design and Nondestructive
Evaluation, Wiley Publications (2014).
2. Maierhofer C and Dobmann G, Non‐Destructive Evaluation of Reinforced Concrete Structures:Non‐
Destructive Testing Methods, Woodhead Publishing (2010)

References:
1. Hellier C, Handbook of Nondestructive Evaluation, Mc‐Graw Hill Education (2012).

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1178
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Non Destructive Evaluation of Structures Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CE 6 PCE PCE‐3 CEE‐318P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Non Destructive Evaluation of
Structures) as this is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. To study about need and scope of Non‐destructive testing (NDT).

2. To perform visual test for given sample using visual aid.
3. To study and perform Rebound Hammer Test.
4. To study and perform Electrochemical Half‐Cell Potentiometer Test.
5. To study and perform Tests for Carbonation of Concrete.
6. To study and perform Ultrasonic Pulse velocity Test.
7. To perform Dye/Liquid Penetration Test for given sample with visible and fluorescent dye.
8. To study and perform Magnetic Particle test using different methods of magnetization.
9. To study Radiographic Testing.
10. To study and perform penetration resistant test
11. To study and perform pull out test
12. To study and perform Leak Testing.
13. To study of Eddy Current Test.
14. To study acoustic emission testing and thermography

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1179
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Non Traditional Manufacturing L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ME 7 PCE PCE‐5 MEE‐423T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To Understand the classifications of non‐traditional machining processes based on industrial
applications.
2. To describe the working of modern machining methods based on mechanical, chemical, thermal and
thermo‐electric energy.
3. To explain, how to investigate the of process parameters of advanced machining methods on its
characteristics.
4. To describe the effects of process parameters numerically, on the performance of Non‐traditional
methods.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Explain Categories of non‐ traditional machining processes based on industrial applications.
CO 2 Analyse the working principle of modern machining methods based on mechanical, chemical, thermal
and thermo‐electric energy.
CO 3 Carryout the investigation of process parameters of advanced machining methods on its
characteristics.
CO 4 Evaluating the effects of process parameters (numerically) on the output parameters of Non‐
traditional methods.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 3 3 ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 2 3 3 3 3 ‐ 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 3 3 3 3 3 ‐ 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 4 3 3 3 2 ‐ 3 ‐ ‐ ‐‐ ‐ ‐ 2

UNIT I

Introduction: An overview of Modern Manufacturing Methods (MMM) ‐ Classification, their comparative study,
Need of MMM.
Process Selection: Physical Parameters, Shape applications, Material applications, Process capability, Effects on
equipment and Tooling, Process economy.

UNIT II

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1180
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Electric Discharge Machining: Working Principle, Mechanism of metal removal, Basic EDM circuits, selection of
tool material and dielectrics, Flushing, Advantages, Disadvantages and Applications, Wire‐cut EDM.
Ultrasonic Machining: Construction and working Principle, Elements of Process, Effect of process parameters,
Applications and limitations.
Abrasive Jet Machining: Working Principle, equipment used, Variables in AJM, Advantages, Disadvantages,
Application.
Water Jet Machining: Working Principle, equipment used, process parameter, Advantages, Disadvantages,
Application.

UNIT III

Electro Chemical Machining (ECM): Principle, Elements of ECM process, Electrochemistry of ECM, selection of
electrolytes and analysis of ECM, Advantages, Limitations, Applications.
Electro Chemical Grinding (ECG): Process: Working principle, equipment used, Process parameters,
Advantages, Disadvantages and Applications.
Electro Chemical Honing (ECH): Process: Working principle, equipment used, Process parameters, Advantages,
Disadvantages and Application.

UNIT IV

Laser Beam Machining: Working principle, equipment, Process parameters, Advantages, Disadvantages and
Application.
Plasma Arc Machining: Working Principle, Parameters, Safety precautions, Applications.
Electron Beam Machining: Principle, beam control techniques, Process capabilities, Comparison of thermal and
non‐thermal processes, Advantages and limitations.

Textbooks:
1. P.C. Pandey & H.S. Shan, “Modern Machining Process”, Tata McGraw Hills, 2006.
2. Amitabh Gosh and A.K. Mallik, “Manufacturing Science”, Affiliated East‐West Press Pvt. Ltd., 1985.

References:
1. Vijay K Jain, “Advance Machining Processes”, Allied Publishers Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2002.
2. P K Mishra, “Nonconventional Machining”, Narosa Publication, 1997.
3. McGeough, “Advanced Methods of Machining”, Chapman and Hall, London, 1998.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1181
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Non Traditional Manufacturing Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ME 7 PCE PCE‐5 MEE‐423P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Non Traditional Manufacturing) as this
is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Study of electric discharge machining process.

2. Determination of material removal rate on electric discharge machine (EDM).
3. Determination of surface roughness on EDM.
4. Study of electrochemical machining process.
5. Determination of material removal rate on electro chemical machine (ECM).
6. Determination of surface roughness on ECM.
7. Study of Flexible manufacturing system.
8. Case study of Rapid Prototyping
9. Study the effect of current on material removal rate in EDM.
10. Determine the effect of different tool material on material removal rate in EDM.
11. Determine the effect of current on surface finish rate in EDM.
12. Determine the effect of different tool surface finish on surface finish in EDM.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1182
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Non Traditional Manufacturing L P C

4 4

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

MAE 7 OAE‐MAE OAE‐1 MAO‐427

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To Understand the classifications of non‐traditional machining processes based on industrial
applications.
2. To describe the working of modern machining methods based on mechanical, chemical, thermal and
thermo‐electric energy.
3. To explain, how to investigate the of process parameters of advanced machining methods on its
characteristics.
4. To describe the effects of process parameters numerically, on the performance of Non‐traditional
methods.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Explain Categories of non‐ traditional machining processes based on industrial applications.
CO 2 Analyse the working principle of modern machining methods based on mechanical, chemical, thermal
and thermo‐electric energy.
CO 3 Carryout the investigation of process parameters of advanced machining methods on its
characteristics.
CO 4 Evaluating the effects of process parameters (numerically) on the output parameters of Non‐
traditional methods.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 3 3 ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 2 3 3 3 3 ‐ 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 3
CO 3 3 3 2 3 ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 4 3 2 3 2 ‐ 3 ‐ ‐ ‐‐ ‐ ‐ 1

UNIT I

Introduction: An overview of Modern Manufacturing Methods (MMM) ‐ Classification, their comparative study,
Need of MMM.
Process Selection: Physical Parameters, Shape applications, Material applications, Process capability, Effects on
equipment and Tooling, Process economy.
Electric Discharge Machining: Working Principle, Mechanism of metal removal, Basic EDM circuits, selection of
tool material and dielectrics, Flushing, Advantages, Disadvantages and Applications

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1183
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT II

Ultrasonic Machining: Construction and working Principle, Elements of Process, Effect of process parameters,
Applications and limitations.
Abrasive Jet Machining: Working Principle, equipment used, Variables in AJM, Advantages, Disadvantages,
Application.
Water Jet Machining: Working Principle, equipment used, process parameter, Advantages, Disadvantages,
Application.
Abrasive Flow Machining: Working Principle, equipment used, process parameter, Advantages, Disadvantages,
Application.

UNIT III

Chemical Machining: Working Principle, equipment used, process parameter, Advantages, Disadvantages,
Application.
Electro Chemical Machining (ECM): Principle, Elements of ECM process, Electrochemistry of ECM, selection of
electrolytes and analysis of ECM, Advantages, Limitations, Applications.
Rapid Prototyping Introduction Stereo Lithography Systems Introduction: Need for the compression in
product development, history of RP systems, Survey of applications, Growth of RP industry, and classification of
RP systems. Stereo Lithography Systems: Principle, Process parameter, Process details, Data preparation, data
files and machine details, Application

UNIT IV

Laser Beam Machining: Working principle, equipment, Process parameters, Advantages, Disadvantages and
Application.
Plasma Arc Machining: Working Principle, Parameters, Safety precautions, Applications.
Electron Beam Machining: Principle, beam control techniques, Process capabilities, Comparison of thermal and
non‐thermal processes, Advantages and limitations.
Wire Cut EDM: Working principle, process parameter, equipment, characteristics of machining process,
applications

Text Books:
1. P.C. Pandey & H.S. Shan, “Modern Machining Process”, Tata McGraw Hills, 2006.
2. Amitabh Gosh and A.K. Mallik, “Manufacturing Science”, Affiliated East‐West Press Pvt. Ltd.

Reference books:
1. Vijay K Jain, “Advance Machining Processes”, Allied Publishers Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2002.
2. P K Mishra, “Nonconventional Machining”, Narosa Publication, 1997.
3. Mc Geough, “Advanced Methods of Machining”, Chapman and Hall, London, 1998.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1184
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Non‐linear System Design L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 7 CI‐EAE CI‐EAE‐5 CI‐411T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. Ability to solve non‐linear equations
2. Ability to analyse stability of non‐linear systems
3. Ability to design non‐linear systems using jacobian linearisation
4. Ability to design non‐linear systems using feedback linearisation
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Ability to solve non‐linear equations
CO 2 Ability to analyse stability of non linear systems
CO 3 Ability to design non‐linear systems using Jacobian linearisation
CO 4 Ability to design nonlinear systems using feedback linearisation
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 2 3 3 2 1 1 1 2 2 3 1
CO 2 3 2 3 3 2 1 1 1 2 2 3 1
CO 3 3 2 3 3 2 1 1 1 2 2 3 1
CO 4 3 2 3 3 2 1 1 1 2 2 3 1

UNIT‐ I

Introduction and Background: Introduction to nonlinear and time‐varying systems. Mathematical background,
including vector spaces and norms. Lp norms for signals, induced norms for systems, and the Lebesgue Lp
spaces. Existence and uniqueness of solutions to nonlinear differential equations.

UNIT‐ II

Stability Analysis: Techniques for the stability analysis of nonlinear and time‐varying systems. Internal stability
of feedback systems. Phase plane portraits. Lyapunov stability theorems. Popov and circle criteria for nonlinear
feedback systems. Passivity and small gain for nonlinear operators.

UNIT‐ III

Design Techniques: Overview of design for nonlinear systems. Jacobian linearization and gain scheduling.
Introduction to feedback linearization and extensions of optimal control techniques. Direct design methods.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1185
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT‐IV

Feedback linearization‐ Design via linearization‐ stabilization ‐ regulation via integral control‐ gain scheduling.
Exact Feedback Linearization ‐ Input state linearization – input output linearization ‐ state feedback control ‐
stabilization ‐ tracking ‐ integral control.

Textbooks:
1. H. K. Khalil Nonlinear Systems, Third Edition, Prentice‐Hall., 2002

References:
1. H. J. Marquez, Nonlinear Control Systems: Analysis and Design, John Wiley Intersciencce, 2003.
2. J. J. Slotine and W. Li Applied Nonlinear Control, Prentice‐Hall, 1991.
3. M. Vidyasagar, Nonlinear Systems Analysis, SIAM, 2002
4. J. E. Gibson Nonlinear Automatic Control, McGraw‐Hill, 1963.
5. J. C. Hsu and A. V. Meyer Modern Control Principles and Applications, McGraw‐Hill, 1968.
6. D. Graham and D. McRuer Analysis Of Nonlinear Control Systems, John Wiley 1961
7. G. J. Thaler and M. P. Pastel Analysis and Design of Nonlinear Feedback Control Systems, McGraw‐Hill,
1962

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1186
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Non‐linear System Design Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 7 CI‐EAE CI‐EAE‐5 CI‐411P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Non‐linear System Design) as this is the
practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Create a simulation of a specific nonlinear system using differential equations and simulate its behavior
over time.
2. Design a nonlinear controller for a given nonlinear system.
3. Solve optimization problems with nonlinear constraints using MATLAB's optimization toolbox.
4. Fit experimental data to a nonlinear mathematical model.
5. Identify the parameters of a nonlinear system using input‐output data. Utilize system identification
techniques, such as the extended Kalman filter (EKF), recursive least squares (RLS), or the subspace‐based
methods, to estimate the model parameters.
6. Apply nonlinear signal processing techniques to analyze and process signals. Implement nonlinear filters,
such as the median filter or the adaptive filter, to remove noise or distortions from signals.
7. Analyze and simulate nonlinear electronic circuits using MATLAB's circuit simulation toolbox.
8. Apply nonlinear image processing techniques to enhance or analyze images.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1187
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Object Oriented Analysis and Design using UML L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

IT 6 PCE PCE‐2 CIE‐344T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To understand the fundamentals of object modelling.
2. To understand and differentiate Unified Process from other approaches.
3. To design with the UML dynamic and implementation diagrams.
4. To improve the software design with design patterns & test the software against its requirements
specification
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Express software design with UML diagrams
CO 2 Identify various scenarios based on software requirements
CO 3 Transform UML based software design into pattern based design using design patterns
CO 4 Design software applications using OO concepts & Understand the various testing methodologies for
OO software
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 1 1 1 2 2
CO 2 3 2 2 3 3 2 1 1 1 1 2 2
CO 3 3 2 2 3 2 2 2 1 1 1 2 2
CO 4 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 2 2 2 3

UNIT I

Unified Process and Use Case Diagrams: Introduction to OOAD with OO Basics ‐ Unified Process – UML
diagrams – Use Case –Case study – the Next Gen POS system, Inception ‐Use Case Modelling – Relating Use
cases – include, extend and generalization – When to use Use‐cases

UNIT II

Static UML Diagrams: Class Diagram–– Elaboration – Domain Model – Finding conceptual classes and
description classes – Associations – Attributes – Domain model refinement – Finding conceptual class
Hierarchies – Aggregation and Composition ‐ Relationship between sequence diagrams and use cases – When
to use Class Diagrams

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1188
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT III

Dynamic and Implementation UML Diagrams: Dynamic Diagrams – UML interaction diagrams ‐ System
sequence diagram – Collaboration diagram – When to use Communication Diagrams ‐ State machine diagram
and Modelling –When to use State Diagrams ‐ Activity diagram – When to use activity diagrams
Implementation Diagrams ‐ UML package diagram ‐ When to use package diagrams ‐ Component and
Deployment Diagrams – When to use Component and Deployment diagrams

UNIT IV

Design Patterns: GRASP: Designing objects with responsibilities – Creator – Information expert – Low Coupling
– High Cohesion – Controller Design Patterns – creational – factory method – structural – Bridge – Adapter –
behavioural – Strategy – observer –Applying GoF design patterns – Mapping design to code TESTING: Impact of
object orientation on Testing – Develop Test Cases and Test Plan

Textbooks:
1. Craig Larman, Applying UML and Patterns: An Introduction to Object‐Oriented Analysis and Design and
Iterative Development, Third Edition, Pearson Education, 2005.
2. Ali Bahrami ‐ Object Oriented Systems Development ‐ McGraw Hill International Edition ‐ 1999

References:
1. Erich Gamma and Richard Helm, Ralph Johnson, John Vlissides, Design patterns: Elements of Reusable
Object‐Oriented Software, Addison‐Wesley, 1995.
2. Martin Fowler, UML Distilled: A Brief Guide to the Standard Object Modelling Language, Third edition,
Addison Wesley, 2003.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1189
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Object Oriented Analysis and Design using UML Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

IT 6 PCE PCE‐2 CIE‐344P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Object Oriented Analysis and Design
using UML) as this is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

Draw standard UML diagrams using an UML modelling tool for a given case study and map design to code and
implement a 3 layered architecture. Test the developed code and validate whether the SRS is satisfied.
1. Identify a software system that needs to be developed.
2. Document the Software Requirements Specification (SRS) for the identified system.
3. Identify use cases and develop the Use Case model.
4. Identify the conceptual classes and develop a Domain Model and also derive a Class Diagram from that.
5. Using the identified scenarios, find the interaction between objects and represent them using UML
Sequence and Collaboration Diagrams
6. Draw relevant State Chart and Activity Diagrams for the same system.
7. Implement the system as per the detailed design
8. Test the software system for all the scenarios identified as per the use case diagram
9. Improve the reusability and maintainability of the software system by applying appropriate design
patterns.
10. Implement the modified system and test it for various scenarios.

SUGGESTED DOMAINS FOR MINI‐PROJECT:

Passport automation system / Book bank / Exam registration / Stock maintenance system / Online course
reservation system / Airline/Railway reservation system / Software personnel management system / Credit
card processing / e‐book management system / Recruitment system / Foreign trading system / Conference
management system / BPO management system / Library management system / Student information system

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1190
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Open Chanel Flow and Sediment Transportation L P C

4 4

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CE 6 PCE PCE‐3 CEE‐320

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To introduce the concepts of channel hydraulics.
2. To study different types of flow and flow characteristics.
3. To analyze flow problems and determine effect of channel geometric parameter of flow
characteristics.
4. To design of inland waterways needed for irrigation, navigation and to study sediment transport.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Define fundamental concepts of various types open channel flow and concepts of specific energy.
CO 2 Analyze the flow through transition, varied flow, forces on sediment load
CO 3 Determine flow profiles, and characteristics of varied flow
CO 4 Design a stable and regime channel.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 2 2 ‐ 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 1 ‐ ‐
CO 2 3 2 2 2 ‐ 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐
CO 3 1 1 1 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐
CO 4 3 3 3 2 1 ‐ ‐ 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐

UNIT‐I

Major and medium irrigation schemes of India, Command area development, Types of Soils and their suitability
for irrigation, Root Zone soil water, Irrigation requirements, Irrigation water quality, Irrigation canal system,
Duty of water, Canal losses, Estimation of design discharge of a canal, canal outlets, Canal regulation, Water
logging, causes, effects and remedial measures.
Alluvial channels carrying clear water and Sediment‐Laden water, Evaporation and seepage losses in channels,
Cross section of irrigation channels, Berms, Freeboard and service road, Silting of channels.

UNIT‐II

Sheet pile cut‐off walls, Khosla’s theory and its applications, Correction for Floor Thickness, Correction for
Mutual Interference of sheet piles, Correction for the slope of the floor, Method for determination of exit
gradient, Uplift force on the floor of canal structure.
Canal regulation structures, Canal Fall, Types of canal fall, Cistern element, Vertical/ Horizontal/Inclined‐impact

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1191
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Cisterns, No‐Impact Cisterns, Roughening measures for energy dissipation such as Friction Block, Ribbed
pitching and Provisions such as baffle wall/ deflector/dentated cill etc at the Downstream end of cistern system
Distributary Head Regulator and Cross Regulator and their Design criteria, Control of Sediment Entry into an
offtaking channel.

UNIT‐III

Cross Drainage Structure, their need and types, Design of Transitions for canal waterway using Hind’s Method,
Upiri Method and Vittal and Chiranjeevi’s method,
Canal Headworks, Selection of the site, Weir or Barrage, Undersluices, Divide Wall, Fish Ladder, Canal Head
Regulator, Sediment Excluders and Sediment Ejector.

UNIT ‐ IV

Types of dams, Factors and General Design Criteria for Embankment Dams, Freeboard, Suitability of
Foundation, Slope protection, Factors and General Design Criteria for Gravity Dams, Forces on gravity Dam,
Causes of failure of a gravity Dam, Stability Analysis of Gravity Dams, Galleries and outlets.
Introduction to Spillway, Types of spillways, energy dissipaters, Cavitation erosion on spillway surface
Classification/ behaviour of rivers, Cutoffs, Aggradation and Degradation, River Training and its objectives, River
training Methods such as Levees, Spurs, Guide Banks.

Textbook(s):
1. S.K.Garg‐ Irrigation Engineering and Hydraulic Structures, Khanna Publishers, Delhi
2. B.C. Punmia and Pande B.B. Lal‐ Irrigation and Water Power Engineering, Laxmi Publications (P) Ltd., Delhi.

References:
1. Ralph A.Wurbs, Wisley P.James‐ Water Resources Engineering, PHI, New Delhi.
2. R.K.Sharma and T.K.Sharma‐ Irrigation Engineering. S.Chand and Company Ltd., New Delhi.
3. Satya Narayana Murty Challa‐Water Resources Engineering [Principles and Practice] NewAge Intl.
4. Applied Hydrology ‐ Ven T Chow, David R Maidment, Larry W Mays, McGraw‐Hill, New Delhi.
5. Bharat Singh, Fundamentals of Irrigation Engineering, Nem Chand and Brothers, Roorkee.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1192
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Operating Systems L P C
4 4

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CSE/IT/CST/ITE 5 PC PC CIC‐305
OAE 7 CSE‐OAE CSE‐OAE‐4 OCSE‐409

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To understand the basics of OS and their functions. To learn the scheduling policies of various
operating systems.
2. Learn memory management methods.
3. To understand the characterisation of deadlock, system deadlock, preventing deadlock, avoiding
deadlock and related concepts.
4. To understand the meaning of a file, structure of the directories, file structure system and
implementation, free‐space management
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Understand the role of operating system in a computing device,
and Ability to understand paging and segmentation methods of memory binding and their pros &
cons.
CO 2 Understand scheduling of process over a processor. Ability to use concepts of semaphore and its
usage in process synchronization.
CO 3 Ability to synchronize programs and make the system deadlock free.
CO 4 Ability to understand file system like file access methods, directory structures, file space allocation in
disk and free space management in disk. Ability to understand disk scheduling and disk recovery
procedures.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 2 ‐ 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐
CO 2 3 3 ‐ ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐
CO 3 3 2 3 ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐
CO 4 3 3 ‐ ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐

UNIT‐I

Introduction: What is an Operating System, Simple Batch Systems, Multiprogrammed Batches systems, Time
Sharing Systems, Personal‐computer systems, Parallel systems, Distributed Systems, Real‐Time Systems, OS – A
Resource Manager.
Processes: Introduction, Process states, process management, Interrupts, Interprocess Communication

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1193
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Threads: Introduction, Thread states, Thread Operation, Threading Models. Processor Scheduling: Scheduling
levels, preemptive vs no preemptive scheduling, priorities, scheduling objective, scheduling criteria, scheduling
algorithms, demand scheduling, real time scheduling.

UNIT‐II

Process Synchronization: Mutual exclusion, software solution to Mutual exclusion problem, hardware solution
to Mutual exclusion problem, semaphores, Critical section problems. Case study on Dining philosopher
problem, Barber shop problem etc.
Memory Organization & Management: Memory Organization, Memory Hierarchy, Memory Management
Strategies, Contiguous versus non‐ Contiguous memory allocation, Partition Management Techniques, Logical
versus Physical Address space, swapping, Paging, Segmentation, Segmentation with Paging Virtual Memory:
Demand Paging, Page Replacement, Page‐replacement Algorithms, Performance of Demand Paging, Thrashing,
Demand Segmentation, and Overlay Concepts.

UNIT‐III

Deadlocks: examples of deadlock, resource concepts, necessary conditions for deadlock, deadlock solution,
deadlock prevention, deadlock avoidance with Bankers algorithms, deadlock detection, deadlock recovery.
Device Management: Disk Scheduling Strategies, Rotational Optimization, System Consideration, Caching and
Buffering.

UNIT ‐ IV

File System: Introduction, File Organization, Logical File System, Physical File System, File Allocation strategy,
Free Space Management, File Access Control, Data Access Techniques, Data Integrity Protection, Case study on
file system viz FAT32, NTFS, Ext2/Ext3 etc.

Textbook(s):
1. Deitel & Dietel, “Operating System”, Pearson, 3 rd Ed., 2011
2. Silbersachatz and Galvin, “Operating System Concepts”, Pearson, 5th Ed., 2001
3. Madnick & Donovan, “Operating System”, TMH,1st Ed., 2001

References:
1. Tannenbaum, “Operating Systems”, PHI, 4th Edition, 2000
2. Godbole, “Operating Systems”, Tata McGraw Hill, 3rd edition, 2014
3. Chauhan, “Principles of Operating Systems”, Oxford Uni. Press, 2014
4. Dhamdhere, “Operating Systems”, Tata McGraw Hill, 3rd edition, 2012
5. Loomis, “Data Management & File Structure”, PHI, 2nd Ed.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1194
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Operating Systems Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CSE/IT/CST/ITE 5 PC PC CIC‐353

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Operating Systems) as this is the
practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Write a program to implement CPU scheduling for first come first serve.

2. Write a program to implement CPU scheduling for shortest job first.

3. Write a program to perform priority scheduling.

4. Write a program to implement CPU scheduling for Round Robin.

5. Wite a program for page replacement policy using a) LRU b) FIFO c) Optimal.

6. Write a program to implement first fit, best fit and worst fit algorithm for memory management.

7. Write a program to implement reader/writer problem using semaphore.

8. Write a program to implement Producer‐Consumer problem using semaphores.

9. Write a program to implement Banker’s algorithm for deadlock avoidance.

10. Write C programs to implement the various File Organization Techniques

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1195
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Optical Communication Systems and Networks L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ECE 6 PCE PCE‐2 ECE‐326T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To impart the Knoledge of optical communication and propagation of light through physical medium.
2. To impart the knowledge about optical fibers, propagation of light through them and signal
degradation during signal propagation through optical fibers.
3. Let the students understand about the types, construction, working and characteristics of various
optical sources.
4. Let the students know about the types, construction, working of various optical detectors and also
know about basic optical receiver. Students should also know about basic optical networks.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 To understand the optical communication and propagation of light through physical medium.
CO 2 To understand various types of optical fibers, propagation of light through them and able to analyse
signal degradation in optical fibers.
CO 3 To understand various optical sources and use them in optical transmitting systems.
CO 4 To understand various optical detectors and apply them in optical receivers and Analyze various
optical networks.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 2 2 2 2 1 ‐ 1 2 1 2
CO 2 3 3 2 2 2 2 1 ‐ 1 2 1 2
CO 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 1 ‐ 1 2 1 2
CO 4 3 3 2 2 2 2 1 ‐ 1 2 1 2

UNIT I

Introduction: Optical spectral bands and windows, Basic optical communication system, Advantages of optical
communication systems.
Optical Fiber Waveguides & Fabrication: Nature of light, Ray theory transmission of light, Electromagnetic
mode theory for optical propogation, Mode theory for circular waveguides, Optical fiber modes, Fiber
materials, Fabrication and mechanical properties, Fiber optic cables.

UNIT II

Optical fiber Structures and Propagation: Classifications of optical fibers, Step‐index fibers, Graded‐index

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1196
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

fibers, Single‐mode fibers, Multimode fibers, Wave propagation in all these fibers, Types of single‐mode fibers.
Signal Degradation in Optical Fibers:
Attenuation – Absorption, Scattering, Bending loss.
Signal Distortion – Intermodal dispersion, Chromatic dispersion, Dispersion in all types of fibers. Dispersion
modified single‐mode fibers.

UNIT III

Optical Sources:
LEDs – Basic concepts of radiation, LED Structures, LED Configurations, Types of LEDs, LED Power & Efficiency,
Modulation of an LED, LED Characteristics.
Lasers – Basic Concepts(Types of emission, Population inversion, Laser oscillations, Lasing etc.), Laser modes
and threshold conditions, Laser diode rate equations, Laser structures and radiation patterns, External
quantum efficiency, Types of Lasers, Modulation of Laser, Laser characteristics.
Basic optical transmitter.

UNIT IV

Optical Detectors: Basic concepts(Optical detection principle, Absorption, Quantum efficiency & Responsivity,
etc.), p‐n Photodiode, p‐i‐n Photodiode, Avalanche Photodiode, Detector Response time, Photodetector noise,
Multiplication factor, Phototransistors, Basic Optical receiver.
Optical Networks: Network concepts, Network topologies, SONET/SDH, High speed lightwave links, WDM
Networks, Optical TDM, Subcarrier multiplexing.

Textbook(s):
1. John M. Senior, “Optical Fiber Communications”, Pearson, 3rd Edition, 2010.
2. Gerd Keiser, “Optical Fiber Communications”, Tata McGraw Hill, 4th edition, 2008.

Reference Books:
1. D.K.Mynbeav & L.L. Scheiner, “Fiber optic Communication Technology”, Pearson Education, 2001.
2. J. Gowar, “Optical Communication System”, PHI, 2nd edition, 1993.
3. G. P. Agrawal, “Fiber optic Communication Systems”, John Wiley & sons, New York, 1992.
4. R.P.Khare, "Fiber Optics and Opto Electronics", Oxford University Press, 2004.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1197
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Optical Communication Systems and Networks Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ECE 6 PCE PCE‐2 ECE‐326P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Optical Communication Systems and
Networks) as this is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. To setup a Fiber Optic Analog Link and study Intensity modulation Technique using analog input signal.
2. To setup a Fiber Optic Analog Link, study the frequency response, and determine the analog bandwidth of
the link.
3. To setup a simple Fiber Optic Voice Link.
4. To setup a Fiber Optic Digital Link and study Intensity modulation Technique using digital input signal.
5. To setup a Fiber Optic Digital Link using a LED source and determine the maximum bit rate that can be
transmitted on the digital link.
6. To study the Time Division multiplexing technique over a Fiber Optic Link.
7. To measure the Propagation Loss in Optical Fiber and determine the attenuation coefficient.
8. To measure the Bending Loss in Optical Fiber.
9. To measure the Numerical Aperture of the Optical Fiber.
10. To study the I‐V characteristic of Light Emmiting Diode (LED).
11. To study the P‐I characteristic of a LASER Diode.
12. To study and plot the characteristics of a Photo Detector.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1198
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Optical Networks L P C
3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EC‐ACT 6 PC PC WMC‐332T
EAE 6 WMC‐EAE WMC‐EAE‐1A WMC‐332T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To impart the knowledge of multiplexing techniques and different types of losses in optical networks.
2. To impart the knowledge of different optical components, optical transmitters and optical detectors.
3. To impart the knowledge of different types of optical networks, control and management and
protection of optical networks.
4. To impart the knowledge of optical packet switching and optical access network architecture.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 To understand the advanced multiplexing techniques and different types of losses in optical fiber.
CO 2 To study different types of optical components, optical transmitters and detectors.
CO 3 To provide overview of different optical network elements and to study various survivable techniques
in optical networks.
CO 4 To understand optical packet switching and optical access network architecture.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 ‐ 2 1 ‐ 2
CO 2 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 ‐ 2 1 ‐ 2
CO 3 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 ‐ 2 1 ‐ 2
CO 4 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 ‐ 2 1 ‐ 2

UNIT I

Introduction: Telecommunications network architecture, circuit switching and packet switching, First
generation optical networks, multiplexing techniques, second generation optical networks, optical layer, optical
packet switching, Network evolution: single‐mode fiber, multimode fiber, optical amplifiers and WDM, loss and
Bandwidth windows, Intermodal dispersion, optical fiber as waveguide, chromatic dispersion, Stimulated
Brillouin scattering, Stimulated Raman scattering.

UNIT II

Optical Components: Couplers, Isolators and Circulators, Multiplexers and filters: gratings, Fabry perot filters.
Optical Amplifiers: stimulated emission, spontaneous emission, Erbium‐doped fiber amplifiers, Raman
amplifiers, semiconductor optical amplifiers, Transmitters: LASER, LED, Detectors: photodetector, front end

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1199
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

amplifier, optical switches, wavelength convertors, optical subcarrier modulation and multiplexing.

UNIT III

Optical Networks: SONET/SDH, optical transport network, Ethernet, IP, WDM network elements: optical line
terminals, optical line amplifiers, optical Add/Drop Multiplexers. Control and Management : Network
management functions, optical layer services and interfacing, layers within the optical layer, Network
survivability: Basic concepts, Protection in SONET/SDH : point to point links, self‐healing rings, ring
interconnection and Dual Homing.

UNIT IV

Photonic Packet Switching and Access Networks: Optical time division multiplexing, synchronization, header
processing , burst switching, Optical Access networks Architecture, Fiber to the curb FTTC, Deployment
considerations: SONET/SDH core network, designing the transmission layer using SDM, TDM, WDM,
unidirectional versus bidirectional WDM systems, long haul networks, long haul under sea networks, metro
networks .

Textbook(s):
1. R. Ramaswami and K. Sivarajan, “Optical Networks: A Practical Perspective”, Morgan Kaufmann Publishers‐
3rd ed
2. Mayer & Martin, “Optical Switching Networks”, Cambridge University Press, 2007.

References:
1. Biswanath Mukherjee, “Optical WDM Networks”, Springer series, 2006.
2. P.E .Green, Jr., “Fiber Optic Networks”, Prentice Hall, NJ, 1993.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1200
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Optical Networks Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EC‐ACT 6 PC PC WMC‐332P
EAE 6 WMC‐EAE WMC‐EAE‐1A WMC‐332P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Optical Networks) as this is the
practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. To design a basic fiber optic communication system using Optsim software.

2. To study the effective loss due to Stimulated Brillouin Scattering.
3. To design DWDM link using Optical Add‐Drop Multiplexer Nodes.
4. To measure Optical signal to noise ratio OSNR using reconfigurable OADM link.
5. To design TDM link and to study channel demultiplexing in Optical time division multiplexed network.
6. To design Optical Code division multiple access link.
7. To study the noise performance of Erbium doped fiber amplifiers..
8. To design 40 channel OC‐768 DWDM link.
9. To demonstrate the functioning of Bitrate Discrimination circuit (BDC) based dual rate burstmode receiver
in PON systems.
10. To design FTTH system with GEPON Access Architecture.
11. To study the effects of optical receiver characteristics on system performance.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1201
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Optimization Techniques L P C
3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CSE‐AIML 6 PC PC AI‐320T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. Understand the basics of Optimization Techniques
2. To analyze problems in which the objective function and the constraints appear as linear functions of
the decision variables
3. To analyze the optimality criteria for various optimization techniques.
4. To appreciate variety of Modern optimization techniques.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Comprehend the techniques and applications of Engineering optimization.
CO 2 Analyze characteristics of a general linear programming problem
CO 3 Analyse various methods of solving the constrained and unconstrained problems.
CO 4 Analyze variety of Modern optimization techniques.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 1 1 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 2 2 2 ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 3 2 1 ‐ 2 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 4 2 1 ‐ 2 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2

UNIT‐I

Introduction to Optimization: Engineering application of Optimization – Statement of an Optimization problem

– Optimal Problem formulation – Classification of Optimization problem. Definition of Global and Local optima
– Optimality criteria ‐ Global optimality

UNIT‐II

Linear programming methods for optimum design: Review of Linear programming methods for optimum design
– Post optimality analysis – Application of LPP models

UNIT‐III

Optimization algorithms for solving unconstrained optimization problems – Gradient based method: Cauchy’s
steepest descent method, Newton’s method, Conjugate gradient method.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1202
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Optimization algorithms for solving constrained optimization problems – direct methods – penalty function
methods – Engineering applications of constrained and unconstrained algorithms.

UNIT – IV

Modern methods of Optimization: Genetic Algorithms – Simulated Annealing – Ant colony optimization – Tabu
search – Neural‐Network based Optimization – Fuzzy optimization techniques – Applications.

Textbook(s):
1. Rao S. S., ‘Engineering Optimization, Theory and Practice’, New Age International Publishers, 2012, 4th Ed
2. Deb K., ‘Optimization for Engineering Design Algorithms and Examples’, PHI, 2000

References:
1. Arora J., ‘Introduction to Optimization Design’, Elsevier Academic Press, New Delhi, 2004
2. Saravanan R., ‘Manufacturing Optimization through Intelligent Techniques’, Taylor & Francis (CRC Press),
2006
3. Hardley G., ‘Linear Programming’, Narosa Book Distributors Private Ltd., 2002
4. C.J. Ray, Optimum Design of Mechanical Elements, Wiley, 2007.
5. D. E. Goldberg, Genetic algorithms in Search, Optimization, and Machine Learning, Addison‐Wesley, 1989.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1203
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Optimization Techniques Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CSE‐AIML 6 PC PC AI‐320P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Optimization Techniques) as this is the
practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Introduction to optimization techniques.

2. Study of classical optimization techniques.
3. Study and computer implementation of one‐dimensional elimination methods to compute optimal
solution.
4. Study and computer implementation of one‐dimensional interpolation methods to compute optimal
solution.
5. Study of one‐dimensional interpolation methods to compute optimal solution
6. Derive the expression for quasi‐Newton formula using central difference and two point forward difference
schemes.
7. Solution approaches for the optimization problems having equality constraints.
8. Solution approaches for the optimization problems having inequality constraints.
9. Create and analyse the working model of simulated annealing
10. Application of Fuzzy optimization technique using a simulation tool.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1204
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Optimization using Controllers L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EE/EEE 6 PCE PCE‐3 EEE‐356T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To understand static and dynamic optimisation
2. To apply optimisation in minimum time, energy and control effort problems,
3. To apply optimisation in linear regulator problem
4. To understand LQG control and multi objective control
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Ability to understand static and dynamic optimisation
CO 2 Ability to apply optimisation in minimum time, energy and control effort problems,
CO 3 Ability to apply optimisation in linear regulator problem
CO 4 Ability to understand LQG control and multi objective control
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 2 3 3 2 1 1 1 2 2 3 1
CO 2 3 2 3 3 2 1 1 1 2 2 3 1
CO 3 3 2 3 3 2 1 1 1 2 2 3 1
CO 4 3 2 3 3 2 1 1 1 2 2 3 1

Unit – I

Introduction. Static and Dynamic optimization. Parameter optimization. Calculus of Variations: problems of
Lagrange, Mayer and Bolza. Euler‐Language equation and transversality conditions, Lagrange multipliers

Unit – II

Pontryagin’s maximum principle; theory; application to minimum time, energy and control effort problems,
and terminal control problem; Dynamic programming: Belaman’s principle of optimality, multistage decision
processes. Application to optimal control.

Unit – III

Linear regulator problem: Matrix Riccati equation and its solution, tracking problem;return difference
inequality and robustness margins, cross product terms, output feedback, Linear quadratic trackers

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1205
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Unit – IV

LQG control and separation principle, simple applications. Multi‐Objective Control and applications.

Textbooks:
1. F.L. Lewis and V.L. Syrmos, “Optimal Control”, John Wiley & Sons, NY 1995.
2. D. S. Naidu, “Optimal Control Systems”, CRC Press, 2002

References:
1. Donald Kirk, “Optimal Control Theory: An Introduction”, Dover Books, 2004.
2. M. Gopal, “Modern Control System Theory”, New Age International Publishers, New Delhi, 2014.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1206
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Optimization using Controllers lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EE/EEE 6 PCE PCE‐3 EEE‐356P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Optimization using Controllers) as this
is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Design and simulate a feedback control system for a SISO plant. Use MATLAB's control system toolbox to
model the plant.
2. Extend the previous experiment to a MIMO control system. Model a MIMO plant using MATLAB's control
system toolbox.
3. Implement an LQR controller for a given linear time‐invariant (LTI) plant.
4. Design an LQG controller that combines state feedback control with Kalman filtering for optimal control of
a linear system with stochastic disturbances.
5. Use MATLAB's control system toolbox or the Model Predictive Control Toolbox to design the controller and
simulate its performance.
6. Design an H‐infinity controller for a given plant to achieve robust performance and disturbance rejection.
7. Place the closed‐loop poles of a system to achieve desired performance characteristics.
8. Optimize the trajectory tracking of a control system. Define a desired trajectory and formulate an
optimization problem to minimize the tracking error. Use MATLAB's optimization toolbox.
9. Use MATLAB's control system toolbox and nonlinear control techniques to design optimal controllers for
nonlinear plants.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1207
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Opto Electronics L P C
4 4

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EEE 6 PCE PCE‐2 EEE‐332

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To understand working and characteristics of Opto Electronics Semi Conductors.
2. To understand working and characteristics of Opto Electronics Materials.
3. To understand working and characteristics of Opto Electronics Detectors.
4. To understand working and characteristics of Solar Cell.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Ability to understand working and characteristics of Opto Electronics Semi Conductors.
CO 2 Ability to understand working and characteristics of Opto Electronics Materials.
CO 3 Ability to understand working and characteristics of Opto Electronics Detectors.
CO 4 Ability to understand working and characteristics of Solar Cell.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 ‐ 2 1 ‐ 2
CO 2 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 ‐ 2 1 ‐ 2
CO 3 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 ‐ 2 1 ‐ 2
CO 4 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 ‐ 2 1 ‐ 2

UNIT I

Optoelectronic materials, Semiconductors, compound semiconductors, III‐V and II‐VI compounds, ZnO, ITO,
GaN, direct and indirect band gap, electronic properties of semiconductors, Fermi level, density of states, life
time and mobility of carriers, invariance of Fermi level at equilibrium, diffusion, continuity equation, excess
carriers, Quasi‐Fermi levels, optical properties, theory of recombination, radiative and non‐ radiative,
absorption edge, photoconductivity, light emitting diodes, LED, device configuration and efficiency, LED
structures, light current characteristics and device performance, frequency response and modulation band
width. Laser diodes – basic concepts, heterojunction and injection lasers, output characteristics.DER, DBR and
quantum well lasers, multiple quantum well structures, surface emitting lasers.

UNIT II

Birefringence, uniaxial and biaxial crystals, index ellipsoid, electro‐optic effect, electro optic retardation. Phase
and amplitude modulators, transverse electro optic modulators and design considerations‐ high frequency
modulation considerations, transit time limitations in lumped modulators, travelling wave modulators.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1208
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Acousto‐optic effect, Raman‐Nath and Bragg regime, acousto‐optic modulators, magneto optic effects, spatial
light modulators.

UNIT III

Photodetectors, ‐performance criteria of a photodectetor, expressions for quantum efficiency, responsivity,

photoconductors and photodiodes, PIN diodes, heterojunction diodes and APDs, characteristics and device
performance, high speed measurement photoresistors, CCDs, photomultiplier tube, noises in photodetectors,
SNR, noise equivalent power.

UNIT IV

Solar cell materials and their properties. solar cell research: technology‐Silicon,Organic and Perovskite
Characterization and analysis: ideal cell under illuminationsolar cell parameters, optical losses; electrical losses,
surface recombination velocity, quantum efficiency ‐ measurements of solar cell parameters; I‐V curve & L‐I‐V
characteristics, internal quantum yield measurements – effects of series and parallel resistance and
temperature ‐ loss analysis.

Textbook(s):
1. Amnon Yariv, Optical Electronics, Holt Rine hart & Winston, Philadelphia, 1991
2. Bhattacharya P., Semiconductor Optoelectronic Devices,, PHI, New Delhi.1995

Reference Books:
1. Ben G. Streetmann & Sanjay Banerjee, Solid State Electronic Devices, 5thEdn, 2000.
2. Solar Cells: Operating principles, Technology and System Applications, by Martin A. Green, PHI, 1981
3. Thin Film Solar Cell: Fabrication, Characterizations and Applications, Poortmans J and Arkhipov V, John
Wiley & Sons, England 2006

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1209
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Optoelectronics Devices L P C
3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ECE 7 PCE PCE‐4 ECE‐417T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To impart the Knowledge about optical processes in semiconductors and Light Emmitting Diodes.
2. To impart the knowledge about operating principles, modes, structures, construction, and
characteristics of Laser Diodes and their applications.
3. Let the students understand about the types, construction, working and characteristics of various
optical detectors and special detection schemes.
4. Let the students know about various optical devices and apply them in optical networks and analyze
various optical parameters.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 To understand the optical processes in semiconductors and Light Emmitting Diodes.
CO 2 To understand about operating principles, modes, structures, construction, and characteristics of Laser
Diodes and their applications.
CO 3 To understand types, construction, working and characteristics of various optical detectors and special
detection schemes.
CO 4 To understand various optical devices and apply them in optical networks and analyze various optical
parameters.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 2 2 2 2 1 ‐ 1 2 1 2
CO 2 3 3 2 2 2 2 1 ‐ 1 2 1 2
CO 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 1 ‐ 1 2 1 2
CO 4 3 3 2 2 2 2 1 ‐ 1 2 1 2

UNIT‐I

Optical Processes in Semiconductors: Electron‐hole pair formation & recombination, Absorption in

semiconductors, Radiation in semiconductors, Types of Optical sources.
Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs): The Electroluminescent process, Choice of LED materials, Device configuration
and efficiency, Light output from LEDs, LED structures, Types of LEDs, Device performance characteristics,
Frequency response and modulation bandwidth, Modulation of an LED, Manufacturing process & applications.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1210
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT‐II

Lasers Operating Principles:‐ Design of a Laser hetrostucture, Emission and absorption of radiation in a two‐
level systems, The Einstein relations and population inversion, Gain in a two‐level lasing medium, Lasing
condition and gain in a semiconductor, Selective amplification & coherence, Lasing threshold condition in a
two‐level system, Axial and transverse laser modes, Application of semiconductor lasers.
Lasers Structures & Properties:‐ Junction laser operating principles, Hetrojunction Lasers, Distributed feedback
lasers, The cleaved‐coupled‐cavity lasers, Quantum well lasers, Surface emitting lasers, Alternate pumping
techniques, Device fabrication, Radiation pattern, External quantum efficiency, Laser characteristics,
Modulation of lasers, Line width of laser modes.

UNIT‐III

Optical Detector: Basic optical detection concepts(Optical detection principle, Absorption, Quantum efficiency
& Responsivity.), Photoconductors, Junction Photodiodes ‐ p‐n Photodiode, p‐i‐n Photodiode, Hetrojunction
diodes. Avalanche Photodiode ‐ Avalanche multiplication, Multiplication and Ionization coefficients in p‐i‐n
and p‐n junction diodes, Measurments of Multiplication factors and Impact‐ionisation coefficients, Practical
Avalanche photodiodes, Detector Response time, Noise performance of photodiodes.
Special Detection Schemes:‐ Phototransistors, Modulated barrier photodiodes, Metal‐Semiconductor
(Schottky Barrier) photodiode, Metal‐Semiconductor‐Metal (MSM) photodiode, Detectors for long wavelength
operations, Wavelenth selective detection, Coherent detection.

UNIT‐IV

Solar Cells: Basic principles, Spectral response, Hetrojunction and Cascaded solar cells, Schottky barrier cells.
Optoelectronic Modulation and Switching Devices: Franz‐Keldysh and Stark effect modulators, Quantum well
Electro‐absorption modulators, Electro‐optic modulators, Optical switching and logic devices.
Light Wave Networks: Fiber types and modes, Network topologies and configurations, Digital and analog
transmission systems, Techniques in Advanced light wave systems – Wavelength division multiplexing, Active
and passive couplers, Regenerative and Non‐regenerative amplifiers, Cross point switches.

Textbook(s):
nd
1. Pallab Bhattacharya,”Semiconductor Optoelectronic Devices”, Pearson Education inc, 2 edition, 1997.
2. Niloy K Dutta & Xiang Zhang, “Optoelectronic Devices”, World Scientific, Singapore, 2018.

References:
1. Jasprit Singh, “Optoelectronics‐An Introduction to Materials and Devices”, McGrawhill Int.edition, 1998.
2. S. C. Gupta, “Optoelectronic Devices and systems,” 2nd edition, PHI, 2015.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1211
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Optoelectronics Devices Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ECE 7 PCE PCE‐4 ECE‐417P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Optoelectronics Devices) as this is the
practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Study the characteristics of LED, the relationship between LED voltage and current and the Wavelength of
Light Emitted.
2. Study of Characteristics of LASER diode. Power vs. Current (P‐I) characteristics and measure slope efficiency
of Laser Diode.
3. Study the Characteristics of Photodiode and measure the responsivity
4. Characteristics of Avalanche Photo Diode (APD) and measure the responsivity.
5. Study of Phototransistor: The relation between photogenerated current and light intensity
6. Study and plot the different characteristics of an optocoupler device.
7. Study of Solar Cell: I‐V characteristics
8. Design and simulate the DWDM and WDM techniques used in optical communication.
9. Measurement the Numerical Aperture of a Multimode Fiber.
10. To measure propagation loss in optical fiber using optical power meter
11. Splice the Single Mode Fiber (SMF) by using fusion splicer.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1212
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Organizational Behaviour L P C
4 4

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 7 QM‐EAE QM‐EAE‐5 QM‐445

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To develop managerial skills for an organisation and apply it in resolving the conflicts.
2. To analyse the differences in behaviour individually and in a group.
3. To understand various processes and working environment /conditions of an organisation.
4. To determine appropriate leadership styles to accomplish the work in the given time frame.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Understand the challenges and opportunities of an organisation.
CO 2 Able to understand individual behaviour and apply the concept of values, attitude, perception in
workplace.
CO 3 To understand the organisation design, climate and culture for taking the decisions.
CO 4 To understand types of transactions and leadership styles of an organisation.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 1 ‐ 1 3 2 3 3
CO 2 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 1 ‐ 3 3 2 3 3
CO 3 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 1 ‐ 3 3 2 3 3
CO 4 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 1 ‐ 3 3 2 3 3

UNIT‐I

Introduction: Concept and nature of Organizational Behaviour; Contributing disciplines to the field of O.B.; O.B.
Models; Need to understand human behaviour; Challenges and Opportunities, Management functions, Tasks
and responsibilities of a professional manager; Managerial skills

UNIT‐II

Individual & Interpersonal Behaviour: Biographical Characteristics; Ability; Values; Attitudes‐Formation,

Theories, Organization related attitude, Relationship between attitude and behaviour; Personality –
determinants and traits; Emotions; Learning‐Theories and reinforcement schedules, Perception –Process and
errors.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1213
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT‐III

Organization Structure and Process: Organizational climate and culture, Organizational Structure and Design,
Managerial Communication, Motivation, Stress and its management, Decision Making: Organizational Context
of Decisions, Decision Making Models; Problem Solving.

UNIT – IV

Interactive Aspects of Organizational Behaviour: Interpersonal Behaviour: Johari Window; Transactional

Analysis – ego states, types of transactions, life positions, applications of T.A, Group Dynamics; Management of
Organizational Conflicts; Leadership Styles.

Textbook(s):
1. Luthans Fred., “Organizational Behaviour”, McGraw Hill, 2010, 12th ed.
2. Robbins & Judge (15th ed.), “Essentials of Organizational Behaviour”, Pearson 2012.

References:
1. Stoner, R. James A.F., “Edward Freeman Daniel R Gilbert Jr., Management” 6TH Ed, PHI.
2. George, J. M. & Jones, G.R. “Understanding and Managing Organizational Behaviour”, 2009, 5th Ed,
Pearson.
3. Green Berg, J. and Baron, R.A., “Behaviour in Organization”, 2008, Prentice Hall of India.
4. Mcshane, S.L., Von Glinow, M.A., Sharma, R.R. “Organizational Behaviour”, 2006 Tata McGrawHill.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1214
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Parallel Computing L P C
3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CSE 6 PCE PCE‐3 CIE‐370T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To understand and analyze different parallel computer models.
2. To assess and analyze the requirement of memory hierarchy.
3. To compare different architecure of parallel computers.
4. To understand various platforms for parallel computing.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Able to understand and analyze different parallel computer models.
CO 2 Able to assess and analyze the requirement of memory hierarchy.
CO 3 Able to compare different architecure of parallel computers.
CO 4 Able to understand various platforms for parallel computing.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 2 2 3 2 1 2 1 ‐ ‐ 1 1 1
CO 2 2 2 3 2 1 2 1 ‐ ‐ 1 1 1
CO 3 2 2 3 2 1 2 1 ‐ ‐ 1 1 1
CO 4 2 2 3 2 1 2 1 ‐ ‐ 1 1 1

UNIT I

Theory of Parallelism: Parallelism, Reason of parallel processing, Concepts and challenges, applications of
parallel processing.
Parallel computer models: The state of computing, Classification of parallel computers, Flynn and Feng’s
classification, SIMD and MIMD operations, Shared Memory vs. message passing multiprocessors, Distributed
shared memory, Hybrid multiprocessors, multiprocessors and multicomputers, Multivector and SIMD
computers, PRAM and VLSI Models.
Program and Network Properties: Conditions of parallelism, program partitioning and scheduling, program flow
mechanism, system interconnection architecture.

UNIT II

Memory Hierarchy Design: Memory technologies and optimization, inclusion, coherence and locality, cache
memory organization and cache performance optimization, shared memory organization, memory protection,
virtual memory technology and introduction to buses, crossbar and multi‐stage switches.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1215
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Pipelining and ILP: Instruction level parallelism and its exploitation‐ concepts and challenges, overcoming data
hazards with dynamic scheduling. Pipelining, instruction and arithmetic pipelining designs, branch handling
techniques, linear and non‐linear pipeline processors, superscalar and super pipeline design.

UNIT III

Parallel architectures: multi‐processor system interconnects, cache coherence and synchronization mechanism,
message passing mechanism, vector processing principles, multivector multiprocessors, compound vector
processing, principles of multithreading, latency hiding techniques‐ shared virtual memory, prefetching
techniques, distributed coherent cache, scalable and multithread architectures, dataflow and hybrid
architecture.

UNIT IV

Parallel Programming Platforms: Implicit Parallelism: Trends in Microprocessor Architectures, limitations of

Memory System Performance, Dichotomy of Parallel Computing Platforms, Physical Organization of Parallel
Platforms, Communication Costs in Parallel Machines, Routing Mechanisms for Interconnection Networks.
Parallel Programming Models: Shared variable models, message passing models, parallel languages and
complier, code optimization and scheduling, Introduction of shared‐memory MIMD machines and message‐
passing MIMD machines.

Textbooks:
1. Introduction to Parallel Computing by Ananth Grama, Anshul Gupta, George Karypis, Vipin Kumar, Pearson.
2. Advance computer Architecture by Kai Hwang under Tata McGraw Hill publications.
3. Introduction to Parallel Processing: Algorithms & Architectures, Behrooz Parhami in Springer Shop.

References:
1. Introduction to Parallel Processing by P. Ravi Prakash, M. Sasikumar, Dinesh Shikhare by PHI Publications.
2. Fundamentals of Parallel Processing by Jordan Harry, Alaghband Gita, PHI Publication
3. Introduction to Parallel Programming by Steven Brawer.
4. Parallel Computers – Architecture and Programming by V. Rajaraman and C. Siva Ram Murthy.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1216
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Parallel Computing Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CSE 6 PCE PCE‐3 CIE‐370P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Parallel Computing) as this is the
practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. OpenMP – Basic programs such as Vector addition, Dot Product

2. OpenMP – Loop work‐sharing and sections work‐sharing
3. OpenMP – Combined parallel loop reduction and Orphaned parallel loop reduction
4. OpenMP – Matrix multiply (specify run of a GPU card, large scale data Complexity of the problem need to
be specified)
5. MPI – Basics of MPI
6. MPI – Communication between MPI process
7. MPI – Advanced communication between MPI process
8. MPI – Collective operation with ‘synchronization’
9. MPI – Collective operation with ‘data movement’
10. MPI – Collective operation with ‘collective computation’
11. MPI – Non‐blocking operation

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1217
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Pattern Recognition L P C
3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 6 IPCV‐EAE IPCV‐EAE‐2 IPCV‐336T
ECE 7 PCE PCE‐4 ECE‐405T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To understand the concept of a pattern and the basic approach to the development of pattern
recognition and machine intelligence algorithms.
2. To apply the knowledge of feature extraction methods, feature evaluation, and data mining on real life
3. To apply both supervised and unsupervised classification methods to detect and characterize patterns
in real‐world data.
4. To impart the knowledge of the soft computing techniques used in pattern recognition.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Understand the need and significance of mathematical fundamentals in pattern recognition to solve
real‐ time problems.
CO 2 Explore on supervised & unsupervised learning algorithms and to apply them for solving problems.
CO 3 Design pattern recognition models to extract interesting patterns & Apply various machine learning
techniques like artificial neural networks, Support Vector machines, Fuzzy inference engines etc.to
solve real‐world problems
CO 4 Develop prototype pattern recognition algorithms that can be used to study algorithm behaviour and
performance against real‐world multivariate data
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 2 1 1 2
CO 2 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 ‐ 2 1 ‐ 2
CO 3 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 ‐ 2 1 ‐ 2
CO 4 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 ‐ 2 1 ‐ 2

UNIT I

Classification: Overview of pattern recognition, Discriminant functions, Supervised learning‐Parametric

estimation, Maximum likelihood estimation.
Pattern Classifier: Bayesian parameter estimation, perceptron algorithm, LMSE algorithm, problems with Bayes
approach, Pattern classification by distance functions, Minimum distance pattern classifier.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1218
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT II

Unsupervised Classification: Criterion functions for clustering; Algorithms for clustering: K‐Means,
Hierarchical and other methods; Cluster validation; Gaussian mixture models; Expectation‐Maximization
method for parameter estimation; Maximum entropy estimation.

UNIT III

Sequential Pattern Recognition: Hidden Markov Models (HMMs); Discrete HMMs; Continuous HMMs
Structural
Dimensionality reduction: Fisher discriminant analysis; Principal component analysis; Factor Analysis
Feature Extraction and Selection: Feature selection through Functions approximation, Binary feature selection.

UNIT IV

Linear discriminant functions, Neural Networks and Kernel Machines: Neural network structures for pattern
recognition, Self‐organizing networks, Support vector machines (SVM), Kernel machines, Maximum margin
classification, and generalize ability.
Neuro Fuzzy and Genetic Algorithm for pattern classification: Fuzzy logic‐Fuzzy pattern classifiers‐Neuro‐Fuzzy
Systems‐pattern classification and optimization Using Genetic Algorithms

Textbook(s):
1. Duda R.O.,and Hart.P.E., Pattern Classification and Scene Analysis, second edition, Wiley, 2001
2. RobertJ. Schalkoff, Pattern Recognition: Statistical, Structural and Neural Approaches, John Wiley & Sons
Inc., New York, 2007.

References:
1. Ou and Gonzales, Pattern Recognition Principles, Wesley Publication Company, London, 1974.
2. Morton Nadier and Eric Smith P., Pattern Recognition Engineering, John Wiley & Sons, New York, 1993

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1219
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Pattern Recognition Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 6 IPCV‐EAE IPCV‐EAE‐2 IPCV‐336P
ECE 7 PCE PCE‐4 ECE‐405P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Pattern Recognition) as this is the
practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Installation and working on various AI tools such as Python / MATLAB.

2. Gaussian function evaluation. Write a MATLAB/Python function that computes the value of the Gaussian
distribution N (m, S), at a given vector x. Hence, plot the effect of varying mean and variance to the normal
distributions.
3. Implementation of pattern recognition problems such as handwritten character/ digit recognition, speech
recognition, etc
4. Implementation of anyone classification technique.
5. Model the experiment by means of a Hidden Markov Models (i.e., define the vector of the initial state
probabilities, the transition matrix and the matrix of the emission probabilities).
6. Implementation of different feature extraction methods.
7. Compute the Classification Accuracy of Support Vector Machine & Convolutional Neural Network for a
given dataset
8. Compute the Classification Accuracy of Extreme Learning Machines & Convolutional Neural Network for a
given dataset
9. Implementation of various clustering techniques.
10. Implementation of the Genetic Algorithms for pattern classification

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1220
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Pattern Recognition and Computer Vision L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CSE‐AIML 7 PC PC ML‐411T
EAE 7 AIML‐EAE AIML‐EAE‐5 ML‐411T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. Understand the in‐depth concept of Pattern Recognition
2. Implement Bayes Decision Theory
3. Understand the in‐depth concept of Perception and related Concepts
4. Understand the concept of ML Pattern Classification
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Discuss various concepts of pattern recognition
CO 2 Understanding various algorithms
CO 3 Explain and apply various computer vision techniques
CO 4 Describe the concept of shape analysis and filtering
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 2 2 3 3 ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ 1 3 2
CO 2 3 3 1 1 1 ‐ 1 1 ‐ 2 2 1
CO 3 3 2 3 3 2 ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ 2 3 1
CO 4 1 2 3 2 2 ‐ 1 ‐ ‐ 1 2 2

UNIT‐I

Induction Algorithms. Rule Induction. Decision Trees. Bayesian Methods. Overview. Naïve Bayes. The Basic
Naıve Bayes Classifier. Naive Bayes Induction for Numeric Attributes. Correction to the Probability Estimation.
Laplace Correction. No Match. Other Bayesian Methods. Other Induction Methods. Neural Networks. Genetic
Algorithms. Instance‐based Learning. Support Vector Machines.

UNIT‐II

About Statistical Pattern Recognition. Classification and regression. Features, Feature Vectors, and Classifiers.
Pre‐processing and feature extraction. The curse of dimensionality. Polynomial curve fitting. Model complexity.
Multivariate non‐linear functions. Bayes' theorem. Decision boundaries. Parametric methods. Sequential
parameter estimation. Linear discriminant functions. Fisher's linear discriminant. Feed‐forward network
mappings.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1221
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT‐III

Review of image processing techniques – classical filtering operations – thresholding techniques – edge
detection techniques – corner and interest point detection – mathematical morphology – texture.

UNIT – IV

Binary shape analysis – connectedness – object labelling and counting – size filtering – distance functions –
skeletons and thinning – deformable shape analysis – boundary tracking procedures – active contours – shape
models and shape recognition – centroidal profiles – handling occlusion – boundary length measures –
boundary descriptors – chain codes – Fourier descriptors – region descriptors – moments.

Textbook(s):
1. Pattern Classification, Richard O. Duda, Peter E. Hart, and David G. Stork. Wiley, 2000, 2nd Edition
2. D. L. Baggio et al., Mastering OpenCV with Practical Computer Vision Projects, Packt Publishing, 2012.

References:
1. Pattern Recognition, Jürgen Beyerer, Matthias Richter, and Matthias Nagel. 2018
2. E. R. Davies, Computer & Machine Vision, Fourth Edition, Academic Press, 2012

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1222
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Pattern Recognition and Computer Vision Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CSE‐AIML 7 PC PC ML‐411P
EAE 7 AIML‐EAE AIML‐EAE‐5 ML‐411P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Pattern Recognition and Computer
Vision) as this is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Write a MATLAB/Python function that computes the value of the Gaussian distribution N(m,s) at given
vector X and plot the effect of varying mean and variance to the normal distribution.
2. Implementation of Gradient descent.
3. Implementation of Linear Regression using Gradient descent.
4. Comparison of classification accuracy of SVM and CNN for the dataset.
5. Implementation basic Image Handling and processing operations on the image.
6. Implementation of Geometric Transformation.
7. Implementation of Perspective Transformation.
8. Implementation of Camera Calibration
9. Compute Fundamental Matrix.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1223
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

PHP Programming and MySQL L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CSE‐in‐EA 7 OAE‐CSE‐EA OAE‐2 FSD‐435T
EE‐VDT/EC‐ACT 7 OAE‐ECE‐EA OAE‐2 FSD‐435T
EAE 7 FSD‐EAE FSD‐EAE‐3 FSD‐435T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. Learn how to take a static website and turn it into a dynamic website run from a database using PHP
and MySQL.
2. Analyze the basic structure of a PHP web application and be able to install and maintain the web
server, compile, and run a simple web application.
3. Learn how databases work and how to design one, as well as how to use php MyAdmin to work with
MySQL.
4. Learn different ways of connecting to MySQL through PHP, and how to create tables, enter data,
select data, change data, and delete data. Connect to SQL Server and other data sources.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Interpret the server side scripting PHP and create dynamic web pages.
CO 2 Outline the advanced concepts of PHP and design web pages to authenticate users.
CO 3 Develop server side programs using PHP and accessing database through PHP.
CO 4 Design web pages to authenticate users using Cookies.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 2 3 2 3 1 ‐ ‐ 3 2 3 2
CO 2 3 2 3 2 3 1 ‐ ‐ 3 2 3 2
CO 3 3 2 3 2 3 1 ‐ ‐ 3 2 3 2
CO 4 3 2 3 2 3 1 ‐ ‐ 3 2 3 2

UNIT‐I

Introduction to PHP: Evaluation of PHP, Basic Syntax, Defining variable and constant, PHP Data type, Operator
and Expression, Decisions and loop: Making Decisions, Doing Repetitive task with looping, Mixing Decisions and
looping with Html, Function: What is a function, Define a function, Call by value and Call by reference,
Recursive function, String Creating and accessing, String Searching & Replacing String, Formatting String, String
Related Library function

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1224
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT‐II

Array Anatomy of an Array, Creating index based and Associative array Accessing array, Element Looping with
Index based array, Looping with associative array using each () and foreach(), Some useful Library function,
Handling Html Form with PHP Capturing Form, Data Dealing with Multi‐value filed, and Generating File
uploaded form, redirecting a form after submission

UNIT‐III

Working with file and Directories: Understanding file& directory, Opening and closing, a file, Coping, renaming
and deleting a file, working with directories, Creating and deleting folder, File Uploading & Downloading,
Session and Cookie: Introduction to Session Control, Session Functionality What is a Cookie, Setting Cookies
with PHP. Using Cookies with Sessions, Deleting Cookies, Registering Session variables, Destroying the variables
and Session.

UNIT ‐ IV

Introduction to RDBMS: Connection with MySql Database, Performing basic database operation (DML) (Insert,
Delete, Update, Select), Setting query parameter, Executing queryJoin (Cross joins, Inner joins, Outer Joins, Self
joins.)

Textbook(s):
1. Dave W Mercer, Allan Kent, Steven D Nowicki, David Mercer, Dan Squier, Wankyu Choi, “Beginning PHP”.
2. RasmusLerdorf and Kevin Tatore , “Programming PHP”

References:
1. Learning PHP, MySQL, books by ‘ O’ riley Press
2. PHP, MySQL and Apache by Julie C Meloni. Pearson Education

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1225
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

PHP Programming and MySQL Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CSE‐in‐EA 7 OAE‐CSE‐EA OAE‐2 FSD‐435P
EE‐VDT/EC‐ACT 7 OAE‐ECE‐EA OAE‐2 FSD‐435P
EAE 7 FSD‐EAE FSD‐EAE‐3 FSD‐435P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (PHP Programming and MySQL) as this
is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. a. Install and configure PHP, web server, MYSQL

b. Write a program to print “Welcome to PHP”.
c. Write a simple PHP program using expressions and operators.
2. Write a PHP program to demonstrate the use of Decision making control structures using:
a. If statement
b. If‐else statement
c. Switch statement
3. Write a PHP program to demonstrate the use of Looping structures using:
a. while statement
b. do‐while statement
c. for statement
d. foreach statement
4. Write a PHP program for creating and manipulating‐
a. Indexed array
b. Associative array
c. Multidimensional array
5. a. Write a PHP program to‐
i. Calculate length of string.
ii. Count the number of words in string without using string functions.
b. Write a simple PHP program to demonstrate use of various built‐in string functions.
6. Write a simple PHP program to demonstrate use of Simple function and Parametrized function.
7. Develop web page with data validation.
8. Write simple PHP program to‐
a. Set cookies and read it.
b. Demonstrate session management
9. Develop a simple application to‐
a. Enter data into database.
b. Retrieve and present data from database.
10. Develop a simple application to Update, Delete table data from database.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1226
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Pipe and Open Channel Hydraulics L P C

4 4

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

OAE 6 CE‐OAE CE‐OAE‐2 OCE‐304

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To introduce the concepts of channel hydraulics.
2. To study different types of flow and flow characteristics.
3. To analyze flow problems and determine effect of channel geometric parameter of flow
characteristics.
4. To understand the concept of pipe flow and pipe network analysis.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Define fundamental concepts of various types open channel flow and concepts of specific energy.
CO 2 Analyze the flow through transition, varied flow, forces on sediment load
CO 3 Determine flow profiles, and characteristics of varied flow
CO 4 Understand the concept of pipe flow and forces exerted and energy loss during transmission.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 2 2 ‐ 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 1 ‐ ‐
CO 2 3 2 2 2 ‐ 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐
CO 3 1 1 1 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐
CO 4 3 3 3 2 1 ‐ ‐ 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐

UNIT‐I

Flow in open channels: Type of channels, classification of flows, geometrical properties of channel section,
velocity distribution in channel section, most economical/efficient section of channel(rectangular, triangular,
trapezoidal), continuity equation, energy equation and momentum equation, concept of critical depth and
specific energy, critical depth for rectangular, triangular, and trapezoidal channels, flow through transition with
a hump and with change in width (contraction and expansion).

UNIT‐II

Uniform flow: Chezy’s equation, Manning’s formula, Factors affecting Manning’s roughness coefficient,
velocity distribution, shear stress distribution, Uniform flow computations for rectangular, trapezoidal and
circular channels, standard line canal channels, Hydraulically efficient channel sections, compound sections,
Critical slope and limit slope.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1227
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT‐III

Gradually Varied Flow: Introduction, differential equation of GVF, Classification of flow profiles, M, S, C, H and
A profiles, features of flow profiles, control sections, serial combination of channel sections, Transitional depth,
numerical solution Method of gradually varied flow problems(direct step method).
Hydraulic jump: Hydraulic jump in rectangular channel: sequent depth ratio, Energy loss; Classification of
jumps, use of jump as an energy dissipater.

UNIT ‐ IV

Flow through pipes: Loss of head / energy in pipes ‐ Major losses‐friction loss by Darcy Weisbach formula,
Chezy’s formula; Types of minor losses; Hydraulic gradient and total energy line, Flow through siphon, Pipes in
series, concept of equivalent pipe, flow through parallel and branched pipes; Water hammer in pipes, sudden
and gradual closure of valve; Analysis of Pipe network using Hardy Cross method.

Textbook(s):
1. K. Subramanya, “Flow in Open Channels”, Tata McGraw Hill
2. S.Ramamrutham, “Hydraulics Fluid Mechanics and Fluid Machines”, Dhanpat Rai Publishing Company,
2018

References:
1. Modi, P.N. Seth S.M., Hydraulics and Fluid Mechanics (incl. Hydraulic Machines), Standard Book House,
New Delhi.
2. Garde, R J, and Ranga Raju, K G, Mechanics of Sediment Transportation and Alluvial Stream Problems,
Wiley Eastern Ltd., New Delhi.
3. Applied Hydrology ‐ Ven T Chow, David R Maidment, Larry W Mays, McGraw‐Hill, New Delhi
4. R.K.Sharma and T.K.Sharma, Irrigation Engineering. S.Chand and Company Ltd., New Delhi.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1228
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Planning and Design of Green Buildings L P C

4 4

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 6 GTSE‐EAE GTSE‐EAE‐1 GTSE‐318

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To impart knowledge of the principles and practices of the green buildings
2. To understand the principles of effective energy and resources management in buildings
3. To bring awareness of the basic criteria in the green building rating systems.
4. To understand the methodologies to reduce, recycle and reuse towards sustainability.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Assimilate environmental impact of buildings.
CO 2 Quantify the environmental impact of buildings in terms of energy consumption.
CO 3 Integrate design strategies in the construction of green buildings as well as existing buildings.
CO 4 Comprehend the procedure involved in green building certification.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 ‐ ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ 1 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 2 ‐ ‐ 3 2 ‐ 3 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 3 ‐ 2 3 3 ‐ 2 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 4 ‐ ‐ 3 ‐ ‐ 3 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2

UNIT‐I

Green building concept‐ History of Green Building Movement, increased public focus on Sustainability and
Energy Efficiency, Supportive Framework and general condition, Green Home Certifications, CO2 Emission
Trade, Impacts of built environment on natural environment, High Performance Building Characteristic, the
LEED rating system, Rating system for Sustainable Building, Barriers to green building growth.

UNIT‐II

Green Building Requirements: Principles of Energy, Heat Flow, Fuel Types, Air Flow, Moisture Flow,
Condensation and Dew Point, Relative Humidity, Concept of Earth air Tunnel System for moderating air
Temperature, sky‐therm system, Solar chimney‐based hybrid system
Indoor Built Environment: Problem of Existing Buildings and Built Environment; Energy use in buildings;
Greenhouse Gas Emissions and Indoor Air pollution; Building Water Use; Land use and consumption;
Construction Materials; Construction, Operation and Demolition Waste. Building shape and orientation,
building envelope, building materials and furnishing, natural resources. An integrated view of green building‐

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1229
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Lifecycle engineering

UNIT‐III

Planning of Green from Start‐ Traditional Design, Integrated Design, Site Selection, Site Development,
Construction Waste, Materials required, Paints, Adhesive and sealants for use in building, Volatile organic
content (VOC), Tree Protection, Pest Control, Floors and Exterior walls, Roofs, Landscaping
Green Building Design: Passive Design Strategies, Bio climatic design, Optimum Design, Solar geometry, climate
responsive building design, thermal comfort, visual comfort, acoustic comfort, Performing Insulation Solution,
Ventilation; Active Strategies: Equipment, Renewable Energy; Retrofitting; Net Zero Building Design.

UNIT – IV

Embodied Energy Estimation; Life Cycle Assessment Analysis, Sustainable building procedure requirement,
Blower door test, Thermography, Indoor Comfort, Air Quality, Noise Protection, Day light Performance and
Non‐Glaring, Emulation, Monitoring and Energy Management, Conscious handling of resources‐ Energy
benchmark as target values for design, regenerative energy resources, primary energy demand for indoor
climate conditioning, Energy demand for Lifecycle of a building, Water requirement, Case study.

Textbook(s):
1 Green Building Technology Guide: Volume 1 ‐ Residential, Fred Andreas, Academic Press Inc., 1st Ed. (2020).
2. The Idea of Green Building, A. K. Jain, Khanna Publishers, First Edition, (2014).

References:
1. Sustainable Construction: Green Building Design and Delivery, Charles Kibert, John Wiley & Sons, (2005).
2. Energetics Perspective on the Environmental and Human Impact of Buildings, Teodora Melania Soimosan
and Ligia Mihaela Moga, Business Science Reference, (2020).
3. Alternative Energy Systems in Building Design, Peter Gevorkian, McGraw‐Hill Education, First Edition, (2009).

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1230
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

PLC and SCADA Systems L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 6 CI‐EAE CI‐EAE‐1 CI‐306T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To Understand the features of PLC
2. Knowlwdge of role of programming in PLC
3. Analyse various functions of PLC
4. Understand operation and importance of various parts of SCADA system
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Understand the features of PLC
CO 2 Assess the role of programming in PLC
CO 3 Analyse various functions of PLC
CO 4 Understand operation and importance of various parts of SCADA system
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 2 1 1 1 1 ‐ 1 3 ‐ 3
CO 2 3 2 1 3 2 1 1 ‐ 1 3 ‐ 1
CO 3 3 2 1 2 3 1 1 ‐ 1 3 ‐ 3
CO 4 3 3 2 1 1 1 1 ‐ 1 3 ‐ 3

UNIT‐I

Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) Basics: Introduction, Parts of PLC, Principles of operation, PLC size and
applications, PLC Advantages and Disadvantages, PLC Manufacturers, PLC hardware components, I/O section,
Analog I/O modules, Digital I/O modules, CPU‐ Processor memory module, Programming devices, Devices
which can be connected to I/O modules, Relay, Contactor, SPST, Push Buttons, NO/NC Concept

UNIT‐II

Programming of Programmable Logic Controller: General PLC Programming Procedures, Contacts and Coils,
Program SCAN, Programming Languages, Ladder Programming, Relay Instructions, Instruction Addressing,
Concept of Latching, Branch Instructions, Contact and Coil I/O Programming Examples, Relation of Digital Gate
Logic to Contact/Coil Logic.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1231
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT‐III

Programmable Logic Controller Functions: Timer Instructions: ON DELAY Timer and OFF DELAY timer, Counter
Instructions: UP/DOWN Counters, Timer and Counter Applications, Program Control Instructions: Master
Control Reset, Jump and Subroutine,
Math Instructions‐ ADD, SUB. Data Handling: Data Move, Data Compare, Data Selection, Electro‐pneumatic
Sequential Circuits and Applications.

UNIT‐IV

SCADA: Definition of SCADA, Applicable Processes, Elements of SCADA System, A Limited Two‐Way System.
Real Time Systems: Communication Access and Master‐Slave determining scan interval. Introduction to
Remote Control, Communications‐A/D Conversion, Long Distance Communication, Communication System
components in brief‐ Protocol, Modems, Synchronous/Asynchronous telephone cable/radio, Half Duplex, Full
Duplex System, Brief introduction to RTU and MTU, Applications‐Automatic Control, Advisory Applications.

Text Books:
1. Frank D. Petruzella “Programmable Logic Controllers”, McGraw‐Hill Book Company.
2. John w. Webb and Ronald A. Reis, “Programmable Logic Controllers”, PHI

Reference Books:
1. Stuart A.Boyer “Supervisors Control and Data Acquisition”, ISA
2. William I. Fletcher “An Engineering Approach to Digital Design”, PHI.
3. Simpson, Colin “Programmable Logic Controllers”, Englewood Cliffs NJ PHI.
4. Gray Dunning, “Introduction to Programmable Logic Controllers”, Delmar Thompson Learning
5. Stenerson, John “Fundamentals Logic Controllers Sensors, & Communications”, 1993. Prentice Hall.
6. Programmable Logic Controllers, W.Bolton, Elsevier

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1232
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

PLC and SCADA Systems Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 6 CI‐EAE CI‐EAE‐1 CI‐306P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (PLC and SCADA Systems) as this is the
practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Study hardware and software used in PLC

2. Develop an Interfacing of lamp and button with PLC for ON/OFF operation.
3. Multiple push button operation with delayed lamp for ON/OFF operation.
4. Study combination of Counter & Timer for Lamp ON/OFF operation using PLC.
5. Observe the effect of change in Proportional Band, Integral gain and Derivative gain values on PID
performance
6. PLC interfaced with SCADA and status read/ command transfer operation
7. Develop an Alarm annunciation using SCADA
8. Reporting and Trending in SCADA System.
9. Perform an experiment of parameter reading of PLC in SCADA
10. Perform an experiment of sensing Temperature using SCADA

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1233
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Pollution Control and Monitoring L P C

4 4

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CE 6 PCE PCE‐2 CEE‐316

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To learn about the air pollutants, sources and its effects.
2. To have a clear understanding on the air quality standards and its techniques
3. To find the Properties of air pollution and its control measures.
4. To learn about the effects and the sources of noise pollution
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Understand basic concepts and terminologies of air & noise pollution, sources and effects on
environment
CO 2 Understand air & noise pollution indices, various acts and legislations
CO 3 Discuss air & noise pollution standards and measurement methods
CO 4 Analyze removal techniques to control air & noise pollution
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 ‐ 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐
CO 2 ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 3
CO 3 ‐ 2 ‐ 3 ‐ 3 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐
CO 4 ‐ 3 3 ‐ ‐ 3 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 3

UNIT‐I

Air pollution: composition and structure of atmosphere, global implications of air pollution, classification of air
pollutants: particulates, hydrocarbon, carbon monoxide, oxides of sulphur, oxides of nitrogen and
photochemical oxidants. Indoor air pollution. Effects of air pollutants on humans, animals, property and plants.

UNIT‐II

Air pollution chemistry, meteorological aspects of air pollution dispersion; temperature lapse rate and stability,
wind velocity and turbulence, plume behaviour, dispersion of air pollutants, the Gaussian Plume Model, stack
height and dispersion.

UNIT‐III

Ambient air quality and standards, air sampling and measurements. Control of particulate air pollutants using

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1234
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

gravitational settling chambers, cyclone separators, wet collectors, fabric filters (Bag‐house filter), electrostatic
precipitators (ESP) Control of gaseous contaminants: Absorption, Adsorption, Condensation and Combustion,
Control of sulphur oxides, nitrogen oxides, carbon monoxide, and hydrocarbons. Automotive emission control,
catalytic convertor, Euro‐I, Euro‐II and Euro‐III specifications, Indian specifications.

UNIT – IV

Noise pollution: Basics of acoustics and specification of sound; sound power, sound intensity and sound
pressure levels; plane, point and line sources, multiple sources; outdoor and indoor noise propagation;
psychoacoustics and noise criteria, effects of noise on health, annoyance rating schemes; special noise
environments: Infrasound, ultrasound, impulsive sound and sonic boom; noise standards and limit values; noise
instrumentation and monitoring procedure. Noise indices. Noise control methods.

Textbook(s):
1. Peavy, Rowe and Tchobanoglous: Environmental Engineering.
2. Martin Crawford: Air Pollution Control Theory.

References:
1. Mycock, McKenna and Theodore: Handbook of Air Pollution Control Engineering and Technology.Suess and
Craxford: W.H.O. Manual on Urban Air Quality Management
2. C.S. Rao, Air Pollution and Control
3. Advanced Air and Noise Pollution Control by Lawrence K. Wang, Norman C. Pereira & Yung IseHung.
4. Noise Pollution and Control by S. P.Singhal , Narosa Pub House
5. Textbook of Noise Pollution and Its Control by S. C. Bhatia, Atlantic; Edition

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1235
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Power Electronics L P C
4 4

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EE/EEE 5 PC PC EEC‐309

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To learn the operation characteristics and firing circuits of power electrons devices.
2. To acquire knowledge of controlled rectifier and choppers control DC Motors
3. To get the exposure of square wave, Quashi square wave PWM and multilevel inverters there use to
control AC drives
4. apply AC controllers cycloconverter and matrix converter to control induction motors
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Understand the operation characteristics and firing circuits of power electronic devices
CO 2 Gained the knowledge of controlled rectifier, choppers and their use to control DC Motors
CO 3 Analyse and design square wave, quashi wave, and multilevel inverters to control AC drive
CO 4 Design AC converter, AC controller, cyclo converter and matrix converter to control induction motor
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 2 3 3 2 3 3 1 1 1 2 3
CO 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 2 3
CO 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 2 3
CO 4 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 2 3

UNIT‐ I

Introduction: Characteristics and switching behaviour of Power Diode, SCR, UJT, TRIAC, DIAC, GTO, MOSFET,
IGBT, MCT and power BJT, two‐transistor analogy of SCR, firing circuits of SCR and TRIAC, SCR gate
characteristics, SCR ratings. Protection of SCR against over current, over voltage, high dV/dt, high dI/dt, thermal
protection, Snubber circuits, Methods of commutation, series and parallel operation of SCR, Driver circuits for
BJT/MOSFET.

UNIT‐ II

A.C. to D.C. Converter: Classification of rectifiers, single and three phase controlled rectifiers, fully controlled
and half controlled rectifiers and their performance parameters, , single‐phase and three phase dual converter.
D.C. to D.C. Converter: Classification of choppers as type A, B, C, D and E, principle of operation, switching
mode regulators: Buck, Boost, Buck‐Boost, Cuk regulators.
DC Motor Drives: DC motor speed control, , controlled rectifier fed dc drives, chopper controlled dc drives.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1236
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT‐ III

D.C. to A.C. Converter: single phase single pulse inverter: Square wave, quasi square. Three phase single pulse
inverters (120̊ and 180 ̊ conduction) Modulation Techniques and reduction of harmonics, PWM techniques,
SPWM techniques, SVM, Carrier less modulation. , PWM Inverter, Bidirectional PWM converters, voltage
source inverters and current source inverter, Multi level Inverter: cascaded and NPC Inverters. Introduction of
AC drives

UNIT‐IV

A.C. to A.C. Converter: AC voltage Controllers, Cyclo‐converters : single phase to single phase, three phase to
single phase, three phase to three phase Cyclo‐converter circuit and their operation, Matrix converter.
Induction Motor Drives: Three phase induction motor starting, braking, , speed control from stator and rotor
sides, stator voltage control, variable frequency control from voltage sources and current sources

Textbooks:
1. M.H. Rashid, “Power Electronics: Circuits, Devices and Applications” Pearson Publications.
2. Daniel W. Hart, “Power Electronics “Tata McGraw‐Hill
3. H.C. Rai, “Power Electronics Devices, Circuits, Systems and Application”, Galgotia Publications, 3rd Edition

References Books:
1. Singh, Kanchandani, “Power Electronics”, Tata McGraw‐Hill.
2. Ned Mohan, Tore M. Undeland and Robbins, “Power Electronics: Converters, Applications and Design”
Wiley India Publication
3. V R Moorthi, “Power Electronics: Devices, Circuits and Industrial Applications”, Oxford Publication.
4. Kassakian, Schlecht, Verghese, “Principles of Power Electronics” , Pearson Publications
5. M.S. Jamil Asghar, “Power Electronics” PHI Publication
6. P. S. Bimbhra “Power Electronics”, Khanna Publishing.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1237
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Power Electronics Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EE/EEE 5 PC PC EEC‐357

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Power Electronics) as this is the
practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. To study and analyze V‐I characteristics of SCR and TRIAC.

2. To study the switching characteristics of MOSFET and IGBT
3. To study R and RC and UJT based firing circuits using SCR.
4. To study single phase Semi‐converter and Full converters feeding R and RL load
5. To study A.C phase control using SCR (half and full wave) using DIAC and TRIAC for dimmer application.
6. To study single‐phase cyclo‐ converter feeding R and RL loads.
7. To study the operation and duty cycle control of buck and boost converter feeding R loads.
8. To study the operation and duty cycle control of Type‐C chopper.
9. To study the THD in operation of single phase Square wave and Quasi square wave Inverter.
10. To study the operation of SPWM Inverter.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1238
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Power Plant Engineering L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ME 6 PCE PCE‐2 MEE‐318T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To make the students familiar with the properties of coal and its firing methods.
2. To make the students understand about the various components of steam power plant.
3. To teach the students the working of Nuclear and hydraulic power plant.
4. To learn about instrumentation and control system in steam power plant.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 To learn the properties of coal and its firing methods.
CO 2 To understand the working of Boiler its mountings and accessories and need of combined cycle.
CO 3 To understand working of Nuclear power plant and hydraulic power plant.
CO 4 To acquire the importance of instrumentation and control system in steam power plant
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 2 2 2 2 ‐ 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 2 3 2 2 2 2 ‐ 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 3 3 2 2 2 2 ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 4 3 2 2 2 2 ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2

UNIT – I

Coal fired Power Plants: Indian energy scenario, Indian coals: formation, properties, analysis, calculation of
heating value of coals; coking and non‐coking coals, fuel handling systems; coal gasification. Classification of
power plants, base load and Peak load power stations, co‐generated power plant, captive power plant, and
their fields of application. coal pulverization, pulverized fuel firing system, combustion process, need of excess
air, cyclone furnace, fluidized bed boiler

UNIT – II

Steam Generators: High pressure utility boiler, natural and forced circulation, Boiler mountings and accessories
its function and working, placement of evaporator, economizers, super heaters, re‐heaters, air pre‐heater in
the boiler, de‐aeration, boiler blow‐ down, ash collection by bag house, gravity separation, electrostatic
precipitators and wet scrubbers, boiler efficiency calculations, water treatment: external and internal
treatment
Combined Cycle Power Plants: Binary vapour cycles, coupled cycles, gas turbine‐ steam turbine power plant.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1239
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Combined cycle with and without supplementary firing.

UNIT – III

Other power plants: Nuclear power plants ‐ working and types of nuclear reactors, boiling water reactor,
pressurized water reactor, fast breeder reactor, controls in nuclear power plants, hydro power plant ‐
classification and working of hydroelectric power plants, tidal power plants, diesel and gas power plants.

UNIT – IV

Instrumentation and Controls in power plants: Important instruments used for temperature, flow, pressure,
water/steam conductivity measurement; flue gas analysis, drum level control, combustion control, super
heater and re‐heater temperature control, furnace safeguard and supervisory system (FSSS), auto turbine run‐
up system(ATRS), interlocks and protection of turbines.
Environment Pollution and Energy conservation: Economics of power generation: load duration curves, power
plant economics, pollution from power plants, disposal/management of nuclear power plant waste

Textbooks:
1. Power Plant Engineering by M.M. Elwakil, Tata McGraw Hill.
2. Power Plant Engineering by P.K Nag, Tata McGraw Hill.

References:
1. Steam and Gas turbines by A Kostyuk and V Frolov, MIR Publishers, ISBN9785030000329.
2. Modern Power Plant Engineering by J Wiesman and R Eckart, Prentice hall India Ltd, ISBN‐ 97801359725.
3. Applied Thermodynamics by T.D Eastop and McConkey, Longman Scientific and Technical, ISBN‐
0582305351.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1240
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Power Plant Engineering Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ME 6 PCE PCE‐2 MEE‐318P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Power Plant Engineering) as this is the
practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. To study and Simulate Boiler Internals.

2. To study and simulate Superheater and Reheaters.
3. To study and simulate Regenerative Feed Water Heaters.
4. To study and Simulate Turbine Vaccum system.
5. To draw Heat Balance sheet of a Boiler.
6. To study the working of Gas Turbine Cycle.
7. To study Combined Cycle and determine effect of Pressure ratio on thermal efficiency.
8. To conduct performance test on four‐stroke diesel engine.
9. To conduct performance test on four‐stroke petrol engine.
10. To conduct performance test on hydraulic power plant.
11. To determine dryness fraction of given steam sample.
12. To study working of Nuclear Power Plant.
13. Visit to thermal/Hydraulic/Nuclear Power Plant.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1241
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Power Plant Instrumentation L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ICE 7 PCE PCE‐4 ICE‐411T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To provide an overview of different methods of power generation and various measurements involved
in it.
2. To impart basic knowledge in nuclear and hydro power plant.
3. To Learn thebasic concept of Thermal power plant and power from renewable energy.
4. To provide knowledge about the different types of devices used for analysis.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Identify the resources of power generation and implementation.
CO 2 Interpret the knowledgeof nuclear and hydro power plant.
CO 3 Recognise the renewable and non‐renewable energy resources.
CO 4 Evaluate the safety, boiler control system as well as recognise various analyzer in power plant
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 ‐ 2 ‐ 2 3 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 3
CO 2 3 2 3 1 2 3 ‐ 3 3 ‐ ‐ 3
CO 3 3 3 2 2 2 3 2 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 3
CO 4 3 2 3 3 2 3 ‐ 3 3 3 ‐ 3

Unit I

Introduction to Power Generation: Energy sources, energy scenario of India, Classification of renewable and
Non‐renewable resources, Brief survey of methods of power generation – hydro, thermal, nuclear, solar and
wind power. Importance of instrumentation in power generation, thermal power plants, building blocks, details
of boiler processes.

Unit II

Nuclear and Hydro Power Plant: Basics of Nuclear Reactors, Nuclear power plant instrumentation, P&I diagram
of different types of nuclear power plant, nuclear reactor control systems and allied instrumentation,process
sensors for nuclear power plants,Safety and reliability aspects.
Introduction to Hydro power generation: Governing system in hydro power plant, water turbine control,
regulation & monitoring of voltage & frequency of output power. Safety and reliability aspects.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1242
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Unit III

Thermal power plant and power from renewable energy:Main Equipment: Boiler, Steam turbines, Generator
types, Boiler Feed Pump and Condensate Extraction Pump, Deaerators, layout and energy conversion process,
Rankine cycle, types of turbines and control, types of generators condensers.
Hydro‐electric power plant‐ classification, typical layout, associated components including turbines. Principle,
Construction and working of Wind, Tidal, Solar, Photo voltaic (PV), Geo‐Thermal etc.

Unit IV

Analysis of Power Plant: Thermal conductive type, paramagnetic type, hydrogen purity meter‐
chromatography‐PH meter, fuel analyzer, pollution monitoring and control.
Introduction to Turbine monitoring and control, Speed, vibration, shell temperature monitoring and control,
cooling system.

Textbooks:
1. P.K. Nag, Power Plant Engineering, Tata McGraw‐Hill Education, 3rd edition, 2007.
2. Power Plant Instrumentation, K. Krishnaswamy, M. PonniBala, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd., 2011.

References:
1. Liptak B.G., Instrumentation in Process Industries, Chilton, 1973.
2. P. Tamilmani, Power Plant Instrumentation, SAMS Publishers, Chennai.
3. David Lindsley, Power‐plant Control and Instrumentation: The Control of Boilers and HRSG, Systems, IET,
London, 2000.
4. E. L. Wakil, M. M. Power Plant Technology, McGraw Hill, 1984
5. Rajput R.K., A Text book of Power plant Engineering. 5th Edition, Lakshmi Publications, 2013.
6. Elonka, S.M. and Kohal A.L.Standard Boiler Operations, McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 1994.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1243
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Power Plant Instrumentation Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ICE 7 PCE PCE‐4 ICE‐411P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Power Plant Instrumentation) as this is
the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Study and Performance of distinct turbines used for Power Plant.

2. To study low pressure boilers and their accessories and mountings.
3. To study high pressure boilers and their accessories and mountings.
4. To study cooling tower and find its efficiency.
5. To find calorific value of a sample of fuel using Bomb calorimeter.
6. Modelling of wind turbine and governor system.
7. Simulation study of effect of Temperature Variation on Photovoltaic Array.
8. Simulation study on Solar PV Energy System.
9. Simulation study on Hybrid (Solar‐Wind) Power system.
10. Simulation study on Intelligent controllers for Hybrid energy systems.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1244
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Power Quality for Microgrids L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 7 MT‐EAE MT‐EAE‐5 MT‐423T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To classify quantify and analyse the power quality problems.
2. To study various standards prescribed on power quality issues.
3. To impart the knowledge of micro grid features with all its essential components and functions.
4. Analyze power quality issues and control operation of micro grid and to study compensation
techniques.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Ability to understand of power quality problems.
CO 2 To impart knowledge about power quality standards and its monitoring.
CO 3 Ability to analyse different micro grid architectures, its features.
CO 4 Ability to apply various operational strategies and control schemes suitable for micro grid using power
electronic converters.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 2 2 3 2 3 3 1 2 3 2 3
CO 2 2 3 2 2 2 1 3 3 2 3 2 3
CO 3 2 3 2 3 3 1 3 2 2 3 3 3
CO 4 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 2 2 3 3 3

UNIT I

Power Quality ‐ An Introduction: Introduction to power quality, Classification of power quality issues,
characterization and problems of electric power quality: poor load power factor, nonlinear and unbalanced
loads, transients, sources of voltage fluctuations and interruptions, waveform distortion, power frequency
variations, harmonic distortion, harmonics creating loads; characterization of nonlinear loads, fundamentals of
harmonics, harmonic sources from commercial loads, effects of harmonic distortion, inter‐harmonics, devices
for controlling harmonic distortion, harmonic propagation studies in large network ‐ FFT analysis.

UNIT II

Power Quality Standards and Monitoring: Introduction, power quality standards and monitoring, IEEE
guidelines and recommendations on power qualities: terminologies, requirements for harmonic control in
electric power systems, practices for individual consumers, utilities, monitoring techniques, standards;

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1245
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

compensation techniques of power quality problems, web based power quality monitoring.

UNIT III

Basics of Microgrid: Microgrid: need & application, drivers and benefits, comparison with conventional power
system, review of sources of microgrids, typical structure and configuration; energy storage technologies,
microgrid layouts, AC and DC microgrids, hybrid layouts, power electronics interfaces in AC and DC microgrids.

Unit IV

Control and Operation of Microgrid: Modes of operation and control of microgrid, grid connected and islanded
mode, active and reactive power control, anti‐islanding schemes: passive, active and communication based
techniques; micro grid communication infrastructure, power quality issues in grid connected and autonomous
micro grids, compensation of power quality problems: passive filters, various types, analysis and design; basics
of P‐Q theory, clarke‘s and park transformations (abc‐dq), synchronous reference frame theory (SRF), distortion
and voltage unbalance compensation by DVR, hybrid power filters and unified power quality conditioner
(UPQC).

Textbook(s):
1. Bhim Singh, Ambrish Chandra, Kamal Al‐Haddad, "Power Quality Problems and Mitigation Techniques",
John Wiley & Sons Limited, 2015.
2. Arindam Ghosh, Gerard Ledwich, “Power Quality Enhancement using custom Power Devices”, Penguin
Books Limited.

References:
1. S. Chowdhury, P. Crossley, “Microgrids and Active Distribution Networks”, Institution of Engineering and
Technology, 2009
2. Nikos Hatziargyriou, “Microgrids Architectures and Contro”l John Wiley Sons, 2014
3. Gevork B. Gharehpetian, S. Mohammad Mousavi Agah, “Distributed Generation Systems: Design, Operation
and Grid Integration”, Butterworth Heinemann, 2017
4. Hassan Bevrani, BrunoFrançois, Toshifumi Ise, “Microgrid Dynamics and Control” John Wiley Sons, 2017
5. Amirnaser Yezdani, and Reza Iravani, “Voltage Source Converters in Power Systems: Modeling, Control and
Applications”, IEEE John Wiley Publications, 2009.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1246
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Power Quality for Microgrids Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 7 MT‐EAE MT‐EAE‐5 MT‐423P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Power Quality for Microgrids) as this is
the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. To design three leg VSC‐based three‐phase‐three‐wire DSTATCOM using MATLAB/SIMULINK.

2. To design three leg VSC‐based three Phase Four wire DSTATCOM.
3. To design SRF Control based VSC.
4. To design DVR using MATLAB/SIMULINK.
5. To determine performance of synchronous reference frame theory based battery energy system supported
DVR.
6. To design photovoltaic based renewable energy System.
7. To design photovoltaic based battery supported renewable energy System.
8. To design wind energy system.
9. To design renewable energy powered micro grid system.
10. To study various renewable energy systems.
11. To study various power quality issues.
12. To study power quality enhancement using custom power devices.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1247
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Power System Analysis and Stability L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 7 PS‐EAE PS‐EAE‐5 PS‐435T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To development the impedance diagram (p.u) and formation of Ybus.
2. To study the different load flow methods
3. To study short circuit calculation for symmetrical faults
4. To study the rotor angle stability of power systems.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Draw impedance diagram for a power system network and to understand per unit quantities..
CO 2 Understand the load flow solution of a power system using different methods.
CO 3 Find the fault currents for all types faults to provide data for the design of protective devices
CO 4 Analyze the steady state, transient and dynamic stability concepts of a power system.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 2 1 2 3 1 2 1 2 2 3 3
CO 2 2 1 2 1 2 2 2 1 2 3 3 2
CO 3 3 2 1 2 2 1 2 1 2 3 3 2
CO 4 3 1 1 2 3 1 2 1 2 1 3 3

UNIT‐I

Introduction: Need for system planning and operational studies,Power scenario in India,Power System
components,Representation,Single line diagram,Per Unit Quantities,P.U. impedance diagram,P.U. Reactance
Diagram ,Network graph, Bus Incidence Matrix, Primitive parameters, Bus Admittance Matrix from primitive
parameters ,Representation of off nominal transformer, Formation of bus admittance matrix of large power
network.

UNIT‐II

Power Flow Studies: Necessity of power flow studies ,Derivation of static power flow equations, Power flow
solution using Gauss‐Seidel Method,Newton Raphson Method (Rectangular and polar coordinates form,,
Decoupled and Fast Decoupled methods ,Algorithmic approach ,Problems on 3–bus system only.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1248
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT‐III

Symmetrical Component & Fault Analysis: Definition of symmetrical components ,symmetrical components of
unbalanced three phase systems,Power in symmetrical components,Sequence impedances: Synchronous
generator,Transmission line and transformers,Sequence networks,Various types of faults LG– LL– LLG and LLL
on unloaded alternator–unsymmetrical faults on power system for numerical problems only.

UNIT – IV

Power System Stability Analysis: Elementary concepts of Steady state,Dynamic and Transient Stabilities,
Description of Steady State Stability Power Limit, Transfer Reactance, Synchronizing Power Coefficient , Power
Angle Curve and Determination of Steady State Stability,Derivation of Swing Equation,Determination of
Transient Stability by Equal Area Criterion ,Applications of Equal Area Criterion,Methods to improve steady
state and transient stability.

Textbook(s):
1. Power System Analysis by Grainger and Stevenson, Tata McGraw Hill.
2. Modern Power system Analysis – by I.J.Nagrath & D .P.Kothari: Tata McGraw Hill, 2nd Edition

References:
1. Power System Analysis – by A.R.Bergen, Prentice Hall, Inc.
2. Power System Analysis by HadiSaadat – TMH Edition.
3. Power System Analysis by B.R.Gupta, Wheeler Publications.
4. Power System Analysis and Design by J.Duncan Glover, M.S.Sarma, T.J. Overbye– Cengage Learning.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1249
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Power System Analysis and Stability Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 7 PS‐EAE PS‐EAE‐5 PS‐435P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Power System Analysis and Stability) as
this is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Formation of Bus Admittance and Impedance Matrices using Matlab.

2. Transient Stability Analysis –Multi Machine Infinite Bus Systemusing Matlab using Matlab.
3. Modelling of Transmission line parameters.
4. To study Small Signal Stability analysis of a single machine infinite bus system with field circuit, exciter and
power system stabilizer.
5. Measurement of Sinusoidal voltages and currents using Matlab .
6. Simulation of Single Line to Ground fault using Matlab
7. Matlab program to solve Swing Equation using Point by Point method
8. Power flow analysis by Newton‐Raphson method and Fast decoupled method using Matlab.
9. Simulation of Line To Line fault Analysis using Matlab.
10. Simulation of Double Line to Ground fault using Matlab.
11. To analyse the effect of transients in a power system using Matlab.
12. Matlab program to formulate Z & Y bus matrix for a four bus system.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1250
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Power System Operation and Control L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 7 PS‐EAE PS‐EAE‐3 PS‐431T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To impart knowledge about the significance of power system operation and control
2. Design of power frequency controller and real power –frequency interaction
3. Maintaining the voltage profile against varying system load
4. Design SCADA and its applications for real time operation
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Ability to understand the day to day operation of electric power system
CO 2 Analyse the control actions to be implemented in order to meet variations of system demand
CO 3 Ability to understand the real power frequency and reactive power voltage interaction
CO 4 Ability to design SCADA and its applications
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 2 3 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 2 2 1
CO 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 1 1 1 2 1 1
CO 3 3 2 2 2 1 2 1 1 2 2 1 1
CO 4 1 2 1 1 2 1 2 2 1 1 1 1

UNIT‐I

Automatic Generation and Voltage Control: Introduction, Load frequency control (single area case), load
frequency (Two Area System) control‐tie line modelling, block diagram representation, load frequency control
with GRC, Speed Governor Dead Band and its effects.

UNIT‐II

Economic Load Despatch: Introduction, Statement of economic dispatch problem‐ input and output
characteristics of thermal plant, System constraint, Economic Dispatch Neglecting losses, Optimum load
dispatch including transmission losses, Exact Transmission loss formula, Automatic load dispatching.

UNIT‐III

Restructuring of Power System: Introduction, Reason for restructuring or deregulation of power industry,
Understanding the restructuring process, introduction to issues involved in deregulation, reasons and

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1251
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

objectives of deregulation of various power system across the world, Transmission Congestion management.

UNIT – IV

Reactive Power and Voltage Control: Bases of reactive power control, Excitation System, Operation of
transmission line under no load and heavy load condition, Voltage Regulation of transmission line and its
relation with reactive power, Modeling. Generation and Absorption of Reactive Power, Relation between
voltage, power and reactive power at node, methods of voltage control.

Textbook(s):
1. I.J. Nagrath & D.P. Kothari, Power System Engineering, Mc Graw Hill, 2007.
2. S. Sivanagaraju, Power System Operation and Control, Pearson Education India, 2009.

Reference Books:
1. P.Kundur, Power System Control and Stability, Mc Graw Hill.
2. Power System Stability Volume‐I: E.W. Kimbark, John Wiley & Sons.
3. Dr. K. Uma Rao, Power System: Operation and Control, Wiley‐India.
4. Loi Lei Lai ―Power System Restructuring and deregula on: Trading Performance & Informa on
Technology, John Wiley & Sons.
5. Chakravarti & Halder, Power System Analysis: Operation & control Prentice Hall of India.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1252
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Power System Operation and Control Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 7 PS‐EAE PS‐EAE‐3 PS‐431P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Power System Operation and Control)
as this is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. To determine sinusoidal voltages and currents.

2. To simulate models of different power system components such as Transmission lines.
3. To determine the parameters of equivalent circuit of transformer from OC SC test data.
4. To obtain step response of rotor angle and generator frequency of a synchronous machine.
5. To obtain the frequency response of single and two area power system using MATLAB.
6. Write a MATLAB program for Swing Equation using point‐by‐point method.
7. Write a MATLAB program for analysing the small‐signal stability of a single machine infinite bus system
assuming classical model for the generator.
8. Simulate the model IEEE excitations systems in MATLAB simulink.
9. Modelling of Turbine and Governor System using MATLAB Simulink
10. Modelling of Facts devices using MATLAB Simulink.

Note: The above practical list is based on model. However, Hands on MATLAB/Sim Power System Toolbox
simulation based models related to the course contents can be carried out.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1253
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Power Systems – II L P C
4 4

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EE/EEE 5 PC PC EEC‐303

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To introduce the concepts and constructional features and operation of relays, and protection of
generators and transformers
2. Familiarise students with various protection schemes of transmission lines
3. Knowledge of fuse and circuit breakers
4. Explore stability analysis
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 To analyse construction and operating characteristics of protective relays, and protection of
generators and transformers
CO 2 Gain knowledge of various methods of prote, transmission lines,
CO 3 Familiarise with the working and applications of fuse and circuit breakers
CO 4 Able to analyse stability of systems
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 3 1 2 3 3 1 1 2 1 3
CO 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 3
CO 3 3 3 3 3 1 3 1 1 3 3 2 3
CO 4 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 2 3 3 3 3

Unit – I

Classification of Relays: Electromechanical, static and numerical relays: Construction, operating characteristic
and their applications.
Protection of Generators and Transformers: Differential Protection, protection of stator windings, rotor earth
fault protection, protection against unbalanced loading, loss of excitation and prime mover failure; Protection
of motors (induction and synchronous) and bus bars.
Transformer Protection: Types of faults, percentage differential protection, Buchholz relay

Unit – II

Protection of Transmission Lines: Over current protection, Grading of over current relays, distance protection,
types of distance relays and their characteristics, carrier current protection, protection against surges, surge
diverters, surge absorbers, use of ground wires on transmission lines, methods of grounding

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1254
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Unit – III

Fuses and Circuit Breakers: Types & Applications of Fuse and MCB, RCCB, ELCB Current interruption theories,
types of Circuit Breakers: Air, air‐blast, Oil, SF6 and Vacuum circuit breakers‐Principle, ratings and applications,
HVDC Circuit breaker, Testing of circuit breakers

Unit – IV

Stability and Load Dispatch: Swing equation, steady state stability, equal area criteria, critical clearing angle,
point by point method, Load frequency control, load frequency control with GRC, Speed Governor Dead Band
and its effects. Load despatch analysis in power system.

Textbooks:
1. Paithanker, Bhide ,”Fundamentals of Power System Protection “ PHI 2014
2. BadriRam”Power System Protection and Switchgear” TMH Publications 2nd Edition

References:
1. J. J. Grainger & W.D. Stevenson, “Power System Analysis” TMH Publication, 2003
2. Paul M. Anderson “Power System Protection” IEEE Press.
3. C L Wadhva, “Electrical Power System” Wiley Eastern Ltd., 3rd edition 2000
4. D.P. Kothari and I.J. Nagrath “Modern Power System Analysis “ TMH 4th Edition

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1255
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Power Systems – II Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EE/EEE 5 PC PC EEC‐351

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Power Systems – II) as this is the
practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. To study single line to Ground fault as practical application in transmission lines. (Using Experimental
setup)
2. To study three phase fault as practical application in transmission lines. (Using Experimental setup)
3. To determine the characteristics of the given differential relay and to apply the relay for the protection of a
transformer against internal faults. (Using Experimental setup)
4. To study instantaneous over current relay. (Using Experimental setup)
a. Study the construction of relay.
b. Study the operating and deoperating of relay.
c. Study the current vs. time characteristics.
5. To study over voltage relay static type and draw its characteristics. (Using Experimental setup)
6. To study the characteristics of miniature‐circuit breaker. (Using Experimental setup)
7. To study the operating characteristics of HRC fuse. (Using Experimental setup)
8. To obtain the characteristics of thermal bimetallic relay. (Using Experimental setup)
9. To study the characteristics of IDMT Earth fault relay. (Using Experimental setup)
10. Simulation based on Network Reduction.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1256
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Powerline Carrier Communication L P C

4 4

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EEE 6 PCE PCE‐1 EEE‐314

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To Understand characterization of PLCC
2. To understand Digital Transmission Techniques used in PLCC
3. To understand PLC network
4. Create PLC systems and their implementation
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Understand characterization of PLCC
CO 2 Understand Digital Transmission Techniques used in PLCC
CO 3 Understand PLC network
CO 4 Create PLC systems and their implementation
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 2 1 2 ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 ‐ 1 ‐
CO 2 2 2 2 ‐ 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 ‐ 1 ‐
CO 3 2 2 2 ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ 1 ‐ 1 ‐
CO 4 1 1 2 ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ 1 ‐ 1 ‐

UNIT‐ I

Channel Characterization: Introduction, channel modelling fundamentals, model for outdoor channel, models
for indoor channels, noise and disturbances measuring techniques, PLC channel emulation tools. Coupling:
Introduction, filtering basics, transformer and capacitor coupler design, impedance adaptation concepts.

UNIT‐ II

Digital Transmission Techniques: Introduction, Architecture of PLC system, Narrowband and broadband PLC
systems, Modulation and coding for narrow band and broad band PLC systems, Error Handling.

UNIT‐ III

PLC Networks : Introduction, Organisation and structure of PLC networks, Media Access Control layer, Multiple
Access Schemes, Protocols for PLC, Traffic control, Supporting Energy Management Systems, Quality of
service(QOS), International standards on PLC networking Technology .

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1257
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT‐IV

Systems and Implementations: PLC smart grid systems, PLC broadband Access systems, Multimedia PLC
systems, DC‐PLC systems, PLC in emerging countries

Textbooks:
1. Hendrik C. Ferreira, Lutz Lampe John Newbury, TheoG.Swart,”PLC: Theory and Applications for narrow
band and broad band communication over power lines”. Wiley and Sons.
2. Halid Hrasnica, Abdelfatteh Haidine, Ralf Lehnert,”Broad Band Power line Communications: Network
Design” Wiley and sons.

References:
1. Gilbert Held, ”Understanding Broadband over Power line”, Auerbach Publications

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1258
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Pressure Vessels and Piping Technology L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 7 DMS‐EAE DMS‐EAE‐5 DMS‐423T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To give exposure to engineering problems involved in the design of pressure vessel
2. To learn about the tests and analysis for various components of pressure vessels.
3. To familiarize the buckling and fracture analysis of pressure vessel under various load conditions.
4. To acquire knowledge of piping, piping layout and designing of pipes.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Acquire skills to design pressure vessels.
CO 2 Demonstrate the skills to test and analyze various components of pressure vessels.
CO 3 Familiarized to the buckling and fracture analysis of pressure vessel under various load conditions.
CO 4 Acquire adequate knowledge of piping, piping layout and designing of pipes.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 2 3 3 ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 2 3 2 2 3 ‐ 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 3 2 2 3 3 ‐ 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 4 3 3 2 3 ‐ 3 ‐ ‐ ‐‐ ‐ ‐ 2

UNIT‐ I

Introduction‐ Methods for determining stresses Terminology and Ligament Efficiency and applications. Stresses
in a circular ring, cylinder Membrane stress Analysis of Vessel Shell components, Cylindrical shells, spherical
Heads, conical heads, Thermal Stresses, Discontinuity stresses in pressure vessels.

UNIT‐ II

Bending of circular plates and determination of stresses in simply supported and clamped circular plate. Stress
concentration in plate having circular hole due to bi‐axial loading, Excessive elastic deformation, Plastic
instability, Brittle rupture and creep. Theory of reinforced opening and reinforcement limits, design of
composite analysis, wind and seismic load consideration in the design of pressure vessel

UNIT‐ III

Buckling phenomenon, Elastic Buckling of circular ring and cylinders under external pressure, collapse of thick

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1259
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

walled cylinders or tubes under external pressure, Effect of supports on Elastic Buckling of Cylinders, Buckling
under combined External pressure and axial loading

UNIT‐ IV

Flow diagram, piping layout and piping stress analysis; Flexibility factor and stress intensification factor; Design
of piping system as per B31.1 piping code. Piping components ‐ bends, tees, bellows and valves. Types of piping
supports and their behaviour; Introduction to piping Codes and Standards.

Textbooks:
1. John F. Harvey, “Theory and Design of Pressure Vessels”, CBS Publishers and Distributors, 1987.
2. Dennis K. Williams, James F. McCabe, Dominique Moinereau, “Pressure Vessels and Piping Division”,
American Society of Mechanical Engineers, 2003.

Referencess:
1. Brownell L. E & Young. E. D, “Process equipment design”, Wiley Eastern Ltd., India.
2. Smith P, “Fundamentals of Piping Design”, Elsevier.
3. Henry H Bednar, “Pressure vessel Design Hand book”, CBS Publishers and Distributors.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1260
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Pressure Vessels and Piping Technology Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 7 DMS‐EAE DMS‐EAE‐5 DMS‐423P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Pressure vessels and Piping
Technology) as this is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Rectangular & Circular Plate bending analysis using FEA

2. Determination of shear centre for thin walled cellular structure and its FEA
3. Analysis of cylinder subjected to internal and/or external pressure
4. Shrink fitted Rotating Disk Analysis
5. Analysis of Elastic Buckling of circular ring and cylinders under external pressure
6. Stress Analysis of piping components (bends, tees, bellows and valves) using FEA
7. Unsymmetrical Bending Analysis for different sections of beam
8. Determining Flexibility factor and stress intensification factor for suitable pipe design
9. Design of piping system as per B31.1 piping code
10. Contact stress analysis with Cylinder to Cylinder, Sphere to flat face, Cylinder to Sphere in contact

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1261
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Principles of Entrepreneurship Mindset L P C

2 2

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

All 7 HS/MS MS MS‐401

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To understand basic aspects of establishing a business in a competitive environment
2. To apply the basic understanding to examine the existing business ventures
3. To examine various business considerations such as marketing, financial and teaming etc.
4. To assess strategies for planning a business venture
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Understand basic aspects of establishing a business in a competitive environment
CO 2 Apply the basic understanding to examine the existing business ventures
CO 3 Examine various business considerations such as marketing, financial and teaming etc.
CO 4 Assessing strategies for planning a business venture
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 2 2 1 2 ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ 1 2 3 2
CO 2 2 2 1 2 ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ 1 2 3 2
CO 3 2 2 1 2 ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ 1 2 3 2
CO 4 2 2 1 2 ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ 1 2 3 2

UNIT‐I

Entrepreneurial perspective: Foundation, Nature and development ofentrepreneurship, importance of

entrepreneurs,Entrepreneurial Mind, Individual entrepreneur Typesof entrepreneurs, Entrepreneurship in India

UNIT‐II

Beginning Considerations: Creativity and developing business ideas; Creatingand starting the venture; Building
a competitiveadvantage; Opportunity recognition, Opportunityassessment; Legal issues

UNIT‐III

Developing Financial Plans: Sources of Funds,Managing Cash Flow,Creating a successful Financial

PlanDeveloping a business plan

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1262
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT ‐ IV

Developing Marketing Plans: Developing a powerful Marketing Plan, E‐commerce,Integrated Marketing

Communications
Leading Considerations: Developing Team, Inviting candidates to join team,Leadership model

Textbook(s):
1. Robert D Hisrich, Michael P Peters & Dean A Shepherd, “Entrepreneurship” 10th Edition,McGraw Hill
Education, 2018

References:
1. Norman M. Scarborough and Jeffery R. cornwell, “Essentials of entrepreneurship and small business
management” 8th Edition, Pearson, 2016
2. Rajiv Roy, “Entrepreneurship”, 2nd Edition, Oxford University Press, 2011
3. Sangeeta Sharma, “Entrepreneurship Development”, 1st Edition, Prentice‐Hall India, 2016
4. John Mullins, “The New Business Road Test: What entrepreneurs and investors should dobefore launching a
lean start‐up” 5th Edition, Pearson Education, 2017
5. Charantimath, Entrepreneurship Development and Small Business Enterprise, Pearson Education.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1263
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Principles of Management for Engineers L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

All 6 HS/MS MS MS‐302

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To describe the functions, roles and skills of managers and illustrate how the manager’s job is evolving.
2. To evaluate approaches to goal setting, planning and organizing in a variety of circumstances.
3. To evaluate contemporary approaches for staffing and leading in an organization
4. To analyze contemporary issues in controlling for measuring organizational performance.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Examine the relevance of the political, legal, ethical, economic andcultural environments in global
business
CO 2 Evaluate approaches to goal setting, planning and organizing in a variety of circumstances.
CO 3 Evaluate contemporary approaches for staffing and leading in an organization
CO 4 Analyze contemporary issues in controlling for measuring organizational performance.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 2 2 1 2 ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ 1 2 3 2
CO 2 2 2 1 2 ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ 1 2 3 2
CO 3 2 2 1 2 ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ 1 2 3 2
CO 4 2 2 1 2 ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ 1 2 3 2

UNIT‐I

Introduction to Managers and Management: Management an Overview: Introduction, Definition

ofManagement, Role of Management, Functions of Managers,Levels of Management, Management Skills
andOrganizational Hierarchy, Social and EthicalResponsibilities of Management: Arguments for and
againstSocial Responsibilities of Business, Social Stakeholders,Measuring Social Responsiveness and Managerial
Ethics,Omnipotent and Symbolic View, Characteristics andimportance of organizational culture, Relevance of
political,legal, economic and Cultural environments to globalbusiness, Structures and techniques organizations
use asthey go international .

UNIT‐II

Planning: Nature & Purpose, Steps involved in Planning, Objectives, Setting Objectives, Process of Managing by
Objectives, Strategies, Policies & Planning Premises, CompetitorIntelligence, Benchmarking, Forecasting,
Decision‐Making.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1264
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Directing: Scope, Human Factors, Creativity and Innovation,Harmonizing Objectives, Leadership, Types of
Leadership,Directing, Managers as leaders, Early LeadershipTheories…Trait Theories, Behavioral Theories,
ManagerialGrid, Contingency Theories of Leadership, Directing ...PathGoal Theory, contemporary views of
Leadership, CrossCultural Leadership, Leadership Training, Substitutes ofLeadership

UNIT‐III

Organizing: Organizing ,Benefits and Limitations‐De‐Centralization andDelegation of Authority, Authority

versus Power,Mechanistic Versus Organic Organization ,CommonOrganizational Designs, Contemporary
OrganizationalDesigns and Contingency Factors, The LearningOrganization Nature and Purpose, Formal and
InformalOrganization, Organization Chart, Structure and Process,Departmentalization by difference strategies,
Line and Staffauthority‐ Benefits and Limitations‐De‐Centralization andDelegation of Authority Versus,
Staffing,Human ResourceInventory, Job Analysis , Job Description, Recruitment and

UNIT ‐ IV

Controlling: Controlling, Introduction to Controlling System and processof Controlling, Requirements for
effective control, Theplanning Contol link, The process of control, types ofcontrol The Budget as Control
Technique, InformationTechnology in Controlling, Productivity, Problems andManagement, Control of Overall
Performance, Direct andPreventive Control, Financial Controls, Tools formeasuring organizational Performance,
Contemporaryissues in control Workplace concerns, employee theft,employee violence

Textbook(s):
1. Tripathi PC. Principles of management. Tata McGraw‐Hill Education; 6th Edition 2017.

References:
1. Koontz H, Weihrich H. Essentials of management: an international, innovation, and leadershipperspective.
McGraw‐Hill Education; 10th Edition 2018.
2. Principles of Management Text and Cases, Pravin Durai , Pearson ,2015
3. Robbins, S.P. &Decenzo, David A. Fundamentals of Management,7th ed., Pearson, 2010
4. Robbins, S.P. & Coulter, Mary Management; 14 ed.,Pearson , 2009

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1265
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Principles of Programming Languages L P C

4 4

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CSE 6 PCE PCE‐1 CIE‐320

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To understand and describe syntax and semantics of programming languages.
2. To understand Data, Data types, and Bindings
3. To learn the concepts of functional and logical programming
4. To explore the knowledge about concurrent Programming paradigms.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Describe syntax and semantics of programming languages
CO 2 Explain data, data types, and basic statements of programming languages
CO 3 Design and implement subprogram constructs, Apply object ‐ oriented, concurrency, pro and event
handling programming constructs
CO 4 Develop programs in various programming languages
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ 3 2
CO 2 ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ 3 ‐ ‐
CO 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 3 ‐ ‐ 3 ‐ ‐ 2 ‐
CO 4 3 ‐ 3 ‐ ‐ 3 3 ‐ 3 ‐ ‐ 3

UNIT‐I

Introduction: Syntax, semantics and pragmatics; Formal translation models, Variables, Expressions &
Statements, Binding time spectrum; Variables and expressions; Assignment; I‐values and r‐values;
Environments and stores; Storage allocation; Constants and initialization; Statement‐level control structure.

UNIT‐II

Primitive Types: Pointers; Structured types; Coercion; Notion of type equivalence; Polymorphism: overloading,
inheritance, type parameterization, Abstract data types; Information hiding and abstraction; Visibility,
Procedures, Modules, Classes, Packages, Objects and Object‐Oriented Programming.

UNIT‐III

Storage Management: Static and dynamic, stack‐based, and heap‐based storage management. Sequence

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1266
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Control: Implicit and explicit sequencing with arithmetic and non‐arithmetic expressions; Sequence control
between statements. Subprogram Control: Subprogram sequence control, data control and referencing
environments; parameter passing; static and dynamic scope; block structure.

UNIT‐IV

Concurrent Programming: Concepts, Communication, Deadlocks, Semaphores, Monitors, Threads,

Synchronization. Logic programming: Introduction; Rules, Structured Data and Scope of the variables;
Operators and Functions; Recursion and recursive rules; Lists, Input and Output; Program control; Logic
Program design.

Textbooks:
1. Programming Languages – Pratt T.V. (Pearson Ed).
2. Introduction to Programming Languages: Programming in C, C++, Scheme, Prolog, C# and SOA – Chen Y.,
Tsai W‐T. (Kendall).
3. Programming Languages: Design & Implementation – Pratt T.W., Zelkowski M.V. (PHI). [4] Programming
Languages, Adesh K Pandey, Narosa Publishing House

References:
1. Programming Languages: Principles and Practice – Louden K.C. (Addision‐Wesley).
2. Programming languages – Grover P.S. (S. Chand).
3. Programming Languages: Principles and Paradigms ‐ Tucker A., Noonan R. (TMH).

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1267
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Privacy and Security in Wireless Networks L P C

4 4

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 7 WMC‐EAE WMC‐EAE‐5 WMC‐459

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To provide overview of different network attacks, vulnerabilities and privacy issues in wireless
networks.
2. To understand detection and prevention mechanisms for different attacks in the wireless networks.
3. To understand basic concepts of cryptography.
4. To impart the knowledge of security models for Wi‐Fi, LTE, WLAN, Bluetooth etc. based networks.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Able to understand the various types of attacks in wireless networks, its vulnerabilities and privacy
issues.
CO 2 Able to understand, analyze & apply detection and prevention mechanisms for different attacks in the
wireless networks.
CO 3 Able to understand & apply basic concepts of cryptography & cryptography algorithms.
CO 4 Able to understand & analyze security issues, architectures & standards for Wi‐Fi, 3G, 4G LTE, WLAN
etc. based networks.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 ‐ 1 ‐ 3
CO 2 2 3 2 2 2 2 1 2 ‐ 1 1 3
CO 3 3 3 1 2 3 1 1 2 ‐ 2 1 3
CO 4 1 2 3 2 1 2 2 1 2 3 1 3

UNIT I

Key requirements for secure communication such as authenticity, confidentiality etc., design principles or
process phases for security systems, basic elements of wireless security such as authentication, encryption etc.;
emerging privacy concerns such as location & tracking; firewall building‐ Interception, denial of service (DOS) &
distributed DOS (DDOS) attacks, different types of DDOS & other attacks, intrusion detection systems for DDOS
attacks & comparison with firewall technology, DDOS defense mechanisms, intrusion prevention systems
mechanisms, security issues comparison for Wi‐Fi and cellular data networks, security threats & features in
logical OSI layers.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1268
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT II

Basic cryptographic concepts – Kerchoff’s principles, cryptographic functions, cryptographic methods for
securing systems, symmetric encryption methods, hash functions, public‐key cryptography, cryptanalysis &
deception attack approaches.

UNIT III

Key elements of 3G & 4G architecture (a review), 3GPP systems, Introduction to LTE standardization, security
features required in GSM, SIM cloning, GSM security mechanism – subscriber authentication in GSM, GSM &
GPRS encryption, subscriber identity confidentiality, limitations or weaknesses of GSM security, 3G security:
major principles, 3G security mechanisms, overview of 3G cryptographic algorithms, handovers between GSM
& 3G from security perspective, network domain security (NDS) architecture.

UNIT IV

3G‐WLAN Interworking: Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) framework – Architectural model, role of link
layer security, security mechanisms of WLAN direct IP access & WLAN 3GPP IP access; Evolved‐packet‐system
(EPS) overview, EPS security threats & features, security requirements for the base station platforms; Overview
of WEP, WAP & Bluetooth security models; security issues for VOIP.

Textbooks:
1. John R. Vacca, “Guide to Wireless Network Security”, Springer, NY, 2006.
2. Dan Forsberg, Günther Horn, Wolf‐Dietrich Moeller, Valtteri Niemi, “LTE Security”, 2nd Edition, John Wiley
and Sons Ltd., 2013.

References:
1. Randall Nichols, Panos Lekkas, “Wireless Security: Models, Threats, and Solutions”, McGraw‐Hill, 2000.
2. Charlie Kaufman, Radia Perlman and Mike Speciner, “Network Security: Private Communication in a Public
World (2nd Edition)”, Prentice Hall, 2002.
3. Kaveh Pahlavan and Prashant Krishnamurthy, “Principles of Wireless Networks: A Unified Approach”,
Prentice Hall, 2006.
4. William C. Y. Lee, “Mobile Communications Engineering: Theory and Applications”, 2nd Edition, McGraw
Hill Telecommunications, 1998.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1269
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Privacy and Security issues in IoT L P C

4 4

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CSE‐IoT 7 PC PC IOT‐449T
EAE 7 IOT‐EAE IOT‐EAE‐5C IOT‐449

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To know the state‐of‐the‐art methodologies in Cyber Physical system
2. To impart knowledge on Model threats and countermeasures.
3. To explore the Privacy Preservation and Trust Models in Internet of Things (IoT)
4. To apply the concept of Internet of Things Security in the real‐world scenarios
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Ability to understand the Security requirements in IoT.
CO 2 Understand the cryptographic fundamentals for IoT
CO 3 Ability to understand the authentication credentials and access control
CO 4 Understand the various types Trust models and Cloud Security.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 1 2 ‐ 1 ‐ 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 ‐ 2
CO 2 2 1 1 ‐ ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ 2 ‐ 2 ‐
CO 3 ‐ 1 ‐ ‐ 3 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ 1 ‐ 2
CO 4 1 ‐ 2 2 ‐ 1 ‐ ‐ 2 ‐ 1

UNIT‐I

Securing the Internet of Things: Security Requirements in IoT Architecture ‐ Security in Enabling Technologies ‐
Security Concerns in IoT Applications. Security Architecture in the Internet of Things ‐Security Requirements in
IoT ‐ Insufficient Authentication/Authorization – Insecure Access Control ‐ Threats to Access Control, Privacy,
and Availability ‐ Attacks Specific to IoT. Vulnerabilities – Secrecy and Secret‐Key Capacity ‐
Authentication/Authorization for Smart Devices ‐ Transport Encryption – Attack & Fault trees

UNIT‐II

Cryptographic Fundamentals for IOT: Cryptographic primitives and its role in IoT – Encryption and Decryption –
Hashes –Digital Signatures – Random number generation – Cipher suites – key management fundamentals –
cryptographic controls built into IoT messaging and communication protocols – IoT Node Authentication

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1270
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT‐III

Identity & Access Management Solutions for IOT: Identity lifecycle – authentication credentials – IoT IAM
infrastructure – Authorization with Publish / Subscribe schemes – access control

UNIT ‐ IV

Cloud Security for IOT: Cloud services and IoT – offerings related to IoT from cloud service providers – Cloud
IoT security controls – An enterprise IoT cloud security architecture – New directions in cloud enabled IoT
computing

Textbook(s):
1. Security and Privacy in Internet of Things (IoTs): Models, Algorithms, and Implementations

References:
1. Practical Internet of Things Security (Kindle Edition) by Brian Russell, Drew Van Duren
2. Securing the Internet of Things Elsevier

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1271
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Process Control L P C
3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ICE 6 PCE PCE‐1 ICE‐306T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To introduce technical terms and nomenclature associated with Process control domain.
2. To understand concepts of PID controller as well as different modes of controllers.
3. To illustrate several forms of control methods, including model‐based control, feed‐forward control,
and cascade control.
4. To impart the knowledge of compensators and multi‐loop controllers.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Understand the basic concepts of process control and their static and dynamic behaviour
CO 2 Design and tuning of classical controller and test their response under various test inputs.
CO 3 Implementation of feedback control processes and its dynamic behaviour.
CO 4 Apply the concepts of cascade control, split and ratio control to distinct process applications.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 1 2 1 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 3
CO 2 3 3 ‐ 3 3 ‐ 2 ‐ 3 2 3 3
CO 3 3 3 ‐ 3 3 ‐ 2 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 3
CO 4 3 2 3 3 3 3 ‐ 3 3 3 ‐ 3

Unit I

Introduction to Process Control System: Incentives of Process control system,Design aspects of process control
systems. Dynamic and modelling of distinct processes: self‐regulating, interacting, and non‐interacting
processes. Dynamic behaviour of First order system, second order system and higher –order systems. Process
lag, load disturbance and their effect on processes.

UNIT – II

Controller Modes: Basic control action, two position, multi‐position, floating control modes. Continuous
controller modes: proportional, integral, derivative. Composite controller modes: P‐I, P‐D, P‐I‐D, Integral wind‐
up, and prevention. Response of controllers for different test inputs

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1272
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT ‐ III

Introduction to Feedback Control: Dynamic Behaviour of feedback‐controlled processes, stability Analysis of

feedback systems. Design problems of controllers, Selection of type of feedback controller, time–Integral
performance criterion, Process Reaction Curve and frequency response characteristic, Ziegler‐Nichol Rule,
effect of dead time, dead time compensator and inverse response compensator.

UNIT – IV

Study of Multiple Loops Controller: Cascade Control System, Selective control system, Split Range Control,
Feed forward and Ratio control, Adaptive and Inferential control systems. Interaction and De‐coupling of
control loops, relative gain array and selection of the loops.

Textbooks:
1. G. Stephanopoulos, Chemical Process Control‐An Introduction to Theory and Practice. PHI, 3rd Ed, 2008.
2. B.W. Bequette, Process Control Modeling, Design and Simulation. PHI, 2004.

References:
1. Curtis Johnson, “Process Control Instrumentation Technology”, 8th Ed., Pearson, New Delhi.
2. D. E. Seborg, T. F. Edgar, and D. A. Mellichamp, “Process Dynamics and Control”, 2nd ed., Wiley.
3. B. G. Liptak, “Process Measurement and Analysis”, 4th edition. Instrument Engineer’s HandBook, CRC Press
4. F. G. Shinskey, “Process Control System”, McGraw‐Hill.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1273
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Process Control Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ICE 6 PCE PCE‐1 ICE‐306P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Process Control) as this is the practical
component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. To implement SILO Control using PLC.

2. To control the PH of reaction Vessel using PLC.
3. To Control the operation of Bottling plant using PLC.
4. To control a chemical process using PLC.
5. To control the operation of Washing Machine using PLC.
6. To implement cascade control using Process Control Trainer.
7. To study the operation of PID Control using Process control Trainer.
8. To implement feed forward control using Process Control Trainer.
9. To implement ON‐OFF control using Process Control Trainer.
10. To study the characteristics of Control Valve using Process Control Trainer.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1274
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Process Control L P C
4 4

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EE 6 PCE PCE‐3 EEE‐360
OAE 7 ICE‐OAE ICE‐OAE‐3 OICE‐433

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To introduce technical terms and nomenclature associated with Process control domain.
2. To understand concepts of PID controller as well as different modes of controllers.
3. To illustrate several forms of control methods, including model‐based control, feed‐forward control,
and cascade control.
4. To impart the knowledge of PLC, SCADA, DCS and multi‐loop controller.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Understand the basic concepts of process control and their static and dynamic behaviour
CO 2 Apply the concepts of PLC, SCADA and DCS to distinct process applications.
CO 3 Implementation of feedback control processes and its dynamic behaviour.
CO 4 Designing and tuning of classical controller and test their response under various test inputs.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 1 2 1 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 3
CO 2 3 3 ‐ 3 3 ‐ 2 ‐ 3 2 3 3
CO 3 3 3 ‐ 3 3 ‐ 2 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 3
CO 4 3 2 3 3 3 3 ‐ 3 3 3 ‐ 3

Unit I

Introduction to Process Control System: Incentives of Process control system,Design aspects of process control
systems. Dynamic and modelling of distinct processes: self‐regulating, interacting, and non‐interacting
processes. Dynamic behaviour of First order system, second order system and higher –order systems. Process
lag, load disturbance and their effect on processes.

UNIT – II

Controller Modes: Basic control action, two position, multi‐position, floating control modes. Continuous
controller modes: proportional, integral, derivative. Composite controller modes: P‐I, P‐D, P‐I‐D, Integral wind‐
up, and prevention. Response of controllers for different test inputs. Selection of control modes for processes
like level, pressure, temperature, and flow.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1275
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT ‐ III

Introduction to Feedback Control: Dynamic Behaviour of feedback‐controlled processes, stability Analysis of

feedback systems. Design problems of controllers, Selection of type of feedback controller, time–Integral
performance criterion, Process Reaction Curve and frequency response characteristic, Ziegler‐Nichol Rule,
effect of dead time, dead time compensator and inverse response compensator.

UNIT – IV

Study of Multiple Loops Controller: Cascade Control System, Selective control system, Split Range Control,
Feed forward and Ratio control, Adaptive and Inferential control systems.Interaction andDe‐coupling of control
loops, relative gain array and selection of the loops.
Introduction to Programmable Logic Controller (PLC), Supervisory Control & Data Acquisition (SCADA) Systems,
Distributed Control System (DCS).

Textbooks:
1. G. Stephanopoulos, Chemical Process Control‐An Introduction to Theory and Practice. PHI, 3rd Ed, 2008.
2. B.W. Bequette, Process Control Modeling, Design and Simulation. PHI, 2004.

References:
1. Curtis Johnson, “Process Control Instrumentation Technology”, 8th Ed., Pearsoned.
2. D. E. Seborg, T. F. Edgar, and D. A. Mellichamp, “Process Dynamics and Control”, 2nd ed., Wiley.
3. B. G. Liptak, “Process Measurement and Analysis”, 4th edition. Instrument Engineer’s HandBook, CRC Press
4. F. G. Shinskey, “Process Control System”, McGraw‐Hill.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1276
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Programming in C for Embedded Systems L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 7 ES‐EAE ES‐EAE‐3A ES‐401T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. Apply embedded C programming and its salient features for embedded systems
2. Illustrate the software and hardware architecture for 8051miccrocontroller in embedded systems.
3. Develop a solution for problems by using the concept learnt in programming using the embedded
controllers
4. Develop simple applications with 8051 by using its various features and interfacing with various
external peripherals.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Apply embedded C programming and its salient features for embedded systems
CO 2 Illustrate the software and hardware architecture for 8051miccrocontroller in embedded systems.
CO 3 Develop a solution for problems by using the concept learnt in programming using the embedded
controllers
CO 4 Develop simple applications with 8051 by using its various features and interfacing with various
external peripherals.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ 2 ‐ 3
CO 2 3 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ 2 ‐ 3
CO 3 3 3 2 2 ‐ ‐ 3 ‐ 2 3 2 3
CO 4 3 3 3 3 ‐ ‐ 3 ‐ 3 3 3 3

Unit I

Characteristics of embedded systems and Embedded C: Embedded System, applications and purpose of
embedded systems, Categories of embedded systems Difference between C and Embedded C , Embedded
Compiler, Embedded C program structure, Control Structure in Embedded C.

Unit II

Programming Embedded C: Inputs and Outputs in embedded C, Operations, Conditional Statements, Arrays,
Pointers and String Basics, Functions and Loops, Variables, Types, Constants, and Expressions, Structures and
Unions, Arithmetic operations in Embedded C.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1277
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Unit III

8051 Microcontroller: 8051 Microcontroller, Architecture, Timers, Interrupts, Serial communication, I/O
programming in 8051, Logic operations in 8051, Data conversion program in 8051 Accessing code ROM space in
8051, Data serialization using 8051.

Unit IV

Peripherals Interfacing and Development Environment: ADC interfacing, DAC interfacing, Sensor interfacing‐
Temperature Sensor Interfacing (LM35), LCD interfacing, Stepper motor interfacing. Development and
Debugging Tools: Software and Hardware tools like Cross‐Compiler, Debugger, Simulator, In‐Circuit Emulator
(ICE), Logic Analyzer etc.

Textbooks:
1. Michael J Pont, “Embedded C”, Addison‐Wesley, An imprint of Pearson Education, 2002.
2. Rajkamal, ‘Embedded system‐Architecture, Programming, Design’, TataMcgraw Hill, 2011

References:
1. Muhammad Ali Mazidi, 8051 Microcontrollers, Pearson, 2006

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1278
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Programming in C for Embedded Systems Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 7 ES‐EAE ES‐EAE‐3A ES‐401P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Programming in C for Embedded
Systems) as this is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Configure timer control registers of 8051 and develop a program to generate given time delay.
2. Port I/O: Use one of the four ports of 8051 for O / P interfaced to eight LED’s. Simulate binary counter (8
bit) on LED’s.
3. Serial I/O: Configure 8051 serial port for asynchronous serial communication with serial port of PC
exchange text messages to PC and display on PC screen. Signify end of message by carriage return.
4. Interface 8051 with D/A converter and generate square wave of given frequency on oscilloscope.
5. Interface 8051 with D/A converter and generate triangular wave of given frequency on oscilloscope.
6. Using D/A converter generate sine wave on oscilloscope with the help of lookup table stored in data area
of 8051.
7. Interface Stepper motor with 8051 and write a program to move the motor through a given angle in clock
wise or counter clock wise direction.
8. Design a Minor project to generate traffic signal using 8051 Microcontroller.
9. Design a Minor project to build Temperature controller.
10. Write a C program to perform addition of ten consecutive numbers stored at 1000H onwards

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1279
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Programming in Java L P C
3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EE‐VDT/EC‐ACT 6 OAE‐ECE‐EA OAE‐1 OCSE‐342T
OAE 6 CSE‐OAE CSE‐OAE‐2B OCSE‐342T
OAE 6 SD‐OAE SD‐OAE‐1C OSD‐332T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To understand and gain knowledge of characteristics of Java, JVM, instruction set, control flow,
programming and the sandbox model.
2. To learn the Java programming, use of exceptional handling and inheritance.
3. To understand threads, thread synchronization, AWT components and event handling mechanism.
4. To understand the concepts of I/O streams, JDBC, object serialization, sockets, RMI, JNI, Collection API
interfaces, Vector, Stack, Hash table classes, list etc.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Ability to understand the compilation process of Java, role of JVM as an emulator and various types of
instructions.
CO 2 Ability to learn and apply concepts of Java programming, exceptional handling and inheritance.
CO 3 Ability to understand the use of multi‐threading, AWT components and event handling mechanism in
Java.
CO 4 Ability to understand the concepts of I/O streams, IDBC, object serialization, sockets, RMI, JNI,
Collection API interfaces, Vector, Stack, Hash table classes, list etc.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 2 2 2 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 2 2 3
CO 2 3 2 2 2 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 2 2 3
CO 3 3 2 2 2 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 2 2 3
CO 4 3 2 2 2 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 2 2 3

UNIT‐I

Overview and characteristics of Java, Java program Compilation and Execution Process Organization of the Java
Virtual Machine, JVM as an interpreter and emulator, Instruction Set, class File Format, Verification, Class Area,
Java Stack, Heap, Garbage Collection. Security Promises of the JVM, Security Architecture and Security Policy.
Class loaders and security aspects, sandbox model

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1280
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT‐II

Java Fundamentals, Data Types & Literals Variables, Wrapper Classes, Arrays, Arithmetic Operators, Logical
Operators, Control of Flow, Classes and Instances, Class Member Modifiers Anonymous Inner Class Interfaces
and Abstract Classes, inheritance, Package, throw and throws clauses, user defined Exceptions, The String
Buffer Class, tokenizer, applets, Life cycle of applet.

UNIT‐III

Threads: Creating Threads, Thread Priority, Blocked States, Extending Thread Class, Runnable Interface, Starting
Threads, Thread Synchronization, Synchronize Threads, Sync Code Block, Overriding Synced Methods, Thread
Communication, wait, notify and notify all.
AWT Components, Component Class, Container Class, Layout Manager Interface Default Layouts, Insets and
Dimensions, Border Layout, Flow Layout, Grid Layout, Card Layout Grid Bag Layout AWT Events, Event Models,
Listeners, Class Listener.

UNIT – IV

Input/Output Stream, Stream Filters, Buffered Streams, Data input and Output Stream, Print Stream Random
Access File, JDBC (Database connectivity with MS‐Access, Oracle, MS‐SQL Server),
Collection API Interfaces, Vector, stack, Hashtable classes, enumerations, set, List, Map, Iterators.

Textbook(s):
1. Patrick Naughton and Herbertz Schidt, “Java‐2 the Complete Reference”,TMH
2. Kathy Sierra & Bert Bates, “Head First Java”, O'Reilly.

References:
1. E. Balaguruswamy, “Programming with Java”, TMH
2. Horstmann, “Computing Concepts with Java 2 Essentials”, John Wiley.
3. Decker & Hirshfield, “Programming Java”, Vikas Publication.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1281
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Programming in Java Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EE‐VDT/EC‐ACT 6 OAE‐ECE‐EA OAE‐1 OCSE‐342P
OAE 6 CSE‐OAE CSE‐OAE‐2B OCSE‐342P
OAE 6 SD‐OAE SD‐OAE‐1C OSD‐332P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Programming in Java) as this is the
practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Write a java program to implement stack and queue concept.

2. Write a java program to produce the tokens from given long string.
3. Write a java package to show dynamic polymorphism and interfaces.
4. Write a java program to show multithreaded producer and consumer application.
5. Create a customized exception and also make use of all the 5 exception keywords.
6. Convert the content of a given file into the uppercase content of the same file.
7. Write a program in java to sort the content of a given text file.
8. Develop an analog clock using applet.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1282
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Programming in Linux Environment L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CSE‐in‐EA 7 OAE‐CSE‐EA OAE‐2 OSD‐455T
OAE 7 SD‐OAE SD‐OAE‐5B OSD‐455T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To understand and make effective use of Linux utilities and Shell scripting language (bash) to solve
problems.
2. To implement in C some Standard Linux utilities such as ls, mv, cp, etc. using system calls, file and
directory commands.
3. To develop the skills necessary for systems programming including process and signal management.
4. To develop the basic skills of inter process communication and write network programs using sockets.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Understand the role of Linux utilities and apply shell scripting to solve problems.
CO 2 Ability to run basic linux utilities, file and directory commands.
CO 3 Ability to understand process environment and signals.
CO 4 Ability to understand interprocess communication and socket programming.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 2 ‐ ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 2 3 2 ‐ ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 3 3 2 ‐ ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 4 3 3 ‐ ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2

UNIT‐I

Linux Utilities: File handling utilities, Security by file permissions, Process utilities, Disk utilities, Networking
commands, Filters, Text Processing utilities and backup utilities.
sed‐ scripts, operation, address, commands, applications, awk‐ execution, fields and records, scripts,
operations, patterns, actions, associative arrays, string and mathematical functions, system commands in awk,
applications.
Shell programming with the Bourne again shell(bash): Introduction, shell responsibilities, pipes and Redirection,
Here documents, Running a shell scripts, The shell as a programming language, Shell meta characters, File
name substitution, Shell variables, Command substitution, Shell commands, The environment, Quoting, Test
command, control structures, arithmetic in shell, shell script examples, interrupt processing, functions,
debugging shell scripts

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1283
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT‐II

Files and Directories: File Concept, File types, File system Structure, File meta data – Inodes, Kernel support for
files, System calls for I/O operations – open, create, read, write, lseek, dup2. File status information – stat
family, file and record locking, fcntl function, Links – Soft links & hard links – symlink, link, unlink.
Directories – creating, removing, changing directories – mkdir, rmdir, chdir, obtaining current working directory
– getcwd, directory contents, scanning directories – opendir, readdir, closedir, rewinddir functions.

UNIT‐III

Process: Process concepts, layout of C program image in main memory, process environment –environment
list, environment variables, getenv, setenv, Kernel support for process, process identification, process control‐
process creation. Replacing a process image, Waiting for a process, process termination, zombie process,
orphan process, system call interface form process management – fork, vfork, exit, wait, waitpid, exec family,
process groups, session and controlling terminal, difference between threads and processes.
Signal‐ Introduction to signals, Signal generation and handling, Kernel support for signal, Signal function,
unreliable signals, reliable signals, Kill, raise, alarm, pause, abort, sleep functions.

UNIT ‐ IV

Interprocess Communications:‐ Introduction to IPC, IPC between processes on a single computer, IPC between
processes on different systems, pipes – creating, IPC between related processes using Unnamed Pipes, FIFOs –
creation, IPC between unrelated processes using FIFO (named pipes), difference between named and unnamed
pipes, popen and pclose library functions.
Message Queues – kernel support for messages, APIs for Message Queues, client/server examples.
Semaphores – Kernel support for semaphores, APIs for semaphores, FILE locking with semaphores.
Sockets: Introduction to Berkeley Sockets, IPC over a network, client/server model, Sockets Address
Structure(UNIX Domain & Internet Domain), ]

Textbook(s):
1. Unix System Programming using C++, T. Chan, PHI,(UNIT III to UNIT VIII)
2. Unix Concepts and Applications, 4th Edition, Sumitabha Das, TMH.
3. Beginning Linux Programming, 4th Edition, N.Matthew, R.Stones, Wrox, Willey India Edition.

References:
1. Linux System Programming. Robert Love, O’Reilly, SPD.
2. Advanced Programming in the Unix environment, 2nd Edition, W.R.Stevens, Pearson Education.
3. Unix Network Programming, W.R.Steven, PHI.
4. Unix for Programming and users, 3rd Edition, Graham Glass, King Ables, Pearson Edition.
5. Unix and Shell Programming, B.A.Forouzan and R.F.Koretsky, S.A.Sarawar, Pearson edition.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1284
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Programming in Linux Environment Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CSE‐in‐EA 7 OAE‐CSE‐EA OAE‐2 OSD‐455P
OAE 7 SD‐OAE SD‐OAE‐5B OSD‐455P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Programming in Linux Environment) as
this is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. a) Study of Unix/Linux general purpose utility command list man, who, cat, cd, cp, ps, ls, mv, rm, mkdir,
rmdir, echo, more, date, time, kill, history, chmod, chown, finger, pwd, cal, logout, shutdown.
b) Study of vi editor.
c) Study of Bash shell, Bourne shell and C shell in Unix/Linux operating system.
d) Study of Unix/Linux file system (tree structure).
2. Write a C program to emulate the UNIX ls –l command.
3. Write a C program that illustrates how to execute two commands concurrently with a command pipe. Ex: ‐
ls –l | sort.
4. Write a shell script to count lines, words & characters in its input. (do not use wc).
5. Implement message queue form of IPC.
6. Write a shell script to compute GCD & LCM of two numbers.
7. Write a shell script to find whether a given number is prime2.
8. Write a C program that makes a copy of a file using standard I/O, and system calls.
9. Write a C program that illustrates two processes communicating using shared memory.
10. Write shell script for‐
a) Showing the count of users logged in
b) Printing Column list of files in your home directory.
c) Listing your job with below normal priority
11. Write a Socket program to print system date and time (Using TCP/IP).

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1285
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Programming in Python L P C
3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CSE/IT/CST/ITE 6 PCE PCE‐2 CIE‐332T
CSE‐IoT/CSE‐ICB 6 PC PC IOT‐320T
EAE 6 IOT‐EAE IOT‐EAE‐2B IOT‐330T
EAE 6 ICB‐EAE ICB‐EAE‐2B IOT‐330T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. Learn the syntax and semantics of Python Programming Language.
2. Write Python functions to facilitate code reuse and manipulate strings.
3. Illustrate the process of structuring the data using lists, tuples and dictionaries.
4. Demonstrate the use of built‐in functions to navigate the file system.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Demonstrate the concepts of control structures in Python.
CO 2 Implement Python programs using functions and strings.
CO 3 Implement methods to create and manipulate lists, tuples and dictionaries
CO 4 Apply the concepts of file handling and regExusing packages.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 2 2 2 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 2 2 3
CO 2 3 2 2 2 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 2 2 3
CO 3 3 2 2 2 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 2 2 3
CO 4 3 2 2 2 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 2 2 3

UNIT‐I

Introduction, Python Basics: Entering Expressions into the Interactive Shell, The Integer, Floating‐Point, and
String Data Types, String Concatenation and Replication, Storing Values in Variables, Dissecting Your Program.
Flow control: Boolean Values, Comparison Operators, Boolean Operators, Mixing Boolean and Comparison
Operators, Elements of Flow Control, Program Execution, Flow Control Statements, Importing Modules, Ending
a Program Early with sys.exit().

UNIT‐II

Functions: def Statements with Parameters, Return Values and return Statements, The None Value, Keyword
Arguments and print(), Local and Global Scope, The global Statement, Exception Handling. Lists: The List Data
Type, Working with Lists, Augmented Assignment Operators, Methods. Dictionaries and Structuring Data: The

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1286
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Dictionary Data Type, Pretty Printing, Using Data Structures to Model Real‐World Things. Manipulating Strings ‐
Working with Strings, Useful String Methods.

UNIT‐III

Reading and Writing Files: Files and File Paths, The os.path Module, The File Reading/Writing Process, Saving
Variables with the shelve Module, Saving Variables with the pprint.pformat() Function. Organizing Files: The
shutil Module, Walking a Directory Tree, Compressing Files with the zipfile Module.

UNIT – IV

Web Scraping: Project: MAPIT.PY with the web browser Module, Downloading Files from the Web with the
requests Module, Saving Downloaded Files to the Hard Drive, HTML.

Textbooks:
1. Al Sweigart, “Automate the Boring Stuff with Python”, William Pollock, 2015, ISBN: 978‐1593275990.

References:
1. Allen B. Downey, "Think Python: How to Think Like a Computer Scientist”, 2nd Edition, Green Tea Press,
2015, ISBN: 978‐9352134755.
2. Charles Dierbach, "Introduction to Computer Science Using Python", 1st Edition, Wiley India Pvt Ltd. ISBN‐13:
978‐8126556014.
3. Wesley J Chun, “Core Python Applications Programming”, 3rd Edition, Pearson Education India, 2015. ISBN‐
13: 978‐9332555365.
4. Roberto Tamassia, Michael H Goldwasser, Michael T Goodrich, “Data Structures and Algorithms in Python”,
1st Edition, Wiley India Pvt Ltd, 2016. ISBN‐13: 978‐8126562176.
5. Reema Thareja, “Python Programming using problem solving approach”, Oxford University press, 2017. ISBN‐
13: 978‐0199480173

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1287
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Programming in Python Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CSE/IT/CST/ITE 6 PCE PCE‐2 CIE‐332P
CSE‐IoT/CSE‐ICB 6 PC PC IOT‐320P
EAE 6 IOT‐EAE IOT‐EAE‐2B IOT‐330P
EAE 6 ICB‐EAE ICB‐EAE‐2B IOT‐330P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Programming in Python) as this is the
practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Basic data types and operators: Create a program that prompts the user for their name and age and prints
a personalized message.
2. Conditional statements: Create a program that prompts the user for their age and tells them if they can
vote in the next election.
3. Loops: Create a program that calculates the factorial of a number entered by the user using a loop.
4. Lists and arrays: Create a program that prompts the user for a list of numbers and then sorts them in
ascending order.
5. Strings and string manipulation: Create a program that prompts the user for a string and then prints out
the string reversed.
6. Functions: Create a program that defines a function to calculate the area of a circle based on the radius
entered by the user.
7. Classes and objects: Create a program that defines a class to represent a car and then creates an object of
that class with specific attributes.
8. File input/output: Create a program that reads data from a file and writes it to another file in a different
format.
9. Regular expressions: Create a program that uses regular expressions to find all instances of a specific
pattern in a text file.
10. Exception handling: Create a program that prompts the user for two numbers and then divides them,
handling any exceptions that may arise.
11. GUI programming: Create a program that uses a graphical user interface (GUI) to allow the user to perform
simple calculations.
12. Web scraping: Create a program that uses a web scraping library to extract data from a website and then
stores it in a database.
13. Data visualization: Create a program that reads data from a file and then creates a visualization of that data
using a data visualization library.
14. Machine learning: Create a program that uses a machine learning library to classify images based on their
content.
15. Networking: Create a program that uses a networking library to communicate with a server and retrieve
data from it.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1288
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Programming in R and Python L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CSE‐DS 6 PC PC DS‐342T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. Learn Fundamentals of R.
2. Learn the Basics of statistical data analysis with examples.
3. Learn the basis of python
4. Compile and visualize data using statistical functions.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Impart the basic knowledge of R Fundamentals.
CO 2 How data is analysed and visualized using statistic functions
CO 3 Impart the basic knowledge of python programming
CO 4 Understand the loading, retrieval techniques of data.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 ‐ ‐ 2 ‐ 3 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 ‐
CO 2 ‐ 3 ‐ 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐
CO 3 3 ‐ ‐ 2 ‐ 3 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 ‐
CO 4 3 2 2 ‐ 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐

UNIT‐I

R Basics: Basic operations in R, Math operations in R, working with null values, Import & Export files in R, Data‐
frame, Joins, One‐way and Two way tables, Arrays, Factors, R ‐ Variables: Variable assignment, Data types of
Variable, Deleting Variables ‐ R Operators: Arithmetic Operators, Relational Operators, Logical Operator,
Assignment Operators, Miscellaneous Operators, R Decision Making: if statement, if – else statement, if – else
if statement, switch statement – R Loops: repeat loop, while loop, for loop ‐ Loop control statement: break
statement, next statement.

UNIT‐II

R‐Function : function definition, Built in functions: mean(), paste(), sum(), min(), max(), seq(), user‐defined
function, calling a function, calling a function without an argument, calling a function with argument values ‐ R‐
Strings – Manipulating Text in Data: substr(), strsplit(), paste(), grep(), toupper(), tolower() ‐ R Vectors –
Sequence vector, rep function, vector access, vector names, vector math, vector recycling, vector element
sorting ‐ R List ‐ Creating a List, List Tags and Values, Add/Delete Element to or from a List, Size of List, Merging

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1289
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Lists, Converting List to Vector ‐ R Matrices – Accessing Elements of a Matrix, Matrix Computations: Addition,
subtraction, Multiplication and Division‐ R Arrays: Naming Columns and Rows, Accessing Array Elements,
Manipulating Array Elements, Calculation Across Array Elements ‐ R Factors –creating factors, generating factor
levels gl().

UNIT‐III

Python Basics Objects and Functions, Identifiers, Variables and Datatypes, Operators, Python Flow, Function
Arguments, Recursive functions ,Lambda, Exception Handling , Iterators, Generators and Decoders, Numpy and
Pandas Numpy: Arrays, Vectorization, Boolean Indexing, Matrix multiplication, Tuple, Join/Merge data, Unicode
strings etc. Pandas: Data Structure, Data frame, Reading data, Handling missing data.

UNIT ‐ IV

Mathematics for Data science Probability, Statistics, Linear Algebra, Gradient Descent, Calculus for data
science, ANOVA, Hypothesis testing, Data Visualization using GGPLOT2 and Matplotlib, Data Pre‐processing,
Data Transformation, Data Reduction, Feature Extraction. Univariate and Multi‐variate analysis.

Textbook(s):
1. Introduction to Machine Learning with Python, A. C. Muller & S. Guido, O’Reilly
2. Data analytics with R by Dr. Bharti Motwani , wiley publication
3. Sandip Rakshit, R Programming for Beginners, McGraw Hill Education (India), 2017.

References:
1. Python for R Users: A Data Science Approach by A. Ohri, Wiley India
2. Python and R for the Modern Data Scientist ,Rick J Scavetta, Boyan Angelov, O’Reilly

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1290
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Programming in R and Python Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CSE‐DS 6 PC PC DS‐342P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Programming in R and Python) as this
is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Demonstrate the following functions/methods which operates on lists in Python with suitable examples:
i) list( ) ii) len( ) iii) count( ) iv) index ( ) v) append( ) vi) insert( ) vii) extend() viii) remove( ) ix) pop( )
x) reverse( ) xi) sort( ) xii) copy( ) xiii) clear( ).
2. Demonstrate the following kinds of Parameters used while writing functions in Python. i) Positional
Parameters ii) Default Parameters iii) Keyword Parameters iv) Variable length Parameters.
3. Demonstrate lambda functions in Python with suitable example programs.
4. Python program to perform read and write operations on a file.
5. Create a CSV file by entering user‐id and password, read and search the password for given user id.
6. Write an R program that takes input from the user and display the values. Also print the version of R
installation.
7. Write a R program to list containing a vector, a matrix and a list and give names to the elements in the list.
8. Write a R program to create an empty data frame.
9. Write a R script, to create R objects for calculator application and save in a specified location in disk
10. Write a R program to find basic descriptive statistics using summary and find subset of dataset by using
subset().
11. Reading different types of data sets (.txt, .csv) from web and disk and writing in file in specific disk location
and reading Excel data sheet and XML dataset in R.
12. Find the data distributions using box and scatter plot.Find the outliers using plot and plot the histogram,
bar chart and pie chart on sample data.
13. Find the correlation matrix and analyse variance (ANOVA), if data have categorical variables on iris data.
Plot the correlation plot on dataset and visualize giving an overview of relationships among data on iris
data.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1291
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Programming in Windows Environment L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CSE‐in‐EA 6 OAE‐CSE‐EA OAE‐1 OSD‐330T
OAE 6 SD‐OAE SD‐OAE‐1B OSD‐330T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. The course Provides an insight into the windows programming environment
2. The course peeps into windows file systems and memory management techniques.
3. The course provides the information about process & thread management in windows
4. The course provides ability to use windows sockets and manage windows services
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Manage windows file system & outline windows principles
CO 2 Handle exceptions and make efficient use of memory in windows environment
CO 3 Create processes/threads and synchronize threads in windows environment
CO 4 Create sockets and manage services in windows environment
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 2 1 1 3 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 3
CO 2 3 2 1 1 3 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 3
CO 3 3 2 1 1 3 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 3
CO 4 3 2 1 1 3 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 3

UNIT‐I

Windows File System: Windows Evolution, Windows, Standards, and Open Systems, Windows Principles, 32‐
bit and 64‐bit Source Code Portability. Windows File Systems, Standard Devices, File and Directory
Management, Console I/O, The 64‐Bit File System, File Processing Strategies , File Locking, The Registry,
Registry Management.

UNIT‐II

Windows Memory Management & Exception Handling: Windows Memory Management Architecture,
Managing Heap Memory, Memory‐Mapped Files, Dynamic Link Libraries, The DLL Entry Point, DLL
Version Management. Exceptions and Their handlers, Errors and exceptions, Vectored Exception Handling.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1292
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT‐III

Windows Process Management: Windows Processes and Threads, Process Creation, Processes in a
Multiprocessor Environment, Process Execution Times, Generating Console Control Events, Jobs. Thread,
Thread Management, Using C library in threads, Performance Impact, Introduction to Program Parallelism,
Process and Thread Priority and Scheduling, Fibers, Thread Synchronization.

UNIT – IV

Windows Sockets & Services: Windows Sockets, Socket Server Function, Socket Client Function, Data grams,
Berkley Sockets Vs Windows sockets, Overlapped I/O with Windows sockets. Writing Windows services, The
service Control Handler, Managing windows services, Service Operation and management Debugging a service

Textbook(s):
1. Windows System Programming, J.M. Hart, Addison Wesley

References:
1. Windows 10 System Programming, P. Yosifovich, Leanpub
2. Programming Windows Chales Petzold, Microsoft Press

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1293
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Programming in Windows Environment Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CSE‐in‐EA 6 OAE‐CSE‐EA OAE‐1 OSD‐330P
OAE 6 SD‐OAE SD‐OAE‐1B OSD‐330P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Programming in Windows
Environment) as this is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

Note: Write Following programs in Windows Environment using C.

1. Printing the Current Directory

3. File Listing and Directory Traversal
4. File Processing with Error and Exception Recovery
5. Sorting a File with Memory Mapping
6. Create an Index File
7. Cerate a DLL with Explicit linking
8. Parallel Searching using multiple processes
9. Create, List, and Kill Background Jobs
10. Multithreaded Pattern Searching
11. Write a socket based client
12. Socket‐Based Server with In‐Process Servers
13. Write code for A Service Wrapper using existing services

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1294
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Project Management L P C
3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

OAE 7 SD‐OAE SD‐OAE‐3B OSD‐447T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To apply the basic concepts of project management such as features, objectives, life cycle, model and
management, in a given context
2. To analyze projects and their associated risks by understanding the various theoretical frameworks,
non‐numerical and numerical models in order to make correct selection decisions
3. To evaluate the stages of project management and identify and determine correct techniques for
planning and scheduling
4. To evaluate management processes for budgeting, controlling and terminating projects in order to
achieve overall project success
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Apply the basic concepts of project management such as features, objectives, life cycle, model and
management, in a given context
CO 2 Analyze projects and their associated risks by understanding the various theoretical frameworks, non‐
numerical and numerical models in order to make correct selection decisions
CO 3 Evaluate the stages of project management and identify and determine correct techniques for
planning and scheduling
CO 4 Evaluate management processes for budgeting, controlling and terminating projects in order to
achieve overall project success
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 2 2 3 3 3 2
CO 2 3 3 2 3 3 2 3
CO 3 3 2 3 3 2 3 2
CO 4 2 3 3 2 2

UNIT‐I

Intoruction: Characteristics of project; Life Cycle of Project; Project Model; Project Management as discipline;
Contemporary aspects of Project Management
Project Selection: Theoretical Models; Non‐numeric models; Numeric Models; Financial Models; Project
Portfolio process, Significance and applicability of Monte Carlo simulation

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1295
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT‐II

Project Organization, Manager and Planning: Pure Project organization; Functional Organizations; Mixed
organizations; Matrix organizations; Role, Attitudes and Skills of Project Manager, Project Coordination,
Systems Integration, Work Breakdown Structure, Linear Responsibility Charts.
Risk Managemen: Theoretical Aspects of risk, Risk Management process, Numeric Techniques, Hillier model,
Sensitivity Analysis, Certainty Equivalent approach and Risk adjusted discount rates, Game theory.

UNIT‐III

Project Scheduling and Resource Allocation: Theoretical aspects‐Importance, Focus Area‐PERT/CPM, AOA and
AON charts, Probability Analysis, Gantt Charts, Crashing of Projects‐ Time and Cost tradeoff, Basics Resource
Leveling and Loading.

UNIT ‐ IV

Budgeting, Control and Project Termination: Estimating Project Budgets, Improving the process of cost
estimation, Basics, Importance, Purpose of control, Types of Control, Desirable features of Control, Control
Systems, Critical Ratio Method, Control of creative activities, Control of change and scope creep, Why
Termination, Types of termination, typical termination activities

Textbook(s):
1. Meredith, Mantel, Project Management‐A Managerial Approach, 10th Edition, Wiley Publications,2017

References:
1. Timmothy Kloppenborg, Contemporary Project Management, 5th Edition, Cengage Learning, 2017
2. Harold Kerzner, Project Management: A Systems Approach to Planning, Scheduling, and Controlling, 12th
Edition, Wiley Publications,2017
3. Wysocki, R.K., Effective Project Management: Traditional, Agile, Extreme, Hybrid, 8th Edition, Wiley, 2018
4. Vohra, N. D., Quantitative Techniques in Management, 5thEdition, Tata McGraw Hill, 2017

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1296
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Project Management Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

OAE 7 SD‐OAE SD‐OAE‐3B OSD‐447P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Project Management) as this is the
practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The allotment and guidelines for the project work shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the
class commencement under intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the
paper is being offered.

Create a mini project on any topic and create a report consisting of all the phases of project management.
Some suggested topics, but not limited to, are as follows:

1. Inventory Management System

2. Event Management System
3. University Admission Management System
4. Hotel Management System
5. Airline Reserversation System
6. Railway Reserversation System
7. E‐commerce

The students shall be asked to write a complete documentation consisting of Requirements Analysis, WBS,
Scheuduling Charts, Metrics, Financial Planning, Resource Allocation, Team Organisation, etc.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1297
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Public Health Engineering L P C

4 4

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

OAE 7 CE‐OAE CE‐OAE‐4 OCE‐403

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To learn the principles for identification of sources of surface and subsurface water
2. To learn calculation of population and requirement of drinking water
3. To understand the plotting of water supply scheme highlighting different features
4. To know evaluation of characteristics and treatment of sewage
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Identify the sources of surface and subsurface water
CO 2 Draw labelled layout for water supply scheme.
CO 3 Estimate the quantity of drinking water required for a population
CO 4 Evaluate characteristics and suggest treatment of sewage.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 2 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐
CO 2 1 3 1 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐
CO 3 1 2 1 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐
CO 4 ‐ 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐

UNIT‐I

Sources, Demand and Quality of Water: Water supply schemes ‐ Objectives, components, Surface and
Subsurface sources of water, Intake Structures, Definition and types, Factors governing the location of an
intake structure, Types of intakes. Demand of water: Factors affecting rate of demand, Variations of water
demands, Forecasting of population. Methods of forecasting of population, (Simple problems on forecasting of
population) Design period, estimating of quantity of water supply required for city or town. Quality of water:
Need for analysis of water, Characteristics of water‐ Physical, Chemical and Biological, testing of water for Total
solids, hardness, chlorides, dissolved Oxygen, pH, Fluoride, Nitrogen and its compounds, Bacteriological tests, E
coli, B coli index, MPN, Sampling of water, Water quality standards as per IS 10500.

UNIT‐II

Purification of Water: Objectives of water treatment, Aeration objects and methods of aeration, Plain
sedimentation, Sedimentation with coagulation, principles of coagulation, types of coagulants, Jar Test, process
of coagulation, types of sedimentation tanks, Clariflocculator. Filtration ‐ mechanization of filtration,

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1298
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

classification of filters: slow sand filter, rapid sand filter, pressure filter. Construction and working of slow sand
filter and rapid sand filter, operational problems in filtration. Disinfection: Objects, methods of disinfection,
Chlorination‐ Application of chlorine, forms of chlorination, types of chlorination practices, residual chlorine
and its importance, Flow diagram of water treatment plants. Miscellaneous water Treatments: Introduction to
water softening, Defluoridation techniques.

UNIT‐III

Conveyance and Distribution of Water: Conveyance: Types of Pipes used for conveyance of water, choice of
pipe material, Types of joints & Types of valves‐ their use, location and function on a pipeline.
Distribution of water: Methods of distribution of water Gravity, pumping, and combined system, Service
reservoirs – functions and types, Layouts of distribution of Water‐Dead end system, grid iron system, circular
system, radial system; their suitability, advantages and disadvantages.

UNIT ‐ IV

Domestic Sewage and System ff Sewerages: Building Sanitation: Necessity of sanitation, Necessity to treat
domestic sewage, Definitions‐ Sewage, silage, types of sewage. Definition of the terms related to Building
Sanitation Civil Engineering Curriculum Structure 122 Water pipe, Rain water pipe, Soil pipe, Sullage pipe, Vent
pipe. Building Sanitary Fittings Water closet – Indian and European type, flushing cistern, wash basin, sinks,
Urinals. Traps types, qualities of good trap. Systems of plumbing ‐ one pipe, two pipe, single stack, choice of
system. Principles regarding design of building drainage, inspection and junction chambers, their necessity,
location, size and shape Systems of Sewerage and Sewer Appurtenances: Types of Sewers, Systems of
sewerage, self‐cleansing velocity and non‐scouring velocity, Laying, Testing and maintenance of sewers,
Manholes and Drop Manhole‐component parts, location, spacing, construction details, Sewer Inlets, Street
Inlets.

Textbook(s):
1. Sharma S.C, Environmental Engineering, Khanna Publishing House, New Delhi
2. Garg, S.K., Environmental Engineering Vol. I and Vol. II, Khanna Publishers

References:
1. Gupta, O.P., Elements of Environmental Pollution Control, Khanna Publishing House, Delhi
2. Rao, C.S., Environmental Pollution Control Engineering, New Age International
3. Peavy H S, Rowe D R, and Tchobanoglous G, Environmental Engineering, McGraw
4. Basak N N, Environmental Engineering,McGraw Hill Publisher

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1299
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Quality and Safety Management L P C

4 4

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 7 CTM‐EAE CTM‐EAE‐3 CEC‐413

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To study the concepts of quality assurance and control techniques in construction.
2. To familiarize with clauses for quality management in construction Industry
3. To study the various construction accidents and cost of construction injuries
4. To study and understand the various safety concepts and requirements applied to construction
industry.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Understand different aspects of quality and related tools.
CO 2 Apply techniques of total quality assurance and quality control programme and cost implication.
CO 3 Understand importance of various aspects of safety during construction activity.
CO 4 Apply principles of environmental safety to construction projects.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 1 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐
CO 2 3 1 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ 1 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐
CO 3 3 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐
CO 4 3 1 ‐ 2 1 ‐ 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐

UNIT‐I

Quality Management: Quality policy in construction Industry‐Consumer Satisfaction‐Ergonomics, Time of

Completion‐Statistical Tolerance‐Taguchi's concept of quality‐ Contract and construction Programming‐
Inspection procedures.
Quality Assurance and Control: Total QA/QC Program and cost implication. Different aspects of Quality‐
Appraisals, failure mode analysis, Stability methods and tools, Influence of drawings, detailing, specification.

UNIT‐II

Construction Accidents: Safety in construction ‐ Cost of Accidents ‐ Safety norms ‐ Safety aids Injury and
Accidents‐ Causes, Investigations and Prevention of Accidents, Hazards – Types, Nature, Causes and Control
Measures ‐ Identifications and Control Techniques ‐ Cost of Construction Injuries‐Legal Implications ‐ Site
management with regard to safety –Safety training and implementation ‐ Construction safety and health
manual. Familiarization with relevant Indian Standards and the National Building Code provisions on

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1300
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

construction safety.

UNIT‐III

Safety in Construction Operations: Excavation and filling ‐ Under‐ water works ‐ Underpinning & Shoring ‐
Ladders & Scaffolds ‐ Tunnelling ‐ Blasting ‐ Dismantling ‐ Confined space Temporary Structures. noise
standards and limit values; noise instrumentation and monitoring procedure.
Construction Machinery: safety in material handling and equipment's‐Safety in storage & stacking of
construction materials. Safety in the use of construction equipment/vehicles. Safety in temporary power supply
and fire safety at construction site.
Safety in Demolition Work: keys to safe demolition, pre survey inspection, method statement, site supervision,
safe clearance zone, health hazards from demolition.

UNIT – IV

Safety Policy: Need‐ Safety provisions ‐Factory Act‐Laws related to the Industrial Safety‐Measurement of Safety
Performance, Safety Audit, Problem Areas in Construction Safety‐Elements of an Effective Safety Programme‐
Job site Safety assessment‐ Safety Meetings‐Safety Incentives
Safety Organization: Safety Policy, Safety Record Keeping, Safety Culture‐Safe Workers‐Safety and First Line
Supervisors‐ Middle Managers‐Top Management Practices, Company Activities and Safety‐Sub contractual
obligation, Project Coordination and Safety Procedures

Textbook(s):
1. Managing Quality, Dale B. G, Fourth Edition, Blackwell Publishing, Oxford, (2003).
2. Reese. C.D and Eidson J.V, Handbook of OSHA Construction Safety and Health, 2nd Ed, CRC Press, Boca Raton,
(2006)

References:
1 Construction Safety, Jimmie W. Hinze, Prentice Hall of India, (1997).
2. Modern Construction Management, Harris .F, McCaffer .R and Edum‐Fotwe .F, 6th Edition, Blackwell
Publishing, Oxford, (2006).
3. Principles of Construction Safety, Holt S. J, Blackwell Publishing, Oxford, (2008).

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1301
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Quality Management & Quality Control L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 6 DMS‐EAE DMS‐EAE‐2 DMS‐314T
EAE 6 DT‐EAE DT‐EAE‐1 DMS‐314T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To understand the concept of Quality.
2. To understand the Implication of Quality on Business.
3. To understand the implications of quality management standards and systems.
4. To have exposure to challenges in Quality Improvement Programs.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Understand the importance of significance of quality.
CO 2 Review the quality management and its importance for individuals, organization and society.
CO 3 Identify requirements of quality improvement programs.
CO 4 Examine control charts and process engineering techniques used for enhancing the quality of a
system.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ 2 ‐ ‐
CO 2 3 ‐ 2 2 2 2 ‐ 2 2 ‐ ‐ 3
CO 3 3 3 3 3 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 4 3 3 2 3 2 3 ‐ ‐ ‐‐ ‐ ‐ 2

UNIT‐I

Basic concepts, definitions and history of quality control. Quality function and concept of quality cycle. Quality
policy and objectives. Economics of quality and measurement of the cost of quality. Quality considerations in
design

UNIT‐II

Process control: Machine and process capability analysis. Use of control charts and process engineering
techniques for implementing the quality plan.

UNIT‐III

Acceptance Sampling: single, double and multiple sampling, lot quality protection, features and types of

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1302
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

acceptance sampling tables, acceptance sampling of variables and statistical tolerance analysis. Quality
education, principles of participation and participative approaches to quality commitment.

UNIT ‐ IV

Emerging concepts of quality management: Taguchi's concept of off‐line quality control and Ishikawa's cause
and effect diagram, Approach to Six sigma quality.

Textbook(s):
1. Besterfield D.H. et al., Total quality Management, 3rd ed., Pearson Education Asia, 2006.
2. Quality Control and Applications by Housen & Ghose.

References:
1. Evans J.R. and Lindsay W.M., The management and Control of Quality, 8th ed., first Indian edition, Cengage
Learning, 2012.
2. Janakiraman B. and Gopal R.K., Total Quality Management, Prentice Hall India, 2006.
3. Industrial Engineering Management by O.P. Khanna.
4. Suganthi L. and Samuel A., Total Quality Management, Prentice Hall India, 2006.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1303
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Quality Management & Quality Control Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 6 DMS‐EAE DMS‐EAE‐2 DMS‐314P
EAE 6 DT‐EAE DT‐EAE‐1 DMS‐314P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Quality Management & Quality
Control) as this is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. To perform Quality considerations in design.

2. To perform Process control with set of given data.
3. To perform machine and process capability analysis of a given specimen.
4. To perform use of control charts and process engineering techniques for implementing thequality plan.
5. To perform Acceptance sampling with given data.
6. To perform statistical tolerance analysisof case study.
7. To apply Taguchi's concept of off‐line quality control.
8. To construct Ishikawa's cause and effect diagram of any case study.
9. To studySix sigma quality tools and its application.
10. To study qquality function and concept of quality cycle.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1304
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Quantum Computing L P C
4 4

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CSE/IT/CST/ITE 6 PCE PCE‐2 CIE‐334

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To impart the basic knowledge of Quantum Computing.
2. To revise mathematics required for Quantum Computing.
3. To understand building blocks of quantum computing and design algorithms.
4. To understand quantum hardware principles and tools for quantum computing.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Appraise various mathematical models required for quantum computing.
CO 2 Illustrate building blocks of quantum computing through architecture and programming models.
CO 3 Identify and apply the various quantum algorithms.
CO 4 Discuss various quantum hardware building principles.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 2 3 2 1 1 1 2 1 2 2
CO 2 3 3 2 3 3 1 1 2 1 1 2 2
CO 3 3 3 2 3 3 1 1 1 2 2 1 2
CO 4 3 3 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 2

UNIT‐I

Mathematical Foundations for Quantum Computing. Matrix Algebra: basis vectors and orthogonality, inner
product and Hilbert spaces, matrices and tensors, unitary operators and projectors, Dirac notation, Eigen
values and Eigen vectors. Origin of Quantum Computing, Overview of major concepts of Quantum Computing,
Quantum Computing vs Classical Computer. Introduction to Quantum Mechanics, Qubits and multi‐qubits
states, Block Sphere representation, Quantum Superposition, Quantum Entanglement, Major players in the
industry (IBM, Microsoft, Rigetti, D‐Wave etc)

UNIT‐II

Architecture of a Quantum Computing platform. Details of q‐bit system of information representation:

Quantum superposition of qubits (valid and invalid superposition), Quantum Entanglement, Useful states from
quantum algorithmic perceptive e.g. Bell State. Operation on qubits: Measuring and transforming using gates.
Quantum Logic gates and Circuit. No Cloning Theorem and Teleportation. Programming model for a Quantum
Computing Program. Steps performed on classical computer. Steps performed on Quantum Computer. Moving

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1305
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

data between bits and qubits.

.
UNIT‐III

Quantum Algorithms and Error Correction. Quantum Algorithms, Shor‘s Algorithm, Grover‘s Algorithm.
Deutsch‘s Algorithm, Deutsch ‐Jozsa Algorithm. Quantum error correction using repetition codes 3 qubit codes,
Shor‘s 9 qubit error correction Code. NISQ era Quantum Algorithms (VQE/QAOA and industrial applications).

UNIT ‐ IV

Quantum Hardware. Ion Trap Qubits, The DiVincenzo Criteria, Lagrangian and Hamiltonian Dynamics in a
Nutshell: Dynamics of a Translating Rotor. Quantum Mechanics of a Free Rotor. The Cirac‐Zoller Mechanism:
Quantum Theory of Simple Harmonic Motion, A Phonon‐Qubit Pair Hamiltonian, LightInduced Rotor‐Phonon
Interactions, Trapped Ion Qubits. Cavity Quantum Electrodynamics (cQED): Eigenstates of the Jaynes‐
Cummings Hamiltonian Circuit QED (cirQED): Quantum LC Circuits, Artificial Atoms, Superconducting Qubits.
Quantum computing with spins: Quantum inverter realised with two exchange coupled spins in quantum dots,
A 2‐qubit spintronic universal quantum gate.

Textbook(s):
1. Michael A. Nielsen, Issac L. Chuang, Quantum Computation and Quantum Information, 10th Ed., Cambridge
University Press, 2010.
2. Parag K Lala, Mc Graw Hill Education, Quantum Computing, A Beginners Introduction, First edition, 2020.

References:
1. Chris Bernhardt, The MIT Press; Reprint edition (2020), Quantum Computing for Everyone.
2. David McMahon, Quantum Computing Explained, Wiley, 2008.
3. Bernard Zygelman, A First Introduction to Quantum Computing and Information,2018

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1306
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Radar and Satellite Communications L P C

4 4

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ECE 6 PCE PCE‐3 ECE‐348
EC‐ACT 7 PC PC ACT‐405

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To explain the radar basics and various types of radar systems.
2. To explain the phase array radar and signal detection.
3. Understand of satellite orbits and launching and transmission theory.
4. Identify satellite access by various users and satellite navigation systems
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Understand the basics of radar systems and detection of radar signals.
CO 2 Analyze the phased array radar systems
CO 3 Understand the concept of satellite communication systems
CO 4 Design of satellite prototype and test analog and digital satellite communication systems as per given
specifications.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 2 3 2 2 3 1 3 2 1 1
CO 2 2 2 2 2 3 2 2 2 2 32 3 2
CO 3 2 3 3 3 2 3 2 3 3 3 1 1
CO 4 2 2 3 3 3 2 1 2 3 3 2 1

UNIT‐I

Radar Basics: general definition of radar, radar range equation, receiver noise, probability of detection and
signal‐to‐noise ratio, RCS, CW, FMCW and multiple frequency CW radars, delay line canceler, error signal of
conical‐scan radar, mono pulse radars, clutter, jamming, doppler shift, Radar waveforms, waveform matched
filter, pulse burst waveform, frequency‐modulated pulse compression waveforms

Unit‐II

Phase Array Working and Feed Systems of Radar: Synthetic aperture radars (SAR), pulse compression
techniques, Doppler processing, Alternate forms of the Doppler spectrum, Moving target indication (MTI),
Pulse Doppler processing, Dwell‐to‐dwell stagger, Clutter mapping and the moving target detector, Detection
of radar signals in noise.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1307
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Unit III

Satellite Sub‐systems: Attitude and Orbit control systems, Telemetry, Tracking and command control system,
Power supply system, Introduction to satellite link design, basic transmission theory, system noise temperature
and G/T ratio, design of downlink and uplink, design of satellite links for specified C/N, satellite data
communication protocols.

Unit IV

Direct broadcast satellite television and radio, satellite navigation and the global positioning systems, GPS
position location principle, GPS receivers and codes, Satellite Signal Acquisition, GPS navigation Message, GPS
Signal Levels, Timing Accuracy, GPS Receiver Operation.

Textbooks:

1. Mark A. Richards “Fundamentals of Radar Signal Processing”McGraw‐Hill, 2nd edition, 2014.

2. S. Haykins, “Adaptive Radar Signal Processing” John Wiley & Sons, Inc. 1st edition, 2007.
3. B.Pratt, A.Bostian, “Satellite Communications”, Wiley India.
4. D. Roddy, “Satellite Communications”, McGrawhill Education.

References:
1. C. Chen and H. Ling, “Time‐Frequency Transforms for Radar Imaging and Signal Analysis”, Artech House, 1st
edition, 2002.
2. Bruce R Elbert. “Introduction to satellite communication”. Artech house, 2008.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1308
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Radio and Television Engineering L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ECE 6 PCE PCE‐2 ECE‐336T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To impart the in depth knowledge of various electronic audio devices and systems.
2. To study the analysis and synthesis of TV Pictures, Composite Video Signal and Receiver Picture Tubes.
3. To impart the knowledge about the various Color Television systems.
4. To impart the knowledge of the basic principle and working of various consumer electronics devices.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Develop the basic knowledge about the various audio devices and systems.
CO 2 Acquire knowledge in Fundamentals of Television, Monochrome TV transmitter and receiver.
CO 3 Interpret the essentials of colour TV and various colour TV systems.
CO 4 Analyze and compare various consumer electronics gadgets/goods/devices.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 2 2 3 2 2 2 2 ‐ ‐ 1 2 3
CO 2 2 2 3 2 2 2 2 ‐ ‐ 1 2 3
CO 3 2 2 3 2 2 2 2 ‐ ‐ 1 2 3
CO 4 2 2 3 2 3 3 2 ‐ ‐ 1 2 3

UNIT I

Audio System: Microphones, Construction, Working principles and applications of microphone: Carbon,
Moving coil, velocity, crystal, condenser type, Cordless microphone, Dynamic & wireless microphone.
Loud Speakers: Direct radiating, horn loaded, woofer, tweeter and squeaker, baffles and enclosures.
Sound recording on magnetic tape its principles, block diagram and tape transport mechanism, Wow, Flutter &
Rumble distortion. Relationship between gap width, tape speed and frequency. Optical recording and
reproduction system, Blue ray technology, VCD & DVD system, HI‐ Fi system, condition for good acoustic
features, stereo amplifiers

UNIT II

Television: Monochrome TV Communication: Elements of TV communication system; Scanning – its need for
picture transmission; Need synchronizing and blanking pulses; Progressive scanning, interlaced scanning, ell
effect, resolution and band width requirement, Composite Video signal (CVS )at the end of even and odd fields,
advantage & disadvantage of negative modulation, need of pre & post Equalizing pulses; Monochrome picture

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1309
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

tube– construction and working, comparison of magnetic and electric of Construction and working of camera
tube: vidicon and plumbicon, night vision camera.
Block Diagram of a TV Receiver: function of each block and wave form at the input and output of each block;
Frequency range of various VHF bands and channels used in India, Major specification of the CCIR B standard.
Typical circuits of scanning and EHT stages of TV receiver, keyed AGC,SAW filter; trap circuit, Identification of
faulty stage by analyzing the symptoms and basic idea of a few important faults and there remedies.

UNIT III

Color TV: Primary colors, trisimulus values, trichromitc coefficients, concepts of additive and subtracting mixing
of colours, concepts of luminance, Hue and saturation, Compatibility of colour TV system with monochrome
system. Block diagram of colour TV camera, Construction and working principles of Trinitron, delta gun and PIL
types of colour picture tubes. Concepts of degaussing, purity, beam shifting; burst signal and its need,
chrominance signal; analysis of G‐Y signal is not transmitted, Block diagram of PAL TV receiver.

UNIT IV

Comparison and overview of digital TV LCD, LED, OLED, QLED, HDTV, Plasma TV &Three dimension TV.
Cable Television: Block diagram and principle of working of STB and DTH, Fuzzy logic washing machine, study of
digital camera, RFID & Bluetooth technology, study of Smart watches, Smart TV and iPods, block diagram of
microwave oven and its function of each block.

Textbook(s):
1. R. R. Gulati, “Modern Television Practice” New Age International, 2nd Edition.
2. S. P. Bali, “Consumer Electronics” Pearson Education, 1st Edition.

Reference Books:
1. A. Dhake, “Television & Video Engineering” TMH – 2nd Edition.
2. R.R. Gulati, “Monochrome & Colour Television” New age International Publisher, 2nd Edition.
3. R.G. Gupta, “Audio & Video Systems” TMH – 2nd Edition

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1310
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Radio and Television Engineering Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ECE 6 PCE PCE‐2 ECE‐336P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Radio and Television Engineering) as
this is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Familiarization with consumer and technician control & safety precautions.

2. To study the working and circuit description of Tape recorder.
3. To study the working of superheterodyne receiver.
4. To study the three band AM/ FM/ SW radio trainer kit.
5. Identify different components and section in TV receiver (B/W & Color)
6. Signal injection and signal tracing in black & white & Color TV
7. Colour TV adjustments, gray scale tracking, Colour killer, focus, chroma traps, sound traps, saturation
control, black level.
8. To study the working of color TV receiver and its voltage measurement.
9. Familiarization with specification, operation and use of TV set equipment, DVM, TVM Monochrome &
Colour pattern generators, sweep generator, X‐Y display wobbuloscope etc.
10. To study the working of Microphone.
11. To Test TV antenna and booster.
12. To study the working of LCD/ Plasma TV.
13. To study the working of LED/ OLED.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1311
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Random Processes and Stochastic Systems L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ECE 6 PCE PCE‐2 ECE‐334T
EAE 6 WMC‐EAE WMC‐EAE‐1B WMC‐334T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To impart the basic knowledge of random variable
2. To impart the knowledge of both temporal and spectral characteristics of Random Process
3. To familiarize the students with several stochastic processes specially Markov process ,Poisson
process, and renewal processes
4. To be acquainted with systems involving random signals.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 To evaluate the statistical properties of random variables and can handle probabilistic
transformations.
CO 2 To understand the temporal and spectral characteristics of Random Process
CO 3 To understand the basic properties of the Markov process ,Poisson process, and renewal processes in
general
CO 4 To understand how to estimate certain performance measures associated with aspects of a stochastic
system.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 ‐ 2 1 ‐ 2
CO 2 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 ‐ 2 1 ‐ 2
CO 3 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 ‐ 2 1 ‐ 2
CO 4 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 ‐ 2 1 ‐ 2

UNIT I

Random Variable: Definition of a Random Variable, Conditions for a Function to be a Random Variable,
Discrete and Continuous, Mixed Random Variable, Distribution and Density functions, Properties, Binomial,
Poisson, Uniform, Gaussian, Exponential, Rayleigh, Conditional Distribution, Methods of defining Conditioning
Event, Conditional Density, Properties. Distribution Function, Properties of Joint Distribution, Marginal
Distribution Functions, Conditional Distribution and Density, Statistical Independence, Sum of Two Random
Variables, Sum of Several Random Variables, Central Limit Theorem: Unequal Distribution, Equal Distributions.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1312
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT II

Random Processes – Temporal Characteristics: The Random Process Concept, Classification of Processes,
Deterministic and Nondeterministic Processes, Distribution and Density Functions, Concept of Stationarity and
Statistical Independence. First‐Order Stationary Processes, Second‐order and Wide‐Sense Stationarity, Nth‐
order and Strict‐Sense Stationarity, Time Averages and Ergodicity, Autocorrelation Function and its Properties,
Cross‐ Correlation Function and its Properties, Covariance Functions, Gaussian Random Processes, Poisson
Random Process.
Random Processes ‐ Spectral Characteristics: The Power Density Spectrum: Properties, Relationship between
Power Density Spectrum and Autocorrelation Function, The Cross‐Power Density Spectrum, Properties,
Relationship between Cross Power Density Spectrum and Cross‐Correlation

UNIT III

Classification of Stochastic Processes: Bernoulli, Markov Process: Markov chains in continuous time, Principles
of discrete event simulation, Markov chain models of queueing systems,Gaussian Process, Martingales,
Diffusions, Brownian Motion and White Noise, Poisson Processes, Renewal Processes: Generalized Renewal
Processes and Renewal Limit.

UNIT IV

Random Signal Response of Linear Systems: Linear System with random input: Spectral factorization theorem
and its importance, Convolution, Mean and Mean squared Value of System Response, autocorrelation Function
of Response, Cross‐Correlation Functions of Input and Output.
Spectral Characteristics of System Response: Power Density Spectrum of Response, Cross‐Power Density
Spectrums of Input and Output, Band pass, Band Limited and Narrowband Processes, Properties. Noise
Definitions: White Noise, colored noise and their statistical characteristics, Ideal low pass filtered white noise,
RC filtered white noise. Innovation process and whitening filter.

Textbook(s):
1. Probability, Random Variables and Random Signal Principles – Peyton Z. Peebles, TMH, 4th Edition, 2001.
th
2. Probability, Random Variables, and Stochastic Processes 3rd and 4 Editions by A. Papoulis.
.
Reference Books:
1. Bernd Probability, Random Processes and Estimation Theory for Engineers, Henry Stark & John W. Woods
2. Probability Methods of Signal and System Analysis by George R. Cooper, Clave D. MC Gillem, 3rd Edition,
Oxford, 1999.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1313
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Random Processes and Stochastic Systems Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ECE 6 PCE PCE‐2 ECE‐334P
EAE 6 WMC‐EAE WMC‐EAE‐1B WMC‐334P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Random Processes and Stochastic
Systems) as this is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Write a program to plot the Deterministic and Stochastic (Continuous) signals

2. Write a program to generate the random variables: a Uniform random variable, a Gaussian random
variable, and a Rayleigh distributed random variable of appropriate length
3. Write a program to generate discrete random variable using Binomial and Bernoulli Distribution
4. Write a program to plot time properties of signals (Time shifting, time scaling and time reversing)
5. Write a program to plot the stochastic properties of signal (Mean, variance, auto correlation, cross
correlation, auto covariance)
6. Write a program to generate samples of a zero‐mean stationary Gaussian vector process on [0, T] using the
FFT algorithm
7. Write a program to estimate the auto‐ or cross‐covariance function of a stationary, ergodic process.
8. Write a program to provide an estimate of the cross covariance function of stationary processes X and Y,
given one sample of each.
9. A probability class has N students enrolled. Write Program to compute the probability of at least two
students have birthday on same day.
10. To simulate continuous time Markov chain for n × n state transition matrix Q, and initial state probabilities
vector p0 of length n
11. To simulate Brownian motion stochastic process with vector t holding an ordered sequence of inspection
times, alpha the scaling constant of a Brownian motion process such that the ith increment has variance
α(ti − −1).
12. To simulate Poisson process with lambda is the arrival rate of a Poisson process, t is a vector of “inspection
times’

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1314
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Rapid Prototyping Tooling and Manufacturing L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ME 7 PCE PCE‐4 MEE‐409T
MAE 7 OAE‐MAE OAE‐1 MAO‐429T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. Understand technology and Recognized importance of rapid prototyping in advance manufacturing
process.
2. Acquire knowledge, techniques, and skills to select relevant rapid prototyping and tooling process.
3. Comprehend the potential of rapid prototyping and tooling in different industrial sectors.
4. Illustrated 3D printing technology for Rapid prototyping and tooling.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Identify, Explain, and solve problems related to rapid prototyping and tooling for manufacturing
complex geometries.
CO 2 Select suitable process and materials for rapid prototyping and tooling.
CO 3 Distinguish technique of CAD and reverse engineering for geometric transformation in rapid
prototyping and tooling.
CO 4 Determine part orientation, apply suitable slicing algorithm, and generate toolpath for minimum build
time.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 3 3 ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 2 3 3 3 3 2 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 3 3 3 3 3 ‐ 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 4 3 3 3 2 3 3 ‐ ‐ ‐‐ ‐ ‐ 2

UNIT‐I

Introduction: Evolution, basic principle, concept, procedure and need of rapid prototyping and tooling,
Classification of rapid prototyping and tooling processes (Additive/Subtractive/Deformative), Classifications of
materials used for Rapid prototyping and tooling, Industrial applications of rapid prototyping and tooling, most
used processes for rapid prototyping.

UNIT‐II

Stereolithography Apparatus (SLA), Fused Deposition Modelling (FDM), Selective Deposition Lamination (SDL),
Laminated Object Manufacturing (LOM), Ultrasonic Consolidation, Laser Engineered Net Shaping (LENS),

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1315
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Electron Beam Free Form Fabrication (EBFFF), Selective Laser Sintering (SLS), Electron Beam Melting (EBM).
Convectional Tooling Vs Rapid Tooling, Classification of Rapid Tooling, Direct and Indirect rapid tooling
methods.

UNIT‐III

CAD for rapid prototyping and tooling: Preparation of 3D‐CAD model in STL format, Reverse engineering,
Reconstruction of 3DCAD model using reverse engineering, Part orientation and support generation, STL
Conversion, STL error diagnostics, Slicing and generation of codes for tool path.

UNIT ‐ IV

Post processing in rapid prototyping and tooling: Support material removal, Surface texture improvement,
Accuracy improvement, Aesthetic improvement, Property enhancements using non‐thermal and thermal
techniques.

Textbook(s):
1. Chua C.K., Leong K.F., and Lim C.S., “Rapid Prototyping: Principles and Applications”, Third Edition, World
Scientific Publishers, 2010.
2. Gebhardt A., “Rapid prototyping”, Hanser Gardener Publications, 2003.

References:
1. Patri K. Venuvinod and WeiyinMa, “Rapid Prototyping: Laser‐based and Other Technologies”, Springer,
2004.
2. D.T. Pham, S.S. Dimov, “Rapid Manufacturing: The Technologies and Applications of Rapid Prototyping and
RapidTooling”, Springer, 2001.
3. Rafiq Noorani, “Rapid Prototyping: Principles and Applications in Manufacturing”, John Wiley & Sons, 2006.
4. Amit Bandyopadhyay, Susmita Bose, “Additive Manufacturing, Second Edition”, CRC Press Taylor & Francis
Group, 2020.
5. Ian Gibson, “Software Solutions for Rapid Prototyping”, Professional Engineering Publishing Limited, UK,
2002.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1316
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Rapid prototyping Tooling and Manufacturing Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ME 7 PCE PCE‐4 MEE‐409P
MAE 7 OAE‐MAE OAE‐1 MAO‐429P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Rapid prototyping Tooling and
Manufacturing) as this is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. To Study the working of Stereo lithography (SL) rapid prototyping machine.

2. To Study the working of Material Jetting rapid prototyping machine.
3. To Study the working of Binder Jetting rapid prototyping machine.
4. To Study the working of Fused Deposition Modelling (FDM) rapid prototyping machine.
5. To Study the working of Sheet Lamination rapid prototyping machine.
6. To Study the working of Selective Laser Sintering (SLS) rapid prototyping machine.
7. To Study the working of Electron Beam melting (EBM) rapid prototyping machine.
8. To Study the working of Electron Beam melting (EBM) rapid prototyping machine.
9. Manufacture the part by any rapid prototyping process without Support Material.
10. Manufacture the part by any of rapid prototyping process with Support Material.
11. Prepare the 3D‐CAD model in STL format of single point cutting tool.
12. Prepare the 3D‐CAD model in STL format of multi point cutting tool.
13. Improve the accuracy of part manufacture by any rapid prototyping process by post process technique.
14. Manufacture the hollow part by any of rapid prototyping process.
15. Reconstruction the 3D‐CAD model of part using reverse engineering and manufacture the part by any RP
process.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1317
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Real Time Embedded System Programming L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CSE‐in‐EA 7 OAE‐CSE‐EA OAE‐2 ES‐405T
EE‐VDT/EC‐ACT 7 OAE‐ECE‐EA OAE‐2 ES‐405T
EAE 7 ES‐EAE ES‐EAE‐4 ES‐405T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To understand the basic knowledge of Embedded system Design.
2. Develop Real time applications with the MSP430 controller.
3. To understand some case studies related to hardware design applications.
4. Learn to apply operating system concepts for real time applications.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 To describe the embedded system, also recognize the classification of embedded systems.
CO 2 To explain the architecture of the MSP 430 processor and its programming aspects (Embedded C).
CO 3 To become aware of interrupts, hyper threading and software optimization.
CO 4 To design real time embedded systems using the concepts of RTOS.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 2 2 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 3 2 3
CO 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 ‐ ‐ 3 3 2 3
CO 3 3 2 2 2 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 3 2 3
CO 4 3 2 2 2 3 2 ‐ ‐ 3 3 2 3

UNIT I

Introduction to Embedded Real‐time Systems, Embedded nitty‐gritty, The Build Process for Embedded Systems,
Types of Memory, Memory Management in Embedded Real‐time Systems, Interrupts and ISRs, Core of
Embedded system: RISC vs CISC controllers, Harvard vs Von Neumann architecture, Introduction to Real‐time
Theory, Real‐time Operating Systems, Requirement Engineering, Architecture and Design of an Embedded
System, Implementation Aspects in Embedded Systems, Estimation Modelling in Embedded System, Validation
and Debugging of Embedded Systems.

UNIT II

Introduction to MSP430 Microcontroller. Architecture. Programming Methods for MSP430. Fundamentals of Physical
Interfacing. Connecting Input Devices. Advanced Physical Interfacing. Multiplexing displays including Charlieplexing.
Shaft encoder. Programming the MSP430. Introduction to Embedded C. Interfacing LEDs and Switches with MSP430

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1318
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

using Digital Input and Output. MSP430 Clock and Reset System. Custom Waveform generation using MSP430.
Interfacing examples.

UNIT III

Operating system overview, Operating system concepts. Processes, Tasks and Threads, Scheduling, Memory
allocation, Clocks and timers, Inter task synchronisation, Device driver models, Bus drivers. Power
management, Examples and overview of Real time OS. Case studies of embedded systems using MSP430
processors.

UNIT IV

Elements of Network Embedded Systems, RTOS: RT‐Linux introduction, RTOS kernel, Real‐Time Scheduling, Bus
structure: Time multiplexing, serial, parallel communication bus structure. Bus arbitration, DMA, PCI, AMBA,
I2C and SPI Buses.

Textbook(s):
1. Raj Kamal, “Embedded Systems Architecture, Programming, and Design,” Tata McGraw Hill.
2. K.V. Shibu, “Introduction to Embedded Systems,” Tata McGraw Hill.
3. MSP430 Microcontroller Basics. John H. Davies. Elsevier.
4. Designing Embedded Hardware, John Catsoulis. 2nd edition. Shroff Publishers and Distributors.

References:
1. The Design of Small‐Scale embedded systems, Tim Wilmshurst, Palgrav, 2003.
2. Embedded System Design, Marwedel, Peter, Kluwer Publishers 2004.
3. Programming Embedded Systems in C and C++. Micheal Barr. Shroff Publishers and Distributors.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1319
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Real Time Embedded System Programming Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CSE‐in‐EA 7 OAE‐CSE‐EA OAE‐2 ES‐405P
EE‐VDT/EC‐ACT 7 OAE‐ECE‐EA OAE‐2 ES‐405P
EAE 7 ES‐EAE ES‐EAE‐4 ES‐405P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Real Time Embedded System
Programming) as this is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Introduction to MSP430 launchpad and Programming Environment.

2. Read input from switch and Automatic control/flash LED (soft‐ware delay).
3. Interrupts programming example using GPIO.
4. Configure watchdog timer in watchdog & interval mode.
5. Configure timer block for signal generation (with given frequency).
6. Read Temperature of MSP430 with the help of ADC.
7. Test various Power Down modes in MSP430.
8. PWM Generator.
9. Use Comparator to compare the signal threshold level.
10. Speed Control of DC Motor
11. Master slave communication between MSPs using SPI.
12. Networking MSPs using Wi‐Fi

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1320
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Real Time Operating Systems L P C

4 4

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CSE‐in‐EA 6 OAE‐CSE‐EA OAE‐1 ES‐304
EE‐VDT/EC‐ACT 6 OAE‐ECE‐EA OAE‐1 ES‐304
EAE 6 ES‐EAE ES‐EAE‐2A ES‐304
ECE 7 PCE PCE‐5 ECE‐425

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. Describe the key characteristics and requirements of real‐time systems, understanding their
fundamental differences from general‐purpose systems.
2. Differentiate between various types of operating systems, particularly RTOS, and justify the selection
of RTOS in embedded applications based on its advantages and suitability.
3. Designing and implementing tasks with inter‐process communication in a chosen RTOS. They will also
gain expertise in applying different task synchronization mechanisms to ensure efficient resource
management and overcome priority inversion challenges.
4. Analyse and troubleshoot synchronization issues in RTOS‐based systems, utilizing profiling techniques
to optimize task performance and evaluate and select the most suitable scheduling algorithms for
specific embedded applications.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Understand and analyse the basic concepts of real‐time systems, task creation, scheduling,
termination mechanisms, and different interprocess communication and synchronization methods in
RTOS.
CO 2 Design and implement task scheduling algorithms and different task synchronization mechanisms to
solve priority inversion problems in RTOS.
CO 3 Implement memory pools and dynamic memory allocation strategies and develop device drivers for
different hardware peripherals in an RTOS to analyse and optimize interrupt handling enhanced real‐
time responsiveness.
CO 4 Implement real‐time communication protocols to interface with external devices in embedded
systems to analyse and design real‐time systems considering timing constraints.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 3 1 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐
CO 2 1 1 3 2 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐
CO 3 3 3 3 2 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐
CO 4 2 2 3 2 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1321
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT‐I

Introduction to RTOS: Overview of embedded systems and their applications, Introduction to real‐time
systems and their characteristics, Fundamentals of operating systems and their role in embedded systems,
Real‐Time Operating Systems (RTOS) vs. General‐Purpose Operating Systems, Tasks and processes in RTOS:
creation, scheduling, and termination, Inter‐process communication and synchronization mechanisms in RTOS,
Case studies of popular RTOS used in embedded systems (e.g., FreeRTOS, VxWorks, RTLinux)

UNIT‐II

Task Management and Scheduling: Task management in RTOS: task states, priorities, and context switching,
Task scheduling algorithms: pre‐emptive vs. non‐pre‐emptive, priority‐based, round‐robin, Rate monotonic
scheduling (RMS) and earliest deadline first (EDF) algorithms, Task synchronization and communication:
semaphores, mutexes, message queues, Deadlock and priority inversion issues in RTOS, Task profiling and
performance analysis in real‐time systems

UNIT‐III

Memory Management and Device Drivers in RTOS: Memory management in embedded systems and its
challenges, Memory partitioning and protection mechanisms in RTOS, Memory pools and dynamic memory
allocation in RTOS, Introduction to device drivers and their role in embedded systems, implementing device
drivers for peripherals in RTOS, Interrupt handling and real‐time responsiveness in device drivers, Case study:
Writing a device driver for a specific hardware peripheral in an RTOS environment

UNIT – IV

Real‐Time Communication and System Design: Interfacing with external devices and communication protocols
(UART, SPI, I2C), Real‐time communication protocols (CAN, Ethernet) and their importance in industrial
applications, Introduction to real‐time constraints and analysis in system design, System‐level design and
considerations for real‐time applications, Introduction to software engineering principles in RTOS projects,
Real‐time debugging and testing techniques in embedded systems, Any one Real‐time case study and
application (robotics, automotive systems, medical devices)

Textbook(s):
1. Real Time Concepts for Embedded Systems – Qing Li, Elsevier, 2011
2. Embedded Systems‐ Architecture, Programming and Design by Rajkamal, TMH, 2007.

References:
1. Shibu K V, “Introduction to Embedded Systems”, Tata McGraw Hill Education Private Limited, 2nd Edition.
2. Embedded Systems: Real‐Time Operating Systems for Arm Cortex‐M Microcontrollers by Jonathan
Valvano, Vol 3, 4th Edition, 2017
3. Mastering the FreeRTOS Real‐Time Kernel: A Hands‐On Tutorial Guide by Richard Barry

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1322
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Recent Construction Technologies L P C

4 4

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CE 7 PCE PCE‐4 CEE‐403
EAE 7 CTM‐EAE CTM‐EAE‐5 CEC‐417

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To learn the application of prefabricated structure.
2. To understand the application of modular construction structure.
3. To know about the concept of high rise building.
4. To learn the latest bridge construction techniques.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Identify various construction techniques and their limitations.
CO 2 Analyse productivity and economics in construction techniques.
CO 3 Comprehend modular construction practices.
CO 4 Implement advanced construction techniques for Civil Engineering projects
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 1 2 2 3 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐
CO 2 3 1 2 2 3 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐
CO 3 3 1 2 2 3 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐
CO 4 3 1 2 2 3 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐

UNIT‐I

Prefabricated Structures: Introduction to Prefabricated structures, Planning for pre‐casting, Selection of

equipment for fabrication, Transport and erection of prefabricated components, Quality measures, Design
considerations of precast elements, Safety measure during erection.
Pre‐Engineered building: Introduction to Pre‐Engineered building, methods of construction, Design
consideration in Pre‐engineered building. Applications of prefabricated structures

UNIT‐II

Modular Construction Practices: Introduction to Modular Construction, Modular coordination, Modular

Standardization, Modular System Building, Limitation and Advantages of Modular Construction, Types of
modular construction, Modular construction process, modular construction comparison between modular and
conventional building.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1323
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT‐III

High Rise Buildings: Definition of high rise building in different context, need, scope‐ advantage and
Disadvantages, History of high rise structure New Design Trends in Geometrical Forms, Construction
Techniques of High Rise Buildings, Specification of high rise buildings, Advance Brick work, Selected High‐Tech
High‐Rise Buildings concrete, current tall buildings and their salient features.

UNIT ‐ IV

Bridge construction techniques: Introduction, Embankments and Foundations, Conventional Bridge

Construction Techniques, Factors affecting selection of bridge, Site selection, preliminary data to be collected,
Codes used in bridge designing. Accelerated Bridge Construction, Prefabricated Bridge Construction. Cable‐
stayed bridge, Balanced cantilever bridge, Incremental Launching method of Bridge Construction.

Textbook(s):
1. Construction Planning, Equipment, and Methods, Robert L. Peurifoy, Clifford J. Schexnayder, Robert
Schmitt and Aviad Shapira, McGraw‐Hill Education, 2018, Ninth Edition.
2. Construction Equipment and Management, S. C. Sharma, Khanna Publishing, 2019, First Edition.

References:
1. Principles and Practices of Commercial Construction, Cameron Andres, Ronald Smith and W. Woods,
Pearson, 2018, Tenth Edition.
2. Construction Materials and Techniques, D. S. Vijayan, S. Arvindan and A. Paulmakesh, Notion Press, 2021,
First Edition.
3. Fundamentals of Building Construction: Materials and Methods, Edward Allen and Joseph Iano, Wiley,
2019, Seventh Edition

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1324
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Refrigeration and Airconditioning L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ME 6 PCE PCE‐2 MEE‐316T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To understand fundamental types of refrigeration system, refrigerants and their properties.
2. To understand the working of vapour compression and absorption refrigeration systems.
3. To understand about instrumentation, control and different components of refrigeration system.
4. To understand the Psychometric chart &table and processes.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Classify the refrigerants and analyze the various air refrigeration systems.
CO 2 Explain the working of vapour compression and absorption refrigeration systems and identify different
methods of performance improvement.
CO 3 Illustrate the different components of refrigeration systems.
CO 4 Analyze the different psychometric processes & evaluate cooling and heating loads.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 3 3 ‐ 1 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 2 3 3 3 3 ‐ 1 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 3 3 2 2 1 ‐ 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 4 3 3 3 3 ‐ 1 ‐ ‐ ‐‐ ‐ ‐ 2

UNIT‐I

Introduction to Refrigeration: Brief history and need of refrigeration and air conditioning,methods of producing
cooling, Heat pump, Unit of refrigeration, Coefficient of performance.
Air Refrigeration systems: Bell Coleman Cycle, Dense Air System, Open Air System, Aircraft refrigeration,
working and analysis of Simple Air Refrigeration Cycle.
Refrigerants: ASHRAE Nomenclature, Eco Friendly Refrigerants, Properties of Refrigerants, Introduction to
Azeotropic& Non Azeotropic Refrigerant Mixtures (NARM).

UNIT‐II

Vapour Compression Refrigeration System: Simple Saturated Cycle, Use of T‐S & P‐h diagrams, COP, Dry and
Wet Compression, Effect of operating parameters, Effect of sub cooling and super heating, Liquid‐Suction Heat
Exchanger, Actual vapour compression cycle.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1325
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Compound Vapour Compression System: Liquid Flash cooler, Flash Inter cooler, Back pressure valves, Individual
Expansion valves, Multiple expansion valves.
Vapour Absorption Refrigeration System: Vapour absorption refrigeration system for NH3‐H2O & LiBr‐H2O,
Carnot COP, Electrolux Refrigerator.

UNIT‐III

Instruments & Controls: Sensing and Actuating Elements, H.P and L.P cut out, Thermostat, Solenoid valve,
Rotameter, Humidistat, Anemometer etc.
Components of Refrigeration System: Types, construction, working, comparison and selection of compressors,
Condensers, Expansion devices and Evaporators, Classification of compressors, reciprocating compressor,
Clearance Volume and Volumetric efficiency, Need for Multistage Compression.

UNIT – IV

Psychrometry: Brief History of Air Conditioning, Working substance in Air Conditioning system, Dalton's Law of
Partial Pressures, Psychometric Properties and Psychometric Chart, Psychometric Processes, Concept of Room
Sensible Heat Factor, Grand Sensible Heat Factor, Apparatus Dew point, Effective Sensible Heat Factor, High
Latent Heat Load applications, Human comfort, Summer & Winter Air Conditioning.
Heat Load Estimation: Inside and Outside design conditions, Solar heat gain through glass and structures,
Occupancy load, Lighting load and miscellaneous loads, Infiltration and Ventilation,
Duct Design: Function, classification and economic factors influencing duct layout, Equal friction, Velocity
reduction and Static regain methods of duct design.

Textbook(s):
1. C.P. Arora, “Refrigeration & Air Conditioning”, Tata McGraw Hill Publication.
2. R.C. Jordand & G.B. Prister, “Refrigeration & Air Conditioning”, Prentice Hall of India Publication.

References:
1. W.F. Stocker & J.W. Jones, “Refrigeration & Air Conditioning”, Tata McGraw Hill Publication.
2. M. Prasad, “Refrigeration & Air Conditioning”, Wiley Eastern.
3. S. Domkundwar, “A Course in Refrigeration & Air Conditioning”, Dhanpat Rai & Sons.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1326
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Refrigeration and Airconditioning Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ME 6 PCE PCE‐2 MEE‐316P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Refrigeration and Airconditioning) as
this is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. To determine COP and other performance indicators of vapor compression test rig.
2. To determine COP and other performance indicators of Ice plant test rig.
3. To determine COP and other performance indicators of Air conditioning test rig.
4. To determine COP and other performance indicators of vapor absorption refrigeration system.
5. To study of installation/operation/maintenance practices for refrigeration systems.
6. To determine the refrigeration load in cold storage (case study/visit).
7. To visit any refrigeration or air conditioning plant.
8. To conduct thermodynamic analysis (energy and exergy) of any refrigeration system.
9. To determine the COP of mechanical heat pump.
10. To determine the COP of cascade refrigeration system.
11. To determine the COP of ejector expansion refrigeration system.
12. To carry out the charging of any refrigeration system.
13. To carry out the different psychometric processes and make basic calculation for properties of moist air.
14. To determine the effect of operating variables on the performance of refrigeration system.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1327
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Reinforcement Learning and Deep Learning L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CSE‐AIML 7 PC PC ML‐409T
EAE 7 AIML‐EAE AIML‐EAE‐4 ML‐409T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To introduce the foundation of Reinforcement learning foundation and Q Network algorithm)
2. To understand policy optimization ,recent advanced techniques and applications of Reinforcement
learning
3. To introduce the concept of deep learning and neural network
4. To understand the concept of NLP and computer vision in deep learning
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Learn how to define RL tasks and the core principals behind the RL, including policies, value functions,
deriving Bellman equations and underst and work with approximate solution(deep Q Network based
algorithms)
CO 2 Learn the policy gradient methods from vanilla to more complex cases and learn application and
advanced techniques in Reinforcement Learning
CO 3 Apply neural networks for problem solving
CO 4 Able to Analyse images and have basic understanding of NLP in deep learning
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 2 3 3 3 2 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 2 3 2 3 3 3 2 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 3 3 2 3 3 3 2 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 4 3 2 3 3 3 2 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2

UNIT‐I

Reinforcement Learning Foundation: Introduction to Reinforcement learning and its terms,Features and
elements of RL, Defining RL Framework and Markov Decision Process , Polices, Value Functions and Bellman
Equations, Exploration vs. Exploitation, Code Standards and Libraries used in RL (Python/Keras/Tensorflow)
Tabular Methods and Q‐networks: Planning through the use of Dynamic Programming and Monte Carlo,
Temporal‐Difference learning methods (TD(0), SARSA, Q‐Learning), Deep Q‐networks (DQN, DDQN, Dueling
DQN, Prioritised Experience Replay)

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1328
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT‐II

Policy Optimization: Introduction to policy‐based methods, Vanilla Policy Gradient, REINFORCE algorithm and
stochastic policy search, Actor‐critic methods (A2C, A3C) ,Advanced policy gradient (PPO, TRPO, DDPG),
Model‐Based RL: Model‐based RL approach
Recent Advances and Applications: Meta‐learning. Multi‐Agent Reinforcement Learning, Partially Observable
Markov Decision Process, Applying RL for real‐world problems

UNIT‐III

Introduction to Deep learning: Introduction to deep learning and its application,Examples of deep learning
Introduction to Neural Network: Introduction to Neural Network its types and application,Introduction to
keras,Introduction to ANN Perceptron and its uses,Multilayer perceptron and deep neural network,Activation
function and its working TanH function,sigma ,relu etc ,Feed forward network, Cost function, Backpropagation,
Gradient Descent, Regulariztion and dropout technique, Batch normalization.
Types of Neural Network: Convolutional Neural network,CNN Pooling,CNN Layers,Flattening and Full
connection,Preparing a fully connected neural network,Introduction to RNN, Deep RNN, Long Short Term
Memory, GRU, Transfer Learning,

UNIT – IV

Deep Learning for Natural Language Processing: Introduction to NLP and Vector Space Model of Semantics
Word Vector Representations: Continuous Skip‐Gram Model, Continuous Bag‐of‐Words model (CBOW), Glove,
Evaluations and Applications in word similarity, analogy reasoning
Deep Learning for Computer Vision: Image segmentation, object detection, automatic image captioning, Image
generation with Generative adversarial networks, video to text with LSTM models. Attention models for
computer vision tasks.

Textbook(s):
1.Richard S. Sutton and Andrew G. Barto, "Reinforcement learning: An introduction", 2nd Edition, MIT Press,
2019
2. Goodfellow, Ian, Yoshua Bengio, and Aaron Courville. "Deep learning." MIT press, 2016.
3. Antonio Gulli and Sujit Pal,”Deep learning with Keras”

References:
1. Wiering, Marco, and Martijn Van Otterlo. "Reinforcement learning: Adaptation, Learning, and Optimization”
(2012)
2. Daniel Slater, Gianmario Spacagna and Peter Roelants, “Python Deep Learning”, Packt Publication.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1329
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Reinforcement Learning and Deep Learning Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CSE‐AIML 7 PC PC ML‐409P
EAE 7 AIML‐EAE AIML‐EAE‐4 ML‐409P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Reinforcement Learning and Deep
Learning) as this is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Setting up the Spyder IDE Environment and Executing a Python Program

2. Installing Keras, Tensorflow and Pytorch libraries and making use of them
3. Implement Q‐learning with pure Python to play a game
 Environment set up and intro to OpenAI Gym
 Write Q‐learning algorithm and train agent to play game
 Watch trained agent play game
4. Implement deep Q‐network with PyTorch
5. Python implementation of the iterative policy evaluation and update.
6. Chatbot using bi‐directional LSTMs
7. Image classification on MNIST dataset (CNN model with fully connected layer)
8. Train a sentiment analysis model on IMDB dataset, use RNN layers with LSTM/GRU
9. Applying the Deep Learning Models in the field of Natural Language Processing
10. Applying the Convolution Neural Network on computer vision problems

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1330
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Reliability & Maintenance Engineering L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ME 6 PCE PCE‐2 MEE‐322T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To understand about the fundamental concepts, the necessary knowledge and the basic skills related
to systems reliability and systems maintenance function.
2. To understand the techniques of Reliability calculations and related characteristics of components.
3. To understand necessary engineering techniques used for analysing, planning and controlling
Maintenance systems.
4. To understand about different ways for scheduling maintenance works and know how to use them.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Develop a sound understanding of the important role of systems reliability and systems maintenance.
CO 2 Estimate systems reliability both for the independent & dependent cases as well as
related characteristics and design systems for better reliability.
CO 3 Analyse and estimate systems maintainability as well as related characteristics and design systems
for better maintainability.
CO 4 Understand and apply necessary knowledge about the types of maintenance and know how to use
them when designing maintenance systems.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 3 3 ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 3
CO 2 3 3 3 3 ‐ 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 ‐ 3
CO 3 3 3 3 3 ‐ 3 ‐ ‐ 2 2 ‐ 3
CO 4 3 3 3 2 ‐ 3 ‐ ‐ 2 2 ‐ 3

UNIT‐I

Definition and basic concepts: Definition of Reliability, Availability and Maintainability. Random events,
Frequency distributions and measures of location, Random variables with examples and probability
distributions. Failure data, failure modes: Mean time to failure, MTBF, Failure analysis, Fault tree analysis,
FMECA.
Reliability in terms of hazard rate and failure density function: Reliability function, Hazard rate function, PDF,
CDF. Hazard models and bath tub curve: Constant, linear and non‐linear hazard models. Applicability of Weibull
distribution. Reliability calculation: Series, parallel and parallel‐series systems, Low level and High level
redundancy.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1331
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT‐II

Reliability calculations for maintained and stand‐by systems: Markov analysis, Load sharing system, standby
systems, and Three component standby systems.

UNIT‐III

Types of Maintenance: Definition of maintenance, Role and scope of maintenance in total organizational
context. Objectives and characteristics of maintenance; Centralised vs Decentralised maintenance. Corrective,
planned, preventive and predictive maintenance. Factors affecting maintenance; Opportunistic maintenance.
Measurement of maintenance work: Mean time to repair, Median time to repair, Mean system down time,
Mean time to restore.

UNIT – IV

Rating of maintenance work and allowances: Maintenance performance indices. Maintenance cost budgets;
Maintenance planning and scheduling; MIS in maintenance.
Measurement of maintenance effectiveness and maintenance audit.

Textbook(s):
1. Mechanical Reliability Engineering by ADS Carter, Macmilan.
2. Reliabilities for the technologies by L.A. Doty, Industrial Press Inc.

References:
1. Introduction to Reliability Engineering by Dhilon & Singh.
2. Reliability Evaluation of Engineering Systems by Roy Billington and R.N. Allen, Pitman.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1332
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Reliability & Maintenance Engineering Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ME 6 PCE PCE‐2 MEE‐322P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Reliability & Maintenance Engineering)
as this is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. To conduct Failure analysis of a given component.

2. To perform Reliability in terms of hazard rate and failure density function of a given component.
3. To perform Reliability calculation: Series, parallel and parallel‐series systems of a given specimen.
4. To perform Markov analysis of given test specimen.
5. To calculate maintenance performance indices of any component.
6. To perform measurement of maintenance work: Mean time to repair for any specimen.
7. To prepare maintenance cost budgets.
8. To perform maintenance audit.
9. To determine the Failure data, failure modes of any component.
10. To determine Mean time to failure of concrete beam.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1333
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Remote Sensing Image Analysis and Classification L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 7 IPCV‐EAE IPCV‐EAE‐4C IPCV‐457T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To impart the basic knowledge about remote sensing.
2. To impart knowledge about satellites and sensors.
3. To impart knowledge about image analysis and image classification.
4. To impart knowledge about image segmentation and shape analysis.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 The ability to understand concept, history and scope of remote sensing.
CO 2 To have an understanding about importance and applications of satellites and sensors.
CO 3 The ability to understand about various techniques of image analysis and image classification.
CO 4 To have a good idea about image segmentation and shape analysis.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 ‐ 2 1 ‐ 2
CO 2 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 ‐ 2 1 ‐ 2
CO 3 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 ‐ 2 1 ‐ 2
CO 4 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 ‐ 2 1 ‐ 2

UNIT I

Overview Of Remote Sensing: Definition, Concept, History & Scope, Energy Resources, Radiation Principles,
Electromagnetic Radiation (EMR) and Electromagnetic Spectrum (EMS), Black Body Radiation, Laws of
Radiation, Interaction of EMR with Earth’s Surface and Atmosphere.

UNIT II

Satellites: Characteristics – Geo‐stationary and Sun‐synchronous, Earth Resources Satellites ‐LANDSAT, SPOT,
IRS, IKONOS Satellite Series, Meteorological Satellites – INSAT, NOAA, GOES.
Sensors: Types and their characteristics, Across Track (whiskbroom) and Along Track (pushbroom) scanning,
Optical Mechanical Scanners – MSS, TM, LISS, WiFS, PAN, Concept of resolution – spatial, spectral, temporal,
radiometric, Basic concept and principles of thermal, microwave and hyperspectral sensing.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1334
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT III

Image Analysis: Recognizing, Differentiating and Quantifying different types of images, Gray scale and Colour
images.
Image Classification: Supervised, Unsupervised Classification, Classification algorithms: Maximum Likelihood,
Distance to Mean, Parallel Piped, Classification Accuracy: Error Matrix, Errors of Commission and Omissions,
Kappa Statistics Advanced Classification Technique.

UNIT IV

Segmentation Techniques: Thresholding Approaches, Region Growing, Relaxation, Line and Edge Detection
Approaches, Edge Linking, Supervised and Unsupervised Classification Techniques, Remotely Sensed Image
Analysis and Applications.
Shape Analysis: Gestalt Principles, Shape Number, Moment Fourier and Other Shape Descriptors, Hough
Transform, Topological and Texture Analysis, Shape Matching. Practical Applications – Finger Print
Classification, Text Recognition.

Textbook(s):
1. Floyd, F. Sabins, Jr: Remote Sensing Principles and Interpretation, Freeman and Co., San Franscisco, 1978
2. Rafael C. Gonzalez, Richard E. Woods, Digital Image Processing‘, Pearson, Third Edition, 2010.
3. Illesand and Kiefere: Remote Sensing and Image interpretation, John qwiley, 1987.

References:
1. Bernd Jahne, “Digital Image Processing”, 5th Ed., Springer, 2002.
2. William K Pratt, “Digital Image Processing: Piks Inside”, John Wiley & Sons, 2001.
3. Manual of Remote Sensing Vol. I&II, 2nd Edition, American Society of Photogrammetry.
4. Remote Sensing: The quantitative approach, P.H. Swain and S.M. Davis, McGraw Hill.
5. Imaging Radar for Resource Survey: Remote Sensing Applications, 3, W Travelt, Chapman & Hall.
6. Remote sensing Notes –Edited by Japan Associates of Remote sensing‐ JARS 1999
7. Anil K. Jain: Fundamentals of Digital Image Processing, Pearson, 2002.
8. John R. Jensen: Introductory Digital Image Processing: A remote sensing perspective, Prentice Hall.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1335
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Remote Sensing Image Analysis and Classification Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 7 IPCV‐EAE IPCV‐EAE‐4C IPCV‐457P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Remote Sensing Image Analysis and
Classification) as this is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Study of Remote Sensing Imagery for identification of geological, geomorphologic and cultural forms (IRSIA
& 1B).
2. Study of Remote Sensing Imagery for Water resources studies (TMIRS & SPOT).
3. Study of Remote Sensing Imagery for Environmental Impact assessment (SPOT).
4. Analysis of spectral reflectance curves.
5. Visual interpretation of satellite images.
6. To implement a Low Pass blurring filter for an image.
7. To implement a High Pass sharpening filter for an image.
8. To implement edge detection on an image. Perform performance comparison of at least two techniques.
9. To implement line detection on an image by using Hough Transform.
10. To implement watershed segmentation on an image.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1336
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Renewable Energy and Policies L P C

4 4

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EE/EEE 7 PCE PCE‐4 EEE‐407

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To explain the concept of solar energy.
2. To analyse wind and small hydro energy.
3. To understand non‐conventional energy resources.
4. To analyse the importance of grid connectivity.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Determine the need of solar energy and its applications.
CO 2 Utilise the technology for harnessing the wind and small hydro power energy
CO 3 Compare other known conventional energy sources biomas geothermal
CO 4 Discuss the importance of grid connectivity and in providing continuous power
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 2 1 ‐ ‐ 1 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 3
CO 2 3 3 2 ‐ ‐ 2 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 3
CO 3 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 1
CO 4 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 1

UNIT‐ I

Solar Energy: radiation – extra terrestrial, spectral distribution, solar constant, solar radiation on earth,
measurements; solar thermal system – solar thermal power and its conversion, solar collectors, flat plate, solar
concentrating collectors, ‐ types and applications; photovoltaic(PV) technology ‐ photovoltaic effect,
efficiency of solar cells, semi‐conductor materials, solar PV system, standards and applications, tracking.

UNIT‐ II

Wind and Small Hydropower Energy: wind data, properties, speed and power relation, power extracted, wind
distribution and speed prediction, wind map of India; wind turbines and electric generators. fundamentals –
types of machines and their characteristics, horizontal and vertical wind mills, elementary design principle,
wind energy farms, off‐shore plants; small, mini and micro hydro power plants and their resource assessment,
plant layout with major components shown.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1337
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT‐ III

Other Non‐conventional Energy Sources: biomass – photosynthesis and origin of biomass energy, resources,
cultivated resources, waste to biomass, terms and definitions – incineration, wood and wood waste, harvesting
super tree, energy forest, phyrolysis, thermo‐chemical biomass conversion to energy, gasification, anaerobic
digester, fermentation, gaseous fuel; geothermal – resources, hot spring, steam system, principle of working,
site selection, associated problems in development; ocean and tidal energy – principle of ocean thermal energy
conversion, wave energy conversion machines, problems and limitations, fundamentals of tidal power,
conversion systems and limitations; hydrogen energy – properties of hydrogen, sources, production and
storage, transportation, problems for use as fuel; fuel cells – introduction with types, principle of operation and
advantages.

UNIT‐IV

Grid Connectivity: wind power interconnection requirement ‐ low‐voltage ride through (LVRT), ramp‐rate
limitations, supply of ancillary services for frequency and voltage control, load following, reserve requirement,
impact of connection on stead‐state and dynamic performance of power system; interfacing dispersed
generation of solar energy with the grid, protective relaying, islanding, voltage flicker and other power quality
issues; role of non‐conventional energy system in smart grid.

Textbooks:
1. Tiwari and Ghosal, “Renewable Energy Resources: Basic Principle & Application”, NarosaPub.
2. S N Bhadra ,D, Kastha,’Wind Electrical Systems” Oxford Publication 2014

References:
1. John Twidell, “Renewable Energy Sources”, Taylor and Francis
2. Godfrey Boyle, “Renewable Energy: Power for a Sustainable Future”, Oxford University Press
3. Ewald F. Fuchs, “Power Conversion of Renewable Energy Systems”, Springer
4. B. H. Khan, “Non Conventional Energy”, Tata McGraw Hill
5. D P kothari ,”Wind energy System and applications” Narosa Pub 2014

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1338
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Research Methodology for Electrical & Electronics Engineering L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EE/EEE 6 PCE PCE‐2 EEE‐334T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To understand different types of research methodology
2. To create datasheet and its analysis
3. To implement optimization techniques
4. To design research papers
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Ability to understand different types of research methodology
CO 2 Ability to create datasheet and its analysis
CO 3 Ability to implement optimization techniques
CO 4 Ability to design research papers
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 2 1 1 1 1 ‐ 1 3 ‐ 3
CO 2 3 2 1 3 2 1 1 ‐ 1 3 ‐ 1
CO 3 3 2 1 2 3 1 1 ‐ 1 3 ‐ 3
CO 4 3 3 2 1 1 1 1 ‐ 1 3 ‐ 3

UNIT I

Research Formulation and Design: Motivation and objectives – Research methods vs. Methodology. Types of
research – Descriptive vs. Analytical, Applied vs. Fundamental, Quantitative vs. Qualitative, Conceptual vs.
Empirical, concept of applied and basic research process, criteria of good research. Defining and formulating
the research problem, selecting the problem, necessity of defining the problem, importance of literature
review in defining a problem, literature review‐primary and secondary sources, reviews, monograph, patents,
research databases, web as a source, searching the web, critical literature review, identifying gap areas from
literature and research database, development of working hypothesis.

UNIT II

Data Collection and Analysis: Accepts of method validation, observation and collection of data, methods of
data collection, sampling methods, data processing and analysis strategies and tools,data analysis with
statically package (Sigma STAT,SPSS for student t‐test, ANOVA, etc.), hypothesis testing

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1339
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT III

Soft Computing: Computer and its role in research, Use of statistical software SPSS, GRETL etcin research.
Introduction to evolutionary algorithms ‐ Fundamentals of Genetic algorithms, Simulated Annealing, Neural
Network based optimization, Optimization of fuzzy systems

UNIT IV

Research Ethics, IPR and Scholary Publishing: Ethics‐ethical issues, ethical committees (human & animal); IPR‐
intellectual property rights and patent law, commercialization, copy right, royalty, trade related aspects of
intellectual property rights (TRIPS); scholarly publishing‐ IMRAD concept and design of research paper, citation
and acknowledgement, plagiarism, reproducibility and accountability.

Textbooks:
1. Garg, B.L., Karadia, R., Agarwal, F. and Agarwal, U.K., 2002. An introduction to Research Methodology,
RBSA Publishers
2. Kothari, C.R., 1990. Research Methodology: Methods and Techniques. New Age International.

References:
1. Sinha, S.C. and Dhiman, A.K., 2002. Research Methodology, Ess Ess Publications. 2 volumes.
2. Trochim, W.M.K., 2005. Research Methods: the concise knowledge base, Atomic Dog Publishing. 270p.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1340
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Research Methodology for Electrical & Electronics Engineering L P C

Lab 2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EE/EEE 6 PCE PCE‐2 EEE‐334P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Research Methodology for Electrical &
Electronics Engineering) as this is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. To study the different types of research methodology.

2. To understand how to create datasheet, processing and do its analysis.
3. Take one research paper and do literature survey for the same.
4. To study different soft computing techniques and learn how to implement it on your research.
5. To do practice to identify the research problem based on literature survey.
6. To learn how to determine research objectives based on research problem.
7. Try to implement the research objectives in the system by using software tool like MATLAB, Python etc.
8. Write research paper based on your system results and check its plagiarism.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1341
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

RF and Microwave Engineering L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ECE 6 PCE PCE‐1 ECE‐314T
EC‐ACT 6 PC PC ECE‐314T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. An understanding of metallic waveguides and network analysis.
2. A through understanding is presented on microwave active and passive components along with
methods to evaluate device performance.
3. Realize the need for microwave sources and understand the principle of microwave tube
4. An ability to perform microwave measurements
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Understand the basic concepts of two port network of RF and Microwave systems and different
parameters like Scattering parameters and ABCD parameters
CO 2 Analyze the performance parameters of RF and microwave passive components and active
components.
CO 3 Evaluate and analyze the Performance of RF and microwave source.
CO 4 Perform measurements on microwave devices and networks using power meter and VNA etc
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 1 2 3 3 3 2 3 1 3 2 1 2
CO 2 3 3 2 2 3 2 1 ‐ 2 3 ‐ 2
CO 3 2 3 3 2 2 1 2 2 3 3 1 ‐
CO 4 2 2 3 3 3 2 2 2 3 3 2 1

UNIT‐I

Introduction of Microwave and RF Engineering, Applications of Microwave and RF Engineering: Maxwell`s

equation, wave equation and their solution (in rectangular coordinates). Rectangular waveguide: TE and TM
modes, field configurations, dominant and degenerative modes, propagation characteristics. Power
transmission and power loss in waveguide. Solutions of Wave Equations in Cylindrical Coordinates; TE Modes
in Circular Waveguides, TM Modes in Circular Waveguides.
Two Port Network Theory: Impedance and Equivalent Voltages and Currents, Impedance and Admittance
Matrices, Network parameters for microwave Circuits, The Scattering Matrix, Formulation of S parameters,
Properties of S parameters, Reciprocal and lossless Network, ,

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1342
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Unit II

Microwave Waveguide Components: E ‐plane Tee, H‐plane ‐ Tee, Magic‐Tee Directional Coupler, Power
Divider, Magic Tee, Circulator, Isolator and Resonator.
Microwave Solid State Devices: Tunnel diode, Varactor diodes, Schottky Barrier diodes, PIN diodes, Gunn
Diodes, IMPATT and TRAPATT diodes, Varactor Diodes.
Microwave Field Effect Transistor; Junction Field effect Transistors; Physical Structure, Principles of Operation,
Current‐Voltage Characteristics, Metal‐Semiconductor Field‐Effect Transistors; Physical Structures, Principles of
Operation, Performance characteristics; High Electron Mobility Transistor (HEMT): Physical Structures,
Principles of Operation, Performance characteristics

Unit III

Linear Beam Tubes: Review of conventional vacuum, High frequency effects in vacuum Tubes; Two cavity
klystron (working, principle, velocity modulation, bunching process) Reflex klystron (working principle,
bunching process, condition of oscillation), application of klystrons. Travelling Wave tube, slow wave structure,
helix TWT (construction and working).
Cross Field Tubes: Cylindrical magnetron (construction, working principle, Hull cut‐off Equations), application of
magnetron.

Unit IV

Microwave Measurements: Measuring Instruments: Principle of operation and application of VSWR meter,
Power meter, Spectrum analyzer, Network analyzer, Measurement of Impedance, Frequency, Power, VSWR, Q
factor

Textbooks:
1. D.M Pozar, “Microwave Engineering”, Wiley Publications.
2. Samuel y. Liao, ‘microwave devices and circuits’ third edition
3. Robert E Colin, “Foundations for Microwave Engineering”, John Wiley & Sons Inc, 2005
4. Annapurna Das, Sisir K.Das‐ Microwave engineering, (TMG)

References:
1. Reinhold Ludwig and Gene Bogdanov, “RF Circuit Design: Theory and Applications”, Pearson, 2011
2. Mathew M Radmanesh, “RF and Microwave Electronics”, Prentice Hall, 2000

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1343
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

RF and Microwave Engineering Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ECE 6 PCE PCE‐1 ECE‐314P
EC‐ACT 6 PC PC ECE‐314P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (RF and Microwave Engineering) as this
is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. To measure the frequency and wavelength using slotted line section and frequency meter.
2. To measure the Isolation and Insertion loss of Isolator and Circulator.
3. To study E‐plane, H‐plane and Magic Tee.
4. To measure Coupling Factor, Directivity and Isolation of directional coupler.
5. To measure VSWR and Reflection coefficient of different loads.
6. To study the characteristics of Klystron and Gunn diode.
7. Simulation of Transmission line: Waveguide and Coaxial line.*
8. Simulation of directional coupler.*
9. Simulation of E‐plane and H‐plane Tee.*
10. Study of micro strip line and LPF using MIC kit/Software.*
11. Study of BPF using MIC kit/ Software.* *

* These experiments may be performed using simulation software like HFSS, CST or IE3D (for planar circuits)
etc.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1344
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

RF Components and Circuit Design L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ECE 7 PCE PCE‐4 ECE‐403T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To comprehend the analysis of RF circuits understanding the concepts of RF circuits
2. Realize the perceptions of the RF active and passive components
3. To communicate the expertise of design attributes of RF amplifiers
4. To study the amplifier & Oscillators
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 To understand the basic of Passive components.
CO 2 To Comprehend different RF active Components
CO 3 Able to exploit the models of the RF amplifier.
CO 4 To develop RF oscillator and analyse characteristics of mixer.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 ‐ 2 1 ‐ 2
CO 2 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 ‐ 2 1 ‐ 2
CO 3 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 ‐ 2 1 ‐ 2
CO 4 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 ‐ 2 1 ‐ 2

UNIT I

Overview to RF Electronics: Importance of RF Design, RF Behavior of Passive Components: High Frequency

Resistors, High‐Frequency Capacitors, High‐Frequency Inductors. Chip Components and Circuit Board
Considerations: Chip Resistors, Chip Capacitors, Surface‐Mounted Inductors

UNIT II

Active RF Components: Semiconductor Basics – Physical Properties of Semiconductors, the PN‐Junction,

Schottky Contact. RF Diodes‐Schottky Diode, PIN Diode, Varactor Diode, Tunnel Diode. Bipolar‐Junction
Transistor‐ Construction, Functionality and Frequency Response. RF Field Effect Transistors‐ Construction,
Functionality, Frequency Response. High Electron Mobility Transistor (HEMT) Construction, Functionality,
Frequency Response.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1345
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT III

RF Transistor Amplifier Design: Characteristics of Amplifiers – Amplifier Circuit Configurations, Amplifier

Matching Basics, Distortion and noise products, Stability Considerations, Small Signal amplifier design, Power
amplifier design.

UNIT IV

Basic Oscillator and Mixer Model: Negative Resistance Oscillator, Feedback Oscillator Design, Design Steps,
Quartz Oscillators. High Frequency Oscillator Configuration: Fixed Frequency Oscillators, Dielectric Resonator
Oscillators, YIG‐Tuned Oscillators, Voltage Controlled Oscillators, Gunn Element Oscillator. Basic Characteristics
of Mixers: Basic Concepts, Frequency Domain Considerations, Single‐Balanced Mixer Double‐Balanced Mixer.

Textbook(s):
1. Reinhold Ludwing and Gene Bogdnov ‐ RF Circuit Design: Theory and applications, Pearson, New Delhi 2001
2. Joseph Carr., Secrets of RF Design 3rd Ed., Tata McGraw‐Hill Publishing Company Limited.

References:
1. Radio frequency and Microwave Electronics ‐ Mathew M.Radmangh, 2001, PE Asia Publ.
2. RF Circuit Design – Christopher Bowick, Cheryl Aljuni and John Biyler, Elsevier Science, 2008.
3. D.M.Pozar, “Microwave Engineering”, Wiley India Limited, Third Edition, 2007

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1346
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

RF Components and Circuit Design Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ECE 7 PCE PCE‐4 ECE‐403P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (RF Components and Circuit Design) as
this is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Design an experiment to develop I‐V characteristics of microwave Gunn diode and to measure output
power and frequency as a function of bias voltage using microwave test bench.
2. Design an experimental setup to carry out square wave modulation through PIN diode.
3. Study of vector network analyzer.
4. Development of MMIC assembly (MOSFET/Frequency doubler/mixer) using EM simulated software
5. Design of microwave filter using EM simulated software
6. Measurement of performance parameters of RF mixer.
7. To plot frequency response of high frequency resistor.
8. To plot frequency response of high frequency capacitor.
9. To plot frequency response of high frequency inductor.
10. Measurement of performance parameters of microwave amplifier.
11. Measurement of performance parameters of RF Switch.
12. Measurement of performance parameters of microwave voltage‐controlled oscillator.

Note: These experiments may be performed using simulation software like HFSS, CST or IE3D (for planar
circuits) etc.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1347
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Robot Actuation Systems L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 7 RA‐EAE RA‐EAE‐3 RA‐437T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To expose the student will be exposed to the concepts of automation and use of various robots.
2. To introduce the student about components of industrial robots and concepts of kinematics,
dynamics.
3. To learn the mathematical approach to calculate the dynamic forces in robots.
4. To expose students to the industrial application of the robots in manufacturing.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Identify various robot configuration and components and selecting appropriate actuators for robots.
CO 2 Carry out kinematic and dynamic analysis for simple serial kinematic chains.
CO 3 Perform trajectory planning for a manipulator by avoiding obstacles.
CO 4 Use knowledge of robotics for automation in manufacturing applications.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 2 3 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 2 3 2 3 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 3 3 2 3 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 4 3 2 3 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐‐ ‐ ‐ 2

UNIT‐I

Robot, Types of robot, uses in industry, anatomy, work volume, Drive systems, Automation and Robotics, types
of automation, assembly automation equipment, material handling systems, feed systems, Automated Guided
Vehicles, Automated storage and retrieval systems, Flexible Manufacturing Systems, Computer Aided Process
Planning Systems, Computer Aided manufacturing. CAD/CAMand Robotics–An overview of Robotics –present
and future applications–classification by coordinate system and control system.

UNIT‐II

Components of Industrial Robotics: Function line diagram representation of robot arms, common types of
arms. Components, Architecture, number of degrees of freedom–Requirements and challenges of end
effectors, determination of the end effectors, comparison of Electric, Hydraulic and Pneumatic types of
locomotion devices.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1348
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Motion Analysis: DH notation, Forward Kinematics and Inverse kinematics: Mapping, Homogenous
transformation

UNIT‐III

Jacobian, Linear and angular velocity of rigid link. Velocity Kinematics, Acceleration Kinematics. Lagrangian
mechanics, formulation and numerical, Motion dynamics, Robot Dynamics

UNIT – IV

Actuators: Pneumatic, Hydraulic actuators, electric& stepper motors. Feedback components: position sensors–
potentiometers, resolvers, encoders–Velocity sensors.
Robot Applications in Manufacturing: Material Transfer‐Material handling, loading and unloading‐Processing ‐
spot and continuous arc welding & spray painting‐Assembly and Inspection.

Textbooks:
1. R.K. Mittal, I.J. Nagrath, “Robotics & Control”, Tata McGraw & Hills, 2005.
2. Saha, S.K., Introduction to Robotics, 2nd Edition, McGraw‐Hill Education, New Delhi, 2014.

References:
1. John J.Craig; “Introduction to Robotics Mechanics & Control”, Pearson Education, 2004.
2. Robert J. Schilling, “Fundamentals of Robotics, analysis & Control”, Prentice Hall (I) P. Ltd., 2002.
3. Mark W. Spong, Seth Hutchinson, M. Vidyasagar “Robot Modeling and Control” John Wiley 2nd Ed.
4. J Srinivasan, R.V.Dukkipati, K. Ramji, “Robotics control & programming”, Narosa.
5. Ghosal, Ashitava, “Robotics: Fundamental Concepts and Analysis,” Oxford University Press, 2006.
6. M. Murray, M., Li, Zexiang, Sastry, S.S., “A Mathematical Introduction to Robotic Manipulation,”CC Press.
7. Mikell P Groover, Mitchell Weiss “Industrial Robotics: Technology, Programming and Application”.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1349
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Robot Actuation Systems Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 7 RA‐EAE RA‐EAE‐3 RA‐437P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Robot Actuation Systems) as this is the
practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Study about robot and its application in industry.

2. To study the DH based parameters and orientation of a given robot.
3. To study the kinematics of robot using Robo Analyzer.
4. To study the forward kinematics for a particular robot and validate using Robo Analyzer.
5. To study the inverse kinematics for a particular robot and validate using Robo Analyzer.
6. To design a robot and calculate the robot cycle time in a work cell.
7. Positioning and orientation of a robotic arm.
8. Case study/Project work/simulation etc.
9. To study working principle of Robotic Arm.
10. To operate perform Pick and Place task using Robotic Arm
11. Image processing using Open source software Open CV.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1350
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Robot Kinematics and Dynamics L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 6 RA‐EAE RA‐EAE‐1 RA‐324T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To Provide a mathematical and geometrical description of robotic manipulators.
2. To Derive from first principles robot dynamics and know how to simulate them.
3. To Understand basic robot control architectures.
4. To Articulate result of robot dynamics and kinematics in industrial environment.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Ability to analyze and design the motion for robotic system.
CO 2 Ability to understand the robot kinematics and differential motion.
CO 3 Ability to acquire the knowledge on robot dynamics, various actuation mechanisms and gripper/tool
selection criteria.
CO 4 Ability to have knowledge about different layouts, inspection techniques and material handling using
robots.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 3 3 ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 2 3 3 3 3 ‐ 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 3 3 3 3 3 ‐ 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 4 3 3 3 2 ‐ 3 ‐ ‐ ‐‐ ‐ ‐ 2

UNIT‐I

Robot, Types of robot, uses in industry, anatomy, work volume, Drive systems, Introduction to Spatial
Descriptions, Motion Kinematics and parameters.

UNIT‐II

DH notation, Forward Kinematics and Inverse kinematics: Mapping, Homogenous transformation Jacobian,
Linear and angular velocity of rigid link. Velocity Kinematics, Acceleration Kinematics.

UNIT‐III

Lagrangian mechanics, formulation and numerical, Motion dynamics, Robot Dynamics, Path Definition, Path

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1351
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Control, Robot Control ,Walking and parallel Robots.

UNIT – IV

End effectors: Mechanical and other types of grippers, Tool as end effectors, Compliant and Soft robots,
Physical Human –Robot Interaction.
Flexible automation, Robot cell layouts, Machine interference, Other considerations in work cell design. Work
cell control, interlocks. Robot cycle time analysis.

Textbooks:
1. R.K. Mittal, I.J. Nagrath, “Robotics & Control”, Tata McGraw & Hills, 2005.
2. Saha, S.K., Introduction to Robotics, 2nd Edition, McGraw‐Hill Education, New Delhi, 2014.

References:
1. John J.Craig; “Introduction to Robotics Mechanics & Control”, Pearson Education, 2004.
2. Robert J. Schilling, “Fundamentals of Robotics, analysis & Control”, Prentice Hall (I) P. Ltd., 2002.
3. Mark W. Spong, Seth Hutchinson, M. Vidyasagar “Robot Modeling and Control” John Wiley 2nd Ed.
4. J Srinivasan, R.V.Dukkipati, K. Ramji, “Robotics control & programming”, Narosa.
5. Ghosal, Ashitava, “Robotics: Fundamental Concepts and Analysis,” Oxford University Press, 2006
6. M. Murray, M., Li, Zexiang, Sastry, S.S., “A Mathematical Introduction to Robotic Manipulation,” CC Press,
1994.
7. Tsai, L.W., “Robot Analysis: The Mechanics of Serial & Parallel Manipulators,” Wiley 1999.
8. Niku, S. B., “Introduction to Robotics: Analysis, Systems, Applications”, Prentice Hall, 2001.
9. Mikell P Groover, Mitchell Weiss “Industrial Robotics: Technology, Programming and Application” Tata
McGraw & Hills, 2009.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1352
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Robot Kinematics and Dynamics Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 6 RA‐EAE RA‐EAE‐1 RA‐324P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Robot Kinematics and Dynamics) as
this is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Study about robot and its application in industry.

2. To study the DH based parameters and orientation of a given robot.
3. To study the kinematics of robot using RoboAnalyzer.
4. To study the forward kinematics for a particular robot and validate using RoboAnalyzer.
5. To study the inverse kinematics for a particular robot and validate using RoboAnalyzer.
6. To design a robot and calculate the robot cycle time in a work cell.
7. Positioning and orientation of a robotic arm.
8. Case study/Project work/simulation etc.
9. To study working principle of Robotic Arm.
10. To operate perform Pick and Place task using Robotic Arm
11. Image processing using Open source software Open CV.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1353
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Robotics Engineering L P C
3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ME 6 PCE PCE‐3 MEE‐328T
MAE 7 PC PC MAC‐409
CSE‐in‐EA 7 OAE‐CSE‐EA OAE‐2 MAC‐409T
EE‐VDT/EC‐ACT 7 OAE‐ECE‐EA OAE‐2 MAC‐409T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. Ability to analyze and design the motion for robotic system.
2. Ability to understand the robot kinematics and differential motion through manipulator Jacobian.
3. Ability to acquire the knowledge on robot dynamics, various actuation mechanisms and gripper/tool
selection criteria.
4. Ability to have knowledge about the different applications of robots in industries i.e. inspection
techniques and material handling.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Define and relate the relationship between mechanical structures of robot and predict their
operational workspace.
CO 2 Estimate and compute the spatial transformation to demonstrate robot kinematics thorugh Jacobian
matrix.
CO 3 Associate and apply knowledge of robot dynamics and outline the gripper/tool selection criteria.
CO 4 Recognize and summarize the applications of robot in industries i.e. inspection techniques and
material handling.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 1 2 3
CO 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 1 2 3
CO 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 3
CO 4 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 3

UNIT‐I

Fundamentals of robot technology: Robot anatomy. Work volume. Drive systems. Control systems and
dynamic performance. Accuracy and repeatability. Sensors in robotics. Robot reference frames and coordinates
and robot kinematics. Path control.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1354
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT‐II

Robot kinematics: Matrix representation. Homogeneous transformations. Forward and inverse kinematics.
Robot dynamics: Differential motions of a frame. Jacobian, static force analysis.

UNIT‐III

Configuration of a robot controller End effectors. Mechanical and other types of grippers. Tools as end
effectors. Robot and effector interface. Gripper selection and design. Introduction to robot languages.
End effectors: Mechanical and other types of grippers. Tools as end effectors. Robot and effector interface.
Gripper selection and design.

UNIT – IV

Applications for manufacturing: Flexible automation. Robot cell layouts. Machine interference. Other
considerations in work cell design. Work cell control, interlocks. Robot cycle time analysis. Typical applications
of robots in material transfer, machine loading/unloading; processing operations; assembly, and inspection.

Textbook(s):
1. Saeed B. Niku, “Introduction to Robotics analysis, Systems & Applications”, Pearson Education Singapore P.
Ltd., 2002.
2. S.R. Deb, “Robotic Technology and Flexible Automation”, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Co. Ltd., 2003.

References:
1. Robert J. Schilling, “Fundamentals of Robotics, analysis & Control”, Prentice Hall of India P. Ltd., 2002.
2. John J.Craig; “Introduction to Robotics Mechanics & Control”, Pearson Education, 2004.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1355
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Robotics Engineering Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ME 6 PCE PCE‐3 MEE‐328P
MAE 7 PC PC MAC‐461
CSE‐in‐EA 7 OAE‐CSE‐EA OAE‐2 MAC‐409P
EE‐VDT/EC‐ACT 7 OAE‐ECE‐EA OAE‐2 MAC‐409P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Robotics Engineering) as this is the
practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Introduction to RoboAnalyzer and WorkSpace 5.0

2. To make solids objects, modify them in Workspace 5.0 by importing a robot in workspace.
3. To create an auxiliary axis, robot mechanism and new robot in Workspace 5.0.
4. To study various Virtual Models of Industrial Robots in Robo Analyzer.
5. To Understand the Coordinate Frames and Transformations in Robo Analyzer.
6. To understand the robot forward kinematics in RoboAnalyzer.
7. To understand the robot inverse kinematics in RoboAnalyzer.
8. To understand the robot dynamics in Robo Analyzer.
9. To do the following task in Roboanalyzer: Select the robot in virtual robot module and learn about joint
level jogging of robots.
10. Write a program for joint trajectories of 2‐ link arm in MATLAB.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1356
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Semiconductor Devices and Modelling L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EE‐VDT 6 PC PC VLSI‐328T
EAE 6 VLSI‐EAE VLSI‐EAE‐1 VLSI‐328T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To impart the basic operation of semiconductor devices.
2. To impart the knowledge of semiconductor materials.
3. To study the physics of junction device & its applications.
4. To study FET structure & process simulation
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 To understand the basic operation of semiconductor devices.
CO 2 To provide the knowledge of semiconductor materials.
CO 3 Understand the physics of junction device & its applications.
CO 4 Analyze FET structure & process simulation.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 2 3 3 3 2 2 ‐ 2 2 3 3
CO 2 3 2 3 3 2 2 3 ‐ 3 2 2 3
CO 3 3 3 3 2 3 2 3 ‐ 2 2 3 2
CO 4 3 3 3 3 2 3 2 ‐ 2 3 3 2

UNIT I

Review of semiconductor physics, p‐n Junction diode: Physical operation, I‐V characteristic and diode equation,
Concept of load line, p‐n junction capacitances (depletion and diffusion), small signal (low and high frequency)
model, Large‐signal model, Breakdown in p‐n diodes, Zener diode, Poisson’s equation.
Crystals and Band structures: Crystal Structure, Lattice, Lattice with basis, Band structure evolution, Density of
states, Carrier Statistics.

UNIT II

Semiconductors in Equilibrium and Carrier Transport in Semiconductors: Semiconductor Materials, Concept of

intrinsic and extrinsic semiconductors, Fermi level Carrier Concentration, Carrier Drift, Carrier Diffusion,
Generation and Recombination Process, Continuity Equation, Thermionic Emission, Tunnelling, High Field
Effects.
.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1357
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT III

Diode Applications: Rectifier circuits, Zener diode‐based voltage regulators, limiting and clamping circuits,
voltage multipliers, switching behaviour of p‐n diode, SPICE model of p‐n diode, an example of p‐n diode data
sheet., zener diode and LED, diode as a rectifier.
Physics of Junction Devices: Thermal Equilibrium Condition, Depletion Region, Depletion and Diffusion
Capacitances, Current‐Voltage Characteristics, Junction Breakdown, Metal Semiconductor Contacts, transistor
(PNP and NPN) characteristics, current and voltage gain.

UNIT IV

FET: UJT, BJT, Introduction, channel transmission, Introduction to the Virtual source model, channel length
modulation, drain induced barrier lowering, punch through, hot carrier effects, DC gate current, junction
leakage: leakage currents, band to band tunnelling and GIDL.
Process Simulation /Process Modeling: Introduction of process simulation, modeling and simulation of
oxidation and diffusion, Ion implantation, Masking, Fick’s laws, Case Study: SUPERM.

Textbook(s):
1. Introduction to Semiconductor Materials and devices by M.S Tyagi, John Wiley & Sons, 5th Edition, 2005.
2. Semiconductor Devices: Modeling and Technology by A Dasgupta, N. Dasgupta, Prentice Hall, 2004.
3. Solid State Physics by Neil W. Ashcroft, N. David Mermin, Cengage Learning, 2011.

References:
1. Physics of Semiconductor Devices by S. M. Sze and Kwok K. Ng, John Wiley & Sons, 3rd Edition, 2002.
2. Solid State Electronic Devices by Ben G. Streetman and Sanjay Banerjee, Prentice Hall, 6th Edition 2005.
3. Semiconductor Device Fundamentals by Robert F. Pierret, Addison‐Wesley Publishing, 1996.
4. Semiconductor Physics and Devices by Donald A. Neamen, McGrawHill, 3 rd Edition 2003.
5. Semiconductor Devices‐ Basic Principles by Jasprit Singh, John Wiley and Sons Inc., 2001.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1358
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Semiconductor Devices and Modelling Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EE‐VDT 6 PC PC VLSI‐328P
EAE 6 VLSI‐EAE VLSI‐EAE‐1 VLSI‐328P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Semiconductor Devices and Modelling)
as this is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Introduction to SPICE (Operating Point Analysis, DC Sweep, Transient Analysis, AC Sweep, Parametric
Sweep, Transfer Function Analysis).
2. Measure, analyse, and model the IV characteristics of the diode
3. ZENER DIODE CHARACTERISTICS AND ZENER AS VOLTAGE REGULATOR
4. HALF ‐WAVE RECTIFIER WITH AND WITHOUT FILTER.
5. FULL ‐WAVE RECTIFIER WITH AND WITHOUT FILTER.
6. Draw the frequency response of CS amplifier using Multisim.
7. INPUT AND OUTPUT CHARACTERISTICS OF TRANSISTOR
8. Demonstrate the Volt‐ampere characteristics of silicon‐controlled rectifier.
9. To study the V‐I characteristics of FET.
10. To study the equivalent circuit model for MOSFET.
11. To study FET model for calculating Drain Induced Barrier Lowering (DIBL).
12. To study FET model for calculating Gate induced drain leakage (GIDL).

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1359
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Sensors and Transducers L P C

4 4

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ICE 4 PC PC ICC‐210
MAE 5 PC PC MAC‐311

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To provide an understanding about the concepts of measurement system its static and dynamic
characteristics.
2. To expose the students to various sensors and transducers for measuring mechanical quantities and
their applications.
3. To teach the basic conditioning circuits for various sensors and transducers.
4. To introduce about advancements in sensor technology and smart sensors.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Ability to define, understand various Sensors, their need and properties of sensors.
CO 2 Ability to apply knowledge of various types of transducers in domestic and industrial applications
CO 3 Ability to analyse various types of sensors for particular application.
CO 4 Ability to design signal conditioning circuit for various sensors and transducers.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 2 1 1 1 1 ‐ 1 3 ‐ 3
CO 2 3 2 1 3 2 1 1 ‐ 1 3 ‐ 1
CO 3 3 2 1 2 3 1 1 ‐ 1 3 ‐ 3
CO 4 3 3 2 1 1 1 1 ‐ 1 3 ‐ 3

UNIT I

Introduction to sensors and Transducers: General concepts and terminology of measurement systems and its
functional elements, transducer classification, static and dynamic characteristics of a measurement system,
criteria for transducer selection.
Resistive Transducers: Principles of operation, construction, theory, signal conditioning circuits and applications
of resistance potentiometers, strain gauges (metallic and semi‐conductor type), resistance thermometer,
thermistors, photo transistors.

UNIT II

Displacement Sensors and Transducers: Capacitive Transducers: Types of capacitive transducer, Principles of
operation, construction, theory, signal conditioning circuits and applications of capacitive transducers

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1360
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Inductive Transducers: Types of Inductive transducer, Principles of operation, construction, signal conditioning
circuits and applications of various variable inductive transducers, LVDT , RVDT Eddy current sensors, Synchros.
Temperature and Radiation Sensors: Active Transducers: Principle of operation, construction, theory, signal
conditioning and applications of Piezo‐electric transducer, Magneto‐strictive transducer, Hall effect
transducer, Photo‐voltaic transducer and Thermocouple

UNIT III

Optical transducers: photo‐emissive, photo‐conductive and Photovoltaic cells, photomultipliers

Digital Transducers: Optical encoders translational and rotary encoders (absolute position and incremental
position encoders) and magnetic pickups.
Smart Sensors and Other transducers: Ultrasonic sensors, Vibration pickups and accelerometers and its
dynamic response, stroboscope, sound and humidity sensors Microelectromechanical System (MEMS),
Biosensors: Glucometer, Oxymeter, Nanosensors and its application, Smart sensor system.

UNIT IV

Chemical Sensors: Definition, Components, Recognition Methods, Transduction Methods, Sensor Configuration
and Fabrication, Sensor Calibration, Sensor Figures of Merit, Sensor Arrays, Sensors in Flow Analysis Systems,
Applications of Chemical Sensors.
Biosensors: Protein Structure and Properties, Enzyme Nomenclature and Classification, Enzyme Components
and Cofactors, Some Enzymes with Relevance to Biosensors, Tranduction Methods in Enzymatic Biosensors.

Textbook(s):
3. D. Patranabis, Sensors and Transducers, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd., 2nd edition.
4. D V S Murty, Transducers and Instrumentation, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd.
5. Florinel‐Gabriel Banica, Chemical Sensors and Biosensors: Fundamentals and Applications, Wiley, 2012

References:
3. E.O. Doebelin, Dhanesh N Manik, Measurement Systems, 6th Edition, McGraw Hill Edu.
4. John P. Bentely, Principles of Measurement System, 4th Edition, Pearson Prentice Hall

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1361
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Sensors and Transducers Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ICE 4 PC PC ICC‐256
MAE 5 PC PC MAC‐355

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Sensors and Transducers) as this is the
practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

12. Study of static and dynamic characteristics of sensors.

13. Measurement of displacement using LVDT
14. Measurement of strain using strain gauge transducer.
15. Measurement of displacement using potentiometer.
16. Measurement of temperature using RTD and plot the characteristics of RTD.
17. Measurement of temperature using thermister.
18. Measurement of pressure using Load cell.
19. Measurement of speed using magnetic sensor.
20. Measurement of speed using photoelectric sensors.
21. Measurement of pressure using pressure transducer.
22. Measurement of liquid level using capacitive sensor.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1362
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Service Oriented Architecture L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CST 6 PCE PCE‐2 CIE‐346T
CSE‐in‐EA 6 OAE‐CSE‐EA OAE‐1 SE‐352T
EAE 6 SE‐EAE SE‐EAE‐2A SE‐352T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To learn fundamentals of XML
2. To provide an overview of Service Oriented Architecture and Web services and their importance
3. To learn web services standards and technologies
4. To learn service oriented analysis and design for developing SOA based applications
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Able to understand XML technologies
CO 2 Able to understand service orientation, benefits of SOA
CO 3 Able to understand web services and WS standards and use web services extensions to develop
solutions
CO 4 Able to understand and apply service modeling, service oriented analysis and design for application
development
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 2 2 3 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 2 2 3
CO 2 3 2 2 3 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 2 2 3
CO 3 3 2 2 3 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 2 2 3
CO 4 3 2 2 3 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 2 2 3

UNIT‐I

XML: XML document structure – Well‐formed and valid documents – DTD – XML Schema – Parsing XML using
DOM, SAX – XPath ‐ XML Transformation and XSL – Xquery.

UNIT‐II

Service Oriented Architecture Basics: Characteristics of SOA, Benefits of SOA , Comparing SOA with Client‐
Server and Distributed architectures –‐‐ Principles of Service Orientation – Service layers.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1363
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT‐III

Web Services and Standards: Web Services Platform – Service descriptions – WSDL – Messaging with SOAP –
Service discovery – UDDI – Service‐Level Interaction Patterns – Orchestration and Choreography.

UNIT – IV

Web Services Extensions: WS‐Addressing ‐ WS‐Reliable Messaging ‐ WS‐Policy – WS‐Coordination – WS ‐

Transactions ‐ WS‐Security – Examples.
Service Oriented Analysis and Design: SOA delivery strategies – Service oriented analysis – Service Modelling –
Service oriented design – Standards and composition guidelines ‐‐ Service design – Business process design –
Case Study.

Textbook(s):
1. Thomas Erl, Service Oriented Architecture: Concepts, Technology, and Design, Pearson Education, 2005.
2. Sandeep Chatterjee and James Webber, Developing Enterprise Web Services: An Architect's Guide, PHI, 2004

References:
1. James McGovern, Sameer Tyagi, Michael E Stevens, Sunil Mathew, Java Web Services Architecure, Elsevier,
2003
2. Ron Schmelzer et al., XML and Web Services, Pearson Education, 2002.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1364
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Service Oriented Architecture Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CST 6 PCE PCE‐2 CIE‐346P
CSE‐in‐EA 6 OAE‐CSE‐EA OAE‐1 SE‐352P
EAE 6 SE‐EAE SE‐EAE‐2A SE‐352P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Service Oriented Architecture) as this
is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. To create a web service for adding few numbers using NetBeans.

2. To create a web service for adding few numbers using NetBeans and write client side code to invoke the
web service.
3. To Create of a web service with database connectivity using NetBeans
4. Create a SOA project with BPEL Module to compose a web service.
5. Develop at least 5 components such as Order Processing, Payment Processing, etc., using .NET component
technology.
6. Develop at least 5 components such as Order Processing, Payment Processing, etc., using EJB component
technology.
7. Invoke .NET components as web services.
8. Invoke EJB components as web services.
9. Develop a J2EE client to access a .NET web service.
10. Develop a .NET client to access a J2EE web service.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1365
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Simulation and Modelling L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CSE 6 PCE PCE‐1 CIE‐322T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To make students understand the concept of simulation and modeling of real time systems.
2. Generate random numbers and random variates using different techniques.
3. Analysis of Simulation models using input analyzer, and output analyser.
4. Explain Verification and Validation of simulation model.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Students will be able to describe the role of important elements of discrete event simulation and
modeling paradigm.
CO 2 Students will be able to conceptualize real world situations related to systems development decisions,
originating from source requirements and goals.
CO 3 Students will be able to develop skills to apply simulation software to construct and execute goal‐
driven system models.
CO 4 Students will be able to interpret the model and apply the results to resolve critical issues in a real
world environment.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 2 1 2 1 ‐ ‐ 2 2 ‐ 1 ‐ ‐
CO 2 2 3 ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐
CO 3 3 2 2 2 ‐ ‐ 2 1 ‐ 2 ‐ ‐
CO 4 2 2 2 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐

UNIT‐I

Introduction to Simulation: System and System Environment, Components of System, Discrete and Continuous
System, System Simulation, Model of a System, Types of Model, Use of Differential and Partial differential
equations in Modeling, Advantages, Disadvantages and Limitations of Simulation, Application Areas, Phases in
Simulation Study.
Simulation of Continuous System: Continuous System Models, Analog Computer, Analog Methods, Hybrid
Simulation, Digital‐Analog Simulators, Feedback Systems.

UNIT‐II

Simulation of Discrete System: Discrete Event Simulation, Representation of time, Simulation Clock and Time

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1366
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Management, Models of Arrival Processes ‐ Poisson Processes, Non‐stationary Poisson Processes, Batch
Arrivals; Gathering statistics, Probability and Monte Carlo Simulation
Queuing System: Characteristics and Structure of Basic Queuing System, Models of Queuing System, Queuing
notation, Single server and Multiple server Queueing Systems, Measurement of Queueing System
Performance, Elementary idea about networks of Queuing with particular emphasis to computer system,
Applications of queuing system.

UNIT‐III

Markov Chains: Features, Process Examples, Applications.

Random Numbers: Random Numbers and its properties, Pseudo Random Numbers, Methods of generation of
Random Number, Tests for Randomness ‐ Uniformity and independence, Random Variate Generation.
Verification and Validation: Design of Simulation Models, Verification of Simulation Models, Calibration and
Validation of the models, Three‐Step Approach for Validation of Simulation Models, Accreditation of Models.

UNIT – IV

Analysis of Simulation Output: Confidence Intervals and Hypothesis Testing, Estimation Methods, Simulation
run statistics, Replication of runs, Elimination of initial bias.
Simulation of Computer Systems: Simulation Tools, Simulation Languages: GPSS, Case Studies of different
types of Simulation Models and Construction of sample mathematical models.

Textbook(s):
1. Jerry Banks, John S. Carson, Barry L. Nelson, David M. Nicole, “Discrete Event System Simulation”, 5th Ed.,
Pearson Education
2. Narsingh Deo, Systems Simulation with Digital Computer, PHI Publication.

References:
1. Geoffrey Gordon, System Simulation, Prentice Hall publication.
2. Averill M Law, W David Kelton, Simulation Modelling & Analysis, McGraw Hill International Editions

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1367
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Simulation and Modelling Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CSE 6 PCE PCE‐1 CIE‐322P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Simulation and Modelling) as this is the
practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Implement different methods of random number generation.

2. Simulating games of dice that generate discrete random variate, using random number generation.
3. Testing of random numbers (K‐S and Chi Square Test).
4. Implementing applications of Monte Carlo methods.
5. Implement applications of Markov’s chain.
6. Simulation of single queue server system.
7. Simulation of 2 queue server system.
8. Program to implement simulation of Inventory System.
9. Program to implement simulation of Telephonic System.
10. GPSS models ‐ queue, storage, facility, multi‐server queue, decision making problems.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1368
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Smart and Wireless Instrumentation L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ICE 6 PCE PCE‐2 ICE‐324T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To develop an basic understanding of Smart & wireless instrumentation
2. To make students capable of analyzing different node architectures.
3. To make students capable of designing & developing applications using WSN (Wireless Sensor
Network)
4. Ability of students to apply wireless sensors for various applications.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Understanding of Smart & wireless instrumentation
CO 2 Analysis of Node architecture.
CO 3 Design and Develop applications using WSN (Wireless Sensor Network)
CO 4 Application of wireless sensors
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 3
CO 2 3 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 3 3 ‐ ‐ 3
CO 3 3 2 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 3 3 ‐ ‐ 3
CO 4 3 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 3 3 3 ‐ 3 3

Unit I

Introduction: Smart Instrumentation (Materials , automation systems, sensing and sensors, sensor
classifications, Wireless sensor Networks ,History of wireless sensor Networks(WSN), Communication in a WSN,
important design constraints of WSN like Energy, self Management, Wireless Networking,Decentralized
Management, Design Constraints, Security etc.

Unit II

Node Architecture: The sensing subsystem, Analog to Digital converter, the processor subsystem, architectural
overview , microcontroller , digital signal processor, application specific integrated circuit, field programmable
gate array (FPGA), comparison, communication interfaces, serial peripheral interface, integrated circuit, the
IMote node architecture, The XYZ node architecture , the Hogthrob node architecture.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1369
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Unit III

Frequency of Wireless Communication & Power Sources ‐ Energy Harvesting: Development of wireless sensor
network based on Microcontroller and communication device – Zigbee communication device.
Power Sources‐ Energy Harvesting: Solar & Lead Acid batteries ‐RF Energy/Harvesting‐Energy Harvesting from
vibration‐ Thermal Energy Harvesting – Energy management techniques, Calculation for battery selection.

Unit IV

Applications: Structural Health monitoring‐ sensing seisimic events, single damage detection using natural
frequencies, multiple damage detection using natural frequencies, multiple damage detection using mode
shapes, coherence, piezoelectric effect, traffic control, health care‐ available sensors, pipeline monitoring,
precision agriculture, active volcano, underground mining.

Textbooks:
1. Fundamental of wireless sensor networks: theory and practice‐ WaltenegusDargie, Christian Poellabauer,
John Wiley and Sons
2. Smart Sensors, Measurement & Instrumentation, Subhas Chandra Mukhopadhyay, Springer, 2013.

References:
1. Wireless Sensors and Instruments: Networks, Design and Applications, HalitEren, CRC Press, Taylor and
Francis, 2006
2. Uvais Qidwai, Smart Instrumentation: “A data flow approach to Interfacing”, Chapman & Hall, 1st edition
December 2013.
3. Wireless Sensor Networks: Architectures and protocols, Edgar H. Callaway Jr.and Edgar H. Callaway.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1370
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Smart and Wireless Instrumentation Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ICE 6 PCE PCE‐2 ICE‐324P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Smart and Wireless Instrumentation)
as this is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. To study the operation of digital humidity sensor.

2. Write a program to connect WIFI to bus.
3. Write a program to connect Wireless Sensor Network (WSN) to a Zigbee communication device.
4. Implementing a Wireless Sensor Network (WSN)
5. FPGA verification using Matlab/Simulink.
6. To measure the open circuit voltage and short circuit current of solar cell.
7. To study Energy management concept principles benefits and its significance.
8. To study energy efficiency in thermal utilities and systems.
9. Implementing a transport control protocol in sensor Network.
10. To study harvesting of Solar Energy.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1371
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Smart Antennas L P C
3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ECE 7 PCE PCE‐5 ECE‐427T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To introduce about the smart antenna technology and various linked parameters.
2. To discuss about the different antenna parameters.
3. To explain the CDMA and its applications.
4. To study the Optimal Spatial Filtering and Adaptive Algorithms in smart antenna:
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Understand the basic of smart antenna systems and applications
CO 2 Describe the various types of smart antenna systems.
CO 3 Analyze the smart antenna techniques for CDMA.
CO 4 Analyze the various filtering and adaptive algorithms for smart antennas.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 2 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 2 1 2
CO 2 2 2 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3
CO 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3 2 3 3 2 1
CO 4 3 2 3 3 3 2 2 2 3 3 2 2

UNIT‐I

Introduction to Smart Antennas: Spatial Processing for Wireless Systems, Key Benefits of Smart Antenna
Technology, Introduction to Smart Antenna Technology, the Vector Channel Impulse Response and the, Spatial
Signature, Spatial Processing Receivers, Fixed Beam forming Networks, Switched Beam Systems.

UNIT‐II

Smart Antenna Systems :The Vector Channel Impulse Response and the Spatial Signature, Spatial Processing
Receivers, Fixed Beam forming Networks, Switched Beam Systems, Adaptive Antenna Systems, Wideband
Smart Antennas, Spatial Diversity, Diversity Combining, and Sectoring, Digital Radio Receiver Techniques and
Software Radios for Smart Antennas, Transmission Beam forming.

Unit III

Smart Antennas Techniques for CDMA: Non‐Coherent CDMA Spatial Processors, Coherent CDMA Spatial

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1372
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Processors and the Spatial, Processing Rake Receiver, Multi‐User Spatial Processing, Dynamic Re‐sectoring
Using Smart Antennas, Downlink Beamforming for CDMA. Range Extension in CDMA, Single Cell Systems with
Spatial Filtering at the IS‐95 Base Station, Reverse Channel Performance of Multi‐cell Systems with Spatial
Filtering at the Base Station.

Unit IV

Optimal Spatial Filtering and Adaptive Algorithms: Impact of Multipath on Optimal Spatial Filtering,
Performance of Under loaded and Overloaded Adaptive Arrays , Adaptive Algorithms , Adaptive Algorithms for
CDMA, Multi target Decision Directed Algorithm (MT‐DD), Least Squares De‐spread Re‐spread Multi target
Array (LSDRMTA) , Least Squares De‐spread Re‐spread Multi target Constant Modulus Algorithm.

Textbooks:
1. T.S. Rappaport and J.C. Liberti, Smart Antennas for Wireless Communications, PHI, 1999.
2. T.S. Rappaport, Smart Antennas: Adaptive Arrays, Algorithms, & Wireless Position Location, PHI, 1998
3. Tapan K Sarkar, “Smart Antennas”, IEEE Press, John Wiley & Sons Publications,2003.

References:
1. Ahmed El Zoogh by, “Smart Antenna Engineering” Artech House, Inc.2005

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1373
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Smart Antennas Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ECE 7 PCE PCE‐5 ECE‐427P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Smart Antennas) as this is the practical
component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Simulate the adaptive array and plot its radiation pattern in MATLAB with MMSE approach.
2. Simulate the adaptive array and plot its radiation pattern in MATLAB with Applebaum approach.
3. Simulate switched beam antenna array using Butler matrix on suitable Computational electromagnetic
software, fabricate and test.
4. Implement the smart antenna system with various algorithms.
5. MATLAB simulation of smart antenna system and various algorithms
6. MATLAB simulation of the LMS algorithm based on Weiner –hopf equation.
7. Design of rectangular patch antenna and weight tested by ensemble software.
8. Design of patch antenna array and weight tested by ensemble software.
9. Design of circular patch antenna and weight tested by ensemble software.
10. Design of 8 elements circular patch antenna array and weight tested by ensemble software.
11. Design of fractal patch antenna and weight tested by ensemble software.

Note: These experiments may be performed using simulation software like MATLAB, HFSS and ENSEMBLE etc.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1374
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Smart Contracts L P C
3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CSE‐ICB 7 PC PC BT‐415T
EAE 7 BT‐EAE BT‐EAE‐4 BT‐415T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. Understand Block chain and smart contracts.
2. Understand virtual machine in terms of blockchain.
3. Understand solidity in smart contracts.
4. Understand different smart contract platforms.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Ability of students to understand the concepts of blockchain and smart contracts.
CO 2 Ability of students to analyze basics of blockchain technology and virtual machine.
CO 3 Ability of students to understand the solidity of smart contracts.
CO 4 Ability of students to understand the concepts of object‐oriented constructs, debugging contracts and
other smart contract platforms.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 1
CO 2 3 3 3 2 3 2 3 1 ‐ ‐ 1 1
CO 3 3 3 2 2 2 3 3 2 2 2 ‐ ‐
CO 4 3 3 2 3 2 3 2 1 1 ‐ ‐ 1

UNIT‐I

Introduction to Blockchain and Ethereum: What is a Blockchain, Blockchain Architectural Overview, The Web
of Trust, Ethereum’s main components, Ethereum’s sub‐protocols, The new generation of the Web (i.e.,
Web3.0), Smart Contracts and Decentralized Applications (dApps), Web apps vs. dApps
Introduction to Smart Contracts: An overview of the history of smart contracts, An intro to the life‐cycle of a
smart contract, Ethereum’s smart contract languages, Interfacing with Ethereum Networks (overview of
Ethereum Networks, Clients, Wallets, Transactions etc.), The Solidity Programming Language, Development
Environments.

UNIT‐II

Blockchain technology Supporting Turing‐Complete Languages: A comparison of Ethereum and Bitcoin,

Overview of Ethereum’s tech stack, architecture, The Ethereum reward scheme, Mist, EVM, Swarm, Whisper,

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1375
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Eth, Gas, A simple Solidity Contract (Contract Walk‐through), The Solidity compiler, Ethereum Contract ABI,
Deployment with the Web3.js or Web3J library.
Virtual Machines and Beyond: History of Virtual Machines, State replication, consensus and the Ethereum
Architecture, Introduction to the Ethereum Virtual Machine and EVM Byte Code interpretation, Incentivisation
structures, rewards schemes, and gas pricing.
Intro to the dApp Development Pipeline: Introduction to development with Solidity, Development
environments (Truffle) Intro to Solidity, Smart contract layout, The structure of .sol source file.

UNIT‐III

Deep‐dive into Solidity: Understanding the different compiler versions and pragmas, Authoring smart
contracts, Contract definitions, Basic data types, Local and State Variables.
Global Variables and Functions: Predefined Global Variables, Structs and Enums, Mapping and Arrays, Build‐in
Functions (e.g., addmod, keccak256), User Functions.
Expressions and Control Structures: Valid expressions of the language, Exception Handling (e.g., assert,
require, revert, throw), Events and Logging, Conditional logic, Implementation of loops.

UNIT ‐ IV

Object Oriented Constructs: Contract constructor and self‐destruct, Function Modifiers and Fallback functions,
Calling other contracts, Inheritance and Multiple Inheritance, Declaring Abstract Classes and Interfaces,
Implementation of Abstract interfaces, Function Overloading
Experimenting with Front‐end Libraries: Intro to front‐end web interfaces, Decentralized Data Storage, The
Ethereum Name Services (ENS)
Unit Testing and Debugging Contracts: Estimating Gas Costs, Basics of using Truffle for testing,
Troubleshooting and Debugging, Common design patterns, Smart Contract Security – overview of attacks on
Ethereum smart contracts.
Deployment Considerations and Other Smart Contract Platforms: Smart Contacts Quality Assurance, Beyond
Ethereum, Blockchain‐as‐a‐Service (BaaS) and the Dark Market, Secure smart contracts with OpenZeppelin,
Experimenting with Hyperledger Besu, Future Outlook and the Road Ahead (e.g., graph‐based blockchain
protocols,distributed autonomous organizations, quantum secured blockchains etc)

Textbook(s):
1. Mastering ethereum: building smart contracts and dapps Antonopoulos, Andreas M., and Gavin Wood,
O'Reilly Media, 2018
2. Hands‐On Smart Contract Development with Hyperledger Fabric V2, Building Enterprise Blockchain
Applications, Matt Zand, Xun (Brian) Wu, Mark Anthony Morris, 2021

Reference books:
1. Patrick Ejeke, “Smart Contracts”
2. Matt Zand, Xun Wu, Mark Morris, “Hands‐On Smart Contract Development with Hyperledger Fabric V2:
Building Enterprise Blockchain Applications”, 1st Edition

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1376
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Smart Contracts Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CSE‐ICB 7 PC PC BT‐415P
EAE 7 BT‐EAE BT‐EAE‐4 BT‐415P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Smart Contracts) as this is the practical
component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

Blockchain Platform (e.g., Ethereum, Binance Smart Chain)

Development Environment (e.g., Remix, Truffle, or Hardhat)

1. Setting up the Development Environment: Install and configure the required development tools (Remix,
Truffle, or Hardhat) and Connect to a blockchain network (local or testnet) for deployment and testing.
2. Writing and compiling a simple smart contract between a retail shop owner and customer.
3. Write a smart contract using a solidity program to perform the balance transfer from contract to other
accounts
4. Write solidity program to perfume the exception handling.
5. Deploy a Smart Contract for Marks Management System in Remix environment, interact with the contract
using a web interface or command‐line interface and test the functionality of the deployed contract.
6. Deploy a Smart Contract on Ethereum with Python, Truffle and web3py in Remix environment.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1377
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Smart Grid and Distributed Generation L P C

4 4

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EE/EEE 7 PCE PCE‐5 EEE‐431

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To understand the features of Smart Grid
2. To ssess the role of automation and digitization in Transmission and Distribution
3. To nalyse Smart grids and Distributed energy resources(DER) with evolutionary algorithms
4. To nderstand operation and importance of data acquisition devices and their location in
Voltage and Frequency control
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Understand the features of Smart Grid
CO 2 Assess the role of automation and digitization in Transmission and Distribution
CO 3 Analyse Smart grids and Distributed energy resources(DER) with evolutionary algorithms
CO 4 Understand operation and importance of data acquisition devices and their location in
Voltage and Frequency control
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 2 1 1 1 1 ‐ 1 3 ‐ 3
CO 2 3 2 1 3 2 1 1 ‐ 1 3 ‐ 1
CO 3 3 2 1 2 3 1 1 ‐ 1 3 ‐ 3
CO 4 3 3 2 1 1 1 1 ‐ 1 3 ‐ 3

UNIT I

Basics of power systems, definition of smart grid, need for smart grid, smart grid domain, enablers of smart
grid, smart grid priority areas, regulatory challenges, smart‐grid activities in India. Smart grid architecture,
standards‐policies, smart‐grid control layer and elements, network architectures, IP‐based systems, power line
communications, supervisory control and data acquisition system, advanced metering infrastructure.

UNIT II

The fundamental components of Smart Grid designs, Transmission Automation distribution Automation,
Renewable Integration Computational Techniques – Static and Dynamic Optimization Techniques for power
applications such as Economic load dispatch – Computational Intelligence Techniques – Evolutionary
Algorithms in power system – Artificial Intelligence techniques and applications in power system.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1378
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT III

Introduction to Distribution Energy Sources, Renewable Energy Technologies – Microgrids – Storage

Technologies –Electric Vehicles and plug – in hybrids – Environmental impact and Climate Change – Economic
Issues.

UNIT IV

Smart city pilot projects, essential elements of smart cities, active distribution networks, microgrids,
distribution system automation, Reliability and resiliency studies, decentralized operation of power network.

Textbooks:
1. S. Borlase, “Smart Grids, Infrastructure, Technology and Solutions”, CRC Press, 1st Edition, 2013.
2. G. Masters, “Renewable and Efficient Electric Power System”, Wiley–IEEE Press, 2nd Edition, 2013

References:
1. A.G. Phadke and J.S. Thorp, “Synchronized Phasor Measurements and their Applications”, Springer, 2nd
Edition, 2017
2. T. Ackermann, “Wind Power in Power Systems”, Hoboken, N J, USA, John Wiley, 2nd Edition, 2012

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1379
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Social Network Analysis and Sentiment Analysis L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CSE/IT/CST/ITE 7 PCE PCE‐4 CIE‐409T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To understand various types of graphs networks
2. To understand the concept of centrality measures in graph and various applications
3. To understand the underlying structure of the problem and the language constructs commonly used
to express opinions and sentiments
4. To understand the concepts of sentiment classification
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Ability to identify and describe the type of complex network
CO 2 Ability to visualize a social network to mine meaningful pattern.
CO 3 To understand the underlying structure of the problem and the language constructs commonly used
to express opinions, sentiments, and emotions
CO 4 To understand core areas of sentiment analysis
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 2 ‐ ‐ 2 2 2 2‐ 2 2 2
CO 2 2 2 1 ‐ 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 3 2 3 1 ‐ 2 3 2 2 ‐ 2 2 2‐
CO 4 2 2 1 ‐ 2 ‐ 2 2 ‐ 2 ‐ 3

UNIT‐I

Graph Preliminaries and Networks: Overview of graphs and types of graphs including Bipartite and Planar
networks, Introduction to Social Networks, Types of Networks: General Random Networks, Small World
Networks, Scale‐Free Networks; Examples of Information Networks

UNIT‐II

Centrality Measures: Network Centrality Measures; Strong and Weak ties; Homophily, Random walk‐based
proximity measures, Other graph‐based proximity measures. Clustering with random‐walk based measures.
Applications based on the analysis of centrality measures.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1380
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT‐III

Introduction, Sentiment analysis applications, Sentiment analysis research, Sentiment analysis as mini‐NLP,The
Problem of Sentiment Analysis, Definition of opinion, Definition of opinion summary, different types of
opinions, Document Sentiment Classification, Supervised sentiment classification, Unsupervised sentiment
classification, Sentiment rating prediction

UNIT‐IV

Sentence Subjectivity and Sentiment Classification: Sentence Subjectivity and Sentiment Classification,
Subjectivity & Objectivity, Sentence Subjectivity Classification, Sentence Sentiment Classification, Aspect
Sentiment Classification, Document level sentiment classification, Rules of Sentiment composition, Negation
and Sentiment, Aspect and Entity Extraction, Feature Extraction methods, Frequency based aspect extraction,
Exploring syntactic relations, Using supervised learning

Textbook(s):
1. M.E.J. Newman, “Networks: An Introduction”, Oxford University Press, 2012
2. Sentiment Analysis: Mining Opinions, Sentiments, and Emotions, by Bing Liu

References:
1. John Scott, “Social Network Analysis”, Sage Publication, 2012
2. Filippo Menczer, “A First Course in Network Science”, Cambridge University Press, 201
3. Sentiment Analysis in Social Networks By Federico Pozzi, Elisabetta Fersini, Enza Messina, Bing Liu ∙ 2016
4. Sentiment Analysis for Social Media, Antonio Moreno, Carlos A. Iglesias, MDPI 2020

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1381
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Social Network Analysis and Sentiment Analysis Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CSE/IT/CST/ITE 7 PCE PCE‐4 CIE‐409P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Social Network Analysis and Sentiment
Analysis) as this is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Implement word similarity.

2. Implementing simple problems related to word disambiguation.
3. Simple demonstration of part of speech tagging.
4. Demonstrate Lexical Analyzer.
5. Demonstrate Semantic Analyzer.
6. Perform Sentiment Analysis.
7. Demonstate Natural Language Generation.
8. Demonstrate Information retrieval and question answering.
9. Demonstrate Grammar formalisms.
10. Perform Aspect level sentiment analysis

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1382
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Soft Computing L P C
3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ICE 7 PCE PCE‐4 ICE‐405T
CSE‐AIML 7 PC PC SC‐401T
EE‐VDT/EC‐ACT 7 OAE‐ECE‐EA OAE‐2 SC‐401T
EAE 7 AI‐EAE AI‐EAE‐3 SC‐401T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To learn the basic concepts of Soft Computing
2. To introduce the concepts of fuzzy sets and fuzzy logic
3. To make students familiar with genetic algorithms, its applications and advances
4. To make students familiar with neural networks that can learn from available examples
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Comprehend soft computing techniques and its applications.
CO 2 Understand the artificial neural networks and its applications
CO 3 Analyse the single‐objective optimization problems using GAs
CO 4 Develop the fuzzy logic sets and membership function and defuzzification techniques.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 ‐ ‐ 2 3 3 ‐ ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐
CO 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 2 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 2
CO 3 ‐ 3 ‐ ‐ 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ 2
CO 4 ‐ ‐ 2 3 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ ‐

UNIT‐I

Introduction to Soft Computing: Concept of computing systems, "Soft" computing versus "Hard" computing,
Characteristics of Soft computing, Some applications of Soft computing techniques

UNIT‐II

Fuzzy logic: Introduction to Fuzzy logic, Fuzzy sets and membership functions, Operations on Fuzzy sets, Fuzzy
relations, rules, propositions, implications and inferences, Defuzzification techniques, Some applications of
Fuzzy logic.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1383
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT‐III

Genetic Algorithms: Concept of "Genetics" and "Evolution" and its application to probabilistic search
techniques, Basic GA framework and different GA architectures, GA operators: Encoding, Crossover, Selection,
Mutation, etc. Solving single‐objective optimization problems using GAs.

UNIT ‐ IV
Artificial Neural Networks: Biological neurons and its working, Simulation of biological neurons to problem
solving, Different ANNs architectures, Training techniques for ANNs, Applications of ANNs to solve some real‐
life problems. Fuzzy Neural systems, Genetic Fuzzy systems, Genetic Neural system

Textbook(s):
1. J.S.R.Jang, C.T.Sun and E.Mizutani, “Neuro‐Fuzzy and Soft Computing”, PHI, 2004
2. S.N.Sivanandam & S.N.Deepa “Principles of Soft Computing” Wiley India Pvt. Ltd., 2007

References:
1. S. Rajasekaran and G.A.V.Pai, “Neural Networks, Fuzzy Logic and Genetic Algorithms”, PHI, 2003.
2. Timothy J.Ross, “Fuzzy Logic with Engineering Applications”, McGraw‐Hill, 1997

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1384
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Soft Computing Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ICE 7 PCE PCE‐4 ICE‐405P
CSE‐AIML 7 PC PC SC‐401P
EE‐VDT/EC‐ACT 7 OAE‐ECE‐EA OAE‐2 SC‐401P
EAE 7 AI‐EAE AI‐EAE‐3 SC‐401P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Soft Computing) as this is the practical
component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Create a perceptron with appropriate no. of inputs and outputs. Train it using fixed increment learning
algorithm until no change in weights is required. Output the final weights.
2. Create a simple ADALINE network with appropriate no. of input and output nodes. Train it using delta
learning rule until no change in weights is required. Output the final weights
3. Train the autocorrelator by given patterns: A1=(‐1,1,‐1,1), A2=(1,1,1,‐1), A3=(‐1, ‐1, ‐ 1, 1). Test it using
patterns: Ax=(‐1,1,‐1,1), Ay=(1,1,1,1), Az=(‐1,‐1,‐1,‐1).
4. Train the hetrocorrelator using multiple training encoding strategy for given patterns: A1=(000111001)
B1=(010000111), A2=(111001110) B2=(100000001), A3=(110110101) B3(101001010). Test it using pattern
A2.
5. Implement Union, Intersection, Complement and Difference operations on fuzzy sets. Also create fuzzy
relation by Cartesian product of any two fuzzy sets and perform maxmin composition on any two fuzzy
relations. 6. To determine the specific rotation of cane sugar solution with the help of half shade
polarimeter.
6. Solve Greg Viot’s fuzzy cruise controller using MATLAB Fuzzy logic toolbox.
7. Solve Air Conditioner Controller using MATLAB Fuzzy logic toolbox.
8. Implement TSP using GA.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1385
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Soft Computing and Expert Systems L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 7 SC‐EAE SC‐EAE‐5 SC‐481T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. Understand the fundamental concepts of soft computing:
2. Understand the concepts of fuzzy sets, fuzzy membership functions, and linguistic variables.
3. Learn about representation schemes, selection operators, crossover, and mutation in genetic
algorithms.
4. Gain hands‐on experience in solving optimization problems using evolutionary computing techniques.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Understand the components and functioning of expert systems, including knowledge representation,
inference mechanisms, and rule‐based programming.
CO 2 Design and develop rule‐based expert systems for real‐world applications, considering knowledge
acquisition and representation techniques.
CO 3 Apply evolutionary computing techniques, such as genetic algorithms, to solve optimization and
search problems effectively.
CO 4 Demonstrate ethical and responsible use of soft computing techniques and expert systems,
considering legal and privacy aspects related to data handling and decision‐making.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 2 2 2 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 2 2 3
CO 2 3 2 2 2 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 2 2 3
CO 3 3 2 2 2 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 2 2 3
CO 4 3 2 2 2 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 2 2 3

Unit I

Introduction to Soft Computing: Definition and characteristics of soft computing,Comparison with

conventional computing techniques,Fuzzy logic, neural networks, evolutionary computing, and probabilistic
reasoning,Expert Systems,Components of an expert system,Knowledge representation and inference
mechanisms,Rule‐based expert systems,Fuzzy Logic:Fuzzy membership functions and linguistic variables,Fuzzy
logic operations: union, intersection, complement,Fuzzy rules and reasoning ,Fuzzy inference systems and
Mamdani model

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1386
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Unit II

Neural Networks and Learning Algorithms: Basics of neural networks and their applications,Biological
inspiration and artificial neurons,Activation functions and network architectures,Feedforward and feedback
neural networks,Single‐layer Neural Networks,Perceptron model and learning algorithm,Linear separability and
convergence properties,Multilayer Neural Networks ,Backpropagation algorithm and gradient descent,Training
and learning strategies,Overfitting and regularization techniques,Radial basis function networks,Self‐Organizing
Maps.

Unit III

Evolutionary Computing and Optimization :.Genetic algorithms and genetic programming,Evolutionary

strategies and evolutionary programming,Evolutionary optimization and search techniques,Genetic
Algorithms,Representation schemes: binary and real‐valued,Selection, crossover, and mutation
operators,Fitness evaluation and selection mechanisms,Convergence and parameter tuning Evolutionary
programming and genetic programming, Particle swarm optimization (PSO), Ant colony optimization (ACO),
Bee algorithms and other swarm intelligence techniques

Unit IV

Hybrid Systems and Applications: Integration of soft computing techniques,Fuzzy‐neural systems and neuro‐
fuzzy systems,Genetic‐fuzzy systems and genetic‐neural systems,Expert System Development: Knowledge
acquisition and knowledge engineering,Rule‐based system development tools,Expert system shells and
inference engines,Soft computing in pattern recognition,Soft computing in data mining and decision
support,Soft computing in control systems and optimization.

Textbooks:
1. “Soft Computing: Techniques and Applications" by S. Sivanandam, S. N. Deepa
2. "Expert Systems: Principles and Programming" by Joseph C. Giarratano, Gary D. Riley

References:
1. Soft Computing and Intelligent Systems: Theory and Applications" by Madan M. Gupta, Naresh K. Sinha,
and Sanjay Ranka
2. "Introduction to Artificial Intelligence" by Philip C. Jackson
3. Genetic Algorithms in Search, Optimization, and Machine Learning" by David E. Goldberg

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1387
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Soft Computing and Expert Systems Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 7 SC‐EAE SC‐EAE‐5 SC‐481P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Soft Computing and Expert Systems) as
this is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Fuzzy Inference System for Air Quality Prediction

2. Neural Network‐based Handwritten Digit Recognition
3. Genetic Algorithm Optimization of Function Parameters
4. Expert System for Medical Diagnosis
5. Fuzzy Logic Control System for Autonomous Robot Navigation
6. Neural Network‐based Stock Market Prediction
7. Genetic Algorithm‐based Feature Selection for Classification
8. Expert System for Fault Diagnosis in Industrial Systems
9. Fuzzy Logic‐based Traffic Light Control System
10. Hybrid Soft Computing System for Credit Risk Assessment

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1388
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Software Engineering L P C
3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CSE/IT/CST/ITE 5 PC PC CIC‐309

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To introduce the basic concepts of the software development processes, Software requirements and
specifications
2. To impart knowledge of Software Project Planning and various Software design techniques for
developing large software systems.
3. To understand Software Metrics, Software Reliability, and Quality assurance using ISO 9001 and SEI‐
CMM.
4. To impart the knowledge and use of software engineering processes and tools in analysis, design,
implementation, software testing, documentation, and maintenance for software systems.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Ability to have an understanding of SDLC Models, Techniques for Requirement Elicitation, and SRS
Document.
CO 2 To be able to explain Software Project Planning and various methods for software design
CO 3 To Understand Software Metrics, Software Reliability, and Quality assurance
CO 4 Ability to have an understanding of Software testing, documentation and maintenance.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 2 2 2 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 2 2 3
CO 2 3 2 2 2 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 2 2 3
CO 3 3 2 2 2 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 2 2 3
CO 4 3 2 2 2 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 2 2 3

UNIT‐I

Introduction: Introduction to Software Engineering, Importance of software engineering as a discipline,

Software applications, Software Crisis, Software Processes & Characteristics, Software life cycle models,
Waterfall, Prototype, Evolutionary and Spiral Models.
Software Requirements Analysis & Specifications: Requirement engineering, Functional and non‐functional
requirements, User requirements, System requirements, requirement elicitation techniques like FAST, QFD &
Use case approach, requirements analysis using DFD, Data dictionaries & ER Diagrams, Requirements
documentation, Nature of SRS, Characteristics & organization of SRS, Requirement Management, IEEE Std. for
SRS.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1389
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT‐II

Software Project Planning: Size Estimation like lines of Code & Function Count, Cost Estimation Models,
COCOMO, Putnam resource allocation model, Validating Software Estimates, Risk Management.
Software Design: Cohesion & Coupling, Classification of Cohesiveness & Coupling, Function Oriented Design,
Object Oriented Design, User Interface Design.

UNIT‐III

Software Metrics: Software measurements: What & Why, Token Count, Halstead Software Science Measures,
Data Structure Metrics, Information Flow Metrics.
Software Reliability: Importance, Hardware Reliability & Software Reliability, Failure and Faults, Reliability
Models‐ Basic Model, Logarithmic Poisson Model, Software Quality Models, CMM & ISO 9001.

UNIT – IV

Software Testing: Testing process, Functional testing: Boundary value analysis, Equivalence class testing,
Decision table testing, Cause effect graphing, Structural testing: Path testing, Data flow and mutation testing,
unit testing, integration and system testing, Debugging, Testing Tools & Standards.
Software Maintenance: Management of Maintenance, Maintenance Process, Maintenance Models, Regression
Testing, Reverse Engineering, Software Re‐engineering, Configuration Management, Documentation.

Textbook(s):
1. K. K. Aggarwal and Yogesh Singh, “Software Engineering”, New Age International, 3rd Ed., 2005.
2. R. S. Pressman, “Software Engineering – A Practitioner's Approach”, McGraw Hill Int. , 5th Ed., 2001.
3. Pankaj Jalote, “An Integrated Approach to Software Engineering”, Narosa, 3rd Ed., 2005.

References:
1. Stephen R. Schach, “Classical & Object Oriented Software Engineering”, IRWIN, 1996.
2. James Peter, W. Pedrycz, “Software Engineering: An Engineering Approach”, John Wiley & Sons.
3. I. Sommerville, “Software Engineering”, Addison Wesley,8th Ed., 2009.
4. Frank Tsui and Orlando Karan, “Essentials of Software Engineering”, Joes and Bartlett, 2nd Ed., 2010.
5. Kassem A. Saleh, “Software Engineering”, Cengage Learning, 2009.
6. Rajib Mall, “Fundamrntal of Software Engineering”, PHI, 3rd Ed., 2009.
7. Carlo Ghizzi, Mehdi Jazayeri and Dino Mandrioli, “Fundamental of Software Engineering”, PHI, 2nd Ed., 2003.
8. Carol L. Hoover, Mel Rosso‐Llopart and Gil Taran, “Evaluating Project Decision Case Studies in Software
Engineering”, Pearson, 2010.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1390
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Software Engineering Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CSE/IT/CST/ITE 5 PC PC CIC‐357

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Software Engineering) as this is the
practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Write down the problem statement for a suggested system of relevance.

2. Do requirement analysis and develop Software Requirement Specification Sheet (SRS) for suggested
system.
3. To perform the function oriented diagram: Data Flow Diagram (DFD) and Structured chart.
4. Draw the entity relationship diagram for the suggested system.
5. To perform the user’s view analysis for the suggested system: Use case diagram.
6. To draw the structural view diagram for the system: Class diagram, object diagram.
7. To draw the behavioral view diagram: State‐chart diagram, Activity diagram
8. To perform the behavioral view diagram for the suggested system: Sequence diagram, Collaboration
diagram
9. To perform the implementation view diagram: Component diagram for the system.
10. To perform the environmental view diagram: Deployment diagram for the system.
11. To perform various testing using the testing tool unit testing, integration testing for a sample code of the
suggested system.
12. Perform Estimation of effort using FP Estimation for chosen system.
13. To prepare time Line Chart / Gantt Chart / PERT Chart for selected software project.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1391
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Software Engineering Standards L P C

4 4

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 7 SE‐EAE SE‐EAE‐5 SE‐489

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To study fundamental concepts in software Engineering Standards.
2. To introduce the activities involved in Software Engineering Standards.
3. To understand International Electrotechnical Commission and International Organization of standard.
4. To understand Quality System Standards and Project Management.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Ability to analyze the importance of Software Engineering Standards while designing a product.
CO 2 Ability to analyze various organizational Goals for Using Software Engineering Standards.
CO 3 Ability to do comparative study for various software Engineering Standards.
CO 4 Ability to understand Quality System Standards and Project Management.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 2 3 3 2 3 ‐ ‐ 2 3 2 2 3
CO 2 3 2 2 2 3 2 ‐ ‐ 3 2 2 3
CO 3 3 2 2 2 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 2 2 3
CO 4 3 2 2 2 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 2 2 3

UNIT‐I

Software Engineering Standards: Scope of Software Engineering Standards, Importance of Software

Engineering Standards, Improving the Product, Protecting the Buyer, Protecting the Business, Increasing
Professional Discipline, Introducing Technology.
History: Makers of Software Engineering Standards, Roles of Software Engineering Standards, Organizational
Goals for Using Software Engineering Standards.

UNIT‐II

International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC): IEC TC56—Dependability, Current Collection of IEC TC56,
Planned Collection of IEC TC56, Organization of IEC TC56 Collection, Strategic Plans, IEC SC45A—Nuclear
Reactor Instrumentation, Current Collection of IEC SC45A , Planned Collection of IEC SC45A, Organization of IEC
SC45A Collection, IEC SC65A—Industrial Process Control, Current Collection of IEC SC65A, Planned Collection of
IEC SC65A, Organization of IEC SC65A Collection,

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1392
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT‐III

International Organization for Standardization (ISO): ISO TC176—Quality Management, Current Collection of
ISO TC176, Planned Collection of ISO TC176, Organization of ISO TC 176 Collection, Strategic Plans ISO/IEC JTC1,
ISO/IEC JTC1/SC7—Software Engineering, Current Collection of JTC1/SC7, Planned Collection of JTC1/SC7,
Organization of JTC1/SC7 Collection, Strategic Plans.

UNIT – IV

Quality Systems Standards: ISO 9000‐3 and IEEE Std 730, The Proposed Revision of ISO 9000‐3, An Alternative:
AS 3563.1/IEEE Std 1298, An Alternative: CAN/CSA‐Q396 ,
Project Management: Project Management Standards for Software, PMI Guide to the PMBOK, IEEE 1058.1—
Software Project Management Plans, Configuration Management Standards.

Textbook(s):
1. The Road Map to Software Engineering: A Standards‐Based Guide by James W. Moore

References:
1. Guide to Software Engineering Standards and Specifications by Stan Magee , Leonard Tripp.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1393
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Software Measurements, Metrics and Modelling L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CSE‐in‐EA 6 OAE‐CSE‐EA OAE‐1 SE‐350T
EAE 6 SE‐EAE SE‐EAE‐1 SE‐350T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. Measurement theory (overview of software metrics, basics of measurement theory, goal‐based
framework for software measurement, empirical investigation in software engineering).
2. Software product and process measurements (measuring internal product attributes: size and
structure, measuring external product attributes: quality, measuring cost and effort, measuring
software reliability, software test metrics, object‐oriented metrics)
3. Measurement management
4. Software Reliability
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Understand various fundamentals of measurement and software metrics
CO 2 Apply frame work and analysis techniques for software measurement.
CO 3 Apply internal and external attributes of software product for effort estimation.
CO 4 Apply reliability models for predicting software quality
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 2 2 3 3 3 2
CO 2 3 3 2 3 3 2 3
CO 3 3 2 3 3 2 3 3
CO 4 3 2 3 3 2 2

UNIT‐I

Fundamentals of Measurement: Measurement: what is it and why do it?: Measurement in Software

Engineering, Scope of Software Metrics, The Basics of measurement: The representational theory of
measurement, Measurement and models, Measurement scales and scale types, meaningfulness in
measurement.

UNIT‐II

A Goal‐Based Framework For Software Measurement: Classifying software measures, Determining what to
Measure, Applying the framework, Software measurement validation, Performing Software Measurement
validation Empirical investigation: Principles of Empirical Studies, Planning Experiments, Planning case studies

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1394
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

as quasi‐experiments ,Relevant and Meaningful Studies.

UNIT‐III

Software Metrics Data Collection: Defining good data, Data collection for incident reports, How to collect data,
Reliability of data collection Procedures Analyzing software measurement data: Statistical distributions and
hypothesis testing, Classical data analysis techniques, Examples of simple analysis techniques.
Measuring internal product attributes: Size Properties of Software Size, Code size, Design size, Requirements
analysis and Specification size, Functional size measures and estimators, Applications of size measures.

UNIT – IV

Measuring internal product attributes: Structure: Aspects of Structural Measures, Control flow structure of
program units, Design‐level Attributes, Object‐oriented Structural attributes and measures.
Measuring External Product Attributes: Modelling software quality, Measuring aspects of quality, Usability
Measures, Maintainability measures, Security Measures Software Reliability: Measurement and Prediction:
Basics of reliability theory, The software reliability problem, Parametric reliability growth models, Predictive
accuracy.

Textbook(s):
1.Software Metrics A Rigorous and PracticalApproach, Norman Fenton, James Bieman , Third Edition, 2014

References:
1. Software metrics, Norman E, Fenton and Shari Lawrence Pfleeger, International Thomson Computer Press,
1997
2. Metric and models in software quality engineering, Stephen H.Kan, 2nd Edition, 2002, Addison Wesley.
3. Measuring the Software Process, William A. Florac and Areitor D. Carletow, 1995, Addison Wesley.
4. Practical Software Metrics for Project Management and Process Improvement, Robert B.Grady, 1992, PHI

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1395
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Software Measurements, Metrics and Modelling Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CSE‐in‐EA 6 OAE‐CSE‐EA OAE‐1 SE‐350P
EAE 6 SE‐EAE SE‐EAE‐1 SE‐350P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Software Measurements, Metrics and
Modelling) as this is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Write down the problem statement for a suggested system of relevance.

2. To evaluate size metrics for the suggested system.
3. To evaluate design metrics for the suggested system.
4. To evaluate Control flow metrics for the suggested system.
5. To evaluate Information metrics for the suggested system.
6. To evaluate weighted metrics for the suggested system.
7. To evaluate Data Structure metrics for the suggested system.
8. To evaluate Software Cost Estimation using Static, Single Variable Model for the suggested system.
9. To evaluate Software Cost Estimation using Static, Multiple Variable Model for the suggested system.
10. To evaluate Object‐oriented Structural attributes and measures for the suggested system.
11. To evaluate Software Maintenance Cost for the suggested system.
12. To evaluate Software Reliability metrics for the suggested system.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1396
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Software Project Management L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CSE 6 PCE PCE‐2 CIE‐348T
CSE‐in‐EA 6 OAE‐CSE‐EA OAE‐1 SE‐354T
EAE 6 SE‐EAE SE‐EAE‐2B SE‐354T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives:
1. To introduce the concepts of project management and managing software development projects.
2. To get familiar with the different activities involved in Software Project Management.
3. To successfully plan and implement a software project management activity.
4. To complete a specific project in time with the available budget.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Develop the model from the conventional software product to the modern
CO 2 Analyze and design the software architecture.
CO 3 Design various estimation levels of cost and effort.
CO 4 Sketch various artifacts sets for better understanding of software development.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 ‐ 3 2 2 3 ‐ ‐ 3 ‐ ‐ 3 2
CO 2 3 ‐ 3 ‐ 2 ‐ 3 3 ‐ ‐ 2 3
CO 3 3 2 ‐ 3 3 ‐ ‐ 2 3 2 ‐ ‐
CO 4 ‐ 2 3 ‐ ‐ 3 ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ 2 ‐

UNIT‐I

Introduction to Software Project Management: The Nature of Software Production, Key Objectives of Effective
Management, Quality, Productivity, Risk Reduction, The Role of the Software Project Manager, Technology,
Human factors and usability, Tools and environments, Transition of the Product to the user.

UNIT‐II

Technical Planning: Life‐cycle models, Types of Plans, Plan documentation methods, Work breakdown
structures, PERT and CPM, Gantt Charts, Standards, Planning for Risk Management and Control, Entry and Exit
criteria, Intermediate checkpoints, Performance prediction and analysis People, Prototyping and modelling,
Inspections and reviews, Process and process assessment, Development Methods, Metrics

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1397
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT‐III

Planning the Project: Business Planning, Determining Objectives, Forecasting demand for the Product, Proposal
Writing, Requirements analysis, Legal issues (patent, copyright, liability, warranty), Configuration management,
Testing and quality assurance, Capacity Planning, Estimating – what it takes to do the job, Cost (direct and
indirect), Resources, Time, Size and complexity of the product, Risk determination, Role of requirements and
design in estimating, Financial planning – budgeting, Resource Allocation, Organizational considerations,
(teams, hierarchies, etc.).

UNIT – IV

Managing the Project: Managing the Task, Project Control, Managing to the Plan, Reviews, Feedback and
Reporting Mechanisms, Configuration Management, Quality Control and Quality Assurance, Managing Change,
Readjusting Goals and Milestones, Risk Management, Testing Phases, Formalized Support Activities, Managing
the Team, Team Organizations, Recruiting and Staffing – picking the right people, Technical leadership,
Avoiding obsolescence – training, etc.) Managing the Context, Communication Skill, Decision Theory, Business
Management, Assessing the Organization’s ability to perform the process, Probability and Statistics, Managing
Product Support and Maintenance.

Textbook(s):
1. Tom Gilb, Finzi Susannah, “Principles of Software Engineering Management”, Addison‐Wesley, England,
1988.
2. Philip Metzger, “Managing A Programming Project”, Prentice Hall, New Jersey, 1981.

References:
1. Dennis Lock, “Handbook of Project Management”, Jaico Publishing House, 1994.
2. Neal Whitten, “Managing Software Development Projects”, John Wiley, 1995.
3. Sanjiv Purba, David Sawh & Bharat Shah, “How to Management a Successful Software Project
Methodologies, Techniques, Tools”, John Wiley, 1995.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1398
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Software Project Management Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CSE 6 PCE PCE‐2 CIE‐348P
CSE‐in‐EA 6 OAE‐CSE‐EA OAE‐1 SE‐354P
EAE 6 SE‐EAE SE‐EAE‐2B SE‐354P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Software Project Management) as this
is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The allotment and guidelines for the project work shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the
class commencement under intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the
paper is being offered.

Create a mini project on any topic and create a report consisting of all the phases of software project
management. Some suggested topics, but not limited to, are as follows:

1. Inventory Management System

2. Event Management System
3. University Admission Management System
4. Hotel Management System
5. Airline Reserversation System
6. Railway Reserversation System
7. E‐commerce

The students shall be asked to write a complete documentation consisting of Requirements Analysis, WBS,
Scheuduling Charts, Metrics, Financial Planning, Resource Allocation, Team Organisation, etc.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1399
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Software Requirements and Estimation L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CST 6 PCE PCE‐3 CIE‐372T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. Understand the good practices for Requirements Engineering, Requirements Elicitation & Elicitation
Techniques
2. Understand analysis models & Software quality attributes
3. Understand Software Estimation & Size Estimation
4. Understand Effort, Schedule and Cost Estimation
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Discuss requirements elicitation techniques.
CO 2 Identify the software requirements for a given project.
CO 3 Estimate the software in terms of effort, schedule and cost.
CO 4 Describe the tools for requirements management and estimation.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 2 3 2 2 1 1 1 3 2 2 3
CO 2 3 2 3 2 2 1 1 1 2 2 2 2
CO 3 3 2 3 2 2 1 1 1 2 2 2 2
CO 4 3 2 3 2 2 1 1 1 2 2 2 2

UNIT‐I

Software Requirements: What and Why: Essential Software requirement, Good practices for requirements
engineering, Improving requirements processes, Software requirements and risk management. Software
Requirements Engineering: Requirements elicitation, requirements analysis documentation, review, elicitation
techniques, analysis models, Software quality attributes, risk reduction through prototyping, setting
requirements priorities, verifying requirements quality.

UNIT‐II

Software Requirements Management: Requirements management Principles and practices, Requirements

attributes, Change Management Process, Requirements Traceability Matrix, Links in requirements chain.
Software Requirements Modeling: Use Case Modeling, Analysis Models, Dataflow diagram, state transition
diagram, class diagrams, Object analysis, Problem Frames.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1400
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT‐ III

Software Estimation: Components of Software Estimations, Estimation methods, Problems associated with
estimation, Key project factors that influence estimation. Size Estimation: Two views of sizing, Function Point
Analysis, Mark II FPA, Full Function Points, LOC Estimation, Conversion between size measures.

UNIT‐IV

Effort, Schedule and Cost Estimation: What is Productivity? Estimation Factors, Approaches to Effort and
Schedule Estimation, COCOMO II, Putnam Estimation Model, Algorithmic models, Cost Estimation. UNIT‐V (10‐
Lectures) Tools for Requirements Management and Estimation Requirements Management Tools: Benefits of
using a requirements management tool, commercial requirements management tool, Rational Requisite pro,
Caliber – RM, implementing requirements management automation. Software Estimation Tools: Desirable
features in software estimation tools, IFPUG, USC‟s COCOMO II, SLIM (Software Life Cycle Management) Tools.

Textbooks:
1. Swapna Kishore, Rajesh Naik, Software Requirements and Estimation, 1st Edition, Tata Mc Graw Hill, 2001.
2. Karl E. Weigers, “Software Requirements,” 2 nd Edition, Microsoft Press, 2013.
3. Rajesh Naik and Swapna Kishore, “Software Requirements and Estimation,” Tata McGraw Hill, 2001.

REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Dean Leffing well and Don Widrig, “Managing Software Requirements,” Pearson Education, 2003.
2. Suzanne Robertson and James Robertson, “Mastering the Requirements Process,” 2nd Edition, Pearson
Education, 2006.
3. Capers Jones, “Estimating Software Costs,” 2 nd Edition, Tata McGraw‐Hill, 2007.
4. M.A. Parthasarathy, “Practical Software Estimation,” 1 st Edition, Pearson Education, 2007

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1401
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Software Requirements and Estimation Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CST 6 PCE PCE‐3 CIE‐372P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Software Requirements and
Estimation) as this is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Prepare SRS for Banking or Online bookstore domain problem / Library Management System.
2. Draw an E‐R diagram and DFD for the project (Banking or Online book store / ATM System).
3. Using COCOMO Model, estimate effort for Banking or Online bookstore domain problem.
4. Calculate effort‐using FP oriented estimation model.
5. Analyze the risk related to the project (Banking or Online book store) and prepare RMMM plan.
6. Develop Time‐line chart and project table using PERT or CPM scheduling methods.
7. Suppose that you need to develop an Employee Information System (EIS) for an organization whose
employee strength is 100000. Now, perform the following activities for EIS. Make assumptions, wherever
necessary.
a) Which SDLC model will you choose? Justify your answer.
b) List the functional and non‐functional requirements.
c) Propose a schedule for the project completion. Draw Gantt and Pert charts.
d) Estimate cost of the project.
e) Develop complete SRS.
f) Draw DFDs of level 0 and level 1.
g) Draw an E ‐ R diagram and its related tables into integrity constraints.
h) Develop test plan document.
8. Consider a university registration system. The system is to handle student registration for various courses
offered by the university as well as for examinations. Identify the risks associated with such a software
system.
9. List all the functional and non‐functional requirements and also produce a project‐scheduling chart using
Gantt chart technique for hospital management system.

10. Consider developing a system for Inventory Management for a super market that has a number of
branches all over a city. Perform the following activities:
Suggest the most appropriate software engineering model for developing this project with appropriate
justification.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1402
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

a) Derive the requirement specifications.

b) List all the functional and non‐functional requirements.
c) Produce a project‐scheduling chart using Gantt chart technique.
d) Give the scope of the solution.
e) Suggest the tools/platform, hardware and requirements.
f) Suggest the security mechanisms to be implemented.
g) Develop a test plan for the system. You can make necessary assumptions and specify them.
h) Write the risk management plans for the system.
i) Estimate the efforts of software project. Make necessary assumptions.
j) Suppose it was revealed that the poor knowledge of the tool is responsible for the problems that are
being encountered for timely completion of the project. What type of remedies do you suggest for
such type of problem? Justify your answer.
k) Suppose there exists some old systems and wants to replace it, suggest the changes with respect to
the software and hardware requirements.
l) Describe the user‐training plan, which can be followed.
m) Develop a design review plan for the system. Also, list the deficiencies, if any, in the SRS for the same.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1403
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Software Security L P C
4 4

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 7 SE‐EAE SE‐EAE‐4A SE‐485

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. Comprehend the basic terminologies in computer security including Confidentiality, Integrity and
Availability (CIA).
2. Identify and describe different types of widely used encryption algorithms such as DES, AES and RSA
and their applications in the real life.
3. Differentiate between the various types of malwares and implement the proper techniques to proect
against them.
4. Understands the causes and consequences of the attack and the various ways to prevent, detect, and
mitigate the system from this attack.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Explain computer security problem and identify why broken software lies at its heart and continuous
risk management and how to put it into practice to ensure software security.
CO 2 Summarise and contrast security properties and link them into the software development lifecycle.
Develop and apply software validation and verification techniques to test security vulnerabilities.
CO 3 Relate security testing and verification to risk analysis to address continued resilience when a cyber‐
attack takes place.
CO 4 Develop case studies to think like an attacker in order to expose security vulnerabilities in software
systems.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 2 2 3 3 3 2
CO 2 3 3 2 3 3 2 3
CO 3 3 2 3 3 2 3 3
CO 4 3 2 3 3 2 3 3

UNIT‐I

Software Security Fundamentals: Defining a Discipline, A Risk Management Framework, Vulnerability

Assessment and Management, Overview on Traffic, Vulnerability and Malware Analysis.

UNIT‐II

Software Security: Code Inspection for Finding Security Vulnerabilities and Exposures (ref: Mitre’s CVE),

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1404
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Architectural Risk Analysis,

UNIT‐III

Software Security Testing: Penetration Testing, Concolic Testing, Fuzzing, Automated Test Generation Model
Checking, Abstract Interpretation, Symbolic Execution, Risk‐Based Security Testing and Verification, Software
Security Meets Security Operations.

UNIT – IV

Software Security Grows Up: Withstanding adversarial tactics and techniques defined in Mitre’s ATT&CK™
knowledge base, An Enterprise Software Security Program.

Textbook(s):
1. Rashid et al.: The Cyber Security Body of Knowledge, CyBOK, v1.0, 2019.
2. McGraw, Gary: Software Security: Building Security In, Addison‐Wesley, 2006.
3. Hoglund, Greg: Exploiting Software: How to Break Code, Addison‐Wesley, 2004.

References:
1. Ransome, James and Misra, Anmol: Core Software Security: Security at the Source, CRC Press, 2014.
2. Edmund M. Clark Jr., Orna Grumberg, Daniel Kroening, Doron Peled, Helmut Veith: Model Checking, The MIT
Press, 2018.
3. Mark Dowd , John McDonald, et al.: The Art of Software Security Assessment: Identifying and Preventing
Software Vulnerabilities, Addison‐Wesley, 2006.
4. SEI CERT C Coding Standard: Rules for Developing Safe, Reliable, and Secure Systems, SEI ‐ Carnegie Mellon
University, 2016.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1405
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Software Testing L P C
4 4

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CST 6 PCE PCE‐1 CIE‐324

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To study fundamental concepts in software testing
2. To identify the needs of software test automation, define and develop a test tool to support test
automation
3. To discuss various software testing issues and solutions in unit test, integration and system testing
4. To expose the advanced software testing topics
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Ability to apply software testing knowledge and engineering methods.
CO 2 Ability to design and conduct a software test process for a software testing project
CO 3 Ability to understand and identify various software testing problems, and solve these problems by
designing and selecting software test models, criteria, strategies, and methods.
CO 4 Ability to understand contemporary issues in software testing, such as component‐based software
testing problems.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 ‐ 3 2 2 3 ‐ ‐ 3 ‐ ‐ 3 2
CO 2 3 ‐ 3 ‐ 2 ‐ 3 3 ‐ ‐ 2 3
CO 3 3 2 ‐ 3 3 ‐ ‐ 2 3 2 ‐ ‐
CO 4 ‐ 2 3 ‐ ‐ 3 ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ 2 ‐

UNIT‐I

Review of Software Engineering: Overview of Software Evolution, SDLC, Testing Process, Terminologies in
Testing: Error, Fault, Failure, Verification, Validation, Difference Between Verification and Validation, Test
Cases, Testing Suite, Test, Oracles, Impracticality of Testing All Data; Impracticality of Testing All Paths.
Verification: Verification Methods, SRS Verification, Source Code Reviews, User Documentation Verification,
Software, Project Audit, Tailoring Software Quality Assurance Program by Reviews, Walkthrough, Inspection
and Configuration Audits.

UNIT‐II

Functional Testing: Boundary Value Analysis, Equivalence Class Testing, Decision Table Based Testing, Cause
Effect Graphing Technique. Structural Testing: Control Flow Testing, Path Testing, Independent Paths,

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1406
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Generation of Graph from Program, Identification of Independent Paths, Cyclomatic Complexity, Data Flow
Testing, Mutation Testing
Regression Testing: What is Regression Testing? Regression Test cases selection, Reducing the number of test
cases, Code coverage prioritization technique. Reducing the number of test cases: Prioritization guidelines,
Priority category, Scheme, Risk Analysis

UNIT‐III

Software Testing Activities: Levels of Testing, Debugging, Testing techniques and their applicability, Exploratory
Testing Automated Test Data Generation: Test Data, Approaches to test data generation, test data generation
using genetic algorithm, Test Data Generation Tools, Software Testing Tools, and Software test Plan.

UNIT ‐ IV

Object Oriented Testing: Definition, Issues, Class Testing, Object Oriented Integration and System Testing.
Testing Web Applications: Web Testing, User Interface Testing, Usability Testing, Security Testing, Performance
Testing, Database testing, Post Deployment Testing

Textbook(s):
1. Yogesh Singh, “Software Testing”, Cambridge University Press, 2012
2. K.K. Aggarwal & Yogesh Singh, “Software Engineering”, New Age International Publishers, 2003.
3. Roger S. Pressman, “Software Engineering – A Practitioner’s Approach”, Fifth Edition, McGraw‐Hill, 2001.

References:
1. Marc Roper, “Software Testing”, McGraw‐Hill, 1994.
2. M.C. Trivedi, Software Testing & Audit, Khanna Publishing House 6. Boris Beizer, “Software System Testing
and Quality Assurance”, Van Nostrand Reinhold, 1984

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1407
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Software Verification, Validation and Testing L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CSE‐in‐EA 7 OAE‐CSE‐EA OAE‐2 SE‐487T
EAE 7 SE‐EAE SE‐EAE‐4B SE‐487T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To study fundamental concepts in software testing
2. To identify the needs of software test automation, and define and develop a test tool to support test
automation
3. To discuss various software testing issues and solutions in software unit test, integration and system
testing
4. To expose the advanced software testing topics
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Ability to apply software testing knowledge and engineering methods.
CO 2 Ability to design and conduct a software test process for a software testing project
CO 3 Ability to understand and identify various software testing problems, and solve these problems by
designing and selecting software test models, criteria, strategies, and methods.
CO 4 Ability to understand contemporary issues in software testing, such as component‐based software
testing problems.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 ‐ 3 2 2 3 ‐ ‐ 3 ‐ ‐ 3 2
CO 2 3 ‐ 3 ‐ 2 ‐ 3 3 ‐ ‐ 2 3
CO 3 3 2 ‐ 3 3 ‐ ‐ 2 3 2 ‐ ‐
CO 4 ‐ 2 3 ‐ ‐ 3 ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ 2 ‐

UNIT‐I

Review of Software Engineering: Overview of Software Evolution, Error, Fault, Failure, Incident, Test Cases,
Testing Process, Limitations of Testing, SDLC, Testing Process, Terminologies in Testing: Error, Fault, Failure,
Verification, Validation, Difference Between Verification and Validation, Test Cases, Testing Suite, Test, Oracles,
Impracticality of Testing All Data; Impracticality of Testing All Paths. Verification: Verification Methods, SRS
Verification, Source Code Reviews, User Documentation Verification

UNIT‐II

Functional Testing: Boundary Value Analysis, Equivalence Class Testing, Decision Table Based Testing, Cause

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1408
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Effect Graphing Technique. Structural Testing: Control Flow Testing, Path Testing, Independent Paths,
Generation of Graph from Program, Identification of Independent Paths, Cyclomatic Complexity, Data Flow
Testing, Mutation Testing
Regression Testing: What is Regression Testing? Regression Test cases selection, Reducing the number of test
cases, Code coverage prioritization technique. Reducing the number of test cases: Prioritization guidelines,
Priority category, Scheme, Risk Analysis.

UNIT‐III

Object Oriented Testing: Definition, Issues, Class Testing, Object Oriented Integration and System Testing.
Testing Web Applications: Web Testing, User Interface Testing, Usability Testing, Security Testing, Performance
Testing.

UNIT ‐ IV

Software Testing Activities: Levels of Testing, Debugging, Testing techniques and their applicability, Exploratory
Testing Automated Test Data Generation: Test Data, Approaches to test data generation, test data generation
using genetic algorithm, Test Data Generation Tools, Software Testing Tools, and Software test Plan.

Textbook(s):
1. Yogesh Singh, “Software Testing”, Cambridge University Press, 2012
2. K.K. Aggarwal & Yogesh Singh, “Software Engineering”, New Age International Publishers, 2003.
3. Roger S. Pressman, “Software Engineering – A Practitioner’s Approach”, Fifth Edition, McGraw‐Hill, 2001.

References:
1. Marc Roper, “Software Testing”, McGraw‐Hill, 1994.
2. M.C. Trivedi, Software Testing & Audit, Khanna Publishing House 6. Boris Beizer, “Software System Testing
and Quality Assurance”, Van Nostrand Reinhold, 1984

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1409
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Software Verification, Validation and Testing Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CSE‐in‐EA 7 OAE‐CSE‐EA OAE‐2 SE‐487P
EAE 7 SE‐EAE SE‐EAE‐4B SE‐487P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Software Verification, Validation and
Testing) as this is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Identify system specification and design test cases for Inventory Management.
2. Design test cases for railway Reservation.
3. To determine the nature of roots of a quadratic equations, its input is triple of +ve integers (say x,y,z) and
values may be from interval [1,100] the program output may have one of the following:‐
[Not a Quadratic equations, Real roots, Imaginary roots, Equal roots] Perform 3‐2 Functional Testing.
4. To determine the type of triangle. Its input is triple of +ve integers (say x,y,z) and the values may be from
interval[1,100]. The program output may be one of the following [Scalene, Isosceles, Equilateral, Not a
Triangle]. Perform 3‐2 Non Functional Testing.
5. To determine the nature of roots of a quadratic equations, its input is triple of +ve integers (say x,y,z) and
values may be from interval [1,100] the program output may have one of the following:‐
[Not a Quadratic equations, Real roots, Imaginary roots, Equal roots] Perform Regression Testing.
6. Prepare defect report after executing test cases for any login form.
7. Study of Any Testing Tool. (Ex. Win Runner)
8. Study of Any Test Management Tool. (Ex. QA Complete)
9. Automate the Test cases using Test Automation tool.(Ex. using QA Complete)
10. Learn how to raise and report Bugs using Bug tracking tool. (Ex. Bugzilla,Jira using QA Complete)
11. Study of any Test Management Tool. ( Ex. Test Director)

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1410
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Solar Photovoltaic Systems L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 7 PED‐EAE PED‐EAE‐5 PED‐429T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To gain knowledge about the significance of Renewable Energy.
2. To understand PV system’s characteristics and behaviour under varying parameters
3. To understand MPP and methods to evaluate MPP.
4. Application of power electronics in PV technology.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Ability to understand the basics and role of renewable energy.
CO 2 Analyse the PV characteristics of solar PV.
CO 3 Ability to understand the concepts of Maximum Power Point and learn methods to implement MPP.
CO 4 Application of Power Electronics in solar PV systems.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 2 2 1 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
CO 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 1 1 3 3
CO 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 1 1 3 3
CO 4 3 2 2 1 3 3 3 2 1 3 3 3

UNIT‐I

PV Cells and Modules: Renewable Energy sources, Emergence of renewable sector and its significance, Impact
of Global warming, Introduction to PV cells and modules, Designing of PV cells to form PV modules/arrays,
Types of solar panels, Potential of solar electrical energy systems in India, Contribution of Solar PV systems in
economic growth of a country, Future of solar in India.

UNIT‐II

PV Characteristics: Introduction to PV characteristics in terms of VI and PV plots, Modeling of solar cells, Effect
of temperature and irradiance on performance of PV module, Partial shading and its effects, Role of bypass and
blocking diodes, Losses and Efficiency calculation of PV module, Parameters affecting module performance.

UNIT‐III

Maximum Power Point: Introduction to MPP, Various methods to find out MPP, Application of AI and hybrid

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1411
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

methods to find MPP, Solar Emulators and their basics, PV integration system, Government schemes and
policies to promote PV in India.

UNIT‐IV

Role of Power Electronics Components in PV Systems: Designing of PV Emulators using Power electronic
components, Introduction to types of batteries used in PV systems, Limitations and challenges of PV systems,
Agencies involved in promotion of PV in India, Reliability Analysis of solar PV systems, Introduction to
availability.

Textbook(s):
1. N.D. Kaushika, Anuradha Mishra, Anil K. Rai: Solar Photovoltaics ‐ Technology, System Design, Reliability
and Viability. Springer Cham, 2018.
2. Maurice Hebert: Maximum Power Point Tracking: Background, Implementation and Classification. Nova
Science Publishers Inc., 2020.

Reference(s):
1. Garg HP, Solar Energy: Fundamentals & Applications, Tata McGraw Hill, 2000.
2. Solanki: Solar Photovoltaics: Fundamentals, Technologies and Applications. PHI Learning Pvt Ltd, 2009.
3. Ali M. Eltamaly, Almoataz Y. Abdelaziz: Modern Maximum Power Point Tracking Techniques for
Photovoltaic Energy Systems, Springer, 2020.
4. Neeraj Priyadarshi, Akash Kumar Bhoi, Ramesh C. Bansal, Akhtar Kalam: DC—D Converters for Future
Renewable Energy Systems. Springer, 2022.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1412
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Solar Photovoltaic Systems Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 7 PED‐EAE PED‐EAE‐5 PED‐429P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Solar Photovoltaic Systems) as this is
the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. To design a solar PV module.

2. To simulate effect of temperature change on output of solar PV.
3. To determine the effect of irradiance on PV characteristics.
4. To design a solar Emulator using buck converter.
5. To design a solar Emulator using boost converter.
6. Write a MATLAB program to obtain MPP OF A PANEL.
7. Write a MATLAB program for obtaining behaviour of a solar cell
8. Simulate dynamic loading on a PV Emulator.
9. To design MPPT system for any solar panel.
10. To design an overall PV system with load.

Note: The above practical list can be based on hardware kits. However, hands on MATLAB/Sim Power System
Toolbox simulation‐based models related to the course contents can be carried out.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1413
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Solid State Drives L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EE/EEE 7 PCE PCE‐4 EEE‐409T
EAE 7 PED‐EAE PED‐EAE‐4 PED‐427T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. Introduction of solid state drive, characteristic and control.
2. Study of operation and control of DC drives.
3. To understand the induction motor drives
4. Introduction to controllers of drives
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Ability to understand the motor‐ load dynamics, closed loop control of speed.
CO 2 Ability of analysis of DC motor drive for multi‐quadrant operation and various control structure.
CO 3 Ability to understand the speed control methods of Induction motor
CO 4 Ability to understand the BLDC motors and feedback control techniques.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 1 1 2
CO 2 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 1 1 2
CO 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 1 1 2
CO 4 3 3 3 2 3 2 2 1 2 1 1 2

UNIT‐I

Electric drive dynamics: Drive Characteristic: Types of loads, Motor load dynamics, Steady state stability, multi
quadrant operation, load torque characteristics, closed loop control, class of duty, thermal considerations.

UNIT‐II

Chopper fed dc motor drive: DC motor speed control: Methods of armature control, field weakening; Steady
state analysis of the single and three phase converter fed separately excited DC motor drive– continuous
conduction, Time ratio and current limit control, 4 quadrant operation of converter / chopper fed drive‐
applications.

UNIT‐III

Induction motor drives: Three phase induction motor starting, braking, transient analysis, stator voltage

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1414
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

control–V/f control, rotor resistance control‐qualitative treatment of slip power recovery drives‐closed loop
control– vector control‐ Applications.

UNIT – IV
0 0
Design of controllers for drives: Concept of BLDC motor, 120 and 180 operation, load and converter – Closed
loop control with current and speed feedback ‐ Armature voltage control and field weakening mode control ‐
Design of controllers: Current controller and speed controller.

Textbook(s):
1. G K Dubey, Principle of Electrical Drives, Narosa Publishing House
2. Bimal K. Bose. ‘Modern Power Electronics and AC Drives’, Pearson Education, 2002.

References:
1. R Krishnan, Electrical Motor Drives, PHI Publications.
2. Bimal K Bose, Power Electronics and Variable Frequency Drives, Wiley India Publication.
3. De, Sen , Electric Drives, PHI Publications
4. Ned Mohan, Electrical Machines And Drives, Wiley India Publication

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1415
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Solid State Drives Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EE/EEE 7 PCE PCE‐4 EEE‐409P
EAE 7 PED‐EAE PED‐EAE‐4 PED‐427P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Solid State Drives) as this is the
practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. To study of load equalization by flywheel for intermittent duty loads.

2. To study of single phase bridge configurations cyclo‐ converter using micro controller.
3. To conduct the study of open loop AC voltage Control of single phase capacitor run induction motor.
4. To conduct the speed control of DC motor below/above base speed using micro controller.
5. To control the speed of DC Motor using MOSFET based chopper and to plot voltage v/s speed graph.
6. To study single phase half controlled converter and speed control of DC Motor..
7. To conduct the speed control of Induction Motor using V/F drive.
8. To study the performance of three phase fully controlled bridge converter.
9. To study the comparison of various braking methods and their range of braking for induction motor.
10. To conduct the close loop speed control of BLDC motor Drive.
11. To conduct the closed Loop speed control of SRM (Switched reluctance Motor) drive.
12. To study of load supply chopping by using the step down chopper.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1416
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Solid State Microwave Device and their Application L P C

4 4

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ECE 6 PCE PCE‐3 ECE‐346

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To learn the basics principles of various microwave solid state devices.
2. To study the operation and device characteristics of RF Active components.
3. To design and analyse various other Solid State Devices and measurements.
4. To design and analyse various applications of the solid state microwave devices and their scope.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Explain different types of waveguides and their respective modes of propagation along with
impedance, admittance, transmission and scattering matrix representations of typical microwave
devices and design microwave matching networks using L section, single and double stub and quarter
wave transformer.
CO 2 Describe and explain working of microwave tubes and solid state devices.
CO 3 Perform measurements on microwave devices and networks using power meter and VNA.
CO 4 Explain the various application perspectives of the solid state microwave or RF based devices.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 2 2 2 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 3
CO 2 3 3 3 3 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 3
CO 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 1 1 1 1 1 3
CO 4 3 3 3 3 2 3 1 1 1 1 1 3

UNIT I

Introduction to Solid State Concepts: Semiconductors, Energy Bands, Electrical behaviour of Silicon,
Germanium, Gallium Arsenide, Gallium Phosphide, Indium Phosphide, ZnO etc. Need for Microwave Solid State
Devices, Evolution, Advantages and Applications.
Introduction to Microwave Solid State Devices: Microwave Diodes: Crystal Diodes, Schottcky Diodes, PIN
Diodes, Varactor Diodes and Tunnel diodes, MOS Diode. Microwave Transistors: Characteristics of Microwave
BJT, Hetero Junction Bipolar Transistor (HBT).

UNIT II

Microwave Solid‐State Devices: Microwave Field Effect Transistors: Characteristics of Junction Field Effect
Transistors (JFET), MESFET, HEMT, Charged Couple Devices.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1417
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Transferred Electron Devices: RWH Theory, Two‐Valley Modes of operations, Gunn Diode, Limited Space
Charge Accumulation Diode (LSA Diode), InP Diodes, Cadmium Telluride Diodes.

UNIT III

Advanced Microwave Solid State Devices: Avalanche Transit Time Devices: Read diode, IMPATT (Impact
Ionisation Avalanche Transit Time) Diode, TRAPATT (Trapped Plasma Avalanche Triggered Transit Time) Diode,
BARITT (Barrier Injected Transit Time) Diodes.

UNIT IV

Applications: Detectors, Modulators, Amplifiers, Oscillators, Switching Circuits, Phase Shifters, Phase Limiters,
Attenuators and Mixers.

Textbooks:
1. Watson, “Microwave Semiconductor Devices and their applications”, McGraw Hill, 1969.
2. Sze. S.M, and Kwok K. Ng, “Physics of Semiconductor Devices”, John Wiley, 3rd Edition 2007.
3. Kai Chang, Microwave Solid‐state Circuits And Applications, Wiley Series.
4. S. Y. Liao, Microwave Devices and Circuits, Pearson.

References:
1. Thomas S. Laverghetta, Solid State Microwave Devices.
2. K. C. Gupta et. al., CAD of Microwave Circuits, Artech House, 1981.
3. R. E. Collins, Foundation of Microwave Engineering, McGraw Hill, 1993.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1418
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Statistical Quality Control L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 7 QM‐EAE QM‐EAE‐4 QM‐443T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To understand and utilize the tools of quality systems.
2. To collect, analyse and plot variable and attribute data. Create and react to control charts.
3. To understand and monitor sources of variation.
4. Determine and use capability indices to describe a process.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Evaluate the usage of Statistical analysis tools as an essential tool for quality improvement.
CO 2 Collect, analyse and chart attribute data parameters.
CO 3 Measure and describe process capability.
CO 4 Setup and use various chart types for problem solving.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 ‐ ‐
CO 2 3 2 2 2 2 2 ‐ 2 2 2 ‐ ‐
CO 3 3 3 3 3 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 4 3 ‐ 2 ‐ 2 3 2 ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ 2

UNIT‐I

The Meaning of Quality and Quality Improvement; Brief History of Quality Methodology; Statistical Methods
for Quality Control and Improvement; Total Quality Management (quality philosophy, links between quality
and productivity, quality costs, legal aspects of quality implementing, quality improvement).
Mean, Median, Mode, Standard deviation, calculating area, The Deming funnel experiment, Normal
distribution tables, Finding the Z score, Central limit theorem.

UNIT‐II

Chance and assignable causes, Statistical Basis of the Control Charts (basic principles, choices of control limits,
significance of control limits, sample size and sampling frequency, rational subgroups, analysis of pattern on
control charts, warning limits, Average Run Length‐ARL).

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1419
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT‐III

Control Charts for X‐Bar and R‐ Charts, Type I and Type II errors, the probability of Type II error. Simple
Numerical Problems.
Statistical Process Control and Process Capability, Zero defect programme; Six – Sigma approach.

UNIT – IV

The acceptance sampling problem, single sampling plan for attributes, Double, Multiple, and Sequential
sampling, AOQL, LTPD, OC curves, Military Standard 105E, the Dodge‐Romig sampling plans. Numerical
problems

Textbook(s):
1. M. Mahajan, Statistical Quality Control, Dhanpant Rai and Co.
2. Grant and Leavenworth‐Statistical Quality Control, 7th Edition, Tata Mcgraw Hill.

References:
1. D.C. Montgomery, Introduction to Statistical Quality Control, John Wiley, 2019.
2. Suganthi L. and Samuel A., Total Quality Management, Prentice Hall India, 2006.
3. Janakiraman B. and Gopal R.K., Total Quality Management, Prentice Hall India, 2006.
4. Juran’s Quality Control Handbook –McGraw Hill Book Company.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1420
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Statistical Quality Control Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 7 QM‐EAE QM‐EAE‐4 QM‐443P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Statistical Quality Control) as this is the
practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. To verify given statistical relationships.

2. To plot and determine the given unknown distribution.
3. To plot control charts for X‐Bar and R‐ Charts.
4. To perform use of control charts and process engineering techniques for implementing thequality plan.
5. To state and prove central limit theorem.
6. To perform statistical tolerance analysis of case study.
7. To perform sampling problem of a given data.
8. To design a sequential sampling plan.
9. To study Six sigma quality tools and its application.
10. To study quality function and concept of quality cycle.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1421
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Statistics, Statistical Modelling & Data Analytics L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CSE‐AI/CSE‐AIML/CSE‐DS 6 PC PC DA‐304T
EAE 6 AI‐EAE AI‐EAE‐2 DA‐304T
EAE 6 AIML‐EAE AIML‐EAE‐2 DA‐304T
EAE 6 DS‐EAE DS‐EAE‐1 DA‐304T
EAE 6 SC‐EAE SC‐EAE‐1 DA‐304T
EAE 6 MLDA‐EAE MLDA‐EAE‐1 DA‐304T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To impart basic knowledge about Statistics, visualisation and probability.
2. To impart basic knowledge about how to implement regression analysis and interpret the results.
3. To impart basic knowledge about how to describe classes of open and closed sets of R, concept of
compactness Describe Metric space ‐ Metric in Rn.
4. To impart basic knowledge about how to apply Eigen values, Eigen vectors.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Ability to learn and understand the basic concepts about Statistics, visualisation and probability.
CO 2 Ability to implement regression analysis and interpret the results. Be able to fit a model to data and
comment on the adequacy of the model
CO 3 Ability to describe classes of open and closed sets of R, concept of compactness Describe Metric space
‐ Metric in Rn.
CO 4 Ability to impart basic knowledge about how to apply Eigen values, Eigen vectors.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 3 3 3 ‐ ‐ 1 2 ‐ ‐ 3
CO 2 3 3 3 3 3 ‐ ‐ 1 2 ‐ ‐ 3
CO 3 3 3 3 3 3 ‐ ‐ 1 2 ‐ ‐ 3
CO 4 3 3 3 3 3 ‐ ‐ 1 2 ‐ ‐ 3

UNIT‐I

Statistics: Introduction & Descriptive Statistics‐ mean, median, mode, variance, and standard deviation. Data
Visualization, Introduction to Probability Distributions.
Hypothesis testing, Linear Algebra and Population Statistics, Mathematical Methods and Probability Theory,
Sampling Distributions and Statistical Inference, Quantitative analysis.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1422
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT‐II

Statistical Modelling: Linear models, regression analysis, analysis of variance, applications in various fields.
Gauss‐Markov theorem; geometry of least squares, subspace formulation of linear models, orthogonal
projections; regression models, factorial experiments, analysis of covariance and model formulae; regression
diagnostics, residuals, influence diagnostics, transformations, Box‐Cox models, model selection and model
building strategies, logistic regression models; Poisson regression models.

UNIT‐III

Data Analytics: Describe classes of open and closed set. Apply the concept of compactness. Describe Metric
space ‐ Metric in Rn. Use the concept of Cauchy sequence, completeness, compactness and connectedness to
solve the problems.

UNIT – IV

Advanced concepts in Data Analytics: Describe vector space, subspaces, independence of vectors, basis and
dimension. Describe Eigen values, Eigen vectors and related results.

Textbook(s):
1. Apostol T. M. (1974): Mathematical Analysis, Narosa Publishing House, New Delhi.
2. Malik, S.C., Arora, S. (2012): Mathematical Analysis, New Age International, New Delhi

References:
1. Pringle, R.M. and Rayner, A.(1971): Generalized Inverse of Matrices with Application to Statistics, Griffin,
London
2. Peter Bruce, Andrew Bruce (2017), Practical Statistics for Data Scientists Paperback

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1423
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Statistics, Statistical Modelling & Data Analytics Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CSE‐AI/CSE‐AIML/CSE‐DS 6 PC PC DA‐304P
EAE 6 AI‐EAE AI‐EAE‐2 DA‐304P
EAE 6 AIML‐EAE AIML‐EAE‐2 DA‐304P
EAE 6 DS‐EAE DS‐EAE‐1 DA‐304P
EAE 6 SC‐EAE SC‐EAE‐1 DA‐304P
EAE 6 MLDA‐EAE MLDA‐EAE‐1 DA‐304P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Statistics, Statistical Modelling & Data
Analytics) as this is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Exercises to implement the basic matrix operations in Scilab.

2. Exercises to find the Eigenvalues and eigenvectors in Scilab.
3. Exercises to solve equations by Gauss elimination, Gauss Jordan Method and Gauss Siedel in Scilab.
4. Exercises to implement the associative, commutative and distributive property in a matrix in Scilab.
5. Exercises to find the reduced row echelon form of a matrix in Scilab.
6. Exercises to plot the functions and to find its first and second derivatives in Scilab.
7. Exercises to present the data as a frequency table in SPSS.
8. Exercises to find the outliers in a dataset in SPSS.
9. Exercises to find the most risky project out of two mutually exclusive projects in SPSS
10. Exercises to draw a scatter diagram, residual plots, outliers leverage and influential data points in R
11. Exercises to calculate correlation using R
12. Exercises to implement Time series Analysis using R.
13. Exercises to implement linear regression using R.
14. Exercises to implement concepts of probability and distributions in R

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1424
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Stochastic Processes and Systems L P C

4 4

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EE 6 PCE PCE‐1 EEE‐318

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To understand the probability
2. To understand the density function
3. To understand the temporal characteristics of stochastic process
4. To understand the spectral characteristics of stochastic process
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Ability to understand the probability
CO 2 Ability to understand the density function
CO 3 Ability to understand the temporal characteristics of stochastic process
CO 4 Ability to understand the spectral characteristics of stochastic process
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 2 3 3 2 1 1 1 2 2 3 1
CO 2 3 2 3 3 2 1 1 1 2 2 3 1
CO 3 3 2 3 3 2 1 1 1 2 2 3 1
CO 4 3 2 3 3 2 1 1 1 2 2 3 1

UNIT I

Probability and Random Variable: Introduction to probability through sets and probability: Relative frequency;
Experiments and sample spaces, discrete and continuous sample spaces; Events; Probability definitions and
axioms; Mathematical model of experiments; Probability as a relative frequency; Joint probability; Conditional
probability, total probability; Baye’s theorem and independent events. Random variable: Definition of random
variable, conditions for a function to be a random variable, discrete, continuous and mixed random variable.

UNIT II

Distribution and Density Functions: Distribution and density functions: distribution and density functions
definitions and properties; binomial, poisson, Uniform, gaussian, exponential, rayleigh, conditional distribution,
methods of defining conditioning on an event, Conditional density, properties. Operation on one random
variable expectations: introduction, expected value of a Random variable, function of a random variable,
moments about the origin, central moments, variance and skew; Chebyche’s inequality; characteristic function;
moment generating function; transformations of a random variable: Monotonic transformations for a

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1425
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

continuous random variable; non monotonic transformations of continuous random Variable; transformation
of a discrete random variable

UNIT III

Stochastic Processes ‐ Temporal Characteristics: The random process concept, classification of processes,
deterministic and non deterministic processes, distribution and density functions, concept of stationary and
statistical independence; First order stationary processes; Second order and wide sense stationary, N Order
and strict sense stationary, time averages and periodicity, mean Ergodic processes, correlation Ergodic
processes; Autocorrelation function and its properties; Cross correlation function and its properties; Covariance
functions; Gaussian random processes; Poisson random process.

UNIT IV

Stochastic Processes ‐ Spectral Characteristics: Power spectrum: Properties, relationship between power
spectrum and autocorrelation function; The cross power density spectrum, properties, relationship between
cross power spectrum and cross correlation function. Spectral characteristics of system response: Power
density spectrum of response; cross‐power density spectrums of input and output of a linear system.
Introduction to white Gaussian noise process and its properties.

Textbooks:
1. Peyton Z. Peebles, “Probability, Random Variables & Random Signal Principles”, TMH, 4th Ed, 2001.
2. Scott Miller, Donald Childers, “Probability and random process”, Elsevier, 2nd Edition, 2012.
3. S.P. Eugene Xavier, “Statistical Theory of Communication”, New Age Publications, 1st Edition, 2003

References:
1. Athanasius Papoulis, S. Unnikrishna Pillai, “Probability, Random Variables and Stochastic Processes”, PHI, 4th
Ed., 2002.
2. Henry Stark, John W. Woods, “Probability and Random Processes with Application to Signal Processing”,
Pearson Education, 3rd Edition, 2014.
3. George R. Cooper, Clave D. MC Gillem, “Probability Methods of Signal and System Analysis”, Oxford, 3rd Ed,
1999.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1426
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Strength of Materials‐II L P C
3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ME 7 PCE PCE‐5 MEE‐413T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To understand about the concept of 3‐dimensional state of stress, theories of failure and strain
energy.
2. To develop the understanding of various stresses acting in thick pressure vessels and rotating
discs/cylinders.
3. To facilitate students to understand the bucking phenomena and concept of the curved beams.
4. To study about the shear stresses in beams and the concept of unsymmetrical bending.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Understood the concept of 3D state of stress at a point, theories of failure and strain energy.
CO 2 Determine the stresses induced in thick pressure vessels and rotating disc/cylinders.
CO 3 Analyse the Euler’s buckling phenomena and bending of curved beams.
CO 4 Compute the shear stresses for different sections of beam and understand the concept of
unsymmetrical bending.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 3 3 ‐ 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 2 3 3 3 3 ‐ 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 3 3 3 3 3 ‐ 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 4 3 3 3 3 ‐ 3 ‐ ‐ ‐‐ ‐ ‐ 2

UNIT‐I

3D Stress: Three dimensional stress and strain, Stress tensor, stress invariants, Strain Tensor, Equilibrium
Equations, St. Venant’s principle, generalized hooks law, Theories of elastic failure and their applications.
Strain Energy: Strain Energy Due to Axial Force, Shear Stress, Bending; Maxwell’s reciprocal theorem,
Castigliano’s theorem for statically determinate structures.

UNIT‐II

Thick Cylinders: Stresses in thick cylinders, sphere subjected to internal pressure, Lame’s equations, compound
cylinders, spherical vessels, hub shrunk on solid shafts.
Rotating Disc and Cylinders: Rotational stresses in discs and rims of uniform thickness; discs of uniform
Strength, long cylinder.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1427
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT‐III

Columns: Combined direct and bending stresses in columns, Euler’s and Rankine Gordon equations,
applications of Johnson's empirical formula for axially loaded columns.
Curved Beams: Bending of beams with large initial curvature, position of neutral axis for rectangular,
trapezoidal and circular cross sections, stress in crane hooks.

UNIT – IV

Shear Stresses in Beams: Shear stress at a section, shear stress distribution for different sections: square,
rectangular, Triangular, Circular section, I‐section, T‐section.
Unsymmetrical Bending and Shear Centre: Properties of beam cross‐section, Principal Axes, Determination of
Principal Axes, stress and deflection in unsymmetrical bending, shear centre.

Textbook(s):
1. Dr. Sadhu Singh, “Strength of Materials”, Khanna Publishers.
2. R.K. Bansal, “A Textbook of Strength of Materials”, Laxmi Publications; 4th ed. (2010).

References:
1. S.P. Timoshenko and J. Gere, “Elements of Strength of Materials”, East‐West affiliated, New Delhi.
2. R.C. Hibbler, “Mechanics of Materials”, Prentice Hall, New Delhi;(1994).
3. L.S. Sri Nath et.al., “Strength of Materials”, McMillan, New Delhi;(2001).
4. Eger P. Popov, “Engg. Mechanics of solids”, Prentice Hall, New Delhi;(1998).
5. Roger T. Fenner, “Mechanics of Solids”, U.K. B.C. Publication, New Delhi;(1990).
6. S. Ramamrutham et.al., “Strength of Materials”, Dhanpat Rai Publishing Company.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1428
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Strength of Materials‐II Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ME 7 PCE PCE‐5 MEE‐413P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Strength of Materials‐II) as this is the
practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. To inspect the property of creep in metals

2. To determine the endurance limit of the given specimen under fatigue or cyclic loading.
3. To study and verify the Maxwell’s Reciprocal theorem on beams.
4. To perform bending test on beam (wooden or any other material) and to determine the Young's modulus
and Modulus of rupture.
5. To find the Shear Modulus of Elasticity of two different materials; Aluminum and Steel using two twist and
bent test rigs are used.
6. To determine the Modulus of Elasticity and Poison’s ratio of Aluminum, the specimen being a cantilever
beam, and compare them with theoretical value.
7. To determine principal stresses and strains in a beam made of aluminum and loaded as a cantilever, and
compare them with theoretical values.
8. To determine flexural strength (modulus of rupture) of concrete using simple beam with third‐point
loading.

9. To study behaviour of different types of columns and find Euler’s buckling load for different end conditions.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1429
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Structural Analysis ‐ II L P C
4 4

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CE 5 PC PC CEC‐303

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To know the concept of combined direct and bending stresses, stresses developed in thin cylinders.
2. To construct influence lines and be able to use the same.
3. To explain method of consistent deformation and slope deflection method.
4. To discuss moment distribution method and unit load method.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Determine stresses in structures and thin cylinders.
CO 2 Utilise the concept of influence line diagrams for support reaction, shear force and bending moment.
CO 3 Interpret unknown forces and displacements in indeterminate structures by method of consistent
deformation and slope deflection method.
CO 4 Analyse indeterminate structures by moment distribution, Kani’s and unit load method.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐
CO 2 1 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐
CO 3 1 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐
CO 4 1 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐

UNIT‐I

Combined direct and bending stresses: Middle third rule, core of a section, stresses due to water and earth
pressure in structures like retaining walls, dams etc.
Thin cylinders: Thin cylinders subjected to internal fluid pressure, wire wound thin cylinders. Thin cylindrical
shells, circumferential and hoop stresses, longitudinal stresses, Maximum shear stress.

UNIT‐II

Moving loads and Influence lines: Introduction to moving loads, absolute maximum bending moment and
shear force, concept of influence lines, influence lines for reaction, shear force, bending of determinate beams,
analysis for different types of moving loads, single concentrated load, several concentrated loads, uniformly
distributed load shorter and longer than span, Application of Muller Breslau Principle for determinate
structures.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1430
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT‐III

Method of consistent deformation: Analysis of indeterminate beams and frames upto two degree of
indeterminacy, Analysis of pin jointed plane frame with external indeterminacy, effects due to error in length
of a member.
Slope Deflection Method: Analysis of continuous beams, Analysis of rigid frames, frames with sloping legs,
frames without sway and with sway, settlement effects.

UNIT – IV

Moment distribution method and Kani’s Method: Analysis of continuous beams and plane frames.
Deflections of pin jointed plane frame: Unit Load Method, Deflections due to Lack of Fit and Temperature
Changes.

Textbook(s):
1. Dr. B. C. Punamia, Er. Ashok Kumar Jain, Dr. Arun Kumar Jain, “Mechanics of Materials”, Laxmi Publications
(P) Ltd. Revised edition (2017)
2. Dr. R. K Bansal, “A Textbook of Strength of Materials”, Laxmi Publications (P) Ltd. (2018)
3. S S Bhavikatti, “Structural Analysis (Vol.I and II)”, Vikas Publication, Fourth Edition (2011)

References:
1. C.S. Reddy, “Basic Structural Analysis”, Tata McGraw Hill (2017)
2. 2.R. Agor, “Structural Analysis”, Khanna Publishing, Third Edition (2021)
3. S. Ramamrutham, R. Narayan, “Theory of Structures”, Dhanpat Rai Publishing Company, (2017)
4. Dr. R. Vaidyanathan, Dr. P. Perumal, “Structural Analysis Volume II”, Laxmi Publications (P) Ltd. (2016)
5. R.C. Hibbler, “Structural Analysis”, Pearson Education

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1431
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Structural Analysis and Design L P C

4 4

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

OAE 6 CE‐OAE CE‐OAE‐1 OCE‐302

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To understand concept of shear force and bending moment in different structures.
2. To analyse indeterminate structures.
3. To develop understanding of various design philosophies and their differences.
4. To develop basic understanding of steel as a construction material
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Illustrate shear force and bending moment diagrams for determinate structures.
CO 2 Analyze indeterminate structures using slope deflection and moment distribution method.
CO 3 Identify codal provision for concrete design by working stress and limit state method.
CO 4 Summarize structural steel properties, type of members and connections.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 1 2 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐
CO 2 1 2 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐
CO 3 ‐ 2 3 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 1 ‐
CO 4 1 3 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 1 ‐

UNIT‐I

Classification of Structures, Degree of Freedom per node, Static and Kinematic degrees of indeterminacy, Shear
force and bending moment: Different types of beams and loads, shear force and bending moment diagrams for
cantilever and simply supported beams with and without overhangs subjected to different kinds of loads,
relation between loading, shear force and bending moments.

UNIT‐II

Slope Deflection Method: Slope‐deflection equations, equilibrium equation of slope‐deflection method,

Analysis of beams with and without joint translation and rotation.
Moment distribution method: Basic concept, Stiffness factor, carry over factor, distribution factor, distribution
theorem, analysis of beams with and without joint translation.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1432
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT‐III

Concrete: Mechanical properties of concrete: elastic modules, poisson’s ratio, creep, shrinkage and durability
of concrete. Working stress and Limit state design concepts. Introduction to Various Design Philosophies
including characteristic strength, Partial Safety Factor, Factored Load, Design stress strain curve. Assumptions
in Limit State Design Method. Constituents, mix design, shortterm and long‐term properties. (IS 456, IS 800, IS
10262)

UNIT – IV

Structural Steel: Composition and its type, material properties and behaviour; stress strain curve, relaxation of
steel, Structural steel designation as per IS: 800:2007, Basics of types of members (Tension member,
Compression member and flexural member) Connections – Types of connections. Rivet Connections, Bolted
Connections and Welded Connections.

Textbook(s):
1. S S Bhavikatti, “Structural Analysis (Vol.I and II)”, Vikas Publication, Fourth Edition (2011).
2. Jain A.K., “Limit State Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures”, Nem Chand Publishers, Roorkee.

References:
1. Ramamrutham, R. Narayan, “Theory of Structures”, Dhanpat Rai Publishing Company, (2017).
2. R. Agor, “Structural Analysis”, Khanna Publishing, Third Edition (2021).
3. S.K. Duggal, “Limit State Design of steel structures”, Tata Mc Graw Hill, 3rd Edition (2019).
4. L.S Negi, “Design of Steel Structure”, Tata McGraw‐Hill.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1433
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Structural Design ‐ II L P C
3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CE 5 PC PC CEC‐305

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. The course aims at designing of basic elements of structures such as beam and slab
2. The course aims at designing of basic elements of structures such as column and foundation.
3. To provide a basic understanding of use of steels in civil engineering
4. To develop technical competence in the design of simple bolted and welded connections, tension and
compression members
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Analyze singly and doubly reinforced beams, one way and two way slabs, short and slender columns
and footings.
CO 2 Understand the behavior of concrete structures under flexure, shear, bond and torsion and
compression.
CO 3 Design of different types of joint system for complex engineering problems considering safety and
economic factors.
CO 4 Identify tension, compression and flexural members in a structure which can meet the specified needs
with appropriate considerations.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 1 1 2 2 1 ‐ 1 1 3 2 3
CO 2 3 3 1 2 1 1 1 1 2 3 2 3
CO 3 2 2 3 2 2 2 ‐ 1 ‐ 3 2 2
CO 4 2 2 3 1 1 2 2 1 1 3 2 2

UNIT‐I

Analysis and design of singly and doubly reinforced simply supported cantilever and continuous beams and
flanged beam section, lintels, Design principles of retaining walls. Design of simply supported, cantilever slabs,
one way and two way slabs
Limit state of Collapse: Flexure, Shear, bond and torsion, Compression, Limit state of Serviceability

UNIT‐II

Design of short and slender columns under axial load, under uniaxial and biaxial bending and shear force.
Design of isolated footing for vertical load and Moment, Design of combined footings.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1434
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT‐III

Riveted connections: Analysis and design of various types of riveted connections, permissible stresses in rivets,
Design criteria, Code requirements, Tacking rivets, rivet joints subject to moment, Stresses in rivets.
Welded connections: Advantage and disadvantages of welding, Design criteria, Code requirements, Analysis
and design of Fillet and Butt weld, Fillet weld subjected to moment.

UNIT – IV

Design of Tension members: Analysis of trusses and design of axially loaded tension member, Lug angle,
tension splice.
Design of compression members: Modes of failure in column, Design of compression member, Lacing and
battening for built up compression member. Compression member composed of two components back‐to‐
back, column base and foundation, Roof trusses [including Purlins, bracings and connections].

Textbook(s):
1. Sinha S.N., “Handbook of Reinforced Concrete Design”, McGraw Hill Publishing Company., New Delhi.
2. Gambhir M.L., “Fundamentals of Reinforced Concrete Design”., PHI Learning (P) Ltd., New Delhi
3. S.K. Duggal, “Limit State Design of steel structures”, Tata Mc Graw Hill
4. L.S. Negi, “Design of steel structures”, Tata Mc Graw Hill

References
1. Jain A.K., “Limit State Design of Reniforced Concrete Structures”., Nem Chand Publishers, Roorkee.
2. Shetty M.S., “Concrete Technology, Theory and Practice”, S.Chand and Co., New Delhi.
3. Raju K., “Reinforced Concrete”, New Age International (P) Ltd., New Delhi.
4. N. Subramanian, “Design of steel structures”, Oxford University Press.
5. Krishnamurthy, “Elementary Structural Design”‐Vol‐III, CBS Publishers

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1435
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Structural Design Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CE 5 PC PC CEC‐351

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Structural Design) as this is the
practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Study of SP34/IS13920/IS456:2000 for detailing of structural elements

2. Preparation of bar bending schedule of Simply supported and Cantilever RCC Beam using MS Excel.
3. Preparation of bar bending schedule of RCC Slabs ( One way and two way) by using MS Excel.
4. Preparation of bar bending schedule of RCC Columns –(Tied columns and Spirally reinforced columns) by
using MS Excel
5. Preparation of bar bending schedule of Isolated and combined footings for RC Columns by using MS Excel.
6. Preparation of working hand sketches and Auto CAD drawings for RCC Beam
7. Preparation of working hand sketches and Auto CAD drawings for Slabs ‐ One way and two way slabs.
8. Preparation of working hand sketches and Auto CAD drawings for RCC Column.
9. Preparation of working hand sketches and Auto CAD drawings for Combined rectangular and trapezoidal
footing.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1436
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Structural Dynamics L P C
4 4

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CE 7 PCE PCE‐5 CEE‐409

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To understand the basics of dynamics of structures using various analysis methods.
2. To analyze the theory of vibrations and their impact on structures using earthquake analysis.
3. To know the multi‐degree of freedom system to evaluate and analyse dynamics responses.
4. To implement Practical vibration analysis.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 To understand structural dynamics and their types.
CO 2 To know the theory of vibrations and earthquakes analysis using IS 1893:2016
CO 3 To evaluate various degrees of freedom on various structural systems.
CO 4 To analyze practical vibration analysis.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 ‐ 1 2 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐
CO 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ 1 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 3
CO 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 4 ‐ ‐ ‐ 1 2 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐

UNIT‐I

Introduction to Structural Dynamics : Fundamental objectives of dynamic analysis ‐ Types of prescribed

loading ‐ Methods of discretization ‐ Formulation of equations of motion by different methods – Direct
equilibration using Newton’s law of motion / D’Alembert’s principle, Principle of virtual work and Hamilton
principle.
Single Degree of Freedom Systems: Formulation and solution of the equation of motion ‐ Free vibration
response ‐ Response to Harmonic, Periodic, Impulsive and general dynamic loadings ‐ Duhamel integral.

UNIT‐II

Theory of Vibrations: Introduction ‐ Elements of vibratory system ‐ Degrees of Freedom ‐ Continuous System ‐
Lumped mass idealization ‐ Oscillatory motion ‐ Simple Harmonic motion ‐ Vectorial representation of S.H.M. ‐
Free vibrations of single degree of freedom system ‐ undamped and damped vibrations ‐ critical damping ‐
Logarithmic decrement ‐ Forced vibration of SDOF systems ‐ Harmonic excitation ‐Dynamic magnification factor
– Phase angle – Bandwidth

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1437
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Introduction to Earthquake Analysis: Introduction ‐ Excitation by rigid base translation ‐ Lumped mass
approach ‐ SDOF and MDOF systems ‐ I. S. Code methods of analysis for obtaining the response of multi‐
storeyed buildings

UNIT‐III

Multi Degree of Freedom Systems: Selection of the degrees of Freedom ‐ Evaluation of structural property
matrices ‐ Formulation of the MDOF equations of motion ‐ Undamped free vibrations ‐ Solutions of Eigen value
problem for natural frequencies and mode shapes ‐ Analysis of Dynamic response – Normal co‐ordinates ‐
Uncoupled equations of motion ‐ Orthogonal properties of normal modes ‐ Mode superposition

UNIT – IV

Practical Vibration Analysis: Introduction ‐ Stodola method ‐ Fundamental mode analysis ‐ Analysis of second
and higher modes ‐ Holzer method ‐ Basic procedure. Continuous Systems: Introduction ‐ Flexural vibrations of
beams ‐ Elementary case – Derivation of governing differential equation of motion ‐ Analysis of undamped free
vibrations of beams in flexure ‐ Natural frequencies and mode shapes of simple beams with different end
conditions ‐ Principles of application to continuous beams.

Textbook(s):
1. Basics of Structural Dynamics and Aseismic Design by Damodarasamy S.R, Publisher: PHI.
2. Dynamics of Structures by Anil K Chopra, Pearson Education India Publications.

References:
1. Dynamics of Structures by Clough & Penzien, McGraw Hill, New York
2. Structural Dynamics by Mario Paz, C.B.S Publishers, New Delhi.
3. Dynamics of Structures by Anil K. Chopra, Pearson Education (Singapore), Delhi.
4. I.S: 1893 ‐ 1984, “Code of practice for Earthquake resistant design of Structures” and latest , I.S: 1893 ‐
2002 (version) Part‐1

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1438
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Supervised and Deep Learning L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 7 MLDA‐EAE MLDA‐EAE‐3 ML‐463T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To introduce students to the fundamentals of Supervised Learning and Deep Learning techniques and
algorithms.
2. To enable students to develop skills in implementing supervised and deep learning algorithms using
Python programming language and popular machine learning libraries.
3. To equip students with the ability to evaluate the performance of supervised and deep learning
models and select the appropriate models for specific problems.
4. To provide students with hands‐on experience in working with real‐world supervised and deep
learning projects.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Develop a deep understanding of the concepts and applications of Supervised Learning and Deep
Learning techniques and algorithms.
CO 2 Develop proficiency in using Python programming language and popular machine learning libraries to
implement supervised and deep learning models.
CO 3 Demonstrate the ability to evaluate the performance of supervised and deep learning models and
select the appropriate models for specific problems.
CO 4 Gain hands‐on experience in working with real‐world supervised and deep learning projects, including
image recognition, text analysis, and time‐series analysis.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 2 2 2 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 2 2 3
CO 2 3 2 2 2 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 2 2 3
CO 3 3 2 2 2 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 2 2 3
CO 4 3 2 2 2 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 2 2 3

UNIT‐I

Introduction to Machine Learning, Types of Machine Learning, Supervised Learning Basics, Regression and
Classification, Linear Regression, Logistic Regression, Model Evaluation Metrics

UNIT‐II

Introduction to Deep Learning, Artificial Neural Networks, Activation Functions, Loss Functions, Optimization

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1439
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Algorithms, Backpropagation Algorithm, Regularization Techniques

UNIT‐III

Introduction to CNNs, CNN Architecture, Convolution and Pooling Layers, Object Detection, Image
Segmentation, Transfer Learning, Introduction to RNNs, RNN Architecture, Long Short‐Term Memory (LSTM),
Gated Recurrent Unit (GRU), Text Generation, Language Translation

UNIT – IV

Generative Adversarial Networks (GANs), Autoencoders, Reinforcement Learning, Natural Language Processing
(NLP), Sentiment Analysis, Time Series Analysis

Textbooks:
1. Aurélien Géron, "Hands‐On Machine Learning with Scikit‐Learn, Keras, and TensorFlow", 2nd Edition,
O'Reilly Media, 2019. ISBN: 978‐1492032649
2. Francois Chollet, "Deep Learning with Python", 1st Edition, Manning Publications, 2017. ISBN: 978‐
1617294433

Reference Books:
1. "Hands‐On Machine Learning with Scikit‐Learn, Keras, and TensorFlow" by Aurélien Géron.
2. "Deep Learning" by Ian Goodfellow, Yoshua Bengio, and Aaron Courville.
3. "Pattern Recognition and Machine Learning" by Christopher M. Bishop.
4. Ian Goodfellow, Yoshua Bengio, and Aaron Courville, "Deep Learning", 1st Edition, MIT Press, 2016. ISBN:
978‐0262035613
5. Andrew Ng, "Machine Learning Yearning", eBook, 2018.
6. Sebastian Raschka and Vahid Mirjalili, "Python Machine Learning", 3rd Edition, Packt Publishing, 2019.
ISBN: 978‐1789955750

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1440
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Supervised and Deep Learning Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 7 MLDA‐EAE MLDA‐EAE‐3 ML‐463P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Supervised and Deep Learning) as this
is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Linear regression: Implement linear regression on a dataset and evaluate the model's performance.
2. Logistic regression: Implement logistic regression on a binary classification dataset and evaluate the
model's performance.
3. k‐Nearest Neighbors (k‐NN): Implement k‐NN algorithm on a dataset and evaluate the model's
performance.
4. Decision Trees: Implement decision trees on a dataset and evaluate the model's performance.
5. Random Forest: Implement random forest algorithm on a dataset and evaluate the model's performance.
6. Support Vector Machines (SVM): Implement SVM on a dataset and evaluate the model's performance.
7. Naive Bayes: Implement Naive Bayes algorithm on a dataset and evaluate the model's performance.
8. Gradient Boosting: Implement gradient boosting algorithm on a dataset and evaluate the model's
performance.
9. Convolutional Neural Networks (CNN): Implement CNN on an image classification dataset and evaluate the
model's performance.
10. Recurrent Neural Networks (RNN): Implement RNN on a text classification dataset and evaluate the
model's performance.
11. Long Short‐Term Memory Networks (LSTM): Implement LSTM on a time‐series dataset and evaluate the
model's performance.
12. Autoencoders: Implement autoencoders on an image dataset and evaluate the model's performance.
13. Generative Adversarial Networks (GANs): Implement GANs on an image dataset and evaluate the model's
performance.
14. Transfer Learning: Implement transfer learning on an image dataset and evaluate the model's
performance.
15. Reinforcement Learning: Implement reinforcement learning on a game environment and evaluate the
model's performance.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1441
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Supervised and Unsupervised Learning L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CSE‐AIML 6 PC PC ML‐352T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To learn about supervised learning and its algorithms
2. To learn about supervised learning networks
3. To learn about unsupervised learning
4. To learn about Unsupervised learning network,Autoencoder,Generative Adversarial Network
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Applying classification and regression algorithm to real world examples
CO 2 Learn about supervised learning network
CO 3 Applying clustering algorithms to real world examples
CO 4 Learn about Unsupervised learning network,Autoencoder,Generative Adversarial Network
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 2 3 3 3 2 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 2 3 2 3 3 3 2 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 3 3 2 3 3 3 2 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 4 3 2 3 3 3 2 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2

UNIT‐I

Supervised Learning: Classification, Ensemble Learning Classification‐Introduction, Example of Supervised

Learning, Classification Model, Classification Learning Steps, Common Classification Algorithms ‐ k‐Nearest
Neighbour (kNN), Decision tree, Random forest model, Support vector machines. Ensemble Learning‐ Boosting,
Bagging
Regression: Introduction, Regression Algorithms ‐ Simple linear regression, Multiple linear regression,
Polynomial Regression Model, Logistic Regression
Bayesian Concept Learning ‐ Introduction, Bayes’ Theorem, Bayesian Belief Network.

UNIT‐II

Supervised Learning Networks:

Perceptron: Representational power of Perceptron, The Perceptron Training Rule, Gradient Descent and Delta
Rule
Multilayer Networks: A differentiable Threshold Unit, Representational Power of Feedforward Networks

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1442
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Backpropagation Algorithm: Convergence and local minima, Hypothesis space search and Inductive Bias,
Generalization, overfitting and stopping criteria.
Regularization for Deep Learning: Parameter Norm Penalties, Dataset Augmentation, Noise Robustness, Early
Stooping, Sparse Representation, Dropout.
Optimization for Training Deep Models: Challenges in Neural network Optimization, Basic Algorithms,
Parameter Initialization Strategies.

UNIT‐III

Unsupervised Learning: Introduction, Unsupervised vs Supervised Learning, Application of Unsupervised

Learning, Clustering –Clustering as a Machine Learning task, Different types of clustering techniques,
Partitioning methods, Hierarchical clustering, Density‐based methods: DBSCAN.
Finding Pattern using Association Rule: Definition of common terms, Association rule, Apriori algorithm.

UNIT – IV

Unsupervised Learning Networks: Kohonen Self‐Organizing Feature Maps – architecture, training algorithm,
Kohonen Self Organizing Motor Map,Restricted Boltzmann machine
Autoencoders: Linear Factor Methods such as Probabilistic PCA and Factor Analysis, Independent Component
Analysis, Sparse Coding; Undercomplete Autoencoders, Regularized Autoencoders, Stochastic Encoders and
Decoders, Denoising Autoencoders, Contractive Autoencoders, Applications of Autoencoders.
Generative Adversarial Networks: Generative Vs Discriminative Modeling, Probabilistic Generative Model,
Generative Adversarial Networks (GAN), GAN challenges: Oscillation Loss, Mode Collapse, Uninformative Loss,
Hyperparameters, Tackling GAN challenges, Wasserstein GAN, Cycle GAN, Neural Style Transfer

Textbook(s):
1. Tom M. Mitchell, “Machine Learning”, McGraw‐Hill Education (India) Private Limited, 2013
2. Jennifer Grange ,” Machine Learning for Absolute Beginners: A Simple, Concise & Complete Introduction to
Supervised and Unsupervised Learning Algorithms”,Kindle
3. Kamal Kant Hiran, Ritesh Kumar Jain, Dr. Kamlesh Lakhwani, Dr Ruchi Doshi,” Master Supervised and
Unsupervised Learning Algorithms with Real Examples”, BPB Publications

References:
1. C. M. BISHOP (2006), “Pattern Recognition and Machine Learning”, Springer‐Verlag New York, 1st Edition
2. Michael W. Berry, Azlinah Mohamed,Bee Wah Yap,”Supervised and Unsupervised Learning for Data Science”

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1443
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Supervised and Unsupervised Learning Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CSE‐AIML 6 PC PC ML‐352P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Supervised and Unsupervised
Learning) as this is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Introduction to JUPYTER IDE and its libraries Pandas and NumPy

2. Program to demonstrate Multiple Linear Regression
3. Program to demonstrate SVM based classification
4. Implement Boolean gates using perceptron
5. Program to demonstrate Back‐Propagation Algorithm
6. Program to demonstrate k‐means clustering algorithm
7. Program to demonstrate Agglomerative Hierarchical clustering
8. Program to demonstrate PCA on face recognition
9. Compare the performance of PCA and Autoencoders on a given dataset
10. Build Generative adversarial model for fake (news/image/audio/video) prediction.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1444
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Supply Chain Management L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 6 QM‐EAE QM‐EAE‐1 QM‐326T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To understand about different types of building blocks of a supply chain network.
2. To understand the supply chain strategy and performance measures and supply chain integration.
3. To understand network designing and operation in supply chain and forecasting techniques.
4. To understand about supply chain restructuring.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Develop a sound understanding of the important role of supply chain management in today’s business
environment.
CO 2 Apply foundational business skills needed in SCM settings.
CO 3 Analyse the analytical business skills to address SCM challenges.
CO 4 Understand and apply the current supply chain theories, practices and concepts utilizing case
problems and problem‐based learning situations.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 3 3 ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 3
CO 2 3 3 3 3 ‐ 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 ‐ 3
CO 3 3 3 3 3 ‐ 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 ‐ 2
CO 4 3 3 3 2 ‐ 3 ‐ ‐ 2 2 ‐ 2

UNIT‐I

Introduction: Evolution of SCM, Building blocks of a supply chain network. Decision in a Supply Chain; Strategic,
tactical, and operational decisions, SCM in Indian Context.
Supply chain Strategy and performance measures: Customer service and cost trade‐ off; order delivery lead
time; supply chain responsiveness; delivery reliability, product variety; Benchmarking supply chain
performance using financial data. Supply chain optimization, integration and restructuring.

UNIT‐II

Supply chain inventory management: Types of Inventory, inventory related costs, managing cycle stock,
managing safety stock, managing seasonal stock, Supply chain redesign on the inventory, Inventory of short life
cycle products. Newsboy, Base‐stock, and (Q,r) models, multi‐echelon supply chains, Performance modelling of
supply chains using Markov chains and queuing networks.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1445
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Modes of transportation: choice and their performance measure, Vehicle Scheduling, Transportation costs in E
retailing.
Network designing and operation: planning for network operations, design of networks, Data for network
design, location of Service outlets.

UNIT‐III

Demand forecasting: Qualitative forecasting methods, Quantitative Forecasting methods, Time series
forecasting models.
Web based SCM: Internet‐enabled supply chains: e‐marketplaces, e‐procurement, elogistics, customer
relationship management, web services, supply chain automation, and supply chain integration.
Supply chain Integration: Internal and External, Building relationship and trust; Vendor management, customer
response.

UNIT ‐ IV

Supply chain Restructuring: Value addition curve, Entry point of customer, Supply chain mapping, point of
differentiation, Postponing for cost reduction, Change in the value addition curve.
Agile Supply chain, Pricing and revenue management.

Textbook(s):
1. Janat Shah, “Supply Chain Management: Text and Cases”, Pearson Education India, 2009.
2. Sunil Chopra, “Supply Chain Management, 3rd Ed”, Pearson Education India, 2009.

References:
1. Khanna O. P., “Industrial Engineering Management”.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1446
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Supply Chain Management Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 6 QM‐EAE QM‐EAE‐1 QM‐326P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Supply Chain Management) as this is
the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. To conduct experiment regarding building blocks of a supply chain network.

2. To perform decision in a Supply Chain; Strategic, tactical, and operational decisions using case study.
3. To conduct benchmarking supply chain performance using financial data.
4. To conduct supply chain inventory management with case study.
5. To calculate Performance modelling of supply chains using Markov chains and queuing networks.
6. To perform network designing and operation with data for network design.
7. To prepare demand forecasting with any given data and using appropriate method.
8. To perform Web based SCM.
9. To determine Supply Chain Restructuring.
10. To determine Pricing and revenue management with any given data.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1447
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Sustainable Engineering Technologies L P C

4 4

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 7 GTSE‐EAE GTSE‐EAE‐5 GTSE‐433

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To increase awareness on issues in areas of sustainability.
2. To understand the role of engineering and technology within sustainable development.
3. To know the methods and tools for sustainable development.
4. To develop the understanding of the role and impact of various aspects of engineering on
environmental, societal and economic problems.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Define the different types of environmental problems and their sustainable solutions.
CO 2 Make use of various standards for development of sustainable solutions.
CO 3 Apply the knowledge of renewable energy in sustainable urbanization.
CO 4 Explain new technology and advanced materials for Social and technological change.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 ‐ 1 2 ‐ ‐ 2 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐
CO 2 ‐ 1 2 1 1 2 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐
CO 3 1 1 2 ‐ ‐ 1 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐
CO 4 ‐ 1 ‐ ‐ 2 3 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2

UNIT‐I

Sustainable Engineering: Introduction, Need and Applications, Social‐environmental and economic

sustainability concepts, Sustainable development, connection between Technology and Sustainable
development, Challenges for sustainable development, Multilateral environmental agreements and protocols‐
Clean Development Mechanism (CDM).
Sustainable wastewater treatment, Zero waste concept, 3 R concept. Global environmental issues‐ Resource
degradation, Regional and Local Environmental Issues. Carbon credits and carbon trading, carbon foot print,
carbon capture and storage technology, LEED building and construction methods.

UNIT‐II

Basic concepts of sustainable habitat, material selection for sustainable design, Methods for increasing energy
efficiency of buildings.Tall Buildings and Elevators‐New Sustainable Design: Introduction, Recent Technological
Developments, Case Studies, Other Technologies, Future Developments, chilled beam system

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1448
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Engineering innovations and sustainable development goals: Engineering innovations to improve health sector,
water engineering for sustainable development, engineering technologies to reduce disaster risks, developing
sustainable and resilient energy system.

UNIT‐III

Energy Sources of the Future: Introduction, Biomass Energy Field, Energy from Water, Ensuring Sustainability of
Bioenergy in Practice, Geothermal Energy, Renewability of Energy Resources, Energy Vectors, and Energy
Technologies for Mobility, Solar Energy: Harvesting the Sun’s Energy for Sustainable Future, A Comparative
Energy‐Efficiency Analysis for Renewable Energy Technologies.
Sustainable Urbanization: Introduction, Why Urban Design Matters, Low‐Carbon Urbanization Strategies,
Innovation and New Technologies, public and electric transport, LED light technology.

UNIT – IV

Sustainable Materials and Technology: Recycling of waste into useful material and their energy applications,
Sustainable technologies for plastic transformation, Bifunctional nanoparticles for sustainable water splitting
applications, sustainable nanostructured materials for energy storage device, Sustainable development of
heavy metal detoxification from water, Sustainable remediation of industrial contaminated water towards
potential industrial applications
Alternative Materials Development Utilizing Advanced Nanotechnology, Biopolymers for Environmental
Applications: Highly Functional Polylactic Acid Composites Used for Durable Products, Computational Materials
Science and Computer‐aided Materials Design and Processing, Mechanisms of Organisms as Environment‐
Friendly Materials Design Tools.

Textbook(s):
1. David S‐K. Ting & Jacqueline A. Stagner, “Sustainable Engineering Technologies and Architectures”, AIP
Publishing LLC (2021).
2. David Allen (Author), David R. Shonnard (Author), “Sustainable Engineering: Concepts, Design and Case
Studies” Prentice Hall, 1st Edition (2011).

References:
1. Joanne Kauffman & Kun‐Mo Lee, “Handbook of Sustainable Engineering”, SpringerReference.
2. Bradley Striebig, Adebayo A. Ogundipe, Maria Papadakis , “Engineering Applications in Sustainable Design
and Development”, Cengage Learning, (2016).
3. John Twidell, “Renewable Energy Resources”, 4th Edition (2021).

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1449
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Sustainable Materials and Practices L P C

4 4

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 6 GTSE‐EAE GTSE‐EAE‐2 GTSE‐320

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. Demonstrate concepts of life‐cycle analysis including economic and sustainability aspects and apply
these concepts to sustainable construction
2. Evaluate the environmental impacts of different materials throughout their life cycle.
3. Analyze the energy consumption, carbon emissions, and resource depletion associated with materials.
4. Explore the applications of sustainable materials in various civil engineering disciplines, such as
structural engineering, transportation engineering, and geotechnical engineering.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Understand the concept of life cycle analysis in sustainability and economical aspects.
CO 2 Quantify the environmental impact of buildings in terms of energy consumption.
CO 3 Determine the carbon emission and resource depletion during construction..
CO 4 Examine the applications of sustainable asphalt and pavement material in transportation engineering
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 2 ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ 1 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 2 ‐ ‐ 3 2 ‐ 3 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 4 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 3

UNIT‐I

Introduction: Embodied energy, Operational energy in Building and Life cycle energy. Ecological foot print, Bio‐
capacity and calculation of planet equivalent.
Sustainable Timber: Sourcing of certified and responsibly harvested timber. Wood preservation techniques and
treatments. Engineered wood products and their sustainability advantages. Timber in sustainable building
systems and construction methods

UNIT‐II

Sustainable Concrete: Role of quality, minimization of natural resource utilisation, High volume fly ash
concrete, geo‐polymer concrete etc. concrete with alternative material for sustainability. Use of supplementary
cementitious materials (SCMs) such as fly ash, slag, and silica fume. Low‐carbon concrete and carbon footprint
reduction strategies. Concrete recycling and reuse, Self‐healing and self‐cleaning concrete.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1450
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Reduction in water consumption in concrete, Recycled aggregate, Energy for grinding crushing of cement
aggregate etc. and reduction. Operational energy in building role of materials and thermal conductivity

UNIT‐III

Sustainable Masonry: Alternative masonry materials such as rammed earth, cob, and straw bale, Clay Bricks
Comparative energy performance emission performance and financial performance, Indoor air quality, Paints,
Adhesive and sealants for use in building, Volatile organic content (VOC) emission issues and indoor air quality
for Sustainability and Health hazard.
Sustainable Steel and Metal Alloys: Recycling and reuse of steel and metal alloys. High‐performance and low‐
impact steel production methods. Corrosion protection and durability enhancements. Lightweight and high‐
strength alloys for structural applications.

UNIT – IV

Sustainable Asphalt and Pavement Materials: Use of recycled asphalt pavement (RAP) and reclaimed asphalt
shingles (RAS). Warm mix asphalt and energy‐efficient asphalt production techniques. Porous pavement
systems for stormwater management. Alternative pavement materials like rubberized asphalt and pervious
concrete.
Material Selection and Design Guidelines: Strategies for sustainable material selection in civil engineering
projects. Integrating sustainable materials into design and specifications. Cost and performance considerations
for sustainable materials. Case studies of successful projects utilising sustainable materials.

Textbook(s):
1 The Philosophy of Sustainable Design by Jason F. McLennan, Ecotone Publishing Co., 2004.
2. Sustainable Construction ‐ Green Building Design and Delivery by Charles J. Kibert, John Wiley & Sons, 2nd
edition, 2008.

References:
1. Sustainable Construction: Green Building Design and Delivery, Charles Kibert, John Wiley & Sons, 2005.
2. Sustainable Construction and Design by Regina Leffers, Prentice Hall, 2009.
3. Green Building Fundamentals by Mike Montoya, Pearson, 2nd edition, 2010

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1451
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Switch Mode Power Conversion L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 7 PED‐EAE PED‐EAE‐3 PED‐425T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. Understanding the function of semiconductor switches, inductor and capacitors in DC‐DC converters.
Modes of operation of converters.
2. To make aware about isolation in switch mode power conversion.
3. Controller basics, design and implementation.
4. Performance analysis of different control schemes
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Understanding the function of semiconductor switches, inductor and capacitors in DC‐DC converters.
Modes of operation of converters.
CO 2 To make aware about isolation in switch mode power conversion.
CO 3 Controller basics, design and implementation.
CO 4 Performance analysis of different control schemes
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 2 2 2 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 1
CO 2 3 3 2 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1
CO 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1
CO 4 3 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

UNIT‐I

Switched Mode DC‐to‐DC Converter: Introduction to buck, boost, buck‐boost DC‐DC converters; power
semiconductor switches diode, controlled switch; reactive components capacitor and inductor as energy
storage; Continuous and discontinuous operation converters, Modelling of DC‐DC converters.

UNIT‐II

Isolated and non‐isolated: Single‐switch and multi‐switch transformer‐isolated DC‐DC converters; Flyback and
forward converters, isolated half‐bridge, full‐bridge converters; Voltage‐fed and current‐fed converters.

UNIT‐III

DC‐DC Controller: DC‐DC converter controller, Controller structure, Positional‐integral (PI) controller,

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1452
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Positional‐integral‐Differential (PID) controller, Implementation of controllers, Control Design and parameters,

Pulse width modulation.

UNIT – IV

Switching Regulator Control: Small‐signal models for switching regulators, Performance analysis and design of
closed‐loop system under different control methods, and operating modes. Measurement of small signal
transfer functions, Soft‐switched and resonant DC‐DC Power converters.

Textbook(s):
1. N Mohan, T M Undeland and W P Robbins, "Power Electronics: Converters, Applications and Design", Wiley
2. Erickson, Robert W., Fundamentals of Power Electronics, Chapman & Hall, 1997

References:
1. A I Pressman, "Switching Power Supply Design", McGraw‐Hill
2. Application Notes from International Rectifiers and other Power Devices and ICs manufacturers
3. Middlebrook, R. D.(Robert David), and Slobodan Cuk, Advances in Switched‐Mode Power Conversion,
Volumes I and II, 2nd Edition, TESLAco, 1983.
4. V. Ramanarayanan Course Material on Switched Mode Power Conversion, Deptt of Electrical Engineering,
Indian Institute of Science, Bangalore 560012

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1453
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Switch Mode Power Conversion Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 7 PED‐EAE PED‐EAE‐3 PED‐425P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Switch Mode Power Conversion) as
this is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Simulate the Buck and Boost converter for the resistive load
2. Study of buck‐boost converter and show its continuous and discontinuous mode of operation.
3. Comparative performance analysis of linear and switch mode power supply.
4. Study of flyback DC‐DC converter with basic topology and ideal switch.
5. Study of full bridge converter application of battery charging.
6. Study of voltage and current fed converter topologies for high power applications.
7. Study of commonly used pulse width techniques.
8. Study of Buck converter closed loop voltage control.
9. Study of closed loop control of DC‐DC converter by using the PI controller.
10. Study of switching regulator as a voltage regulator.
11. Study of switching regulator selection and sizing.
12. Implementation of feedback control by using the proportional‐integral (PI) controller in a DC‐DC converter
with resistive load.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1454
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Switchgear and Protection L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EE 7 PCE PCE‐4 EEE‐411T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To understand components of protection system
2. To understand protection of feeders, generator and transformer
3. To understand working and applications of circuit breaker
4. To understand working of static relay
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Ability to understand components of protection system
CO 2 Ability to understand protection of feeders, generator and transformer
CO 3 Ability to understand working and applications of circuit breaker
CO 4 Ability to understand working of static relay
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 2 3 3 2 1 1 1 2 2 3 1
CO 2 3 2 3 3 2 1 1 1 2 2 3 1
CO 3 3 2 3 3 2 1 1 1 2 2 3 1
CO 4 3 2 3 3 2 1 1 1 2 2 3 1

UNIT‐ I

Protective Devices: Philosophy of protection, Nature, Causes and consequences of faults, Zone of protection,
Requirements of a protective scheme, Basic terminology components of protection scheme. Relay
classification, Principle of different types of electromagnetic relay. General equation of phase and magnitude
comparators, Duality of comparators, Electromagnetic relays, over current relays Directional relays, Distance
relay‐ impedance, Reactance and Mho type, Differential relays.

UNIT‐ II

Feeder: Protection: Over current and earth fault protection, Distance protection, Pilot wire protection, Carrier
current protection.
Generator Protection: Biased differential protection, restricted earth fault protection, Field suppression,
Negative sequence protection, Earth fault detection in rotor circuit
Power transformer Protection: Biased differential protections, restricted earth fault protection, Buchholz relay
Protection of combined transformer and alternator.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1455
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Bus Zone Protection: frame leakage and circulating current scheme‐use of Translay relay.

UNIT‐ III

Circuit Breakers: Formation of arc during circuit breaking. Characteristics of electric arc. Theories of arc
Interruption. Recovery and restriking voltage, interruption of capacitive and inductive currents. Current
chopping. Principle of A.C. and D.C. circuit breaking requirements of good circuit breaker circuit breaker rating.
Different types of circuit breakers. Air break and Air blast circuit breaker. Plain break and controlled break all
circuit breakers. Minimum oil circuit breakers. Vacuum circuit breaker, SF6 circuit breaker. D.C. Circuit breaker.
H.R.C. Fuse: Construction and characteristics

UNIT‐IV

Static Relays : Development and classification of static relays, Different types of phase and amplitude
capacitors, Basic static relays used in protective scheme, Elementary idea about digital & numerical protection.
Testing and maintenance of protective gear, Protection against surge‐surge absorber, Surgediverter.
Arrangement of Bus bar, Circuit breaker and isolator. Current limiting reactors in power system and their
arrangement calculation of fault MVA for symmetrical short circuits. Circuit breaker capacity.

Textbooks:
1. Paithanker, Bhide ,”Fundamentals of Power System Protection “ PHI 2014
2. BadriRam”Power System Protection and Switchgear” TMH Publications 2nd Edition

References:
1. Van C Warrington, “Protective Relays” Vol.‐I & II
2. Ravindranath, M.Chander, “Power System Protection and SwitchGear”, Wiley Eastern Ltd. New Delhi
3. T S Madhav Rao, “Power System Protection”, TMH Pulication
4. Sunil S.Rao, “Switch Gear and Protection”, Khanna Publication

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1456
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Switchgear and Protection Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EE 7 PCE PCE‐4 EEE‐411P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Switchgear and Protection) as this is
the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. To study the numerical IDMT over current relay. Obtain & plot its current‐time characteristics for various
plugs setting time multiplier & measure pickup / reset ratio.
2. To plot operating Characteristics of percentage numerical differential relay.
3. To plot operating Characteristics of numerical under voltage / over voltage relay.
4. To plot operating Characteristics of numericalNegative sequence relay.
5. To study C.T./ PT testing by comparison method.
6. Instantaneous over current protection Relay based on Mann and Morrison algorithm.
7. Implementation of over current protection of transformer in LabVIEW.
8. MATLAB Program for Simulating Three Sample Algorithms.
9. Implementation Methods of Motor Protection in LabVIEW.
10. Ground Fault Protection of Three Phase Line Using Phase Quantities.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1457
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

System Modeling, Simulation and Analysis L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ME 6 PCE PCE‐3 MEE‐336T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To understand about the fundamental concepts, the necessary knowledge and the basic skills related
to system modeling.
2. To develop simulation model using heuristic methods.
3. To analyse Simulation models using input analyzer, and output analyzer.
4. To explain Verification and Validation of simulation model.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Describe the role of important elements of discrete event simulation and modeling paradigm.
CO 2 Conceptualize real world situations related to systems development decisions, originating from source
requirements and goals.
CO 3 Develop skills to apply simulation software to construct and execute goal‐driven system models.
CO 4 Interpret the model and apply the results to resolve critical issues in a real world environment.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 3 3 ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 2 3 3 3 3 ‐ 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 ‐ 2
CO 3 3 3 3 3 ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ 2 2 ‐ 3
CO 4 3 3 3 2 ‐ 3 ‐ ‐ 2 2 ‐ 3

UNIT‐I

Introduction of system modelling: Definition of Mechanical Systems, Philosophy and approach; Systems and
Design: Integrated Product Design, Modelling, Analysis and Simulation, Man‐Machine Interface; Product
design, process route modelling, Optimization techniques, Case studies & industrial applications

UNIT‐II

Introduction to Simulation: Simulation, Advantages, Disadvantages, Areas of application, System environment,

components of a system, Model of a system, types of models, steps in a simulation study. Simulation Examples:
Simulation of Queuing systems, Simulation of Inventory System, Other simulation examples.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1458
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT‐III

General Principles: Concepts in discrete ‐ event simulation, event scheduling/ Time advance algorithm,
simulation using event scheduling. Random Numbers: Properties, Generations methods, Tests for Random
number‐ Frequency test, Runs test, Autocorrelation test

UNIT – IV

Analysis of Simulation Data Input Modelling: Data collection, Identification and distribution with data,
parameter estimation, Goodness of fit tests, Selection of input models without data, Multivariate and time
series analysis. Verification and Validation of Model – Model Building, Verification, Calibration and Validation of
Models.
Output Analysis – Types of Simulations with Respect to Output Analysis, Stochastic Nature of output data,
Measures of Performance and their estimation, Output analysis of terminating simulation, Output analysis of
steady state simulations. Simulation Softwares: Selection of Simulation Software, Simulation packages, Trend in
Simulation Software.

Textbook(s):
1. Averill M Law, W David Kelton, Simulation Modelling & Analysis, McGraw Hill International Editions –
Industrial Engineering series, 4th Edition, ISBN: 0‐07‐100803‐9.
2. Jerry Banks, John S Carson, II, Berry L Nelson, David M Nicol, Discrete Event System Simulation, Pearson
Education, Asia, 4th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 81‐203‐2832‐9.

References:
1. Geoffrey Gordon, System Simulation, Prentice Hall publication, 2nd Edition, 1978, ISBN: 81‐203‐0140‐4
2. Narsingh Deo, Systems Simulation with Digital Computer, PHI Publication (EEE), 3rd Edition, 2004, ISBN: 0‐
87692‐028‐8

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1459
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

System Modeling, Simulation and Analysis Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ME 6 PCE PCE‐3 MEE‐336P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (System Modeling, Simulation and
Analysis) as this is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. To study features of Arena Package and Input Modeling

2. Simulation of Manufacturing System I
3. Simulation of Manufacturing System II
4. Simulation of Service Operations I
5. Simulation of Service Operations II
6. Simulation of JIT Kanban Multi Product Assembly Line System
7. Modelling a Live Problem
8. Analyse the output of a system with different input variables using simulation.

Note: Suggested Simulation Packages; Promodel, Arena, Quest, Witness, Extend, Simio

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1460
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Systems Design and Simulation L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EE 6 PCE PCE‐3 EEE‐364T
EEE 7 PCE PCE‐4 EEE‐435T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To create admittance matrix for systems
2. To evaluate load flow in systems
3. To develop load forecasting methods
4. To create state estimation of systems
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Ability to create admittance matrix for systems
CO 2 Ability to evaluate load flow in systems
CO 3 Ability to develop load forecasting methods
CO 4 Ability to create state estimation of systems
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 2 3 3 2 1 1 1 2 2 3 1
CO 2 3 2 3 3 2 1 1 1 2 2 3 1
CO 3 3 2 3 3 2 1 1 1 2 2 3 1
CO 4 3 2 3 3 2 1 1 1 2 2 3 1

UNIT‐ I

Network Formulation and Graph Theory: Introduction, Network Equations,Graph Theory, Development of
Network Matrices from Graph Theoretic Approach, Building Algorithm for the Bus Impedance Matrix,
Modification of ZBUS matrix due to changes in the primitive network, Transformer modeling for YBUS

UNIT‐ II

Load Flow Studies: Introduction, Static Load Flow Equations and solution methods: Gauss Seidal method,
Newton Raphson method, DeCoupled method, Fast Decoupled method, Modified Fast Decoupled, Concept of
Optimal Power Flow, Solution of Optimal power flow by Gradient method, Solution of Optimal power flow by
Newton’s Raphson linear Programming Methods.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1461
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT‐ III

Load Forecasting: Objectives of forecasting ‐ Load growth patterns and their importance in planning Load
forecasting Based on discounted multiple regression technique‐Weather sensitive load forecasting‐
Determination of annual forecasting‐Use of AI in load forecasting.
Modelling of Power System Components: The need for modelling of power system, different areas of power
system analysis. Simplified models of non‐electrical components like boiler, steam & hydro‐turbine &governor
system. Transformer modelling such as auto‐transformer, tapchanging & phase‐shifting transformer

UNIT‐IV

Introduction to State Estimation in Power Systems: Introduction, Power system state estimation, Maximum
Likelihood Weighted Least Squares Estimation, Introduction, , Maximum Likelihood Concepts, Matrix
Formulation, State Estimation of an AC network, Development of Method, An Introduction to Advanced topics
in state estimation, Detection andIdentification of Bad measurements, Estimation of quantities not being
measured, Network Observability and Pseudo measurements, Applicationof Power Systems State Estimation

Textbooks:
1. Power Generation Operation & Control, John Wiley & Sons, Inc, 1996‐ A. J.Wood and B. F. Wollenberg
2. Computational Methods for Electric Power Systems, Second Edition, Mariesa Crow, CRC Press, 2009

References:
1. AC‐DC Power System Analysis, IEE London UK, 1998‐ Jos Arrillaga and Bruce Smith
2. Advanced Power System Analysis and Dynamics, New Age International Ltd,New Delhi, 1992‐ L. P. Singh
3. Power System Analysis, Tata Mcgraw Hill, New Delhi, 1999‐ Hadi Sadat
4. Elements of Power System Analysis, W.D. Stevenson Jr., 4th Edition, Mcgraw hill,
5. Power System Analysis, A.R. Bergen, Vijay Vittal, 2nd edition, Pearson Publication.
6. Modern Power System Analysis, I.J. Nagarath, D.P.Kothari, 3rd edition, Tata Mcgraw Hill, New Delhi

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1462
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Systems Design and Simulation Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EE 6 PCE PCE‐3 EEE‐364P
EEE 7 PCE PCE‐4 EEE‐435P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Systems Design and Simulation) as this
is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Understanding various Commands of MATLAB and solving simple DC circuit through MATLAB.
2. Develop program in MATLAB using Gauss‐Seidel Method and solve a given P. S. Network problem.
3. Develop program in MATLAB using Fast‐Decoupled Method and solve a given P. S. Network problem.
4. Develop program in MATLAB for formation of Z‐bus by modification method. Form the Z‐bus for a given
network manually as well as through Progam and match the results.
5. Develop program in MATLAB for Fault current, bus voltages and line currents for (i) 3‐ phase symmetrical
Fault (ii) Single Line to ground fault (iii) Line to Line fault (iv) Double line to ground fault.
6. Develop program in MATLAB for calculation of optimal dispatch, Fuel Cost by (i) analytical method (ii)
graphical demonstration method, neglecting linelosses.
7. Develop program in MATLAB for calculating state Estimation and solve a given network manually and using
the program and match theresults.
8. Develop program in MATLAB for calculation of generator shift distribution factors.
9. Develop program in MATLAB for calculation of line outage distribution factors.
10. Write a program for plotting Power – Delta curve for fault occurs in network (solving of swing equation).

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1463
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Systems Restructuring for Optimization L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EE/EEE 7 PCE PCE‐5 EEE‐433T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To understand the restructuring of power sector
2. To understand the economics of power sector
3. To understand the Transmission Open Access and Pricing Issues
4. To understand the Transmission Congestion Management and Pricing
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Ability to understand the restructuring of power sector
CO 2 Ability to understand the economics of power sector
CO 3 Ability to understand the Transmission Open Access and Pricing Issues
CO 4 Ability to understand the Transmission Congestion Management and Pricing
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 2 3 3 2 1 1 1 2 2 3 1
CO 2 3 2 3 3 2 1 1 1 2 2 3 1
CO 3 3 2 3 3 2 1 1 1 2 2 3 1
CO 4 3 2 3 3 2 1 1 1 2 2 3 1

UNIT‐ I

Introduction to Restructuring of Power Industry: Introduction, Reasons for restructuring / deregulation of

power industry, Understanding the restructuring process, Introduction to issues involved in deregulation,
Reasons and objectives of deregulation of various power systems across the world . Indian power sector‐past
and present status, overview of growth of power sector in India. Players in the Indian power sector.

UNIT‐ II

Fundamentals of Economics: Introduction, Consumer behavior, Supplier behavior, Market equilibrium, Short‐
run and Long‐run costs, Various costs of production, Relationship between short‐run and long‐run average
costs, Perfectly competitive market.
Introduction of ancillary services – Types of Ancillary services – Classification of Ancillary services – Load
generation balancing related services – Voltage control and reactive power support devices – Black start
capability service ‐ ancillary service –Co‐optimization of energy and reserve services.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1464
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT‐ III

Deregulation of power industry, restructuring process, issues involved in deregulation, competitive market
structure of deregulated power system, operation and control aspects of deregulated power system.
Transmission Open Access and Pricing Issues: Introduction, power wheeling, transmission open access, cost
components in transmission, pricing of power transactions, transmission open access and pricing mechanisms
in various countries.

UNIT‐IV

Transmission Congestion Management and Pricing‐ transmission cost allocation methods, LMP, FTR and
Congestion Management. Role of FACTS devices in competitive power market, Available Transfer Capability,
Distributed Generation in restructured markets.

Textbooks:
1. Steven Stoft, “Power system economics: designing markets for electricity”, John Wiley & Sons, 2002.
2. Mohammad Shahidehpour, MuwaffaqAlomoush, Marcel Dekker, “Restructured electrical power systems:
operation, trading and volatility” Pub., 2001.
3. W. H. J. R. Dunn, M. A. Rossi, B. Avaramovic: Impact of market restructuring on power systems operation,
IEEE computer Applications on Power Engineering, vol. 8, January 1995, pp 42–47.
4. Understanding electric utilities and de‐regulation, Lorrin Philipson, H. Lee Willis, Marcel Dekker Pub., 1998.

References:
1. Making competition work in electricity Sally Hunt, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., 2002.
2. Operation of restructured power systems Kankar Bhattacharya, Jaap E. Daadler, Math H.J Bollen, Kluwer
Academic Pub., 2001.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1465
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Systems Restructuring for Optimization Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EE/EEE 7 PCE PCE‐5 EEE‐433P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Systems Restructuring for
Optimization) as this is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Use MATLAB's power flow toolbox or build your own load flow algorithm to calculate voltage magnitudes,
angles, active power, and reactive power flows.
2. Use MATLAB to analyze the connectivity and power flow between different buses or areas in the network.
3. Implement an OPF algorithm in MATLAB to optimize the operation of the power system after restructuring.
4. Determine the optimal commitment of generation units in the restructured power system.
5. Optimize the expansion of the transmission network after restructuring to accommodate changes in power
flow patterns.
6. Investigate the provision of ancillary services, such as frequency regulation or reactive power support, in
the restructured power system.
7. Explore the integration of renewable energy sources into the restructured power system.
8. Perform reliability assessment of the restructured power system using MATLAB.
9. Analyze the impact of different market mechanisms on the restructured power system.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1466
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Theory of Machines L P C
3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

OAE 6 ME‐OAE ME‐OAE‐1 OME‐324T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To impart knowledge of various types of mechanisms and perform their synthesis by analytical and
graphical method.
2. To develop the understanding of Gears, Gear trains and Gyroscope.
3. To facilitate students to understand the function and working of flywheels and governor.
4. To learn and study the phenomena of balancing and mechanical vibrations.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Examine various types of mechanisms and execute their kinematic analysis.
CO 2 Explain the concept of Gears, Gear Trains and Gyroscope.
CO 3 Describe the working principle of flywheel and governor.
CO 4 Understand the concept of balancing and mechanical vibration system.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 3 3 ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 2 3 3 3 3 ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 3 3 3 3 3 ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 4 3 3 3 3 ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2

UNIT‐I

Mechanisms and Machines: Introduction of Simple mechanism, Different types of Kinematics pair, Grubler’s
rule for degree of freedom, Grashof’s Criterion for mobility determination, Inversions of 4R, 3R‐P, and 2R‐2P
chains. Kinematic Analysis of Planar Mechanisms: Velocity and acceleration diagrams, Application of relative
velocity method in Slider crank and four bar mechanism, Instantaneous centre method, Kennedy‐Arnold
theorem, Acceleration diagrams for simple mechanism.
Cams: Classification, Construction of Cam profile, Analysis of Cams with uniform acceleration, and retardation,
SHM, Cycloidal motion.

UNIT‐II

Gears and Gear Trains: Classification of gears, Terminology, Geometry of tooth profiles, Law of gearing,
Cycloidal and Involute profile, Undercutting and interference, Methods to avoid interference, Condition for
minimum number of teeth to avoid interference, Contact ratio, Interference, Simple, Compound and Epicyclic

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1467
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

gear trains, Tabular column method for Epicyclic gear trains, Fixing torque.
Gyroscopes: Principles of Gyroscope, Effect of Gyroscopic couple on automobiles, ships and aircrafts.

UNIT‐III

Dynamic Analysis: Analysis of single slider crank mechanism for displacement, velocity and acceleration using
analytical method, Klein’s Construction, Turning moment diagrams, Flywheel.
Mechanical governors:Function of a governor, types of governors: weight and spring loaded, Hunting and
Sensitivity, efforts and power of a governor, controlling diagrams.

UNIT ‐ IV

Balancing: Static and Dynamic balancing, balancing of rotating and reciprocating masses, single and
multicylinder engines.
Vibrations: Free vibration of a body, single degree of freedom system, Rayleigh method, free vibrations with
viscous damping, Logarithmic decrement, Response of damped spring mass system to harmonic forces,
Whirling of shafts, Vibration isolation, Transmissibility Ratio.

Textbook(s):
1. S.S. Rattan, “Theory of Machines”, Tata McGraw Hill.
2. V.P. Singh, “Theory of Machines”, Dhanpat Rai & Co.(P)Ltd.

References:
1. J E Shigley “Theory of Machines”, Pearson.
2. Thomas Beven, “The Theory of Machines”, CBS Publishers.
3. R.L. Norton, “Kinematics and Dynamics of Machinery”, Tata McGraw‐Hill.
4. 4. P.L. Ballaney, “Theory of Machines & Mechanism”, Khanna Publishers.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1468
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Theory of Machines Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

OAE 6 ME‐OAE ME‐OAE‐1 OME‐324P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Theory of Machines) as this is the
practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. To study and verify the inversions of four bar (4R), single slider (3R‐1P) crank and double slider (2R‐2P)
crank mechanism and also prove Grashof’s Law.
2. To find out experimentally the Coriolis component of acceleration and compare with theoretical values
3. To study various types of CAM and follower mechanisms. Also, draw the CAM profile for the given CAM
apparatus and determine jumping speed.
4. Draw velocity and acceleration diagram of engine mechanism using Klien’s construction
5. To study various types of gear and gear trains and to determine gear ratio of simple, compound and
epicyclic gear trains.
6. To calculate the torque on a Planet Carrier and torque on internal gear using epicyclic gear train and
holding torque apparatus.
7. To determine the radius of gyration and moment of Inertia of a given rod.
8. To study and verify the motion of any one Governor.
9. To study and verify the gyroscopic law of motion.
10. To study and verify the dynamic balancing of rotating masses.
11. To determine the natural frequency of undamped free vibration of the given spring mass system.
12. To find the moment of inertia of a fly wheel.
13. To determine whirling speed of shaft theoretically and experimentally.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1469
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Total Quality Management L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 7 QM‐EAE QM‐EAE‐3 QM‐441T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To understand the concept of Quality.
2. To understand the Implication of Quality on Business.
3. To Implement Quality Implementation Programs.
4. To have exposure to challenges in Quality Improvement Programs.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Evaluate the usage of TQM as an essential tool for quality improvement.
CO 2 Review therole of leadership, performance appraisal and supplier partnership as the important
strategies in the field of TQM.
CO 3 Examine seven traditional tools used for enhancing the quality of a system.
CO 4 Estimate and compare the various ISO 9000‐ ISO 9000‐2000, ISO 14000 Quality Systems.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 ‐ ‐
CO 2 3 2 2 2 2 2 ‐ 2 2 ‐ ‐ ‐
CO 3 3 3 3 3 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 4 3 ‐ 2 ‐ 2 3 2 ‐ ‐‐ ‐ ‐ ‐

UNIT‐I

Introduction, need for quality, evolution of quality; Definitions of quality, product quality and service quality;
Basic concepts of TQM, TQM framework, contributions of Deming, Juran and Crosby. Barriers to TQM; Quality
statements, customer focus, customer orientation & satisfaction, customer complaints, customer retention;
costs to quality.

UNIT‐II

TQM principles; leadership, strategic quality planning; Quality councils‐ employee involvement, motivation;
Empowerment; Team and Teamwork; Quality circles, recognition and reward, performance appraisal;
Continuous process improvement; PDCE cycle, 5S, Kaizen; Supplier partnership, Partnering, Supplier rating &
selection.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1470
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT‐III

The seven traditional tools of quality; New management tools; Six sigma‐ concepts, methodology, applications
to manufacturing, service sector including IT, Bench marking process; FMEA‐ stages, types.
TQM tools and techniques, control charts, process capability, concepts of six sigmas, Quality Function
Development (QFD), Taguchi quality loss function; TPM‐ concepts, improvement needs, performance
measures.

UNIT ‐ IV

Quality systems, need for ISO 9000, ISO 9001‐9008; Quality system‐ elements, documentation, Quality
auditing, QS 9000, ISO 14000‐ concepts, requirements and benefits; TQM implementation in manufacturing
and service sectors.

Textbook(s):
1. Bester field D.H. et al., Total quality Management, 3rd ed., Pearson Education Asia, 2006.
2. Janaki Raman B. and Gopal R.K., Total Quality Management, Prentice Hall India, 2006.

References:
1. Evans J.R. and Lindsay W.M., The management and Control of Quality, 8th ed., first Indian edition, Cengage
Learning, 2012.
2. Suganthi L. and Samuel A., Total Quality Management, Prentice Hall India, 2006.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1471
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Total Quality Management Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 7 QM‐EAE QM‐EAE‐3 QM‐441P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Total Quality Management) as this is
the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. To perform Quality considerations in design.

2. To understand difference between product quality and service quality with case study.
3. To calculate costs to quality of a given specimen.
4. To perform PDCE cycle of a case study.
5. To study Six sigma‐ concepts, methodology.
6. To apply TQM tools and techniques on case study.
7. To construct control charts on given data.
8. To calculate Taguchi quality loss function.
9. To study seven traditional tools of quality and their application.
10. To study TQM implementation in manufacturing and service sectors with case study.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1472
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Traffic Engineering and Pavement Design L P C

4 4

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CE 5 PC PC CEC‐311

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To design the various geometric parameters of road.
2. To study the traffic characteristics and design of road intersections & signals.
3. To design and construct the pavement by selecting appropriate materials and design approach.
4. To learn methods to construct various types of roads and propose the maintenance strategies.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Design the various geometric parameters of road.
CO 2 Study the traffic characteristics and design of road intersections & signals.
CO 3 Design and construct the pavement by selecting appropriate materials and design approach.
CO 4 Learn methods to construct various types of roads and propose the maintenance strategies.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 2 1 1 1 ‐ ‐ 2 ‐ 1 1 1 ‐
CO 2 1 2 3 1 2 2 1 ‐ 2 1 2 2
CO 3 3 2 3 2 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 1 3 1
CO 4 2 3 3 2 3 2 2 ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ 1

UNIT‐I

Geometric Design of Highways (IRC:73‐ Latest revision): Cross section elements–pavement surface
characteristics, camber, kerbs, shoulder, Sight distance, Horizontal curves, Superelevation, Extra widening,
Transition curves, Gradient, Vertical curves–Summit and valley curves.
Traffic Engineering: Traffic characteristics–road user characteristics, vehicular characteristics; Traffic studies
and analysis: Traffic volume studies–methods of counting volume, presentation of volume data; Traffic speed
studies– Types of speeds, methods of measuring spot speeds, presentation of spot speed data; Speed & delay
studies–floating car method; Origin & destination studies–objective, methods of conducting O & D study,
presentation of O‐D data; Parking studies; Accident studies.

UNIT‐II

Traffic Flow and Roadway Capacity: Traffic flow characteristics–space headways, time headways; Speed‐Flow‐
Density relations; Passenger car units, recommended PCU values, peak hour factor; Capacity and level of
service of rural highways and urban roads as per latest IRC recommendation.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1473
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Traffic Regulation and Control: Traffic signs and their classification; Traffic signal–classification, general
principles of two‐phase signal design, Design of traffic signal by webster method and IRC; Intersection at grade,
Grade separated intersection, Design of roundabouts as per IRC:65‐2017.

UNIT‐III

Design of Highway Pavement: Types of Pavements, Difference between flexible and rigid pavement, Design
factors–Standard axle load, ESWL, Rigidity factor; Design of flexible pavement– group index method, CBR
method, California resistance value method, Design of flexible pavement by IRC:37 (Latest revision); Design of
rigid pavement, Westergaard theory, load and temperature stresses, joints, IRC method of rigid pavement
design (IRC:58‐2015), Design of Dowel bars, Design of Tie bars.

UNIT – IV

Highway Construction and Maintenance: Construction of Subgrade, Water Bound Macadam (WBM), Wet mix
macadam (WMM), Granular Sub Base (GSB), Tack Coat, Prime Coat, Seal Coat, Surface Dressing, Bituminous
Macadam (BM), Bituminous concrete, Dry lean concrete (DLC), Cement Concrete (CC) road construction;
Maintenance of bituminous and concrete roads, Concepts of overlay design.

Note: All designs and procedure are to be done with reference to latest revision of IRC as given below in
reference section.

Textbook(s):
1. S.K. Khanna, C.E.G. Justo, A. Veeraragavan, “Highway Engineering”, Nem Chand & Bros., 10th Edition (2021).
2. S.K. Khanna, C.E.G. Justo, A. Veeraragavan, “Highway Materials and Pavement Testing”, Nem Chand and
Bros.

Referencs:
1. L.R. Kadiyali, “Traffic Engineering and Transport Planning”, Khanna Publishers.
2. Rangwala, “Highway Engineering”,Charotar Publishing House, 12th Edition (2022).
3. IRC: 37‐ Latest revision, “Tentative Guidelines for the design of Flexible Pavements” Indian Roads Congress,
New Delhi.
th
4. IRC:58‐2015 Guidelines for the Design of Plain Jointed Rigid Pavements for Highways (4 Revision).
st
5. IRC:65‐2017 Guidelines for Planning and Design of Roundabouts (1 Revision)
6. IRC:73‐1980 Geometric Design Standards for Rural (Non‐Urban) Highways
7. IRC:106‐1990 Guidelines for Capacity of Urban Roads in Plain Areas
8. IRC:93‐1985 Guidelines on Design and Installation of Road Traffic Signals.
9. IRC:92‐2017 Guidelines for Design of Interchanges in Urban Areas (1st Revision)
10. IRC:SP:68‐2005, “Guidelines for Construction of Roller Compacted Concrete Pavements”, Indian Roads
Congress, New Delhi.
11. IRC:15‐2002, “Standard Specifications and Code of Practice for construction of Concrete Roads” Indian
Roads Congress, New Delhi.
12. MORTH, “Specifications for Road and Bridge Works”, Ministry of Shipping, Road Transport & Highways,
Published by Indian Roads Congress, New Delhi.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1474
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Transmission Lines, Waveguides and Antenna Design L P C

4 4

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ECE/EE‐VDT/EC‐ACT 5 PC PC ECC‐309

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To familiarise the various types of transmission lines and to deliberate the losses associated.
2. To communicate information about waveguide concepts
3. To impart the understanding of characteristics of different types of high frequency resonators.
4. To impart the knowledge to define different terminologies of antenna parameters.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 To Understand the primary model of wave propagation in Transmission Lines and Analyze the various
line parameters and Apply smith chart for line parameter and impedance calculations.
CO 2 Discuss the fundamental concepts of wave propagation in rectangular and circular waveguides and
evaluate their characteristics.
CO 3 Understand the characteristics of resonance frequency of different types of resonator and its modes
configuration.
CO 4 To describe the basic parameters of antenna and interpret to solve the radiation components
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 ‐ 2 1 ‐ 2
CO 2 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 ‐ 2 1 ‐ 2
CO 3 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 ‐ 2 1 ‐ 2
CO 4 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 ‐ 2 1 ‐ 2

UNIT I

Microwave Transmission Lines: Transmission‐Line Equations, Solutions of Transmission‐Line Equations.

Reflection Coefficient, Transmission Coefficient. Standing Wave, Standing‐Wave Ratio, Line Impedance, Line
Admittance, Open and short circuited lines. Smith Chart Impedance Matching: Single‐Stub Matching, Double‐
Stub Matching. Losses in transmission lines. Lines of different lengths – λ/2, λ/4, λ/8 lines.
Introduction to Microstrip transmission line.

UNIT II

Microwave Waveguides and Components:

Introduction Rectangular Waveguides: Solutions of Wave Equations in Rectangular Coordinates, TE Modes in
Rectangular Waveguides, TM Modes in Rectangular Waveguides, Power Transmission in Rectangular

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1475
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Waveguides, Losses in Rectangular Waveguides, Excitations of Modes in Rectangular Waveguides.

Circular Waveguides: Solutions of Wave Equations in Cylindrical Coordinates, TE Modes in Circular
Waveguides, TM Modes in Circular Waveguides, Excitations of Modes in Circular Waveguides.

UNIT III

Microwave Resonators: Series and Parallel Resonant Circuits: Series Resonant Circuit, Parallel Resonant Circuit,
Loaded and Unloaded Q.
Transmission Line Resonators: Short‐Circuited λ/2 line, Open‐Circuited λ/2, Short‐Circuited λ/4 Line;
Rectangular Waveguide Cavities: Resonant Frequencies, Q of the TE10l Mode; Circular Waveguide Cavities:
Resonant Frequencies, Q of the TEnml Mode. Dielectric Resonators: Resonant Frequencies, Q of the TE01δ Mode.
Excitation of Resonators: Critical Coupling, A Gap‐Coupled Microstrip Resonator.

UNIT IV

Antennas: Introduction, Types of Antennas, Radiation Mechanism. Introduction monopole and dipole antenna.
Fundamental Parameters: Introduction, Radiation Pattern, Radiation Power Density, Radiation Intensity,
Beamwidth, Directivity, Antenna Efficiency, Gain, Realized Gain, Beam Efficiency, Antenna Radiation Efficiency,
Friis Transmission Equation and Radar Range Equation
Radiation Integrals and Auxiliary Potential Functions: The Vector Potential A for an Electric Current Source J,
The Vector Potential F for A Magnetic Current Source M, Electric and Magnetic Fields for Electric (J) and
Magnetic (M) Current Sources, Solution of the Inhomogeneous Vector Potential Wave Equation, Far‐Field
Radiation, Duality Theorem, Reciprocity Theorems

Textbook(s):
1. M. N. O. Sadiku , “Elements of Electromagnetics”, Oxford University Press 2007
2. S.Y Liao, “Microwave devices and Circuits” Pearson publications
3. D.M Pozar, “Microwave Engineering”, Wiley Publications.
4. Antenna for all Application‐John D Kraus, third edition‐TMH publication
5. Antenna Theory‐Constantine A. Balanis ‐Third edition‐Wiley Publication

References:
1. E. C. Jordon, K. G. Balman, “Electromagnetic Waves & Radiation System” Prentice Hall, India
2. Antennas and Wave Propagation–G. S. N. Raju (Pearson)
3. Foundations of Antenna Theory and Techniques – Vincent F. Fusco(Pearson)

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1476
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Transmission Lines, Waveguides and Antenna Design Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ECE/EE‐VDT/EC‐ACT 5 PC PC ECC‐357

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Transmission Lines, Waveguides and
Antenna Design) as this is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. To design and simulate a coaxial transmission line and obtain the propagation constant.
2. To design and simulate strip line and microstrip line and coplanar line and obtain the propagation
constants.
3. To design and simulate a rectangular waveguide.
4. To design and simulate a circular waveguide.
5. To design and simulate a dipole antenna.
6. To design and simulate a slotted a rectangular waveguide antenna.
7. To design and simulate a leaky wave antenna using the rectangular waveguide.
8. To design and simulate a rectangular microstrip patch antenna.
9. To design and simulate a circular patch antenna.
10. To design and simulate a rectangular microstrip patch antenna array.
11. To design and simulate a circular microstrip patch antenna array.

Note: These experiments may be performed using simulation software like HFSS, CST and IE3D.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1477
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Transport Planning and Intelligent Transportation System L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CE 7 PCE PCE‐4 CEE‐407T
EAE 7 IE‐EAE IE‐EAE‐4 IE‐437T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To understand system approach to traffic planning process based on travel demand and traffic
management.
2. To develop traffic management for accident prevention, smooth highway traffic flow.
3. To study Application of queuing approach to traffic flow, trip generation, trip distribution models for
traffic analysis.
4. To develop intelligent transport systems.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Examine essential characteristics of the traffic stream using manual and automatic methods.
CO 2 Illustrate traffic signal timings and traffic flow curves.
CO 3 Make use of queuing approach, trip generation and trip distribution models.
CO 4 Explain the role of ITS and its applications for improving the performance of the transportation
system.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 2 1 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐
CO 2 2 1 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐
CO 3 3 1 2 1 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐
CO 4 2 ‐ 1 ‐ 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐

UNIT‐I

Urban travel characteristics, Evolution of Planning Process, Supply and Demand – Systems approach, Overall
Planning process, Long term Vs. Short‐term planning, Methods of Measuring Spot Speeds, Radar Speed Meters,
Video Camera Method, Moving Observer Method, Presentation of Travel Time and Journey Speed Data,
Vehicle Volume Classification and Occupancy Counts, Origin‐Destination Survey, Parking Surveys, Use of
photographic Techniques in Traffic Survey, Analysis and Interpretation of Traffic Study, fitting a Normal
Distribution Curve to Observed Speed Data, Time Mean Speed and Space Mean Speed.

UNIT‐II

Traffic and Parking Problems, Parking Space requirement standards, Design standards for on‐street and off‐

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1478
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

street parking facilities. Public transport systems, planning for pedestrians and bicycles. Requirement of traffic
Signals and traffic signs, Fixed Time Signals and Vehicle Actuated signals, Optimum Cycle Length, Co‐
Coordinated Control of Signals, Delay at Signalized Intersections.
Introduction to Travel Demand and Traffic Management, Traffic Management measures and their influence on
accident prevention, Road Safety Audit. Theory of Traffic Flow, Basic Diagram of Traffic flow, Speed Flow
Curves, Vehicular Stream equations and diagrams, Shock Waves in traffic. Uninterrupted speed flow
relationships, Freeway capacity and level of service.

UNIT‐III

Queuing system and input parameters, Queuing discipline, Application of Queuing approach to traffic flow, Gap
and Headway Distribution, Trip Generation Analysis: Type of trips, Factor affecting trip generation, Trip
Generation models: zonal models, Household models, Trip distribution models: Growth factor models, Gravity
models. Mode split analysis: Mode choice behaviour, Factor influencing the choice of mode, Mode split curves,
Traffic assignment, Development of comprehensive mobility plan, uncontrolled intersections.

UNIT ‐ IV

Basics of Intelligent Transport System, Challenges and opportunities in ITS, Systems engineering in ITS and ITS
architecture, ITS applications in Transportation system management, Traffic operations, Public transportation,
Freight and commercial vehicle operations, Electronic tolling and pricing, Personal transportation, Rural and
regional transportation, Sustainable transportation, Connected and autonomous vehicles (C&AV), Supporting
ITS Technologies, ITS standards and specifications, Indian Smart Cities Mission, ITS Case studies

Textbook(s):
1. Papacostas, C.S. and Prevedouros, P.D., “Transportation Engineering and Planning”, PHI, Third Edition,
(2012).
2. Dr. L.R.Kadiyali, “Traffic Engineering and Transport Planning”, Khanna Publishers.

References:
1. Ashok Kumar Jain, “Urban Transport: Planning and Management”, APH pub Corporation, ND (2009).
2. Partha Chakroborty, Animesh Das, “Principles of Transportation Engineering”, PHI, New Delhi.
3. Michael J. Bruton, “An Introduction to Transportation Planning”, Routledge Library Editions: Global Transport
Planning, (2021).
4. Hutchinson B.G., Allen, Taylor & Francis, Principles of Urban Transportation System Planning, McGraw Hill,
(1986)
5. Michael D. Meyer, “Transportation Planning Handbook”, Institute of Transportation Engineers, John Wiley &
Sons, Fourth Edition, (2016).

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1479
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Transport Planning and Intelligent Transportation System Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CE 7 PCE PCE‐4 CEE‐407P
EAE 7 IE‐EAE IE‐EAE‐4 IE‐437P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Transport Planning and Intelligent
Transportation System) as this is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. To determine traffic stream characteristics by moving observer method.

2. To determine distribution characteristics by plotting frequency and cumulative frequency distribution
curves for traffic data.
3. To determine parking space requirement by plotting parking accumulation curve.
4. To determine parking space requirement for data obtained by In‐Out parking survey method.
5. To determine parking space requirement for data obtained by License plate methos of parking survey.
6. To plot fundamental diagrams of traffic flow.
7. To design traffic signal system.
8. To calculate peak hour factor and actual flow rate for volumetric data obtained at a traffic intersection.
9. To determine maximum queue length and maximum delay at a toll plaza using queuing analysis.
10. To compute trip matrix using growth factor model.
11. To study the Case Studies of the latest ITS Implementations.
12. To study applications of Intelligent Transport System.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1480
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Turbomachines L P C
3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ME 6 PCE PCE‐1 MEE‐308T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To provide the knowledge of basic principles, governing equations and applications of turbo machine.
2. To understand the construction, operation, and analysis of steam turbines.
3. To understand the construction, operation, and analysis of hydraulic turbines.
4. To understand the construction, operation, and analysis design of centrifugal pumps and compressors.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Explain the fluid and thermodynamics principles relevant to turbo machines.
CO 2 Analyse the performance of the steam turbines based on the principles of fluid mechanics and
thermodynamics.
CO 3 Analyse the performance of the hydraulic turbines based on the principles of fluid mechanics.
CO 4 Analyse the performance of the centrifugal pumps and compressors based on the principles of fluid
mechanics and thermodynamics.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 3 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 2 3 3 3 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 3 3 3 3 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 4 3 3 3 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐‐ ‐ ‐ 2

UNIT‐I

Introduction to Turbomachines, angular momentum principle, velocity diagram, Euler’s energy equation,
physical meaning of energy equation Classification of Turbomachines. Comparison with positive displacement
machines, general thermodynamic analysis.
Flow through nozzle: nozzle definition, classification, velocity of sound or pressure pulse in fluid, stagnation
properties, critical pressure ratio and choke flow, nozzle efficiency.

UNIT‐II

Steam Turbines:
Impulse Turbines: classification, single stage impulse turbine, velocity triangle, blade work, blade efficiency,
condition for maximum blade efficiency, need of compounding, pressure or Rateau compounding, velocity or

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1481
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Curtis compounding.
Reaction turbine – Parsons’s turbine, velocity triangle, blade work, blade efficiency, condition for maximum
blade efficiency, carry over efficiency, losses in steam turbines, reheat factor and condition line, governing of
turbine.

UNIT‐III

Hydraulic Turbines: Classification, various efficiencies.

Pelton Wheel – Principle of working, velocity triangles, design parameters, maximum efficiency, and numerical
problems.
Francis turbine: Principle of working, velocity triangles, design parameters, Kaplan and Propeller turbines ‐
Principle of working, velocity triangles, design parameters and Numerical Problems. Theory and types of Draft
tube.

UNIT ‐ IV

Centrifugal Pumps: Parts of centrifugal pump, working of centrifugal pump, different heads and efficiencies of
centrifugal pump, Velocity triangles and their analysis, Minimum speed for starting the flow, Maximum suction
lift, Net positive suction head, Cavitation, Need for priming, Pumps in series and parallel.
Centrifugal Compressors: Parts of centrifugal compressor, working of centrifugal compressor, Ideal energy
transfer, Slip, Power input parameter, Pressure coefficient, Compressor efficiency, Losses in centrifugal
compressor, surging and choking.

Textbook(s):
1. Seppo A. Korpela, “Principles of Turbomachinery”, John Wiley& Sons, 2nd ed. (2019).
2. V Ganesan, “Gas Turbines”, Mc Graw Hill Education; 3rd ed. (2014).

References:
1. R.K.Turton, Principles of Turbomachinery, Chapman and Hall, 2nd ed. (1995).
2. E. Dick, “Fundamentals of Turbomachines”, Springer, 1st ed. (2015).
3. G. Ingram, “Basic concepts in Turbomachinery”, BookBoon, 1st ed. (2009).
4. S. M. Yahya, “Turbines, Compressors & Fans”,Mc Graw Hill Education, 2nd ed. (2002).
5. P. K. Nag, “Power Plant Engineering”, Mc Graw Hill Education; 3rd ed. (2009).

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1482
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Turbomachines Lab L P C
2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ME 6 PCE PCE‐1 MEE‐308P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Turbomachines) as this is the practical
component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Study of Pelton turbine.

2. To conduct performance test on the given Pelton wheel turbine.
3. Study of Francis turbine.
4. To conduct performance test on the given Francis turbine.
5. Study of centrifugal pump.
6. To conduct performance test on the given centrifugal pump.
7. Study of Kaplan turbine.
8. To conduct performance test on the given Kaplan turbine.
9. Study of centrifugal compressor.
10. To conduct performance test on the given centrifugal compressor.
11. Parametric analysis of the performance of Pelton turbine using any software.
12. Parametric analysis of the performance of Francis turbine using any software.
13. Parametric analysis of the performance of centrifugal pump using any software.
14. Parametric analysis of the performance of centrifugal compressor using any software.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1483
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Understanding Human Being, Nature and Existence L P C

Comprehensively 4 4

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CSE‐in‐EA 6 OAE‐CSE‐EA OAE‐1 OUHV‐338
EE‐VDT/EC‐ACT 6 OAE‐ECE‐EA OAE‐1 OUHV‐338
OAE 6 UHV‐OAE UHV‐OAE‐1 OUHV‐338

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To help the students develop clarity about human being, human aspirations and their fulfilment
through all‐encompassing resolution.
2. To facilitate the competence to understand the harmony in nature/existence and participation of
human being in the nature/existence.
3. To help the students develop the understanding of human tradition and its various components.
4. To distinguish between self and body, and formulate the role of self in the day‐to‐day activities of a
human being
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Develop clarity about human aspirations and their fulfillment through all‐encompassing resolution
CO 2 Evaluate the significance of right understanding for a happy and prosperous life
CO 3 Examine the participation of human being in ensuring harmony in the family, society, nature and
existence
CO 4 Formulate the holistic way of living leading to human tradition with its various components
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 ‐ 3 1 1 ‐ 1
CO 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 ‐ 3 1 1 ‐ 1
CO 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 ‐ 3 1 1 ‐ 1
CO 4 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 ‐ 3 1 1 ‐ 1

UNIT‐I

Introduction‐Basic Human Aspiration, its fulfillment through All‐encompassing Resolution: The basic human
aspirations and their fulfillment through Right understanding and Resolution, Right understanding and
Resolution are the activities of the Self, Self is central to Human Existence; All‐encompassing Resolution for a
Human Being, its details and solution of problems in the light of Resolution.

UNIT‐II

Right Understanding (Knowing)‐ Knower, Known & the Process: The domain of right understanding starts

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1484
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

from understanding the human being (the knower, the experiencer and the doer); and extends up to
understanding nature/existence – its interconnectedness and co‐existence; and finally understanding the role
of human being in existence (human conduct).
Understanding Human Being: Understanding the human being comprehensively is the first step and the core
theme of this course; human being as co‐existence of the self and the body; the activities and potentialities of
the self; Reasons for harmony/contradiction in the self.

UNIT‐III

Understanding Existence (including Nature): A comprehensive understanding (knowledge) about the

existence, which certainly includes the Nature. The need and the process of inner evolution (through self‐
exploration, self‐awareness and self‐evaluation)‐ particularly awakening to activities of the Self: Realization,
Understanding and Contemplation in the Self (Realization of Co‐Existence, Understanding of Harmony in
Nature and Contemplation of Participation of Human in this harmony/ order leading to comprehensive
knowledge about the existence).

UNIT ‐ IV

Understanding Human Conduct, All‐encompassing Resolution and Holistic Way of Living: Understanding
different aspects of All‐encompassing Resolution (understanding, wisdom, science etc.), Holistic way of living
for Human Being with All‐encompassing Resolution covering all four dimensions of human endeavor viz.,
realization, thought, behavior and work (participation in the larger order) leading to harmony at all levels from
self to Nature and entire Existence, ultimately, leading to a Humane Society and Human Tradition.

Textbooks:
1. A Foundation Course in Human Values and Professional Ethics, R R Gaur, R Asthana, G P Bagaria, 2nd
Revised Edition, Excel Books, New Delhi, 2019. ISBN 978‐93‐87034‐47‐1
2. Professional Ethics and Human Values, Premvir Kapoor, Khanna Book Publishing, New Delhi, 2022.

References:
1. Avartansheel Arthshastra, A. Nagraj, Divya Path Sansthan, Amarkantak, India
2. Economy of Permanence – (a quest for social order based on non‐violence), J. C. Kumarappa (2010), Sarva‐
Seva‐Sangh‐Prakashan, Varansi, India
3. Energy and Equity, Ivan Illich (1974), The Trinity Press, Worcester & Harper Collins, USA
4. IshadiNauUpnishad, Shankaracharya, Geeta press, Gorakhpur,
5. ManavVyavaharDarshan, A. Nagraj, Divya Path Sansthan, Amarkantak, India
6. ManaviyaSamvidhan, A. Nagraj, Divya Path Sansthan, Amarkantak, India
7. MahasatipatthanSutta, S N Goenka, Vipassana Research Institute, First Edition, 1996
8. Small Is Beautiful: A Study of Economics as if People Mattered, E. F. Schumacher, 1973, Blond & Briggs, UK
9. Slow is Beautiful, Cecile Andrews http://www.newsociety.com/Books/S/Slow‐is‐Beautiful)
10. Science & Humanism – towards a unified worldview, P. L. Dhar & R. R. Gaur (1990), Commonwealth
Publishers, New Delhi
11. Sanchian Sri Guru Granth Sahib Ji, ShiromaniGurdwaraParbhandhak Committee, 2001
12. SamanSuttam, JinendraVarni, 1974.
13. VyavaharvadiSamajshastra, A. Nagraj, Divya Path Sansthan, Amarkantak, India
14. VyavahatmakJanvad, A. Nagraj, Divya Path Sansthan, Amarkantak, India.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1485
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Universal Human Values L P C

1 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

All 6 HS/MS HS HS‐304

Marking Scheme:
4. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
5. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
6. This is an NUES paper, hence all examinations to be conducted by the concerned teacher.
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper.
Course Objectives :
1. To help the students appreciate the essential complementarily between 'VALUES' and 'SKILLS' to
ensure sustained happiness and prosperity which are the core aspirations of all human beings.
2. To facilitate the development of a Holistic perspective among students towards life and profession as
well as towards happiness and prosperity based on a correct understanding of the Human reality and
the rest of existence. Such a holistic perspective forms the basis of Universal Human Values and
movement towards value‐based living in a natural way.
3. To highlight plausible implications of such a Holistic understanding in terms of ethical human conduct,
trustful and mutually fulfilling human behaviour and mutually enriching interaction with Nature.
4. To analyze the value of harmonious relationship based on trust and respect in their life and profession
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Evaluate the significance of value inputs in formal education and start applying them in their life and
profession
CO 2 Distinguish between values and skills, happiness and accumulation of physical facilities, the Self and
the Body, Intention and Competence of an individual, etc.
CO 3 Examine the role of a human being in ensuring harmony in society and nature.
CO 4 Apply the understanding of ethical conduct to formulate the strategy for ethical life and profession.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 ‐ 3 1 1 ‐ 1
CO 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 ‐ 3 1 1 ‐ 1
CO 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 ‐ 3 1 1 ‐ 1
CO 4 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 ‐ 3 1 1 ‐ 1

UNIT‐I

Introduction‐Basic Human Aspiration, its fulfillment through All‐encompassing Resolution: The basic human
aspirations and their fulfillment through Right understanding and Resolution, Right understanding and
Resolution as the activities of the Self, Self being central to Human Existence; All‐encompassing Resolution for a
Human Being, its details and solution of problems in the light of Resolution

UNIT‐II

Understanding Human Being: Understanding the human being comprehensively as the first step and the core

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1486
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

theme of this course; human being as co‐existence of the self and the body; the activities and potentialities of
the self; Basis for harmony/contradiction in the self

UNIT‐III

Understanding Nature and Existence: A comprehensive understanding (knowledge) about the existence,
Nature being included; the need and process of inner evolution (through self‐exploration, self‐awareness and
self‐evaluation), particularly awakening to activities of the Self: Realization, Understanding and Contemplation
in the Self (Realization of Co‐Existence, Understanding of Harmony in Nature and Contemplation of
Participation of Human in this harmony/ order leading to comprehensive knowledge about the existence).

UNIT ‐ IV

Understanding Human Conduct, All‐encompassing Resolution & Holistic Way of Living: Understanding Human
Conduct, different aspects of All‐encompassing Resolution (understanding, wisdom, science etc.), Holistic way
of living for Human Being with All‐encompassing Resolution covering all four dimensions of human endeavor
viz., realization, thought, behavior and work (participation in the larger order) leading to harmony at all levels
from Self to Nature and entire Existence

Textbook(s):
1. R R Gaur, R Asthana, G P Bagaria, 2019 (2nd Revised Edition), A Foundation Course in Human Values and
Professional Ethics. ISBN 978‐93‐87034‐47‐1, Excel Books, New Delhi.
2. Premvir Kapoor, Professional Ethics and Human Values, Khanna Book Publishing, New Delhi, 2022.

References:
1. Ivan Illich, 1974, Energy & Equity, The Trinity Press, Worcester, and Harper Collins, USA
2. E.F. Schumacher, 1973, Small is Beautiful: a study of economics as if people mattered, Blond & Briggs,
Britain.
3. Sussan George, 1976, How the Other Half Dies, Penguin Press. Reprinted 1986.
4. Donella H. Meadows, Dennis L. Meadows, Jorgen Randers, William W. Behrens III, 1972, Limits to Growth –
Club of Rome’s report, Universe Books.
5. A Nagraj, 1998, Jeevan Vidya EkParichay, Divya Path Sansthan, Amarkantak.
6. P L Dhar, RR Gaur, 1990, Science and Humanism, Commonwealth Publishers.
7. A N Tripathy, 2003, Human Values, New Age International Publishers.
8. Subhas Palekar, 2000, How to practice Natural Farming, Pracheen (Vaidik) Krishi Tantra Shodh, Amravati.
9. E G Seebauer& Robert L. Berry, 2000, Fundamentals of Ethics for Scientists &Engineers, Oxford University
Press
10. M Govindrajran, S Natrajan& V.S. Senthil Kumar, Engineering Ethics (including Human Values), Eastern
Economy Edition, Prentice Hall of India Ltd.
11. B P Banerjee, 2005, Foundations of Ethics and Management, Excel Books.
12. B L Bajpai, 2004, Indian Ethos and Modern Management, New Royal Book Co., Lucknow. Reprinted 2008.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1487
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Unsupervised Learning L P C
3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 7 MLDA‐EAE MLDA‐EAE‐4 ML‐465T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To learn about unsupervised learning and clustering algorithms
2. To learn about Gaussian mixture models and linear dimensional reduction methods
3. To learn about autoencoders and generative adversarial network
4. To learn about outlier detection,density estimation methods and unsupervised learning networks
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Applying clustering algorithms for the real world data
CO 2 Applying Dimensional reduction techniques for feature extraction and learn,Gaussian mixture models
CO 3 Learn about Autoencoders and Genearative adversarial network
CO 4 Applying outlier and novelity detection,density estimation methods to real world data and learn
about unsupervised learning networks
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 2 3 3 3 2 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 2 3 2 3 3 3 2 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 3 3 2 3 3 3 2 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 4 3 2 3 3 3 2 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2

UNIT‐I

Unsupervised learning ‐ Introduction, Unsupervised vs Supervised Learning, Application of Unsupervised

Learning,
Clustering –Clustering as a Machine Learning task, Different types of clustering techniques, Partitioning
methods, Hierarchical clustering, Density‐based methods: DBSCAN
Biclustering :Spectral co‐clustering,spectral biclustering
Finding Pattern using Association Rule ‐ Definition of common terms, Association rule, Apriori algorithm.

UNIT‐II

Gaussain Mixture Models: Gaussian mixture ,Variational Bayesian Gaussian mixture

Manifold learning:Introduction,Isomap,Locally linear embedding,Modified locally linear embedding,Spectral
embedding,MDS(Multi dimensional scaling, t‐distributed Stochastic Neighbor Embedding (t‐SNE)

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1488
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Decomposing signals in components (matrix factorization problems):PCA(Principal component Anlysis),Factor

Analysis, Kernel Principal Component Analysis (kPCA), Truncated singular value decomposition and latent
semantic analysis, Independent component analysis (ICA), Non‐negative matrix factorization (NMF or NNMF),
Latent Dirichlet Allocation (LDA)

UNIT‐III

Autoencoders: Architecture,Layers in autoencoder ,training of autoencoder ,Sparse Coding, Undercomplete

Autoencoders, Regularized Autoencoders, Stochastic Encoders and Decoders, Denoising Autoencoders,
Contractive Autoencoders, Applications of Autoencoders.
Generative Adversarial Networks: Generative Vs Discriminative Modeling, Probabilistic Generative Model,
Generative Adversarial Networks (GAN), GAN challenges: Oscillation Loss, Mode Collapse, Uninformative Loss,
Hyperparameters, Tackling GAN challenges, Wasserstein GAN, Cycle GAN, Neural Style Transfer

UNIT ‐ IV

Novelty and outlier detection:Overview of outlier detection methods,Novelty detection,outlier detection

Density estimation:Histograms and kernel density estimation
Unsupervised Learning Networks: Kohonen Self‐Organizing Feature Maps – architecture, training algorithm,
Kohonen Self‐Organizing Motor Map,Restricted Boltzmann machine(neural network model)

Textbook(s):
1. Tom M. Mitchell, “Machine Learning”, McGraw‐Hill Education (India) Private Limited, 2013.
2. Benyamin Ghojogh, Mark Crowley, Fakhri Karray, , Ali Ghodsi , Elements of Dimensionality Reduction and
Manifold Learning,Springer

References:
1. C. M. BISHOP (2006), “Pattern Recognition and Machine Learning”, Springer‐Verlag New York, 1st Edition
2. Kevin Murphy, Machine learning: a probabilistic perspective.
3. Jennifer Grange ,” Machine Learning for Absolute Beginners: A Simple, Concise & Complete Introduction to
Supervised and Unsupervised Learning Algorithms”,Kindle

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1489
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Unsupervised Learning Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 7 MLDA‐EAE MLDA‐EAE‐4 ML‐465P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Unsupervised Learning) as this is the
practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Setting up the Jupyter Notebook and Executing a Python Program

2. Installing Keras, Tensorflow and Pytorch,Pandas ,numpy etc libraries and making use of them
3. Apply EM algorithm to cluster a set of data stored in a .CSV file. Use the same data set for clustering using
k‐Means algorithm. Compare the results of these two algorithms and comment on the quality of clustering.
You can add Java/Python ML library classes/API in the program.
4. Program to demonstrate k‐means clustering algorithm
5. Program to demonstrate DBSCAN clustering algorithm
6. Program to demonstrate PCA and LDA on Iris dataset
7. Compare the performance of PCA and Autoencoders on a given dataset
8. Build Generative adversarial model for fake (news/image/audio/video) prediction.
9. Outlier detection in time series dataset using RNN
10. Anomaly detection using Self‐Organizing Network

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1490
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Utilization of Electrical Energy L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EE/EEE 6 PCE PCE‐1 EEE‐320T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. Demonstrate laws of illumination and lightning schemes
2. Principles and operations of electrical heating and welding
3. Characteristics and operation of various traction motors
4. Demonstrate electrolysis and design of batteries
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Implement laws of illumination
CO 2 Demonstrate electrical heating and welding
CO 3 Implement braking schemes on traction motors
CO 4 Acquire knowledge of construction of energy storage devices
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 2 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 3 2 3
CO 2 3 2 1 2 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 2
CO 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 3
CO 4 3 3 3 2 3 3 2 2 3 2 2 2

UNIT I

Illumination: Introduction, terms used in illumination, laws of illumination, polar curves, photometry,
integrating sphere, sources of light, discharge lamps, Mercury Vapour and Sodium Vapour lamps‐ their
characteristic and applications. Performance comparison between tungsten filament lamps, fluorescent tubes,
CFL and LED Lights. Basic principles of light control, types and design of lighting schemes and flood lighting.

UNIT II

Electrical Heating :Principle and application of resistance, induction and dielectric heating;,Infrared or radiant
heating, High frequency eddy current heating, arc furnaces, induction furnace, electric supply for high
frequency heating applications.
Welding: Resistance welding; arc welding, welding generator and welding transformer, properties of arcing
electrode, comparison between resistance and arc welding, comparison between A.C. and D.C. welding.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1491
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT III

Electric Traction: Advantages of electric traction, requirements of an ideal traction system, different system of
electric traction; comparison between D.C. and A.C. systems of railway electrification; speed – time curves,
different types of traction motors and their characteristics; parallel operation of traction motors.
Starting and speed control of 3 phase induction motors, braking, advantages and disadvantages of regenerative
braking. Calculation of energy returned during regeneration.

UNIT IV

Electroplating: Principles and applications of electrolysis. Faraday’s law of electrolysis, electroplating;

calculation of current required for depositing given amount of metal, current efficiency, voltage‐energy
efficiency, extraction of metals electro deposition, factors governing deposition process.
Energy Storage Devices: Constructional details, principle of operation of Rechargeable Alkaline, Nickel –
Cadmium, Nickel‐Metal Hydride, Lithium ion and Lead‐acid batteries, their comparison and applications.
Charging of batteries and rating. Fuel cell and use of electric double layer capacitor (super capacitor) as battery
bank.

Textbooks:
1. Pratab. H. “Art and Science of Utilization of Electrical Energy”: Dhanpat Rai & Sons.
2. N.V. Suryanarayana, “Utilization of Electrical Power including Electric Drives and ElectricTraction”,New Age.

References:
1. C.L. Wadhwa, “Generation, Distribution and Utilization of Electrical Energy”, New Age.
2. E. Openshaw Taylor, “Utilization of Electric Energy”, Orient Longman, Universities Press

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1492
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Utilization of Electrical Energy Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EE/EEE 6 PCE PCE‐1 EEE‐320P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Utilization of Electrical Energy) as this
is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Demonstration and calculation of current for electro plating process used to different metals.
2. Demonstration of large size cut model of different types of batteries.
3. Study of charging methods of batteries and calculation of their life cycle.
4. Charging and discharging of super capacitors.
5. To plot polar curves for various lamps.
6. Verification of illumination laws.
7. Performance comparison of MV lamps, SV lamps, filament lamps, CFL & LED lights.
8. Design of lighting schemes for house / commercial complex / industry / street light / flood light.
9. Demonstration of resistance / inductance / dielectric heatings.
10. Characteristics of welding transformer.
11. Speed control of various traction motors.
12. Braking schemes for traction motors.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1493
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

VHDL Programming L P C
3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ITE 6 PCE PCE‐1 CIE‐326T
ECE 6 PCE PCE‐1 ECE‐306T
EE‐VDT 6 PC PC ECE‐306T
CSE‐in‐EA 7 OAE‐CSE‐EA OAE‐2 ES‐403T
EC‐ACT 7 OAE‐ECE‐EA OAE‐2 ES‐403T
EAE 7 ES‐EAE ES‐EAE‐3B ES‐403T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To provide knowledge of basics of VHDL Programming.
2. To impart knowledge of Combinational logic circuit simulation and its implementation.
3. To impart knowledge of simulation and implementation of Synchronous Sequential logic circuit.
4. To impart knowledge of simulation and implementation of Asynchronous Sequential logic circuit.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 To understand the basics of VHDL Programming.
CO 2 To understand simulation and implementation of Combinational logic circuit.
CO 3 To understand simulation and implementation of Synchronous Sequential logic circuit.
CO 4 To understand simulation and implementation of Asynchronous Sequential logic circuit.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 2 2 3 3 2 2 2 ‐ 1 2 2 3
CO 2 3 2 3 3 3 2 2 ‐ 1 2 2 3
CO 3 3 2 3 3 3 2 2 ‐ 1 2 2 3
CO 4 3 2 3 3 3 2 2 ‐ 1 2 2 3

UNIT‐I

Introduction to VHDL, design units, data objects, signal drivers, inertial and transport delays, delta delay, VHDL
data types, concurrent and sequential statements, configuration declaration, instantiation.

UNIT‐II

Combinational logic circuit design and VHDL implementation of following circuits –full adder, Subtractor,
decoder, encoder, multiplexer, ALU, Subprograms – Functions, Procedures, attributes, generic, generate,
package, IEEE standard logic library, file I/O, test bench, barrel shifter, 4X4 key board encoder,
multiplier, divider, Hamming code encoder and correction circuits.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1494
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT‐III

Sequential circuit design: flip‐flops, registers, counters. Synchronous Sequential circuit design: finite state
machines, Mealy and Moore, state assignments, design and VHDL implementation of FSMs, Linear feedback
shift register (Pseudorandom and CRC).

UNIT – IV

Asynchronous sequential circuit design – primitive flow table, concept of race, critical race and hazards, design
issues like metastability, synchronizers, clock skew and timing considerations Introduction to place & route
process, Introduction to ROM, PLA, PAL, Architecture of CPLD and FPGA (Xilinx/Altera).

Textbook(s):
1. Stephen Brown, Zvonko Vranesic, “Fundamentals of Digital Logic with VHDL design”, TMH.
2. Douglas Perry , “VHDL” 4th Edition, TMH.

References:
1. J. Bhasker, “A VHDL Primmer”, Prentice Hall 1995.
2. Charles. H.Roth , “Digital System Design using VHDL”, PWS (1998)
3. John F. Wakerley , “Digital Design Principles And Practices” , Pearson Education
4. Navabi Z , “VHDL‐Analysis & Modelling of Digital Systems”, McGraw Hill.
5. William I. Fletcher, “An Engineering Approach To Digital Design”, Prentice Hall
6. M. Morris Mano, “Digital Design 3rd Edition”, Pearson.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1495
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

VHDL Programming Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ITE 6 PCE PCE‐1 CIE‐326P
ECE 6 PCE PCE‐1 ECE‐306P
EE‐VDT 6 PC PC ECE‐306P
CSE‐in‐EA 7 OAE‐CSE‐EA OAE‐2 ES‐403P
EC‐ACT 7 OAE‐ECE‐EA OAE‐2 ES‐403P
EAE 7 ES‐EAE ES‐EAE‐3B ES‐403P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (VHDL Programming) as this is the
practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Design all gates using VHDL.

2. Write VHDL programs for the following circuits, check the wave forms and the hardware generated
i) half adder ii) full adder
3. Write VHDL programs for the following circuits, check the wave forms and the hardware generated
i) multiplexer ii) demultiplexer
4. Write VHDL programs for the following circuits, check the wave forms and the hardware generated
i) decoder ii) encoder
5. Write a VHDL program for a comparator and check the wave forms and the hardware generated
6. Write a VHDL program for a code converter and check the wave forms and the hardware generated
7. Write a VHDL program for a FLIP‐FLOP and check the wave forms and the hardware generated
8. Write a VHDL program for a counter and check the wave forms and the hardware generated
9. Write VHDL programs for the following circuits, check the wave forms and the hardware generated
i) ALU ii) shift register

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1496
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Virtual Instrumentation L P C
3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ICE 7 PCE PCE‐4 ICE‐403T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. Ability to develop basic understanding of Virtual Instrumentation & Labview.
2. Ability to design a Virtual Instrumentation model.
3. Ability to analyze different Arrays
4. Ability to apply labview for various Applications.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Understand basic concepts of Labview
CO 2 Apply PC interfacing principles for data acquisition
CO 3 Appraise the usefulness of LabVIEW for real time data acquisition and analysis
CO 4 Design instrumentation and control applications using LabVIEW
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 ‐ 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 3
CO 2 3 2 3 ‐ 3 3 3 3 3 ‐ ‐ 3
CO 3 3 3 ‐ ‐ 3 ‐ 3 3 3 ‐ ‐ 3
CO 4 3 2 ‐ ‐ 3 3 3 3 3 ‐ 3 3

UNIT I

Introduction: Virtual Instrumentation: Definition & Architecture of virtual instrumentation system, Advantages
of Labview, Salient features of labview, Virtual Instrument & Traditional Instrument, Application area of Virtual
Instrumentation,
Introduction to LabView: Comparison with conventional programming, popular data flow and VI software
packages, building a VI front panel and block diagram

UNIT II

Data Flow Programming Techniques: Graphical programming in data flow, creating sub VI’s, For and While
loops, case and sequence structure, formula nodes, local and global , string and file I/O, array and clusters,
creating one‐dimensional, two dimensional and multidimensional arrays, initializing array, deleting, inserting
and replacing elements, rows, columns and pages with in arrays, arrays functions, auto indexing, creating two
dimensional arrays using loops.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1497
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT III

Plotting Data, String and File Input/Output: Plotting data: Types of waveforms, waveform graphs, waveform
charts, XY graphs, Digital waveform graphs, 3D graphs, customizing graphs & charts, configuring a graph or
chart
String and File Input/Output: File formats, fill I/O functions, path functions, sample VI’s to demonstrate file
write & read, generating file names automatically, String functions.

UNIT IV

Data Acquisition Basics: A/D and D/A converters, Plug‐in Analog Input / Output cards, Digital Input and Output
Cards, Selecting and Configuring data acquisition device, Organization of the DAQ VI system, design of digital
voltmeter with transducer input, counters and timers, timing, interrupts, DMA.
Common Instrumentation Interfaces: RS232C/ RS485, GPIB, use of library functions to communicate with
different instruments

Textbooks:
1. Jeorome Jovitha, “ Virtual Instrumentation using Labview”, PHI
2. Sanjay Gupta, joseph john, “Virtual Instrumentation Using Labview”, TMH

References:
1. Gary johnson, “Labview Graphical programming”, Second Edition TMH.
2. Ronald W Larsen, “Labview for Engineers” , prentice Hall Ltd.
3. S Gupta and J P Gupta, “PC Interfacing for Data Acquisition and process control”, Instrument Society of
America, 1994.
4. Robert H. Bishop “Learning with Lab‐View” Prentice Hall 2009.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1498
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Virtual Instrumentation Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ICE 7 PCE PCE‐4 ICE‐403P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Virtual Instrumentation) as this is the
practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Introduction to VI,Basic operations, controls, Indicators and Structures

2. Lab view – Debugging a VI, Sub VI’s
3. To perform Boolean operations using VI .
4. Preparing simple VIs (learning front panel and block diagram environment)
5. To apply filtering technique for a given input signal
6. Generate signals such as Sine , Square and Triangular using VI.
7. Simulation of PID controller using VI.
8. Developing VI using control system tool kit.
9. Hardware‐ Software Interfacing using VI.
10. Developing Web based applications using Vis.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1499
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Vision for Humane Society L P C

4 4

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CSE‐in‐EA 6 OAE‐CSE‐EA OAE‐1 OUHV‐340
EE‐VDT/EC‐ACT 6 OAE‐ECE‐EA OAE‐1 OUHV‐340
OAE 6 UHV‐OAE UHV‐OAE‐2 OUHV‐340

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto
5 sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To help the students understand the values ensuring justice in human‐human relationship
2. To develop the competence to think about the conceptual framework of humane society which
includes undivided society (relationship based) and universal human order (system based).
3. To help the students have the exposure for transition from current state to humane society (the
undivided society and universal human order).
4. To formulate a conceptual framework of humane society based on relationship and harmony
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Analyze the significance of feelings in ensuring justice in human‐human relationships
CO 2 Evaluate the fulfillment in relationships in their personal and professional life with the understanding
of established and expressed values
CO 3 Develop the competence to work as a team based on relationship in different dimensions of life and
society
CO 4 Formulate the steps of transition from current state to humane society (the undivided society and
universal human order)
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 ‐ 3 1 1 ‐ 1
CO 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 ‐ 3 1 1 ‐ 1
CO 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 ‐ 3 1 1 ‐ 1
CO 4 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 ‐ 3 1 1 ‐ 1

UNIT‐I

Introduction to the Course: Basic aspiration of a Human Being and program for its fulfillment, need for family
and relationship for a Human Being, Human‐human relationship and role of behavior in its fulfillment, Human‐
rest of Nature relationship and role of work in its fulfillment, Comprehensive Human Goal, Need for Undivided
Society, Need for Universal Human Order, an appraisal of the Current State, Appraisal of Efforts in this
Direction in Human History.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1500
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT‐II

Understanding Human‐Human Relationship & its Fulfilment: Recognition of Human‐Human Relationship,

Recognition of feelings in relationship, Established Values and Expressed Values in Relationship,
interrelatedness of feelings and their fulfillment, Expression of feelings, Types of relationship and their
purpose, mutual evaluation in relationship, meaning of justice in relationship, Justice leading to culture,
civilization and Human Conduct.

UNIT‐III

Justice from Family to World Family Order: Undivided Society as continuity and expanse of Justice in
behaviour – family to world family order, continuity of culture and civilization, Universal Order on the basis of
Undivided Society, Conceptual Framework for Universal human order, Universal Human Order as continuity
and expanse of order in living: from family order to world family order, a conceptual framework for universal
human order.

UNIT ‐ IV

Program for Ensuring Undivided Society and Universal Human Order: Education – Sanskar, Health – Self
Regulation, Production‐work, Exchange – storage, Justice‐preservation.
Human Tradition: Scope and Steps of Universal Human Order, Human Tradition (Ex. Family order to world
family order), Steps for transition from the current state, Possibilities of participation of students in this
direction, Present efforts in this direction, Sum up.

Textbooks:
1. A Foundation Course in Human Values and Professional Ethics, R R Gaur, R Asthana, G P Bagaria, 2nd
Revised Edition, Excel Books, New Delhi, 2019. ISBN 978‐93‐87034‐47‐1
2. Professional Ethics and Human Values, Premvir Kapoor, Khanna Book Publishing, New Delhi, 2022.

References:
1. AvartansheelArthshastra, A. Nagraj, Divya Path Sansthan, Amarkantak, India.
2. An Appeal by the Dalai Lama to the World: Ethics Are More Important Than Religion, Dalai Lama XIV, 2015.
3. Economy of Permanence – (a quest for social order based on non‐violence), J. C. Kumarappa (2010), Sarva‐
Seva‐Sangh‐Prakashan, Varansi, India.
4. Energy and Equity, Ivan Illich (1974), The Trinity Press, Worcester & Harper Collins, USA.
5. Human Society, Kingsley Davis, 1949.
6. Hind Swaraj or, Indian home rule Mohandas K. Gandhi, 1909.
7. Integral Humanism, Deendayal Upadhyaya, 1965.
8. LohiyaKeVichar, LokBharti, RammanoharLohiya, 2008.
9. ManavVyavaharDarshan, A. Nagraj, Divya Path Sansthan, Amarkantak, India.
10. ManaviyaSamvidhan, A. Nagraj, Divya Path Sansthan, Amarkantak, India
11. SamadhanatmakBhautikvad, A. Nagraj, Divya Path Sansthan, Amarkantak, India
12. Small Is Beautiful: A Study of Economics as if People Mattered, E. F. Schumacher, 1973, Blond & Briggs, UK.
13. Slow is Beautiful, Cecile Andrews (http://www.newsociety.com/Books/S/Slow‐is‐Beautiful)
14. Sociology Themes and Perspectives, Harper Collins; EIGHT edition (2014), Martin Holborn and Peter
Langley, 1980.
15. Samagrakranti: Jaya Prakash Narayan's philosophy of social change, Siddharth Publications, Renu Sinha,
1996.
16. Science & Humanism – towards a unified worldview, P. L. Dhar & R. R. Gaur (1990), Commonwealth
Publishers, New Delhi
17. VyavaharvadiSamajshastra, A. Nagraj, Divya Path Sansthan, Amarkantak, India.
18. VyavahatmakJanvad, A. Nagraj, Divya Path Sansthan, Amarkantak, India.
19. The Communist Manifesto, Karl Marx, 1848.
22. Toward a True Kinship of Faiths: How the World's Religions Can Come Together Dalai Lama XIV, 2011.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1501
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Reference Videos
1. Kin school, Tekos, Russia (30 minutes)
2. Technology (Solar City etc.).
3. Natural Farming.
4. Economics of Happiness (1h 8m)

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1502
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Visual Basic.NET Programming L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CSE/IT/CST/ITE 6 PCE PCE‐1 CIE‐308T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To learn about the various data types and control structures in VB.NET
2. To learn about object‐oriented programming concepts and their implementation in VB.NET
3. To understand how to work with files, directories, and databases using VB.NET
4. To learn about multi‐threading, XML document handling, and web programming with VB.NET
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Knowledge and understanding of the basic syntax and structure of VB.NET programs.
CO 2 Ability to use control structures and data types effectively to solve programming problems.
CO 3 Understanding of object‐oriented programming concepts and their implementation in VB.NET.
CO 4 Understanding and implementation of multi‐threading, XML document handling, and web
programming with VB.NET.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 2 2 2 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 2 2 3
CO 2 3 2 2 2 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 2 2 3
CO 3 3 2 2 2 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 2 2 3
CO 4 3 2 2 2 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 2 2 3

UNIT‐I

Overview of VB.NET and its history, Features and benefits of VB.NET, Introduction to .NET framework
architecture and common language runtime (CLR), Setting up the development environment (Visual Studio),
Basic syntax and structure of a VB.NET program, use of namespaces

UNIT‐II

Variables and data types, Operators and expressions, Control structures: decision making statements and
loops, Working with arrays and strings, Exception handling in VB.NET, Working with files and directories, Basic
understanding of LINQ

UNIT‐III

Understanding the basics of object‐oriented programming (OOP), Creating classes and objects in VB.NET,

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1503
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

inheritance and polymorphism, encapsulation and abstraction, Working with interfaces and abstract classes,
delegates and events

UNIT – IV

Working with databases using ADO.NET, multi‐threading concepts and working with threads, Working with
XML documents using XML DOM and XML serialization, the basics of web programming with ASP.NET,
Understanding the basics of WPF and Windows Forms for desktop application development,Overview of .NET
core and its features

Text Books:
1. "Programming Visual Basic .NET" by Dave Grundgeiger
2. "Programming Microsoft Visual Basic .NET" by Francesco Balena
3. "VB.NET and XML" by Rod Stephens
4. "VB.NET Language in a Nutshell" by Steven Roman and Ron Petrusha

References:
1. "Visual Basic .NET and the .NET Platform: An Advanced Guide" by Andrew Troelsen

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1504
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Visual Basic.NET Programming Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CSE/IT/CST/ITE 6 PCE PCE‐1 CIE‐308P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Visual Basic.NET Programming) as this
is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Create a program that calculates the sum of two numbers entered by the user.
2. Develop a program that accepts a string from the user and displays it in reverse order.
3. Build a program that converts a given temperature in Fahrenheit to Celsius.
4. Create a program that generates a random number and asks the user to guess the number.
5. Build a program that determines whether a given year is a leap year or not.
6. Develop a program that accepts a string from the user and displays the number of vowels and consonants
in the string.
7. Create a program that reads a file and displays its content on the screen.
8. Build a program that accepts a number from the user and displays its factorial.
9. Develop a program that accepts a number from the user and displays its binary, octal, and hexadecimal
equivalents.
10. Create a program that determines whether a given string is a palindrome or not.
11. Build a program that accepts a number from the user and displays its prime factors.
12. Develop a program that accepts two strings from the user and concatenates them.
13. Create a program that sorts an array of integers in ascending order.
14. Build a program that accepts a number from the user and displays its square root.
15. Develop a program that accepts a sentence from the user and displays the number of words and characters
in the sentence.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1505
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

VLSI L P C
3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EE/EEE 6 PCE PCE‐3 EEE‐362T
EE‐VDT 6 PC PC VLSI‐330T
EAE 6 VLSI‐EAE VLSI‐EAE‐2 VLSI‐330T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To provide the basic knowledge of VLSI Technology, MOS transistor working principle and scaling effect
on device parameters
2. To impart the knowledge of MOS fabrication, inverter configuration, switching characteristics and
interconnection effects.
3. To impart the knowledge of CMOS amplifiers.
4. To impart the knowledge of various design metrics of CMOS analog circuits.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 To understand the basic knowledge of VLSI Technology, MOS transistor working principle and scaling
effect on device parameters
CO 2 To understand MOS fabrication, inverter configuration, switching characteristics and interconnection
effects.
CO 3 To design CMOS amplifiers.
CO 4 To understand various design metrics of CMOS analog circuits.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 3 3 2 1 ‐ ‐ 2 1 2 1
CO 2 3 3 3 3 2 1 ‐ ‐ 2 1 2 1
CO 3 3 3 3 3 2 1 ‐ ‐ 2 1 2 1
CO 4 3 3 3 3 2 1 ‐ ‐ 2 1 2 1

UNIT‐I

Evolution of VLSI, VLSI designing methodology, design flow, design Hierarchy, concept of regularity, modularity
& locality, VLSI design style, MOS transistor theory, MOS structure, Energy band diagram of MOS system, MOS
under external bias, derivation of threshold voltage equation, enhancement & depletion transistor, MOS device
design equations, MOSFET scaling and small geometry effects, MOSFET capacitances.

UNIT‐II

CMOS & NMOS process technology – explanation of different stages in fabrication, Body effect, and latch up in

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1506
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

CMOS. NMOS inverter, CMOS inverter, DC characteristics, static load MOS inverter, pull up/pull down ratio,
static & dynamic power dissipation. Switching characteristics: rise time, fall time delays, noise margin.

UNIT‐III

Small signal model of MOSFET, Single stage amplifier: Common source stage with resistive load, diode
connected load, triode load, Common source stage with source degeneration, source follower, Common Gate
stage, cascode amplifier, folded cascode amplifier. Basic current mirrors, Cascode current mirrors.

UNIT IV

MOS Differential amplifier, Single‐Ended and Differential operation, qualitative and quantitative analysis of
basic differential pair, common mode response, differential amplifier with MOS loads, Gilbert cell. Miller effect,
frequency response of common‐source single stage amplifier.

Textbook(s):
1. S. M. Kang, Y. Lebiebici, “CMOS digital integrated circuits analysis & design” Tata McGraw Hill, 3rd Edition.
2. Basic VLSI Design ‐ Pucknell Douglas A., Eshraghian Kamran, PHI Learning Pvt Limited, 2013.
3. Adel S. Sedra, Kenneth C. Smith: Microelectronics Circuits, Oxford University Press.

References:
1. J. M. Rabaey, “Digital Integrated Circuits” PHI Learning Pvt Limited, India
2. J. P. Uyemura, Introduction to VLSI Circuits and Systems‖, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., New York, NY
3. N. Weste and D. Harris, "CMOS VLSI Design: A Circuits and Systems Perspective”, 4th Edition, Pearson

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1507
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

VLSI Lab L P C
2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EE/EEE 6 PCE PCE‐3 EEE‐362P
EE‐VDT 6 PC PC VLSI‐330P
EAE 6 VLSI‐EAE VLSI‐EAE‐2 VLSI‐330P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (VLSI) as this is the practical component
of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. To study the MOS characteristics and introduction to tanner EDA software tools.
2. To design and study the DC characteristics of PMOS and NMOS.
3. To design and study the DC and AC characteristics of resistive load inverter.
4. To design and study the DC and AC characteristics of CMOS inverter.
5. To design and study the characteristics of CMOS NAND and NOR gate.
6. To design any Boolean function using transmission gates.
7. To design and study the characteristics of CMOS multiplexer.
8. To design and study the characteristics of D latch.
9. To design and study the characteristics of Full adder.
10. To design and study the layout of PMOS and NMOS transistors.
11. To design and study the layout of CMOS inverter.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1508
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

VLSI Testing L P C
4 4

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EE‐VDT 7 PC PC VLSI‐451
EAE 7 VLSI‐EAE VLSI‐EAE‐5C VLSI‐451

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To enhance knowledge of the fault modeling in VLSI circuits.
2. To create vectors to test a circuit efficiently covering maximum faults.
3. Learn about application in modern digital design
4. Use modern CAD tools for VLSI testing and verification.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 To understand fault modelling in VLSI circuits.
CO 2 To create vectors for test a circuit efficiently covering maximum faults.
CO 3 Understanding the application in modern digital design
CO 4 Using modern CAD tools for VLSI testing and verification.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 2 3 2 3 2 1 ‐ 2 1 1 1
CO 2 3 2 3 2 3 1 1 ‐ 2 1 ‐ 1
CO 3 3 2 3 2 2 2 1 ‐ 2 1 2 2
CO 4 3 3 3 2 3 2 1 ‐ 2 1 2 2

UNIT I

Physical fault sandtheir modelling. Fault equivalence and dominance, fault collapsing, Fault simulation: parallel,
deductive and concurrent techniques; critical path‐tracing. Test generation for combinational circuits: Boolean
differenced‐algorithm, Podem, random etc.

UNIT II

Exhaustive, random and weighted test pattern generation, aliasing and its effect on fault coverage. PLA testing:
cross‐point fault model, test generation, easily testable designs. Memory testing: permanent, intermittent and
pattern‐sensitive faults; test generation. Delay faults and hazards; test pattern generation techniques, ATPG
and its different types.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1509
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT III

Test pattern generation for sequential circuits: ad‐hoc and structures techniques scan path and LSSD, boundary
scan. Built‐in self‐test techniques: LBIST and MBIST. Verification: logic level (combinational and sequential
circuits), RTL‐level (data path and control path).

UNIT IV

Verification of embedded systems. Use of formal techniques: decision diagrams, logic‐based approaches.
ASIC/IP Verification, direct and random testing, Error detection and correction codes.

Textbook(s):
1. Essentials of Electronic Testing, M. L. Bushnell and V. D. Agrawal,3rd Kluwer Academic Publishers 2002.
2. Delay Fault Testing for VLSI Circuits, A. Krstic and K‐T Cheng,3rd Kluwer Academic Publishers. 2003.
3. Testing of Digital Systems, N. K. Jha and S. Gupta, 2nd, Cambridge University Press. 2003.

References:
1. Digital Systems Testing and Testable Design, M. Abramovici, M. A. Breuer and A. D. Friedman, 3rd, Wiley‐
IEEE Press. 1994
2. B Fault Tolerant and Fault Testable P. K. Lala, 4th, Hardware Design, Prentice‐Hall. 1986.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1510
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Water Resource Planning L P C

4 4

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CE 6 PCE PCE‐2 CEE‐314
EAE 6 IE‐EAE IE‐EAE‐1 IE‐322

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To impart knowledge about the planning and management of water resources.
2. To introduce the concepts of watershed management, integrated water resources management,
environmental interaction of water resources and policies/framework related to water resources
3. To enable the students to understand the different components of water resources and their
management
4. To enable the student to estimate well parameters and yield of well, with the help of mathematics,
science, and engineering fundamentals.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Identify different problems related to water resources planning, management and development.
CO 2 Describe problems like water balance, water distribution networks, water pollution and other water
related concerns.
CO 3 Apply principles and guidelines to solve above mentioned problems
CO 4 Determine appropriate techniques for Ground Water modeling and prediction of flow.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 1 ‐ 2 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐
CO 2 2 ‐ 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐
CO 3 3 ‐ 1 2 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐
CO 4 3 2 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐

UNIT‐I

Introduction of Water Systems engineering‐scope and approach Issues and the systems planning approach,
Water system dynamics, Water Resource [W.R.] development alternatives, Water systems planning objectives,
Constraints and Criteria, Economic and Econometric principles, Cost and Benefit Curves.

UNIT‐II

Application of Linear programming [LP] and Dynamic programming [DP] models in Water Resource Engineering,
Problem formulation for W.R. systems, Multi‐objective Water Resource Planning, Non‐inferior Solutions, Plan
Formulation, Weighting Method, Constraint Method, Plan Selection. Reservoir Operation, Standard Operating

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1511
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Policy, Optimal Operating Policy using LP Rules, Curves for Reservoir Operations Reservoir Systems
[Deterministic Inflow], Reservoir Sizing, Sequent Peak Analysis Neglecting Evaporation, Sequent Peak Analysis
Considering Evaporation Loss, Reservoir Capacity using LP , Storage Yield Function, Mixed Integer LP
Formulation for Maximising Yield.

UNIT‐III

Multireservoir Operation, Stationary Policy using DP, Simulation of Reservoir Operation for Hydropower
Generation, Reservoir Systems [Random Inflow], Lognormal and Exponential Distributions, Chance Constrained
LP, Linear Decision Rule, Deterministic Equivalent of a chance constraint Concept of Reliability, Reliability‐based
Reservoir Sizing, Maximum Reliability, Stochastic Dynamic programming for reservoir operation, State variable
discretisation, Inflow as a stochastic process, Steady state operating policy, Steady State Probabilities, Real‐
time Operation, Case Study.

UNIT ‐ IV

Water quality management planning and associated models, Regional planning models, Policy issues for
improvement in utilisation of water resources, Optical Irrigation Water allocation for single and multiple crops,
Crop Yield optimization. Applications of Linear Programming in [1] Optimal Irrigation water allocation to
multiple crops, [2] Multireservoir system for irrigation planning, [3] Reservoir Operation [Short term] for
irrigation, [4] Reservoir operation for Hydropower optimization. Application of dynamic programming in ‐ [1]
Steady State Reservoir operating policy for irrigation, [2] Real Time Reservoir Operation for Irrigation, An
Example application for inflow forecasting, Fuzzy Sets and Fuzzy logic, Introduction, Fuzzy rule based reservoir
operation model.

Textbook(s):
1. Water Resources Systems Planning and Management, Sharad K. Jain, V 2003 ,Elsevier ,Singh . .P
2. Water Resources Systems Planning and Management: An Introduction to Methods, Models and
Applications, Daniel P. Loucks, Eelco Van Beek, 2005.

References:
1. S.Vedula, P.P.Majumdar‐Water Resources Systems, Tata Mcgraw Hill Publishing Company Ltd., ND
2. M.C. Chaturvedi, W.R.Systems‐Planning and Management, Tata McGraw Hill Publications, New Delhi
3. Louks D Petal W.R. System Planning and Analysis, Prentice Hall – 1981. [R4] Maass. A. eta:‐Design Water
Resources Systems‐McMillan, 1968.
4. A.S. Goodman, Principals of Water Resources Planning, Prentice Hall, 1984

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1512
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Wavelets L P C
3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ECE 6 PCE PCE‐3 ECE‐340T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To Impart the basics of signal representation and Fourier theory
2. To Explain the concepts, theory, and algorithms behind wavelets from an interdisciplinary perspective
that unifies harmonic analysis, filter bank, and multiresolution analysis.
3. To Discuss the wavelet, transform in both continuous and discrete domain
4. To understand the applications of Wavelet transform
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Understand the terminology that are used in the Wavelets literature
CO 2 To understand Multi Resolution Analysis and Filter banks
CO 3 To Understand the design of Wavelets in both continuous and discrete domain
CO 4 Apply wavelets, filter banks, and multiresolution techniques to solve practical engineering problems
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 3 3 3 1 1 ‐ 1 1 ‐ 2
CO 2 3 3 3 3 3 1 1 ‐ 1 1 ‐ 2
CO 3 3 3 3 3 3 1 1 ‐ 1 1 ‐ 2
CO 4 3 3 3 3 3 1 1 ‐ 1 1 ‐ 2

UNIT I

Introduction and Fundamentals: Stationary and non‐stationary signals, Signal representation using basis and
frames, Orthogonality and Orthonormality, Properties of Norm, Parseval's Theorem, Brief introduction to
Fourier transform and Short time Fourier transform, Time‐frequency analysis, Heisenberg’s uncertainty
principle, Filter banks, Multi resolution formulation: Wavelets from filters, Classes of wavelets: Haar,
Daubechies, bi‐orthogonal.

UNIT II

Continuous Wavelet Transform: Continuous wavelet transform (CWT), Time and frequency resolution of the
continuous wavelet transform, Construction of continuous wavelets: Spline, orthonormal, bi‐orthonormal,
Inverse continuous wavelet transform, Redundancy of CWT, Zoom property of the continuous wavelet
transform, Filtering in continuous wavelet transform domain.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1513
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT III

Discrete Wavelet Transform And Filterbanks: Orthogonal and bi‐orthogonal two‐channel filter banks, Design
of two‐channel filter banks, Tree‐structured filter banks, Discrete wavelet transform, Non‐linear approximation
in the Wavelet domain, multi resolution analysis, Construction and Computation of the discrete wavelet
transform, the redundant discrete wavelet transform.

UNIT IV

Multi Resolution Analysis: Multirate discrete time systems, Parameterization of discrete wavelets, Bi‐
orthogonal wavelet bases, two dimensional, wavelet transforms and extensions to higher dimensions, wave
packets.
Applications: Signal and Image compression, analysis and classification of audio signals using CWT, Wavelet
based signal de‐noising and energy compaction.

Textbook(s):
1. A Wavelet Tour of Signal Processing, 2nd edition, S. Mallat, Academic Press, 1999.
2. Wavelet transforms: Introduction, Theory and applications, Raghuveer rao and Ajit S. Bopardikar, Pearson
Education Asia, 2000.
3. Wavelets and Sub band Coding, M. Vetterli and J. Kovacevic, Prentice Hall, 1995.

References:
1. Fundamentals of Wavelets: Theory, Algorithms, and Applications, J.C. Goswami and A.K. Chan, 2nd ed.,
Wiley, 2011.
2. Wavelets and their Applications, Michel Misiti, Yves Misiti, Georges Oppenheim, Jean‐Michel Poggi, John
Wiley & Sons, 2010.
3. A premier on Wavelets and their scientific applications, J S Walker, CRC press, 2002.
4. Wavelets and signal processing: An application‐based introduction, Stark, Springer, 2005.
5. A friendly guide to Wavelets, Gerald Keiser, Springer, 2011.
6. Multirate Systems and Filter Banks, P. P. Vaidyanathan, Pearson Education, 2004.
7. Wavelets: from math too practice, Desanka.P.Radunovik, springer, 2009.
8. Insight into wavelets from theory to practice, K P Soman and KL Ramachandran, PHI, 2008.
9. Gilbert Strang and Truong Nguyen, “Wavelets and Filter banks”, Wellesley Cambridge Press, 1996.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1514
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Wavelets Lab L P C
2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ECE 6 PCE PCE‐3 ECE‐340P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Wavelets) as this is the practical
component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Obtain the CWT of the chirp signal and plot the CWT along with the true instantaneous frequencies plotted
as dashed lines.
2. To plot and analyse the chirp signal using Short‐time FT.
3. Observe and detect transient changes in a time series data using CWT.
4. Observe the steady‐state oscillations and transient events denoting the heartbeats of ECG signal (QRS
complexes) using CWT.
5. To Plot and observe the wavelet coherence of the two signals using CWT.
6. Analyse and plot a suitable signal using a wavelet MRA.
7. Demonstrate the reconstruction of a signal from MRA.
8. Demonstrate denoising of a real‐valued 1‐D signal using wavelet signal denoiser.
9. Demonstration of wavelet‐based image compression.
10. Wavelet correlation analysis of financial data (GDP component data).

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1515
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Web and Mobile Application Testing and Deployment L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 7 FSD‐EAE FSD‐EAE‐5 FSD‐439T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To introduce students to the concepts, methodologies, and best practices of web and mobile
application testing and deployment.
2. To familiarize students with performance testing, optimization, and security considerations in web and
mobile application development.
3. To equip students with the knowledge and skills to implement continuous integration, delivery, and
deployment processes.
4. To enhance students' ability to effectively test, deploy, and maintain web and mobile applications in
various environments.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Demonstrate a clear understanding of the importance of testing and deployment in the software
development life cycle and apply functional testing techniques to ensure the quality and reliability of
web and mobile applications.
CO 2 Perform performance testing, analyze results, and optimize web and mobile applications for better
performance and Conduct security testing to identify vulnerabilities and implement necessary
countermeasures.
CO 3 Implement continuous integration, delivery, and deployment pipelines for efficient software
development and deployment and apply industry best practices for deploying web and mobile
applications in different environments.
CO 4 Develop the ability to use appropriate tools and technologies for web and mobile application testing
and deployment and collaborate effectively in teams to test, deploy, and maintain web and mobile
applications.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 3 2 2 3 ‐ 3 3 2 2 3
CO 2 3 3 3 2 2 3 ‐ 3 3 2 2 3
CO 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 ‐ 3 3 2 2 3
CO 4 3 3 3 2 2 3 ‐ 3 3 2 2 3

UNIT I

Introduction to Web and Mobile Application Testing and Deployment: Overview of web and mobile
application testing and deployment, Importance of testing and deployment in software development life cycle,

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1516
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Testing methodologies and strategies, Deployment models and techniques

Functional Testing of Web and Mobile Applications: Introduction to functional testing, Test case design
techniques, Test automation frameworks and tools, Cross‐browser and cross‐platform testing, Mobile
application testing

UNIT II

Performance Testing and Optimization: Performance testing concepts and objectives, Load testing and stress
testing, Performance measurement and profiling tools, Performance optimization techniques, Mobile
performance testing considerations.

UNIT III

Security Testing and Deployment Best Practices: Introduction to security testing, Security vulnerabilities and
threats, Security testing techniques and tools, Secure deployment best practices, Compliance and regulatory
considerations.

UNIT IV

Continuous Integration, Delivery, and Deployment: Introduction to continuous integration, delivery, and
deployment, Continuous integration and build automation tools, Continuous delivery pipelines
Deployment strategies and techniques, Monitoring and error tracking in production

Textbooks:
1. "Software Testing: Principles and Practices" by Srinivasan Desikan and Gopalaswamy Ramesh
2. "Agile Testing: A Practical Guide for Testers and Agile Teams" by Lisa Crispin and Janet Gregory
3. ”Software Testing”: Yogesh Singh Cambridge University Press

Reference Books:
1. "Effective Software Testing: 50 Specific Ways to Improve Your Testing" by Elfriede Dustin, et al.
2. "Continuous Delivery: Reliable Software Releases through Build, Test, and Deployment Automation" by Jez
Humble and David Farley
3. "Selenium WebDriver Recipes in Python: The problem‐solving guide to Selenium WebDriver in Python" by
Zed A. Shaw
4. "Hands‐On Mobile App Testing: A Guide for Mobile Testers and Anyone Involved in the Mobile App
Business" by Daniel Knott
5. "The Art of Application Performance Testing: Help for Programmers and Quality Assurance" by Ian
Molyneaux
6. "Web Performance Tuning: Speeding Up the Web" by Patrick Killelea
7. "The Web Application Hacker's Handbook: Finding and Exploiting Security Flaws" by Dafydd Stuttard and
Marcus Pinto
8. "OWASP Testing Guide" by The Open Web Application Security Project (OWASP)
9. "How to Break Software: A Practical Guide to Testing" by James A. Whittaker
10. "Performance Testing Guidance for Web Applications" by Microsoft Corporation
11. "Software Security: Building Security In" by Gary McGraw
12. "Continuous Integration: Improving Software Quality and Reducing Risk" by Paul M. Duvall

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1517
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Web and Mobile Application Testing and Deployment Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

EAE 7 FSD‐EAE FSD‐EAE‐5 FSD‐43P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Web and Mobile Application Testing
and Deployment) as this is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1: Introduction to Web Technologies

Objective: Familiarize students with basic web technologies, HTML, CSS, and JavaScript.
Activities: Create a simple web page using HTML, style it with CSS, and add interactivity using JavaScript.
2: Web Application Testing
Objective: Introduce students to various testing techniques and tools for web applications.
Activities: Test a web application for functional and non‐functional requirements; perform unit testing,
integration testing, and regression testing.
3: Mobile Application Development
Objective: Enable students to develop mobile applications using a cross‐platform framework.
Activities: Build a simple mobile application using a framework like React Native or Flutter.
4: Mobile Application Testing
Objective: Introduce students to the challenges and techniques of testing mobile applications.
Activities: Test a mobile application for usability, performance, compatibility, and security.
5: Web Application Deployment
Objective: Teach students the process of deploying a web application to a hosting environment.
Activities: Deploy a web application on a cloud hosting platform like Amazon Web Services (AWS) or Heroku.
6: Continuous Integration and Deployment
Objective: Introduce students to the concepts of continuous integration and deployment for web and mobile
applications.
Activities: Set up a CI/CD pipeline using tools like Jenkins, Travis CI, or GitLab CI/CD.
7: Performance Testing for Web Applications
Objective: Teach students how to analyze and improve the performance of web applications.
Activities: Perform load testing, stress testing, and optimize the performance of a web application.
8: Security Testing for Web and Mobile Applications
Objective: Introduce students to the fundamentals of security testing for web and mobile applications.
Activities: Conduct vulnerability assessments, penetration testing, and analyze security issues in a web or
mobile application.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1518
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Web Development using MEAN Stack L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CSE‐in‐EA 6 OAE‐CSE‐EA OAE‐1 FSD‐320T
EAE 6 FSD‐EAE FSD‐EAE‐2A FSD‐320T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To provide the solid foundation in web development, covering the fundamental skills of frontend and
backend technologies using mean environment
2. To learn and implement the concept of AngularJS
3. To learn and implement the concept of NodeJS and ExpressJS
4. To learn and implement the connectivity of MongoDB with web applications
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Apply web designing using mark‐up languages.
CO 2 Understand the utility of Node.js and Express.js.
CO 3 Apply the concept of angular in web designing.
CO 4 Implement the concept of Mongo DB in web development.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 1 2 3 2 3 3 2 2 3 3 2 3
CO 2 1 2 3 2 3 3 2 2 3 3 2 3
CO 3 1 2 3 2 3 3 2 2 3 3 2 3
CO 4 2 2 3 2 3 3 2 2 3 3 2 3

UNIT‐I

Web Development Introduction: Front end technology, Back end technology, HTML, CSS AND JAVA Script
basics, JavaScript Essentials: Variables, Data Types, Operators, Control Structures, Functions, Objects
MEAN Full Stack: Three‐tier web application development, The evolution of JavaScript Introducing MEAN ,
features of MEAN, MEAN components setup, Exploring the project structure

UNIT‐II

Node.js: Introduction, JavaScript event‐driven programming , Node.js event‐driven programming, JavaScript

closures, Node modules , CommonJS modules , Node.js core modules , Node.js third‐party modules , Node.js ile
modules , Node.js folder modules , Developing Node.js web applications , Meet the Connect module , Connect
middleware , Understanding the order of Connect middleware, Mounting Connect middleware
Introduction to Express, Creating your first Express application , The application, request, and response objects,

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1519
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

External middleware , Implementing the MVC pattern , Application folder structure, Horizontal folder structure,
Vertical folder structure, File‐naming conventions , Rendering Views

UNIT‐III

Introduction to Angular: Angular and its Key concepts, Angular components, Modules, Services, and
Dependency Injection
Angular Templates and Data Binding: Template syntax, Interpolation, Property binding, Event binding, Two‐way
binding
Angular Directives: Introduction, Built‐in Directives, Custom Directives, Structural Directives
Angular Routing: Introduction, Configuring Routes, Route Parameters, Route Guards, Lazy Loading

UNIT ‐ IV

MongoDB: Introduction to NoSQL and MongoDB, Key features of MongoDB, The BSON format 83, MongoDB
ad hoc queries, indexing, replica set, sharding, shell, databases, collections, CRUD operations, new document
creation( using insert, update, save, read document, use of operators,
Deleting documents

Textbook(s):
1. Web Application Development with MEAN by Amos Q. Haviv Adrian Mejia, Robert Onodi, Packt Publishing.
2. Write Modern Web Apps with the Mean Stack: Mongo, Express, Angularjs, and Node.js (Develop and Design)
by Jeff Dickey, Pearson Publishing.

References:
1. HTML, CSS, and JavaScript All in One by Julie C. Meloni, Jennifer Kyrnin, Pearson Publishing.
2. Full‐Stack JavaScript Development: Develop, Test and Deploy with Mongodb, Express, Angular and Node on
Aws by Eric Bush, Maura Van Der Linden, Red Sky Publishing.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1520
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Web Development using MEAN Stack Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CSE‐in‐EA 6 OAE‐CSE‐EA OAE‐1 FSD‐320P
EAE 6 FSD‐EAE FSD‐EAE‐2A FSD‐320P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Web Development using MEAN Stack)
as this is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Create a static website using HTML / CSS / JavaScript and deploy it on a web server.
2. Install and set up Node.js and Express.js on the local machine.
3. Use Angular CLI to create a new component and implement data binding techniques such as string
interpolation, property binding, two‐way data binding, and event binding.
4. Implement component interaction using @Input, @Output decorators, and @ViewChild decorator to get
hold of DOM.
5. Use built‐in directives such as ngFor, ngIf, ngSwitch, ngClass, ngStyle to manipulate the DOM elements.
6. Implement Dependency Injection by injecting a service into a component and accessing its functions.
7. Use Http client module to perform HTTP requests to a server, handle responses, and errors.
8. Implement Routing in an Angular app, including redirection, wild card route, relative paths, and routing
guards.
9. Create a basic server using Node.js and Express.js, and handle requests and responses.
10. Connect a Node.js server to a MongoDB database, and perform CRUD (Create, Read, Update, and Delete)
operations using Mongoose library.
11. Implement authentication and authorization using Passport.js and JSON Web Tokens (JWT).
12. Deploy the MEAN stack application to cloud platforms such as Heroku, AWS, or Azure.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1521
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Web Development using MERN Stack L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CSE‐in‐EA 6 OAE‐CSE‐EA OAE‐1 FSD‐322T
EAE 6 FSD‐EAE FSD‐EAE‐2B FSD‐322T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To learn the Web Development, Designing and validations using HTML, XHTML, XML, CSS, XSLT and
JavaScript
2. To learn and implement the concept of ReactJS
3. To learn and implement the concept of NodeJS and ExpressJS
4. To learn and implement the connectivity of MongoDB with web applications
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 To be able to learn the basic implementation and apply HTML, XHTML, XML, CSS, XSLT and JavaScript
concepts in web applications
CO 2 To be able to develop a Web application using ReactJS
CO 3 To be able to develop a Web application based on NodeJS and ExpressJS
CO 4 To be able to connect the applications using MongoDB
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 1 2 1 1 3 1 ‐ 1 2 ‐ 3 3
CO 2 1 2 1 1 3 1 ‐ 1 2 ‐ 3 3
CO 3 1 2 1 1 3 1 ‐ 1 2 ‐ 3 3
CO 4 1 2 1 1 3 1 ‐ 1 2 ‐ 3 3

UNIT‐I

Introduction: Fundamentals of Web Design, Webpage and Website, Web application, Client‐server architecture
Markup languages: Introduction to HTML, basics of XTHML, HTML elements, HTML tags, lists, tables, forms,
defining XHTML’s abstract syntax, XML.
CSS style sheets: Introduction, CSS core syntax, text properties, CSS box model, normal flow box layout, other
properties like list, tables, XSLT
Client Side Programming: JAVA Scripts, basic syntax, variables & data‐types, literals, functions, objects, arrays,
built‐in objects, JAVA Script form programming, Intrinsic event handling, modifying element style, document
trees, ECMAScript5, ECMAScript6

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1522
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT‐II

ReactJS: Introduction, Templating using JSX, Classes using JSX, Components, State and Props, Lifecycle of
Components, Rendering List and Portals, Error Handling, Routers, Redux and Redux Saga, Immutable.js, Service
Side Rendering, Unit Testing, Webpack

UNIT‐III

NodeJS: Node js Overview, Node js Basics and Setup, Node js Console, Node js Command Utilities, Node js
Modules, Node js Concepts, Node js Events, Node js Database Access, Node.js with Express.js, Express.js
Request, Express.js Response, Express.js Get, Express.js Post, Express.js Routing, Express.js Cookies, Express.js
File Upload, Express.js Middleware, Express.js Scaffolding, Express.js Template.

UNIT ‐ IV

MongoDB: SQL and NoSql concepts, Create and manage MongoDB, Migration of data into MongoDB, MongoDB
with NodeJS, Services offered by MongoDB

Textbook(s):
1. Vasan Subramanian, “Pro MERN Stack”, Apress Publisher, 2 Edition, ISBN: 9781484243916
2. Chris Northwood, “The Full Stack Developer”, Apress Publisher, ISBN: 978‐1484241516

References:
1. Greg Lim, “Beginning MERN Stack Applications”, Independently Published, Third Edition.
2. ”Road for Being MERN STACK Developer”, Independently published, ISBN:9798766684855
3. Shama Hoque, “ Full Stack React Projects”, O'Reilly Media , 2nd Edition.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1523
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Web Development using MERN Stack Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CSE‐in‐EA 6 OAE‐CSE‐EA OAE‐1 FSD‐322P
EAE 6 FSD‐EAE FSD‐EAE‐2B FSD‐322P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Web Development using MERN Stack)
as this is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Task management tool: Login/Register to the application, add daily tasks, Assign a due date of completion,
Mark them as complete/incomplete and View weekly/monthly statistics of their to‐dos.
2. Blogging platform:
3. Social media platform
4. Weather Forecasting APP.
5. Bookstore Library and Stock keeping APP:
a) User Interface: Browse Books from library, filter them based on category, author, publications, pay
&amp; rent them for a specific duration, like/review them
b) Admin interface: List/manage books, track rented books and their availability and send notifications via
email to users once lease expires.
6. Build a simple CRUD application: create a web application that allows users to create, Read, Update and
Delete data from a MongoDB database.
7. Design a web platform to help small businesses manage their inventory.
8. Create a web‐based system to streamline the process of booking appointments.
9. Develop a web‐based tool for medical professionals to easily store and access patient records.
10. Develop a web application to facilitate collaboration between teachers and students.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1524
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Web Intelligence and Big Data Analytics L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ITE 7 PCE PCE‐5 CIE‐429T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To understand the importance of web intelligence.
2. To define big data and to do perform big data analytics.
3. To perform decision making and predictive data analysis on big data.
4. To understand various technologies used for big data.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Able to apply various techniques of web intelligence.
CO 2 Able identify various tools for big data analysis.
CO 3 Able to perform decision making and predictive data analysis on big data.
CO 4 Able to perform big data analytics using Hadoop.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 3 2 2 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 2 2 3
CO 2 3 3 2 2 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 2 2 3
CO 3 3 3 2 3 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 2 2 3
CO 4 3 3 2 3 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 2 2 3

UNIT‐I

Web Intelligence: Web Scale AI and Big Data, Web Intelligence, Big Data Look: Indexing‐ Index creation,
Ranking, Page Rank Searching‐ Enterprise search, Searching structured data, Object Search, Locality Sensitive
Hashing and Memory.

UNIT‐II

Big Data Introduction: The Evolution of Data Management, Defining Big Data, Traditional and advanced
analytics. Distributed Computing, need of distributed computing for big data, economics of computing, latency
problem.
Examining Big Data Types, Structured Data, sources of big structured data, role of relational databases in big
data, Unstructured Data, sources of unstructured data, role of a CMS in big data management.
Big Data Stack: Redundant Physical Infrastructure, Security Infrastructure, Operational Databases. Organizing
Data Services and Tools, Analytical Data Warehouses, Big Data Analytics, Big Data Applications.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1525
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT‐III

Virtualization and big data: Server virtualization, Application virtualization, Network virtualization, Processor
and memory virtualization, Data and storage virtualization, Managing Virtualization with the Hypervisor.
MapReduce Fundamentals, Putting map and reduce Together, Optimizing MapReduce Tasks. Hadoop, Hadoop
Distributed File System (HDFS), Name Nodes, Data nodes, Hadoop MapReduce.

UNIT ‐ IV

Big Data Analytics: Basic analytics, Advanced analytics, Operationalized analytics, Monetizing analytics, Text
Analytics and Big Data, Social media analytics, Text Analytics Tools for Big Data, Attensity, Clarabridge,
OpenText.
Integrating Data Sources: Dealing with Real‐time Data Streams and Complex Event Processing,
Operationalizing Big Data, Applying Big Data within Your Organization, Security and Governance for Big Data
Environments.

Textbook(s):
1. The Intelligent Web: Search, Smart Algorithms and Big Data published by Oxford University Press, UK, in
November 2013, authored by Dr. Gautam Shroff.
2. Judith S. Hurwitz, Alan F. Nugent, Fern Halper, Marcia A. Kaufman, “Big Data For Dummies”, John Wiley &
Sons, Inc.(2013)
3. Robert D. Schneider, “Hadoop For Dummies”, John Wiley & Sons, Inc. (2012)

References:
1. Understanding Big Data: Analytics for Enterprise Class Hadoop and Streaming Data, by Paul
Zikopoulos,McGraw Hill 2012.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1526
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Web Intelligence and Big Data Analytics Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ITE 7 PCE PCE‐5 CIE‐429P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Web Intelligence and Big Data
Analytics as this is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Analyze the link structure of web using page rank algorithms.

2. Analyze the link structure of web using HITS algorithms.
3. Analyze different Web caching Algorithm: LRV, FIFO, LRU etc.
4. Downloading and installing Hadoop; Understanding different Hadoop modes. Startup scripts, Configuration
files
5. Implement the following file management tasks in Hadoop: i. Adding files and directories ii. Retrieving files
iii. Deleting files Hint: A typical Hadoop workflow creates data files (such as log files) elsewhere and copies
them into HDFS using one of the above command line utilities
6. Implement of Matrix Multiplication with Hadoop Map Reduce
7. Write a Map Reduce program that mines weather data. Hint: Weather sensors collecting data every hour
at many locations across the globe gather a large volume of log data, which is a good candidate for analysis
with Map Reduce, since it is semi structured and record‐oriented
8. Run a basic Word Count Map Reduce program to understand Map Reduce Paradigm.
9. Implementation of K‐means clustering using Map Reduce.
10. Installation of Hive along with practice examples.
11. Installation of HBase, Installing thrift along with Practice examples

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1527
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Web Mining L P C
3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CSE/IT 7 PCE PCE‐5 CIE‐431T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To understand the scope of Web mining, identifying the opportunities and the challenges
2. To learn to apply different data mining/ML techniques in web mining
3. To learn graph based representation of WWW
4. To understand techniques for web crawling for web contents to build useful statistics like page ranking
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Understand the scope of Web mining, identifying the opportunities and the challenges
CO 2 Learn to apply different data mining/ML techniques in web mining
CO 3 Learn graph based representation of WWW
CO 4 Understand techniques for web crawling for web contents to build useful statistics like page ranking
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 2 2 2 3 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 3 2 2 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 4 3 2 2 1 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 2

UNIT‐I

World Wide Web – Data Mining Vs Web Mining – Data Mining Foundations: Association rules and Sequential
Patterns – Machine Learning in Data Mining, Web Mining: Web Structure Mining, Web Content Mining, and
Web Usage Mining. Web Structure Mining: Web Graph ‐ Extracting pattern from hyperlinks – Mining Document
Structure ‐ PageRank.

UNIT‐II

Web Content Mining: Text and Web Page Pre‐processing – Inverted Indices – Latent Semantic Indexing – Web
Spamming – Social Network Analysis – Web Crawlers – Structured Data Extraction – Opinion mining and
Sentiment Analysis.

UNIT‐III

Web usage Mining: Data collection and Pre‐processing – Data Modelling – Discovery and Analysis of Web Usage

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1528
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

– Recommender System and Collaborative Filtering – Query log mining

UNIT – IV

Web Mining Applications and Other Topics: Data integration for e‐commerce, Web personalization and
recommender systems, Web content and structure mining, Web data warehousing, Review of tools,
applications, and systems

Textbook(s):
1. Liu B. Web Data Mining: Exploring Hyperlinks, Contents, and Usage Data. Springer Science & Business Media;
2007.

References:
1. Markov Z, Larose DT. Data Mining the Web: Uncovering Patterns in Web Content, Structure, and Usage. John
Wiley & Sons; 2007.
2. Web Mining:: Applications and Techniques by Anthony Scime
3. Mining the Web: Discovering Knowledge from Hypertext Data by Soumen Chakrabarti

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1529
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Web Mining Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CSE/IT 7 PCE PCE‐5 CIE‐431P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Web Mining) as this is the practical
component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Implement Page Rank Algorithm in Web Mining

2. Analyze the link structure of web using page rank algorithms.
3. Text and webpage pre‐processing
4. Social network analysis
5. Opinion mining
6. Sentiment analysis
7. Privatization of web content
8. Web usage mining
9. Recommender system
10. Web structure mining

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1530
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Web Technologies L P C
3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CSE/IT/CST/ITE 6 PCE PCE‐3 CIE‐356T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To explain web application development with HTML and CSS
2. Learn about scripting languages Java Script and JSP Technologies
3. To Learn Server‐side Development with PHP
4. Develop web applications using PHP and MYSQL
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Identify and illustrate the basic concepts of HTML and CSS & apply those concepts to design web pages
CO 2 Understand various concepts related to dynamic web pages and validate them using JavaScript and
JSP
CO 3 Outline and understand the concepts of PHP for Web Development
CO 4 Integrate PHP, MYSQL and Scripting languages for web applications.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ 3 2
CO 2 ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 ‐ ‐ 3 ‐ ‐
CO 3 ‐ ‐ ‐ 2 3 ‐ ‐ 3 ‐ ‐ 2 ‐
CO 4 3 ‐ 3 ‐ ‐ 3 3 ‐ 3 ‐ ‐ 3

UNIT‐I

HTML: Basic Syntax, Standard HTML Document Structure, Basic Text Markup, Html styles, Elements, Attributes,
Heading, Layouts, I frames Images, Hypertext Links, Lists, Tables, Forms, Dynamic HTML.
CSS: Need for CSS, introduction to CSS, basic syntax and structure, using CSS, background images, colors, and
properties, manipulating texts, using fonts, borders, boxes, margins, padding lists, positioning using CSS, CSS2,
The Box Model, Working with XML: Document Type Definition (DTD), XML schemas, Document object model,
Parsers ‐DOM, and SAX. Introduction to XHTML: XML, Meta tags, Character entities, frames, and frame sets.

UNIT‐II

JavaScript ‐ Client‐side scripting, Introduction to JavaScript, Objects, Primitives Operations and Expressions,
Control Statements, Arrays, Functions, Constructors, JavaScript, and objects, JavaScript own objects, the DOM
and web browser environments, forms and validations
Introduction to JSP: The Anatomy of a JSP Page, JSP Processing, Declarations, Directives, Expressions, Code

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1531
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Snippets, implicit objects, Using Beans in JSP Pages, Using Cookies and session for session tracking, connecting
to database in JSP

UNIT‐III

Introduction to Server‐Side Development with PHP, what is Server‐Side Development, A Web Server’s
Responsibilities, Quick Tour of PHP, Introduction and basic syntax of PHP, decision and looping with examples,
PHP and HTML, Arrays, Functions, Browser control and detection, string, Form processing, Files, Advance
Features: Cookies and Sessions.

UNIT – IV

PHP and MySQL: Basic commands with PHP examples, Connection to the server, creating a database, selecting
a database, listing database, listing table names, creating a table, inserting data, altering tables, queries,
deleting the database, deleting data, and tables, PHP my admin and database bugs. Managing State, The
Problem of State in Web Applications, Passing Information via Query Strings, Passing Information via the URL
Path, Cookies, Serialization, Session State.

Textbooks:
1. Web Technologies: A Computer Science Perspective, Jackson, Pearson Education India, 2007.
2. Programming the World Wide Web, 7th Edition, Robert W Sebesta, Pearson, 2013.

References:
1. Web Technologies, HTML, JavaScript, PHP, Java, JSP, XML and AJAX, Black book, 1st Edition, Dream
Tech, 2009.
2. An Introduction to Web Design, Programming, 1st Edition, Paul S Wang, Sanda S Katila, Cengage Learning,
2003.
3. PHP and MySQL Web Development, Luke Welling, Addison Wesley

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1532
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Web Technologies Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CSE/IT/CST/ITE 6 PCE PCE‐3 CIE‐356P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Web Technologies) as this is the
practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Design web pages for your college containing a description of the courses, departments, faculties, library
etc, use href, list tags.
2. Write html code to develop a webpage having two frames that divide the webpage into two equal rows
and then divide the row into equal columns fill each frame with a different background color.
3. Design a web page of your home town with an attractive background color, text color, an Image, font etc.
(use internal CSS).
4. Use External, Internal, and Inline CSS to format college web page that you created.
5. Create HTML Page with JavaScript which takes Integer number as input and tells whether the number is
ODD or EVEN
6. Create HTML Page that contains form with fields Name, Email, Mobile No, Gender , Favourite Colour and a
button now write a JavaScript code to combine and display the information in textbox when the button is
clicked and implement validation.
7. Create XML file to store student information like Enrolment Number, Name Mobile Number , Email Id.
8. Write a php script to read data from txt file and display it in html table (the file contains info in format
Name: Password: Email )
9. Write a PHP Script for login authentication. Design an html form which takes username and password from
user and validate against stored username and password in file.
10. Write PHP Script for storing and retrieving user information from MySql table.
a. Design A HTML page which takes Name, Address, Email and Mobile No. From user (register.php)
b. Store this data in Mysql database / text file.
c. Next page display all user in html table using PHP (display.php)

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1533
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Windows System Administration L P C

4 4

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ITE 6 PCE PCE‐2 CIE‐350

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. The course provides an insight in windows server 2022.
2. The course provides the ability to install and configure windows server 2022.
3. The course provides tools and techniques to administer users in windows server 2022.
4. The course peeps in to data storage and virtualization techniques.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Ablility to install windows 2022 server
CO 2 Ablilty to setup various services in windows 2022 server
CO 3 Ability to configure windows 2022 server and implement virtualization
CO 4 Ability to fine tune and trouble shoot windows server 2022
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 2 2 1 3 3 ‐ 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 2 3 2 2 1 3 3 ‐ 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ 2
CO 3 3 2 2 1 3 3 ‐ 1 ‐ ‐ 2 2
CO 4 3 2 2 1 3 3 ‐ 1 ‐ ‐ 3 2

UNIT‐I

Introducing Windows Server and Installing Windows Server 2022: Getting Started with Windows Server,
Getting to know computer networks, Exploring computer network components, Investigating computer
network architectures, Getting to know IP addressing and subnetting, Exploring servers, Understanding a NOS,
Understanding Windows Server, Introducing Windows Server 2022: An overview of Windows Server 2022,
Installing Windows Server 2022: Understanding the installation of Windows Server 2022, Various Windows
Server 2022 installation methods, Post‐Installation Tasks in Windows Server 2022: Understanding devices and
device drivers, Understanding the Windows Registry and its services, Understanding Windows Server initial
configuration.

UNIT‐II

Setting Up Windows Server 2022: Directory Services in Windows Server 2022, Understanding the Active
Directory infrastructure, Understanding DNS, Understanding OUs and containers, Understanding accounts and
groups, Exercise: installing the AD DS and DNS roles and promoting the server to a DC , Adding Roles to

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1534
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Windows Server 2022: Understanding server roles and features, Understanding application servers,
Understanding web services, Understanding Remote Access, Understanding file and print services,
Understanding user rights, NTFS permissions, and share permissions, Exercise – installing the Web Server (IIS)
and PDS roles.

UNIT‐III

Configuring Windows Server 2022: Group Policy in Windows Server 2022, Understanding GP, Types of GP
editors, Exercise – examples of GPOs for system administrators, Virtualization with Windows Server 2022:
Understanding server virtualization, Getting to know Hyper‐V Manager, Exercise – installing Hyper‐V on
Windows Server 2022, Storing Data in Windows Server 2022: Understanding storage technologies,
Understanding RAID, Understanding disks.

UNIT – IV

Keeping Windows Server 2022 Up and Running: Tuning and Maintaining Windows Server 2022, Understanding
server hardware components, Understanding performance monitoring, Understanding logs and alerts, Exercise
– working with the Performance Logs & Alerts service, Updating and Troubleshooting Windows Server 2022:
Understanding updates, Understanding the troubleshooting methodology, Understanding the startup process,
Understanding business continuity, Exercise – using Event Viewer to monitor and manage logs.

Textbook(s):
1. Bekim Dauti, “Windows Server 2022 Administration Fundamentals”, Packt Publishing.

References:
1. Tom Carpenter, “Microsoft Windows Server Administration Essentials”, John Wiley & Sons.
2. Crystal Panek “Windows Server Administration Fundamentals”, Sybex.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1535
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Wireless Communication and Networks L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CSE‐NET 6 PC PC WMC‐340T
EC‐ACT 6 PC PC WMC‐336T
EE‐VDT 6 OAE‐ECE‐EA OAE‐1 WMC‐336T
EAE 6 WMC‐EAE WMC‐EAE‐1C WMC‐336T
IT 7 PCE PCE‐4 CIE‐415T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To know the evolution, principles and architecture of cellular systems and various concepts associated
with mobility management and network signaling
2. To study design and operation of various 2G systems (GSM/GPRS/IS‐95/UMTS).
3. To know features and technical aspects of 3G/4G standards evolved from IMT
2000 vision.
4. To know technical standards related to 4G, 5G, Bluetooth, Zigbee, NFC, WiMAX.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Understand the evolution, principles and architecture of cellular systems and various concepts
associated with mobility management and network signaling.
CO 2 Develop an understanding of design and operation of various 2G systems (GSM/GPRS/IS‐95/CDMA).
CO 3 Analyze the features and technical aspects of 3G standards evolved from IMT 2000 vision
CO 4 Analyze the features and technical aspects of 4G, 5G, Bluetooth, Zigbee, NFC and WiMax standards
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 1 2 3 3 2 2 ‐ 2 2 3 3
CO 2 3 1 2 2 2 2 3 ‐ 3 2 2 3
CO 3 3 3 3 2 3 2 3 ‐ 2 2 3 2
CO 4 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 ‐ 2 3 3 2

UNIT I

Introduction To Wireless Communication Systems: Evolution of mobile radio communications; Overview of

generations of cellular systems, comparison of various wireless systems.
Introduction to Personal Communication Services (PCS): PCS architecture, Mobility management, Networks
signaling. A basic cellular system, multiple access techniques: FDMA, TDMA, CDMA.
Introduction to Wireless Channels and Diversity: Fast Fading Wireless Channel Modeling, Rayleigh/Ricean,
Fading Channels, BER Performance in Fading Channels, Introduction to different modulation technique.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1536
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT II

2G Networks: AMPS, ETACS, GSM: GSM Architecture, Mobility Management, Network signalling, mobile
management, voice signal processing and coding, 2.5G Mobile Data Networks: Introduction to Mobile Data
Networks, General Packet Radio Services (GPRS): GPRS architecture, GPRS Network nodes, EDGE, Mobile
IP,CDMA IS‐95: Spread Spectrum, Frequency and Channel Specifications, Forward and Reverse CDMA Channel,
Near‐Far Problem, Power Control, Spread Spectrum Systems Cellular Code Division Access Systems‐Principle,
Power Control, effects of multipath propagation on code division multiple access.

UNIT III

Third Generation (3G) Mobile Services: The Universsal Mobile Telecommunication System (UMTS) & CDMA
2000 standards, UMTS Network Architecture Release 99, UMTS Interfaces, UMTS Network Evolution, UMTS
Channels, UMTS Time Slots.

UNIT IV

Evolution of Generations: Features of 4G (LTE & VoLTE), 5G, Bluetooth: Architecture, Feature, Frequency Band,
Master‐Slave, IEEE Standard, Zigbee: Architecture, Feature, Frequency Band, IEEE Standard, NFC: IEEE
Standard, Architecture, Feature, IEEE 802.16 (WiMax): Standard Architecture, Spectrum Allocation, Overview of
WiMAX PHY, MAC Layer, Scheduling services, UGS, rtPS, nrtPS, Best Effort (BE).

Textbook(s):
1. Raj Pandya, “Mobile & Personnel communication Systems and Services”, Prentice Hall India, 2001.
2. Theodore S. Rappaport, “Wireless Communication‐ Principles and practices,” 2nd Ed., Pearson Education
Pvt. Ltd, 5th Edition, 2008.
3. Wireless Networks: Applications and Protocols, T.S Rappaport, Pearson Education.
4. Wireless Communication and Networks: 3G and Beyond, I. Saha Mishra, TMH Education

References:
1. T.L.Singhal “Wireless Communication”, Tata McGraw Hill Publication.
2. Jochen Schiller, “Mobile communications,” Pearson Education Pvt. Ltd., 2002.
3. Yi –Bing Lin & Imrich Chlamatac, “Wireless and Mobile Networks Architecture,” John Wiley & Sons, 2001.
4. Lee, W.C.Y., “Mobile Cellular Telecommunication”, 2nd Edition, McGraw Hill,1998.
5. Smith & Collins, “3G Wireless Networks,” TMH, 2007
6. Schiller, Jochen, “Mobile Communications”, 2nd Edition, Addison Wesley.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1537
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Wireless Communication and Networks Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

CSE‐NET 6 PC PC WMC‐340P
EC‐ACT 6 PC PC WMC‐336P
EE‐VDT 6 OAE‐ECE‐EA OAE‐1 WMC‐336P
EAE 6 WMC‐EAE WMC‐EAE‐1C WMC‐336P
IT 7 PCE PCE‐4 CIE‐415P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Wireless Communication and
Networks) as this is the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. An introduction to basic digital baseband communication through MATLAB® simulations

2. Simulate Bluetooth voice transmission to observe effect of AWGN and interference of 802.11b on
transmission using MATLAB and Simulink.
3. Develop a mobile application for wireless technology using any wizards such as available on
www.appypie.com or any other.
4. Simulate the line coding techniques using MATLAB and Simulink
5. Simulate the Binary amplitude shift keying using MATLAB and Simulink
6. Simulate the Binary phase shift keying using MATLAB and Simulink
7. Simulate the Quadrature phase shift keying using MATLAB and Simulink
8. Simulate the Delta Modulation using MATLAB and simulink.
9. Simulate the Adaptive delta Modulation using MATLAB and simulink.
10. Simulate the Direct sequence spread spectrum using MATLAB and Simulink
11. Simulate WSN node to determine position on node and blink LED using cupcarbon simulator and senscript.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1538
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Wireless Sensor Networks L P C

3 3

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ECE 6 PCE PCE‐3 ECE‐342T
CSE‐IoT 6 PC PC IOT‐328T
EAE 6 IOT‐EAE IOT‐EAE‐2C IOT‐332T
EAE 6 ICB‐EAE ICB‐EAE‐2C IOT‐332T
EEE 7 PCE PCE‐4 EEE‐415T
CSE‐NET 7 PC PC NET‐475T
CSE‐in‐EA 7 OAE‐CSE‐EA OAE‐2 OECE‐421T
EAE 7 NET‐EAE NET‐EAE‐5 NET‐475T
OAE 7 ECE‐OAE ECE‐OAE‐4B OECE‐421T

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 25 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 75 marks
Instructions for paper setter:
1. There should be 9 questions in the term end examinations question paper.
2. The first (1st) question should be compulsory and cover the entire syllabus. This question should be
objective, single line answers or short answer type question of total 15 marks.
3. Apart from question 1 which is compulsory, rest of the paper shall consist of 4 units as per the syllabus.
Every unit shall have two questions covering the corresponding unit of the syllabus. However, the student
shall be asked to attempt only one of the two questions in the unit. Individual questions may contain upto 5
sub‐parts / sub‐questions. Each Unit shall have a marks weightage of 15.
4. The questions are to be framed keeping in view the learning outcomes of the course / paper. The standard
/ level of the questions to be asked should be at the level of the prescribed textbook.
5. The requirement of (scientific) calculators / log‐tables / data – tables may be specified if required.
Course Objectives :
1. To make students understand the basics of Wireless sensor Networks.
2. To familiarize with learning of the Architecture of WSN.
3. To familiarize with learning of the Architecture of WSN.
4. To study the design consideration of topology control and solution to the various problems.
Course Outcomes (CO)
CO 1 Understand challenges and technologies for wireless networks.
CO 2 Understand architecture and sensors.
CO 3 Describe the communication, energy efficiency, computing, storage and transmission.
CO 4 Explain the concept of programming the in WSN environment.
Course Outcomes (CO) to Programme Outcomes (PO) mapping (scale 1: low, 2: Medium, 3: High)
PO01 PO02 PO03 PO04 PO05 PO06 PO07 PO08 PO09 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO 1 3 2 2 1 2 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 3
CO 2 3 2 2 1 2 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 3
CO 3 3 2 2 1 2 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 3
CO 4 3 2 2 1 2 1 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 3

UNIT‐I

Introduction: Mobile Ad‐hoc Networks (MANETs), Introduction to Sensor Networks, Constraints and
Challenges, Advantage of Sensor Networks, Applications of Sensor Networks. Architecture: Single‐Node
Architecture ‐ Hardware Components, Energy Consumption of Sensor Nodes, Operating Systems, Network
Architecture ‐Sensor Network Scenarios, Optimization Goals, Gateway Concepts.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1539
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

UNIT‐II

Networking Sensors: Physical Layer and Transceiver Design Considerations, MAC Protocols for Wireless Sensor
Networks, classification of MAC protocols, MAC protocols for sensor network, location discovery, S‐MAC, IEEE
802.15.4. Routing Protocols‐ Energy‐Efficient Routing, Geographic Routing.

UNIT‐III

Infrastructure Establishment: Topology Control, Clustering, Time Synchronization, Localization and Positioning,
Sensor Tasking and Control. Case study of WSN‟s for different applications.

UNIT – IV

Platform, Tool and Security: Sensor Node Hardware – Berkeley Motes, Programming Challenges, Node‐level
software platforms, Node‐level Simulators. Security issues in Sensor Networks. Future Research Direction.

Textbook(s):
1. Holger Karl and Andreas Willig, “Protocols And Architectures for Wireless Sensor Networks”, John Wiley.
2. Feng Zhao and Leonidas J. Guibas, “Wireless Sensor Networks‐ An Information Processing Approach”,
Elsevier.
3. C.Siva Ram Murthy and B.S.Manoj, “Ad hoc Wireless Networks Architectures and Protocols”, Pearson
Education.

References:
1. Dr. Xerenium, Shen, Dr. Yi Pan , “Fundamentals of Wireless Sensor Networks”, Theory and Practice”,Wiley.
2. KazemSohraby, Daniel Minoli, &TaiebZnati, “Wireless Sensor Networks‐ Technology, Protocols, And
Applications”, John Wiley.

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1540
 Handbook of B.Tech. Programmes offered by USICT at Affiliated Institutions of the University.

Wireless Sensor Networks Lab L P C

2 1

Discipline(s) / EAE / OAE Semester Group Sub‐group Paper Code

ECE 6 PCE PCE‐3 ECE‐342P
CSE‐IoT 6 PC PC IOT‐328P
EAE 6 IOT‐EAE IOT‐EAE‐2C IOT‐332P
EAE 6 ICB‐EAE ICB‐EAE‐2C IOT‐332P
EEE 7 PCE PCE‐4 EEE‐415P
CSE‐NET 7 PC PC NET‐475P
CSE‐in‐EA 7 OAE‐CSE‐EA OAE‐2 OECE‐421P
EAE 7 NET‐EAE NET‐EAE‐5 NET‐475P
OAE 7 ECE‐OAE ECE‐OAE‐4B OECE‐421P

Marking Scheme:
1. Teachers Continuous Evaluation: 40 marks
2. Term end Theory Examinations: 60 marks
Instructions:
1. The course objectives and course outcomes are identical to that of (Wireless Sensor Networks) as this is
the practical component of the corresponding theory paper.
2. The practical list shall be notified by the teacher in the first week of the class commencement under
intimation to the office of the Head of Department / Institution in which the paper is being offered from
the list of practicals below. Atleast 10 experiments must be performed by the students, they may be asked
to do more. Atleast 5 experiments must be from the given list.

1. Introduction of Wireless sensor network applications and its simulation.

2. Network Simulator installation of wireless sensor network
3. Write TCL script for transmission between mobile nodes.
4. Write TCL script for sensor nodes with different parameters.
5. Generate tcl script for udp and CBR traffic in WSN nodes.
6. Generate tcl script for TCP and CBR traffic in WSN nodes.
7. Implementation of routing protocol in NS2 for AODV protocol.
8. Implementation of routing protocol in NS2 for DSR protocol.
9. Implementation of routing protocol in NS2 for TORA protocol.
10. Study other wireless sensor network simulators (Mannasim. Contiki.)

Applicable from Batch Admitted in Academic Session 2021-22 Onwards Page 1541